Chevrolet - Equinox Awd - Workshop Manual - 2006 - 2006

Factory Workshop Manual Make Chevrolet Model Equinox Awd Engine and year V6-3.4L VIN F (2006) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Alarm Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17 Alarm Module: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 18 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 19 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 20 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 21 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 22 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 23 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 24 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 25 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 26 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 27 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 28 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 29 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 30 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 31 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 32 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 33 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 34 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 35 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 36 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 37 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 38 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 39 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 40 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 41 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 42 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 43 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 44 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 45 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 46 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 47 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 48 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 49 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 50 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 51 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 52 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 53 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 54 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 55 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 56 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 57 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 58 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 59 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 60 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 61 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 62 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 63 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 64 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 65 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 66 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 67 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 68 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 69 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 70 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 71 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 72 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 73 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 74 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 75 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 76 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 77 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 78 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 79 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 80 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 10037 Date: 100420 Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) CUSTOMER SATISFACTION Bulletin No.: 10037 Date: April 20, 2010 Subject: 10037 - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) Models: 2003 Buick LeSabre 2004-2006 Buick Rendezvous 2005 Buick LeSabre, Terraza 2005-2006 Buick LaCrosse/Allure 2006-2008 Buick Lucerne 2008 Buick LaCrosse/Allure 2008-2009 Buick Enclave 2003 Cadillac CTS 2004 Cadillac Escalade 2004-2005 Cadillac CTS-V, Deville 2005 Cadillac Escalade ESV, SRX 2005-2006 Cadillac STS 2005-2008 Cadillac CTS 2006-2008 Cadillac DTS 2007 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade EXT 2007-2008 Cadillac Escalade ESV 2008 Cadillac SRX, STS 2002 Chevrolet Impala 2003-2008 Chevrolet Suburban 2003-2009 Chevrolet Silverado 2004-2008 Chevrolet Impala 2005 Chevrolet Colorado, Corvette, Malibu 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander 2005-2008 Chevrolet Avalanche, Tahoe, TrailBlazer 2006 Chevrolet HHR, Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 Chevrolet Corvette 2008 Chevrolet HHR 2008-2009 Chevrolet Cobalt, Colorado, Malibu, Uplander 2003 GMC Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon XL 2004-2008 GMC Yukon 2005-2009 GMC Sierra 2005-2008 GMC Yukon XL 2006-2008 GMC Envoy 2007 GMC Canyon 2007-2009 GMC Acadia 2006 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2008 HUMMER H2 2003 Oldsmobile Silhouette 2005 Montana SV6 2005-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006 Pontiac G6, Vibe 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 2007-2008 Pontiac Solstice 2008 Pontiac G6, Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G5, G8 2009 Pontiac G3, Montana SV6 2005-2007 Saturn ION 2006-2009Saturn VUE 2007-2008 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK, SKY Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 89 THIS PROGRAM IS IN EFFECT UNTIL APRIL 30, 2011. Condition Certain 2002-2009 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may have a condition in which the vehicle's OnStar(R) system repeatedly makes incomplete calls to OnStar(R) without the vehicle's occupant(s) input or knowledge. Customer initiated Blue Button call, Emergency calls, and Automatic Crash Notification calls will also fail to establish a data connection with the OnStar(R) Call Center. Eventually, the customer's call will connect as a voice only line and the customer will be able to talk with an OnStar(R) advisor; however, the advisor will not get crucial customer data such as vehicle identification and location. Correction Dealers/retailers are to replace the OnStar(R) module (VCIM). Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2002-2009 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R), and built within these VIN breakpoints: Note: Some model years/models have only one vehicle involved. Important Dealers/retailers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers/retailers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers/retailers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers/retailers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to dealers/retailers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports. Dealers/retailers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this program is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this program. Parts Information US: OnStar(R) modules required for this program are to be obtained by contacting Autocraft Electronics via the web at www.autocraft.com, and selecting the catalog item that contains bulletin number 10037 (or PIC 4893B), or by calling 1-800-336-3998. Dealer must provide the VIN, R.O. number, and the current vehicle mileage. Canada: OnStar(R) modules required for this program are to be obtained by contacting MASS Electronics at 1-877-410-6277. Dealer must provide the VIN, R.O. number, and the current vehicle mileage. DO NOT ORDER ONSTAR(R) MODULES FROM GENERAL MOTORS CUSTOMER CARE AND AFTERSALES (GMCC&A;), SATURN SERVICE PARTS OPERATION (SSPO), OR THE TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE CENTER (TAC). Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers/retailers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table below. 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers/retailers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers/retailers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 90 * Dealers using WINs: Add 0.2 hours to the labor time for administrative allowance for the module exchange. Dealers using GWM: Submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under "Administration Time" for the module exchange. ** The $25 represents the additional net amount allowed for the module exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the module is replaced by Masscomp's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit the 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealer using GWM should submit the 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Customer Notification OnStar will notify customers of this program on their vehicle. Dealer Program Responsibility All unsold new vehicles in dealers'/retailers' possession and subject to this program must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this program bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers/retailers are to service all vehicles subject to this program at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, through April 30, 2011. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer/retailer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer/retailer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Program follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 91 In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this program enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership/facility for service through April 30, 2011, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the program correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure Note Do NOT replace the inside rear view mirror in tandem with this concern. The mirror has no bearing on this specific issue. 1. Remove the OnStar(R) module (referred to as the Communication Interface Module (CIM) or Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in SI). Refer to SI for module removal instructions. Note Inform customer that all Bluetooth devices must be paired with the new VCIM. Bluetooth devices that have not been paired to the new VCIM will not function properly. 2. Install the new OnStar(R) module (referred to as the Communication Interface Module (CIM) or Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in SI). Refer to SI for module installation instructions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 10037 Date: 100420 Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) CUSTOMER SATISFACTION Bulletin No.: 10037 Date: April 20, 2010 Subject: 10037 - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) Models: 2003 Buick LeSabre 2004-2006 Buick Rendezvous 2005 Buick LeSabre, Terraza 2005-2006 Buick LaCrosse/Allure 2006-2008 Buick Lucerne 2008 Buick LaCrosse/Allure 2008-2009 Buick Enclave 2003 Cadillac CTS 2004 Cadillac Escalade 2004-2005 Cadillac CTS-V, Deville 2005 Cadillac Escalade ESV, SRX 2005-2006 Cadillac STS 2005-2008 Cadillac CTS 2006-2008 Cadillac DTS 2007 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade EXT 2007-2008 Cadillac Escalade ESV 2008 Cadillac SRX, STS 2002 Chevrolet Impala 2003-2008 Chevrolet Suburban 2003-2009 Chevrolet Silverado 2004-2008 Chevrolet Impala 2005 Chevrolet Colorado, Corvette, Malibu 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander 2005-2008 Chevrolet Avalanche, Tahoe, TrailBlazer 2006 Chevrolet HHR, Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 Chevrolet Corvette 2008 Chevrolet HHR 2008-2009 Chevrolet Cobalt, Colorado, Malibu, Uplander 2003 GMC Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon XL 2004-2008 GMC Yukon 2005-2009 GMC Sierra 2005-2008 GMC Yukon XL 2006-2008 GMC Envoy 2007 GMC Canyon 2007-2009 GMC Acadia 2006 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2008 HUMMER H2 2003 Oldsmobile Silhouette 2005 Montana SV6 2005-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006 Pontiac G6, Vibe 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 2007-2008 Pontiac Solstice 2008 Pontiac G6, Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G5, G8 2009 Pontiac G3, Montana SV6 2005-2007 Saturn ION 2006-2009Saturn VUE 2007-2008 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK, SKY Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 97 THIS PROGRAM IS IN EFFECT UNTIL APRIL 30, 2011. Condition Certain 2002-2009 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may have a condition in which the vehicle's OnStar(R) system repeatedly makes incomplete calls to OnStar(R) without the vehicle's occupant(s) input or knowledge. Customer initiated Blue Button call, Emergency calls, and Automatic Crash Notification calls will also fail to establish a data connection with the OnStar(R) Call Center. Eventually, the customer's call will connect as a voice only line and the customer will be able to talk with an OnStar(R) advisor; however, the advisor will not get crucial customer data such as vehicle identification and location. Correction Dealers/retailers are to replace the OnStar(R) module (VCIM). Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2002-2009 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R), and built within these VIN breakpoints: Note: Some model years/models have only one vehicle involved. Important Dealers/retailers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers/retailers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers/retailers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers/retailers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to dealers/retailers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports. Dealers/retailers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this program is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this program. Parts Information US: OnStar(R) modules required for this program are to be obtained by contacting Autocraft Electronics via the web at www.autocraft.com, and selecting the catalog item that contains bulletin number 10037 (or PIC 4893B), or by calling 1-800-336-3998. Dealer must provide the VIN, R.O. number, and the current vehicle mileage. Canada: OnStar(R) modules required for this program are to be obtained by contacting MASS Electronics at 1-877-410-6277. Dealer must provide the VIN, R.O. number, and the current vehicle mileage. DO NOT ORDER ONSTAR(R) MODULES FROM GENERAL MOTORS CUSTOMER CARE AND AFTERSALES (GMCC&A;), SATURN SERVICE PARTS OPERATION (SSPO), OR THE TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE CENTER (TAC). Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers/retailers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table below. 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers/retailers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers/retailers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 98 * Dealers using WINs: Add 0.2 hours to the labor time for administrative allowance for the module exchange. Dealers using GWM: Submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under "Administration Time" for the module exchange. ** The $25 represents the additional net amount allowed for the module exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the module is replaced by Masscomp's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit the 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealer using GWM should submit the 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Customer Notification OnStar will notify customers of this program on their vehicle. Dealer Program Responsibility All unsold new vehicles in dealers'/retailers' possession and subject to this program must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this program bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers/retailers are to service all vehicles subject to this program at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, through April 30, 2011. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer/retailer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer/retailer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Program follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 99 In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this program enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership/facility for service through April 30, 2011, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the program correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure Note Do NOT replace the inside rear view mirror in tandem with this concern. The mirror has no bearing on this specific issue. 1. Remove the OnStar(R) module (referred to as the Communication Interface Module (CIM) or Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in SI). Refer to SI for module removal instructions. Note Inform customer that all Bluetooth devices must be paired with the new VCIM. Bluetooth devices that have not been paired to the new VCIM will not function properly. 2. Install the new OnStar(R) module (referred to as the Communication Interface Module (CIM) or Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in SI). Refer to SI for module installation instructions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 108 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 113 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 118 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 119 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 125 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-008C Date: September 18, 2008 Subject: Information on OnStar(R) Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Systems Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to correct the model year range for the Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo and update the reference to GM Dealerworld. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). All 2000-2003 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar® from the list above were built with Analog/Digital-Ready OnStar(R) Hardware. Some of these vehicles may have been upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital). Certain 2004-2005 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) from the list above may have been either: ^ Originally built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware OR ^ Upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Hardware All 2006 model year and newer vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) were built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware. If a vehicle has Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware, then the system is capable of operating on both the analog and digital cellular Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information > Page 134 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 147 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 152 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 153 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-009B Date: June 29, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Language Change for OnStar(R) System (U.S. and Canada Only) Models: 2006-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2006-2008 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Built After and Including VIN Breakpoints Listed Below (2006 MY Only) Attention: This bulletin only applies to vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) Generation 6.1 or later with a Station Identification (STID) Number in the following range: 16,000,000-17,000,000 or 20,000,000-21,999,999 or 23,500,001-26,000,000 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the service procedure and add a Canadian procedure. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Numbers 05-08-46-009A and 05-08-46-008A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 158 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 159 Built After and Including the VIN Breakpoints shown. The Generation (Gen) 6.1 OnStar(R) system found in these vehicles has the capability to change the default English voice recognition to French or Spanish. Changing the language of the OnStar(R) system will change the following features to the language you select: Voice recognition command prompts will be played in the language selected. The voice recognition system will only recognize commands given in the selected language. Once completed, this process completely changes all voice recognition and voice commands of the OnStar(R) system. The process will need to be repeated in its entirety to change to a different language, including English. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 160 Method 1 Method 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 161 Method 3 The Gen 6.1 version of OnStar(R) does not require the use of the Service Programming System (SPS) to change the voice recognition system. However, there are three ways to change the language. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-008C Date: September 18, 2008 Subject: Information on OnStar(R) Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Systems Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to correct the model year range for the Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo and update the reference to GM Dealerworld. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). All 2000-2003 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar® from the list above were built with Analog/Digital-Ready OnStar(R) Hardware. Some of these vehicles may have been upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital). Certain 2004-2005 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) from the list above may have been either: ^ Originally built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware OR ^ Upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Hardware All 2006 model year and newer vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) were built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware. If a vehicle has Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware, then the system is capable of operating on both the analog and digital cellular Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information > Page 171 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-009B Date: June 29, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Language Change for OnStar(R) System (U.S. and Canada Only) Models: 2006-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2006-2008 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Built After and Including VIN Breakpoints Listed Below (2006 MY Only) Attention: This bulletin only applies to vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) Generation 6.1 or later with a Station Identification (STID) Number in the following range: 16,000,000-17,000,000 or 20,000,000-21,999,999 or 23,500,001-26,000,000 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the service procedure and add a Canadian procedure. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Numbers 05-08-46-009A and 05-08-46-008A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 184 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 185 Built After and Including the VIN Breakpoints shown. The Generation (Gen) 6.1 OnStar(R) system found in these vehicles has the capability to change the default English voice recognition to French or Spanish. Changing the language of the OnStar(R) system will change the following features to the language you select: Voice recognition command prompts will be played in the language selected. The voice recognition system will only recognize commands given in the selected language. Once completed, this process completely changes all voice recognition and voice commands of the OnStar(R) system. The process will need to be repeated in its entirety to change to a different language, including English. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 186 Method 1 Method 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 187 Method 3 The Gen 6.1 version of OnStar(R) does not require the use of the Service Programming System (SPS) to change the voice recognition system. However, there are three ways to change the language. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations VCIM Location Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 191 Global Positioning System Module: Diagrams Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 192 Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) C2 Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 193 Global Positioning System Module: Service and Repair COMMUNICATION INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fastener located on the bottom of the OnStar(R) bracket. IMPORTANT: The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) has a specific set of unique numbers that tie the module to each vehicle. These numbers, the 10-digit station identification and the 11-digit electronic serial number, are used by the National Cellular Network and OnStar(R) to identify the specific vehicle. Because these numbers are tied to the vehicle identification number of the vehicle, you must never exchange these parts with those of another vehicle. 2. Tilt the module inboard to the center of the vehicle and pull down the communication interface module (CIM) 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors, the GPS antenna, and the cellular coax cable. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. If replacing the VCIM, record the 10-digit STID number, and the 11-digit ESN number from the labels on the new module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 194 2. Connect the electrical connectors, the GPS antenna, and the cellular coax cable. 3. Tilt the CIM inboard and install the CIM. 4. Install the CIM fastener. Tighten the fastener to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Reconfigure the OnStar(R) system. Refer to OnStar Reconfiguration. IMPORTANT: After replacing the vehicle communication interface module, you must reconfigure the OnStar(R) system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. In addition, pressing and holding the white dot button on the keypad will NOT reset this version of the OnStar(R) system. This action will cause a DTC to set. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 203 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 204 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 205 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 211 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 212 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 213 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Relay > Component Information > Locations Power Door Lock Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 218 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 219 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Heated Seat Module - Driver Heated Seat Module - Driver C1 (with RPO Code KA1) Heated Seat Module - Driver C2 (with RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 225 Heated Seat Module - Driver C3 (with RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 226 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger C1 (with RPO Code KA1) Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger C2 (with RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 227 Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger C3 (with RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Seat Heater Control Module: Procedures HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the heated seat module retainer. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the heated seat module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 230 3. Remove the module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the heated seat module. 2. Install the module with the retainer to the seat pan. 3. Test for proper operation of the seat heater. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 231 Seat Heater Control Module: Removal and Replacement Heated Seat Control Module Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the heated seat module retainer. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the heated seat module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 232 3. Remove the module. Installation Procedure 1. Connect the electrical connector to the heated seat module. 2. Install the module with the retainer to the seat pan. 3. Test for proper operation of the seat heater. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Headliner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 236 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Diagrams Sunroof Control Module C1 (with RPO Code CF5) Sunroof Control Module C2 (with RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 237 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Depress the tab on the side of the control module. 3. With the tab depressed, slide the sunroof control module toward the sunroof motor. This will release the control module from the sunroof module. 4. Remove the control module from the sunroof module and disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 238 1. Connect the electrical connector to the sunroof control module. 2. Insert the control module tabs into the sunroof module slots. 3. Slide the sunroof express module away from the sunroof motor until it is fully engaged. 4. Verify the proper operation of the sunroof before securing the headliner. 5. Install the headliner. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Component Locations Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side 1 - EPS Inline Fuse Holder 2 - PSCM Harness Connection to the Underhood Fuse Block 3 Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 244 Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 245 Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 246 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Always connect or disconnect the wiring harness connector from the EBCM/EBTCM with the ignition switch in the OFF position. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the EBCM/EBTCM. 1. Remove the transmission control module (TCM), if equipped, from the mounting bracket and position aside. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Clean the electronic brake control module (EBCM) to brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) area of any accumulated dirt and foreign material. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the EBCM. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 247 5. Disconnect the pump motor electrical connector. 6. Remove the EBCM attaching screws. 7. Separate the EBCM from the BPMV by carefully pulling apart. Installation Procedure 1. Clean the sealing surface of the BPMV, with denatured alcohol and a clean shop cloth. 2. Install the EBCM to the BPMV. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the EBCM-to-BPMV attaching screws. Tighten the bolts in a cross pattern. ^ Tighten the bolts to 3 Nm (27 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the pump motor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 248 5. Connect the electrical connector to the EBCM. 6. Reposition the TCM, if equipped, to the mounting bracket. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. DO NOT start the engine. 8. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 254 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 255 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 256 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 257 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 258 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 259 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 260 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 261 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 262 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 263 Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 264 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 265 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 266 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 267 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 268 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 269 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 270 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 271 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 272 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 273 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 274 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 275 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 276 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 277 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 278 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 279 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 280 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 281 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 282 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 283 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 284 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 285 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 286 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 287 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 288 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 289 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 290 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 291 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 292 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 293 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 294 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 295 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 296 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 297 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 298 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 299 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 300 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 301 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 302 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 303 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 304 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 305 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 306 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 307 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 308 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 309 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 310 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 311 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 312 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 313 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 314 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 315 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 316 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 317 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 318 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 319 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 320 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 321 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 322 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 323 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 324 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 325 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 326 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 330 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 331 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 332 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 335 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 336 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 337 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 338 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 339 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 340 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 341 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 342 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 343 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 344 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 345 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 346 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 347 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 348 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 349 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 350 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 351 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 352 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 353 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 354 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 355 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 356 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 357 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 358 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 359 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 360 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 361 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 362 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 363 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 364 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 365 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 366 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 367 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 368 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 369 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 370 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 371 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 372 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 373 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 374 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 375 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 376 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 377 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 378 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 379 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 380 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 381 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 382 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 383 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 384 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 385 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 386 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 387 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 388 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 389 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 390 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 391 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 392 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 393 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 394 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 395 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 396 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 397 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 398 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 399 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 400 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 401 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 402 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 403 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 404 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 405 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 406 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 407 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 408 Cooling Fan S/P Relay Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 413 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 414 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 417 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 418 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 419 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 420 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 421 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 422 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 423 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 424 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 425 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 426 Blower Motor Relay: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 427 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 428 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 429 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 430 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 431 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 432 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 433 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 434 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 435 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 436 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 437 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 438 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 439 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 440 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 441 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 442 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 443 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 444 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 445 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 446 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 447 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 448 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 449 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 450 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 451 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 452 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 453 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 454 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 455 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 456 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 457 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 458 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 459 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 460 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 461 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 462 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 463 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 464 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 465 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 466 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 467 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 468 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 469 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 470 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 471 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 472 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 473 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 474 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 475 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 476 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 477 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 478 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 479 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 480 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 481 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 482 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 483 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 484 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 485 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 486 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 487 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 488 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 489 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 493 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 494 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 495 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Control Module HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 501 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 502 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 503 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 504 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 505 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 506 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 507 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 508 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 509 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 510 Control Module HVAC: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 511 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 512 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 513 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 514 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 515 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 516 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 517 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 518 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 519 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 520 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 521 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 522 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 523 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 524 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 525 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 526 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 527 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 528 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 529 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 530 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 531 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 532 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 533 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 534 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 535 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 536 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 537 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 538 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 539 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 540 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 541 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 542 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 543 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 544 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 545 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 546 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 547 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 548 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 549 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 550 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 551 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 552 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 553 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 554 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 555 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 556 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 557 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 558 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 559 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 560 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 561 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 562 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 563 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 564 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 565 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 566 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 567 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 568 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 569 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 570 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 571 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 572 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 573 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 574 Control Module HVAC: Connector Views HVAC Control Module C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 575 HVAC Control Module C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Backup Lamp Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 580 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 581 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 582 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 586 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 587 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 588 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 592 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 593 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 594 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 598 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 599 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Horn Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 603 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 604 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 605 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Parking Lamp Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 609 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 610 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations Behind The Center Of The I/P - Turn Signal Relay Location Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 614 Turn Signal Relay Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block Relay Box: Application and ID Underhood Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 620 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 621 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 622 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 623 Relay Box: Application and ID I/P Fuse Block Label Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 624 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 625 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Relay Box: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition OFF. IMPORTANT: Record all preset radio stations. 2. Remove the screws from the battery cooling box. Remove the battery cover. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the positive battery cable. 5. Remove the console. 6. Remove the nut holding the following fuse block connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4): - The body 68-way connector (1) - The I/P 68-way connector (2) - The I/P 24-way connector (3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 628 7. Remove the bolt holding the fuse block into place. 8. Remove the ground wire (1). 9. Remove the fuse block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuse block and attach the ground wire (1) and attach the bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 629 2. Connect the harness connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4). Tighten the connectors to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the console. 4. Connect the positive battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the battery cooling box cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 7. Set the radio stations to the preset selections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 630 Relay Box: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the underhood accessory wiring junction block cover. 3. Remove the nut at the end of the fuse block and remove both the positive battery cable and the EPS cable. 4. Loosen the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block until the block can be lifted off the connectors. 5. Remove the I/P connectors (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 631 6. Pull up on each of the following 68-way connectors until they come out. IMPORTANT: All 3 fuse block 68-way connectors are held into place to the fuse block case by push-in retainers. 1. Fuse block case (1) 2. Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) 3. Engine 68-way connector (3) 4. I/P 68-way connector (4) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each of the following 68-way connectors into its proper location. - Fuse block case (1) - Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) - Engine 68-way connector (3) - I/P 68-way connector (4) 2. Push down on each connector until it is fully secured into the fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 632 3. Connect the I/P connectors (2). 4. Tighten the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the underhood accessory wiring junction block harness retaining bolts (1) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 5. Reconnect the positive battery cable and EPS at the end of the fuse block with the nut. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the fuse box cover. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Body Control Module: Customer Interest A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Bulletin No.: 07-01-38-005 Date: July 18, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Poor A/C Performance, A/C Does Not Get Cold Enough After Long Drive Cycle (Recalibrate BCM with Tech 2) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on poor A/C performance or that the A/C does not get cold enough after a long drive. Some of the possible symptoms of this condition are: Blowing warm air Reduced air flow Mist/Vapor coming out of vents Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the evaporator core freezing up. Fix It Right the First Time Tips DO NOT replace the evaporator temperature sensor for this condition unless diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. The sensor can be checked for proper function using the Tech 2(R). Check the sensor for volts varying around 2.3V to 2.6V. This data is within the BCM and is displayed in the accessory list. If the volts are near zero, check for a good connection at the sensor. Also, inspect the harness for possible damage. The sensor is located on the driver's side of the HVAC module and can be accessed from underneath the instrument panel by removing the closeout panel and OnStar(R) module, if equipped. DO NOT replace the thermal expansion valve (TXV) for this condition unless published SI diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. If AC components have been replaced or the refrigerant has been evacuated and recharged and no PAG oil has been added back into the system, it may have a reduced oil level. Please ensure that the vehicle has the proper amount of PAG oil in the system, as low oil level will contribute to the evaporator freezing up. To return to a nominal level of PAG oil, it may be necessary to flush the system. Refer to SI for flushing instructions. Correction The Tech 2(R) must have software version 27.009 or later. Recalibrate the BCM with new software using the Tech 2(R) and following the procedure below. This updated software will control the cycling of the compressor clutch to prevent freezing of the evaporator core. Install the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle and power on. Turn ON the ignition, with engine OFF. Select "Diagnostics." Build the vehicle. Select "Body Control Module". Select "Module Setup". Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough > Page 643 Then press "BCM Setup" soft key to execute update. When completed command state will change from "None" to "BCM Setup". Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: Customer Interest Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 648 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 649 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Bulletin No.: 07-01-38-005 Date: July 18, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Poor A/C Performance, A/C Does Not Get Cold Enough After Long Drive Cycle (Recalibrate BCM with Tech 2) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on poor A/C performance or that the A/C does not get cold enough after a long drive. Some of the possible symptoms of this condition are: Blowing warm air Reduced air flow Mist/Vapor coming out of vents Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the evaporator core freezing up. Fix It Right the First Time Tips DO NOT replace the evaporator temperature sensor for this condition unless diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. The sensor can be checked for proper function using the Tech 2(R). Check the sensor for volts varying around 2.3V to 2.6V. This data is within the BCM and is displayed in the accessory list. If the volts are near zero, check for a good connection at the sensor. Also, inspect the harness for possible damage. The sensor is located on the driver's side of the HVAC module and can be accessed from underneath the instrument panel by removing the closeout panel and OnStar(R) module, if equipped. DO NOT replace the thermal expansion valve (TXV) for this condition unless published SI diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. If AC components have been replaced or the refrigerant has been evacuated and recharged and no PAG oil has been added back into the system, it may have a reduced oil level. Please ensure that the vehicle has the proper amount of PAG oil in the system, as low oil level will contribute to the evaporator freezing up. To return to a nominal level of PAG oil, it may be necessary to flush the system. Refer to SI for flushing instructions. Correction The Tech 2(R) must have software version 27.009 or later. Recalibrate the BCM with new software using the Tech 2(R) and following the procedure below. This updated software will control the cycling of the compressor clutch to prevent freezing of the evaporator core. Install the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle and power on. Turn ON the ignition, with engine OFF. Select "Diagnostics." Build the vehicle. Select "Body Control Module". Select "Module Setup". Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough > Page 655 Then press "BCM Setup" soft key to execute update. When completed command state will change from "None" to "BCM Setup". Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 660 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 661 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 662 Center Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 665 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 666 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 667 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 668 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 669 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 670 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 671 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 672 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 673 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 674 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 675 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 676 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 677 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 678 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 679 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 680 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 681 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 682 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 683 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 684 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 685 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 686 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 687 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 688 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 689 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 690 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 691 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 692 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 693 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 694 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 695 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 696 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 697 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 698 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 699 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 700 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 701 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 702 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 703 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 704 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 705 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 706 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 707 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 708 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 709 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 710 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 711 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 712 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 713 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 714 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 715 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 716 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 717 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 718 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 719 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 720 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 721 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 722 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 723 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 724 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 725 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 726 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 727 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 728 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 729 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 730 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 731 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 732 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 733 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 734 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 735 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 736 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 737 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 738 Body Control Module: Connector Views Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 739 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 740 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 741 Body Control Module (BCM) C4 Splice Pack SP200 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System Body Control Module: Description and Operation Body Control System BODY CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION BCM OVERVIEW The main features of the body control module (BCM) are: The BCM is the gateway between class 2 serial data circuit and high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. - The BCM controls multiple functions. - The BCM is the power mode master. GATEWAY The body control module (BCM) communicates functionally on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data buses. The BCM is the gateway between the buses and transfers serial data messages from one subnet to another. Physical communication of the BCM with the scan tool is through class 2 serial data circuit. BCM FUNCTIONS The body control module (BCM) performs multiple body control functions. The BCM can control devices directly connected to its outputs based on input information. The BCM evaluates this information and controls certain body control systems by commanding outputs on or off. The BCM inputs can be: Sensors and switches that are directly connected to the BCM - Class 2 serial data messages received from other vehicle systems connected to the class 2 serial data link - GMLAN serial data messages received from other vehicles systems connected to the high speed GMLAN serial data link The BCM is also capable of controlling other vehicle systems that are not directly wired to the BCM. The BCM does this by sending specific messages on the class 2 serial data link or high speed GMLAN serial data link. The system capable of performing the required function will respond to the BCM messages. Some of the other system functions that BCM controls or contributes to are: Audible warnings-Refer to Audible Warnings Description and Operation in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. - Exterior lighting control-Refer to Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Interior lighting-Refer to Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Automatic door locks-Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors. - Keyless entry-Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry. - Theft deterrent-Refer to Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent. - Wipers/washers-Refer to Wiper/Washer System Description and Operation in Wipers/Washer Systems. - Rear defogger-Refer to Rear Window Defogger Description and Operation in Heated Glass Element. - Horn-Refer to Horns System Description and Operation in Horns. POWER MODE The BCM is the power mode master (PMM). Refer to Power Mode Description and Operation for more information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 744 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Power Mode POWER MODE DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SERIAL DATA POWER MODE On vehicles that have several control modules connected by serial data circuits, one module is the power mode master (PMM). On this vehicle the PMM is the body control module (BCM). The BCM monitors Ignition 1 (Run/Crank), Ignition 2 (Acc/Run), and Ignition 3 (Run) signals from the ignition switch, and the engine run flag (ERF) message from the engine control module (ECM) in order to determine the present power mode. To determine the correct power mode the BCM uses: The state of these signals - The sequence of switch closures received by the BCM - The status of the engine run flag Correct Ignition Switch Inputs The chart indicates the power modes detected and transmitted by the BCM. The power mode message is a periodic with event message type and is transmitted by the PMM at every 2 seconds on class 2 link and at every 250 ms on high speed GMLAN link. The power modes are identical transmitted on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data circuits with the exception of retained accessory power (RAP). RAP is transmitted only on class 2 and it is mapped on high speed GMLAN as Off Awake. FAIL-SAFE OPERATION Since the operation of the vehicle systems depends on the power mode, there is a fail-safe plan in place should the body control module (BCM) fail to send a power mode message. The fail-safe plan covers modules with discrete ignition signal inputs as well as those modules using exclusively serial data control of power mode. SERIAL DATA MESSAGE The modules that depend exclusively on serial data messages for power modes stay in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message until they receive the engine status from the powertrain control module (PCM). If the BCM fails, the modules monitor the serial data circuit for the engine run flag serial data. If the engine run flag serial data is true, indicating that the engine is running, the modules fail-safe to Run. In this state the modules and their subsystems can support all operator requirements. If the engine run flag serial data is false, indicating that the engine is not running, the modules fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. DISCRETE IGNITION SIGNALS Those modules that have discrete ignition signal inputs also remain in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message received on the serial data circuits. They then check the state of their discrete ignition input to determine the current valid state. If the discrete ignition input is active, B+, the modules will fail-safe to the RUN power mode. If the discrete ignition input is not active, open or 0 voltage, the modules will fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 745 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Retained Accessory Power (RAP) RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SERIAL DATA CONTROL OF RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) Retained accessory power (RAP) is a vehicle power mode that permits the operation of selected customer convenience items after the ignition switch is turned OFF. These selected items will remain in operation until a passenger compartment door or liftgate is opened or until the RAP function timer reaches its shut-off limit. The class 2 RAP power mode is mapped to GMLAN serial data circuit as Off Awake power mode. Refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation for more information on data link communications. The BCM monitors the ignition switch signals, battery condition and the doors status to determine whether RAP should be initiated. The modules that support the RAP power mode will operate the systems under their control as required by their RAP power mode strategy. RAP will end when one of the following conditions is met: The BCM detects the opening of a passenger compartment door. - The RAP timer expires. - The battery capacity decreases below a prescribed limit. - Any other ignition switch state is chosen. The function supported in the RAP power mode is the operation of the radio. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Body Control Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT Begin the system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. The Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will provide the following information: - The identification of the control modules which are not communicating. - The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures The use of the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will identify the correct procedures to begin vehicle diagnosis. These must be performed before system DTC or symptom diagnosis. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 748 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures A Symptoms - Computer/Integrating Systems SYMPTOMS IMPORTANT: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: - There are no DTCs set. - The control modules can communicate via the serial data links. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to: - Data Link Communications Description and Operation - Body Control System Description and Operation - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation Visual/Physical Inspection Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. - Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: - Scan Tool Does Not Power Up See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Does Not Power Up - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device - Power Mode Mismatch See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Power Mode Mismatch - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After TimeOut See: Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Time-Out - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative See: Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 749 Step 1 - Step 6 Step 1 - Step 6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 750 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BODY CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Rotate the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the radio bezel. 3. Disconnect the body control module (BCM) electrical harnesses. 4. Remove the BCM from the instrument panel (I/P) retainer: 1. Pry the BCM tabs from the locking tabs on the underside of the restraint. 2. Slide the BCM out of the retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the BCM. 2. Install the radio bezel. 3. Slide the BCM tabs into the slots in the I/P retainer until the tabs lock into place. 4. Connect the electrical connectors. 5. Program a new or a remanufactured BCM. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 754 Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 755 Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MODULE The throttle actuator control (TAC) module is the control center for the TAC system. The TAC system uses electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) and is self-diagnosing. The TAC module provides diagnostic information to the powertrain control module (PCM) through a dedicated serial data line. The TAC achieves throttle positioning by providing a pulse width modulated (PWM) voltage to the TAC motor as directed by the PCM. The TAC module is not serviced and should be replaced with the throttle body assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 760 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 761 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 762 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 763 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 764 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 765 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 766 LF Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 769 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 770 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 771 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 772 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 773 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 774 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 775 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 776 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 777 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 778 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 779 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 780 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 781 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 782 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 783 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 784 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 785 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 786 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 787 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 788 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 789 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 790 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 791 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 792 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 793 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 794 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 795 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 796 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 797 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 798 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 799 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 800 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 801 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 802 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 803 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 804 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 805 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 806 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 807 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 808 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 809 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 810 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 811 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 812 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 813 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 814 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 815 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 816 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 817 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 818 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 819 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 820 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 821 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 822 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 823 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 824 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 825 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 826 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 827 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 828 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 829 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 830 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 831 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 832 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 833 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 834 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 835 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 836 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 837 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 838 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 839 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 840 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 841 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 842 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C1 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 843 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C1 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 844 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 845 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 846 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DESCRIPTION The powertrain control module (PCM) interacts with many emission related components and systems, and monitors emission related components and systems for deterioration. OBD II diagnostics monitor the system performance and a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets if the system performance degrades. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) operation and the DTC storage are dictated by the DTC type. A DTC is ranked as a Type A or Type B if the DTC is emissions related. Type C is a non-emissions related DTC. The PCM is in the engine compartment. The PCM is the control center of the Computers and Control system. The PCM controls the following components: - The fuel injection system - The ignition system - The emission control systems - The on-board diagnostics - The A/C and fan systems The PCM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect the vehicle performance and the emissions. The PCM also performs diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The PCM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the MIL. When the PCM detects a malfunction, it stores a DTC. The condition is identified by the particular DTC that is set. This aids the technician in making repairs. PCM Function The powertrain control module (PCM) can supply 5 volts or 12 volts to the various sensors or switches. This is done through pull-up resistors to the regulated power supplies within the control module. In some cases, even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give an accurate reading because the resistance is too low. Therefore, a DMM with at least 10 megaohms input impedance is required in order to ensure accurate voltage readings. The PCM controls the output circuits by controlling the ground or the power feed circuit through the transistors or a device called an output driver module. EEPROM The electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory that is physically part of the control module. The EEPROM contains program and calibration information that the powertrain control module (PCM) needs in order to control the powertrain operation. Special equipment, as well as the correct program and calibration for the vehicle, are required in order to reprogram the control module. Data Link Connector (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a 16-pin connector that provides the technician a means of accessing communication data for aid in the diagnosis. This connector allows the technician to use a scan tool in order to monitor the various parameters, and display the DTC information. The DLC is located inside of the drivers compartment, underneath the dash. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Operation The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located in the instrument panel cluster. The MIL will display as either SERVICE ENGINE SOON or one of the following symbols when commanded ON: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 849 The MIL indicates that an emissions related fault has occurred and vehicle service is required. The following is a list of the modes of operation for the MIL: The MIL illuminates when the ignition is turned ON, with the engine OFF. This is a bulb test to ensure that the MIL is able to illuminate. - The MIL turns OFF after the engine is started if a diagnostic fault is not present. - The MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started if the control module detects a fault. A DTC is stored any time the control module illuminates the MIL due to an emissions related fault. The MIL turns OFF after 3 consecutive ignition cycles in which a Test Passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. - The MIL flashes if the control module detects a misfire condition which could damage the catalytic converter. - When the MIL is illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated as long as the ignition is ON. - When the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition is cycled OFF and then ON. PCM Service Precautions The powertrain control module (PCM), by design, can withstand the normal current draws that are associated with the vehicle operations. However, care must be used in order to avoid overloading any of these circuits. When testing for opens or shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the PCM circuits unless the diagnostic procedure instructs you to do so. These circuits should only be tested with a DMM. Emissions Diagnosis For State I/M Programs This OBD II equipped vehicle is designed to diagnose any conditions that could lead to excessive levels of the following emissions: Hydrocarbons (HC) - Carbon monoxide (CO) - Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) - Evaporative emission (EVAP) system losses Should this vehicles on-board diagnostic system, powertrain control module (PCM), detect a condition that could result in excessive emissions, the PCM turns ON the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and stores a DTC that is associated with the condition. Aftermarket (Add-On) Electrical And Vacuum Equipment NOTE: Do not attach add-on vacuum operated equipment to this vehicle. The use of add-on vacuum equipment may result in damage to vehicle components or systems. - Connect any add-on electrically operated equipment to the vehicle's electrical system at the battery (power and ground) in order to prevent damage to the vehicle. Aftermarket, add-on, electrical and vacuum equipment is defined as any equipment installed on a vehicle after leaving the factory that connects to the vehicles electrical or vacuum systems. No allowances have been made in the vehicle design for this type of equipment. Add-on electrical equipment, even when installed to these strict guidelines, may still cause the powertrain system to malfunction. This may also include equipment not connected to the vehicle electrical system, such as portable telephones and radios. Therefore, the first step in diagnosing any powertrain condition is to eliminate all of the aftermarket electrical equipment from the vehicle. After this is done, if the problem still exists, the problem may be diagnosed in the normal manner. Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage IMPORTANT: In order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage to the control module, DO NOT touch the connector pins on the control module. The electronic components that are used in the control systems are often designed to carry very low voltage. The electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 volts of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. By comparison, it takes as much as 4,000 volts for a person to even feel the effect of a static discharge. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a car seat. Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, therefore, it is Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 850 important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. Emissions Control Information Label The underhood Vehicle Emissions Control Information Label contains important emission specifications and setting procedures. In the upper left corner is the exhaust emission information. This identifies the year, the manufacturing division of the engine, the displacement of the engine in liters, the class of the vehicle, and type of fuel metering system. There is also an illustrated emission components and vacuum hose schematic. This label is located in the engine compartment of every General Motors vehicle. If the label has been removed, it can be ordered from GM service parts operations (GMSPO). Underhood Inspection IMPORTANT: This inspection is very important and must be done carefully and thoroughly. Perform a careful underhood inspection when performing any diagnostic procedure or diagnosing the cause of an emission test failure. This can often lead to repairing a condition without further steps. Use the following guidelines when performing an inspection: Inspect all of the vacuum hoses for correct routing, pinches, cuts, or disconnects. - Inspect any hoses that are difficult to see. - Inspect all of the wires in the engine compartment for the following conditions: Burned or chafed spots - Pinched wires - Contact with sharp edges - Contact with hot exhaust manifolds Basic Knowledge Required NOTE: Lack of basic knowledge of this powertrain when performing diagnostic procedures could result in incorrect diagnostic performance or damage to powertrain components. Do not attempt to diagnose a powertrain problem without this basic knowledge. A basic understanding of hand tools is necessary in order to effectively use this section of the service data. You must be familiar with some of the basics of engine operation and electrical diagnosis in order to use this section of the service data. Basic electrical circuits-You should have an understanding of basic electricity and know the meaning of voltage volts), current (amps), and resistance ohms). You should understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire, and you should be able to identify a shorted or open circuit by using a DMM. You should be able to read and understand a wiring diagram. - Use of digital multimeter-You should be familiar with the DMM, particularly the essential tool. You should be able to use the meter in order to measure the voltage volts), the resistance ohms), the current (amps), intermittents (min/max), and frequency (Hertz). - Use of circuit testing tools-You should not use a test lamp to diagnose the Computers and Control system unless you are specifically instructed to do so. You should know how to the use jumper wires in order to test the components and allow the DMM readings without damaging the terminals. You should know how to use the J 35616 connector test adapter kit and use the kit whenever the diagnostic procedures call for front probing any connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 851 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE The powertrain control module (PCM) determines the drivers intent and then calculates the appropriate throttle response. This information is sent to the throttle actuator control (TAC) module through a dedicated serial data line. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 852 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Electronic Ignition (EI) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The powertrain control module (PCM) controls all ignition system functions, and constantly corrects the basic spark timing. The PCM monitors information from various sensor inputs that include the following: - The throttle position (TP) sensor - The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor - The mass air flow (MAF) sensor - The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor - The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) - The transmission gear position or range information sensors - The engine knock sensor (KS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 853 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a scan tool, retrieve the percentage of remaining engine oil and the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. Record the remaining engine oil and the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. IMPORTANT: It is necessary to record the remaining engine oil life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil life will default to 100%. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil will need to be changed at 5000 km (3,000 mi) from the last engine oil change. - It is necessary to record the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining automatic transmission fluid life, the automatic transmission fluid life will default to 100%. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining automatic transmission fluid life, the automatic transmission fluid will need to be changed at 83000 km (50,000 mi) from the last automatic transmission fluid change. 2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) (1) and PCM bracket (2) from the battery box cover. 3. Remove the PCM bracket (2) from the PCM (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 854 4. Disconnect the PCM wire harness (4) from the battery box cover. 5. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 6. Remove the PCM connectors (2) from the PCM (3). 7. Remove the PCM (3) from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the PCM (3) to the vehicle. 2. Install the PCM connectors (2) to the PCM (3). 3. Connect the negative battery cable. 4. Connect the PCM wire harness (4) to the battery box cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 855 5. Install the PCM bracket (2) to the PCM (1). 6. Install the PCM bracket (1) to the battery box cover. 7. Reprogram the PCM. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 859 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 860 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 861 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 866 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 867 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 868 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 871 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 872 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 873 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 874 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 875 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 876 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 877 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 878 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 879 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 880 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 881 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 882 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 883 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 884 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 885 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 886 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 887 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 888 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 889 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 890 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 891 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 892 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 893 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 894 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 895 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 896 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 897 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 898 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 899 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 900 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 901 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 902 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 903 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 904 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 905 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 906 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 907 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 908 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 909 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 910 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 911 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 912 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 913 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 914 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 915 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 916 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 917 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 918 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 919 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 920 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 921 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 922 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 923 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 924 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 925 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 926 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 927 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 928 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 929 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 930 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 931 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 932 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 933 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 934 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 935 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 936 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 937 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 938 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 939 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 940 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 941 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 942 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 943 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 947 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 948 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 949 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 954 Ignition Control Module (ICM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 955 Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation IGNITION CONTROL MODULE (ICM)/COILS There are 3 dual-tower ignition coils that are part of the ignition control module (ICM). The ICM contains coil driver circuits that command the coils to operate. The ICM has the following circuits: - An ignition voltage circuit - A ground circuit - An IC 1 control circuit for the 1-4 ignition coil - An IC 2 control circuit for the 2-5 ignition coil - An IC 3 control circuit for the 3-6 ignition coil - A low reference circuit The powertrain control module (PCM) controls each dual-tower ignition coil by transmitting timing pulses on the ignition control (IC) circuit to the ICM for the proper coil to enable a spark event. The spark plugs are connected to each coil tower by spark plug wires. The spark plug wires conduct the spark energy from the coil to the spark plug. The spark plug electrode is tipped with platinum for long wear and higher efficiency. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement IGNITION COIL/CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the spark plug wires. Note the position from which the wires are removed. 3. Disconnect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 5. Remove the ignition coil/control module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 2. Install the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. Tighten the bolts to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 958 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Connect the spark plug wires. 5. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 959 Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair Ignition Control Module Bracket IGNITION CONTROL MODULE BRACKET REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 3. Remove the spark plug wire retainer (1) from the ignition control module bracket. 4. Remove the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 5. Position the ignition coil/control module aside out of the way. 6. Remove the bolt (3) from the fuel injector wire harness bracket (4) and positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve fresh air tube retainer. 7. Remove the engine wire harness retainers from the ignition control module bracket studs (5). 8. Remove the nut (1) retaining the heater outlet pipe. 9. Lift pipe up slightly to gain access for the removal of the 2 ignition control module bracket bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 960 10. Remove the ignition control module bracket bolts (2). 11. Remove the ignition control module bracket nuts (6). 12. Remove the ignition control module bracket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition control module bracket. 2. Install the ignition control module bracket nuts (6). Tighten the nuts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the ignition control module bracket bolts (2). Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 961 4. Install the nut (1) retaining the heater outlet pipe. Tighten the nut to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 5. Install the engine wire harness retainers to the ignition control module bracket studs (5). 6. Install the bolt (3) from the fuel injector wire harness bracket (4) and PCV valve fresh air tube retainer. Tighten the bolts to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 7. Install the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 8. Install the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. Tighten the bolts to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). 9. Install the spark plug wire retainer (1) to the ignition control module bracket. 10. Connect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 11. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection IGNITION RELAY DIAGNOSIS CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ignition relay is normally an open relay. The relay armature is held in the open position by spring tension. When the ignition switch is turned to the Run or Start position, current will flow through the relay coil. A wire connected to the other end of the relay coil completes the path to ground. The electromagnetic field created by the relay coil overcomes the spring tension and moves the armature, allowing the relay contacts to close. The closed relay contacts allow current to flow from the battery to the following fuses: The Eng Controls fuse - The Fuel INJ fuse - The Elec Eng fuse - The O2 Sensors fuse - The Trans Sol fuse - The ABS fuse - The AWD fuse When the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, the electromagnetic field collapses. This action allows the spring tension to move the armature away from the relay contacts, which interrupts current flow to the fuses. If the ignition relay fails to close, the engine will crank but will not run. The class 2 communications will be available with the use of a scan tool. The ignition relay table assumes that the vehicle battery is fully charged. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test in Starting and Charging. See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test TEST Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 965 Step 1 - Step 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 966 Step 8 - Step 18 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 967 Step 19 - Step 28 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 968 Step 29 - Step 37 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 969 Step 38 - Step 44 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 974 I/P Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 975 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Inflatable Restraint Sensing And Diagnostic Module (SDM) Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 976 Inflatable Restraint Sensing And Diagnostic Module (SDM) Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 977 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM) The sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) is a microprocessor and the control center for the SIR system. The SDM contains internal sensors along with several external sensors, if equipped, mounted at strategic locations on the vehicle. In the event of a collision, the SDM compares the signals from the internal and external sensors to a value stored in memory. When the generated signals exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the appropriate deployment loops to deploy the air bags or seat belt pretensioners. If the force of the impact is not sufficient to warrant inflator module deployment, the SDM may still deploy the seat belt pretensioners. The SDM records the SIR system status when a deployment occurs and turns the AIR BAG indicator located in the IPC ON. As soon as three distinct deployment commands (representing different events) have been issued to any belt pretensioner, or the SDM commands any front and side air bag to deploy once, the SDM shall be considered to not be reusable. The SDM performs continuous diagnostic monitoring of the SIR system electrical components and circuitry when the ignition is turned ON. If the SDM detects a malfunction, a DTC will be stored and the SDM will command the AIR BAG indicator ON, notifying the driver that a malfunction exist. In the event that ignition positive voltage is lost during a collision, the SDM maintains a 23-volt loop reserve (23 VLR) for deployment of the air bags. It is important when disabling the SIR system for servicing or rescue operations to allow the 23 VLR to dissipate, which could take up to 1 minute. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 978 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8. CAUTION: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). Before applying power to the SDM, make sure that it is securely fastened with the arrow facing toward the front of the vehicle. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. 2. Remove the console assembly. 3. Remove the retainers from the connector position assurance (CPA) and disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the nuts and remove the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other contaminants from the mounting surface. 2. Install the SDM to the vehicle with the nuts. Tighten the nuts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the console assembly. 4. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8. 5. Reprogram the BCM. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration in Computer/Integrating Systems. IMPORTANT: If you do NOT perform the BCM programming procedure, the vehicle option content information which is read by the BCM may be Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 979 incorrect and a DTC B1001 Option Configuration Error will set in both the SDM and the BCM. This will illuminate the AIR BAG telltale. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 08-09-41-004 > Mar > 08 > Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Customer Interest Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-004 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: Airbag Light On, DTC B1000 Set (Reprogram Passenger Presence System (PPS) Module) Models: 2008 Buick Enclave 2005-2008 Cadillac SRX 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 GMC Acadia 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2008 Saturn OUTLOOK 2007-2008 Suzuki XL-7 Condition Some customers may comment on the airbag light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find DTC B1000 with symptom code 37 set as current or in history. Correction Important: You must contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. New software for the Passenger Presence System (PPS) has been released to disable this diagnostic check to prevent false setting of DTC B1000. Reprogram the PPS module with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Perform a PPS rezero/preload procedure upon a successful module reprogramming event. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 08-09-41-004 > Mar > 08 > Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-004 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: Airbag Light On, DTC B1000 Set (Reprogram Passenger Presence System (PPS) Module) Models: 2008 Buick Enclave 2005-2008 Cadillac SRX 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 GMC Acadia 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2008 Saturn OUTLOOK 2007-2008 Suzuki XL-7 Condition Some customers may comment on the airbag light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find DTC B1000 with symptom code 37 set as current or in history. Correction Important: You must contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. New software for the Passenger Presence System (PPS) has been released to disable this diagnostic check to prevent false setting of DTC B1000. Reprogram the PPS module with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Perform a PPS rezero/preload procedure upon a successful module reprogramming event. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Electrical Diagrams For information regarding diagrams for this component, please refer to Powertrain Management diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Engine Controls Diagram Index Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Control Module: Locations Power Steering System Component Views Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side 1 - EPS Inline Fuse Holder 2 - PSCM Harness Connection to the Underhood Fuse Block 3 Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1002 Electronic Power Steering Harness, I/P Side 1 - G207 2 - Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) 3 - Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C3 - EPS Motor Pigtail 4 - Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1003 Steering Control Module: Diagrams Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C1 Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1004 Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-07-30-014 > May > 07 > A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-014 Date: May 23, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: AF33-5 Transmission - Check Engine Light On, DTC P0711 or U0101 Set (Reprogram TCM by Contacting TCSC) Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on the check engine light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find either DTC P0711 or U0101 set. Cause A software anomaly within the TCM may cause this condition. Correction DO NOT replace the internal transaxle wiring harness to correct P0711 code. Contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) to obtain a VCI number and reprogram the TCM to correct a single DTC of either P0711 or U0101. Multiple communication codes will NOT be addressed with this TCM software update. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-07-30-014 > May > 07 > A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-014 Date: May 23, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: AF33-5 Transmission - Check Engine Light On, DTC P0711 or U0101 Set (Reprogram TCM by Contacting TCSC) Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on the check engine light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find either DTC P0711 or U0101 set. Cause A software anomaly within the TCM may cause this condition. Correction DO NOT replace the internal transaxle wiring harness to correct P0711 code. Contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) to obtain a VCI number and reprogram the TCM to correct a single DTC of either P0711 or U0101. Multiple communication codes will NOT be addressed with this TCM software update. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 08-07-30-009B > May > 08 > A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Control Module C1 Control Module: Diagrams Transmission Control Module C1 Transmission Control Module C1 Transmission Control Module C1 Transmission Control Module C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Control Module C1 > Page 1045 Control Module: Diagrams Transmission Control Module C2 Transmission Control Module C2 Transmission Control Module C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Control Module C1 > Page 1046 Transmission Control Module C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1047 Control Module: Service and Repair Transaxle Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the TCM from TCM bracket. 3. Disconnect the transaxle control module (TCM) electrical connectors (1) from the TCM (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1048 1. Connect the TCM electrical connector (1) to the TCM (2). 2. Install the TCM to the TCM bracket. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. 4. Important: DTC P0602 is set with all new service transaxle control modules. When the transaxle control module is reprogrammed with the correct software and calibrations, DTC P0602 will be erased. Reprogram the TCM with the correct calibration. Refer to Transmission Control Module Programming and Setup. 5. Perform the transmission adaptive learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1053 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1054 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1055 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations Power Window Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1059 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1060 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1061 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wiper Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1066 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1067 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1068 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P, Steering Column Connections Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1074 Passlock Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation Remote Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-028 Date: August 28, 2008 Subject: Information On Inadvertent Steering Wheel Control (SWC) Button Press Causing Radio Anomalies Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X All Vehicles with Steering Wheel Controls This bulletin is being issued to provide a recommendation for vehicles with a customer concern of the radio station tuning changing by itself, volume changing by itself, radio changing by itself, or radio muting or going silent when driving and turning the steering wheel. The switches on the right hand side of the steering wheel are easily pressed and may inadvertently be pressed when turning the steering wheel. These concerns may be affected by the location of the steering wheel controls. Recommendation Do Not Replace The Radio 1. Please determine that the switch controls on the steering wheel are functioning correctly. 2. Ask the customer if their hand was in close proximity to the steering wheel controls when the condition happened. Explain to the customer that bumping the controls would have caused this undesired action. Explain to the customer the proper use and function of the steering wheel controls. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Switch - Driver Door Lock Switch - Front Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1083 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool to pry the switch from the door handle assembly. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 2. Position the switch on the door handle assembly. Push inward to seat the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1084 3. Install the door trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Outside Rearview Mirror Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1088 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair POWER MIRROR SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Use a flat blade tool to remove the left front air deflector. 2. Disconnect the electrical connection from the power mirror switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1089 3. Remove the power mirror switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the power mirror switch to the air deflector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1090 2. Connect the electrical connection to the power mirror switch 3. Push the air deflector to the instrument panel until the air deflector is seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1094 Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (with RPO Code AG1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Power Seat Switch: Procedures Seat Switch Replacement - Power SEAT SWITCH REPLACEMENT - POWER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat switch bezel. 2. Remove the outer trim panel from the seat cushion. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the switch. 4. Use a small flat-bladed tool to remove the switch from the trim panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1097 1. Install the switch into the trim panel. 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the outer trim panel to the seat cushion. 4. Install the seat switch bezel. Seat Switch Bezel Replacement SEAT SWITCH BEZEL REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Move the seat to the most forward position. 2. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove the bezel from the seat switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1098 1. Install the seat switch bezel. Press into place. 2. Return the seat to the original position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1099 Power Seat Switch: Removal and Replacement Seat Switch Bezel Replacement Seat Switch Bezel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Move the seat to the most forward position. 2. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove the bezel from the seat switch. Installation Procedure 1. Install the seat switch bezel. Press into place. 2. Return the seat to the original position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1100 Seat Switch Replacement - Power Seat Switch Replacement - Power Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seat switch bezel. Refer to Seat Switch Bezel Replacement (See: Seat Switch Bezel Replacement) . 2. Remove the outer trim panel from the seat cushion. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the switch. 4. Use a small flat-bladed tool to remove the switch from the trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1101 Installation Procedure 1. Install the switch into the trim panel. 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the outer trim panel to the seat cushion. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 4. Install the seat switch bezel. Refer to Seat Switch Bezel Replacement (See: Seat Switch Bezel Replacement) . Lumbar Actuator Replacement - Manual Lumbar Actuator Replacement - Manual Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1102 2. Remove the lumbar cable from the actuator: 1. Adjust the knob until the lumbar basket is in the position of least support. 2. Pull back on the lumbar cable sleeve. 3. Remove the barrel end of the cable from the lumbar actuator. 3. Remove the lumbar knob by pulling firmly on the knob. 4. Drill out the rivets from the lumbar actuator, if necessary. 5. Remove the lumbar actuator screws. 6. Remove the actuator from the seat. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1103 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Install the lumbar actuator to the seat cushion frame with screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 2. Install the lumbar knob. 3. Install the lumbar cable in the actuator: 1. Pull back on the lumbar cable sleeve. 2. Install the barrel end of the cable from the lumbar actuator. 3. Adjust the knob to ensure that the cable is properly installed. 4. Install the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Seat Heater Switch: Procedures HEATED SEAT SWITCH REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat outer trim. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the seat heater switch. 3. Remove the heater switch from the trim. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1109 1. Install the heater switch to the seat trim. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the heater switch. 3. Install the seat outer trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1110 Seat Heater Switch: Removal and Replacement Heated Seat Switch Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seat outer trim. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the seat heater switch. 3. Remove the heater switch from the trim. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1111 1. Install the heater switch to the seat trim. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the heater switch. 3. Install the seat outer trim. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Headliner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Sunroof Switch (with RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1118 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Pull gently at front of reading lamp cover to disengage retaining clips. 2. Rotate cover rearward until rear attaching hooks are released. 3. Disconnect sunroof switch harness from sunroof switch. 4. Remove sunroof switch fasteners and remove sunroof switch. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1119 1. Install sunroof switch with fasteners. Tighten sunroof switch to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in) 2. Connect sunroof switch harness to sunroof switch. 3. Position front reading lamp cover into rear attaching hooks. 4. Rotate front reading lamp cover into lamp assembly forward, then snap cover into place. 5. Function sunroof switch to ensure proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Component Locations Brake Warning System Components Brake Warning System Components 1 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1125 LR Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1126 Brake Fluid Level Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Brake Warning System Components Brake Warning System Components 1 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1130 Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1131 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Park Brake Warning Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Remove the front floor console. 3. Disconnect the warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 4. Remove the warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the park brake warning lamp switch locating tab to the locating hole on the park brake lever assembly. 2. Install the switch to the park brake lever. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the park brake warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). ^ Tighten the screw to 4 Nm (35 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the park brake warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 5. Install the front floor console. 6. Enable the SIR system. 7. Verify correct park brake warning lamp operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations Left Side of the I/P Left Side of the I/P 1. Ambient Light Sensor 2. Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) 3. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4. Traction Control (TC) Switch (JM4) 5. Hazard Switch 6. Fog Lamp Switch (T96) 7. Radio 8. HVAC Control Module 9. Power Window Switch - Main 10. Transmission Range Indicator 11. Horn Switch/Pad - Part of the Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module 12. Headlamp Switch 13. Dimmer Switch 14. Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 15. Data Link Connector (DLC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1135 Traction Control Switch (JM4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1136 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Traction Control Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel. 2. Carefully release the retaining tabs and remove the traction control switch from the trim bezel. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1137 1. Install the traction control switch to the trim bezel. Ensure that the retaining tabs are fully engaged. 2. Install the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Wheel Speed Sensor: Component Locations Under the Rear of the Vehicle Under the Rear of the Vehicle Under the Rear of the Vehicle 1 - Fuel Tank Harness 2 - C406 3 - Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) Harness 4 - C404 5 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - RR Shown, LR Similar LF Suspension LF Suspension Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1142 1 - C104 Left Shown, C105 Right Similar 2 - Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - LF, RF Similar Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1143 Wheel Speed Sensor: Connector Locations LF Suspension Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1144 Under The Rear Of The Vehicle Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1145 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - LF Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1146 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - LR Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1147 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - RF Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1148 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - RR Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake rotor. 4. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt. 6. Remove the wheel speed sensor. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front > Page 1151 1. Install the wheel speed sensor to the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 3. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the brake rotor. 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front > Page 1152 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake shoes. 4. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt. 6. Remove the wheel speed sensor through the drum brake backing plate. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front > Page 1153 1. Install the wheel speed sensor through the drum brake backing plate to the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 2. Seat the wheel speed sensor harness grommet into the backing plate. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the brake shoes. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1159 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1160 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Engine coolant must be drained below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill) in Cooling System. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply thread sealant GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent, to sensor threads. IMPORTANT: Tap out sensor mounting hole in engine head to remove any thread sealant residue. Clean any sealant residue from old sensor and apply RTV sealant to threads if old sensor is going to be reused. 2. Install the ECT sensor. Tighten the engine coolant temperature sensor to 23 N.m (17 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1161 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Fill engine coolant to proper level. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill) in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1166 Cruise/Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1167 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Adjustments CRUISE RELEASE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Disconnect the cruise brake switch harness connector. NOTE: Improper cruise control release switch adjustment may cause brake damage such as brake drag, heat buildup and excessive brake lining wear. 3. Rotate the cruise brake switch counterclockwise and remove the cruise brake switch from the switch retainer. 4. Install the cruise brake switch. - Position the switch into the retainer with the electrical connector index notch pointing to the 1 o'clock position. - Slide the switch in the retainer until the plunger is fully depressed into the barrel. - Rotate the switch clockwise until the travel stop has been reached, approximately 60 degrees. - Inspect the cruise brake switch to ensure the switch is properly locked into the switch retainer with the cruise brake switch electrical connector index notch pointing to the 3 o'clock position. IMPORTANT: Do not depress the brake pedal assembly during the brake switch installation. Depressing the brake pedal will cause a brake drag condition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1168 5. Connect the cruise brake switch harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 7. Use the scan tool to monitor CRUISE BRAKE SWITCH in the engine control module (ECM) General Information data table, while depressing and releasing the brake pedal. Verify the APPLIED and RELEASED states read correctly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1169 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair CRUISE RELEASE SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Disconnect the cruise brake switch connector. 3. Rotate the cruise brake switch counterclockwise and remove the cruise brake switch from the switch retainer. 4. Gently compress the locking tabs on the cruise brake retainer and remove the switch retainer from the brake pedal assembly. IMPORTANT: Depressing the brake pedal will allow easier access of the retainer locking tabs. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1170 1. Install the cruise brake switch retainer into the upper hole of the brake pedal assembly with the retainer arrow pointing in the 3 o'clock position. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the indexing arrow is facing to the right and the ears on the retainer are fully extended on the back side of the bracket to prevent the retainer from being pushed out. 2. Install the cruise brake switch. - Position the switch into the retainer with the electrical connector index notch pointing to the 1 o'clock position. - Slide the switch in the retainer until the plunger is fully depressed into the barrel. - Rotate the switch clockwise until the travel stop has been reached, approximately 60 degrees. - Inspect the cruise brake switch to ensure the switch is properly locked into the switch retainer with the cruise brake switch electrical connector index notch pointing to the 3 o'clock position. IMPORTANT: Do not depress the brake pedal assembly during the cruise brake switch installation. Depressing the brake pedal during the cruise brake switch installation will cause a brake drag condition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1171 3. Connect the cruise brake switch harness connector. 4. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 5. Use the scan tool to monitor CRUISE BRAKE SWITCH in the engine control module (ECM) General Information data table, while depressing and releasing the brake pedal. Verify the APPLIED and RELEASED states read correctly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (With RPO Code K34 Without RPO Code UK3) Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (With RPO Code K34 And UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left > Page 1176 Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Steering Wheel Control Switch - Right Steering Wheel Control Switch - Right (With RPO Code K34 Without RPO Code UK3) Steering Wheel Control Switch - Right (With RPO Code K34 And UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1177 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the switch assembly from the steering wheel. 2. Disconnect the cruise switch electrical harness connector from the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the switch electrical harness connector to the switch. Push in the connector until a click is heard and pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 2. Insert the cruise switch into the steering wheel and gently apply pressure to fasten the switch in the opening. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Level Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the oil pressure indicator switch electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the oil pressure indicator switch from the engine block. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1182 1. Apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or the equivalent to the oil pressure indicator switch threads. 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil pressure indicator switch. ^ Tighten the switch to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect the oil pressure indicator switch electrical connector (2). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1186 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1192 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1193 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1194 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1195 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1196 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1197 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1198 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1199 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1200 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1201 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1202 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1203 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1204 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1205 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1206 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1207 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1208 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1209 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1210 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1211 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1212 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1213 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1214 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1215 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1216 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1217 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1218 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1219 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1220 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1221 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1222 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1223 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1224 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1225 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1226 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1227 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1228 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1229 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1230 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1231 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1232 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1233 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1234 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1235 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1236 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1237 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1238 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1239 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1240 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1241 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1242 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1243 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1244 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1245 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1246 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1247 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1248 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1249 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1250 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1251 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1252 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1253 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1254 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1255 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1256 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1257 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1258 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1259 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1260 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1261 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1262 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1263 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1264 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations HVAC Module Assembly Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1268 Evaporator Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Low Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Low Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) REFRIGERANT LOW TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left side insulator/closeout panel. 2. Disconnect the temperature sensor connector from the temperature sensor. 3. Twist the temperature sensor one quarter turn to disengage from the evaporator case assembly. 4. Remove the temperature sensor from the evaporator case assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the temperature sensor to the evaporator case assembly. 2. Twist the temperature sensor one quarter turn to engage to the evaporator case assembly. 3. Install the temperature sensor connector to the temperature sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Low Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1273 4. Install the left side insulator/closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1278 Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1279 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair INSTRUMENT PANEL (I/P) DIMMER SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left side air deflector from the instrument panel (I/P). 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the dimmer switch. 3. Remove the screw from the I/P dimmer switch. 4. Remove the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the dimmer switch to the left side air deflector panel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1280 Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Install the electrical connector to the dimmer switch. 3. Install the left side air deflector panel to the I/P. 4. Test the dimmer switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagrams Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Primary Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Secondary Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (with RPO Code DH3/DF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1287 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front fascia. 2. Remove the push-in retainer that secures the ambient air temperature sensor to the impact bar. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the ambient air temperature sensor. 4. Remove the sensor from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the ambient air temperature sensor. 2. Install the ambient air temperature sensor to the impact bar and with the push-in retainer. 3. Install the front fascia. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Brake Warning System Components Brake Warning System Components 1 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1291 Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1292 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Park Brake Warning Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Remove the front floor console. 3. Disconnect the warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 4. Remove the warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the park brake warning lamp switch locating tab to the locating hole on the park brake lever assembly. 2. Install the switch to the park brake lever. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the park brake warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). ^ Tighten the screw to 4 Nm (35 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the park brake warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 5. Install the front floor console. 6. Enable the SIR system. 7. Verify correct park brake warning lamp operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1297 Ambient Light Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1298 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the access panel covers from the upper trim pad. 2. Remove the I/P cluster trim panel. 3. Remove the windshield garnish moldings. 4. Remove the upper trim pad bolts. 5. Lift the upper trim pad to disengage the clips. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1299 6. Twist the ambient light sensor to remove the sensor from the upper trim pad. 7. Disconnect the electrical connector from the ambient light sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the ambient light sensor. 2. Align the sensor to the upper trim pad and twist into place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1300 3. Align the upper trim pad to the I/P and fasten the bolts in place. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Install the windshield garnish moldings. 5. Install the I/P cluster trim panel. 6. Install the access panel covers to the upper trim pad. 7. Test the ambient light sensor for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Switches Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Stop Lamp Switch - Lower Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Stop Lamp Switch - Lower Stop Lamp Switch - Lower Stop Lamp Switch - Lower Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Stop Lamp Switch - Lower > Page 1306 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Stop Lamp Switch - Upper Stop Lamp Switch - Upper Stop Lamp Switch - Upper Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1307 Brake Light Switch: Adjustments STOP LAMP SWITCH ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 1. Improper stoplamp switch adjustment may cause brake drag, heat buildup and excessive brake lining wear. NOTE: Proper stoplamp switch adjustment is essential. Disconnect the electrical connector from the stop lamp switch. 2. Rotate the switch counterclockwise and remove the switch from the switch retainer. 3. Install the switch to the bracket by turning and pushing the switch until the switch bottoms on the brake pedal. IMPORTANT: Do NOT depress the brake pedal assembly during the stop lamp switch installation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1308 This will cause a drag condition on the brake. 4. Connect the electrical connector to the stop lamp switch. 5. Inspect the stop lamps for proper operation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1309 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair STOP LAMP SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the stop lamp switch. 2. Rotate the stop lamp switch counterclockwise and remove the switch from the switch retainer. 3. Gently compress the locking tabs on the switch retainer and remove the switch retainer from the brake pedal assembly. IMPORTANT: Depressing the brake pedal will allow easier access to the locking tabs on the stop lamp retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1310 1. Connect the electrical connectors on the stop lamp switch. NOTE: Proper stoplamp switch adjustment is essential. Improper stoplamp switch adjustment may cause brake drag, heat buildup and excessive brake lining wear. IMPORTANT: Do NOT depress the brake pedal assembly during the stop lamp switch installation. This will cause a drag condition on the brake. - Inspect the retainer to insure that the locking tabs have locked into position and the retainer is in place. 2. Install the switch to the bracket by turning and pushing the switch until the switch bottoms on the brake pedal. 3. Inspect the stop lamps for proper operation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1314 Fog Lamp Switch (with RPO Code T96) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1315 Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair FOG LAMP SWITCH REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel from the center stack. 2. Remove the screw that retains the center air deflector assembly to the I/P trim bezel. Remove the air deflector assembly. 3. Use a flat-bladed tool to release the fasteners on the fog lamp switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1316 4. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the fog lamp switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Align the fog lamp switch with the center air deflector assembly and snap into place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1317 2. Install the center air deflector assembly to the I/P trim bezel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the fog lamp switch. 4. Install the I/P trim bezel. 5. Test the fog lamp switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1321 Hazard Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1325 Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Multifunction Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Multifunction Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement Multifunction Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disable the SIR system. 3. Remove the steering wheel. 4. Remove the SIR coil. 5. Remove the steering column trim covers. 6. Depress the lock tabs on the left and right multifunction levers. Remove the multifunction levers. 7. Disconnect the housing electrical connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Multifunction Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement > Page 1333 8. Remove the lock housing bolts. 9. Separate the ignition housing from the multifunction lever bracket. Slide the bracket from the column. Installation Procedure 1. Pre-assemble the lock housing and multifunction lever bracket. Hand-tighten the bolts, leaving approximately 3.2 mm (0.125 inch) gap at the bolt ends. 2. Important: Ensure that the lock tab fully engages into the column slot. Slide the bracket onto the column. 3. Hand-tighten the lower bolt until snug. 4. Hand-tighten the upper bolt until snug. 5. Notice: Tighten the lower bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.) 6. Tighten the upper bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Multifunction Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement > Page 1334 7. Connect the ignition housing electrical connectors. 8. Important: Ensure that both locking tabs are seated. Install the multifunction levers. 9. Install the upper and lower shrouds. 10. Install the SIR coil. 11. Install the steering wheel. 12. Enable the SIR system. 13. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Multifunction Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement > Page 1335 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Multifunction, Turn Signal Switch Replacement Multifunction, Turn Signal Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the steering column trim covers. 2. Disconnect the multifunction turn signal switch harness connectors. 3. Depress the lock tabs on the left and right multifunction levers. 4. Remove the multifunction levers. Installation Procedure 1. Install the multifunction turn signal switch to the steering column. 2. Important: Ensure both locking tabs are seated. Connect the multifunction turn signal switch harness connectors. 3. Install the steering column trim covers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Under The Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1341 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1342 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The accelerator pedal contains 2 individual accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors within the assembly. The APP sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits: - A 5-volt reference circuit - A low reference circuit - A signal circuit The APP sensors are used to determine the pedal angle. The powertrain control module (PCM) provides each APP sensor with a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensors provide the PCM with signal voltage proportional to the pedal movement. Both APP sensor signal voltages are low at rest position and increase as the pedal is applied. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1343 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR PEDAL WITH POSITION SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor connector. 3. Disconnect the APP sensor harness connector. 4. Remove the APP assembly attachment bolts. IMPORTANT: Due to clearance issues, the upper attachment bolt cannot be removed from the accelerator pedal assembly. Loose then bolt completely and leave the bolt in the component until the assembly is removed from the vehicle. 5. Remove the APP assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1344 1. Install the upper attachment bolt into the APP assembly. 2. Install the APP assembly into the vehicle. 3. Install the remaining attachment bolts into the APP assembly. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the APP sensor harness connector. Push the connector in until the lock position is felt, then pull back to confirm engagement. 5. Install the CPA to the APP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1350 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1351 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1352 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1353 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1354 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1355 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1356 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1357 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1358 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1359 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1360 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1361 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1362 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1363 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1364 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1365 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1366 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1367 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1368 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1369 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1370 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1371 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1372 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1373 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1374 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1375 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1376 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1377 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1378 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1379 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1380 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1381 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1382 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1383 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1384 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1385 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1386 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1387 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1388 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1389 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1390 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1391 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1392 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1393 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1394 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1395 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1396 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1397 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1398 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1399 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1400 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1401 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1402 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1403 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1404 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1405 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1406 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1407 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1408 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1409 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1410 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1411 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1412 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1413 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1414 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1415 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1416 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1417 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1418 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1419 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1420 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1421 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1422 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1423 Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1424 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the MAF from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the MAF to air cleaner assembly seal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1425 1. Install the seal to the MAF. 2. Install the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 3. Install the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. Tighten the screws to 4 N.m (35 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1431 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1432 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1433 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1434 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1435 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1436 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1437 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1438 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1439 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1440 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1441 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1442 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1443 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1444 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1445 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1446 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1447 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1448 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1449 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1450 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1451 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1452 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1453 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1454 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1455 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1456 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1457 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1458 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1459 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1460 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1461 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1462 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1463 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1464 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1465 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1466 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1467 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1468 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1469 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1470 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1471 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1472 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1473 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1474 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1475 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1476 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1477 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1478 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1479 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1480 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1481 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1482 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1483 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1484 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1485 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1486 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1487 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1488 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1489 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1490 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1491 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1492 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1493 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1494 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1495 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1496 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1497 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1498 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1499 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1500 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1501 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1502 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1503 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1504 Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1505 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor does not directly affect the operation of the ignition system. The CMP sensor information is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to determine the position of the valve train relative to the crankshaft position. By monitoring the CMP and crankshaft position (CKP) signals, the PCM can accurately time the operation of the fuel injectors. The PCM supplies the sensor with a 12-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1506 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt. 3. Remove the CMP sensor. 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-rings for wear, cracks, or leakage if the sensor is being reused. Replace the O-rings if damaged. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the CMP sensor O-rings with clean engine oil. 2. Install the CMP sensor. 3. Install the CMP sensor bolt. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1510 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1511 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Engine coolant must be drained below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill) in Cooling System. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply thread sealant GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent, to sensor threads. IMPORTANT: Tap out sensor mounting hole in engine head to remove any thread sealant residue. Clean any sealant residue from old sensor and apply RTV sealant to threads if old sensor is going to be reused. 2. Install the ECT sensor. Tighten the engine coolant temperature sensor to 23 N.m (17 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1512 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Fill engine coolant to proper level. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill) in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1518 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1519 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1520 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1521 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1522 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1523 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1524 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1525 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1526 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1527 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1528 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1529 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1530 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1531 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1532 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1533 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1534 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1535 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1536 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1537 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1538 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1539 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1540 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1541 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1542 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1543 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1544 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1545 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1546 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1547 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1548 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1549 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1550 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1551 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1552 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1553 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1554 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1555 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1556 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1557 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1558 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1559 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1560 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1561 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1562 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1563 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1564 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1565 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1566 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1567 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1568 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1569 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1570 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1571 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1572 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1573 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1574 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1575 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1576 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1577 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1578 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1579 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1580 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1581 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1582 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1583 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1584 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1585 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1586 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1587 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1588 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1589 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1590 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1591 Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1592 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a 3-wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses 2 magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets, the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The CKP sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 24 times per crankshaft revolution. The pulse width encoding pattern is used to synchronize the coil firing sequence with the crankshaft position. The CKP sensor is used for ignition timing, fuel injector timing, misfire diagnostics, and tachometer display. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a 12-volt reference, a low reference, and a medium resolution engine speed signal circuit to the CKP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CKP sensor nut (2). 4. Remove the CKP sensor (1) from the engine. 5. Inspect for wear, cracks, or leakage if the CKP sensor is being reused. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil. Replace the O-rings if damaged. 2. Install the CKP sensor (1) to the block. 3. Install the CKP sensor nut (1). Tighten the nut to 11 N.m (97 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 1595 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 1596 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: - The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. - The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A powertrain control module (PCM) replacement - A crankshaft balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the PCM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC. 3. With a scan tool, select the CKP variation learn procedure and perform the following: 1. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 2. Block drive wheels. 3. Set parking brake. 4. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 5. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 6. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 7. Start and idle engine. 8. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 9. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 10. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). IMPORTANT: The engine should not accelerate beyond the calibrated fuel cut-off RPM value noted in step 3.1. Release the throttle immediately if the value is exceeded. - While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 4. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC. 5. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully in order to store the CKP system variation values in the PCM memory. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1600 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR The fuel level sensor consists of a float, a wire float arm, and a ceramic resistor card. The position of the float arm indicates the fuel level. The fuel level sensor contains a variable resistor which changes resistance in correspondence with the position of the float arm. The control module sends the fuel level information via the CAN serial data to the body control module (BCM). The instrument panel cluster (IPC) displays the fuel level as determined by the BCM. This information is used for the IPC fuel gage and the low fuel warning indicator, if applicable. The control module also monitors the fuel level input for various diagnostics. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT - PRIMARY REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: NEW fuel tank module seals are necessary each time the fuel tank module is serviced. Obtain NEW seals for both the primary and secondary modules prior to beginning this service procedure. - There are 2 fuel level sender unit and float assemblies in the fuel tank. There is 1 located on each fuel pump module. The fuel level sender unit and float is NOT the same for each of the fuel pump modules. 2. Remove the fuel pump module. 3. Disconnect the fuel level sender unit and float electrical connector from the underside of the top of the pump module. 4. Release the retaining tabs (1, 2) and remove the level sensor by sliding up. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 1603 1. Install the fuel level sender unit and float onto the fuel pump module. Make sure that the sender cap snaps into place (1, 2). 2. Connect the fuel level sender unit and float electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel pump module into the fuel tank. 4. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 1604 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Secondary FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT - SECONDARY REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: A NEW fuel tank module seal is necessary each time the fuel tank module is serviced. Obtain a NEW seal prior to beginning this service procedure. - There are 2 fuel level sender unit and float assemblies in the fuel tank. There is 1 located on each fuel pump module. The fuel level sender unit and float is NOT the same for each of the fuel pump modules. 2. Remove the fuel pump module. 3. Disconnect the fuel level sender unit and the float electrical connector. 4. Release the retaining tabs and remove the level sensor by sliding up. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 1605 1. Install the fuel level sender unit and float onto the fuel pump module. Make sure that the sender cap snaps into place. 2. Connect the fuel level sender unit and the float electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel pump module into the fuel tank. 4. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1609 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor measures the difference between the pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank and outside air pressure. The control module provides a 5-volt reference and a ground to the FTP sensor. The FTP sensor provides a signal voltage back to the control module that can vary between 0.1-4.9 volts. As FTP increases, FTP sensor voltage decreases, high pressure , = low voltage. As FTP decreases, FTP sensor voltage increases low pressure or vacuum = high voltage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1610 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump module harness electrical connector from the fuel tank pressure sensor. 3. Position 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers, one on each side of the sensor, near the vacuum port. 4. Carefully use the screwdrivers to lift and release the sensor from the fuel pump module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1611 1. Install the fuel tank pressure sensor to the fuel pump module assembly. Ensure that the sensor grommet is fully seated to the pump module. 2. Connect the pump module electrical connector to the fuel tank pressure sensor. 3. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1615 Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1619 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1622 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1623 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1624 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1625 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1626 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1627 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1628 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1629 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1630 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1631 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1632 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1633 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1634 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1635 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1636 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1637 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1638 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1639 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1640 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1641 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1642 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1643 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1644 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1645 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1646 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1647 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1648 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1649 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1650 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1651 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1652 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1653 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1654 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1655 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1656 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1657 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1658 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1659 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1660 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1661 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1662 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1663 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1664 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1665 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1666 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1667 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1668 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1669 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1670 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1671 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1672 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1673 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1674 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1675 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1676 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1677 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1678 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1679 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1680 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1681 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1682 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1683 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1684 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1685 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1686 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1687 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1688 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1689 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1690 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1691 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1692 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1693 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1694 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1695 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) 1 Knock Sensor (KS) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1696 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. The KS system uses one or 2 flat response 2-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1697 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: This engine is equipped with 2 knock sensors. This service procedure applies to both the right and left knock sensors 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the KS bolt. 4. Remove the KS. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply thread locker to the sensor threads. The sensor threads are coated at the factory and applying additional thread locker affects the sensor's ability to detect detonation. 1. Install the KS to engine block. 2. Install the KS bolt. Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the KS electrical connector. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1701 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1702 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Testing and Inspection MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR DIAGNOSIS DIAGNOSTIC FAULT INFORMATION IMPORTANT: Always perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures MAP Sensor TYPICAL SCAN TOOL DATA CIRCUIT/SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to pressure changes in the intake manifold. The pressure changes occur based on the engine load. The MAP sensor has the following circuits: 5-volt reference circuit - Low reference circuit - MAP sensor signal circuit The control module supplies 5 volts to the MAP sensor on the 5-volt reference circuit. The control module also provides a ground on the low reference circuit. The MAP sensor provides a signal to the control module on the MAP sensor signal circuit which is relative to the pressure changes in the manifold. The control module should detect a low signal voltage at a low MAP, such as during an idle or a deceleration. The control module should detect a high signal voltage at a high MAP, such as the ignition is ON, with the engine OFF, or at a wide open throttle (WOT). The MAP sensor is also used in order to determine the barometric pressure (BARO). This occurs when the ignition switch is turned ON, with the engine OFF. The BARO reading may also be updated whenever the engine is operated at WOT. The control module monitors the MAP sensor signal for voltage outside of the normal range. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Poor idle characteristics may be due to uncontrolled fueling caused by an open or high resistance in the HO2S 1 low signal circuit. Before replacing any component, ensure that this condition does not exist. CIRCUIT/SYSTEM TESTING Always perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. 1. Start the engine. 2. Monitor the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) information with the scan tool. 3. If DTC P0641 or P0651 is also set then correct DTC P0641 or P0651 first. 4. Inspect for the following conditions: - Disconnected, damaged, or incorrectly routed vacuum hoses. - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor disconnected from the vacuum source. - Restrictions in the MAP sensor vacuum source. - Intake manifold vacuum leaks. - Check for a properly functioning oxygen sensor. 5. Turn OFF the ignition. 6. Remove the MAP sensor from the engine vacuum source. Leave the MAP sensor connected to the engine harness. 7. Connect a J 23738-A Mityvac to the MAP sensor. 8. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 9. Observe the MAP sensor pressure with the scan tool. 10. Apply vacuum to the MAP sensor with the J 23738-A in 1 inch Hg increments until 15 inches Hg is reached. Each 1 inch Hg should decrease MAP sensor pressure by 3-4 kPa. Monitor the MAP sensor pressure to see if the decrease in pressure in consistent. If decrease in pressure is not consistent then, test for intermittent and poor connections at the MAP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1703 11. Apply vacuum with the J 23738-A until 20 inches Hg is reached. Observe the MAP sensor pressure for less than 34 kPa. - If more than 34 kPa, test for an intermittent and for a poor connection at the MAP sensor. 12. With the ignition ON, and the engine OFF. 13. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. 14. Measure for 4.8-5.2 volts from the 5-volt reference circuit of the MAP sensor to a good ground, with a DMM. - If more than specified value than test the circuit for a short to voltage or faulty control module. - If less than specified value than test the circuit for high resistance, an open, or an intermittent and poor connection or at the control module, or a faulty control module. 15. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor 16. Use a scan tool and observe the MAP sensor for less than 12 kPa. - If the MAP sensor is more than 12 kPa then test the MAP sensor signal circuit for a short to voltage or a faulty control module. 17. Use a 3-amp fused jumper wire and connect it between the MAP sensor 5-volt reference circuit and the MAP sensor signal circuit. 18. Use a scan tool and observe the MAP sensor for more than 103 kPa. - If the MAP sensor is less than 103 kPa then test the MAP sensor signal circuit for high resistance or a faulty control module. 19. With the 3-amp fused jumper wire still connected between the 5-volt reference circuit of the MAP sensor and the signal circuit of the MAP sensor. Observe the MAP sensor parameter with the scan tool for 4.9V. If more than 4.9V then replace the MAP sensor. - If less than 4.9V then, test the MAP sensor signal circuit between the control module and the MAP sensor for a short to ground, an open, or high resistance. Test for an intermittent and for a poor connection at the control module, if tests OK then replace the control module. 20. Turn OFF the ignition and allow the control module to power down. 21. With a DMM measure for less than 5 ohms of resistance between the low reference circuit of the MAP sensor and a good ground. - If the resistance is more than 5 ohms, then test the circuit for a high resistance or a faulty control module. 22. If the MAP sensor circuits test normal, then replace the MAP sensor. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT: Always perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure. Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Replacement - Control Module References Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1704 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the MAP sensor retaining bolt (3) and bracket (2). 3. Remove the MAP sensor (1) and the MAP sensor port seal if it is still retained in the intake manifold. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the MAP sensor (1) to the intake manifold. 2. Install the MAP sensor retaining bracket (2) and bolt (3). Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the MAP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1710 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1711 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1712 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1713 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1714 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1715 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1716 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1717 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1718 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1719 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1720 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1721 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1722 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1723 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1724 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1725 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1726 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1727 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1728 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1729 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1730 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1731 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1732 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1733 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1734 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1735 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1736 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1737 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1738 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1739 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1740 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1741 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1742 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1743 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1744 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1745 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1746 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1747 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1748 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1749 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1750 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1751 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1752 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1753 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1754 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1755 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1756 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1757 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1758 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1759 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1760 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1761 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1762 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1763 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1764 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1765 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1766 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1767 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1768 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1769 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1770 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1771 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1772 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1773 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1774 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1775 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1776 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1777 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1778 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1779 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1780 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1781 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1782 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1783 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 1 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 1 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR REPLACEMENT - POSITION 1 REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the HO2S 1 harness connector. 2. Remove the HO2S 1 from the exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the threads of the HO2S 2. NOTE: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. Use only a nickel based anti-seize compound that does not contain silicone. 2. Install the HO2S 1 to the exhaust manifold. Tighten the HO2S 1 to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the HO2S 1 harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard and pull back to confirm a positive engagement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 1 > Page 1786 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 2 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR REPLACEMENT - POSITION 2 REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the HO2S 2 harness connector (3). 3. Use a liquid penetrate before removing the sensor. IMPORTANT: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. DO NOT use products containing silicone on or near the HO2S. 4. Remove the HO2S 2 (2) from the exhaust pipe. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the threads of the HO2S 2. NOTE: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. Use only a nickel based anti-seize compound that does not contain silicone. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 1 > Page 1787 2. Install the HO2S 2 (2). Tighten the HO2S 2 to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the HO2S 2 harness connector (3). Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Ensure the HO2S 2 harness pigtail connector is secure to the chassis. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1792 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1793 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1794 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1795 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1796 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1797 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1798 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1799 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1800 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1801 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1802 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1803 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1804 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1805 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1806 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1807 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1808 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1809 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1810 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1811 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1812 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1813 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1814 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1815 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1816 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1817 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1818 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1819 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1820 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1821 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1822 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1823 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1824 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1825 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1826 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1827 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1828 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1829 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1830 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1831 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1832 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1833 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1834 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1835 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1836 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1837 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1838 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1839 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1840 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1841 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1842 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1843 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1844 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1845 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1846 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1847 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1848 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1849 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1850 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1851 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1852 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1853 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1854 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1855 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1856 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1857 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1858 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1859 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1860 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1861 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1862 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1863 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1864 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1868 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1869 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1870 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required - J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 1873 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 1874 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 1875 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 1876 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 1877 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Under The Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1882 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1883 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The accelerator pedal contains 2 individual accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors within the assembly. The APP sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits: - A 5-volt reference circuit - A low reference circuit - A signal circuit The APP sensors are used to determine the pedal angle. The powertrain control module (PCM) provides each APP sensor with a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensors provide the PCM with signal voltage proportional to the pedal movement. Both APP sensor signal voltages are low at rest position and increase as the pedal is applied. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1884 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR PEDAL WITH POSITION SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor connector. 3. Disconnect the APP sensor harness connector. 4. Remove the APP assembly attachment bolts. IMPORTANT: Due to clearance issues, the upper attachment bolt cannot be removed from the accelerator pedal assembly. Loose then bolt completely and leave the bolt in the component until the assembly is removed from the vehicle. 5. Remove the APP assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1885 1. Install the upper attachment bolt into the APP assembly. 2. Install the APP assembly into the vehicle. 3. Install the remaining attachment bolts into the APP assembly. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the APP sensor harness connector. Push the connector in until the lock position is felt, then pull back to confirm engagement. 5. Install the CPA to the APP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1891 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1892 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1893 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1894 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1895 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1896 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1897 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1898 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1899 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1900 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1901 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1902 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1903 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1904 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1905 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1906 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1907 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1908 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1909 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1910 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1911 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1912 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1913 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1914 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1915 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1916 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1917 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1918 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1919 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1920 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1921 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1922 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1923 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1924 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1925 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1926 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1927 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1928 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1929 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1930 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1931 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1932 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1933 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1934 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1935 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1936 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1937 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1938 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1939 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1940 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1941 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1942 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1943 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1944 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1945 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1946 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1947 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1948 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1949 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1950 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1951 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1952 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1953 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1954 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1955 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1956 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1957 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1958 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1959 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1960 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1961 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1962 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1963 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1964 Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1965 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the MAF from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the MAF to air cleaner assembly seal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1966 1. Install the seal to the MAF. 2. Install the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 3. Install the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. Tighten the screws to 4 N.m (35 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1971 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1972 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1973 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1974 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1975 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1976 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1977 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1978 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1979 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1980 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1981 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1982 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1983 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1984 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1985 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1986 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1987 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1988 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1989 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1990 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1991 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1992 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1993 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1994 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1995 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1996 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1997 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1998 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1999 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2000 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2001 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2002 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2003 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2004 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2005 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2006 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2007 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2008 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2009 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2010 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2011 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2012 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2013 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2014 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2015 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2016 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2017 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2018 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2019 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2020 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2021 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2022 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2023 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2024 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2025 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2026 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2027 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2028 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2029 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2030 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2031 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2032 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2033 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2034 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2035 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2036 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2037 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2038 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2039 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2040 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2041 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2042 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2043 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2050 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2051 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2052 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2053 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2054 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2055 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2056 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2057 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2058 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2059 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2060 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2061 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2062 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2063 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2064 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2065 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2066 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2067 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2068 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2069 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2070 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2071 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2072 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2073 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2074 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2075 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2076 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2077 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2078 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2079 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2080 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2081 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2082 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2083 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2084 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2085 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2086 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2087 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2088 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2089 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2090 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2091 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2092 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2093 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2094 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2095 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2096 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2097 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2098 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2099 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2100 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2101 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2102 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2103 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2104 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2105 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2106 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2107 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2108 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2109 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2110 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2111 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2112 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2113 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2114 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2115 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2116 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2117 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2118 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2119 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2120 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2121 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2122 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2123 Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2124 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor does not directly affect the operation of the ignition system. The CMP sensor information is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to determine the position of the valve train relative to the crankshaft position. By monitoring the CMP and crankshaft position (CKP) signals, the PCM can accurately time the operation of the fuel injectors. The PCM supplies the sensor with a 12-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2125 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt. 3. Remove the CMP sensor. 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-rings for wear, cracks, or leakage if the sensor is being reused. Replace the O-rings if damaged. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the CMP sensor O-rings with clean engine oil. 2. Install the CMP sensor. 3. Install the CMP sensor bolt. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2131 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2132 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2133 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2134 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2135 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2136 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2137 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2138 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2139 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2140 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2141 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2142 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2143 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2144 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2145 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2146 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2147 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2148 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2149 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2150 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2151 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2152 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2153 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2154 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2155 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2156 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2157 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2158 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2159 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2160 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2161 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2162 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2163 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2164 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2165 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2166 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2167 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2168 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2169 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2170 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2171 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2172 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2173 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2174 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2175 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2176 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2177 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2178 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2179 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2180 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2181 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2182 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2183 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2184 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2185 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2186 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2187 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2188 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2189 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2190 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2191 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2192 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2193 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2194 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2195 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2196 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2197 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2198 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2199 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2200 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2201 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2202 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2203 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2204 Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2205 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a 3-wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses 2 magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets, the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The CKP sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 24 times per crankshaft revolution. The pulse width encoding pattern is used to synchronize the coil firing sequence with the crankshaft position. The CKP sensor is used for ignition timing, fuel injector timing, misfire diagnostics, and tachometer display. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a 12-volt reference, a low reference, and a medium resolution engine speed signal circuit to the CKP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CKP sensor nut (2). 4. Remove the CKP sensor (1) from the engine. 5. Inspect for wear, cracks, or leakage if the CKP sensor is being reused. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil. Replace the O-rings if damaged. 2. Install the CKP sensor (1) to the block. 3. Install the CKP sensor nut (1). Tighten the nut to 11 N.m (97 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 2208 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 2209 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: - The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. - The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A powertrain control module (PCM) replacement - A crankshaft balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the PCM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC. 3. With a scan tool, select the CKP variation learn procedure and perform the following: 1. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 2. Block drive wheels. 3. Set parking brake. 4. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 5. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 6. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 7. Start and idle engine. 8. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 9. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 10. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). IMPORTANT: The engine should not accelerate beyond the calibrated fuel cut-off RPM value noted in step 3.1. Release the throttle immediately if the value is exceeded. - While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 4. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC. 5. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully in order to store the CKP system variation values in the PCM memory. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 2219 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 2220 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 2221 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 2227 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 2228 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 2229 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2230 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Description and Operation KEY AND LOCK CYLINDER CODING USE INSTRUCTION SHEET SUPPLIED For the key cutting and lock cylinder coding procedure, refer to the instruction sheet supplied in the key and lock cylinder kit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Use Instruction Sheet Supplied For the key cutting and lock cylinder coding procedure, refer to the instruction sheet supplied in the key and lock cylinder kit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 2233 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Important: Vehicle must be in PARK prior to ignition cylinder removal. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disable the SIR system. 3. Remove the steering column trim covers. 4. Insert key into the ignition and rotate to the RUN position. Then rotate ignition cylinder back to ACC position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 2234 5. Depress the locking button through hole on side of ignition module assembly with a thin pick-type tool. Slide the lock cylinder from the ignition housing. Installation Procedure Important: Actuator blade within the ignition module must be in ACC position to install the lock cylinder assembly. If rotated, reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 2235 1. Important: If you are installing a new lock cylinder, refer to Key and Lock Cylinder Coding. Insert key into ignition lock cylinder and install the cylinder into the lock housing. 2. Rotate the lock cylinder in the housing. Verify proper rotation. 3. Install the steering column trim covers. 4. Enable the SIR system. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 2236 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the SIR system. 2. Remove the steering wheel. 3. Remove the steering column trim covers. 4. Remove the multifunction levers. 5. Disconnect the housing electrical connectors. 6. Disengage the retaining tabs and remove the park lock cable assembly from the housing. 7. Remove the lock housing bolts. 8. Turn the ignition key to the ACC position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 2237 9. Separate the lock housing (lock cylinder case) from the multifunction lever bracket. Slide the bracket from the column. 10. Remove the ignition switch screws. 11. Remove the ignition switch. Installation Procedure 1. Ensure the ignition switch is in the ACC position. 2. Notice: Position the ignition switch to housing and install the screws and tighten. ^ Tighten the screws to 2.5 Nm (22 inch lbs.). 3. Pre-assemble the lock housing and multifunction lever bracket. Hand tighten the bolts leaving approximately 3.2 mm (0.125 inch) gap. 4. Slide the bracket onto the column. Ensure lock tab fully engages into the column slot. 5. Hand tighten the lower bolt until snug. 6. Hand tighten the upper bolt until snug. 7. Tighten the lower bolt, then the upper bolt. ^ Tighten the bolts to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 2238 8. Snap the ignition lock cable onto the ignition module. 9. Connect the ignition housing electrical connectors. 10. Important: Ensure both locking tabs are seated. Install the multifunction levers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 2239 11. Install the steering column trim covers. 12. Install the SIR coil. 13. Install the steering wheel. 14. Enable the SIR system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2243 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2246 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2247 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2248 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2249 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2250 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2251 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2252 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2253 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2254 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2255 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2256 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2257 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2258 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2259 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2260 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2261 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2262 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2263 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2264 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2265 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2266 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2267 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2268 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2269 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2270 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2271 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2272 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2273 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2274 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2275 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2276 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2277 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2278 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2279 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2280 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2281 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2282 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2283 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2284 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2285 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2286 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2287 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2288 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2289 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2290 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2291 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2292 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2293 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2294 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2295 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2296 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2297 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2298 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2299 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2300 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2301 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2302 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2303 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2304 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2305 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2306 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2307 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2308 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2309 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2310 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2311 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2312 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2313 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2314 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2315 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2316 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2317 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2318 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2319 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) 1 Knock Sensor (KS) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2320 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. The KS system uses one or 2 flat response 2-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2321 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: This engine is equipped with 2 knock sensors. This service procedure applies to both the right and left knock sensors 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the KS bolt. 4. Remove the KS. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply thread locker to the sensor threads. The sensor threads are coated at the factory and applying additional thread locker affects the sensor's ability to detect detonation. 1. Install the KS to engine block. 2. Install the KS bolt. Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the KS electrical connector. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Impact Sensor: Diagrams Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) - Left (ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) > Page 2328 Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) - Right (ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) > Page 2329 Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front End Sensor Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Front End Sensor INFLATABLE RESTRAINT FRONT END SENSOR The front end sensor, also known as the electronic frontal sensor (EFS), is equipped on vehicles to supplement the SIR system performance. The EFS is an electronic sensor and is not part of the deployment loops, but instead provides an input to the SDM. The EFS can assist in determining the severity of some frontal collisions. The SDM contains a microprocessor which performs calculations using the measured accelerations and compares these calculations to a value stored in memory. When the generated calculations exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the frontal deployment loops deploying the frontal air bags. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front End Sensor > Page 2332 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Side Impact Sensor (SIS) INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (SIS) The side impact sensor (SIS) contains a sensing device which monitors vehicle acceleration and velocity changes to detect side collisions that are severe enough to warrant air bag deployment. The SIS is not part of the deployment loop, but instead provides an input to the SDM. The SDM contains a microprocessor that performs calculations using the measured accelerations and compares these calculations to a value stored in memory. When the generated calculations exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the deployment loops deploying the side air bags. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor Replacement Caution: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint front end sensor. Before applying power to the front end sensor make sure that it is securely fastened. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. Preliminary Procedure: Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. 1. Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Front End Discriminating Sensor Bolt. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. Tip: Loosen the TORX head bolt in order to remove sensor. The bolt has left hand threads. Tighten 8 N.m (71 lb in) 2. Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Front End Discriminating Sensor Assembly. Procedure: 1. Slide the sensor towards the front of vehicle to guide the sensor bolt out of release slot. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2335 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 or to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. CAUTION: When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must be disabled. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR components, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. - Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint side impact sensor (SIS). Before applying power to the SIS make sure that it is securely fastened. Failure to observe the correct installation procedures could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. 2. Remove the center pillar lower molding. 3. Loosen the fasteners on the side impact sensor (SIS). 4. Remove the SIS by sliding the module up and out of the key slots in the sheet metal. 5. Disconnect the SIS electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other contaminants from the mounting surface. 2. Connect the SIS electrical connector and insert into the connector position assurance (CPA) to secure. 3. Place the SIS through the access hole in the lock pillar. 4. Slide the module down and locate the captured fastener in the key slots of the lock pillar. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2336 Tighten the fastener to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the center pillar lower molding. 6. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 or to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Component Views Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2340 Seat Belt Switch - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing System Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly, sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or between the occupant and the seat fabric. Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE NECESSARY BY SUCH USE. Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers. Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the passenger air bag. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 2355 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 2356 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 2357 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 2363 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 2364 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 2365 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2366 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Description and Operation KEY AND LOCK CYLINDER CODING USE INSTRUCTION SHEET SUPPLIED For the key cutting and lock cylinder coding procedure, refer to the instruction sheet supplied in the key and lock cylinder kit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Use Instruction Sheet Supplied For the key cutting and lock cylinder coding procedure, refer to the instruction sheet supplied in the key and lock cylinder kit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 2369 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Important: Vehicle must be in PARK prior to ignition cylinder removal. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disable the SIR system. 3. Remove the steering column trim covers. 4. Insert key into the ignition and rotate to the RUN position. Then rotate ignition cylinder back to ACC position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 2370 5. Depress the locking button through hole on side of ignition module assembly with a thin pick-type tool. Slide the lock cylinder from the ignition housing. Installation Procedure Important: Actuator blade within the ignition module must be in ACC position to install the lock cylinder assembly. If rotated, reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 2371 1. Important: If you are installing a new lock cylinder, refer to Key and Lock Cylinder Coding. Insert key into ignition lock cylinder and install the cylinder into the lock housing. 2. Rotate the lock cylinder in the housing. Verify proper rotation. 3. Install the steering column trim covers. 4. Enable the SIR system. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 2372 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the SIR system. 2. Remove the steering wheel. 3. Remove the steering column trim covers. 4. Remove the multifunction levers. 5. Disconnect the housing electrical connectors. 6. Disengage the retaining tabs and remove the park lock cable assembly from the housing. 7. Remove the lock housing bolts. 8. Turn the ignition key to the ACC position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 2373 9. Separate the lock housing (lock cylinder case) from the multifunction lever bracket. Slide the bracket from the column. 10. Remove the ignition switch screws. 11. Remove the ignition switch. Installation Procedure 1. Ensure the ignition switch is in the ACC position. 2. Notice: Position the ignition switch to housing and install the screws and tighten. ^ Tighten the screws to 2.5 Nm (22 inch lbs.). 3. Pre-assemble the lock housing and multifunction lever bracket. Hand tighten the bolts leaving approximately 3.2 mm (0.125 inch) gap. 4. Slide the bracket onto the column. Ensure lock tab fully engages into the column slot. 5. Hand tighten the lower bolt until snug. 6. Hand tighten the upper bolt until snug. 7. Tighten the lower bolt, then the upper bolt. ^ Tighten the bolts to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 2374 8. Snap the ignition lock cable onto the ignition module. 9. Connect the ignition housing electrical connectors. 10. Important: Ensure both locking tabs are seated. Install the multifunction levers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 2375 11. Install the steering column trim covers. 12. Install the SIR coil. 13. Install the steering wheel. 14. Enable the SIR system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 2382 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 2383 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Minimizing Damage to TPM Sensors INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-007 Date: May 16, 2008 Subject: Minimizing Damage to Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Sensors During Tire Mounting/Dismounting Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors Minimizing Damage To TPM Sensors All GM vehicles now in production and sold in the U.S., as well as many vehicles sold in Canada, feature Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems that have valve stem mounted Tire Pressure Sensors. When dismounting and mounting tires, care must be taken when breaking the bead loose from the wheel. If the tire machines bead breaking fixture is positioned too close to the tire pressure sensor, as the tire bead breaks away from the wheel it may be forced into, or catch on the edge of the tire pressure sensor. This can damage the sensor and require the sensor to be replaced. Care must also be taken when transferring the tire bead to the other side of the wheel rim. As the tire machine rotates and the tire bead is stretched around the wheel rim, the bead can come in contact with the sensor if it is not correctly positioned in relation to the mounting/dismounting head prior to tire mounting/dismounting. This can also cause sensor damage requiring replacement. Procedure Notice: Use a tire changing machine in order to dismount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or the wheel rim could result. Notice: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. 1. Remove the valve core from the valve stem. 2. Deflate the tire completely. Important: Rim-clamp European-type tire changers are recommended. 3. Use the tire changer in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Follow steps 4-7 to remove the tire from the wheel. 4. When separating the tire bead from the wheel position the bead breaking fixture 90, 180 and 270 degrees from the valve stem. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 2384 5. Position the wheel and tire so the valve stem is situated at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the outer tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 6. Position the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated again at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the inner tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 7. Remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting on vehicles equipped with TPM replace the tire pressure sensor. 8. Use a wire brush or coarse steel wool in order to remove any rubber, light rust or corrosion from the wheel bead seats. Important: If bead seat corrosion has been identified as an air loss concern on the wheel being worked on, refer to GM Service Bulletin # 08-03-10-006 for additional information on correcting the leak. 9. Apply GM P/N 12345884 (in Canada, P/N 5728223) or equivalent to the tire bead and the wheel rim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 2385 10. Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the inside of the wheel rim. 11. Position the rim so that the valve stem (1) is situated at the 3 o'clock position relative to the head (2). This will protect the sensor when the bottom bead seats. 12. After the bottom bead is on the wheel, reposition the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated at the 9 o'clock position relative to the head. This will protect the sensor while mounting the tire bead to the outside of the wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 2386 13. Use the tire changer in order to install the tire to the wheel. Caution: To avoid serious personal injury, do not stand over tire when inflating. The bead may break when the bead snaps over the safety hump. Do not exceed 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure when inflating any tire if beads are not seated. If 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure will not seat the beads, deflate, lubricate the beads and reinflate. Overinflating may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. Important: Allowable bead seating pressure is 345 kPa (50 psi) on Extended Mobility Tires. 14. Inflate the tire until it passes the bead humps. Be sure that the valve core is not installed at this time. 15. Install the valve core to the valve core stem. 16. Inflate the tire to the proper air pressure. 17. Ensure that the locating rings are visible on both sides of the tire in order to verify that the tire bead is fully seated on the wheel. Parts Information The product shown above is available from GM SPO. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2392 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2393 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2394 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required - J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 2397 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 2398 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 2399 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 2400 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 2401 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side > Page 2407 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor, Wiring Harness Side Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor, Wiring Harness Side Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Disconnect the wiring harness (4) from the input speed sensor. 3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt. 4. Remove the input speed sensor. 5. Remove the input speed sensor O-ring. Discard the O-ring. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 2410 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new input speed sensor O-ring. 2. Install the new input speed sensor O-ring onto the input speed sensor. 3. Install the input speed sensor to the transaxle. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the input speed sensor bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (4) to the input speed sensor. 6. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 2411 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the wiring harness (2) from the output shaft speed sensor. 2. Remove the output speed sensor bolt (3). 3. Remove the output shaft speed sensor (2) and the O-ring (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 2412 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new output speed sensor O-ring (1). 2. Install the new output speed sensor O-ring (1) onto the output speed sensor (2). 3. Install the output speed sensor (2) into the transmission case assembly. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the output speed sensor bolt (3). ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (2) to the output shaft speed sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2416 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2417 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Bulletin No.: 06-04-21-001 Date: May 17, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Updated Transfer Case Connector Service Kit Now Available For Transfer Case Speed Sensor Wire Harness Connector that Comes Loose Or Connector Retainer Clip Breaks Models: 2007 and Prior GM Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with Four-Wheel Drive or All-Wheel Drive Technicians may find that when the transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector is removed, the connector lock flexes/bends and does not return to the original position. The transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector then has no locking device. On older vehicles, the plastic connector retainer becomes brittle and the clip may break as soon as it is flexed. In the past, the only service fix was to install a wire harness connector service pack, P/N 88987183. This repair procedure involved splicing a new service connector with an integral connector lock. This connector service kit is of the same design and was still prone to failure over time. A new connector service repair kit is now available, P/N 15306187, that is an updated design. This new kit should be used whenever the speed sensor wire harness connector requires replacement. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Power Window Switch: Diagrams Power Window Switch - Main Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2427 Window Switch - LR Window Switch - RR Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Power Window Switch Replacement POWER WINDOW SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the console shift lever bezel. 2. Remove the screws from the power window switch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 2430 3. Remove the switch assembly from the bezel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the switch assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the screws to the switch assembly. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 2431 3. Install the console shift lever bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 2432 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Power Window Switch Replacement - Rear Door POWER WINDOW SWITCH REPLACEMENT - REAR DOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool to pry the switch from the door handle assembly. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the switch.. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 2433 2. Position the switch on the door handle assembly. Push in the switch to seat. 3. Install the door trim panel assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper/Washer System Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2438 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper/Washer System Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2442 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-07-009C Date: December 09, 2010 Subject: Wheel Alignment Specifications, Requirements and Recommendations for GM Vehicles Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being extensively revised to provide technicians and warranty administrators with an all inclusive guide for wheel alignments. PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-07-009B (Section 03 - Suspension). Purpose The purpose of this bulletin is to provide retail, wholesale and fleet personnel with General Motors' warranty service requirements and recommendations for customer concerns related to wheel alignment. For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all of GM's Standard Wheel Alignment Service Procedures, Policy Guidelines and bulletins on wheel alignment warranty service. Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. The following five (5) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a successful wheel alignment service. 1. Verify the vehicle is in an Original Equipment condition for curb weight, tires, wheels, suspension and steering configurations. Vehicles modified in any of these areas are not covered for wheel alignment warranty. 2. Review the customer concern relative to "Normal Operation" definitions. 3. Verify that vehicle is within the "Mileage Policy" range. 4. Document wheel alignment warranty claims appropriately for labor operations E2000 and E2020. The following information must be documented or attached to the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 5. Use the proper wheel alignment equipment (preferred with print-out capability), process and the appropriate calibration maintenance schedules. Important If it is determined that a wheel alignment is necessary under warranty, use the proper labor code for the repair. E2000 for Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe set or E2020 for Wheel Alignment Check/Adjust includes Caster, Camber and Toe set (Wheel alignment labor time for other component repairs is to be charged to the component that causes a wheel alignment operation.). The following flowchart is to help summarize the information detailed in this bulletin and should be used whenever a wheel alignment is performed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 2448 Verify Original Equipment Condition of the Vehicle - Verify that Original Equipment Tires and Wheels or Official GM Accessory Tires and Wheels are on the vehicle. - Verify that aftermarket suspension "Lift" or "Lowering" Kits or other suspension alterations have NOT been done to the vehicle. - Check for accidental damage to the vehicle; for example, severe pothole or curb impacts, collision damage that may have affected the wheel alignment of the vehicle; e.g., engine cradles, suspension control arms, axles, wheels, wheel covers, tires may show evidence of damage/impact. - Check to be sure vehicle has seen "Normal Use" rather than abuse; e.g., very aggressive driving may show up by looking at the tires and condition of the vehicle. - Check for other additional equipment items that may significantly affect vehicle mass such as large tool boxes, campers, snow plow packages (without the snowplow RPO), etc., especially in trucks and cutaway/incomplete vehicles. Significant additional mass can affect trim height and wheel alignment of the vehicle and may necessitate a customer pay wheel alignment when placed semi-permanently in the vehicle (Upfitter instructions are to realign the vehicle after placement of these types of items. (This typically applies to trucks and incomplete vehicles that can be upfit with equipment such as the above.) Customer Concerns, "Normal Operation" Conditions and "Mileage Policy" Possible Concerns The following are typical conditions that may require wheel alignment warranty service: 1. Lead/Pull: defined as "at a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight heading." Important Please evaluate for the condition with hands-on the steering wheel. Follow the "Vehicle Leads/Pulls" diagnostic tree located in SI to determine the cause of a lead/pull concern. Lead/Pull concerns can be due to road crown or road slope, tires, wheel alignment or even in rare circumstances a steering gear issue. Lead/pull concerns due to road crown are considered "Normal Operation" and are NOT a warrantable condition -- the customer should be advised that this is "Normal Operation." Important Some customers may comment on a "Lead/Pull" when they hold the steering wheel in a level condition. If so, this is more likely a "steering wheel angle" concern because the customer is "steering" the vehicle to obtain a "level" steering wheel. 2. Steering wheel angle to the left or right (counter-clockwise or clockwise, respectively): Defined as the steering wheel angle (clocking) deviation from "level" while maintaining a straight heading on a typical straight road. 3. Irregular or Premature tire wear: Slight to very slight "feathering" or "edge" wear on the shoulders of tires is NOT considered unusual and should even out with a tire rotation; if the customer is concerned about a "feathering" condition of the tires, the customer could be advised to rotate the tires earlier than the next scheduled mileage/maintenance interval (but no later than the next interval). Be sure to understand the customer's driving habits as this will also heavily influence the tire wear performance; tire wear from aggressive or abusive driving habits is NOT a warrantable condition. Important Slight or mild feathering, cupping, edge or heel/toe wear of tire tread shoulders is "normal" and can show up very early in a tire/vehicle service mileage; in fact, some new tires can show evidence of feathering from the factory. These issues do NOT affect the overall performance and tread life of the tire. Dealer personnel should always check the customer's maintenance records to ensure that tire inflation pressure is being maintained to placard and that the tires are being rotated (modified-X pattern) at the proper mileage intervals. Wheel alignments are NOT to be performed for the types of "Normal" Tire Feathering shown in Figures 1-4 below. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 2449 Figure 1: Full Tread View - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder/Adjacent/Center Ribs Figure 2: Tire Shoulder View Example 1 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder Figure 3: Tire Shoulder View Example 2 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Figure 4: Detail Side View of Tire Shoulder Area - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Important When a wheel alignment is deemed necessary for tire wear, be sure to document on the repair order, in as much detail as possible, the severity and type of tire wear (e.g., severe center wear or severe inside or outside shoulder wear) and the position of the tire on the vehicle (RF, LF, LR, RR). Please note the customer's concern with the wear such as, noise, appearance, wear life, etc. A field product report with pictures of the tire wear condition is recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002J and #07-00-89-036C. 4. Other repairs that affect wheel alignment; e.g., certain component replacement such as suspension control arm replacement, engine cradle adjustment/replace, steering gear replacement, steering tie rod replace, suspension strut/shock, steering knuckle, etc. may require a wheel alignment. Important If other components or repairs are identified as affecting the wheel alignment, policy calls for the wheel alignment labor time to be charged to the replaced/repaired component's labor operation time rather than the wheel alignment labor operations. Important Vibration type customer concerns are generally NOT due to wheel alignment except in the rare cases; e.g., extreme diagonal wear across the tread. In general, wheel alignments are NOT to be performed as an investigation/correction for vibration concerns. "Normal Operation" Conditions Vehicle Lead/Pull Due to Road Crown or Slope: As part of "Normal Operation," vehicles will follow side-to-side or left to right road crown or slope. Be sure to verify from the customer the types of roads they are driving as they may not recognize the influence of road crown on vehicle lead/pull and steering wheel angle. If a vehicle requires significant steering effort to prevent it from "climbing" the road crown there may be an issue to be looked into further. Important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 2450 A wheel alignment will generally NOT correct vehicles that follow the road crown since this is within "Normal Operation." Mileage Policy The following mileage policy applies for E2020 and E2000 labor operations: Note Wheel Alignment is NOT covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for Express and Savana Cutaway vehicles as these vehicles require Upfitters to set the wheel alignment after completing the vehicles. - 0-800 km (0-500 mi): E2000/E2020 claims ONLY allowed with Call Center Authorization. Due to the tie down during shipping, the vehicle's suspension requires some time to reach normal operating position. For this reason, new vehicles are generally NOT to be aligned until they have accumulated at least 800 km (500 mi). A field product report should accompany any claim within this mileage range. - 801-12,000 km (501-7,500 mi): - If a vehicle came from the factory with incorrect alignment settings, any resulting off-angle steering wheel, lead/pull characteristics or the rare occurrence of excessive tire wear would be apparent early in the life of the vehicle. The following policy applies: - Vehicles 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe - Escalade/ESV/EXT, Tahoe/Suburban, Yukon/XL/Denali, Silverado/Sierra, Express/Savana, Corvette and Colorado/Canyon: E2000/E2020 Claims: Call Center Authorization Required - All Vehicles NOT 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe as noted above: E2000/E2020 Claims: Dealer Service Manager Authorization Required - 12,001 km and beyond (7,501 miles and beyond): During this period, customers are responsible for the wheel alignment expense or dealers may provide on a case-by case basis a one-time customer enthusiasm claim up to 16,000 km (10,000 mi). In the event that a defective component required the use of the subject labor operations, the identified defective component labor operation will include the appropriate labor time for a wheel alignment as an add condition to the component repair. Important Only one wheel alignment labor operation claim (E2000 or E2020) may be used per VIN. Warranty Documentation Requirements When a wheel alignment service has been deemed necessary, the following items will need to be clearly documented on/with the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 1. Document the customer concern in as much detail as possible on the repair order and in the warranty administration system. Preferred examples: - Steering wheel is off angle in the counterclockwise direction by approximately x degrees or clocking position. - Vehicle lead/pulls to the right at approximately x-y mph. Vehicle will climb the road crown. Severe, Moderate or Slight. - RF and LF tires are wearing on the outside shoulders with severe feathering. Important In the event of a lead/pull or steering wheel angle concern, please note the direction of lead/pull (left or right) or direction of steering wheel angle (clockwise or counterclockwise) on the repair order and within the warranty claim verbatim. Important In the event of a tire wear concern, please note the position on the vehicle and where the wear is occurring on the tire; i.e., the RF tire is wearing on the inside shoulder. 2. Document the technician's findings on cause and correction of the issue. Examples: - Reset LF toe from 0.45 degrees to 0.10 degrees and RF toe from -0.25 degrees to 0.10 degrees to correct the steering wheel angle from 5 degrees counterclockwise to 0 degrees. - Reset LF camber from 0.25 degrees to -0.05 degrees to correct the cross-camber condition of +0.30 degrees to 0.00 degrees on the vehicle. - Front Sum toe was found to be 0.50 degrees, reset to 0.20 degrees. 3. Print-out the "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings and attach them to the Repair Order or if print-out capability is not Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 2451 available, measurements may also be clearly and legibly handwritten into the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire attached to this bulletin. 4. Attach the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire below along with the print-out of "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements to the Repair Order and retain for use by GM. Wheel Alignment Equipment and Process Wheel alignments must be performed with a quality machine that will give accurate results when performing checks. "External Reference" (image-based camera technology) is preferred. Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-00-89-029B: General Motors Dealership Critical Equipment Requirements and Recommendations. Requirements: - Computerized four wheel alignment system. - Computer capable of printing before and after alignment reports. - Computer capable of time and date stamp printout. - Racking system must have jacking capability - Racking system must be capable of level to 1.6 mm (1/16 in) - Appropriate wheel stops and safety certification - Built-in turn plates and slip plates - Wheel clamps capable of attaching to 20" or larger wheels - Racking capable of accepting any GM passenger car or light duty truck - Operator properly trained and ASE-certified (U.S. only) in wheel alignment Recommendations: Racking should have front and rear jacking capability. Equipment Maintenance and Calibration: Alignment machines must be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. Most manufacturers recommend the following: - Alignment machines with "internal reference" sensors should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) every six months. - Alignment machines with "external reference" (image-based camera technology) should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) once a year. - Racks must be kept level to within 1.6 mm (1/16 in). - If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged in some way, check the calibration immediately. Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. Wheel Alignment Process When performing wheel alignment measurement and/or adjustment, the following steps should be taken: Preliminary Steps: 1. Verify that the vehicle has a full tank of fuel (compensate as necessary). 2. Inspect the wheels and the tires for damage. 3. Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. 4. Inspect the wheel bearings for excessive play. 5. Inspect all suspension and steering parts for looseness, wear, or damage. 6. Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. 7. Inspect the vehicle trim height. 8. Compensate for frame angle on targeted vehicles (refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI). Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment angles. However, if the wheel alignment angles are not within the range of specifications, adjust the wheel alignment to the specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. Follow the wheel alignment equipment manufacturer's instructions. Measure/Adjust: Important Prior to making any adjustments to wheel alignment on a vehicle, technicians must verify that the wheel alignment specifications loaded into their wheel alignment machine are up-to-date by comparing these to the wheel alignment specifications for the appropriate model and model year in SI. Using incorrect and/or outdated specifications may result in unnecessary adjustments, irregular and/or premature tire wear and repeat customer concerns Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 2452 Important When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front wheel alignment angles. Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. If necessary, adjust the wheel alignment to vehicle specification and record the before and after measurements. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Important Technicians must refer to SI for the correct wheel alignment specifications. SI is the only source of GM wheel alignment specifications that is kept up-to-date throughout the year. Test drive vehicle to ensure proper repair. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 2453 Frame Angle Measurement (Express / Savana Only) ........ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 2454 What corrected the customer concern and was the repair verified? Please Explain: ............. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener Tightening Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener Tightening Specifications > Page 2457 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener Tightening Specifications > Page 2458 Alignment: Specifications Wheel Alignment Specifications WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS FRONT SUSPENSION Camber ................................................................................................................................................ .......................................................... -0.6° ± 0.75° Camber Cross Tolerance .................................... ............................................................................................................................................. 0.0° ± 0.50° Caster ........................................................................................................................................ .................................................................... 3.00° ± 0.75° Caster Cross Tolerance ............................ ....................................................................................................................................................... 0.0° ± 0.50° Total Toe ......................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... +0.15° ± 0.20° Steering Wheel Angle ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . 0.00° ± 3.5° Thrust Angle .................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................. --REAR SUSPENSION Camber ................................................................................................................................................ .......................................................... -0.5° ± 0.75° Camber Cross Tolerance .................................... ............................................................................................................................................. 0.0° ± 0.75° Caster ........................................................................................................................................ ..................................................................................... --- Caster Cross Tolerance ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... --- Total Toe ............................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... +0.2° ± 0.20° Steering Wheel Angle ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .......... --- Thrust Angle ......................................................................................................................... .......................................................................... 0.0° ± 0.20° Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 2459 Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Description Caster Description Caster is the tilting of the uppermost point of the steering axis either forward or backward, when viewed from the side of the vehicle. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Caster influences directional control of the steering but does not affect the tire wear . Caster is affected by the vehicle height, therefore it is important to keep the body at its designed height. Overloading the vehicle or a weak or sagging rear spring will affect caster. When the rear of the vehicle is lower than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a more positive caster. If the rear of the vehicle is higher than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a less positive caster. With too little positive caster, steering may be touchy at high speed and wheel returnability may be diminished when coming out of a turn. If one wheel has more positive caster than the other, that wheel will pull toward the center of the vehicle. This condition will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the least amount of positive caster. Camber Description Camber Description Camber is the tilting of the wheels from the vertical when viewed from the front of the vehicle. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts inward at the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt is measured in degrees from the vertical. Camber settings influence the directional control and the tire wear. Too much positive camber will result in premature wear on the outside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Too much negative camber will result in premature wear on the inside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Unequal side-to-side camber of 1 degree or more will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the most positive camber. Toe Description Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 2460 Toe Description Toe is a measurement of how much the front and/or rear wheels are turned in or out from a straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in, toe is positive (+). When the wheels are turned out, toe is negative (-). The actual amount of toe is normally only a fraction of a degree. The purpose of toe is to ensure that the wheels roll parallel. Toe also offsets the small deflections of the wheel support system that occur when the vehicle is rolling forward. In other words, with the vehicle standing still and the wheels set with toe-in, the wheels tend to roll parallel on the road when the vehicle is moving. Improper toe adjustment will cause premature tire wear and cause steering instability. Setback Description Setback applies to both the front and the rear wheels. Setback is the amount that one wheel may be aligned behind the other wheel. Setback may be the result of a road hazard or a collision. The first clue is a caster difference from side-to-side of more than 1 degree. Thrust Angles Description Thrust Angles Description The front wheels aim or steer the vehicle. The rear wheels control tracking. This tracking action relates to the thrust angle (3). The thrust angle is the path that the rear wheels take. Ideally, the thrust angle is geometrically aligned with the body centerline (2). In the illustration, toe-in is shown on the left rear wheel, moving the thrust line (1) off center. The resulting deviation from the centerline is the thrust angle. Lead/Pull Description Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 2461 At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Lead/pull is usually caused by the following factors: ^ Tire construction ^ Wheel alignment ^ Unbalanced steering gear The way in which a tire is built may produce lead/pull. The rear tires will not cause lead. Torque Steer Description A vehicle pulls or leads in one direction during hard acceleration. A vehicle pulls or leads in the other direction during deceleration. The following factors may cause torque steer to be more apparent on a particular vehicle: ^ A slightly smaller diameter tire on the right front increases a right torque lead. Inspect the front tires for differences in the brand, the construction, or the size. If the tires appear to be similar, change the front tires from side-to-side and retest the vehicle. Tire and wheel assemblies have the most significant effect on torque steer correction. ^ A large difference in the right and left front tire pressure ^ Left-to-right differences in the front view axle angle may cause significant steering pull in a vehicle. The pull will be to the side with the most downward sloping axle from the differential to the wheels. Axles typically slope downward from the differential. The slope of the transaxle pan to level ground may be used as an indication of bias axle angles. The side with the higher transaxle pan (shown on the left side of the illustration) has the most downward sloping axle angle. Memory Steer Description Memory steer is when the vehicle wants to lead or pull in the direction the driver previously turned the vehicle. Additionally, after turning in the opposite direction, the vehicle will want to lead or pull in that direction. Wander Description Wander is the undesired drifting or deviation of a vehicle to either side from a straight path with hand pressure on the steering wheel. Wander is a symptom of the vehicle's sensitivity to external disturbances, such as road crown and crosswind, and accentuated by poor on-center steering feel. Scrub Radius Description Ideally, the scrub radius is as small as possible. Normally, the SAI angle and the centerline of the tire and the wheel intersect below the road surface, causing a positive scrub radius. With struts, the SAI angle is much larger than the long arm/short arm type of suspension. This allows the SAI angle to intersect the camber angle above the road surface, forming a negative scrub radius. The smaller the scrub radius, the better the directional stability. Installing aftermarket wheels that have additional offset will dramatically increase the scrub radius. The newly installed wheels may cause the centerline of the tires to move further away from the spindle. This will increase the scrub radius. A large amount of scrub radius can cause severe shimmy after hitting a bump. Four-wheel drive vehicles with large tires use a steering damper to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 2462 compensate for an increased scrub radius. Scrub radius is not directly measurable by the conventional methods. Scrub radius is projected geometrically by engineers during the design phase of the suspension. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment Alignment: Service and Repair Front Camber Adjustment Front Camber Adjustment 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. 3. Remove the strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. Discard the nuts and bolts. 4. If the strut has not been previously modified, perform the following procedure: 1. Disconnect the strut from the knuckle. 2. Important: ^ Maximum outboard adjustment-(increased negative camber) 2.0 mm of outboard elongation or to within 11.0 mm from outboard edge of lower strut clevis bracket, whichever comes first ^ Maximum inboard adjustment-(increased positive camber) 4.0 mm of inboard elongation ^ If filing the strut, paint the exposed metal with primer. If increasing negative camber, remove material from the outside of the lower strut hole. 3. If decreasing negative camber, remove material from the inside of the lower strut hole. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment > Page 2465 5. Loosely install new strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. 6. Adjust the camber to specifications by moving the top of the wheel in or out as necessary. 7. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. ^ Tighten the nuts and bolts to 180 Nm (133 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment > Page 2466 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Caster Adjustment Front Caster Adjustment The front caster is not adjustable. If the front caster angle is not within specifications, inspect for suspension support misalignment or front suspension damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment > Page 2467 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Toe Adjustment Front Toe Adjustment 1. Position and lock the steering wheel with the vehicle with the wheels in the straight forward position. 2. Loosen both inner tie rod jam nuts. 3. Important: The inner tie rod must rotate freely from the boot seal surface. Do not allow the boot to rotate. Loosen the inner tie rod seal to boot surface. 4. Use a wrench on the tie rod flats to increase or decrease the toe angle specifications. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the inner tie rod jam nuts. ^ Tighten the jam nuts to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). 6. Inspect the toe angle to ensure proper adjustment and adjust as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment > Page 2468 Alignment: Service and Repair Measuring Wheel Alignment Measuring Wheel Alignment Steering and vibration complaints are not always the result of improper alignment. One possible cause is wheel and tire imbalance. Another possibility is tire lead due to worn or improperly manufactured tires. Lead/pull is defined as follows: At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Lead is the vehicle deviation from a straight path on a level road without pressure on the steering wheel. Before performing any adjustment affecting wheel alignment, perform the following inspections and adjustments in order to ensure correct alignment readings: ^ Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. ^ Inspect the runout of the wheels and the tires. ^ Inspect the wheel bearings for backlash and excessive play. ^ Inspect the ball joints and tie rod ends for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the control arms and stabilizer shaft for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the steering gear for looseness at the frame. ^ Inspect the struts/shock absorbers for wear, leaks, and any noticeable noises. ^ Inspect the vehicle trim height. ^ Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. ^ Inspect the fuel level. The fuel tank should be full or the vehicle should have a compensating load added. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. If normally carried in the vehicle, these items should remain in the vehicle during alignment adjustments. Give consideration also to the condition of the equipment being used for the alignment. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment settings. However, if the setting exceeds the service allowable specifications, correct the alignment to the service preferred specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications . Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. 4. Important: When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front alignment angles. Adjust alignment angles to vehicle specification. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment > Page 2469 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Camber Adjustment Front Camber Adjustment 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. 3. Remove the strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. Discard the nuts and bolts. 4. If the strut has not been previously modified, perform the following procedure: 1. Disconnect the strut from the knuckle. 2. Important: ^ Maximum outboard adjustment-(increased negative camber) 2.0 mm of outboard elongation or to within 11.0 mm from outboard edge of lower strut clevis bracket, whichever comes first ^ Maximum inboard adjustment-(increased positive camber) 4.0 mm of inboard elongation ^ If filing the strut, paint the exposed metal with primer. If increasing negative camber, remove material from the outside of the lower strut hole. 3. If decreasing negative camber, remove material from the inside of the lower strut hole. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment > Page 2470 5. Loosely install new strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. 6. Adjust the camber to specifications by moving the top of the wheel in or out as necessary. 7. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. ^ Tighten the nuts and bolts to 180 Nm (133 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Front Caster Adjustment Front Caster Adjustment The front caster is not adjustable. If the front caster angle is not within specifications, inspect for suspension support misalignment or front suspension damage. Front Toe Adjustment Front Toe Adjustment 1. Position and lock the steering wheel with the vehicle with the wheels in the straight forward position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment > Page 2471 2. Loosen both inner tie rod jam nuts. 3. Important: The inner tie rod must rotate freely from the boot seal surface. Do not allow the boot to rotate. Loosen the inner tie rod seal to boot surface. 4. Use a wrench on the tie rod flats to increase or decrease the toe angle specifications. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the inner tie rod jam nuts. ^ Tighten the jam nuts to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). 6. Inspect the toe angle to ensure proper adjustment and adjust as necessary. Measuring Wheel Alignment Measuring Wheel Alignment Steering and vibration complaints are not always the result of improper alignment. One possible cause is wheel and tire imbalance. Another possibility is tire lead due to worn or improperly manufactured tires. Lead/pull is defined as follows: At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Lead is the vehicle deviation from a straight path on a level road without pressure on the steering wheel. Before performing any adjustment affecting wheel alignment, perform the following inspections and adjustments in order to ensure correct alignment readings: ^ Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. ^ Inspect the runout of the wheels and the tires. ^ Inspect the wheel bearings for backlash and excessive play. ^ Inspect the ball joints and tie rod ends for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the control arms and stabilizer shaft for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the steering gear for looseness at the frame. ^ Inspect the struts/shock absorbers for wear, leaks, and any noticeable noises. ^ Inspect the vehicle trim height. ^ Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. ^ Inspect the fuel level. The fuel tank should be full or the vehicle should have a compensating load added. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. If normally carried in the vehicle, these items should remain in the vehicle during alignment adjustments. Give consideration also to the condition of the equipment being used for the alignment. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment settings. However, if the setting exceeds the service allowable specifications, correct the alignment to the service preferred specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications . Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. 4. Important: When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front alignment angles. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment > Page 2472 Adjust alignment angles to vehicle specification. Rear Camber Adjustment Rear Camber Adjustment 1. Loosen the upper control arm-to-frame fastener enough to allow movement. 2. Important: The frame of the vehicle is slotted, turning the cam nut will move the camber in to the designated location. Rotate the upper control arm-to-frame fastener in the direction necessary to the correct the camber measurement. 3. Snug the upper control arm-to-frame fastener, do not tighten at this time. 4. Reinspect the rear camber specifications and adjust as necessary. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Hold the nut and tighten the upper control arm-to-frame bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 6. Repeat the procedure for the other rear wheel. Rear Toe Adjustment Rear Toe Adjustment 1. Loosen the toe link-to-frame fastener enough to allow for movement. 2. Important: The frame of the vehicle is slotted, a cam nut is available for service if required. Rotate the toe link cam nut in the direction necessary to correct the toe angle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment > Page 2473 3. Snug the toe link-to-frame fastener, do not tighten at this time. 4. Reinspect the rear toe specifications and adjust as necessary. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Hold the nut and tighten the link-to-frame fastener bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 6. Repeat the procedure for the other rear wheel. Trim Height Inspection Trim Height Inspection Procedure Trim Height Measurement Trim height is a predetermined measurement relating to vehicle ride height. Incorrect trim heights can cause the vehicle to bottom out over bumps, damage to the suspension components and symptoms similar to wheel alignment problems. Check the trim heights when diagnosing suspension concerns and before checking the wheel alignment. Perform the following before measuring the trim heights: ^ Set the tire pressure to the specifications shown on the certification label. ^ Check the fuel level. Add additional weight if necessary to simulate a full tank. ^ Make sure the passenger and rear compartments are empty, except for the spare tire. ^ Make sure the vehicle is on a flat and level surface, such as an alignment rack. ^ Check that all the vehicle doors are securely closed. ^ Check that the vehicle hood and rear deck lids are securely closed. ^ Check for installed after market accessories or modifications that could affect trim height measurement. Important: All dimensions are measured vertical to the ground. Trim height should be within ±22.0 mm (±0.87 inch) to be considered correct. Measuring the Bumper Heights Use the following procedure to check the front bumper height: 1. Jounce the front and rear of the vehicle a few times and allow the suspension to settle. 2. The front bumper height measurement is taken outward 390 mm (15.35 inch) from the center of the fascia to ground level. Measurements are made from the inner bumper core to ground level. Measure both sides and average the measurements. 3. Compare the measurement to the front bumper curb height specification. Refer to Trim Height Specifications. 4. If the measurement is outside of the specified range, replace the front springs. 5. Using your hands, lift the rear bumper approximately 38 mm (1.59 inch). 6. Gently remove your hands and allow the vehicle to lower. 7. Using your hands, jounce the rear of the vehicle downward approximately 38 mm (1.59 inch). 8. Gently remove your hands and allow the vehicle to rise. 9. The rear bumper height measurement is taken outward 530 mm (20.86 inch) from the center of the fascia to ground level. Measurements are made from the inner bumper core to ground level. Measure both sides and average the measurements. 10. Compare the measurement to the rear bumper curb height specification. Refer to Trim Height Specifications. 11. If the measurement is outside of the specified range, replace the rear springs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF) ............................................................................................................................................. 384-425 kPa (50-60 psi) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2480 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel system is a returnless on-demand design. The fuel pressure regulator is a part of the primary fuel tank module, eliminating the need for a return pipe from the engine. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel tank module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies high pressure fuel through the fuel filter, past the fuel pressure regulator, and through the fuel feed pipe to the fuel injection system. The fuel pressure regulator has a T-joint that diverts the needed fuel to the fuel rail with the unused fuel dropping back into the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The primary fuel tank module contains a reverse flow check valve. The check valve and the fuel pressure regulator maintain fuel pressure in the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail in order to prevent long cranking times. The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank. TEST Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2481 Step 1 - Step 6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2482 Step 7 - Step 13 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 07-06-04-026A > Apr > 08 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Customer Interest Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-026A Date: April 08, 2008 Subject: Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On, DTC P0171 Set (Inspect/Secure Fresh Air Inlet Pipe and Reprogram PCM) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include new repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-026 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the Service Engine Soon (SES) light is illuminated. Upon investigation the technician may find that Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0171 has been set. Cause The fresh air inlet pipe may have become disconnected from the grommet in the rear rocker cover. Correction Inspect the fresh air inlet pipe connection to the rear rocker cover. If the inlet pipe has become disconnected from the rear rocker cover reconnect the pipe into the grommet and also into the metal retaining bracket. Use a plastic tie strap to secure the pipe to the retaining bracket as shown above. In addition an updated Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calibration is now available to address this condition. Reprogram the PCM with the updated calibration using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS). As always make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 07-06-04-026A > Apr > 08 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-026A Date: April 08, 2008 Subject: Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On, DTC P0171 Set (Inspect/Secure Fresh Air Inlet Pipe and Reprogram PCM) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include new repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-026 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the Service Engine Soon (SES) light is illuminated. Upon investigation the technician may find that Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0171 has been set. Cause The fresh air inlet pipe may have become disconnected from the grommet in the rear rocker cover. Correction Inspect the fresh air inlet pipe connection to the rear rocker cover. If the inlet pipe has become disconnected from the rear rocker cover reconnect the pipe into the grommet and also into the metal retaining bracket. Use a plastic tie strap to secure the pipe to the retaining bracket as shown above. In addition an updated Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calibration is now available to address this condition. Reprogram the PCM with the updated calibration using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS). As always make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2497 Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE DUCT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Loosen the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) fresh air pipe from the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Remove the air cleaner intake duct from the mass air flow (MAF) sensor and throttle body. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner intake duct to the MAF sensor and throttle body. 2. Install the PCV fresh air pipe to the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Tighten the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. Tighten the clamps to 4 N.m (35 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 2506 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 2512 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2513 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Release the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by tilting to release the lid from the lower housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2514 5. Remove the air cleaner element (2) from the lower housing (1). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner element (2) into the lower housing (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2515 2. Install the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by first engaging the hinge then lower the cover into the closed position. 3. Fasten the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. 4. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Connect the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection. 3. Install the bleed hose into an approved container and open the valve to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 4. Disconnect the fuel pressure gage from the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure > Page 2521 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Spark Plug Wire Resistance...................................................................................................................................... 4,018 ohm per meter (1,225 ohm per ft) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2525 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG WIRE INSPECTION Spark plug wire integrity is vital for proper engine operation. A thorough inspection will be necessary to accurately identify conditions that may affect engine operation. Refer to the list below for items to be inspected. 1. Inspect for correct routing of the spark plug wires. Improper routing may cause cross-firing. 2. Inspect each wire for any signs of cracks or splits in the wire. 3. Inspect each boot for the following conditions: - Tearing - Piercing - Arcing - Carbon tracking - Corroded terminal If corrosion, carbon tracking, or arcing are indicated on a spark plug wire boot or terminal, both the wire and the component connected to the wire should be replaced. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2526 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG WIRE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Remove the spark plug wires (1) from the left side spark plugs. NOTE: Twist the spark plug boot one-half turn in order to release the boot. Pull on the spark plug boot only. Do not pull on the spark plug wire or the wire could be damaged. 3. Remove the spark plug wires from the retaining clips (2). 4. Remove the spark plug wires (1) from the right side spark plugs. 5. Remove the spark plug wires from the retaining clips (2). 6. Remove the spark plug wires from the ignition coil/control module. 7. Remove the spark plug wires from the engine. 8. If you are replacing the spark plug wires, transfer any of the following components: - Boot heat shields - Spark plug wire conduit - Spark plug wire retaining clips Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2527 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the ignition coil/control module. 2. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the right side spark plugs. 3. Install the spark plug wires to the retaining clips (2). 4. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the left side spark plugs. 5. Install the spark plug wires to the retaining clips (2). 6. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap Spark Plug Gap ................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 1.52 mm (0.060 in.) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap > Page 2532 Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... .................................................. 15 Nm (11.0 lb. ft..) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2533 Spark Plug: Application and ID SPARK PLUG TYPE GM P/N ................................................................................................................................................ .............................................................. 12568387 AC Delco P/N ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................... 41-101 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2534 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG INSPECTION SPARK PLUG USAGE - Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications for the correct spark plug. - Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: Spark plug fouling-Colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug SPARK PLUG INSPECTION - Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. - Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. - Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2535 - Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. An excessively wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. A rattling sound indicates internal damage. - A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. SPARK PLUG VISUAL INSPECTION - Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. - Carbon fouled-Dry, fluffy, black carbon or soot caused by the following conditions: Rich fuel mixtures Leaking fuel injectors - Excessive fuel pressure - Restricted air filter element - Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output Weak coils - Worn ignition wires - Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. - Deposit fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2536 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Observe the following service precautions: Allow the engine to cool before removing the spark plugs. Attempting to remove spark plugs from a hot engine can cause the spark plugs to seize. This can damage the cylinder head threads. - Clean the spark plug recess area before removing the spark plug. Failure to do so can result in engine damage due to dirt or foreign material entering the cylinder head, or in contamination of the cylinder head threads. Contaminated threads may prevent proper seating of the new spark plug. - Use only the spark plugs specified for use in the vehicle. Do not install spark plugs that are either hotter or colder than those specified for the vehicle. Installing spark plugs of another type can severely damage the engine. 1. Remove the spark plug wires from the spark plugs. 2. Remove the spark plugs (1) from the cylinder head. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Gap the spark plugs to the specifications. Refer to Ignition System Specifications. NOTE: It is important to check the gap of all new and reconditioned spark plugs before installation. Pre-set gaps may have changed during handling. Use a round wire feeler gauge to be sure of an accurate check, particularly on used plugs. Installing plugs with the wrong gap can cause poor engine performance and may even damage the engine. 2. Install the spark plugs to the cylinder head. Tighten the spark plugs to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). NOTE: Be sure plug threads smoothly into cylinder head and is fully seated. Use a thread chaser if necessary to clean threads in cylinder head. Cross-threading or failing to fully seat spark plug can cause overheating of plug, exhaust blow-by, or thread damage. Follow the recommended torque specifications carefully. Over or under-tightening can also cause severe damage to engine or spark plug. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2537 - Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: ONLY when the cylinder head is replaced with a NEW cylinder head, the FIRST time the spark plugs are installed, tighten the spark plugs to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). All subsequent tightening of the spark plugs, tighten to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 3. Install the spark plug wires to the spark plugs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. No cylinder reading should be less than 689 kPa (100 psi). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2541 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test A compression pressure test of the engine cylinders determines the condition of the rings, the valves, and the head gasket. 1. Important: Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and the ignition fuses from the I/P fuse block. Disable the ignition. 2. Disable the fuel systems. 3. Remove the spark plugs from all the cylinders. 4. Remove the air duct from the throttle body. 5. Block the throttle plate in the open position. 6. Measure the engine compression, using the following procedure: 1. Firmly install the compression gauge to the spark plug hole. 2. Have an assistant crank the engine through at least 4 compression strokes in the testing =cylinder. 3. Record the readings on the gauge at each stroke. 4. Disconnect the gauge. 5. Repeat the compression test for each cylinder. 7. Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. ^ The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. ^ No cylinder reading should be less than 689 kPa (100 psi). 8. The following list contains examples of the possible measurements: ^ When the compression measurement is normal, the compression builds up quickly and evenly to the specified compression on each cylinder. ^ When the compression is low on the first stroke and tends to build up on the following strokes, but does not reach the normal compression, the piston rings may be the cause. ^ If the compression improves considerably with the addition of three squirts of oil, the piston rings may be the cause. ^ When the compression is low on the first stroke and does not build up in the following strokes, the valves may be the cause. ^ The addition of oil does not affect the compression, the valves may be the cause. ^ When the compression is low on two adjacent cylinders, or coolant is present in the crankcase, the head gasket may be the cause. 9. Remove the block from the throttle plate. 10. Install the air duct to the throttle body. 11. Install the spark plugs. 12. Install the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) fuse. 13. Install the ignition fuse to the I/P fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-008A Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt / Serpentine Belt Noise and Availability and Use of Kent-Moore EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year and update the Tool Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008 (Section 06 - Engine). Background Several aftermarket companies offer laser alignment tools for accessory drive systems that can be very helpful in eliminating drive belt noise as a result of misaligned pulleys. Typically pricing ranges from $160 - $200. EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt The GM Tool program has now made available a competitive, simple to use and time-saving laser tool to assist in achieving precise alignment of the drive belt pulleys. This optional tool removes the guesswork from proper pulley alignment and may serve to reduce comebacks from: - Drive Belt Noise - Accelerated Drive Belt Wear - Drive Belt Slippage Instructions The instructions below are specific only to the truck Gen IV V-8 family of engines. These instructions are only for illustrative purposes to show how the tool may be used. Universal instructions are included in the box with the Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt. Caution - Do not look directly into the beam projected from the laser. - Use caution when shining the laser on highly polished or reflective surfaces. Laser safety glasses help reduce laser beam glare in many circumstances. - Always use laser safety glasses when using the laser. Laser safety glasses are not designed to protect eyes from direct laser exposure. 1. Observe and mark the serpentine belt orientation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 2549 2. Remove the serpentine belt from the accessory drive system. 3. Install the tool onto the power steering pulley. Position the legs of the tool into the outer grooves of the pulley, farthest from the front of the engine. 4. Install the retaining cord around the pulley and to the legs of the tool. 5. Put on the laser safety glasses provided with the tool. 6. Depress the switch on the rear of the tool to activate the light beam. 7. Rotate the power steering pulley as required to project the light beam onto the crankshaft balancer pulley grooves. 8. Inspect for proper power steering pulley alignment. - If the laser beam projects onto the second rib or raised area (1), the pulleys are aligned properly. - If the laser beam projects more than one-quarter rib 0.9 mm (0.035 in) mis-alignment, adjust the position of the power steering pulley as required. - Refer to SI for Power Steering Pulley Removal and Installation procedures. 9. Install the serpentine belt to the accessory drive system in the original orientation. 10. Operate the vehicle and verify that the belt noise concern is no longer present. Tool Information Please visit the GM service tool website for pricing information or to place your order for this tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 2550 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2551 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2552 Drive Belt: Description and Operation Drive Belt System Description The drive belt system consists of the following components: ^ The drive belt ^ The drive belt tensioner ^ The drive belt idler pulley ^ The crankshaft balancer pulley ^ The accessory drive component mounting brackets ^ The accessory drive components ^ The power steering pump, if belt driven ^ The generator ^ The A/C compressor, if equipped ^ The engine cooling fan, if belt driven ^ The water pump, if belt driven ^ The vacuum pump, if equipped ^ The air compressor, if equipped The drive belt system may use one belt or two belts. The drive belt is thin so that it can bend backwards and has several ribs to match the grooves in the pulleys. There also may be a V-belt style belt used to drive certain accessory drive components. The drive belts are made of different types of rubbers (chloroprene or EPDM) and have different layers or plys containing either fiber cloth or cords for reinforcement. Both sides of the drive belt may be used to drive the different accessory drive components. When the back side of the drive belt is used to drive a pulley, the pulley is smooth. The drive belt is pulled by the crankshaft balancer pulley across the accessory drive component pulleys. The spring loaded drive belt tensioner keeps constant tension on the drive belt to prevent the drive belt from slipping. The drive belt tensioner arm will move when loads are applied to the drive belt by the accessory drive components and the crankshaft. The drive belt system may have an idler pulley, which is used to add wrap to the adjacent pulleys. Some systems use an idler pulley in place of an accessory drive component when the vehicle is not equipped with the accessory. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids The symptom may be intermittent due to moisture on the drive belt(s) or the pulleys. It may be necessary to spray a small amount of water on the drive belt(s) in order to duplicate the customers concern. If spraying water on the drive belt(s) duplicates the symptom, cleaning the belt pulleys may be the probable solution. A loose or improper installation of a body component, a suspension component, or other items of the vehicle may cause the chirping noise. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 2555 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 2556 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table. 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belt and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the noise is related to the drive belt. When removing the drive belt(s) the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspect all drive belt pulleys for pilling. Pilling is the small balls or pills or it may be strings in the drive belt grooves from the accumulation of rubber dust. 6. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 10. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 12. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 14. Replacing the drive belt when it is not damaged or there is not excessive pilling will only be a temporary repair. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 2557 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Excessive Wear Diagnosis Drive Belt Excessive Wear Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Excessive wear on a drive belt(s) is usually caused by an incorrect installation or the wrong drive belt for the application. Minor misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will not cause excessive wear, but will probably cause the drive belt(s) to make a noise or to fall off. Excessive misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will cause excessive wear but may also make the drive belt(s) fall off. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is correctly installed on all of the drive belt pulleys. Wear on the drive belt(s) may be caused by mis-positioning the drive belt(s) by one groove on a pulley. 3. The installation of a drive belt that is two wide or two narrow will cause wear on the drive belt. The drive belt ribs should match all of the grooves on all of the pulleys. 4. This inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is not contacting any parts of the engine or body while the engine is operating. There should be sufficient clearance when the drive belt accessory drive components load varies. The drive belt(s) should not come in contact with an engine or a body component when snapping the throttle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 2558 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Falls Off Diagnosis Drive Belt Falls Off Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids If the drive belt(s) repeatedly falls off the drive belt pulleys, this is because of pulley misalignment. An extra load that is quickly applied on released by an accessory drive component may cause the drive belt to fall off the pulleys. Verify the accessory drive components operate properly. If the drive belt(s) is the incorrect length, the drive belt tensioner may not keep the proper tension on the drive belt. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This inspection is to verify the condition of the drive belt. Damage may of occurred to the drive belt when the drive belt fell off. The drive belt may of been damaged, which caused the drive belt to fall off. Inspect the belt for cuts, tears, sections of ribs missing, or damaged belt plys. 4. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 2559 grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure of that pulley. 5. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 6. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent or cracked may will let the drive belt fall off. 7. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. Missing. loose, or the wrong fasteners may cause pulley misalignment from the bracket moving under load. Over tightening of the fasteners may cause misalignment of the accessory component bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 2560 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Rumbling Diagnosis Drive Belt Rumbling Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Vibration from the engine operating may cause a body component or another part of the vehicle to make rumbling noise. The drive belt(s) may have a condition that can not be seen or felt. Sometimes replacing the drive belt may be the only repair for the symptom. If replacing the drive belt(s), completing the diagnostic table, and the noise is only heard when the drive belt(s) is installed, there might be an accessory drive component with a failure. Varying the load on the different accessory drive components may aid in identifying which component is causing the rumbling noise. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom. 3. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) is causing the rumbling noise. Rumbling noise may be confused with an internal engine noise due to the similarity in the description. Remove only one drive belt at a time if the vehicle has multiple drive belts. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspecting the drive belt(s) is to ensure that it is not causing a the noise. Small cracks across the ribs of the drive belt will not cause the noise. Belt separation is identified by the plys of the belt separating and may be seen at the edge of the belt our felt as a lump in the belt. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 2561 5. Small amounts of pilling is normal condition and acceptable. When the pilling is severe the drive belt does not have a smooth surface for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 2562 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids The symptom may be intermittent due to moisture on the drive belt(s) or the pulleys. It may be necessary to spray a small amount of water on the drive belt(s) in order to duplicate the customers concern. If spraying water on the drive belt(s) duplicates the symptom, cleaning the belt pulleys may be the probable solution. A loose or improper installation of a body component, a suspension component, or other items of the vehicle may cause the chirping noise. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 2563 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 2564 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table. 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belt and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the noise is related to the drive belt. When removing the drive belt(s) the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspect all drive belt pulleys for pilling. Pilling is the small balls or pills or it may be strings in the drive belt grooves from the accumulation of rubber dust. 6. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 10. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 12. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 14. Replacing the drive belt when it is not damaged or there is not excessive pilling will only be a temporary repair. Drive Belt Excessive Wear Diagnosis Drive Belt Excessive Wear Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Excessive wear on a drive belt(s) is usually caused by an incorrect installation or the wrong drive belt for the application. Minor misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will not cause excessive wear, but will probably cause the drive belt(s) to make a noise or to fall off. Excessive misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will cause excessive wear but may also make the drive belt(s) fall off. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is correctly installed on all of the drive belt pulleys. Wear on the drive belt(s) may be caused by mis-positioning the drive belt(s) by one groove on a pulley. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 2565 3. The installation of a drive belt that is two wide or two narrow will cause wear on the drive belt. The drive belt ribs should match all of the grooves on all of the pulleys. 4. This inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is not contacting any parts of the engine or body while the engine is operating. There should be sufficient clearance when the drive belt accessory drive components load varies. The drive belt(s) should not come in contact with an engine or a body component when snapping the throttle. Drive Belt Falls Off Diagnosis Drive Belt Falls Off Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids If the drive belt(s) repeatedly falls off the drive belt pulleys, this is because of pulley misalignment. An extra load that is quickly applied on released by an accessory drive component may cause the drive belt to fall off the pulleys. Verify the accessory drive components operate properly. If the drive belt(s) is the incorrect length, the drive belt tensioner may not keep the proper tension on the drive belt. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 2566 2. This inspection is to verify the condition of the drive belt. Damage may of occurred to the drive belt when the drive belt fell off. The drive belt may of been damaged, which caused the drive belt to fall off. Inspect the belt for cuts, tears, sections of ribs missing, or damaged belt plys. 4. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure of that pulley. 5. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 6. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent or cracked may will let the drive belt fall off. 7. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. Missing. loose, or the wrong fasteners may cause pulley misalignment from the bracket moving under load. Over tightening of the fasteners may cause misalignment of the accessory component bracket. Drive Belt Rumbling Diagnosis Drive Belt Rumbling Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Vibration from the engine operating may cause a body component or another part of the vehicle to make rumbling noise. The drive belt(s) may have a condition that can not be seen or felt. Sometimes replacing the drive belt may be the only repair for the symptom. If replacing the drive belt(s), completing the diagnostic table, and the noise is only heard when the drive belt(s) is installed, there might be an accessory drive component with a failure. Varying the load on the different accessory drive components may aid in identifying which component is causing the rumbling noise. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 2567 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom. 3. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) is causing the rumbling noise. Rumbling noise may be confused with an internal engine noise due to the similarity in the description. Remove only one drive belt at a time if the vehicle has multiple drive belts. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspecting the drive belt(s) is to ensure that it is not causing a the noise. Small cracks across the ribs of the drive belt will not cause the noise. Belt separation is identified by the plys of the belt separating and may be seen at the edge of the belt our felt as a lump in the belt. 5. Small amounts of pilling is normal condition and acceptable. When the pilling is severe the drive belt does not have a smooth surface for proper operation. Drive Belt Squeal Diagnosis Drive Belt Squeal Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids A loose or improper installation of a body component, a suspension component, or other items of the vehicle may cause the squeal noise. If the noise is intermittent, verify the accessory drive components by varying their loads making sure they are operated to their maximum capacity. An overcharged A/C system, power steering system with a pinched hose or wrong fluid, or a generator failing are suggested items to inspect. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 2568 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belt and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the squeal noise is the drive belt(s) or an accessory drive component. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. This test is to verify that an accessory drive component does not have a seized bearing. With the belt remove test the bearings in the accessory drive components for turning smoothly. Also test the accessory drive components with the engine operating by varying the load on the components to verify that the components operate properly. 5. This test is to verify that the drive belt tensioner operates properly. If the drive belt tensioner is not operating properly, proper belt tension may not be achieved to keep the drive belt from slipping which could cause a squeal noise. 6. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) is not too long, which would prevent the drive belt tensioner from working properly. Also if an incorrect length drive belt was installed, it may not be routed properly and may be turning an accessory drive component in the wrong direction. 7. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 8. This test is to verify that the pulleys are the correct diameter or width. Using a known good vehicle compare the pulley sizes. Drive Belt Vibration Diagnosis Drive Belt Vibration Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 2569 The accessory drive components can have an affect on engine vibration. Such as but not limited to the A/C system over charged, the power steering system restricted or the incorrect fluid, or an extra load on the generator. To help identify an intermittent or an improper condition, vary the loads on the accessory drive components. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom such as the exhaust system, or the drivetrain. 3. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) or accessory drive components may be causing the vibration. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. The drive belt(s) may cause a vibration. While the drive belt(s) is removed this is the best time to inspect the condition of the belt. 6. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 8. This step should only be performed if the water pump is driven by the drive belt. Inspect the water pump shaft for being bent. Also inspect the water pump bearings for smoothness and excessive play. Compare the water pump with a known good water pump. 9. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent, cracked, or loose may put extra strain on that accessory component causing it to vibrate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 2570 Drive Belt Whine Diagnosis Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2571 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Drive Belt Replacement ^ Tools Required J 39914 Serpentine Belt Tensioner Unloader Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner (8) to release the tension on the drive belt. 3. Remove the drive belt from the right idler pulley (2). 4. Carefully release J 39914 to relieve the drive belt tensioner spring tension. 5. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 6. Provided the vehicle will not be raised or lifted to perform additional work. Utilizing a floor jack and a wood block, support the front of the engine using the following procedure. 1. Place the wood block between the lift point of the floor jack and the bottom of the engine oil pan. 2. Raise the jack until the wood block comes into contact with the engine oil pan and is capable of supporting the weight of the engine. 7. If the vehicle is to be raised or lifted in order to perform additional work. Support the engine using the engine support fixture. 8. Remove the right engine mount. 9. Remove the drive belt from the remaining pulleys. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2572 1. Install the drive belt to all the pulleys except the right idler pulley. 2. Install the right engine mount. 3. Depending on which method was used to support the engine. Remove the floor jack from under the engine oil pan or remove the engine support fixture. 4. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner away from the drive belt. 5. Install the drive belt to the right idler pulley (2). 6. Carefully release J 39914 allowing the drive belt tensioner (8) to come in contact with the drive belt. 7. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 8. Inspect the drive belt to insure the belt is properly centered on all pulleys (1-8). 9. Install the air cleaner assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-026A > Apr > 08 > Engine Controls SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Customer Interest Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-026A Date: April 08, 2008 Subject: Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On, DTC P0171 Set (Inspect/Secure Fresh Air Inlet Pipe and Reprogram PCM) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include new repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-026 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the Service Engine Soon (SES) light is illuminated. Upon investigation the technician may find that Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0171 has been set. Cause The fresh air inlet pipe may have become disconnected from the grommet in the rear rocker cover. Correction Inspect the fresh air inlet pipe connection to the rear rocker cover. If the inlet pipe has become disconnected from the rear rocker cover reconnect the pipe into the grommet and also into the metal retaining bracket. Use a plastic tie strap to secure the pipe to the retaining bracket as shown above. In addition an updated Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calibration is now available to address this condition. Reprogram the PCM with the updated calibration using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS). As always make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-06-04-026A > Apr > 08 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-026A Date: April 08, 2008 Subject: Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On, DTC P0171 Set (Inspect/Secure Fresh Air Inlet Pipe and Reprogram PCM) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include new repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-026 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the Service Engine Soon (SES) light is illuminated. Upon investigation the technician may find that Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0171 has been set. Cause The fresh air inlet pipe may have become disconnected from the grommet in the rear rocker cover. Correction Inspect the fresh air inlet pipe connection to the rear rocker cover. If the inlet pipe has become disconnected from the rear rocker cover reconnect the pipe into the grommet and also into the metal retaining bracket. Use a plastic tie strap to secure the pipe to the retaining bracket as shown above. In addition an updated Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calibration is now available to address this condition. Reprogram the PCM with the updated calibration using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS). As always make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Wheel Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-013B Date: March 29, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle/Click/Ticking Type Noise Coming From Wheel Cover (Install Wheel Cover Insulators) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Buick Terraza with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2006 Chevrolet HHR with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Pontiac Montana SV6 with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Saturn Relay with 17 Inch Wheel Cover Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-013A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle/click/ticking type noise coming from the front or rear wheels. This condition is most apparent while driving at low speeds (0-24 km/h (0-15 mph)) and is relative to wheel rotation. Cause This condition may be caused by hard contact between the inner edge of the wheel cover and the outer edge of the steel rim. This contact occurs when the delrin ring comes out of its channel and separates from the wheel cover. In most cases, the delrin ring will be completely gone. Correction If the delrin ring is missing, install insulators on the backside of all four wheel covers. Use the following service procedure listed below. Remove the wheel covers. Clean the back side of each wheel cover using a mild liquid detergent in a distilled or deionized water solution. Rinse each wheel cover with clean water. Dry each wheel cover using compressed air or a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 2593 Saturn Relay Shown, others Similar After the wheel covers are completely dry, each wheel cover should be wiped with isopropyl alcohol on a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth and apply Adhesion Promoter, P/N 12378462, or equivalent, at the insulator locations. Insulator location is at the center of each spoke in the groove. Place two insulators at the location where a divider prevents one from going in the center. Refer to the illustrations above. Peel the red non-stick backing off of the insulator. Carefully place the insulator onto the wheel cover so that the area under the lip is resting against the corner of the inside edge of the wheel cover lip. This should place the insulator flush with the outside edge of the wheel cover. Press down firmly on the insulator to ensure that the adhesive is bonding to the wheel cover. Place another insulator in the next location by repeating Steps 5 through 7. There should be an insulator at each spoke location with two being placed at Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 2594 the above specified location. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 2600 Saturn Relay Shown, others Similar After the wheel covers are completely dry, each wheel cover should be wiped with isopropyl alcohol on a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth and apply Adhesion Promoter, P/N 12378462, or equivalent, at the insulator locations. Insulator location is at the center of each spoke in the groove. Place two insulators at the location where a divider prevents one from going in the center. Refer to the illustrations above. Peel the red non-stick backing off of the insulator. Carefully place the insulator onto the wheel cover so that the area under the lip is resting against the corner of the inside edge of the wheel cover lip. This should place the insulator flush with the outside edge of the wheel cover. Press down firmly on the insulator to ensure that the adhesive is bonding to the wheel cover. Place another insulator in the next location by repeating Steps 5 through 7. There should be an insulator at each spoke location with two being placed at Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 2601 the above specified location. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2602 Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE DUCT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Loosen the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) fresh air pipe from the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Remove the air cleaner intake duct from the mass air flow (MAF) sensor and throttle body. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner intake duct to the MAF sensor and throttle body. 2. Install the PCV fresh air pipe to the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Tighten the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. Tighten the clamps to 4 N.m (35 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 2611 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 2617 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2618 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Release the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by tilting to release the lid from the lower housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2619 5. Remove the air cleaner element (2) from the lower housing (1). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner element (2) into the lower housing (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2620 2. Install the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by first engaging the hinge then lower the cover into the closed position. 3. Fasten the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. 4. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Replacement Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Replacement PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR FILTER HOUSING REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the push pins from the rear of the RH air inlet panel. 2. Open the hood. 3. Remove the push pins from the top and forward edge of the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Replacement > Page 2625 4. Remove the RH air inlet panel. 5. Remove the LH air inlet panel. 6. Remove the filter housing nuts from the vehicle. 7. Remove the filter housing from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Replacement > Page 2626 1. Inspect the foam seal. If the seal is damaged, replace the seal using Kent Industries adhesive back foam tape P/N 46485 (or equivalent). 2. Install the filter housing to the vehicle. 3. Install the new seal nuts to the filter housing. Tighten the nuts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: New seal nuts must be used when installing passenger compartment air filter housing to prevent leaks. 4. Install the LH air inlet panel. 5. Install the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Replacement > Page 2627 6. Install the push pins to the top and forward edge of the RH air inlet panel. 7. Close the hood. 8. Install the push pins to the rear of the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Replacement > Page 2628 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Passenger Compartment Air Filter Replacement PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR FILTER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the push pins from the rear of the RH air inlet panel. 2. Open the hood. 3. Remove the push pins from the top and forward edge of the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Replacement > Page 2629 4. Remove the RH air inlet panel. 5. Remove the filter from the filter housing by depressing the release tab at the inboard edge of the filter housing. 6. Remove the filter from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Replacement > Page 2630 1. Install the filter to the vehicle. 2. Install the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Replacement > Page 2631 3. Install the push pins to the top and forward edge of the RH air inlet panel. 4. Close the hood. 5. Install the push pins to the rear of the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER FILTER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. IMPORTANT: The evaporative emission (EVAP) canister filter cover must also be replaced when the EVAP filter is replaced to ensure proper operation of the EVAP canister. 2. Remove the EVAP canister from the vehicle. 3. Carefully release the canister filter cover rear retaining tabs. 4. Carefully release the canister filter cover forward retaining tabs and remove the cover from the EVAP canister. 5. Discard the EVAP canister filter cover. 6. Remove the filter from the canister and discard the filter. 7. Clean the inside of the EVAP canister filter housing with a clean shop towel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2635 1. Install a NEW filter to the canister filter housing. 2. Install a NEW EVAP filter cover to the EVAP canister. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the seal is properly seated in the NEW EVAP filter cover. 3. Install the EVAP canister to the vehicle. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Connect the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection. 3. Install the bleed hose into an approved container and open the valve to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 4. Disconnect the fuel pressure gage from the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure > Page 2641 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Pump Pickup Filter > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pump Pickup Filter: Description and Operation FUEL STRAINER The fuel strainer attaches to the lower end of the primary fuel tank module. The fuel strainer is made of woven plastic. The functions of the fuel strainer are to filter contaminants and to wick fuel. The fuel strainer normally requires no maintenance. Fuel stoppage at this point indicates that the fuel tank contains an abnormal amount of sediment or contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-016B Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Information on Internal Engine Noise or Damage After Oil Filter Replacement Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-01-016A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important Engine damage that is the result of an incorrect or improperly installed engine oil filter is not a warrantable claim. The best way to avoid oil filter quality concerns is to purchase ACDelco(R) oil filters directly from GMSPO. Oil filter misapplication may cause abnormal engine noise or internal damage. Always utilize the most recent parts information to ensure the correct part number filter is installed when replacing oil filters. Do not rely on physical dimensions alone. Counterfeit copies of name brand parts have been discovered in some aftermarket parts systems. Always ensure the parts you install are from a trusted source. Improper oil filter installation may result in catastrophic engine damage. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) installation instructions when replacing any oil filter and pay particular attention to procedures for proper cartridge filter element alignment. If the diagnostics in SI (Engine Mechanical) lead to the oil filter as the cause of the internal engine noise or damage, dealers should submit a field product report. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002I (Information for Dealers on How to Submit a Field Product Report). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2649 Oil Filter: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Position the oil drain pan under the engine oil drain plug. 3. Remove the engine oil drain plug. 4. Clean and inspect the engine oil drain plug, replace if necessary. 5. Clean and inspect the engine oil drain plug sealing surface on the oil pan, repair or replace oil pan if necessary. 6. Remove the oil filter. 7. Clean and inspect the oil filter sealing area on the oil filter adapter, repair or replace if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Lightly oil the replacement oil filter gasket with clean oil. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2650 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the new oil filter. ^ Tighten the filter to 3/4 to 1 full turn, after the oil filter gasket contacts the oil filter mounting surface. 3. Install the engine oil drain plug. ^ Tighten the plug to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the oil drain pan. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2651 6. Remove the oil fill cap from the rocker arm cover. 7. Fill the engine with new engine oil. 8. Install the oil fill cap to the rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Heater Outlet Hose Replacement Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Remove the heater outlet hose clamps (1). 3. Remove the heater outlet hose (2). Installation Procedure 1. Apply engine coolant to the heater outlet hose in order to ease installation. 2. Install the heater outlet hose (2). 3. Install the heater outlet hose clamps (1). 4. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2657 Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Heater Pipe Replacement - Inlet Heater Pipe Replacement - Inlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Release and slide the heater core inlet hose clamp away from the heater inlet pipe connection. 3. Disconnect the heater core inlet hose from the heater inlet pipe. 4. Remove the heater inlet pipe nut (2). 5. Remove the heater inlet pipe (1). 6. Remove the seal (3) from the heater inlet pipe (1). Installation Procedure 1. Install a new seal (3) to the heater inlet pipe (1). 2. Apply engine coolant to the heater inlet pipe seal (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2658 3. Install the heater outlet pipe (1). 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the heater inlet pipe nut (2). Tighten the nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Connect the heater core inlet hose to the heater inlet pipe. 6. Position the heater core inlet hose clamp over the heater inlet pipe connection. 7. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2659 Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Heater Pipe Replacement - Outlet Heater Pipe Replacement - Outlet Removal Procedure 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Remove the air cleaner air intake duct. 4. Remove the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor bolt (3) and bracket (2). 5. Rotate the MAP sensor out of the way of the heater outlet pipe. 6. Disconnect the evaporative emissions (EVAP) pipe from the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 7. Disconnect the electrical connector from the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 8. Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve electrical connector. 9. Release and slide the heater outlet hose clamp (1) away from the heater outlet pipe connection. 10. Disconnect the heater outlet hose (2) from the heater outlet pipe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2660 11. Release and slide the heater core outlet hose clamp away from the heater outlet pipe connection. 12. Disconnect the heater core outlet hose from the heater outlet pipe. 13. Remove the heater outlet pipe nut (1) securing the heater outlet pipe (2) to the intake manifold. 14. Remove the two nuts (3) and bolt (4) securing the heater outlet pipe to the throttle body. 15. Remove the heater outlet pipe (2) from the engine. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2661 1. Install the heater outlet pipe (2) to the engine. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the heater outlet pipe nut (1) securing the heater outlet pipe (2) to the intake manifold. Tighten the nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the heater outlet pipe to the throttle body nuts (3) and bolt (4). Tighten the nuts and bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the heater core outlet hose to the heater outlet pipe. 5. Position the heater core outlet hose clamp over the heater outlet pipe connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2662 6. Connect the heater outlet hose (2) to the heater outlet pipe. 7. Position the heater outlet hose clamp (1) over the heater outlet pipe connection. 8. Connect the electrical connector to the EGR valve. 9. Connect the electrical connector to the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 10. Connect the EVAP pipe to the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 11. Reposition the MAP sensor. 12. Install the MAP sensor bracket (2) and bolt (3). Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 13. Install the air cleaner air intake duct. 14. Fill the cooling system. 15. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2663 Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Thermal Bypass Fitting Replacement Thermal Bypass Fitting Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Release and slide the thermal bypass pipe hose clamp (2) away from the thermal bypass fitting. 3. Remove the thermal bypass hose (1) from the thermal bypass fitting. 4. Release and slide the heater outlet hose clamp (1) away from the thermal bypass fitting. 5. Remove the heater outlet hose (2) from the thermal bypass fitting. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2664 6. Remove the thermal bypass fitting bolt (2). 7. Remove the thermal bypass fitting (1). 8. Remove the seal from the thermal bypass fitting. Installation Procedure 1. Install a new seal to the thermal bypass fitting. 2. Apply engine coolant to the thermal bypass fitting seal to ease installation. 3. Install the thermal bypass fitting (1). 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the thermal bypass fitting bolt (2). Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2665 5. Install the heater outlet hose (2) to the thermal bypass fitting. 6. Position the heater outlet hose clamp (1) over the thermal bypass fitting. 7. Install the thermal bypass hose (1) to the thermal bypass fitting. 8. Position the thermal bypass pipe hose clamp (2) over the thermal bypass fitting. 9. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2666 Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Heater Outlet Hose Replacement Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Remove the heater outlet hose clamps (1). 3. Remove the heater outlet hose (2). Installation Procedure 1. Apply engine coolant to the heater outlet hose in order to ease installation. 2. Install the heater outlet hose (2). 3. Install the heater outlet hose clamps (1). 4. Fill the cooling system. Heater Pipe Replacement - Inlet Heater Pipe Replacement - Inlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2667 2. Release and slide the heater core inlet hose clamp away from the heater inlet pipe connection. 3. Disconnect the heater core inlet hose from the heater inlet pipe. 4. Remove the heater inlet pipe nut (2). 5. Remove the heater inlet pipe (1). 6. Remove the seal (3) from the heater inlet pipe (1). Installation Procedure 1. Install a new seal (3) to the heater inlet pipe (1). 2. Apply engine coolant to the heater inlet pipe seal (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2668 3. Install the heater outlet pipe (1). 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the heater inlet pipe nut (2). Tighten the nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Connect the heater core inlet hose to the heater inlet pipe. 6. Position the heater core inlet hose clamp over the heater inlet pipe connection. 7. Fill the cooling system. Heater Pipe Replacement - Outlet Heater Pipe Replacement - Outlet Removal Procedure 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Remove the air cleaner air intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2669 4. Remove the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor bolt (3) and bracket (2). 5. Rotate the MAP sensor out of the way of the heater outlet pipe. 6. Disconnect the evaporative emissions (EVAP) pipe from the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 7. Disconnect the electrical connector from the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 8. Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve electrical connector. 9. Release and slide the heater outlet hose clamp (1) away from the heater outlet pipe connection. 10. Disconnect the heater outlet hose (2) from the heater outlet pipe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2670 11. Release and slide the heater core outlet hose clamp away from the heater outlet pipe connection. 12. Disconnect the heater core outlet hose from the heater outlet pipe. 13. Remove the heater outlet pipe nut (1) securing the heater outlet pipe (2) to the intake manifold. 14. Remove the two nuts (3) and bolt (4) securing the heater outlet pipe to the throttle body. 15. Remove the heater outlet pipe (2) from the engine. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2671 1. Install the heater outlet pipe (2) to the engine. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the heater outlet pipe nut (1) securing the heater outlet pipe (2) to the intake manifold. Tighten the nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the heater outlet pipe to the throttle body nuts (3) and bolt (4). Tighten the nuts and bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the heater core outlet hose to the heater outlet pipe. 5. Position the heater core outlet hose clamp over the heater outlet pipe connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2672 6. Connect the heater outlet hose (2) to the heater outlet pipe. 7. Position the heater outlet hose clamp (1) over the heater outlet pipe connection. 8. Connect the electrical connector to the EGR valve. 9. Connect the electrical connector to the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 10. Connect the EVAP pipe to the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 11. Reposition the MAP sensor. 12. Install the MAP sensor bracket (2) and bolt (3). Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 13. Install the air cleaner air intake duct. 14. Fill the cooling system. 15. Install the injector sight shield. Thermal Bypass Fitting Replacement Thermal Bypass Fitting Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2673 2. Release and slide the thermal bypass pipe hose clamp (2) away from the thermal bypass fitting. 3. Remove the thermal bypass hose (1) from the thermal bypass fitting. 4. Release and slide the heater outlet hose clamp (1) away from the thermal bypass fitting. 5. Remove the heater outlet hose (2) from the thermal bypass fitting. 6. Remove the thermal bypass fitting bolt (2). 7. Remove the thermal bypass fitting (1). 8. Remove the seal from the thermal bypass fitting. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2674 Installation Procedure 1. Install a new seal to the thermal bypass fitting. 2. Apply engine coolant to the thermal bypass fitting seal to ease installation. 3. Install the thermal bypass fitting (1). 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the thermal bypass fitting bolt (2). Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). 5. Install the heater outlet hose (2) to the thermal bypass fitting. 6. Position the heater outlet hose clamp (1) over the thermal bypass fitting. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2675 7. Install the thermal bypass hose (1) to the thermal bypass fitting. 8. Position the thermal bypass pipe hose clamp (2) over the thermal bypass fitting. 9. Fill the cooling system. Thermal Bypass Hose Replacement Thermal Bypass Hose Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Release and slide the thermal bypass pipe hose clamps (2) away from the hose connections. 3. Remove thermal bypass hose (1). Installation Procedure 1. Apply engine coolant to the bypass hose in order to ease installation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2676 2. Install the thermal bypass pipe hose (1). 3. Position the thermal bypass pipe hose clamps (2) over the hose end connections. 4. Fill the cooling system. Thermal Bypass Pipe Replacement Thermal Bypass Pipe Replacement Tools Required J 21882 Oil Suction Pipe Installer Removal Procedure 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the upper intake manifold. 3. Remove the thermal bypass hose. 4. Remove the thermal bypass pipe bolt. 5. Remove the thermal bypass pipe. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 2677 1. Apply sealant GM P/N 12345493 (Canadian P/N 10953488) or equivalent to the end of the thermal bypass pipe where the pipe is pressed into the intake manifold. 2. Install the thermal bypass pipe using J 21882. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the thermal bypass pipe bolt. Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 4. Install the thermal bypass hose. 5. Install the upper intake manifold. 6. Fill the engine with coolant. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inlet Heater Hose: Service and Repair Inlet HEATER HOSE REPLACEMENT - INLET REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill). 2. Remove the heater inlet hose clamp from the heater core. 3. Remove the heater inlet hose (2) from the heater core. 4. Remove the heater inlet hose clamp from the engine. 5. Remove the heater inlet hose (2) from the engine. 6. Remove the heater inlet hose (2) from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inlet > Page 2682 1. Install the heater inlet hose (2) to the vehicle. 2. Install the heater inlet hose (2) to the engine. 3. Install the heater inlet hose clamp to the engine. 4. Install the heater inlet hose (2) to the heater core. 5. Install the heater inlet hose clamp to the heater core. 6. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inlet > Page 2683 Heater Hose: Service and Repair Outlet HEATER HOSE REPLACEMENT - OUTLET REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill). 2. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the heater core. 3. Remove the heater outlet hose (1) from the heater core. 4. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the engine. 5. Remove the heater outlet hose (1) from the engine. 6. Position the loose end of the heater outlet hose (1) outboard to ease in the removal of the surge tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inlet > Page 2684 7. Remove the surge tank inlet hose clamp from the surge tank. 8. Disconnect the surge tank inlet hose from the surge tank. 9. Remove the surge tank bolts from the surge tank. 10. Lift the surge tank to gain access to the heater outlet hose. 11. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the surge tank. 12. Remove the heater outlet hose from the surge tank. 13. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. 14. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the hose. This will aid in routing the heater outlet hose from the vehicle. 15. Remove the heater outlet hose from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inlet > Page 2685 1. Install the heater outlet hose to the vehicle. Route the hose into position for attachment to the surge tank. 2. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the hose. 3. Install the heater outlet hose to the surge tank. 4. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. 5. Install the surge tank bolts to the surge tank. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 6. Connect the surge tank inlet hose to the surge tank. 7. Install the surge tank inlet hose clamp to the surge tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inlet > Page 2686 8. Install the heater outlet hose (1) to the engine. 9. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the engine. 10. Install the heater outlet hose (1) to the heater core. 11. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the heater core. 12. Fill the engine coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement COMPRESSOR HOSE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the left headlamp. 3. Remove the compressor hose retainer nut from the battery box. 4. Remove the evaporator outlet hose nut from the evaporator outlet hose. 5. Remove the evaporator outlet hose from the compressor hose. 6. Install a protective cap to the evaporator outlet hose to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 2691 7. Remove the compressor hose nut from the condenser. 8. Remove the compressor hose from the condenser. 9. Install a protective cap to the condenser to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. 10. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 11. Disconnect the electrical connector from the pressure transducer. 12. Remove the compressor hose nut at the compressor. 13. Remove the compressor hose from the compressor. 14. Install a protective cap to the compressor to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. 15. Remove the compressor hose from the vehicle. 16. Remove and discard the sealing washers from the compressor hose. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 2692 1. Remove protective cap from compressor end of the compressor hose and the compressor. 2. Install new seal washers to the compressor hose. 3. Install the compressor hose to the compressor. 4. Install the compressor hose nut to the compressor. Tighten the nut to 22 N.m (16 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 5. Connect the electrical connector to the pressure transducer. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Position the compressor hose in the vehicle. 8. Install a new sealing washer to the evaporator outlet hose. 9. Install the evaporator outlet hose to the compressor hose. 10. Install the evaporator outlet hose nut to the evaporator outlet hose. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 2693 Tighten the nut to 22 N.m (16 lb ft). 11. Install a new sealing washer to the compressor hose at the condenser. 12. Install the compressor hose to the condenser. 13. Install the compressor hose nut to the condenser. Tighten the nut to 22 N.m (16 lb ft). 14. Install the compressor hose retainer nut to the battery box. Tighten the nut to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 15. Install the left headlamp. 16. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 17. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 2694 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Hose Replacement - Outlet EVAPORATOR HOSE REPLACEMENT - OUTLET TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the evaporator outlet hose nut from the evaporator outlet hose. 3. Remove the evaporator outlet hose from the compressor hose. 4. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line retainer plate nut from the TXV. 5. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line from the TXV. 6. Remove evaporator outlet hose from the vehicle. 7. Remove and discard the sealing washers from the evaporator outlet hose and the compressor hose. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 2695 8. Install protective caps to the TXV, the liquid line, and the compressor hose to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the protective caps from the TXV, the liquid line, and the compressor hose. 2. Install new sealing washers to the evaporator outlet hose, liquid line, and the compressor hose. 3. Install the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the TXV. 4. Install the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 5. Install the evaporator outlet hose to the compressor hose. 6. Install the evaporator outlet hose nut to the evaporator outlet hose. Tighten the nut to 22 N.m (16 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 2696 7. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 8. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 2697 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Liquid Line Replacement LIQUID LINE REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the left headlamp. 3. Remove the surge tank. 4. Remove the washer bottle. 5. Remove the battery. 6. Remove the battery box bolts from the battery box. 7. Disconnect the negative battery cable nut from the wheelhouse. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 2698 8. Remove the nut retaining the liquid line to the strut tower. 9. Disconnect the harness and vent hose retainers from the liquid line. 10. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line retainer plate nut from the TXV. 11. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line from the TXV. 12. Remove the liquid line nut from the condenser. 13. Remove the liquid line from the condenser. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 2699 14. Remove the bolt retaining the liquid line to the body. 15. Position the battery box inboard to allow for routing of the liquid line. 16. Route the liquid line above the battery box and the ground lug. 17. Lift the rear portion of the liquid line upward and remove the liquid line from the vehicle. 18. Remove and discard the sealing washer from the liquid line. 19. Install protective caps to the condenser, the evaporator outlet hose, and the TXV to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 2700 1. Route the liquid line below the battery box and the ground lug. 2. Connect the negative battery cable nut to the wheelhouse. Tighten the nut to 12 N.m (106 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Remove the protective caps from the condenser, the evaporator outlet hose, and the TXV. 4. Install the new sealing washer to the liquid line. 5. Route the condenser end of the liquid line into position. 6. Install the liquid line to the condenser. 7. Install the liquid line nut to the condenser. Tighten the nut to 22 N.m (16 lb ft). IMPORTANT: Use a large pair of pliers to hold the fitting while tightening the nut. Be careful not to twist the line. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 2701 8. Install the bolt to retain the liquid line to the body. Tighten the nut to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 9. Remove the protective cap from the TXV, the liquid line, and the evaporator outlet hose. 10. Install new seal washers to the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose. 11. Install the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose to the TXV. 12. Install the liquid line and evaporator outlet hose retainer plate nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 2702 13. Install the four battery box bolts to the inside of the battery box. Tighten the nut to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 14. Install the battery box bolt to the outside of the battery box. Tighten the nut to 10 N.m (86 lb in). 15. Install the battery. 16. Install the liquid line to the strut tower. 17. Install the liquid line nut to the strut tower. Tighten the nut to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 18. Connect the harness and vent hose retainers to the liquid line. 19. Install the surge tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 2703 20. Install the washer bottle. 21. Install the left headlamp. 22. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 23. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the coolant. 2. Remove the upper fascia retainers from the radiator support. 3. Remove the upper radiator bracket bolt from the radiator support. 4. Remove the upper radiator bracket from the radiator. 5. Remove the radiator inlet hose clamp from the radiator. 6. Remove the radiator inlet hose from the radiator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 2708 7. Remove the radiator inlet hose clamp from the engine. 8. Remove the radiator inlet hose from the engine. Installation Procedure 1. Install the radiator inlet hose to the engine. 2. Install the radiator inlet hose clamp to the engine. 3. Install the radiator inlet hose to the radiator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 2709 4. Install the radiator inlet hose clamp to the radiator. 5. Install the upper radiator bracket to the radiator. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Install the upper radiator bracket bolt to the radiator support. Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 7. Install the upper fascia retainers to the radiator support. 8. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 2710 Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement Radiator Hose Replacement - Outlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the coolant. 2. Remove the radiator outlet hose clamp from the engine. 3. Remove the radiator outlet hose from the engine. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle. 5. Remove the radiator outlet hose clamp from the radiator. 6. Remove the radiator outlet hose from the radiator. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 2711 1. Install the radiator outlet hose to the radiator. 2. Install the radiator outlet hose clamp to the radiator. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Install the radiator outlet hose to the engine. 5. Install the radiator outlet hose clamp to the engine. 6. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Brake Fluid: Capacity Specifications Information not provided by manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2717 Brake Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye Bulletin No.: 05-06-02-002B Date: January 18, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: DEX-COOL(R) Coolant - New Leak Detection Dye J 46366 - Replaces J 29545-6 Models: 1996-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light/Medium Duty Trucks* (including Saturn) 1997-2008 Isuzu T-Series Medium Duty Tilt Cab Models Built in Janesville and Flint 1999-2008 Isuzu N-Series Medium Duty Commercial Models with 5.7L or 6.0L Gas Engine 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X *EXCLUDING 2006 and Prior Chevrolet Aveo, Epica, Optra, Vivant and Pontiac Matiz, Wave Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-02-002A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Leak detection dye P/N 12378563 (J 29545-6) (in Canada P/N 88900915) may cause DEX-COOL(R) coolant to appear green in a black vessel making it appear to be conventional (green) coolant. This may cause a technician to add conventional coolant to a low DEX-COOL(R) system thus contaminating it. The green DEX-COOL(R) appearance is caused by the color of the leak detection dye which alters the color of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant. A new leak detection dye P/N 89022219 (J 46366) (in Canada P/N 89022220) has been released that does not alter the appearance of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant. When adding the new leak detection dye the color of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant will not change. For detecting leaks on any system that uses DEX-COOL(R) leak detection dye P/N 89022219 (in Canada P/N 89022220) should be used. The new leak detection dye can be used with both conventional and DEX-COOL(R) coolant. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 2722 Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information Bulletin No.: 00-06-02-006D Date: August 15, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Engine Coolant Recycling and Warranty Information Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER Vehicles 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Attention: Please address this bulletin to the Warranty Claims Administrator and the Service Manager. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to adjust the title and Include Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-06-02-006C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Coolant Reimbursement Policy General Motors supports the use of recycled engine coolant for warranty repairs/service, providing a GM approved engine coolant recycling system is used. Recycled coolant will be reimbursed at the GMSPO dealer price for new coolant plus the appropriate mark-up. When coolant replacement is required during a warranty repair, it is crucial that only the relative amount of engine coolant concentrate be charged, not the total diluted volume. In other words: if you are using two gallons of pre-diluted (50:50) recycled engine coolant to service a vehicle, you may request reimbursement for one gallon of GM Goodwrench engine coolant concentrate at the dealer price plus the appropriate warranty parts handling allowance. Licensed Approved DEX-COOL(R) Providers Important: USE OF NON-APPROVED VIRGIN OR RECYCLED DEX-COOL(R) OR DEVIATIONS IN THE FORM OF ALTERNATE CHEMICALS OR ALTERATION OF EQUIPMENT, WILL VOID THE GM ENDORSEMENT, MAY DEGRADE COOLANT SYSTEM INTEGRITY AND PLACE THE COOLING SYSTEM WARRANTY UNDER JEOPARDY. Shown in Table 1 are the only current licensed and approved providers of DEX-COOL(R). Products that are advertised as "COMPATIBLE" or "RECOMMENDED" for use with DEX-COOL(R) have not been tested or approved by General Motors. Non-approved coolants may degrade the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 2723 coolant system integrity and will no longer be considered a 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Coolant Removal Services/Recycling The tables include all coolant recycling processes currently approved by GM. Also included is a primary phone number and demographic information. Used DEX-COOL(R) can be combined with used conventional coolant (green) for recycling. Depending on the recycling service and/or equipment, it is then designated as a conventional 2 yr/30,000 mile (50,000 km) coolant or DEX-COOL(R) 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Recycled coolants as designated in this bulletin may be used during the vehicle(s) warranty period. DEX-COOL(R) Recycling The DEX-COOL(R) recycling service listed in Table 2 has been approved for recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL) or conventional) to DEX-COOL(R) with 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) usability. Recycling Fluid Technologies is the only licensed provider of Recycled DEX-COOL(R) meeting GM6277M specifications and utilizes GM approved inhibitor packages. This is currently a limited program being monitored by GM Service Operations which will be expanded as demand increases. Conventional (Green) Recycling Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 2724 Processes shown in the Table 3 are capable of recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL(R) or conventional) to a conventional (green) coolant. Recycling conventional coolant can be accomplished at your facility by a technician using approved EQUIPMENT (listed by model number in Table 3), or by an approved coolant recycling SERVICE which may recycle the coolant at your facility or at an offsite operation. Refer to the table for GM approved coolant recyclers in either of these two categories. Should you decide to recycle the coolant yourself, strict adherence to the operating procedures is imperative. Use ONLY the inhibitor chemicals supplied by the respective (GM approved) recycling equipment manufacturer. Sealing Tablets Cooling System Sealing Tablets (Seal Tabs) should not be used as a regular maintenance item after servicing an engine cooling system. Discoloration of coolant can occur if too many seal tabs have been inserted into the cooling system. This can occur if seal tabs are repeatedly used over the service life of a vehicle. Where appropriate, seal tabs may be used if diagnostics fail to repair a small leak in the cooling system. When a condition appears in which seal tabs may be recommended, a specific bulletin will be released describing their proper usage. Water Quality The integrity of the coolant is dependent upon the quality of DEX-COOL(R) and water. DEX-COOL(R) is a product that has enhanced protection capability as well as an extended service interval. These enhanced properties may be jeopardized by combining DEX-COOL(R) with poor quality water. If you suspect the water in your area of being poor quality, it is recommended you use distilled or de-ionized water with DEX-COOL(R). "Pink" DEX-COOL(R) DEX-COOL(R) is orange in color to distinguish it from other coolants. Due to inconsistencies in the mixing of the dyes used with DEX-COOL(R), some batches may appear pink after time. The color shift from orange to pink does not affect the integrity of the coolant, and still maintains the 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) service interval. Back Service Only use DEX-COOL(R) if the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 2725 Contamination Mixing conventional green coolant with DEX-COOL(R) will degrade the service interval from 5 yrs./150,000 miles (240,000 km) to 2 yrs./30,000 miles (50,000 km) if left in the contaminated condition. If contamination occurs, the cooling system must be flushed twice immediately and re-filled with a 50/50 mixture of DEX-COOL(R) and clean water in order to preserve the enhanced properties and extended service interval of DEX-COOL(R). After 5 years/150,000 miles (240,000 km) After 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km), the coolant should be changed, preferably using a coolant exchanger. If the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R) and has not had problems with contamination from non-DEX-COOL(R) coolants, then the service interval remains the same, and the coolant does not need to be changed for another 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km) Equipment (Coolant Exchangers) The preferred method of performing coolant replacement is to use a coolant exchanger. A coolant exchanger can replace virtually all of the old coolant with new coolant. Coolant exchangers can be used to perform coolant replacement without spillage, and facilitate easy waste collection. They can also be used to lower the coolant level in a vehicle to allow for less messy servicing of cooling system components. It is recommended that you use a coolant exchanger with a vacuum feature facilitates removing trapped air from the cooling system. This is a substantial time savings over repeatedly thermo cycling the vehicle and topping-off the radiator. The vacuum feature also allows venting of a hot system to relieve system pressure. Approved coolant exchangers are available through the GMDE (General Motors Dealer Equipment) program. For refilling a cooling system that has been partially or fully drained for repairs other than coolant replacement, the Vac-N-Fill Coolant Refill Tool (GE-47716) is recommended to facilitate removal of trapped air from the cooling system during refill. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System ................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 10.5 quarts (9.9 liters) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2728 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL extended life coolant. A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant will: ^ Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). ^ Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). ^ Protect against rust and corrosion. ^ Help keep the proper engine temperature. ^ Let the warning lights and gages work as they should. NOTICE: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle. WHAT TO USE Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and one-half DEX-COOL coolant which won't damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you don't need to add anything else. CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle's coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. NOTICE: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, check your cooling system. NOTICE: If you use the proper coolant, you do not have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information > Page 2733 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Overhaul .............................................................................................................................................. ....................................................... 7.8 liters (8.2 qts) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2736 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID Use only T-IV Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88900925, in Canada 22689186). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2737 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure Description Inspection of the transaxle fluid level, correct type of fluid, and the condition of the fluid for accurate operation of the transaxle. Procedure 1. Important: Routine inspection of the transaxle fluid is not required. Transaxle fluid inspection is only required if there is a symptom indicating a concern with the fluid. Park the vehicle on a flat level surface. 2. Operate the vehicle in order for the transmission fluid temperature to reach the normal operating range. Transaxle normal temperature: 60 - 70 degrees C (140 - 158 degrees F) 3. With the engine at idle, manual shift through all transaxle ranges and return to the PARK position. Leave the engine idling. 4. Clean any dirt or debris away from the area of the transaxle fluid level indicator. 5. Remove the transaxle fluid level indicator bolt (1) from the transaxle. 6. Remove the transaxle fluid level indicator (2). 7. Wipe away any transaxle fluid from the indicator. 8. Insert the indicator into the transaxle until fully seated. 9. Important: Inspecting transaxle fluid level when not at normal temperature can give an incorrect measurement. The transaxle fluid expands when warm. Remove the indicator and inspect the level and the condition of the oil on the indicator: ^ Transmission fluid level at normal operating temperature (1) ^ Transmission fluid level if cold (2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2738 10. If the fluid level is incorrect inspect for the following conditions: ^ Fluid below level, inspect for a leak. Refer to Fluid Leak Diagnosis or Automatic Transmission Fluid Leaks. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fluid Leak Diagnosis See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Automatic Transmission Fluid Leaks ^ Fluid above level, inspect for contamination of the fluid. 11. Important: The transaxle uses T-IV fluid, GM P/N 88900925 (Canadian P/N 22689186). The fluid is normally red in color. The oil may darken in color with more miles on a vehicle. Inspect the condition of the fluid for the following conditions: ^ Excessively dirty with particles in the fluid ^ If there are no DRIVEABILITY concerns, replace the fluid. ^ If DRIVEABILITY concerns are present disassemble and inspect for a cause. ^ Burnt smell ^ Inspect for the correct fluid. Refer to Fluid Capacity Specifications. ^ Inspect for conditions that may of cause overheating of the transmission fluid. Refer to Transmission Overheats. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Transmission Overheats ^ If there are no DRIVEABILITY concerns, replace the fluid. ^ If DRIVEABILITY concerns are present disassemble and inspect for cause. ^ Inspect the transmission oil cooler system for functioning properly. ^ Black in color ^ Disassemble the transaxle and inspect for components that may have over heated. ^ Inspect the transmission oil cooler system for functioning properly. ^ Milky or white tint in color from coolant or water ^ Inspect for failure of the transaxle oil cooler. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Engine Coolant/Water In Transmission ^ Inspect for missing or improperly routed vent hose. ^ Inspect for missing fill plug. 12. Install the fluid level indicator. 13. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the fluid indicator bolt. ^ Tighten the fluid indicator bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2739 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transaxle Fluid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain fluid. Allow at least 5 minutes for the fluid to drain completely. 3. Remove the gasket from the drain plug and discard. Installation Procedure 1. Install the new gasket on the drain plug. 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the drain plug. ^ Tighten the drain plug to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 3. Make sure vehicle is level. 4. Remove the fluid level indicator located behind the front transaxle mount. Refer to Fluid Level Indicator Replacement. 5. Important: DexronIII automatic transmission fluid is not compatible with this transaxle. If DexronIII ATF is used, transaxle failure will result. This transaxle uses GM T-IV fluid P/N 88900925. Notice: Do not remove the 3rd gear anchor band bolt located on top of the transmission for checking fluid or adding fluid. Removing the bolt will dislocate internal components and require the transmission to be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for repair. Add approximately 3.1 L (3.3 Qt) of GM T-IV fluid to the transaxle, using the fluid level indicator location. 6. Important: If the check is necessary at a low oil temperature of 30° - 40°C (86° - 104°F), perform check using the COLD range on the level gage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2740 However, the fluid must be re-checked at the proper fluid temperature. Start engine and operate vehicle until transaxle fluid temperature reaches 60° - 70°C (140° 158°F). 7. Apply parking brake. 8. Depress brake pedal and move shift lever slowly through all gear ranges from park (P) to low (L), pausing for about 3 seconds in each range. Return shift lever to park (P) range at idle condition. 9. Pull level gauge out again and check if fluid level is within the HOT range. 10. If fluid is not within the correct level, adjust accordingly: 1. If fluid is below the HOT range, add enough to bring it up to the correct level. 2. If fluid is above HOT range, drain excess fluid. 11. Install the fluid level indicator. Refer to Fluid Level Indicator Replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Rear Differential ................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 750 ml (25.4 ounces) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2745 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications CARRIER ASSEMBLY -- DIFFERENTIAL (REAR DRIVE MODULE) VERSATRAK Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12378514, in Canada 88901045). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle Inspection Procedure 1. Important: In order to obtain an accurate indication of the fluid level, the rear drive module priming procedure must be performed prior to fluid level inspection. Prime the rear drive module in the service stall: 1. Raise and support the vehicle so that all wheels are off of the ground. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Start the engine and place transmission in a forward gear. 3. Slowly apply the park brake until the rear wheels stop rotating. 4. Carefully accelerate the engine until the rear wheels begin to rotate. 5. Important: Do not exceed 5 seconds of park brake apply while vehicle is in gear and the engine is running to avoid overheating of the rear drive module. Continue allowing the rear wheels to rotate for 5 seconds. 6. Release the accelerator and apply the brakes. 7. Place transmission in park or neutral and turn the engine OFF. 8. Release the park brake. 9. Raise the vehicle fully. 2. Alternatively, prime the rear drive module by driving the vehicle on a flat, paved surface in a tight, 360 degree circle for 3 consecutive revolutions at 8 km/h (5 mph). 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Clean the area around the fluid fill plug. 5. Remove the fluid fill plug. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle > Page 2748 6. Using a length of heavy mechanics wire or equivalent, position a 90 degree bend approximately 25 mm (1 inch) from the end of the wire. 7. Place the angled end of the wire into the fluid fill plug hole. 8. Rest the wire squarely on the threads of the fill plug hole. 9. Remove the wire and measure the distance between the bend and the fluid level as indicated by the witness mark. The distance from the bend to the witness mark should be 8 - 17 mm (0.32 - 0.68 inch). 10. Adjust the fluid level as required by adding or removing fluid GM P/N 12378514 (Canadian P/N 88901045). 11. Thoroughly clean the fill plug threads and apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) to the threads. 12. Install the rear drive module fill plug. ^ Tighten the fill plug to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). 13. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle > Page 2749 Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Lubricant Replacement - Rear Drive Axle Lubricant Replacement - Rear Drive Axle Draining Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place a drain pan below the rear drive module. 3. Remove the drain plug from the front of the rear drive module, below the input flange. 4. Drain the fluid. Filling Procedure 1. Thoroughly clean the threads of the drain plug. 2. Apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) to the drain plug threads. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the drain plug to the rear drive module. ^ Tighten the drain plug to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the rear drive module fill plug. 5. Fill the rear drive module with fluid GM P/N 12378514 (Canadian P/N 88901045). Fill initially with 750 ml (25.4 oz) of fluid. 6. Inspect the fluid level. 7. Thoroughly clean the threads of the fill plug. 8. Apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) to the fill plug threads. 9. Install the fill plug to the rear drive module. ^ Tighten the fill plug to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle > Page 2750 10. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications TRANSFER CASE FILL QUANTITY 500 ml (17.0 ounces.) to the bottom of the fill hole. NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2755 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications TRANSFER CASE (POWER TRANSFER UNIT) VERSATRAK Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12378514, in Canada 88901045). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2756 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Transfer Case Fluid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the drain plug (1). 3. Remove the fill plug (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2757 1. Clean the drain plug and apply sealant GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) to the threads. 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the drain plug (1). ^ Tighten the drain plug to 24 (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Fill the transfer case with synthetic gear lubricant GM P/N 12378514 (Canadian P/N 88901045) to the bottom of the fill plug, or 540 ml (18.2 oz). 4. Clean the fill plug and apply adhesive GM P/N 12345493 (Canadian P/N 10953488) to the threads. 5. Install the fill plug (1). ^ Tighten the fill plug to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 11-00-90-001 Date: March 14, 2011 Subject: Global Information for GM dexos1(TM) and GM dexos2(TM) Engine Oil Specifications for Spark Ignited and Diesel Engines, Available Licensed Brands, and Service Fill for Adding or Complete Oil Change Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Excluding All Vehicles Equipped with Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines GM dexos 1(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 1(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons The dexos(TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos‹›(TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos‹›(TM) specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 1(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Specification Important General Motors dexos 1(TM) engine oil specification replaces the previous General Motors specifications GM6094M, GM4718M and GM-LL-A-025 for most GM gasoline engines. The oil specified for use in GM passenger cars and trucks, PRIOR to the 2011 model year remains acceptable for those previous vehicles. However, dexos 1(TM) is backward compatible and can be used in those older vehicles. In North America, starting with the 2011 model year, GM introduced dexos 1(TM) certified engine oil as a factory fill and service fill for gasoline engines. The reasons for the new engine oil specification are as follows: - To meet environmental goals such as increasing fuel efficiency and reducing engine emissions. - To promote long engine life. - To minimize the number of engine oil changes in order to help meet the goal of lessening the industry's overall dependence on crude oil. dexos 1(TM) is a GM-developed engine oil specification that has been designed to provide the following benefits: - Further improve fuel economy, to meet future corporate average fuel economy (CAFE) requirements and fuel economy retention by allowing the oil to maintain its fuel economy benefits throughout the life of the oil. - More robust formulations for added engine protection and aeration performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 2762 - Support the GM Oil Life System, thereby minimizing the replacement of engine oil, before its life has been depleted. - Reduce the duplication of requirements for a large number of internal GM engine oil specifications. International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) GF-5 Standard In addition to GM dexos 1(TM), a new International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) standard called GF-5, was introduced in October 2010. - There will be a corresponding API category, called: SN Resource Conserving. The current GF-4 standard was put in place in 2004 and will become obsolete in October 2011. Similar to dexos 1(TM), the GF-5 standard will use a new fuel economy test, Sequence VID, which demands a statistically significant increase in fuel economy versus the Sequence VIB test that was used for GF-4. - It is expected that all dexos 1(TM) approved oils will be capable of meeting the GF-5 standard. However, not all GF-5 engine oils will be capable of meeting the dexos 1(TM) specification. - Like dexos(TM), the new ILSAC GF-5 standard will call for more sophisticated additives. The API will begin licensing marketers during October 2010, to produce and distribute GF-5 certified products, which are expected to include SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30 oils. Corporate Average Fuel Economy (CAFE) Requirements Effect on Fuel Economy Since CAFE standards were first introduced in 1974, the fuel economy of cars has more than doubled, while the fuel economy of light trucks has increased by more than 50 percent. Proposed CAFE standards call for a continuation of increased fuel economy in new cars and trucks. To meet these future requirements, all aspects of vehicle operation are being looked at more critically than ever before. New technology being introduced in GM vehicles designed to increase vehicle efficiency and fuel economy include direct injection, cam phasing, turbocharging and active fuel management (AFM). The demands of these new technologies on engine oil also are taken into consideration when determining new oil specifications. AFM for example can help to achieve improved fuel economy. However alternately deactivating and activating the cylinders by not allowing the intake and exhaust valves to open contributes to additional stress on the engine oil. Another industry trend for meeting tough fuel economy mandates has been a shift toward lower viscosity oils. dexos 1(TM) will eventually be offered in several viscosity grades in accordance with engine needs: SAE 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30. Using the right viscosity grade oil is critical for proper engine performance. Always refer to the Maintenance section of a vehicle Owner Manual for the proper viscosity grade for the engine being serviced. GM Oil Life System in Conjunction With dexos (TM) Supports Extended Oil Change Intervals To help conserve oil while maintaining engine protection, many GM vehicles are equipped with the GM Oil Life System. This system can provide oil change intervals that exceed the traditional 3,000 mile (4,830 km) recommendation. The dexos (TM) specification, with its requirements for improved oil robustness, compliments the GM Oil Life System by supporting extended oil change intervals over the lifetime of a vehicle. If all GM customers with GM Oil Life System equipped vehicles would use the system as intended, GM estimates that more than 100 million gallons of oil could be saved annually. GM dexos 2(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 2(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 2763 The dexos (TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos (TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos (TM)specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 2(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Specification - dexos 2(TM) is approved and recommended by GM for use in Europe starting in model year 2010 vehicles, regardless of where the vehicle was manufactured. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European gasoline engines. Important The Duramax(TM) diesel engine is the exception and requires lubricants meeting specification CJ-4. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European light-duty diesel engines and replaces GM-LL-B-025 and GM-LL-A-025. - dexos 2(TM) protects diesel engines from harmful soot deposits and is designed with limits on certain chemical components to prolong catalyst life and protect expensive emission reduction systems. It is a robust oil, resisting degradation between oil changes and maintaining optimum performance longer. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 2764 Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Engine Oil Capacity INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-007 Date: March 14, 2008 Subject: Updated Engine Oil Capacity for 3.4L Engine (RPO LNJ) Models: 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) The purpose of this bulletin is to update the Engine Oil Capacities for the 3.4L V6 Engine (RPO LNJ) found in the Chevrolet Equinox and Pontiac Torrent. The engine oil capacity with an oil filter replacement has been revised to 4.3 L (4.5 qts). The original capacity was 3.8L (4.0 qts). This revision has been made in the Maintenance and Lubrication, Approximate Fluid Capacities and Engine Mechanical- 3.4L, Engine Mechanical Specifications sections of SI. This change also applies to the Owners Manual. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications This capacity has been updated by TSB 08-06-01-007. Engine Oil with Filter ............................................................................................................................ ............................................... 4.5 quarts (4.3 liters) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2767 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE OIL TYPE Look for two things: 1.GM6094M Your vehicle's engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M. 2.SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst symbol on the container. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). You should look for this information on the oil container, and use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. NOTICE: Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty. GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below -20°F (-29°C), it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures. ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you will need for good performance and engine protection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2768 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Position the oil drain pan under the engine oil drain plug. 3. Remove the engine oil drain plug. 4. Clean and inspect the engine oil drain plug, replace if necessary. 5. Clean and inspect the engine oil drain plug sealing surface on the oil pan, repair or replace oil pan if necessary. 6. Remove the oil filter. 7. Clean and inspect the oil filter sealing area on the oil filter adapter, repair or replace if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Lightly oil the replacement oil filter gasket with clean oil. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2769 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the new oil filter. ^ Tighten the filter to 3/4 to 1 full turn, after the oil filter gasket contacts the oil filter mounting surface. 3. Install the engine oil drain plug. ^ Tighten the plug to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the oil drain pan. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2770 6. Remove the oil fill cap from the rocker arm cover. 7. Fill the engine with new engine oil. 8. Install the oil fill cap to the rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Information not provided by manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2775 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications POWER STEERING SYSTEM GM Power Steering Fluid GM P/N 89021184 (Canadian P/N 89021186) or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment Bulletin No.: 08-01-38-001 Date: January 25, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Information On New GE-48800 CoolTech Refrigerant Recovery/Recharge Equipment Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Attention: This bulletin is being issued to announce the release of GM approved Air Conditioning (A/C) Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging Equipment that meets the new Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2788 Refrigerant Recovery Standards. The ACR2000 (J-43600) cannot be manufactured in its current state after December 2007 and will be superseded by GE-48800. The new J2788 standard does not require that GM Dealers replace their ACR2000 units. ACR2000's currently in use are very capable of servicing today's refrigerant systems when used correctly and can continue to be used. Details regarding the new SAE J2788 standard are outlined in GM Bulletin 07-01-38-004. Effective February 1 2008, new A/C Refrigerant Recovery/Recharging equipment (P/N GE-48800) will be released as a required replacement for the previously essential ACR2000 (J-43600). This equipment is SAE J2788 compliant and meets GM requirements for A/C Refrigerant System Repairs on all General Motors vehicles, including Hybrid systems with Polyolester (POE) refrigerant oil. This equipment will not be shipped as an essential tool to GM Dealerships. In addition, this equipment is Hybrid compliant and designed to prevent oil cross contamination when servicing Hybrid vehicles with Electric A/C Compressors that use POE refrigerant oil. The ACR2000 (J-43600) will need to be retrofitted with a J-43600-50 (Hose - ACR2000 Oil Flush Loop) to be able to perform Hybrid A/C service work. All Hybrid dealers will receive the J-43600-50, with installation instructions, as a component of the Hybrid essential tool package. Dealerships that do not sell Hybrids, but may need to service Hybrids, can obtain J-43600-50 from SPX Kent Moore. Refer to GM Bulletin 08-01-39-001 for the ACR2000 Hose Flush procedure. The High Voltage (HV) electric A/C compressor used on Two Mode Hybrid vehicles uses a Polyolester (POE) refrigerant oil instead of a Polyalkylene Glycol (PAG) synthetic refrigerant oil. This is due to the better electrical resistance of the POE oil and its ability to provide HV isolation. Failure to flush the hoses before adding refrigerant to a Hybrid vehicle with an electric A/C compressor may result in an unacceptable amount of PAG oil entering the refrigerant system. It may cause a Battery Energy Control Module Hybrid Battery Voltage System Isolation Lost Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC P1AE7) to be set. Additionally, the A/C system warranty will be voided. Warranty Submission Requirements The Electronically Generated Repair Data (snapshot summary) and printer functions have been eliminated from the GE-48800. The VGA display and temperature probes were eliminated to reduce equipment costs. As a result, effective immediately the 18 digit "Snapshot/Charge Summary" code is no longer required for Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant system repairs that are submitted for warranty reimbursement. The charge summary data from before and after system repairs will continue to required, but documented on the repair order only. Both high and low pressures and the recovery and charge amounts should be noted during the repair and entered on the repair order. If using ACR2000 (J-43600), the "Snapshot/Charge Summary" printouts should continue to be attached to the shops copy of the repair order. The labor codes that are affected by this requirement are D3000 through D4500. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment > Page 2780 Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Contaminated R134A Refrigerant Bulletin No.: 06-01-39-007 Date: July 25, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Contaminated R134a Refrigerant Found on Market for Automotive Air-Conditioning Systems Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2007 and Prior Saab 9-7X Attention: This bulletin should be directed to the Service Manager as well as the Parts Manager. Commercially Available Contaminated R134a Refrigerant Impurities have been found in new commercially available containers of R134a. High levels of contaminates may cause decreased performance, and be detrimental to some air-conditioning components. Accompanying these contaminates has been high levels of moisture. Tip: Excessive moisture may cause system concerns such as orifice tube freeze-up and reduced performance. Industry Reaction: New Industry Purity Standards Due to the potential availability of these lower quality refrigerants, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), and the Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Industry (ARI) are in the process of instituting reliable standards that will be carried on the labels of future R134a refrigerant containers. This identifying symbol will be your assurance of a product that conforms to the minimum standard for OEM Automotive Air-Conditioning use. How Can You Protect Yourself Today? It is recommended to use GM or ACDelco(R) sourced refrigerants for all A/C repair work. These refrigerants meet General Motors own internal standards for quality and purity, insuring that your completed repairs are as good as the way it left the factory. Parts Information The part numbers shown are available through GMSPO or ACDelco(R). The nearest ACDelco(R) distributor in your area can be found by calling 1-800-223-3526 (U.S. Only). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment > Page 2781 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant System Capacities Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2784 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Air Conditioning Refrigerant ....................................................................................................................... R134a P/N 12356150 U.S. (10953485 Canada) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2785 Refrigerant: Service and Repair REFRIGERANT RECOVERY AND RECHARGING TOOLS REQUIRED J 43600 ACR 2000 Air Conditioning Service Center CAUTION: - Avoid breathing the A/C Refrigerant 134a (R-134a) and the lubricant vapor or the mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose, and throat. Work in a well ventilated area. In order to remove R-134a from the A/C system, use service equipment that is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J 2210 (R-134a recycling equipment). If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before continuing service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. - For personal protection, goggles and gloves should be worn and a clean cloth wrapped around fittings, valves, and connections when doing work that includes opening the refrigerant system. If R-134a comes in contact with any part of the body severe frostbite and personal injury can result. The exposed area should be flushed immediately with cold water and prompt medical help should be obtained. NOTE: - R-134a is the only approved refrigerant for use in this vehicle. The use of any other refrigerant may result in poor system performance or component failure. - To avoid system damage use only R-134a dedicated tools when servicing the A/C system. - Use only Polyalkylene Glycol Synthetic Refrigerant Oil (PAG) for internal circulation through the R-134a A/C system and only 525 viscosity mineral oil on fitting threads and O-rings. If lubricants other than those specified are used, compressor failure and/or fitting seizure may result. - R-12 refrigerant and R-134a refrigerant must never be mixed, even in the smallest of amounts, as they are incompatible with each other. If the refrigerants are mixed, compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer to the manufacturer instructions included with the service equipment before servicing. The J 43600 is a complete air conditioning service center for R-134a. The ACR 2000 recovers, recycles, evacuates and recharges A/C refrigerant quickly, accurately and automatically. The unit has a display screen that contains the function controls and displays prompts that will lead the technician through the recover, recycle, evacuate and recharge operations. R-134a is recovered into and charged out of an internal storage vessel. The ACR 2000 automatically replenishes this vessel from an external source tank in order to maintain a constant 5.45-6.82 kg (12-15 lbs) of A/C refrigerant. The ACR 2000 has a built in A/C refrigerant identifier that will test for contamination, prior to recovery and will notify the technician if there are foreign gases present in the A/C system. If foreign gases are present, the ACR 2000 will not recover the refrigerant from the A/C system. The ACR 2000 also features automatic air purge, single pass recycling and an automatic oil drain. Refer to the J 43600 ACR 2000 manual for operation and setup instruction. Always recharge the A/C System with the proper amount of R-134a. Refer to Refrigerant System Capacities for the correct amount. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - New PAG Oil Refrigerant Oil: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - New PAG Oil Bulletin No.: 02-01-39-004B Date: November 16, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: New PAG Oil Released Models: 2006 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Built With R-134a Refrigeration System All Air Conditioning Compressor Types (Excluding R4 and A6 Type Compressors) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to change the PAG oil part number used for R4 and A6 compressors with R-134a refrigerant systems. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-01-39-004A (Section 01 - HVAC). All General Motors vehicles built with R-134a refrigerant systems shall now be serviced with GM Universal PAG Oil (excluding vehicles equipped with an R4 or A6 compressor). R4 and A6 compressors with R-134a refrigerant systems shall use PAG OIL, GM P/N 12356151 (A/C Delco part number 15-118) (in Canada, use P/N 10953486). Important: The PAG oil referenced in this bulletin is formulated with specific additive packages that meet General Motors specifications and use of another oil may void the A/C systems warranty. Use this new PAG oil when servicing the A/C system on the vehicles listed above. Oil packaged in an 8 oz tube should be installed using A/C Oil Injector, J 45037. Refer to the HVAC Section of Service Information for detailed information on Oil Balancing and Capacities. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL CAPACITIES ABRUPT REFRIGERANT LOSS .................................................................................................................................................. 65 ml (2.20 ounces) NOTE: Abrupt refrigerant loss due to a large leak, hose rupture, collision, or pressure relief valve opening. Conditions that allow the refrigerant to seep or bleed off over time do not cause this oil loss. Upon replacement of a component that caused a large refrigerant loss, also add the required amount of oil for the particular component. COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT The Zexel model DKS17DS service compressor is precharged with the specified amount of PAG oil. .......................................... 74 ml (2.50 ounces) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. CONDENSER REPLACEMENT WITH RECEIVER DEHYDRATOR ............................................................................................................................................. 60 ml (2.0 ounces) WITHOUT RECEIVER DEHYDRATOR ..................................................................................................................................... 30 ml (1.0 ounces) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. EVAPORATOR REPLACEMENT .................................................................................................................................................. 30 ml (1.0 ounces) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. RECEIVER DEHYDRATOR REPLACEMENT ............................................................................................................................ 30 ml (1.0 ounces) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. THERMAL EXPANSION VALVE REPLACEMENT ................................................................................................................ 20 ml (0.75 ounces) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. TOTAL SYSTEM PAG OIL CAPACITY ................................................................................................................................... 130 ml (4.40 ounces) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2792 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL Polyalkylene glycol (PAG) Oil ................................................................................................................ GM P/N 12378526 (Canadian P/N 88900060) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2793 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair A/C REFRIGERANT SYSTEM OIL CHARGE REPLENISHING If oil was removed from the A/C system during the recovery process or due to component replacement, the oil must be replenished. Oil can be added to the system by pouring the correct amount into the replaced component or into an open refrigerant line. For the proper quantities of oil to add to the A/C refrigerant system, refer to Refrigerant System Capacities. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure ABS Automated Bleed Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Before performing the antilock brake system (ABS) Automated Bleed Procedure, first perform a manual or pressure bleed of the base brake system. The automated bleed procedure is recommended when one of the following conditions exist: ^ Base brake system bleeding does not achieve the desired pedal height or feel ^ Extreme loss of brake fluid has occurred ^ Air ingestion is suspected in the secondary circuits of the brake modulator assembly The ABS Automated Bleed Procedure uses a scan tool to cycle the system solenoid valves and run the pump in order to purge any air from the secondary circuits. These circuits are normally closed off, and are only opened during system initialization at vehicle start up and during ABS operation. The automated bleed procedure opens these secondary circuits and allows any air trapped in these circuits to flow out toward the brake corners. Automated Bleed Procedure 1. Notice: The Auto Bleed Procedure may be terminated at any time during the process by pressing the EXIT button. No further Scan Tool prompts pertaining to the Auto Bleed procedure will be given. After exiting the bleed procedure, relieve bleed pressure and disconnect bleed equipment per manufacturers instructions. Failure to properly relieve pressure may result in spilled brake fluid causing damage to components and painted surfaces. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove all 4 tire and wheel assemblies. 3. Inspect the brake system for leaks and visual damage. Repair or replace components as needed. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Inspect the battery state of charge. 6. Install a scan tool. 7. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 8. With the scan tool, establish communications with the ABS system. Select Special Functions. Select Automated Bleed from the Special Functions menu. 9. Raise and support the vehicle. 10. Following the directions given on the scan tool, pressure bleed the base brake system. 11. Follow the scan tool directions until the desired brake pedal height is achieved. 12. If the bleed procedure is aborted, a malfunction exists. Perform the following steps before resuming the bleed procedure: ^ If a DTC is detected, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle, and diagnose the appropriate DTC. ^ If the brake pedal feels spongy, perform the conventional brake bleed procedure again. 13. When the desired pedal height is achieved, press the brake pedal to inspect for firmness. 14. Lower the vehicle. 15. Remove the scan tool. 16. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. 17. Inspect the brake fluid level. 18. Road test the vehicle while inspecting that the pedal remains high and firm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 2798 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding Manual Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to catch brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, or if you have disconnected the brake pipes from the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, you must perform the following steps to bleed air at the ports of the hydraulic component: 1. If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the brake pipes installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly, loosen and separate one of the brake pipes from the port of the component. For the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, perform these steps in the sequence of system flow; begin with the fluid feed pipes from the master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the component. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the component and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the component. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the component. 9. With the brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly - after all air has been purged from the first port of the component that was bled - loosen and separate the next brake pipe from the component, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8, until each of the ports on the component has been bled. 10. After completing the final component port bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the brake pipe-to-component fittings are properly tightened. 4. Ensure the brake master cylinder reservoir remains at least half-full during this bleeding procedure. Add fluid as needed to maintain the proper level.Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 6. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 7. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 8. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. 9. Tighten the bleeder valve, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 10. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 8-10 until all air is purged from the same wheel hydraulic circuit. 11. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 12. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 13. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 14. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 15. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit - install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 17. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 18. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. 19. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleeding procedure again. If the brake pedal still feels spongy after repeating the bleeding procedure, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. 2. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system in order to purge any air that may still be trapped in the system. 20. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. 21. Important: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 2799 Pressure Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) ^ Tools Required J 29532 Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent - J 44894-A Brake Pressure Bleeder Adapter Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to catch brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal becomes firm, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, or if you have disconnected the brake pipes from the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, you must perform the following steps to bleed air at the ports of the hydraulic component: 1. If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the brake pipes installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly, loosen and separate one of the brake pipes from the port of the component. For the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, perform these steps in the sequence of system flow; begin with the fluid feed pipes from the master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the component. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the component and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the component. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the component. 9. With the brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly - after all air has been purged from the first port of the component that was bled - loosen and separate the next brake pipe from the component, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8, until each of the ports on the component has been bled. 10. After completing the final component port bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the brake pipe-to-component fittings are properly tightened. 4. Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install the J 44894-A to the brake master cylinder reservoir. 6. Connect the J 29532 , or equivalent, to the J 44894-A. 7. Charge the J 29532 , or equivalent, air tank to 175-205 kPa (25-30 psi). 8. Open the J 29532 , or equivalent, fluid tank valve to allow pressurized brake fluid to enter the brake system. 9. Wait approximately 30 seconds, then inspect the entire hydraulic brake system in order to ensure that there are no existing external brake fluid leaks. Any brake fluid leaks identified require repair prior to completing this procedure. 10. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 11. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 12. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. Allow fluid to flow until air bubbles stop flowing from the bleeder, then tighten the bleeder valve. 13. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 14. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 15. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 17. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit - install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 18. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 19. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 20. Close the J 29532 , or equivalent, fluid tank valve, then disconnect the J 29532 , or equivalent, from the J 44894-A. 21. Remove the J 44894-A from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 22. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. 23. If the brake pedal feels spongy perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. 2. If equipped with Antilock Brakes, using a scan tool, perform the antilock brake system automated bleeding procedure to remove any air that may have been trapped in the BPMV. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 2800 24. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. 25. Important: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 2801 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Secure the mounting flange of the brake master cylinder in a bench vise so that the rear of the primary piston is accessible. 2. Remove the cap from the hose nipple on the master cylinder reservoir. 3. Install suitable fittings to the master cylinder ports that match the type of flare seat required and also provide for hose attachment. 4. Install transparent hoses to the fittings, then route the hoses into the master cylinder reservoir. 5. Ensure that the ends of the transparent hoses running into the reservoir are fully submerged in the brake fluid. 6. Using a smooth, round-ended tool, depress and release the primary piston as far as it will travel, a depth of about 25 mm (1 inch), several times. Observe the flow of fluid coming from the ports. As air is bled from the primary and secondary pistons, the effort required to depress the primary piston will increase and the amount of travel will decrease. 7. Continue to depress and release the primary piston until fluid flows freely from the ports with no evidence of air bubbles. 8. Remove the transparent hoses from the reservoir. 9. Install the cap to the hose nipple on the reservoir, to prevent fluid loss and contamination. 10. Remove the fittings with the transparent hoses from the master cylinder ports. Wrap the master cylinder with a clean shop cloth to prevent brake fluid spills. 11. Remove the master cylinder from the vise. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2806 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2807 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2808 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2809 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2810 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2811 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2812 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2813 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2814 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2815 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2816 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2817 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2818 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2819 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2820 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2821 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2822 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2823 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center, then remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2824 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the I/P module connector. 7. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2825 2. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2826 5. Locate And Remove The Air Bag Fuse From The Body Control Module Fuse Center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - right, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the right rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2827 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - RF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - RF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - right, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2828 3. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2829 10. Connect the SIS - RF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 8 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2830 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the upper rear window molding. 7. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 9. Remove the rear coat hooks. 10. Gently pull down the right rear corner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 11. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2831 13. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 14. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 15. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 16. Remove the CPA from the I/P module connector. 17. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. 18. Remove the CPA from the steering wheel module coil connector. 19. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2832 20. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 21. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 22. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 23. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 24. Remove the CPA from the roof rail module - left connector. 25. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2833 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 5. Install the lower center pillar trim. 6. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 7. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2834 8. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 9. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 10. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 13. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 14. Install the rear coat hooks. 15. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 2835 16. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 17. Install the upper rear window molding. 18. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 19. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 20. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 21. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Fuse: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Bulletin No.: 07-08-45-002 Date: September 05, 2007 ADVANCED SERVICE INFORMATION Subject: Service Alert: Concerns With Aftermarket Fuses in GM Vehicles Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X Concerns with Harbor Freight Tools "Storehouse" Branded Blade Type Fuses General Motors has become aware of a fuse recall by Harbor Freight Tools/Storehouse for a variety of aftermarket fuses. In two cases, these fuses have not provided protection for the wiring system of the vehicles they were customer installed in. Upon testing the 15 amp version, it was found that the fuse still would not "open" when shorted directly across the battery terminals. How to Identify These Fuses Packed in a 120 piece set, the fuse has a translucent, hard plastic, blue body with the amperage stamped into the top. There are no white painted numbers on the fuse to indicate amperage. There are no identifying marks on the fuse to tell who is making it. The fuses are known to be distributed by Harbor Freight Tools but there may be other marketers, and packaging of this style of fuse. It would be prudent to replace these fuses if found in a customers vehicle. Likewise, if wiring overheating is found you should check the fuse panel for the presence of this style of fuse. All GM dealers should use genuine GM fuses on the vehicles they service. You should also encourage the use of GM fuses to your customers to assure they are getting the required electrical system protection. GM has no knowledge of any concerns with other aftermarket fuses. If additional information becomes available, this bulletin will be updated. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block Fuse: Locations Underhood Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 2843 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 2844 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 2845 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 2846 Fuse: Locations I/P Fuse Block Label Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 2847 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 2848 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2851 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2852 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2853 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2854 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2855 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2856 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2857 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2858 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2859 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2860 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2861 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2862 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2863 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2864 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2865 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2866 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2867 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2868 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2869 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2870 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2871 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2872 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2873 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2874 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2875 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2876 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2877 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2878 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2879 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2880 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2881 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2882 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2883 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2884 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2885 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2886 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2887 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2888 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2889 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2890 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2891 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2892 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2893 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2894 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2895 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2896 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2897 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2898 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2899 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2900 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2901 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2902 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2903 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2904 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2905 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2906 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2907 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2908 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2909 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2910 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2911 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2912 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2913 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2914 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2915 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2916 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2917 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2918 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2919 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2920 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2921 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2922 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2923 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block Fuse: Application and ID Underhood Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 2926 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 2927 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 2928 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 2929 Fuse: Application and ID I/P Fuse Block Label Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 2930 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 2931 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2936 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2937 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2938 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2939 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2940 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2941 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2942 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2943 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2944 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2945 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2946 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2947 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2948 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2949 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2950 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2951 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2952 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2953 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2954 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2955 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2956 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2957 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2958 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2959 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2960 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2961 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2962 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2963 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2964 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2965 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2966 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2967 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2968 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2969 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2970 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2971 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2972 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2973 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2974 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2975 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2976 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2977 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2978 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2979 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2980 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2981 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2982 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2983 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2984 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2985 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2986 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2987 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2988 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2989 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2990 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2991 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2992 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2993 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2994 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2995 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2996 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2997 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2998 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2999 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3000 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3001 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3002 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3003 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3004 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3005 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3006 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3007 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3008 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3009 Fuse Block: Connector Views Fuse Block - Underhood C1 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3010 Fuse Block - Underhood C1 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3011 Fuse Block - Underhood C2 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3012 Fuse Block - Underhood C2 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3013 Fuse Block - Underhood C3 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3014 Fuse Block - Underhood C3 (Part 2) Fuse Block - Underhood C4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3015 Fuse Block - Underhood C5 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3016 I/P Fuse Block - I/P C1 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3017 I/P Fuse Block - I/P C1 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3018 I/P Fuse Block - I/P C1 (Part 3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3019 I/P Fuse Block - I/P C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3020 Fuse Block - I/P C3 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3021 Fuse Block - I/P C3 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3022 Fuse Block - I/P C3 (Part 3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Fuse Block: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition OFF. IMPORTANT: Record all preset radio stations. 2. Remove the screws from the battery cooling box. Remove the battery cover. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the positive battery cable. 5. Remove the console. 6. Remove the nut holding the following fuse block connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4): - The body 68-way connector (1) - The I/P 68-way connector (2) - The I/P 24-way connector (3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 3025 7. Remove the bolt holding the fuse block into place. 8. Remove the ground wire (1). 9. Remove the fuse block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuse block and attach the ground wire (1) and attach the bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 3026 2. Connect the harness connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4). Tighten the connectors to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the console. 4. Connect the positive battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the battery cooling box cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 7. Set the radio stations to the preset selections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 3027 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the underhood accessory wiring junction block cover. 3. Remove the nut at the end of the fuse block and remove both the positive battery cable and the EPS cable. 4. Loosen the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block until the block can be lifted off the connectors. 5. Remove the I/P connectors (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 3028 6. Pull up on each of the following 68-way connectors until they come out. IMPORTANT: All 3 fuse block 68-way connectors are held into place to the fuse block case by push-in retainers. 1. Fuse block case (1) 2. Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) 3. Engine 68-way connector (3) 4. I/P 68-way connector (4) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each of the following 68-way connectors into its proper location. - Fuse block case (1) - Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) - Engine 68-way connector (3) - I/P 68-way connector (4) 2. Push down on each connector until it is fully secured into the fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 3029 3. Connect the I/P connectors (2). 4. Tighten the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the underhood accessory wiring junction block harness retaining bolts (1) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 5. Reconnect the positive battery cable and EPS at the end of the fuse block with the nut. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the fuse box cover. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block Relay Box: Application and ID Underhood Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 3034 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 3035 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 3036 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 3037 Relay Box: Application and ID I/P Fuse Block Label Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 3038 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 3039 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Relay Box: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition OFF. IMPORTANT: Record all preset radio stations. 2. Remove the screws from the battery cooling box. Remove the battery cover. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the positive battery cable. 5. Remove the console. 6. Remove the nut holding the following fuse block connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4): - The body 68-way connector (1) - The I/P 68-way connector (2) - The I/P 24-way connector (3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 3042 7. Remove the bolt holding the fuse block into place. 8. Remove the ground wire (1). 9. Remove the fuse block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuse block and attach the ground wire (1) and attach the bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 3043 2. Connect the harness connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4). Tighten the connectors to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the console. 4. Connect the positive battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the battery cooling box cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 7. Set the radio stations to the preset selections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 3044 Relay Box: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the underhood accessory wiring junction block cover. 3. Remove the nut at the end of the fuse block and remove both the positive battery cable and the EPS cable. 4. Loosen the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block until the block can be lifted off the connectors. 5. Remove the I/P connectors (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 3045 6. Pull up on each of the following 68-way connectors until they come out. IMPORTANT: All 3 fuse block 68-way connectors are held into place to the fuse block case by push-in retainers. 1. Fuse block case (1) 2. Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) 3. Engine 68-way connector (3) 4. I/P 68-way connector (4) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each of the following 68-way connectors into its proper location. - Fuse block case (1) - Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) - Engine 68-way connector (3) - I/P 68-way connector (4) 2. Push down on each connector until it is fully secured into the fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 3046 3. Connect the I/P connectors (2). 4. Tighten the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the underhood accessory wiring junction block harness retaining bolts (1) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 5. Reconnect the positive battery cable and EPS at the end of the fuse block with the nut. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the fuse box cover. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3052 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3053 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3054 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3055 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3056 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3057 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation This vehicle is not equipped with a factory installed Tire Pressure Monitor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation SERVICE VEHICLE SOON INDICATOR The "SERVICE VEHICLE SOON" light, (if equipped) will come on if there are certain non-emission related vehicle problems. These problems may not be obvious and may affect vehicle performance or durability. The light will come on briefly when the ignition is turned on to show that it is working properly. This light does NOT come on at certain mileage intervals. There is probably a PCM or a BCM Code set that will aid you in diagnosis. RESET PROCEDURE The only way to get the light to go off is to clear the PCM or BCM code(s). This light can NOT be reset or shut off any other way. PCM/BCM codes should be read & repaired before clearing them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) OPERATION The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located in the instrument panel cluster. The MIL will display as either SERVICE ENGINE SOON or one of the following symbols when commanded ON: The MIL indicates that an emissions related fault has occurred and vehicle service is required. The following is a list of the modes of operation for the MIL: - The MIL illuminates when the ignition is turned ON, with the engine OFF. This is a bulb test to ensure that the MIL is able to illuminate. - The MIL turns OFF after the engine is started if a diagnostic fault is not present. - The MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started if the control module detects a fault. A DTC is stored any time the control module illuminates the MIL due to an emissions related fault. The MIL turns OFF after 3 consecutive ignition cycles in which a Test Passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. - The MIL flashes if the control module detects a misfire condition which could damage the catalytic converter. - When the MIL is illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated as long as the ignition is ON. - When the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition is cycled OFF and then ON. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair ENGINE OIL LIFE SYSTEM WHEN TO CHANGE ENGINE OIL Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is changed. When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary. A "change engine oil" light will come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. HOW TO RESET THE ENGINE OIL LIFE SYSTEM The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a change engine oil light being turned on, reset the system. 1. Turn the ignition key to "RUN" with the engine off. 2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three times within five seconds. The "change engine oil" light will flash while the system is resetting. 3. Turn the key to "LOCK". If the change engine oil light comes back on and stays on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure. WHAT TO DO WITH USED OIL Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's warnings about the use and disposal of oil products. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions Vehicle Lifting: Service Precautions CAUTION: - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Information Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair General Information LIFTING AND JACKING THE VEHICLE CAUTION: - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. NOTE: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: - Remove or secure all of the vehicle's contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. - The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. - The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment's manufacturer. - Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. - Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle's contents. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Information > Page 3073 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. Notice: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: * Remove or secure all of the vehicle's contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment's manufacturer. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle's contents. Vehicle Lifting-Frame Contact Lift Front Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the front lift pads approximately 12.2 in (310 mm) inboard from the front pinchweld flanges. Rear Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the rear lift pads 10.0 in (255 mm) inboard from the rear pinchweld flanges. Vehicle Jacking Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Information > Page 3074 Under the Center of the Rear Suspension Lift the rear of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad at the center of the rear suspension. Supporting the Vehicle with Jackstands Important: Place jackstands ONLY under strong and stable vehicle structures. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3089 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3090 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Minimizing Damage to TPM Sensors INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-007 Date: May 16, 2008 Subject: Minimizing Damage to Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Sensors During Tire Mounting/Dismounting Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors Minimizing Damage To TPM Sensors All GM vehicles now in production and sold in the U.S., as well as many vehicles sold in Canada, feature Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems that have valve stem mounted Tire Pressure Sensors. When dismounting and mounting tires, care must be taken when breaking the bead loose from the wheel. If the tire machines bead breaking fixture is positioned too close to the tire pressure sensor, as the tire bead breaks away from the wheel it may be forced into, or catch on the edge of the tire pressure sensor. This can damage the sensor and require the sensor to be replaced. Care must also be taken when transferring the tire bead to the other side of the wheel rim. As the tire machine rotates and the tire bead is stretched around the wheel rim, the bead can come in contact with the sensor if it is not correctly positioned in relation to the mounting/dismounting head prior to tire mounting/dismounting. This can also cause sensor damage requiring replacement. Procedure Notice: Use a tire changing machine in order to dismount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or the wheel rim could result. Notice: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. 1. Remove the valve core from the valve stem. 2. Deflate the tire completely. Important: Rim-clamp European-type tire changers are recommended. 3. Use the tire changer in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Follow steps 4-7 to remove the tire from the wheel. 4. When separating the tire bead from the wheel position the bead breaking fixture 90, 180 and 270 degrees from the valve stem. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3091 5. Position the wheel and tire so the valve stem is situated at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the outer tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 6. Position the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated again at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the inner tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 7. Remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting on vehicles equipped with TPM replace the tire pressure sensor. 8. Use a wire brush or coarse steel wool in order to remove any rubber, light rust or corrosion from the wheel bead seats. Important: If bead seat corrosion has been identified as an air loss concern on the wheel being worked on, refer to GM Service Bulletin # 08-03-10-006 for additional information on correcting the leak. 9. Apply GM P/N 12345884 (in Canada, P/N 5728223) or equivalent to the tire bead and the wheel rim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3092 10. Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the inside of the wheel rim. 11. Position the rim so that the valve stem (1) is situated at the 3 o'clock position relative to the head (2). This will protect the sensor when the bottom bead seats. 12. After the bottom bead is on the wheel, reposition the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated at the 9 o'clock position relative to the head. This will protect the sensor while mounting the tire bead to the outside of the wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3093 13. Use the tire changer in order to install the tire to the wheel. Caution: To avoid serious personal injury, do not stand over tire when inflating. The bead may break when the bead snaps over the safety hump. Do not exceed 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure when inflating any tire if beads are not seated. If 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure will not seat the beads, deflate, lubricate the beads and reinflate. Overinflating may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. Important: Allowable bead seating pressure is 345 kPa (50 psi) on Extended Mobility Tires. 14. Inflate the tire until it passes the bead humps. Be sure that the valve core is not installed at this time. 15. Install the valve core to the valve core stem. 16. Inflate the tire to the proper air pressure. 17. Ensure that the locating rings are visible on both sides of the tire in order to verify that the tire bead is fully seated on the wheel. Parts Information The product shown above is available from GM SPO. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3099 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3100 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3101 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3102 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3103 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3104 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation This vehicle is not equipped with a factory installed Tire Pressure Monitor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3117 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3118 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Minimizing Damage to TPM Sensors INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-007 Date: May 16, 2008 Subject: Minimizing Damage to Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Sensors During Tire Mounting/Dismounting Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors Minimizing Damage To TPM Sensors All GM vehicles now in production and sold in the U.S., as well as many vehicles sold in Canada, feature Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems that have valve stem mounted Tire Pressure Sensors. When dismounting and mounting tires, care must be taken when breaking the bead loose from the wheel. If the tire machines bead breaking fixture is positioned too close to the tire pressure sensor, as the tire bead breaks away from the wheel it may be forced into, or catch on the edge of the tire pressure sensor. This can damage the sensor and require the sensor to be replaced. Care must also be taken when transferring the tire bead to the other side of the wheel rim. As the tire machine rotates and the tire bead is stretched around the wheel rim, the bead can come in contact with the sensor if it is not correctly positioned in relation to the mounting/dismounting head prior to tire mounting/dismounting. This can also cause sensor damage requiring replacement. Procedure Notice: Use a tire changing machine in order to dismount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or the wheel rim could result. Notice: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. 1. Remove the valve core from the valve stem. 2. Deflate the tire completely. Important: Rim-clamp European-type tire changers are recommended. 3. Use the tire changer in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Follow steps 4-7 to remove the tire from the wheel. 4. When separating the tire bead from the wheel position the bead breaking fixture 90, 180 and 270 degrees from the valve stem. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3119 5. Position the wheel and tire so the valve stem is situated at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the outer tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 6. Position the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated again at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the inner tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 7. Remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting on vehicles equipped with TPM replace the tire pressure sensor. 8. Use a wire brush or coarse steel wool in order to remove any rubber, light rust or corrosion from the wheel bead seats. Important: If bead seat corrosion has been identified as an air loss concern on the wheel being worked on, refer to GM Service Bulletin # 08-03-10-006 for additional information on correcting the leak. 9. Apply GM P/N 12345884 (in Canada, P/N 5728223) or equivalent to the tire bead and the wheel rim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3120 10. Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the inside of the wheel rim. 11. Position the rim so that the valve stem (1) is situated at the 3 o'clock position relative to the head (2). This will protect the sensor when the bottom bead seats. 12. After the bottom bead is on the wheel, reposition the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated at the 9 o'clock position relative to the head. This will protect the sensor while mounting the tire bead to the outside of the wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3121 13. Use the tire changer in order to install the tire to the wheel. Caution: To avoid serious personal injury, do not stand over tire when inflating. The bead may break when the bead snaps over the safety hump. Do not exceed 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure when inflating any tire if beads are not seated. If 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure will not seat the beads, deflate, lubricate the beads and reinflate. Overinflating may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. Important: Allowable bead seating pressure is 345 kPa (50 psi) on Extended Mobility Tires. 14. Inflate the tire until it passes the bead humps. Be sure that the valve core is not installed at this time. 15. Install the valve core to the valve core stem. 16. Inflate the tire to the proper air pressure. 17. Ensure that the locating rings are visible on both sides of the tire in order to verify that the tire bead is fully seated on the wheel. Parts Information The product shown above is available from GM SPO. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3126 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3127 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3128 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3129 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3130 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-03-16-001 > Jul > 10 > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tires: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-001F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Puncture Repair Procedures For All Cars and Light Duty Trucks Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001E (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin covers puncture repair procedures for passenger car and light duty truck radial tires in the tread area only. The tire manufacturer must be contacted for its individual repair policy and whether or not the speed rating is retained after repair. Caution - Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall. - Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while repairing tires. - NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads. Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. - NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation. Repairable area on a radial tire. Important - NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32") remaining depth). - NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4"). - NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair. - NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel). - Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair. - Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury. - Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and repair tools/repair material recommendations. Three basic steps for tire puncture repair: 1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3140 2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent air loss. External Inspection 1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak by using a water and soap solution. Mark the injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core. 2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader. Internal Inspection 1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4. Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5. Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4") should not be repaired. Cleaning 1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool. 2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow guidelines for handling and disposal. Clean the Injury Channel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3141 1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended reaming tool(s). Fill the Injury 1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. (For combination repair/plug units skip this step.) Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug per repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just above the inside tire surface. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection. Repair Unit Selection Important Do not install the repair unit in this step. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3142 1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit selection. Buffing 1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine wire brush or gritted rasp. 2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool. Cementing Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures. Repair Unit Application Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3143 1. The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed (Do not spread the beads excessively). Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units 1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out. 3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread. Combination Repair/Plug Units 1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2. Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions. 2. Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool. Safety Cage Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3144 Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. Final Inspection 1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - OFF Vehicle. For additional tire puncture repair information, contact: Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-03-10-020C > Apr > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-020C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-020B (Section 03 - Suspension). GM's Position on the Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires General Motors does not oppose the use of purified nitrogen as an inflation gas for tires. We expect the theoretical benefits to be reduced in practical use due to the lack of an existing infrastructure to continuously facilitate inflating tires with nearly pure nitrogen. Even occasional inflation with compressed atmospheric air will negate many of the theoretical benefits. Given those theoretical benefits, practical limitations, and the robust design of GM original equipment TPC tires, the realized benefits to our customer of inflating their tires with purified nitrogen are expected to be minimal. The Promise of Nitrogen: Under Controlled Conditions Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general consumer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. The following benefits under controlled conditions are attributed to nitrogen gas and its unique properties: - A reduction in the expected loss of Tire Pressure over time. - A reduction in the variance of Tire Pressures with temperature changes due to reduction of water vapor concentration. - A reduction of long term rubber degradation due to a decrease in oxygen concentrations. Important These are obtainable performance improvements when relatively pure nitrogen gas is used to inflate tires under controlled conditions. The Promise of Nitrogen: Real World Use Nitrogen inflation can provide some benefit by reducing gas migration (pressure loss) at the molecular level through the tire structure. NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) has stated that the inflation pressure loss of tires can be up to 5% a month. Nitrogen molecules are larger than oxygen molecules and, therefore, are less prone to "seeping" through the tire casing. The actual obtainable benefits of nitrogen vary, based on the physical construction and the materials used in the manufacturing of the tire being inflated. Another potential benefit of nitrogen is the reduced oxidation of tire components. Research has demonstrated that oxygen consumed in the oxidation process of the tire primarily comes from the inflation media. Therefore, it is reasonable to assume that oxidation of tire components can be reduced if the tire is inflated with pure nitrogen. However, only very small amounts of oxygen are required to begin the normal oxidation process. Even slight contamination of the tire inflation gas with compressed atmospheric air during normal inflation pressure maintenance, may negate the benefits of using nitrogen. GM Tire Quality, Technology and Focus of Importance Since 1972, General Motors has designed tires under the TPC (Tire Performance Criteria) specification system, which includes specific requirements that ensure robust tire performance under normal usage. General Motors works with tire suppliers to design and manufacture original equipment tires for GM vehicles. The GM TPC addresses required performance with respect to both inflation pressure retention, and endurance properties for original equipment tires. The inflation pressure retention requirements address availability of oxygen and oxidation concerns, while endurance requirements ensure the mechanical structure of the tire has sufficient strength. This combination has provided our customers with tires that maintain their structural integrity throughout their useful treadlife under normal operating conditions. Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Maintaining the correct inflation pressure allows the tire to perform as intended by the vehicle manufacturer in many areas, including comfort, fuel economy, stopping distance, cornering, traction, treadwear, and noise. Since the load carrying capability of a tire is related to inflation pressure, proper inflation pressure maintenance is necessary for the tire to support the load imposed by the vehicle without excessive structural Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-03-10-020C > Apr > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires > Page 3149 degradation. Important Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-03-16-002A > Apr > 10 > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-03-16-002A > Apr > 10 > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3154 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-03-16-002A > Apr > 10 > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3155 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-03-16-002A > Apr > 10 > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3156 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-03-16-002A > Apr > 10 > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3157 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-03-16-002A > Apr > 10 > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3158 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-03-10-008B > Aug > 09 > Tires - Slight/Mild Edge Feathering Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Slight/Mild Edge Feathering Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-03-10-008B Date: August 13, 2009 Subject: Information on Slight or Mild Tire Feathering and Recommended Practices (Normal Tire Wear Condition) Models: 2006-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-10-008A (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin provides information regarding the normal tire wear condition of slight or mild tire feathering and recommended practices. If a vehicle comes into a dealership with a concern of slight or mild feathering-type wear on the tires, review with the customer their past tire rotation history. Tires should be rotated every 8,000 to 13,000 km (5,000 to 8,000 mi) for applicable vehicles with tires where a tire rotation is possible or recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-015B for information on tire rotation for vehicles with different front/rear tire/wheel sizes. SOME TIRE FEATHERING IS A NORMAL PART OF TIRE WEAR AND THROUGH PROPER TIRE ROTATION AND INFLATION, THIS TIRE WEAR CAN BE MINIMIZED AND TIRE LIFE MAXIMIZED. If the customer has not rotated the tires within the last 8,000 to 13,000 km (5,000 to 8,000 mi), a tire rotation in the modified X-pattern is necessary to clean-up the feathering, rather than placing the vehicle on the alignment machine. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-00-90-002J > Jan > 09 > Tires - Correct Inflation Pressure Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Correct Inflation Pressure Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-00-90-002J Date: January 28, 2009 Subject: Information on Proper Tire Pressure Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3, H3T 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and clarify additional information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-00-90-002I (Section 00 - General Information). Important: ^ Adjustment of tire pressure for a customer with a Low Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light on and no codes in the TPM system is NOT a warrantable repair. Claims to simply adjust the tire pressure will be rejected. ^ ALL tires (including the spare tire) MUST be set to the recommended inflation pressure stated on the vehicle's tire placard (on driver's door) during the PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION (PDI). Recommended inflation pressure is not the pressure printed on tire sidewall. ^ Tires may be over-inflated from the assembly plant due to the mounting process. ^ Generally a 5.6°C (10°F) temperature change will result in (is equivalent to) a 6.9 kPa (1 psi) tire pressure change. ^ 2008-2009 HUMMER H2 Only - The H2 comes standard with Light Truck "D" Load Range tires with a recommended cold inflation pressure of 289 kPa (42 psi). These tires will alert the driver to a low pressure situation at roughly 262 kPa (38 psi) due to a requirement in FMVSS 138 which specifies a Minimum Activation Pressure for each tire type. This creates a relatively narrow window of "usable" pressure values and the warning will be more sensitive to outside temperature changes during the colder months. As with other cold temperature/tire pressure issues, there is nothing wrong with the system itself. If a vehicle is brought in with this concern, check for tire damage and set all tires to the Recommended Cold Inflation Pressure shown on the vehicle placard. Accurate tire pressures ensure the safe handling and appropriate ride characteristics of GM cars and trucks. It is critical that the tire pressure be adjusted to the specifications on the vehicle¡C■s tire placard during PDI. Ride, handling and road noise concerns may be caused by improperly adjusted tire pressure. The first step in the diagnosis of these concerns is to verify that the tires are inflated to the correct pressures. The recommended tire inflation pressure is listed on the vehicle¡C■s tire placard. The tire placard is located on the driver¡C■s side front or rear door edge, center pillar, or the rear compartment lid. Tip ^ Generally a 5.6°C (10°F) temperature increase will result in (is equivalent to) a 6.9 kPa (1 psi) tire pressure increase. ^ The definition of a "cold" tire is one that has been sitting for at least 3 hours, or driven no more than 1.6 km (1 mi). ^ On extremely cold days, if the vehicle has been indoors, it may be necessary to compensate for the low external temperature by adding additional air to the tire during PDI. ^ During cold weather, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator light (a yellow horseshoe with an exclamation point) may illuminate. If this indicator turns off after the tires warm up (reach operating temperature), the tire pressure should be reset to placard pressure at the cold temperature. ^ The TPM system will work correctly with nitrogen in tires. ^ The TPM system is compatible with the GM Vehicle Care Tire Sealant but may not be with other commercially available sealants. Important: ^ Do not use the tire pressure indicated on the tire itself as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-00-90-002J > Jan > 09 > Tires - Correct Inflation Pressure Information > Page 3167 ^ Always inspect and adjust the pressure when the tires are cold. ^ Vehicles that have different pressures for the front and the rear need to be adjusted after tire rotation. Improper tire inflation may result in any or all of the following conditions: ^ Premature tire wear ^ Harsh ride ^ Excessive road noise ^ Poor handling ^ Reduced fuel economy ^ Low Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Light ON ^ Low Tire Pressure Message on the Drivers Information Center (DIC) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > Page 3168 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 07-07-30-014 > May > 07 > A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-014 Date: May 23, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: AF33-5 Transmission - Check Engine Light On, DTC P0711 or U0101 Set (Reprogram TCM by Contacting TCSC) Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on the check engine light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find either DTC P0711 or U0101 set. Cause A software anomaly within the TCM may cause this condition. Correction DO NOT replace the internal transaxle wiring harness to correct P0711 code. Contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) to obtain a VCI number and reprogram the TCM to correct a single DTC of either P0711 or U0101. Multiple communication codes will NOT be addressed with this TCM software update. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 3178 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-020C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-020B (Section 03 - Suspension). GM's Position on the Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires General Motors does not oppose the use of purified nitrogen as an inflation gas for tires. We expect the theoretical benefits to be reduced in practical use due to the lack of an existing infrastructure to continuously facilitate inflating tires with nearly pure nitrogen. Even occasional inflation with compressed atmospheric air will negate many of the theoretical benefits. Given those theoretical benefits, practical limitations, and the robust design of GM original equipment TPC tires, the realized benefits to our customer of inflating their tires with purified nitrogen are expected to be minimal. The Promise of Nitrogen: Under Controlled Conditions Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general consumer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. The following benefits under controlled conditions are attributed to nitrogen gas and its unique properties: - A reduction in the expected loss of Tire Pressure over time. - A reduction in the variance of Tire Pressures with temperature changes due to reduction of water vapor concentration. - A reduction of long term rubber degradation due to a decrease in oxygen concentrations. Important These are obtainable performance improvements when relatively pure nitrogen gas is used to inflate tires under controlled conditions. The Promise of Nitrogen: Real World Use Nitrogen inflation can provide some benefit by reducing gas migration (pressure loss) at the molecular level through the tire structure. NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) has stated that the inflation pressure loss of tires can be up to 5% a month. Nitrogen molecules are larger than oxygen molecules and, therefore, are less prone to "seeping" through the tire casing. The actual obtainable benefits of nitrogen vary, based on the physical construction and the materials used in the manufacturing of the tire being inflated. Another potential benefit of nitrogen is the reduced oxidation of tire components. Research has demonstrated that oxygen consumed in the oxidation process of the tire primarily comes from the inflation media. Therefore, it is reasonable to assume that oxidation of tire components can be reduced if the tire is inflated with pure nitrogen. However, only very small amounts of oxygen are required to begin the normal oxidation process. Even slight contamination of the tire inflation gas with compressed atmospheric air during normal inflation pressure maintenance, may negate the benefits of using nitrogen. GM Tire Quality, Technology and Focus of Importance Since 1972, General Motors has designed tires under the TPC (Tire Performance Criteria) specification system, which includes specific requirements that ensure robust tire performance under normal usage. General Motors works with tire suppliers to design and manufacture original equipment tires for GM vehicles. The GM TPC addresses required performance with respect to both inflation pressure retention, and endurance properties for original equipment tires. The inflation pressure retention requirements address availability of oxygen and oxidation concerns, while endurance requirements ensure the mechanical structure of the tire has sufficient strength. This combination has provided our customers with tires that maintain their structural integrity throughout their useful treadlife under normal operating conditions. Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Maintaining the correct inflation pressure allows the tire to perform as intended by the vehicle manufacturer in many areas, including comfort, fuel economy, stopping distance, cornering, traction, treadwear, and noise. Since the load carrying capability of a tire is related to inflation pressure, proper inflation pressure maintenance is necessary for the tire to support the load imposed by the vehicle without excessive structural Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 3179 degradation. Important Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 3180 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-001F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Puncture Repair Procedures For All Cars and Light Duty Trucks Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001E (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin covers puncture repair procedures for passenger car and light duty truck radial tires in the tread area only. The tire manufacturer must be contacted for its individual repair policy and whether or not the speed rating is retained after repair. Caution - Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall. - Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while repairing tires. - NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads. Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. - NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation. Repairable area on a radial tire. Important - NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32") remaining depth). - NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4"). - NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair. - NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel). - Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair. - Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury. - Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and repair tools/repair material recommendations. Three basic steps for tire puncture repair: 1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 3181 2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent air loss. External Inspection 1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak by using a water and soap solution. Mark the injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core. 2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader. Internal Inspection 1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4. Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5. Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4") should not be repaired. Cleaning 1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool. 2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow guidelines for handling and disposal. Clean the Injury Channel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 3182 1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended reaming tool(s). Fill the Injury 1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. (For combination repair/plug units skip this step.) Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug per repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just above the inside tire surface. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection. Repair Unit Selection Important Do not install the repair unit in this step. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 3183 1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit selection. Buffing 1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine wire brush or gritted rasp. 2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool. Cementing Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures. Repair Unit Application Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 3184 1. The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed (Do not spread the beads excessively). Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units 1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out. 3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread. Combination Repair/Plug Units 1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2. Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions. 2. Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool. Safety Cage Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 3185 Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. Final Inspection 1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - OFF Vehicle. For additional tire puncture repair information, contact: Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3186 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3187 Tires: Description and Operation Tread Wear Indicators Description Tread Wear Indicators Description The original equipment tires have tread wear indicators that show when you should replace the tires. The location of these indicators are at 72 degree intervals around the outer diameter of the tire. The indicators appear as a 6 mm (0.25 inch) wide band when the tire tread depth becomes 1.6 mm (2/32 inch). Tire Inflation Description When you inflate the tires to the recommended inflation pressures, the factory-installed wheels and tires are designed in order to handle loads to the tire's rated load capacity. Incorrect tire pressures, or under-inflated tires, can cause the following conditions: ^ Vehicle handling concerns ^ Poor fuel economy ^ Shortened tire life ^ Tire overloading Inspect the tire pressure when the following conditions apply: ^ The vehicle has been sitting at least 3 hours. ^ The vehicle has not been driven for more than 1.6 km (1 mi). ^ The tires are cool. Inspect the tires monthly or before any extended trip. Adjust the tire pressure to the specifications on the tire label. Install the valve caps or the extensions on the valves. The caps or the extensions keep out dust and water. The kilopascal (kPa) is the metric term for pressure. The tire pressure may be printed in both kilopascal (kPa) and psi. One psi equals 6.9 kPa. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3188 Inflation Pressure Conversion (Kilopascals to PSI) Tires with a higher than recommended pressure can cause the following conditions: ^ A hard ride ^ Tire bruising ^ Rapid tread wear at the center of the tire Tires with a lower than recommended pressure can cause the following conditions: ^ A tire squeal on turns ^ Hard steering ^ Rapid wear and uneven wear on the edge of the tread ^ Tire rim bruises and tire rim rupture ^ Tire cord breakage ^ High tire temperatures ^ Reduced vehicle handling ^ High fuel consumption ^ Soft riding Unequal pressure on the same axle can cause the following conditions: ^ Uneven braking ^ Steering lead ^ Reduced vehicle handling Refer to the Tire Placard for specific tire and wheel applications and tire pressures. All Seasons Tires Description All Seasons Tires Description Most Saturn vehicles are equipped with steel belted all-season radial tires as standard equipment. These tires qualify as snow tires, with a higher than average rating for snow traction than the non-all season radial tires previously used. Other performance areas, such as wet traction, rolling resistance, tread life, and air retention, are also improved. This is done by improvements in both tread design and tread compounds. These tires are identified by an M + S molded in the tire side wall after the tire size. The suffix MS is also molded in the tire side wall after the TPC specification number. P-Metric Sized Tires Description Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3189 P-Metric Sized Tires Description Most P-metric tire sizes do not have exact corresponding alphanumeric tire sizes. Replacement tires should be of the same tire performance criteria TPC specification number including the same size, the same load range, and the same construction as those originally installed on the vehicle. Consult a tire dealer if you must replace the P-metric tire with other sizes. Tire companies can best recommend the closest match of alphanumeric to P-metric sizes within their own tire lines. The above illustration may not correspond with your vehicle, but is meant as an example. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Mounting and Dismounting Tires: Service and Repair Tire Mounting and Dismounting Tire Mounting and Dismounting Notice: Use a tire changing machine in order to dismount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or the wheel rim could result. Notice: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. 1. Notice: Damage to either the tire bead or the wheel mounting holes can result from the use of improper wheel attachment or tire mounting procedures. It takes up to 70 seconds for all of the air to completely exhaust from a large tire. Failure to follow the proper procedures could cause the tire changer to put enough force on the tire to bend the wheel at the mounting surface. Such damage may result in vibration and/or shimmy, and under severe usage lead to wheel cracking. Deflate the tire completely. 2. Important: Rim-clamp European-type tire changers are recommended. Use the tire changer in order to remove the tire from the wheel. 3. Use a wire brush or coarse steel wool in order to remove any rubber, light rust or corrosion from the wheel bead seats. 4. Notice: When mounting the tires, use an approved tire mounting lubricant. DO NOT use silicon or corrosive base compounds to lubricate the tire bead and the wheel rim. A silicon base compound can cause the tire to slip on the rim. A corrosive type compound can cause tire or rim deterioration. Apply an approved Lubricant to the tire bead and the wheel rim. 5. Use the tire changer in order to install the tire to the wheel. 6. Caution: To avoid serious personal injury, do not stand over tire when inflating. The bead may break when the bead snaps over the safety hump. Do not exceed 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure when inflating any tire if beads are not seated. If 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure will not seat the beads, deflate, relubricate the beads and reinflate. Overinflation may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. Inflate the tire to the proper air pressure. 7. Ensure that the locating rings are visible on both sides of the tire in order to verify that the tire bead is fully seated on the wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Mounting and Dismounting > Page 3192 Tires: Service and Repair Tire Repair Tire Repair Many different materials and techniques are available on the market in order to repair tires. Not all of the materials and techniques work on some types of tires. Tire manufacturers have published detailed instructions on how and when to repair tires. Obtain the instructions from the manufacturer. If the vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire, do not repair the compact spare. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Mounting and Dismounting > Page 3193 Tires: Service and Repair Tire Rotation Tire Rotation Rotate the tires and wheels at frequent intervals to equalize wear. Refer to Maintenance Schedule in Maintenance and Lubrication. In addition to scheduled rotation, rotate the tire and wheel whenever uneven tire wear is noticed. Radial tires tend to wear faster in the shoulder area, particularly in front positions. Radial tires in non-drive locations may develop an irregular wear pattern that may increase tire noise. This makes regular rotation especially necessary. Always use a 4-wheel rotation. After rotation, check the wheel nuts for specified torque. Then, set the tire pressure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 3202 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 3203 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 3204 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 3209 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 3214 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 3215 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 3216 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 3222 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 3223 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 3224 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 3229 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 3234 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 3235 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 3240 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 3241 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 3242 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 3247 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 3252 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 3253 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 3254 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 04-03-10-012B > Feb > 08 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-012B Date: February 01, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Pitting and Brake Dust on Chrome wheels Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-012A (Section 03 - Suspension). Analysis of Returned Wheels Chrome wheels returned under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for pitting concerns have recently been evaluated. This condition is usually most severe in the vent (or window) area of the front wheels. This "pitting" may actually be brake dust that has been allowed to accumulate on the wheel. The longer this accumulation builds up, the more difficult it is to remove. Cleaning the Wheels In all cases, the returned wheels could be cleaned to their original condition using GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, P/N 10952905). When using this product, you should confine your treatment to the areas of the wheel that show evidence of the brake dust build-up. This product is only for use on chromed steel or chromed aluminum wheels. Parts Information Warranty Information Wheel replacement for this condition is NOT applicable under the terms of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 3264 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 3265 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 3266 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 3271 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 3276 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 3277 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 04-03-10-012B > Feb > 08 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-012B Date: February 01, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Pitting and Brake Dust on Chrome wheels Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-012A (Section 03 - Suspension). Analysis of Returned Wheels Chrome wheels returned under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for pitting concerns have recently been evaluated. This condition is usually most severe in the vent (or window) area of the front wheels. This "pitting" may actually be brake dust that has been allowed to accumulate on the wheel. The longer this accumulation builds up, the more difficult it is to remove. Cleaning the Wheels In all cases, the returned wheels could be cleaned to their original condition using GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, P/N 10952905). When using this product, you should confine your treatment to the areas of the wheel that show evidence of the brake dust build-up. This product is only for use on chromed steel or chromed aluminum wheels. Parts Information Warranty Information Wheel replacement for this condition is NOT applicable under the terms of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3282 Wheels: Description and Operation Replacement Wheels Description Replace the wheel if any of the following conditions exist: ^ The wheel exhibits excessive runout ^ The wheel is bent ^ The wheel is cracked ^ The wheel is severely rusted ^ The wheel is severely corroded ^ Important: Air leaks caused by porosity on aluminum wheels are repairable. The wheel leaks air Caution: If you are replacing the wheel(s), the wheel stud(s), the wheel nut(s) or the wheel bolt(s), install only new Saturn original equipment parts. Installation of used parts or non-Saturn original equipment parts may cause the wheel to loosen, loss of tire air pressure, poor vehicle handling and loss of vehicle control resulting in personal injury. Notice: The use of non-Saturn original equipment wheels may cause: ^ Damage to the wheel bearing, the wheel fasteners and the wheel ^ Tire damage caused by the modified clearance to the adjacent vehicle components ^ Adverse vehicle steering stability caused by the modified scrub radius ^ Damage to the vehicle caused by the modified ground clearance ^ Speedometer and odometer inaccuracy Replace the wheel, the wheel studs and the wheel/nuts, or the wheel bolts if applicable, if any of the following conditions exist: ^ The wheel has elongated bolt holes. ^ The wheel/nuts, or bolts if applicable, loosen repeatedly. Steel wheel identification is stamped into the wheel near the valve stem. Aluminum wheel identification is cast into the inboard side of the wheel. Steel Wheel Repair Description Notice: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening or repair damage from striking curbs, etc. Do not weld wheels. The alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated and uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material. Notice: The use of tubes in tubeless tires is not a recommended repair due to the fact that speed ratings are greatly reduced. If leaks are found in a steel wheel, replace the wheel with a wheel of original equipment quality. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Step 1 - Step 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front brake rotor. 2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 3288 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor electrical connector form the connector bracket. 4. Remove the front wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 5. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire or equivalent. 6. Remove and discard the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 7. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the steering knuckle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 3289 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 130 Nm (96 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 3290 4. Install the wheel speed sensor electrical connector to the mounting bracket, if equipped. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the front brake rotor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 3291 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Rear Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear brake drum. 2. On vehicles with all-wheel drive, remove the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 3292 4. Important: Do not damage the wheel drive shaft joint seal. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent. 5. Remove the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 6. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the suspension knuckle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 84 Nm (62 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 3293 3. On all-wheel drive vehicles, install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 125 Nm (92 ft. lbs.). 4. If equipped, route the wheel speed sensor electrical harness through the backing plate and seat the grommet. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the rear brake drum. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 3294 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front brake rotor. 2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 3295 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor electrical connector form the connector bracket. 4. Remove the front wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 5. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire or equivalent. 6. Remove and discard the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 7. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the steering knuckle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 3296 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 130 Nm (96 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 3297 4. Install the wheel speed sensor electrical connector to the mounting bracket, if equipped. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the front brake rotor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Cover: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Wheel Cover: Customer Interest Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-013B Date: March 29, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle/Click/Ticking Type Noise Coming From Wheel Cover (Install Wheel Cover Insulators) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Buick Terraza with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2006 Chevrolet HHR with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Pontiac Montana SV6 with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Saturn Relay with 17 Inch Wheel Cover Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-013A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle/click/ticking type noise coming from the front or rear wheels. This condition is most apparent while driving at low speeds (0-24 km/h (0-15 mph)) and is relative to wheel rotation. Cause This condition may be caused by hard contact between the inner edge of the wheel cover and the outer edge of the steel rim. This contact occurs when the delrin ring comes out of its channel and separates from the wheel cover. In most cases, the delrin ring will be completely gone. Correction If the delrin ring is missing, install insulators on the backside of all four wheel covers. Use the following service procedure listed below. Remove the wheel covers. Clean the back side of each wheel cover using a mild liquid detergent in a distilled or deionized water solution. Rinse each wheel cover with clean water. Dry each wheel cover using compressed air or a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Cover: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 3306 Saturn Relay Shown, others Similar After the wheel covers are completely dry, each wheel cover should be wiped with isopropyl alcohol on a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth and apply Adhesion Promoter, P/N 12378462, or equivalent, at the insulator locations. Insulator location is at the center of each spoke in the groove. Place two insulators at the location where a divider prevents one from going in the center. Refer to the illustrations above. Peel the red non-stick backing off of the insulator. Carefully place the insulator onto the wheel cover so that the area under the lip is resting against the corner of the inside edge of the wheel cover lip. This should place the insulator flush with the outside edge of the wheel cover. Press down firmly on the insulator to ensure that the adhesive is bonding to the wheel cover. Place another insulator in the next location by repeating Steps 5 through 7. There should be an insulator at each spoke location with two being placed at Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Cover: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 3307 the above specified location. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Cover: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Wheel Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-013B Date: March 29, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle/Click/Ticking Type Noise Coming From Wheel Cover (Install Wheel Cover Insulators) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Buick Terraza with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2006 Chevrolet HHR with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Pontiac Montana SV6 with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Saturn Relay with 17 Inch Wheel Cover Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-013A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle/click/ticking type noise coming from the front or rear wheels. This condition is most apparent while driving at low speeds (0-24 km/h (0-15 mph)) and is relative to wheel rotation. Cause This condition may be caused by hard contact between the inner edge of the wheel cover and the outer edge of the steel rim. This contact occurs when the delrin ring comes out of its channel and separates from the wheel cover. In most cases, the delrin ring will be completely gone. Correction If the delrin ring is missing, install insulators on the backside of all four wheel covers. Use the following service procedure listed below. Remove the wheel covers. Clean the back side of each wheel cover using a mild liquid detergent in a distilled or deionized water solution. Rinse each wheel cover with clean water. Dry each wheel cover using compressed air or a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Cover: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 3313 Saturn Relay Shown, others Similar After the wheel covers are completely dry, each wheel cover should be wiped with isopropyl alcohol on a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth and apply Adhesion Promoter, P/N 12378462, or equivalent, at the insulator locations. Insulator location is at the center of each spoke in the groove. Place two insulators at the location where a divider prevents one from going in the center. Refer to the illustrations above. Peel the red non-stick backing off of the insulator. Carefully place the insulator onto the wheel cover so that the area under the lip is resting against the corner of the inside edge of the wheel cover lip. This should place the insulator flush with the outside edge of the wheel cover. Press down firmly on the insulator to ensure that the adhesive is bonding to the wheel cover. Place another insulator in the next location by repeating Steps 5 through 7. There should be an insulator at each spoke location with two being placed at Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Cover: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 3314 the above specified location. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to .............................................................................................................................. .................................. 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications The contents of this article reflects the changes identified in TSB 05-03-10-014 Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-014 Date: October 05, 2005 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE Subject: Revised Wheel Nut Torque Specification Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox 2002-2005 Saturn VUE The revised wheel nut torque is 140 Nm (100 lb ft). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3322 Wheel Nut Torque Sequence Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3323 Wheel Fastener: Description and Operation Metric Wheel Nuts and Bolts Description Metric wheel/nuts and bolts are identified in the following way: ^ The wheel/nut has the word Metric stamped on the face. ^ The letter M is stamped on the end of the wheel bolt. The thread sizes of metric wheel/nuts and the bolts are indicated by the following example: M12 x 1.5. ^ M = Metric ^ 12 = Diameter in millimeters ^ 1.5 = Millimeters gap per thread Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Stud Replacement ^ Tools Required J 43631 Ball Joint Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 4. Using the J 43631, press out the wheel stud from the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 3326 1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the bearing side of the hub flange. 2. Place flat washers over the wheel stud being installer. 3. Install the wheel nut or a hex head nut to the wheel stud. 4. Gradually tighten the nut in order to draw the stud into the hub flange until the head of the wheel stud is fully seated against the hub flange. 5. Remove the nut and flat washers. 6. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 7. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 8. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 3327 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Wheel Stud Replacement ^ Tools Required J 43631 Ball Joint Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 4. Using the J 43631 , press out the wheel stud from the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 3328 1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the bearing side of the hub flange. 2. Place flat washers over the wheel stud being installer. 3. Install the wheel nut or a hex head nut to the wheel stud. 4. Gradually tighten the nut in order to draw the stud into the hub flange until the head of the wheel stud is fully seated against the hub flange. 5. Remove the nut and flat washers. 6. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 7. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 8. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 3329 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Stud Replacement ^ Tools Required J 43631 Ball Joint Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Using the J 43631 , press out the wheel stud from the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 3330 1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the bearing side of the hub flange. 2. Place flat washers over the wheel stud being installed. 3. Install the wheel nut or a hex head nut to the wheel stud. 4. Gradually tighten the nut in order to draw the stud into the hub flange until the head of the wheel stud is fully seated against the hub flange. 5. Remove the nut and flat washers. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Jump Starting > System Information > Service Precautions Jump Starting: Service Precautions CAUTION: Batteries produce explosive gases. Batteries contain corrosive acid. Batteries supply levels of electrical current high enough to cause burns. Therefore, in order to reduce the risk of personal injury while working near a battery, observe the following guidelines: - Always shield your eyes. - Avoid leaning over the battery whenever possible. - Do not expose the battery to open flames or sparks. - Do not allow battery acid to contact the eyes or the skin. Flush any contacted areas with water immediately and thoroughly. - Get medical help. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Jump Starting > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 3334 Jump Starting: Service and Repair JUMP STARTING IN CASE OF EMERGENCY CAUTION: Batteries produce explosive gases. Batteries contain corrosive acid. Batteries supply levels of electrical current high enough to cause burns. Therefore, in order to reduce the risk of personal injury while working near a battery, observe the following guidelines: - Always shield your eyes. - Avoid leaning over the battery whenever possible. - Do not expose the battery to open flames or sparks. - Do not allow battery acid to contact the eyes or the skin. Flush any contacted areas with water immediately and thoroughly. - Get medical help. NOTE: This vehicle has a 12 volt, negative ground electrical system. Make sure the vehicle or equipment being used to jump start the engine is also 12 volt, negative ground. Use of any other type of system will damage the vehicle's electrical components. 1. Position the vehicle with the booster battery so that the jumper cables will reach. - Do not let the 2 vehicles touch. - Make sure that the jumper cables do not have loose ends, or missing insulation. 2. Place an automatic transmission in PARK. If equipped with a manual transmission, place in NEUTRAL and block the wheels. 3. Turn OFF all electrical loads on both vehicles that are not needed. 4. Turn OFF the ignition on both vehicles. 5. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the battery positive (+) terminal (2) of the vehicle with the discharged battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal (1) of the booster battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 7. Connect the black negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal (3) of the booster battery. 8. The final connection is made to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part (4) of the vehicle with the discharged battery.This final attachment must be at least 46 cm (18 in) away from the dead battery. CAUTION: Do not connect a jumper cable directly to the negative terminal of a discharged battery to prevent sparking and possible explosion of battery gases. 9. Start the engine of the vehicle that is providing the boost. 10. Crank the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery. NOTE: Never operate the starter motor more than 15 seconds at a time without pausing in order to allow it to cool for at least 2 minutes. Overheating will damage the starter motor. 11. The black negative (-) cable must be first disconnected from the vehicle that was boosted (4). 12. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the negative (-) terminal (3) of the booster battery. 13. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the positive (+) terminal (1) of the booster battery. NOTE: Do not let the cable end touch any metal. Damage to the battery and other components may result. 14. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the remote positive (+) terminal (2) of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions Vehicle Lifting: Service Precautions CAUTION: - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Information Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair General Information LIFTING AND JACKING THE VEHICLE CAUTION: - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. NOTE: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: - Remove or secure all of the vehicle's contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. - The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. - The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment's manufacturer. - Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. - Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle's contents. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Information > Page 3340 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. Notice: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: * Remove or secure all of the vehicle's contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment's manufacturer. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle's contents. Vehicle Lifting-Frame Contact Lift Front Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the front lift pads approximately 12.2 in (310 mm) inboard from the front pinchweld flanges. Rear Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the rear lift pads 10.0 in (255 mm) inboard from the rear pinchweld flanges. Vehicle Jacking Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Information > Page 3341 Under the Center of the Rear Suspension Lift the rear of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad at the center of the rear suspension. Supporting the Vehicle with Jackstands Important: Place jackstands ONLY under strong and stable vehicle structures. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. No cylinder reading should be less than 689 kPa (100 psi). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 3347 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test A compression pressure test of the engine cylinders determines the condition of the rings, the valves, and the head gasket. 1. Important: Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and the ignition fuses from the I/P fuse block. Disable the ignition. 2. Disable the fuel systems. 3. Remove the spark plugs from all the cylinders. 4. Remove the air duct from the throttle body. 5. Block the throttle plate in the open position. 6. Measure the engine compression, using the following procedure: 1. Firmly install the compression gauge to the spark plug hole. 2. Have an assistant crank the engine through at least 4 compression strokes in the testing =cylinder. 3. Record the readings on the gauge at each stroke. 4. Disconnect the gauge. 5. Repeat the compression test for each cylinder. 7. Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. ^ The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. ^ No cylinder reading should be less than 689 kPa (100 psi). 8. The following list contains examples of the possible measurements: ^ When the compression measurement is normal, the compression builds up quickly and evenly to the specified compression on each cylinder. ^ When the compression is low on the first stroke and tends to build up on the following strokes, but does not reach the normal compression, the piston rings may be the cause. ^ If the compression improves considerably with the addition of three squirts of oil, the piston rings may be the cause. ^ When the compression is low on the first stroke and does not build up in the following strokes, the valves may be the cause. ^ The addition of oil does not affect the compression, the valves may be the cause. ^ When the compression is low on two adjacent cylinders, or coolant is present in the crankcase, the head gasket may be the cause. 9. Remove the block from the throttle plate. 10. Install the air duct to the throttle body. 11. Install the spark plugs. 12. Install the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) fuse. 13. Install the ignition fuse to the I/P fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair Camshaft Bearing: Service and Repair Camshaft Rear Bearing Hole Plug Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine flywheel. 2. Remove the camshaft rear bearing hole plug. Installation Procedure 1. Important: Inspect plug bore for old sealant. Ensure bore is clean and free of nicks and burs. Apply sealer GM P/N 12377901 (Canadian P/N 10953504) or equivalent to the camshaft rear bearing hole plug. 2. Install the camshaft rear bearing hole plug. 3. Ensure that the camshaft rear bearing plug is installed to specifications. 4. Install the engine flywheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Valve Lifter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the valve rocker arm cover. 2. Remove the lower intake manifold. 3. Remove the valve rocker arms and pushrods. 4. Remove the lifter guide bolts. 5. Remove the lifter guide. 6. Important: Place the valve lifters in an organized order to ensure that they are installed in the same location from which they were removed. Remove the lifters. Installation Procedure 1. Coat the valve lifters using prelube GM P/N 1052367 (Canadian P/N 992869) or the equivalent. 2. Install the valve lifters in their original locations. 3. Install the lifter guide. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Apply threadlock GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or the equivalent to the lifter guide bolt threads and install the bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 5. Install the valve rocker arms and pushrods. 6. Install the lower intake manifold. 7. Install the valve rocker arm cover. 8. Inspect for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Push Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair Push Rod: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the valve rocker arm cover(s). 2. Remove the rocker arm bolt(s). 3. Remove the valve rocker arm(s) and the pushrod(s). Installation Procedure 1. Coat the ends of the push rods using prelube GM P/N 1052367 (Canadian P/N 992869) or the equivalent. 2. Important: The intake valve push rods measure 146.0 mm (5.75 inch) in length. The exhaust valve push rods measure 152.5 mm (6.0 inch) in length. Install the push rods in their original location. 3. Coat the rocker arm friction surfaces using prelube GM P/N 1052367 (Canadian P/N 992869) or the equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Push Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3358 4. Important: Shims may be required under the valve rocker arm pedestals if reconditioning has been performed on the cylinder head or its components. Install the valve rocker arms in their original positions. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve rocker arm bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 42 Nm (31 ft. lbs.) . 6. Install the valve rocker arm cover(s). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the valve rocker arm cover(s). 2. Remove the rocker arm bolt(s). 3. Remove the valve rocker arm(s) and the pushrod(s). Installation Procedure 1. Coat the ends of the push rods using prelube GM P/N 1052367 (Canadian P/N 992869) or the equivalent. 2. Important: The intake valve push rods measure 146.0 mm (5.75 inch) in length. The exhaust valve push rods measure 152.5 mm (6.0 inch) in length. Install the push rods in their original location. 3. Coat the rocker arm friction surfaces using prelube GM P/N 1052367 (Canadian P/N 992869) or the equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3362 4. Important: Shims may be required under the valve rocker arm pedestals if reconditioning has been performed on the cylinder head or its components. Install the valve rocker arms in their original positions. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve rocker arm bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 42 Nm (31 ft. lbs.) . 6. Install the valve rocker arm cover(s). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance .............................................................................................................................. 0.18-0.062 mm (0.0007-0.017 inch) Connecting Rod Bore Diameter ................................................................................................................................ 53.962-53.978 mm (2.124-2.125 inch) Connecting Rod Bore Out-of-Round ................ 0.008 mm (0.0002 inch) Connecting Rod Length - Center to Center 144.75-144.81 mm (5.69-5.70 inch) Connecting Rod Side Clearance ....................................................................................................................... 0.25-0.37 mm (0.010-0.015 inch)Crankshaft Connecting Rod Journal Diameter ........................................................................................................................ 50.768-50.784 mm (1.9987-1.9994 inch) Connecting Rod Journal Out-of-Round ................................................. 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Connecting Rod Journal Taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Connecting Rod Journal Width ..................................................................................................................................... 21.92-22.08 mm (0.863-0.869 inch) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance .............................................................................................................................. 0.18-0.062 mm (0.0007-0.017 inch) Connecting Rod Bore Diameter ................................................................................................................................ 53.962-53.978 mm (2.124-2.125 inch) Connecting Rod Bore Out-of-Round ................ 0.008 mm (0.0002 inch) Connecting Rod Length - Center to Center 144.75-144.81 mm (5.69-5.70 inch) Connecting Rod Side Clearance ....................................................................................................................... 0.25-0.37 mm (0.010-0.015 inch)Crankshaft Connecting Rod Journal Diameter ........................................................................................................................ 50.768-50.784 mm (1.9987-1.9994 inch) Connecting Rod Journal Out-of-Round ................................................. 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Connecting Rod Journal Taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Connecting Rod Journal Width ..................................................................................................................................... 21.92-22.08 mm (0.863-0.869 inch) Rod Bearing Cap Bolt First Pass ......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................... 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.) Final Pass .................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................... 75 degrees Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Crankshaft End Play .......................... 0.060-0.210 mm (0.0024-0.0083 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Width 23.9-24.1 mm (0.941-0.949 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance Except #3 ...................................................................................................... 0.019-0.064 mm (0.0008-0.0025 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance - #3 Thrust Bearing ......................................................................................... 0.032-0.077 mm (0.0012-0.0030 inch) Crankshaft Main Journal Diameter ....................................................................................................................... 67.239-67.257 mm (2.6473-2.6483 inch) Crankshaft Main Journal Out-of-Round ............................................... 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Crankshaft Main Journal Taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Crankshaft Rear Flange Runout .......................................................................................................................................................... 0.04 mm (0.0016 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Cap Bolt/Stud First Pass ............................................................................. ....................................................................................................................... 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.) Final Pass ..................................................................................................................................................... .......................................................... 77 degrees Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications Crankshaft End Play .......................... 0.060-0.210 mm (0.0024-0.0083 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Width 23.9-24.1 mm (0.941-0.949 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance Except #3 ...................................................................................................... 0.019-0.064 mm (0.0008-0.0025 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance - #3 Thrust Bearing ......................................................................................... 0.032-0.077 mm (0.0012-0.0030 inch) Crankshaft Main Journal Diameter ....................................................................................................................... 67.239-67.257 mm (2.6473-2.6483 inch) Crankshaft Main Journal Out-of-Round ............................................... 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Crankshaft Main Journal Taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Crankshaft Rear Flange Runout .......................................................................................................................................................... 0.04 mm (0.0016 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Cap Bolt/Stud First Pass ............................................................................. ....................................................................................................................... 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.) Final Pass ..................................................................................................................................................... .......................................................... 77 degrees Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Heater Replacement Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Coolant Heater Replacement Coolant Heater Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the coolant heater cord from the heater (2). 3. Important: Do not score the surface of the engine block hole when removing the coolant heater. Remove the coolant heater from the block. Installation Procedure 1. Remove any burrs, sealer, paint or other foreign material from the threads/sealing surface of the engine block and from the old coolant heater if the heater is to be reused. 2. If reusing the old coolant heater, apply thread sealant GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480), or equivalent to the threads. 3. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the coolant heater to the engine block. ^ Tighten the coolant heater to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the coolant heater cord to the heater (2). 5. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Heater Replacement > Page 3380 Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Coolant Heater Cord Replacement Coolant Heater Cord Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the coolant heater cord (2) from the coolant heater (1). 2. Disconnect the coolant heater cord (1) from the cord retainers (2). 3. Remove the coolant heater cord (1) from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Heater Replacement > Page 3381 1. Route the coolant heater cord (1) as illustrated, in the engine compartment. 2. Connect the coolant heater cord (1) to the cord retainers (2). 3. Connect the coolant heater cord (2) to the coolant heater (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Crankshaft Balancer Bolt First Pass .................................................................................................... ................................................................................................ 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs.) Final Pass ............. .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................... 72 degrees Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3385 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Crankshaft Balancer Replacement ^ Tools Required J 39914 Serpentine Belt Tensioner Unloader - J 41816-A Crankshaft Balancer Remover - J 29113 Balancer and Crank Sprocket Puller - J 45059 Angle Meter - EN 46359 Puller End Protector Removal Procedure 1. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner (8) to release the tension on the drive belt. 2. Remove the drive belt from the right idler pulley (2). 3. Carefully release J 39914 to relieve the drive belt tensioner spring tension. 4. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 6. Remove the right front wheel. 7. Remove the wheelhouse liner. 8. Remove the crankshaft balancer bolt and washer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3386 9. Notice: The inertial weight section of the crankshaft balancer is assembled to the hub with a rubber type material. The correct installation procedures (with the proper tool) must be followed or movement of the inertial weight section of the hub will destroy the tuning of the crankshaft balancer. Notice: Do NOT use a power-assisted tool with the special tool in order to remove or install this component. You cannot properly control the alignment of this component using a power-assisted tool, and this can damage the component. Remove the crankshaft balancer using the J 41816-A along with EN 46359. Installation Procedure 1. Apply sealer GM P/N 12378521 (Canadian P/N 88901148) or the equivalent, to the keyway of the crankshaft balancer. 2. Place the crankshaft balancer into position over the key in the crankshaft. 3. Notice: Do NOT use a power-assisted tool with the special tool in order to remove or install this component. You cannot properly control the alignment of this component using a power-assisted tool, and this can damage the component. Install the J 29113 onto the crankshaft. 4. Rotate the hex nut on the J 29113 to install the crankshaft balancer onto the crankshaft. 5. Remove the J 29113 from the crankshaft. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3387 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the crankshaft balancer bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs.). Turn the bolt an additional 70 degrees using the J 45059. 7. Install the wheelhouse liner. 8. Install the right front wheel. 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Insure the drive belt is properly centered on all the pulleys except the right idler pulley (3). 11. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner away from the drive belt. 12. Install the drive belt to the right idler pulley (2). 13. Carefully release J 39914 allowing the drive belt tensioner (8) to come in contact with the drive belt. 14. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 15. Inspect the drive belt to insure the belt is properly centered on all the pulleys (1-8). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston: Specifications Piston Piston Diameter - production - cylinder 1-4 .............................................................................................................. 91.985-92.003 mm (3.621-3.622 inch) Piston Diameter - service limit - cylinder 1-4 .................................................................................................................................. 91.945 mm (3.619 inch) Piston Diameter - production - cylinder 5-6 ................................................................................................................ 91.99-92.028 mm (3.621-3.623 inch) Piston Diameter - service limit - cylinder 5-6 ................................................................................................................................... 91.945 mm (3.619 inch) Piston Pin Bore Diameter ......................... 23.005-23.010 mm (0.9057-0.9059 inch) Piston Ring Groove Width - First 1.23-1.25 mm (0.048-0.049 inch) Piston Ring Groove Width Second ................................................................................................................................. 1.53-1.55 mm (0.060-0.061 inch) Piston Ring Groove Width - Oil Control ......................................................................................................................... 3.03-3.055 mm (0.119-0.120 inch) Piston to Bore Clearance - production - 1-4 ................................................................................................................ 0.17-0.053 mm (0.0006-0.0020 inch) Piston to Bore Clearance - service limit- 1-4 ................................................................................................................................... 0.093 mm (0.0036 inch) Piston to Bore Clearance - production - 5-6 ........................................................................................................... -0.008-0.048 mm (-0.0003-0.0018 inch) Piston to Bore Clearance - service limit- 5-6 .............................................................................................................................. 0.093 mm (0.0036 inch)Pin Piston Pin Clearance to Connecting Rod Bore - Press Fit ............................................................................ -0.047 to -0.019 mm (-0.0019 to -0.0007 inch) Piston Pin Clearance to Piston Pin Bore ............................................................................................................... 0.008-0.016 mm (0.00031-0.00063 inch) Piston Pin Diameter ................................................................................................................................................ 22.994-22.997 mm (0.9053-0.9054 inch) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Piston Ring End Gap First Compression Ring ..................................................................................................................................................... 0.15-0.36 mm (0.006-0.014 inch) Second Compression Ring ............................................................................................................................................ 0.48-0.74 mm (0.0188-0.0291 inch) Oil Control Ring ............................................................................................................................................................. 0.25-0.77 mm (0.0098-0.0303 inch) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance First Compression Ring ................................................................................................................................................. 0.04-0.086 mm (0.002-0.0033 inch) Second Compression Ring .............................................................................................................................................. 0.04-0.08 mm (0.002-0.0031 inch) Oil Control Ring ........................................................................................................................................................... 0.07-0.095 mm (0.0028-0.0037 inch) Piston Ring Thickness First Compression Ring ................................................................................................................................................. 1.164-1.190 mm (0.046-0.047 inch) Second Compression Ring ........................................................................................................................................ 1.460-1.490 mm (0.0574-0.0586 inch) Oil Control Ring - Maximum .............................................................................................................................................................. 2.960 mm (0.116 inch) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Connect the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection. 3. Install the bleed hose into an approved container and open the valve to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 4. Disconnect the fuel pressure gage from the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure > Page 3399 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the valve rocker arm cover(s). 2. Remove the rocker arm bolt(s). 3. Remove the valve rocker arm(s) and the pushrod(s). Installation Procedure 1. Coat the ends of the push rods using prelube GM P/N 1052367 (Canadian P/N 992869) or the equivalent. 2. Important: The intake valve push rods measure 146.0 mm (5.75 inch) in length. The exhaust valve push rods measure 152.5 mm (6.0 inch) in length. Install the push rods in their original location. 3. Coat the rocker arm friction surfaces using prelube GM P/N 1052367 (Canadian P/N 992869) or the equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3403 4. Important: Shims may be required under the valve rocker arm pedestals if reconditioning has been performed on the cylinder head or its components. Install the valve rocker arms in their original positions. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve rocker arm bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 42 Nm (31 ft. lbs.) . 6. Install the valve rocker arm cover(s). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Repair Instructions Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Removal Procedure 1. Remove the fuel injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the left side spark plug wires (1) from the retainers (2). 3. Remove the bolt (2) and the spark plug wire support (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left > Page 3408 4. Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) foul air pipe (4) from the PCV valve. 5. Remove the oil filler cap from the valve rocker arm cover. 6. Notice: Valve rocker arm cover gasket and sealant must be carefully trimmed away from lower intake manifold gasket. Failure to do so will damage the lower intake manifold gasket, causing a severe oil leak. Loosen the valve rocker arm cover bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left > Page 3409 7. Important: When removing the valve rocker arm cover, ensure the gasket stays in place attached to the cylinder head. Remove the valve rocker arm cover. Bump the end of the valve rocker arm cover with the palm of your hand or a soft rubber mallet if the cover adheres to the cylinder head. 8. Trim the valve cover gasket and sealant away from the lower intake manifold gasket at the cylinder head to the lower intake manifold joints (1). 9. Remove the rocker arm cover gasket. 10. Clean the sealing surface on the cylinder head with degreaser. 11. Clean the valve rocker arm cover. Installation Procedure 1. Important: All gasket mating surfaces need to be free of oil and foreign material. Use GM P/N 12346139 (Canadian P/N 10953463) or equivalent to clean surfaces. Important: Apply sealant GM P/N 12378521 (Canadian P/N 88901148) or equivalent, at the cylinder head to lower intake manifold joint. Apply sealant at the cylinder head to lower intake manifold joints (1). 2. Install a new gasket to the valve rocker arm cover. Ensure the gasket is properly seated in the groove of the valve rocker arm cover. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve rocker arm cover. ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left > Page 3410 4. Install the oil filler cap to the valve rocker arm cover. 5. Connect the PCV foul air pipe (4) to the PCV valve. 6. Install the spark plug wire support (1) and bolt (2). ^ Tighten the bolt to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left > Page 3411 7. Connect the left side spark plug wires (1) to the spark plug wire retainers (2). 8. Install the fuel injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left > Page 3412 Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Right Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Right Removal Procedure 1. Remove the fuel injector sight shield. 2. Remove the generator bracket. 3. Remove the ignition control module bracket from the engine with the ignition control module and spark plug wires still attached. Position out of the way. 4. Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) fresh air pipe (1) from the right valve rocker arm cover. 5. Notice: Valve rocker arm cover gasket and sealant must be carefully trimmed away from lower intake manifold gasket. Failure to do so will damage the lower intake manifold gasket, causing a severe oil leak. Loosen the valve rocker arm cover bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left > Page 3413 6. Important: When removing the valve rocker arm cover, ensure the gasket stays in place attached to the cylinder head. Remove the valve rocker arm cover. Bump the end of the valve rocker arm cover with the palm of your hand or a soft rubber mallet if the cover adheres to the cylinder head. 7. Trim the valve cover gasket and sealant away from the lower intake manifold gasket at the cylinder head to lower intake manifold joints (1). 8. Remove the valve rocker arm cover gasket. 9. Clean the sealing surface on the cylinder head with degreaser. 10. Clean the valve rocker arm cover. Installation Procedure 1. Important: All gasket mating surfaces need to be free of oil and foreign material. Use GM P/N 12346139 (Canadian P/N 10953463) or equivalent to clean surfaces. Important: Apply sealer GM P/N 12378521 (Canadian P/N 88901148) or equivalent, at the cylinder head to lower intake manifold joint. Apply sealant at the cylinder head to lower intake manifold joints (1). 2. Install a new gasket to the valve rocker arm cover. Ensure the gasket is properly seated in the groove of the valve rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left > Page 3414 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve rocker arm cover. ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the PCV fresh air pipe (1) to the right valve rocker arm cover. 5. Install the ignition control module bracket with the ignition control module and spark plug wired still attached. 6. Install the generator bracket. 7. Install the fuel injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Valve Guide: > 08-06-01-022 > Oct > 08 > Engine - Ticking Noise Valve Guide: Customer Interest Engine - Ticking Noise TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-022 Date: October 28, 2008 Subject: Tick Type Noise Coming From Engine (Inspect Exhaust Valve Stem to Guide Clearance) Models: 2006-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent Equipped with 3.4L Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Condition Some customers may comment that they hear a ticking noise coming from the engine. Some may describe the noise as sounding like a lifter tick. Cause The finish on the exhaust valve stem(s) may have caused excessive wear on the exhaust valve guide(s) in the cylinder heads. When this occurs, the exhaust valve stem to guide clearance becomes out of specification and the tick noise is created each time the valve stem comes in contact with the guide. Correction 1. Verify that the engine oil level is within the operating range. 2. Verify that the noise in question is not the normal ticking type sound produced by the fuel injectors. 3. Connect a mechanical oil pressure gauge and verify that the engine has adequate oil pressure. Refer to SI for additional information if necessary. 4. If the oil pressure is within specification, then remove the left (front) rocker cover and gasket. Refer to the Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side in SI. 5. Place shop towels over the rocker arms and push rods to contain engine oil in the next step. 6. Start the engine and allow to idle. Important: The following steps only need to be done on the exhaust valves. 7. Using a block of wood or the wooden handle on a hammer, place a side load on cylinder number 2 exhaust valve spring. ^ If the noise is reduced or eliminated, then there is excessive clearance between that exhaust valve stem and the guide in the cylinder head. Proceed to Step 8. ^ If the noise is NOT reduced or eliminated, then proceed to cylinder number 4 and 6 exhaust valve springs and apply the same type of side load. If the noise is reduced or eliminated then there is excessive clearance between an exhaust valve stem and guide in the cylinder head. Proceed to the next step. 8. Remove the right (rear) rocker cover. Important: It may not be possible to apply a side load to the exhaust springs with a piece of wood or hammer handle because there is less clearance at the rear side of the engine. As a result, the inspection procedure on the rear side is different than the left (front) side. 9. Remove the rocker arm and push rod from cylinder # 1 exhaust valve. Important: With one rocker arm and push rod removed at a time in the next steps the engine will exhibit a noticeable misfire or rough idle during the test. 10. With shop towels in place to contain any oil, start the engine and allow to idle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Valve Guide: > 08-06-01-022 > Oct > 08 > Engine - Ticking Noise > Page 3423 ^ If the tick noise is reduced or eliminated, then there is excessive clearance between that exhaust valve stem and guide in the cylinder head. Proceed to Step 11. ^ If the noise is NOT reduced or eliminated, then reinstall the push rod and rocker arm and tighten the bolt to specification. Then proceed to cylinder number 3, and if necessary number 5, exhaust valve and repeat the process. If the noise is reduced or eliminated, then there is excessive clearance between an exhaust valve stem and guide in the cylinder head. Proceed to the next step. ^ If the tick noise is always present and never is reduced or eliminated when testing all 6 exhaust valves, then the noise is coming from some other source and it is not necessary to continue with this bulletin. Refer to SI for additional diagnostic information. 11. Replace any cylinder head that has an exhaust valve stem with excessive clearance to the guide. It will be necessary to install three new exhaust valves in each cylinder head replaced. Please note that the exhaust valve part number listed below will have an improved stem finish. Refer to the Cylinder Head Replacement procedure in SI. Parts Information Replacement cylinder heads DO NOT come with any valvetrain components or expansion (freeze) plugs. When ordering a replacement head, it will also be necessary to order 3 exhaust valves and 2 expansion plugs for each head ordered. The intake valves and "all" springs, caps and locks are reusable. In addition, new valve stem seals (intake and exhaust) will be needed and are included in the head gasket kit listed. Warranty Information For vehicle repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Guide: > 08-06-01-022 > Oct > 08 > Engine - Ticking Noise Valve Guide: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Ticking Noise TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-022 Date: October 28, 2008 Subject: Tick Type Noise Coming From Engine (Inspect Exhaust Valve Stem to Guide Clearance) Models: 2006-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent Equipped with 3.4L Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Condition Some customers may comment that they hear a ticking noise coming from the engine. Some may describe the noise as sounding like a lifter tick. Cause The finish on the exhaust valve stem(s) may have caused excessive wear on the exhaust valve guide(s) in the cylinder heads. When this occurs, the exhaust valve stem to guide clearance becomes out of specification and the tick noise is created each time the valve stem comes in contact with the guide. Correction 1. Verify that the engine oil level is within the operating range. 2. Verify that the noise in question is not the normal ticking type sound produced by the fuel injectors. 3. Connect a mechanical oil pressure gauge and verify that the engine has adequate oil pressure. Refer to SI for additional information if necessary. 4. If the oil pressure is within specification, then remove the left (front) rocker cover and gasket. Refer to the Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side in SI. 5. Place shop towels over the rocker arms and push rods to contain engine oil in the next step. 6. Start the engine and allow to idle. Important: The following steps only need to be done on the exhaust valves. 7. Using a block of wood or the wooden handle on a hammer, place a side load on cylinder number 2 exhaust valve spring. ^ If the noise is reduced or eliminated, then there is excessive clearance between that exhaust valve stem and the guide in the cylinder head. Proceed to Step 8. ^ If the noise is NOT reduced or eliminated, then proceed to cylinder number 4 and 6 exhaust valve springs and apply the same type of side load. If the noise is reduced or eliminated then there is excessive clearance between an exhaust valve stem and guide in the cylinder head. Proceed to the next step. 8. Remove the right (rear) rocker cover. Important: It may not be possible to apply a side load to the exhaust springs with a piece of wood or hammer handle because there is less clearance at the rear side of the engine. As a result, the inspection procedure on the rear side is different than the left (front) side. 9. Remove the rocker arm and push rod from cylinder # 1 exhaust valve. Important: With one rocker arm and push rod removed at a time in the next steps the engine will exhibit a noticeable misfire or rough idle during the test. 10. With shop towels in place to contain any oil, start the engine and allow to idle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Guide: > 08-06-01-022 > Oct > 08 > Engine - Ticking Noise > Page 3429 ^ If the tick noise is reduced or eliminated, then there is excessive clearance between that exhaust valve stem and guide in the cylinder head. Proceed to Step 11. ^ If the noise is NOT reduced or eliminated, then reinstall the push rod and rocker arm and tighten the bolt to specification. Then proceed to cylinder number 3, and if necessary number 5, exhaust valve and repeat the process. If the noise is reduced or eliminated, then there is excessive clearance between an exhaust valve stem and guide in the cylinder head. Proceed to the next step. ^ If the tick noise is always present and never is reduced or eliminated when testing all 6 exhaust valves, then the noise is coming from some other source and it is not necessary to continue with this bulletin. Refer to SI for additional diagnostic information. 11. Replace any cylinder head that has an exhaust valve stem with excessive clearance to the guide. It will be necessary to install three new exhaust valves in each cylinder head replaced. Please note that the exhaust valve part number listed below will have an improved stem finish. Refer to the Cylinder Head Replacement procedure in SI. Parts Information Replacement cylinder heads DO NOT come with any valvetrain components or expansion (freeze) plugs. When ordering a replacement head, it will also be necessary to order 3 exhaust valves and 2 expansion plugs for each head ordered. The intake valves and "all" springs, caps and locks are reusable. In addition, new valve stem seals (intake and exhaust) will be needed and are included in the head gasket kit listed. Warranty Information For vehicle repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Spring: Service and Repair Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement ^ Tools Required J 22794 Spark Plug Port Adapter - J 38606 Valve Spring Compressor Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rocker arm. 2. Remove the spark plug. 3. Important: Before you remove the valve keys, rotate the engine so that the piston in the cylinder you are working on is at (TDC) top dead center. This will eliminate the possibility of the valve accidentally falling inside the cylinder. Install the J 22794 into the spark plug port. Apply compressed air in order to hold the valves in place. 4. Compress the valve spring with the J 38606. 5. Remove the valve keys (2). 6. Remove the valve spring cap (3). 7. Remove the valve spring (4). 8. Inspect the valve spring for damage. Replace the spring if it is damaged. 9. Remove the spring seat/valve stem oil seal (5). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3433 1. Install the valve stem oil seal/spring seat (5). ^ Use a suitable driver. ^ Press over the valve guide boss. 2. Install the valve spring (4). 3. Install the valve spring cap (3). 4. Compress the valve spring using the J 38606. 5. Install the valve keys. If necessary, hold the valve keys in place with grease. 6. Remove the J 38606 in order to release the valve spring. 7. Ensure that the valve keys are seated. 8. Release the air pressure and remove the J 22794. 9. Install the valve rocker arm. 10. Install the spark plug. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-06-01-022 > Oct > 08 > Engine - Ticking Noise Valve: Customer Interest Engine - Ticking Noise TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-022 Date: October 28, 2008 Subject: Tick Type Noise Coming From Engine (Inspect Exhaust Valve Stem to Guide Clearance) Models: 2006-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent Equipped with 3.4L Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Condition Some customers may comment that they hear a ticking noise coming from the engine. Some may describe the noise as sounding like a lifter tick. Cause The finish on the exhaust valve stem(s) may have caused excessive wear on the exhaust valve guide(s) in the cylinder heads. When this occurs, the exhaust valve stem to guide clearance becomes out of specification and the tick noise is created each time the valve stem comes in contact with the guide. Correction 1. Verify that the engine oil level is within the operating range. 2. Verify that the noise in question is not the normal ticking type sound produced by the fuel injectors. 3. Connect a mechanical oil pressure gauge and verify that the engine has adequate oil pressure. Refer to SI for additional information if necessary. 4. If the oil pressure is within specification, then remove the left (front) rocker cover and gasket. Refer to the Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side in SI. 5. Place shop towels over the rocker arms and push rods to contain engine oil in the next step. 6. Start the engine and allow to idle. Important: The following steps only need to be done on the exhaust valves. 7. Using a block of wood or the wooden handle on a hammer, place a side load on cylinder number 2 exhaust valve spring. ^ If the noise is reduced or eliminated, then there is excessive clearance between that exhaust valve stem and the guide in the cylinder head. Proceed to Step 8. ^ If the noise is NOT reduced or eliminated, then proceed to cylinder number 4 and 6 exhaust valve springs and apply the same type of side load. If the noise is reduced or eliminated then there is excessive clearance between an exhaust valve stem and guide in the cylinder head. Proceed to the next step. 8. Remove the right (rear) rocker cover. Important: It may not be possible to apply a side load to the exhaust springs with a piece of wood or hammer handle because there is less clearance at the rear side of the engine. As a result, the inspection procedure on the rear side is different than the left (front) side. 9. Remove the rocker arm and push rod from cylinder # 1 exhaust valve. Important: With one rocker arm and push rod removed at a time in the next steps the engine will exhibit a noticeable misfire or rough idle during the test. 10. With shop towels in place to contain any oil, start the engine and allow to idle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-06-01-022 > Oct > 08 > Engine - Ticking Noise > Page 3442 ^ If the tick noise is reduced or eliminated, then there is excessive clearance between that exhaust valve stem and guide in the cylinder head. Proceed to Step 11. ^ If the noise is NOT reduced or eliminated, then reinstall the push rod and rocker arm and tighten the bolt to specification. Then proceed to cylinder number 3, and if necessary number 5, exhaust valve and repeat the process. If the noise is reduced or eliminated, then there is excessive clearance between an exhaust valve stem and guide in the cylinder head. Proceed to the next step. ^ If the tick noise is always present and never is reduced or eliminated when testing all 6 exhaust valves, then the noise is coming from some other source and it is not necessary to continue with this bulletin. Refer to SI for additional diagnostic information. 11. Replace any cylinder head that has an exhaust valve stem with excessive clearance to the guide. It will be necessary to install three new exhaust valves in each cylinder head replaced. Please note that the exhaust valve part number listed below will have an improved stem finish. Refer to the Cylinder Head Replacement procedure in SI. Parts Information Replacement cylinder heads DO NOT come with any valvetrain components or expansion (freeze) plugs. When ordering a replacement head, it will also be necessary to order 3 exhaust valves and 2 expansion plugs for each head ordered. The intake valves and "all" springs, caps and locks are reusable. In addition, new valve stem seals (intake and exhaust) will be needed and are included in the head gasket kit listed. Warranty Information For vehicle repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-06-01-022 > Oct > 08 > Engine - Ticking Noise Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Ticking Noise TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-022 Date: October 28, 2008 Subject: Tick Type Noise Coming From Engine (Inspect Exhaust Valve Stem to Guide Clearance) Models: 2006-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent Equipped with 3.4L Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Condition Some customers may comment that they hear a ticking noise coming from the engine. Some may describe the noise as sounding like a lifter tick. Cause The finish on the exhaust valve stem(s) may have caused excessive wear on the exhaust valve guide(s) in the cylinder heads. When this occurs, the exhaust valve stem to guide clearance becomes out of specification and the tick noise is created each time the valve stem comes in contact with the guide. Correction 1. Verify that the engine oil level is within the operating range. 2. Verify that the noise in question is not the normal ticking type sound produced by the fuel injectors. 3. Connect a mechanical oil pressure gauge and verify that the engine has adequate oil pressure. Refer to SI for additional information if necessary. 4. If the oil pressure is within specification, then remove the left (front) rocker cover and gasket. Refer to the Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side in SI. 5. Place shop towels over the rocker arms and push rods to contain engine oil in the next step. 6. Start the engine and allow to idle. Important: The following steps only need to be done on the exhaust valves. 7. Using a block of wood or the wooden handle on a hammer, place a side load on cylinder number 2 exhaust valve spring. ^ If the noise is reduced or eliminated, then there is excessive clearance between that exhaust valve stem and the guide in the cylinder head. Proceed to Step 8. ^ If the noise is NOT reduced or eliminated, then proceed to cylinder number 4 and 6 exhaust valve springs and apply the same type of side load. If the noise is reduced or eliminated then there is excessive clearance between an exhaust valve stem and guide in the cylinder head. Proceed to the next step. 8. Remove the right (rear) rocker cover. Important: It may not be possible to apply a side load to the exhaust springs with a piece of wood or hammer handle because there is less clearance at the rear side of the engine. As a result, the inspection procedure on the rear side is different than the left (front) side. 9. Remove the rocker arm and push rod from cylinder # 1 exhaust valve. Important: With one rocker arm and push rod removed at a time in the next steps the engine will exhibit a noticeable misfire or rough idle during the test. 10. With shop towels in place to contain any oil, start the engine and allow to idle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-06-01-022 > Oct > 08 > Engine - Ticking Noise > Page 3448 ^ If the tick noise is reduced or eliminated, then there is excessive clearance between that exhaust valve stem and guide in the cylinder head. Proceed to Step 11. ^ If the noise is NOT reduced or eliminated, then reinstall the push rod and rocker arm and tighten the bolt to specification. Then proceed to cylinder number 3, and if necessary number 5, exhaust valve and repeat the process. If the noise is reduced or eliminated, then there is excessive clearance between an exhaust valve stem and guide in the cylinder head. Proceed to the next step. ^ If the tick noise is always present and never is reduced or eliminated when testing all 6 exhaust valves, then the noise is coming from some other source and it is not necessary to continue with this bulletin. Refer to SI for additional diagnostic information. 11. Replace any cylinder head that has an exhaust valve stem with excessive clearance to the guide. It will be necessary to install three new exhaust valves in each cylinder head replaced. Please note that the exhaust valve part number listed below will have an improved stem finish. Refer to the Cylinder Head Replacement procedure in SI. Parts Information Replacement cylinder heads DO NOT come with any valvetrain components or expansion (freeze) plugs. When ordering a replacement head, it will also be necessary to order 3 exhaust valves and 2 expansion plugs for each head ordered. The intake valves and "all" springs, caps and locks are reusable. In addition, new valve stem seals (intake and exhaust) will be needed and are included in the head gasket kit listed. Warranty Information For vehicle repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 3454 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 3455 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 3456 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 3462 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 3463 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 3464 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-008A Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt / Serpentine Belt Noise and Availability and Use of Kent-Moore EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year and update the Tool Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008 (Section 06 - Engine). Background Several aftermarket companies offer laser alignment tools for accessory drive systems that can be very helpful in eliminating drive belt noise as a result of misaligned pulleys. Typically pricing ranges from $160 - $200. EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt The GM Tool program has now made available a competitive, simple to use and time-saving laser tool to assist in achieving precise alignment of the drive belt pulleys. This optional tool removes the guesswork from proper pulley alignment and may serve to reduce comebacks from: - Drive Belt Noise - Accelerated Drive Belt Wear - Drive Belt Slippage Instructions The instructions below are specific only to the truck Gen IV V-8 family of engines. These instructions are only for illustrative purposes to show how the tool may be used. Universal instructions are included in the box with the Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt. Caution - Do not look directly into the beam projected from the laser. - Use caution when shining the laser on highly polished or reflective surfaces. Laser safety glasses help reduce laser beam glare in many circumstances. - Always use laser safety glasses when using the laser. Laser safety glasses are not designed to protect eyes from direct laser exposure. 1. Observe and mark the serpentine belt orientation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 3470 2. Remove the serpentine belt from the accessory drive system. 3. Install the tool onto the power steering pulley. Position the legs of the tool into the outer grooves of the pulley, farthest from the front of the engine. 4. Install the retaining cord around the pulley and to the legs of the tool. 5. Put on the laser safety glasses provided with the tool. 6. Depress the switch on the rear of the tool to activate the light beam. 7. Rotate the power steering pulley as required to project the light beam onto the crankshaft balancer pulley grooves. 8. Inspect for proper power steering pulley alignment. - If the laser beam projects onto the second rib or raised area (1), the pulleys are aligned properly. - If the laser beam projects more than one-quarter rib 0.9 mm (0.035 in) mis-alignment, adjust the position of the power steering pulley as required. - Refer to SI for Power Steering Pulley Removal and Installation procedures. 9. Install the serpentine belt to the accessory drive system in the original orientation. 10. Operate the vehicle and verify that the belt noise concern is no longer present. Tool Information Please visit the GM service tool website for pricing information or to place your order for this tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 3471 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3472 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3473 Drive Belt: Description and Operation Drive Belt System Description The drive belt system consists of the following components: ^ The drive belt ^ The drive belt tensioner ^ The drive belt idler pulley ^ The crankshaft balancer pulley ^ The accessory drive component mounting brackets ^ The accessory drive components ^ The power steering pump, if belt driven ^ The generator ^ The A/C compressor, if equipped ^ The engine cooling fan, if belt driven ^ The water pump, if belt driven ^ The vacuum pump, if equipped ^ The air compressor, if equipped The drive belt system may use one belt or two belts. The drive belt is thin so that it can bend backwards and has several ribs to match the grooves in the pulleys. There also may be a V-belt style belt used to drive certain accessory drive components. The drive belts are made of different types of rubbers (chloroprene or EPDM) and have different layers or plys containing either fiber cloth or cords for reinforcement. Both sides of the drive belt may be used to drive the different accessory drive components. When the back side of the drive belt is used to drive a pulley, the pulley is smooth. The drive belt is pulled by the crankshaft balancer pulley across the accessory drive component pulleys. The spring loaded drive belt tensioner keeps constant tension on the drive belt to prevent the drive belt from slipping. The drive belt tensioner arm will move when loads are applied to the drive belt by the accessory drive components and the crankshaft. The drive belt system may have an idler pulley, which is used to add wrap to the adjacent pulleys. Some systems use an idler pulley in place of an accessory drive component when the vehicle is not equipped with the accessory. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids The symptom may be intermittent due to moisture on the drive belt(s) or the pulleys. It may be necessary to spray a small amount of water on the drive belt(s) in order to duplicate the customers concern. If spraying water on the drive belt(s) duplicates the symptom, cleaning the belt pulleys may be the probable solution. A loose or improper installation of a body component, a suspension component, or other items of the vehicle may cause the chirping noise. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 3476 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 3477 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table. 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belt and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the noise is related to the drive belt. When removing the drive belt(s) the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspect all drive belt pulleys for pilling. Pilling is the small balls or pills or it may be strings in the drive belt grooves from the accumulation of rubber dust. 6. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 10. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 12. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 14. Replacing the drive belt when it is not damaged or there is not excessive pilling will only be a temporary repair. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 3478 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Excessive Wear Diagnosis Drive Belt Excessive Wear Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Excessive wear on a drive belt(s) is usually caused by an incorrect installation or the wrong drive belt for the application. Minor misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will not cause excessive wear, but will probably cause the drive belt(s) to make a noise or to fall off. Excessive misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will cause excessive wear but may also make the drive belt(s) fall off. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is correctly installed on all of the drive belt pulleys. Wear on the drive belt(s) may be caused by mis-positioning the drive belt(s) by one groove on a pulley. 3. The installation of a drive belt that is two wide or two narrow will cause wear on the drive belt. The drive belt ribs should match all of the grooves on all of the pulleys. 4. This inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is not contacting any parts of the engine or body while the engine is operating. There should be sufficient clearance when the drive belt accessory drive components load varies. The drive belt(s) should not come in contact with an engine or a body component when snapping the throttle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 3479 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Falls Off Diagnosis Drive Belt Falls Off Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids If the drive belt(s) repeatedly falls off the drive belt pulleys, this is because of pulley misalignment. An extra load that is quickly applied on released by an accessory drive component may cause the drive belt to fall off the pulleys. Verify the accessory drive components operate properly. If the drive belt(s) is the incorrect length, the drive belt tensioner may not keep the proper tension on the drive belt. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This inspection is to verify the condition of the drive belt. Damage may of occurred to the drive belt when the drive belt fell off. The drive belt may of been damaged, which caused the drive belt to fall off. Inspect the belt for cuts, tears, sections of ribs missing, or damaged belt plys. 4. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 3480 grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure of that pulley. 5. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 6. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent or cracked may will let the drive belt fall off. 7. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. Missing. loose, or the wrong fasteners may cause pulley misalignment from the bracket moving under load. Over tightening of the fasteners may cause misalignment of the accessory component bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 3481 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Rumbling Diagnosis Drive Belt Rumbling Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Vibration from the engine operating may cause a body component or another part of the vehicle to make rumbling noise. The drive belt(s) may have a condition that can not be seen or felt. Sometimes replacing the drive belt may be the only repair for the symptom. If replacing the drive belt(s), completing the diagnostic table, and the noise is only heard when the drive belt(s) is installed, there might be an accessory drive component with a failure. Varying the load on the different accessory drive components may aid in identifying which component is causing the rumbling noise. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom. 3. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) is causing the rumbling noise. Rumbling noise may be confused with an internal engine noise due to the similarity in the description. Remove only one drive belt at a time if the vehicle has multiple drive belts. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspecting the drive belt(s) is to ensure that it is not causing a the noise. Small cracks across the ribs of the drive belt will not cause the noise. Belt separation is identified by the plys of the belt separating and may be seen at the edge of the belt our felt as a lump in the belt. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 3482 5. Small amounts of pilling is normal condition and acceptable. When the pilling is severe the drive belt does not have a smooth surface for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 3483 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids The symptom may be intermittent due to moisture on the drive belt(s) or the pulleys. It may be necessary to spray a small amount of water on the drive belt(s) in order to duplicate the customers concern. If spraying water on the drive belt(s) duplicates the symptom, cleaning the belt pulleys may be the probable solution. A loose or improper installation of a body component, a suspension component, or other items of the vehicle may cause the chirping noise. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 3484 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 3485 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table. 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belt and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the noise is related to the drive belt. When removing the drive belt(s) the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspect all drive belt pulleys for pilling. Pilling is the small balls or pills or it may be strings in the drive belt grooves from the accumulation of rubber dust. 6. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 10. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 12. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 14. Replacing the drive belt when it is not damaged or there is not excessive pilling will only be a temporary repair. Drive Belt Excessive Wear Diagnosis Drive Belt Excessive Wear Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Excessive wear on a drive belt(s) is usually caused by an incorrect installation or the wrong drive belt for the application. Minor misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will not cause excessive wear, but will probably cause the drive belt(s) to make a noise or to fall off. Excessive misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will cause excessive wear but may also make the drive belt(s) fall off. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is correctly installed on all of the drive belt pulleys. Wear on the drive belt(s) may be caused by mis-positioning the drive belt(s) by one groove on a pulley. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 3486 3. The installation of a drive belt that is two wide or two narrow will cause wear on the drive belt. The drive belt ribs should match all of the grooves on all of the pulleys. 4. This inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is not contacting any parts of the engine or body while the engine is operating. There should be sufficient clearance when the drive belt accessory drive components load varies. The drive belt(s) should not come in contact with an engine or a body component when snapping the throttle. Drive Belt Falls Off Diagnosis Drive Belt Falls Off Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids If the drive belt(s) repeatedly falls off the drive belt pulleys, this is because of pulley misalignment. An extra load that is quickly applied on released by an accessory drive component may cause the drive belt to fall off the pulleys. Verify the accessory drive components operate properly. If the drive belt(s) is the incorrect length, the drive belt tensioner may not keep the proper tension on the drive belt. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 3487 2. This inspection is to verify the condition of the drive belt. Damage may of occurred to the drive belt when the drive belt fell off. The drive belt may of been damaged, which caused the drive belt to fall off. Inspect the belt for cuts, tears, sections of ribs missing, or damaged belt plys. 4. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure of that pulley. 5. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 6. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent or cracked may will let the drive belt fall off. 7. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. Missing. loose, or the wrong fasteners may cause pulley misalignment from the bracket moving under load. Over tightening of the fasteners may cause misalignment of the accessory component bracket. Drive Belt Rumbling Diagnosis Drive Belt Rumbling Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Vibration from the engine operating may cause a body component or another part of the vehicle to make rumbling noise. The drive belt(s) may have a condition that can not be seen or felt. Sometimes replacing the drive belt may be the only repair for the symptom. If replacing the drive belt(s), completing the diagnostic table, and the noise is only heard when the drive belt(s) is installed, there might be an accessory drive component with a failure. Varying the load on the different accessory drive components may aid in identifying which component is causing the rumbling noise. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 3488 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom. 3. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) is causing the rumbling noise. Rumbling noise may be confused with an internal engine noise due to the similarity in the description. Remove only one drive belt at a time if the vehicle has multiple drive belts. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspecting the drive belt(s) is to ensure that it is not causing a the noise. Small cracks across the ribs of the drive belt will not cause the noise. Belt separation is identified by the plys of the belt separating and may be seen at the edge of the belt our felt as a lump in the belt. 5. Small amounts of pilling is normal condition and acceptable. When the pilling is severe the drive belt does not have a smooth surface for proper operation. Drive Belt Squeal Diagnosis Drive Belt Squeal Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids A loose or improper installation of a body component, a suspension component, or other items of the vehicle may cause the squeal noise. If the noise is intermittent, verify the accessory drive components by varying their loads making sure they are operated to their maximum capacity. An overcharged A/C system, power steering system with a pinched hose or wrong fluid, or a generator failing are suggested items to inspect. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 3489 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belt and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the squeal noise is the drive belt(s) or an accessory drive component. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. This test is to verify that an accessory drive component does not have a seized bearing. With the belt remove test the bearings in the accessory drive components for turning smoothly. Also test the accessory drive components with the engine operating by varying the load on the components to verify that the components operate properly. 5. This test is to verify that the drive belt tensioner operates properly. If the drive belt tensioner is not operating properly, proper belt tension may not be achieved to keep the drive belt from slipping which could cause a squeal noise. 6. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) is not too long, which would prevent the drive belt tensioner from working properly. Also if an incorrect length drive belt was installed, it may not be routed properly and may be turning an accessory drive component in the wrong direction. 7. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 8. This test is to verify that the pulleys are the correct diameter or width. Using a known good vehicle compare the pulley sizes. Drive Belt Vibration Diagnosis Drive Belt Vibration Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 3490 The accessory drive components can have an affect on engine vibration. Such as but not limited to the A/C system over charged, the power steering system restricted or the incorrect fluid, or an extra load on the generator. To help identify an intermittent or an improper condition, vary the loads on the accessory drive components. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom such as the exhaust system, or the drivetrain. 3. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) or accessory drive components may be causing the vibration. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. The drive belt(s) may cause a vibration. While the drive belt(s) is removed this is the best time to inspect the condition of the belt. 6. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 8. This step should only be performed if the water pump is driven by the drive belt. Inspect the water pump shaft for being bent. Also inspect the water pump bearings for smoothness and excessive play. Compare the water pump with a known good water pump. 9. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent, cracked, or loose may put extra strain on that accessory component causing it to vibrate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis > Page 3491 Drive Belt Whine Diagnosis Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3492 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Drive Belt Replacement ^ Tools Required J 39914 Serpentine Belt Tensioner Unloader Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner (8) to release the tension on the drive belt. 3. Remove the drive belt from the right idler pulley (2). 4. Carefully release J 39914 to relieve the drive belt tensioner spring tension. 5. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 6. Provided the vehicle will not be raised or lifted to perform additional work. Utilizing a floor jack and a wood block, support the front of the engine using the following procedure. 1. Place the wood block between the lift point of the floor jack and the bottom of the engine oil pan. 2. Raise the jack until the wood block comes into contact with the engine oil pan and is capable of supporting the weight of the engine. 7. If the vehicle is to be raised or lifted in order to perform additional work. Support the engine using the engine support fixture. 8. Remove the right engine mount. 9. Remove the drive belt from the remaining pulleys. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3493 1. Install the drive belt to all the pulleys except the right idler pulley. 2. Install the right engine mount. 3. Depending on which method was used to support the engine. Remove the floor jack from under the engine oil pan or remove the engine support fixture. 4. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner away from the drive belt. 5. Install the drive belt to the right idler pulley (2). 6. Carefully release J 39914 allowing the drive belt tensioner (8) to come in contact with the drive belt. 7. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 8. Inspect the drive belt to insure the belt is properly centered on all pulleys (1-8). 9. Install the air cleaner assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Tensioner Diagnosis Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3497 Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement ^ Tools Required J 39914 Serpentine Belt Tensioner Unloader Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner (8) to release the tension on the drive belt. 3. Remove the drive belt from the right idler pulley (2). 4. Carefully release J 39914 to relieve the drive belt tensioner spring tension. 5. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 6. Loosen the drive belt tensioner bolt. 7. Remove the drive belt tensioner and bolt together from the generator bracket. 8. Separate the bolt from the drive belt tensioner once removed from vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3498 1. Install the bolt to the drive belt tensioner. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the drive belt tensioner and bolt as an assembly to the generator bracket. ^ Tighten the bolt to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 3. Insure the drive belt is properly centered on all the pulleys except the right idler pulley (3). 4. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner away from the drive belt. 5. Install the drive belt to the right idler pulley (2). 6. Carefully release J 39914 allowing the drive belt tensioner (8) to come in contact with the drive belt. 7. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 8. Inspect the drive belt to insure the belt is properly centered on all the pulleys (1-8). 9. Install the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Engine Mount: Testing and Inspection Engine Mount Inspection 1. Important: Before replacing any engine mount due to suspected fluid loss, verify that the source of the fluid is the engine mount, not the engine or accessories. Install the engine support fixture. 2. Observe the engine mount while raising the engine. Raising the engine removes the weight from the engine mount and creates slight tension on the rubber. 3. Replace the engine mount if the engine mount exhibits any of the following conditions: ^ The hard rubber is covered with heat check cracks. ^ The rubber is separated from the metal plate of the engine mount. ^ The rubber is split through the center of the engine mount. ^ The engine mount itself is leaking fluid. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Lift Bracket Replacement Engine Lift Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the thermostat housing. 2. Remove the engine lift bracket bolts. 3. Remove the engine lift bracket from the left cylinder head. Installation Procedure 1. Install the engine lift bracket to the left cylinder head. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the engine lift bracket bolts. ^ Tighten the bolt to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the thermostat housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 3504 Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Right Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Right Removal Procedure 1. Remove the right engine mount. 2. Remove the engine mount bracket to engine bolts (1-4). 3. Remove the engine mount bracket from the engine. Installation Procedure 1. Position the engine mount bracket to the engine. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 3505 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the engine mount bracket to engine bolts (1-4). 1. Tighten the bolts in locations (1) and (2) to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 2. Tighten the bolts in locations (3) and (4) to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the right engine mount. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 3506 Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount Replacement - Front Engine Mount Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission mount bolt. 3. Remove the transmission mount-to-transmission bolts. 4. Remove the transmission mount from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 3507 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Install the transmission mount-to-transmission bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transmission mount bolt. ^ Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 3508 Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount Replacement - Right Engine Mount Replacement - Right Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Support the engine. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the engine mount to bracket bolts. 5. Remove the engine mount to frame rail nuts. 6. Remove the engine mount from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 3509 1. Position the engine mount onto the frame rail studs. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the engine mount to frame rail stud nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the engine mount to engine mount bracket bolts. Take care when aligning the engine mount to engine mount bracket bolt holes, while hand tightening all the bolts. 4. Tighten the engine mount to engine mount bracket bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Remove the engine support. 7. Install the air cleaner assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 3510 Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Support Fixture Engine Support Fixture Installation Procedure ^ Tools Required J 28467-B Universal Engine Support Fixture - J 36462-A Engine Support Adapter Leg Set - J 28467-13 Engine Support Fixture Adapters - GM P/N 11519137 4 Studs or equivalent 1. Remove the fuel injector sight shield. 2. Pull each end of the hood rear seal away from the cowl panel flange near both strut towers. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Replace 2 strut bolts with studs GM P/N 11519137 on right and left sides of the vehicle for installation of support fixture. ^ Tighten the studs to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 3511 4. Install the J-28467-13 (1) and J 28467-5 strut tower adapter (2) to the top of the right strut tower. 5. Install the J-28467-13 (2) and J 28467-5 strut tower adapter (1) to the top of the left strut tower. 6. Install a 127 cm (50 inch) engine support fixture cross bar (2) transversely across the vehicle between both J 28467-5 strut tower adapters. 7. Insert safety pins (1, 3) through the J 28467-5 strut tower adapters and the cross bar (2) to prevent movement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 3512 Important: If 58 cm (23 inch) length engine support cross bar is not available it may be necessary to remove the vehicle hood for additional clearance if a longer cross bar is to be substituted. 8. Position a 58 cm (23 inch) engine support fixture cross bar (1) longitudinally with J 36462-A leg assembly (3) next to the rear engine lift bracket. 9. Install a J 28467-1A clamp (2) to secure the longitudinal mounted cross bar to the transverse mounted cross bar. 10. Insert a J 28467-7A lift hook through a J 28467-6 bracket and install a J 28467-34 wing nut. 11. Install the lift hook and bracket assembly (1) to the longitudinal mounted cross bar (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 3513 12. Position the J 28467-7A lift hook to the rear engine lift bracket (2). 13. Tighten the J 28467-34 wing nut (1) until all free slack is removed from the J 28467-7A bolt hook. Important: If 58 cm (23 inch) length engine support cross bar is not available it may be necessary to remove the vehicle hood for additional clearance if a longer cross bar is to be substituted. 14. Position a 58 cm (23 inch) engine support fixture cross bar (3) longitudinally with J 36462-A leg assembly (4) next to the front engine lift bracket. 15. Install a J 28467-1A clamp to secure the longitudinal mounted cross bar to the transverse mounted cross bar. 16. Insert a J 28467-7A lift hook through a J 28467-6 bracket and install a J 28467-34 wing nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 3514 17. Install the lift hook and bracket assembly (1) to the longitudinal mounted cross bar (2). 18. Position the J 28467-7A bolt hook (1) to the front engine lift bracket. 19. Tighten the J 28467-34 wing nut (2) until all free slack is removed from the J 28467-7A lift hook (1). 20. Evenly tighten both wing nuts until the engine weight is supported by the engine support fixture and no longer carried by the engine mounts. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 21. After removing the engine support fixture, replace the temporary strut studs with the original strut bolts. ^ Tighten the studs to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Lower Idler Pulley: Service and Repair Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Lower Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Lower ^ Tools Required J 39914 Serpentine Belt Tensioner Unloader Removal Procedure 1. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner (8) to release the tension on the drive belt. 2. Remove the drive belt from the right idler pulley (2). 3. Carefully release J 39914 to relieve the drive belt tensioner spring tension. 4. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 6. Remove the right front wheel. 7. Remove the engine splash shield. 8. Loosen the lower belt idler pulley bolt. 9. Remove the lower belt idler pulley and bolt from the engine front cover. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Lower > Page 3519 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the lower belt idler pulley and bolt to the engine cover. ^ Tighten the bolt to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the engine splash shield. 3. Install the right front wheel. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Insure the drive belt is properly centered on all the pulleys except the right idler pulley (3). 6. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner away from the drive belt. 7. Install the drive belt to the right idler pulley (2). 8. Carefully release J 39914 allowing the drive belt tensioner (8) to come in contact with the drive belt. 9. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 10. Inspect the drive belt to insure the belt is properly centered on all the pulleys (1-8). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Lower > Page 3520 Idler Pulley: Service and Repair Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Left Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Left ^ Tools Required J 39914 Serpentine Belt Tensioner Unloader Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner (8) to release the tension on the drive belt. 3. Remove the drive belt from the right idler pulley (2). 4. Carefully release J 39914 to relieve the drive belt tensioner spring tension. 5. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 6. Loosen the left belt idler pulley bolt. 7. Remove the left belt idler pulley and bolt from the generator bracket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Lower > Page 3521 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the left belt idler pulley and bolt to the generator bracket. ^ Tighten the bolt to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 2. Insure the drive belt is properly centered on all the pulleys except the right idler pulley (3). 3. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner away from the drive belt. 4. Install the drive belt to the right idler pulley (2). 5. Carefully release J 39914 allowing the drive belt tensioner (8) to come in contact with the drive belt. 6. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 7. Inspect the drive belt to insure the belt is properly centered on all the pulleys (1-8). 8. Install the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Lower > Page 3522 Idler Pulley: Service and Repair Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Right Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Right ^ Tools Required J 39914 Serpentine Belt Tensioner Unloader Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner (8) to release the tension on the drive belt. 3. Remove the drive belt from the right idler pulley (2). 4. Carefully release J 39914 to relieve the drive belt tensioner spring tension. 5. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 6. Loosen the right belt idler pulley bolt. 7. Remove the right belt idler pulley and bolt from the engine front cover. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Lower > Page 3523 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the right belt idler pulley and bolt to the engine front cover. ^ Tighten the bolt to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 2. Insure the drive belt is properly centered on all the pulleys except the right idler pulley (3). 3. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner away from the drive belt. 4. Install the drive belt to the right idler pulley (2). 5. Carefully release J 39914 allowing the drive belt tensioner (8) to come in contact with the drive belt. 6. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 7. Inspect the drive belt to insure the belt is properly centered on all the pulleys (1-8). 8. Install the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications 414 kPa (60 psi) ......................................................................................................................................................... at 1,850 RPM using 5W-30 engine oil Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3528 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Diagnosis and Testing Low or No Oil Pressure The following conditions may cause low or no oil pressure: ^ Low oil level Fill to the full mark on the oil level indicator. ^ Incorrect or malfunctioning oil pressure switch Replace the oil pressure switch. ^ Incorrect or malfunctioning oil pressure gage Replace the oil pressure gage. ^ Improper oil viscosity or diluted oil ^ Install oil of proper viscosity for expected temperature. ^ Install new oil if the oil is diluted. ^ A worn or dirty oil pump Clean or replace the oil pump. ^ A plugged oil filter Replace the oil filter. ^ A loose or plugged oil pickup screen Replace the oil pickup screen. ^ A hole in the oil pickup tube Replace the oil pickup tube. ^ Excessive bearing clearance Replace the bearings. ^ Cracked, porous, or plugged oil gallery Repair or replace the engine block. ^ Missing or improperly installed gallery plugs Install or repair the plugs as needed. ^ A stuck pressure regulator valve ^ Inspect the pressure regulator valve for sticking in the bore. ^ Inspect the bore for scoring and burrs. ^ A worn or poorly machined camshaft Replace the camshaft. Oil Pressure Testing ^ Tools Required J 25087-C Oil Pressure Tester If the vehicle has low oil pressure complete the following steps: 1. Inspect the oil level. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove the oil filter. 4. Assemble the plunger valve in the large hole of the J 25087-C base. Insert the hose in the small hole of the J 25087-C base. Connect the gage to the end of the hose. 5. Insert the flat side of the rubber plug in the bypass valve without depressing the bypass valve. 6. Install the J 25087-C on the filter mounting pad. 7. Start the engine. 8. Inspect the overall oil pressure, the oil pressure switch, and for noisy lifters. Ensure that the engine is at operating temperature before inspecting the oil pressure. The oil pressure should be approximately 414 kPa (60 psi) at 1,850 RPM using 5W-30 engine oil. 9. If adequate oil pressure is indicated, test the oil pressure switch. 10. If a low reading is indicated, press the valve on the tester base in order to isolate the oil pump and/or its components from the lubricating system. An adequate reading at this time indicates a good pump and the previous low pressure was due to worn bearings, etc. A low reading while pressing the valve indicates a faulty pump. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair Oil Level Indicator and Tube Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the oil level indicator (1). 2. Remove the oil level indicator tube bolt (3). 3. Remove the oil level indicator tube (2).If you are unable to remove the oil level indicator tube, perform the following steps: 1. Remove the stud in order to allow for lateral movement of the oil level indicator tube. 2. Apply penetrating oil to the bottom of the oil level indicator tube. 3. Move the oil level indicator tube back and forth in order to loosen the oil level indicator tube. Installation Procedure 1. Clean the oil level indicator tube. 2. Apply GM sealant P/N 12345739 or equivalent around the oil level indicator tube 12.7 mm (0.50 inch) below the bead. 3. Install the oil level indicator tube (2) into the engine block. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil level indicator tube bolt (3). ^ Tighten the bolt to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the oil level indicator (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 11-00-90-001 Date: March 14, 2011 Subject: Global Information for GM dexos1(TM) and GM dexos2(TM) Engine Oil Specifications for Spark Ignited and Diesel Engines, Available Licensed Brands, and Service Fill for Adding or Complete Oil Change Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Excluding All Vehicles Equipped with Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines GM dexos 1(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 1(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons The dexos(TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos‹›(TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos‹›(TM) specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 1(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Specification Important General Motors dexos 1(TM) engine oil specification replaces the previous General Motors specifications GM6094M, GM4718M and GM-LL-A-025 for most GM gasoline engines. The oil specified for use in GM passenger cars and trucks, PRIOR to the 2011 model year remains acceptable for those previous vehicles. However, dexos 1(TM) is backward compatible and can be used in those older vehicles. In North America, starting with the 2011 model year, GM introduced dexos 1(TM) certified engine oil as a factory fill and service fill for gasoline engines. The reasons for the new engine oil specification are as follows: - To meet environmental goals such as increasing fuel efficiency and reducing engine emissions. - To promote long engine life. - To minimize the number of engine oil changes in order to help meet the goal of lessening the industry's overall dependence on crude oil. dexos 1(TM) is a GM-developed engine oil specification that has been designed to provide the following benefits: - Further improve fuel economy, to meet future corporate average fuel economy (CAFE) requirements and fuel economy retention by allowing the oil to maintain its fuel economy benefits throughout the life of the oil. - More robust formulations for added engine protection and aeration performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 3536 - Support the GM Oil Life System, thereby minimizing the replacement of engine oil, before its life has been depleted. - Reduce the duplication of requirements for a large number of internal GM engine oil specifications. International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) GF-5 Standard In addition to GM dexos 1(TM), a new International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) standard called GF-5, was introduced in October 2010. - There will be a corresponding API category, called: SN Resource Conserving. The current GF-4 standard was put in place in 2004 and will become obsolete in October 2011. Similar to dexos 1(TM), the GF-5 standard will use a new fuel economy test, Sequence VID, which demands a statistically significant increase in fuel economy versus the Sequence VIB test that was used for GF-4. - It is expected that all dexos 1(TM) approved oils will be capable of meeting the GF-5 standard. However, not all GF-5 engine oils will be capable of meeting the dexos 1(TM) specification. - Like dexos(TM), the new ILSAC GF-5 standard will call for more sophisticated additives. The API will begin licensing marketers during October 2010, to produce and distribute GF-5 certified products, which are expected to include SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30 oils. Corporate Average Fuel Economy (CAFE) Requirements Effect on Fuel Economy Since CAFE standards were first introduced in 1974, the fuel economy of cars has more than doubled, while the fuel economy of light trucks has increased by more than 50 percent. Proposed CAFE standards call for a continuation of increased fuel economy in new cars and trucks. To meet these future requirements, all aspects of vehicle operation are being looked at more critically than ever before. New technology being introduced in GM vehicles designed to increase vehicle efficiency and fuel economy include direct injection, cam phasing, turbocharging and active fuel management (AFM). The demands of these new technologies on engine oil also are taken into consideration when determining new oil specifications. AFM for example can help to achieve improved fuel economy. However alternately deactivating and activating the cylinders by not allowing the intake and exhaust valves to open contributes to additional stress on the engine oil. Another industry trend for meeting tough fuel economy mandates has been a shift toward lower viscosity oils. dexos 1(TM) will eventually be offered in several viscosity grades in accordance with engine needs: SAE 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30. Using the right viscosity grade oil is critical for proper engine performance. Always refer to the Maintenance section of a vehicle Owner Manual for the proper viscosity grade for the engine being serviced. GM Oil Life System in Conjunction With dexos (TM) Supports Extended Oil Change Intervals To help conserve oil while maintaining engine protection, many GM vehicles are equipped with the GM Oil Life System. This system can provide oil change intervals that exceed the traditional 3,000 mile (4,830 km) recommendation. The dexos (TM) specification, with its requirements for improved oil robustness, compliments the GM Oil Life System by supporting extended oil change intervals over the lifetime of a vehicle. If all GM customers with GM Oil Life System equipped vehicles would use the system as intended, GM estimates that more than 100 million gallons of oil could be saved annually. GM dexos 2(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 2(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 3537 The dexos (TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos (TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos (TM)specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 2(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Specification - dexos 2(TM) is approved and recommended by GM for use in Europe starting in model year 2010 vehicles, regardless of where the vehicle was manufactured. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European gasoline engines. Important The Duramax(TM) diesel engine is the exception and requires lubricants meeting specification CJ-4. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European light-duty diesel engines and replaces GM-LL-B-025 and GM-LL-A-025. - dexos 2(TM) protects diesel engines from harmful soot deposits and is designed with limits on certain chemical components to prolong catalyst life and protect expensive emission reduction systems. It is a robust oil, resisting degradation between oil changes and maintaining optimum performance longer. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 3538 Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Engine Oil Capacity INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-007 Date: March 14, 2008 Subject: Updated Engine Oil Capacity for 3.4L Engine (RPO LNJ) Models: 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) The purpose of this bulletin is to update the Engine Oil Capacities for the 3.4L V6 Engine (RPO LNJ) found in the Chevrolet Equinox and Pontiac Torrent. The engine oil capacity with an oil filter replacement has been revised to 4.3 L (4.5 qts). The original capacity was 3.8L (4.0 qts). This revision has been made in the Maintenance and Lubrication, Approximate Fluid Capacities and Engine Mechanical- 3.4L, Engine Mechanical Specifications sections of SI. This change also applies to the Owners Manual. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications This capacity has been updated by TSB 08-06-01-007. Engine Oil with Filter ............................................................................................................................ ............................................... 4.5 quarts (4.3 liters) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3541 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE OIL TYPE Look for two things: 1.GM6094M Your vehicle's engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M. 2.SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst symbol on the container. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). You should look for this information on the oil container, and use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. NOTICE: Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty. GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below -20°F (-29°C), it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures. ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you will need for good performance and engine protection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3542 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Position the oil drain pan under the engine oil drain plug. 3. Remove the engine oil drain plug. 4. Clean and inspect the engine oil drain plug, replace if necessary. 5. Clean and inspect the engine oil drain plug sealing surface on the oil pan, repair or replace oil pan if necessary. 6. Remove the oil filter. 7. Clean and inspect the oil filter sealing area on the oil filter adapter, repair or replace if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Lightly oil the replacement oil filter gasket with clean oil. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3543 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the new oil filter. ^ Tighten the filter to 3/4 to 1 full turn, after the oil filter gasket contacts the oil filter mounting surface. 3. Install the engine oil drain plug. ^ Tighten the plug to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the oil drain pan. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3544 6. Remove the oil fill cap from the rocker arm cover. 7. Fill the engine with new engine oil. 8. Install the oil fill cap to the rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Cooler: Service and Repair Oil Cooler Line Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Caution: Ensure that the vehicle is properly supported and squarely positioned. To help avoid personal injury when a vehicle is on a hoist, provide additional support for the vehicle on the opposite end from which the components are being removed. Position the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Place a drain pan or suitable container under the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the transaxle oil cooler lines from the radiator. 4. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Remove the transaxle cooler line assembly nut (2) from the transaxle. 6. Remove the transaxle cooler lines (1) from the vehicle. 7. Replace the transaxle oil cooler pipe seals. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3548 1. Install the transaxle oil cooler line assembly (1) to the transaxle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the transaxle oil cooler line assembly nut (2). ^ Tighten the transaxle oil cooler lines to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Connect the transaxle oil cooler lines to the radiator. ^ Tighten the transaxle cooler line fittings to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 5. Important: Dexron III automatic transmission fluid is not compatible with this transaxle. If Dexron III ATF is used, transaxle failure will result. This transaxle uses GM T-IV fluid P/N 88900925. Add fluid to the transaxle. 6. Start the engine a check for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-016B Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Information on Internal Engine Noise or Damage After Oil Filter Replacement Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-01-016A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important Engine damage that is the result of an incorrect or improperly installed engine oil filter is not a warrantable claim. The best way to avoid oil filter quality concerns is to purchase ACDelco(R) oil filters directly from GMSPO. Oil filter misapplication may cause abnormal engine noise or internal damage. Always utilize the most recent parts information to ensure the correct part number filter is installed when replacing oil filters. Do not rely on physical dimensions alone. Counterfeit copies of name brand parts have been discovered in some aftermarket parts systems. Always ensure the parts you install are from a trusted source. Improper oil filter installation may result in catastrophic engine damage. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) installation instructions when replacing any oil filter and pay particular attention to procedures for proper cartridge filter element alignment. If the diagnostics in SI (Engine Mechanical) lead to the oil filter as the cause of the internal engine noise or damage, dealers should submit a field product report. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002I (Information for Dealers on How to Submit a Field Product Report). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3553 Oil Filter: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Position the oil drain pan under the engine oil drain plug. 3. Remove the engine oil drain plug. 4. Clean and inspect the engine oil drain plug, replace if necessary. 5. Clean and inspect the engine oil drain plug sealing surface on the oil pan, repair or replace oil pan if necessary. 6. Remove the oil filter. 7. Clean and inspect the oil filter sealing area on the oil filter adapter, repair or replace if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Lightly oil the replacement oil filter gasket with clean oil. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3554 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the new oil filter. ^ Tighten the filter to 3/4 to 1 full turn, after the oil filter gasket contacts the oil filter mounting surface. 3. Install the engine oil drain plug. ^ Tighten the plug to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the oil drain pan. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3555 6. Remove the oil fill cap from the rocker arm cover. 7. Fill the engine with new engine oil. 8. Install the oil fill cap to the rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Filter Adapter: Service and Repair Oil Filter Adapter and Bypass Valve Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the oil filter. 3. Remove the oil filter adapter bolts (2). 4. Remove the oil filter adapter (1) and gasket from the engine block. 5. Remove the oil filter bypass hole plug. 6. Important: Do not pry against the threads in the oil filter bypass hole when removing the bypass valve. Insert a flat-bladed tool into the oil filter bypass hole and force the bypass valve out in order to remove the bypass valve. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3559 1. Install the oil filter bypass valve (1) to the proper depth. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil filter bypass hole plug. ^ Tighten the plug to 19 Nm (14 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the oil filter adapter (1) and gasket to the engine block. 4. Install the oil filter adapter bolts (2). ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the oil filter. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Fill the engine with NEW engine oil. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Level Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the oil pressure indicator switch electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the oil pressure indicator switch from the engine block. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3563 1. Apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or the equivalent to the oil pressure indicator switch threads. 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil pressure indicator switch. ^ Tighten the switch to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect the oil pressure indicator switch electrical connector (2). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oil Pan: > 07-06-01-020 > Sep > 07 > Engine - Engine Compartment Rattle or Knock Oil Pan: Customer Interest Engine - Engine Compartment Rattle or Knock Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-020 Date: September 17, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle/Knock Type Noise Coming from Engine Compartment or Underneath Vehicle (Check for Missing Rear Oil Pan Bolts and Perform Necessary Repair) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment about a loud rattle/knock type noise coming from the engine compartment or from underneath the vehicle. Upon inspection, you may find that the noise is coming from the rear of the engine in the transmission bell housing/flexplate area. Cause The bolt(s) that attach the rear of the oil pan to the engine block may have come out and fallen down into the transmission bell housing. Correction Replace the bolt that came out with a new bolt, P/N 11570082. Prior to installing the new bolts, apply thread locker, P/N 12345382 (in Canada, P/N 10953489), to the threads. Install the bolt and tighten to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Then remove the left rear oil pan bolt, clean the threads, apply thread locker, install and tighten to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Verify that the other (vertical) oil pan bolts are also tightened to the same specification and that the side (horizontal) oil pan bolts are tightened to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). Inspect the flexplate (flywheel) and other components for damage caused by the movement of the bolt. Warranty Information Use appropriate labor operation number based on repair performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oil Pan: > 07-06-01-020 > Sep > 07 > Engine - Engine Compartment Rattle or Knock Oil Pan: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Compartment Rattle or Knock Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-020 Date: September 17, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle/Knock Type Noise Coming from Engine Compartment or Underneath Vehicle (Check for Missing Rear Oil Pan Bolts and Perform Necessary Repair) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment about a loud rattle/knock type noise coming from the engine compartment or from underneath the vehicle. Upon inspection, you may find that the noise is coming from the rear of the engine in the transmission bell housing/flexplate area. Cause The bolt(s) that attach the rear of the oil pan to the engine block may have come out and fallen down into the transmission bell housing. Correction Replace the bolt that came out with a new bolt, P/N 11570082. Prior to installing the new bolts, apply thread locker, P/N 12345382 (in Canada, P/N 10953489), to the threads. Install the bolt and tighten to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Then remove the left rear oil pan bolt, clean the threads, apply thread locker, install and tighten to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Verify that the other (vertical) oil pan bolts are also tightened to the same specification and that the side (horizontal) oil pan bolts are tightened to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). Inspect the flexplate (flywheel) and other components for damage caused by the movement of the bolt. Warranty Information Use appropriate labor operation number based on repair performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3577 Oil Pan: Specifications Oil Pan Bolt .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Oil Pan Side Bolt ................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3578 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Replacement ^ Tools Required J 39505 Torque Wrench Adapter Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Install the engine support fixture. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the air conditioning compressor mounting bracket. 5. Remove the engine-to-transaxle brace bolts (1, 2). 6. Remove the engine-to-transaxle brace (3). 7. Remove the starter. 8. If equipped with all wheel drive (AWD), remove the transfer case. 9. If equipped with front wheel drive (FWD), remove the intermediate shaft. 10. Remove the frame. 11. Drain the engine oil and remove the oil filter. 12. Remove the oil pan side bolts. 13. Remove the oil pan sealing surface bolts. 14. Remove the oil pan. 15. Clean the oil pan and the engine block gasket surface. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3579 1. Important: Provided the rear main bearing cap and engine front cover have not been removed and provided the sealant on either side of the rear main bearing cap and engine front cover has not been disturbed, it may not be necessary to apply additional sealant in these locations. Apply sealer GM P/N 12378521 (Canadian P/N 88901148) or the equivalent, to both sides of the crankshaft rear main bearing cap (1) and where the engine front cover meets the engine block. Press the sealer into the gap using a putty knife. 2. Install the oil pan gasket. 3. Install the oil pan. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil pan flange bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the oil pan side bolts. ^ Using J 39505 torque the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 6. Install a NEW oil filter. 7. Install the frame. 8. If equipped with FWD, install the intermediate shaft. 9. If equipped with AWD, install the transfer case. 10. Install the starter. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3580 11. Install the engine-to-transaxle brace (3). 12. Install the engine-to-transaxle brace bolts (1, 2). ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 13. Install the air conditioning compressor mounting bracket. 14. Lower the vehicle. 15. Remove the engine support fixture. 16. Connect the negative battery cable. 17. Fill the engine with new engine oil. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 3584 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump Drive Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Pump Drive Shaft: Service and Repair Oil Pump Drive Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the lower intake manifold. 2. Remove the oil pump drive clamp bolt. 3. Remove the oil pump drive clamp. 4. Remove the oil pump drive. Installation Procedure 1. Apply prelube GM P/N 12345501 (Canadian P/N 992704) or the equivalent to the oil pump drive gear. 2. Apply engine oil to the oil pump drive gear assembly for ease of assembly. 3. Install the oil pump drive gear assembly. 4. Install the oil pump drive gear clamp. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil pump drive gear clamp bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 36 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the lower intake manifold. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Oil Pump Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the oil pan. 2. Remove the oil pump bolt. 3. Remove the oil pump and oil pump drive shaft. 4. Remove the crankshaft oil deflector nuts. 5. Remove the crankshaft oil deflector. 6. Inspect the oil pump driveshaft at both ends for rounding of the corners. Installation Procedure 1. Install the crankshaft oil deflector. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3591 Install the crankshaft oil deflector nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Important: Rotate the oil pump driveshaft as necessary in order to obtain the engagement with the oil pump drive. Install the oil pump and oil pump drive shaft. 4. Install the oil pump bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the oil pan. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications 414 kPa (60 psi) ......................................................................................................................................................... at 1,850 RPM using 5W-30 engine oil Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3596 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Diagnosis and Testing Low or No Oil Pressure The following conditions may cause low or no oil pressure: ^ Low oil level Fill to the full mark on the oil level indicator. ^ Incorrect or malfunctioning oil pressure switch Replace the oil pressure switch. ^ Incorrect or malfunctioning oil pressure gage Replace the oil pressure gage. ^ Improper oil viscosity or diluted oil ^ Install oil of proper viscosity for expected temperature. ^ Install new oil if the oil is diluted. ^ A worn or dirty oil pump Clean or replace the oil pump. ^ A plugged oil filter Replace the oil filter. ^ A loose or plugged oil pickup screen Replace the oil pickup screen. ^ A hole in the oil pickup tube Replace the oil pickup tube. ^ Excessive bearing clearance Replace the bearings. ^ Cracked, porous, or plugged oil gallery Repair or replace the engine block. ^ Missing or improperly installed gallery plugs Install or repair the plugs as needed. ^ A stuck pressure regulator valve ^ Inspect the pressure regulator valve for sticking in the bore. ^ Inspect the bore for scoring and burrs. ^ A worn or poorly machined camshaft Replace the camshaft. Oil Pressure Testing ^ Tools Required J 25087-C Oil Pressure Tester If the vehicle has low oil pressure complete the following steps: 1. Inspect the oil level. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove the oil filter. 4. Assemble the plunger valve in the large hole of the J 25087-C base. Insert the hose in the small hole of the J 25087-C base. Connect the gage to the end of the hose. 5. Insert the flat side of the rubber plug in the bypass valve without depressing the bypass valve. 6. Install the J 25087-C on the filter mounting pad. 7. Start the engine. 8. Inspect the overall oil pressure, the oil pressure switch, and for noisy lifters. Ensure that the engine is at operating temperature before inspecting the oil pressure. The oil pressure should be approximately 414 kPa (60 psi) at 1,850 RPM using 5W-30 engine oil. 9. If adequate oil pressure is indicated, test the oil pressure switch. 10. If a low reading is indicated, press the valve on the tester base in order to isolate the oil pump and/or its components from the lubricating system. An adequate reading at this time indicates a good pump and the previous low pressure was due to worn bearings, etc. A low reading while pressing the valve indicates a faulty pump. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement Intake Manifold: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-06-01-026C Date: February 03, 2010 Subject: Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement After Severe Internal Engine Damage Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-06-01-026B (Section 06 - Engine). When replacing an engine due to internal damage, extreme care should be taken when transferring the intake manifold to the new Goodwrench service engine long block. Internal damage may result in the potential discharge of internal engine component debris in the intake manifold via broken pistons and/or bent, broken, or missing intake valves. After removing the intake manifold from the engine, the technician should carefully inspect all of the cylinder head intake ports to see if the valve heads are still present and not bent. Usually when the valve heads are missing or sufficiently bent, internal engine component debris will be present to varying degrees in the intake port of the cylinder head. If this debris is present in any of the cylinder head intake ports, the intake manifold should be replaced. This replacement is required due to the complex inlet runner and plenum configuration of most of the intake manifolds, making thorough and complete component cleaning difficult and nearly impossible to verify complete removal of debris. Re-installation of an intake manifold removed from an engine with deposits of internal engine component debris may result in the ingestion of any remaining debris into the new Goodwrench service engine. This may cause damage or potential failure of the new service engine. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3601 Intake Manifold: Specifications Lower Intake Manifold Bolt - Center First Pass ................................................................................... ............................................................................................................... 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.) Final Pass ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................ 13 Nm (115 inch lbs.) Lower Intake Manifold Bolt - Corner First Pass ....... .............................................................................................................................................................. ......................... 13 Nm (115 inch lbs.) Final Pass ............................................................................... .................................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Upper Intake Manifold Bolt/Stud .............................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Throttle Body Bolt/Stud ........................................................................................................................ ................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Remove the upper intake manifold. 3. Remove the heater inlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the radiator inlet hose from the thermostat housing. 5. Remove the fuel rail assembly. 6. Remove the lower intake manifold bolts. 7. Remove the lower intake manifold from the engine. 8. If replacing the lower intake manifold, remove the thermostat and housing. 9. Remove the rocker arms and push rods. 10. Remove the lower intake manifold gaskets. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 3604 1. Important: All gasket mating surfaces must remain free of oil and foreign material. Use GM P/N 12346139 (Canadian P/N 10953463) or equivalent to clean surfaces. Important: Do not apply room temperature vulcanizing (RTV) sealer to the engine block prior to the installation of the manifold gaskets. RTV sealer is not to be placed under the lower intake manifold gaskets. Install the lower intake manifold gaskets. 2. Install the rocker arms and push rods. 3. Install the lower intake manifold seals. 4. With the seals in place, apply a small drop 8 - 10 mm (0.31 - 0.39 inch) of RTV sealer GM P/N 12346141 (Canadian P/N 10953433). 5. Install the lower intake manifold to the engine. 6. Notice: Maximum gasket performance is achieved when using new fasteners, which contain a thread-locking patch. If the fasteners are not Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 3605 replaced, a thread locking chemical must be applied to the fastener threads. Failure to replace the fasteners or apply a thread-locking chemical MAY reduce gasket sealing capability. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: All lower intake manifold bolts need to be clean, free of foreign materials, and reused only if new bolts are unavailable. Use GM P/N 1234382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent and apply to the old intake manifold bolt threads. Important: Manufacturer recommends the center bolts be fully torqued before the diagonal bolts to assure proper torque distribution. Important: Lower intake manifold bolts in locations (6) and (7) should be torqued to specification using a crows foot type tool. Install the lower intake manifold bolts. 1. On the first pass. Tighten the lower intake manifold bolts (1, 2, 3, 4) in sequence to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 2. On the final pass. Tighten the lower intake manifold bolts (1, 2, 3, 4) in sequence to 13 Nm (115 inch lbs.). 3. On the final pass. Tighten the lower intake manifold bolts (5, 6, 7, 8) in sequence to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the fuel rail assembly. 8. Connect the radiator inlet hose to the thermostat housing. 9. Install the heater inlet pipe. 10. Install the upper intake manifold. 11. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 3606 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold Replacement - Upper Intake Manifold Replacement - Upper Removal Procedure 1. Remove the fuel injector sight shield. 2. Release the clamp (1) from the brake booster vacuum hose connection. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (2) from the intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the left side spark plug wires (1) from the retainers (2) and from the spark plugs. 5. Remove the ignition control module bracket from the engine with the ignition control module and spark plug wires still attached. Position out of the way. 6. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 3607 7. Remove the heater outlet pipe nut (4) from the upper intake manifold. 8. Remove the heater outlet pipe nuts (2) and bolt (3) from the throttle body. 9. Position the heater outlet pipe out of the way without disconnecting the heater hoses. 10. Remove the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) pipe. 11. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) foul air hose. 12. Loosen but do not completely remove the generator attachment bolt most near the intake manifold. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 3608 13. Remove the generator brace nut (2). 14. Remove the generator brace (1). 15. Remove the upper intake manifold bolts (4, 5). 16. Remove the spark plug wire retainer (3). 17. Remove the upper intake manifold (2). 18. Remove the upper intake manifold gaskets (1). 19. If replacing the upper intake manifold complete the following steps: 1. Remove the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. 2. Remove the EGR valve. 3. Remove the evaporative emissions (EVAP) purge solenoid valve. 4. Remove the throttle body. 5. Remove the fuel injector sight shield studs. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 3609 1. Install the upper intake manifold gaskets (1) to the lower intake manifold and install the fir tree retainers to retain the upper intake manifold gasket position. 2. Install the upper intake manifold (2). 3. Install the spark plug wire retainer (3). 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Apply threadlock GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) to the bolt threads. Install the upper intake manifold bolts (4, 5). ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. If the upper manifold was replaced, complete the following steps: 1. Install the fuel injector sight shield studs. 2. Install the throttle body. 3. Install the EVAP purge solenoid valve. 4. Install the EGR valve. 5. Install MAP sensor. 6. Install the generator brace (1). 7. Install the generator brace nut (2). ^ Tighten the nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 3610 8. Fully insert the generator attachment bolt most near the intake manifold. ^ Tighten the bolt to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 9. Install the PCV foul air hose. 10. Install the EGR pipe. 11. Position the heater outlet pipe to the throttle body and the upper intake manifold. 12. Install the heater outlet pipe nuts (2) to the throttle body. ^ Tighten the nut to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 13. Install the heater outlet pipe bolt (3) to the throttle body. ^ Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 14. Install the heater outlet pipe nut (4) to the upper intake manifold. ^ Tighten the nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 15. Install the air cleaner intake duct. 16. Install the ignition control module bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 3611 17. Connect the left side spark plug wires (1) to the spark plugs and to the spark plug wire retainers. 18. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose (2) to the intake manifold. 19. Install the clamp (1) to the brake booster vacuum hose connection. 20. Install the fuel injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Customer Interest Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal Bulletin No.: 05-06-01-019F Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Engine Oil Leak at Crankshaft Rear Main Oil Seal (Install Revised Crankshaft Rear Main Oil Seal Using Revised Rear Main Seal Installer and Remover Tools) Models: 1986-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with 2.8L, 3.1L, 3.4L, 3.5L, 3.9L 60 Degree V6 Engine (VINs D, E, F, J, K, L, M, N, R, S, T, V, W, X, Z, 1, 3, 8, 9, W, R - RPOs LG6, LA1, LNJ, LG8, LL1 or LX9, L82, LL2, LB8, LHO, LG5, LB6, LE2 or LQ1, LH7, LC1, L44, LZ4, LZE, LZ9, LGD, LZ8, LZG) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add an Important statement on proper seal installation. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-01-019E (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). This bulletin only applies to 60 degree V6 engines. Some of the discontinued 60 degree V6 engine VINs and RPOs may have carried over to other new model year engines and may no longer be a 60 degree V6 engine. So this bulletin may not apply. It is very important to verify that the following information is correct before using this bulletin: Year of vehicle (e.g. N = 1992) V6 Engine Liter size (e.g. 3.4L) VIN CODE (e.g. X) RPO (e.g. LQ1) If ALL the information from the vehicle (year, size, VIN Code, RPO) you're working on can be found under the models listed above, then this bulletin applies to that engine. If one or more of the vehicle's information can NOT be found under the models listed above, then this bulletin does NOT apply. This bulletin does not apply to 2004-2007 Saturn VUE models with 3.5L DOHC V6 Engine (VIN 4 RPO L66) or 2005-2008 Cadillac CTS with 2.8L HFV6 Engine (VIN T - RPO LP1). Condition Some customers may comment on external oil leakage. Correction Before replacement of the new design crankshaft rear main oil seal, be sure the PCV system is operating correctly. The new seal described below comes with a protective nylon sleeve already installed in the seal. This sleeve assures that the seal is installed in the correct direction and also protects the seal from getting damaged during installation. Do not remove the protective sleeve from the seal; if removed, the installation tool (EN48108) will not work. A new design crankshaft rear main oil seal and installation tool (EN-48108) has been released. This seal incorporates features that improve high mileage durability. Replace the crankshaft rear main oil seal with the new design rear main oil seal, P/N 12592195, using the following service procedures. Tools Required TOOLS WERE SHIPPED TO YOUR DEALERSHIPS. IF YOU HAVE NOT RECEIVED THEM OR THEY ARE LOST, PLEASE CALL GM SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS AT 1-800-GM-TOOLS. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 3621 EN-48108 Rear Main Oil Seal Installation Tool This tool has a unique design to allow the technician to easily install the rear main seal squarely to the correct depth and direction. Before proceeding with installation, review the above illustration to become familiar with the components shown in the illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 3622 EN-48672 rear Main Oil Seal Remover Tool This tool has a unique design to allow the technician to easily remove the rear main seal without nicking the crankshaft sealing surface when removing the seal. Before proceeding with removal, review the above illustration to become familiar with the following components: Removal Plate Threaded Adjustment Pins and Jam Nuts Force Screw # 2 Self Drill Screws 38 mm (1.5 in) long 8 needed Extreme Pressure Lubricant Removal Procedure Remove the transmission. Refer to Transmission Replacement in SI or the appropriate Service Manual. Remove the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement in SI or the appropriate Service Manual. Install the removal plate (2) and both threaded adjustment pins and jam nuts (1) into the back of the crankshaft flange and secure the plate with adjustment pins and jam nuts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 3623 Install # 2 Self Drill Screws 38 mm (1.5 in) long, eight needed, (1) and tighten down flush to the plate. Before installing the force screw, apply a small amount of the Extreme Pressure Lubricant J 23444-A, provided in the tool kit. Install the force screw (1) and back off both jam nuts (2) and continue to turn the force screw (1) into the removal plate to remove the seal from the crankshaft. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 3624 Once the seal is removed from the crankshaft, remove and save all eight screws and discard the old seal. Clean the crankshaft sealing surface with a clean, lint free towel. Inspect the lead-in edge of the crankshaft for burrs or sharp edges that could damage the rear main oil seal. Remove any burrs or sharp edges with crocus cloth or equivalent before proceeding. Installation Procedure Do not remove the protective nylon sleeve from the new rear main seal prior to installation. The EN-48108 is designed to install the rear main seal with the protective sleeve in place. Never apply or use any oil, lubricants or sealing compounds on the crankshaft rear main oil seal. Align the mandrel dowel pin (EN-48108) to the dowel pin hole in the crankshaft. Refer to the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 3625 Using a large flat-bladed screwdriver, tighten the two mandrel screws to the crankshaft. Ensure that the mandrel is snug to the crankshaft hub. Refer to the above illustration. Different types (styles) of rear main seals were used in production in different model years, engines and manufacturing facilities. As a result, the NEW style rear main seal that you will be installing may have a different appearance or shape than the one removed. Regardless of what type of seal was removed and what side was facing outside the engine, the new seal must be installed as described. Upon close inspection of the outer lip on the new seal, the words this side out" will be seen. This side of the seal must be facing OUTSIDE the engine when correctly installed. While this may seem backwards, it is correct. In addition, the protective nylon (plastic) sleeve that the seal is mounted on in the package was designed so that the seal can only be installed in the proper direction when using the installation tool described in the following steps. Install the rear main seal (1), with the protective nylon sleeve attached (2), onto the mandrel. The seal, if properly installed, will center on a step that protrudes from the center of the mandrel. As an error proof, seal will fit only one way onto the mandrel. Refer to the above illustration. Before installing the outer drive drum, bearing, washer and the drive nut onto the threaded shaft, apply a small amount of the Extreme Pressure Lubricant J 23444-A, provided in the tool kit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 3626 Install the outer drive drum onto the mandrel (EN-481 08). Install the bearing, washer and the drive nut onto the threaded shaft. Refer to the above illustration. Using a wrench, turn the drive nut on the mandrel (EN-48108), which will push the seal into the engine block bore. Turn the wrench until the drive drum is snug and flush against the engine block. Refer to the above illustration. Loosen and remove the drive nut, washer, bearing and drive drum. Discard the protective nylon sleeve. Verify that the seal has seated properly. Use a flat-bladed screwdriver to remove the two attachment screws from the mandrel and remove the mandrel from the crankshaft hub. Refer to the above illustration. Install the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement in SI or the appropriate Service Manual. Install the transmission. Refer to Transmission Replacement in SI or the appropriate Service Manual. Inspect for proper fluid levels. Inspect for leaks. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 3627 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal Bulletin No.: 05-06-01-019F Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Engine Oil Leak at Crankshaft Rear Main Oil Seal (Install Revised Crankshaft Rear Main Oil Seal Using Revised Rear Main Seal Installer and Remover Tools) Models: 1986-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with 2.8L, 3.1L, 3.4L, 3.5L, 3.9L 60 Degree V6 Engine (VINs D, E, F, J, K, L, M, N, R, S, T, V, W, X, Z, 1, 3, 8, 9, W, R - RPOs LG6, LA1, LNJ, LG8, LL1 or LX9, L82, LL2, LB8, LHO, LG5, LB6, LE2 or LQ1, LH7, LC1, L44, LZ4, LZE, LZ9, LGD, LZ8, LZG) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add an Important statement on proper seal installation. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-01-019E (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). This bulletin only applies to 60 degree V6 engines. Some of the discontinued 60 degree V6 engine VINs and RPOs may have carried over to other new model year engines and may no longer be a 60 degree V6 engine. So this bulletin may not apply. It is very important to verify that the following information is correct before using this bulletin: Year of vehicle (e.g. N = 1992) V6 Engine Liter size (e.g. 3.4L) VIN CODE (e.g. X) RPO (e.g. LQ1) If ALL the information from the vehicle (year, size, VIN Code, RPO) you're working on can be found under the models listed above, then this bulletin applies to that engine. If one or more of the vehicle's information can NOT be found under the models listed above, then this bulletin does NOT apply. This bulletin does not apply to 2004-2007 Saturn VUE models with 3.5L DOHC V6 Engine (VIN 4 RPO L66) or 2005-2008 Cadillac CTS with 2.8L HFV6 Engine (VIN T - RPO LP1). Condition Some customers may comment on external oil leakage. Correction Before replacement of the new design crankshaft rear main oil seal, be sure the PCV system is operating correctly. The new seal described below comes with a protective nylon sleeve already installed in the seal. This sleeve assures that the seal is installed in the correct direction and also protects the seal from getting damaged during installation. Do not remove the protective sleeve from the seal; if removed, the installation tool (EN48108) will not work. A new design crankshaft rear main oil seal and installation tool (EN-48108) has been released. This seal incorporates features that improve high mileage durability. Replace the crankshaft rear main oil seal with the new design rear main oil seal, P/N 12592195, using the following service procedures. Tools Required TOOLS WERE SHIPPED TO YOUR DEALERSHIPS. IF YOU HAVE NOT RECEIVED THEM OR THEY ARE LOST, PLEASE CALL GM SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS AT 1-800-GM-TOOLS. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 3633 EN-48108 Rear Main Oil Seal Installation Tool This tool has a unique design to allow the technician to easily install the rear main seal squarely to the correct depth and direction. Before proceeding with installation, review the above illustration to become familiar with the components shown in the illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 3634 EN-48672 rear Main Oil Seal Remover Tool This tool has a unique design to allow the technician to easily remove the rear main seal without nicking the crankshaft sealing surface when removing the seal. Before proceeding with removal, review the above illustration to become familiar with the following components: Removal Plate Threaded Adjustment Pins and Jam Nuts Force Screw # 2 Self Drill Screws 38 mm (1.5 in) long 8 needed Extreme Pressure Lubricant Removal Procedure Remove the transmission. Refer to Transmission Replacement in SI or the appropriate Service Manual. Remove the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement in SI or the appropriate Service Manual. Install the removal plate (2) and both threaded adjustment pins and jam nuts (1) into the back of the crankshaft flange and secure the plate with adjustment pins and jam nuts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 3635 Install # 2 Self Drill Screws 38 mm (1.5 in) long, eight needed, (1) and tighten down flush to the plate. Before installing the force screw, apply a small amount of the Extreme Pressure Lubricant J 23444-A, provided in the tool kit. Install the force screw (1) and back off both jam nuts (2) and continue to turn the force screw (1) into the removal plate to remove the seal from the crankshaft. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 3636 Once the seal is removed from the crankshaft, remove and save all eight screws and discard the old seal. Clean the crankshaft sealing surface with a clean, lint free towel. Inspect the lead-in edge of the crankshaft for burrs or sharp edges that could damage the rear main oil seal. Remove any burrs or sharp edges with crocus cloth or equivalent before proceeding. Installation Procedure Do not remove the protective nylon sleeve from the new rear main seal prior to installation. The EN-48108 is designed to install the rear main seal with the protective sleeve in place. Never apply or use any oil, lubricants or sealing compounds on the crankshaft rear main oil seal. Align the mandrel dowel pin (EN-48108) to the dowel pin hole in the crankshaft. Refer to the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 3637 Using a large flat-bladed screwdriver, tighten the two mandrel screws to the crankshaft. Ensure that the mandrel is snug to the crankshaft hub. Refer to the above illustration. Different types (styles) of rear main seals were used in production in different model years, engines and manufacturing facilities. As a result, the NEW style rear main seal that you will be installing may have a different appearance or shape than the one removed. Regardless of what type of seal was removed and what side was facing outside the engine, the new seal must be installed as described. Upon close inspection of the outer lip on the new seal, the words this side out" will be seen. This side of the seal must be facing OUTSIDE the engine when correctly installed. While this may seem backwards, it is correct. In addition, the protective nylon (plastic) sleeve that the seal is mounted on in the package was designed so that the seal can only be installed in the proper direction when using the installation tool described in the following steps. Install the rear main seal (1), with the protective nylon sleeve attached (2), onto the mandrel. The seal, if properly installed, will center on a step that protrudes from the center of the mandrel. As an error proof, seal will fit only one way onto the mandrel. Refer to the above illustration. Before installing the outer drive drum, bearing, washer and the drive nut onto the threaded shaft, apply a small amount of the Extreme Pressure Lubricant J 23444-A, provided in the tool kit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 3638 Install the outer drive drum onto the mandrel (EN-481 08). Install the bearing, washer and the drive nut onto the threaded shaft. Refer to the above illustration. Using a wrench, turn the drive nut on the mandrel (EN-48108), which will push the seal into the engine block bore. Turn the wrench until the drive drum is snug and flush against the engine block. Refer to the above illustration. Loosen and remove the drive nut, washer, bearing and drive drum. Discard the protective nylon sleeve. Verify that the seal has seated properly. Use a flat-bladed screwdriver to remove the two attachment screws from the mandrel and remove the mandrel from the crankshaft hub. Refer to the above illustration. Install the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement in SI or the appropriate Service Manual. Install the transmission. Refer to Transmission Replacement in SI or the appropriate Service Manual. Inspect for proper fluid levels. Inspect for leaks. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 3639 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3640 Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Replacement ^ Tools Required J 34686 Rear Main Seal Installer Removal Procedure Important: Do not damage the crankshaft or seal bore. 1. Remove the engine flywheel. 2. Remove the crankshaft rear oil seal. Pry the crankshaft rear oil seal out using a suitable tool. Installation Procedure Notice: Do not apply or use any oil lubrication on the crankshaft rear oil seal, or the seal installer. Do not touch the sealing lip of the oil seal once the protective sleeve is removed. Doing so will damage/deform the seal. Notice: Clean the crankshaft sealing surface with a clean, lint free towel. Inspect lead-in edge of crankshaft for burrs/sharp edges that could damage the rear main oil seal. Remove burrs/sharp edges with crocus cloth before proceeding. Important: Notice the direction of the rear oil seal. The new design is a reverse style as opposed to what has been used in the past. "THIS SIDE OUT" has been stamped into the seal as shown in the graphic. 1. Carefully remove the protection sleeve from the new crankshaft rear oil seal. 2. Install the crankshaft rear oil seal onto the J 34686 by sliding the crankshaft rear oil seal over the mandrel using a twisting motion until the back of the crankshaft rear oil seal bottoms squarely against the collar of the tool. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Perform the following steps in order to install the crankshaft rear oil seal: A. Align the dowel pin of the J 34686 with the dowel pin in the crankshaft. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3641 B. Attach the J 34686 to the crankshaft by hand, or tighten the attaching screws to 5 Nm (45 inch lbs.). C. Turn the T-handle of the J 34686 in order to engage allow the collar to push the seal into the bore. Turn the handle until the collar is tight against the engine block. Ensure that the seal is seated properly. D. Loosen the T-handle until the handle comes to a stop. E. Remove the attaching screws. 4. Install the engine flywheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal Front Crankshaft Seal: Customer Interest Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-023 Date: December 05, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: 60 Degree V6 Engine Oil Leak at Crankshaft Front Oil Seal (Use New Crankshaft Front Oil Seal Installer Tool EN-48869) Models: 1986-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with 2.8L, 3.1L, 3.4L, 3.5L or 3.9L 60 Degree V6 Engine (VINs D, E, F, J, K, L, M, N, R, S, T, V, W, X, Z, 1, 3, 8, 9, W, R - RPOs LG6, LA1, LNJ, LG8, LL1 or LX9, L82, LL2, LB8, LHO, LG5, LB6, LE2 or LQ1, LH7, LC1, L44, LZ4, LZE, LZ9, LGD, LZ8, LZG) This bulletin does not apply to 2004-2007 Saturn VUE models with 3.5L DOHC V6 Engine (VIN 4 RPO L66) or 2005-2008 Cadillac CTS with 2.8L HFV6 Engine (VIN T - RPO LP1). This bulletin only applies to 60 degree V6 engines. Some of the discontinued 60 degree V6 engine VINs and RPOs may have carried over to other new model year engines and may no longer be a 60 degree V6 engine. So this bulletin may not apply. It is very important to verify that the information shown is correct before using this bulletin. If ALL the information from the vehicle (year, size, VIN Code, RPO) you're working on can be found under the models listed above, then this bulletin applies to that engine. If one or more of the vehicle's information can NOT be found under the models listed above, then this bulletin does NOT apply. Condition Some customers may comment on external oil leakage. Correction Before replacement of the crankshaft front oil seal, be sure the PCV system is operating correctly. Tools Required TOOLS WERE SHIPPED TO YOUR DEALERSHIPS. IF YOU HAVE NOT RECEIVED THEM OR THEY ARE LOST, PLEASE CALL GM SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS AT 1-800-GM-TOOLS. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal > Page 3650 The EN-48869 has a unique design to allow the technician to easily install the front crankshaft seal squarely to the correct depth and direction. Before proceeding with installation, review the illustration to become familiar with the tool. Removal Procedure Remove the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement in SI. Use care not to damage the engine front cover or nick the crankshaft. Remove the crankshaft front oil seal (1) using a suitable tool. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal > Page 3651 Lubricate the inside of the crankshaft front oil seal (1) with clean engine oil. Then install the seal to the installer body (2). Align the oil seal and installer body (1) with the engine front cover and crankshaft. Before installing the force screw, apply a small amount of the Extreme Pressure Lubricant J 23444-A, provided in the tool kit, to the force screw. Install the drive nut (4) onto the threaded force screw shaft (5), washer (3), and bearing (2). Then install to the installer body (1) and tighten the force screw to the crankshaft by hand. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal > Page 3652 Using a wrench, turn the drive nut on the threaded force screw shaft (2), this will push the seal into the engine front cover. Continue to turn the drive nut (2) with the wrench until the installer body (1) is snug and flush against the engine front cover. Loosen and remove the drive nut from the threaded force screw shaft, washer, bearing, and installer body. Verify that the seal has seated properly, flush against front cover flange (1). Install the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement in SI. Inspect for proper fluid levels. Inspect for leaks. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal > Page 3653 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal Front Crankshaft Seal: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-023 Date: December 05, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: 60 Degree V6 Engine Oil Leak at Crankshaft Front Oil Seal (Use New Crankshaft Front Oil Seal Installer Tool EN-48869) Models: 1986-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with 2.8L, 3.1L, 3.4L, 3.5L or 3.9L 60 Degree V6 Engine (VINs D, E, F, J, K, L, M, N, R, S, T, V, W, X, Z, 1, 3, 8, 9, W, R - RPOs LG6, LA1, LNJ, LG8, LL1 or LX9, L82, LL2, LB8, LHO, LG5, LB6, LE2 or LQ1, LH7, LC1, L44, LZ4, LZE, LZ9, LGD, LZ8, LZG) This bulletin does not apply to 2004-2007 Saturn VUE models with 3.5L DOHC V6 Engine (VIN 4 RPO L66) or 2005-2008 Cadillac CTS with 2.8L HFV6 Engine (VIN T - RPO LP1). This bulletin only applies to 60 degree V6 engines. Some of the discontinued 60 degree V6 engine VINs and RPOs may have carried over to other new model year engines and may no longer be a 60 degree V6 engine. So this bulletin may not apply. It is very important to verify that the information shown is correct before using this bulletin. If ALL the information from the vehicle (year, size, VIN Code, RPO) you're working on can be found under the models listed above, then this bulletin applies to that engine. If one or more of the vehicle's information can NOT be found under the models listed above, then this bulletin does NOT apply. Condition Some customers may comment on external oil leakage. Correction Before replacement of the crankshaft front oil seal, be sure the PCV system is operating correctly. Tools Required TOOLS WERE SHIPPED TO YOUR DEALERSHIPS. IF YOU HAVE NOT RECEIVED THEM OR THEY ARE LOST, PLEASE CALL GM SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS AT 1-800-GM-TOOLS. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal > Page 3659 The EN-48869 has a unique design to allow the technician to easily install the front crankshaft seal squarely to the correct depth and direction. Before proceeding with installation, review the illustration to become familiar with the tool. Removal Procedure Remove the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement in SI. Use care not to damage the engine front cover or nick the crankshaft. Remove the crankshaft front oil seal (1) using a suitable tool. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal > Page 3660 Lubricate the inside of the crankshaft front oil seal (1) with clean engine oil. Then install the seal to the installer body (2). Align the oil seal and installer body (1) with the engine front cover and crankshaft. Before installing the force screw, apply a small amount of the Extreme Pressure Lubricant J 23444-A, provided in the tool kit, to the force screw. Install the drive nut (4) onto the threaded force screw shaft (5), washer (3), and bearing (2). Then install to the installer body (1) and tighten the force screw to the crankshaft by hand. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal > Page 3661 Using a wrench, turn the drive nut on the threaded force screw shaft (2), this will push the seal into the engine front cover. Continue to turn the drive nut (2) with the wrench until the installer body (1) is snug and flush against the engine front cover. Loosen and remove the drive nut from the threaded force screw shaft, washer, bearing, and installer body. Verify that the seal has seated properly, flush against front cover flange (1). Install the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement in SI. Inspect for proper fluid levels. Inspect for leaks. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal > Page 3662 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 3668 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-008C Date: September 18, 2008 Subject: Information on OnStar(R) Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Systems Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to correct the model year range for the Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo and update the reference to GM Dealerworld. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). All 2000-2003 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar® from the list above were built with Analog/Digital-Ready OnStar(R) Hardware. Some of these vehicles may have been upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital). Certain 2004-2005 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) from the list above may have been either: ^ Originally built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware OR ^ Upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Hardware All 2006 model year and newer vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) were built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware. If a vehicle has Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware, then the system is capable of operating on both the analog and digital cellular Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information > Page 3677 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 3690 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 3695 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 3696 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-009B Date: June 29, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Language Change for OnStar(R) System (U.S. and Canada Only) Models: 2006-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2006-2008 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Built After and Including VIN Breakpoints Listed Below (2006 MY Only) Attention: This bulletin only applies to vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) Generation 6.1 or later with a Station Identification (STID) Number in the following range: 16,000,000-17,000,000 or 20,000,000-21,999,999 or 23,500,001-26,000,000 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the service procedure and add a Canadian procedure. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Numbers 05-08-46-009A and 05-08-46-008A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 3701 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 3702 Built After and Including the VIN Breakpoints shown. The Generation (Gen) 6.1 OnStar(R) system found in these vehicles has the capability to change the default English voice recognition to French or Spanish. Changing the language of the OnStar(R) system will change the following features to the language you select: Voice recognition command prompts will be played in the language selected. The voice recognition system will only recognize commands given in the selected language. Once completed, this process completely changes all voice recognition and voice commands of the OnStar(R) system. The process will need to be repeated in its entirety to change to a different language, including English. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 3703 Method 1 Method 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 3704 Method 3 The Gen 6.1 version of OnStar(R) does not require the use of the Service Programming System (SPS) to change the voice recognition system. However, there are three ways to change the language. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 3710 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information > Page 3719 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 3732 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 3737 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 3738 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 3743 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 3744 Built After and Including the VIN Breakpoints shown. The Generation (Gen) 6.1 OnStar(R) system found in these vehicles has the capability to change the default English voice recognition to French or Spanish. Changing the language of the OnStar(R) system will change the following features to the language you select: Voice recognition command prompts will be played in the language selected. The voice recognition system will only recognize commands given in the selected language. Once completed, this process completely changes all voice recognition and voice commands of the OnStar(R) system. The process will need to be repeated in its entirety to change to a different language, including English. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 3745 Method 1 Method 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 3746 Method 3 The Gen 6.1 version of OnStar(R) does not require the use of the Service Programming System (SPS) to change the voice recognition system. However, there are three ways to change the language. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3747 Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Front Oil Seal Replacement ^ Tools Required J 35468 Cover Aligner and Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the crankshaft balancer. 2. Pry out the crankshaft front oil seal using a suitable tool. Use care not to damage the engine front cover or the crankshaft. 3. Inspect the crankshaft, the crankshaft balancer and the engine front cover for wear and/or damage. Replace the components as necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Align the J 35468 and the crankshaft front oil seal with the engine front cover and crankshaft. 2. Install the crankshaft front oil seal using the J 35468 and a suitable tool. 3. Install the crankshaft balancer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement ^ Tools Required J 22794 Spark Plug Port Adapter - J 38606 Valve Spring Compressor Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rocker arm. 2. Remove the spark plug. 3. Important: Before you remove the valve keys, rotate the engine so that the piston in the cylinder you are working on is at (TDC) top dead center. This will eliminate the possibility of the valve accidentally falling inside the cylinder. Install the J 22794 into the spark plug port. Apply compressed air in order to hold the valves in place. 4. Compress the valve spring with the J 38606. 5. Remove the valve keys (2). 6. Remove the valve spring cap (3). 7. Remove the valve spring (4). 8. Inspect the valve spring for damage. Replace the spring if it is damaged. 9. Remove the spring seat/valve stem oil seal (5). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3751 1. Install the valve stem oil seal/spring seat (5). ^ Use a suitable driver. ^ Press over the valve guide boss. 2. Install the valve spring (4). 3. Install the valve spring cap (3). 4. Compress the valve spring using the J 38606. 5. Install the valve keys. If necessary, hold the valve keys in place with grease. 6. Remove the J 38606 in order to release the valve spring. 7. Ensure that the valve keys are seated. 8. Release the air pressure and remove the J 22794. 9. Install the valve rocker arm. 10. Install the spark plug. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Level Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the oil pressure indicator switch electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the oil pressure indicator switch from the engine block. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3756 1. Apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or the equivalent to the oil pressure indicator switch threads. 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil pressure indicator switch. ^ Tighten the switch to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect the oil pressure indicator switch electrical connector (2). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 3760 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair Timing Chain: Service and Repair Timing Chain and Sprockets Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine front cover. 2. Remove the camshaft sprocket bolt. 3. Remove the camshaft sprocket and timing chain. 4. Remove the crankshaft sprocket. 5. Remove the timing chain dampener bolts. 6. Remove the timing chain dampener. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3765 1. Install the crankshaft sprocket. 2. Apply prelube GM P/N 12345501 (Canadian P/N 992704) or the equivalent to the crankshaft sprocket thrust surface. 3. Install the timing chain dampener. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the timing chain dampener bolts. ^ Tighten the bolt to 21 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 5. Align the crankshaft timing mark (2) to the timing mark on the bottom of the timing chain dampener (1). 6. Hold the camshaft sprocket with the timing chain hanging down and install the timing chain to the crankshaft gear. 7. Align the timing mark on the camshaft gear (4) with the timing mark on top of the timing chain dampener (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3766 8. Align the dowel in the camshaft with the dowel hole in the camshaft sprocket. 9. Draw the camshaft sprocket onto the camshaft using the mounting bolt. 10. Coat the crankshaft and camshaft sprocket with engine oil. ^ Tighten the bolt to 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). 11. Install the engine front cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Engine Front Cover Bolt Large Bolt ..................................................................................................... ............................................................................................. 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.) Medium Bolt ............. .............................................................................................................................................................. ................... 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.) Small Bolt ........................................................................................... ....................................................................................................... 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3773 Timing Cover: Service and Repair Engine Front Cover Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 3. Install the engine support fixture. 4. Remove the drive belt. 5. Drain the cooling system. 6. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 7. Remove the crankshaft balancer. 8. Remove the lower belt idler pulley. 9. Remove the engine oil pan. 10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Remove the left belt idler pulley. 12. Remove the right engine mount bracket bolts (2-4). 13. Remove the right engine mount bracket (1). 14. Remove the water pump. 15. Remove the thermostat bypass hose adapter. 16. Remove the radiator outlet hose from the engine front cover. 17. Remove the engine front cover bolts (2-4). 18. Remove the engine front cover (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3774 19. Remove the engine front cover gasket (1). 20. Clean the engine block and front cover gasket sealing surfaces. Installation Procedure 1. Apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or the equivalent, to the lower tabs of the engine front cover gasket. Uniformly apply the sealer to both sides of the gasket lower tabs with the sealant bead being no less than 5.0 mm (0.20 inch) wide as shown. Torque front cover immediately after installation of sealer coated gasket. 2. Install the gasket (1) to the engine block positioning the gasket on the locating pins (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3775 3. Install the engine front cover (1) to the engine block aligning the cover with the locating pins. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the engine front cover bolts (3, 4). ^ Tighten the bolts to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the engine front cover bolts (2). ^ Tighten the bolts to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the radiator outlet hose to the engine front cover. 7. Install the thermostat bypass hose adapter. 8. Install the water pump. 9. Install the right engine mount bracket (1). 10. Install the right engine mount bracket bolts (2-4). ^ Tighten the bolts to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.). 11. Install the engine mount bracket bolts (3). ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 12. Install the left belt idler pulley. 13. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 14. Install the engine oil pan. 15. Install the lower belt idler pulley. 16. Install the crankshaft balancer. 17. Lower the vehicle. 18. Install the drive belt. 19. Remove the engine support fixture. 20. Install the air cleaner assembly. 21. Connect the negative battery cable. 22. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF) ............................................................................................................................................. 384-425 kPa (50-60 psi) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 3782 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel system is a returnless on-demand design. The fuel pressure regulator is a part of the primary fuel tank module, eliminating the need for a return pipe from the engine. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel tank module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies high pressure fuel through the fuel filter, past the fuel pressure regulator, and through the fuel feed pipe to the fuel injection system. The fuel pressure regulator has a T-joint that diverts the needed fuel to the fuel rail with the unused fuel dropping back into the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The primary fuel tank module contains a reverse flow check valve. The check valve and the fuel pressure regulator maintain fuel pressure in the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail in order to prevent long cranking times. The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank. TEST Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 3783 Step 1 - Step 6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 3784 Step 7 - Step 13 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 07-06-04-026A > Apr > 08 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Customer Interest Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-026A Date: April 08, 2008 Subject: Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On, DTC P0171 Set (Inspect/Secure Fresh Air Inlet Pipe and Reprogram PCM) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include new repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-026 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the Service Engine Soon (SES) light is illuminated. Upon investigation the technician may find that Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0171 has been set. Cause The fresh air inlet pipe may have become disconnected from the grommet in the rear rocker cover. Correction Inspect the fresh air inlet pipe connection to the rear rocker cover. If the inlet pipe has become disconnected from the rear rocker cover reconnect the pipe into the grommet and also into the metal retaining bracket. Use a plastic tie strap to secure the pipe to the retaining bracket as shown above. In addition an updated Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calibration is now available to address this condition. Reprogram the PCM with the updated calibration using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS). As always make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 07-06-04-026A > Apr > 08 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-026A Date: April 08, 2008 Subject: Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On, DTC P0171 Set (Inspect/Secure Fresh Air Inlet Pipe and Reprogram PCM) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include new repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-026 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the Service Engine Soon (SES) light is illuminated. Upon investigation the technician may find that Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0171 has been set. Cause The fresh air inlet pipe may have become disconnected from the grommet in the rear rocker cover. Correction Inspect the fresh air inlet pipe connection to the rear rocker cover. If the inlet pipe has become disconnected from the rear rocker cover reconnect the pipe into the grommet and also into the metal retaining bracket. Use a plastic tie strap to secure the pipe to the retaining bracket as shown above. In addition an updated Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calibration is now available to address this condition. Reprogram the PCM with the updated calibration using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS). As always make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3799 Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE DUCT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Loosen the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) fresh air pipe from the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Remove the air cleaner intake duct from the mass air flow (MAF) sensor and throttle body. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner intake duct to the MAF sensor and throttle body. 2. Install the PCV fresh air pipe to the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Tighten the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. Tighten the clamps to 4 N.m (35 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 3808 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 3814 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 3820 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 3821 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 3822 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 3828 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 3829 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 3830 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3831 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Release the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by tilting to release the lid from the lower housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3832 5. Remove the air cleaner element (2) from the lower housing (1). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner element (2) into the lower housing (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3833 2. Install the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by first engaging the hinge then lower the cover into the closed position. 3. Fasten the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. 4. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Connect the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection. 3. Install the bleed hose into an approved container and open the valve to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 4. Disconnect the fuel pressure gage from the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure > Page 3839 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Spark Plug Wire Resistance...................................................................................................................................... 4,018 ohm per meter (1,225 ohm per ft) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3843 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG WIRE INSPECTION Spark plug wire integrity is vital for proper engine operation. A thorough inspection will be necessary to accurately identify conditions that may affect engine operation. Refer to the list below for items to be inspected. 1. Inspect for correct routing of the spark plug wires. Improper routing may cause cross-firing. 2. Inspect each wire for any signs of cracks or splits in the wire. 3. Inspect each boot for the following conditions: - Tearing - Piercing - Arcing - Carbon tracking - Corroded terminal If corrosion, carbon tracking, or arcing are indicated on a spark plug wire boot or terminal, both the wire and the component connected to the wire should be replaced. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3844 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG WIRE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Remove the spark plug wires (1) from the left side spark plugs. NOTE: Twist the spark plug boot one-half turn in order to release the boot. Pull on the spark plug boot only. Do not pull on the spark plug wire or the wire could be damaged. 3. Remove the spark plug wires from the retaining clips (2). 4. Remove the spark plug wires (1) from the right side spark plugs. 5. Remove the spark plug wires from the retaining clips (2). 6. Remove the spark plug wires from the ignition coil/control module. 7. Remove the spark plug wires from the engine. 8. If you are replacing the spark plug wires, transfer any of the following components: - Boot heat shields - Spark plug wire conduit - Spark plug wire retaining clips Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3845 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the ignition coil/control module. 2. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the right side spark plugs. 3. Install the spark plug wires to the retaining clips (2). 4. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the left side spark plugs. 5. Install the spark plug wires to the retaining clips (2). 6. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap Spark Plug Gap ................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 1.52 mm (0.060 in.) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap > Page 3850 Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... .................................................. 15 Nm (11.0 lb. ft..) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3851 Spark Plug: Application and ID SPARK PLUG TYPE GM P/N ................................................................................................................................................ .............................................................. 12568387 AC Delco P/N ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................... 41-101 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3852 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG INSPECTION SPARK PLUG USAGE - Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications for the correct spark plug. - Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: Spark plug fouling-Colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug SPARK PLUG INSPECTION - Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. - Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. - Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3853 - Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. An excessively wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. A rattling sound indicates internal damage. - A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. SPARK PLUG VISUAL INSPECTION - Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. - Carbon fouled-Dry, fluffy, black carbon or soot caused by the following conditions: Rich fuel mixtures Leaking fuel injectors - Excessive fuel pressure - Restricted air filter element - Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output Weak coils - Worn ignition wires - Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. - Deposit fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3854 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Observe the following service precautions: Allow the engine to cool before removing the spark plugs. Attempting to remove spark plugs from a hot engine can cause the spark plugs to seize. This can damage the cylinder head threads. - Clean the spark plug recess area before removing the spark plug. Failure to do so can result in engine damage due to dirt or foreign material entering the cylinder head, or in contamination of the cylinder head threads. Contaminated threads may prevent proper seating of the new spark plug. - Use only the spark plugs specified for use in the vehicle. Do not install spark plugs that are either hotter or colder than those specified for the vehicle. Installing spark plugs of another type can severely damage the engine. 1. Remove the spark plug wires from the spark plugs. 2. Remove the spark plugs (1) from the cylinder head. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Gap the spark plugs to the specifications. Refer to Ignition System Specifications. NOTE: It is important to check the gap of all new and reconditioned spark plugs before installation. Pre-set gaps may have changed during handling. Use a round wire feeler gauge to be sure of an accurate check, particularly on used plugs. Installing plugs with the wrong gap can cause poor engine performance and may even damage the engine. 2. Install the spark plugs to the cylinder head. Tighten the spark plugs to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). NOTE: Be sure plug threads smoothly into cylinder head and is fully seated. Use a thread chaser if necessary to clean threads in cylinder head. Cross-threading or failing to fully seat spark plug can cause overheating of plug, exhaust blow-by, or thread damage. Follow the recommended torque specifications carefully. Over or under-tightening can also cause severe damage to engine or spark plug. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3855 - Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: ONLY when the cylinder head is replaced with a NEW cylinder head, the FIRST time the spark plugs are installed, tighten the spark plugs to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). All subsequent tightening of the spark plugs, tighten to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 3. Install the spark plug wires to the spark plugs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. No cylinder reading should be less than 689 kPa (100 psi). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 3859 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test A compression pressure test of the engine cylinders determines the condition of the rings, the valves, and the head gasket. 1. Important: Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and the ignition fuses from the I/P fuse block. Disable the ignition. 2. Disable the fuel systems. 3. Remove the spark plugs from all the cylinders. 4. Remove the air duct from the throttle body. 5. Block the throttle plate in the open position. 6. Measure the engine compression, using the following procedure: 1. Firmly install the compression gauge to the spark plug hole. 2. Have an assistant crank the engine through at least 4 compression strokes in the testing =cylinder. 3. Record the readings on the gauge at each stroke. 4. Disconnect the gauge. 5. Repeat the compression test for each cylinder. 7. Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. ^ The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. ^ No cylinder reading should be less than 689 kPa (100 psi). 8. The following list contains examples of the possible measurements: ^ When the compression measurement is normal, the compression builds up quickly and evenly to the specified compression on each cylinder. ^ When the compression is low on the first stroke and tends to build up on the following strokes, but does not reach the normal compression, the piston rings may be the cause. ^ If the compression improves considerably with the addition of three squirts of oil, the piston rings may be the cause. ^ When the compression is low on the first stroke and does not build up in the following strokes, the valves may be the cause. ^ The addition of oil does not affect the compression, the valves may be the cause. ^ When the compression is low on two adjacent cylinders, or coolant is present in the crankcase, the head gasket may be the cause. 9. Remove the block from the throttle plate. 10. Install the air duct to the throttle body. 11. Install the spark plugs. 12. Install the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) fuse. 13. Install the ignition fuse to the I/P fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair Thermostat Housing Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the fuel injector sight shield. 2. Drain the coolant until the coolant level is below the thermostat. 3. Remove the crossover exhaust pipe. 4. Remove the radiator hose from the thermostat housing. 5. Remove the thermostat housing bolts (2) and clean any sealer from the bolt threads. 6. Remove the thermostat housing (1). 7. Remove the thermostat (3). 8. Clean the mating surfaces. Installation Procedure 1. Install the thermostat (3). 2. Install the thermostat housing (1). 3. Install RTV sealer, GM P/N 12378478 (Canadian P/N 88900041) or the equivalent, to the thermostat housing bolt threads. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the thermostat housing bolts (2). Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the radiator hose to the thermostat housing. 6. Install the crossover exhaust pipe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3863 7. Install the fuel injector sight shield. 8. Fill the cooling system. 9. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. Repair as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3864 Water Pump: Specifications Water pump bolts ................................................................................................................................ .................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye Bulletin No.: 05-06-02-002B Date: January 18, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: DEX-COOL(R) Coolant - New Leak Detection Dye J 46366 - Replaces J 29545-6 Models: 1996-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light/Medium Duty Trucks* (including Saturn) 1997-2008 Isuzu T-Series Medium Duty Tilt Cab Models Built in Janesville and Flint 1999-2008 Isuzu N-Series Medium Duty Commercial Models with 5.7L or 6.0L Gas Engine 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X *EXCLUDING 2006 and Prior Chevrolet Aveo, Epica, Optra, Vivant and Pontiac Matiz, Wave Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-02-002A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Leak detection dye P/N 12378563 (J 29545-6) (in Canada P/N 88900915) may cause DEX-COOL(R) coolant to appear green in a black vessel making it appear to be conventional (green) coolant. This may cause a technician to add conventional coolant to a low DEX-COOL(R) system thus contaminating it. The green DEX-COOL(R) appearance is caused by the color of the leak detection dye which alters the color of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant. A new leak detection dye P/N 89022219 (J 46366) (in Canada P/N 89022220) has been released that does not alter the appearance of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant. When adding the new leak detection dye the color of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant will not change. For detecting leaks on any system that uses DEX-COOL(R) leak detection dye P/N 89022219 (in Canada P/N 89022220) should be used. The new leak detection dye can be used with both conventional and DEX-COOL(R) coolant. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 3870 Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information Bulletin No.: 00-06-02-006D Date: August 15, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Engine Coolant Recycling and Warranty Information Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER Vehicles 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Attention: Please address this bulletin to the Warranty Claims Administrator and the Service Manager. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to adjust the title and Include Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-06-02-006C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Coolant Reimbursement Policy General Motors supports the use of recycled engine coolant for warranty repairs/service, providing a GM approved engine coolant recycling system is used. Recycled coolant will be reimbursed at the GMSPO dealer price for new coolant plus the appropriate mark-up. When coolant replacement is required during a warranty repair, it is crucial that only the relative amount of engine coolant concentrate be charged, not the total diluted volume. In other words: if you are using two gallons of pre-diluted (50:50) recycled engine coolant to service a vehicle, you may request reimbursement for one gallon of GM Goodwrench engine coolant concentrate at the dealer price plus the appropriate warranty parts handling allowance. Licensed Approved DEX-COOL(R) Providers Important: USE OF NON-APPROVED VIRGIN OR RECYCLED DEX-COOL(R) OR DEVIATIONS IN THE FORM OF ALTERNATE CHEMICALS OR ALTERATION OF EQUIPMENT, WILL VOID THE GM ENDORSEMENT, MAY DEGRADE COOLANT SYSTEM INTEGRITY AND PLACE THE COOLING SYSTEM WARRANTY UNDER JEOPARDY. Shown in Table 1 are the only current licensed and approved providers of DEX-COOL(R). Products that are advertised as "COMPATIBLE" or "RECOMMENDED" for use with DEX-COOL(R) have not been tested or approved by General Motors. Non-approved coolants may degrade the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 3871 coolant system integrity and will no longer be considered a 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Coolant Removal Services/Recycling The tables include all coolant recycling processes currently approved by GM. Also included is a primary phone number and demographic information. Used DEX-COOL(R) can be combined with used conventional coolant (green) for recycling. Depending on the recycling service and/or equipment, it is then designated as a conventional 2 yr/30,000 mile (50,000 km) coolant or DEX-COOL(R) 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Recycled coolants as designated in this bulletin may be used during the vehicle(s) warranty period. DEX-COOL(R) Recycling The DEX-COOL(R) recycling service listed in Table 2 has been approved for recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL) or conventional) to DEX-COOL(R) with 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) usability. Recycling Fluid Technologies is the only licensed provider of Recycled DEX-COOL(R) meeting GM6277M specifications and utilizes GM approved inhibitor packages. This is currently a limited program being monitored by GM Service Operations which will be expanded as demand increases. Conventional (Green) Recycling Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 3872 Processes shown in the Table 3 are capable of recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL(R) or conventional) to a conventional (green) coolant. Recycling conventional coolant can be accomplished at your facility by a technician using approved EQUIPMENT (listed by model number in Table 3), or by an approved coolant recycling SERVICE which may recycle the coolant at your facility or at an offsite operation. Refer to the table for GM approved coolant recyclers in either of these two categories. Should you decide to recycle the coolant yourself, strict adherence to the operating procedures is imperative. Use ONLY the inhibitor chemicals supplied by the respective (GM approved) recycling equipment manufacturer. Sealing Tablets Cooling System Sealing Tablets (Seal Tabs) should not be used as a regular maintenance item after servicing an engine cooling system. Discoloration of coolant can occur if too many seal tabs have been inserted into the cooling system. This can occur if seal tabs are repeatedly used over the service life of a vehicle. Where appropriate, seal tabs may be used if diagnostics fail to repair a small leak in the cooling system. When a condition appears in which seal tabs may be recommended, a specific bulletin will be released describing their proper usage. Water Quality The integrity of the coolant is dependent upon the quality of DEX-COOL(R) and water. DEX-COOL(R) is a product that has enhanced protection capability as well as an extended service interval. These enhanced properties may be jeopardized by combining DEX-COOL(R) with poor quality water. If you suspect the water in your area of being poor quality, it is recommended you use distilled or de-ionized water with DEX-COOL(R). "Pink" DEX-COOL(R) DEX-COOL(R) is orange in color to distinguish it from other coolants. Due to inconsistencies in the mixing of the dyes used with DEX-COOL(R), some batches may appear pink after time. The color shift from orange to pink does not affect the integrity of the coolant, and still maintains the 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) service interval. Back Service Only use DEX-COOL(R) if the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 3873 Contamination Mixing conventional green coolant with DEX-COOL(R) will degrade the service interval from 5 yrs./150,000 miles (240,000 km) to 2 yrs./30,000 miles (50,000 km) if left in the contaminated condition. If contamination occurs, the cooling system must be flushed twice immediately and re-filled with a 50/50 mixture of DEX-COOL(R) and clean water in order to preserve the enhanced properties and extended service interval of DEX-COOL(R). After 5 years/150,000 miles (240,000 km) After 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km), the coolant should be changed, preferably using a coolant exchanger. If the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R) and has not had problems with contamination from non-DEX-COOL(R) coolants, then the service interval remains the same, and the coolant does not need to be changed for another 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km) Equipment (Coolant Exchangers) The preferred method of performing coolant replacement is to use a coolant exchanger. A coolant exchanger can replace virtually all of the old coolant with new coolant. Coolant exchangers can be used to perform coolant replacement without spillage, and facilitate easy waste collection. They can also be used to lower the coolant level in a vehicle to allow for less messy servicing of cooling system components. It is recommended that you use a coolant exchanger with a vacuum feature facilitates removing trapped air from the cooling system. This is a substantial time savings over repeatedly thermo cycling the vehicle and topping-off the radiator. The vacuum feature also allows venting of a hot system to relieve system pressure. Approved coolant exchangers are available through the GMDE (General Motors Dealer Equipment) program. For refilling a cooling system that has been partially or fully drained for repairs other than coolant replacement, the Vac-N-Fill Coolant Refill Tool (GE-47716) is recommended to facilitate removal of trapped air from the cooling system during refill. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System ................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 10.5 quarts (9.9 liters) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3876 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL extended life coolant. A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant will: ^ Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). ^ Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). ^ Protect against rust and corrosion. ^ Help keep the proper engine temperature. ^ Let the warning lights and gages work as they should. NOTICE: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle. WHAT TO USE Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and one-half DEX-COOL coolant which won't damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you don't need to add anything else. CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle's coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. NOTICE: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, check your cooling system. NOTICE: If you use the proper coolant, you do not have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Heater Outlet Hose Replacement Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Remove the heater outlet hose clamps (1). 3. Remove the heater outlet hose (2). Installation Procedure 1. Apply engine coolant to the heater outlet hose in order to ease installation. 2. Install the heater outlet hose (2). 3. Install the heater outlet hose clamps (1). 4. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3881 Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Heater Pipe Replacement - Inlet Heater Pipe Replacement - Inlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Release and slide the heater core inlet hose clamp away from the heater inlet pipe connection. 3. Disconnect the heater core inlet hose from the heater inlet pipe. 4. Remove the heater inlet pipe nut (2). 5. Remove the heater inlet pipe (1). 6. Remove the seal (3) from the heater inlet pipe (1). Installation Procedure 1. Install a new seal (3) to the heater inlet pipe (1). 2. Apply engine coolant to the heater inlet pipe seal (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3882 3. Install the heater outlet pipe (1). 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the heater inlet pipe nut (2). Tighten the nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Connect the heater core inlet hose to the heater inlet pipe. 6. Position the heater core inlet hose clamp over the heater inlet pipe connection. 7. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3883 Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Heater Pipe Replacement - Outlet Heater Pipe Replacement - Outlet Removal Procedure 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Remove the air cleaner air intake duct. 4. Remove the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor bolt (3) and bracket (2). 5. Rotate the MAP sensor out of the way of the heater outlet pipe. 6. Disconnect the evaporative emissions (EVAP) pipe from the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 7. Disconnect the electrical connector from the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 8. Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve electrical connector. 9. Release and slide the heater outlet hose clamp (1) away from the heater outlet pipe connection. 10. Disconnect the heater outlet hose (2) from the heater outlet pipe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3884 11. Release and slide the heater core outlet hose clamp away from the heater outlet pipe connection. 12. Disconnect the heater core outlet hose from the heater outlet pipe. 13. Remove the heater outlet pipe nut (1) securing the heater outlet pipe (2) to the intake manifold. 14. Remove the two nuts (3) and bolt (4) securing the heater outlet pipe to the throttle body. 15. Remove the heater outlet pipe (2) from the engine. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3885 1. Install the heater outlet pipe (2) to the engine. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the heater outlet pipe nut (1) securing the heater outlet pipe (2) to the intake manifold. Tighten the nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the heater outlet pipe to the throttle body nuts (3) and bolt (4). Tighten the nuts and bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the heater core outlet hose to the heater outlet pipe. 5. Position the heater core outlet hose clamp over the heater outlet pipe connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3886 6. Connect the heater outlet hose (2) to the heater outlet pipe. 7. Position the heater outlet hose clamp (1) over the heater outlet pipe connection. 8. Connect the electrical connector to the EGR valve. 9. Connect the electrical connector to the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 10. Connect the EVAP pipe to the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 11. Reposition the MAP sensor. 12. Install the MAP sensor bracket (2) and bolt (3). Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 13. Install the air cleaner air intake duct. 14. Fill the cooling system. 15. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3887 Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Thermal Bypass Fitting Replacement Thermal Bypass Fitting Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Release and slide the thermal bypass pipe hose clamp (2) away from the thermal bypass fitting. 3. Remove the thermal bypass hose (1) from the thermal bypass fitting. 4. Release and slide the heater outlet hose clamp (1) away from the thermal bypass fitting. 5. Remove the heater outlet hose (2) from the thermal bypass fitting. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3888 6. Remove the thermal bypass fitting bolt (2). 7. Remove the thermal bypass fitting (1). 8. Remove the seal from the thermal bypass fitting. Installation Procedure 1. Install a new seal to the thermal bypass fitting. 2. Apply engine coolant to the thermal bypass fitting seal to ease installation. 3. Install the thermal bypass fitting (1). 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the thermal bypass fitting bolt (2). Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3889 5. Install the heater outlet hose (2) to the thermal bypass fitting. 6. Position the heater outlet hose clamp (1) over the thermal bypass fitting. 7. Install the thermal bypass hose (1) to the thermal bypass fitting. 8. Position the thermal bypass pipe hose clamp (2) over the thermal bypass fitting. 9. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3890 Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Heater Outlet Hose Replacement Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Remove the heater outlet hose clamps (1). 3. Remove the heater outlet hose (2). Installation Procedure 1. Apply engine coolant to the heater outlet hose in order to ease installation. 2. Install the heater outlet hose (2). 3. Install the heater outlet hose clamps (1). 4. Fill the cooling system. Heater Pipe Replacement - Inlet Heater Pipe Replacement - Inlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3891 2. Release and slide the heater core inlet hose clamp away from the heater inlet pipe connection. 3. Disconnect the heater core inlet hose from the heater inlet pipe. 4. Remove the heater inlet pipe nut (2). 5. Remove the heater inlet pipe (1). 6. Remove the seal (3) from the heater inlet pipe (1). Installation Procedure 1. Install a new seal (3) to the heater inlet pipe (1). 2. Apply engine coolant to the heater inlet pipe seal (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3892 3. Install the heater outlet pipe (1). 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the heater inlet pipe nut (2). Tighten the nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Connect the heater core inlet hose to the heater inlet pipe. 6. Position the heater core inlet hose clamp over the heater inlet pipe connection. 7. Fill the cooling system. Heater Pipe Replacement - Outlet Heater Pipe Replacement - Outlet Removal Procedure 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Remove the air cleaner air intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3893 4. Remove the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor bolt (3) and bracket (2). 5. Rotate the MAP sensor out of the way of the heater outlet pipe. 6. Disconnect the evaporative emissions (EVAP) pipe from the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 7. Disconnect the electrical connector from the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 8. Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve electrical connector. 9. Release and slide the heater outlet hose clamp (1) away from the heater outlet pipe connection. 10. Disconnect the heater outlet hose (2) from the heater outlet pipe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3894 11. Release and slide the heater core outlet hose clamp away from the heater outlet pipe connection. 12. Disconnect the heater core outlet hose from the heater outlet pipe. 13. Remove the heater outlet pipe nut (1) securing the heater outlet pipe (2) to the intake manifold. 14. Remove the two nuts (3) and bolt (4) securing the heater outlet pipe to the throttle body. 15. Remove the heater outlet pipe (2) from the engine. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3895 1. Install the heater outlet pipe (2) to the engine. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the heater outlet pipe nut (1) securing the heater outlet pipe (2) to the intake manifold. Tighten the nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the heater outlet pipe to the throttle body nuts (3) and bolt (4). Tighten the nuts and bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the heater core outlet hose to the heater outlet pipe. 5. Position the heater core outlet hose clamp over the heater outlet pipe connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3896 6. Connect the heater outlet hose (2) to the heater outlet pipe. 7. Position the heater outlet hose clamp (1) over the heater outlet pipe connection. 8. Connect the electrical connector to the EGR valve. 9. Connect the electrical connector to the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 10. Connect the EVAP pipe to the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 11. Reposition the MAP sensor. 12. Install the MAP sensor bracket (2) and bolt (3). Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 13. Install the air cleaner air intake duct. 14. Fill the cooling system. 15. Install the injector sight shield. Thermal Bypass Fitting Replacement Thermal Bypass Fitting Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3897 2. Release and slide the thermal bypass pipe hose clamp (2) away from the thermal bypass fitting. 3. Remove the thermal bypass hose (1) from the thermal bypass fitting. 4. Release and slide the heater outlet hose clamp (1) away from the thermal bypass fitting. 5. Remove the heater outlet hose (2) from the thermal bypass fitting. 6. Remove the thermal bypass fitting bolt (2). 7. Remove the thermal bypass fitting (1). 8. Remove the seal from the thermal bypass fitting. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3898 Installation Procedure 1. Install a new seal to the thermal bypass fitting. 2. Apply engine coolant to the thermal bypass fitting seal to ease installation. 3. Install the thermal bypass fitting (1). 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the thermal bypass fitting bolt (2). Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). 5. Install the heater outlet hose (2) to the thermal bypass fitting. 6. Position the heater outlet hose clamp (1) over the thermal bypass fitting. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3899 7. Install the thermal bypass hose (1) to the thermal bypass fitting. 8. Position the thermal bypass pipe hose clamp (2) over the thermal bypass fitting. 9. Fill the cooling system. Thermal Bypass Hose Replacement Thermal Bypass Hose Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Release and slide the thermal bypass pipe hose clamps (2) away from the hose connections. 3. Remove thermal bypass hose (1). Installation Procedure 1. Apply engine coolant to the bypass hose in order to ease installation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3900 2. Install the thermal bypass pipe hose (1). 3. Position the thermal bypass pipe hose clamps (2) over the hose end connections. 4. Fill the cooling system. Thermal Bypass Pipe Replacement Thermal Bypass Pipe Replacement Tools Required J 21882 Oil Suction Pipe Installer Removal Procedure 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the upper intake manifold. 3. Remove the thermal bypass hose. 4. Remove the thermal bypass pipe bolt. 5. Remove the thermal bypass pipe. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Outlet Hose Replacement > Page 3901 1. Apply sealant GM P/N 12345493 (Canadian P/N 10953488) or equivalent to the end of the thermal bypass pipe where the pipe is pressed into the intake manifold. 2. Install the thermal bypass pipe using J 21882. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the thermal bypass pipe bolt. Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 4. Install the thermal bypass hose. 5. Install the upper intake manifold. 6. Fill the engine with coolant. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Surge Tank Inlet Hose/Pipe Replacement Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Radiator Surge Tank Inlet Hose/Pipe Replacement Surge Tank Hose/Pipe Replacement - Inlet Removal Procedure 1. Remove the surge tank inlet hose clamp from the surge tank. 2. Remove the surge tank inlet hose from the surge tank. 3. Remove the surge tank inlet hose clamp from the engine. 4. Remove the surge tank inlet hose from the engine. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Surge Tank Inlet Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 3906 1. Install the surge tank inlet hose to the engine. 2. Install the surge tank inlet hose clamp to the engine. 3. Install the surge tank inlet hose to the surge tank. 4. Install the surge tank inlet hose clamp to the surge tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Surge Tank Inlet Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 3907 Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Surge Tank Replacement Surge Tank Replacement Tools Required GE-477161617 Vac N Fill Coolant Refill Tool Removal Procedure 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the heater core. 3. Remove the heater outlet hose (1) from the heater core. 4. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the engine. 5. Remove the heater outlet hose (1) from the engine. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Surge Tank Inlet Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 3908 6. Position the loose end of the heater inlet hose outboard to ease in the removal of the surge tank. 7. Remove the surge tank inlet hose clamp from the surge tank. 8. Disconnect the surge tank inlet hose from the surge tank. 9. Remove the surge tank bolts from the surge tank. 10. Lift the surge tank to gain access to the heater outlet hose. 11. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the surge tank. 12. Remove the heater outlet hose from the surge tank. 13. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Surge Tank Inlet Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 3909 1. Install the heater outlet hose to the surge tank. 2. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice Install the surge tank bolts to the surge tank. Tighten the bolts to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the surge tank inlet hose to the surge tank. 5. Install the surge tank inlet hose clamp to the surge tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Surge Tank Inlet Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 3910 6. Install the heater outlet hose (1) to the engine. 7. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the engine. 8. Install the heater outlet hose (1) to the heater core. 9. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the heater core. 10. Fill the engine coolant. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3916 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3917 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3918 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3919 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3920 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3921 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3922 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3923 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3924 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3925 Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3926 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3927 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3928 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3929 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3930 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3931 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3932 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3933 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3934 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3935 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3936 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3937 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3938 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3939 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3940 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3941 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3942 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3943 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3944 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3945 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3946 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3947 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3948 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3949 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3950 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3951 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3952 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3953 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3954 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3955 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3956 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3957 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3958 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3959 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3960 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3961 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3962 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3963 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3964 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3965 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3966 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3967 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3968 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3969 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3970 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3971 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3972 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3973 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3974 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3975 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3976 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3977 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3978 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3979 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3980 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3981 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3982 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3983 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3984 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3985 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3986 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3987 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3988 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3993 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3994 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3995 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3996 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3997 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3998 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3999 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4000 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4001 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4002 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4003 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4004 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4005 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4006 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4007 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4008 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4009 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4010 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4011 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4012 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4013 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4014 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4015 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4016 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4017 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4018 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4019 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4020 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4021 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4022 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4023 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4024 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4025 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4026 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4027 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4028 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4029 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4030 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4031 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4032 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4033 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4034 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4035 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4036 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4037 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4038 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4039 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4040 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4041 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4042 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4043 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4044 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4045 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4046 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4047 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4048 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4049 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4050 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4051 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4052 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4053 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4054 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4055 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4056 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4057 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4058 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4059 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4060 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4061 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4062 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4063 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4064 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4065 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4066 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Service and Repair Cooling Fan Motor Replacement - Electric Tools Required GE-47827 Socket This vehicle is equipped with counter-rotating engine cooling fans. The right hand fan will require the use of GE-47827 for fan blade removal. The left hand fan blade can be removed using a normal six point socket. Removal Procedure Caution: An electric fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. Caution: To help avoid personal injury or damage to the vehicle, a bent, cracked, or damaged fan blade or housing should always be replaced. Caution: Before servicing any electrical component, the ignition key must be in the OFF or LOCK position and all electrical loads must be OFF, unless instructed otherwise in these procedures. If a tool or equipment could easily come in contact with a live exposed electrical terminal, also disconnect the negative battery cable. Failure to follow these precautions may cause personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or its components. 1. Remove the fan shroud assembly from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4067 2. Important: Hold the fan blade to prevent rotation. Using GE-47827, or a six point socket, turn the fan motor drive plate in the opposite direction of the arrow stamped on the fan blade. 3. Remove and discard the fan blade. 4. Notice: Failure to tape off all of the entry points to the cooling fan motor will allow debris to enter and damage the motor. Important: When reusing the fan motor tape off the front and rear entry points of the fan motor before drilling the rivets. Center punch each of the rivets (1) from the rear of the motor. 5. Drill the head of the rivets (1) from the fan motor using a 6.35 mm (0.25 inch) drill bit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4068 6. Tap the rivets out of the fan shroud. 7. Remove the fan motor from the fan shroud. 8. Important: Blow off any excess debris from the fan motor. Remove the tape covering the entry points from the fan motor. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4069 1. Install the engine cooling fan motor to the fan shroud. 2. Important: Position the fan motor to the fan shroud and insert the bolts from the front side. Install the cooling fan motor bolts. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. Install the cooling fan motor nuts. Tighten the nuts to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 4. Notice: Failure to heat the fan hub in hot tap water before installation will result in cooling fan failure due to cracking. Allowing the heated fan to cool for more than one minute prior to installation will also result in failure due to cracking. Important: Using hot tap water at a minimum of 49°C (120°F), hold the new fan blade hub under the running water for a minimum of 60 seconds to hear the fan blade to the temperature of the water. Immediately after heating, position the fan blade on the fan motor drive plate. Install the new engine cooling fan blade. 5. Using the GE-47827, or a six point socket, turn the fan motor drive plate in the same direction of the arrow on the fan blade until the fan motor drive plate engages to the fan blade. 6. Rotate the cooling fan blade to ensure proper rotation. 7. Install the fan shroud assembly to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4073 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4074 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4075 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4078 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4079 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4080 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4081 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4082 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4083 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4084 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4085 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4086 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4087 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4088 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4089 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4090 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4091 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4092 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4093 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4094 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4095 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4096 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4097 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4098 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4099 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4100 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4101 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4102 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4103 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4104 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4105 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4106 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4107 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4108 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4109 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4110 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4111 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4112 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4113 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4114 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4115 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4116 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4117 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4118 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4119 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4120 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4121 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4122 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4123 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4124 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4125 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4126 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4127 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4128 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4129 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4130 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4131 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4132 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4133 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4134 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4135 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4136 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4137 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4138 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4139 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4140 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4141 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4142 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4143 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4144 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4145 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4146 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4147 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4148 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4149 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4150 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4151 Cooling Fan S/P Relay Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4156 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4157 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Engine coolant must be drained below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill) in Cooling System. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply thread sealant GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent, to sensor threads. IMPORTANT: Tap out sensor mounting hole in engine head to remove any thread sealant residue. Clean any sealant residue from old sensor and apply RTV sealant to threads if old sensor is going to be reused. 2. Install the ECT sensor. Tighten the engine coolant temperature sensor to 23 N.m (17 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4158 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Fill engine coolant to proper level. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill) in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair Fan Shroud: Service and Repair Cooling Fan and Shroud Replacement Tools Required GE-47716 1617 Vac N Fill Coolant Refill Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front fascia. 2. Drain the coolant. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the fan motors. 4. Unclip the wire harness from the fan assembly. 5. Remove the condenser radiator fan module (CRFM) closeout panel retainers from the condenser. 6. Remove the CRFM closeout panel from the condenser. 7. Remove the front impact bar. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4162 8. Remove the CRFM mounting bracket bolts from the radiator support. 9. Remove the CRFM mounting brackets from the radiator support. 10. Remove the radiator inlet hose clamp from the radiator. 11. Remove the radiator inlet hose from the radiator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4163 12. Disconnect the transmission cooler lines from the radiator. 13. Unclip the transmission cooler lines from the fan assembly. 14. Remove the fan assembly bolts from the radiator. 15. Remove the fan assembly from the radiator. 16. Position the condenser and radiator assembly forward of the right hand front impact bar bracket. 17. Remove the fan assembly from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the fan assembly to the vehicle. 2. Return the condenser and radiator assembly to the mounted position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4164 3. Install the fan assembly to the radiator by guiding the lower tabs into the corresponding hooks on the radiator. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 4. Install the fan assembly bolts to the radiator. Tighten the bolts to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.). 5. Install the radiator inlet hose to the radiator. 6. Install the radiator inlet hose clamp to the radiator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4165 7. Clip the transmission cooler lines to the fan assembly. 8. Connect the transmission cooler lines to the radiator. 9. Install the CRFM mounting brackets to the radiator support. 10. Install the CRFM mounting bracket bolts to the radiator support. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 11. Install the front impact bar. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4166 12. Install the CRFM closeout panel to the condenser. 13. Install the CRFM closeout panel retainers to the condenser. 14. Clip the engine wire harness to fan assembly. Notice: Refer to Compressor Hose Clearance to the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Pipe Notice. 15. Install the electrical connectors to the fan motors. 16. Install the front fascia. 17. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators Heater Core: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-06-02-001A Date: July 16, 2008 Subject: Information On Aluminum Heater Core and/or Radiator Replacement Models: 2005 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-02-001 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important: 2004-05 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX-COOL(R). Refer to the flushing procedure explained later in this bulletin. The following information should be utilized when servicing aluminum heater core and/or radiators on repeat visits. A replacement may be necessary because erosion, corrosion, or insufficient inhibitor levels may cause damage to the heater core, radiator or water pump. A coolant check should be performed whenever a heater core, radiator, or water pump is replaced. The following procedures/ inspections should be done to verify proper coolant effectiveness. Caution: To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam under pressure if the radiator cap or surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. Important: If the vehicle's coolant is low, drained out, or the customer has repeatedly added coolant or water to the system, then the system should be completely flushed using the procedure explained later in this bulletin. Technician Diagnosis ^ Verify coolant concentration. A 50% coolant/water solution ensures proper freeze and corrosion protection. Inhibitor levels cannot be easily measured in the field, but can be indirectly done by the measurement of coolant concentration. This must be done by using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale), or equivalent, coolant tester. The Refractometer uses a minimal amount of coolant that can be taken from the coolant recovery reservoir, radiator or the engine block. Inexpensive gravity float testers (floating balls) will not completely analyze the coolant concentration fully and should not be used. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65% coolant concentrate. This mixture will have a freeze point protection of -34 degrees Fahrenheit (-37 degrees Celsius). If the concentration is below 50%, the cooling system must be flushed. ^ Inspect the coolant flow restrictor if the vehicle is equipped with one. Refer to Service Information (SI) and/or the appropriate Service Manual for component location and condition for operation. ^ Verify that no electrolysis is present in the cooling system. This electrolysis test can be performed before or after the system has been repaired. Use a digital voltmeter set to 12 volts. Attach one test lead to the negative battery post and insert the other test lead into the radiator coolant, making sure the lead does not touch the filler neck or core. Any voltage reading over 0.3 volts indicates that stray current is finding its way into the coolant. Electrolysis is often an intermittent condition that occurs when a device or accessory that is mounted to the radiator is energized. This type of current could be caused from a poorly grounded cooling fan or some other accessory and can be verified by watching the volt meter and turning on and off various accessories or engage the starter motor. Before using one of the following flush procedures, the coolant recovery reservoir must be removed, drained, cleaned and reinstalled before refilling the system. Notice: ^ Using coolant other than DEX‐COOL(R) may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX‐COOL(R) (silicate free) coolant in your vehicle. ^ If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 4171 Flushing Procedures using DEX-COOL(R) Important: The following procedure recommends refilling the system with DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. This coolant is orange in color and has a service interval of 5 years or 240,000 km (150,000 mi). However, when used on vehicles built prior to the introduction of DEX-COOL(R), maintenance intervals will remain the same as specified in the Owner's Manual. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling system flush and fill machine is not available, drain the coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run the vehicle until the thermostat opens. Repeat and run the vehicle three (3) times to totally remove the old coolant or until the drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with DEX‐COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to the system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and reverify the coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore the coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, reverify the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Flushing Procedures using Conventional Silicated (Green Colored) Coolant Important: 2004-2005 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX‐COOL(R). The Aveo and Wave are filled with conventional, silicated engine coolant that is blue in color. Silicated coolants are typically green in color and are required to be drained, flushed and refilled every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). The Aveo and Wave are to be serviced with conventional, silicated coolant. Use P/N 12378560 (1 gal) (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 (1 L). Refer to the Owner's Manual or Service Information (SI) for further information on OEM coolant. Important: Do not mix the OEM orange colored DEX-COOL(R) coolant with green colored coolant when adding coolant to the system or when servicing the vehicle's cooling system. Mixing the orange and green colored coolants will produce a brown coolant which may be a customer dissatisfier and will not extend the service interval to that of DEX-COOL(R). Conventional silicated coolants offered by GM Service and Parts Operations are green in color. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling systems flush and fill machine is not available, drain coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run vehicle until thermostat opens. Repeat and run vehicle three (3) times to totally remove old coolant or until drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with a good quality ethylene glycol base engine coolant, P/N 12378560, 1 gal (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L), conforming to GM specification 1825M, or recycled coolant conforming to GM specification 1825M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% good quality ethylene glycol base (green colored) engine coolant, P/N 12378560 1 gal., (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L) conforming to GM specification 1825M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and recheck coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, recheck the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. Concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 4172 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4173 Heater Core: Service and Repair HEATER CORE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the HVAC module from the vehicle. 2. Remove the heater heater core cover screws from the HVAC module. 3. Remove the heater core cover from the HVAC module. 4. Remove the heater core from the HVAC module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4174 1. Install the heater core to the HVAC module. 2. Install the heater core cover to the HVAC module. 3. Install the heater core cover screws to the HVAC module. Tighten the screw to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the HVAC module to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inlet Heater Hose: Service and Repair Inlet HEATER HOSE REPLACEMENT - INLET REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill). 2. Remove the heater inlet hose clamp from the heater core. 3. Remove the heater inlet hose (2) from the heater core. 4. Remove the heater inlet hose clamp from the engine. 5. Remove the heater inlet hose (2) from the engine. 6. Remove the heater inlet hose (2) from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inlet > Page 4179 1. Install the heater inlet hose (2) to the vehicle. 2. Install the heater inlet hose (2) to the engine. 3. Install the heater inlet hose clamp to the engine. 4. Install the heater inlet hose (2) to the heater core. 5. Install the heater inlet hose clamp to the heater core. 6. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inlet > Page 4180 Heater Hose: Service and Repair Outlet HEATER HOSE REPLACEMENT - OUTLET REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill). 2. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the heater core. 3. Remove the heater outlet hose (1) from the heater core. 4. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the engine. 5. Remove the heater outlet hose (1) from the engine. 6. Position the loose end of the heater outlet hose (1) outboard to ease in the removal of the surge tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inlet > Page 4181 7. Remove the surge tank inlet hose clamp from the surge tank. 8. Disconnect the surge tank inlet hose from the surge tank. 9. Remove the surge tank bolts from the surge tank. 10. Lift the surge tank to gain access to the heater outlet hose. 11. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the surge tank. 12. Remove the heater outlet hose from the surge tank. 13. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. 14. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the hose. This will aid in routing the heater outlet hose from the vehicle. 15. Remove the heater outlet hose from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inlet > Page 4182 1. Install the heater outlet hose to the vehicle. Route the hose into position for attachment to the surge tank. 2. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the hose. 3. Install the heater outlet hose to the surge tank. 4. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. 5. Install the surge tank bolts to the surge tank. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 6. Connect the surge tank inlet hose to the surge tank. 7. Install the surge tank inlet hose clamp to the surge tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inlet > Page 4183 8. Install the heater outlet hose (1) to the engine. 9. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the engine. 10. Install the heater outlet hose (1) to the heater core. 11. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the heater core. 12. Fill the engine coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Radiator Drain Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair Radiator Drain Plug: Service and Repair Drain Cock Replacement Tools Required GE-477161617 Vac N Fill Coolant Refill Tool Removal Procedure 1. Drain the radiator. 2. Unscrew the drain plug from the radiator end tank. 3. Remove and discard the O-ring. Installation Procedure 1. Install the new O-ring. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Radiator Drain Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4188 2. Install and tighten the drain plug into the end tank drain hole. 3. Fill the radiator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection Pressure Cap Testing Tools Required ^ J 24460-01 Cooling System Pressure Tester ^ J 42401 Radiator Cap/Surge Tank Test Adapter 1. Caution: To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam under pressure if radiator cap or surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. Remove the pressure cap. 2. Wash the pressure cap sealing surface with water. 3. Use the J 24460-01 (1) with J 42401 (2) in order to test the pressure cap. 4. Test the pressure cap for the following conditions: ^ Pressure release when the J 24460-01 exceeds the pressure rating of the pressure cap. ^ Maintain the rated pressure for at least 10 seconds. Note the rate of pressure loss. 5. Replace the pressure cap under the following conditions: ^ The pressure cap does not release pressure which exceeds the rated pressure of the cap. ^ The pressure cap does not hold the rated pressure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the coolant. 2. Remove the upper fascia retainers from the radiator support. 3. Remove the upper radiator bracket bolt from the radiator support. 4. Remove the upper radiator bracket from the radiator. 5. Remove the radiator inlet hose clamp from the radiator. 6. Remove the radiator inlet hose from the radiator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 4196 7. Remove the radiator inlet hose clamp from the engine. 8. Remove the radiator inlet hose from the engine. Installation Procedure 1. Install the radiator inlet hose to the engine. 2. Install the radiator inlet hose clamp to the engine. 3. Install the radiator inlet hose to the radiator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 4197 4. Install the radiator inlet hose clamp to the radiator. 5. Install the upper radiator bracket to the radiator. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Install the upper radiator bracket bolt to the radiator support. Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 7. Install the upper fascia retainers to the radiator support. 8. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 4198 Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement Radiator Hose Replacement - Outlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the coolant. 2. Remove the radiator outlet hose clamp from the engine. 3. Remove the radiator outlet hose from the engine. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle. 5. Remove the radiator outlet hose clamp from the radiator. 6. Remove the radiator outlet hose from the radiator. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 4199 1. Install the radiator outlet hose to the radiator. 2. Install the radiator outlet hose clamp to the radiator. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Install the radiator outlet hose to the engine. 5. Install the radiator outlet hose clamp to the engine. 6. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4205 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4206 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4207 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4208 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4209 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4210 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4211 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4212 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4213 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4214 Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4215 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4216 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4217 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4218 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4219 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4220 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4221 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4222 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4223 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4224 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4225 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4226 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4227 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4228 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4229 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4230 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4231 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4232 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4233 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4234 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4235 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4236 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4237 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4238 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4239 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4240 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4241 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4242 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4243 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4244 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4245 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4246 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4247 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4248 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4249 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4250 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4251 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4252 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4253 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4254 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4255 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4256 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4257 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4258 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4259 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4260 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4261 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4262 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4263 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4264 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4265 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4266 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4267 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4268 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4269 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4270 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4271 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4272 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4273 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4274 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4275 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4276 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4277 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4281 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4282 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4283 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4286 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4287 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4288 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4289 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4290 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4291 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4292 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4293 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4294 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4295 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4296 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4297 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4299 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4300 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4301 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4302 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4303 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4304 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4305 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4306 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4307 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4308 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4309 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4310 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4311 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4312 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4313 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4314 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4315 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4316 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4317 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4318 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4319 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4320 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4321 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4322 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4323 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4324 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4325 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4326 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4327 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4328 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4329 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4330 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4331 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4332 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4333 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4334 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4335 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4336 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4337 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4338 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4339 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4340 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4341 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4342 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4343 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4344 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4345 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4346 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4347 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4348 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4349 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4350 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4351 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4352 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4353 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4354 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4355 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4356 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4357 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4358 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4359 Cooling Fan S/P Relay Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4365 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4366 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Engine coolant must be drained below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill) in Cooling System. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply thread sealant GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent, to sensor threads. IMPORTANT: Tap out sensor mounting hole in engine head to remove any thread sealant residue. Clean any sealant residue from old sensor and apply RTV sealant to threads if old sensor is going to be reused. 2. Install the ECT sensor. Tighten the engine coolant temperature sensor to 23 N.m (17 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4367 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Fill engine coolant to proper level. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill) in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications Thermostat: Specifications The thermostat should begin to open .................................................................................................. ............................................................. 87°C (188°F). The thermostat should be fully open .............. ................................................................................................................................................. 97°C (206°F). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4371 Thermostat: Service and Repair Thermostat Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the fuel injector sight shield. 2. Drain the coolant until the coolant level is below the thermostat. 3. Remove the crossover exhaust pipe. 4. Remove the radiator hose from the thermostat housing. 5. Remove the thermostat housing bolts (2) and clean any sealer from the bolt threads. 6. Remove the thermostat housing (1). 7. Remove the thermostat (3). 8. Clean the mating surfaces. Installation Procedure 1. Install the thermostat (3). 2. Install the thermostat housing (1). 3. Install RTV sealer, GM P/N 12378478 (Canadian P/N 88900041) or the equivalent, to the thermostat housing bolt threads. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the thermostat housing bolts (2). Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the radiator hose to the thermostat housing. 6. Install the crossover exhaust pipe. 7. Install the fuel injector sight shield. 8. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4372 9. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. Repair as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Service and Repair P0020 - P0024: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis for all P codes - See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Water pump bolts ................................................................................................................................ .................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4379 Water Pump: Service and Repair Water Pump Replacement Tools Required J 39914 Serpentine Belt Tensioner Unloader Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system until the coolant is below the level of the water pump. 2. Loosen the water pump pulley bolts (4). 3. Using the J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner (8) to release the tension on the drive belt. 4. Remove the drive belt from the right idler pulley (2). 5. Carefully release the J 39914 to relieve the drive belt tensioner spring tension. 6. Remove the J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 7. Remove the water pump pulley bolts (2). 8. Remove the water pump pulley (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4380 9. Remove the water pump bolts (3). 10. Remove the water pump (1). 11. Remove the water pump gasket (2). 12. Clean the water pump mating surfaces. Installation Procedure 1. Install the water pump gasket (2). 2. Install the water pump (1). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the water pump bolts (3). Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4381 4. Install the water pump pulley (1). Loosely install the pulley bolts (2). 5. Insure the drive belt is properly centered on all the pulleys except the right idler puller (3). 6. Using the J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner away from the drive belt. 7. Install the drive belt to the right idler pulley (2). 8. Carefully release the J 39914 allowing the drive belt tensioner (8) to come in contact with the drive belt. 9. Remove the J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 10. Inspect the drive belt to insure the belt is properly centered on all the pulleys (1- 8). 11. Tighten the water pump pulley bolts. Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 12. Fill the cooling system. 13. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Precautions Catalytic Converter: Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Precautions Bulletin No.: 06-06-01-010A Date: February 04, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Close-Coupled Converter and Engine Breakdown or Non-Function Due to Severe Overheat or Lack of Oil Causing Piston(s) Connecting Rod(s) Crankshaft Cylinder(s) and/or Head(s) Camshaft(s) Intake and/or Exhaust Valve(s) Main and/or Rod Bearing(s) Damage Models: 2004-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks with Close-Coupled Catalytic Converters Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-06-01-010 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Certain 2004-2008 General Motors products may be equipped with a new style of catalytic converter technically known as the close-coupled catalytic converter providing quick catalyst warm-up resulting in lower tail pipe emissions earlier in the vehicle operating cycle. If an engine breakdown or non-function were to occur (such as broken intake/exhaust valve or piston) debris may be deposited in the converter through engine exhaust ports. If the engine is non-functioning due to a severe overheat event damage to the ceramic "brick" internal to the catalytic converter may occur. This may result in ceramic debris being drawn into the engine through the cylinder head exhaust ports. If a replacement engine is installed in either of these instances the replacement engine may fail due to the debris being introduced into the combustion chambers when started. When replacing an engine for a breakdown or non-function an inspection of the catalytic converters and ALL transferred components (such as exhaust/ intake manifolds) should be performed. Any debris found should be removed. In cases of engine failure due to severe overheat dealers should also inspect each catalytic converter for signs of melting or cracking of the ceramic "brick". If damage is observed the converter should be replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair Exhaust Crossover Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Crossover Pipe Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery box. 2. Remove the exhaust crossover pipe nuts (2). 3. Remove the exhaust crossover pipe (3). 4. Remove the exhaust manifold studs (1), if replacement of the stud is necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install any previously removed exhaust manifold studs (1). ^ Tighten the studs to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the exhaust crossover pipe (3). 3. Important: Maintain approximately 6.35 mm (0.25 inch) between the thermostat housing and the exhaust crossover pipe. Install the exhaust crossover pipe nuts (2). ^ Tighten the nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the battery box. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Exhaust Manifold Specifications Exhaust Manifold Nut .......................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.) Exhaust Manifold Stud .................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Replacement - Left Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Replacement - Left Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Replacement - Left 1. Remove the heat shield bolts (3). 2. Remove the heat shield (2) from the exhaust manifold. Installation Procedure 1. Install the heat shield (1) to the exhaust manifold. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the heat shield bolts to the exhaust manifold. ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Replacement - Left > Page 4395 Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Replacement - Right Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Replacement - Right 1. Remove the heat shield bolts (3). 2. Remove the lower heat shield (2) from the exhaust manifold. 3. Remove the upper heat shield (1) from the exhaust manifold. Installation Procedure 1. Install the upper heat shield (1) to the exhaust manifold. 2. Install the lower heat shield (2) to the exhaust manifold. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the heat shield bolts to the exhaust manifold. ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Replacement - Left > Page 4396 Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Removal Procedure 1. Remove the 3 nuts attaching the exhaust crossover pipe to the left exhaust manifold. 2. Remove the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) pipe. 3. Remove the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts (2). 4. Remove the exhaust manifold heat shield (1). 5. Remove the exhaust manifold nuts (3). 6. Remove the exhaust manifold (2). 7. Remove the exhaust manifold gasket (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Replacement - Left > Page 4397 8. If necessary, remove the exhaust manifold studs. 9. Clean the exhaust manifold and the cylinder head exhaust manifold sealing surfaces. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. If previously removed, install the exhaust manifold studs. ^ Tighten the studs to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Replacement - Left > Page 4398 2. Install the exhaust manifold gasket (1). 3. Install the exhaust manifold (2). 4. Install the exhaust manifold nuts (3). ^ Tighten the nuts to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the exhaust manifold heat shield (1). 6. Install the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts (2). ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 7. Install the EGR pipe. 8. Install the 3 nuts attaching the exhaust crossover pipe to the left exhaust manifold. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Replacement - Left > Page 4399 Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the oxygen sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 3 nuts attaching exhaust crossover pipe to the right exhaust manifold. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the nuts (3) securing the catalytic converter (4) to the exhaust manifold and position catalytic converter out of the way. 5. Remove the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts (3). 6. Remove the exhaust manifold heat shields (1, 2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Replacement - Left > Page 4400 7. Remove the exhaust manifold nuts (3). 8. Remove the exhaust manifold (2). 9. Remove the exhaust manifold gasket (1). 10. If you are REPLACING the engine right side exhaust manifold, remove the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). 11. If necessary, remove the exhaust manifold studs. 12. Clean the exhaust manifold and the cylinder head exhaust manifold sealing surfaces. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Replacement - Left > Page 4401 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. If previously removed, install the exhaust manifold studs. ^ Tighten the studs to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 2. If removed, install the HO2S. 3. Install the exhaust manifold gasket (1). 4. Install the exhaust manifold (2). 5. Install the exhaust manifold nuts (3). ^ Tighten the nuts to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the exhaust manifold upper heat shield (1). 7. Install the exhaust manifold lower heat shield (2). 8. Install the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts (3). ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Replacement - Left > Page 4402 9. Install the catalytic converter (4) to the exhaust manifold and install the nuts (3). 10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Install the exhaust crossover pipe nuts to the right side exhaust manifold. 12. Connect the HO2S electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Heat Shield Replacement - Center Heat Shield: Service and Repair Exhaust Heat Shield Replacement - Center Exhaust Heat Shield Replacement - Center Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the exhaust system. 3. If vehicle is equipped with all wheel drive (AWD) remove the propeller shaft underbody guard loop bolts and guard loop. 4. Important: Support the fuel tank before removing the fuel tank strap bolt. Remove the fuel tank strap bolt, which also fastens the rear of the center heat shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Heat Shield Replacement - Center > Page 4407 5. Important: The front and rear heat shields overlap and utilize common rivet attachment points. Remove the rivets. 6. Remove the shield. Installation Procedure 1. Position the shield to the vehicle, aligning the front rivet locations which are common attachment points with the front heat shield. 2. Install the rivets 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Heat Shield Replacement - Center > Page 4408 Install the fuel tank strap bolt and tighten. ^ Tighten the bolt to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 4. If vehicle is equipped with AWD install the propeller shaft underbody guard loop and bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the exhaust system. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Heat Shield Replacement - Center > Page 4409 Heat Shield: Service and Repair Exhaust Heat Shield Replacement - Front Exhaust Heat Shield Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the catalytic converter. 3. Important: The front and rear heat shields overlap and utilize common rivet attachment points. Remove the nut and rivets. 4. Remove the heat shield. Installation Procedure 1. Position the shield to the vehicle, aligning the front hole stud. Place the rear of the shield under the rear shield and against the underbody. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the nut and tighten. ^ Tighten the heat shield-to-underbody nut to 10 Nm (89 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the rivets. 4. Install the catalytic converter. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Heat Shield Replacement - Center > Page 4410 Heat Shield: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Heat Shield Replacement Fuel Tank Heat Shield Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the fuel tank. 2. Remove the fuel tank shield from the fuel tank. Installation Procedure 1. Install the fuel tank shield to the fuel tank. 2. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Body Control Module: Customer Interest A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Bulletin No.: 07-01-38-005 Date: July 18, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Poor A/C Performance, A/C Does Not Get Cold Enough After Long Drive Cycle (Recalibrate BCM with Tech 2) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on poor A/C performance or that the A/C does not get cold enough after a long drive. Some of the possible symptoms of this condition are: Blowing warm air Reduced air flow Mist/Vapor coming out of vents Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the evaporator core freezing up. Fix It Right the First Time Tips DO NOT replace the evaporator temperature sensor for this condition unless diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. The sensor can be checked for proper function using the Tech 2(R). Check the sensor for volts varying around 2.3V to 2.6V. This data is within the BCM and is displayed in the accessory list. If the volts are near zero, check for a good connection at the sensor. Also, inspect the harness for possible damage. The sensor is located on the driver's side of the HVAC module and can be accessed from underneath the instrument panel by removing the closeout panel and OnStar(R) module, if equipped. DO NOT replace the thermal expansion valve (TXV) for this condition unless published SI diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. If AC components have been replaced or the refrigerant has been evacuated and recharged and no PAG oil has been added back into the system, it may have a reduced oil level. Please ensure that the vehicle has the proper amount of PAG oil in the system, as low oil level will contribute to the evaporator freezing up. To return to a nominal level of PAG oil, it may be necessary to flush the system. Refer to SI for flushing instructions. Correction The Tech 2(R) must have software version 27.009 or later. Recalibrate the BCM with new software using the Tech 2(R) and following the procedure below. This updated software will control the cycling of the compressor clutch to prevent freezing of the evaporator core. Install the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle and power on. Turn ON the ignition, with engine OFF. Select "Diagnostics." Build the vehicle. Select "Body Control Module". Select "Module Setup". Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough > Page 4422 Then press "BCM Setup" soft key to execute update. When completed command state will change from "None" to "BCM Setup". Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: Customer Interest Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 4427 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 4428 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Bulletin No.: 07-01-38-005 Date: July 18, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Poor A/C Performance, A/C Does Not Get Cold Enough After Long Drive Cycle (Recalibrate BCM with Tech 2) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on poor A/C performance or that the A/C does not get cold enough after a long drive. Some of the possible symptoms of this condition are: Blowing warm air Reduced air flow Mist/Vapor coming out of vents Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the evaporator core freezing up. Fix It Right the First Time Tips DO NOT replace the evaporator temperature sensor for this condition unless diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. The sensor can be checked for proper function using the Tech 2(R). Check the sensor for volts varying around 2.3V to 2.6V. This data is within the BCM and is displayed in the accessory list. If the volts are near zero, check for a good connection at the sensor. Also, inspect the harness for possible damage. The sensor is located on the driver's side of the HVAC module and can be accessed from underneath the instrument panel by removing the closeout panel and OnStar(R) module, if equipped. DO NOT replace the thermal expansion valve (TXV) for this condition unless published SI diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. If AC components have been replaced or the refrigerant has been evacuated and recharged and no PAG oil has been added back into the system, it may have a reduced oil level. Please ensure that the vehicle has the proper amount of PAG oil in the system, as low oil level will contribute to the evaporator freezing up. To return to a nominal level of PAG oil, it may be necessary to flush the system. Refer to SI for flushing instructions. Correction The Tech 2(R) must have software version 27.009 or later. Recalibrate the BCM with new software using the Tech 2(R) and following the procedure below. This updated software will control the cycling of the compressor clutch to prevent freezing of the evaporator core. Install the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle and power on. Turn ON the ignition, with engine OFF. Select "Diagnostics." Build the vehicle. Select "Body Control Module". Select "Module Setup". Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough > Page 4434 Then press "BCM Setup" soft key to execute update. When completed command state will change from "None" to "BCM Setup". Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 4439 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 4440 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4441 Center Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4444 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4445 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4446 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4447 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4448 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4449 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4450 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4451 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4452 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4453 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4454 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4455 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4456 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4457 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4458 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4459 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4460 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4461 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4462 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4463 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4464 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4465 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4466 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4467 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4468 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4469 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4470 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4471 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4472 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4473 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4474 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4475 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4476 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4477 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4478 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4479 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4480 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4481 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4482 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4483 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4484 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4485 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4486 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4487 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4488 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4489 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4490 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4491 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4492 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4493 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4494 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4495 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4496 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4497 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4498 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4499 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4500 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4501 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4502 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4503 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4504 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4505 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4506 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4507 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4508 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4509 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4510 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4511 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4512 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4513 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4514 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4515 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4516 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4517 Body Control Module: Connector Views Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4518 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4519 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4520 Body Control Module (BCM) C4 Splice Pack SP200 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System Body Control Module: Description and Operation Body Control System BODY CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION BCM OVERVIEW The main features of the body control module (BCM) are: The BCM is the gateway between class 2 serial data circuit and high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. - The BCM controls multiple functions. - The BCM is the power mode master. GATEWAY The body control module (BCM) communicates functionally on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data buses. The BCM is the gateway between the buses and transfers serial data messages from one subnet to another. Physical communication of the BCM with the scan tool is through class 2 serial data circuit. BCM FUNCTIONS The body control module (BCM) performs multiple body control functions. The BCM can control devices directly connected to its outputs based on input information. The BCM evaluates this information and controls certain body control systems by commanding outputs on or off. The BCM inputs can be: Sensors and switches that are directly connected to the BCM - Class 2 serial data messages received from other vehicle systems connected to the class 2 serial data link - GMLAN serial data messages received from other vehicles systems connected to the high speed GMLAN serial data link The BCM is also capable of controlling other vehicle systems that are not directly wired to the BCM. The BCM does this by sending specific messages on the class 2 serial data link or high speed GMLAN serial data link. The system capable of performing the required function will respond to the BCM messages. Some of the other system functions that BCM controls or contributes to are: Audible warnings-Refer to Audible Warnings Description and Operation in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. - Exterior lighting control-Refer to Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Interior lighting-Refer to Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Automatic door locks-Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors. - Keyless entry-Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry. - Theft deterrent-Refer to Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent. - Wipers/washers-Refer to Wiper/Washer System Description and Operation in Wipers/Washer Systems. - Rear defogger-Refer to Rear Window Defogger Description and Operation in Heated Glass Element. - Horn-Refer to Horns System Description and Operation in Horns. POWER MODE The BCM is the power mode master (PMM). Refer to Power Mode Description and Operation for more information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 4523 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Power Mode POWER MODE DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SERIAL DATA POWER MODE On vehicles that have several control modules connected by serial data circuits, one module is the power mode master (PMM). On this vehicle the PMM is the body control module (BCM). The BCM monitors Ignition 1 (Run/Crank), Ignition 2 (Acc/Run), and Ignition 3 (Run) signals from the ignition switch, and the engine run flag (ERF) message from the engine control module (ECM) in order to determine the present power mode. To determine the correct power mode the BCM uses: The state of these signals - The sequence of switch closures received by the BCM - The status of the engine run flag Correct Ignition Switch Inputs The chart indicates the power modes detected and transmitted by the BCM. The power mode message is a periodic with event message type and is transmitted by the PMM at every 2 seconds on class 2 link and at every 250 ms on high speed GMLAN link. The power modes are identical transmitted on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data circuits with the exception of retained accessory power (RAP). RAP is transmitted only on class 2 and it is mapped on high speed GMLAN as Off Awake. FAIL-SAFE OPERATION Since the operation of the vehicle systems depends on the power mode, there is a fail-safe plan in place should the body control module (BCM) fail to send a power mode message. The fail-safe plan covers modules with discrete ignition signal inputs as well as those modules using exclusively serial data control of power mode. SERIAL DATA MESSAGE The modules that depend exclusively on serial data messages for power modes stay in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message until they receive the engine status from the powertrain control module (PCM). If the BCM fails, the modules monitor the serial data circuit for the engine run flag serial data. If the engine run flag serial data is true, indicating that the engine is running, the modules fail-safe to Run. In this state the modules and their subsystems can support all operator requirements. If the engine run flag serial data is false, indicating that the engine is not running, the modules fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. DISCRETE IGNITION SIGNALS Those modules that have discrete ignition signal inputs also remain in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message received on the serial data circuits. They then check the state of their discrete ignition input to determine the current valid state. If the discrete ignition input is active, B+, the modules will fail-safe to the RUN power mode. If the discrete ignition input is not active, open or 0 voltage, the modules will fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 4524 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Retained Accessory Power (RAP) RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SERIAL DATA CONTROL OF RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) Retained accessory power (RAP) is a vehicle power mode that permits the operation of selected customer convenience items after the ignition switch is turned OFF. These selected items will remain in operation until a passenger compartment door or liftgate is opened or until the RAP function timer reaches its shut-off limit. The class 2 RAP power mode is mapped to GMLAN serial data circuit as Off Awake power mode. Refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation for more information on data link communications. The BCM monitors the ignition switch signals, battery condition and the doors status to determine whether RAP should be initiated. The modules that support the RAP power mode will operate the systems under their control as required by their RAP power mode strategy. RAP will end when one of the following conditions is met: The BCM detects the opening of a passenger compartment door. - The RAP timer expires. - The battery capacity decreases below a prescribed limit. - Any other ignition switch state is chosen. The function supported in the RAP power mode is the operation of the radio. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Body Control Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT Begin the system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. The Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will provide the following information: - The identification of the control modules which are not communicating. - The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures The use of the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will identify the correct procedures to begin vehicle diagnosis. These must be performed before system DTC or symptom diagnosis. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4527 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures A Symptoms - Computer/Integrating Systems SYMPTOMS IMPORTANT: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: - There are no DTCs set. - The control modules can communicate via the serial data links. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to: - Data Link Communications Description and Operation - Body Control System Description and Operation - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation Visual/Physical Inspection Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. - Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: - Scan Tool Does Not Power Up See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Does Not Power Up - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device - Power Mode Mismatch See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Power Mode Mismatch - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After TimeOut See: Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Time-Out - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative See: Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4528 Step 1 - Step 6 Step 1 - Step 6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4529 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BODY CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Rotate the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the radio bezel. 3. Disconnect the body control module (BCM) electrical harnesses. 4. Remove the BCM from the instrument panel (I/P) retainer: 1. Pry the BCM tabs from the locking tabs on the underside of the restraint. 2. Slide the BCM out of the retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the BCM. 2. Install the radio bezel. 3. Slide the BCM tabs into the slots in the I/P retainer until the tabs lock into place. 4. Connect the electrical connectors. 5. Program a new or a remanufactured BCM. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4533 Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4534 Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MODULE The throttle actuator control (TAC) module is the control center for the TAC system. The TAC system uses electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) and is self-diagnosing. The TAC module provides diagnostic information to the powertrain control module (PCM) through a dedicated serial data line. The TAC achieves throttle positioning by providing a pulse width modulated (PWM) voltage to the TAC motor as directed by the PCM. The TAC module is not serviced and should be replaced with the throttle body assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 4539 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 4540 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 4541 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 4542 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 4543 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 4544 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4545 LF Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4548 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4549 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4550 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4551 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4552 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4553 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4554 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4555 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4556 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4557 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4558 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4559 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4560 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4561 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4562 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4563 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4564 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4565 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4566 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4567 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4568 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4569 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4570 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4571 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4572 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4573 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4574 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4575 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4576 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4577 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4578 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4579 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4580 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4581 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4582 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4583 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4584 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4585 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4586 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4587 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4588 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4589 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4590 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4591 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4592 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4593 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4594 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4595 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4596 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4597 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4598 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4599 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4600 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4601 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4602 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4603 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4604 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4605 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4606 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4607 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4608 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4609 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4610 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4611 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4612 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4613 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4614 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4615 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4616 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4617 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4618 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4619 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4620 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4621 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C1 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4622 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C1 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4623 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4624 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4625 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DESCRIPTION The powertrain control module (PCM) interacts with many emission related components and systems, and monitors emission related components and systems for deterioration. OBD II diagnostics monitor the system performance and a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets if the system performance degrades. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) operation and the DTC storage are dictated by the DTC type. A DTC is ranked as a Type A or Type B if the DTC is emissions related. Type C is a non-emissions related DTC. The PCM is in the engine compartment. The PCM is the control center of the Computers and Control system. The PCM controls the following components: - The fuel injection system - The ignition system - The emission control systems - The on-board diagnostics - The A/C and fan systems The PCM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect the vehicle performance and the emissions. The PCM also performs diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The PCM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the MIL. When the PCM detects a malfunction, it stores a DTC. The condition is identified by the particular DTC that is set. This aids the technician in making repairs. PCM Function The powertrain control module (PCM) can supply 5 volts or 12 volts to the various sensors or switches. This is done through pull-up resistors to the regulated power supplies within the control module. In some cases, even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give an accurate reading because the resistance is too low. Therefore, a DMM with at least 10 megaohms input impedance is required in order to ensure accurate voltage readings. The PCM controls the output circuits by controlling the ground or the power feed circuit through the transistors or a device called an output driver module. EEPROM The electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory that is physically part of the control module. The EEPROM contains program and calibration information that the powertrain control module (PCM) needs in order to control the powertrain operation. Special equipment, as well as the correct program and calibration for the vehicle, are required in order to reprogram the control module. Data Link Connector (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a 16-pin connector that provides the technician a means of accessing communication data for aid in the diagnosis. This connector allows the technician to use a scan tool in order to monitor the various parameters, and display the DTC information. The DLC is located inside of the drivers compartment, underneath the dash. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Operation The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located in the instrument panel cluster. The MIL will display as either SERVICE ENGINE SOON or one of the following symbols when commanded ON: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 4628 The MIL indicates that an emissions related fault has occurred and vehicle service is required. The following is a list of the modes of operation for the MIL: The MIL illuminates when the ignition is turned ON, with the engine OFF. This is a bulb test to ensure that the MIL is able to illuminate. - The MIL turns OFF after the engine is started if a diagnostic fault is not present. - The MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started if the control module detects a fault. A DTC is stored any time the control module illuminates the MIL due to an emissions related fault. The MIL turns OFF after 3 consecutive ignition cycles in which a Test Passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. - The MIL flashes if the control module detects a misfire condition which could damage the catalytic converter. - When the MIL is illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated as long as the ignition is ON. - When the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition is cycled OFF and then ON. PCM Service Precautions The powertrain control module (PCM), by design, can withstand the normal current draws that are associated with the vehicle operations. However, care must be used in order to avoid overloading any of these circuits. When testing for opens or shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the PCM circuits unless the diagnostic procedure instructs you to do so. These circuits should only be tested with a DMM. Emissions Diagnosis For State I/M Programs This OBD II equipped vehicle is designed to diagnose any conditions that could lead to excessive levels of the following emissions: Hydrocarbons (HC) - Carbon monoxide (CO) - Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) - Evaporative emission (EVAP) system losses Should this vehicles on-board diagnostic system, powertrain control module (PCM), detect a condition that could result in excessive emissions, the PCM turns ON the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and stores a DTC that is associated with the condition. Aftermarket (Add-On) Electrical And Vacuum Equipment NOTE: Do not attach add-on vacuum operated equipment to this vehicle. The use of add-on vacuum equipment may result in damage to vehicle components or systems. - Connect any add-on electrically operated equipment to the vehicle's electrical system at the battery (power and ground) in order to prevent damage to the vehicle. Aftermarket, add-on, electrical and vacuum equipment is defined as any equipment installed on a vehicle after leaving the factory that connects to the vehicles electrical or vacuum systems. No allowances have been made in the vehicle design for this type of equipment. Add-on electrical equipment, even when installed to these strict guidelines, may still cause the powertrain system to malfunction. This may also include equipment not connected to the vehicle electrical system, such as portable telephones and radios. Therefore, the first step in diagnosing any powertrain condition is to eliminate all of the aftermarket electrical equipment from the vehicle. After this is done, if the problem still exists, the problem may be diagnosed in the normal manner. Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage IMPORTANT: In order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage to the control module, DO NOT touch the connector pins on the control module. The electronic components that are used in the control systems are often designed to carry very low voltage. The electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 volts of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. By comparison, it takes as much as 4,000 volts for a person to even feel the effect of a static discharge. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a car seat. Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, therefore, it is Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 4629 important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. Emissions Control Information Label The underhood Vehicle Emissions Control Information Label contains important emission specifications and setting procedures. In the upper left corner is the exhaust emission information. This identifies the year, the manufacturing division of the engine, the displacement of the engine in liters, the class of the vehicle, and type of fuel metering system. There is also an illustrated emission components and vacuum hose schematic. This label is located in the engine compartment of every General Motors vehicle. If the label has been removed, it can be ordered from GM service parts operations (GMSPO). Underhood Inspection IMPORTANT: This inspection is very important and must be done carefully and thoroughly. Perform a careful underhood inspection when performing any diagnostic procedure or diagnosing the cause of an emission test failure. This can often lead to repairing a condition without further steps. Use the following guidelines when performing an inspection: Inspect all of the vacuum hoses for correct routing, pinches, cuts, or disconnects. - Inspect any hoses that are difficult to see. - Inspect all of the wires in the engine compartment for the following conditions: Burned or chafed spots - Pinched wires - Contact with sharp edges - Contact with hot exhaust manifolds Basic Knowledge Required NOTE: Lack of basic knowledge of this powertrain when performing diagnostic procedures could result in incorrect diagnostic performance or damage to powertrain components. Do not attempt to diagnose a powertrain problem without this basic knowledge. A basic understanding of hand tools is necessary in order to effectively use this section of the service data. You must be familiar with some of the basics of engine operation and electrical diagnosis in order to use this section of the service data. Basic electrical circuits-You should have an understanding of basic electricity and know the meaning of voltage volts), current (amps), and resistance ohms). You should understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire, and you should be able to identify a shorted or open circuit by using a DMM. You should be able to read and understand a wiring diagram. - Use of digital multimeter-You should be familiar with the DMM, particularly the essential tool. You should be able to use the meter in order to measure the voltage volts), the resistance ohms), the current (amps), intermittents (min/max), and frequency (Hertz). - Use of circuit testing tools-You should not use a test lamp to diagnose the Computers and Control system unless you are specifically instructed to do so. You should know how to the use jumper wires in order to test the components and allow the DMM readings without damaging the terminals. You should know how to use the J 35616 connector test adapter kit and use the kit whenever the diagnostic procedures call for front probing any connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 4630 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE The powertrain control module (PCM) determines the drivers intent and then calculates the appropriate throttle response. This information is sent to the throttle actuator control (TAC) module through a dedicated serial data line. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 4631 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Electronic Ignition (EI) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The powertrain control module (PCM) controls all ignition system functions, and constantly corrects the basic spark timing. The PCM monitors information from various sensor inputs that include the following: - The throttle position (TP) sensor - The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor - The mass air flow (MAF) sensor - The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor - The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) - The transmission gear position or range information sensors - The engine knock sensor (KS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4632 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a scan tool, retrieve the percentage of remaining engine oil and the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. Record the remaining engine oil and the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. IMPORTANT: It is necessary to record the remaining engine oil life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil life will default to 100%. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil will need to be changed at 5000 km (3,000 mi) from the last engine oil change. - It is necessary to record the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining automatic transmission fluid life, the automatic transmission fluid life will default to 100%. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining automatic transmission fluid life, the automatic transmission fluid will need to be changed at 83000 km (50,000 mi) from the last automatic transmission fluid change. 2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) (1) and PCM bracket (2) from the battery box cover. 3. Remove the PCM bracket (2) from the PCM (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4633 4. Disconnect the PCM wire harness (4) from the battery box cover. 5. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 6. Remove the PCM connectors (2) from the PCM (3). 7. Remove the PCM (3) from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the PCM (3) to the vehicle. 2. Install the PCM connectors (2) to the PCM (3). 3. Connect the negative battery cable. 4. Connect the PCM wire harness (4) to the battery box cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4634 5. Install the PCM bracket (2) to the PCM (1). 6. Install the PCM bracket (1) to the battery box cover. 7. Reprogram the PCM. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4638 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4639 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4640 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4645 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4646 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4647 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4650 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4651 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4652 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4653 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4654 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4655 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4656 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4657 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4658 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4659 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4660 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4661 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4662 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4663 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4664 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4665 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4666 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4667 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4668 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4669 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4670 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4671 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4672 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4673 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4674 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4675 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4676 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4677 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4678 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4679 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4680 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4681 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4682 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4683 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4684 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4685 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4686 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4687 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4688 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4689 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4690 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4691 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4692 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4693 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4694 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4695 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4696 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4697 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4698 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4699 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4700 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4701 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4702 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4703 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4704 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4705 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4706 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4707 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4708 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4709 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4710 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4711 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4712 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4713 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4714 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4715 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4716 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4717 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4718 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4719 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4720 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4721 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4722 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4726 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4727 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4728 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4733 Ignition Control Module (ICM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4734 Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation IGNITION CONTROL MODULE (ICM)/COILS There are 3 dual-tower ignition coils that are part of the ignition control module (ICM). The ICM contains coil driver circuits that command the coils to operate. The ICM has the following circuits: - An ignition voltage circuit - A ground circuit - An IC 1 control circuit for the 1-4 ignition coil - An IC 2 control circuit for the 2-5 ignition coil - An IC 3 control circuit for the 3-6 ignition coil - A low reference circuit The powertrain control module (PCM) controls each dual-tower ignition coil by transmitting timing pulses on the ignition control (IC) circuit to the ICM for the proper coil to enable a spark event. The spark plugs are connected to each coil tower by spark plug wires. The spark plug wires conduct the spark energy from the coil to the spark plug. The spark plug electrode is tipped with platinum for long wear and higher efficiency. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement IGNITION COIL/CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the spark plug wires. Note the position from which the wires are removed. 3. Disconnect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 5. Remove the ignition coil/control module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 2. Install the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. Tighten the bolts to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 4737 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Connect the spark plug wires. 5. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 4738 Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair Ignition Control Module Bracket IGNITION CONTROL MODULE BRACKET REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 3. Remove the spark plug wire retainer (1) from the ignition control module bracket. 4. Remove the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 5. Position the ignition coil/control module aside out of the way. 6. Remove the bolt (3) from the fuel injector wire harness bracket (4) and positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve fresh air tube retainer. 7. Remove the engine wire harness retainers from the ignition control module bracket studs (5). 8. Remove the nut (1) retaining the heater outlet pipe. 9. Lift pipe up slightly to gain access for the removal of the 2 ignition control module bracket bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 4739 10. Remove the ignition control module bracket bolts (2). 11. Remove the ignition control module bracket nuts (6). 12. Remove the ignition control module bracket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition control module bracket. 2. Install the ignition control module bracket nuts (6). Tighten the nuts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the ignition control module bracket bolts (2). Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 4740 4. Install the nut (1) retaining the heater outlet pipe. Tighten the nut to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 5. Install the engine wire harness retainers to the ignition control module bracket studs (5). 6. Install the bolt (3) from the fuel injector wire harness bracket (4) and PCV valve fresh air tube retainer. Tighten the bolts to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 7. Install the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 8. Install the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. Tighten the bolts to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). 9. Install the spark plug wire retainer (1) to the ignition control module bracket. 10. Connect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 11. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection IGNITION RELAY DIAGNOSIS CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ignition relay is normally an open relay. The relay armature is held in the open position by spring tension. When the ignition switch is turned to the Run or Start position, current will flow through the relay coil. A wire connected to the other end of the relay coil completes the path to ground. The electromagnetic field created by the relay coil overcomes the spring tension and moves the armature, allowing the relay contacts to close. The closed relay contacts allow current to flow from the battery to the following fuses: The Eng Controls fuse - The Fuel INJ fuse - The Elec Eng fuse - The O2 Sensors fuse - The Trans Sol fuse - The ABS fuse - The AWD fuse When the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, the electromagnetic field collapses. This action allows the spring tension to move the armature away from the relay contacts, which interrupts current flow to the fuses. If the ignition relay fails to close, the engine will crank but will not run. The class 2 communications will be available with the use of a scan tool. The ignition relay table assumes that the vehicle battery is fully charged. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test in Starting and Charging. See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test TEST Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4744 Step 1 - Step 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4745 Step 8 - Step 18 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4746 Step 19 - Step 28 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4747 Step 29 - Step 37 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4748 Step 38 - Step 44 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Under The Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4754 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4755 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The accelerator pedal contains 2 individual accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors within the assembly. The APP sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits: - A 5-volt reference circuit - A low reference circuit - A signal circuit The APP sensors are used to determine the pedal angle. The powertrain control module (PCM) provides each APP sensor with a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensors provide the PCM with signal voltage proportional to the pedal movement. Both APP sensor signal voltages are low at rest position and increase as the pedal is applied. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4756 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR PEDAL WITH POSITION SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor connector. 3. Disconnect the APP sensor harness connector. 4. Remove the APP assembly attachment bolts. IMPORTANT: Due to clearance issues, the upper attachment bolt cannot be removed from the accelerator pedal assembly. Loose then bolt completely and leave the bolt in the component until the assembly is removed from the vehicle. 5. Remove the APP assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4757 1. Install the upper attachment bolt into the APP assembly. 2. Install the APP assembly into the vehicle. 3. Install the remaining attachment bolts into the APP assembly. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the APP sensor harness connector. Push the connector in until the lock position is felt, then pull back to confirm engagement. 5. Install the CPA to the APP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4763 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4764 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4765 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4766 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4767 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4768 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4769 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4770 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4771 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4772 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4773 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4774 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4775 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4776 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4777 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4778 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4779 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4780 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4781 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4782 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4783 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4784 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4785 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4786 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4787 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4788 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4789 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4790 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4791 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4792 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4793 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4794 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4795 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4796 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4797 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4798 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4799 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4800 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4801 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4802 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4803 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4804 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4805 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4806 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4807 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4808 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4809 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4810 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4811 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4812 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4813 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4814 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4815 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4816 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4817 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4818 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4819 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4820 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4821 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4822 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4823 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4824 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4825 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4826 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4827 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4828 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4829 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4830 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4831 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4832 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4833 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4834 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4835 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4836 Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4837 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the MAF from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the MAF to air cleaner assembly seal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4838 1. Install the seal to the MAF. 2. Install the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 3. Install the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. Tighten the screws to 4 N.m (35 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4844 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4845 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4846 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4847 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4848 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4849 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4850 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4851 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4852 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4853 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4854 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4855 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4856 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4857 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4858 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4859 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4860 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4861 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4862 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4863 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4864 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4865 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4866 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4867 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4868 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4869 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4870 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4871 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4872 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4873 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4874 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4875 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4876 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4877 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4878 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4879 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4880 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4881 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4882 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4883 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4884 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4885 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4886 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4887 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4888 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4889 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4890 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4891 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4892 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4893 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4894 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4895 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4896 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4897 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4898 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4899 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4900 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4901 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4902 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4903 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4904 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4905 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4906 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4907 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4908 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4909 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4910 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4911 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4912 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4913 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4914 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4915 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4916 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4917 Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4918 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor does not directly affect the operation of the ignition system. The CMP sensor information is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to determine the position of the valve train relative to the crankshaft position. By monitoring the CMP and crankshaft position (CKP) signals, the PCM can accurately time the operation of the fuel injectors. The PCM supplies the sensor with a 12-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4919 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt. 3. Remove the CMP sensor. 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-rings for wear, cracks, or leakage if the sensor is being reused. Replace the O-rings if damaged. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the CMP sensor O-rings with clean engine oil. 2. Install the CMP sensor. 3. Install the CMP sensor bolt. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4923 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4924 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Engine coolant must be drained below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill) in Cooling System. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply thread sealant GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent, to sensor threads. IMPORTANT: Tap out sensor mounting hole in engine head to remove any thread sealant residue. Clean any sealant residue from old sensor and apply RTV sealant to threads if old sensor is going to be reused. 2. Install the ECT sensor. Tighten the engine coolant temperature sensor to 23 N.m (17 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4925 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Fill engine coolant to proper level. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill) in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4931 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4932 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4933 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4934 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4935 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4936 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4937 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4938 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4939 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4940 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4941 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4942 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4943 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4944 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4945 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4946 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4947 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4948 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4949 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4950 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4951 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4952 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4953 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4954 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4955 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4956 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4957 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4958 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4959 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4960 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4961 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4962 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4963 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4964 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4965 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4966 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4967 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4968 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4969 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4970 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4971 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4972 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4973 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4974 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4975 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4976 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4977 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4978 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4979 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4980 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4981 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4982 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4983 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4984 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4985 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4986 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4987 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4988 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4989 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4990 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4991 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4992 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4993 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4994 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4995 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4996 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4997 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4998 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4999 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5000 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5001 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5002 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5003 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5004 Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5005 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a 3-wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses 2 magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets, the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The CKP sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 24 times per crankshaft revolution. The pulse width encoding pattern is used to synchronize the coil firing sequence with the crankshaft position. The CKP sensor is used for ignition timing, fuel injector timing, misfire diagnostics, and tachometer display. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a 12-volt reference, a low reference, and a medium resolution engine speed signal circuit to the CKP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CKP sensor nut (2). 4. Remove the CKP sensor (1) from the engine. 5. Inspect for wear, cracks, or leakage if the CKP sensor is being reused. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil. Replace the O-rings if damaged. 2. Install the CKP sensor (1) to the block. 3. Install the CKP sensor nut (1). Tighten the nut to 11 N.m (97 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 5008 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 5009 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: - The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. - The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A powertrain control module (PCM) replacement - A crankshaft balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the PCM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC. 3. With a scan tool, select the CKP variation learn procedure and perform the following: 1. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 2. Block drive wheels. 3. Set parking brake. 4. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 5. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 6. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 7. Start and idle engine. 8. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 9. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 10. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). IMPORTANT: The engine should not accelerate beyond the calibrated fuel cut-off RPM value noted in step 3.1. Release the throttle immediately if the value is exceeded. - While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 4. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC. 5. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully in order to store the CKP system variation values in the PCM memory. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5013 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR The fuel level sensor consists of a float, a wire float arm, and a ceramic resistor card. The position of the float arm indicates the fuel level. The fuel level sensor contains a variable resistor which changes resistance in correspondence with the position of the float arm. The control module sends the fuel level information via the CAN serial data to the body control module (BCM). The instrument panel cluster (IPC) displays the fuel level as determined by the BCM. This information is used for the IPC fuel gage and the low fuel warning indicator, if applicable. The control module also monitors the fuel level input for various diagnostics. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT - PRIMARY REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: NEW fuel tank module seals are necessary each time the fuel tank module is serviced. Obtain NEW seals for both the primary and secondary modules prior to beginning this service procedure. - There are 2 fuel level sender unit and float assemblies in the fuel tank. There is 1 located on each fuel pump module. The fuel level sender unit and float is NOT the same for each of the fuel pump modules. 2. Remove the fuel pump module. 3. Disconnect the fuel level sender unit and float electrical connector from the underside of the top of the pump module. 4. Release the retaining tabs (1, 2) and remove the level sensor by sliding up. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 5016 1. Install the fuel level sender unit and float onto the fuel pump module. Make sure that the sender cap snaps into place (1, 2). 2. Connect the fuel level sender unit and float electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel pump module into the fuel tank. 4. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 5017 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Secondary FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT - SECONDARY REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: A NEW fuel tank module seal is necessary each time the fuel tank module is serviced. Obtain a NEW seal prior to beginning this service procedure. - There are 2 fuel level sender unit and float assemblies in the fuel tank. There is 1 located on each fuel pump module. The fuel level sender unit and float is NOT the same for each of the fuel pump modules. 2. Remove the fuel pump module. 3. Disconnect the fuel level sender unit and the float electrical connector. 4. Release the retaining tabs and remove the level sensor by sliding up. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 5018 1. Install the fuel level sender unit and float onto the fuel pump module. Make sure that the sender cap snaps into place. 2. Connect the fuel level sender unit and the float electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel pump module into the fuel tank. 4. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5022 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor measures the difference between the pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank and outside air pressure. The control module provides a 5-volt reference and a ground to the FTP sensor. The FTP sensor provides a signal voltage back to the control module that can vary between 0.1-4.9 volts. As FTP increases, FTP sensor voltage decreases, high pressure , = low voltage. As FTP decreases, FTP sensor voltage increases low pressure or vacuum = high voltage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5023 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump module harness electrical connector from the fuel tank pressure sensor. 3. Position 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers, one on each side of the sensor, near the vacuum port. 4. Carefully use the screwdrivers to lift and release the sensor from the fuel pump module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5024 1. Install the fuel tank pressure sensor to the fuel pump module assembly. Ensure that the sensor grommet is fully seated to the pump module. 2. Connect the pump module electrical connector to the fuel tank pressure sensor. 3. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5028 Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5032 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5035 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5036 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5037 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5038 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5039 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5040 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5041 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5042 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5043 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5044 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5045 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5046 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5047 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5048 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5049 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5050 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5051 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5052 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5053 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5054 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5055 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5056 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5057 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5058 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5059 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5060 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5061 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5062 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5063 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5064 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5065 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5066 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5067 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5068 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5069 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5070 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5071 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5072 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5073 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5074 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5075 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5076 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5077 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5078 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5079 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5080 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5081 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5082 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5083 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5084 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5085 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5086 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5087 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5088 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5089 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5090 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5091 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5092 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5093 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5094 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5095 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5096 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5097 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5098 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5099 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5100 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5101 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5102 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5103 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5104 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5105 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5106 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5107 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5108 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) 1 Knock Sensor (KS) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5109 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. The KS system uses one or 2 flat response 2-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5110 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: This engine is equipped with 2 knock sensors. This service procedure applies to both the right and left knock sensors 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the KS bolt. 4. Remove the KS. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply thread locker to the sensor threads. The sensor threads are coated at the factory and applying additional thread locker affects the sensor's ability to detect detonation. 1. Install the KS to engine block. 2. Install the KS bolt. Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the KS electrical connector. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5114 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5115 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Testing and Inspection MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR DIAGNOSIS DIAGNOSTIC FAULT INFORMATION IMPORTANT: Always perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures MAP Sensor TYPICAL SCAN TOOL DATA CIRCUIT/SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to pressure changes in the intake manifold. The pressure changes occur based on the engine load. The MAP sensor has the following circuits: 5-volt reference circuit - Low reference circuit - MAP sensor signal circuit The control module supplies 5 volts to the MAP sensor on the 5-volt reference circuit. The control module also provides a ground on the low reference circuit. The MAP sensor provides a signal to the control module on the MAP sensor signal circuit which is relative to the pressure changes in the manifold. The control module should detect a low signal voltage at a low MAP, such as during an idle or a deceleration. The control module should detect a high signal voltage at a high MAP, such as the ignition is ON, with the engine OFF, or at a wide open throttle (WOT). The MAP sensor is also used in order to determine the barometric pressure (BARO). This occurs when the ignition switch is turned ON, with the engine OFF. The BARO reading may also be updated whenever the engine is operated at WOT. The control module monitors the MAP sensor signal for voltage outside of the normal range. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Poor idle characteristics may be due to uncontrolled fueling caused by an open or high resistance in the HO2S 1 low signal circuit. Before replacing any component, ensure that this condition does not exist. CIRCUIT/SYSTEM TESTING Always perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. 1. Start the engine. 2. Monitor the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) information with the scan tool. 3. If DTC P0641 or P0651 is also set then correct DTC P0641 or P0651 first. 4. Inspect for the following conditions: - Disconnected, damaged, or incorrectly routed vacuum hoses. - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor disconnected from the vacuum source. - Restrictions in the MAP sensor vacuum source. - Intake manifold vacuum leaks. - Check for a properly functioning oxygen sensor. 5. Turn OFF the ignition. 6. Remove the MAP sensor from the engine vacuum source. Leave the MAP sensor connected to the engine harness. 7. Connect a J 23738-A Mityvac to the MAP sensor. 8. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 9. Observe the MAP sensor pressure with the scan tool. 10. Apply vacuum to the MAP sensor with the J 23738-A in 1 inch Hg increments until 15 inches Hg is reached. Each 1 inch Hg should decrease MAP sensor pressure by 3-4 kPa. Monitor the MAP sensor pressure to see if the decrease in pressure in consistent. If decrease in pressure is not consistent then, test for intermittent and poor connections at the MAP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5116 11. Apply vacuum with the J 23738-A until 20 inches Hg is reached. Observe the MAP sensor pressure for less than 34 kPa. - If more than 34 kPa, test for an intermittent and for a poor connection at the MAP sensor. 12. With the ignition ON, and the engine OFF. 13. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. 14. Measure for 4.8-5.2 volts from the 5-volt reference circuit of the MAP sensor to a good ground, with a DMM. - If more than specified value than test the circuit for a short to voltage or faulty control module. - If less than specified value than test the circuit for high resistance, an open, or an intermittent and poor connection or at the control module, or a faulty control module. 15. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor 16. Use a scan tool and observe the MAP sensor for less than 12 kPa. - If the MAP sensor is more than 12 kPa then test the MAP sensor signal circuit for a short to voltage or a faulty control module. 17. Use a 3-amp fused jumper wire and connect it between the MAP sensor 5-volt reference circuit and the MAP sensor signal circuit. 18. Use a scan tool and observe the MAP sensor for more than 103 kPa. - If the MAP sensor is less than 103 kPa then test the MAP sensor signal circuit for high resistance or a faulty control module. 19. With the 3-amp fused jumper wire still connected between the 5-volt reference circuit of the MAP sensor and the signal circuit of the MAP sensor. Observe the MAP sensor parameter with the scan tool for 4.9V. If more than 4.9V then replace the MAP sensor. - If less than 4.9V then, test the MAP sensor signal circuit between the control module and the MAP sensor for a short to ground, an open, or high resistance. Test for an intermittent and for a poor connection at the control module, if tests OK then replace the control module. 20. Turn OFF the ignition and allow the control module to power down. 21. With a DMM measure for less than 5 ohms of resistance between the low reference circuit of the MAP sensor and a good ground. - If the resistance is more than 5 ohms, then test the circuit for a high resistance or a faulty control module. 22. If the MAP sensor circuits test normal, then replace the MAP sensor. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT: Always perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure. Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Replacement - Control Module References Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5117 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the MAP sensor retaining bolt (3) and bracket (2). 3. Remove the MAP sensor (1) and the MAP sensor port seal if it is still retained in the intake manifold. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the MAP sensor (1) to the intake manifold. 2. Install the MAP sensor retaining bracket (2) and bolt (3). Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the MAP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5123 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5124 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5125 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5126 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5127 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5128 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5129 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5130 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5131 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5132 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5133 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5134 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5135 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5136 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5137 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5138 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5139 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5140 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5141 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5142 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5143 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5144 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5145 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5146 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5147 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5148 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5149 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5150 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5151 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5152 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5153 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5154 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5155 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5156 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5157 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5158 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5159 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5160 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5161 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5162 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5163 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5164 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5165 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5166 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5167 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5168 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5169 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5170 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5171 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5172 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5173 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5174 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5175 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5176 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5177 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5178 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5179 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5180 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5181 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5182 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5183 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5184 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5185 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5186 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5187 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5188 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5189 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5190 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5191 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5192 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5193 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5194 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5195 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5196 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 1 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 1 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR REPLACEMENT - POSITION 1 REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the HO2S 1 harness connector. 2. Remove the HO2S 1 from the exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the threads of the HO2S 2. NOTE: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. Use only a nickel based anti-seize compound that does not contain silicone. 2. Install the HO2S 1 to the exhaust manifold. Tighten the HO2S 1 to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the HO2S 1 harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard and pull back to confirm a positive engagement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 1 > Page 5199 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 2 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR REPLACEMENT - POSITION 2 REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the HO2S 2 harness connector (3). 3. Use a liquid penetrate before removing the sensor. IMPORTANT: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. DO NOT use products containing silicone on or near the HO2S. 4. Remove the HO2S 2 (2) from the exhaust pipe. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the threads of the HO2S 2. NOTE: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. Use only a nickel based anti-seize compound that does not contain silicone. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 1 > Page 5200 2. Install the HO2S 2 (2). Tighten the HO2S 2 to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the HO2S 2 harness connector (3). Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Ensure the HO2S 2 harness pigtail connector is secure to the chassis. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5205 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5206 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5207 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5208 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5209 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5210 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5211 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5212 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5213 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5214 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5215 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5216 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5217 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5218 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5219 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5220 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5221 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5222 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5223 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5224 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5225 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5226 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5227 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5228 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5229 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5230 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5231 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5232 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5233 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5234 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5235 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5236 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5237 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5238 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5239 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5240 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5241 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5242 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5243 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5244 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5245 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5246 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5247 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5248 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5249 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5250 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5251 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5252 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5253 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5254 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5255 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5256 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5257 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5258 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5259 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5260 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5261 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5262 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5263 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5264 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5265 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5266 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5267 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5268 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5269 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5270 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5271 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5272 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5273 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5274 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5275 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5276 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5277 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5281 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5282 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5283 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required - J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5286 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5287 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5288 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5289 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5290 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Under The Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5295 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5296 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The accelerator pedal contains 2 individual accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors within the assembly. The APP sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits: - A 5-volt reference circuit - A low reference circuit - A signal circuit The APP sensors are used to determine the pedal angle. The powertrain control module (PCM) provides each APP sensor with a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensors provide the PCM with signal voltage proportional to the pedal movement. Both APP sensor signal voltages are low at rest position and increase as the pedal is applied. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5297 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR PEDAL WITH POSITION SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor connector. 3. Disconnect the APP sensor harness connector. 4. Remove the APP assembly attachment bolts. IMPORTANT: Due to clearance issues, the upper attachment bolt cannot be removed from the accelerator pedal assembly. Loose then bolt completely and leave the bolt in the component until the assembly is removed from the vehicle. 5. Remove the APP assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5298 1. Install the upper attachment bolt into the APP assembly. 2. Install the APP assembly into the vehicle. 3. Install the remaining attachment bolts into the APP assembly. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the APP sensor harness connector. Push the connector in until the lock position is felt, then pull back to confirm engagement. 5. Install the CPA to the APP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5304 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5305 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5306 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5307 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5308 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5309 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5310 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5311 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5312 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5313 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5314 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5315 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5316 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5317 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5318 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5319 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5320 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5321 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5322 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5323 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5324 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5325 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5326 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5327 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5328 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5329 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5330 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5331 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5332 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5333 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5334 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5335 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5336 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5337 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5338 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5339 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5340 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5341 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5342 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5343 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5344 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5345 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5346 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5347 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5348 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5349 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5350 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5351 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5352 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5353 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5354 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5355 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5356 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5357 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5358 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5359 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5360 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5361 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5362 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5363 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5364 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5365 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5366 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5367 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5368 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5369 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5370 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5371 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5372 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5373 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5374 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5375 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5376 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5377 Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5378 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the MAF from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the MAF to air cleaner assembly seal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5379 1. Install the seal to the MAF. 2. Install the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 3. Install the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. Tighten the screws to 4 N.m (35 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5384 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5385 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5386 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5387 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5388 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5389 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5390 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5391 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5392 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5393 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5394 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5395 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5396 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5397 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5398 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5399 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5400 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5401 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5402 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5403 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5404 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5405 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5406 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5407 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5408 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5409 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5410 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5411 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5412 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5413 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5414 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5415 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5416 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5417 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5418 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5419 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5420 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5421 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5422 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5423 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5424 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5425 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5426 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5427 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5428 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5429 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5430 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5431 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5432 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5433 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5434 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5435 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5436 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5437 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5438 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5439 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5440 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5441 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5442 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5443 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5444 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5445 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5446 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5447 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5448 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5449 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5450 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5451 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5452 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5453 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5454 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5455 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5456 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5463 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5464 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5465 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5466 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5467 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5468 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5469 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5470 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5471 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5472 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5473 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5474 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5475 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5476 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5477 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5478 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5479 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5480 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5481 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5482 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5483 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5484 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5485 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5486 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5487 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5488 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5489 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5490 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5491 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5492 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5493 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5494 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5495 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5496 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5497 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5498 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5499 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5500 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5501 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5502 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5503 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5504 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5505 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5506 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5507 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5508 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5509 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5510 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5511 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5512 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5513 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5514 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5515 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5516 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5517 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5518 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5519 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5520 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5521 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5522 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5523 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5524 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5525 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5526 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5527 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5528 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5529 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5530 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5531 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5532 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5533 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5534 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5535 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5536 Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5537 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor does not directly affect the operation of the ignition system. The CMP sensor information is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to determine the position of the valve train relative to the crankshaft position. By monitoring the CMP and crankshaft position (CKP) signals, the PCM can accurately time the operation of the fuel injectors. The PCM supplies the sensor with a 12-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5538 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt. 3. Remove the CMP sensor. 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-rings for wear, cracks, or leakage if the sensor is being reused. Replace the O-rings if damaged. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the CMP sensor O-rings with clean engine oil. 2. Install the CMP sensor. 3. Install the CMP sensor bolt. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5544 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5545 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5546 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5547 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5548 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5549 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5550 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5551 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5552 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5553 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5554 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5555 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5556 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5557 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5558 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5559 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5560 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5561 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5562 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5563 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5564 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5565 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5566 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5567 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5568 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5569 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5570 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5571 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5572 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5573 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5574 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5575 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5576 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5577 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5578 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5579 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5580 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5581 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5582 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5583 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5584 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5585 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5586 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5587 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5588 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5589 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5590 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5591 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5592 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5593 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5594 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5595 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5596 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5597 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5598 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5599 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5600 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5601 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5602 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5603 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5604 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5605 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5606 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5607 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5608 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5609 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5610 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5611 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5612 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5613 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5614 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5615 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5616 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5617 Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5618 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a 3-wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses 2 magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets, the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The CKP sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 24 times per crankshaft revolution. The pulse width encoding pattern is used to synchronize the coil firing sequence with the crankshaft position. The CKP sensor is used for ignition timing, fuel injector timing, misfire diagnostics, and tachometer display. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a 12-volt reference, a low reference, and a medium resolution engine speed signal circuit to the CKP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CKP sensor nut (2). 4. Remove the CKP sensor (1) from the engine. 5. Inspect for wear, cracks, or leakage if the CKP sensor is being reused. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil. Replace the O-rings if damaged. 2. Install the CKP sensor (1) to the block. 3. Install the CKP sensor nut (1). Tighten the nut to 11 N.m (97 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 5621 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 5622 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: - The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. - The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A powertrain control module (PCM) replacement - A crankshaft balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the PCM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC. 3. With a scan tool, select the CKP variation learn procedure and perform the following: 1. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 2. Block drive wheels. 3. Set parking brake. 4. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 5. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 6. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 7. Start and idle engine. 8. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 9. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 10. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). IMPORTANT: The engine should not accelerate beyond the calibrated fuel cut-off RPM value noted in step 3.1. Release the throttle immediately if the value is exceeded. - While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 4. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC. 5. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully in order to store the CKP system variation values in the PCM memory. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 5632 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 5633 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 5634 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 5640 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 5641 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 5642 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5643 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Description and Operation KEY AND LOCK CYLINDER CODING USE INSTRUCTION SHEET SUPPLIED For the key cutting and lock cylinder coding procedure, refer to the instruction sheet supplied in the key and lock cylinder kit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Use Instruction Sheet Supplied For the key cutting and lock cylinder coding procedure, refer to the instruction sheet supplied in the key and lock cylinder kit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 5646 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Important: Vehicle must be in PARK prior to ignition cylinder removal. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disable the SIR system. 3. Remove the steering column trim covers. 4. Insert key into the ignition and rotate to the RUN position. Then rotate ignition cylinder back to ACC position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 5647 5. Depress the locking button through hole on side of ignition module assembly with a thin pick-type tool. Slide the lock cylinder from the ignition housing. Installation Procedure Important: Actuator blade within the ignition module must be in ACC position to install the lock cylinder assembly. If rotated, reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 5648 1. Important: If you are installing a new lock cylinder, refer to Key and Lock Cylinder Coding. Insert key into ignition lock cylinder and install the cylinder into the lock housing. 2. Rotate the lock cylinder in the housing. Verify proper rotation. 3. Install the steering column trim covers. 4. Enable the SIR system. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 5649 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the SIR system. 2. Remove the steering wheel. 3. Remove the steering column trim covers. 4. Remove the multifunction levers. 5. Disconnect the housing electrical connectors. 6. Disengage the retaining tabs and remove the park lock cable assembly from the housing. 7. Remove the lock housing bolts. 8. Turn the ignition key to the ACC position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 5650 9. Separate the lock housing (lock cylinder case) from the multifunction lever bracket. Slide the bracket from the column. 10. Remove the ignition switch screws. 11. Remove the ignition switch. Installation Procedure 1. Ensure the ignition switch is in the ACC position. 2. Notice: Position the ignition switch to housing and install the screws and tighten. ^ Tighten the screws to 2.5 Nm (22 inch lbs.). 3. Pre-assemble the lock housing and multifunction lever bracket. Hand tighten the bolts leaving approximately 3.2 mm (0.125 inch) gap. 4. Slide the bracket onto the column. Ensure lock tab fully engages into the column slot. 5. Hand tighten the lower bolt until snug. 6. Hand tighten the upper bolt until snug. 7. Tighten the lower bolt, then the upper bolt. ^ Tighten the bolts to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 5651 8. Snap the ignition lock cable onto the ignition module. 9. Connect the ignition housing electrical connectors. 10. Important: Ensure both locking tabs are seated. Install the multifunction levers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 5652 11. Install the steering column trim covers. 12. Install the SIR coil. 13. Install the steering wheel. 14. Enable the SIR system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5656 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5659 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5660 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5661 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5662 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5663 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5664 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5665 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5666 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5667 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5668 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5669 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5670 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5671 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5672 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5673 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5674 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5675 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5676 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5677 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5678 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5679 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5680 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5681 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5682 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5683 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5684 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5685 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5686 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5687 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5688 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5689 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5690 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5691 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5692 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5693 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5694 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5695 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5696 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5697 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5698 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5699 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5700 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5701 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5702 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5703 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5704 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5705 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5706 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5707 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5708 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5709 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5710 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5711 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5712 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5713 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5714 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5715 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5716 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5717 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5718 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5719 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5720 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5721 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5722 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5723 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5724 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5725 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5726 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5727 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5728 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5729 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5730 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5731 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5732 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) 1 Knock Sensor (KS) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5733 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. The KS system uses one or 2 flat response 2-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5734 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: This engine is equipped with 2 knock sensors. This service procedure applies to both the right and left knock sensors 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the KS bolt. 4. Remove the KS. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply thread locker to the sensor threads. The sensor threads are coated at the factory and applying additional thread locker affects the sensor's ability to detect detonation. 1. Install the KS to engine block. 2. Install the KS bolt. Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the KS electrical connector. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF) ............................................................................................................................................. 384-425 kPa (50-60 psi) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 5741 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel system is a returnless on-demand design. The fuel pressure regulator is a part of the primary fuel tank module, eliminating the need for a return pipe from the engine. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel tank module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies high pressure fuel through the fuel filter, past the fuel pressure regulator, and through the fuel feed pipe to the fuel injection system. The fuel pressure regulator has a T-joint that diverts the needed fuel to the fuel rail with the unused fuel dropping back into the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The primary fuel tank module contains a reverse flow check valve. The check valve and the fuel pressure regulator maintain fuel pressure in the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail in order to prevent long cranking times. The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank. TEST Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 5742 Step 1 - Step 6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 5743 Step 7 - Step 13 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 07-06-04-026A > Apr > 08 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Customer Interest Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-026A Date: April 08, 2008 Subject: Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On, DTC P0171 Set (Inspect/Secure Fresh Air Inlet Pipe and Reprogram PCM) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include new repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-026 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the Service Engine Soon (SES) light is illuminated. Upon investigation the technician may find that Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0171 has been set. Cause The fresh air inlet pipe may have become disconnected from the grommet in the rear rocker cover. Correction Inspect the fresh air inlet pipe connection to the rear rocker cover. If the inlet pipe has become disconnected from the rear rocker cover reconnect the pipe into the grommet and also into the metal retaining bracket. Use a plastic tie strap to secure the pipe to the retaining bracket as shown above. In addition an updated Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calibration is now available to address this condition. Reprogram the PCM with the updated calibration using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS). As always make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 07-06-04-026A > Apr > 08 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-026A Date: April 08, 2008 Subject: Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On, DTC P0171 Set (Inspect/Secure Fresh Air Inlet Pipe and Reprogram PCM) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include new repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-026 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the Service Engine Soon (SES) light is illuminated. Upon investigation the technician may find that Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0171 has been set. Cause The fresh air inlet pipe may have become disconnected from the grommet in the rear rocker cover. Correction Inspect the fresh air inlet pipe connection to the rear rocker cover. If the inlet pipe has become disconnected from the rear rocker cover reconnect the pipe into the grommet and also into the metal retaining bracket. Use a plastic tie strap to secure the pipe to the retaining bracket as shown above. In addition an updated Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calibration is now available to address this condition. Reprogram the PCM with the updated calibration using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS). As always make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5758 Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE DUCT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Loosen the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) fresh air pipe from the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Remove the air cleaner intake duct from the mass air flow (MAF) sensor and throttle body. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner intake duct to the MAF sensor and throttle body. 2. Install the PCV fresh air pipe to the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Tighten the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. Tighten the clamps to 4 N.m (35 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 5767 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 5773 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H Date: April 11, 2011 Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab Models: 2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear Window Defroster - RPO C49 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Repair Suggestions Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass), always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector (P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab. In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the following before attempting the repair: - Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the solder. - If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass. Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair! - You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar, making a strong and lasting repair. - Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection. Soldering Procedure 1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a new connector to the feed wire. The proper connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5. - Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal. - Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab. Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with moveable glass. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly seated connector may cause excessive resistance and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical connector tab to the defroster tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 5779 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 5780 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 5781 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 00-08-48-005D > Sep > 10 > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 5791 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 5792 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 5793 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5798 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Release the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by tilting to release the lid from the lower housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5799 5. Remove the air cleaner element (2) from the lower housing (1). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner element (2) into the lower housing (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5800 2. Install the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by first engaging the hinge then lower the cover into the closed position. 3. Fasten the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. 4. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Connect the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection. 3. Install the bleed hose into an approved container and open the valve to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 4. Disconnect the fuel pressure gage from the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure > Page 5806 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Spark Plug Wire Resistance...................................................................................................................................... 4,018 ohm per meter (1,225 ohm per ft) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5810 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG WIRE INSPECTION Spark plug wire integrity is vital for proper engine operation. A thorough inspection will be necessary to accurately identify conditions that may affect engine operation. Refer to the list below for items to be inspected. 1. Inspect for correct routing of the spark plug wires. Improper routing may cause cross-firing. 2. Inspect each wire for any signs of cracks or splits in the wire. 3. Inspect each boot for the following conditions: - Tearing - Piercing - Arcing - Carbon tracking - Corroded terminal If corrosion, carbon tracking, or arcing are indicated on a spark plug wire boot or terminal, both the wire and the component connected to the wire should be replaced. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5811 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG WIRE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Remove the spark plug wires (1) from the left side spark plugs. NOTE: Twist the spark plug boot one-half turn in order to release the boot. Pull on the spark plug boot only. Do not pull on the spark plug wire or the wire could be damaged. 3. Remove the spark plug wires from the retaining clips (2). 4. Remove the spark plug wires (1) from the right side spark plugs. 5. Remove the spark plug wires from the retaining clips (2). 6. Remove the spark plug wires from the ignition coil/control module. 7. Remove the spark plug wires from the engine. 8. If you are replacing the spark plug wires, transfer any of the following components: - Boot heat shields - Spark plug wire conduit - Spark plug wire retaining clips Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5812 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the ignition coil/control module. 2. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the right side spark plugs. 3. Install the spark plug wires to the retaining clips (2). 4. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the left side spark plugs. 5. Install the spark plug wires to the retaining clips (2). 6. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap Spark Plug Gap ................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 1.52 mm (0.060 in.) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap > Page 5817 Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... .................................................. 15 Nm (11.0 lb. ft..) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5818 Spark Plug: Application and ID SPARK PLUG TYPE GM P/N ................................................................................................................................................ .............................................................. 12568387 AC Delco P/N ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................... 41-101 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5819 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG INSPECTION SPARK PLUG USAGE - Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications for the correct spark plug. - Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: Spark plug fouling-Colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug SPARK PLUG INSPECTION - Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. - Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. - Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5820 - Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. An excessively wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. A rattling sound indicates internal damage. - A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. SPARK PLUG VISUAL INSPECTION - Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. - Carbon fouled-Dry, fluffy, black carbon or soot caused by the following conditions: Rich fuel mixtures Leaking fuel injectors - Excessive fuel pressure - Restricted air filter element - Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output Weak coils - Worn ignition wires - Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. - Deposit fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5821 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Observe the following service precautions: Allow the engine to cool before removing the spark plugs. Attempting to remove spark plugs from a hot engine can cause the spark plugs to seize. This can damage the cylinder head threads. - Clean the spark plug recess area before removing the spark plug. Failure to do so can result in engine damage due to dirt or foreign material entering the cylinder head, or in contamination of the cylinder head threads. Contaminated threads may prevent proper seating of the new spark plug. - Use only the spark plugs specified for use in the vehicle. Do not install spark plugs that are either hotter or colder than those specified for the vehicle. Installing spark plugs of another type can severely damage the engine. 1. Remove the spark plug wires from the spark plugs. 2. Remove the spark plugs (1) from the cylinder head. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Gap the spark plugs to the specifications. Refer to Ignition System Specifications. NOTE: It is important to check the gap of all new and reconditioned spark plugs before installation. Pre-set gaps may have changed during handling. Use a round wire feeler gauge to be sure of an accurate check, particularly on used plugs. Installing plugs with the wrong gap can cause poor engine performance and may even damage the engine. 2. Install the spark plugs to the cylinder head. Tighten the spark plugs to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). NOTE: Be sure plug threads smoothly into cylinder head and is fully seated. Use a thread chaser if necessary to clean threads in cylinder head. Cross-threading or failing to fully seat spark plug can cause overheating of plug, exhaust blow-by, or thread damage. Follow the recommended torque specifications carefully. Over or under-tightening can also cause severe damage to engine or spark plug. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5822 - Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: ONLY when the cylinder head is replaced with a NEW cylinder head, the FIRST time the spark plugs are installed, tighten the spark plugs to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). All subsequent tightening of the spark plugs, tighten to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 3. Install the spark plug wires to the spark plugs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. No cylinder reading should be less than 689 kPa (100 psi). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 5826 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test A compression pressure test of the engine cylinders determines the condition of the rings, the valves, and the head gasket. 1. Important: Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and the ignition fuses from the I/P fuse block. Disable the ignition. 2. Disable the fuel systems. 3. Remove the spark plugs from all the cylinders. 4. Remove the air duct from the throttle body. 5. Block the throttle plate in the open position. 6. Measure the engine compression, using the following procedure: 1. Firmly install the compression gauge to the spark plug hole. 2. Have an assistant crank the engine through at least 4 compression strokes in the testing =cylinder. 3. Record the readings on the gauge at each stroke. 4. Disconnect the gauge. 5. Repeat the compression test for each cylinder. 7. Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. ^ The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. ^ No cylinder reading should be less than 689 kPa (100 psi). 8. The following list contains examples of the possible measurements: ^ When the compression measurement is normal, the compression builds up quickly and evenly to the specified compression on each cylinder. ^ When the compression is low on the first stroke and tends to build up on the following strokes, but does not reach the normal compression, the piston rings may be the cause. ^ If the compression improves considerably with the addition of three squirts of oil, the piston rings may be the cause. ^ When the compression is low on the first stroke and does not build up in the following strokes, the valves may be the cause. ^ The addition of oil does not affect the compression, the valves may be the cause. ^ When the compression is low on two adjacent cylinders, or coolant is present in the crankcase, the head gasket may be the cause. 9. Remove the block from the throttle plate. 10. Install the air duct to the throttle body. 11. Install the spark plugs. 12. Install the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) fuse. 13. Install the ignition fuse to the I/P fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Under The Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5831 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5832 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The accelerator pedal contains 2 individual accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors within the assembly. The APP sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits: - A 5-volt reference circuit - A low reference circuit - A signal circuit The APP sensors are used to determine the pedal angle. The powertrain control module (PCM) provides each APP sensor with a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensors provide the PCM with signal voltage proportional to the pedal movement. Both APP sensor signal voltages are low at rest position and increase as the pedal is applied. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5833 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR PEDAL WITH POSITION SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor connector. 3. Disconnect the APP sensor harness connector. 4. Remove the APP assembly attachment bolts. IMPORTANT: Due to clearance issues, the upper attachment bolt cannot be removed from the accelerator pedal assembly. Loose then bolt completely and leave the bolt in the component until the assembly is removed from the vehicle. 5. Remove the APP assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5834 1. Install the upper attachment bolt into the APP assembly. 2. Install the APP assembly into the vehicle. 3. Install the remaining attachment bolts into the APP assembly. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the APP sensor harness connector. Push the connector in until the lock position is felt, then pull back to confirm engagement. 5. Install the CPA to the APP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5840 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5841 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5842 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5843 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5844 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5845 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5846 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5847 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5848 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5849 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5850 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5851 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5852 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5853 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5854 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5855 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5856 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5857 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5858 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5859 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5860 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5861 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5862 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5863 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5864 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5865 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5866 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5867 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5868 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5869 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5870 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5871 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5872 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5873 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5874 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5875 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5876 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5877 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5878 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5879 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5880 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5881 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5882 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5883 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5884 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5885 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5886 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5887 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5888 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5889 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5890 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5891 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5892 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5893 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5894 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5895 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5896 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5897 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5898 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5899 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5900 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5901 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5902 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5903 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5904 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5905 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5906 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5907 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5908 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5909 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5910 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5911 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5912 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5913 Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5914 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the MAF from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the MAF to air cleaner assembly seal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5915 1. Install the seal to the MAF. 2. Install the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 3. Install the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. Tighten the screws to 4 N.m (35 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5919 Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Body Control Module: Customer Interest A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Bulletin No.: 07-01-38-005 Date: July 18, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Poor A/C Performance, A/C Does Not Get Cold Enough After Long Drive Cycle (Recalibrate BCM with Tech 2) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on poor A/C performance or that the A/C does not get cold enough after a long drive. Some of the possible symptoms of this condition are: Blowing warm air Reduced air flow Mist/Vapor coming out of vents Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the evaporator core freezing up. Fix It Right the First Time Tips DO NOT replace the evaporator temperature sensor for this condition unless diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. The sensor can be checked for proper function using the Tech 2(R). Check the sensor for volts varying around 2.3V to 2.6V. This data is within the BCM and is displayed in the accessory list. If the volts are near zero, check for a good connection at the sensor. Also, inspect the harness for possible damage. The sensor is located on the driver's side of the HVAC module and can be accessed from underneath the instrument panel by removing the closeout panel and OnStar(R) module, if equipped. DO NOT replace the thermal expansion valve (TXV) for this condition unless published SI diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. If AC components have been replaced or the refrigerant has been evacuated and recharged and no PAG oil has been added back into the system, it may have a reduced oil level. Please ensure that the vehicle has the proper amount of PAG oil in the system, as low oil level will contribute to the evaporator freezing up. To return to a nominal level of PAG oil, it may be necessary to flush the system. Refer to SI for flushing instructions. Correction The Tech 2(R) must have software version 27.009 or later. Recalibrate the BCM with new software using the Tech 2(R) and following the procedure below. This updated software will control the cycling of the compressor clutch to prevent freezing of the evaporator core. Install the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle and power on. Turn ON the ignition, with engine OFF. Select "Diagnostics." Build the vehicle. Select "Body Control Module". Select "Module Setup". Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough > Page 5928 Then press "BCM Setup" soft key to execute update. When completed command state will change from "None" to "BCM Setup". Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: Customer Interest Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 5933 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 5934 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Bulletin No.: 07-01-38-005 Date: July 18, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Poor A/C Performance, A/C Does Not Get Cold Enough After Long Drive Cycle (Recalibrate BCM with Tech 2) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on poor A/C performance or that the A/C does not get cold enough after a long drive. Some of the possible symptoms of this condition are: Blowing warm air Reduced air flow Mist/Vapor coming out of vents Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the evaporator core freezing up. Fix It Right the First Time Tips DO NOT replace the evaporator temperature sensor for this condition unless diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. The sensor can be checked for proper function using the Tech 2(R). Check the sensor for volts varying around 2.3V to 2.6V. This data is within the BCM and is displayed in the accessory list. If the volts are near zero, check for a good connection at the sensor. Also, inspect the harness for possible damage. The sensor is located on the driver's side of the HVAC module and can be accessed from underneath the instrument panel by removing the closeout panel and OnStar(R) module, if equipped. DO NOT replace the thermal expansion valve (TXV) for this condition unless published SI diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. If AC components have been replaced or the refrigerant has been evacuated and recharged and no PAG oil has been added back into the system, it may have a reduced oil level. Please ensure that the vehicle has the proper amount of PAG oil in the system, as low oil level will contribute to the evaporator freezing up. To return to a nominal level of PAG oil, it may be necessary to flush the system. Refer to SI for flushing instructions. Correction The Tech 2(R) must have software version 27.009 or later. Recalibrate the BCM with new software using the Tech 2(R) and following the procedure below. This updated software will control the cycling of the compressor clutch to prevent freezing of the evaporator core. Install the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle and power on. Turn ON the ignition, with engine OFF. Select "Diagnostics." Build the vehicle. Select "Body Control Module". Select "Module Setup". Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough > Page 5940 Then press "BCM Setup" soft key to execute update. When completed command state will change from "None" to "BCM Setup". Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 5945 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 5946 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5947 Center Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5950 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5951 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5952 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5953 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5954 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5955 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5956 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5957 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5958 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5959 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5960 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5961 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5962 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5963 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5964 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5965 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5966 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5967 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5968 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5969 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5970 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5971 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5972 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5973 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5974 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5975 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5976 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5977 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5978 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5979 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5980 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5981 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5982 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5983 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5984 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5985 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5986 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5987 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5988 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5989 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5990 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5991 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5992 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5993 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5994 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5995 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5996 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5997 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5998 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5999 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6000 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6001 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6002 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6003 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6004 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6005 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6006 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6007 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6008 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6009 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6010 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6011 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6012 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6013 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6014 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6015 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6016 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6017 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6018 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6019 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6020 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6021 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6022 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6023 Body Control Module: Connector Views Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6024 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6025 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6026 Body Control Module (BCM) C4 Splice Pack SP200 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System Body Control Module: Description and Operation Body Control System BODY CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION BCM OVERVIEW The main features of the body control module (BCM) are: The BCM is the gateway between class 2 serial data circuit and high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. - The BCM controls multiple functions. - The BCM is the power mode master. GATEWAY The body control module (BCM) communicates functionally on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data buses. The BCM is the gateway between the buses and transfers serial data messages from one subnet to another. Physical communication of the BCM with the scan tool is through class 2 serial data circuit. BCM FUNCTIONS The body control module (BCM) performs multiple body control functions. The BCM can control devices directly connected to its outputs based on input information. The BCM evaluates this information and controls certain body control systems by commanding outputs on or off. The BCM inputs can be: Sensors and switches that are directly connected to the BCM - Class 2 serial data messages received from other vehicle systems connected to the class 2 serial data link - GMLAN serial data messages received from other vehicles systems connected to the high speed GMLAN serial data link The BCM is also capable of controlling other vehicle systems that are not directly wired to the BCM. The BCM does this by sending specific messages on the class 2 serial data link or high speed GMLAN serial data link. The system capable of performing the required function will respond to the BCM messages. Some of the other system functions that BCM controls or contributes to are: Audible warnings-Refer to Audible Warnings Description and Operation in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. - Exterior lighting control-Refer to Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Interior lighting-Refer to Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Automatic door locks-Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors. - Keyless entry-Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry. - Theft deterrent-Refer to Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent. - Wipers/washers-Refer to Wiper/Washer System Description and Operation in Wipers/Washer Systems. - Rear defogger-Refer to Rear Window Defogger Description and Operation in Heated Glass Element. - Horn-Refer to Horns System Description and Operation in Horns. POWER MODE The BCM is the power mode master (PMM). Refer to Power Mode Description and Operation for more information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 6029 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Power Mode POWER MODE DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SERIAL DATA POWER MODE On vehicles that have several control modules connected by serial data circuits, one module is the power mode master (PMM). On this vehicle the PMM is the body control module (BCM). The BCM monitors Ignition 1 (Run/Crank), Ignition 2 (Acc/Run), and Ignition 3 (Run) signals from the ignition switch, and the engine run flag (ERF) message from the engine control module (ECM) in order to determine the present power mode. To determine the correct power mode the BCM uses: The state of these signals - The sequence of switch closures received by the BCM - The status of the engine run flag Correct Ignition Switch Inputs The chart indicates the power modes detected and transmitted by the BCM. The power mode message is a periodic with event message type and is transmitted by the PMM at every 2 seconds on class 2 link and at every 250 ms on high speed GMLAN link. The power modes are identical transmitted on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data circuits with the exception of retained accessory power (RAP). RAP is transmitted only on class 2 and it is mapped on high speed GMLAN as Off Awake. FAIL-SAFE OPERATION Since the operation of the vehicle systems depends on the power mode, there is a fail-safe plan in place should the body control module (BCM) fail to send a power mode message. The fail-safe plan covers modules with discrete ignition signal inputs as well as those modules using exclusively serial data control of power mode. SERIAL DATA MESSAGE The modules that depend exclusively on serial data messages for power modes stay in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message until they receive the engine status from the powertrain control module (PCM). If the BCM fails, the modules monitor the serial data circuit for the engine run flag serial data. If the engine run flag serial data is true, indicating that the engine is running, the modules fail-safe to Run. In this state the modules and their subsystems can support all operator requirements. If the engine run flag serial data is false, indicating that the engine is not running, the modules fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. DISCRETE IGNITION SIGNALS Those modules that have discrete ignition signal inputs also remain in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message received on the serial data circuits. They then check the state of their discrete ignition input to determine the current valid state. If the discrete ignition input is active, B+, the modules will fail-safe to the RUN power mode. If the discrete ignition input is not active, open or 0 voltage, the modules will fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 6030 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Retained Accessory Power (RAP) RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SERIAL DATA CONTROL OF RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) Retained accessory power (RAP) is a vehicle power mode that permits the operation of selected customer convenience items after the ignition switch is turned OFF. These selected items will remain in operation until a passenger compartment door or liftgate is opened or until the RAP function timer reaches its shut-off limit. The class 2 RAP power mode is mapped to GMLAN serial data circuit as Off Awake power mode. Refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation for more information on data link communications. The BCM monitors the ignition switch signals, battery condition and the doors status to determine whether RAP should be initiated. The modules that support the RAP power mode will operate the systems under their control as required by their RAP power mode strategy. RAP will end when one of the following conditions is met: The BCM detects the opening of a passenger compartment door. - The RAP timer expires. - The battery capacity decreases below a prescribed limit. - Any other ignition switch state is chosen. The function supported in the RAP power mode is the operation of the radio. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Body Control Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT Begin the system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. The Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will provide the following information: - The identification of the control modules which are not communicating. - The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures The use of the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will identify the correct procedures to begin vehicle diagnosis. These must be performed before system DTC or symptom diagnosis. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6033 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures A Symptoms - Computer/Integrating Systems SYMPTOMS IMPORTANT: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: - There are no DTCs set. - The control modules can communicate via the serial data links. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to: - Data Link Communications Description and Operation - Body Control System Description and Operation - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation Visual/Physical Inspection Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. - Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: - Scan Tool Does Not Power Up See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Does Not Power Up - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device - Power Mode Mismatch See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Power Mode Mismatch - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After TimeOut See: Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Time-Out - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative See: Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6034 Step 1 - Step 6 Step 1 - Step 6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6035 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BODY CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Rotate the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the radio bezel. 3. Disconnect the body control module (BCM) electrical harnesses. 4. Remove the BCM from the instrument panel (I/P) retainer: 1. Pry the BCM tabs from the locking tabs on the underside of the restraint. 2. Slide the BCM out of the retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the BCM. 2. Install the radio bezel. 3. Slide the BCM tabs into the slots in the I/P retainer until the tabs lock into place. 4. Connect the electrical connectors. 5. Program a new or a remanufactured BCM. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6041 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6042 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6043 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6044 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6045 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6046 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6047 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6048 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6049 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6050 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6051 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6052 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6053 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6054 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6055 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6056 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6057 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6058 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6059 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6060 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6061 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6062 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6063 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6064 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6065 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6066 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6067 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6068 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6069 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6070 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6071 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6072 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6073 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6074 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6075 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6076 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6077 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6078 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6079 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6080 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6081 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6082 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6083 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6084 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6085 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6086 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6087 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6088 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6089 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6090 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6091 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6092 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6093 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6094 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6095 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6096 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6097 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6098 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6099 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6100 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6101 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6102 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6103 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6104 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6105 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6106 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6107 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6108 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6109 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6110 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6111 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6112 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6113 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6114 Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6115 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor does not directly affect the operation of the ignition system. The CMP sensor information is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to determine the position of the valve train relative to the crankshaft position. By monitoring the CMP and crankshaft position (CKP) signals, the PCM can accurately time the operation of the fuel injectors. The PCM supplies the sensor with a 12-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6116 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt. 3. Remove the CMP sensor. 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-rings for wear, cracks, or leakage if the sensor is being reused. Replace the O-rings if damaged. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the CMP sensor O-rings with clean engine oil. 2. Install the CMP sensor. 3. Install the CMP sensor bolt. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 6120 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 6121 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Engine coolant must be drained below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill) in Cooling System. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply thread sealant GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent, to sensor threads. IMPORTANT: Tap out sensor mounting hole in engine head to remove any thread sealant residue. Clean any sealant residue from old sensor and apply RTV sealant to threads if old sensor is going to be reused. 2. Install the ECT sensor. Tighten the engine coolant temperature sensor to 23 N.m (17 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 6122 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Fill engine coolant to proper level. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill) in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6128 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6129 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6130 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6131 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6132 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6133 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6134 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6135 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6136 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6137 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6138 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6139 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6140 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6141 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6142 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6143 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6144 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6145 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6146 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6147 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6148 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6149 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6150 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6151 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6152 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6153 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6154 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6155 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6156 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6157 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6158 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6159 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6160 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6161 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6162 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6163 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6164 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6165 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6166 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6167 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6168 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6169 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6170 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6171 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6172 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6173 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6174 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6175 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6176 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6177 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6178 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6179 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6180 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6181 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6182 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6183 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6184 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6185 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6186 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6187 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6188 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6189 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6190 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6191 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6192 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6193 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6194 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6195 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6196 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6197 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6198 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6199 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6200 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6201 Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6202 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a 3-wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses 2 magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets, the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The CKP sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 24 times per crankshaft revolution. The pulse width encoding pattern is used to synchronize the coil firing sequence with the crankshaft position. The CKP sensor is used for ignition timing, fuel injector timing, misfire diagnostics, and tachometer display. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a 12-volt reference, a low reference, and a medium resolution engine speed signal circuit to the CKP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CKP sensor nut (2). 4. Remove the CKP sensor (1) from the engine. 5. Inspect for wear, cracks, or leakage if the CKP sensor is being reused. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil. Replace the O-rings if damaged. 2. Install the CKP sensor (1) to the block. 3. Install the CKP sensor nut (1). Tighten the nut to 11 N.m (97 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 6205 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 6206 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: - The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. - The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A powertrain control module (PCM) replacement - A crankshaft balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the PCM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC. 3. With a scan tool, select the CKP variation learn procedure and perform the following: 1. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 2. Block drive wheels. 3. Set parking brake. 4. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 5. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 6. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 7. Start and idle engine. 8. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 9. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 10. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). IMPORTANT: The engine should not accelerate beyond the calibrated fuel cut-off RPM value noted in step 3.1. Release the throttle immediately if the value is exceeded. - While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 4. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC. 5. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully in order to store the CKP system variation values in the PCM memory. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations Data Link Connector: Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 6210 Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6213 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6214 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6215 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6216 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6217 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6218 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6219 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6220 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6221 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6222 Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6223 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6224 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6225 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6226 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6227 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6228 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6229 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6230 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6231 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6232 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6233 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6234 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6235 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6236 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6237 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6238 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6239 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6240 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6241 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6242 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6243 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6244 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6245 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6246 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6247 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6248 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6249 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6250 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6251 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6252 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6253 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6254 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6255 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6256 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6257 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6258 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6259 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6260 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6261 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6262 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6263 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6264 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6265 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6266 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6267 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6268 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6269 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6270 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6271 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6272 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6273 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6274 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6275 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6276 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6277 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6278 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6279 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6280 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6281 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6282 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6283 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6284 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6285 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6286 Data Link Connector (DLC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Description and Operation > Data Link Connector Description Data Link Connector: Description and Operation Data Link Connector Description DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a 16-pin connector that provides the technician a means of accessing communication data for aid in the diagnosis. This connector allows the technician to use a scan tool in order to monitor the various parameters, and display the DTC information. The DLC is located inside of the drivers compartment, underneath the dash. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Description and Operation > Data Link Connector Description > Page 6289 Data Link Connector: Description and Operation Data Link Communications DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The communication among modules is performed through the class 2 serial data circuit and high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The modules that need real time communication are attached to the high speed GMLAN network. The body control module (BCM) is the gateway between the networks. The purpose of the gateway is to transfer information from one network to another. The gateway will interact with each network according to that network's transmission model. Refer to Body Control System Description and Operation for more information about the gateway. GMLAN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The serial data is transmitted on two twisted wires that allow speed up to 500 Kbps. The twisted pair is terminated with two 120 ohm resistors, one is internal to the ECM and the other is internal to the BCM. The resistors are used to reduce noise on the high speed GMLAN bus during normal vehicle operation. The high speed GMLAN is a differential bus. The high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and high speed GMLAN serial data (-) are driven to opposite extremes from a rest or idle level. The idle level which is approximately 2.5 volts is considered a recessive transmitted data and is interpreted as a logic 1. Driving the lines to their extremes adds 1 volt to high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and subtracts 1 volt from high speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) wire. This dominant state is interpreted as a logic 0. GMLAN network management supports selective start up and is based on virtual networks. A virtual network is a collection of signals started in response to a vehicle event. The starting of a virtual network signifies that a particular aspect of the vehicles's functionality has been requested. A virtual network is supported by virtual devices which represents a collection of signals owned by a single physical device. So, any physical device can have one or more virtual devices. The signal supervision is the process of determining whether an expected signal is being received or not. Failsofting is the ability to substitute a signal with a default value or a default algorithm, in the absence of a valid signal. Some messages are also interpreted as a "heartbeat" of a virtual device. If such a signal is lost, the application will set a no communication code against the respective virtual device. This code is mapped on the Tech 2 screen as a code against the physical device. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not normally represent a failure of the module that set it. The interaction between high speed GMLAN and class 2 is assured by BCM, which is the gateway. Any message from the class 2 modules to the high speed GMLAN modules is translated by BCM without carrying the original transmitter ID. Therefore the GMLAN modules consider the BCM as being the originator of all class 2 messages that they receive. CLASS 2 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the class 2 serial data circuit. Class 2 serial data is transmitted on a single wire at an average of 10.4 Kbps. The bus is active at 7.0 volts nominal and inactive at ground potential. Each module communicating on the class 2 serial data line sends a state of health (SOH) message every 2 seconds to ensure that the module is operating properly. When a module stops communicating on the class 2 serial data line, for example if the module loses power or ground, the SOH message it normally sends on the data line every 2 seconds disappears. Other modules on the class 2 serial data line, which expect to receive that SOH message, detect its absence; those modules in turn set an internal DTC associated with the loss of SOH of the non-communicating module. The DTC is unique to the module which is not communicating, for example, when the body control module (BCM) SOH message disappears, several modules set DTC U1064. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not normally represent a failure of the module that set it. The BCM emulates the GMLAN modules on the class 2, embedding the original transmitter ID in GMLAN messages to class 2. Therefore the class 2 modules can set specific non communications DTCs against GMLAN modules. DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16 cavity connector. Connector design and location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and is required to provide the following: Scan tool power battery positive voltage at terminal 16 - Scan tool power ground at terminal 4 - Common signal ground at terminal 5 - Class 2 signal at terminal 2 - High speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) at terminal 6 - High speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) at terminal 14 GMLAN SERIAL DATA LINE The GMLAN serial data communications circuit on this vehicle is in a linear topology. The following modules are connected to the link, in order from DLC to the end of the linear configuration: The body control module (BCM) - The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) - The electronic brake control module (EBCM) - The transmission control module (TCM) - The engine control module (ECM) VCIM communicates functionally and physically on class 2 only. The high speed GMLAN circuits just pass through the module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Description and Operation > Data Link Connector Description > Page 6290 CLASS 2 SERIAL DATA LINE The class 2 serial data communications circuit on this vehicle is in a star configuration. The star has one splice pack, located nearby the DLC. The following modules communicate on the class 2 serial data circuit: The body control module (BCM) - The digital radio receiver (DRR) - The instrument panel cluster (IPC) - The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) - The power steering control module (PSCM) - The radio - The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6291 Data Link Connector: Testing and Inspection DATA LINK REFERENCES IMPORTANT: - For DTC U1500, refer to DTC U1500 in Cellular Communication. - For DTC U0107, refer to DTC U0107 in Computers and Control Systems - 3.4L This table identifies which serial data link that a particular module uses for in-vehicle data transmission. Some modules may use more than one data link to communicate. Some modules may have multiple communication circuits passing through them without actively communicating on that data link. This table is used to assist in correcting a communication malfunction. For the description and operation of these serial data communication circuits, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6292 Data Link Connector: Service and Repair DATA LINK CONNECTOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8. CAUTION: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). Before applying power to the SDM, make sure that it is securely fastened with the arrow facing toward the front of the vehicle. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. - If the vehicle interior is exposed to moisture and becomes soaked up to the level of the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), the SDM and SDM harness connector must be replaced. The SDM could be activated when powered, which could cause airbag deployment and result in personal injury. 2. Remove the console assembly. 3. Remove the retainers from the connector position assurance (CPA) and disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the nuts and remove the SDM. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other contaminants from the mounting surface. 2. Install the SDM to the vehicle with the nuts. Tighten the nuts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the console assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6293 4. Enable the SIR system. 5. Reprogram the BCM. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration. IMPORTANT: If you do NOT perform the BCM programming procedure, the vehicle option content information which is read by the BCM may be incorrect and a DTC B1001 Option Configuration Error will set in both the SDM and the BCM. This will illuminate the AIR BAG telltale. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL (TAC) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PURPOSE The throttle actuator control (TAC) system delivers improved throttle response and greater reliability and eliminates the need for mechanical cable. The TAC system performs the following functions: Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensing - Throttle positioning to meet driver and engine demands - Throttle position sensing - Internal diagnostics - Cruise control functions - Manage TAC electrical power consumption The TAC system includes the following components: The APP sensors - The throttle body assembly - The powertrain control module (PCM) ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The accelerator pedal contains 2 individual accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors within the assembly. The APP sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits: A 5-volt reference circuit - A low reference circuit - A signal circuit The APP sensors are used to determine the pedal angle. The powertrain control module (PCM) provides each APP sensor with a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensors provide the PCM with signal voltage proportional to the pedal movement. Both APP sensor signal voltages are low at rest position and increase as the pedal is applied. THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY The throttle assembly contains the following components: The throttle blade - The throttle actuator motor - The throttle position (TP) sensor 1 and 2 - The throttle actuator control (TAC) module The throttle body functions similar to a conventional throttle body with the following exceptions: There is no longer an idle air control (IAC) motor and associated air passages. - An electric motor opens and closes the throttle valve. - The TAC module is located within the throttle body assembly. - The throttle blade is spring loaded in both directions and the default position is slightly open. - There are 2 individual TP sensors within the throttle body assembly. The TP sensors are used to determine the throttle plate angle. The TP sensors provide the powertrain control module (PCM) with a signal voltage proportional to throttle plate movement. Both TP sensor signal voltages are low at closed throttle and increase as the throttle opens. THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MODULE The throttle actuator control (TAC) module is the control center for the TAC system. The TAC system uses electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) and is self-diagnosing. The TAC module provides diagnostic information to the powertrain control module (PCM) through a dedicated serial data line. The TAC achieves throttle positioning by providing a pulse width modulated (PWM) voltage to the TAC motor as directed by the PCM. The TAC module is not serviced and should be replaced with the throttle body assembly. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE The powertrain control module (PCM) determines the drivers intent and then calculates the appropriate throttle response. This information is sent to the throttle actuator control (TAC) module through a dedicated serial data line. MODES OF OPERATION Normal Mode During the operation of the throttle actuator control (TAC) system, several modes or functions are considered normal. The following modes may be entered during normal operation: Minimum pedal value-At key-up, the powertrain control module (PCM) updates the learned minimum pedal value. - Minimum throttle position (TP) values-At key-up, the PCM updates the learned minimum throttle position value. In order to learn the minimum throttle position value, the throttle blade is moved to the closed position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6297 - Ice break mode-If the throttle is not able to reach a predetermined minimum throttle position, the ice break mode is entered. During the ice break mode, the PCM commands the maximum pulse width several times to the throttle actuator motor in the closing direction. - Battery saver mode-After a predetermined time without engine RPM, the PCM commands the battery saver mode. During the battery saver mode, the TAC module removes the voltage from the motor control circuits, which removes the current draw used to maintain the idle position and allows the throttle to return to the spring loaded default position. Reduced Engine Power Mode When the PCM detects a condition with the TAC system, the PCM may enter a reduced engine power mode. Reduced engine power may cause one or more of the following conditions: Acceleration limiting-The PCM will continue to use the accelerator pedal for throttle control, however the vehicle acceleration is limited. - Limited throttle mode-The PCM will continue to use the accelerator pedal for throttle control however the maximum throttle opening is limited. - Throttle default mode-The PCM will turn off the throttle actuator motor and the throttle will return to the spring loaded default position. - Forced idle mode-The PCM will perform the following actions: Limit engine speed to idle by positioning the throttle, or by controlling the fuel and spark if the throttle is turned off. - Ignore the accelerator pedal input. - Engine shutdown mode-The PCM will disable fuel and de-energize the throttle actuator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6301 Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6302 Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MODULE The throttle actuator control (TAC) module is the control center for the TAC system. The TAC system uses electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) and is self-diagnosing. The TAC module provides diagnostic information to the powertrain control module (PCM) through a dedicated serial data line. The TAC achieves throttle positioning by providing a pulse width modulated (PWM) voltage to the TAC motor as directed by the PCM. The TAC module is not serviced and should be replaced with the throttle body assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 6307 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 6308 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 6309 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 6310 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 6311 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 6312 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6313 LF Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6316 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6317 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6318 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6319 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6320 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6321 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6322 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6323 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6324 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6325 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6326 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6327 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6328 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6329 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6330 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6331 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6332 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6333 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6334 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6335 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6336 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6337 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6338 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6339 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6340 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6341 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6342 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6343 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6344 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6345 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6346 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6347 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6348 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6349 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6350 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6351 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6352 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6353 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6354 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6355 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6356 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6357 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6358 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6359 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6360 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6361 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6362 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6363 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6364 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6365 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6366 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6367 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6368 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6369 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6370 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6371 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6372 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6373 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6374 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6375 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6376 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6377 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6378 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6379 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6380 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6381 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6382 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6383 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6384 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6385 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6386 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6387 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6388 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6389 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C1 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6390 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C1 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6391 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6392 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6393 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DESCRIPTION The powertrain control module (PCM) interacts with many emission related components and systems, and monitors emission related components and systems for deterioration. OBD II diagnostics monitor the system performance and a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets if the system performance degrades. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) operation and the DTC storage are dictated by the DTC type. A DTC is ranked as a Type A or Type B if the DTC is emissions related. Type C is a non-emissions related DTC. The PCM is in the engine compartment. The PCM is the control center of the Computers and Control system. The PCM controls the following components: - The fuel injection system - The ignition system - The emission control systems - The on-board diagnostics - The A/C and fan systems The PCM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect the vehicle performance and the emissions. The PCM also performs diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The PCM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the MIL. When the PCM detects a malfunction, it stores a DTC. The condition is identified by the particular DTC that is set. This aids the technician in making repairs. PCM Function The powertrain control module (PCM) can supply 5 volts or 12 volts to the various sensors or switches. This is done through pull-up resistors to the regulated power supplies within the control module. In some cases, even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give an accurate reading because the resistance is too low. Therefore, a DMM with at least 10 megaohms input impedance is required in order to ensure accurate voltage readings. The PCM controls the output circuits by controlling the ground or the power feed circuit through the transistors or a device called an output driver module. EEPROM The electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory that is physically part of the control module. The EEPROM contains program and calibration information that the powertrain control module (PCM) needs in order to control the powertrain operation. Special equipment, as well as the correct program and calibration for the vehicle, are required in order to reprogram the control module. Data Link Connector (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a 16-pin connector that provides the technician a means of accessing communication data for aid in the diagnosis. This connector allows the technician to use a scan tool in order to monitor the various parameters, and display the DTC information. The DLC is located inside of the drivers compartment, underneath the dash. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Operation The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located in the instrument panel cluster. The MIL will display as either SERVICE ENGINE SOON or one of the following symbols when commanded ON: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 6396 The MIL indicates that an emissions related fault has occurred and vehicle service is required. The following is a list of the modes of operation for the MIL: The MIL illuminates when the ignition is turned ON, with the engine OFF. This is a bulb test to ensure that the MIL is able to illuminate. - The MIL turns OFF after the engine is started if a diagnostic fault is not present. - The MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started if the control module detects a fault. A DTC is stored any time the control module illuminates the MIL due to an emissions related fault. The MIL turns OFF after 3 consecutive ignition cycles in which a Test Passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. - The MIL flashes if the control module detects a misfire condition which could damage the catalytic converter. - When the MIL is illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated as long as the ignition is ON. - When the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition is cycled OFF and then ON. PCM Service Precautions The powertrain control module (PCM), by design, can withstand the normal current draws that are associated with the vehicle operations. However, care must be used in order to avoid overloading any of these circuits. When testing for opens or shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the PCM circuits unless the diagnostic procedure instructs you to do so. These circuits should only be tested with a DMM. Emissions Diagnosis For State I/M Programs This OBD II equipped vehicle is designed to diagnose any conditions that could lead to excessive levels of the following emissions: Hydrocarbons (HC) - Carbon monoxide (CO) - Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) - Evaporative emission (EVAP) system losses Should this vehicles on-board diagnostic system, powertrain control module (PCM), detect a condition that could result in excessive emissions, the PCM turns ON the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and stores a DTC that is associated with the condition. Aftermarket (Add-On) Electrical And Vacuum Equipment NOTE: Do not attach add-on vacuum operated equipment to this vehicle. The use of add-on vacuum equipment may result in damage to vehicle components or systems. - Connect any add-on electrically operated equipment to the vehicle's electrical system at the battery (power and ground) in order to prevent damage to the vehicle. Aftermarket, add-on, electrical and vacuum equipment is defined as any equipment installed on a vehicle after leaving the factory that connects to the vehicles electrical or vacuum systems. No allowances have been made in the vehicle design for this type of equipment. Add-on electrical equipment, even when installed to these strict guidelines, may still cause the powertrain system to malfunction. This may also include equipment not connected to the vehicle electrical system, such as portable telephones and radios. Therefore, the first step in diagnosing any powertrain condition is to eliminate all of the aftermarket electrical equipment from the vehicle. After this is done, if the problem still exists, the problem may be diagnosed in the normal manner. Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage IMPORTANT: In order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage to the control module, DO NOT touch the connector pins on the control module. The electronic components that are used in the control systems are often designed to carry very low voltage. The electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 volts of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. By comparison, it takes as much as 4,000 volts for a person to even feel the effect of a static discharge. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a car seat. Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, therefore, it is Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 6397 important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. Emissions Control Information Label The underhood Vehicle Emissions Control Information Label contains important emission specifications and setting procedures. In the upper left corner is the exhaust emission information. This identifies the year, the manufacturing division of the engine, the displacement of the engine in liters, the class of the vehicle, and type of fuel metering system. There is also an illustrated emission components and vacuum hose schematic. This label is located in the engine compartment of every General Motors vehicle. If the label has been removed, it can be ordered from GM service parts operations (GMSPO). Underhood Inspection IMPORTANT: This inspection is very important and must be done carefully and thoroughly. Perform a careful underhood inspection when performing any diagnostic procedure or diagnosing the cause of an emission test failure. This can often lead to repairing a condition without further steps. Use the following guidelines when performing an inspection: Inspect all of the vacuum hoses for correct routing, pinches, cuts, or disconnects. - Inspect any hoses that are difficult to see. - Inspect all of the wires in the engine compartment for the following conditions: Burned or chafed spots - Pinched wires - Contact with sharp edges - Contact with hot exhaust manifolds Basic Knowledge Required NOTE: Lack of basic knowledge of this powertrain when performing diagnostic procedures could result in incorrect diagnostic performance or damage to powertrain components. Do not attempt to diagnose a powertrain problem without this basic knowledge. A basic understanding of hand tools is necessary in order to effectively use this section of the service data. You must be familiar with some of the basics of engine operation and electrical diagnosis in order to use this section of the service data. Basic electrical circuits-You should have an understanding of basic electricity and know the meaning of voltage volts), current (amps), and resistance ohms). You should understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire, and you should be able to identify a shorted or open circuit by using a DMM. You should be able to read and understand a wiring diagram. - Use of digital multimeter-You should be familiar with the DMM, particularly the essential tool. You should be able to use the meter in order to measure the voltage volts), the resistance ohms), the current (amps), intermittents (min/max), and frequency (Hertz). - Use of circuit testing tools-You should not use a test lamp to diagnose the Computers and Control system unless you are specifically instructed to do so. You should know how to the use jumper wires in order to test the components and allow the DMM readings without damaging the terminals. You should know how to use the J 35616 connector test adapter kit and use the kit whenever the diagnostic procedures call for front probing any connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 6398 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE The powertrain control module (PCM) determines the drivers intent and then calculates the appropriate throttle response. This information is sent to the throttle actuator control (TAC) module through a dedicated serial data line. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 6399 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Electronic Ignition (EI) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The powertrain control module (PCM) controls all ignition system functions, and constantly corrects the basic spark timing. The PCM monitors information from various sensor inputs that include the following: - The throttle position (TP) sensor - The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor - The mass air flow (MAF) sensor - The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor - The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) - The transmission gear position or range information sensors - The engine knock sensor (KS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6400 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a scan tool, retrieve the percentage of remaining engine oil and the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. Record the remaining engine oil and the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. IMPORTANT: It is necessary to record the remaining engine oil life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil life will default to 100%. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil will need to be changed at 5000 km (3,000 mi) from the last engine oil change. - It is necessary to record the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining automatic transmission fluid life, the automatic transmission fluid life will default to 100%. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining automatic transmission fluid life, the automatic transmission fluid will need to be changed at 83000 km (50,000 mi) from the last automatic transmission fluid change. 2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) (1) and PCM bracket (2) from the battery box cover. 3. Remove the PCM bracket (2) from the PCM (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6401 4. Disconnect the PCM wire harness (4) from the battery box cover. 5. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 6. Remove the PCM connectors (2) from the PCM (3). 7. Remove the PCM (3) from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the PCM (3) to the vehicle. 2. Install the PCM connectors (2) to the PCM (3). 3. Connect the negative battery cable. 4. Connect the PCM wire harness (4) to the battery box cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6402 5. Install the PCM bracket (2) to the PCM (1). 6. Install the PCM bracket (1) to the battery box cover. 7. Reprogram the PCM. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6406 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR The fuel level sensor consists of a float, a wire float arm, and a ceramic resistor card. The position of the float arm indicates the fuel level. The fuel level sensor contains a variable resistor which changes resistance in correspondence with the position of the float arm. The control module sends the fuel level information via the CAN serial data to the body control module (BCM). The instrument panel cluster (IPC) displays the fuel level as determined by the BCM. This information is used for the IPC fuel gage and the low fuel warning indicator, if applicable. The control module also monitors the fuel level input for various diagnostics. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT - PRIMARY REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: NEW fuel tank module seals are necessary each time the fuel tank module is serviced. Obtain NEW seals for both the primary and secondary modules prior to beginning this service procedure. - There are 2 fuel level sender unit and float assemblies in the fuel tank. There is 1 located on each fuel pump module. The fuel level sender unit and float is NOT the same for each of the fuel pump modules. 2. Remove the fuel pump module. 3. Disconnect the fuel level sender unit and float electrical connector from the underside of the top of the pump module. 4. Release the retaining tabs (1, 2) and remove the level sensor by sliding up. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 6409 1. Install the fuel level sender unit and float onto the fuel pump module. Make sure that the sender cap snaps into place (1, 2). 2. Connect the fuel level sender unit and float electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel pump module into the fuel tank. 4. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 6410 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Secondary FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT - SECONDARY REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: A NEW fuel tank module seal is necessary each time the fuel tank module is serviced. Obtain a NEW seal prior to beginning this service procedure. - There are 2 fuel level sender unit and float assemblies in the fuel tank. There is 1 located on each fuel pump module. The fuel level sender unit and float is NOT the same for each of the fuel pump modules. 2. Remove the fuel pump module. 3. Disconnect the fuel level sender unit and the float electrical connector. 4. Release the retaining tabs and remove the level sensor by sliding up. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 6411 1. Install the fuel level sender unit and float onto the fuel pump module. Make sure that the sender cap snaps into place. 2. Connect the fuel level sender unit and the float electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel pump module into the fuel tank. 4. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6415 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor measures the difference between the pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank and outside air pressure. The control module provides a 5-volt reference and a ground to the FTP sensor. The FTP sensor provides a signal voltage back to the control module that can vary between 0.1-4.9 volts. As FTP increases, FTP sensor voltage decreases, high pressure , = low voltage. As FTP decreases, FTP sensor voltage increases low pressure or vacuum = high voltage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6416 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump module harness electrical connector from the fuel tank pressure sensor. 3. Position 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers, one on each side of the sensor, near the vacuum port. 4. Carefully use the screwdrivers to lift and release the sensor from the fuel pump module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6417 1. Install the fuel tank pressure sensor to the fuel pump module assembly. Ensure that the sensor grommet is fully seated to the pump module. 2. Connect the pump module electrical connector to the fuel tank pressure sensor. 3. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device Information Bus: Testing and Inspection Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device SCAN TOOL DOES NOT COMMUNICATE WITH CLASS 2 DEVICE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Modules connected to the class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. Connecting a scan tool to the data link connector (DLC) allows communication with the modules for diagnostic purposes. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS The following conditions will cause a total loss of class 2 serial data communication: A class 2 serial data circuit shorted to ground. - A class 2 serial data circuit shorted to voltage. - An internal condition within a module or connector on the class 2 serial data circuit, that causes a short to voltage or ground to the class 2 serial data circuit. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device > Page 6422 Step 1 - Step 12 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device > Page 6423 Step 13 - Step 18 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. A partial malfunction in the class 2 serial data circuit uses a different procedure from a total malfunction of the class 2 serial data circuit. The following modules communicate on the class 2 serial data circuit: Body control module (BCM) - Digital radio receiver (DRR) - Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) - Instrument panel cluster (IPC) - Power steering control module (PSCM) - Radio - Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) 3. The following DTCs may be retrieved with a history status, but are not the cause of the present condition. - U1300 - U1301 - U1305 6. A state of health DTC with a history status may be present along with a U1000 or U1255 code having a current status. This indicates that the malfunction occurred when the ignition was ON. 7. Data link connector terminals 2 and 5 provide the connection to the class 2 serial data circuit and the signal ground circuit respectively. 10. A poor connection at DLC terminal of the splice pack - SP200 would cause this condition but will not set a DTC. 11. An open in the class 2 serial data circuit between the DLC and splice pack SP200 will prevent the scan tool from communicating with any module. This condition will not set a DTC. 12. The class 2 serial data circuit is shorted to voltage or ground. The condition may be due to the wiring or due to a malfunction in one of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device > Page 6424 modules. When testing the wire for a short, make sure there is not a module connected to the wire being tested. This test isolates the BCM class 2 serial data circuit. 14. The BCM detects that the ignition is ON and sends the appropriate power mode message to the other modules. Therefore, the BCM must remain connected to the DLC for any other module to communicate with the scan tool. This test isolates the splice pack - SP200 serial data circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device > Page 6425 Information Bus: Testing and Inspection Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device SCAN TOOL DOES NOT COMMUNICATE WITH HIGH SPEED GMLAN DEVICE Modules connected to the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications on the high speed GMLAN network during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module detects a bus-off condition a DTC U0001, U2100 or U2104 will be set. Generally these DTCs can be retrieved as history only, with the exception of body control module (BCM) that can set DTC U2100 as current, because it communicates with the scan tool on class 2. Diagnostic Aids The high speed GMLAN serial data bus uses two 120 ohm terminating resistors that are in parallel with the high speed GMLAN (+) and (-) circuits. One of the resistors is connected at the body control module (BCM) and the other is at the engine control module (ECM). If testing for a short between high speed GMLAN (+) and (-) a reading of 60 ohm is normal. If the high speed GMLAN serial data is open testing the resistance between high speed GMLAN (+) and (-) will read about 120 ohm. The engine will not start when there is a total malfunction of the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits while the engine is not running. The following conditions may cause a total loss of high speed GMLAN data communication: A short between high speed GMLAN (+) and high speed GMLAN (-) circuits - Any of the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits shorted to ground or voltage - A module internal malfunction that causes a short to voltage or ground on the high speed GMLAN circuits - Any of the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits open Test Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device > Page 6426 Step 1 - Step 9 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device > Page 6427 Step 10 - Step 13 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device > Page 6428 Information Bus: Testing and Inspection Scan Tool Does Not Power Up SCAN TOOL DOES NOT POWER UP CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16 cavity connector. Connector design and location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and is required to provide the following: Scan tool power battery positive voltage at terminal 16 - Scan tool power ground at terminal 4 - Common signal ground at terminal 5 The scan tool will power up with the ignition OFF. Some modules however, will not communicate unless the ignition is ON and the power mode master (PMM) module sends the appropriate power mode message. TEST DESCRIPTION Step 1 - Step 4 The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 4. If the battery positive voltage and ground circuits of the DLC are functioning properly, the malfunction must be due to the scan tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6432 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6435 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6436 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6437 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6438 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6439 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6440 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6441 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6442 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6443 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6444 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6445 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6446 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6447 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6448 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6449 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6450 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6451 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6452 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6453 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6454 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6455 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6456 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6457 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6458 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6459 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6460 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6461 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6462 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6463 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6464 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6465 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6466 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6467 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6468 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6469 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6470 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6471 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6472 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6473 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6474 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6475 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6476 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6477 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6478 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6479 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6480 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6481 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6482 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6483 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6484 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6485 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6486 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6487 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6488 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6489 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6490 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6491 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6492 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6493 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6494 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6495 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6496 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6497 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6498 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6499 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6500 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6501 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6502 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6503 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6504 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6505 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6506 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6507 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6508 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) 1 Knock Sensor (KS) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6509 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. The KS system uses one or 2 flat response 2-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6510 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: This engine is equipped with 2 knock sensors. This service procedure applies to both the right and left knock sensors 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the KS bolt. 4. Remove the KS. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply thread locker to the sensor threads. The sensor threads are coated at the factory and applying additional thread locker affects the sensor's ability to detect detonation. 1. Install the KS to engine block. 2. Install the KS bolt. Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the KS electrical connector. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 6514 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 6515 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 6516 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) OPERATION The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located in the instrument panel cluster. The MIL will display as either SERVICE ENGINE SOON or one of the following symbols when commanded ON: The MIL indicates that an emissions related fault has occurred and vehicle service is required. The following is a list of the modes of operation for the MIL: - The MIL illuminates when the ignition is turned ON, with the engine OFF. This is a bulb test to ensure that the MIL is able to illuminate. - The MIL turns OFF after the engine is started if a diagnostic fault is not present. - The MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started if the control module detects a fault. A DTC is stored any time the control module illuminates the MIL due to an emissions related fault. The MIL turns OFF after 3 consecutive ignition cycles in which a Test Passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. - The MIL flashes if the control module detects a misfire condition which could damage the catalytic converter. - When the MIL is illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated as long as the ignition is ON. - When the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition is cycled OFF and then ON. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6523 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6524 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Testing and Inspection MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR DIAGNOSIS DIAGNOSTIC FAULT INFORMATION IMPORTANT: Always perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures MAP Sensor TYPICAL SCAN TOOL DATA CIRCUIT/SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to pressure changes in the intake manifold. The pressure changes occur based on the engine load. The MAP sensor has the following circuits: 5-volt reference circuit - Low reference circuit - MAP sensor signal circuit The control module supplies 5 volts to the MAP sensor on the 5-volt reference circuit. The control module also provides a ground on the low reference circuit. The MAP sensor provides a signal to the control module on the MAP sensor signal circuit which is relative to the pressure changes in the manifold. The control module should detect a low signal voltage at a low MAP, such as during an idle or a deceleration. The control module should detect a high signal voltage at a high MAP, such as the ignition is ON, with the engine OFF, or at a wide open throttle (WOT). The MAP sensor is also used in order to determine the barometric pressure (BARO). This occurs when the ignition switch is turned ON, with the engine OFF. The BARO reading may also be updated whenever the engine is operated at WOT. The control module monitors the MAP sensor signal for voltage outside of the normal range. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Poor idle characteristics may be due to uncontrolled fueling caused by an open or high resistance in the HO2S 1 low signal circuit. Before replacing any component, ensure that this condition does not exist. CIRCUIT/SYSTEM TESTING Always perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. 1. Start the engine. 2. Monitor the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) information with the scan tool. 3. If DTC P0641 or P0651 is also set then correct DTC P0641 or P0651 first. 4. Inspect for the following conditions: - Disconnected, damaged, or incorrectly routed vacuum hoses. - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor disconnected from the vacuum source. - Restrictions in the MAP sensor vacuum source. - Intake manifold vacuum leaks. - Check for a properly functioning oxygen sensor. 5. Turn OFF the ignition. 6. Remove the MAP sensor from the engine vacuum source. Leave the MAP sensor connected to the engine harness. 7. Connect a J 23738-A Mityvac to the MAP sensor. 8. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 9. Observe the MAP sensor pressure with the scan tool. 10. Apply vacuum to the MAP sensor with the J 23738-A in 1 inch Hg increments until 15 inches Hg is reached. Each 1 inch Hg should decrease MAP sensor pressure by 3-4 kPa. Monitor the MAP sensor pressure to see if the decrease in pressure in consistent. If decrease in pressure is not consistent then, test for intermittent and poor connections at the MAP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6525 11. Apply vacuum with the J 23738-A until 20 inches Hg is reached. Observe the MAP sensor pressure for less than 34 kPa. - If more than 34 kPa, test for an intermittent and for a poor connection at the MAP sensor. 12. With the ignition ON, and the engine OFF. 13. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. 14. Measure for 4.8-5.2 volts from the 5-volt reference circuit of the MAP sensor to a good ground, with a DMM. - If more than specified value than test the circuit for a short to voltage or faulty control module. - If less than specified value than test the circuit for high resistance, an open, or an intermittent and poor connection or at the control module, or a faulty control module. 15. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor 16. Use a scan tool and observe the MAP sensor for less than 12 kPa. - If the MAP sensor is more than 12 kPa then test the MAP sensor signal circuit for a short to voltage or a faulty control module. 17. Use a 3-amp fused jumper wire and connect it between the MAP sensor 5-volt reference circuit and the MAP sensor signal circuit. 18. Use a scan tool and observe the MAP sensor for more than 103 kPa. - If the MAP sensor is less than 103 kPa then test the MAP sensor signal circuit for high resistance or a faulty control module. 19. With the 3-amp fused jumper wire still connected between the 5-volt reference circuit of the MAP sensor and the signal circuit of the MAP sensor. Observe the MAP sensor parameter with the scan tool for 4.9V. If more than 4.9V then replace the MAP sensor. - If less than 4.9V then, test the MAP sensor signal circuit between the control module and the MAP sensor for a short to ground, an open, or high resistance. Test for an intermittent and for a poor connection at the control module, if tests OK then replace the control module. 20. Turn OFF the ignition and allow the control module to power down. 21. With a DMM measure for less than 5 ohms of resistance between the low reference circuit of the MAP sensor and a good ground. - If the resistance is more than 5 ohms, then test the circuit for a high resistance or a faulty control module. 22. If the MAP sensor circuits test normal, then replace the MAP sensor. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT: Always perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure. Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Replacement - Control Module References Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6526 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the MAP sensor retaining bolt (3) and bracket (2). 3. Remove the MAP sensor (1) and the MAP sensor port seal if it is still retained in the intake manifold. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the MAP sensor (1) to the intake manifold. 2. Install the MAP sensor retaining bracket (2) and bolt (3). Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the MAP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6532 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6533 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6534 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6535 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6536 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6537 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6538 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6539 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6540 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6541 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6542 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6543 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6544 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6545 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6546 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6547 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6548 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6549 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6550 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6551 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6552 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6553 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6554 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6555 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6556 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6557 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6558 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6559 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6560 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6561 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6562 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6563 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6564 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6565 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6566 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6567 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6568 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6569 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6570 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6571 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6572 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6573 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6574 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6575 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6576 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6577 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6578 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6579 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6580 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6581 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6582 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6583 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6584 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6585 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6586 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6587 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6588 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6589 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6590 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6591 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6592 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6593 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6594 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6595 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6596 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6597 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6598 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6599 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6600 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6601 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6602 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6603 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6604 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6605 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 1 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 1 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR REPLACEMENT - POSITION 1 REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the HO2S 1 harness connector. 2. Remove the HO2S 1 from the exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the threads of the HO2S 2. NOTE: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. Use only a nickel based anti-seize compound that does not contain silicone. 2. Install the HO2S 1 to the exhaust manifold. Tighten the HO2S 1 to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the HO2S 1 harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard and pull back to confirm a positive engagement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 1 > Page 6608 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 2 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR REPLACEMENT - POSITION 2 REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the HO2S 2 harness connector (3). 3. Use a liquid penetrate before removing the sensor. IMPORTANT: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. DO NOT use products containing silicone on or near the HO2S. 4. Remove the HO2S 2 (2) from the exhaust pipe. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the threads of the HO2S 2. NOTE: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. Use only a nickel based anti-seize compound that does not contain silicone. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 1 > Page 6609 2. Install the HO2S 2 (2). Tighten the HO2S 2 to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the HO2S 2 harness connector (3). Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Ensure the HO2S 2 harness pigtail connector is secure to the chassis. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Body Control Module: Customer Interest A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Bulletin No.: 07-01-38-005 Date: July 18, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Poor A/C Performance, A/C Does Not Get Cold Enough After Long Drive Cycle (Recalibrate BCM with Tech 2) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on poor A/C performance or that the A/C does not get cold enough after a long drive. Some of the possible symptoms of this condition are: Blowing warm air Reduced air flow Mist/Vapor coming out of vents Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the evaporator core freezing up. Fix It Right the First Time Tips DO NOT replace the evaporator temperature sensor for this condition unless diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. The sensor can be checked for proper function using the Tech 2(R). Check the sensor for volts varying around 2.3V to 2.6V. This data is within the BCM and is displayed in the accessory list. If the volts are near zero, check for a good connection at the sensor. Also, inspect the harness for possible damage. The sensor is located on the driver's side of the HVAC module and can be accessed from underneath the instrument panel by removing the closeout panel and OnStar(R) module, if equipped. DO NOT replace the thermal expansion valve (TXV) for this condition unless published SI diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. If AC components have been replaced or the refrigerant has been evacuated and recharged and no PAG oil has been added back into the system, it may have a reduced oil level. Please ensure that the vehicle has the proper amount of PAG oil in the system, as low oil level will contribute to the evaporator freezing up. To return to a nominal level of PAG oil, it may be necessary to flush the system. Refer to SI for flushing instructions. Correction The Tech 2(R) must have software version 27.009 or later. Recalibrate the BCM with new software using the Tech 2(R) and following the procedure below. This updated software will control the cycling of the compressor clutch to prevent freezing of the evaporator core. Install the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle and power on. Turn ON the ignition, with engine OFF. Select "Diagnostics." Build the vehicle. Select "Body Control Module". Select "Module Setup". Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough > Page 6619 Then press "BCM Setup" soft key to execute update. When completed command state will change from "None" to "BCM Setup". Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: Customer Interest Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 6624 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 6625 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Bulletin No.: 07-01-38-005 Date: July 18, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Poor A/C Performance, A/C Does Not Get Cold Enough After Long Drive Cycle (Recalibrate BCM with Tech 2) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on poor A/C performance or that the A/C does not get cold enough after a long drive. Some of the possible symptoms of this condition are: Blowing warm air Reduced air flow Mist/Vapor coming out of vents Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the evaporator core freezing up. Fix It Right the First Time Tips DO NOT replace the evaporator temperature sensor for this condition unless diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. The sensor can be checked for proper function using the Tech 2(R). Check the sensor for volts varying around 2.3V to 2.6V. This data is within the BCM and is displayed in the accessory list. If the volts are near zero, check for a good connection at the sensor. Also, inspect the harness for possible damage. The sensor is located on the driver's side of the HVAC module and can be accessed from underneath the instrument panel by removing the closeout panel and OnStar(R) module, if equipped. DO NOT replace the thermal expansion valve (TXV) for this condition unless published SI diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. If AC components have been replaced or the refrigerant has been evacuated and recharged and no PAG oil has been added back into the system, it may have a reduced oil level. Please ensure that the vehicle has the proper amount of PAG oil in the system, as low oil level will contribute to the evaporator freezing up. To return to a nominal level of PAG oil, it may be necessary to flush the system. Refer to SI for flushing instructions. Correction The Tech 2(R) must have software version 27.009 or later. Recalibrate the BCM with new software using the Tech 2(R) and following the procedure below. This updated software will control the cycling of the compressor clutch to prevent freezing of the evaporator core. Install the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle and power on. Turn ON the ignition, with engine OFF. Select "Diagnostics." Build the vehicle. Select "Body Control Module". Select "Module Setup". Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough > Page 6631 Then press "BCM Setup" soft key to execute update. When completed command state will change from "None" to "BCM Setup". Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 6636 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 6637 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6638 Center Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6641 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6642 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6643 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6644 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6645 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6646 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6647 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6648 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6649 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6650 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6651 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6652 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6653 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6654 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6655 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6656 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6657 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6658 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6659 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6660 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6661 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6662 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6663 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6664 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6665 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6666 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6667 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6668 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6669 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6670 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6671 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6672 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6673 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6674 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6675 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6676 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6677 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6678 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6679 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6680 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6681 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6682 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6683 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6684 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6685 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6686 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6687 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6688 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6689 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6690 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6691 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6692 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6693 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6694 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6695 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6696 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6697 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6698 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6699 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6700 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6701 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6702 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6703 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6704 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6705 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6706 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6707 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6708 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6709 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6710 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6711 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6712 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6713 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6714 Body Control Module: Connector Views Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6715 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6716 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6717 Body Control Module (BCM) C4 Splice Pack SP200 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System Body Control Module: Description and Operation Body Control System BODY CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION BCM OVERVIEW The main features of the body control module (BCM) are: The BCM is the gateway between class 2 serial data circuit and high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. - The BCM controls multiple functions. - The BCM is the power mode master. GATEWAY The body control module (BCM) communicates functionally on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data buses. The BCM is the gateway between the buses and transfers serial data messages from one subnet to another. Physical communication of the BCM with the scan tool is through class 2 serial data circuit. BCM FUNCTIONS The body control module (BCM) performs multiple body control functions. The BCM can control devices directly connected to its outputs based on input information. The BCM evaluates this information and controls certain body control systems by commanding outputs on or off. The BCM inputs can be: Sensors and switches that are directly connected to the BCM - Class 2 serial data messages received from other vehicle systems connected to the class 2 serial data link - GMLAN serial data messages received from other vehicles systems connected to the high speed GMLAN serial data link The BCM is also capable of controlling other vehicle systems that are not directly wired to the BCM. The BCM does this by sending specific messages on the class 2 serial data link or high speed GMLAN serial data link. The system capable of performing the required function will respond to the BCM messages. Some of the other system functions that BCM controls or contributes to are: Audible warnings-Refer to Audible Warnings Description and Operation in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. - Exterior lighting control-Refer to Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Interior lighting-Refer to Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Automatic door locks-Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors. - Keyless entry-Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry. - Theft deterrent-Refer to Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent. - Wipers/washers-Refer to Wiper/Washer System Description and Operation in Wipers/Washer Systems. - Rear defogger-Refer to Rear Window Defogger Description and Operation in Heated Glass Element. - Horn-Refer to Horns System Description and Operation in Horns. POWER MODE The BCM is the power mode master (PMM). Refer to Power Mode Description and Operation for more information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 6720 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Power Mode POWER MODE DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SERIAL DATA POWER MODE On vehicles that have several control modules connected by serial data circuits, one module is the power mode master (PMM). On this vehicle the PMM is the body control module (BCM). The BCM monitors Ignition 1 (Run/Crank), Ignition 2 (Acc/Run), and Ignition 3 (Run) signals from the ignition switch, and the engine run flag (ERF) message from the engine control module (ECM) in order to determine the present power mode. To determine the correct power mode the BCM uses: The state of these signals - The sequence of switch closures received by the BCM - The status of the engine run flag Correct Ignition Switch Inputs The chart indicates the power modes detected and transmitted by the BCM. The power mode message is a periodic with event message type and is transmitted by the PMM at every 2 seconds on class 2 link and at every 250 ms on high speed GMLAN link. The power modes are identical transmitted on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data circuits with the exception of retained accessory power (RAP). RAP is transmitted only on class 2 and it is mapped on high speed GMLAN as Off Awake. FAIL-SAFE OPERATION Since the operation of the vehicle systems depends on the power mode, there is a fail-safe plan in place should the body control module (BCM) fail to send a power mode message. The fail-safe plan covers modules with discrete ignition signal inputs as well as those modules using exclusively serial data control of power mode. SERIAL DATA MESSAGE The modules that depend exclusively on serial data messages for power modes stay in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message until they receive the engine status from the powertrain control module (PCM). If the BCM fails, the modules monitor the serial data circuit for the engine run flag serial data. If the engine run flag serial data is true, indicating that the engine is running, the modules fail-safe to Run. In this state the modules and their subsystems can support all operator requirements. If the engine run flag serial data is false, indicating that the engine is not running, the modules fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. DISCRETE IGNITION SIGNALS Those modules that have discrete ignition signal inputs also remain in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message received on the serial data circuits. They then check the state of their discrete ignition input to determine the current valid state. If the discrete ignition input is active, B+, the modules will fail-safe to the RUN power mode. If the discrete ignition input is not active, open or 0 voltage, the modules will fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 6721 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Retained Accessory Power (RAP) RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SERIAL DATA CONTROL OF RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) Retained accessory power (RAP) is a vehicle power mode that permits the operation of selected customer convenience items after the ignition switch is turned OFF. These selected items will remain in operation until a passenger compartment door or liftgate is opened or until the RAP function timer reaches its shut-off limit. The class 2 RAP power mode is mapped to GMLAN serial data circuit as Off Awake power mode. Refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation for more information on data link communications. The BCM monitors the ignition switch signals, battery condition and the doors status to determine whether RAP should be initiated. The modules that support the RAP power mode will operate the systems under their control as required by their RAP power mode strategy. RAP will end when one of the following conditions is met: The BCM detects the opening of a passenger compartment door. - The RAP timer expires. - The battery capacity decreases below a prescribed limit. - Any other ignition switch state is chosen. The function supported in the RAP power mode is the operation of the radio. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Body Control Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT Begin the system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. The Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will provide the following information: - The identification of the control modules which are not communicating. - The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures The use of the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will identify the correct procedures to begin vehicle diagnosis. These must be performed before system DTC or symptom diagnosis. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6724 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures A Symptoms - Computer/Integrating Systems SYMPTOMS IMPORTANT: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: - There are no DTCs set. - The control modules can communicate via the serial data links. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to: - Data Link Communications Description and Operation - Body Control System Description and Operation - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation Visual/Physical Inspection Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. - Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: - Scan Tool Does Not Power Up See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Does Not Power Up - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device - Power Mode Mismatch See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Power Mode Mismatch - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After TimeOut See: Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Time-Out - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative See: Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6725 Step 1 - Step 6 Step 1 - Step 6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6726 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BODY CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Rotate the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the radio bezel. 3. Disconnect the body control module (BCM) electrical harnesses. 4. Remove the BCM from the instrument panel (I/P) retainer: 1. Pry the BCM tabs from the locking tabs on the underside of the restraint. 2. Slide the BCM out of the retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the BCM. 2. Install the radio bezel. 3. Slide the BCM tabs into the slots in the I/P retainer until the tabs lock into place. 4. Connect the electrical connectors. 5. Program a new or a remanufactured BCM. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6730 Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6731 Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MODULE The throttle actuator control (TAC) module is the control center for the TAC system. The TAC system uses electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) and is self-diagnosing. The TAC module provides diagnostic information to the powertrain control module (PCM) through a dedicated serial data line. The TAC achieves throttle positioning by providing a pulse width modulated (PWM) voltage to the TAC motor as directed by the PCM. The TAC module is not serviced and should be replaced with the throttle body assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 6736 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 6737 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 6738 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 6739 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 6740 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 6741 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6742 LF Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6745 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6746 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6747 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6748 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6749 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6750 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6751 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6752 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6753 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6754 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6755 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6756 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6757 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6758 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6759 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6760 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6761 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6762 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6763 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6764 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6765 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6766 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6767 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6768 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6769 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6770 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6771 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6772 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6773 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6774 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6775 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6776 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6777 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6778 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6779 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6780 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6781 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6782 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6783 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6784 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6785 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6786 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6787 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6788 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6789 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6790 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6791 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6792 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6793 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6794 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6795 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6796 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6797 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6798 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6799 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6800 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6801 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6802 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6803 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6804 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6805 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6806 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6807 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6808 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6809 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6810 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6811 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6812 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6813 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6814 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6815 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6816 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6817 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6818 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C1 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6819 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C1 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6820 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6821 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6822 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DESCRIPTION The powertrain control module (PCM) interacts with many emission related components and systems, and monitors emission related components and systems for deterioration. OBD II diagnostics monitor the system performance and a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets if the system performance degrades. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) operation and the DTC storage are dictated by the DTC type. A DTC is ranked as a Type A or Type B if the DTC is emissions related. Type C is a non-emissions related DTC. The PCM is in the engine compartment. The PCM is the control center of the Computers and Control system. The PCM controls the following components: - The fuel injection system - The ignition system - The emission control systems - The on-board diagnostics - The A/C and fan systems The PCM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect the vehicle performance and the emissions. The PCM also performs diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The PCM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the MIL. When the PCM detects a malfunction, it stores a DTC. The condition is identified by the particular DTC that is set. This aids the technician in making repairs. PCM Function The powertrain control module (PCM) can supply 5 volts or 12 volts to the various sensors or switches. This is done through pull-up resistors to the regulated power supplies within the control module. In some cases, even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give an accurate reading because the resistance is too low. Therefore, a DMM with at least 10 megaohms input impedance is required in order to ensure accurate voltage readings. The PCM controls the output circuits by controlling the ground or the power feed circuit through the transistors or a device called an output driver module. EEPROM The electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory that is physically part of the control module. The EEPROM contains program and calibration information that the powertrain control module (PCM) needs in order to control the powertrain operation. Special equipment, as well as the correct program and calibration for the vehicle, are required in order to reprogram the control module. Data Link Connector (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a 16-pin connector that provides the technician a means of accessing communication data for aid in the diagnosis. This connector allows the technician to use a scan tool in order to monitor the various parameters, and display the DTC information. The DLC is located inside of the drivers compartment, underneath the dash. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Operation The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located in the instrument panel cluster. The MIL will display as either SERVICE ENGINE SOON or one of the following symbols when commanded ON: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 6825 The MIL indicates that an emissions related fault has occurred and vehicle service is required. The following is a list of the modes of operation for the MIL: The MIL illuminates when the ignition is turned ON, with the engine OFF. This is a bulb test to ensure that the MIL is able to illuminate. - The MIL turns OFF after the engine is started if a diagnostic fault is not present. - The MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started if the control module detects a fault. A DTC is stored any time the control module illuminates the MIL due to an emissions related fault. The MIL turns OFF after 3 consecutive ignition cycles in which a Test Passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. - The MIL flashes if the control module detects a misfire condition which could damage the catalytic converter. - When the MIL is illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated as long as the ignition is ON. - When the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition is cycled OFF and then ON. PCM Service Precautions The powertrain control module (PCM), by design, can withstand the normal current draws that are associated with the vehicle operations. However, care must be used in order to avoid overloading any of these circuits. When testing for opens or shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the PCM circuits unless the diagnostic procedure instructs you to do so. These circuits should only be tested with a DMM. Emissions Diagnosis For State I/M Programs This OBD II equipped vehicle is designed to diagnose any conditions that could lead to excessive levels of the following emissions: Hydrocarbons (HC) - Carbon monoxide (CO) - Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) - Evaporative emission (EVAP) system losses Should this vehicles on-board diagnostic system, powertrain control module (PCM), detect a condition that could result in excessive emissions, the PCM turns ON the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and stores a DTC that is associated with the condition. Aftermarket (Add-On) Electrical And Vacuum Equipment NOTE: Do not attach add-on vacuum operated equipment to this vehicle. The use of add-on vacuum equipment may result in damage to vehicle components or systems. - Connect any add-on electrically operated equipment to the vehicle's electrical system at the battery (power and ground) in order to prevent damage to the vehicle. Aftermarket, add-on, electrical and vacuum equipment is defined as any equipment installed on a vehicle after leaving the factory that connects to the vehicles electrical or vacuum systems. No allowances have been made in the vehicle design for this type of equipment. Add-on electrical equipment, even when installed to these strict guidelines, may still cause the powertrain system to malfunction. This may also include equipment not connected to the vehicle electrical system, such as portable telephones and radios. Therefore, the first step in diagnosing any powertrain condition is to eliminate all of the aftermarket electrical equipment from the vehicle. After this is done, if the problem still exists, the problem may be diagnosed in the normal manner. Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage IMPORTANT: In order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage to the control module, DO NOT touch the connector pins on the control module. The electronic components that are used in the control systems are often designed to carry very low voltage. The electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 volts of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. By comparison, it takes as much as 4,000 volts for a person to even feel the effect of a static discharge. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a car seat. Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, therefore, it is Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 6826 important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. Emissions Control Information Label The underhood Vehicle Emissions Control Information Label contains important emission specifications and setting procedures. In the upper left corner is the exhaust emission information. This identifies the year, the manufacturing division of the engine, the displacement of the engine in liters, the class of the vehicle, and type of fuel metering system. There is also an illustrated emission components and vacuum hose schematic. This label is located in the engine compartment of every General Motors vehicle. If the label has been removed, it can be ordered from GM service parts operations (GMSPO). Underhood Inspection IMPORTANT: This inspection is very important and must be done carefully and thoroughly. Perform a careful underhood inspection when performing any diagnostic procedure or diagnosing the cause of an emission test failure. This can often lead to repairing a condition without further steps. Use the following guidelines when performing an inspection: Inspect all of the vacuum hoses for correct routing, pinches, cuts, or disconnects. - Inspect any hoses that are difficult to see. - Inspect all of the wires in the engine compartment for the following conditions: Burned or chafed spots - Pinched wires - Contact with sharp edges - Contact with hot exhaust manifolds Basic Knowledge Required NOTE: Lack of basic knowledge of this powertrain when performing diagnostic procedures could result in incorrect diagnostic performance or damage to powertrain components. Do not attempt to diagnose a powertrain problem without this basic knowledge. A basic understanding of hand tools is necessary in order to effectively use this section of the service data. You must be familiar with some of the basics of engine operation and electrical diagnosis in order to use this section of the service data. Basic electrical circuits-You should have an understanding of basic electricity and know the meaning of voltage volts), current (amps), and resistance ohms). You should understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire, and you should be able to identify a shorted or open circuit by using a DMM. You should be able to read and understand a wiring diagram. - Use of digital multimeter-You should be familiar with the DMM, particularly the essential tool. You should be able to use the meter in order to measure the voltage volts), the resistance ohms), the current (amps), intermittents (min/max), and frequency (Hertz). - Use of circuit testing tools-You should not use a test lamp to diagnose the Computers and Control system unless you are specifically instructed to do so. You should know how to the use jumper wires in order to test the components and allow the DMM readings without damaging the terminals. You should know how to use the J 35616 connector test adapter kit and use the kit whenever the diagnostic procedures call for front probing any connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 6827 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE The powertrain control module (PCM) determines the drivers intent and then calculates the appropriate throttle response. This information is sent to the throttle actuator control (TAC) module through a dedicated serial data line. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 6828 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Electronic Ignition (EI) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The powertrain control module (PCM) controls all ignition system functions, and constantly corrects the basic spark timing. The PCM monitors information from various sensor inputs that include the following: - The throttle position (TP) sensor - The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor - The mass air flow (MAF) sensor - The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor - The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) - The transmission gear position or range information sensors - The engine knock sensor (KS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6829 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a scan tool, retrieve the percentage of remaining engine oil and the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. Record the remaining engine oil and the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. IMPORTANT: It is necessary to record the remaining engine oil life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil life will default to 100%. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil will need to be changed at 5000 km (3,000 mi) from the last engine oil change. - It is necessary to record the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining automatic transmission fluid life, the automatic transmission fluid life will default to 100%. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining automatic transmission fluid life, the automatic transmission fluid will need to be changed at 83000 km (50,000 mi) from the last automatic transmission fluid change. 2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) (1) and PCM bracket (2) from the battery box cover. 3. Remove the PCM bracket (2) from the PCM (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6830 4. Disconnect the PCM wire harness (4) from the battery box cover. 5. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 6. Remove the PCM connectors (2) from the PCM (3). 7. Remove the PCM (3) from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the PCM (3) to the vehicle. 2. Install the PCM connectors (2) to the PCM (3). 3. Connect the negative battery cable. 4. Connect the PCM wire harness (4) to the battery box cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6831 5. Install the PCM bracket (2) to the PCM (1). 6. Install the PCM bracket (1) to the battery box cover. 7. Reprogram the PCM. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 6835 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 6836 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 6837 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Under The Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6842 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6843 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The accelerator pedal contains 2 individual accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors within the assembly. The APP sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits: - A 5-volt reference circuit - A low reference circuit - A signal circuit The APP sensors are used to determine the pedal angle. The powertrain control module (PCM) provides each APP sensor with a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensors provide the PCM with signal voltage proportional to the pedal movement. Both APP sensor signal voltages are low at rest position and increase as the pedal is applied. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6844 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR PEDAL WITH POSITION SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor connector. 3. Disconnect the APP sensor harness connector. 4. Remove the APP assembly attachment bolts. IMPORTANT: Due to clearance issues, the upper attachment bolt cannot be removed from the accelerator pedal assembly. Loose then bolt completely and leave the bolt in the component until the assembly is removed from the vehicle. 5. Remove the APP assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6845 1. Install the upper attachment bolt into the APP assembly. 2. Install the APP assembly into the vehicle. 3. Install the remaining attachment bolts into the APP assembly. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the APP sensor harness connector. Push the connector in until the lock position is felt, then pull back to confirm engagement. 5. Install the CPA to the APP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6851 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6852 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6853 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6854 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6855 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6856 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6857 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6858 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6859 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6860 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6861 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6862 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6863 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6864 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6865 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6866 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6867 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6868 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6869 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6870 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6871 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6872 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6873 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6874 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6875 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6876 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6877 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6878 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6879 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6880 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6881 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6882 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6883 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6884 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6885 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6886 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6887 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6888 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6889 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6890 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6891 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6892 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6893 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6894 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6895 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6896 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6897 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6898 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6899 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6900 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6901 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6902 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6903 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6904 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6905 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6906 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6907 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6908 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6909 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6910 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6911 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6912 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6913 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6914 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6915 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6916 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6917 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6918 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6919 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6920 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6921 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6922 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6923 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6924 Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6925 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the MAF from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the MAF to air cleaner assembly seal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6926 1. Install the seal to the MAF. 2. Install the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 3. Install the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. Tighten the screws to 4 N.m (35 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6932 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6933 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6934 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6935 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6936 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6937 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6938 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6939 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6940 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6941 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6942 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6943 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6944 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6945 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6946 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6947 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6948 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6949 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6950 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6951 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6952 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6953 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6954 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6955 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6956 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6957 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6958 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6959 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6960 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6961 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6962 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6963 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6964 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6965 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6966 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6967 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6968 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6969 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6970 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6971 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6972 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6973 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6974 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6975 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6976 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6977 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6978 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6979 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6980 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6981 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6982 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6983 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6984 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6985 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6986 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6987 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6988 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6989 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6990 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6991 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6992 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6993 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6994 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6995 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6996 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6997 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6998 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6999 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7000 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7001 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7002 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7003 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7004 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7005 Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7006 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor does not directly affect the operation of the ignition system. The CMP sensor information is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to determine the position of the valve train relative to the crankshaft position. By monitoring the CMP and crankshaft position (CKP) signals, the PCM can accurately time the operation of the fuel injectors. The PCM supplies the sensor with a 12-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7007 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt. 3. Remove the CMP sensor. 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-rings for wear, cracks, or leakage if the sensor is being reused. Replace the O-rings if damaged. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the CMP sensor O-rings with clean engine oil. 2. Install the CMP sensor. 3. Install the CMP sensor bolt. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7011 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7012 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Engine coolant must be drained below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill) in Cooling System. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply thread sealant GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent, to sensor threads. IMPORTANT: Tap out sensor mounting hole in engine head to remove any thread sealant residue. Clean any sealant residue from old sensor and apply RTV sealant to threads if old sensor is going to be reused. 2. Install the ECT sensor. Tighten the engine coolant temperature sensor to 23 N.m (17 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7013 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Fill engine coolant to proper level. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill) in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7019 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7020 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7021 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7022 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7023 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7024 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7025 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7026 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7027 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7028 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7029 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7030 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7031 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7032 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7033 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7034 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7035 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7036 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7037 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7038 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7039 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7040 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7041 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7042 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7043 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7044 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7045 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7046 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7047 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7048 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7049 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7050 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7051 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7052 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7053 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7054 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7055 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7056 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7057 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7058 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7059 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7060 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7061 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7062 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7063 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7064 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7065 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7066 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7067 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7068 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7069 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7070 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7071 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7072 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7073 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7074 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7075 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7076 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7077 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7078 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7079 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7080 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7081 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7082 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7083 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7084 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7085 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7086 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7087 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7088 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7089 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7090 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7091 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7092 Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7093 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a 3-wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses 2 magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets, the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The CKP sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 24 times per crankshaft revolution. The pulse width encoding pattern is used to synchronize the coil firing sequence with the crankshaft position. The CKP sensor is used for ignition timing, fuel injector timing, misfire diagnostics, and tachometer display. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a 12-volt reference, a low reference, and a medium resolution engine speed signal circuit to the CKP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CKP sensor nut (2). 4. Remove the CKP sensor (1) from the engine. 5. Inspect for wear, cracks, or leakage if the CKP sensor is being reused. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil. Replace the O-rings if damaged. 2. Install the CKP sensor (1) to the block. 3. Install the CKP sensor nut (1). Tighten the nut to 11 N.m (97 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 7096 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 7097 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: - The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. - The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A powertrain control module (PCM) replacement - A crankshaft balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the PCM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC. 3. With a scan tool, select the CKP variation learn procedure and perform the following: 1. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 2. Block drive wheels. 3. Set parking brake. 4. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 5. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 6. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 7. Start and idle engine. 8. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 9. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 10. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). IMPORTANT: The engine should not accelerate beyond the calibrated fuel cut-off RPM value noted in step 3.1. Release the throttle immediately if the value is exceeded. - While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 4. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC. 5. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully in order to store the CKP system variation values in the PCM memory. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7101 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR The fuel level sensor consists of a float, a wire float arm, and a ceramic resistor card. The position of the float arm indicates the fuel level. The fuel level sensor contains a variable resistor which changes resistance in correspondence with the position of the float arm. The control module sends the fuel level information via the CAN serial data to the body control module (BCM). The instrument panel cluster (IPC) displays the fuel level as determined by the BCM. This information is used for the IPC fuel gage and the low fuel warning indicator, if applicable. The control module also monitors the fuel level input for various diagnostics. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT - PRIMARY REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: NEW fuel tank module seals are necessary each time the fuel tank module is serviced. Obtain NEW seals for both the primary and secondary modules prior to beginning this service procedure. - There are 2 fuel level sender unit and float assemblies in the fuel tank. There is 1 located on each fuel pump module. The fuel level sender unit and float is NOT the same for each of the fuel pump modules. 2. Remove the fuel pump module. 3. Disconnect the fuel level sender unit and float electrical connector from the underside of the top of the pump module. 4. Release the retaining tabs (1, 2) and remove the level sensor by sliding up. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 7104 1. Install the fuel level sender unit and float onto the fuel pump module. Make sure that the sender cap snaps into place (1, 2). 2. Connect the fuel level sender unit and float electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel pump module into the fuel tank. 4. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 7105 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Secondary FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT - SECONDARY REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: A NEW fuel tank module seal is necessary each time the fuel tank module is serviced. Obtain a NEW seal prior to beginning this service procedure. - There are 2 fuel level sender unit and float assemblies in the fuel tank. There is 1 located on each fuel pump module. The fuel level sender unit and float is NOT the same for each of the fuel pump modules. 2. Remove the fuel pump module. 3. Disconnect the fuel level sender unit and the float electrical connector. 4. Release the retaining tabs and remove the level sensor by sliding up. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 7106 1. Install the fuel level sender unit and float onto the fuel pump module. Make sure that the sender cap snaps into place. 2. Connect the fuel level sender unit and the float electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel pump module into the fuel tank. 4. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7110 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor measures the difference between the pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank and outside air pressure. The control module provides a 5-volt reference and a ground to the FTP sensor. The FTP sensor provides a signal voltage back to the control module that can vary between 0.1-4.9 volts. As FTP increases, FTP sensor voltage decreases, high pressure , = low voltage. As FTP decreases, FTP sensor voltage increases low pressure or vacuum = high voltage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7111 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump module harness electrical connector from the fuel tank pressure sensor. 3. Position 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers, one on each side of the sensor, near the vacuum port. 4. Carefully use the screwdrivers to lift and release the sensor from the fuel pump module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7112 1. Install the fuel tank pressure sensor to the fuel pump module assembly. Ensure that the sensor grommet is fully seated to the pump module. 2. Connect the pump module electrical connector to the fuel tank pressure sensor. 3. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7116 Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7120 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7123 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7124 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7125 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7126 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7127 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7128 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7129 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7130 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7131 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7132 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7133 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7134 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7135 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7136 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7137 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7138 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7139 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7140 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7141 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7142 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7143 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7144 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7145 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7146 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7147 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7148 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7149 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7150 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7151 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7152 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7153 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7154 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7155 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7156 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7157 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7158 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7159 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7160 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7161 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7162 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7163 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7164 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7165 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7166 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7167 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7168 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7169 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7170 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7171 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7172 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7173 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7174 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7175 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7176 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7177 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7178 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7179 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7180 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7181 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7182 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7183 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7184 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7185 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7186 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7187 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7188 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7189 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7190 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7191 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7192 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7193 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7194 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7195 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7196 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) 1 Knock Sensor (KS) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7197 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. The KS system uses one or 2 flat response 2-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7198 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: This engine is equipped with 2 knock sensors. This service procedure applies to both the right and left knock sensors 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the KS bolt. 4. Remove the KS. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply thread locker to the sensor threads. The sensor threads are coated at the factory and applying additional thread locker affects the sensor's ability to detect detonation. 1. Install the KS to engine block. 2. Install the KS bolt. Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the KS electrical connector. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7202 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7203 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Testing and Inspection MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR DIAGNOSIS DIAGNOSTIC FAULT INFORMATION IMPORTANT: Always perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures MAP Sensor TYPICAL SCAN TOOL DATA CIRCUIT/SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to pressure changes in the intake manifold. The pressure changes occur based on the engine load. The MAP sensor has the following circuits: 5-volt reference circuit - Low reference circuit - MAP sensor signal circuit The control module supplies 5 volts to the MAP sensor on the 5-volt reference circuit. The control module also provides a ground on the low reference circuit. The MAP sensor provides a signal to the control module on the MAP sensor signal circuit which is relative to the pressure changes in the manifold. The control module should detect a low signal voltage at a low MAP, such as during an idle or a deceleration. The control module should detect a high signal voltage at a high MAP, such as the ignition is ON, with the engine OFF, or at a wide open throttle (WOT). The MAP sensor is also used in order to determine the barometric pressure (BARO). This occurs when the ignition switch is turned ON, with the engine OFF. The BARO reading may also be updated whenever the engine is operated at WOT. The control module monitors the MAP sensor signal for voltage outside of the normal range. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Poor idle characteristics may be due to uncontrolled fueling caused by an open or high resistance in the HO2S 1 low signal circuit. Before replacing any component, ensure that this condition does not exist. CIRCUIT/SYSTEM TESTING Always perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. 1. Start the engine. 2. Monitor the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) information with the scan tool. 3. If DTC P0641 or P0651 is also set then correct DTC P0641 or P0651 first. 4. Inspect for the following conditions: - Disconnected, damaged, or incorrectly routed vacuum hoses. - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor disconnected from the vacuum source. - Restrictions in the MAP sensor vacuum source. - Intake manifold vacuum leaks. - Check for a properly functioning oxygen sensor. 5. Turn OFF the ignition. 6. Remove the MAP sensor from the engine vacuum source. Leave the MAP sensor connected to the engine harness. 7. Connect a J 23738-A Mityvac to the MAP sensor. 8. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 9. Observe the MAP sensor pressure with the scan tool. 10. Apply vacuum to the MAP sensor with the J 23738-A in 1 inch Hg increments until 15 inches Hg is reached. Each 1 inch Hg should decrease MAP sensor pressure by 3-4 kPa. Monitor the MAP sensor pressure to see if the decrease in pressure in consistent. If decrease in pressure is not consistent then, test for intermittent and poor connections at the MAP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7204 11. Apply vacuum with the J 23738-A until 20 inches Hg is reached. Observe the MAP sensor pressure for less than 34 kPa. - If more than 34 kPa, test for an intermittent and for a poor connection at the MAP sensor. 12. With the ignition ON, and the engine OFF. 13. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. 14. Measure for 4.8-5.2 volts from the 5-volt reference circuit of the MAP sensor to a good ground, with a DMM. - If more than specified value than test the circuit for a short to voltage or faulty control module. - If less than specified value than test the circuit for high resistance, an open, or an intermittent and poor connection or at the control module, or a faulty control module. 15. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor 16. Use a scan tool and observe the MAP sensor for less than 12 kPa. - If the MAP sensor is more than 12 kPa then test the MAP sensor signal circuit for a short to voltage or a faulty control module. 17. Use a 3-amp fused jumper wire and connect it between the MAP sensor 5-volt reference circuit and the MAP sensor signal circuit. 18. Use a scan tool and observe the MAP sensor for more than 103 kPa. - If the MAP sensor is less than 103 kPa then test the MAP sensor signal circuit for high resistance or a faulty control module. 19. With the 3-amp fused jumper wire still connected between the 5-volt reference circuit of the MAP sensor and the signal circuit of the MAP sensor. Observe the MAP sensor parameter with the scan tool for 4.9V. If more than 4.9V then replace the MAP sensor. - If less than 4.9V then, test the MAP sensor signal circuit between the control module and the MAP sensor for a short to ground, an open, or high resistance. Test for an intermittent and for a poor connection at the control module, if tests OK then replace the control module. 20. Turn OFF the ignition and allow the control module to power down. 21. With a DMM measure for less than 5 ohms of resistance between the low reference circuit of the MAP sensor and a good ground. - If the resistance is more than 5 ohms, then test the circuit for a high resistance or a faulty control module. 22. If the MAP sensor circuits test normal, then replace the MAP sensor. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT: Always perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure. Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Replacement - Control Module References Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7205 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the MAP sensor retaining bolt (3) and bracket (2). 3. Remove the MAP sensor (1) and the MAP sensor port seal if it is still retained in the intake manifold. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the MAP sensor (1) to the intake manifold. 2. Install the MAP sensor retaining bracket (2) and bolt (3). Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the MAP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7211 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7212 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7213 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7214 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7215 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7216 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7217 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7218 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7219 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7220 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7221 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7222 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7223 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7224 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7225 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7226 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7227 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7228 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7229 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7230 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7231 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7232 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7233 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7234 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7235 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7236 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7237 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7238 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7239 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7240 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7241 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7242 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7243 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7244 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7245 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7246 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7247 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7248 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7249 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7250 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7251 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7252 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7253 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7254 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7255 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7256 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7257 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7258 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7259 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7260 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7261 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7262 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7263 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7264 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7265 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7266 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7267 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7268 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7269 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7270 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7271 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7272 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7273 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7274 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7275 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7276 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7277 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7278 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7279 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7280 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7281 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7282 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7283 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7284 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 1 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 1 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR REPLACEMENT - POSITION 1 REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the HO2S 1 harness connector. 2. Remove the HO2S 1 from the exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the threads of the HO2S 2. NOTE: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. Use only a nickel based anti-seize compound that does not contain silicone. 2. Install the HO2S 1 to the exhaust manifold. Tighten the HO2S 1 to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the HO2S 1 harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard and pull back to confirm a positive engagement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 1 > Page 7287 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 2 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR REPLACEMENT - POSITION 2 REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the HO2S 2 harness connector (3). 3. Use a liquid penetrate before removing the sensor. IMPORTANT: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. DO NOT use products containing silicone on or near the HO2S. 4. Remove the HO2S 2 (2) from the exhaust pipe. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the threads of the HO2S 2. NOTE: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. Use only a nickel based anti-seize compound that does not contain silicone. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Position 1 > Page 7288 2. Install the HO2S 2 (2). Tighten the HO2S 2 to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the HO2S 2 harness connector (3). Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Ensure the HO2S 2 harness pigtail connector is secure to the chassis. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7293 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7294 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7295 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7296 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7297 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7299 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7300 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7301 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7302 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7303 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7304 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7305 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7306 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7307 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7308 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7309 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7310 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7311 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7312 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7313 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7314 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7315 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7316 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7317 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7318 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7319 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7320 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7321 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7322 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7323 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7324 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7325 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7326 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7327 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7328 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7329 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7330 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7331 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7332 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7333 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7334 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7335 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7336 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7337 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7338 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7339 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7340 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7341 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7342 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7343 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7344 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7345 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7346 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7347 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7348 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7349 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7350 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7351 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7352 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7353 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7354 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7355 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7356 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7357 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7358 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7359 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7360 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7361 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7362 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7363 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7364 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7365 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7369 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7370 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7371 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required - J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 7374 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 7375 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 7376 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 7377 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 7378 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7383 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7384 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7385 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7386 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7387 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7388 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7389 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7390 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7391 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7392 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7393 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7394 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7395 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7396 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7397 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7398 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7399 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7400 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7401 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7402 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7403 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7404 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7405 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7406 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7407 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7408 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7409 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7410 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7411 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7412 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7413 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7414 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7415 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7416 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7417 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7418 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7419 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7420 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7421 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7422 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7423 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7424 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7425 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7426 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7427 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7428 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7429 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7430 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7431 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7432 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7433 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7434 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7435 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7436 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7437 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7438 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7439 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7440 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7441 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7442 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7443 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7444 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7445 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7446 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7447 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7448 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7449 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7450 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7451 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7452 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7453 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7454 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7455 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7459 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7460 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7461 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required - J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 7464 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 7465 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 7466 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 7467 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 7468 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Precautions Catalytic Converter: Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Precautions Bulletin No.: 06-06-01-010A Date: February 04, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Close-Coupled Converter and Engine Breakdown or Non-Function Due to Severe Overheat or Lack of Oil Causing Piston(s) Connecting Rod(s) Crankshaft Cylinder(s) and/or Head(s) Camshaft(s) Intake and/or Exhaust Valve(s) Main and/or Rod Bearing(s) Damage Models: 2004-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks with Close-Coupled Catalytic Converters Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-06-01-010 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Certain 2004-2008 General Motors products may be equipped with a new style of catalytic converter technically known as the close-coupled catalytic converter providing quick catalyst warm-up resulting in lower tail pipe emissions earlier in the vehicle operating cycle. If an engine breakdown or non-function were to occur (such as broken intake/exhaust valve or piston) debris may be deposited in the converter through engine exhaust ports. If the engine is non-functioning due to a severe overheat event damage to the ceramic "brick" internal to the catalytic converter may occur. This may result in ceramic debris being drawn into the engine through the cylinder head exhaust ports. If a replacement engine is installed in either of these instances the replacement engine may fail due to the debris being introduced into the combustion chambers when started. When replacing an engine for a breakdown or non-function an inspection of the catalytic converters and ALL transferred components (such as exhaust/ intake manifolds) should be performed. Any debris found should be removed. In cases of engine failure due to severe overheat dealers should also inspect each catalytic converter for signs of melting or cracking of the ceramic "brick". If damage is observed the converter should be replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7478 Canister Purge Solenoid: Description and Operation EVAP PURGE VALVE The EVAP purge valve controls the flow of vapors from the EVAP system to the intake manifold. This normally closed valve is pulse width modulated (PWM) by the control module to precisely control the flow of fuel vapor to the engine. The valve will also be opened during some portions of the EVAP testing, allowing engine vacuum to enter the EVAP system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7479 Canister Purge Solenoid: Service and Repair EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE SOLENOID VALVE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge solenoid valve electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve hose/pipe. 4. Remove the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve retaining bolt (2). 5. Remove the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve (1) from the intake manifold. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve (1) on the intake manifold. 2. install the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve bolt (2). Tighten the EVAP canister purge valve retaining bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve hose/pipe. 4. Connect the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER FILTER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. IMPORTANT: The evaporative emission (EVAP) canister filter cover must also be replaced when the EVAP filter is replaced to ensure proper operation of the EVAP canister. 2. Remove the EVAP canister from the vehicle. 3. Carefully release the canister filter cover rear retaining tabs. 4. Carefully release the canister filter cover forward retaining tabs and remove the cover from the EVAP canister. 5. Discard the EVAP canister filter cover. 6. Remove the filter from the canister and discard the filter. 7. Clean the inside of the EVAP canister filter housing with a clean shop towel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7483 1. Install a NEW filter to the canister filter housing. 2. Install a NEW EVAP filter cover to the EVAP canister. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the seal is properly seated in the NEW EVAP filter cover. 3. Install the EVAP canister to the vehicle. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-06-04-008 > Feb > 08 > Emissions - Clicking/Banging Noise From Under Vehicle Evaporative Check Valve: Customer Interest Emissions - Clicking/Banging Noise From Under Vehicle Bulletin No.: 08-06-04-008 Date: February 04, 2008 TECHNICAL Subject: Clicking Type Noise Heard Under Vehicle (Replace EVAP Canister Vent Solenoid Valve) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Condition Some customers may comment on a clicking type noise coming from under the vehicle. Some may comment that there are always three clicks while others may refer to the noise as being three bangs. Cause The clicking or banging type noise may be caused by the cycling of the evaporative canister vent valve, when the valve is cycling there may be three clicks or bangs heard. The cycling of the valve is determined and controlled by the PCM. Correction Explain to the customer that the sound they are hearing is a normal function of the vehicle's evaporative emission system and that no repairs are needed. If the customer still feels the condition is not acceptable the canister vent solenoid valve can be replaced with P/N 15788844. This is a quieter operating valve. Before replacing the valve, please advise the customer that this will only reduce the sound level (volume) of the valve and will not eliminate the sound completely. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-06-04-008 > Feb > 08 > Emissions - Clicking/Banging Noise From Under Vehicle > Page 7492 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-06-04-008 > Feb > 08 > Emissions - Clicking/Banging Noise From Under Vehicle Evaporative Check Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - Clicking/Banging Noise From Under Vehicle Bulletin No.: 08-06-04-008 Date: February 04, 2008 TECHNICAL Subject: Clicking Type Noise Heard Under Vehicle (Replace EVAP Canister Vent Solenoid Valve) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Condition Some customers may comment on a clicking type noise coming from under the vehicle. Some may comment that there are always three clicks while others may refer to the noise as being three bangs. Cause The clicking or banging type noise may be caused by the cycling of the evaporative canister vent valve, when the valve is cycling there may be three clicks or bangs heard. The cycling of the valve is determined and controlled by the PCM. Correction Explain to the customer that the sound they are hearing is a normal function of the vehicle's evaporative emission system and that no repairs are needed. If the customer still feels the condition is not acceptable the canister vent solenoid valve can be replaced with P/N 15788844. This is a quieter operating valve. Before replacing the valve, please advise the customer that this will only reduce the sound level (volume) of the valve and will not eliminate the sound completely. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-06-04-008 > Feb > 08 > Emissions - Clicking/Banging Noise From Under Vehicle > Page 7498 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads Brake Caliper: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads Bulletin No.: 05-05-23-005A Date: January 23, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise from Front of Vehicle at Slow Speeds on Rough Surfaces When Brake Pedal Is Not Applied (Install New Caliper Pin Bushing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2002-2006 Saturn VUE Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-05-23-005 (Section 05 - Brakes). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise coming from the front of the vehicle while driving at slow speeds over rough road surfaces when the brake pedal is not applied. Cause This condition may be caused by the interface of the front brake caliper guide pins and the front brake caliper bracket. Correction Verify the customer concern. To isolate the brake caliper guide pins as a potential source of the noise, apply the brakes when the noise is apparent. If the noise stops when the brakes are applied and comes back when the brakes are released, then the brake caliper guide pin bushings are the most likely source of the concern. If the brake caliper guide pin bushings have been identified as the source of the noise, then replace the front brake caliper guide pin bushings on the lower pin on the brakes on both sides of the vehicle. Refer to the service procedure in this bulletin. Service Procedure Caution: Avoid taking the following actions when you service wheel brake parts: ^ Do not grind brake linings. ^ Do not sand brake linings. ^ Do not clean wheel brake parts with a dry brush or with compressed air. Some models or aftermarket brake parts may contain asbestos fibers which can become airborne in dust. Breathing dust with asbestos fibers may cause serious bodily harm. Use a water-dampened cloth in order to remove any dust on brake parts. Equipment is available commercially in order to perform this washing function. These wet methods prevent fibers from becoming airborne. Caution: Brake fluid may irritate eyes and skin. In case of contact, take the following actions: ^ Eye contact--rinse thoroughly with water. ^ Skin contact--wash with soap and water. ^ If ingested--consult a physician immediately. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 7504 Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Install and firmly hand tighten 2 wheel nuts to opposite wheel studs in order to retain the rotor to the hub. 4. Install a large C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and against the outboard brake pad. 5. Tighten the C-clamp evenly until the caliper piston is compressed into the caliper bore enough to allow the caliper to slide past the brake rotor. 6. Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 7. Remove the brake caliper lower guide pin bolt. Note: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 8. Without disconnecting the hydraulic brake flexible hose, pivot the caliper upward and secure the caliper with heavy mechanics wire, or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 7505 9. Remove the lower caliper pin taking care not to damage the pin boot. 10. Remove the rubber bushing from the caliper pin. 11. Clean the pin and install a new bushing. 12. Lubricate the caliper pin and bushing assembly with a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant and install in the caliper bracket. 13. Remove the support and rotate the brake caliper into position over the disc brake pads and to the caliper mounting bracket. 14. Repeat Steps 1-13 on opposite side brake assembly. Installation Procedure Note: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners must be the correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring replacement or fasteners requiring the use of thread locking compound or sealant are identified in the service procedure. Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on fasteners or fastener joint surfaces unless specified. These coatings affect fastener torque and joint clamping force and may damage the fastener. Use the correct tightening sequence and specifications when installing fasteners in order to avoid damage to parts and systems. 1. Install the lower brake caliper guide pin bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 44 N.m (32 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 7506 2. Remove the wheel nuts retaining the brake rotor to the hub. 3. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Repeat Steps 1-3 on opposite side brake assembly. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 7. Slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance again until a firm brake pedal apply is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 7512 Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Install and firmly hand tighten 2 wheel nuts to opposite wheel studs in order to retain the rotor to the hub. 4. Install a large C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and against the outboard brake pad. 5. Tighten the C-clamp evenly until the caliper piston is compressed into the caliper bore enough to allow the caliper to slide past the brake rotor. 6. Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 7. Remove the brake caliper lower guide pin bolt. Note: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 8. Without disconnecting the hydraulic brake flexible hose, pivot the caliper upward and secure the caliper with heavy mechanics wire, or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 7513 9. Remove the lower caliper pin taking care not to damage the pin boot. 10. Remove the rubber bushing from the caliper pin. 11. Clean the pin and install a new bushing. 12. Lubricate the caliper pin and bushing assembly with a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant and install in the caliper bracket. 13. Remove the support and rotate the brake caliper into position over the disc brake pads and to the caliper mounting bracket. 14. Repeat Steps 1-13 on opposite side brake assembly. Installation Procedure Note: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners must be the correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring replacement or fasteners requiring the use of thread locking compound or sealant are identified in the service procedure. Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on fasteners or fastener joint surfaces unless specified. These coatings affect fastener torque and joint clamping force and may damage the fastener. Use the correct tightening sequence and specifications when installing fasteners in order to avoid damage to parts and systems. 1. Install the lower brake caliper guide pin bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 44 N.m (32 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 7514 2. Remove the wheel nuts retaining the brake rotor to the hub. 3. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Repeat Steps 1-3 on opposite side brake assembly. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 7. Slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance again until a firm brake pedal apply is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Locations Under The Rear Of The Vehicle Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 7519 Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 7520 Canister Vent Valve: Description and Operation EVAP VENT VALVE The EVAP vent valve controls fresh airflow into the EVAP canister. The valve is normally open. The control module will command the valve closed during some EVAP tests, allowing the system to be tested for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 7521 Canister Vent Valve: Service and Repair EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT SOLENOID VALVE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister from the vehicle. 2. Rotate the EVAP canister vent valve counterclockwise to release from the locked position. 3. Remove the vent valve from the EVAP canister. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 7522 1. Insert the EVAP canister vent solenoid valve into the EVAP canister, with the valve aligned to the released position. 2. Rotate vent valve clockwise to secure into the locked position. 3. Install the EVAP canister to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) HOSES/PIPES REPLACEMENT - ENGINE REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the generator. 2. Remove the nuts (1) securing the evaporative emission (EVAP) hose/pipe (2) to the strut tower. 3. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose/pipe (2) from the purge solenoid. 4. Disconnect the engine EVAP purge hose/pipe from the chassis EVAP purge hose/pipe. 5. Cap or plug both the engine and chassis EVAP purge hose/pipes to prevent contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine > Page 7527 6. Remove the EVAP hose/pipe (2) from the retainer (3). 7. Remove the EVAP hose/pipe (2) from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the EVAP hose/pipe (2) to the vehicle. 2. Install the EVAP hose/pipe (2) to the retainer (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine > Page 7528 3. Remove the caps or plugs from both the engine and chassis EVAP purge hose/pipes. 4. Connect the engine EVAP purge hose/pipe to the chassis EVAP purge hose/pipe. 5. Connect the EVAP purge hose/pipe (2) to the purge solenoid. 6. Install the nuts (1) securing the evaporative emission EVAP hose/pipe (2) to the strut tower. Tighten the nuts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 7. Install the generator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine > Page 7529 Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine/Chassis EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) HOSES/PIPES REPLACEMENT - ENGINE/CHASSIS REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Do not allow smoking or the use of open flames in the area where work on the fuel or EVAP system is taking place. Anytime work is being done on the fuel system, disconnect the negative battery cable, except for those tests where battery voltage is required. - Whenever fuel lines are removed, catch fuel in an approved container. Container opening must be a minimum of 300 mm (12 in) diameter to adequately catch the fluid. NOTE: Fuel/Vapor lines cannot be spliced or repaired. The line must be replaced (if damaged) with the same type of line. 1. Disconnect the engine evaporative emission (EVAP) purge hose/pipe from the chassis EVAP purge hose/pipe. 2. Cap or plug both the engine and chassis EVAP purge hose/pipes to prevent contamination. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose/pipe from the EVAP canister. 5. Cap or plug both the EVAP purge hose/pipe and canister to prevent contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine > Page 7530 6. Release the pipe retainers (1) from the vehicle underbody. 7. Remove the purge pipe from the pipe retainers. 8. Remove the purge pipe from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the purge pipe to the vehicle. 2. Install the purge pipe to the pipe retainers. 3. Secure the pipe retainers (1) to the vehicle underbody. 4. Remove the caps or plugs from both the EVAP purge hose/pipe and canister. 5. Connect the EVAP purge hose/pipe to the EVAP canister. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine > Page 7531 7. Remove the caps or plugs from both the engine and chassis EVAP purge hose/pipes. 8. Connect the engine EVAP purge hose/pipe to the chassis EVAP purge hose/pipe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative System Service Port > Component Information > Description and Operation Evaporative System Service Port: Description and Operation EVAP SERVICE PORT The EVAP service port is located in the EVAP purge pipe between the EVAP purge valve and the EVAP canister. The service port is identified by a green colored cap. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Refueling Vapor Recovery System > System Information > Description and Operation Refueling Vapor Recovery System: Description and Operation ON-BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY SYSTEM (ORVR) The on-board refueling vapor recovery (ORVR) system is an on-board vehicle system designed to recover fuel vapors during the vehicle refueling operation. Instead of allowing fuel vapors to escape to the atmosphere the ORVR system transports the vapor to the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister for use by the engine. The flow of liquid fuel down the fuel filler neck provides a liquid seal that prevents fuel vapor from leaving the fuel system. The ORVR system architecture varies from platform to platform. Some of the items listed below are optional depending on the platform application. The following is a list of all the ORVR system components with a brief description of their operation: - The EVAP canister (1). The EVAP canister receives and stores refueling vapor from the fuel system. The EVAP canister releases the fuel vapor to the engine through the EVAP control system. - The vapor lines (2). The vapor lines transport fuel vapor from the fuel tank assembly to the EVAP canister. - The vapor recirculation line (3), if equipped. The vapor recirculation line transports fuel vapor from the fuel tank to the top of the fuel filler pipe during refueling in order to reduce the fuel vapor at the canister. The vapor recirculation line can be located inside the fuel filler pipe or outside of the fuel filler pipe. - The variable orifice valve (4), if equipped. The variable orifice valve regulates the amount of vapor allowed to enter the vapor recirculation line. - The fuel filler pipe (5). The fuel filler pipe carries fuel from the fuel dispensing nozzle to the fuel tank. - The check valve (6). The check valve limits fuel spitback from the fuel tank during the refueling operation by allowing fuel flow only into the fuel tank. The check valve is located at the bottom of the fuel filler pipe or in the fuel tank filler neck. - The fuel sender assembly (7). The fuel sender assembly pumps fuel to the engine from the fuel tank. - The fill limiter vent valve (8). The fill limiter vent valve is located in the fuel tank and acts as a shut-off valve. The fill limiter vent valve performs the following functions: - Controls the fuel tank fill level by closing the primary vent of the fuel tank. - Prevents liquid fuel from exiting the fuel tank through the vapor line and entering the EVAP canister. - Provides fuel-spillage protection in the event of a vehicle rollover by closing the vapor path from the tank to the EVAP canister. - The pressure/vacuum relief valve (9), if equipped. The pressure/vacuum relief valve provides venting of excessive fuel tank pressure or vacuum. The pressure/vacuum relief valve is located in the fuel filler neck on a plastic fuel tank and in the fill limiter vent valve on a steel fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair EGR Tube: Service and Repair EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) PIPE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Remove the bolt (3) retaining the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) pipe (4) to the EGR valve (1). 3. Remove the 2 bolts (5) securing the EGR pipe (4) to the exhaust manifold. 4. Remove the EGR pipe (4). 5. Remove the EGR pipe to exhaust manifold gasket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the EGR pipe to exhaust manifold gasket. 2. Install the EGR pipe (4). 3. Install the 2 bolts (5) that secure the EGR pipe (4) to exhaust manifold. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7542 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the bolt (3) the secures the EGR pipe (4) bolt to the EGR valve (1). Tighten the bolt to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 5. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Diagrams Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7546 EGR Valve: Description and Operation LINEAR EGR VALVE The linear exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve consists of the following: - The EGR valve position sensor - The EGR valve position sensor cap - The bobbin and coil assembly - The valve pintle - The primary pole piece - The armature sleeve - The armature and base assembly - The exhaust gas inlet port - The exhaust gas outlet port Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7547 EGR Valve: Service and Repair EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) pipe (4). 2. Disconnect the EGR valve electrical connector. 3. Remove the EGR valve bolts (2). 4. Remove the EGR valve (1). 5. Remove the EGR valve gasket. 6. Clean the EGR valve mating surface. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the EGR valve (1) with a new gasket to the intake manifold. 2. Install the EGR valve bolts (2). Tighten the bolts to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7548 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the EGR valve electrical connector. 4. Install the EGR pipe (4). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF) ............................................................................................................................................. 384-425 kPa (50-60 psi) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 7555 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel system is a returnless on-demand design. The fuel pressure regulator is a part of the primary fuel tank module, eliminating the need for a return pipe from the engine. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel tank module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies high pressure fuel through the fuel filter, past the fuel pressure regulator, and through the fuel feed pipe to the fuel injection system. The fuel pressure regulator has a T-joint that diverts the needed fuel to the fuel rail with the unused fuel dropping back into the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The primary fuel tank module contains a reverse flow check valve. The check valve and the fuel pressure regulator maintain fuel pressure in the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail in order to prevent long cranking times. The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank. TEST Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 7556 Step 1 - Step 6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 7557 Step 7 - Step 13 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Connect the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection. 3. Install the bleed hose into an approved container and open the valve to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 4. Disconnect the fuel pressure gage from the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure > Page 7562 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Under The Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7566 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7567 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The accelerator pedal contains 2 individual accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors within the assembly. The APP sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits: - A 5-volt reference circuit - A low reference circuit - A signal circuit The APP sensors are used to determine the pedal angle. The powertrain control module (PCM) provides each APP sensor with a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensors provide the PCM with signal voltage proportional to the pedal movement. Both APP sensor signal voltages are low at rest position and increase as the pedal is applied. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7568 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR PEDAL WITH POSITION SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor connector. 3. Disconnect the APP sensor harness connector. 4. Remove the APP assembly attachment bolts. IMPORTANT: Due to clearance issues, the upper attachment bolt cannot be removed from the accelerator pedal assembly. Loose then bolt completely and leave the bolt in the component until the assembly is removed from the vehicle. 5. Remove the APP assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7569 1. Install the upper attachment bolt into the APP assembly. 2. Install the APP assembly into the vehicle. 3. Install the remaining attachment bolts into the APP assembly. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the APP sensor harness connector. Push the connector in until the lock position is felt, then pull back to confirm engagement. 5. Install the CPA to the APP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 07-06-04-026A > Apr > 08 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Customer Interest Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-026A Date: April 08, 2008 Subject: Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On, DTC P0171 Set (Inspect/Secure Fresh Air Inlet Pipe and Reprogram PCM) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include new repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-026 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the Service Engine Soon (SES) light is illuminated. Upon investigation the technician may find that Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0171 has been set. Cause The fresh air inlet pipe may have become disconnected from the grommet in the rear rocker cover. Correction Inspect the fresh air inlet pipe connection to the rear rocker cover. If the inlet pipe has become disconnected from the rear rocker cover reconnect the pipe into the grommet and also into the metal retaining bracket. Use a plastic tie strap to secure the pipe to the retaining bracket as shown above. In addition an updated Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calibration is now available to address this condition. Reprogram the PCM with the updated calibration using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS). As always make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: > 07-06-04-026A > Apr > 08 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-026A Date: April 08, 2008 Subject: Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On, DTC P0171 Set (Inspect/Secure Fresh Air Inlet Pipe and Reprogram PCM) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include new repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-026 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the Service Engine Soon (SES) light is illuminated. Upon investigation the technician may find that Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0171 has been set. Cause The fresh air inlet pipe may have become disconnected from the grommet in the rear rocker cover. Correction Inspect the fresh air inlet pipe connection to the rear rocker cover. If the inlet pipe has become disconnected from the rear rocker cover reconnect the pipe into the grommet and also into the metal retaining bracket. Use a plastic tie strap to secure the pipe to the retaining bracket as shown above. In addition an updated Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calibration is now available to address this condition. Reprogram the PCM with the updated calibration using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS). As always make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7584 Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE DUCT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Loosen the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) fresh air pipe from the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Remove the air cleaner intake duct from the mass air flow (MAF) sensor and throttle body. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner intake duct to the MAF sensor and throttle body. 2. Install the PCV fresh air pipe to the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Tighten the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. Tighten the clamps to 4 N.m (35 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 7593 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 7599 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7600 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Release the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by tilting to release the lid from the lower housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7601 5. Remove the air cleaner element (2) from the lower housing (1). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner element (2) into the lower housing (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7602 2. Install the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by first engaging the hinge then lower the cover into the closed position. 3. Fasten the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. 4. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7608 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7609 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7610 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7611 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7612 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7613 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7614 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7615 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7616 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7617 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7618 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7619 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7620 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7621 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7622 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7623 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7624 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7625 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7626 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7627 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7628 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7629 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7630 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7631 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7632 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7633 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7634 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7635 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7636 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7637 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7638 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7639 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7640 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7641 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7642 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7643 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7644 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7645 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7646 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7647 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7648 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7649 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7650 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7651 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7652 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7653 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7654 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7655 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7656 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7657 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7658 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7659 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7660 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7661 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7662 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7663 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7664 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7665 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7666 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7667 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7668 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7669 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7670 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7671 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7672 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7673 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7674 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7675 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7676 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7677 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7678 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7679 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7680 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7681 Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7682 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the MAF from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the MAF to air cleaner assembly seal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7683 1. Install the seal to the MAF. 2. Install the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 3. Install the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. Tighten the screws to 4 N.m (35 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-022G Date: October 27, 2010 Subject: TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Information and Available Brands (Deposits, Fuel Economy, No Start, Power, Performance, Stall Concerns) - Canada ONLY Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Canada Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and include an additional gasoline brand as a TOP TIER source. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-022F (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). In the U.S., refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-047I. A new class of fuel called TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is appearing at retail stations of some fuel marketers. This gasoline meets detergency standards developed by six automotive companies. All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by the Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Intake valve: 16,093 km (10,000 mi) with TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Intake valve: 16,093 km (10,000 mi) with Minimum Additive recommended by the CGSB Top Tier Fuel Availability Chevron was the first to offer TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in Canada. Shell became the first national gasoline retailer to offer TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline across Canada. Petro-Canada began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline nationally as of October 1, 2006. Sunoco began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in March of 2007. Esso began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in May of 2010. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 7688 Gasoline Brands That Currently Meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards The following gasoline brands meet the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards in all octane grades : Chevron Canada (markets in British Columbia and western Alberta) - Shell Canada (nationally) - Petro-Canada (nationally) - Sunoco-Canada (Ontario) - Esso-Canada (nationally) What is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is a new class of gasoline with enhanced detergency and no metallic additives. It meets new, voluntary deposit control standards developed by six automotive companies that exceed the detergent recommendations of Canadian standards and does not contain metallic additives, which can damage vehicle emission control components. Where Can TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Be Purchased? The TOP TIER program began in the U.S. and Canada on May 3, 2004. Some fuel marketers have already joined and introduced TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. This is a voluntary program and not all fuel marketers will offer this product. Once fuel marketers make public announcements, they will appear on a list of brands that meet the TOP TIER standards. Who developed TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards were developed by six automotive companies: BMW, General Motors, Honda, Toyota, Volkswagen and Audi. Why was TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline developed? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline was developed to increase the level of detergent additive in gasoline. In the U.S., government regulations require that all gasoline sold in the U.S. contain a detergent additive. However, the requirement is minimal and in many cases, is not sufficient to keep engines clean. In Canada, gasoline standards recommend adherence to U.S. detergency requirements but do not require it. In fact, many brands of gasoline in Canada do not contain any detergent additive. In order to meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards, a higher level of detergent is needed than what is required or recommended, and no metallic additives are allowed. Also, TOP TIER was developed to give fuel marketers the opportunity to differentiate their product. Why did the six automotive companies join together to develop TOP TIER? All six corporations recognized the benefits to both the vehicle and the consumer. Also, joining together emphasized that low detergency and the intentional addition of metallic additives is an issue of concern to several automotive companies. What are the benefits of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner than gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by Canadian standards. Clean engines help provide optimal fuel economy and engine performance, and also provide reduced emissions. Also, the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help reduce deposit related concerns. Who should use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by Canadian standards. Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. More information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at this website, http://www.toptiergas.com/. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 7689 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 7690 Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - 'TOP TIER' Detergent Gasoline Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-047I Date: August 17, 2009 Subject: TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Deposits, Fuel Economy, No Start, Power, Performance, Stall Concerns) - U.S. Only Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) (U.S. Only) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 (U.S. Only) 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 (U.S. Only) 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X (U.S. Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and additional sources to the Top Tier Fuel Retailers list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-047H (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). In Canada, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-022F. A new class of fuel called TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is appearing at retail stations of some fuel marketers. This gasoline meets detergency standards developed by six automotive companies. All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Intake valve: - 10,000 miles with TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Intake valve: - 10,000 miles with Legal Minimum additive Gasoline Brands That Currently Meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards As of August 1, 2009, all grades of the following gasoline brands meet the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards: - Chevron - Chevron-Canada - QuikTrip - Conoco Phillips 66 - 76 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 7691 - Shell - Shell-Canada - Entec Stations located in the greater Montgomery, Alabama area. - MFA Oil Company located throughout Missouri. - Kwik Trip, Inc. in Minnesota and Wisconsin and Kwik Star convenience stores in Iowa. The Somerset Refinery, Inc. at Somerset Oil stations in Kentucky. Aloha Petroleum - Tri-Par Oil Company - Turkey Hill Minit Markets - Texaco - Petro-Canada - Sunoco-Canada - Road Ranger located in Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Kentucky, Missouri, Ohio and Wisconsin What is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is a new class of gasoline with enhanced detergency. It meets new, voluntary deposit control standards developed by six automotive companies that exceed the detergent requirements imposed by the EPA. Where Can TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Be Purchased? The TOP TIER program began on May 3, 2004 and many fuel marketers have joined the program and have introduced TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. This is a voluntary program and not all fuel marketers will offer this product. Once fuel marketers make public announcements, they will appear on a list of brands that meet the TOP TIER standards. Where Can I find the Latest Information on TOP TIER Fuel and Retailers? On the web, please visit www.toptiergas.com for additional information and updated retailer lists. Who developed TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards were developed by six automotive companies: Audi, BMW, General Motors, Honda, Toyota and Volkswagen. Why was TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline developed? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline was developed to increase the level of detergent additive in gasoline. The EPA requires that all gasoline sold in the U.S. contain a detergent additive. However, the requirement is minimal and in many cases, is not sufficient to keep engines clean. In order to meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards, a higher level of detergent is needed than what is required by the EPA. Also, TOP TIER was developed to give fuel marketers the opportunity to differentiate their product. Why did the six automotive companies join together to develop TOP TIER? All six corporations recognized the benefits to both the vehicle and the consumer. Also, joining together emphasized that low detergency is an issue of concern to several automotive companies. What are the benefits of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner than gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Clean engines help provide optimal fuel economy and performance and reduced emissions. Also, use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help reduce deposit related concerns. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 7692 Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - E85 Fuel Usage Precautions Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-035C Date: July 30, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Usage of E85 Fuels in GM Vehicles Models: 1997-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 1997-2008 Isuzu NPR Commercial Medium Duty Trucks 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year and additional engines with E85 capability. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-035B (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Customer Interest in E85 Fuel As the retail price of gasoline increases, some locations in the country are seeing price differentials between regular gasoline and E85 where E85 is selling for substantially less than regular grade gasoline. One result of this is that some customers have inquired if they are able to use E85 fuel in non-E85 compatible vehicles. Only vehicles designated for use with E85 should use E85 blended fuel. E85 compatibility is designated for vehicles that are certified to run on up to 85% ethanol and 15% gasoline. All other gasoline engines are designed to run on fuel that contains no more than 10% ethanol. Use of fuel containing greater than 10% ethanol in non-E85 designated vehicles can cause driveability issues, service engine soon indicators as well as increased fuel system corrosion. Using E85 Fuels in Non-Compatible Vehicles General Motors is aware of an increased number of cases where customers have fueled non-FlexFuel designated vehicles with E85. Fueling non-FlexFuel designated vehicles with E85, or with fuels where the concentration of ethanol exceeds the ASTM specification of 10%, will result in one or more of the following conditions: Lean Driveability concerns such as hesitations, sags and/or possible stalling. SES lights due to OBD codes. Fuel Trim codes P0171 and/or P0174. Misfire codes (P0300). Various 02 sensor codes. Disabled traction control or Stability System disabled messages. Harsh/Firm transmission shifts. Fuel system and/or engine mechanical component degradation. Use of fuel containing greater than 10% ethanol in non-E85 designated vehicles can cause driveability issues, service engine soon indicators as well as increased fuel system corrosion. If the dealer suspects that a non-FlexFuel designated vehicle brought in for service has been fueled with E85, the fuel in the vehicle's tank should be checked for alcohol content with tool J 44175. If the alcohol content exceeds 10% the fuel should be drained and the vehicle refilled with gasoline - preferably one of the Top Tier brands. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 7693 Repairs to non-FlexFuel vehicles that have been fueled with E85 are not covered under the terms of the New Vehicle Warranty. A complete list of GM's FlexFuel vehicles can be found in this Service Bulletin, or at www.livegreengoyellow.com. E85 Compatible Vehicles The only E85 compatible vehicles produced by General Motors are shown. Only vehicles that are listed in the E85 Compatible Vehicles section of this bulletin and/or www.livegreengoyellow.com are E85 compatible. All other gasoline and diesel engines are NOT E85 compatible. Use of fuel containing greater than 10% ethanol in non-E85 designated vehicles can cause driveability issues, service engine soon indicators as well as increased fuel system corrosion. Repairs to non-FlexFuel vehicles that have been fueled with E85 are not covered under the terms of the New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 7694 Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - E85 Refueling Station Information Bulletin No.: 06-06-04-030 Date: May 15, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Locations of E85 Refueling Stations and Expanded E85 Information Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Equipped for Flexible Fuel (E85) Attention: U.S. dealers - This bulletin should be directed to the Sales Manager as well as the Service Manager. Copies of this bulletin may be given to customers purchasing or considering the purchase of E85 capable vehicles, and may be left or posted in customer waiting areas. Canadian dealers - This bulletin is intended for the U.S. Market and provides only limited information relevant to the Canadian market. Customer Questions, Concerns and Refueling Locations for E85 Fuel Extensive information on E85 Ethanol based fuels can be found at www.livegreengoyellow.com . This General Motors site contains vital information that anticipates and answers customer questions and concerns about E85 fuel. Part of the information is a useful link that provides the location nationally of all E85 refueling stations. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7695 Fuel: Specifications GASOLINE OCTANE Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87, you may notice an audible knocking noise when you drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. GASOLINE SPECIFICATIONS It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications which were developed by automobile manufacturers around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel Charter which is available from the Alliance of Automobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasoline. CALIFORNIA FUEL If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. See the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty. ADDITIVES To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing your emission control system to work properly. In most cases, you should not have to add anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations. General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines that are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of gasoline. Also, your GM dealer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit-related problems. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier. NOTICE: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage the plastic and rubber parts. That damage would not be covered under your warranty. Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. FUELS IN FOREIGN COUNTRIES If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by your warranty. To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Without Special Tool Fuel: Testing and Inspection Without Special Tool ALCOHOL/CONTAMINANTS-IN-FUEL DIAGNOSIS (WITHOUT SPECIAL TOOL) Water contamination in the fuel system may cause driveability conditions such as hesitation, stalling, no start, or misfires in one or more cylinders. Water may collect near a single fuel injector, at the lowest point in the fuel rail, and cause a misfire in that cylinder. If the fuel system is contaminated with water, inspect the fuel system components for rust, or deterioration. Alcohol concentrations of 10 percent or greater in fuel can be detrimental to fuel system components. Alcohol contamination may cause fuel system corrosion, deterioration of rubber components, and subsequent fuel filter restriction. Fuel contaminated with alcohol may cause driveability conditions such as hesitation, lack of power, stalling, or no start. Some types of alcohol are more detrimental to fuel system components than others. Alcohol in Fuel Testing Procedure The fuel sample should be drawn from the bottom of the tank so that any water present in the tank will be detected. The sample should be bright and clear. If alcohol contamination is suspected then use the following procedure to test the fuel quality. 1. Using a 100 ml specified cylinder with 1 ml graduation marks, fill the cylinder with fuel to the 90 ml mark. 2. Add 10 ml of water in order to bring the total fluid volume to 100 ml and install a stopper. 3. Shake the cylinder vigorously for 10-15 seconds. 4. Carefully loosen the stopper in order to release the pressure. 5. Re-install the stopper and shake the cylinder vigorously again for 10-15 seconds. 6. Put the cylinder on a level surface for approximately 5 minutes in order to allow adequate liquid separation. If alcohol is present in the fuel, the volume of the lower layer, which would now contain both alcohol and water, will be more than 10 ml. For example, if the volume of the lower layer is increased to 15 ml, this indicates at least 5 percent alcohol in the fuel. The actual amount of alcohol may be somewhat more because this procedure does not extract all of the alcohol from the fuel. Particulate Contaminants in Fuel Testing Procedure The fuel sample should be drawn from the bottom of the tank so that any water present in the tank will be detected. The sample should be bright and clear. If the sample appears cloudy, or contaminated with water, as indicated by a water layer at the bottom of the sample, use the following procedure to diagnose the fuel. 1. Using an approved fuel container, draw approximately 0.5 liter of fuel. 2. Place the cylinder on a level surface for approximately 5 minutes in order to allow settling of the particulate contamination. Particulate contamination will show up in various shapes and colors. Sand will typically be identified by a white or light brown crystals. Rubber will appear as black and irregular particles. If particles are found clean the entire fuel system thoroughly. Refer to Fuel System Cleaning. See: Service and Repair Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Without Special Tool > Page 7698 Fuel: Testing and Inspection With Special Tool ALCOHOL/CONTAMINANTS-IN-FUEL DIAGNOSIS (WITH SPECIAL TOOL) TEST DESCRIPTION Fuel quality can affect vehicle performance. Gasoline and gasoline blends that are contaminated or contain excessive amounts of alcohol can affect vehicle driveability, fuel economy, fuel system components, and emissions. Excessive alcohol in the fuel may cause fuel system corrosion, deterioration of rubber components, and subsequent fuel filter restriction. Some types of alcohol are more detrimental to fuel system components than others. Ethanol is commonly used in gasoline, but in concentrations of no more than 10 percent. Some fuels, such as E85, contain a very high percent of ethanol. Fuel with more than 10 percent ethanol may cause driveability conditions in vehicles such as hesitation, lack of power, stalling, or no start. If excessive alcohol in the fuel is suspected, then use the following procedure to test the fuel quality. TEST PROCEDURE 1. Turn ON the J 44175 Fuel Composition Tester. 2. Verify the fuel composition tester is operational by measuring the AC frequency output with a DMM. A frequency without a fuel sample in the test cell indicates that the tester is working correctly. 3. Install the J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage. CAUTION: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 4. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. IMPORTANT: you will need to bleed the J 34730-1A a few times in order to obtain an accurate fuel sample. 5. Place the bleed hose (1) of the fuel pressure gage into the 100 ml beaker (2). 6. Command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool. 7. Slowly open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage, until an adequate fuel sample is obtained. 8. If water appears in the fuel sample, clean the fuel system and replace the fuel in the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Without Special Tool > Page 7699 9. Pour the fuel sample from the beaker (1) into the J 44175 , until the level of the fuel is at the top of each fuel test port (2). IMPORTANT: Do not allow any substances other than gasoline, ethanol/gasoline blends, air, or acetone into the test ports of the fuel composition tester. Contaminants in the fuel composition tester could result in misdiagnosis. 10. Observe the diagnostic LEDs on the fuel composition tester. If the red fuel diagnostic LED is illuminated, a fuel contamination condition exists. Refer to Fuel System Cleaning. See: Service and Repair 11. Measure the output frequency of the fuel composition tester. Fuel Composition Test Examples 12. Subtract 50 from the reading on the DMM to obtain the percentage of alcohol in the fuel sample. Refer to the examples in the table. 13. If the fuel sample contains more than 10 percent ethanol, replace the fuel in the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System -07-06-04-022G End Of Need For Information Fuel Filler Cap: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System -07-06-04-022G End Of Need For Information ENGINEERING INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-022G Date: July 31, 2009 Subject: EI07238 - Fuel Cap May Not Seal, MIL/SES Light Illuminated with DTC P0442 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Small Leak Detected and/or P0455 - Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Large Leak Detected (Engineering Information Closed) Models: 2005 Cadillac DeVille 2005-2006 Cadillac SRX 2005-2007 Cadillac XLR, XLR-V 2005-2007 Chevrolet Corvette 2006-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 Chevrolet Express 2007-2008 GMC Savana 2005 Pontiac Bonneville 2006 Pontiac GTO 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent 2005-2007 Saturn VUE Equipped with Engine RPOs LJ3, LC3, L61, LK9, LNJ, LP9, L36, L66, LH2, LD8, LY2, LR4, LS2, LY6, LS7 Please Refer to GMVIS Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to end the need for information from the field. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-022F (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Additional information is no longer needed by Engineering. Refer to the published diagnostics and repairs in SI to correct this concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7704 Fuel Filler Cap: Description and Operation FUEL FILLER CAP NOTE: If a fuel tank filler cap requires replacement, use only a fuel tank filler cap with the same features. Failure to use the correct fuel tank filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel and EVAP system. The fuel fill pipe has a tethered fuel filler cap. A torque-limiting device prevents the cap from being over-tightened. To install the cap, turn the cap clockwise until you hear audible clicks. This indicates that the cap is correctly torqued and fully seated. A fuel filler cap that is not fully seated may cause a malfunction in the Emission System. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Connect the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection. 3. Install the bleed hose into an approved container and open the valve to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 4. Disconnect the fuel pressure gage from the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure > Page 7710 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's Fuel Injector: Customer Interest Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 03-06-04-030G Date: April 22, 2009 Subject: Various Driveability Symptoms Due to Clogged Fuel Injectors, MIL/SES DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0300, P1174, P1175 (Clean Fuel Injectors and/or Perform Injector Test With AFIT CH-47976) Models: 2005-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with Engine RPOs listed in the Table above and MULTEC(R) 2 Fuel Injectors Attention: GM does not support cleaning injectors on any engines that are not listed in this bulletin. Engines other than the ones listed in this bulletin that diagnosis indicates having restricted injectors should have those injectors replaced. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model year to 2009 and to provide applicable engine RPO table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-06-04-030F (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following various driveability symptoms: - Extended Crank Time - Hard to Start - MIL/SES Illuminated with DTCs - Hesitation - Lack of Power - Surge or Chuggle - Rough Idle - Light or Intermittent Misfire Cause Due to various factors, the fuel injectors may become restricted. Extensive testing has demonstrated that fuel related issues are the cause of clogged injectors. At this point, no specific fuel, fuel constituent, or engine condition has been identified as causing the restriction. The restriction causes the engine to operate at a lean air fuel ratio. This may either trigger the MIL to illuminate or the engine to develop various driveability symptoms. Correction Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 7719 Fuel injector restrictions, deposits can be cleaned on the vehicle using the following procedure. Under NO circumstances should this procedure be modified, changed or shortened. As a long term solution, and to prevent reoccurrence, customers should be encouraged to use Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For further information on Top Tier detergent gasoline and fuel retailers, please refer to the following Corporate Bulletin Numbers: - 04-06-04-047G (U.S. Only) - 05-06-04-022D (Canada ONLY) Notice GM UPPER ENGINE AND FUEL INJECTOR CLEANER is the only injector cleaning agent approved for use with General Motors fuel system components. Other injector cleaners may cause damage to plastics, plated metals or bearings. General Motors has completed extensive laboratory testing of GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner, and can assure its compatibility with General Motors fuel system components, as long as the cleaning procedure is followed correctly. Injector Cleaning Procedure The following tools, or their equivalent, are required: - CH-47976 Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT) - J 35800-A Fuel Injector Cleaner - J 37287 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - J 42964 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - J 42873 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - * One bottle of GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner, P/N 88861802 (in Canada, P/N 88861804) - * One bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus, P/N 88861011 (in Canada, P/N 88861012) Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT- CH-47976) Some dealers may not have an Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT- CH-47976). Dealers can contact to order an AFIT- CH-47976. Dealers still can test the fuel injectors without an AFIT. Refer to Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/ J 39021 or Tech 2(R)) in SI. Important As mentioned in the AFIT User Guide, vehicles that are not listed in the AFIT menu can still be tested with the AFIT. Depending on the model, it may be possible to enter the previous model year and proceed with testing using the DLC connection. If this is not possible on the model that you are working on, it will be necessary to use the direct connection method outlined in the AFIT User Guide (See Pages 17-31). General Motors recommends that the Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT) be used in testing fuel injectors. If the SI diagnostics do not isolate a cause for this concern, use the Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT - CH-47976) to perform an "Injector Test" as outlined in the AFIT User Guide. The AFIT "Injector Test" measures the flow characteristics of all fuel injectors, which is more precise when compared with the standard Tech 2(R) fuel injector balance test. As a result, the AFIT is more likely to isolate the cause of a P1174 DTC (for example: if it is being caused by a fuel injector concern). The CH-47976 (Active Fuel Injector Tester - AFIT) can also be used to measure fuel pressure and fuel system leak down. Also, as mentioned in the P1174 SI diagnosis, if the misfire current counters or misfire graph indicate any misfires, it may be an indicator of the cylinder that is causing the concern. Refer to Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/CH-47976) in SI for additional instructions. Training (U.S.) To access the training video on AFIT, take the following path at the GM Training Website: 1. After logging into the training website, choose the link on the left side of the page titled "web video library." 2. Then choose "technical." 3. Next, within the search box, type in September course number "10206.09D. 4. This will bring up a link with this course. Scroll through to choose "feature topic." 5. At this point, the seminar can be chosen to view or the video related to the AFIT. Additional training is available from the training website. Please see TECHassist 16044.18T2 Active Fuel Injector Tester and also see 16044.14D1 GM Powertrain Performance for more information on GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 7720 Also, dealers can now download software updates for the AFIT at GM Dealer Equipment (GMDE). Training (Canada) To access the training video on AFIT, take the following path at the GMPro LMS Training Website: 1. After logging into the website, choose the link on the left side of the page titled "Catalog." 2. Then choose "Catalog Search." 3. Next, within the search box, Select Course Number - Contains - "T" then select search. 4. This will bring up a list of TECHassist courses. Scroll through to choose "Active Fuel Injector Tester" and select "View." 5. At this point, a new window will open and the program can be Launched. Also, dealers can now download software updates for the AFIT at GM Dealer Equipment (GMDE). Techlink Additional information can be found on AFIT (June 2006 Edition) and GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner (November 2006 Edition) in Techlink. To access the articles, take the following path: 1. Go to GM DealerWorld (U.S.) or the GM GlobalConnect (Canada). 2. Click on the Service Tab in DealerWorld (in Canada, click Technican Resources in the Service Library of GM GlobalConnect). 3. Click on the GM Techlink Hyperlink. 4. Click on the Archives Hyperlink at GM Techlink. - Click on 06-2006 in the Archives Section and Click on the Active Fuel Injector Tester Link in the June 2006 Techlink Article. - Click on 11-2006 in the Archives Section and Click on the GM Top Engine Cleaner Replaced Link in the November 2006 Techlink Article. Injector Cleaning Procedure Notice GM UPPER ENGINE AND FUEL INJECTOR CLEANER is the only injector cleaning agent recommended. DO NOT USE OTHER CLEANING AGENTS AS THEY MAY CONTAIN METHANOL, WHICH CAN DAMAGE FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS. Under NO circumstances should the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner be added to the vehicle fuel tank. Do not exceed the recommended cleaning solution concentration. Testing has demonstrated that exceeding the recommended cleaning solution concentration does not improve the effectiveness of this procedure. Important Vehicles with less than 160 km (100 mi) on the odometer should not have the injectors cleaned. These vehicles should have any out of specification injectors replaced. 1. For 4, 5 and 6 cylinder engines, empty two of the 30 ml (1 oz) reservoirs of the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner container into the J 35800-A - Injector Cleaning Tank then add 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. If you are using any other brand of cleaning tank, you will need a total of 60 ml (2 oz) mixed with 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. 2. For 8 cylinder engines, empty two of the 30 ml (1 oz) reservoirs of the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner container into the J 35800-A Injector Cleaning Tank then add 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. If you are using any other brand of cleaning tank, you will need a total of 60 ml (2 oz) of Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner mixed with 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. This procedure will need to be repeated for a second time for an 8 cylinder engine (8 cylinder engines receive 960 ml total fluid 120 ml (4 oz) of Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner and 840 ml (28 oz) of gasoline. 3. Be sure to follow all additional instructions provided with the tool. 4. Electrically disable the vehicle fuel pump by either removing the fuel pump fuse or the fuel pump relay and disconnecting the oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 7721 5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 6. Relieve fuel pressure and disconnect the fuel feed and return lines at the fuel rail. Plug the fuel feed and return lines coming off the fuel rail with J 37287, J 42873 or J 42964 as appropriate for the fuel system. 7. Connect the J 35800-A to the vehicle fuel rail. 8. Pressurize the J 35800-A to 510 kPa (75 psi). 9. Start and idle the engine until it stalls, due to lack of fuel. This should take approximately 15-20 minutes. 10. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 11. Disconnect the J 35800-A from the fuel rail. 12. Reconnect the vehicle fuel pump relay and oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. 13. Remove the J 37287, J 42873 or J 42964 and reconnect the vehicle fuel feed and return lines. 14. Start and idle the vehicle for an additional two minutes to ensure residual injector cleaner is flushed from the fuel rail and fuel lines. 15. Pour the entire contents of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus (P/N 88861011 [in Canada, P/N 88861012]) into the tank and advise the customer to fill the tank. 16. Review the benefits of using Top Tier Detergent gasoline with the customer and recommend that they add a bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus to the fuel tank at every oil change. Regular use of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus should keep the customer from having to repeat the injector cleaning procedure. 17. Road test the vehicle to verify that the customer concern has been corrected. Parts Information * Only 1/8 of the cost may be claimed for 4 and 6 cylinder engines and 1/4 of the cost for 8 cylinder engines. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 7722 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's Fuel Injector: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 03-06-04-030G Date: April 22, 2009 Subject: Various Driveability Symptoms Due to Clogged Fuel Injectors, MIL/SES DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0300, P1174, P1175 (Clean Fuel Injectors and/or Perform Injector Test With AFIT CH-47976) Models: 2005-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with Engine RPOs listed in the Table above and MULTEC(R) 2 Fuel Injectors Attention: GM does not support cleaning injectors on any engines that are not listed in this bulletin. Engines other than the ones listed in this bulletin that diagnosis indicates having restricted injectors should have those injectors replaced. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model year to 2009 and to provide applicable engine RPO table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-06-04-030F (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following various driveability symptoms: - Extended Crank Time - Hard to Start - MIL/SES Illuminated with DTCs - Hesitation - Lack of Power - Surge or Chuggle - Rough Idle - Light or Intermittent Misfire Cause Due to various factors, the fuel injectors may become restricted. Extensive testing has demonstrated that fuel related issues are the cause of clogged injectors. At this point, no specific fuel, fuel constituent, or engine condition has been identified as causing the restriction. The restriction causes the engine to operate at a lean air fuel ratio. This may either trigger the MIL to illuminate or the engine to develop various driveability symptoms. Correction Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 7728 Fuel injector restrictions, deposits can be cleaned on the vehicle using the following procedure. Under NO circumstances should this procedure be modified, changed or shortened. As a long term solution, and to prevent reoccurrence, customers should be encouraged to use Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For further information on Top Tier detergent gasoline and fuel retailers, please refer to the following Corporate Bulletin Numbers: - 04-06-04-047G (U.S. Only) - 05-06-04-022D (Canada ONLY) Notice GM UPPER ENGINE AND FUEL INJECTOR CLEANER is the only injector cleaning agent approved for use with General Motors fuel system components. Other injector cleaners may cause damage to plastics, plated metals or bearings. General Motors has completed extensive laboratory testing of GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner, and can assure its compatibility with General Motors fuel system components, as long as the cleaning procedure is followed correctly. Injector Cleaning Procedure The following tools, or their equivalent, are required: - CH-47976 Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT) - J 35800-A Fuel Injector Cleaner - J 37287 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - J 42964 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - J 42873 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - * One bottle of GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner, P/N 88861802 (in Canada, P/N 88861804) - * One bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus, P/N 88861011 (in Canada, P/N 88861012) Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT- CH-47976) Some dealers may not have an Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT- CH-47976). Dealers can contact to order an AFIT- CH-47976. Dealers still can test the fuel injectors without an AFIT. Refer to Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/ J 39021 or Tech 2(R)) in SI. Important As mentioned in the AFIT User Guide, vehicles that are not listed in the AFIT menu can still be tested with the AFIT. Depending on the model, it may be possible to enter the previous model year and proceed with testing using the DLC connection. If this is not possible on the model that you are working on, it will be necessary to use the direct connection method outlined in the AFIT User Guide (See Pages 17-31). General Motors recommends that the Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT) be used in testing fuel injectors. If the SI diagnostics do not isolate a cause for this concern, use the Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT - CH-47976) to perform an "Injector Test" as outlined in the AFIT User Guide. The AFIT "Injector Test" measures the flow characteristics of all fuel injectors, which is more precise when compared with the standard Tech 2(R) fuel injector balance test. As a result, the AFIT is more likely to isolate the cause of a P1174 DTC (for example: if it is being caused by a fuel injector concern). The CH-47976 (Active Fuel Injector Tester - AFIT) can also be used to measure fuel pressure and fuel system leak down. Also, as mentioned in the P1174 SI diagnosis, if the misfire current counters or misfire graph indicate any misfires, it may be an indicator of the cylinder that is causing the concern. Refer to Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/CH-47976) in SI for additional instructions. Training (U.S.) To access the training video on AFIT, take the following path at the GM Training Website: 1. After logging into the training website, choose the link on the left side of the page titled "web video library." 2. Then choose "technical." 3. Next, within the search box, type in September course number "10206.09D. 4. This will bring up a link with this course. Scroll through to choose "feature topic." 5. At this point, the seminar can be chosen to view or the video related to the AFIT. Additional training is available from the training website. Please see TECHassist 16044.18T2 Active Fuel Injector Tester and also see 16044.14D1 GM Powertrain Performance for more information on GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 7729 Also, dealers can now download software updates for the AFIT at GM Dealer Equipment (GMDE). Training (Canada) To access the training video on AFIT, take the following path at the GMPro LMS Training Website: 1. After logging into the website, choose the link on the left side of the page titled "Catalog." 2. Then choose "Catalog Search." 3. Next, within the search box, Select Course Number - Contains - "T" then select search. 4. This will bring up a list of TECHassist courses. Scroll through to choose "Active Fuel Injector Tester" and select "View." 5. At this point, a new window will open and the program can be Launched. Also, dealers can now download software updates for the AFIT at GM Dealer Equipment (GMDE). Techlink Additional information can be found on AFIT (June 2006 Edition) and GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner (November 2006 Edition) in Techlink. To access the articles, take the following path: 1. Go to GM DealerWorld (U.S.) or the GM GlobalConnect (Canada). 2. Click on the Service Tab in DealerWorld (in Canada, click Technican Resources in the Service Library of GM GlobalConnect). 3. Click on the GM Techlink Hyperlink. 4. Click on the Archives Hyperlink at GM Techlink. - Click on 06-2006 in the Archives Section and Click on the Active Fuel Injector Tester Link in the June 2006 Techlink Article. - Click on 11-2006 in the Archives Section and Click on the GM Top Engine Cleaner Replaced Link in the November 2006 Techlink Article. Injector Cleaning Procedure Notice GM UPPER ENGINE AND FUEL INJECTOR CLEANER is the only injector cleaning agent recommended. DO NOT USE OTHER CLEANING AGENTS AS THEY MAY CONTAIN METHANOL, WHICH CAN DAMAGE FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS. Under NO circumstances should the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner be added to the vehicle fuel tank. Do not exceed the recommended cleaning solution concentration. Testing has demonstrated that exceeding the recommended cleaning solution concentration does not improve the effectiveness of this procedure. Important Vehicles with less than 160 km (100 mi) on the odometer should not have the injectors cleaned. These vehicles should have any out of specification injectors replaced. 1. For 4, 5 and 6 cylinder engines, empty two of the 30 ml (1 oz) reservoirs of the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner container into the J 35800-A - Injector Cleaning Tank then add 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. If you are using any other brand of cleaning tank, you will need a total of 60 ml (2 oz) mixed with 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. 2. For 8 cylinder engines, empty two of the 30 ml (1 oz) reservoirs of the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner container into the J 35800-A Injector Cleaning Tank then add 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. If you are using any other brand of cleaning tank, you will need a total of 60 ml (2 oz) of Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner mixed with 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. This procedure will need to be repeated for a second time for an 8 cylinder engine (8 cylinder engines receive 960 ml total fluid 120 ml (4 oz) of Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner and 840 ml (28 oz) of gasoline. 3. Be sure to follow all additional instructions provided with the tool. 4. Electrically disable the vehicle fuel pump by either removing the fuel pump fuse or the fuel pump relay and disconnecting the oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 7730 5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 6. Relieve fuel pressure and disconnect the fuel feed and return lines at the fuel rail. Plug the fuel feed and return lines coming off the fuel rail with J 37287, J 42873 or J 42964 as appropriate for the fuel system. 7. Connect the J 35800-A to the vehicle fuel rail. 8. Pressurize the J 35800-A to 510 kPa (75 psi). 9. Start and idle the engine until it stalls, due to lack of fuel. This should take approximately 15-20 minutes. 10. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 11. Disconnect the J 35800-A from the fuel rail. 12. Reconnect the vehicle fuel pump relay and oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. 13. Remove the J 37287, J 42873 or J 42964 and reconnect the vehicle fuel feed and return lines. 14. Start and idle the vehicle for an additional two minutes to ensure residual injector cleaner is flushed from the fuel rail and fuel lines. 15. Pour the entire contents of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus (P/N 88861011 [in Canada, P/N 88861012]) into the tank and advise the customer to fill the tank. 16. Review the benefits of using Top Tier Detergent gasoline with the customer and recommend that they add a bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus to the fuel tank at every oil change. Regular use of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus should keep the customer from having to repeat the injector cleaning procedure. 17. Road test the vehicle to verify that the customer concern has been corrected. Parts Information * Only 1/8 of the cost may be claimed for 4 and 6 cylinder engines and 1/4 of the cost for 8 cylinder engines. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 7731 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 04-06-04-051B > Jan > 06 > Fuel System - Fuel Injector Maintenance Cleaning Fuel Injector: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Injector Maintenance Cleaning Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-051B Date: January 04, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Maintenance Cleaning of Fuel Injectors Models: 2006 and Prior All General Motors Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years and update the name and part number of GM Fuel System Treatment. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-051A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is aware that some companies are marketing tools, equipment and programs to support fuel injector cleaning as a preventative maintenance procedure. General Motors does not endorse, support or acknowledge the need for fuel injector cleaning as a preventative maintenance procedure. Fuel injector cleaning is approved only when performed as directed by a published GM driveability or DTC diagnostic service procedure. Due to variation in fuel quality in different areas of the country, the only preventative maintenance currently endorsed by GM regarding its gasoline engine fuel systems is the addition of GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS, P/N 88861011 (for U.S. ACDelco(R), use P/N 88861013) (in Canada, P/N 88861012), added to a tank of fuel at each oil change. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-06-04-030A for proper cleaning instructions. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 04-06-04-051B > Jan > 06 > Fuel System - Fuel Injector Maintenance Cleaning Fuel Injector: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Injector Maintenance Cleaning Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-051B Date: January 04, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Maintenance Cleaning of Fuel Injectors Models: 2006 and Prior All General Motors Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years and update the name and part number of GM Fuel System Treatment. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-051A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is aware that some companies are marketing tools, equipment and programs to support fuel injector cleaning as a preventative maintenance procedure. General Motors does not endorse, support or acknowledge the need for fuel injector cleaning as a preventative maintenance procedure. Fuel injector cleaning is approved only when performed as directed by a published GM driveability or DTC diagnostic service procedure. Due to variation in fuel quality in different areas of the country, the only preventative maintenance currently endorsed by GM regarding its gasoline engine fuel systems is the addition of GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS, P/N 88861011 (for U.S. ACDelco(R), use P/N 88861013) (in Canada, P/N 88861012), added to a tank of fuel at each oil change. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-06-04-030A for proper cleaning instructions. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Injector: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7743 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7744 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7745 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7746 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7747 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7748 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7749 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7750 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7751 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7752 Fuel Injector: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7753 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7754 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7755 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7756 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7757 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7758 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7759 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7760 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7761 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7762 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7763 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7764 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7765 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7766 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7767 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7768 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7769 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7770 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7771 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7772 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7773 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7774 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7775 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7776 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7777 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7778 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7779 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7780 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7781 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7782 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7783 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7784 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7785 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7786 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7787 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7788 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7789 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7790 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7791 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7792 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7793 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7794 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7795 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7796 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7797 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7798 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7799 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7800 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7801 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7802 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7803 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7804 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7805 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7806 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7807 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7808 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7809 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7810 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7811 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7812 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7813 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7814 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7815 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7816 Fuel Injector: Connector Views Fuel Injector 1 Fuel Injector 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7817 Fuel Injector 3 Fuel Injector 4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7818 Fuel Injector 5 Fuel Injector 6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7819 Fuel Injector: Description and Operation FUEL INJECTORS The fuel injector assembly is a solenoid device controlled by the control module that meters pressurized fuel to a single engine cylinder. The control module energizes the high-impedance, 12 ohm, injector solenoid (4) to open a normally closed ball valve (1). This allows fuel to flow into the top of the injector, past the ball valve, and through a director plate (3) at the injector outlet. The director plate has machined holes that control the fuel flow, generating a spray of finely atomized fuel at the injector tip. Fuel from the injector tip is directed at the intake valve, causing the fuel to become further atomized and vaporized before entering the combustion chamber. This fine atomization improves fuel economy and emissions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Balance Test With Special Tool Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Fuel Injector Balance Test With Special Tool FUEL INJECTOR BALANCE TEST WITH SPECIAL TOOL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Fuel Injector Balance Test With Special Tool Fuel Injector Balance Test Example (Actual Results May Vary) The scan tool is first used to energize the fuel pump relay. The fuel injector tester is then used to pulse each injector for a precise amount of time, allowing a measured amount of fuel into the manifold. This causes a drop in system fuel pressure that can be recorded and used to compare each injector. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Balance Test With Special Tool > Page 7822 Step 1 - Step 5 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Balance Test With Special Tool > Page 7823 Step 6 - Step 8 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 3. The engine coolant temperature (ECT) must be below the operating temperature in order to avoid irregular fuel pressure readings due to hot soak fuel boiling. 6. If the pressure drop value for each fuel injector is within 20 kPa (3 psi) of the average pressure drop value, the fuel injectors are flowing properly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Balance Test With Special Tool > Page 7824 Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Fuel Injector Balance Test with Tech 2 FUEL INJECTOR BALANCE TEST WITH TECH 2 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Fuel Injector Balance Test Example (Actual Results May Vary) The scan tool first energizes the fuel pump and then the fuel injectors, for a precise amount of time, allowing a measured amount of fuel into the manifold. This causes a drop in system fuel pressure that can be recorded and used to compare each injector. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Balance Test With Special Tool > Page 7825 Step 1 - Step 5 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Balance Test With Special Tool > Page 7826 Step 6 - Step 8 The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 3. The engine coolant temperature (ECT) must be below the operating temperature in order to avoid irregular fuel pressure readings due to hot soak fuel boiling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Balance Test With Special Tool > Page 7827 Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Fuel Injector Coil Test FUEL INJECTOR COIL TEST CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The powertrain control module (PCM) enables the appropriate fuel injector on the intake stroke for each cylinder. Ignition voltage is supplied directly to the fuel injectors. The PCM controls each fuel injector by grounding the control circuit via a solid state device called a driver. A fuel injector coil winding resistance that is too high or low will affect engine driveability. A fuel injector control circuit DTC may not set, but a misfire may be apparent. The fuel injector coil windings are affected by temperature. The resistance of the fuel injector coil windings will increase as the temperature of the fuel injector increases. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS - Monitoring the misfire current counters, or misfire graph, may help isolate the fuel injector that is causing the condition. - Operating the vehicle over a wide temperature range may help isolate the fuel injector that is causing the condition. - Perform the fuel injector coil test within the conditions of the customers concern. A fuel injector condition may only be apparent at a certain temperature, or under certain conditions. - If the fuel injector coil test does not isolate the condition perform the fuel injector balance test. Refer to Fuel Injector Balance Test with Special Tool or Fuel Injector Balance Test with Tech 2. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Injector Balance Test With Special Tool See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Injector Balance Test With Tech 2 TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Balance Test With Special Tool > Page 7828 Step 1 - Step 11 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 3. This step tests each fuel injector resistance within a specific temperature range. If any of the fuel injectors display a resistance outside of the specified value, replace the fuel injector. 4. This step determines if all of the fuel injectors are within 3 ohms of each other. If the highest resistance value is within 3 ohms of the lowest resistance value, then all of the fuel injector coil windings are OK. 6. This step determines if the ignition 1 voltage circuit under the intake plenum is causing the concern. 8. This step determines which fuel injector is faulty. After subtracting the highest and lowest resistance values from the average value, replace the fuel injector that has the greatest resistance difference from the average. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injector Replacement Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Fuel Injector Replacement FUEL INJECTOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Use care in removing the fuel injectors in order to prevent damage to the fuel injector electrical connector pins or the fuel injector nozzles. Do not immerse the fuel injector in any type of cleaner. The fuel injector is an electrical component and may be damaged by this cleaning method. IMPORTANT: If the fuel injectors are found to be leaking, the engine oil may be contaminated with fuel. 1. Remove the fuel rail. 2. Remove the fuel injector retaining clip (1). 3. Remove the fuel injector (3) from the fuel rail. 4. Remove the fuel injector upper O-ring (2). 5. Remove the fuel injector lower O-ring (4). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuel injector upper O-ring (2). 2. Install the fuel injector lower O-ring (4). 3. Lubricate the fuel injector upper O-ring (2) using GM P/N 12345616 (Canadian P/N 993182). 4. Install the fuel injector (3) to the fuel rail. 5. Install the fuel injector retaining clip (1). 6. Install the fuel rail. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injector Replacement > Page 7831 Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Fuel Injector Cleaning Procedure FUEL INJECTOR CLEANING PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED - J 37287 Fuel Line Shut-Off Adapters - J 35800-A Fuel Injector Cleaner - J 42873-1 3/8 Fuel Line Shut-Off Valve - J 42873-2 5/16 Return Pipe Shut-Off Valve - J 42964-1 3/8 Fuel Pipe Shut-Off Valve - J 42964-2 5/16 Fuel Pipe Shut-Off Valve NOTE: - GM Top-Engine Cleaner is the only injector cleaning agent recommended. Do not use other cleaning agents, as they may contain methanol which can damage fuel system components. - Under NO circumstances should the top engine cleaner be added to the vehicles fuel tank, as it may damage the fuel pump and other system components. - Do not exceed a 10 percent cleaning solution concentration. Higher concentrations may damage fuel system components. Testing has demonstrated that exceeding the 10 percent cleaning solution concentration does not improve the effectiveness of this procedure. IMPORTANT: - Vehicles with less than 160 km (100 mi) on the odometer should not have the injectors cleaned. These vehicles should have the injectors replaced. - During this procedure you will need a total of 960 ml (32.4 oz) of cleaning solution. That is 2 tanks of solution for the J 35800-A. Other brands of tools may have a different capacity and would therefore require more or less tanks to complete the procedure. You must use all 960 ml (32.4 oz) of solution to ensure complete injector cleaning. 1. Obtain J 35800-A (2). 2. For US dealers, empty 2 pre-measured GM Top-Engine Cleaner containers, 24 ml (0.812 oz) each, GM P/N 12346535, into the J 35800-A. IMPORTANT: Make sure the valve at the bottom of the canister (3) is closed. 3. For Canadian dealers, measure and dispense 48 ml (1.62 oz) of Top-Engine Cleaner, Canadian P/N 992872, into the J 35800-A. 4. If you are using any other brand of tank you will need a total of 96 ml (3.24 oz) of Top-Engine Cleaner mixed with 864 ml (29.16 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. 5. Fill the injector cleaning tank with regular unleaded gasoline. Be sure to follow all additional instructions provided with the tool. 6. Electrically disable the vehicle fuel pump by removing the fuel pump relay and disconnecting the oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. 7. Disconnect the fuel feed and return line, if equipped, at the fuel rail. Plug the fuel feed and return line, if equipped, coming off the fuel rail with J 37287 , or J 42964-1 , and J 42964-2 or J 42873-1 , and J 42873-2 as appropriate for the fuel system. 8. Connect the J 35800-A to the vehicle fuel rail. 9. Pressurize the J 35800-A to 510 kPa (75 psi). 10. Start and idle the engine until it stalls due to lack of fuel. This should take approximately 15-20 minutes. 11. Disconnect J 35800-A from the fuel rail. 12. Reconnect the vehicle fuel pump relay and oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. 13. Remove J 37287 or J 42964-1 , and J 42964-2 or J 42873-1 , and J 42873-2 and reconnect the vehicle fuel feed and return lines. 14. Start and idle the vehicle for an additional 2 minutes to ensure residual injector cleaner is flushed from the fuel rail and fuel lines. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injector Replacement > Page 7832 15. Repeat steps 1-5 of the Injector Balance Test, and record the fuel pressure drop from each injector. 16. Subtract the lowest fuel pressure drop from the highest fuel pressure drop. If the value is 15 kPa (2 psi) or less, no additional action is required. If the value is greater than 15 kPa (2 psi), replace the injector with the lowest fuel pressure drop. 17. Add one ounce of Port Fuel Injector Cleaner, GM P/N 12345104 (Canadian P/N 10953467), to the vehicle fuel tank for each gallon of gasoline estimated to be in the fuel tank. Instruct the customer to add the reminder of the bottle of Port Fuel Injector Cleaner to the vehicle fuel tank at the next fill-up. 18. Advise the customer to change brands of fuel and to add GM Port Fuel Injector Cleaner every 5000 km (3,000 mi). GM Port Fuel Injector Cleaner contains the same additives that the fuel companies are removing from the fuel to reduce costs. Regular use of GM Port Fuel Injector Cleaner should keep the customer from having to repeat the injector cleaning procedure. 19. Road test the vehicle to verify that the customer concern has been corrected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Line Coupler: Description and Operation FUEL PIPE O-RINGS O-rings seal the threaded connections in the fuel system. The fuel system O-ring seals are made of special material. Service the O-ring seals with the correct service part. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Metal Collar) Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Metal Collar) QUICK CONNECT FITTING(S) SERVICE (METAL COLLAR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 37088-A Fuel Line Disconnect Tool Set REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing any fuel system connection. Refer to the Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 2. Remove the retainer from the quick-connect fitting. 3. Blow dirt out of the fitting using compressed air. CAUTION: Refer to Fuel and Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hose/Pipe Connection Cleaning Notice in Service Precautions. - Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. 4. Choose the correct tool from the J 37088-A for the size of the fitting. Insert the tool into the female connector, then push inward in order to release the locking tabs. 5. Pull the connection apart. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Metal Collar) > Page 7838 CAUTION: Refer to Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution in Service Precautions. 6. Use a clean shop towel in order to wipe off the male pipe end. 7. Inspect both ends of the fitting for dirt and burrs. Clean or replace the components as required. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe end. CAUTION: Refer to Fuel Pipe Fitting Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Push both sides of the fitting together in order to snap the retaining tabs into place. 3. Once installed, pull on both sides of the fitting in order to make sure the connection is secure. 4. Install the retainer to the quick-connect fitting. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Metal Collar) > Page 7839 Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Plastic Collar) QUICK CONNECT FITTING(S) SERVICE (PLASTIC COLLAR) REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: There are several types of plastic collar fuel and evaporative emission quick connect fittings used on this vehicle. Bartholomew (1) - Q Release (2) - Squeeze to Release (3) - Sliding Retainer (4) The following instructions apply to all of these types of plastic collar quick connect fittings except where indicated. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing any fuel system connection. Refer to the Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 2. Using compressed air, blow any dirt out of the quick-connect fitting. CAUTION: Refer to Fuel and Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hose/Pipe Connection Cleaning Notice in Service Precautions. - Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Metal Collar) > Page 7840 3. This step applies to Bartholomew style connectors ONLY. Squeeze the plastic quick connect fitting release tabs. 4. This step applies to Q Release style connectors ONLY. Release the fitting by Pushing the tab toward the other side of the slot in the fitting. 5. This step applies to Squeeze to Release style connectors ONLY. Squeeze where indicated by arrows on both sides of the plastic ring surrounding the quick connect fitting. 6. This step applies to Sliding Retainer style connectors ONLY. Release the fitting by pressing on one side of the release tab causing it to push in slightly. If the tab doesn't move try pressing the tab in from the opposite side. The tab will only move in one direction Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Metal Collar) > Page 7841 7. Pull the connection apart. CAUTION: Refer to Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male connection end. CAUTION: Refer to Fuel Pipe Fitting Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Push both sides of the quick-connect fitting together in order to cause the retaining feature to snap into place. 3. Once installed, pull on both sides of the quick-connect fitting in order to make sure the connection is secure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pressure Regulator: Description and Operation FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR The fuel pressure regulator is integrated into the fuel filter cover on the primary fuel tank module. The fuel pressure regulator uses a spring with a preset tension and a stainless steel ball inserted into a precision ground seat in order to regulate fuel pressure. This type of fuel pressure regulator is not serviceable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF) ............................................................................................................................................. 384-425 kPa (50-60 psi) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 7851 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel system is a returnless on-demand design. The fuel pressure regulator is a part of the primary fuel tank module, eliminating the need for a return pipe from the engine. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel tank module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies high pressure fuel through the fuel filter, past the fuel pressure regulator, and through the fuel feed pipe to the fuel injection system. The fuel pressure regulator has a T-joint that diverts the needed fuel to the fuel rail with the unused fuel dropping back into the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The primary fuel tank module contains a reverse flow check valve. The check valve and the fuel pressure regulator maintain fuel pressure in the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail in order to prevent long cranking times. The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank. TEST Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 7852 Step 1 - Step 6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 7853 Step 7 - Step 13 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7857 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7858 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7859 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7862 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7863 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7864 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7865 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7866 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7867 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7868 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7869 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7870 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7871 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7872 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7873 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7874 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7875 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7876 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7877 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7878 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7879 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7880 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7881 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7882 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7883 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7884 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7885 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7886 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7887 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7888 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7889 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7890 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7891 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7892 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7893 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7894 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7895 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7896 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7897 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7898 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7899 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7900 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7901 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7902 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7903 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7904 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7905 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7906 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7907 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7908 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7909 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7910 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7911 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7912 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7913 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7914 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7915 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7916 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7917 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7918 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7919 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7920 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7921 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7922 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7923 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7924 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7925 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7926 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7927 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7928 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7929 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7930 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7931 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7932 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7933 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7934 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Pickup Filter > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pump Pickup Filter: Description and Operation FUEL STRAINER The fuel strainer attaches to the lower end of the primary fuel tank module. The fuel strainer is made of woven plastic. The functions of the fuel strainer are to filter contaminants and to wick fuel. The fuel strainer normally requires no maintenance. Fuel stoppage at this point indicates that the fuel tank contains an abnormal amount of sediment or contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Rail: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL ASSEMBLY The fuel rail assembly attaches to the engine intake manifold. The fuel rail assembly performs the following functions: - Positions the injectors in the intake manifold - Distributes fuel evenly to the injectors - Integrates the fuel pulse dampener into the fuel metering system Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7941 Fuel Rail: Service and Repair FUEL RAIL ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury that may result from a fuel leak, always install the fuel injector O-rings in the proper position. If the upper and lower O-rings are different colors (black and brown), be sure to install the black O-ring in the upper position and the brown O-ring in the lower position on the fuel injector. The O-rings are the same size but are made of different materials. IMPORTANT: When servicing the fuel rail assembly, precautions must be taken to prevent dirt and other contaminants from entering the fuel passages. It is recommended that the fittings be capped, and the holes be plugged during servicing. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 2. Remove the upper intake manifold. 3. Disconnect the engine fuel feed pipe (1) at the fuel rail (4). 4. Disconnect the main fuel injector harness electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the coolant temperature sensor and camshaft position sensor electrical connectors 6. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the fuel injectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7942 7. Remove the fuel rail retaining bolts (2). 8. Remove the fuel rail assembly (1). 9. Remove the injector O-ring seal from the spray tip end of each injector. 10. If removing the fuel injectors from the fuel rail is necessary. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NOTE: Use care when servicing the fuel system components, especially the fuel injector electrical connectors, the fuel injector tips, and the injector O-rings. Plug the inlet and the outlet ports of the fuel rail in order to prevent contamination. - Do not use compressed air to clean the fuel rail assembly as this may damage the fuel rail components. - Do not immerse the fuel rail assembly in a solvent bath in order to prevent damage to the fuel rail assembly. 1. If the fuel injectors were removed from the fuel rail. 2. Lubricate the fuel injector O-rings using GM P/N 12345616, (Canadian P/N 993182) 3. Install the fuel injector nozzles into the lower intake manifold injector bores. 4. Press on the fuel rail (1) using the palms of both hands until the fuel injectors are fully seated. 5. Install the fuel rail attaching bolts (2). Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7943 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Install the injector electrical harness to the fuel rail. 7. Apply lubricant to the fuel injector electrical connectors. GM P/N 12377900, (Canadian P/N 10953529). 8. Connect the fuel injector electrical connectors. 9. Connect the coolant temperature sensor and camshaft position sensor electrical connectors 10. Connect the main fuel injector electrical harness connector. 11. Connect the fuel feed pipe (1) at the fuel rail (4). 12. Install the upper intake manifold. 13. Connect the negative battery cable. 14. Inspect for fuel leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Return Line: Description and Operation FUEL FEED PIPES The fuel feed pipe carries fuel from the fuel tank to the fuel injection system. The fuel pipe consists of 3 sections: - The rear fuel pipe is located from the top of the fuel tank to the chassis fuel pipe. The rear fuel pipe is constructed of nylon. - The chassis fuel pipe is located under the vehicle and connects the rear fuel pipe to the engine compartment fuel pipe. The chassis fuel pipe is constructed of steel with a section of rubber hose. - The engine compartment fuel pipe connects the chassis fuel feed pipe to the fuel rail. The engine compartment fuel pipe is constructed of steel. NYLON FUEL PIPES CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury observe the following items: - Replace all nylon fuel pipes that are nicked, scratched or damaged during installation, do not attempt to repair the sections of the nylon fuel pipes - Do not hammer directly on the fuel harness body clips when installing new fuel pipes. Damage to the nylon pipes may result in a fuel leak. - Always cover nylon vapor pipes with a wet towel before using a torch near them. Also, never expose the vehicle to temperatures higher than 115°C (239°F) for more than one hour, or more than 90°C (194°F) for any extended period. - Apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe ends before connecting fuel pipe fittings. This will ensure proper reconnection and prevent a possible fuel leak. (During normal operation, the O-rings located in the female connector will swell and may prevent proper reconnection if not lubricated.) Nylon pipes are constructed to withstand maximum fuel system pressure, exposure to fuel additives, and changes in temperature. The following 2 sizes of nylon pipes are used: - 9.53 mm (3/8 in) ID for the fuel feed - 12.7 mm (1/2 in) ID for the vent Heat resistant rubber hose or corrugated plastic conduit protect the sections of the pipes that are exposed to chafing, high temperature, or vibration. Nylon fuel pipes are somewhat flexible and can be formed around gradual turns under the vehicle. However, if nylon fuel pipes are forced into sharp bends, the pipes kink and restrict the fuel flow. Also, once exposed to fuel, nylon pipes may become stiffer and are more likely to kink if bent too far. Take special care when working on a vehicle with nylon fuel pipes. FUEL PIPE O-RINGS O-rings seal the threaded connections in the fuel system. The fuel system O-ring seals are made of special material. Service the O-ring seals with the correct service part. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Chassis Fuel Return Line: Service and Repair Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Chassis FUEL HOSE/PIPES REPLACEMENT - CHASSIS REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Do not allow smoking or the use of open flames in the area where work on the fuel or EVAP system is taking place. Anytime work is being done on the fuel system, disconnect the negative battery cable, except for those tests where battery voltage is required. - Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. - Whenever fuel lines are removed, catch fuel in an approved container. Container opening must be a minimum of 300 mm (12 in) diameter to adequately catch the fluid. NOTE: Fuel/Vapor lines cannot be spliced or repaired. The line must be replaced (if damaged) with the same type of line. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 2. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (2) from the chassis fuel hose/pipe (3). 4. Cap the fuel hose/pipes to prevent contamination and fuel leakage. 5. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Chassis > Page 7949 6. Disconnect the chassis fuel hose/pipe (2) from the fuel tank. 7. Cap the fuel hose/pipes to prevent contamination and fuel leakage. 8. Release the pipe retainers (1) from the vehicle underbody. 9. Remove the fuel hose/pipe from the pipe retainers. 10. Remove the fuel hose/pipe from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuel hose/pipe to the vehicle. 2. Install the fuel hose/pipe from the pipe retainers. 3. Attach the pipe retainers (1) to the vehicle underbody. 4. Remove the caps from the fuel pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Chassis > Page 7950 5. Connect the chassis fuel hose/pipe (2) to the fuel tank. 6. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. 7. Remove the caps from the fuel pipes. 8. Connect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (2) to the chassis fuel hose/pipe (3). 9. Connect the negative battery terminal. 10. Prime the fuel system. 1. Cycle the ignition ON for 5 seconds and then OFF for 10 seconds. Repeat cycling twice. 2. Crank the engine until it starts. The maximum starter motor cranking time is 20 seconds. 3. If the engine does not start, repeat steps. 11. Run the engine and check the system for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Chassis > Page 7951 Fuel Return Line: Service and Repair Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment FUEL HOSE/PIPES REPLACEMENT - ENGINE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Do not attempt to repair the engine fuel feed pipe or the engine fuel return pipe. Replace a damaged engine fuel feed pipe or the engine fuel return pipe. 1. Remove the exhaust crossover pipe. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Remove the 2 nuts securing the fuel hose/pipe to the engine and transaxle. 4. Remove the fuel hose/pipe retainers from the threaded studs on the engine and transaxle. 5. Clean all engine fuel pipe connections and areas surrounding the engine fuel pipe connections before disconnecting the engine fuel pipe connections to avoid possible contamination of the fuel system. 6. Disconnect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (2) from the chassis fuel hose/pipe (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Chassis > Page 7952 7. Cap the fuel hose/pipes to prevent contamination and fuel leakage. 8. Disconnect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (1) from the fuel rail (4). 9. Cap the fuel hose/pipes to prevent contamination and fuel leakage. 10. Remove the fuel hose/pipe from the fuel pipe retainer (2). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the fuel hose/pipe to the engine. 2. Install the fuel hose/pipe retainers to the threaded studs on the engine and transaxle. 3. Install the 2 nuts securing the fuel hose/pipe to the engine and transaxle. Tighten the nuts to 28 N.m (21 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Chassis > Page 7953 4. Install the fuel hose/pipe to the fuel pipe retainer (2). 5. Remove the caps from the fuel pipes. 6. Connect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (1) to the fuel rail (4). 7. Remove the caps from the fuel pipes. 8. Connect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (2) to the chassis fuel hose/pipe (3). 9. Install the exhaust crossover pipe. 10. Prime the fuel system. 1. Cycle the ignition ON for 5 seconds and then OFF for 10 seconds. 2. Repeat step 7.1 twice. 3. Crank the engine until it starts. The maximum starter motor cranking time is 20 seconds. 4. If the engine does not start, repeat steps 7.1-7.4. 11. Run the engine and check for fuel system leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Supply Line: Description and Operation FUEL FEED PIPES The fuel feed pipe carries fuel from the fuel tank to the fuel injection system. The fuel pipe consists of 3 sections: - The rear fuel pipe is located from the top of the fuel tank to the chassis fuel pipe. The rear fuel pipe is constructed of nylon. - The chassis fuel pipe is located under the vehicle and connects the rear fuel pipe to the engine compartment fuel pipe. The chassis fuel pipe is constructed of steel with a section of rubber hose. - The engine compartment fuel pipe connects the chassis fuel feed pipe to the fuel rail. The engine compartment fuel pipe is constructed of steel. NYLON FUEL PIPES CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury observe the following items: - Replace all nylon fuel pipes that are nicked, scratched or damaged during installation, do not attempt to repair the sections of the nylon fuel pipes - Do not hammer directly on the fuel harness body clips when installing new fuel pipes. Damage to the nylon pipes may result in a fuel leak. - Always cover nylon vapor pipes with a wet towel before using a torch near them. Also, never expose the vehicle to temperatures higher than 115°C (239°F) for more than one hour, or more than 90°C (194°F) for any extended period. - Apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe ends before connecting fuel pipe fittings. This will ensure proper reconnection and prevent a possible fuel leak. (During normal operation, the O-rings located in the female connector will swell and may prevent proper reconnection if not lubricated.) Nylon pipes are constructed to withstand maximum fuel system pressure, exposure to fuel additives, and changes in temperature. The following 2 sizes of nylon pipes are used: - 9.53 mm (3/8 in) ID for the fuel feed - 12.7 mm (1/2 in) ID for the vent Heat resistant rubber hose or corrugated plastic conduit protect the sections of the pipes that are exposed to chafing, high temperature, or vibration. Nylon fuel pipes are somewhat flexible and can be formed around gradual turns under the vehicle. However, if nylon fuel pipes are forced into sharp bends, the pipes kink and restrict the fuel flow. Also, once exposed to fuel, nylon pipes may become stiffer and are more likely to kink if bent too far. Take special care when working on a vehicle with nylon fuel pipes. FUEL PIPE O-RINGS O-rings seal the threaded connections in the fuel system. The fuel system O-ring seals are made of special material. Service the O-ring seals with the correct service part. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Chassis Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Chassis FUEL HOSE/PIPES REPLACEMENT - CHASSIS REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Do not allow smoking or the use of open flames in the area where work on the fuel or EVAP system is taking place. Anytime work is being done on the fuel system, disconnect the negative battery cable, except for those tests where battery voltage is required. - Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. - Whenever fuel lines are removed, catch fuel in an approved container. Container opening must be a minimum of 300 mm (12 in) diameter to adequately catch the fluid. NOTE: Fuel/Vapor lines cannot be spliced or repaired. The line must be replaced (if damaged) with the same type of line. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 2. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (2) from the chassis fuel hose/pipe (3). 4. Cap the fuel hose/pipes to prevent contamination and fuel leakage. 5. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Chassis > Page 7959 6. Disconnect the chassis fuel hose/pipe (2) from the fuel tank. 7. Cap the fuel hose/pipes to prevent contamination and fuel leakage. 8. Release the pipe retainers (1) from the vehicle underbody. 9. Remove the fuel hose/pipe from the pipe retainers. 10. Remove the fuel hose/pipe from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuel hose/pipe to the vehicle. 2. Install the fuel hose/pipe from the pipe retainers. 3. Attach the pipe retainers (1) to the vehicle underbody. 4. Remove the caps from the fuel pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Chassis > Page 7960 5. Connect the chassis fuel hose/pipe (2) to the fuel tank. 6. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. 7. Remove the caps from the fuel pipes. 8. Connect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (2) to the chassis fuel hose/pipe (3). 9. Connect the negative battery terminal. 10. Prime the fuel system. 1. Cycle the ignition ON for 5 seconds and then OFF for 10 seconds. Repeat cycling twice. 2. Crank the engine until it starts. The maximum starter motor cranking time is 20 seconds. 3. If the engine does not start, repeat steps. 11. Run the engine and check the system for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Chassis > Page 7961 Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment FUEL HOSE/PIPES REPLACEMENT - ENGINE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Do not attempt to repair the engine fuel feed pipe or the engine fuel return pipe. Replace a damaged engine fuel feed pipe or the engine fuel return pipe. 1. Remove the exhaust crossover pipe. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Remove the 2 nuts securing the fuel hose/pipe to the engine and transaxle. 4. Remove the fuel hose/pipe retainers from the threaded studs on the engine and transaxle. 5. Clean all engine fuel pipe connections and areas surrounding the engine fuel pipe connections before disconnecting the engine fuel pipe connections to avoid possible contamination of the fuel system. 6. Disconnect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (2) from the chassis fuel hose/pipe (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Chassis > Page 7962 7. Cap the fuel hose/pipes to prevent contamination and fuel leakage. 8. Disconnect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (1) from the fuel rail (4). 9. Cap the fuel hose/pipes to prevent contamination and fuel leakage. 10. Remove the fuel hose/pipe from the fuel pipe retainer (2). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the fuel hose/pipe to the engine. 2. Install the fuel hose/pipe retainers to the threaded studs on the engine and transaxle. 3. Install the 2 nuts securing the fuel hose/pipe to the engine and transaxle. Tighten the nuts to 28 N.m (21 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Chassis > Page 7963 4. Install the fuel hose/pipe to the fuel pipe retainer (2). 5. Remove the caps from the fuel pipes. 6. Connect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (1) to the fuel rail (4). 7. Remove the caps from the fuel pipes. 8. Connect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (2) to the chassis fuel hose/pipe (3). 9. Install the exhaust crossover pipe. 10. Prime the fuel system. 1. Cycle the ignition ON for 5 seconds and then OFF for 10 seconds. 2. Repeat step 7.1 twice. 3. Crank the engine until it starts. The maximum starter motor cranking time is 20 seconds. 4. If the engine does not start, repeat steps 7.1-7.4. 11. Run the engine and check for fuel system leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Filler Hose: Description and Operation FUEL FILL PIPE The fuel fill pipe has a built-in restrictor in order to prevent refueling with leaded fuel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7968 Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair FILLER TUBE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Ensure that the fuel level in the tank is less than 1/4 full. If necessary, drain the fuel tank to at least this level. Refer to Fuel Tank Draining Procedure. IMPORTANT: Replacement fuel filler tube hoses do not come equipped with hose clamps. Obtain replacement hose clamps prior to beginning this service procedure. CAUTION: Do not allow smoking or the use of open flames in the area where work on the fuel or EVAP system is taking place. Anytime work is being done on the fuel system, disconnect the negative battery cable, except for those tests where battery voltage is required. 2. Remove the fuel filler cap. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the right rear wheel and tire. 5. Remove the right rear wheelhouse inner liner. 6. Loosen the fuel filler tube hose clamp. 7. Disconnect the fuel filler tube, the fuel filler vent tube, and the fresh air hose from the fuel tank. 8. Remove the fuel filler tube bracket bolts (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7969 9. Remove the fuel filler tube (1) from the vehicle. 10. Remove the closeout grommet. 11. Separate the fresh air hose from the fuel filler tube. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7970 1. Attach the fresh air hose to the fuel filler tube. 2. Install the closeout grommet. 3. Position the fuel filler tube (1) to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7971 4. Position the fuel filler tube to the closeout grommet (1). 5. Install the fuel filler tube bracket bolts (2). Tighten the bolt to 12 N.m (106 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Position the filler tube-to-fuel tank connecting hose and hose clamp. Tighten the clamp to 5 N.m (44 lb in). IMPORTANT: Ensure that the fuel filler tube connecting hose is installed until it touches the fuel tank body. The hose clamp should be located within 13 mm (1/2 in) of the end of the connecting hose. 7. Connect the fuel filler vent tube and fresh air hose. 8. Install the inner wheelhouse liner. 9. Install the wheel and tire. 10. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. 11. Install the fuel filler cap. 12. Perform the Service Bay Diagnostic Test for the EVAP emission system using the scan tool. This test will verify the integrity of the vapor handling areas of the fuel system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-04-001 > Jan > 09 > Fuel System - MIL ON/DTC's P0455/P0442 Fuel Filler Neck: Customer Interest Fuel System - MIL ON/DTC's P0455/P0442 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-001 Date: January 08, 2009 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Check Engine Light On, DTC P0442 or P0455 Set (Perform Outlined Repair) Models: 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on a check engine light on. Upon further investigation, the technician may find DTC P0442 (EVAP small leak) or P0455 (EVAP large leak) set as current or in history. Cause This condition may be caused by the rubber grommet at the fuel tank filler neck not being properly seated. In some situations, the inner lip of the grommet may ride over the top of the filler neck, preventing the fuel cap from tightening properly, resulting in poor sealing. This can set the small or large leak diagnostic codes. Correction DO NOT replace the fuel cap for this condition. Follow the instructions listed below. 1. Inspect the rubber grommet for damage. Replace if necessary. 2. Ensure that the grommet is correctly seated to the fuel filler neck pocket. 3. If the grommet is not correctly seated, use a non-metallic tool to push down on the inner lip of the grommet, folding it inward on the fill pipe. This will prevent the possibility of the inner lip interfering with the fuel cap. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-04-001 > Jan > 09 > Fuel System - MIL ON/DTC's P0455/P0442 > Page 7980 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-06-04-022G > Jul > 09 > Fuel System -07-06-04-022G End Of Need For Information Fuel Filler Neck: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System -07-06-04-022G End Of Need For Information ENGINEERING INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-022G Date: July 31, 2009 Subject: EI07238 - Fuel Cap May Not Seal, MIL/SES Light Illuminated with DTC P0442 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Small Leak Detected and/or P0455 - Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Large Leak Detected (Engineering Information Closed) Models: 2005 Cadillac DeVille 2005-2006 Cadillac SRX 2005-2007 Cadillac XLR, XLR-V 2005-2007 Chevrolet Corvette 2006-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 Chevrolet Express 2007-2008 GMC Savana 2005 Pontiac Bonneville 2006 Pontiac GTO 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent 2005-2007 Saturn VUE Equipped with Engine RPOs LJ3, LC3, L61, LK9, LNJ, LP9, L36, L66, LH2, LD8, LY2, LR4, LS2, LY6, LS7 Please Refer to GMVIS Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to end the need for information from the field. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-022F (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Additional information is no longer needed by Engineering. Refer to the published diagnostics and repairs in SI to correct this concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-06-04-001 > Jan > 09 > Fuel System - MIL ON/DTC's P0455/P0442 Fuel Filler Neck: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - MIL ON/DTC's P0455/P0442 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-001 Date: January 08, 2009 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Check Engine Light On, DTC P0442 or P0455 Set (Perform Outlined Repair) Models: 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on a check engine light on. Upon further investigation, the technician may find DTC P0442 (EVAP small leak) or P0455 (EVAP large leak) set as current or in history. Cause This condition may be caused by the rubber grommet at the fuel tank filler neck not being properly seated. In some situations, the inner lip of the grommet may ride over the top of the filler neck, preventing the fuel cap from tightening properly, resulting in poor sealing. This can set the small or large leak diagnostic codes. Correction DO NOT replace the fuel cap for this condition. Follow the instructions listed below. 1. Inspect the rubber grommet for damage. Replace if necessary. 2. Ensure that the grommet is correctly seated to the fuel filler neck pocket. 3. If the grommet is not correctly seated, use a non-metallic tool to push down on the inner lip of the grommet, folding it inward on the fill pipe. This will prevent the possibility of the inner lip interfering with the fuel cap. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-06-04-001 > Jan > 09 > Fuel System - MIL ON/DTC's P0455/P0442 > Page 7990 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-06-04-006 > Jan > 06 > Fuel System - Fuel Filler Neck Flapper Door Elimination Fuel Filler Neck: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Filler Neck Flapper Door Elimination Bulletin No.: 06-06-04-006 Date: January 30, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Elimination of Fuel Filler Tube Flapper Door Models: 2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2006 HUMMER H2, H3 2006 Saab 9-7X Attention: The flapper door located in the fuel filler neck has been eliminated on the current Buick LaCrosse (Buick Allure, Canada Only) in production. This change will be progressively rolled into the other GM products listed above. Do Not attempt to change the fuel filler tube because the flapper is not present. New Metal Fuel Filler Tubes Without a Flapper Door A revised style of fuel filler tube has changed materials from plastic to metal construction. On plastic fuel filler necks, the metal flapper was included as a safe discharge point for static electricity. With the metal style of fuel filler tube, the entire neck serves as the static discharge point making the flapper redundant. Important: Do Not attempt to change the fuel filler tube because the flapper is not present. Replacement fuel filler tubes will not be equipped with the flapper. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 8000 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 8001 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 8002 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 8008 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 8009 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 8010 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagrams Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Primary Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Secondary Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Tank Unit: Diagrams Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Primary Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Secondary Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8020 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8021 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8022 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations P0715 - P0719: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis for all P codes - See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8029 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8030 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8031 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8032 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8033 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8034 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8035 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8036 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8037 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8038 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8039 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8040 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8041 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8045 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8046 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8047 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Under The Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8052 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8053 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The accelerator pedal contains 2 individual accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors within the assembly. The APP sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits: - A 5-volt reference circuit - A low reference circuit - A signal circuit The APP sensors are used to determine the pedal angle. The powertrain control module (PCM) provides each APP sensor with a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensors provide the PCM with signal voltage proportional to the pedal movement. Both APP sensor signal voltages are low at rest position and increase as the pedal is applied. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8054 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR PEDAL WITH POSITION SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor connector. 3. Disconnect the APP sensor harness connector. 4. Remove the APP assembly attachment bolts. IMPORTANT: Due to clearance issues, the upper attachment bolt cannot be removed from the accelerator pedal assembly. Loose then bolt completely and leave the bolt in the component until the assembly is removed from the vehicle. 5. Remove the APP assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8055 1. Install the upper attachment bolt into the APP assembly. 2. Install the APP assembly into the vehicle. 3. Install the remaining attachment bolts into the APP assembly. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the APP sensor harness connector. Push the connector in until the lock position is felt, then pull back to confirm engagement. 5. Install the CPA to the APP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8061 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8062 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8063 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8064 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8065 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8066 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8067 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8068 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8069 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8070 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8071 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8072 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8073 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8074 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8075 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8076 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8077 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8078 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8079 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8080 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8081 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8082 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8083 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8084 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8085 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8086 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8087 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8088 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8089 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8090 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8091 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8092 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8093 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8094 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8095 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8096 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8097 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8098 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8099 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8100 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8101 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8102 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8103 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8104 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8105 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8106 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8107 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8108 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8109 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8110 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8111 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8112 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8113 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8114 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8115 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8116 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8117 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8118 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8119 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8120 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8121 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8122 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8123 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8124 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8125 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8126 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8127 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8128 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8129 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8130 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8131 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8132 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8133 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8134 Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8135 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the MAF from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the MAF to air cleaner assembly seal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8136 1. Install the seal to the MAF. 2. Install the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 3. Install the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. Tighten the screws to 4 N.m (35 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8141 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8142 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8143 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8144 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8145 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8146 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8147 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8148 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8149 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8150 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8151 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8152 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8153 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8154 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8155 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8156 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8157 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8158 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8159 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8160 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8161 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8162 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8163 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8164 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8165 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8166 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8167 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8168 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8169 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8170 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8171 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8172 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8173 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8174 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8175 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8176 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8177 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8178 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8179 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8180 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8181 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8182 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8183 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8184 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8185 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8186 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8187 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8188 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8189 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8190 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8191 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8192 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8193 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8194 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8195 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8196 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8197 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8198 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8199 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8200 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8201 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8202 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8203 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8204 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8205 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8206 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8207 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8208 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8209 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8210 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8211 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8212 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8213 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Throttle Body Assembly Replacement Throttle Body: Service and Repair Throttle Body Assembly Replacement THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: The throttle actuator control (TAC) module is not replaceable separate of the throttle body assembly. If the TAC module requires replacement the entire throttle body assembly must be replaced. 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Remove the heater outlet pipe. 3. Cover the throttle body opening with a shop towel and use the shop air to remove any dirt at the base of the throttle body. 4. Disconnect the TAC module electrical connector (1) by pulling up on the connector lock (2) to release the connector from the TAC module (3). 5. Remove the throttle body bolts (2). 6. Remove the throttle body (1) from the intake manifold 7. Block the intake manifold opening with a clean shop towel to prevent dirt from entering. 8. Remove the throttle body studs ONLY If replacement of stud is necessary. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the throttle body studs if previously removed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Throttle Body Assembly Replacement > Page 8218 Tighten the throttle body stud to 6 N.m (53 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the throttle body (1) to the intake manifold 3. Install the throttle body bolts. Tighten the throttle body-to-intake manifold bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the TAC module electrical connector (1) to the TAC module (3) then press down the connector lock (2) in order to secure the TAC module electrical connector. 5. Install the heater outlet pipe. 6. Install the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Throttle Body Assembly Replacement > Page 8219 Throttle Body: Service and Repair Throttle Body Cleaning Procedure THROTTLE BODY CLEANING PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: Over extended time and mileage, deposits may accumulate on the back of the throttle valve plate. The source of the deposit is exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) gas. Typically these deposits pose no problem. Occasionally the deposit may accumulate to a point where perceived pedal effort or throttle valve movement is effected. This procedure should not be performed on vehicles with mileage under 80 450 km (50,000 mi). 1. Remove the air intake duct. CAUTION: Turn OFF the ignition before inserting fingers into the throttle bore. Unexpected movement of the throttle blade could cause personal injury. NOTE: Do not insert any tools into the throttle body bore in order to avoid damage to the throttle valve plate. 2. Inspect the throttle body bore and the throttle valve plate for deposits. You will need to open the throttle valve in order to inspect all surfaces. NOTE: Do not use any solvent that contains Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK). This solvent may damage fuel system components. 3. Clean the throttle body bore and the throttle valve plate using a clean shop towel with GM top engine cleaner, GM P/N 1052626 (Canadian P/N 993026) or AC-Delco Carburetor Tune-Up Conditioner, P/N X66-P, or an equivalent product. 4. Install the air intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8224 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8225 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8226 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8227 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8228 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8229 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8230 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8231 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8232 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8233 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8234 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8235 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8236 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8237 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8238 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8239 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8240 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8241 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8242 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8243 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8244 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8245 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8246 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8247 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8248 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8249 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8250 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8251 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8252 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8253 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8254 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8255 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8256 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8257 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8258 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8259 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8260 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8261 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8262 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8263 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8264 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8265 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8266 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8267 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8268 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8269 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8270 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8271 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8272 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8273 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8274 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8275 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8276 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8277 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8278 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8279 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8280 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8281 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8282 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8283 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8284 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8285 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8286 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8287 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8288 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8289 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8290 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8291 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8292 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8293 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8294 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8295 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8296 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8303 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8304 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8305 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8306 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8307 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8308 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8309 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8310 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8311 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8312 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8313 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8314 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8315 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8316 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8317 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8318 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8319 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8320 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8321 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8322 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8323 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8324 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8325 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8326 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8327 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8328 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8329 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8330 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8331 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8332 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8333 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8334 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8335 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8336 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8337 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8338 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8339 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8340 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8341 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8342 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8343 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8344 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8345 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8346 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8347 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8348 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8349 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8350 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8351 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8352 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8353 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8354 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8355 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8356 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8357 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8358 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8359 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8360 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8361 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8362 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8363 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8364 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8365 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8366 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8367 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8368 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8369 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8370 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8371 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8372 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8373 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8374 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8375 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8376 Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8377 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor does not directly affect the operation of the ignition system. The CMP sensor information is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to determine the position of the valve train relative to the crankshaft position. By monitoring the CMP and crankshaft position (CKP) signals, the PCM can accurately time the operation of the fuel injectors. The PCM supplies the sensor with a 12-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8378 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt. 3. Remove the CMP sensor. 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-rings for wear, cracks, or leakage if the sensor is being reused. Replace the O-rings if damaged. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the CMP sensor O-rings with clean engine oil. 2. Install the CMP sensor. 3. Install the CMP sensor bolt. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8384 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8385 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8386 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8387 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8388 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8389 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8390 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8391 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8392 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8393 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8394 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8395 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8396 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8397 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8398 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8399 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8400 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8401 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8402 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8403 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8404 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8405 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8406 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8407 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8408 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8409 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8410 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8411 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8412 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8413 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8414 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8415 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8416 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8417 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8418 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8419 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8420 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8421 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8422 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8423 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8424 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8425 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8426 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8427 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8428 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8429 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8430 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8431 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8432 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8433 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8434 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8435 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8436 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8437 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8438 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8439 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8440 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8441 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8442 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8443 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8444 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8445 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8446 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8447 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8448 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8449 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8450 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8451 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8452 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8453 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8454 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8455 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8456 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8457 Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8458 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a 3-wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses 2 magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets, the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The CKP sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 24 times per crankshaft revolution. The pulse width encoding pattern is used to synchronize the coil firing sequence with the crankshaft position. The CKP sensor is used for ignition timing, fuel injector timing, misfire diagnostics, and tachometer display. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a 12-volt reference, a low reference, and a medium resolution engine speed signal circuit to the CKP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CKP sensor nut (2). 4. Remove the CKP sensor (1) from the engine. 5. Inspect for wear, cracks, or leakage if the CKP sensor is being reused. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil. Replace the O-rings if damaged. 2. Install the CKP sensor (1) to the block. 3. Install the CKP sensor nut (1). Tighten the nut to 11 N.m (97 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 8461 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 8462 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: - The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. - The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A powertrain control module (PCM) replacement - A crankshaft balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the PCM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC. 3. With a scan tool, select the CKP variation learn procedure and perform the following: 1. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 2. Block drive wheels. 3. Set parking brake. 4. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 5. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 6. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 7. Start and idle engine. 8. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 9. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 10. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). IMPORTANT: The engine should not accelerate beyond the calibrated fuel cut-off RPM value noted in step 3.1. Release the throttle immediately if the value is exceeded. - While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 4. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC. 5. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully in order to store the CKP system variation values in the PCM memory. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Spark Plug Wire Resistance...................................................................................................................................... 4,018 ohm per meter (1,225 ohm per ft) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8466 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG WIRE INSPECTION Spark plug wire integrity is vital for proper engine operation. A thorough inspection will be necessary to accurately identify conditions that may affect engine operation. Refer to the list below for items to be inspected. 1. Inspect for correct routing of the spark plug wires. Improper routing may cause cross-firing. 2. Inspect each wire for any signs of cracks or splits in the wire. 3. Inspect each boot for the following conditions: - Tearing - Piercing - Arcing - Carbon tracking - Corroded terminal If corrosion, carbon tracking, or arcing are indicated on a spark plug wire boot or terminal, both the wire and the component connected to the wire should be replaced. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8467 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG WIRE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Remove the spark plug wires (1) from the left side spark plugs. NOTE: Twist the spark plug boot one-half turn in order to release the boot. Pull on the spark plug boot only. Do not pull on the spark plug wire or the wire could be damaged. 3. Remove the spark plug wires from the retaining clips (2). 4. Remove the spark plug wires (1) from the right side spark plugs. 5. Remove the spark plug wires from the retaining clips (2). 6. Remove the spark plug wires from the ignition coil/control module. 7. Remove the spark plug wires from the engine. 8. If you are replacing the spark plug wires, transfer any of the following components: - Boot heat shields - Spark plug wire conduit - Spark plug wire retaining clips Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8468 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the ignition coil/control module. 2. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the right side spark plugs. 3. Install the spark plug wires to the retaining clips (2). 4. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the left side spark plugs. 5. Install the spark plug wires to the retaining clips (2). 6. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Description and Operation Ignition Coil: Description and Operation IGNITION CONTROL MODULE (ICM)/COILS There are 3 dual-tower ignition coils that are part of the ignition control module (ICM). The ICM contains coil driver circuits that command the coils to operate. The ICM has the following circuits: - An ignition voltage circuit - A ground circuit - An IC 1 control circuit for the 1-4 ignition coil - An IC 2 control circuit for the 2-5 ignition coil - An IC 3 control circuit for the 3-6 ignition coil - A low reference circuit The powertrain control module (PCM) controls each dual-tower ignition coil by transmitting timing pulses on the ignition control (IC) circuit to the ICM for the proper coil to enable a spark event. The spark plugs are connected to each coil tower by spark plug wires. The spark plug wires conduct the spark energy from the coil to the spark plug. The spark plug electrode is tipped with platinum for long wear and higher efficiency. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8472 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair IGNITION COIL/CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the spark plug wires. Note the position from which the wires are removed. 3. Disconnect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 5. Remove the ignition coil/control module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 2. Install the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. Tighten the bolts to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8473 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Connect the spark plug wires. 5. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8477 Ignition Control Module (ICM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8478 Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation IGNITION CONTROL MODULE (ICM)/COILS There are 3 dual-tower ignition coils that are part of the ignition control module (ICM). The ICM contains coil driver circuits that command the coils to operate. The ICM has the following circuits: - An ignition voltage circuit - A ground circuit - An IC 1 control circuit for the 1-4 ignition coil - An IC 2 control circuit for the 2-5 ignition coil - An IC 3 control circuit for the 3-6 ignition coil - A low reference circuit The powertrain control module (PCM) controls each dual-tower ignition coil by transmitting timing pulses on the ignition control (IC) circuit to the ICM for the proper coil to enable a spark event. The spark plugs are connected to each coil tower by spark plug wires. The spark plug wires conduct the spark energy from the coil to the spark plug. The spark plug electrode is tipped with platinum for long wear and higher efficiency. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement IGNITION COIL/CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the spark plug wires. Note the position from which the wires are removed. 3. Disconnect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 5. Remove the ignition coil/control module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 2. Install the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. Tighten the bolts to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 8481 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Connect the spark plug wires. 5. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 8482 Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair Ignition Control Module Bracket IGNITION CONTROL MODULE BRACKET REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 3. Remove the spark plug wire retainer (1) from the ignition control module bracket. 4. Remove the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 5. Position the ignition coil/control module aside out of the way. 6. Remove the bolt (3) from the fuel injector wire harness bracket (4) and positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve fresh air tube retainer. 7. Remove the engine wire harness retainers from the ignition control module bracket studs (5). 8. Remove the nut (1) retaining the heater outlet pipe. 9. Lift pipe up slightly to gain access for the removal of the 2 ignition control module bracket bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 8483 10. Remove the ignition control module bracket bolts (2). 11. Remove the ignition control module bracket nuts (6). 12. Remove the ignition control module bracket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition control module bracket. 2. Install the ignition control module bracket nuts (6). Tighten the nuts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the ignition control module bracket bolts (2). Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 8484 4. Install the nut (1) retaining the heater outlet pipe. Tighten the nut to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 5. Install the engine wire harness retainers to the ignition control module bracket studs (5). 6. Install the bolt (3) from the fuel injector wire harness bracket (4) and PCV valve fresh air tube retainer. Tighten the bolts to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 7. Install the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 8. Install the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. Tighten the bolts to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). 9. Install the spark plug wire retainer (1) to the ignition control module bracket. 10. Connect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 11. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection IGNITION RELAY DIAGNOSIS CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ignition relay is normally an open relay. The relay armature is held in the open position by spring tension. When the ignition switch is turned to the Run or Start position, current will flow through the relay coil. A wire connected to the other end of the relay coil completes the path to ground. The electromagnetic field created by the relay coil overcomes the spring tension and moves the armature, allowing the relay contacts to close. The closed relay contacts allow current to flow from the battery to the following fuses: The Eng Controls fuse - The Fuel INJ fuse - The Elec Eng fuse - The O2 Sensors fuse - The Trans Sol fuse - The ABS fuse - The AWD fuse When the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, the electromagnetic field collapses. This action allows the spring tension to move the armature away from the relay contacts, which interrupts current flow to the fuses. If the ignition relay fails to close, the engine will crank but will not run. The class 2 communications will be available with the use of a scan tool. The ignition relay table assumes that the vehicle battery is fully charged. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test in Starting and Charging. See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test TEST Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8488 Step 1 - Step 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8489 Step 8 - Step 18 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8490 Step 19 - Step 28 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8491 Step 29 - Step 37 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8492 Step 38 - Step 44 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8496 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8499 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8500 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8501 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8502 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8503 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8504 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8505 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8506 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8507 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8508 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8509 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8510 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8511 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8512 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8513 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8514 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8515 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8516 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8517 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8518 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8519 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8520 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8521 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8522 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8523 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8524 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8525 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8526 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8527 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8528 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8529 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8530 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8531 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8532 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8533 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8534 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8535 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8536 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8537 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8538 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8539 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8540 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8541 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8542 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8543 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8544 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8545 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8546 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8547 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8548 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8549 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8550 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8551 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8552 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8553 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8554 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8555 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8556 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8557 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8558 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8559 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8560 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8561 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8562 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8563 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8564 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8565 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8566 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8567 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8568 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8569 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8570 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8571 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8572 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) 1 Knock Sensor (KS) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8573 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. The KS system uses one or 2 flat response 2-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8574 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: This engine is equipped with 2 knock sensors. This service procedure applies to both the right and left knock sensors 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the KS bolt. 4. Remove the KS. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply thread locker to the sensor threads. The sensor threads are coated at the factory and applying additional thread locker affects the sensor's ability to detect detonation. 1. Install the KS to engine block. 2. Install the KS bolt. Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the KS electrical connector. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8579 Ignition Control Module (ICM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8580 Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation IGNITION CONTROL MODULE (ICM)/COILS There are 3 dual-tower ignition coils that are part of the ignition control module (ICM). The ICM contains coil driver circuits that command the coils to operate. The ICM has the following circuits: - An ignition voltage circuit - A ground circuit - An IC 1 control circuit for the 1-4 ignition coil - An IC 2 control circuit for the 2-5 ignition coil - An IC 3 control circuit for the 3-6 ignition coil - A low reference circuit The powertrain control module (PCM) controls each dual-tower ignition coil by transmitting timing pulses on the ignition control (IC) circuit to the ICM for the proper coil to enable a spark event. The spark plugs are connected to each coil tower by spark plug wires. The spark plug wires conduct the spark energy from the coil to the spark plug. The spark plug electrode is tipped with platinum for long wear and higher efficiency. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement IGNITION COIL/CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the spark plug wires. Note the position from which the wires are removed. 3. Disconnect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 5. Remove the ignition coil/control module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 2. Install the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. Tighten the bolts to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 8583 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Connect the spark plug wires. 5. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 8584 Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair Ignition Control Module Bracket IGNITION CONTROL MODULE BRACKET REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 3. Remove the spark plug wire retainer (1) from the ignition control module bracket. 4. Remove the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 5. Position the ignition coil/control module aside out of the way. 6. Remove the bolt (3) from the fuel injector wire harness bracket (4) and positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve fresh air tube retainer. 7. Remove the engine wire harness retainers from the ignition control module bracket studs (5). 8. Remove the nut (1) retaining the heater outlet pipe. 9. Lift pipe up slightly to gain access for the removal of the 2 ignition control module bracket bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 8585 10. Remove the ignition control module bracket bolts (2). 11. Remove the ignition control module bracket nuts (6). 12. Remove the ignition control module bracket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition control module bracket. 2. Install the ignition control module bracket nuts (6). Tighten the nuts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the ignition control module bracket bolts (2). Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 8586 4. Install the nut (1) retaining the heater outlet pipe. Tighten the nut to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 5. Install the engine wire harness retainers to the ignition control module bracket studs (5). 6. Install the bolt (3) from the fuel injector wire harness bracket (4) and PCV valve fresh air tube retainer. Tighten the bolts to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 7. Install the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 8. Install the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. Tighten the bolts to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). 9. Install the spark plug wire retainer (1) to the ignition control module bracket. 10. Connect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 11. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection IGNITION RELAY DIAGNOSIS CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ignition relay is normally an open relay. The relay armature is held in the open position by spring tension. When the ignition switch is turned to the Run or Start position, current will flow through the relay coil. A wire connected to the other end of the relay coil completes the path to ground. The electromagnetic field created by the relay coil overcomes the spring tension and moves the armature, allowing the relay contacts to close. The closed relay contacts allow current to flow from the battery to the following fuses: The Eng Controls fuse - The Fuel INJ fuse - The Elec Eng fuse - The O2 Sensors fuse - The Trans Sol fuse - The ABS fuse - The AWD fuse When the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, the electromagnetic field collapses. This action allows the spring tension to move the armature away from the relay contacts, which interrupts current flow to the fuses. If the ignition relay fails to close, the engine will crank but will not run. The class 2 communications will be available with the use of a scan tool. The ignition relay table assumes that the vehicle battery is fully charged. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test in Starting and Charging. See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test TEST Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8590 Step 1 - Step 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8591 Step 8 - Step 18 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8592 Step 19 - Step 28 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8593 Step 29 - Step 37 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8594 Step 38 - Step 44 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8601 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8602 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8603 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8604 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8605 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8606 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8607 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8608 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8609 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8610 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8611 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8612 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8613 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8614 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8615 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8616 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8617 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8618 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8619 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8620 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8621 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8622 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8623 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8624 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8625 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8626 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8627 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8628 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8629 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8630 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8631 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8632 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8633 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8634 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8635 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8636 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8637 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8638 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8639 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8640 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8641 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8642 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8643 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8644 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8645 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8646 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8647 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8648 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8649 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8650 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8651 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8652 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8653 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8654 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8655 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8656 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8657 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8658 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8659 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8660 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8661 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8662 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8663 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8664 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8665 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8666 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8667 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8668 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8669 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8670 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8671 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8672 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8673 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8674 Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8675 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor does not directly affect the operation of the ignition system. The CMP sensor information is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to determine the position of the valve train relative to the crankshaft position. By monitoring the CMP and crankshaft position (CKP) signals, the PCM can accurately time the operation of the fuel injectors. The PCM supplies the sensor with a 12-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8676 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt. 3. Remove the CMP sensor. 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-rings for wear, cracks, or leakage if the sensor is being reused. Replace the O-rings if damaged. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the CMP sensor O-rings with clean engine oil. 2. Install the CMP sensor. 3. Install the CMP sensor bolt. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8682 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8683 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8684 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8685 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8686 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8687 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8688 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8689 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8690 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8691 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8692 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8693 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8694 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8695 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8696 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8697 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8698 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8699 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8700 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8701 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8702 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8703 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8704 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8705 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8706 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8707 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8708 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8709 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8710 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8711 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8712 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8713 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8714 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8715 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8716 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8717 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8718 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8719 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8720 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8721 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8722 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8723 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8724 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8725 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8726 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8727 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8728 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8729 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8730 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8731 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8732 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8733 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8734 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8735 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8736 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8737 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8738 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8739 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8740 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8741 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8742 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8743 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8744 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8745 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8746 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8747 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8748 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8749 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8750 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8751 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8752 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8753 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8754 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8755 Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8756 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a 3-wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses 2 magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets, the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The CKP sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 24 times per crankshaft revolution. The pulse width encoding pattern is used to synchronize the coil firing sequence with the crankshaft position. The CKP sensor is used for ignition timing, fuel injector timing, misfire diagnostics, and tachometer display. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a 12-volt reference, a low reference, and a medium resolution engine speed signal circuit to the CKP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CKP sensor nut (2). 4. Remove the CKP sensor (1) from the engine. 5. Inspect for wear, cracks, or leakage if the CKP sensor is being reused. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil. Replace the O-rings if damaged. 2. Install the CKP sensor (1) to the block. 3. Install the CKP sensor nut (1). Tighten the nut to 11 N.m (97 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 8759 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 8760 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: - The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. - The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A powertrain control module (PCM) replacement - A crankshaft balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the PCM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC. 3. With a scan tool, select the CKP variation learn procedure and perform the following: 1. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 2. Block drive wheels. 3. Set parking brake. 4. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 5. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 6. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 7. Start and idle engine. 8. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 9. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 10. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). IMPORTANT: The engine should not accelerate beyond the calibrated fuel cut-off RPM value noted in step 3.1. Release the throttle immediately if the value is exceeded. - While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 4. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC. 5. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully in order to store the CKP system variation values in the PCM memory. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 8770 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 8771 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 8772 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 8778 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 8779 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 8780 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8781 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Description and Operation KEY AND LOCK CYLINDER CODING USE INSTRUCTION SHEET SUPPLIED For the key cutting and lock cylinder coding procedure, refer to the instruction sheet supplied in the key and lock cylinder kit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Use Instruction Sheet Supplied For the key cutting and lock cylinder coding procedure, refer to the instruction sheet supplied in the key and lock cylinder kit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 8784 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Important: Vehicle must be in PARK prior to ignition cylinder removal. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disable the SIR system. 3. Remove the steering column trim covers. 4. Insert key into the ignition and rotate to the RUN position. Then rotate ignition cylinder back to ACC position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 8785 5. Depress the locking button through hole on side of ignition module assembly with a thin pick-type tool. Slide the lock cylinder from the ignition housing. Installation Procedure Important: Actuator blade within the ignition module must be in ACC position to install the lock cylinder assembly. If rotated, reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 8786 1. Important: If you are installing a new lock cylinder, refer to Key and Lock Cylinder Coding. Insert key into ignition lock cylinder and install the cylinder into the lock housing. 2. Rotate the lock cylinder in the housing. Verify proper rotation. 3. Install the steering column trim covers. 4. Enable the SIR system. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 8787 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the SIR system. 2. Remove the steering wheel. 3. Remove the steering column trim covers. 4. Remove the multifunction levers. 5. Disconnect the housing electrical connectors. 6. Disengage the retaining tabs and remove the park lock cable assembly from the housing. 7. Remove the lock housing bolts. 8. Turn the ignition key to the ACC position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 8788 9. Separate the lock housing (lock cylinder case) from the multifunction lever bracket. Slide the bracket from the column. 10. Remove the ignition switch screws. 11. Remove the ignition switch. Installation Procedure 1. Ensure the ignition switch is in the ACC position. 2. Notice: Position the ignition switch to housing and install the screws and tighten. ^ Tighten the screws to 2.5 Nm (22 inch lbs.). 3. Pre-assemble the lock housing and multifunction lever bracket. Hand tighten the bolts leaving approximately 3.2 mm (0.125 inch) gap. 4. Slide the bracket onto the column. Ensure lock tab fully engages into the column slot. 5. Hand tighten the lower bolt until snug. 6. Hand tighten the upper bolt until snug. 7. Tighten the lower bolt, then the upper bolt. ^ Tighten the bolts to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 8789 8. Snap the ignition lock cable onto the ignition module. 9. Connect the ignition housing electrical connectors. 10. Important: Ensure both locking tabs are seated. Install the multifunction levers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 8790 11. Install the steering column trim covers. 12. Install the SIR coil. 13. Install the steering wheel. 14. Enable the SIR system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8794 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8797 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8798 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8799 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8800 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8801 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8802 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8803 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8804 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8805 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8806 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8807 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8808 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8809 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8810 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8811 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8812 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8813 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8814 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8815 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8816 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8817 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8818 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8819 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8820 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8821 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8822 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8823 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8824 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8825 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8826 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8827 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8828 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8829 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8830 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8831 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8832 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8833 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8834 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8835 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8836 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8837 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8838 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8839 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8840 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8841 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8842 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8843 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8844 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8845 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8846 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8847 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8848 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8849 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8850 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8851 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8852 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8853 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8854 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8855 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8856 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8857 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8858 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8859 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8860 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8861 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8862 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8863 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8864 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8865 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8866 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8867 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8868 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8869 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8870 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) 1 Knock Sensor (KS) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8871 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. The KS system uses one or 2 flat response 2-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8872 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: This engine is equipped with 2 knock sensors. This service procedure applies to both the right and left knock sensors 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the KS bolt. 4. Remove the KS. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply thread locker to the sensor threads. The sensor threads are coated at the factory and applying additional thread locker affects the sensor's ability to detect detonation. 1. Install the KS to engine block. 2. Install the KS bolt. Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the KS electrical connector. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap Spark Plug Gap ................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 1.52 mm (0.060 in.) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap > Page 8877 Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... .................................................. 15 Nm (11.0 lb. ft..) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8878 Spark Plug: Application and ID SPARK PLUG TYPE GM P/N ................................................................................................................................................ .............................................................. 12568387 AC Delco P/N ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................... 41-101 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8879 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG INSPECTION SPARK PLUG USAGE - Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications for the correct spark plug. - Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: Spark plug fouling-Colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug SPARK PLUG INSPECTION - Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. - Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. - Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8880 - Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. An excessively wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. A rattling sound indicates internal damage. - A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. SPARK PLUG VISUAL INSPECTION - Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. - Carbon fouled-Dry, fluffy, black carbon or soot caused by the following conditions: Rich fuel mixtures Leaking fuel injectors - Excessive fuel pressure - Restricted air filter element - Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output Weak coils - Worn ignition wires - Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. - Deposit fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8881 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Observe the following service precautions: Allow the engine to cool before removing the spark plugs. Attempting to remove spark plugs from a hot engine can cause the spark plugs to seize. This can damage the cylinder head threads. - Clean the spark plug recess area before removing the spark plug. Failure to do so can result in engine damage due to dirt or foreign material entering the cylinder head, or in contamination of the cylinder head threads. Contaminated threads may prevent proper seating of the new spark plug. - Use only the spark plugs specified for use in the vehicle. Do not install spark plugs that are either hotter or colder than those specified for the vehicle. Installing spark plugs of another type can severely damage the engine. 1. Remove the spark plug wires from the spark plugs. 2. Remove the spark plugs (1) from the cylinder head. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Gap the spark plugs to the specifications. Refer to Ignition System Specifications. NOTE: It is important to check the gap of all new and reconditioned spark plugs before installation. Pre-set gaps may have changed during handling. Use a round wire feeler gauge to be sure of an accurate check, particularly on used plugs. Installing plugs with the wrong gap can cause poor engine performance and may even damage the engine. 2. Install the spark plugs to the cylinder head. Tighten the spark plugs to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). NOTE: Be sure plug threads smoothly into cylinder head and is fully seated. Use a thread chaser if necessary to clean threads in cylinder head. Cross-threading or failing to fully seat spark plug can cause overheating of plug, exhaust blow-by, or thread damage. Follow the recommended torque specifications carefully. Over or under-tightening can also cause severe damage to engine or spark plug. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8882 - Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: ONLY when the cylinder head is replaced with a NEW cylinder head, the FIRST time the spark plugs are installed, tighten the spark plugs to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). All subsequent tightening of the spark plugs, tighten to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 3. Install the spark plug wires to the spark plugs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 8889 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Line Pressure Control Solenoid (SLT) Line Pressure Control Solenoid (SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams A/T Shift Lock Solenoid Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8893 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid/Switch Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the shift control assembly. 2. Disconnect the brake transaxle shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness connector. 3. Using a screwdriver, disconnect the plastic retainers at solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 4. Remove the solenoid from the shift control assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the solenoid onto the shift control assembly. Connect the plastic retainers at the solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 2. Connect the BTSI solenoid harness connector. 3. Install the shift control assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8897 Shift Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8900 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8901 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8902 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8903 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8904 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8905 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8906 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8907 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8908 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8909 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8910 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8911 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8912 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8913 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8914 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8915 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8916 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8917 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8918 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8919 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8920 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8921 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8922 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8923 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8924 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8925 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8926 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8927 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8928 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8929 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8930 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8931 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8932 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8933 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8934 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8935 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8936 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8937 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8938 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8939 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8940 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8941 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8942 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8943 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8944 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8945 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8946 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8947 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8948 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8949 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8950 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8951 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8952 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8953 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8954 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8955 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8956 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8957 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8958 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8959 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8960 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8961 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8962 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8963 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8964 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8965 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8966 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8967 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8968 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8969 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8970 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8971 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8972 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8973 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8974 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8975 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) Reverse, 1ST Shift Solenoid (S1) Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid (S1) Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid (S1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8976 Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8977 Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8983 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8984 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8985 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8986 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8987 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8988 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8989 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8990 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8991 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8992 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8993 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8994 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8995 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8996 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8997 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8998 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8999 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9000 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9001 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9002 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9003 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9004 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9005 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9006 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9007 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9008 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9009 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9010 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9011 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9012 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9013 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9014 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9015 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9016 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9017 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9018 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9019 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9020 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9021 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9022 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9023 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9024 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9025 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9026 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9027 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9028 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9029 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9030 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9031 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9032 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9033 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9034 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9035 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9036 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9037 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9038 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9039 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9040 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9041 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9042 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9043 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9044 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9045 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9046 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9047 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9048 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9049 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9050 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9051 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9052 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9053 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9054 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9055 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9056 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Connector Views Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid (SLU) Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid (SLU) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Shift Indicator: Description and Operation SHIFT INDICATOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The shift indicator, located in the console, displays the selected gear position. The body control module (BCM) controls the LEDs in the PRNDL display of the shift indicator through 4 control circuits. The parameters of the 4 control circuits to the shift indicator are bits A, B, C, and parity. These outputs are available for display on the scan tool. The BCM has 8 DTCs for these 4 control circuits. These DTCs diagnose a short or an open for each circuit. The BCM receives selected gear position information from the transmission control module (TCM) via serial data. The TCM receives the gear position through four inputs from the park/neutral position switch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-07-30-014 > May > 07 > A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-014 Date: May 23, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: AF33-5 Transmission - Check Engine Light On, DTC P0711 or U0101 Set (Reprogram TCM by Contacting TCSC) Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on the check engine light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find either DTC P0711 or U0101 set. Cause A software anomaly within the TCM may cause this condition. Correction DO NOT replace the internal transaxle wiring harness to correct P0711 code. Contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) to obtain a VCI number and reprogram the TCM to correct a single DTC of either P0711 or U0101. Multiple communication codes will NOT be addressed with this TCM software update. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 07-07-30-014 > May > 07 > A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-014 Date: May 23, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: AF33-5 Transmission - Check Engine Light On, DTC P0711 or U0101 Set (Reprogram TCM by Contacting TCSC) Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on the check engine light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find either DTC P0711 or U0101 set. Cause A software anomaly within the TCM may cause this condition. Correction DO NOT replace the internal transaxle wiring harness to correct P0711 code. Contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) to obtain a VCI number and reprogram the TCM to correct a single DTC of either P0711 or U0101. Multiple communication codes will NOT be addressed with this TCM software update. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Control Module C1 Control Module: Diagrams Transmission Control Module C1 Transmission Control Module C1 Transmission Control Module C1 Transmission Control Module C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Control Module C1 > Page 9088 Control Module: Diagrams Transmission Control Module C2 Transmission Control Module C2 Transmission Control Module C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Control Module C1 > Page 9089 Transmission Control Module C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9090 Control Module: Service and Repair Transaxle Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the TCM from TCM bracket. 3. Disconnect the transaxle control module (TCM) electrical connectors (1) from the TCM (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9091 1. Connect the TCM electrical connector (1) to the TCM (2). 2. Install the TCM to the TCM bracket. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. 4. Important: DTC P0602 is set with all new service transaxle control modules. When the transaxle control module is reprogrammed with the correct software and calibrations, DTC P0602 will be erased. Reprogram the TCM with the correct calibration. Refer to Transmission Control Module Programming and Setup. 5. Perform the transmission adaptive learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 9097 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 9098 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 9099 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required - J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 9102 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 9103 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 9104 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 9105 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 9106 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side > Page 9112 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor, Wiring Harness Side Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor, Wiring Harness Side Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Disconnect the wiring harness (4) from the input speed sensor. 3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt. 4. Remove the input speed sensor. 5. Remove the input speed sensor O-ring. Discard the O-ring. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 9115 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new input speed sensor O-ring. 2. Install the new input speed sensor O-ring onto the input speed sensor. 3. Install the input speed sensor to the transaxle. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the input speed sensor bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (4) to the input speed sensor. 6. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 9116 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the wiring harness (2) from the output shaft speed sensor. 2. Remove the output speed sensor bolt (3). 3. Remove the output shaft speed sensor (2) and the O-ring (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 9117 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new output speed sensor O-ring (1). 2. Install the new output speed sensor O-ring (1) onto the output speed sensor (2). 3. Install the output speed sensor (2) into the transmission case assembly. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the output speed sensor bolt (3). ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (2) to the output shaft speed sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9121 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9122 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Bulletin No.: 06-04-21-001 Date: May 17, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Updated Transfer Case Connector Service Kit Now Available For Transfer Case Speed Sensor Wire Harness Connector that Comes Loose Or Connector Retainer Clip Breaks Models: 2007 and Prior GM Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with Four-Wheel Drive or All-Wheel Drive Technicians may find that when the transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector is removed, the connector lock flexes/bends and does not return to the original position. The transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector then has no locking device. On older vehicles, the plastic connector retainer becomes brittle and the clip may break as soon as it is flexed. In the past, the only service fix was to install a wire harness connector service pack, P/N 88987183. This repair procedure involved splicing a new service connector with an integral connector lock. This connector service kit is of the same design and was still prone to failure over time. A new connector service repair kit is now available, P/N 15306187, that is an updated design. This new kit should be used whenever the speed sensor wire harness connector requires replacement. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-026A > Apr > 08 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-026A Date: April 08, 2008 Subject: Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On, DTC P0171 Set (Inspect/Secure Fresh Air Inlet Pipe and Reprogram PCM) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include new repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-026 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the Service Engine Soon (SES) light is illuminated. Upon investigation the technician may find that Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0171 has been set. Cause The fresh air inlet pipe may have become disconnected from the grommet in the rear rocker cover. Correction Inspect the fresh air inlet pipe connection to the rear rocker cover. If the inlet pipe has become disconnected from the rear rocker cover reconnect the pipe into the grommet and also into the metal retaining bracket. Use a plastic tie strap to secure the pipe to the retaining bracket as shown above. In addition an updated Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calibration is now available to address this condition. Reprogram the PCM with the updated calibration using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS). As always make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-07-30-014 > May > 07 > A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-014 Date: May 23, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: AF33-5 Transmission - Check Engine Light On, DTC P0711 or U0101 Set (Reprogram TCM by Contacting TCSC) Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on the check engine light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find either DTC P0711 or U0101 set. Cause A software anomaly within the TCM may cause this condition. Correction DO NOT replace the internal transaxle wiring harness to correct P0711 code. Contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) to obtain a VCI number and reprogram the TCM to correct a single DTC of either P0711 or U0101. Multiple communication codes will NOT be addressed with this TCM software update. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set Bulletin No.: 06-06-04-008B Date: March 19, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: LNJ Service Engine Soon (SES) Light Illuminated, Multiple Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1404 and/or P0404 (Install EGR Valve, EGR Valve Gasket, EGR Pipe, EGR Valve Wiring Harness Connector and Reprogram PCM) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Built Prior to January 25, 2006 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the first Important statement in the Correction section. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-06-04-008A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on a Service Engine Soon (SES) light illuminated on the instrument cluster. Some vehicles may have previously been serviced for this same condition. Technicians may also find a DTC P1404 and/or DTC P0404, which may have led to previous exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve and PCM replacements. Correction The following EGR valve service parts kit, P/N 89018176, contains all the required individual parts needed to perform an EGR system change-over for the vehicles listed in this bulletin only. Please be advised that some early produced kits may contain an instruction sheet that has an error in the wiring portion of the procedure. Therefore, it is advised that the instructions included in the kit be discarded and that only the instructions contained in the bulletin be used. P/N 12581876 - EGR Valve P/N 12593632 - EGR Gasket P/N 12602507 - Pipe Assembly, EGR Valve P/N 15306175 - Wiring Harness Connector, EGR Valve (includes terminals and wire leads) This EGR valve kit is used to convert a Delphi EGR valve equipped LNJ engine used in the Chevrolet Equinox and Pontiac Torrent to a Siemens valve. This kit contains all necessary parts for conversion. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calibration must be updated for the Siemens EGR valve to work correctly. Failure to install an updated calibration when using this conversion kit may cause PCM diagnostic codes to set, resulting in a "Service Engine Soon" indicator lamp to illuminate. EGR Valve Identification Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 9144 If a Siemens valve is already installed, it is NOT necessary to install this kit. Individual components are serviced. Install the service part kit listed in this bulletin using the following procedure: Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery. If equipped, remove the injector sight shield from the studs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 9145 Disconnect the EGR valve electrical connector. Remove the bolt (3) retaining the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) pipe (4) to the EGR valve (1). Remove the 2 bolts (5) securing the EGR pipe (4) to the exhaust manifold. Remove the EGR pipe to exhaust manifold gasket. Remove the EGR valve bolts (2). Remove the EGR valve (1). Remove the EGR valve gasket. Remove all the old gasket material from intake manifold with a gasket scraper. Clean and inspect the EGR valve gasket mating surfaces. Install the new EGR valve, P/N 12581876 (1) with a new EGR gasket, P/N 12593632 to the intake manifold. Install the EGR valve bolts (2). Install the EGR valve bolts (2). Refer to the Fastener Notice in the Service Manual. Tighten Tighten the EGR valve bolts (2) to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). Install the new EGR pipe (4), P/N 12602507 to the exhaust manifold. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 9146 Install the 2 bolts (5) that secure the EGR pipe (4) to the exhaust manifold. Tighten Tighten the EGR pipe assembly bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Install the bolt (3) the secures the EGR pipe (4) bolt to the EGR valve (1). Tighten Tighten the bolt to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). In the following steps, care must be taken to prevent cross-wiring of the two gray colored EGR wire leads (located at pin A and pin D). Cross-wiring will result in an MIL to be set. Before cutting the wiring harness leads, mark the gray leads using tape so the location will be remembered on assembly. Take the disconnected EGR valve harness electrical connector and cut the wires directly at the base of the connector. Open the EGR electrical conduit to expose the wire leads. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from all five EGR circuit harness connector wires. Refer to the correct EGR Valve Wiring Harness Connector End View Schematics in the bulletin for the installation of the new EGR valve wiring harness connector, P/N 15306175. Use splice seal connectors supplied in the wiring harness kit (P/N 15306175) when replacing the EGR valve wiring harness connector. Install the new EGR valve wiring harness connector, P/N 15306175 (includes splice connectors, terminals and wire leads), to the existing engine wiring harness. Use a heat gun to shrink the tubing and set the glue in the connectors. Wrap the new EGR valve wiring harness leads with electrical tape and secure them into the EGR valve electrical harness conduit. Failure to correctly wire the EGR valve electrical connector will result in a PCM diagnostic code to set and result in a "Service Engine Soon" indicator lamp to illuminate. Connect the engine harness electrical connector to the EGR valve. If equipped, install the injector sight shield to the studs. Connect the negative battery cable at the battery. Reprogram the PCM with the latest calibrations for the EGR system change over. This calibration, or any that follow, is designed to address this concern. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS) using the appropriate Service Information (SI) procedures. The PCM calibrations are available to dealerships as part of TIS2000 incremental satellite update version 1.0, which was broadcast to dealers January 08, 2006 or later. For the dealerships that use CDs, they were mailed out January 14, 2006 or later. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 9147 It is important to mark both gray wires before cutting off the EGR valve harness connector. Follow the wiring schematic in this bulletin to ensure a proper repair. Incorrect installation of the EGR valve harness connector will cause EGR valve DTCs to set with incorrect scan tool EGR data parameter readings. If you encounter this condition, check your wiring repair to the EGR valve harness connector. Do not replace the PCM or the EGR valve. Installation Instruction Sheet You may have received the incorrect installation instruction sheet for the EGR retrofit kit. It is very important to check the revision date on the instruction sheet before attempting this repair. There are three instruction sheets in one. Use the one on the top left corner. The revision date can be found on the lower left corner of your copy. Please discard any copy that does not have the following revision date of 03FE06 If the revision date cannot be determined, then look at the EGR valve connector end view schematic on your copy of the instruction sheet for the following. If the illustration callout shows A-E , your instruction sheet is incorrect. If the illustration callout shows E-A , your instruction sheet is correct. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 9148 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 9154 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 9155 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 9156 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 07-06-04-026A > Apr > 08 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0171 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-026A Date: April 08, 2008 Subject: Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On, DTC P0171 Set (Inspect/Secure Fresh Air Inlet Pipe and Reprogram PCM) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include new repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-026 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the Service Engine Soon (SES) light is illuminated. Upon investigation the technician may find that Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0171 has been set. Cause The fresh air inlet pipe may have become disconnected from the grommet in the rear rocker cover. Correction Inspect the fresh air inlet pipe connection to the rear rocker cover. If the inlet pipe has become disconnected from the rear rocker cover reconnect the pipe into the grommet and also into the metal retaining bracket. Use a plastic tie strap to secure the pipe to the retaining bracket as shown above. In addition an updated Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calibration is now available to address this condition. Reprogram the PCM with the updated calibration using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS). As always make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 07-07-30-014 > May > 07 > A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-014 Date: May 23, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: AF33-5 Transmission - Check Engine Light On, DTC P0711 or U0101 Set (Reprogram TCM by Contacting TCSC) Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on the check engine light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find either DTC P0711 or U0101 set. Cause A software anomaly within the TCM may cause this condition. Correction DO NOT replace the internal transaxle wiring harness to correct P0711 code. Contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) to obtain a VCI number and reprogram the TCM to correct a single DTC of either P0711 or U0101. Multiple communication codes will NOT be addressed with this TCM software update. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set Bulletin No.: 06-06-04-008B Date: March 19, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: LNJ Service Engine Soon (SES) Light Illuminated, Multiple Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1404 and/or P0404 (Install EGR Valve, EGR Valve Gasket, EGR Pipe, EGR Valve Wiring Harness Connector and Reprogram PCM) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Built Prior to January 25, 2006 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the first Important statement in the Correction section. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-06-04-008A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on a Service Engine Soon (SES) light illuminated on the instrument cluster. Some vehicles may have previously been serviced for this same condition. Technicians may also find a DTC P1404 and/or DTC P0404, which may have led to previous exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve and PCM replacements. Correction The following EGR valve service parts kit, P/N 89018176, contains all the required individual parts needed to perform an EGR system change-over for the vehicles listed in this bulletin only. Please be advised that some early produced kits may contain an instruction sheet that has an error in the wiring portion of the procedure. Therefore, it is advised that the instructions included in the kit be discarded and that only the instructions contained in the bulletin be used. P/N 12581876 - EGR Valve P/N 12593632 - EGR Gasket P/N 12602507 - Pipe Assembly, EGR Valve P/N 15306175 - Wiring Harness Connector, EGR Valve (includes terminals and wire leads) This EGR valve kit is used to convert a Delphi EGR valve equipped LNJ engine used in the Chevrolet Equinox and Pontiac Torrent to a Siemens valve. This kit contains all necessary parts for conversion. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calibration must be updated for the Siemens EGR valve to work correctly. Failure to install an updated calibration when using this conversion kit may cause PCM diagnostic codes to set, resulting in a "Service Engine Soon" indicator lamp to illuminate. EGR Valve Identification Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 9169 If a Siemens valve is already installed, it is NOT necessary to install this kit. Individual components are serviced. Install the service part kit listed in this bulletin using the following procedure: Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery. If equipped, remove the injector sight shield from the studs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 9170 Disconnect the EGR valve electrical connector. Remove the bolt (3) retaining the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) pipe (4) to the EGR valve (1). Remove the 2 bolts (5) securing the EGR pipe (4) to the exhaust manifold. Remove the EGR pipe to exhaust manifold gasket. Remove the EGR valve bolts (2). Remove the EGR valve (1). Remove the EGR valve gasket. Remove all the old gasket material from intake manifold with a gasket scraper. Clean and inspect the EGR valve gasket mating surfaces. Install the new EGR valve, P/N 12581876 (1) with a new EGR gasket, P/N 12593632 to the intake manifold. Install the EGR valve bolts (2). Install the EGR valve bolts (2). Refer to the Fastener Notice in the Service Manual. Tighten Tighten the EGR valve bolts (2) to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). Install the new EGR pipe (4), P/N 12602507 to the exhaust manifold. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 9171 Install the 2 bolts (5) that secure the EGR pipe (4) to the exhaust manifold. Tighten Tighten the EGR pipe assembly bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Install the bolt (3) the secures the EGR pipe (4) bolt to the EGR valve (1). Tighten Tighten the bolt to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). In the following steps, care must be taken to prevent cross-wiring of the two gray colored EGR wire leads (located at pin A and pin D). Cross-wiring will result in an MIL to be set. Before cutting the wiring harness leads, mark the gray leads using tape so the location will be remembered on assembly. Take the disconnected EGR valve harness electrical connector and cut the wires directly at the base of the connector. Open the EGR electrical conduit to expose the wire leads. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from all five EGR circuit harness connector wires. Refer to the correct EGR Valve Wiring Harness Connector End View Schematics in the bulletin for the installation of the new EGR valve wiring harness connector, P/N 15306175. Use splice seal connectors supplied in the wiring harness kit (P/N 15306175) when replacing the EGR valve wiring harness connector. Install the new EGR valve wiring harness connector, P/N 15306175 (includes splice connectors, terminals and wire leads), to the existing engine wiring harness. Use a heat gun to shrink the tubing and set the glue in the connectors. Wrap the new EGR valve wiring harness leads with electrical tape and secure them into the EGR valve electrical harness conduit. Failure to correctly wire the EGR valve electrical connector will result in a PCM diagnostic code to set and result in a "Service Engine Soon" indicator lamp to illuminate. Connect the engine harness electrical connector to the EGR valve. If equipped, install the injector sight shield to the studs. Connect the negative battery cable at the battery. Reprogram the PCM with the latest calibrations for the EGR system change over. This calibration, or any that follow, is designed to address this concern. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS) using the appropriate Service Information (SI) procedures. The PCM calibrations are available to dealerships as part of TIS2000 incremental satellite update version 1.0, which was broadcast to dealers January 08, 2006 or later. For the dealerships that use CDs, they were mailed out January 14, 2006 or later. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 9172 It is important to mark both gray wires before cutting off the EGR valve harness connector. Follow the wiring schematic in this bulletin to ensure a proper repair. Incorrect installation of the EGR valve harness connector will cause EGR valve DTCs to set with incorrect scan tool EGR data parameter readings. If you encounter this condition, check your wiring repair to the EGR valve harness connector. Do not replace the PCM or the EGR valve. Installation Instruction Sheet You may have received the incorrect installation instruction sheet for the EGR retrofit kit. It is very important to check the revision date on the instruction sheet before attempting this repair. There are three instruction sheets in one. Use the one on the top left corner. The revision date can be found on the lower left corner of your copy. Please discard any copy that does not have the following revision date of 03FE06 If the revision date cannot be determined, then look at the EGR valve connector end view schematic on your copy of the instruction sheet for the following. If the illustration callout shows A-E , your instruction sheet is incorrect. If the illustration callout shows E-A , your instruction sheet is correct. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 9173 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 9179 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 9180 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 9181 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9182 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Description and Operation EEPROM The electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory that is physically part of the control module. The EEPROM contains program and calibration information that the powertrain control module (PCM) needs in order to control the powertrain operation. Special equipment, as well as the correct program and calibration for the vehicle, are required in order to reprogram the control module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 9189 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Line Pressure Control Solenoid (SLT) Line Pressure Control Solenoid (SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams A/T Shift Lock Solenoid Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9193 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid/Switch Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the shift control assembly. 2. Disconnect the brake transaxle shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness connector. 3. Using a screwdriver, disconnect the plastic retainers at solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 4. Remove the solenoid from the shift control assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the solenoid onto the shift control assembly. Connect the plastic retainers at the solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 2. Connect the BTSI solenoid harness connector. 3. Install the shift control assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9197 Shift Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9200 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9201 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9202 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9203 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9204 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9205 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9206 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9207 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9208 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9209 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9210 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9211 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9212 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9213 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9214 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9215 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9216 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9217 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9218 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9219 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9220 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9221 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9222 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9223 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9224 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9225 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9226 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9227 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9228 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9229 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9230 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9231 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9232 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9233 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9234 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9235 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9236 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9237 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9238 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9239 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9240 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9241 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9242 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9243 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9244 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9245 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9246 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9247 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9248 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9249 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9250 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9251 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9252 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9253 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9254 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9255 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9256 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9257 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9258 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9259 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9260 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9261 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9262 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9263 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9264 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9265 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9266 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9267 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9268 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9269 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9270 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9271 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9272 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9273 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9274 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9275 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) Reverse, 1ST Shift Solenoid (S1) Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid (S1) Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid (S1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9276 Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9277 Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9283 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9284 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9285 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9286 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9287 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9288 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9289 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9290 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9291 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9292 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9293 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9294 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9295 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9296 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9297 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9299 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9300 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9301 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9302 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9303 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9304 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9305 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9306 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9307 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9308 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9309 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9310 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9311 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9312 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9313 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9314 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9315 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9316 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9317 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9318 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9319 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9320 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9321 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9322 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9323 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9324 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9325 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9326 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9327 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9328 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9329 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9330 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9331 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9332 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9333 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9334 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9335 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9336 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9337 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9338 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9339 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9340 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9341 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9342 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9343 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9344 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9345 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9346 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9347 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9348 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9349 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9350 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9351 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9352 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9353 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9354 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9355 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9356 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Connector Views Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid (SLU) Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid (SLU) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 9362 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Line Pressure Control Solenoid (SLT) Line Pressure Control Solenoid (SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams A/T Shift Lock Solenoid Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9366 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid/Switch Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the shift control assembly. 2. Disconnect the brake transaxle shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness connector. 3. Using a screwdriver, disconnect the plastic retainers at solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 4. Remove the solenoid from the shift control assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the solenoid onto the shift control assembly. Connect the plastic retainers at the solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 2. Connect the BTSI solenoid harness connector. 3. Install the shift control assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9370 Shift Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9373 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9374 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9375 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9376 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9377 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9378 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9379 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9380 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9381 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9382 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9383 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9384 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9385 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9386 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9387 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9388 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9389 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9390 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9391 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9392 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9393 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9394 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9395 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9396 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9397 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9398 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9399 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9400 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9401 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9402 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9403 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9404 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9405 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9406 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9407 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9408 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9409 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9410 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9411 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9412 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9413 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9414 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9415 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9416 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9417 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9418 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9419 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9420 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9421 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9422 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9423 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9424 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9425 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9426 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9427 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9428 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9429 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9430 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9431 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9432 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9433 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9434 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9435 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9436 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9437 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9438 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9439 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9440 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9441 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9442 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9443 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9444 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9445 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9446 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9447 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9448 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) Reverse, 1ST Shift Solenoid (S1) Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid (S1) Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid (S1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9449 Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9450 Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9456 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9457 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9458 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9459 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9460 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9461 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9462 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9463 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9464 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9465 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9466 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9467 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9468 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9469 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9470 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9471 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9472 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9473 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9474 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9475 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9476 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9477 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9478 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9479 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9480 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9481 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9482 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9483 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9484 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9485 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9486 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9487 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9488 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9489 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9490 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9491 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9492 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9493 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9494 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9495 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9496 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9497 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9498 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9499 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9500 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9501 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9502 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9503 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9504 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9505 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9506 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9507 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9508 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9509 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9510 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9511 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9512 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9513 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9514 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9515 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9516 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9517 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9518 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9519 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9520 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9521 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9522 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9523 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9524 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9525 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9526 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9527 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9528 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9529 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Connector Views Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid (SLU) Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid (SLU) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent Channel Plate: Customer Interest A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent > Page 9538 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Channel Plate: > 01-07-30-036H > Jan > 09 > A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips Channel Plate: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-036H Date: January 29, 2009 Subject: Diagnostic Tips for Automatic Transmission DTC P0756, Second, Third, Fourth Gear Start Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32 or M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 model year and add details regarding spacer plates. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-036G (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Some dealership technicians may have difficulty diagnosing DTC P0756, 2-3 Shift Valve Performance on 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E automatic transmissions. As detailed in the Service Manual, when the PCM detects a 4-3-3-4 shift pattern, DTC P0756 will set. Some customers may also describe a condition of a second, third or fourth gear start that may have the same causes but has not set this DTC yet. Below are some tips when diagnosing this DTC: ^ This is a performance code. This means that a mechanical malfunction exists. ^ This code is not set by electrical issues such as a damaged wiring harness or poor electrical connections. Electrical problems would cause a DTC P0758, P0787 or P0788 to set. ^ The most likely cause is chips/debris plugging the filtered AFL oil at orifice # 29 on the top of the spacer plate (48). This is a very small hole and is easily plugged by a small amount of debris. It is important to remove the spacer plate and inspect orifice # 29 and the immediate area for the presence of chips/debris. Also, the transmission case passage directly above this orifice and the valve body passage directly below should be inspected and cleaned of any chips/debris. For 2003 and newer vehicles the spacer plate should be replaced. The service replacement spacer plate is a bonded style with gaskets and solenoid filter screens bonded to the spacer plate. These screens can help to prevent plugging of orifice # 29 caused by small debris or chips. ^ This code could be set if the 2-3 shift valve (368) were stuck or hung-up in its bore. Inspect the 2-3 shift valve (368) and the 2-3 shuttle valve (369) for free movement or damage and clean the valves, the bore and the valve body passages. ^ This code could be set by a 2-3 shift solenoid (367b) if it were cracked, broken or leaking. Refer to Shift Solenoid Leak Test in the appropriate Service Manual for the leak test procedure. Based on parts return findings, a damaged or leaking shift solenoid is the least likely cause of this condition. Simply replacing a shift solenoid will not correct this condition unless the solenoid has been found to be cracked, broken or leaking. It is important to also refer to the appropriate Service Manual or Service Information (SI) for further possible causes of this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Channel Plate: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent Channel Plate: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Channel Plate: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent > Page 9548 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Channel Plate: > 01-07-30-036H > Jan > 09 > A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips Channel Plate: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-036H Date: January 29, 2009 Subject: Diagnostic Tips for Automatic Transmission DTC P0756, Second, Third, Fourth Gear Start Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32 or M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 model year and add details regarding spacer plates. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-036G (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Some dealership technicians may have difficulty diagnosing DTC P0756, 2-3 Shift Valve Performance on 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E automatic transmissions. As detailed in the Service Manual, when the PCM detects a 4-3-3-4 shift pattern, DTC P0756 will set. Some customers may also describe a condition of a second, third or fourth gear start that may have the same causes but has not set this DTC yet. Below are some tips when diagnosing this DTC: ^ This is a performance code. This means that a mechanical malfunction exists. ^ This code is not set by electrical issues such as a damaged wiring harness or poor electrical connections. Electrical problems would cause a DTC P0758, P0787 or P0788 to set. ^ The most likely cause is chips/debris plugging the filtered AFL oil at orifice # 29 on the top of the spacer plate (48). This is a very small hole and is easily plugged by a small amount of debris. It is important to remove the spacer plate and inspect orifice # 29 and the immediate area for the presence of chips/debris. Also, the transmission case passage directly above this orifice and the valve body passage directly below should be inspected and cleaned of any chips/debris. For 2003 and newer vehicles the spacer plate should be replaced. The service replacement spacer plate is a bonded style with gaskets and solenoid filter screens bonded to the spacer plate. These screens can help to prevent plugging of orifice # 29 caused by small debris or chips. ^ This code could be set if the 2-3 shift valve (368) were stuck or hung-up in its bore. Inspect the 2-3 shift valve (368) and the 2-3 shuttle valve (369) for free movement or damage and clean the valves, the bore and the valve body passages. ^ This code could be set by a 2-3 shift solenoid (367b) if it were cracked, broken or leaking. Refer to Shift Solenoid Leak Test in the appropriate Service Manual for the leak test procedure. Based on parts return findings, a damaged or leaking shift solenoid is the least likely cause of this condition. Simply replacing a shift solenoid will not correct this condition unless the solenoid has been found to be cracked, broken or leaking. It is important to also refer to the appropriate Service Manual or Service Information (SI) for further possible causes of this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch: > 08-07-30-009B > May > 08 > A/T 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks Clutch: Customer Interest A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 08-07-30-009B > May > 08 > A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-07-30-014 > May > 07 > A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-014 Date: May 23, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: AF33-5 Transmission - Check Engine Light On, DTC P0711 or U0101 Set (Reprogram TCM by Contacting TCSC) Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on the check engine light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find either DTC P0711 or U0101 set. Cause A software anomaly within the TCM may cause this condition. Correction DO NOT replace the internal transaxle wiring harness to correct P0711 code. Contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) to obtain a VCI number and reprogram the TCM to correct a single DTC of either P0711 or U0101. Multiple communication codes will NOT be addressed with this TCM software update. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 07-07-30-014 > May > 07 > A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-014 Date: May 23, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: AF33-5 Transmission - Check Engine Light On, DTC P0711 or U0101 Set (Reprogram TCM by Contacting TCSC) Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on the check engine light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find either DTC P0711 or U0101 set. Cause A software anomaly within the TCM may cause this condition. Correction DO NOT replace the internal transaxle wiring harness to correct P0711 code. Contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) to obtain a VCI number and reprogram the TCM to correct a single DTC of either P0711 or U0101. Multiple communication codes will NOT be addressed with this TCM software update. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Control Module C1 Control Module: Diagrams Transmission Control Module C1 Transmission Control Module C1 Transmission Control Module C1 Transmission Control Module C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Control Module C1 > Page 9591 Control Module: Diagrams Transmission Control Module C2 Transmission Control Module C2 Transmission Control Module C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Control Module C1 > Page 9592 Transmission Control Module C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9593 Control Module: Service and Repair Transaxle Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the TCM from TCM bracket. 3. Disconnect the transaxle control module (TCM) electrical connectors (1) from the TCM (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9594 1. Connect the TCM electrical connector (1) to the TCM (2). 2. Install the TCM to the TCM bracket. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. 4. Important: DTC P0602 is set with all new service transaxle control modules. When the transaxle control module is reprogrammed with the correct software and calibrations, DTC P0602 will be erased. Reprogram the TCM with the correct calibration. Refer to Transmission Control Module Programming and Setup. 5. Perform the transmission adaptive learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: Service and Repair Fluid Level Indicator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Clean any dirt or debris away from the transaxle fluid plug/level indicator area. 2. Remove the transaxle fluid level indicator bolt from the transaxle. 3. Remove the transaxle fluid level indicator from the transaxle. 4. Wipe away any transaxle fluid from the fluid level indicator. Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle fluid level indicator onto the transaxle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle fluid level indicator bolt onto the transaxle. ^ Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information > Page 9602 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Overhaul .............................................................................................................................................. ....................................................... 7.8 liters (8.2 qts) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 9605 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID Use only T-IV Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88900925, in Canada 22689186). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9606 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure Description Inspection of the transaxle fluid level, correct type of fluid, and the condition of the fluid for accurate operation of the transaxle. Procedure 1. Important: Routine inspection of the transaxle fluid is not required. Transaxle fluid inspection is only required if there is a symptom indicating a concern with the fluid. Park the vehicle on a flat level surface. 2. Operate the vehicle in order for the transmission fluid temperature to reach the normal operating range. Transaxle normal temperature: 60 - 70 degrees C (140 - 158 degrees F) 3. With the engine at idle, manual shift through all transaxle ranges and return to the PARK position. Leave the engine idling. 4. Clean any dirt or debris away from the area of the transaxle fluid level indicator. 5. Remove the transaxle fluid level indicator bolt (1) from the transaxle. 6. Remove the transaxle fluid level indicator (2). 7. Wipe away any transaxle fluid from the indicator. 8. Insert the indicator into the transaxle until fully seated. 9. Important: Inspecting transaxle fluid level when not at normal temperature can give an incorrect measurement. The transaxle fluid expands when warm. Remove the indicator and inspect the level and the condition of the oil on the indicator: ^ Transmission fluid level at normal operating temperature (1) ^ Transmission fluid level if cold (2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9607 10. If the fluid level is incorrect inspect for the following conditions: ^ Fluid below level, inspect for a leak. Refer to Fluid Leak Diagnosis or Automatic Transmission Fluid Leaks. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fluid Leak Diagnosis See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Automatic Transmission Fluid Leaks ^ Fluid above level, inspect for contamination of the fluid. 11. Important: The transaxle uses T-IV fluid, GM P/N 88900925 (Canadian P/N 22689186). The fluid is normally red in color. The oil may darken in color with more miles on a vehicle. Inspect the condition of the fluid for the following conditions: ^ Excessively dirty with particles in the fluid ^ If there are no DRIVEABILITY concerns, replace the fluid. ^ If DRIVEABILITY concerns are present disassemble and inspect for a cause. ^ Burnt smell ^ Inspect for the correct fluid. Refer to Fluid Capacity Specifications. ^ Inspect for conditions that may of cause overheating of the transmission fluid. Refer to Transmission Overheats. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Transmission Overheats ^ If there are no DRIVEABILITY concerns, replace the fluid. ^ If DRIVEABILITY concerns are present disassemble and inspect for cause. ^ Inspect the transmission oil cooler system for functioning properly. ^ Black in color ^ Disassemble the transaxle and inspect for components that may have over heated. ^ Inspect the transmission oil cooler system for functioning properly. ^ Milky or white tint in color from coolant or water ^ Inspect for failure of the transaxle oil cooler. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Engine Coolant/Water In Transmission ^ Inspect for missing or improperly routed vent hose. ^ Inspect for missing fill plug. 12. Install the fluid level indicator. 13. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the fluid indicator bolt. ^ Tighten the fluid indicator bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9608 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transaxle Fluid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain fluid. Allow at least 5 minutes for the fluid to drain completely. 3. Remove the gasket from the drain plug and discard. Installation Procedure 1. Install the new gasket on the drain plug. 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the drain plug. ^ Tighten the drain plug to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 3. Make sure vehicle is level. 4. Remove the fluid level indicator located behind the front transaxle mount. Refer to Fluid Level Indicator Replacement. 5. Important: DexronIII automatic transmission fluid is not compatible with this transaxle. If DexronIII ATF is used, transaxle failure will result. This transaxle uses GM T-IV fluid P/N 88900925. Notice: Do not remove the 3rd gear anchor band bolt located on top of the transmission for checking fluid or adding fluid. Removing the bolt will dislocate internal components and require the transmission to be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for repair. Add approximately 3.1 L (3.3 Qt) of GM T-IV fluid to the transaxle, using the fluid level indicator location. 6. Important: If the check is necessary at a low oil temperature of 30° - 40°C (86° - 104°F), perform check using the COLD range on the level gage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9609 However, the fluid must be re-checked at the proper fluid temperature. Start engine and operate vehicle until transaxle fluid temperature reaches 60° - 70°C (140° 158°F). 7. Apply parking brake. 8. Depress brake pedal and move shift lever slowly through all gear ranges from park (P) to low (L), pausing for about 3 seconds in each range. Return shift lever to park (P) range at idle condition. 9. Pull level gauge out again and check if fluid level is within the HOT range. 10. If fluid is not within the correct level, adjust accordingly: 1. If fluid is below the HOT range, add enough to bring it up to the correct level. 2. If fluid is above HOT range, drain excess fluid. 11. Install the fluid level indicator. Refer to Fluid Level Indicator Replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting Fluid Line/Hose: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-017B Date: November 25, 2008 Subject: Information on 4T65-E MN7, M15, M76, MN3 Automatic Transmission Case, Cooler Fitting and Torque Converter Drain Back Check Ball Change Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with one of the HYDRA-MATIC(R) Automatic Transmissions shown above. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Parts Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-017A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Effective with Julian date 4019 (January 19, 2004), the 4T65E transaxle cases and cooler fittings have changed and are not interchangeable with past models. The technician may find that when replacing the inlet or outlet transmission cooler lines, the new lines cannot be connected to the transmission. A change to the transmission cooler line fittings was implemented in production on February 1, 2004. The cooler line fittings were changed to a design with a longer lead in pilot (1). The cooler line fittings with the longer lead in pilot will not fit on models built before February 1, 2004. The longer lead in pilot fittings (1) (9/16-18 UNF) have replaced the shorter lead in pilot fittings (2) (3/8-18 NPSF w/check ball & 1/4-18 NPSF). If the transmission cooler lines will not connect, then replace them with the following cooler line fittings as appropriate with the older, shorter lead in pilot design: ^ For vehicles built prior to February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Hose, P/N 20793004. ^ For vehicles built after February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Hose, second design P/N 15264588. ^ For vehicles built prior to February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Hose, P/N 20793005. ^ For vehicles built after February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Hose, second design P/N 15264589. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting > Page 9614 The torque specification has changed for the fittings to case. The torque has changed from 38 Nm (28 lb ft) to 32 Nm (23 lb ft). Tighten Tighten the new cooler fittings to 32 Nm (23 lb ft). The converter drain back check ball (420C) has been removed from the cooler line fitting and is now located in the channel plate. If you get a concern of no movement in the morning or after sitting for several hours, the cooler check ball should be inspected. The best way to determine where the check ball is located is to look at the cooler line fittings. The old fittings are different sizes (3/8-18 NPSF & 1/4-18 NPSF) and would contain the cooler check ball. The new fittings are the same size as each other (9/16-18 UNF) and do not have a cooler check ball. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9615 Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair Oil Cooler Line Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Caution: Ensure that the vehicle is properly supported and squarely positioned. To help avoid personal injury when a vehicle is on a hoist, provide additional support for the vehicle on the opposite end from which the components are being removed. Position the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Place a drain pan or suitable container under the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the transaxle oil cooler lines from the radiator. 4. Raise the vehicle. 5. Disengage the transaxle cooler lines from the fan shroud. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9616 6. Remove the transaxle cooler line assembly nut (2) from the transaxle. 7. Remove the transaxle cooler lines (1) from the vehicle. 8. Replace the transaxle oil cooler pipe seals. Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle oil cooler line assembly (1) to the transaxle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the transaxle oil cooler line assembly nut (2). ^ Tighten the transaxle oil cooler lines to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9617 4. Engage the transaxle oil cooler lines with the fan shroud by snapping in place. 5. Connect the transaxle oil cooler lines to the radiator. ^ Tighten the transaxle cooler line fittings to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 6. Important: Dexron III automatic transmission fluid is not compatible with this transaxle. If Dexron III ATF is used, transaxle failure will result. This transaxle uses GM T-IV fluid P/N 88900925. Add fluid to the transaxle. Refer to the Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure. 7. Start the engine a check for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Fluid Pan: Specifications Fluid Pan Tighten the control valve body cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten the bolts to ............................................................................................................................................................ 13 Nm (115 inch lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Shift Indicator: Description and Operation SHIFT INDICATOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The shift indicator, located in the console, displays the selected gear position. The body control module (BCM) controls the LEDs in the PRNDL display of the shift indicator through 4 control circuits. The parameters of the 4 control circuits to the shift indicator are bits A, B, C, and parity. These outputs are available for display on the scan tool. The BCM has 8 DTCs for these 4 control circuits. These DTCs diagnose a short or an open for each circuit. The BCM receives selected gear position information from the transmission control module (TCM) via serial data. The TCM receives the gear position through four inputs from the park/neutral position switch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Output Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise Output Shaft: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-042F Date: February 05, 2010 Subject: Information on 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32, M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and 4L70E transmission. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-042E (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Important For 2005 model year fullsize utilities and pickups, refer to Corporate Bulletin 05-07-30-012. Some vehicles may exhibit a clunk noise that can be heard on a 2-3 upshift or a 3-2 downshift. During a 2-3 upshift, the 2-4 band is released and the 3-4 clutch is applied. The timing of this shift can cause a momentary torque reversal of the output shaft that results in a clunk noise. This same torque reversal can also occur on a 3-2 downshift when the 3-4 clutch is released and the 2-4 band applied. This condition may be worse on a 4-wheel drive vehicle due to the additional tolerances in the transfer case. This is a normal condition. No repairs should be attempted. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Lock Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Lock Cable: Service and Repair Park Lock Cable Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the SIR system. 2. Remove the console. 3. Remove the lock cylinder bezel from the steering column shroud by carefully prying with a thin bladed screwdriver. 4. Remove the shroud fasteners and remove the steering column upper and lower shroud panels. 5. Make sure the key is in the OFF position. 6. Squeeze the tabs on the park lock cable clip and pull upward to remove the cable from the shift control. 7. Disconnect the park lock cable from the shift control park lock lever. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Lock Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9632 8. Disengage the retaining tabs and remove the park lock cable from the ignition module. 9. Note the park lock cable routing while removing the park lock cable from the vehicle. 10. Using a screwdriver, push on the black tab to release the end fitting. Discard the end fitting. Installation Procedure 1. Install a new end fitting on the park lock cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Lock Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9633 2. Install the park lock cable onto the ignition module. 3. Install the park lock cable onto the shift control. 4. Install the park lock cable end terminal onto the park lock lever by aligning the cable fitting to the park lock lever pin and pushing forward. When installing, be sure not to install the cable end fitting on an angle or push down on the cable portion as this may cause cable to misadjust. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Lock Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9634 5. With the cable adjuster in the unlocked position, verify the shift control is in the park (P) position. Lock the adjuster piece into place by pushing in on the tab, then check the cable adjustment as follows: 1. Set the parking brake. 2. With the ignition key removed from ignition lock cylinder and control shift lever in the park (P) position, depress the control shift lever button and attempt to move control shift lever out of park (P) position. ^ If control shift lever can be shifted out of park (P) position, perform step 5 over again ensuring that the cable adjuster lock is operating properly. ^ If control shift lever cannot be shifted out of park (P) position, proceed to next step. 3. Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder assembly and turn to RUN position. 4. Depress the brake pedal and depress the control shift lever button and move control shift lever out of park (P) position. 5. Release the brake pedal. With the control shift lever out of the park (P) position, attempt to turn ignition to LOCK position. Ensure the ignition key is pushed inward toward the steering column when it is rotated toward LOCK position. ^ If ignition key can be turned to LOCK position with control shift lever out of park (P) position, return to the beginning of step 5 and check the park lock cable adjustment. ^ If the ignition key cannot be turned to LOCK position with the control shift lever out of the park (P) position, park lock cable is properly adjusted. Proceed to next step. 6. Depress the control shift lever button. Move control shift lever to park (P) position. 7. Turn the ignition key to ON position and then to OFF position. 8. Ensure ignition key is removable. ^ If ignition key can be removed from ignition lock cylinder assembly, proceed to next step. ^ If ignition key cannot be removed from ignition lock assembly, return to the beginning of step 5 and check the park lock cable adjustment. 9. Turn the ignition key to LOCK position. 10. Remove the ignition key from the ignition lock cylinder assembly. 6. Install the shroud fasteners and install the steering column upper and lower shroud panels. 7. Install the lock cylinder bezel onto the steering column shroud. 8. Install the console. 9. Enable the SIR system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 9638 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Line Pressure Control Solenoid (SLT) Line Pressure Control Solenoid (SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-07-30-014 > May > 07 > A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-014 Date: May 23, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: AF33-5 Transmission - Check Engine Light On, DTC P0711 or U0101 Set (Reprogram TCM by Contacting TCSC) Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on the check engine light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find either DTC P0711 or U0101 set. Cause A software anomaly within the TCM may cause this condition. Correction DO NOT replace the internal transaxle wiring harness to correct P0711 code. Contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) to obtain a VCI number and reprogram the TCM to correct a single DTC of either P0711 or U0101. Multiple communication codes will NOT be addressed with this TCM software update. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 07-07-30-014 > May > 07 > A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-014 Date: May 23, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: AF33-5 Transmission - Check Engine Light On, DTC P0711 or U0101 Set (Reprogram TCM by Contacting TCSC) Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on the check engine light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find either DTC P0711 or U0101 set. Cause A software anomaly within the TCM may cause this condition. Correction DO NOT replace the internal transaxle wiring harness to correct P0711 code. Contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) to obtain a VCI number and reprogram the TCM to correct a single DTC of either P0711 or U0101. Multiple communication codes will NOT be addressed with this TCM software update. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Control Module C1 Control Module: Diagrams Transmission Control Module C1 Transmission Control Module C1 Transmission Control Module C1 Transmission Control Module C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Control Module C1 > Page 9664 Control Module: Diagrams Transmission Control Module C2 Transmission Control Module C2 Transmission Control Module C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Control Module C1 > Page 9665 Transmission Control Module C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9666 Control Module: Service and Repair Transaxle Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the TCM from TCM bracket. 3. Disconnect the transaxle control module (TCM) electrical connectors (1) from the TCM (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9667 1. Connect the TCM electrical connector (1) to the TCM (2). 2. Install the TCM to the TCM bracket. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. 4. Important: DTC P0602 is set with all new service transaxle control modules. When the transaxle control module is reprogrammed with the correct software and calibrations, DTC P0602 will be erased. Reprogram the TCM with the correct calibration. Refer to Transmission Control Module Programming and Setup. 5. Perform the transmission adaptive learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent > Page 9676 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent > Page 9682 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 9683 Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 01-07-30-032E Date: 080929 A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 9684 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 01-07-30-032E Date: 080929 A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 9685 To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9686 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Oil Cooler Pipe Seals Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41239-1 Cooler Line Seal Installer - J 45201 Cooler Line Seal Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise Vehicle. 2. Caution: Ensure that the vehicle is properly supported and squarely positioned. To help avoid personal injury when a vehicle is on a hoist, provide additional support for the vehicle on the opposite end from which the components are being removed. Place a drain pan or suitable container under the vehicle. 3. Remove the transaxle oil cooler line assembly nut from the transaxle. 4. Disconnect the transaxle oil cooler lines from the vehicle. 5. Important: Ensure that the J 45201 is fully seated into the transaxle seal bore. Insert the collet piece (2) of the J 45201 into the cooler line seal. 6. Insert the forcing screw piece (1) of the J 45201 into the collet (2). 7. Tighten the forcing screw (1) until snug. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9687 8. Thread the collar piece (1) of the J 45201 onto the collet (3) until snug. 9. Turn the collar clockwise in order to remove the cooler line seal (87). 10. Discard the seal (87). 11. Clean the case bores for the cooler line seals. Installation Procedure 1. Insert a new transaxle cooler line seal into the case bore. 2. Remove the nub from the J 41239-1. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9688 3. Install the nub of the J 41239-1 on the transaxle cooler line seal. 4. Tap the new transaxle cooler line seal into the case bore. 5. Install the transaxle oil cooler line assembly to the transaxle. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle oil cooler line assembly nut. ^ Tighten the transaxle cooler line retaining nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Important: Dexron III automatic transmission fluid is not compatible with this transaxle. If Dexron III ATF is used, transaxle failure will result. This transaxle uses GM T-IV fluid P/N 88900925. Add fluid to the transaxle. Refer to Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure. 9. Start the engine and check for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 9693 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 9694 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 9695 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required - J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 9698 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 9699 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 9700 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 9701 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 9702 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side > Page 9708 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor, Wiring Harness Side Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor, Wiring Harness Side Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Disconnect the wiring harness (4) from the input speed sensor. 3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt. 4. Remove the input speed sensor. 5. Remove the input speed sensor O-ring. Discard the O-ring. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 9711 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new input speed sensor O-ring. 2. Install the new input speed sensor O-ring onto the input speed sensor. 3. Install the input speed sensor to the transaxle. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the input speed sensor bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (4) to the input speed sensor. 6. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 9712 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the wiring harness (2) from the output shaft speed sensor. 2. Remove the output speed sensor bolt (3). 3. Remove the output shaft speed sensor (2) and the O-ring (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 9713 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new output speed sensor O-ring (1). 2. Install the new output speed sensor O-ring (1) onto the output speed sensor (2). 3. Install the output speed sensor (2) into the transmission case assembly. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the output speed sensor bolt (3). ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (2) to the output shaft speed sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9717 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9718 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams A/T Shift Lock Solenoid Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9723 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid/Switch Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the shift control assembly. 2. Disconnect the brake transaxle shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness connector. 3. Using a screwdriver, disconnect the plastic retainers at solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 4. Remove the solenoid from the shift control assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the solenoid onto the shift control assembly. Connect the plastic retainers at the solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 2. Connect the BTSI solenoid harness connector. 3. Install the shift control assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9727 Shift Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9730 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9731 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9732 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9733 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9734 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9735 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9736 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9737 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9738 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9739 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9740 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9741 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9742 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9743 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9744 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9745 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9746 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9747 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9748 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9749 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9750 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9751 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9752 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9753 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9754 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9755 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9756 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9757 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9758 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9759 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9760 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9761 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9762 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9763 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9764 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9765 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9766 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9767 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9768 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9769 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9770 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9771 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9772 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9773 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9774 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9775 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9776 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9777 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9778 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9779 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9780 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9781 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9782 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9783 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9784 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9785 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9786 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9787 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9788 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9789 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9790 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9791 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9792 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9793 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9794 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9795 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9796 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9797 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9798 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9799 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9800 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9801 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9802 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9803 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9804 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9805 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) Reverse, 1ST Shift Solenoid (S1) Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid (S1) Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid (S1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9806 Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9807 Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Knob Replacement Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Shift Control Knob Replacement Shift Control Knob Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Rotate the key to the RUN position, however do NOT start the vehicle. 3. Move the shift control lever rearward to one of the low gear positions. 4. Carefully insert a small flat bladed tool between the trim ring (2) and the shift knob (1). Apply careful downward pressure to the shift knob trim ring to separate the trim ring from the shift knob. The trim ring will drop down approximately 13.0 mm (0.5 inch) exposing the shift knob retaining screw. 5. Loosen the shift control knob screw (1) approximately 4-5 turns. It is not necessary to fully remove the screw from the shift control knob. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Knob Replacement > Page 9812 6. Remove the shift control knob (2) from the shift control lever (1). Installation Procedure 1. Install the shift control knob (2) to the shift control lever (1). 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the control knob screw (1) if previously removed. ^ Tighten the screw to 1.5 Nm (13 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Knob Replacement > Page 9813 3. Lift the shift control knob trim ring (1) up to the shift control knob until a click sound is heard indicating the trim ring is secured to the shift knob. 4. Check for proper operation of the shift knob button through all gear ranges. 5. Place the shift control lever in the PARK position. 6. Rotate the key to the off position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Knob Replacement > Page 9814 Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Shift Indicator Replacement Shift Indicator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the center trim bezel. 2. Remove the screws holding the shift indicator to the center console trim bezel and disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Remove the shift indicator from the center trim bezel. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Knob Replacement > Page 9815 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Align the shift indicator with the center trim bezel and fasten with the screws. ^ Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.). 2. Connect the electrical connection to the center trim bezel. 3. Attach the center trim bezel to the center stack. Verify proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments Shift Cable: Adjustments Shift Control Cable Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Adjustment Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake and ensure the vehicle is not running. 2. Ensure that the shift control assembly is in the park (P) position. 3. Pull back the white plastic cover (1) on the center connector. 4. Pull up on the center tabs of the lock button (2). 5. Important: This step must be performed correctly to avoid a misadjusted cable. Do not grasp the shift cable end (2) during this procedure. Release the shift cable end (2) and allow the blue spring to tension/adjust the shift cable system. 6. Pull the white cover (3) on the shift cable end (1) back. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 9820 7. Push the natural colored lock button (2) down to engage the locking teeth on the shift cable end (1). 8. Release the white cover (1). 9. Verify the white cover (1) conceals the natural colored lock (2). 10. If the white cover (1) does not conceal the natural colored lock (2), the shift cable must be readjusted. 11. Test the transmission for proper shift operation. 12. If all of the gear positions cannot be achieved, the shift cable must be readjusted. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement Shift Cable: Service and Repair Shift Control Cable Replacement Shift Control Cable Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Important: The shift control cable can be disassembled and removed as two independent sections when removal of the complete cable is not necessary, or the cable can remain together and be removed as one piece not requiring disassembly of the cable. Disassembling Cable 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Ensure that the shift control range select lever is in the park (P) position. 3. Remove the shift control cable retainer (2) from the cowl stud (1) near the brake master cylinder. 4. Pull back the spring loaded cover (2) to expose the cable adjustment lock (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 9823 5. Lift the cable adjustment lock (3) up to unlock both halves of the shift cable (1, 4). 6. Rotate the shift cable to expose the retaining clip (5). It may be necessary to pull the transaxle end of the shift cable (4) out of the shift control end of the shift cable (1) to fully expose the retaining clip (5). 7. Remove the retaining clip (2) from the shift control cable (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 9824 8. Separate the shift control end of the cable (1) from the transaxle end of the cable (2). Cable Removal - Shift Control End Refer to the following steps to remove the shift control end (2) of the shift control cable. 1. Remove the console. 2. Ensure that the shift control range select lever is in the park (P) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 9825 3. Using the J 36346, disconnect the shift control cable from the shift control range select lever pin. 4. Depress the shift control cable retainer clip tabs and remove the cable from the shift control. 5. Remove the shift control cable grommet from the cowl. 6. Remove the shift control cable retainer (1) from the cowl stud (2) near the generator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 9826 7. Remove the shift control cable retaining clips (2) from the cowl (1). 8. Note the shift control cable routing and remove the shift control cable from the vehicle. Cable Removal - Transaxle End Refer to the following steps to remove the transaxle end (1) of the shift control cable. 1. Using the J 36346, disconnect the shift control cable (2) from the transaxle range switch lever (3). 2. Depress the shift control cable retainer clip tabs and remove the shift control cable (2) from the shift control cable bracket (1). 3. Note the shift control cable routing and remove the shift control cable from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 9827 Cable Installation - Transaxle End Refer to the following steps to install the transaxle end (1) of the shift control cable. 1. Important: Ensure the shift control cable is routed exactly as originally positioned in the vehicle to avoid coming into contact with potential hazards such as hot, sharp, and moving objects. Install the shift control cable (2) to the shift control cable bracket (1). Ensure the shift control cable retaining tabs fully engage the shift control cable bracket. 2. Connect the shift control cable (2) to the transaxle range switch lever (3). Cable Installation - Shift Control End Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 9828 Refer to the following steps to remove the shift control end (2) of the shift control cable. 1. Important: Ensure the shift control cable is routed exactly as originally positioned in the vehicle to avoid coming into contact with potential hazards such as hot, sharp, and moving objects. Secure the shift control cable grommet by pressing the cable into the pass-thru hole in the cowl. 2. Ensure the shift control range select lever is in the park (P) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 9829 3. Install the shift control cable to the shift control. 4. Install the shift control cable onto the shift control range select lever pin. 5. Install the console. 6. Attach the shift control cable retainer (1) to the cowl stud (2) near the generator. 7. Install the shift control cable retaining clips (2) to the cowl (1). Assembling Cable Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 9830 1. Install the cable retaining clip (2). 2. Push the transaxle end of the shift control cable (4) into the shift control end of the shift control cable (1) until the cable retaining clip (5) is fully locked into the shift control cable groove (3). 3. Ensure that the shift control lever and the transaxle range select lever are both in the park (P) position. 4. Ensure the transaxle cable end (4) is not being held and that the spring is allowed to tension the cable. 5. Depress the cable adjustment lock (3) in order to lock both halves of the shift cable (1, 4). 6. Release the spring loaded cover (2) allowing it to cover the cable adjustment lock. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 9831 7. Install the shift control cable retainer (2) to the cowl stud (1) near the brake master cylinder. 8. Adjust the shift control cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 9832 Shift Cable: Service and Repair Shift Control Cable Bracket Replacement Shift Control Cable Bracket Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Notice: The control cable must be disconnected from the transaxle range switch lever prior to disconnecting it from the control cable bracket. Otherwise damage to the manual shift shaft may result, requiring transaxle disassembly. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the J 36346, disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Depress the shift control cable retainer clip tabs and remove the cable from the shift control cable bracket. 4. Remove the shift control cable bracket bolts. 5. Remove the shift control cable bracket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 9833 1. Install the transaxle shift control bracket. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle shift control bracket. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Secure the shift control cable to the bracket. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 4. With the transaxle range switch lever in neutral (N), attach the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when the shift control cable is properly installed. 5. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Torque Converter Replacement Information Torque Converter: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Torque Converter Replacement Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-010C Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle Torque Converter Replacement Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saturn Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Except VTi Equipped Vehicles (RPO M16 and M75) 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with ALL Automatic Transmissions and Transaxles Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2007-2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-010B (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The purpose of this bulletin is to help technicians determine when a torque converter should be replaced. Below is a list of general guidelines to follow. The converter should NOT be replaced if the following apply: ^ DTC P0742 - TCC stuck on is set. This code is almost always the result of a controls condition (i.e. stuck TCC solenoid/valve). Experience has shown that this code rarely indicates a mechanical concern within the torque converter. ^ The fluid has an odor or is discolored but no evidence of metal contamination. ^ Fine metal particles (traces of metal flakes/gray color to fluid ) are found in the converter. This is not harmful to the torque converter. ^ The vehicle has been exposed to high mileage. ^ A small amount of wear appears on the hub where the oil pump drive gear mates to the converter (RWD only). A certain amount of such wear is normal for both the hub and oil pump gear. Neither the converter nor the front pump assembly should be replaced. The torque converter should be replaced under any of the following conditions: ^ The vehicle has TCC shudder and/or no TCC apply. First complete all electrical and hydraulic diagnosis and check for proper engine operation. The converter clutch may be damaged. Also the converter bushing and/or internal 0-ring may be damaged. ^ Evidence of damage to the oil pump assembly pump shaft turbine shaft drive sprocket support and bearing or metal chips/debris in the converter. ^ Metal chips/debris are found in the converter or when flushing the cooler and the cooler lines. ^ External leaks in the hub weld area lug weld or closure weld. ^ Converter pilot is broken damaged or fits poorly into the crankshaft. ^ The converter hub is scored or damaged. ^ The transmission oil is contaminated with engine coolant engine oil or water. ^ If excessive end play is found after measuring the converter for proper end play (refer to Service Manual). ^ If metal chips/debris are found in the fluid filter or on the magnet and no internal parts in the unit are worn or damaged. This indicates that the material came from the converter. ^ The converter has an unbalanced condition that results in a vibration that cannot be corrected by following Converter Vibration Procedures. ^ Blue converter or dark circular ring between lugs. This condition will also require a complete cleaning of the cooler and a check for adequate flow Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Torque Converter Replacement Information > Page 9838 through the cooler. ^ Converter bearing noise determined by noise from the bell housing area in Drive or Reverse at idle. The noise is gone in Neutral and Park. ^ If silicon from the viscous clutch is found in the lower pan (4T80-E ONLY). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting Torque Converter Check Valve: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-017B Date: November 25, 2008 Subject: Information on 4T65-E MN7, M15, M76, MN3 Automatic Transmission Case, Cooler Fitting and Torque Converter Drain Back Check Ball Change Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with one of the HYDRA-MATIC(R) Automatic Transmissions shown above. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Parts Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-017A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Effective with Julian date 4019 (January 19, 2004), the 4T65E transaxle cases and cooler fittings have changed and are not interchangeable with past models. The technician may find that when replacing the inlet or outlet transmission cooler lines, the new lines cannot be connected to the transmission. A change to the transmission cooler line fittings was implemented in production on February 1, 2004. The cooler line fittings were changed to a design with a longer lead in pilot (1). The cooler line fittings with the longer lead in pilot will not fit on models built before February 1, 2004. The longer lead in pilot fittings (1) (9/16-18 UNF) have replaced the shorter lead in pilot fittings (2) (3/8-18 NPSF w/check ball & 1/4-18 NPSF). If the transmission cooler lines will not connect, then replace them with the following cooler line fittings as appropriate with the older, shorter lead in pilot design: ^ For vehicles built prior to February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Hose, P/N 20793004. ^ For vehicles built after February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Hose, second design P/N 15264588. ^ For vehicles built prior to February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Hose, P/N 20793005. ^ For vehicles built after February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Hose, second design P/N 15264589. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting > Page 9843 The torque specification has changed for the fittings to case. The torque has changed from 38 Nm (28 lb ft) to 32 Nm (23 lb ft). Tighten Tighten the new cooler fittings to 32 Nm (23 lb ft). The converter drain back check ball (420C) has been removed from the cooler line fitting and is now located in the channel plate. If you get a concern of no movement in the morning or after sitting for several hours, the cooler check ball should be inspected. The best way to determine where the check ball is located is to look at the cooler line fittings. The old fittings are different sizes (3/8-18 NPSF & 1/4-18 NPSF) and would contain the cooler check ball. The new fittings are the same size as each other (9/16-18 UNF) and do not have a cooler check ball. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9849 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9850 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9851 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9852 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9853 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9854 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9855 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9856 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9857 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9858 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9859 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9860 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9861 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9862 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9863 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9864 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9865 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9866 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9867 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9868 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9869 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9870 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9871 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9872 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9873 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9874 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9875 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9876 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9877 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9878 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9879 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9880 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9881 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9882 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9883 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9884 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9885 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9886 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9887 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9888 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9889 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9890 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9891 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9892 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9893 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9894 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9895 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9896 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9897 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9898 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9899 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9900 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9901 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9902 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9903 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9904 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9905 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9906 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9907 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9908 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9909 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9910 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9911 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9912 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9913 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9914 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9915 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9916 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9917 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9918 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9919 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9920 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9921 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9922 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Connector Views Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid (SLU) Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid (SLU) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-07-30-052G Date: March 02, 2011 Subject: Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow(R) Models: 2011 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 with Automatic Transmission/Transaxle including Allison(R) Transmissions Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. The J 45096 transmission oil cooling system flush and flow test tool replaces current tool J 35944-A. J 45096 is a self-contained unit utilizing a 12-volt flow meter, shop air supply and DEXRON(R) VI automatic transmission fluid (ATF). In the flush mode, transmission fluid is cycled through the transmission oil cooling system. High-pressure air is automatically injected into the fluid stream adding agitation to the ATF oil to enhance the removal of contaminated ATF oil and debris. In the flow mode, an electronic flow meter is used to measure the flow capability of the ATF oil cooling system. A digital display indicates the ATF oil flow rate in gallons per minute (GPM) along with the amount of ATF oil in the supply vessel, supply vessel ATF oil temperature, machine cycles and the operating mode. The supply oil vessel has 30 L (32 qt) capacity and the waste oil vessel has 32 L (34 qt) capacity. The waste oil vessel is constructed of a translucent composite material that allows the user to easily identify the oil level. The waste oil vessel can accommodate vacuum evacuation and gravity draining. In the code mode, a random, encrypted code is generated that can be used for verification of flow test results. Current essential cooler line adapters are used to connect the J 45096 to the automatic transmission oil cooler lines that allows J 45096 to adapt to General Motors passenger cars and light duty trucks, current and past models (except the Pontiac Vibe, Wave and Chevrolet Aveo). The tool may be adapted for use on the Pontiac Vibe, Wave and Chevrolet Aveo by dealership personnel with a barbed hose connector and rubber hose obtained locally. The Vibe's/Wave's/Aveo's transmission has a transmission oil requirement which is slightly different than DEXRON(R) VI ATF. However, flushing the cooler with DEXRON(R) VI automatic transmission fluid is an acceptable service procedure. Very little fluid remains in the cooler after the flush procedure and the residual DEXRON(R) VI ATF in the cooler is compatible with the Vibe's/Wave's/Aveo's transmission fluid. Notice Insufficient oil flow through the ATF oil cooling system will cause premature transmission failure. The required minimum ATF oil flow rate reading is directly related to the supply oil temperature. Refer to the flow rate reference chart for the oil flow rate specification based on the temperature of the ATF in the supply vessel. Helpful Hints for Maintaining the Temperature at or above 18°C (65°F) Important - The temperature of the supply vessel oil must be 18°C (65°F) or greater for J 45096 to operate. It is recommended to store the J 45096 in an area of the dealership where the room temperature remains at or above 18°C (65°F) when not in use. - Do not attempt to increase the fluid temperature in the Transflow(R) machine with an engine oil dipstick, or any other immersion type heater. The Transflow(R) machine has a check valve in the supply reservoir. Inserting a heater will damage the check valve and the subsequent repair expense would be the dealer's responsibility. - A heater blanket, P/N J-45096-10, is available for the Transflow(R) transmission cooling system flushing tool. This heater fastens around the Transflow(R) internal supply vessel and runs on 110 volts AC. The heater will warm the ATF in the supply vessel to at least 18°C (65° F) and has a thermostat to hold a constant temperature. Store the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R) machine in a room where the temperature is maintained at or above 18°C (65°F). Keep the ATF level in the reservoir low when the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R), is not in use. Store several gallons of oil in an area where the temperature is maintained at or above 18°C (65°F). Fill the reservoir of the J 45096 as needed before using the machine on Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 9927 each repair. With the ATF in a tightly sealed container, place the container in a tub of hot water for a period of time. Then pour the ATF into the reservoir. This method works best with a low fluid level in the reservoir. Place the Transflow(R) machine in the direct sunlight with the cabinet door open to expose the reservoir to the rays of the warm sun. Flush / Flow Test Procedure Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle and require the transmission oil pan or transmission side cover to be removed include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. Refer to SI for Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test J 45096 for the appropriate procedure. Important The J 45096 can be used to flush the transmission oil cooler system on an Allison equipped vehicle, but the flow meter should not be utilized. Refer to SI for Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test J 45096 for the appropriate flow check procedure. Machine Displays After completion of the flush and flow test, the following information is to be recorded on the repair order. This information is displayed on the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R) machine when the dial is in the code position. - Tested flow rate (displayed in Gallons Per Minute (GPM) - Temperature (displayed is degrees Fahrenheit) - Cycle number (a number) - Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code (i.e. A10DFB2) Warranty Information Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. Performing a transmission oil cooling system flush and flow test will use between 4.7-7.5 L (5-8 qts) of DEXRON(R)VI transmission fluid. The amount Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 9928 of transmission fluid (ATF), (DEXRON(R)VI) (fluid) that is to be charged for the flush portion of the repair should not exceed the allowable charge for 7.5 L (2 gal) of fluid. This expense should be shown in the Parts Section of the warranty claim document. The Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code, i.e. A10DFB2, "MUST" be written on the job card and placed in the comments section of the warranty claim. Any repair that requires the technician to contact the Product Quality Center (PQC) must also include the seven digit flow code. The agent will request the seven digit flow code and add the information to the PQC case prior to providing authorization for the warranty claim. The Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code, i.e. A10DFB2, "MUST" be written on the job card, entered in the warranty claim labor operation Flush Code additional field (when available) and placed in the comments section of the warranty claim. Any repair that requires the technician to contact the Product Quality Center (PQC) must also include the seven digit flow code. The agent will request the seven digit flow code and add the information to the PQC case prior to providing authorization for the warranty claim. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 9929 Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 9930 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > AF33-5 Transmission Mount Inspection Transmission Mount: Testing and Inspection AF33-5 Transmission Mount Inspection Transmission Mount Inspection Inspection Procedure 1. Notice: In order to avoid oil pan damage and possible engine failure, insert a block of wood that spans the width of the oil pan bottom between the oil pan and the jack support. Important: Before replacing any transmission mount due to a suspected fluid loss, verify that the source of the fluid is the mount. Raise the transmission/transaxle in order to relieve tension in the mount. 2. Observe the mount while raising the transmission/transaxle. Raising the transmission/transaxle removes the weight from the mount. 3. Replace the mount if it exhibits any of the following conditions: ^ The hard rubber surface is covered with heat check cracks. ^ The rubber is separated from the outer metal sleeve of the mount. ^ The rubber is split through the center of the transmission mount. ^ The mount is leaking fluid. 4. When replacing the transmission mounts or brackets, refer to the following procedures: ^ Transmission Mount Replacement - Rear ^ Transmission Mount Bracket Replacement - Rear ^ Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > AF33-5 Transmission Mount Inspection > Page 9935 Transmission Mount: Testing and Inspection Transmission Mount Inspection Anchor Article Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the transaxle brace to engine oil pan bolts (2). 3. Remove the transaxle brace to transaxle bolt (1). 4. Remove the transaxle brace (3). Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle brace (3). 2. Install the transaxle brace bolts (1, 2). ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement > Page 9938 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Mount Replacement - Rear Transmission Mount Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove both front tires and wheels. 3. If equipped with AWD, disconnect the stabilizer links from the stabilizer shaft. 4. If equipped with AWD, swing the stabilizer shaft upwards in order to gain additional clearance. 5. Remove the transmission mount-to-bracket through bolt. 6. Remove the transmission mount-to-frame bolts. 7. Remove the transmission mount from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the transmission mount to the frame. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement > Page 9939 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transmission mount-to-frame bolts. ^ Tighten the bolt to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the transmission mount-to-bracket through bolt, while aligning the transmission mount to the bracket. ^ Tighten the bolt to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 4. If equipped with AWD, lower the stabilizer shaft and connect the stabilizer links. ^ Tighten the stabilizer link nuts to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 5. Install both front tires and wheels. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement > Page 9940 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Removal Procedure 1. Support the engine. 2. Remove the battery tray. 3. Remove the transmission mount to transmission bolts. 4. Remove the transmission mount to frame rail bolts. 5. Remove the mount from the engine. Installation Procedure 1. Position the transmission mount on the frame rail. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement > Page 9941 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transmission mount to frame rail bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the transmission mount to transmission bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the battery tray. 5. Remove the engine support. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement > Page 9942 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Mount Bracket Replacement - Rear Transmission Mount Bracket Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear transmission mount. 2. Disconnect the intermediate steering shaft from the steering gear. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement > Page 9943 3. Remove the steering gear to frame bolts. 4. Secure the steering gear upward in order to gain additional clearance. 5. Remove the transmission mount bracket to transmission bolts. 6. Remove the transmission mount bracket from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement > Page 9944 1. Position the transmission mount bracket to the transmission. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transmission mount bracket to transmission bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 3. Lower the steering gear to the frame. 4. Install the steering gear to frame bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement > Page 9945 5. Install the intermediate steering shaft to the steering gear. 6. Install the intermediate steering shaft to gear pinch bolt. ^ Tighten the bolts to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the rear transmission mount. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 9949 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 9950 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 9951 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required - J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 9954 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 9955 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 9956 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 9957 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 9958 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side > Page 9964 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor, Wiring Harness Side Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor, Wiring Harness Side Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Disconnect the wiring harness (4) from the input speed sensor. 3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt. 4. Remove the input speed sensor. 5. Remove the input speed sensor O-ring. Discard the O-ring. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 9967 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new input speed sensor O-ring. 2. Install the new input speed sensor O-ring onto the input speed sensor. 3. Install the input speed sensor to the transaxle. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the input speed sensor bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (4) to the input speed sensor. 6. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 9968 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the wiring harness (2) from the output shaft speed sensor. 2. Remove the output speed sensor bolt (3). 3. Remove the output shaft speed sensor (2) and the O-ring (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 9969 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new output speed sensor O-ring (1). 2. Install the new output speed sensor O-ring (1) onto the output speed sensor (2). 3. Install the output speed sensor (2) into the transmission case assembly. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the output speed sensor bolt (3). ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (2) to the output shaft speed sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9973 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9974 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips Valve Body: Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-036H Date: January 29, 2009 Subject: Diagnostic Tips for Automatic Transmission DTC P0756, Second, Third, Fourth Gear Start Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32 or M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 model year and add details regarding spacer plates. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-036G (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Some dealership technicians may have difficulty diagnosing DTC P0756, 2-3 Shift Valve Performance on 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E automatic transmissions. As detailed in the Service Manual, when the PCM detects a 4-3-3-4 shift pattern, DTC P0756 will set. Some customers may also describe a condition of a second, third or fourth gear start that may have the same causes but has not set this DTC yet. Below are some tips when diagnosing this DTC: ^ This is a performance code. This means that a mechanical malfunction exists. ^ This code is not set by electrical issues such as a damaged wiring harness or poor electrical connections. Electrical problems would cause a DTC P0758, P0787 or P0788 to set. ^ The most likely cause is chips/debris plugging the filtered AFL oil at orifice # 29 on the top of the spacer plate (48). This is a very small hole and is easily plugged by a small amount of debris. It is important to remove the spacer plate and inspect orifice # 29 and the immediate area for the presence of chips/debris. Also, the transmission case passage directly above this orifice and the valve body passage directly below should be inspected and cleaned of any chips/debris. For 2003 and newer vehicles the spacer plate should be replaced. The service replacement spacer plate is a bonded style with gaskets and solenoid filter screens bonded to the spacer plate. These screens can help to prevent plugging of orifice # 29 caused by small debris or chips. ^ This code could be set if the 2-3 shift valve (368) were stuck or hung-up in its bore. Inspect the 2-3 shift valve (368) and the 2-3 shuttle valve (369) for free movement or damage and clean the valves, the bore and the valve body passages. ^ This code could be set by a 2-3 shift solenoid (367b) if it were cracked, broken or leaking. Refer to Shift Solenoid Leak Test in the appropriate Service Manual for the leak test procedure. Based on parts return findings, a damaged or leaking shift solenoid is the least likely cause of this condition. Simply replacing a shift solenoid will not correct this condition unless the solenoid has been found to be cracked, broken or leaking. It is important to also refer to the appropriate Service Manual or Service Information (SI) for further possible causes of this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9979 Valve Body: Locations Disassembled Views Control Valve Body Assembly 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) - Dark Gray 301 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 62) 302 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 28) (2) 302 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 28) (2) 302 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 28) (2) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) - Blue 304 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 50) (2) 304 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 50) (2) 305 - Reverse Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S5) - Brown 306 - Shift Solenoid Valve O-ring Seal (5) 306 - Shift Solenoid Valve O-ring Seal (5) 306 - Shift Solenoid Valve O-ring Seal (5) 307 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 10) (3) 307 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 10) (3) 307 Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 10) (3) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) - Black 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) - Black 311 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 13) 312 - Control Valve Body Solenoid Valve Retainer 313 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 20) (5) 313 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 20) (5) 314 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 16) (2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9980 315 - Front Control Valve Body Assembly 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) - Blue 318 - Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Clip 319 - TCC Lock Up Control Solenoid Valve Retainer (SLU) 320 - Front Control Valve Body to Front Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Gasket 321 - Front Control Valve Body Spacer Plate 322 - Front Control Valve Body Spacer Plate to Middle Control Valve Body Gasket 323 - Middle Control Valve Body Assembly 324 - Middle Control Valve Body Assembly to Rear Control Valve Body Spacer Plate and Gasket Assembly 326 - Rear Control Valve Body Assembly 327 - Rear Control Valve Body to Rear Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Gasket 328 - Rear Control Valve Body Assembly Spacer Plate 329 - Rear Control Valve Body Assembly Spacer Plate to No. 2 Rear Control Valve Body Assembly Gasket 330 - No. 2 Rear Control Valve Body Assembly 331 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 76) 332 Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 49.5) (4) 333 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 40) 334 - Control Valve Body Assembly Pressure Test Hole Bolt/Screw Pressure Tap (M6 x 1.0 x 12) (1) 335 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 35) (2) 336 - Manual Valve Link 337 Manual Valve 338 - Manual Valve Link Retainer 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) - Black 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Green Front Control Valve Body Assembly 345 - Front Control Valve Body 346 - Solenoid Modulator Valve 347 - Solenoid Modulator Valve Spring - Yellow 348 - Solenoid Modulator Valve Bore Plug (4) 348 - Solenoid Modulator Valve Bore Plug (4) 348 - Solenoid Modulator Valve Bore Plug (4) 348 - Solenoid Modulator Valve Bore Plug (4) 349 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 10) (4) 349 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 10) (4) 349 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 10) (4) 349 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 10) (4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9981 350 - Pressure Relief Valve Spring - Natural Color 351 - Pressure Relief Valve 352 - Fluid Strainer 354 - Forward Clutch (C1) Control Valve 355 - Ball Check Valve 356 - Neutral Relay Valve 357 Neutral Relay Valve Spring - Light Blue 358 - 2nd Coast Clutch (B1) Control Valve Spring - Blue 359 - 2nd Coast Clutch (B1) Control Valve 360 - Check Valve (2) 361 - Check Valve Spring (2) Middle Control Valve Body Assembly 353 - Accumulator Check Valve Assembly (6) 353 - Accumulator Check Valve Assembly (7) 362 Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 362 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 362 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 362 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 362 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 362 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 362 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 370 - Middle Control Valve Body 371 - Fluid Strainer (3) 371 - Fluid Strainer (3) 372 - Fluid Strainer 373 - Reverse Shift Ball Check Valve Bushing - Inner 374 - Reverse Shift Ball Check Valve 375 - Reverse Shift Ball Check Valve Bushing - Outer 376 - Solenoid Relay Valve Sleeve 377 - Solenoid Relay Valve Plunger 378 Solenoid Relay Valve 379 - Solenoid Relay Valve Spring - Orange 380 - Cooler By-Pass Valve Spring - Natural Color 381 - Cooler By-Pass Valve 382 - TCC Check Valve 383 - TCC Check Valve Spring - Yellow Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9982 384 - 3rd Gear Band (B4) Release Valve Spring - Blue 385 - 3rd Gear Band (B4) Release Valve 386 - U1 Shift Valve 387 - U1 Shift Valve Spring - Light Green 389 - M1 Shift Valve 390 - M1 Shift Valve Spring - Light Blue 391 - M1 Shift Valve Bore Plug 392 - U2 Shift Valve 393 - U2 Shift Valve Spring - Light Green 394 - U2 Shift Valve Bore Plug (3) 394 - U2 Shift Valve Bore Plug (3) 394 - U2 Shift Valve Bore Plug (3) 395 - Primary Regulator Valve 396 - Primary Regulator Valve Spring Purple 397 - Primary Regulator Valve Plunger 398 - Primary Regulator Valve Sleeve 399 - Forward Clutch Check Ball Rear Control Valve Body Assembly 410 - Rear Control Valve Body 411 - 1-2 Reverse Clutch (B5) Control Valve 412 - Lock Up Relay Control Valve Sleeve 413 - Lock Up Relay Control Valve Plunger 414 - Lock Up Relay Valve Spring - Red 415 - Lock Up Relay Valve 416 - Rear Valve Body Cover Plate Bolt - Hexagon (M5 x 0.8 x 13) (2) 417 - Rear Valve Body Cover Plate 418 - Rear Valve Body Cover Plate Gasket 419 Rear Valve Body Cover Plate Gasket 420 - Rear Valve Body Cover Plate 421 - Rear Valve Body Cover Plate Bolt - Hexagon (M5 x 0.8 x 13) (7) 422 - 3rd Gear Band (B4) Control Valve Spring Orange 423 - 3rd Gear Band (B4) Control Valve 424 - Shift Pressure Relay Valve 425 - Shift Pressure Relay Valve Spring - Light Green 426 - M2 Shift Valve 427 - M2 Shift Valve Spring - Light Blue Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9983 428 - Shift Pressure Control Valve Sleeve 429 - Shift Pressure Control Valve Spring - White 430 Shift Pressure Control Valve 431 - Shift Pressure Control Valve Plunger 432 - Shift Pressure Control Valve Plunger Sleeve 433 - Line Pressure Control (SLT) Accumulator Piston 434 - Line Pressure Control (SLT) Accumulator Piston Spring - Outer - Orange 435 - Line Pressure Control (SLT) Accumulator Piston Spring - Inner - Orange 436 - Secondary Regulator Valve 437 Secondary Regulator Valve Spring - Natural Color No. 2 Rear Control Valve Body Assembly 353 - Accumulator Check Valve Assembly (2) 353 - Accumulator Check Valve Assembly (2) 445 No. 2 Rear Control Valve Body 446 - 2nd Clutch (B2) Control Valve 447 - 2nd Clutch (B2) Control Valve Spring - Natural Color 448 - 2nd Clutch (B2) Control Valve Plug 449 - TCC Check Valve Spring - Light Blue 450 - TCC Check Valve 451 - Reverse Shift Restrict Ball Check Valve Bushing Inner 452 - Reverse Shift Restrict Ball Check Valve 453 - Reverse Shift Restrict Ball Check Valve Bushing - Outer 454 - Lock Up Control Valve 455 - Lock Up Control Valve Plunger 456 - Lock Up Control Valve Spring - Yellow 457 - Lock Up Control Valve Sleeve 458 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 21.2) 459 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 15) (2) 459 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 15) (2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9984 Valve Body: Diagrams Disassembled Views Control Valve Body Assembly 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) - Dark Gray 301 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 62) 302 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 28) (2) 302 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 28) (2) 302 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 28) (2) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) - Blue 304 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 50) (2) 304 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 50) (2) 305 - Reverse Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S5) - Brown 306 - Shift Solenoid Valve O-ring Seal (5) 306 - Shift Solenoid Valve O-ring Seal (5) 306 - Shift Solenoid Valve O-ring Seal (5) 307 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 10) (3) 307 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 10) (3) 307 Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 10) (3) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) - Black 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) - Black 311 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 13) 312 - Control Valve Body Solenoid Valve Retainer 313 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 20) (5) 313 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 20) (5) 314 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 16) (2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9985 315 - Front Control Valve Body Assembly 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) - Blue 318 - Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Clip 319 - TCC Lock Up Control Solenoid Valve Retainer (SLU) 320 - Front Control Valve Body to Front Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Gasket 321 - Front Control Valve Body Spacer Plate 322 - Front Control Valve Body Spacer Plate to Middle Control Valve Body Gasket 323 - Middle Control Valve Body Assembly 324 - Middle Control Valve Body Assembly to Rear Control Valve Body Spacer Plate and Gasket Assembly 326 - Rear Control Valve Body Assembly 327 - Rear Control Valve Body to Rear Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Gasket 328 - Rear Control Valve Body Assembly Spacer Plate 329 - Rear Control Valve Body Assembly Spacer Plate to No. 2 Rear Control Valve Body Assembly Gasket 330 - No. 2 Rear Control Valve Body Assembly 331 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 76) 332 Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 49.5) (4) 333 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 40) 334 - Control Valve Body Assembly Pressure Test Hole Bolt/Screw Pressure Tap (M6 x 1.0 x 12) (1) 335 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 35) (2) 336 - Manual Valve Link 337 Manual Valve 338 - Manual Valve Link Retainer 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) - Black 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Green Front Control Valve Body Assembly 345 - Front Control Valve Body 346 - Solenoid Modulator Valve 347 - Solenoid Modulator Valve Spring - Yellow 348 - Solenoid Modulator Valve Bore Plug (4) 348 - Solenoid Modulator Valve Bore Plug (4) 348 - Solenoid Modulator Valve Bore Plug (4) 348 - Solenoid Modulator Valve Bore Plug (4) 349 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 10) (4) 349 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 10) (4) 349 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 10) (4) 349 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 10) (4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9986 350 - Pressure Relief Valve Spring - Natural Color 351 - Pressure Relief Valve 352 - Fluid Strainer 354 - Forward Clutch (C1) Control Valve 355 - Ball Check Valve 356 - Neutral Relay Valve 357 Neutral Relay Valve Spring - Light Blue 358 - 2nd Coast Clutch (B1) Control Valve Spring - Blue 359 - 2nd Coast Clutch (B1) Control Valve 360 - Check Valve (2) 361 - Check Valve Spring (2) Middle Control Valve Body Assembly 353 - Accumulator Check Valve Assembly (6) 353 - Accumulator Check Valve Assembly (7) 362 Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 362 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 362 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 362 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 362 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 362 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 362 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 370 - Middle Control Valve Body 371 - Fluid Strainer (3) 371 - Fluid Strainer (3) 372 - Fluid Strainer 373 - Reverse Shift Ball Check Valve Bushing - Inner 374 - Reverse Shift Ball Check Valve 375 - Reverse Shift Ball Check Valve Bushing - Outer 376 - Solenoid Relay Valve Sleeve 377 - Solenoid Relay Valve Plunger 378 Solenoid Relay Valve 379 - Solenoid Relay Valve Spring - Orange 380 - Cooler By-Pass Valve Spring - Natural Color 381 - Cooler By-Pass Valve 382 - TCC Check Valve 383 - TCC Check Valve Spring - Yellow Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9987 384 - 3rd Gear Band (B4) Release Valve Spring - Blue 385 - 3rd Gear Band (B4) Release Valve 386 - U1 Shift Valve 387 - U1 Shift Valve Spring - Light Green 389 - M1 Shift Valve 390 - M1 Shift Valve Spring - Light Blue 391 - M1 Shift Valve Bore Plug 392 - U2 Shift Valve 393 - U2 Shift Valve Spring - Light Green 394 - U2 Shift Valve Bore Plug (3) 394 - U2 Shift Valve Bore Plug (3) 394 - U2 Shift Valve Bore Plug (3) 395 - Primary Regulator Valve 396 - Primary Regulator Valve Spring Purple 397 - Primary Regulator Valve Plunger 398 - Primary Regulator Valve Sleeve 399 - Forward Clutch Check Ball Rear Control Valve Body Assembly 410 - Rear Control Valve Body 411 - 1-2 Reverse Clutch (B5) Control Valve 412 - Lock Up Relay Control Valve Sleeve 413 - Lock Up Relay Control Valve Plunger 414 - Lock Up Relay Valve Spring - Red 415 - Lock Up Relay Valve 416 - Rear Valve Body Cover Plate Bolt - Hexagon (M5 x 0.8 x 13) (2) 417 - Rear Valve Body Cover Plate 418 - Rear Valve Body Cover Plate Gasket 419 Rear Valve Body Cover Plate Gasket 420 - Rear Valve Body Cover Plate 421 - Rear Valve Body Cover Plate Bolt - Hexagon (M5 x 0.8 x 13) (7) 422 - 3rd Gear Band (B4) Control Valve Spring Orange 423 - 3rd Gear Band (B4) Control Valve 424 - Shift Pressure Relay Valve 425 - Shift Pressure Relay Valve Spring - Light Green 426 - M2 Shift Valve 427 - M2 Shift Valve Spring - Light Blue Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9988 428 - Shift Pressure Control Valve Sleeve 429 - Shift Pressure Control Valve Spring - White 430 Shift Pressure Control Valve 431 - Shift Pressure Control Valve Plunger 432 - Shift Pressure Control Valve Plunger Sleeve 433 - Line Pressure Control (SLT) Accumulator Piston 434 - Line Pressure Control (SLT) Accumulator Piston Spring - Outer - Orange 435 - Line Pressure Control (SLT) Accumulator Piston Spring - Inner - Orange 436 - Secondary Regulator Valve 437 Secondary Regulator Valve Spring - Natural Color No. 2 Rear Control Valve Body Assembly 353 - Accumulator Check Valve Assembly (2) 353 - Accumulator Check Valve Assembly (2) 445 No. 2 Rear Control Valve Body 446 - 2nd Clutch (B2) Control Valve 447 - 2nd Clutch (B2) Control Valve Spring - Natural Color 448 - 2nd Clutch (B2) Control Valve Plug 449 - TCC Check Valve Spring - Light Blue 450 - TCC Check Valve 451 - Reverse Shift Restrict Ball Check Valve Bushing Inner 452 - Reverse Shift Restrict Ball Check Valve 453 - Reverse Shift Restrict Ball Check Valve Bushing - Outer 454 - Lock Up Control Valve 455 - Lock Up Control Valve Plunger 456 - Lock Up Control Valve Spring - Yellow 457 - Lock Up Control Valve Sleeve 458 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 21.2) 459 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 15) (2) 459 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 15) (2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement Valve Body: Service and Repair Control Valve Body Cover Replacement Control Valve Body Cover Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. 2. Remove the left front wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the left splash shield. 4. Remove the front engine mount. 5. Remove the transaxle oil cooler lines and seals from the transaxle. 6. Remove the 9 TORX bolts (2) from the control valve body cover (1). Important: Do not pry with a tool on the transaxle control valve body cover, case or sealing surfaces. 7. Remove control valve body cover. Installation Procedure 1. Clean any gasket material from the control valve body cover and inspect the gasket mounting surface. 2. Install a 3 mm (0.125 inch) bead of RTV sealer GM P/N 89020326 (Canadian P/N 89021188) onto the control valve body cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 9991 3. Install the control valve body cover (1) onto the transaxle case. 4. Important: Use LOCTITE(tm) 242 thread sealer on ALL bolt threads. Install the control valve body cover bolts (2) hand tight. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the control valve body cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten the bolts to 13 Nm (115 inch lbs.). 6. Install the transaxle oil cooler lines and seals to the transaxle. 7. Install the front engine mount. 8. Install the left splash shield. 9. Install the left front wheel and the tire assembly. 10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Check the transaxle fluid level. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 9992 Valve Body: Service and Repair Control Valve Body Replacement Control Valve Body Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Important: Place the transaxle in neutral (N). Remove the control valve body cover. 2. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors (1-8). 3. Remove the fluid temperature sensor bolt (31). 4. Remove the fluid temperature sensor clamp (49). 5. Remove the fluid temperature sensor (36) and the O-ring (32) from the control valve body. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 9993 6. Remove the wiring harness (33) from the automatic transaxle wiring harness clip. 7. With a twisting motion remove the complete wiring harness assembly. 8. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts/screws (31), control valve body fluid passage cover (37) and gasket (38). 9. Remove the 6 control valve body mounting bolts/screws (1-6). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 9994 10. While holding the control valve body assembly, disconnect the manual shift detent lever assembly (710) from the manual valve link (336). 11. Move the detent lever assembly clockwise for ease of removing the manual valve. 12. Remove the control valve body assembly (39). 13. Remove the 2 transaxle case fluid passage seals (86). Installation Procedure 1. Install 2 new transaxle case fluid passage seals (86) into the transaxle case fluid ports. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 9995 2. While holding the control valve body assembly (39), connect the manual valve link (336) to the manual shift detent lever assembly (710). 3. Install the 6 control valve body assembly to transaxle case bolts and hand tighten. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the control valve body assembly-to-transaxle case bolts in sequence. ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 9996 5. Install a new control valve body fluid passage cover gasket (38). 6. Install the control valve body fluid passage cover (37). 7. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (31). ^ Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 8. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to a new transaxle wiring connector O-ring seal (46). 9. Install a new transaxle wiring connector O-ring seal (46) onto the transaxle wiring harness assembly (33). 10. Install the transaxle wiring harness assembly (33) into the transaxle case through the wiring harness bore. 11. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to a new transaxle fluid temperature sensor O-ring seal (32). 12. Install a new transaxle fluid temperature sensor O-ring seal (32) into the groove of the transaxle fluid temperature sensor (36). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 9997 13. Install the transaxle fluid temperature sensor (36) into the front control valve body fluid temperature sensor bore. 14. Install the transaxle fluid temperature sensor clip (49). 15. Install the fluid temperature sensor bolt (31). ^ Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 16. Connect the 8 solenoid wire connectors as follows: ^ 1 blue ^ 2 black ^ 3 green ^ 4 black ^ 5 blue ^ 6 gray ^ 7 brown ^ 8 black 17. Install the control valve body cover. 18. Perform the transmission adaptive learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > M/T - Hydraulic Clutch Bleeding Procedure Improvement Clutch Hydraulic System: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Hydraulic Clutch Bleeding Procedure Improvement Bulletin No.: 01-07-31-002B Date: November 01, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Improved Bleeding Procedure for Hydraulic Clutch Release System Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2007 and Prior Chevrolet and GMC 6-7F T-Series Medium Duty Tilt Cab Models 2007 and Prior Isuzu F-Series Medium Duty Tilt Cab Models 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-31-002A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). This bulletin is being issued to inform dealers of an improved procedure to aid in the ease of bleeding the clutch hydraulic system for the above listed vehicles. This procedure can be used anytime air is introduced into the hydraulic system. Following this procedure may also reduce the number of unnecessary parts replaced for low clutch pedal reserve and high shift effort. Verify that all the lines and fittings are dry and secure. Clean the dirt and grease from the reservoir cap in order to ensure that no foreign substances enter the system. Remove the reservoir cap. Fill the reservoir to the proper level with the required fluid. Attach the J 43485 (Adapter) to the J 35555 (Mity Vac), or equivalent. Brake fluid will deteriorate the rubber on J 43485. Use a clean shop cloth to wipe away the fluid after each use. Place and hold the adapter on the reservoir filler neck to ensure a tight fit. In some cases, the adapter will fit into the reservoir opening. Apply a vacuum of 51-68 kPa (15-20 hg) and remove the adapter. Refill the reservoir to the proper level. Repeat Steps 6 and 7. If needed, refill the reservoir and continue to pull a vacuum until no more bubbles can be seen in the reservoir or until the fluid level no longer drops. The vehicle will move if started in gear before the Actuator Cylinder is refilled and operational. Start the vehicle the first time in neutral to help prevent personal injury from vehicle movement and see if the transmission will shift easily into gear. Pump the clutch pedal until firm (to refill actuator cylinder). Add additional fluid if needed. Test drive vehicle to ensure proper operation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Shift Lock Control Feature Function Shift Interlock: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Shift Lock Control Feature Function Bulletin No.: 03-07-30-043A Date: May 25, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Information Regarding Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function Models: 2007 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-07-30-043 (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). This bulletin is being issued to better explain how the Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control (formerly known as Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)) feature is intended to operate. Revised wording regarding the shift lock control system began appearing in the Owner Manuals beginning with the 2004 model year. The shift lock control feature was intended to prevent drivers from shifting out of Park with the vehicle running without the brakes applied. However, if the ignition switch is in the Accessory (ACC) position, it may be possible on some vehicles to move the shift lever out of Park WITHOUT first activating the brake. The shift lock control system is ONLY active when the ignition switch is in the RUN or ON position. This means that when the ignition switch is in the RUN or ON position, the shift lever cannot be moved out of the Park position without activating the brake. Some owners may feel that the shift lock control system prevents an unattended child from moving the vehicle. Please stress to owners, as stated in the Owner Manual, that children should NEVER be left unattended in a vehicle, even if the ignition key has been removed from the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair Differential Clutch: Service and Repair Differential Clutch Drum Assembly Replacement ^ Tools Required J-08614-A Pinion Flange Holder and Remover - J 8092 Driver Handle - J 46607 Alignment Tool - J 44852 Front Clutch Drum Seal Installer - J 44853 Rear Clutch Drum Seal Installer - J 44873 Shoulder Bolts Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the propeller shaft underbody guard loop bolts. 3. Remove the guard loop. 4. Reference mark the propeller shaft flange-to-pinion flange relationship at the rear drive module (RDM). 5. Remove the propeller shaft flange mounting bolts at the RDM pinion flange. 6. Position the end of the propeller shaft away from the RDM and secure with heavy mechanics wire, or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10012 7. Place a container under the RDM housing. 8. Remove the RDM drain plug. 9. Drain the RDM fluid. 10. Install the J-08614-A (1) to the pinion flange (2) using the J 44873-2 shoulder bolts (3). 11. Loosen the pinion flange nut. 12. Using a breaker bar to hold the J 44873 stationary, loosen the pinion flange nut. 13. Remove and discard the pinion flange nut (1). 14. Remove the pinion flange (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10013 15. Remove the RDM housing cover bolts (1). 16. Carefully remove the housing cover (2) from the RDM. 17. Remove the clutch drum (2) from the housing cover (1). 18. Remove the filter assembly. 19. Remove the locating pins. 20. Important: Do not gouge the housing cover and RDM sealing surfaces. Remove all traces of sealer from the housing cover and RDM sealing surfaces. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10014 21. Clean the housing cover and RDM sealing surfaces with denatured alcohol or equivalent, and dry with a clean, lint free cloth. 22. Check the pinion flange sealing surface (1) for wear or gouges, the bolt threads (2) for damage and the pinion splines (3) for worn or damaged splines. 23. Inspect the dust deflector (2) for cracks . 24. Inspect the pinion flange seal (1), the front seal (2) and the rear seal (3) for tears, cuts, and gouges on the seals and sealing surfaces. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10015 25. If the rear seal (1) is damaged, replace using J 44853 . Install the clutch drum rear oil seal (1) to the differential housing. 26. Inspect the clutch cover oil seal (1). It is recessed into the clutch cover. Inspect for tears, cuts, and gouges on the seals and sealant surfaces. 27. If the front seal is damaged, replace using J 44852 (1) and J 8092 (2). Install the front oil seal into the clutch cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10016 28. Important: The bearing must be replaced, if removed. Inspect the clutch cover bearing (1) for roughness and excessive play. It is recessed into the clutch cover. 29. Remove the snap ring (1). 30. Drive the bearing (1) out from the inner race. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10017 31. Install the bearing (1) into the clutch over from the outer race with a suitable driver. 32. Install the snap ring (2) into the groove. Installation Procedure 1. Install a new filter assembly. 2. Install the locating pins. 3. Align the clutch with the pump and pump bushing. Place the J 46607 in the splines of the clutch. Twist alignment tool back and forth to align the pump and bushing. With a properly aligned clutch, the groove on the J 46607 will be flush with the drum as shown. Remove the tool by pulling straight out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10018 4. Notice: Do not submerge the clutch drum in solvent. This will damage friction material and geroter pump. Install the clutch drum (1) to the pinion shaft (2) by shaking the drum while rotating the drum back and forth to engage the splines of the pump rotor and bushing. 5. When properly engaged, the clutch drum will be fully seated against the clutch drum oil seal (1). 6. Apply a continuous bead of sealer, GM P/N 21019581 (Canadian P/N 10953472) of equal height and width to the RDM housing sealing surface. Apply sealer to a height and width of 2.5 mm (0.098 inch). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10019 7. Notice: The clutch cover housing must be fully seated to the rear drive module (RDM). Do Not use the mounting bolts to draw the cover to the RDM. If the cover does not fully seat to the RDM, the clutch drum assembly splines must be realigned to the pinion shaft splines before proceeding. Failure to follow these instructions will result in damage to the clutch assembly. Important: Do not disturb the sealer bead applied to the RDM sealing surface. Install the clutch housing cover (1) to the RDM. 8. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Hand install the clutch housing cover bolts (2). ^ Tighten the bolts to 26 Nm (19 ft. lbs.). 9. Install the dust deflector (2) to the input flange (1) if removed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10020 10. Install the input flange (2) to the clutch shaft. 11. Hand install a new input flange nut (1) to the clutch shaft. 12. Install the J-08614-A (1) to the pinion flange (2) using J 44873-2 shoulder bolts (3). 13. Tighten the pinion nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 203 Nm (150 ft. lbs.). 14. Thoroughly clean the drain plug threads and apply thread sealer, GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480), to the plug threads. 15. Install the RDM drain plug. ^ Tighten the plug to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10021 16. Remove the RDM fill plug. 17. Thoroughly clean the fill plug threads and apply thread sealer, GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480), to the plug threads. 18. Fill the RDM with lubricant. 19. Install the fill plug. ^ Tighten the plug to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). 20. Thoroughly clean and apply threadlocker, GM P/N 89021297 (Canadian P/N 10953488) to the propeller shaft flange mounting bolt threads. 21. Align the reference marks on the propeller shaft flange and the RDM input flange. 22. Install the propeller shaft flange mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10022 23. Install the propeller shaft underbody guard loop. 24. Install the propeller shaft underbody guard loop bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 25. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair Differential Mount: Service and Repair Differential Carrier Assembly Mount Replacement ^ Tools Required J 44866Support Bushing Remover and Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the front pipe and remove the intermediate pipe and muffler assembly. 3. Place a support stand under the rear drive module (RDM) and support the RDM. 4. Remove the rear stabilizer bar. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10026 5. Remove the RDM bracket-to-bushing mounting nut and bolt. 6. Remove the nut (1) and bolt (3) from the mounting RDM mounting bracket (2) and remove the bracket. 7. Place the open receiver end of the J 44866 over the flanged side of the bushing and against the vehicle frame. 8. Position the driver portion of the J 44866 with the smaller diameter of the driver against the bushing. 9. Install the bolt and washer through the driver, bushing, and receiver. 10. Install the nut to the bolt. 11. Slowly tighten the bolt and nut until the bushing is driven out of the vehicle frame and into the receiver. 12. Disassemble the J 44866 and remove the bushing. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10027 1. Position the RDM support bushing to the vehicle frame with the slotted portions of the bushing at the 6 o'clock and 12 o'clock positions. 2. Install the receiver end of the J 44866 against the vehicle frame opposite the bushing. 3. Place the large diameter face of the J 44866 driver against the flanged portion of the bushing. 4. Install the bolt and washer through the driver, bushing, and receiver. 5. Install the nut to the bolt. 6. Slowly tighten the bolt and nut until the bushing is drawn into the vehicle frame and the flange is seated squared against the vehicle frame. 7. Remove the J 44866 . 8. Install the support bracket (2) to the RDM. 9. Install the bolt (3) and nut (1) to the bracket. 10. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the support bracket nut and bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt and nut to 105 Nm (77 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10028 11. Install the bracket-to-bushing bolt and nut. ^ Tighten the bolt and nut to 105 Nm (77 ft. lbs.). 12. Remove the support stand from under the RDM. 13. Install the rear stabilizer bar to the vehicle. 14. Install the intermediate pipe and muffler assembly. 15. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Rear Differential ................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 750 ml (25.4 ounces) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 10033 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications CARRIER ASSEMBLY -- DIFFERENTIAL (REAR DRIVE MODULE) VERSATRAK Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12378514, in Canada 88901045). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle Inspection Procedure 1. Important: In order to obtain an accurate indication of the fluid level, the rear drive module priming procedure must be performed prior to fluid level inspection. Prime the rear drive module in the service stall: 1. Raise and support the vehicle so that all wheels are off of the ground. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Start the engine and place transmission in a forward gear. 3. Slowly apply the park brake until the rear wheels stop rotating. 4. Carefully accelerate the engine until the rear wheels begin to rotate. 5. Important: Do not exceed 5 seconds of park brake apply while vehicle is in gear and the engine is running to avoid overheating of the rear drive module. Continue allowing the rear wheels to rotate for 5 seconds. 6. Release the accelerator and apply the brakes. 7. Place transmission in park or neutral and turn the engine OFF. 8. Release the park brake. 9. Raise the vehicle fully. 2. Alternatively, prime the rear drive module by driving the vehicle on a flat, paved surface in a tight, 360 degree circle for 3 consecutive revolutions at 8 km/h (5 mph). 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Clean the area around the fluid fill plug. 5. Remove the fluid fill plug. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle > Page 10036 6. Using a length of heavy mechanics wire or equivalent, position a 90 degree bend approximately 25 mm (1 inch) from the end of the wire. 7. Place the angled end of the wire into the fluid fill plug hole. 8. Rest the wire squarely on the threads of the fill plug hole. 9. Remove the wire and measure the distance between the bend and the fluid level as indicated by the witness mark. The distance from the bend to the witness mark should be 8 - 17 mm (0.32 - 0.68 inch). 10. Adjust the fluid level as required by adding or removing fluid GM P/N 12378514 (Canadian P/N 88901045). 11. Thoroughly clean the fill plug threads and apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) to the threads. 12. Install the rear drive module fill plug. ^ Tighten the fill plug to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). 13. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle > Page 10037 Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Lubricant Replacement - Rear Drive Axle Lubricant Replacement - Rear Drive Axle Draining Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place a drain pan below the rear drive module. 3. Remove the drain plug from the front of the rear drive module, below the input flange. 4. Drain the fluid. Filling Procedure 1. Thoroughly clean the threads of the drain plug. 2. Apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) to the drain plug threads. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the drain plug to the rear drive module. ^ Tighten the drain plug to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the rear drive module fill plug. 5. Fill the rear drive module with fluid GM P/N 12378514 (Canadian P/N 88901045). Fill initially with 750 ml (25.4 oz) of fluid. 6. Inspect the fluid level. 7. Thoroughly clean the threads of the fill plug. 8. Apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) to the fill plug threads. 9. Install the fill plug to the rear drive module. ^ Tighten the fill plug to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle > Page 10038 10. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair Pinion Flange: Service and Repair Drive Pinion Flange/Yoke and/or Oil Seal Replacement ^ Tools Required J-08614-A Pinion Flange Holder and Remover - J 44851 Pinion Seal Installer - J 44873 Shoulder Bolts Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Index mark the propeller shaft at the power take-off unit (PTU) output flange and at the rear drive module input flange. 3. Place an adjustable support at the front and the rear of the propeller shaft. 4. Remove the rear drive module (RDM) propeller shaft guard (2) mounting bolts (1). 5. Remove the bolts securing the propeller shaft to the RDM flange. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10042 6. Remove the bolts securing the propeller shaft to the PTU. 7. Remove the bolts securing the support bearing to the vehicle underbody. 8. Remove the propeller shaft from the vehicle. 9. Install the J-08614-A (1) to the pinion flange (2) using J 44873-2 shoulder bolts (3). 10. Loosen the pinion flange nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10043 11. Remove and discard the pinion flange nut (1). 12. Remove the flange (2). 13. Remove the dust deflector (2) from the pinion flange (1). 14. Remove and discard the pinion oil seal (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10044 1. Thoroughly clean the pinion oil seal mounting surface of the RDM housing (1). 2. Using the J 44851 , install a new pinion oil seal to the RDM. 3. Ensure that the seal flange seats squarely against the face of the RDM. 4. Install the dust deflector (2) to the drive pinion flange (1). 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the pinion flange (2) and nut (1) to the RDM. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10045 6. Install the J-08614-A (1) to the pinion flange (2) using J 44873-2 shoulder bolts (3). 7. Tighten the pinion flange nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 203 Nm (150 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 44873 from pinion flange. 9. Install the propeller shaft to the vehicle using support stands to assist in positioning the propeller shaft. 10. Hand install the support bearing retainer bolts to the vehicle underbody. 11. Align the reference marks on the propeller shaft and the PTU output flange. 12. Install the bolts to the propeller shaft and the PTU flange. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10046 13. Align the reference marks on the propeller shaft and the RDM pinion flange. 14. Thoroughly clean and apply threadlocker, GM P/N 89021297 (Canadian P/N 10953488), to the propeller shaft flange mounting bolt threads. 15. Install the bolts to the propeller shaft and the pinion flange. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 16. Remove the support stands. 17. Install the propeller shaft guard to the RDM. 18. Install the bolts to the propeller shaft guard. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 19. Inspect the RDM fluid level. 20. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left ^ Tools Required J 44809 Output Shaft Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the left rear wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the left rear wheel drive shaft. 4. Carefully pry out the output shaft seal and discard. Installation Procedure 1. Install the new output shaft seal using the J 44809 . 2. Install the left rear wheel drive shaft. 3. Inspect the rear drive module fluid level. 4. Install the left rear wheel and tire assembly. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left > Page 10051 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Right Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Right ^ Tools Required J 44809 Output Shaft Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the right rear wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the right rear wheel drive shaft. 4. Carefully pry out the output shaft seal and discard. Installation Procedure 1. Install the new output shaft seal using the J 44809 . 2. Install the right rear wheel drive shaft. 3. Inspect the rear drive module fluid level. 4. Install the right rear wheel and tire assembly. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left > Page 10052 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Drive Pinion Flange/Yoke and/or Oil Seal Replacement Drive Pinion Flange/Yoke and/or Oil Seal Replacement ^ Tools Required J-08614-A Pinion Flange Holder and Remover - J 44851 Pinion Seal Installer - J 44873 Shoulder Bolts Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Index mark the propeller shaft at the power take-off unit (PTU) output flange and at the rear drive module input flange. 3. Place an adjustable support at the front and the rear of the propeller shaft. 4. Remove the rear drive module (RDM) propeller shaft guard (2) mounting bolts (1). 5. Remove the bolts securing the propeller shaft to the RDM flange. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left > Page 10053 6. Remove the bolts securing the propeller shaft to the PTU. 7. Remove the bolts securing the support bearing to the vehicle underbody. 8. Remove the propeller shaft from the vehicle. 9. Install the J-08614-A (1) to the pinion flange (2) using J 44873-2 shoulder bolts (3). 10. Loosen the pinion flange nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left > Page 10054 11. Remove and discard the pinion flange nut (1). 12. Remove the flange (2). 13. Remove the dust deflector (2) from the pinion flange (1). 14. Remove and discard the pinion oil seal (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left > Page 10055 1. Thoroughly clean the pinion oil seal mounting surface of the RDM housing (1). 2. Using the J 44851 , install a new pinion oil seal to the RDM. 3. Ensure that the seal flange seats squarely against the face of the RDM. 4. Install the dust deflector (2) to the drive pinion flange (1). 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the pinion flange (2) and nut (1) to the RDM. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left > Page 10056 6. Install the J-08614-A (1) to the pinion flange (2) using J 44873-2 shoulder bolts (3). 7. Tighten the pinion flange nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 203 Nm (150 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 44873 from pinion flange. 9. Install the propeller shaft to the vehicle using support stands to assist in positioning the propeller shaft. 10. Hand install the support bearing retainer bolts to the vehicle underbody. 11. Align the reference marks on the propeller shaft and the PTU output flange. 12. Install the bolts to the propeller shaft and the PTU flange. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left > Page 10057 13. Align the reference marks on the propeller shaft and the RDM pinion flange. 14. Thoroughly clean and apply threadlocker, GM P/N 89021297 (Canadian P/N 10953488), to the propeller shaft flange mounting bolt threads. 15. Install the bolts to the propeller shaft and the pinion flange. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 16. Remove the support stands. 17. Install the propeller shaft guard to the RDM. 18. Install the bolts to the propeller shaft guard. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 19. Inspect the RDM fluid level. 20. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10062 Axle Shaft Assembly: Diagrams Wheel Drive Shafts Disassembled Views Tripot Design Wheel Drive Shaft Tripot Design Wheel Drive Shaft 1 - Retainer and Housing Assembly 2 - Retaining Ring 3 - Tripot Joint Spider Assembly 4 - Boot Retaining Clamp 5 - Tripot Trilobal Bushing 6 - Inboard Boot 7 - Boot Retaining Clamp 8 - Axle Shaft 9 - Boot Retaining Clamp 10 - Outboard Boot 11 - Boot Retaining Clamp 12 - Race Retaining Ring 13 - Chrome Alloy Ball 14 - CV Joint Inner Race 15 - CV Joint Cage 16 - CV Joint Outer Race Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10063 Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Wheel Drive Shafts Description and Operation Wheel drive shafts are flexible assemblies consisting of an inner tripot joint and an outer constant velocity joint connected by an axle shaft. The inner joint is completely flexible, and can plunge in and out. The outer joint is also flexible, but cannot plunge in and out. These drive axles are used to transmit rotational force from the transaxle to the front tire and wheel assemblies. Seal and Clamp The wheel drive shafts use inboard and outboard joint seals made of thermoplastic material, and clamps made of stainless steel. The functions of the seals are as follows: ^ The seals protect the internal parts of the inboard and outboard joints. ^ They protect the joint lubricating grease from surrounding detrimental atmospheric conditions; such as extreme temperatures, ozone gas, etc. ^ They protect the joint lubricating grease from foreign materials; such as stones, dirt, water, salt, etc. ^ The seals facilitate angular and axial movement of the inboard joint. ^ The seals facilitate angular movement of the outboard joint. The function of the clamps is as follows: Provide a leak proof connection at both the housing and the axle shaft for the inboard and outboard joints. The thermoplastic material performs well against normal handing, operational wear and conditions. This material however, is not strong enough to withstand abusive handling or damage due to objects such as sharp tools or the sharp edge of any other surrounding component on the vehicle. Inner Joint The inner joints are of the tripot design without an over-extension limitation retainer. The inner joints incorporate a male spline which interlocks with the transaxle using snap rings. Outer Joint The outer joints are of the Rzeppa, constant velocity joint design. The shaft end which mates with the wheel bearing and hub assembly, incorporates a helical spline to assure a tight, press-type fit. This design assures that no end play will exist between the hub bearing and the drive shaft assembly for added durability and reduced bearing noise. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Axle Shaft Assembly: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Diagnostic Starting Point - Wheel Drive Shafts Begin the wheel drive shaft system diagnosis with the Diagnostic Starting Point - Vibration Diagnosis and Correction in Vibration Diagnosis and Correction. The use of the Diagnostic Starting Point will help determine if the concern is wheel drive shaft related. When instructed to exit the Vibration Diagnosis and Correction diagnostic procedures, return to the Diagnostic Starting Point Wheel Drive Shafts and proceed to Wheel Drive Shafts Description and Operation in order to become familiar with the design and function of the wheel drive shaft system. Reviewing the Description and Operation information will also help determine if the condition is a potential operating characteristic or not. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10066 Axle Shaft Assembly: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - Symptoms - Wheel Drive Shafts Symptoms - Wheel Drive Shafts Important: Complete the following steps prior to beginning the wheel drive shaft diagnosis. 1. Review the Diagnostic Starting Point - Vibration Diagnosis and Correction in Vibration Diagnosis and Correction. 2. Perform the Vibration Analysis - Road Testing in Vibration Diagnosis and Correction in order to effectively diagnose the concern. 3. Review the system operation in order to become familiar with the system function. Visual/Physical Inspection ^ Inspect for aftermarket equipment and modifications which could affect the operation of the wheel drive shafts or other rotating components. ^ Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. ^ Thoroughly inspect the entire wheel drive shaft for visible damage, leaking joint seals, and missing seal clamps. ^ Inspect the wheel drive shaft seals for cuts, tears, or other damage which may allow the loss of lubricant and the entry of contaminates. Symptom List After performing the Visual/Physical Inspection and no visual signs of damage or other interference impairing the wheel drive shaft function is apparent, it may be necessary to remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle and manipulate the joints manually. Any binding or otherwise impeded movement of the joints may indicate damage which could contribute to the concern. Refer to the following: ^ Click Noise In Turns See: Click Noise In Turns ^ Clunk When Accelerating from Coast See: Clunk When Accelerating From Coast ^ Clunk Noise When Accelerating During Turns See: Clunk Noise When Accelerating During Turns ^ Shudder or Vibration During Acceleration See: Shudder or Vibration During Acceleration Click Noise In Turns Click Noise In Turns A constant velocity joint which is worn or damaged may cause a click noise during turns. This may be more apparent while simultaneously turning and accelerating. This click is caused by wear and/or damage to the constant velocity joint bearings and/or races. Commonly, this damage or wear is caused by the loss of lubricating grease from the constant velocity joint and the entry of foreign material or contaminates. Carefully inspect the wheel drive shaft seals for cuts, tears or other damage which may allow the lubricating grease to escape. The loss of this grease will cause damage to the wheel drive shaft constant velocity joint in a very short period of time. After the inspection reveals no visual evidence of wear or damage, it may be necessary to remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle and manipulate the inner and outer joints manually. Any binding or impeded movement of the joints may indicate damage which could contribute to the concern. Clunk Noise When Accelerating During Turns Clunk Noise When Accelerating During Turns A clunk noise that occurs while accelerating during turns may be caused by wear and/or damage to the inboard and the outboard joints in combination. The loss of lubricant and/or the presence of contaminates can cause damage to the internal components of the joints. Carefully inspect the joint seals for cuts, tears or other damage. Joint seals that are damaged may allow lubricant leakage and the entry of contaminates. After inspection reveals no visual evidence of wear or damage, it may be necessary to remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle an manipulate the joints manually. Do not allow the joints to separate from the wheel drive shaft bar. Any binding or impeded movement of the joints may indicate damage which could contribute to the concern. Clunk When Accelerating From Coast Clunk When Accelerating from Coast A clunk noise occurring when accelerating from coast or a standing start may be caused by a worn or damaged wheel drive shaft cross groove joint. The common cause of wheel drive shaft cross groove damage is the loss of lubricating grease and/or the presence of foreign material and contaminates in the joint. This usually occurs as a result of a torn or damaged cross groove joint seal. Carefully inspect the wheel drive shaft seal for cuts, tears or other damage that may allow the loss of the lubricating grease and/or the entry of contaminates. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10067 After inspection reveals no visual evidence of wear or damage, it may be necessary to remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle and manipulate the joint manually. Do not allow the joint to separate from the wheel drive shaft bar. Any binding or impeded movement of the joints may indicate damage which could contribute to the concern. Shudder or Vibration During Acceleration Shudder or Vibration During Acceleration In order to diagnose a shudder or vibration during acceleration, refer to Diagnostic Starting Point Vibration Diagnosis and Correction. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) ^ Tools Required J 2619-01 Slide Hammer - J 44394 Seal Protector - J 44467 Output Shaft Assembly Remover and Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the right tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the right front wheel drive shaft. 4. Remove and discard the wheel drive shaft retaining ring. 5. Remove the O-ring seal from the intermediate drive shaft at the bearing retainer. 6. Remove the bearing retainer-to-support bracket mounting bolts. 7. Remove the bearing retainer. 8. Assemble the J 44467 and the J 2619-01 to the intermediate drive shaft retainer ring groove. 9. Disengage the intermediate drive shaft from the transaxle. 10. Remove the intermediate drive shaft from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10070 11. Remove the intermediate drive shaft support bracket mounting bolts. 12. Remove the support bracket from the engine. Installation Procedure 1. Install the intermediate drive shaft support bracket to the engine. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the support bracket mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10071 3. Install the J 44394 to the transaxle oil seal. 4. Install the intermediate drive shaft to the bearing retainer bracket and the transaxle. 5. Remove the J 44394 when the intermediate shaft splines pass the oil seal. 6. Ensure that the intermediate drive shaft is fully seated by grasping the intermediate drive shaft and attempting to pull free of the transaxle. 7. Position the bearing retainer to the support bracket. 8. Install the bearing retainer bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 9. Install the O-ring seal to the intermediate drive shaft. 10. Install a new wheel drive shaft retaining ring to the intermediate drive shaft. 11. Install the right wheel drive shaft. 12. Install the right tire and wheel assembly. 13. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10072 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L66 Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L66) ^ Tools Required J 2619-01 Slide Hammer - J 44394 Seal Protector - J 44467 Output Shaft Assembly Remover and Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the right tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the right front wheel drive shaft. 4. Remove and discard the wheel drive shaft retaining ring. 5. Remove the O-ring seal from the intermediate drive shaft at the bearing retainer. 6. Remove the intermediate drive shaft support bracket bolts at the engine. 7. Assemble the J 44467 and the J 2619-01 to the intermediate drive shaft retainer ring groove. 8. Disengage the intermediate drive shaft from the transaxle. 9. Remove the intermediate drive shaft from the vehicle. 10. Remove the J 44467 and the J 2619-01 from the intermediate drive shaft. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10073 Installation Procedure 1. Install the J 44394 to the transaxle oil seal. 2. Install the intermediate drive shaft to the transaxle. 3. Remove the J 44394 when the intermediate shaft splines pass the oil seal. 4. Ensure that the intermediate drive shaft is fully seated by grasping the intermediate drive shaft and attempting to pull free of the transaxle. 5. Position the support bracket to the engine. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the support bracket bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the O-ring seal to the intermediate drive shaft. 8. Install a new wheel drive shaft retaining ring to the intermediate drive shaft. 9. Install the right wheel drive shaft. 10. Install the right tire and wheel assembly. 11. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10074 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Seal Replacement Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Seal Replacement - Front ^ Tools Required J 35910 Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers Disassembly Procedure 1. Position wheel drive shaft bar in a soft jawed vise and clamp securely. 2. Using side cutters, remove and discard the small seal clamp. 3. Remove large seal retaining clamp using a flat-bladed tool and discard the clamp. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10075 4. Separate the seal from the tripot housing at the large diameter and slide the seal away from the joint along the axle shaft. 5. Wipe the excess grease from the face of the tripot spider and the inside of the tripot housing. 6. Remove the tripot housing from the spider and shaft. 7. Remove the retaining ring from the groove on the wheel drive shaft bar and remove the spider assembly. 8. Remove the seal from the wheel drive shaft bar. 9. Thoroughly clean all parts with a suitable solvent, removing all traces of grease and contaminants. 10. Dry all parts with compressed air. 11. Inspect the tripot joint components for unusual wear, cracks, and other damage. Replace any damaged components. Assembly Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10076 1. Install the small seal clamp to the seal. Do not crimp the clamp. 2. Slide the inner seal onto the wheel drive shaft bar and locate the lip of the seal groove on the wheel drive shaft bar. 3. Important: Ensure the seal clamp is positioned correctly in the seal groove. Using the J 35910 , crimp the small seal clamp. 4. Measure the clamp gap width. Clamp gap width should not exceed 2.15 mm (0.85 inch). 5. Install the tripot spider assembly to the wheel drive shaft bar, until seated against shoulder. 6. Install the retaining ring in the groove of the wheel drive shaft bar with suitable pliers. 7. Place approximately half of the grease in the kit to the seal and place the remainder in the tripot housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10077 8. Install the large clamp over the large diameter of the seal. 9. Install the tripot housing to the tripot spider assembly on the wheel drive shaft bar. 10. Slide the large diameter of the seal over the outside of the tripot housing and position the lip of the seal in the housing groove. 11. Place the large seal retaining clamp around the seal and close using J 35910 . 12. Inspect the gap dimension on the clamp ear. Continue tightening until the gap dimension is reached. Dimension equals 1.9 mm (5/64 inch). 13. Rotate the housing in a circular motion to distribute the grease in the tripot joint. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10078 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Seal Replacement Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Seal Replacement - Rear ^ Tools Required J 35910 Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers Disassembly Procedure 1. Position wheel drive shaft bar in a soft jawed vise and clamp securely. 2. Using side cutters, remove and discard the small seal clamp. 3. Remove large seal retaining clamp using a flat-bladed tool and discard the clamp. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10079 4. Separate the seal from the tripot housing at the large diameter and slide the seal away from the joint along the axle shaft. 5. Wipe the excess grease from the face of the tripot spider and the inside of the tripot housing. 6. Remove the tripot housing from the spider and shaft. 7. Remove the retaining ring from the groove on the wheel drive shaft bar and remove the spider assembly. 8. Remove the seal from the wheel drive shaft bar. 9. Thoroughly clean all parts with a suitable solvent, removing all traces of grease and contaminants. 10. Dry all parts with compressed air. 11. Inspect the tripot joint components for unusual wear, cracks, and other damage. Replace any damaged components. Assembly Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10080 1. Install the small seal clamp to the seal. Do not crimp the clamp. 2. Slide the inner seal onto the wheel drive shaft bar and locate the lip of the seal groove on the wheel drive shaft bar. 3. Important: Ensure the seal clamp is positioned correctly in the seal groove. Using the J 35910 , crimp the small seal clamp. 4. Measure the clamp gap width. Clamp gap width should not exceed 2.15 mm (0.85 inch). 5. Install the tripot spider assembly to the wheel drive shaft bar, until seated against shoulder. 6. Install the retaining ring in the groove of the wheel drive shaft bar . 7. Place approximately half of the grease in the kit to the seal and place the remainder in the tripot housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10081 8. Install the large clamp over the large diameter of the seal. 9. Install the tripot housing to the tripot spider assembly on the wheel drive shaft bar. 10. Slide the large diameter of the seal over the outside of the tripot housing and position the lip of the seal in the housing groove. 11. Place the large seal retaining clamp around the seal and close using J 35910 . 12. Inspect the gap dimension on the clamp ear. Continue tightening until the gap dimension is reached. Dimension equals 1.9 mm (5/64 inch). 13. Rotate the housing in a circular motion to distribute the grease in the tripot joint. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10082 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) ^ Tools Required J 2619-01 Slide Hammer - J 44394 Seal Protector - J 44467 Output Shaft Assembly Remover and Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the right tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the right front wheel drive shaft. 4. Remove and discard the wheel drive shaft retaining ring. 5. Remove the O-ring seal from the intermediate drive shaft at the bearing retainer. 6. Remove the bearing retainer-to-support bracket mounting bolts. 7. Remove the bearing retainer. 8. Assemble the J 44467 and the J 2619-01 to the intermediate drive shaft retainer ring groove. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10083 9. Disengage the intermediate drive shaft from the transaxle. 10. Remove the intermediate drive shaft from the vehicle. 11. Remove the intermediate drive shaft support bracket mounting bolts. 12. Remove the support bracket from the engine. Installation Procedure 1. Install the intermediate drive shaft support bracket to the engine. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the support bracket mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10084 3. Install the J 44394 to the transaxle oil seal. 4. Install the intermediate drive shaft to the bearing retainer bracket and the transaxle. 5. Remove the J 44394 when the intermediate shaft splines pass the oil seal. 6. Ensure that the intermediate drive shaft is fully seated by grasping the intermediate drive shaft and attempting to pull free of the transaxle. 7. Position the bearing retainer to the support bracket. 8. Install the bearing retainer bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 9. Install the O-ring seal to the intermediate drive shaft. 10. Install a new wheel drive shaft retaining ring to the intermediate drive shaft. 11. Install the right wheel drive shaft. 12. Install the right tire and wheel assembly. 13. Lower the vehicle. Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L66 Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L66) ^ Tools Required J 2619-01 Slide Hammer - J 44394 Seal Protector - J 44467 Output Shaft Assembly Remover and Installer Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10085 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the right tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the right front wheel drive shaft. 4. Remove and discard the wheel drive shaft retaining ring. 5. Remove the O-ring seal from the intermediate drive shaft at the bearing retainer. 6. Remove the intermediate drive shaft support bracket bolts at the engine. 7. Assemble the J 44467 and the J 2619-01 to the intermediate drive shaft retainer ring groove. 8. Disengage the intermediate drive shaft from the transaxle. 9. Remove the intermediate drive shaft from the vehicle. 10. Remove the J 44467 and the J 2619-01 from the intermediate drive shaft. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10086 1. Install the J 44394 to the transaxle oil seal. 2. Install the intermediate drive shaft to the transaxle. 3. Remove the J 44394 when the intermediate shaft splines pass the oil seal. 4. Ensure that the intermediate drive shaft is fully seated by grasping the intermediate drive shaft and attempting to pull free of the transaxle. 5. Position the support bracket to the engine. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the support bracket bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the O-ring seal to the intermediate drive shaft. 8. Install a new wheel drive shaft retaining ring to the intermediate drive shaft. 9. Install the right wheel drive shaft. 10. Install the right tire and wheel assembly. 11. Lower the vehicle. Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Seal Replacement - Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Seal Replacement - Front ^ Tools Required J 35910 Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers Disassembly Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10087 1. Position wheel drive shaft bar in a soft jawed vise and clamp securely. 2. Using side cutters, remove and discard the small seal clamp. 3. Remove large seal retaining clamp using a flat-bladed tool and discard the clamp. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10088 4. Separate the seal from the tripot housing at the large diameter and slide the seal away from the joint along the axle shaft. 5. Wipe the excess grease from the face of the tripot spider and the inside of the tripot housing. 6. Remove the tripot housing from the spider and shaft. 7. Remove the retaining ring from the groove on the wheel drive shaft bar and remove the spider assembly. 8. Remove the seal from the wheel drive shaft bar. 9. Thoroughly clean all parts with a suitable solvent, removing all traces of grease and contaminants. 10. Dry all parts with compressed air. 11. Inspect the tripot joint components for unusual wear, cracks, and other damage. Replace any damaged components. Assembly Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10089 1. Install the small seal clamp to the seal. Do not crimp the clamp. 2. Slide the inner seal onto the wheel drive shaft bar and locate the lip of the seal groove on the wheel drive shaft bar. 3. Important: Ensure the seal clamp is positioned correctly in the seal groove. Using the J 35910 , crimp the small seal clamp. 4. Measure the clamp gap width. Clamp gap width should not exceed 2.15 mm (0.85 inch). 5. Install the tripot spider assembly to the wheel drive shaft bar, until seated against shoulder. 6. Install the retaining ring in the groove of the wheel drive shaft bar with suitable pliers. 7. Place approximately half of the grease in the kit to the seal and place the remainder in the tripot housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10090 8. Install the large clamp over the large diameter of the seal. 9. Install the tripot housing to the tripot spider assembly on the wheel drive shaft bar. 10. Slide the large diameter of the seal over the outside of the tripot housing and position the lip of the seal in the housing groove. 11. Place the large seal retaining clamp around the seal and close using J 35910 . 12. Inspect the gap dimension on the clamp ear. Continue tightening until the gap dimension is reached. Dimension equals 1.9 mm (5/64 inch). 13. Rotate the housing in a circular motion to distribute the grease in the tripot joint. Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Seal Replacement - Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Seal Replacement - Rear ^ Tools Required J 35910 Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers Disassembly Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10091 1. Position wheel drive shaft bar in a soft jawed vise and clamp securely. 2. Using side cutters, remove and discard the small seal clamp. 3. Remove large seal retaining clamp using a flat-bladed tool and discard the clamp. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10092 4. Separate the seal from the tripot housing at the large diameter and slide the seal away from the joint along the axle shaft. 5. Wipe the excess grease from the face of the tripot spider and the inside of the tripot housing. 6. Remove the tripot housing from the spider and shaft. 7. Remove the retaining ring from the groove on the wheel drive shaft bar and remove the spider assembly. 8. Remove the seal from the wheel drive shaft bar. 9. Thoroughly clean all parts with a suitable solvent, removing all traces of grease and contaminants. 10. Dry all parts with compressed air. 11. Inspect the tripot joint components for unusual wear, cracks, and other damage. Replace any damaged components. Assembly Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10093 1. Install the small seal clamp to the seal. Do not crimp the clamp. 2. Slide the inner seal onto the wheel drive shaft bar and locate the lip of the seal groove on the wheel drive shaft bar. 3. Important: Ensure the seal clamp is positioned correctly in the seal groove. Using the J 35910 , crimp the small seal clamp. 4. Measure the clamp gap width. Clamp gap width should not exceed 2.15 mm (0.85 inch). 5. Install the tripot spider assembly to the wheel drive shaft bar, until seated against shoulder. 6. Install the retaining ring in the groove of the wheel drive shaft bar . 7. Place approximately half of the grease in the kit to the seal and place the remainder in the tripot housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10094 8. Install the large clamp over the large diameter of the seal. 9. Install the tripot housing to the tripot spider assembly on the wheel drive shaft bar. 10. Slide the large diameter of the seal over the outside of the tripot housing and position the lip of the seal in the housing groove. 11. Place the large seal retaining clamp around the seal and close using J 35910 . 12. Inspect the gap dimension on the clamp ear. Continue tightening until the gap dimension is reached. Dimension equals 1.9 mm (5/64 inch). 13. Rotate the housing in a circular motion to distribute the grease in the tripot joint. Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Seal Replacement - Front Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Seal Replacement - Front ^ Tools Required J 35910 Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers Disassembly Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10095 1. Clamp the drive axle shaft in a soft jawed vice. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool and disengage the retaining tabs of the large seal clamp. 3. Discard the clamp. 4. Remove the small seal clamp using side cutters and discard the clamp. 5. Separate the constant velocity (CV) joint boot from the CV joint race at the large diameter. 6. Slide the boot away from the joint along the wheel drive shaft bar. 7. Wipe the excess grease from the face of the CV inner race. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10096 8. Place a block of wood against the CV joint outer race and carefully tap on the CV joint to remove it from the wheel drive shaft bar. 9. Remove the seal from the wheel drive shaft bar. 10. Remove the CV joint retaining ring from the wheel drive shaft bar. 11. Place a brass drift against the CV joint inner race (1). 12. Tap gently on the brass drift with a hammer in order to tilt the joint race. 13. Remove the first bearing roller (2) when the CV race tilts. 14. Tilt the CV joint inner race in the opposite direction to remove the opposing bearing roller. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10097 15. Repeat the process to remove all 6 of the bearing rollers. 16. Pivot the CV joint cage (4) and the inner race 90 degrees to the centerline of the outer race (2). At the same time, align the cage windows (3) with the lands of the outer race. 17. Lift out the cage (4) and the inner race. 18. Remove the inner race (1) from the cage (2) by rotating the inner race upward. 19. Clean the following items thoroughly with a suitable solvent. Remove all traces of grease and contaminants. ^ The inner and outer race assemblies. ^ The CV joint cage. ^ The bearing rollers. 20. Dry all the parts with compressed air. 21. Inspect the CV joint assembly for the following: ^ Unusual wear ^ Cracks ^ Damage 22. Replace any damaged parts. 23. Clean the wheel drive shaft bar. Use a wire brush to remove any rust in the seal mounting grooves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10098 Installation Procedure 1. Install the new small seal clamp (2) on the neck of the outboard seal (1). Do not clamp. 2. Slide the outboard seal onto the wheel drive shaft bar and position the neck of the outboard seal in the seal groove on the bar. The largest groove below the sight groove on the wheel drive shaft bar is the seal groove seal (3). 3. Important: Ensure that the seal clamp is properly positioned around the entire circumference of the seal. Crimp the seal clamp using the J 35910 . 4. Measure the clamp end gap dimension. The gap should not exceed 2.15 mm (0.85 inch). The gap should not exceed 2.15 mm (0.85 inch). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10099 5. Put a light coat of grease from the service kit on the bearing roller grooves of the inner race and outer race. 6. Hold the inner race 90 degrees to centerline of cage with the lands of the inner race (1) aligned with the windows of the cage (2) and insert the inner race into the cage. 7. Hold the cage and inner race 90 degrees to the center line of the outer race (1) and align the cage windows (3) with the lands of the outer race. 8. Important: Be sure that the retaining ring side of the inner race faces the wheel drive shaft bar. Place the cage and the inner race into the outer race. 9. Insert the first bearing roller, then tilt the cage in the opposite direction to insert the opposing bearing roller. 10. Repeat this process until all 6 bearing rollers are in place. 11. Install the CV joint retaining ring to the wheel drive shaft bar. 12. Place approximately half the grease from the service kit inside the outboard seal and pack the CV joint with the remaining grease. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10100 13. Place a block of wood against the CV joint spindle and tap on the block of wood until the CV joint inner race engages the retaining ring. 14. Slide the large diameter of the seal over the outside of the CV race and locate the lip of the seal in the housing groove. 15. Install the large seal retaining clamp over the seal and close using the J 35910 16. Inspect the gap dimension on the clamp ear. Continue tightening until the gap dimension is reached. Dimension equals 1.9 mm (5/64 inch). 17. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the bench vise. 18. Distribute the grease within the outer CV joint by rotating the joint in a circular motion four to five times. Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Seal Replacement - Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Seal Replacement - Rear ^ Tools Required J 35910 Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers Disassembly Procedure 1. Clamp the drive axle shaft in a soft jawed vice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10101 2. Use a flat-bladed tool and disengage the retaining tabs of the large seal clamp. 3. Discard the clamp. 4. Remove the small seal clamp using side cutters and discard the clamp. 5. Separate the constant velocity (CV) joint boot from the CV joint race at the large diameter. 6. Slide the boot away from the joint along the wheel drive shaft bar. 7. Wipe the excess grease from the face of the CV inner race. 8. Place a block of wood against the CV joint outer race and carefully tap on the CV joint to remove it from the wheel drive shaft bar. 9. Remove the seal from the wheel drive shaft bar. 10. Remove the CV joint retaining ring from the wheel drive shaft bar. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10102 11. Place a brass drift against the CV joint inner race (1). 12. Tap gently on the brass drift with a hammer in order to tilt the joint race. 13. Remove the first bearing roller (2) when the CV race tilts. 14. Tilt the CV joint inner race in the opposite direction to remove the opposing bearing roller. 15. Repeat the process to remove all 6 of the bearing rollers. 16. Pivot the CV joint cage (4) and the inner race 90 degrees to the centerline of the outer race (2). At the same time, align the cage windows (3) with the lands of the outer race. 17. Lift out the cage (4) and the inner race. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10103 18. Remove the inner race (1) from the cage (2) by rotating the inner race upward. 19. Clean the following items thoroughly with a suitable solvent. Remove all traces of grease and contaminants. ^ The inner and outer race assemblies ^ The CV joint cage ^ The bearing rollers 20. Dry all the parts with compressed air. 21. Inspect the CV joint assembly for the following: ^ Unusual wear ^ Cracks ^ Damage 22. Replace any damaged parts. 23. Clean the wheel drive shaft bar. Use a wire brush to remove any rust in the seal mounting grooves. Installation Procedure 1. Install the new small seal clamp (2) on the neck of the outboard seal (1). Do not clamp. 2. Slide the outboard seal onto the wheel drive shaft bar and position the neck of the outboard seal in the seal groove on the bar. The largest groove below the sight groove on the wheel drive shaft bar is the seal groove seal (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10104 3. Important: Ensure that the seal clamp is properly positioned around the entire circumference of the seal. Crimp the seal clamp using the J 35910 . 4. Measure the clamp end gap dimension. The gap should not exceed 2.15 mm (0.85 inch). The gap should not exceed 2.15 mm (0.85 inch). 5. Put a light coat of grease from the service kit on the bearing roller grooves of the inner race and outer race. 6. Hold the inner race 90 degrees to centerline of cage with the lands of the inner race (1) aligned with the windows of the cage (2) and insert the inner race into the cage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10105 7. Hold the cage and inner race 90 degrees to the center line of the outer race (1) and align the cage windows (3) with the lands of the outer race. 8. Important: Be sure that the retaining ring side of the inner race faces the wheel drive shaft bar. Place the cage and the inner race into the outer race. 9. Insert the first bearing roller, then tilt the cage in the opposite direction to insert the opposing bearing roller. 10. Repeat this process until all 6 bearing rollers are in place. 11. Using pliers, install the CV joint retaining ring to the wheel drive shaft bar. 12. Place approximately half the grease from the service kit inside the outboard seal and pack the CV joint with the remaining grease. 13. Place a block of wood against the CV joint spindle and tap on the block of wood until the CV joint inner race engages the retaining ring. 14. Slide the large diameter of the seal over the outside of the CV race and locate the lip of the seal in the housing groove. 15. Instal the large seal retaining clamp over the seal and close using the J 35910 . 16. Inspect the gap dimension on the clamp ear. Continue tightening until the gap dimension is reached. Dimension equals 1.9 mm (5/64 inch). 17. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the bench vise. 18. Distribute the grease within the outer CV joint by rotating the joint in a circular motion 4 to 5 times. Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement - Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement - Front ^ Tools Required J 43828 Ball Joint Separator - J 44015 Steering Linkage Installer - J 45341 Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Removal Tool - J 24319-B Steering Linkage and Tie Rod Puller - J 44394 Seal Protector - J 2619-01 Slide Hammer Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10106 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove and discard the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 4. Notice: Hold the ball stud from turning when removing/installing the nut. The boot can become torn and damaged if the ball stud turns. Remove the outer tie rod end-to-steering knuckle nut. Do not loosen the tie rod end jam nut. 5. Important: Do not use a wedge type tool to separate the tie rod end from the steering knuckle. Using the J 24319-B separate the tie rod end from the steering knuckle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10107 6. Remove and discard the cotter pin from the lower ball joint stud. 7. Remove the ball joint stud nut. 8. Using the J 43828 separate the lower ball joint stud from the steering knuckle. 9. Using a backup wrench on the stud, remove the nut securing the lower stabilizer bar link and disengage the link. 10. Disengage the wheel drive shaft spindle from the wheel hub assembly. If necessary, place a wood block against the end of the wheel drive shaft Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10108 spindle and tap with a hammer to aid removal. 11. Important: Use care not to damage the joint seal when removing the wheel drive shaft. Assemble the J 45341 and the J 2619-01 to the wheel drive shaft inner tripot joint. 12. Important: On vehicles equipped with all-wheel drive (AWD), the stub shaft may disengage from the power takeoff unit (PTU). If necessary, cap the opening in the PTU to prevent fluid loss. Disengage the wheel drive shaft from the transmission or power takeoff unit (PTU), if equipped. 13. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install a new wheel drive shaft retaining ring to the output shaft. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10109 2. Install the J 44394 to the wheel drive shaft oil seal. 3. Install the wheel drive shaft to the output shaft: ^ Guide the wheel drive shaft tripot joint squarely onto the output shaft. ^ After the splined end of the wheel drive shaft passes the oil seal, remove the J 44394 from the oil seal. ^ Firmly engage the wheel drive shaft to the output shaft. ^ Ensure that the tripot joint is fully seated on the output shaft by grasping the tripot joint and attempting to pull free of the output shaft. 4. Insert the constant velocity (CV) joint spindle to the wheel hub/bearing assembly of the steering knuckle. 5. Hand install a new wheel drive shaft spindle nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10110 6. Install the lower ball joint stud to the steering knuckle. 7. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the lower ball joint castle nut to the stud. ^ Tighten the nut to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). ^ Tighten the nut an additional 150 degrees. 8. Install the cotter pin to the ball joint stud. 9. If necessary, tighten the nut one additional flat at a time until the castle nut aligns with the hole in the ball joint stud. 10. Secure the cotter pin to the ball joint stud by folding one tine over the end of the ball joint stud. 11. Cut off any excess length of the cotter pin tines. 12. Install the lower link to the stabilizer bar. 13. Install a new nut to the stabilizer bar link stud. 14. Important: In order to prevent damaging the stabilizer bar link stud seal, do not allow the stud to rotate while tightening the nut. Use a back up wrench on the stud and tighten the nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10111 15. Install the tie rod end to the steering knuckle. 16. Using the J 44015 , pull the stud into steering knuckle. ^ Tighten the J 44015 to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 17. Remove the J 44015 from the tie rod end stud. 18. Install a new nut to the tie rod end stud. ^ Tighten the nut to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 19. Tighten the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10112 20. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 21. Lower the vehicle. 22. Inspect the transmission fluid level. Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement - Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement - Rear ^ Tools Required J 45341 Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Removal Tool - J 44394 Seal Protector - J-2619-A Slide Hammer w/Adapter Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove and discard the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10113 4. While holding the stabilizer link with a wrench, remove the stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nut. 5. Disconnect the link from the control arm. 6. Place a stand under the lower control arm and support the control arm. 7. Remove the lower shock absorber mounting bolt and nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10114 8. Remove the toe link nut, bolt, and washer. 9. Loosen, but do not remove, the lower suspension jounce bumper nut. 10. Remove the lower control arm-to-suspension knuckle bolt and nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10115 11. Important: Relieve spring tension slowly in order to avoid sudden release of the coil spring. Slowly lower support stand until coil spring tension is relieved and remove coil spring. 12. Loosen, but do not remove, the upper control arm-to-suspension knuckle nut. 13. Important: Support the wheel drive shaft while it is disengaged from the wheel hub and bearing assembly in order to avoid damaging the wheel drive shaft seals. Place a block of wood against the wheel drive shaft spindle and tap with a hammer to release the spindle from the wheel hub and bearing assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10116 14. Rotate the suspension knuckle upward and secure with heavy mechanics wire, or equivalent. 15. Assemble the J 45341 and the J-2619-A to the wheel drive shaft inner tripot joint. 16. Disengage the tripot joint from the rear drive module (RDM). 17. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle. 18. Remove and discard the wheel drive shaft retaining ring. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10117 1. Install a new wheel drive shaft retaining ring to the inner tripot joint. 2. Install the J 44394 to the wheel drive shaft oil seal. 3. Align the splines of the inner tripot joint to the output shaft of the RDM. 4. Install the wheel drive shaft to the output shaft: ^ Guide the wheel drive shaft tripot joint squarely onto the output shaft. ^ After the splined end of the wheel drive shaft passes the oil seal, remove the J 44394 from the oil seal. ^ Firmly engage the wheel drive shaft to the output shaft. ^ Ensure that the tripot joint is fully seated on the output shaft by grasping the tripot joint and attempting to pull free of the output shaft. ^ Ensure that the tripot slinger does not become damaged. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10118 5. Rotate the suspension knuckle downward while simultaneously guiding the constant velocity (CV) joint spindle to the wheel hub and bearing assembly of the suspension knuckle. 6. Hand install a new wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 7. Position the insulators to the coil spring and align the ends of the coil spring with the abutments of the insulators. 8. Secure each of the insulators to the coil spring using 2 plastic tie straps positioned 180 degrees apart and through the reliefs molded into the insulators. 9. Cut off any excess length of the tie straps. 10. Position the coil spring assembly to the lower control arm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10119 11. Position a support stand under the lower control arm. 12. Carefully raise the lower control arm while simultaneously guiding the coil spring assembly into the rear suspension cradle. 13. Position the suspension knuckle to the lower control arm. 14. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Ensure that the hex head of the suspension knuckle bolt faces the rear of the vehicle. Install the lower control arm-to-suspension knuckle bolt and nut. ^ Tighten the bolt and nut to 160 Nm (118 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10120 15. Tighten the upper control arm-to-suspension knuckle bolt and nut. ^ Tighten the bolt and nut to 135 Nm (100 ft. lbs.). 16. Install the lower shock absorber mounting bolt and nut. ^ Tighten the bolt and nut to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 17. Slowly lower and remove the support stand. 18. Tighten the lower jounce bumper nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs.). 19. Position the rear toe link to the suspension knuckle. 20. Install the washer, bolt, and nut to the suspension knuckle and the toe link assembly. ^ Tighten the bolt and nut to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement - With RPO L61 > Page 10121 21. Position the stabilizer bar link to the lower control arm. 22. Install the nut to the stabilizer bar link. 23. While holding the stabilizer bar link stationary with a wrench, tighten the nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 24. Tighten the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 25. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 26. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10122 Axle Shaft Assembly: Tools and Equipment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10123 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-009B > May > 08 > A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-07-30-009B > May > 08 > A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-09-41-004 > Mar > 08 > Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-004 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: Airbag Light On, DTC B1000 Set (Reprogram Passenger Presence System (PPS) Module) Models: 2008 Buick Enclave 2005-2008 Cadillac SRX 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 GMC Acadia 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2008 Saturn OUTLOOK 2007-2008 Suzuki XL-7 Condition Some customers may comment on the airbag light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find DTC B1000 with symptom code 37 set as current or in history. Correction Important: You must contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. New software for the Passenger Presence System (PPS) has been released to disable this diagnostic check to prevent false setting of DTC B1000. Reprogram the PPS module with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Perform a PPS rezero/preload procedure upon a successful module reprogramming event. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 10142 Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-07-30-009B Date: 080501 A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-07-30-009B Date: 080501 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 10143 A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-07-30-009B Date: 080501 A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 10144 Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Service and Repair > Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Right) Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Right) Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Right) ^ Tools Required J 45000 Seal Remover - J 45187 Differential Output Shaft Oil Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place a drain pan under the transaxle to catch any spilled transaxle fluid. 3. Remove the right front wheel drive shaft. 4. Vehicles equipped with all wheel drive (AWD), remove the transfer case. 5. Using the J 45000 remove the right drive axle seal from the transaxle. 6. Clean the seal bore in the transaxle housing. Installation Procedure 1. Using the J 45187 , install the right drive axle seal onto the transaxle. 2. Vehicles equipped with AWD, install the transfer case. 3. Install the right front wheel drive shaft. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Important: Dexron(R)III automatic transmission fluid is not compatible with this transaxle. If Dexron(R)III ATF is used, transaxle failure will result. This transaxle uses GM T-IV fluid GM P/N 88900925. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Service and Repair > Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Right) > Page 10147 Inspect the transaxle fluid level. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Service and Repair > Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Right) > Page 10148 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Left) Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Left) ^ Tools Required J 44809 Output Shaft Seal Installer - J 45000 Seal Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place a drain pan under the transaxle to catch any spilled transaxle fluid. 3. Remove the left front axle shaft. 4. Using the J 45000 , remove the axle seal from the transaxle and discard. 5. Clean the seal bore in the transaxle housing. Installation Procedure 1. Using the J 44809 , install the left axle seal into the transaxle . 2. Install the left front axle shaft. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Important: Dexron(R)III automatic transmission fluid is not compatible with this transaxle. If Dexron(R)III ATF is used, transaxle failure will result. This transaxle uses GM T-IV fluid GM P/N 88900925. Inspect the transaxle fluid level. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Service and Repair > Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Right) > Page 10149 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair AF33-5 - Automatic Transaxle Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Right) Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Right) ^ Tools Required J 45000 Seal Remover - J 45187 Differential Output Shaft Oil Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a drain pan under the transaxle to catch any spilled transaxle fluid. 3. Remove the right front wheel drive shaft. 4. Vehicles equipped with all wheel drive (AWD), remove the transfer case. 5. If equipped with an axle seal dust cover, discard it and do not replace it. 6. Using the J 45000 remove the right drive axle seal from the transaxle. 7. Clean the seal bore in the transaxle housing. Installation Procedure 1. Using the J 45187, install the right drive axle seal onto the transaxle. 2. Vehicles equipped with AWD, install the transfer case. 3. Install the right front wheel drive shaft. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Important: Dextron III automatic transmission fluid is not compatible with this transaxle. If Dextron III ATF is used, transaxle failure will result. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Service and Repair > Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Right) > Page 10150 This transaxle uses GM T-IV fluid GM P/N 88900925. Inspect the transaxle fluid level. Refer to Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics. Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Left) Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Left) ^ Tools Required J 44809 Output Shaft Seal Installer - J 45000 Seal Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a drain pan under the transaxle to catch any spilled transaxle fluid. 3. Remove the left front axle shaft. 4. Using the J 45000, remove the axle seal from the transaxle and discard. 5. Clean the seal bore in the transaxle housing. Installation Procedure 1. Using the J 44809, install the left axle seal into the transaxle. 2. Install the left front axle shaft. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Important: Dextron III automatic transmission fluid is not compatible with this transaxle. If Dextron III ATF is used, transaxle failure will result. This transaxle uses GM T-IV fluid GM P/N 88900925. Inspect the transaxle fluid level. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Step 1 - Step 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front brake rotor. 2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 10156 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor electrical connector form the connector bracket. 4. Remove the front wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 5. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire or equivalent. 6. Remove and discard the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 7. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the steering knuckle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 10157 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 130 Nm (96 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 10158 4. Install the wheel speed sensor electrical connector to the mounting bracket, if equipped. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the front brake rotor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 10159 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Rear Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear brake drum. 2. On vehicles with all-wheel drive, remove the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 10160 4. Important: Do not damage the wheel drive shaft joint seal. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent. 5. Remove the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 6. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the suspension knuckle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 84 Nm (62 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 10161 3. On all-wheel drive vehicles, install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 125 Nm (92 ft. lbs.). 4. If equipped, route the wheel speed sensor electrical harness through the backing plate and seat the grommet. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the rear brake drum. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 10162 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front brake rotor. 2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 10163 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor electrical connector form the connector bracket. 4. Remove the front wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 5. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire or equivalent. 6. Remove and discard the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 7. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the steering knuckle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 10164 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 130 Nm (96 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 10165 4. Install the wheel speed sensor electrical connector to the mounting bracket, if equipped. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the front brake rotor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to .............................................................................................................................. .................................. 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair Center Support: Service and Repair Center Bearing Removal Removal Procedure ^ Tools Required J 22912-01 Split-Plate Bearing Puller - J 45270 Universal Joint Remover/Installer 1. Notice: Never clamp propeller shaft tubing in a vise. Clamping propeller shaft tubing in a vise could dent or deform the tube, causing an imbalance or unsafe condition. Always clamp on one end of the yokes and support the shaft horizontally. Important: Prior to disassembly, mark the positions of the driveshaft components relative to the driveshaft tube. All components must be reassembled in the same relationship to maintain proper balance. Remove the snap rings. 1. Pinch the ends of the snap ring together with a pair of pliers. 2. If the snap ring does not readily snap out of the groove in the yoke, tap the end of the bearing cup lightly in order to relieve pressure from ring. 2. Remove the universal joint caps using J 45270 . 3. Remove the front shaft half. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10174 4. Remove the lock ring (1) from the groove. 5. Discard the lock ring. 6. Place J 22912-01 on the splined yoke, as illustrated. 7. Using a press, remove the yoke. 8. Place J 22912-01 behind the support bearing. 9. Place the shaft in a press; then, support J 22912-01 and press off the support bearing. Center Bearing Cleaning and Inspection Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10175 1. Clean and inspect the universal joint cap bore (1). 2. Check the slinger (2) for bent lip or looseness. 3. Clean and inspect the splines (3). 4. Clean the snap ring groove (1). 5. Clean and inspect the yoke splines (2). 6. Clean and inspect the bearing mating surfaces (3). Center Bearing Installation Installation Procedure ^ Tool Required J 44870 Yoke Installer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10176 1. Using J 44870 , install the support bearing on the drive shaft until it seats firmly. 2. Align the splines on the shaft and the splines on the yoke. 3. Using J 44870 , install the yoke (2) on the drive shaft (1) until the lock ring groove is visible. 4. Install the lock ring (1) in the groove. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10177 5. Install the universal joint caps and the retaining clips. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Propeller Shaft Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Place the transmission in neutral. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Index mark the relationship of the propeller shaft to the rear drive module flange. 4. Remove the bolts securing the underbody guard loop. 5. Remove the underbody guard loop. 6. Place a support under the propeller shaft at the rear drive module. 7. Remove the bolts securing the propeller shaft yoke flange to the rear drive module flange. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10181 8. Index mark the relationship of the propeller shaft to the power take-off unit (PTU) flange. 9. Place a support under the propeller shaft at the PTU. 10. Remove the bolts securing the propeller shaft to the PTU flange. 11. Place a support under the propeller shaft at the support bearing. 12. Remove the bolts securing the propeller shaft support bearing to the vehicle underbody. 13. While supporting the propeller shaft, move the propeller shaft rearward to disengage the constant velocity joint from the PTU flange. 14. Remove the propeller shaft from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. While supporting the front, center, and rear of the propeller shaft, install the propeller shaft to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10182 2. Install, but do not tighten, the support bearing mounting bolts. 3. Pull the forward section of the propeller shaft rearward and install the propeller shaft to the PTU flange. 4. Align the index marks on the propeller shaft constant velocity joint and the PTU flange. 5. Thoroughly clean the propeller shaft flange mounting bolts and apply threadlocker, GM P/N 89021297 (Canadian P/N 10953488), to the bolt threads. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the front propeller shaft mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (19 ft. lbs.). 7. Align the index marks on the propeller shaft yoke flange and the rear drive module flange and install the propeller . 8. Thoroughly clean the yoke mounting bolts and apply threadlocker, GM P/N 89021297 (Canadian P/N 10953488), to the bolt threads. 9. Install the bolts to the propeller shaft yoke and rear drive module flange. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 10. Tighten the support bearing mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (19 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10183 11. Remove the support stands from the propeller shaft. 12. Install the guard loop to the vehicle underbody. 13. Install the bolts to the guard loop. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (19 ft. lbs.). 14. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joint Replacement - External Snap Ring Universal Joint: Service and Repair Universal Joint Replacement - External Snap Ring Universal Joint Replacement - External Snap Ring ^ Tool Required J 45270 Universal Joint Remover/Installer 1. Notice: Never clamp propeller shaft tubing in a vise. Clamping propeller shaft tubing in a vise could dent or deform the tube, causing an imbalance or unsafe condition. Always clamp on one end of the yokes and support the shaft horizontally. Important: Prior to disassembly, mark the positions of the driveshaft components relative to the driveshaft tube. All components must be reassembled in the same relationship to maintain proper balance. Remove the propeller shaft. 2. Remove the snap rings. 1. Pinch the ends of the snap ring together with a pair of pliers. 2. If a snap ring does not readily snap out of the groove in the yoke, tap the end of the bearing cup lightly in order to relieve pressure from ring. 3. Use J 45270 to remove the U-joint caps. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joint Replacement - External Snap Ring > Page 10188 4. If the bearing cup is not completely removed (2), place the exposed portion of the bearing cap into a soft-jaw vise. Tap upwards on the propeller shaft yoke with a hammer until the bearing cap is free of the propeller shaft yoke. 5. Rotate the propeller shaft and press the opposite bearing cup out of the yoke. 6. Remove the cross from the yoke. 7. Remove the remaining universal joint parts from the yoke. 8. Inspect the retaining ring grooves for the following: ^ Dirt ^ Corrosion ^ Pieces of the old ring 9. Inspect the bearing cup bores for burns or imperfections. 10. Important: Corrosion or dirt may prevent bearing cup installation and may prohibit the proper seating of the bearing retainers. Clean the retaining ring grooves. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joint Replacement - External Snap Ring > Page 10189 1. Remove the bearing cups from the new universal joint journals. 2. Coat the needle bearings in the bearing cups with a thin layer of grease that is present on the journal. Use your finger to apply the grease. 3. Install one bearing cup partway into one side of the yoke. 4. Turn the yoke ear toward the bottom. 5. Install the cross into the yoke so that the trunnion seats freely into the bearing cup. 6. With the trunnion seated in the bearing cup, press the bearing cup into the yoke until it is flush with the yoke ear. 7. Install the opposite bearing cup partway into the yoke ear. 8. Make sure that the trunnions are started straight and true into both bearing cups. 9. Important: If the bearing cup seems to bind or hang-up, stop pressing. Check the needle bearings for misalignment in the bearing cup. Press the opposite bearing cup into the yoke ear. ^ Work the cross all the time. ^ Check for free unbinding movement of the trunnions in the bearing cups. ^ Press the bearing cup into the yoke until the bearing retainer groove is visible over the top of the bearing cup. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joint Replacement - External Snap Ring > Page 10190 10. Important: Assemble the universal joint using the yellow snap rings supplied in the kit. If difficulty is encountered with the yellow snap rings, install the black snap rings supplied in the kit. Install the bearing retainer in the retainer groove. ^ Continue pressing until you can snap both retainers into place. ^ A small amount of chassis grease may help the snap ring seat in the bearing cup groove. 11. After the clips are installed, check for binding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joint Replacement - External Snap Ring > Page 10191 12. If cross binding is felt, it may be necessary to strike the flange area in order to remove excess pressure from the cross. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joint Replacement - External Snap Ring > Page 10192 Universal Joint: Service and Repair Constant Velocity Joint Cleaning and Inspection Constant Velocity Joint Cleaning and Inspection Cleaning and Inspection Replace the propeller shaft half if any of the following occur: ^ Important: The constant velocity (CV) joint assembly is not serviceable. If the dust boot is torn or the joint is worn or damaged, replace the propeller shaft as an assembly. Inspect the constant velocity (CV) joint boot for rips or cracks. ^ Rotate the constant velocity (CV) joint to inspect for binding. ^ Inspect the constant velocity (CV) joint for grease or oil leakage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Shift Indicator: Description and Operation SHIFT INDICATOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The shift indicator, located in the console, displays the selected gear position. The body control module (BCM) controls the LEDs in the PRNDL display of the shift indicator through 4 control circuits. The parameters of the 4 control circuits to the shift indicator are bits A, B, C, and parity. These outputs are available for display on the scan tool. The BCM has 8 DTCs for these 4 control circuits. These DTCs diagnose a short or an open for each circuit. The BCM receives selected gear position information from the transmission control module (TCM) via serial data. The TCM receives the gear position through four inputs from the park/neutral position switch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Manual Transmission - M/T Operating Characteristics Manual Transmission/Transaxle: Technical Service Bulletins Manual Transmission - M/T Operating Characteristics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-07-29-004G Date: December 15, 2010 Subject: Manual Transmission Operating Characteristics Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior Chevrolet and GMC Medium Duty Trucks 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 with Manual Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and to add Cold Operation information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-07-29-004F (Section 07 Transmission/Transaxle). Important Even though this bulletin attempts to cover operating characteristics of manual transmissions, it cannot be all inclusive. Be sure to compare any questionable concerns to a similar vehicle and if possible, with similar mileage. Even though many of the conditions are described as characteristics and may not be durability issues, GM may attempt to improve specific issues for customer satisfaction. The purpose of this bulletin is to assist in identifying characteristics of manual transmissions that repair attempts will not change. The following are explanations and examples of conditions that will generally occur in all manual transmissions. All noises will vary between transmissions due to build variation, type of transmission (usually the more heavy duty, the more noise), type of flywheel and clutch, level of insulation, etc. Basic Information Many transmission noises are created by the firing pulses of the engine. Each firing pulse creates a sudden change in angular acceleration at the crankshaft. These changes in speed can be reduced with clutch damper springs and dual mass flywheels. However, some speed variation will make it through to the transmission. This can create noise as the various gears will accel and decel against each other because of required clearances. Cold Operation Manual transmission operation will be affected by temperature because the transmission fluid will be thicker when cold. The thicker fluid will increase the amount of force needed to shift the transmission when cold. The likelihood of gear clash will also increase due to the greater time needed for the synchronizer assembly to perform its function. Therefore when the transmission is cold, or before it has reached operating temperature, quick, hard shifts should be avoided to prevent damage to the transmission. Gear Rattle Rattling or grinding (not to be confused with a missed shift type of grinding, also described as a combustion knock type of noise) type noises usually occur while operating the engine at low RPMs (lugging the engine). This can occur while accelerating from a stop (for example, a Corvette) or while operating at low RPMs while under a load (for example, Kodiak in a lower gear and at low engine speed). Vehicles equipped with a dual-mass flywheel (for example, a 3500 HD Sierra with the 6-speed manual and Duramax(R)) will have reduced noise levels as compared to vehicles without (for example, a 4500 Kodiak with the 6-speed manual and Duramax(R)). However, dual-mass flywheels do not eliminate all noise. Neutral Rattle There are often concerns of rattle while idling in neutral with the clutch engaged. This is related to the changes in angular acceleration described earlier. This is a light rattle, and once again, vehicles with dual mass flywheels will have reduced noise. If the engine is shut off while idling in neutral with the clutch engaged, the sudden stop of the engine will create a rapid change in angular acceleration that even dual mass flywheels cannot compensate. Because of the mass of all the components, this will create a noise. This type of noise should not be heard if the clutch is released (pedal pushed to the floor). Backlash Backlash noise is created when changing engine or driveline loading. This can occur when accelerating from a stop, coming to a stop, or applying and releasing the throttle (loading and unloading the driveline). This will vary based on vehicle type, build variations, driver input, vehicle loading, etc. and is created from the necessary clearance between all of the mating gears in the transmission, axle(s) and transfer case (if equipped). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Manual Transmission - M/T Operating Characteristics > Page 10202 Shift Effort Shift effort will vary among different style transmissions and synchronizer designs. Usually the more heavy duty the transmission, the higher the shift effort because of the increased mass of the components. Shift effort can also be higher in cold weather because the fluid will be thicker. Medium duty transmissions will not shift as quickly as a Corvette transmission. To reduce shift effort, do not attempt to rush the shift - allow the synchronizers to work as designed. Shifting harder will only increase the chance of rushing past the synchronizer leading to grinding while shifting. Non-Synchronized Gears Some light duty truck transmissions in 1st gear (creeper-gear) and reverse gears in various transmissions, along with all gears in some medium duty transmissions, may be non-synchronized. This means there is not a mechanism to match input and output shaft speeds to allow for a smooth shift. This function is left up to the driver. This can be noticed if a shift into 1st or reverse is attempted while the vehicle is rolling or before the input shaft stops rotating leading to a gear grind. The grinding can be reduced by coming to a complete stop and pausing for a moment before shifting into the 1st or reverse gear. Some slight grinding can be expected. In medium duty non-synchronized transmissions, the driver must match input shaft (engine) speed to output shaft (driveshaft) speed with every shift. This can be accomplished by double clutching, or by using other methods. If the driver is not able to perform this function properly, there will be gear grinding with each improperly completed shift. Driver training may be required to correct this condition. Clutch brakes are used in medium duty non-synchronized transmissions to allow a shift into gear at a stop. The clutch brake is used to stop the input shaft from spinning, allowing a shift into gear at a stop without grinding. The clutch brake is activated by pressing the clutch pedal all the way to the floor. When the clutch brake is used, it is possible to have a blocked shift with the vehicle stationary. If this occurs, engage the clutch slightly to rotate the input gear to allow the shift. The clutch brake is intended to only be used while at a stop. Care must be taken to not activate the clutch brake while shifting between gears. This could lead to excessive grinding or a blocked or missed shift. Skip Shift Currently, the Cadillac CTS-V, Pontiac GTO, Chevrolet Corvette and Camaro SS (other models may follow) equipped with the 6-speed manual transmission have a feature referred to as a "skip-shift." This feature only allows a shift from 1st to 4th gear when the indicator lamp is illuminated on the dash. Dealers cannot disable this feature as it was established to help meet fuel economy standards. The conditions for this feature are: engine coolant at normal operating temperature, vehicle speed of 24-31 km/h (15-19 mph), 21% or less throttle being used (refer to Service Information or the Owner Manual for more details.) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-07-30-014 > May > 07 > A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-014 Date: May 23, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: AF33-5 Transmission - Check Engine Light On, DTC P0711 or U0101 Set (Reprogram TCM by Contacting TCSC) Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on the check engine light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find either DTC P0711 or U0101 set. Cause A software anomaly within the TCM may cause this condition. Correction DO NOT replace the internal transaxle wiring harness to correct P0711 code. Contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) to obtain a VCI number and reprogram the TCM to correct a single DTC of either P0711 or U0101. Multiple communication codes will NOT be addressed with this TCM software update. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-07-30-014 > May > 07 > A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-014 Date: May 23, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: AF33-5 Transmission - Check Engine Light On, DTC P0711 or U0101 Set (Reprogram TCM by Contacting TCSC) Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on the check engine light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find either DTC P0711 or U0101 set. Cause A software anomaly within the TCM may cause this condition. Correction DO NOT replace the internal transaxle wiring harness to correct P0711 code. Contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) to obtain a VCI number and reprogram the TCM to correct a single DTC of either P0711 or U0101. Multiple communication codes will NOT be addressed with this TCM software update. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H Date: April 11, 2011 Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab Models: 2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear Window Defroster - RPO C49 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Repair Suggestions Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass), always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector (P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab. In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the following before attempting the repair: - Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the solder. - If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass. Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair! - You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar, making a strong and lasting repair. - Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection. Soldering Procedure 1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a new connector to the feed wire. The proper connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5. - Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal. - Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab. Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with moveable glass. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly seated connector may cause excessive resistance and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical connector tab to the defroster tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 10227 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 10228 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 10229 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-08-48-005D > Sep > 10 > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 10239 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 10240 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 10241 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Control Module C1 Control Module: Diagrams Transmission Control Module C1 Transmission Control Module C1 Transmission Control Module C1 Transmission Control Module C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Control Module C1 > Page 10248 Control Module: Diagrams Transmission Control Module C2 Transmission Control Module C2 Transmission Control Module C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Control Module C1 > Page 10249 Transmission Control Module C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10250 Control Module: Service and Repair Transaxle Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the TCM from TCM bracket. 3. Disconnect the transaxle control module (TCM) electrical connectors (1) from the TCM (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10251 1. Connect the TCM electrical connector (1) to the TCM (2). 2. Install the TCM to the TCM bracket. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. 4. Important: DTC P0602 is set with all new service transaxle control modules. When the transaxle control module is reprogrammed with the correct software and calibrations, DTC P0602 will be erased. Reprogram the TCM with the correct calibration. Refer to Transmission Control Module Programming and Setup. 5. Perform the transmission adaptive learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 10257 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 10258 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 10259 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required - J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 10262 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 10263 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 10264 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 10265 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 10266 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side > Page 10272 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor, Wiring Harness Side Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor, Wiring Harness Side Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Disconnect the wiring harness (4) from the input speed sensor. 3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt. 4. Remove the input speed sensor. 5. Remove the input speed sensor O-ring. Discard the O-ring. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 10275 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new input speed sensor O-ring. 2. Install the new input speed sensor O-ring onto the input speed sensor. 3. Install the input speed sensor to the transaxle. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the input speed sensor bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (4) to the input speed sensor. 6. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 10276 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the wiring harness (2) from the output shaft speed sensor. 2. Remove the output speed sensor bolt (3). 3. Remove the output shaft speed sensor (2) and the O-ring (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 10277 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new output speed sensor O-ring (1). 2. Install the new output speed sensor O-ring (1) onto the output speed sensor (2). 3. Install the output speed sensor (2) into the transmission case assembly. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the output speed sensor bolt (3). ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (2) to the output shaft speed sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10281 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10282 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Bulletin No.: 06-04-21-001 Date: May 17, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Updated Transfer Case Connector Service Kit Now Available For Transfer Case Speed Sensor Wire Harness Connector that Comes Loose Or Connector Retainer Clip Breaks Models: 2007 and Prior GM Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with Four-Wheel Drive or All-Wheel Drive Technicians may find that when the transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector is removed, the connector lock flexes/bends and does not return to the original position. The transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector then has no locking device. On older vehicles, the plastic connector retainer becomes brittle and the clip may break as soon as it is flexed. In the past, the only service fix was to install a wire harness connector service pack, P/N 88987183. This repair procedure involved splicing a new service connector with an integral connector lock. This connector service kit is of the same design and was still prone to failure over time. A new connector service repair kit is now available, P/N 15306187, that is an updated design. This new kit should be used whenever the speed sensor wire harness connector requires replacement. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications TRANSFER CASE FILL QUANTITY 500 ml (17.0 ounces.) to the bottom of the fill hole. NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 10293 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications TRANSFER CASE (POWER TRANSFER UNIT) VERSATRAK Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12378514, in Canada 88901045). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10294 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Transfer Case Fluid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the drain plug (1). 3. Remove the fill plug (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10295 1. Clean the drain plug and apply sealant GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) to the threads. 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the drain plug (1). ^ Tighten the drain plug to 24 (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Fill the transfer case with synthetic gear lubricant GM P/N 12378514 (Canadian P/N 88901045) to the bottom of the fill plug, or 540 ml (18.2 oz). 4. Clean the fill plug and apply adhesive GM P/N 12345493 (Canadian P/N 10953488) to the threads. 5. Install the fill plug (1). ^ Tighten the fill plug to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Output Shaft, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair Output Shaft: Service and Repair Front Drive Axle Inner Stub Shaft Bearing Replacement ^ Tools Required J 29369-2 Bushing and Bearing Remover - 2-3 Inch - J 38868 Output Shaft Assembly Remover and Installer - J 4972-4 Output Shaft Needle Bearing Installer - J 6125-1B Slide Hammer with Adapter Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Drain the transfer case fluid. 3. Remove the right wheel drive shaft. 4. Remove the intermediate shaft. 5. Remove the retainer ring from the stub shaft for tool installation. Discard the used retainer ring. 6. Remove the stub shaft using the J 6125-1B and J 38868 . 7. Remove the transfer case mounting bracket. 8. Remove all bolts (2) from the side cover (1). 9. Use the pry point relief slots to remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Output Shaft, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10299 10. Remove the carrier assembly (1) from the housing. 11. Important: Perform this step only if the bearing needs to be replaced. Do not use the old bearing again. Using the J 29369-2 and a slide hammer, remove the stub shaft inner bearing from the carrier bore. OTC 8007 adapters may be needed to assist in the removal. Installation Procedure 1. Using J 4972-4 and a driver, install the axle shaft bearing to the carrier until the bearing seats. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Output Shaft, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10300 2. Important: Do not use motor-powered tools to clean surfaces. Clean the carrier assembly housing sealing surface (1) with a solvent and scrape it clean with a razor knife. 3. Clean the cover sealing surface (1) with solvent and scrape it with a razor blade. 4. Important: Grease the seal lips in order to protect the seal and to ease in assembly. Install the carrier assembly (1) to the housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Output Shaft, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10301 5. Important: Do not apply excess sealer. Excess sealer could cause premature failure. Apply a 2 - 3 mm (0.8 - 0.12 inch) amount of sealant GM P/N 1052943 (Canadian P/N 10953491), or equivalent, to the housing (1). 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Grease the seal lips in order to protect the seal and to ease in assembly. Coat the bolt threads with thread sealant GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489). Install the side cover bolts (1) and the bolts (2 and 3) to the housing. There is not a specific tightening sequence, but the bolts with the dowel pins should be tightened first, and alternate the others from side to side. ^ Tighten the side cover bolts to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the transfer case mounting bracket. 8. Using the J 44809 , install the NEW output shaft seal. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Output Shaft, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10302 9. Install the stub shaft using the J 6125-1B and J 38868 . 10. Install a NEW retainer ring on the stub shaft. 11. Install the intermediate shaft. 12. Install the right wheel drive shaft. 13. Fill the transfer case fluid. 14. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Axle Shaft Oil Seal Replacement ^ Tools Required J 38868 Output Shaft Assembly Remover and Installer - J 44809 Output Shaft Seal Installer - J 6125-1B Slide Hammer with Adapter Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the right wheel drive shaft. 3. Remove the retainer ring from the stub shaft for tool installation. Discard the used retainer ring. 4. Remove the stub shaft using the J 6125-1B and J 38868 . 5. Carefully, remove the output shaft seal and discard. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10306 1. Clean any dirt or foreign material from the seal bore area. 2. Using the J 44809 , install the NEW output shaft seal. 3. Install the stub shaft using the J 6125-1B and J 38868 . 4. Install a NEW retainer ring on the stub shaft. 5. Install the right wheel drive shaft. 6. Remove the fluid fill plug and check the fluid level. Fluid should be to the bottom of the fill hole threads. Add synthetic gear lubricant GM P/N 12378514 (Canadian P/N 88901045) if necessary. 7. Clean and fill plug and apply adhesive GM P/N 12345493 (Canadian P/N 10953488) to the threads. 8. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10307 Install the fill plug (1). ^ Tighten the fill plug to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Bulletin No.: 06-04-21-001 Date: May 17, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Updated Transfer Case Connector Service Kit Now Available For Transfer Case Speed Sensor Wire Harness Connector that Comes Loose Or Connector Retainer Clip Breaks Models: 2007 and Prior GM Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with Four-Wheel Drive or All-Wheel Drive Technicians may find that when the transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector is removed, the connector lock flexes/bends and does not return to the original position. The transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector then has no locking device. On older vehicles, the plastic connector retainer becomes brittle and the clip may break as soon as it is flexed. In the past, the only service fix was to install a wire harness connector service pack, P/N 88987183. This repair procedure involved splicing a new service connector with an integral connector lock. This connector service kit is of the same design and was still prone to failure over time. A new connector service repair kit is now available, P/N 15306187, that is an updated design. This new kit should be used whenever the speed sensor wire harness connector requires replacement. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Bulletin No.: 06-04-21-001 Date: May 17, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Updated Transfer Case Connector Service Kit Now Available For Transfer Case Speed Sensor Wire Harness Connector that Comes Loose Or Connector Retainer Clip Breaks Models: 2007 and Prior GM Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with Four-Wheel Drive or All-Wheel Drive Technicians may find that when the transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector is removed, the connector lock flexes/bends and does not return to the original position. The transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector then has no locking device. On older vehicles, the plastic connector retainer becomes brittle and the clip may break as soon as it is flexed. In the past, the only service fix was to install a wire harness connector service pack, P/N 88987183. This repair procedure involved splicing a new service connector with an integral connector lock. This connector service kit is of the same design and was still prone to failure over time. A new connector service repair kit is now available, P/N 15306187, that is an updated design. This new kit should be used whenever the speed sensor wire harness connector requires replacement. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair Transfer Case Mount: Service and Repair Transfer Case Mounting Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the right hand axle. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the crankshaft position sensor (2) and the knock sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolts from the transfer case mounting bracket and engine. 5. Remove the bracket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10320 1. Position the transfer case mounting bracket to the vehicle and hand start all bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 (37 ft. lbs.). 2. Connect the electrical connectors to the crankshaft position sensor (2) and the knock sensor (1). 3. Install the right hand axle. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 10327 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Line Pressure Control Solenoid (SLT) Line Pressure Control Solenoid (SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams A/T Shift Lock Solenoid Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10331 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid/Switch Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the shift control assembly. 2. Disconnect the brake transaxle shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness connector. 3. Using a screwdriver, disconnect the plastic retainers at solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 4. Remove the solenoid from the shift control assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the solenoid onto the shift control assembly. Connect the plastic retainers at the solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 2. Connect the BTSI solenoid harness connector. 3. Install the shift control assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10335 Shift Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10338 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10339 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10340 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10341 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10342 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10343 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10344 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10345 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10346 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10347 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10348 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10349 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10350 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10351 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10352 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10353 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10354 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10355 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10356 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10357 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10358 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10359 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10360 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10361 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10362 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10363 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10364 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10365 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10366 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10367 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10368 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10369 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10370 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10371 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10372 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10373 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10374 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10375 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10376 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10377 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10378 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10379 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10380 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10381 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10382 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10383 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10384 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10385 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10386 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10387 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10388 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10389 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10390 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10391 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10392 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10393 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10394 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10395 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10396 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10397 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10398 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10399 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10400 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10401 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10402 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10403 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10404 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10405 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10406 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10407 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10408 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10409 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10410 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10411 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10412 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10413 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) Reverse, 1ST Shift Solenoid (S1) Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid (S1) Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid (S1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10414 Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10415 Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10421 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10422 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10423 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10424 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10425 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10426 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10427 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10428 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10429 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10430 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10431 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10432 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10433 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10434 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10435 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10436 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10437 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10438 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10439 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10440 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10441 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10442 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10443 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10444 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10445 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10446 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10447 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10448 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10449 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10450 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10451 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10452 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10453 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10454 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10455 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10456 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10457 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10458 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10459 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10460 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10461 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10462 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10463 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10464 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10465 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10466 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10467 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10468 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10469 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10470 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10471 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10472 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10473 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10474 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10475 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10476 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10477 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10478 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10479 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10480 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10481 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10482 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10483 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10484 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10485 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10486 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10487 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10488 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10489 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10490 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10491 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10492 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10493 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10494 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Connector Views Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid (SLU) Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid (SLU) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Shift Indicator: Description and Operation SHIFT INDICATOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The shift indicator, located in the console, displays the selected gear position. The body control module (BCM) controls the LEDs in the PRNDL display of the shift indicator through 4 control circuits. The parameters of the 4 control circuits to the shift indicator are bits A, B, C, and parity. These outputs are available for display on the scan tool. The BCM has 8 DTCs for these 4 control circuits. These DTCs diagnose a short or an open for each circuit. The BCM receives selected gear position information from the transmission control module (TCM) via serial data. The TCM receives the gear position through four inputs from the park/neutral position switch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-07-30-014 > May > 07 > A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-014 Date: May 23, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: AF33-5 Transmission - Check Engine Light On, DTC P0711 or U0101 Set (Reprogram TCM by Contacting TCSC) Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on the check engine light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find either DTC P0711 or U0101 set. Cause A software anomaly within the TCM may cause this condition. Correction DO NOT replace the internal transaxle wiring harness to correct P0711 code. Contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) to obtain a VCI number and reprogram the TCM to correct a single DTC of either P0711 or U0101. Multiple communication codes will NOT be addressed with this TCM software update. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 07-07-30-014 > May > 07 > A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0711 or U0101 Set Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-014 Date: May 23, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: AF33-5 Transmission - Check Engine Light On, DTC P0711 or U0101 Set (Reprogram TCM by Contacting TCSC) Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on the check engine light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find either DTC P0711 or U0101 set. Cause A software anomaly within the TCM may cause this condition. Correction DO NOT replace the internal transaxle wiring harness to correct P0711 code. Contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) to obtain a VCI number and reprogram the TCM to correct a single DTC of either P0711 or U0101. Multiple communication codes will NOT be addressed with this TCM software update. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Control Module C1 Control Module: Diagrams Transmission Control Module C1 Transmission Control Module C1 Transmission Control Module C1 Transmission Control Module C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Control Module C1 > Page 10526 Control Module: Diagrams Transmission Control Module C2 Transmission Control Module C2 Transmission Control Module C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Control Module C1 > Page 10527 Transmission Control Module C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10528 Control Module: Service and Repair Transaxle Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the TCM from TCM bracket. 3. Disconnect the transaxle control module (TCM) electrical connectors (1) from the TCM (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10529 1. Connect the TCM electrical connector (1) to the TCM (2). 2. Install the TCM to the TCM bracket. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. 4. Important: DTC P0602 is set with all new service transaxle control modules. When the transaxle control module is reprogrammed with the correct software and calibrations, DTC P0602 will be erased. Reprogram the TCM with the correct calibration. Refer to Transmission Control Module Programming and Setup. 5. Perform the transmission adaptive learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 10535 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 10536 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 10537 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required - J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346, disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 10540 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 10541 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 10542 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 10543 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404. 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 10544 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side > Page 10550 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor, Wiring Harness Side Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor, Wiring Harness Side Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Disconnect the wiring harness (4) from the input speed sensor. 3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt. 4. Remove the input speed sensor. 5. Remove the input speed sensor O-ring. Discard the O-ring. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 10553 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new input speed sensor O-ring. 2. Install the new input speed sensor O-ring onto the input speed sensor. 3. Install the input speed sensor to the transaxle. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the input speed sensor bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (4) to the input speed sensor. 6. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 10554 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the wiring harness (2) from the output shaft speed sensor. 2. Remove the output speed sensor bolt (3). 3. Remove the output shaft speed sensor (2) and the O-ring (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 10555 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new output speed sensor O-ring (1). 2. Install the new output speed sensor O-ring (1) onto the output speed sensor (2). 3. Install the output speed sensor (2) into the transmission case assembly. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the output speed sensor bolt (3). ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (2) to the output shaft speed sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10559 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10560 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Bulletin No.: 06-04-21-001 Date: May 17, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Updated Transfer Case Connector Service Kit Now Available For Transfer Case Speed Sensor Wire Harness Connector that Comes Loose Or Connector Retainer Clip Breaks Models: 2007 and Prior GM Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with Four-Wheel Drive or All-Wheel Drive Technicians may find that when the transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector is removed, the connector lock flexes/bends and does not return to the original position. The transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector then has no locking device. On older vehicles, the plastic connector retainer becomes brittle and the clip may break as soon as it is flexed. In the past, the only service fix was to install a wire harness connector service pack, P/N 88987183. This repair procedure involved splicing a new service connector with an integral connector lock. This connector service kit is of the same design and was still prone to failure over time. A new connector service repair kit is now available, P/N 15306187, that is an updated design. This new kit should be used whenever the speed sensor wire harness connector requires replacement. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Component Locations Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side 1 - EPS Inline Fuse Holder 2 - PSCM Harness Connection to the Underhood Fuse Block 3 Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 10572 Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10573 Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10574 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Always connect or disconnect the wiring harness connector from the EBCM/EBTCM with the ignition switch in the OFF position. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the EBCM/EBTCM. 1. Remove the transmission control module (TCM), if equipped, from the mounting bracket and position aside. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Clean the electronic brake control module (EBCM) to brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) area of any accumulated dirt and foreign material. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the EBCM. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10575 5. Disconnect the pump motor electrical connector. 6. Remove the EBCM attaching screws. 7. Separate the EBCM from the BPMV by carefully pulling apart. Installation Procedure 1. Clean the sealing surface of the BPMV, with denatured alcohol and a clean shop cloth. 2. Install the EBCM to the BPMV. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the EBCM-to-BPMV attaching screws. Tighten the bolts in a cross pattern. ^ Tighten the bolts to 3 Nm (27 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the pump motor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10576 5. Connect the electrical connector to the EBCM. 6. Reposition the TCM, if equipped, to the mounting bracket. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. DO NOT start the engine. 8. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the transmission control module (TCM), if equipped, from the mounting bracket and position aside. 3. Clean the brake modulator assembly pipe fitting areas of any accumulated dirt and foreign material. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the electronic brake control module (EBCM). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 10581 5. Place a shop towel under the brake modulator assembly to catch any brake fluid loss. 6. Important: Prior to disconnecting the brake pipes from the antilock brake system (ABS) modulator assembly, note the locations of the brake pipes to the valve assembly, to aid during installation. Disconnect the caliper and wheel cylinder brake pipes from the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV). 7. Cap the brake pipe ends to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 8. Disconnect the master cylinder brake pipes from the BPMV. 9. Cap the brake pipe ends to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 10. Plug the modulator brake pipe openings to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 11. Loosen the 2 insulator nuts on the brake pressure modulator valve assembly. 12. Remove the brake modulator assembly from modulator bracket by pulling straight up. Installation Procedure Important: When installing a new brake modulator assembly, do NOT remove the shipping plugs from the pipe ports until after installation into the vehicle. 1. Install the brake modulator assembly to the modulator bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 10582 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the 2 brake pressure modulator assembly insulator nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 3. Remove the caps from the master cylinder brake pipe ends. 4. Remove the plugs from the master cylinder ports on the modulator assembly. 5. Connect the master cylinder brake pipes to the modulator assembly, in the same location as removed. 6. Tighten the brake pipe fittings at the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV). ^ Tighten the fittings to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the caps from the caliper and wheel cylinder brake pipe ends. 8. Remove the plugs from the caliper and wheel cylinder ports on the modulator assembly. 9. Connect the caliper and wheel cylinder brake pipes to the modulator assembly, in the same location as removed. 10. Tighten the brake pipe fittings at the BPMV. ^ Tighten the fittings to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 10583 11. Connect the electrical connector to the EBCM. 12. Reposition the TCM, if equipped, to the mounting bracket. 13. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 14. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. DO NOT start engine. 15. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Proceduresin Vehicle DTC Information. 16. Observe the feel of the brake pedal after performing the diagnostic system check. If the pedal now feels spongy, air may have been in the secondary circuit of the brake modulator assembly, which may have been introduced into the primary circuit. If the pedal feels spongy, perform the ABS Automated Bleed Procedure. 17. Remove the shop towel and discard into an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 10584 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Pressure Modulator Valve (BPMV) Bracket Replacement Brake Pressure Modulator Valve (BPMV) Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control module (TCM), if equipped, from the mounting bracket and position aside. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Disconnect the electronic brake control module (EBCM) electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 10585 4. Loosen the 2 insulator nuts on the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) assembly. 5. Carefully lift the brake modulator assembly just enough to clear the bracket, then support the assembly. 6. Remove the brake pressure modulator assembly bracket mounting bolts. 7. Remove the bracket from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the BPMV assembly bracket to the vehicle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 10586 Install the brake pressure modulator assembly bracket mounting bolts and nut. ^ Tighten the bolts and nut to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 3. Install the brake modulator assembly to the bracket. 4. Tighten the 2 brake pressure modulator assembly insulator nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the EBCM electrical connector. 6. Reposition the TCM, if equipped, to the mounting bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations Left Side of the I/P Left Side of the I/P 1. Ambient Light Sensor 2. Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) 3. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4. Traction Control (TC) Switch (JM4) 5. Hazard Switch 6. Fog Lamp Switch (T96) 7. Radio 8. HVAC Control Module 9. Power Window Switch - Main 10. Transmission Range Indicator 11. Horn Switch/Pad - Part of the Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module 12. Headlamp Switch 13. Dimmer Switch 14. Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 15. Data Link Connector (DLC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10590 Traction Control Switch (JM4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10591 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Traction Control Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel. 2. Carefully release the retaining tabs and remove the traction control switch from the trim bezel. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10592 1. Install the traction control switch to the trim bezel. Ensure that the retaining tabs are fully engaged. 2. Install the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Wheel Speed Sensor: Component Locations Under the Rear of the Vehicle Under the Rear of the Vehicle Under the Rear of the Vehicle 1 - Fuel Tank Harness 2 - C406 3 - Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) Harness 4 - C404 5 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - RR Shown, LR Similar LF Suspension LF Suspension Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 10597 1 - C104 Left Shown, C105 Right Similar 2 - Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - LF, RF Similar Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 10598 Wheel Speed Sensor: Connector Locations LF Suspension Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 10599 Under The Rear Of The Vehicle Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10600 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - LF Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10601 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - LR Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10602 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - RF Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10603 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - RR Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake rotor. 4. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt. 6. Remove the wheel speed sensor. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front > Page 10606 1. Install the wheel speed sensor to the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 3. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the brake rotor. 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front > Page 10607 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake shoes. 4. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt. 6. Remove the wheel speed sensor through the drum brake backing plate. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front > Page 10608 1. Install the wheel speed sensor through the drum brake backing plate to the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 2. Seat the wheel speed sensor harness grommet into the backing plate. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the brake shoes. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure ABS Automated Bleed Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Before performing the antilock brake system (ABS) Automated Bleed Procedure, first perform a manual or pressure bleed of the base brake system. The automated bleed procedure is recommended when one of the following conditions exist: ^ Base brake system bleeding does not achieve the desired pedal height or feel ^ Extreme loss of brake fluid has occurred ^ Air ingestion is suspected in the secondary circuits of the brake modulator assembly The ABS Automated Bleed Procedure uses a scan tool to cycle the system solenoid valves and run the pump in order to purge any air from the secondary circuits. These circuits are normally closed off, and are only opened during system initialization at vehicle start up and during ABS operation. The automated bleed procedure opens these secondary circuits and allows any air trapped in these circuits to flow out toward the brake corners. Automated Bleed Procedure 1. Notice: The Auto Bleed Procedure may be terminated at any time during the process by pressing the EXIT button. No further Scan Tool prompts pertaining to the Auto Bleed procedure will be given. After exiting the bleed procedure, relieve bleed pressure and disconnect bleed equipment per manufacturers instructions. Failure to properly relieve pressure may result in spilled brake fluid causing damage to components and painted surfaces. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove all 4 tire and wheel assemblies. 3. Inspect the brake system for leaks and visual damage. Repair or replace components as needed. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Inspect the battery state of charge. 6. Install a scan tool. 7. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 8. With the scan tool, establish communications with the ABS system. Select Special Functions. Select Automated Bleed from the Special Functions menu. 9. Raise and support the vehicle. 10. Following the directions given on the scan tool, pressure bleed the base brake system. 11. Follow the scan tool directions until the desired brake pedal height is achieved. 12. If the bleed procedure is aborted, a malfunction exists. Perform the following steps before resuming the bleed procedure: ^ If a DTC is detected, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle, and diagnose the appropriate DTC. ^ If the brake pedal feels spongy, perform the conventional brake bleed procedure again. 13. When the desired pedal height is achieved, press the brake pedal to inspect for firmness. 14. Lower the vehicle. 15. Remove the scan tool. 16. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. 17. Inspect the brake fluid level. 18. Road test the vehicle while inspecting that the pedal remains high and firm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 10613 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding Manual Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to catch brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, or if you have disconnected the brake pipes from the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, you must perform the following steps to bleed air at the ports of the hydraulic component: 1. If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the brake pipes installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly, loosen and separate one of the brake pipes from the port of the component. For the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, perform these steps in the sequence of system flow; begin with the fluid feed pipes from the master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the component. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the component and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the component. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the component. 9. With the brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly - after all air has been purged from the first port of the component that was bled - loosen and separate the next brake pipe from the component, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8, until each of the ports on the component has been bled. 10. After completing the final component port bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the brake pipe-to-component fittings are properly tightened. 4. Ensure the brake master cylinder reservoir remains at least half-full during this bleeding procedure. Add fluid as needed to maintain the proper level.Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 6. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 7. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 8. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. 9. Tighten the bleeder valve, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 10. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 8-10 until all air is purged from the same wheel hydraulic circuit. 11. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 12. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 13. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 14. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 15. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit - install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 17. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 18. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. 19. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleeding procedure again. If the brake pedal still feels spongy after repeating the bleeding procedure, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. 2. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system in order to purge any air that may still be trapped in the system. 20. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. 21. Important: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 10614 Pressure Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) ^ Tools Required J 29532 Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent - J 44894-A Brake Pressure Bleeder Adapter Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to catch brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal becomes firm, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, or if you have disconnected the brake pipes from the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, you must perform the following steps to bleed air at the ports of the hydraulic component: 1. If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the brake pipes installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly, loosen and separate one of the brake pipes from the port of the component. For the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, perform these steps in the sequence of system flow; begin with the fluid feed pipes from the master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the component. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the component and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the component. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the component. 9. With the brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly - after all air has been purged from the first port of the component that was bled - loosen and separate the next brake pipe from the component, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8, until each of the ports on the component has been bled. 10. After completing the final component port bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the brake pipe-to-component fittings are properly tightened. 4. Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install the J 44894-A to the brake master cylinder reservoir. 6. Connect the J 29532 , or equivalent, to the J 44894-A. 7. Charge the J 29532 , or equivalent, air tank to 175-205 kPa (25-30 psi). 8. Open the J 29532 , or equivalent, fluid tank valve to allow pressurized brake fluid to enter the brake system. 9. Wait approximately 30 seconds, then inspect the entire hydraulic brake system in order to ensure that there are no existing external brake fluid leaks. Any brake fluid leaks identified require repair prior to completing this procedure. 10. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 11. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 12. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. Allow fluid to flow until air bubbles stop flowing from the bleeder, then tighten the bleeder valve. 13. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 14. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 15. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 17. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit - install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 18. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 19. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 20. Close the J 29532 , or equivalent, fluid tank valve, then disconnect the J 29532 , or equivalent, from the J 44894-A. 21. Remove the J 44894-A from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 22. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. 23. If the brake pedal feels spongy perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. 2. If equipped with Antilock Brakes, using a scan tool, perform the antilock brake system automated bleeding procedure to remove any air that may have been trapped in the BPMV. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 10615 24. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. 25. Important: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 10616 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Secure the mounting flange of the brake master cylinder in a bench vise so that the rear of the primary piston is accessible. 2. Remove the cap from the hose nipple on the master cylinder reservoir. 3. Install suitable fittings to the master cylinder ports that match the type of flare seat required and also provide for hose attachment. 4. Install transparent hoses to the fittings, then route the hoses into the master cylinder reservoir. 5. Ensure that the ends of the transparent hoses running into the reservoir are fully submerged in the brake fluid. 6. Using a smooth, round-ended tool, depress and release the primary piston as far as it will travel, a depth of about 25 mm (1 inch), several times. Observe the flow of fluid coming from the ports. As air is bled from the primary and secondary pistons, the effort required to depress the primary piston will increase and the amount of travel will decrease. 7. Continue to depress and release the primary piston until fluid flows freely from the ports with no evidence of air bubbles. 8. Remove the transparent hoses from the reservoir. 9. Install the cap to the hose nipple on the reservoir, to prevent fluid loss and contamination. 10. Remove the fittings with the transparent hoses from the master cylinder ports. Wrap the master cylinder with a clean shop cloth to prevent brake fluid spills. 11. Remove the master cylinder from the vise. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the accelerator pedal assembly electrical connector. 2. Remove the mounting bolts and reposition the module aside, if equipped. 3. Remove the retaining clip and washer from the brake pedal. 4. Release the brake booster pushrod from the brake pedal. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10620 5. Remove the stop lamp switch from the pedal bracket. 6. Remove the cruise control release switch, if equipped, from the pedal bracket. 7. Remove the brake booster mounting nuts. 8. Position the brake booster forward to clear the studs from the front of the dash. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10621 9. Remove the brake pedal bracket-to-steering column bracket bolt. 10. Loosen, but do not remove, the steering column bracket to cowl nut. 11. While simultaneously disengaging the brake pedal bracket pilot bushings from the foam insulation panel, pull the brake pedal assembly back and toward the center of the vehicle. 12. Remove the brake pedal assembly from the vehicle. 13. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly from the brake pedal bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10622 14. Remove the mounting bracket bolts and J-nuts from the brake pedal assembly, if equipped. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the J-nuts and mounting bracket bolts to the brake pedal assembly, if equipped. ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 2. Install the accelerator pedal assembly to the brake pedal bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10623 3. Install the brake pedal assembly into the vehicle, while guiding the brake pedal bracket pilot bushings into the foam insulator panel. 4. Reposition the booster studs thru dash panel. 5. Install the brake pedal bracket-to-steering column bracket bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 6. Loosely install the brake booster mounting nuts. 7. Apply a thin coating of lithium grease to the pushrod pin on the brake pedal. 8. Connect the brake booster pushrod to the brake pedal. 9. Install the washer and retaining clip to the brake pedal. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10624 10. Tighten the vacuum brake booster mounting nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 11. Install the steering column bracket to cowl nut. ^ Tighten the nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 12. Install the cruise control release switch and retainer, if equipped, to the pedal bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10625 13. Install the stop lamp switch and retainer to the pedal bracket. 14. Adjust the stop lamp switch. 15. Adjust the cruise release switch, if equipped. 16. Reposition the module to the mounting bracket, if equipped. 17. Connect the accelerator pedal assembly electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Caliper: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads Brake Caliper: Customer Interest Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads Bulletin No.: 05-05-23-005A Date: January 23, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise from Front of Vehicle at Slow Speeds on Rough Surfaces When Brake Pedal Is Not Applied (Install New Caliper Pin Bushing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2002-2006 Saturn VUE Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-05-23-005 (Section 05 - Brakes). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise coming from the front of the vehicle while driving at slow speeds over rough road surfaces when the brake pedal is not applied. Cause This condition may be caused by the interface of the front brake caliper guide pins and the front brake caliper bracket. Correction Verify the customer concern. To isolate the brake caliper guide pins as a potential source of the noise, apply the brakes when the noise is apparent. If the noise stops when the brakes are applied and comes back when the brakes are released, then the brake caliper guide pin bushings are the most likely source of the concern. If the brake caliper guide pin bushings have been identified as the source of the noise, then replace the front brake caliper guide pin bushings on the lower pin on the brakes on both sides of the vehicle. Refer to the service procedure in this bulletin. Service Procedure Caution: Avoid taking the following actions when you service wheel brake parts: ^ Do not grind brake linings. ^ Do not sand brake linings. ^ Do not clean wheel brake parts with a dry brush or with compressed air. Some models or aftermarket brake parts may contain asbestos fibers which can become airborne in dust. Breathing dust with asbestos fibers may cause serious bodily harm. Use a water-dampened cloth in order to remove any dust on brake parts. Equipment is available commercially in order to perform this washing function. These wet methods prevent fibers from becoming airborne. Caution: Brake fluid may irritate eyes and skin. In case of contact, take the following actions: ^ Eye contact--rinse thoroughly with water. ^ Skin contact--wash with soap and water. ^ If ingested--consult a physician immediately. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Caliper: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 10635 Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Install and firmly hand tighten 2 wheel nuts to opposite wheel studs in order to retain the rotor to the hub. 4. Install a large C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and against the outboard brake pad. 5. Tighten the C-clamp evenly until the caliper piston is compressed into the caliper bore enough to allow the caliper to slide past the brake rotor. 6. Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 7. Remove the brake caliper lower guide pin bolt. Note: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 8. Without disconnecting the hydraulic brake flexible hose, pivot the caliper upward and secure the caliper with heavy mechanics wire, or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Caliper: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 10636 9. Remove the lower caliper pin taking care not to damage the pin boot. 10. Remove the rubber bushing from the caliper pin. 11. Clean the pin and install a new bushing. 12. Lubricate the caliper pin and bushing assembly with a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant and install in the caliper bracket. 13. Remove the support and rotate the brake caliper into position over the disc brake pads and to the caliper mounting bracket. 14. Repeat Steps 1-13 on opposite side brake assembly. Installation Procedure Note: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners must be the correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring replacement or fasteners requiring the use of thread locking compound or sealant are identified in the service procedure. Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on fasteners or fastener joint surfaces unless specified. These coatings affect fastener torque and joint clamping force and may damage the fastener. Use the correct tightening sequence and specifications when installing fasteners in order to avoid damage to parts and systems. 1. Install the lower brake caliper guide pin bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 44 N.m (32 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Caliper: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 10637 2. Remove the wheel nuts retaining the brake rotor to the hub. 3. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Repeat Steps 1-3 on opposite side brake assembly. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 7. Slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance again until a firm brake pedal apply is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Caliper: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads Brake Caliper: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads Bulletin No.: 05-05-23-005A Date: January 23, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise from Front of Vehicle at Slow Speeds on Rough Surfaces When Brake Pedal Is Not Applied (Install New Caliper Pin Bushing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2002-2006 Saturn VUE Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-05-23-005 (Section 05 - Brakes). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise coming from the front of the vehicle while driving at slow speeds over rough road surfaces when the brake pedal is not applied. Cause This condition may be caused by the interface of the front brake caliper guide pins and the front brake caliper bracket. Correction Verify the customer concern. To isolate the brake caliper guide pins as a potential source of the noise, apply the brakes when the noise is apparent. If the noise stops when the brakes are applied and comes back when the brakes are released, then the brake caliper guide pin bushings are the most likely source of the concern. If the brake caliper guide pin bushings have been identified as the source of the noise, then replace the front brake caliper guide pin bushings on the lower pin on the brakes on both sides of the vehicle. Refer to the service procedure in this bulletin. Service Procedure Caution: Avoid taking the following actions when you service wheel brake parts: ^ Do not grind brake linings. ^ Do not sand brake linings. ^ Do not clean wheel brake parts with a dry brush or with compressed air. Some models or aftermarket brake parts may contain asbestos fibers which can become airborne in dust. Breathing dust with asbestos fibers may cause serious bodily harm. Use a water-dampened cloth in order to remove any dust on brake parts. Equipment is available commercially in order to perform this washing function. These wet methods prevent fibers from becoming airborne. Caution: Brake fluid may irritate eyes and skin. In case of contact, take the following actions: ^ Eye contact--rinse thoroughly with water. ^ Skin contact--wash with soap and water. ^ If ingested--consult a physician immediately. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Caliper: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 10643 Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Install and firmly hand tighten 2 wheel nuts to opposite wheel studs in order to retain the rotor to the hub. 4. Install a large C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and against the outboard brake pad. 5. Tighten the C-clamp evenly until the caliper piston is compressed into the caliper bore enough to allow the caliper to slide past the brake rotor. 6. Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 7. Remove the brake caliper lower guide pin bolt. Note: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 8. Without disconnecting the hydraulic brake flexible hose, pivot the caliper upward and secure the caliper with heavy mechanics wire, or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Caliper: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 10644 9. Remove the lower caliper pin taking care not to damage the pin boot. 10. Remove the rubber bushing from the caliper pin. 11. Clean the pin and install a new bushing. 12. Lubricate the caliper pin and bushing assembly with a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant and install in the caliper bracket. 13. Remove the support and rotate the brake caliper into position over the disc brake pads and to the caliper mounting bracket. 14. Repeat Steps 1-13 on opposite side brake assembly. Installation Procedure Note: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners must be the correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring replacement or fasteners requiring the use of thread locking compound or sealant are identified in the service procedure. Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on fasteners or fastener joint surfaces unless specified. These coatings affect fastener torque and joint clamping force and may damage the fastener. Use the correct tightening sequence and specifications when installing fasteners in order to avoid damage to parts and systems. 1. Install the lower brake caliper guide pin bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 44 N.m (32 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Caliper: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 10645 2. Remove the wheel nuts retaining the brake rotor to the hub. 3. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Repeat Steps 1-3 on opposite side brake assembly. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 7. Slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance again until a firm brake pedal apply is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10646 Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Brake Caliper Inspection 1. Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Inspect the brake caliper housing (1) for cracks, excess wear, and/or damage. If any of these conditions are present, the brake caliper requires replacement. 2. Inspect the caliper piston dust boot seal (2) for cracks, tears, cuts, deterioration and/or improper seating in the caliper body. If any of these conditions are present, the brake caliper requires overhaul or replacement. 3. Inspect for brake fluid leakage around the caliper piston dust boot seal (2) and on the disc brake pads. If there is any evidence of brake fluid leakage, the brake caliper requires overhaul or replacement. 4. Inspect for smooth and complete travel of the caliper piston, or pistons, into the caliper bore, or bores: The movement of a caliper piston into a caliper bore should be smooth and even. If a caliper piston is frozen or difficult to bottom, the caliper requires overhaul or replacement. ^ For single piston caliper applications, insert a discarded inner brake pad (2) or block of wood in front of the piston. Using a large C-clamp (1) installed over the body of the caliper (3) and against the brake pad or block of wood, slowly bottom the piston in the bore. ^ For dual piston caliper applications, insert a discarded inner brake pad (2) or block of wood in front of the pistons. Using 2 large C-clamps (1) installed over the body of the caliper (3) and against the brake pad or block of wood, slowly bottom the pistons evenly into the bores. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure Caution: Do not move the vehicle until a firm brake pedal is obtained. Failure to obtain a firm pedal before moving vehicle may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the brake caliper from the brake caliper bracket. 2. Notice: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. Support the brake caliper (1) with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent; do NOT disconnect the hydraulic brake flexible hose from the caliper. 3. Remove the brake pads (2) from the brake caliper bracket (3). 4. Remove the brake pad retainers (1) from the brake caliper bracket (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement > Page 10649 5. Remove the brake caliper bracket bolts (2). 6. Remove the brake caliper bracket (1) from the knuckle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake caliper bracket (1) to the knuckle. 2. Important: If reusing the caliper bracket bolts, the threads of the caliper bracket bolts and the threads of the knuckle mounting holes must be thoroughly cleaned and free of debris prior to the application of threadlocker. Prepare the bolts and the threaded holes for assembly: 1. Thoroughly clean the residue from the bolt threads by using denatured alcohol or equivalent and allow to dry. 2. Thoroughly clean the residue from the threaded holes by using denatured alcohol or equivalent and allow to dry. 3. Apply threadlocker Saturn P/N 21005994, or equivalent to two-thirds of the threaded length of the lower caliper bracket bolts. 4. Allow the threadlocker to cure approximately 10 minutes before installation. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the 2 brake caliper bracket bolts (2). ^ Tighten the front brake caliper bracket bolts to 185 Nm (136 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the brake pad retainers (1) to the brake caliper bracket (3). 5. Install the brake pads (2) to the brake caliper bracket (3). 6. Install the brake caliper (1) to the front brake caliper bracket (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement > Page 10650 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Replacement Brake Caliper Replacement Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Inspect the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, no brake fluid needs to be removed from the reservoir before proceeding. 3. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, remove brake fluid to the midway point before proceeding. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Install and firmly hand tighten 2 wheel nuts to opposite wheel studs in order to retain the rotor to the hub. 7. Install a large C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and against the outer brake pad. 8. Tighten the C-clamp until the caliper piston is compressed into the caliper bore enough to allow the caliper to slide past the brake rotor. 9. Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 10. Remove the brake hose-to-caliper bolt from the brake caliper. 11. Remove the brake hose from the brake caliper. 12. Remove and discard the 2 copper brake hose gaskets. These gaskets may be stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 13. Cap or plug the opening in the brake caliper and the brake hose to prevent fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement > Page 10651 14. Remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts. 15. Remove the brake caliper from the caliper bracket. 16. Inspect the brake caliper guide pins for freedom of movement, and inspect the condition of the guide pin boots. Move the guide pins inboard and outboard within the bracket bores, without disengaging the slides from the boots, and observe for the following: ^ Restricted caliper guide pin movement ^ Looseness in the brake caliper mounting bracket ^ Seized or binding caliper guide pins ^ Split or torn boots 17. If any of the conditions listed are found, the brake caliper guide pins and/or boots require replacement. Installation Procedure 1. Apply a light, thin coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the caliper guide pins. 2. Install the guide pins to the brake caliper bracket. 3. Install the brake caliper to the brake caliper bracket. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the brake caliper guide pin bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 44 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement > Page 10652 5. Remove the caps or plugs from the brake caliper opening and the brake hose. 6. Important: Do not reuse the copper brake hose gaskets. Install NEW copper brake hose gaskets to the brake hose-to-caliper bolt and to the brake hose. 7. Install the brake hose and the brake hose-to-brake caliper bolt to the brake caliper. ^ Tighten the bolt to 44 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). 8. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 9. Remove the wheel nuts retaining the brake rotor to the wheel hub. 10. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 11. Lower the vehicle. 12. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal to approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 13. Slowly release the brake pedal. 14. Wait 15 seconds, then gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance again until a firm brake pedal apply is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications Brake Pad: Specifications Brake Pad Lining Minimum Thickness .................................................................................................................................................. 2.0 mm (0.080 inch) Brake Pad Lining Thickness - New ........................................................................................................................................................ 9.6 mm (0.380 inch) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10656 Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Brake Pad Inspection Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Inspect the disc brake pads at regular intervals, or whenever the tire and wheel assemblies are removed from the vehicle. ^ If replacement is necessary, always replace disc brake pads in axle sets. ^ Inspect both edges of the disc brake pad friction surfaces (3). The highest rate of wear normally occurs at the trailing edge of the disc brake pads. ^ Inspect the thickness of the disc brake pads (3) in order to ensure that they have not worn excessively. The disc brake pad wear should be approximately even per axle set. ^ Both front and rear disc brake pads have integral, audible wear sensors (1). When the disc brake pad wear reaches the minimum allowable thickness, the wear sensor contacts the disc brake rotor (2). The wear indicator will then produce an audible, high-pitched warning noise during wheel rotation. ^ Replace the disc brake pads when the friction surface (3) is worn to within 2 mm (0.080 inch) of the mounting plates. ^ Remove the brake calipers and inspect the friction surfaces of the inner and outer disc brake pads to ensure that they are level. Place the disc brake pad friction surfaces together and measure the gap between the surfaces. If more than 0.5 mm (0.020 inch) gap exists midway between the length of the disc brake pads, replace the disc brake pads. ^ Verify that any disc brake pad shims that may be required are in place and not damaged or excessively corroded. Replace any missing or damaged shims in order to preserve proper disc brake performance. ^ Replace the disc brake pads if any have separated from the mounting plates. ^ Inspect the disc brake pads friction surfaces for cracks, fractures, or damage which may cause noise or otherwise impair disc brake performance. ^ Inspect the noise insulators on the brake pad mounting plate. Replace the brake pads if the noise insulators have separated from the brake pad mounting plate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement Brake Pad: Service and Repair Brake Pads Replacement Brake Pads Replacement Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Inspect the fluid level in the brake master cylinder auxiliary reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, no brake fluid needs to be removed from the reservoir before proceeding. 3. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, remove brake fluid to the midway point before proceeding. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Install and firmly hand tighten 2 wheel nuts to opposite wheel studs in order to retain the rotor to the hub. 7. Install a large C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and against the outboard brake pad. 8. Tighten the C-clamp evenly until the caliper piston is compressed into the caliper bore enough to allow the caliper to slide past the brake rotor. 9. Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 10. Remove the brake caliper lower guide pin bolt. 11. Notice: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement > Page 10659 Without disconnecting the hydraulic brake flexible hose, pivot the caliper upward and secure the caliper with heavy mechanics wire, or equivalent. 12. Remove the brake pads from the caliper mounting bracket. 13. Remove the brake pad retainers from the caliper bracket. 14. Thoroughly clean the brake pad hardware mating surfaces of the caliper bracket, of any debris and corrosion. 15. Inspect the brake caliper guide pins for freedom of movement, and inspect the condition of the guide pin boots. Move the guide pins inboard and outboard within the bracket bores, without disengaging the slides from the boots, and observe for the following: ^ Restricted caliper guide pin movement ^ Looseness in the brake caliper mounting bracket ^ Seized or binding caliper guide pins ^ Split or torn boots 16. If any of the conditions listed are found, the brake caliper guide pins and/or boots require replacement. Installation Procedure 1. Install a large C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper, with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and against an old inboard brake pad or a wood block installed against the caliper piston. 2. Tighten the C-clamp evenly until the caliper piston is compressed completely into the caliper bore. 3. Remove the C-clamp and the old brake pad or wood block from the caliper. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement > Page 10660 4. Apply a very thin coating of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the pad hardware mating surfaces of the caliper bracket only. 5. Install the brake pad retainers to the brake caliper bracket. 6. Important: The wear sensor equipped disc brake pad must be mounted inboard of the rotor with the leading edge of the sensor facing the brake rotor during forward wheel rotation, or at the top of the pad when installed in vehicle position. Install the brake pads to the caliper bracket. 7. Remove the support, and rotate the brake caliper into position over the disc brake pads and to the caliper mounting bracket. 8. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the lower brake caliper guide pin bolt. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement > Page 10661 ^ Tighten the bolt to 44 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). 9. Remove the wheel nuts retaining the brake rotor to the hub. 10. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 11. Lower the vehicle. 12. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 13. Slowly release the brake pedal. 14. Wait 15 seconds, then gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance again until a firm brake pedal apply is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. 15. Fill the master cylinder auxiliary reservoir to the proper level. 16. Burnish the pads and rotors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement > Page 10662 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Burnishing Pads and Rotors Burnishing Pads and Rotors Caution: Road test a vehicle under safe conditions and while obeying all traffic laws. Do not attempt any maneuvers that could jeopardize vehicle control. Failure to adhere to these precautions could lead to serious personal injury and vehicle damage. Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Burnishing the brake pads and brake rotors is necessary in order to ensure that the braking surfaces are properly prepared after service has been performed on the disc brake system. This procedure should be performed whenever the disc brake rotors have been refinished or replaced, and/or whenever the disc brake pads have been replaced. 1. Select a smooth road with little or no traffic. 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 48 km/h (30 mph). Important: Use care to avoid overheating the brakes while performing this step. 3. Using moderate to firm pressure, apply the brakes to bring the vehicle to a stop. Do not allow the brakes to lock. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until approximately 20 stops have been completed. Allow sufficient cooling periods between stops in order to properly burnish the brake pads and rotors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-05-22-002L Date: 090326 Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-05-22-002L Date: March 26, 2009 Subject: Disc Brake Warranty Service and Procedures Models: 1999-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 1999-2004 Isuzu Light Duty Trucks (Canada Only) 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X (Canada Only) 1999-2010 Saturn Vehicles (Canada Only) EXCLUDING 2009-2010 Chevrolet Corvette ZR1 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to inform you that due to improvements in vehicle brake corner and wheel design, assembly plant build processes and dealership required tools like the On-Car Lathe, measuring for Lateral Run Out (LRO) is no longer a required step when performing base brake service. Due to this change, you are no longer required to enter the LRO measurement on the repair order or in the warranty system failure code section. The bulletin information below and the base brake labor operations have been updated accordingly. Due to this change it is more important than ever to properly maintain your brake lathe (per the Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure in this bulletin). Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-05-22-002K (Section 05 Brakes). For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all GM's Standard Brake Service Procedures and Policy Guidelines for brake rotor and brake pad service and wear. For additional information, the Service Technical College lists a complete index of available Brake courses. This information can be accessed at www.gmtraining.com > resources > training materials > brakes courseware index. In Canada, refer to Service Know How course 55040.00V and Hydraulic Brake Certification program 15003.16H. Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM BRAKE SERVICE. The following four (4) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a successful brake service. 1. Measure and Document Pre-Service Rotor Thickness* (REQUIRED on Repair Order) determine rotor clean-up/refinish/replace 2. Properly clean ALL brake corner mating surfaces - hub, rotor and wheel 3. Properly clean-up/refinish rotor, measure and document post-service rotor thickness (REQUIRED on Repair Order) Important If it is determined the rotor needs to be refinished, verify lathe equipment is properly calibrated. 4. Properly reassemble the brake corner using proper torque tools, torque specification and torque sequence - wheel lug nuts. * The bulletin refers to Minimum Thickness specification as the minimum allowable thickness after refinish. Always refer to SI to verify the spec stamped on the rotor is the minimum thickness spec after refinish and not the discard spec. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 10667 Bulletin Format ***REPAIR ORDER REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 10668 Important When using any one of the brake labor operations listed in this bulletin (except for H9709 - Brake Burnish), the following two rotor measurements (1. Original Rotor Thickness, 2. Refinished Rotor Thickness are required and MUST be written/documented on the repair order, or for your convenience, complete the form (GM Brake Service Repair Order Documentation for Required Measurements) shown above and attach it to the repair order. If the Warranty Parts Center generates a request, this Documentation/Form must be attached to the repair order that is sent back. Important Documentation of brake lathe maintenance and calibration as recommended by the lathe manufacturer must be available for review upon request. Repair Order Documentation - Rotor Original And Refinished Thickness - REQUIRED When resurfacing a brake rotor or drum, the ORIGINAL thickness (measured thickness before refinish) and REFINISHED thickness (measured thickness after refinish) MUST be written/documented on the repair order hard copy for each rotor serviced. If a rotor replacement is necessary, only the original thickness measurement needs to be recorded. Repair Order Documentation - Explanation of Part Replacement - REQUIRED If replacement of a brake component is necessary, proper documentation on the repair order is required. See the following examples: ^ Brake rotor replacement - Customer comment was brake pulsation. Rotor was refinished on a prior brake service. After rotor measurement, it was determined that refinishing the rotor again would take it under the Minimum Thickness specification. ^ Brake pad replacement - Customer comment was brake squeak noise. On inspection, found pads contaminated by fluid leak at caliper. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 10669 TOOL INFORMATION CORRECTION PLATE PART INFORMATION Refer to TSB 01-05-23-001 for the Brake Align(R) application chart. For vehicles repaired under warranty, Brake Align(R) Run-Out Correction Plates should be submitted in the Net Amount at cost plus 40%. Brake Align(R) Run-Out Correction Plates are available through the following suppliers: - Dealer Equipment and Services - Brake Align(R) LLC (U.S. Dealers Only) * We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any such items, which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 10670 WARRANTY INFORMATION Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 10671 WORKSHEET - BRAKE LATHE CALIBRATION Important Brake lathe calibration should be performed and recorded monthly or if you are consistently measuring high LRO after rotor refinishing. Disclaimer GM Brake Service Procedure GM BRAKE SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the wheel and caliper. 2. Measure rotor thickness. In order to determine if the rotor can be refinished, do the following steps: Important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 10672 If performing routine Brake Service for worn pads only, and the rotors are not damaged and measure within specification - DO NOT REFINISH ROTORS. 1. Remove the rotor(s). 2. Measure the rotor for original thickness using a brake micrometer. Multiple measure points should be taken and the lowest measurement should be recorded. 3. Reference the Minimum Thickness specification stamped on the backside of the rotor or SI for Minimum Thickness specification/other. In most cases, the rotor should be refinished unless the measurement taken makes it obvious that refinishing the rotor would take the measurement under the Minimum Thickness specification (then replacement is necessary). DO NOT use any other manufacturers rotor specifications. 3. ***Record the lowest ORIGINAL rotor thickness measurement on the repair order hard copy as noted in the "Repair Order Documentation - Rotor Refinish" section of this bulletin. 4. Clean all of the mating surfaces between the hub, the rotor and the wheel using the J 42450A Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit and J 41013 - Whiz Wheel(R). If rotors are not to be refinished - Go To Step 8. Important Cleaning all mating surfaces and making them free of corrosion, burrs and other debris (which includes removal of Hubless rotors) is critical and MUST be performed whether using an On-Car or Bench Lathe Refinish Procedure. 5. Be sure to follow the appropriate refinishing procedure listed below for the type of lathe you are using. Important Only replace the rotors if they do not meet the Minimum Thickness specification. Important DO NOT REFINISH NEW ROTORS. Important Only remove the necessary amount of material from each side of the rotor and note that equal amounts of material do not have to be removed from both sides on any brake system using a floating caliper. Important Prior to making the cut, install the recommended clip-on style disc silencer supplied with the lathe. Use of this silencer is critical to prevent chatter from occurring during the cut. Bench Type Lathe 1. Refinish the existing rotor on an approved, well-maintained lathe to guarantee smooth, flat and parallel surfaces. 2. Check for clean and true lathe adapters and make sure the arbor shoulder is clean and free of debris or burrs. For more information, see the "Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure (Bench-Type)" section in this bulletin. 3. On the outboard area of the rotor, position the cutting tools one eighth of an inch into the brake pad area of the rotor. Feed the cutting tools into the rotor until they cut the rotor to new metal, a full 360 degrees. Zero each dial and back off a full turn 4. Move the cutting bits to the middle of the rotor and do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. Back off a full turn. 5. Position the cutting bits one eighth of an inch inside the inboard (closest to the hub) edge of the brake pad contact area. Do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. 6. Back off a full turn and position the cutting bits all the way inboard in preparation to refinish the full rotor surface. Advance both tool cutters to the zero setting plus just enough to clean up the entire rotor surface. 7. After completing the refinish, sand both sides of the rotor for approximately one minute per side using a sanding block and 130-150 grit sandpaper to obtain a non-directional finish. On-Car Type Lathe 1. Reinstall the rotor(s). Important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 10673 When using the On-Car lathe on vehicles equipped with limited slip (or posi-trac) rear system, it is critical that the rear drive shaft is disconnected/disengaged prior to operation of the On-Car lathe. Remember to mark and re-index the drive shaft correctly on re-assembly to prevent creating driveline vibration. Whenever the lathe drive motor is being switched on, the operator MUST keep their body out of the wheel well area until the machine has reached its normal operating RPM. 2. Refinish the existing rotor on an approved, well-maintained lathe to guarantee smooth, flat and parallel surfaces. Important When raising the vehicle on the lift, be sure to have it at a good working height (waist high is average) to accommodate mounting the On-Car lathe. Optimally, the center piston on the lathe trolley will be mid-travel. If the lathe trolley center piston is completely compressed (bottoming out) or inversely fully extended and hanging off the vehicle hub, this could affect the calibration time of the lathe. 3. Select the correct adapter for the vehicle you're working on and mount it to the hub with the vehicle lug nuts. Hand tighten 34-41 Nm (25-30 lb ft) the nuts using equal torque. DO NOT use impact wrenches, excessive torque will damage the adapter. Important Ensure the adapter sits flush on the rotor hat surface. Be sure to remove any rust, rotor retaining clips, etc. that may preclude the adapter from sitting flat on the mounting surface. 4. Connect the lathe to the adapter, turn on the lathe and activate the computer to compensate for run-out in the hub. 5. Once the computer indicates the compensation process was successful, on the outboard area of the rotor, position the cutting tools one eighth of an inch into the brake pad area of the rotor. Feed the cutting tools into the rotor until they cut the rotor to new metal, a full 360 degrees. Zero each dial and back off a full turn. 6. Move the cutting bits to the middle of the rotor and do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. Back off a full turn. 7. Position the cutting bits one eighth of an inch inside the inboard (closest to the hub) edge of the brake pad contact area. Do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. 8. Back off a full turn and position the cutting bits all the way inboard in preparation to refinish the full rotor surface. Advance both tool cutters to the zero setting plus just enough to clean up the entire rotor surface. 9. After completing the refinish, sand both sides of the rotor for approximately one minute per side using a sanding block and 130-150 grit sandpaper to obtain a non-directional finish. 10. Dismount the lathe, but leave the lathe adapter attached to the vehicle. 6. Once the rotor has been properly machined, wash the rotor with soap and water (use a mild dish washing soap) or wipe it clean with GM approved brake cleaner, P/N 88862650 (Canadian P/N 88901247). Important Thoroughly cleaning the rotor will prevent the possible transfer of finite metal dust left as a by-product of machining to the pad material during the seating process, thus reducing the opportunity for squeaks or other noises to occur. 7. ***Record the REFINISHED rotor thickness measurement on the repair order hard copy. Refer to the "Repair Order Documentation - Rotor Refinish" section of this bulletin. 8. Setting up to measure for Lateral Run Out (LRO): Important Measuring for Lateral Run Out (LRO) (steps 8 - 15) is no longer required however, these steps are being left in the overall procedure as a good check to be performed in the case of a repeat pulsation complaint. If you are not checking for LRO, go to step 16. Bench-Type Lathe 1. Ensure that the mating surfaces of the rotor hat section and the hub mating surface are clean and free of debris. 2. Mount the new, original or refinished rotor onto the vehicle hub. Important Always hold the rotor on the bottom half so any debris that may be dislodged from the vents will fall out instead of falling into the mounting area. Any movement or jarring from the rotor falling over on the studs can release rust from the vents on the rotor. 3. Tilt the top of the rotor in towards the vehicle so you can see the studs and ease the rotor onto the studs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 10674 4. Slide the rotor all the way to the hub and hold it in place until you have placed one of the conical washers (with the tapered hole side facing out) and run the first lug nut up tight by hand so the rotor doesn't move when you release it. 5. Place the conical washers on the rest of the studs (with the tapered hole side facing out), start and snug the lug nuts by hand. 6. Using the one half inch drive impact wrench and a torque stick (J 39544) or equivalent, start with the lug nut opposite of the one you first tightened by hand and tighten the lug nuts using a star pattern until they touch the hub but do not completely torque. Then again, starting with the first lug nut you tightened by hand, tighten all the lug nuts in a star pattern to the specific vehicle torque specification. 7. DO NOT reinstall the caliper or the wheel at this time. On-Car Type Lathe 1. Leave the On-Car adapter on the wheel. 2. Proceed to Step 9. 9. Fasten the dial indicator to the steering knuckle so that the indicator needle contacts the rotor outboard friction surface approximately 6.35 mm (0.25 in) from the rotor's outer edge. The stylus should be perpendicular to the friction surface of the rotor. Important Make sure the dial indicator needle tip is screwed tight, a loose tip could cause false readings. 10. Measure for LRO. Follow the procedure below to determine if the LRO is within specification (0.050 mm (0.002 in) or LESS). 1. Rotate the rotor and locate the point on the rotor where the lowest dial indicator reading is indicated and set the dial indicator to zero. 2. Rotate the rotor from the low point and locate the point with the highest dial indicator reading (rotor "high spot"). Note the amount and mark the location of the "high spot" on the rotor and mark the closest wheel stud relative to this location. If the high point falls between two studs, mark both studs. In instances where the vehicle has "capped lug nuts" you should mark the hub. 11. If the Lateral Run Out (LRO) measurement is 0.050 mm (0.002 in) or LESS, no correction is necessary. Go to Step 15 if this is the first rotor completed. Go to Step 16 if this is the second rotor completed. If the LRO is GREATER than 0.050 mm (0.002 in), go to Step 12. 12. If the LRO measurement is greater than 0.050 mm (0.002 in), use the following procedure to correct for LRO: Important If the LRO measurement is over 0.279 mm (0.011 in), determine the source or cause of the LRO and correct it (i.e. verify drive axle nut torque specification, refinished rotor is source of LRO due to a lathe qualification issue - see "Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure"). Hubless Rotor 1. Remove the rotor and using the Brake Align(R) application chart (found in TSB 01-05-23-001B), choose the correct plate to bring the rotor LRO to 0.050 mm (0.002 in) or less. The plates come in 0.0762 mm (0.003 in), 0.1524 mm (0.006 in) and 0.2286 (0.009 in) compensation. For more information on proper plate selection, see the instruction video/DVD included in the "Brake Align(R)" kit or TSB 01-05-23-001B. 2. Align the V-notch of the selected Brake Align(R) correction plate to the marked wheel stud ("high spot") or between the two points marked (if the "high spot" is between two wheel studs). Important IF Brake Align(R) Correction Plates are not available for the vehicle being serviced, refer to SI Document - Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction for correcting LRO. Important Per Brake Align(R) manufacturer, NEVER attempt to stack two or more Correction Plates together on one hub. NEVER attempt to reuse a previously installed Correction Plate. 3. Reinstall the rotor using the same method and precautions as the first time - found in Step 8. Make sure to index the rotor correctly to the marks made in step 10, otherwise LRO will be comprised. Hubbed / Captured / Trapped Rotor 1. Measure the rotor thickness. 2. Refinish or replace the rotor (see Service Information for further details). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 10675 13. Use a Dial Indicator to measure the rotor to verify the LRO is within specification. 14. If using, BENCH LATHE - DO NOT remove conical washers and lug nuts at this time. ON-CAR LATHE - You must remove adapter and install conical washers and lug nuts to retain rotor position. Important For Hubless rotor design, while removing the adapter, you must hold the rotor tight to the hub and install the top conical washer and lug nut first to ensure no debris falls between the surface while removing the adapter. Then, install the remaining conical washers and lug nuts. Otherwise, LRO will be comprised. 15. Perform Steps 1 through 7 on the opposite side of the vehicle (steps 1-12, if performing LRO). 16. Reinstall the rotors on both sides of the vehicle and perform the following steps: 1. Reinstall the calipers and pads. 2. Pump the brakes to pressurize the calipers. 3. Remove the lug nuts/conical washers. 4. Install and properly torque the wheels. Important It is critical to follow the star pattern wheel torque procedure and use the proper tools (torque stick or torque wrench) as referenced in SI. 17. Road test the vehicle to verify the repairs. Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure BRAKE LATHE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE Calibration of the brake lathe should be performed and recorded monthly or whenever post-service brake rotor LRO measurements are consistently reading above specification. BENCH-TYPE LATHE Use the following procedure to calibrate a Bench-type brake lathe: 1. After refinishing a rotor, loosen the arbor nut and while holding the inside bell clamp to keep it from rotating, rotate the rotor 180 degrees. 2. Retighten the arbor nut and set the dial indicator on the rotor using the same instructions as checking the run out on the vehicle. 3. Rotate the arbor and read the runout. 4. Divide the reading by two and this will give you the amount of runout the lathe is cutting into the rotor. Important If there is any runout, you will need to machine the inside bell clamp in place on the lathe (this procedure is for a Bench type lathe ONLY, DO NOT machine inside the bell clamp on an On-Car type lathe). Machining the Inside Bell Clamp (Bench Type Lathe Only) Any nicks or burrs on the shoulder of the arbor must be removed. An 80-grit stone can be used to accomplish this. Spray WD-40(R) on the shoulder and with the lathe running, hold the stone flat against the shoulder surface using slight pressure. When the burrs are gone, clean the surface. Burrs must also be removed from the hub of the inside bell clamp. This can be accomplished with the stone and WD-40(R). Keep the stone flat on the hub while removing the burrs. After removing the burrs, clean the hub. Place the bell clamp on the arbor of the lathe and use the small radius adapters first and then spacers to allow you to tighten the arbor nut to secure the bell clamp to the lathe. Position the tool bit in the left hand of the rotor truer so you can machine the face of the bell clamp. Machine the face of the bell clamp taking just enough off of it to cut the full face of the clamp the full 360 degrees. Before you loosen the arbor nut, match mark the hub of the bell clamp to the arbor and line up these marks before machining a rotor. A magic marker can be used to make the match marks. Machine a rotor and recheck the calibration. Repeat this procedure on all Inside Bell Clamps used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 10676 Important If runout is still present, contact the brake lathe supplier. ON-CAR TYPE LATHE Use the following procedure to calibrate an On-Car brake lathe: 1. Connect the lathe to a vehicle using the appropriate adapter. 2. Attach a vise-grip dial indicator to a fixed point in the wheel well and bring the dial indicator to a flat surface on the cutting head. 3. Turn on the lathe and press the "start" button so the lathe begins to compensate. 4. Once compensation is complete, note the runout as measured by the dial indicator. Measured runout at this point is overstated given that it is outside the rotor diameter. 5. If runout is in excess of 0.1016 mm (0.004 in) (0.050 mm (0.002 in) as measured within the rotor diameter), calibration must be tightened. Follow manufacturer's instructions for tightening the calibration of the lathe. This information is found in the manual supplied with the lathe. Important If the machine is taking a long time to compensate during normal use, prior to checking the lathe calibration, it is recommended that the machine be disconnected from the adapter and the adapter (still connected to the vehicle) is rotated 180 degrees and the machine reattached. This will accomplish two things: - It will re-verify the machine is properly attached to the adapter. - It will change the location of the runout (phase) relative to the machine and thus possibly allow for quick compensation as a result of the position change. The following information has been added as a reference to ensure your Pro-Cut PFM lathe provides a consistent smooth surface finish over long term usage. Cutting Tips / Depth of Cut / Tip Life The cutting tips must be right side up. Reference marks always face up. The cutting tips may not have chips or dings in the surface of the points. Cuts of 0.1016-0.381 mm (0.004-0.015 in) will provide the best surface finish and the optimal tip life. When cleaning or rotating the cutting bits, make sure that the seat area for the tip on the tool is free and clear of debris. Cutting Head On each brake job, the technician must center the cutting head for that particular vehicle using one of the mounting bolt holes on the slide plate. Once the head is centered, it is vital that the technician use one hand to push the head firmly and squarely back into the dovetail on the slide plate while using the other hand to tighten the Allen-Hex bolt that secures the head. Failure to do this could result in chatter occurring during the cut. Tool Holder Plate (Cutting Head) The tool holder plate is the plate that the cutting arms are attached to. It can bend or break if a technician accidently runs the cutting arms into the hub of the rotor while the rotor is turning. (Cuts of more than 0.508 mm (0.020 in) can also bend this plate). Once bent, the lathe will most likely not cut properly until the tool holder plate is replaced. In order to verify the condition of the tool holder plate on a machine that will not cut right, remove the mounting bolt and remove the cutting head from the slide plate. With the cutting head titled at an angle, lay the long edge of the tool holder plate down on the flat part of the slide plate. If any gap can be seen between the edge and the slide plate, the tool holder plate is bent and the source of vibration. Also check to ensure that the cutting arms are lying flat on the upper side of the tool holder plate. If the mounting arm post is bent, it will show itself by having the back of the cutting arm lifting off the surface of the tool holder. Gib Adjustment / Loose Gib As wear occurs between the slide plate and the box it rides on, you must take up the slack. You do this by way of a moveable wedge, which we call the gib. Your lathe manual details adjustment process, which you should perform when required after monthly checks or whenever surface finish is inconsistent. Brake Pulsation BRAKE PULSATION Brake pulsation is caused by brake rotor thickness variation. Brake rotor thickness variation causes the piston in the brake caliper, when applied, to "pump" in and out of the caliper housing. The "pumping" effect is transmitted hydraulically to the brake pedal. Brake pulsation concerns may result from two basic conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 10677 1. Thickness Variation Pulsation is Caused by Lateral Run Out (LRO). LRO on a brake corner assembly is virtually undetectable unless measured (with a dial indicator after the brake service) and will not be detected as brake pulsation during an after brake service test drive. If the brake corner is assembled with excessive LRO (greater than 0.050 mm (0.002 in), thickness variation will develop on the brake rotor over time and miles. Excessive LRO will cause the brake pads to wear the brake rotors unevenly, which causes rotor thickness variation. Pulsation that is the result of excessive Lateral Run Out usually develops in 4,800-16,000 km (3,000-10,000 mi). The more excessive the LRO, the faster the pulsation will develop. LRO can also be induced when uneven torque is applied to wheel nuts (lug nuts). Improper wheel tightening after tire rotation, spare tire usage, brake inspection, etc. can be the cause of brake pulsation. Again, it usually takes 4,800-16,000 km (3,000-10,000 mi) AFTER the service event for the condition to develop. The customer does not usually make the connection between the service event and the awareness of the pulsation. The proper usage of torque wrenches and/or torque sticks (torque limiting sockets) will greatly reduce or eliminate the pulsation conditions after wheel service events. The improper use of impact wrenches on wheel nuts greatly increases the likelihood of pulsation after wheel service. The following are examples of pulsation conditions and reimbursement recommendations: - If the customer noticed the condition between 4,800-16,000 km (3,000-10,000 mi) and it gradually got worse, normally the repair would be covered. The customer may tolerate the condition until it becomes very apparent. - If a GM dealer performed a prior brake service, consider paying for the repair and then strongly reinforce proper brake lathe maintenance. - If the customer had the brake service done outside of a GM dealership, normally GM would not offer any assistance. - If a customer indicated they had wheel service, ask who performed the service. Then; - If a GM dealer performed the service, consider paying for the repair and then strongly reinforce the use of torque sticks at the dealer. Two common size torque sticks cover 90% of all GM products. Each technician needs to use torque sticks properly every time the wheel nuts are tightened. - If the customer had the wheel service done outside of a GM dealership, normally GM would not offer any assistance. 2. Thickness Variation Pulsation Caused by Brake Rotor Corrosion - Rotor corrosion is another form of thickness variation, which can cause a pulsation concern and can be addressed as follows: - Cosmetic Corrosion: In most instances rotor corrosion is cosmetic and refinishing the rotor is unnecessary. - Corrosion - Pulsation Caused by Thickness Variation (Lot Rot / Low Miles - 0-321 km (0-200 mi): At times more extensive corrosion can cause pulsation due to thickness variation. This usually happens when the vehicle is parked for long periods of time in humid type conditions and the braking surface area under the pads corrodes at a different rate compared to the rest of the braking surface area. Cleaning up of braking surfaces (burnishing) can be accomplished by 10 - 15 moderate stops from 56- 64 km/h (35 - 40 mph) with cooling time between stops. If multiple moderate braking stops do not correct this condition, follow the "Brake Rotor Clean-Up Procedure" below. - Corrosion - Pulsation Caused by Thickness Variation (without rotor flaking / higher mileage 3,200-8,000 km (2,000-5,000 mi): In some cases, more extensive corrosion that is not cleaned up by the brake pad over time and miles can cause the same type of pulsation complaint due to thickness variation. In these cases, the rotor surface is usually darker instead of shiny and a brake pad foot print can be seen against the darker surface. This darker surface is usually due to build-up, on the rotor material surface, caused by a combination of corrosion, pad material and heat. To correct this condition, follow the "Brake Rotor Clean-up Procedure" below. - Corrosion - Pulsation Caused by Thickness Variation (with rotor flaking / higher mileage - 8,000 + km (5,000 + miles) : At times, more extensive corrosion over time and miles can cause pulsation due to thickness variation (flaking). This flaking is usually a build up, mostly on the rotor material surface, caused by a combination of corrosion, pad material and heat. When rotor measurements are taken, the low areas are usually close to the original rotor thickness (new rotor) measurement and the high areas usually measure more than the original rotor thickness (new rotor) measurement (depending on mileage and normal wear). To correct this condition, follow the "Brake Rotor Clean-up Procedure" described below. Important In some flaking instances, cleaning-up this type of corrosion may require more rotor material to be removed then desired. Customer consideration should be taken in these situations and handled on a case by case basis, depending on the amount/percentage of rotor life remaining and the vehicle's warranty time and miles. Brake Rotor Clean-Up Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 10678 BRAKE ROTOR CLEAN-UP PROCEDURE Clean-up the rotors on an approved, well-maintained brake lathe to guarantee smooth, flat and parallel surfaces. Check for clean and true lathe adapters and make sure the arbor shoulder is clean and free of debris or burrs. For more information see the "Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure" section in this bulletin. 1. On the outboard area of the rotor, position the cutting tools one eighth of an inch into the brake pad area of the rotor. Feed the cutting tools into the rotor until they cut the rotor to new metal, a full 360 degrees. Zero each dial and back off a full turn. 2. Move the cutting bits to the middle of the rotor and do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. Back off a full turn. 3. Position the cutting bits one eighth of an inch inside the inboard (closest to the hub) edge of the brake pad contact area. Do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. 4. Back off a full turn and position the cutting bits all the way inboard in preparation to refinish the full rotor surface. Advance both tool cutters to the zero setting plus just enough to clean up the entire rotor surface. 5. After completing the refinish, sand both sides of the rotor for approximately one minute per side using a sanding block and 130-150 grit sandpaper to obtain a non-directional finish. Important Only remove the necessary amount of material from each side of the rotor and note that equal amounts of material do not have to be removed from both sides on any brake system using a floating caliper. Important In many of these instances, such a minimal amount of material is removed from the rotor that customer satisfaction is not a concern for future brake services. This procedure is intended to "Clean-up" the rotor surface and should be conveyed to the customer as such - not as "cut", "refinish" or "machine", which tends to be terms understood as a substantial reduction of rotor material/life. If the brake lathe equipment being used is not capable of removing minor amounts of material while holding tolerances, further lathe maintenance, repair, updates or equipment replacement may be necessary. Brake Noise BRAKE NOISE Some brake noise is normal and differences in loading, type of driving, or driving style can make a difference in brake wear on the same make and model. Depending on weather conditions, driving patterns and the local environment, brake noise may become more or less apparent. Verify all metal-to-metal contact areas between pads, pad guides, caliper and knuckles are clean and lubricated with a thin layer of high temperature silicone grease. Brake noise is caused by a "slip-stick" vibration of brake components. While intermittent brake noise may be normal, performing 3 to 4 aggressive stops may temporarily reduce or eliminate most brake squeal. If the noise persists and is consistently occurring, a brake dampening compound may be applied to the back of each pad. This allows parts to slide freely and not vibrate when moving relative to each other. Use Silicone Brake Lubricant, ACDelco P/N 88862181 (Canadian P/N 88862496) or equivalent. The following noises are characteristics of all braking systems and are unavoidable. They may not indicate improper operation of the brake system. Squeak/Squeal Noise: - Occurs with front semi-metallic brake pads at medium speeds when light to medium pressure is applied to the brake pedal. - Occasionally a noise may occur on rear brakes during the first few stops or with cold brakes and/or high humidity. Grinding Noise: - Common to rear brakes and some front disc brakes during initial stops after the vehicle has been parked overnight. - Caused by corrosion on the metal surfaces during vehicle non-use. Usually disappears after a few stops. Groan Noise: A groan type noise may be heard when stopping quickly or moving forward slowly from a complete stop. This is normal. On vehicles equipped with ABS, a groan or moan type noise during hard braking applications or loose gravel, wet or icy road conditions is a normal function of the ABS activation. Key Points - Frequently Asked Questions KEY POINTS - FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS - Q: How do on-car lathes react to Axle Float? Does the play affect the machining of the rotor, either surface finish or LRO? Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 10679 A: Because the Pro-Cut on-car lathe adjusts in a live mode while spinning the hub/rotor, the dynamics of a floating axle are effectively eliminated. Once the lathe is compensated, there is no difference in the cutting/surface finish and LRO are just the same as with a non-floating axle. - Q: Which lathe is essential for performing brake work, the bench or on-car? A: Dealers must have a well maintained bench lathe and well maintained on-car lathe. These lathes need to be calibrated on a monthly basis. BOTH lathes are essential to providing quality brake service. - Q: What is the expected tip life for an on-car lathe? A: The geometry and composition of the Pro-Cut tips are designed for "single pass" cutting. When using the Pro-Cut the cutting depth should be set to take all material needed to get below rust grooves, eliminate all run-out and resurface the entire disc in a single pass. Cuts of 0.1016-0.381 mm (0.004-0.015 in) will provide the best surface finish and the optimal tip life. No "skim cut" or "finish cut" is needed. Failure to follow this procedure will shorten tip life. The Pro-cut tips will last between 7-12 cuts per corner. With three usable corners, a pair of tips is good for at least 21 cuts. - Q: Why does GM recommend the use of single pass (referred to as "positive rake") bench and on-car brake lathes? A: GM Service and GM Brake Engineering have performed competitive evaluations on a significant number of bench and on-car brake lathes. These tests measured critical performance characteristics such as flatness, surface finish and the ability of the lathe to repeat accuracy over many uses. In each test, single pass lathe designs out performed the competitors. Single pass brake lathes are more productive requiring less time to perform the same procedure. - Q: Is it okay to leave the caliper/pads installed while cutting rotors using an on-car lathe? A: On-car lathes should never be used with the pads and calipers installed on the vehicle. The debris from cutting the rotors can contaminate the brake pads/calipers which can lead to other brake concerns and comebacks. - Q: What information needs to be documented on the Repair Order? A: Any claim that is submitted using the labor operations in this bulletin, must have the Original Rotor Thickness and Refinish Rotor Thickness (if refinished) documented on the repair order. For more information, refer to the "Repair Order Required Documentation" section of this bulletin. All Warranty Repair Orders paid by GM, are subject to review for compliance and may be debited where the repair does not comply with this procedure. Brake Warranty BRAKE WARRANTY Brake Rotors: - Brake rotor warranty is covered under the terms of the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Reference the vehicle's warranty guide for verification. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced during normal/routine pad replacement. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced and is ineffective in correcting brake squeal type noises and/or premature lining wear out. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced for cosmetic corrosion. Clean up of braking surfaces can be accomplished by 10-15 moderate stops from 56-64 km/h (35-40 mph) with cooling time between stops. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced for rotor discoloration/hard spots. - Rotors should be refinished NOT replaced for Customer Pulsation concerns. This condition is a result of rotor thickness variation, usually caused by LRO (wear induced over time and miles) or corrosion (Lot Rot). - When rotor refinishing, only remove the necessary amount of material from each side of the rotor and note that equal amounts of material do not have to be removed from both sides on any brake system using a floating caliper. - Rotors should be refinished for severe scoring - depth in excess of 1.5 mm (0.060 in). Important If the scoring depth is more than 1.5 mm (0.060 in) after the rotor is refinished, it should be replaced. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 10680 - It is not necessary to replace rotors in pairs. Rotors may be replaced individually. However, caution should be exercised, as a variance in surface finish may cause a brake pull condition. - New rotors should not be refinished before installation. Original equipment rotor surfaces are ground to ensure smooth finish and parallelism between mounting and friction surfaces. If a new rotor has more than 0.050 mm (0.002 in) Lateral Run Out (LRO) when properly mounted on the hub, correct it using one of the following methods: 1. For hubless rotor designs, use the correction plate procedure found in the "GM Brake Service Procedure for Hubless Rotors" outlined in this bulletin. 2. For hubbed/trapped/captured rotor designs, refinish the rotor using an On-Car lathe and the procedure outlined in this bulletin. - Never reuse rotors that measure under the Minimum Thickness specification. In this instance, the rotor should be replaced. Important If the Minimum Thickness specification is not visible on the rotor, reference Service Information (SI) for the specific vehicle application. DO NOT use any other manufacturers rotor specifications. Brake Pads: Important When determining the warranty coverage (as an example) - if all four front or four rear brake pads are excessively worn evenly, that would NOT be covered under warranty since this type of wear is most likely due to driving habits or trailering. However, if the brake pads are excessively worn un-evenly, side-to-side or same side/inner-to-outer pads, then consideration should be given to cover this under warranty since this type of wear is most likely due to poor operation of other braking components. - Consideration should be given for covering brake pads up to 39,000 km (24,000 mi) (excluding owner abuse, excessive trailering, or the situations that would not be considered normal use). - Installation of new rotors does not require pad replacement. Do not replace pads unless their condition requires it - excessively worn, damage or contaminated. Brake Wear: Several factors impact brake lining wear and should be taken into account when reviewing related issues: - heavy loads / high temperatures / towing / mountainous driving / city driving / aggressive driving / driver braking characteristics (left foot or two feet) The following are conditions that may extend brake lining wear: - light loads / highway driving / conservative driving / level terrain Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 10681 Brake Rotor/Disc: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rotor/Drum Refinishing Labor Operations Bulletin No.: 06-05-22-007 Date: November 30, 2006 WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Subject: Brake Rotor/Drum Refinishing Labor Operations Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X (Canada Only) The purpose of this bulletin is to advise dealership personnel of labor operation changes relating to brake repairs. Existing brake rotor and drum labor operations have been revised to remove the refinishing times and new labor operations have been established for refinishing brake rotors or drums. The changes will become effective with the release of the December 2006 Labor Time Guide. The following changes: Applies to all 2005-2007 vehicles, unless 2005 was the last year of production for that particular model. May apply to 2004 and prior models years if the vehicle was produced after 2005 - e.g. TrailBlazer, Envoy, etc. Where the new labor operations for refinishing rotors or drums do not apply, the existing labor operations will still contain time for refinishing. Always refer to the Labor Time Guide for the appropriate labor operations and time for the vehicle being repaired. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 10682 The list shown is of labor operations for brake service. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10683 Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Brake Rotor Diameter .......................................................................................................................... ........................................... 296.00 mm (11.654 inch) Brake Rotor Discard Thickness....................... ...................................................................................................................................... 24.5 mm (0.960 inch) Brake Rotor Maximum Allowable Assembled Lateral Runout ............................................................................................................. 0.06 mm (0.002 inch) Brake Rotor Maximum Allowable Scoring .......................................................................................................................................... 1.50 mm (0.059 inch) Brake Rotor Maximum Allowable Thickness Variation ..................................................................................................................... 0.025 mm (0.001 inch) Brake Rotor Minimum Allowable Thickness After Refinish ................................................................................................................ 24.5 mm (0.960 inch) Brake Rotor Thickness - New ........................................................................................................................ ....................................... 26.0 mm (1.024 inch) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout (LRO) Correction Important: ^ Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. ^ Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800 - 11 300 km (3,000 - 7,000 mi). Review the following acceptable methods for bringing the brake rotor assembled LRO to within specifications. Determine which method to use for the specific vehicle being repaired. ^ The indexing method of correcting assembled LRO is most effective when the LRO specification is only exceeded by a relatively small amount: 0.025 - 0.127 mm (0.001 - 0.005 inch). Indexing is used to achieve the best possible match of high spots to low spots between related components. ^ The correction plate method of correcting assembled LRO involves the addition of a tapered plate between the brake rotor and the hub/axle flange. The correction plate method can be used to correct LRO that exceeds the specification by up to 0.23 mm (0.009 inch). ^ The on-vehicle brake lathe method is used to bring the LRO to within specifications through compensating for LRO while refinishing the brake rotor. If the assembled LRO cannot be corrected using these methods, then other components must be suspected as causing and/or contributing to the LRO concern. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 10686 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction Correction Plates Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout (LRO) Correction - Correction Plates ^ Tools Required J 39544-KIT Torque-Limiting Socket Set, or equivalent - J 45101-100Conical Brake Rotor Washers Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Important: ^ Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. ^ Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). 1. Rotate the brake rotor to position the high spot, identified and marked during the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement procedure, to face upward. 2. Remove the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts that were installed during the assembled LRO measurement procedure and/or the indexing correction procedure. 3. Inspect the mounting surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Select the correction plate, following the manufacturer's instructions, which has a specification closest to the assembled LRO measurement.For example: If the assembled LRO measurement was 0.076 mm (0.003 inch), the 0.076 mm (0.003 inch) correction plate would be used. If the measurement was 0.127 mm (0.005 inch), the 0.152 mm (0.006 inch) correction plate would be used. 5. Determine the positioning for the correction plate (1) using the high spot mark (3) made during the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 10687 6. Important: ^ Do NOT install used correction plates in an attempt to correct brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO). ^ Do NOT stack up, or install more than one correction plate onto one hub/axle flange location, in an attempt to correct brake rotor assembled LRO. Install the correction plate (1) onto the hub/axle flange, with the V-shaped notch (2) orientated to align with the high spot mark (3), that was positioned to face upward. 7. Install the brake rotor to the hub/axle flange. Use the matchmark made prior to removal for proper orientation to the flange. 8. Hold the rotor firmly in place against the hub/axle flange and install one of the J 45101-100 (1) and one lug nut (2) onto the upper-most wheel stud. 9. Continue to hold the rotor secure and tighten the lug nut firmly by hand. 10. Install the remaining J 45101-100 and lug nuts onto the wheel studs and tighten the nuts firmly by hand in a star-pattern. 11. Using the J 39544-KIT , or equivalent, tighten the lug nuts in a star-pattern to specification, in order to properly secure the rotor. 12. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. 13. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout (LRO) Correction. 14. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 10688 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction Indexing Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout (LRO) Correction - Indexing ^ Tools Required J 39544-KIT Torque-Limiting Socket Set, or equivalent - J 45101-100 Conical Brake Rotor Washers Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Important: ^ Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. ^ Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). 1. Remove the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts that were installed during the assembled LRO measurement procedure. 2. Inspect the mating surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 3. Index the brake rotor in a different orientation to the hub/axle flange. 4. Hold the rotor firmly in place against the hub/axle flange and install one of the J 45101-100 (1) and one lug nut (2) onto the upper-most wheel stud. 5. Continue to hold the rotor secure and tighten the lug nut firmly by hand. 6. Install the remaining J 45101-100 and lug nuts onto the wheel studs and tighten the nuts firmly by hand in a star-pattern. 7. Using the J 39544-KIT , or equivalent, tighten the lug nuts in a star-pattern to specification, in order to properly secure the rotor. 8. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. 9. Compare the amount of change between this measurement and the original measurement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 10689 10. If this measurement is within specifications, proceed to step 14. 11. If this measurement still exceeds specifications, repeat steps 1-9 until the best assembled LRO measurement is obtained. 12. Matchmark the final location of the rotor to the wheel studs if the orientation is different than it was originally. 13. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout (LRO) Correction. 14. If the brake rotor assembled LRO is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 10690 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - On Vehicle Lathe Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout (LRO) Correction - On-Vehicle Lathe ^ Tools Required J 45101-100Conical Brake Rotor Washers Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Important: ^ Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. ^ Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800 - 11 300 km (3,000 - 7,000 mi). 1. Ensure that the caliper and caliper bracket that are already being supported, are clear from contacting any rotating components, such as the brake rotor. 2. Remove the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts that were installed during the assembled LRO measurement procedure and/or the indexing correction procedure. 3. Inspect the mounting surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Set up the lathe, following the manufacturer's instructions. 5. Refinish the brake rotor, following the brake lathe manufacturer's instructions. 6. After each successive cut, inspect the brake rotor thickness. 7. If at any time the brake rotor exceeds the minimum allowable thickness after refinish specification, the brake rotor must be replaced. After replacing the rotor, proceed to step 10. 8. After refinishing the brake rotor, use the following procedure in order to obtain the desired non-directional finish: 1. Follow the brake lathe manufacturer's recommended speed setting for applying a non-directional finish 2. Using moderate pressure, apply the non-directional finish: ^ If the lathe is equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with 120 grit aluminum oxide sandpaper ^ If the lathe is not equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with a sanding block and 150 grit aluminum oxide sandpaper 3. After applying a non-directional finish, clean each friction surface of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner 9. Remove the lathe from the vehicle. 10. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. 11. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout (LRO) Correction. 12. If the brake rotor assembled LRO is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 10691 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout (LRO) Correction Important: ^ Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. ^ Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800 - 11 300 km (3,000 - 7,000 mi). Review the following acceptable methods for bringing the brake rotor assembled LRO to within specifications. Determine which method to use for the specific vehicle being repaired. ^ The indexing method of correcting assembled LRO is most effective when the LRO specification is only exceeded by a relatively small amount: 0.025 - 0.127 mm (0.001 - 0.005 inch). Indexing is used to achieve the best possible match of high spots to low spots between related components. ^ The correction plate method of correcting assembled LRO involves the addition of a tapered plate between the brake rotor and the hub/axle flange. The correction plate method can be used to correct LRO that exceeds the specification by up to 0.23 mm (0.009 inch). ^ The on-vehicle brake lathe method is used to bring the LRO to within specifications through compensating for LRO while refinishing the brake rotor. If the assembled LRO cannot be corrected using these methods, then other components must be suspected as causing and/or contributing to the LRO concern. Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout (LRO) Correction - Correction Plates ^ Tools Required J 39544-KIT Torque-Limiting Socket Set, or equivalent - J 45101-100Conical Brake Rotor Washers Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Important: ^ Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. ^ Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 10692 1. Rotate the brake rotor to position the high spot, identified and marked during the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement procedure, to face upward. 2. Remove the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts that were installed during the assembled LRO measurement procedure and/or the indexing correction procedure. 3. Inspect the mounting surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Select the correction plate, following the manufacturer's instructions, which has a specification closest to the assembled LRO measurement.For example: If the assembled LRO measurement was 0.076 mm (0.003 inch), the 0.076 mm (0.003 inch) correction plate would be used. If the measurement was 0.127 mm (0.005 inch), the 0.152 mm (0.006 inch) correction plate would be used. 5. Determine the positioning for the correction plate (1) using the high spot mark (3) made during the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement procedure. 6. Important: ^ Do NOT install used correction plates in an attempt to correct brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO). ^ Do NOT stack up, or install more than one correction plate onto one hub/axle flange location, in an attempt to correct brake rotor assembled LRO. Install the correction plate (1) onto the hub/axle flange, with the V-shaped notch (2) orientated to align with the high spot mark (3), that was positioned to face upward. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 10693 7. Install the brake rotor to the hub/axle flange. Use the matchmark made prior to removal for proper orientation to the flange. 8. Hold the rotor firmly in place against the hub/axle flange and install one of the J 45101-100 (1) and one lug nut (2) onto the upper-most wheel stud. 9. Continue to hold the rotor secure and tighten the lug nut firmly by hand. 10. Install the remaining J 45101-100 and lug nuts onto the wheel studs and tighten the nuts firmly by hand in a star-pattern. 11. Using the J 39544-KIT , or equivalent, tighten the lug nuts in a star-pattern to specification, in order to properly secure the rotor. 12. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. 13. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout (LRO) Correction. 14. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts. Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Indexing Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout (LRO) Correction - Indexing ^ Tools Required J 39544-KIT Torque-Limiting Socket Set, or equivalent - J 45101-100 Conical Brake Rotor Washers Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Important: ^ Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. ^ Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 10694 1. Remove the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts that were installed during the assembled LRO measurement procedure. 2. Inspect the mating surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 3. Index the brake rotor in a different orientation to the hub/axle flange. 4. Hold the rotor firmly in place against the hub/axle flange and install one of the J 45101-100 (1) and one lug nut (2) onto the upper-most wheel stud. 5. Continue to hold the rotor secure and tighten the lug nut firmly by hand. 6. Install the remaining J 45101-100 and lug nuts onto the wheel studs and tighten the nuts firmly by hand in a star-pattern. 7. Using the J 39544-KIT , or equivalent, tighten the lug nuts in a star-pattern to specification, in order to properly secure the rotor. 8. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. 9. Compare the amount of change between this measurement and the original measurement. 10. If this measurement is within specifications, proceed to step 14. 11. If this measurement still exceeds specifications, repeat steps 1-9 until the best assembled LRO measurement is obtained. 12. Matchmark the final location of the rotor to the wheel studs if the orientation is different than it was originally. 13. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout (LRO) Correction. 14. If the brake rotor assembled LRO is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts. Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - On Vehicle Lathe Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout (LRO) Correction - On-Vehicle Lathe ^ Tools Required J 45101-100Conical Brake Rotor Washers Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 10695 Important: ^ Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. ^ Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800 - 11 300 km (3,000 - 7,000 mi). 1. Ensure that the caliper and caliper bracket that are already being supported, are clear from contacting any rotating components, such as the brake rotor. 2. Remove the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts that were installed during the assembled LRO measurement procedure and/or the indexing correction procedure. 3. Inspect the mounting surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Set up the lathe, following the manufacturer's instructions. 5. Refinish the brake rotor, following the brake lathe manufacturer's instructions. 6. After each successive cut, inspect the brake rotor thickness. 7. If at any time the brake rotor exceeds the minimum allowable thickness after refinish specification, the brake rotor must be replaced. After replacing the rotor, proceed to step 10. 8. After refinishing the brake rotor, use the following procedure in order to obtain the desired non-directional finish: 1. Follow the brake lathe manufacturer's recommended speed setting for applying a non-directional finish 2. Using moderate pressure, apply the non-directional finish: ^ If the lathe is equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with 120 grit aluminum oxide sandpaper ^ If the lathe is not equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with a sanding block and 150 grit aluminum oxide sandpaper 3. After applying a non-directional finish, clean each friction surface of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner 9. Remove the lathe from the vehicle. 10. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. 11. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout (LRO) Correction. 12. If the brake rotor assembled LRO is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts. Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout (LRO) Measurement ^ Tools Required J 39544-KIT Torque-Limiting Socket Set, or equivalent - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit - J 45101 Hub and Wheel Runout Gage, or equivalent - J 45101-100 Conical Brake Rotor Washers Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Important: ^ Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). ^ Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled LRO. Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 10696 1. Matchmark the position of the brake rotor to the wheel studs if this has not been done already. 2. Important: Whenever the brake rotor has been separated from the hub/axle flange, any rust or contaminants should be cleaned from the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor mating surfaces. Failure to do this may result in excessive assembled LRO of the brake rotor, which could lead to brake pulsation. Inspect the mating surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles, corrosion, rust, or debris remaining. If the wheel hub/axle flange and/or if the brake rotor mating surfaces exhibit these conditions, perform the following steps: 1. Remove the brake rotor from the vehicle. 2. Using the J 42450-A , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the hub/axle flange. 3. Using the J 41013 , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the brake rotor. 4. Clean the friction surfaces of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. 3. Install the rotor to the hub/axle flange using the matchmark made prior to removal. 4. Hold the rotor firmly in place against the hub/axle flange and install one of the J 45101-100 (1), and one lug nut (2) onto the upper-most wheel stud. 5. Continue to hold the rotor secure and tighten the lug nut firmly by hand. 6. Install the remaining J 45101-100 and lug nuts onto the wheel studs and tighten the nuts firmly by hand in a star-pattern. 7. Using the J 39544-KIT , or equivalent, tighten the lug nuts in a star-pattern to specification, in order to properly secure the rotor. 8. If the brake rotor has been REFINISHED or REPLACED with a new rotor, proceed to step 14. 9. If the brake rotor meets the following criteria, proceed to step 10. ^ The rotor is within specifications and is being REUSED. ^ The rotor has NOT been refinished. ^ The rotor does NOT exhibit thickness variation exceeding the maximum allowable level. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 10697 10. Mount a dial indicator, J 45101 , or equivalent, to the steering knuckle and position the indicator button so it contacts the brake rotor friction surface at a 90 degree angle, approximately 13 mm (0.5 inch) from the outer edge of the rotor. 11. Measure and record the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. 0. Rotate the rotor until the lowest reading is displayed on the indicator dial, then set the dial to zero. 1. Rotate the rotor until the highest reading is displayed on the dial. 2. Mark the location of the high spot relative to the nearest wheel stud, or studs. 3. Measure and record the amount of LRO. 12. Compare the brake rotor assembled LRO to the following specification: Brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.06 mm (0.002 inch). 13. If the brake rotor assembled LRO is within specifications, proceed to step 18. If the brake rotor assembled LRO exceeds the specification, refinish the rotor to ensure true parallelism. After refinishing the rotor, proceed to step 14. 14. Mount a dial indicator, J 45101 , or equivalent, to the steering knuckle and position the indicator button so it contacts the brake rotor friction surface at a 90 degree angle, approximately 13 mm (0.5 inch) from the outer edge of the rotor. 15. Measure and record the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. 0. Rotate the rotor until the lowest reading is displayed on the indicator dial, then set the dial to zero. 1. Rotate the rotor until the highest reading is displayed on the dial. 2. Mark the location of the high spot relative to the nearest wheel stud, or studs. 3. Measure and record the amount of LRO. 16. Compare the brake rotor assembled LRO to the following specification: Brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.06 mm (0.002 inch) 17. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement exceeds the specification, bring the LRO to within specifications. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout (LRO) Correction. 18. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts. Brake Rotor Surface and Wear Inspection Brake Rotor Surface and Wear Inspection Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. 1. If the inboard friction surface of the brake rotor is not accessible, reposition and support the caliper with the brake pads. 2. Clean the friction surfaces of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. 3. Inspect the friction surfaces of the brake rotor for the following braking surface conditions: ^ Heavy rust and/or pitting Light surface rust can be removed with an abrasive disc. Heavy surface rust and/or pitting must be removed by refinishing the rotor. ^ Cracks and/or heat spots ^ Excessive blueing discoloration 4. If the friction surfaces of the brake rotor exhibit one or more of the braking surface conditions listed, the rotor requires refinishing or replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 10698 5. Using a micrometer calibrated in thousandths-of-a-millimeter, or ten-thousandths-of-an-inch, measure and record the scoring depth of any grooves present on the rotor friction surfaces. 6. Compare the groove scoring depth recorded to the following specification: Brake rotor maximum allowable scoring: 1.50 mm (0.059 inch) 7. If the brake rotor scoring depth exceeds the specification, or if an excessive amount of scoring is present, the rotor requires refinishing or replacement. Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. 1. If the inboard friction surface of the brake rotor is not accessible, reposition and support the caliper with the brake pads. 2. Clean the friction surfaces of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. 3. Using a micrometer calibrated in thousandths-of-a-millimeter, or ten-thousandths-of-an-inch, measure and record the thickness of the brake rotor at 4 or more points, evenly spaced around the rotor. Ensure that the measurements are only taken within the friction surfaces and that the micrometer is positioned the same distance from the outer edge of the rotor, about 13 mm (1/2 inch), for each measurement. 4. Compare the lowest thickness measurement recorded to the following specification: Brake rotor minimum allowable thickness after refinishing: 24.5 mm (0.960 inch) 5. If the lowest thickness measurement of the brake rotor is above the minimum allowable thickness after refinishing specification, the rotor may be able to be refinished, depending upon surface and wear conditions which may be present. 6. If the lowest thickness measurement of the brake rotor is at or below the minimum allowable thickness after refinishing specification, the rotor may not be refinished. 7. If the lowest thickness measurement of the brake rotor is at or below the discard thickness specification, the rotor requires replacement. Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Important: Any disc brake rotor that exhibits thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level must be refinished or replaced. Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. 1. If the inboard friction surface of the brake rotor is not accessible, reposition and support the caliper with the brake pads. 2. Clean the friction surfaces of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 10699 3. Using a micrometer calibrated in thousandths-of-a-millimeter, or ten-thousandths-of-an-inch, measure and record the thickness of the brake rotor at four or more points, evenly spaced around the rotor. Ensure that the measurements are only taken within the friction surfaces and that the micrometer is positioned the same distance from the outer edge of the rotor, about 13 mm (1/2 inch), for each measurement. 4. Calculate the difference between the highest and lowest thickness measurements recorded to obtain the amount of thickness variation. 5. Compare the thickness variation measurement to the following specification: Brake rotor maximum allowable thickness variation: 0.009 mm (0.000 inch) 6. Important: Whenever a brake rotor is refinished or replaced, the assembled lateral runout (LRO) of the rotor must be measured to ensure optimum performance of the disc brakes. If the brake rotor thickness variation measurement exceeds the specification, the rotor requires refinishing or replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Rotor Replacement Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Brake Rotor Replacement Brake Rotor Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Install a C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper, with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and the outboard disc brake pad. 4. Tighten the C-clamp until the caliper piston is compressed into the caliper bore enough to allow the caliper to slide past the brake rotor. 5. Remove the C-clamp. 6. Notice: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. Important: Do NOT disconnect the hydraulic brake flexible hose from the caliper. Remove the brake caliper and the caliper mounting bracket as an assembly from the steering knuckle and support the assembly with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent. Ensure that there is no tension on the hydraulic brake flexible hose. 7. Matchmark the position of the brake rotor to the wheel studs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Rotor Replacement > Page 10702 8. Remove the brake rotor. Installation Procedure 1. Important: Whenever the brake rotor has been separated from the hub/axle flange, any rust or contaminants should be cleaned from the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor mating surfaces. Failure to do this may result in excessive assembled lateral runout (LRO) of the brake rotor, which could lead to brake pulsation. Using the J 42450-A , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the hub/axle flange. 2. Using the J 41013 , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface and mounting surface of the brake rotor. 3. Inspect the mating surfaces of the hub/axle flange and the rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Install the brake rotor to the hub/axle flange. Use the matchmark made prior to removal for proper orientation to the flange. 5. If the brake rotor was removed and installed as part of a brake system repair, measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor to ensure optimum performance of the disc brakes. 6. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement exceeds the specification, bring the LRO to within specifications. 7. Remove the support, and install the brake caliper and the brake caliper bracket as an assembly to the steering knuckle. 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. If the brake rotor was refinished or replaced, or if new brake pads were installed, burnish the pads and rotors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Rotor Replacement > Page 10703 Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Burnishing Pads and Rotors Burnishing Pads and Rotors Caution: Road test a vehicle under safe conditions and while obeying all traffic laws. Do not attempt any maneuvers that could jeopardize vehicle control. Failure to adhere to these precautions could lead to serious personal injury and vehicle damage. Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Burnishing the brake pads and brake rotors is necessary in order to ensure that the braking surfaces are properly prepared after service has been performed on the disc brake system. This procedure should be performed whenever the disc brake rotors have been refinished or replaced, and/or whenever the disc brake pads have been replaced. 1. Select a smooth road with little or no traffic. 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 48 km/h (30 mph). Important: Use care to avoid overheating the brakes while performing this step. 3. Using moderate to firm pressure, apply the brakes to bring the vehicle to a stop. Do not allow the brakes to lock. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until approximately 20 stops have been completed. Allow sufficient cooling periods between stops in order to properly burnish the brake pads and rotors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Rotor Replacement > Page 10704 Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Brake Rotor Refinishing Brake Rotor Refinishing ^ Tools Required J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Important: ^ The disc brake rotors do not require refinishing as part of routine brake system service. New disc brake rotors do not require refinishing.Do not refinish disc brake rotors in an attempt to correct the following conditions: ^ Brake system noise - squeal, growl, groan ^ Uneven and/or premature disc brake pad wear ^ Superficial or cosmetic corrosion/rust of the disc brake rotor friction surface ^ Scoring of the disc brake rotor friction surface less than the maximum allowable specification ^ Before refinishing a brake rotor, the rotor MUST first be checked for adequate thickness to allow the rotor to be refinished and remain above the minimum allowable thickness after refinish specification. Disc brake rotors should only be refinished if they have adequate thickness to be refinished and if one or more of the following conditions exist: ^ Thickness variation in excess of the maximum allowable specification ^ Excessive corrosion/rust and/or pitting ^ Cracks and/or heat spots ^ Excessive blueing discoloration ^ Scoring of the disc brake rotor surface in excess of the maximum allowable specification ^ Disc brake rotors may need to be refinished as part of the process for correcting brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) that exceeds the maximum allowable specification. 1. Important: Whenever the brake rotor has been separated from the hub/axle flange, clean any rust or contaminants from the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor mating surfaces. Failure to do this may result in increased assembled lateral runout (LRO) of the brake rotor, which could lead to brake pulsation. Using the J 42450-A , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the hub/axle flange. 2. Using the J 41013 , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface and mounting surface of the brake rotor. 3. Inspect the mating surfaces of the hub/axle flange and the rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Mount the brake rotor to the brake lathe according to the lathe manufacturer's instructions, ensuring that all mounting attachments and adapters are clean and free of debris. 5. Ensure that any vibration dampening attachments are securely in place. 6. With the brake lathe running, slowly bring in the cutting tools until they just contact the brake rotor friction surfaces. 7. Observe the witness mark on the brake rotor. If the witness mark extends approximately three-quarters or more of the way around the brake rotor friction surface on each side, the brake rotor is properly mounted to the lathe. 8. If the witness mark does not extend three-quarters or more of the way around the brake rotor, re-mount the rotor to the lathe. 9. Following the brake lathe manufacturer's instructions, refinish the brake rotor. 10. After each successive cut, inspect the brake rotor thickness. 11. If at any time the brake rotor exceeds the minimum allowable thickness after refinish specification, the brake rotor must be replaced. 12. After refinishing the brake rotor, use the following procedure in order to obtain the desired non-directional finish: 1. Follow the brake lathe manufacturer's recommended speed setting for applying a non-directional finish 2. Using moderate pressure, apply the non-directional finish: ^ If the lathe is equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with 120 grit aluminum oxide sandpaper ^ If the lathe is not equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with a sanding block and 150 grit aluminum oxide sandpaper 3. After applying a non-directional finish, clean each friction surface of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner 13. Remove the brake rotor from the brake lathe. 14. Measure the assembled lateral runout (LRO) of the brake rotor to ensure optimum performance of the disc brakes. 15. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement exceeds the specification, bring the LRO to within specifications. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair Backing Plate: Service and Repair Drum Brake Backing Plate Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Do not pry against the splash shield or backing plate in attempt to free the drum. This will bend the splash shield or backing plate. A bent backing plate may cause brake chatter and/or pulsation. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Remove the brake drum. 4. Remove the brake shoes. 5. Remove the park brake cable from the park brake actuator lever. 6. Depress the retaining fingers on the park brake cable (1) and remove the park brake cable from the backing plate. 7. Remove the wheel cylinder. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10709 8. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 9. Remove the backing plate. Installation Procedure 1. Install the backing plate. 2. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 3. Install the wheel cylinder. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10710 4. Install the park brake cable (1) to the backing plate. 5. Install the park brake cable to the park brake actuator (5). 6. Install the brake shoes. 7. Adjust the brake shoes. 8. Adjust the park brake cable. 9. Install the brake drum. 10. Install the tire and wheel. 11. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Rotor/Drum Refinishing Labor Operations Brake Drum: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rotor/Drum Refinishing Labor Operations Bulletin No.: 06-05-22-007 Date: November 30, 2006 WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Subject: Brake Rotor/Drum Refinishing Labor Operations Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X (Canada Only) The purpose of this bulletin is to advise dealership personnel of labor operation changes relating to brake repairs. Existing brake rotor and drum labor operations have been revised to remove the refinishing times and new labor operations have been established for refinishing brake rotors or drums. The changes will become effective with the release of the December 2006 Labor Time Guide. The following changes: Applies to all 2005-2007 vehicles, unless 2005 was the last year of production for that particular model. May apply to 2004 and prior models years if the vehicle was produced after 2005 - e.g. TrailBlazer, Envoy, etc. Where the new labor operations for refinishing rotors or drums do not apply, the existing labor operations will still contain time for refinishing. Always refer to the Labor Time Guide for the appropriate labor operations and time for the vehicle being repaired. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Rotor/Drum Refinishing Labor Operations > Page 10715 The list shown is of labor operations for brake service. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10716 Brake Drum: Specifications Brake Drum Diameter - New ............................................................................................................... ................................................. 250.0 mm (9.84 inch) Brake Drum Discard Diameter ............................................................................................................................................................. 251.5 mm (9.90 inch) Brake Drum Maximum Allowable Radial Runout ................................................................................................................................ 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) Brake Drum Maximum Allowable Scoring .............................................................................................................................................. 1.5 mm (0.059 inch Brake Drum Maximum Diameter After Refinish .................................................................................................................................. 251.5 mm (9.90 inch) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Drum Diameter Measurement Brake Drum: Testing and Inspection Brake Drum Diameter Measurement Brake Drum Diameter Measurement 1. Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Clean the brake shoe lining contact surface of the brake drum with denatured alcohol or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. 2. Using a brake drum micrometer calibrated in thousandths of an inch, measure and record the largest diameter of the brake drum at 4 or more points, equally spaced around the drum.Ensure the measurements are only taken within the brake shoe lining contact area. The micrometer must be positioned the same distance from the outside edge of the drum for each measurement. 3. Compare the largest diameter measurement recorded to the following specifications: ^ Brake drum maximum allowable diameter after refinish: 251.5 mm (9.90 inch) ^ Brake drum discard diameter: 251.5 mm (9.90 inch) 4. If the largest diameter measurement of the brake drum is less than the maximum allowable inside diameter after refinishing specification, the drum may be refinished, depending upon surface and wear conditions. 5. If the largest diameter measurement of the brake drum is equal to the maximum allowable diameter after refinishing specification, the drum may not be refinished. 6. If the largest diameter measurement of the brake drum is greater than the discard diameter specification, the drum requires replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Drum Diameter Measurement > Page 10719 Brake Drum: Testing and Inspection Brake Drum Surface and Wear Inspection Brake Drum Surface and Wear Inspection ^ Tools Required J 8001 Dial Indicator, or equivalent Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. 1. With the brake drum removed, clean the brake shoe lining contact surface of the brake drum with denatured alcohol or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. 2. Inspect the braking surface of the brake drum for the following Braking Surface Conditions: ^ Heavy rust and/or pitting Light surface rust can be removed with an abrasive disc; heavy surface rust and/or pitting must be removed by refinishing the drum. ^ Cracks and/or heat spots ^ Excessive blueing discoloration ^ Missing balance weights 3. If the braking surface of the brake drum exhibits one or more of the Braking Surface Conditions listed, the drum requires refinishing or replacement. 4. Using a brake drum micrometer calibrated in thousandths-of-an-inch, measure and record any grooves present on the drum braking surface.Ensure that the measurements are only taken within the brake shoe lining contact area. 5. Compare the groove, or scoring depth recorded to the following specification: Brake drum maximum allowable scoring: 1.5 mm (0.059 inch) 6. If the brake drum scoring depth exceeds the specification, or if an excessive amount of scoring is present, the drum requires refinishing or replacement. 7. Mount the brake drum on a brake lathe. 8. Mount a dial indicator, J 8001 or equivalent, and position the indicator button so it contacts the braking surface of the brake drum at a 90 degree angle, approximately 19 mm (0.75 inch) from the outer edge of the drum. 9. Measure and record the radial runout of the brake drum. 1. Rotate the drum until the lowest reading is displayed on the indicator dial, then zero the dial. 2. Rotate the drum until the highest reading is displayed on the dial. 10. Compare the radial runout of the brake drum to the following specification: Brake drum maximum allowable radial runout: 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) 11. If the brake drum radial runout exceeds the specification, the drum requires refinishing or replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Drum Refinishing Brake Drum: Service and Repair Brake Drum Refinishing Brake Drum Refinishing ^ Tools Required J 41013 Rotor/Drum Flange Resurfacing Kit - J 42450-A Hub Cleaning Kit Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. 1. The brake drums do not require refinishing as part of routine brake system service. Do not refinish brake drums in an attempt to correct the following conditions: ^ Brake system noise (squeal, growl, groan) ^ Uneven and/or premature brake lining wear ^ Superficial or cosmetic corrosion/rust of the brake drum surface ^ Scoring of the brake drum surface (less than the maximum allowable specification) 2. Brake drums should only be refinished if the following conditions exist: ^ Excessive corrosion/rust and/or pitting ^ Cracks and/or heat spots ^ Excessive blueing discoloration ^ Scoring of the brake drum surface (in excess of the maximum allowable specification) ^ Radial runout in excess of the maximum allowable specification 3. Inspect each of the brake drums and determine if the brake drums can be refinished and remain within the maximum allowable diameter after refinish specification: 1. With the tire and wheel assemblies removed, measure the diameter of each of the brake drums. 2. Inspect each of the brake drums for excessive surface wear and/or radial runout. 4. If the brake drums can be refinished, proceed with the rotor refinishing procedure. 5. If necessary, use the J 41013 in order to thoroughly clean any corrosion/rust from the brake drum flange. 6. Mount the brake drum to the brake lathe according to the lathe manufacturer's instructions. 7. Ensure that any vibration dampening attachments are securely in place. 8. With the brake lathe running, slowly bring in the cutting tool until it just contacts the brake drum friction surface. 9. Observe the witness mark on the brake drum. If the witness mark extends approximately three-quarters or more of the way around the brake drum surface, the brake drum is properly mounted to the lathe. 10. If the witness mark does not extend three-quarters or more of the way around the brake drum, re-mount the brake drum to the lathe. 11. Following the brake lathe manufacturer's instructions, refinish the brake drum. 12. After each successive cut, inspect the brake drum diameter. 13. If at any time the brake drum exceeds the maximum allowable diameter after refinish specification, the brake drum must be replaced. 14. After refinishing the brake drum, use the following procedure in order to obtain the desired non-directional finish: 0. Follow the brake lathe manufacturer's recommended speed setting for applying a non-directional finish 1. Using moderate pressure, apply the non-directional finish: ^ If the lathe is equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with 120 grit aluminum oxide sandpaper. ^ If the lathe is not equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with a sanding block and 150 grit aluminum oxide sandpaper. 2. After applying a non-directional finish, clean each friction surface of the brake drum with denatured alcohol or an equivalent brake cleaner 15. Remove the brake drum from the brake lathe. Important: Failure to clean the corrosion from the wheel bearing flange may result in increased lateral runout of the brake drum and brake system pulsation. 16. If necessary, use the J 42450-A in order to thoroughly clean any corrosion from the wheel bearing flange. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Drum Refinishing > Page 10722 Brake Drum: Service and Repair Brake Drum Replacement Brake Drum Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Check to ensure that the park brake is fully released. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Remove the brake drum. 5. If the brake drum is to be reinstalled to the vehicle, use the J 41013 to clean any rust or corrosion from the hub/flange mating surface of the brake drum. If necessary, carefully remove any corrosion from the edge of the drum braking surface in order to ease installation. 6. Use the J 42450-A to clean the wheel hub flange. Installation Procedure 1. Adjust the drum brakes. 2. Install the brake drum. 3. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Apply the brakes approximately three times in order to seat and center the brake shoes within the drum. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications Brake Shoe: Specifications Brake Shoe Lining Minimum Thickness ................................................................................................................................................... 1.0 mm (0.04 inch) Brake Shoe Lining Thickness - New ........................................................................................................................................................ 6.0 mm (0.24 inch) Brake Shoe Lining-to-Drum Clearance ................................................................................................................................................. 0.50 mm (0.020 inch) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10726 Brake Shoe: Adjustments Drum Brake Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 21177-A Drum-to-Brake Shoe Clearance Gage Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the rear wheels and tires. 3. Relieve cable tension from the park brake system at the equalizer. There should be no tension on the park brake cables, so that the brake shoes are positioned only by the adjuster strut. 4. Remove the rear drums. 5. Set the J 21177-A so that the J 21177-A contacts the inside diameter of the drum at the widest point. 6. Position the J 21177-A over the shoes at the widest point. 7. Turn the adjuster nut until the shoes just contact the J 21177-A. 8. Repeat steps 2-7 for the other rear brake assembly. 9. Install the rear drums. 10. Install the rear wheels and tires. 11. Adjust the park brake cable system. 12. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10727 Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Brake Shoe Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Caution: Keep fingers away from rear brake shoe springs to prevent fingers from being pinched between spring and shoe web or spring and backing plate. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the brake drum. 3. Notice: Do not over stretch the adjuster spring. Damage can occur if the spring is over stretched. Disengage the adjuster spring hook end from the tab on the adjuster actuator (1). 4. Remove the straight end of the adjuster spring from the brake shoe. 5. Remove the adjuster actuator from the brake shoe. 6. Remove the return spring (7) from the brake shoes. 7. Remove the park brake cable (6) from the park brake actuator lever (5). 8. Remove the brake shoe hold-down springs and retainers (4) from the brake shoes. 9. Remove the adjuster from the brake shoes and the park brake actuator lever (2). 10. Remove the horseshoe clip retaining the park brake actuator lever to the brake shoe. 11. Remove the park brake actuator lever and wave washer from the brake shoe. 12. Clean all of the drum brake system components with denatured alcohol. 13. Inspect all of the drum brake system components. 14. Replace drum brake system components as necessary. 15. Inspect the wheel cylinder for the following conditions: ^ Brake fluid leakage ^ Worn or damaged dust boots 16. Replace damaged or leaking wheel cylinders as necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Apply a thin, light coat of high temperature, silicone brake lubricant to the following areas: ^ The brake shoe contact points on the backing plate ^ The adjuster screw threads ^ The inside diameter of the adjuster socket Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10728 2. Install the park brake actuator lever (5) to the lever pivot pin. 3. Install the horseshoe clip to the park brake actuator lever pivot pin. 4. Install the brake shoes to the brake backing plate. 5. Install the brake shoe hold-down pins, springs and retainers (4) to the brake shoes. 6. Install the park brake cable (6) to the park brake actuator lever. 7. Important: Ensure that the adjuster (2) engages the brake shoe (4) and the park brake actuator (3) properly. Install the adjuster screw to the brake shoe and the park brake actuator. 8. Apply a thin, light coat of high temperature, silicone brake lubricant to the adjuster actuator/brake shoe interface. 9. Install the adjuster actuator (1) to the brake shoe. 10. Notice: Do not over stretch the adjuster spring. Damage can occur if the spring is over stretched. Install the straight end of the adjuster spring (3) to the brake shoe. 11. Install the adjuster spring hook end to the tab on the adjuster actuator (1). 12. Install the return spring (7) to the brake shoes. 13. Important: Ensure that the adjuster operates properly. Move the park brake actuator lever (5) in order to spread the brake shoes apart. The adjuster actuator lever should move downward, then upward as the park brake actuator lever is released, forcing the adjuster wheel to rotate. If the adjuster does not operate properly, remove then reinstall the adjuster. 14. Adjust the brake shoes. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10729 15. Adjust the park brake cable. 16. Install the brake drum. 17. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Wheel Cylinder Replacement ^ Tools Required J 38400 Brake Shoe Spanner and Spring Remover Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Clean all dirt and foreign material from the wheel cylinder brake pipe fitting and the bleeder valve. 4. Remove the brake drum. 5. Remove the brake pipe nut. 6. Install a cap over the end of the brake pipe in order to prevent brake fluid loss and/or brake fluid contamination. 7. Remove the wheel cylinder bolts (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10733 8. Use the J 38400 in order to spread the brake shoes apart (1). 9. Remove the wheel cylinder. 10. Clean the old sealant from the backing plate where the wheel cylinder was installed. Clean the sealant from the wheel cylinder if you are reusing the wheel cylinder. Installation Procedure 1. Use the J 38400 in order to spread the brake shoes apart (1). 2. Install the wheel cylinder. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel cylinder bolts (2). ^ Tighten the bolts to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the cap from the brake pipe and install the brake pipe to the wheel cylinder. ^ Tighten the nut to 19 Nm (14 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the brake drum. . 6. Bleed the hydraulic brake system at the wheel cylinder. 7. Install the tire and wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10734 8. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure ABS Automated Bleed Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Before performing the antilock brake system (ABS) Automated Bleed Procedure, first perform a manual or pressure bleed of the base brake system. The automated bleed procedure is recommended when one of the following conditions exist: ^ Base brake system bleeding does not achieve the desired pedal height or feel ^ Extreme loss of brake fluid has occurred ^ Air ingestion is suspected in the secondary circuits of the brake modulator assembly The ABS Automated Bleed Procedure uses a scan tool to cycle the system solenoid valves and run the pump in order to purge any air from the secondary circuits. These circuits are normally closed off, and are only opened during system initialization at vehicle start up and during ABS operation. The automated bleed procedure opens these secondary circuits and allows any air trapped in these circuits to flow out toward the brake corners. Automated Bleed Procedure 1. Notice: The Auto Bleed Procedure may be terminated at any time during the process by pressing the EXIT button. No further Scan Tool prompts pertaining to the Auto Bleed procedure will be given. After exiting the bleed procedure, relieve bleed pressure and disconnect bleed equipment per manufacturers instructions. Failure to properly relieve pressure may result in spilled brake fluid causing damage to components and painted surfaces. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove all 4 tire and wheel assemblies. 3. Inspect the brake system for leaks and visual damage. Repair or replace components as needed. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Inspect the battery state of charge. 6. Install a scan tool. 7. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 8. With the scan tool, establish communications with the ABS system. Select Special Functions. Select Automated Bleed from the Special Functions menu. 9. Raise and support the vehicle. 10. Following the directions given on the scan tool, pressure bleed the base brake system. 11. Follow the scan tool directions until the desired brake pedal height is achieved. 12. If the bleed procedure is aborted, a malfunction exists. Perform the following steps before resuming the bleed procedure: ^ If a DTC is detected, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle, and diagnose the appropriate DTC. ^ If the brake pedal feels spongy, perform the conventional brake bleed procedure again. 13. When the desired pedal height is achieved, press the brake pedal to inspect for firmness. 14. Lower the vehicle. 15. Remove the scan tool. 16. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. 17. Inspect the brake fluid level. 18. Road test the vehicle while inspecting that the pedal remains high and firm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 10740 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding Manual Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to catch brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, or if you have disconnected the brake pipes from the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, you must perform the following steps to bleed air at the ports of the hydraulic component: 1. If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the brake pipes installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly, loosen and separate one of the brake pipes from the port of the component. For the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, perform these steps in the sequence of system flow; begin with the fluid feed pipes from the master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the component. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the component and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the component. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the component. 9. With the brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly - after all air has been purged from the first port of the component that was bled - loosen and separate the next brake pipe from the component, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8, until each of the ports on the component has been bled. 10. After completing the final component port bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the brake pipe-to-component fittings are properly tightened. 4. Ensure the brake master cylinder reservoir remains at least half-full during this bleeding procedure. Add fluid as needed to maintain the proper level.Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 6. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 7. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 8. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. 9. Tighten the bleeder valve, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 10. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 8-10 until all air is purged from the same wheel hydraulic circuit. 11. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 12. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 13. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 14. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 15. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit - install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 17. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 18. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. 19. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleeding procedure again. If the brake pedal still feels spongy after repeating the bleeding procedure, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. 2. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system in order to purge any air that may still be trapped in the system. 20. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. 21. Important: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 10741 Pressure Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) ^ Tools Required J 29532 Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent - J 44894-A Brake Pressure Bleeder Adapter Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to catch brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal becomes firm, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, or if you have disconnected the brake pipes from the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, you must perform the following steps to bleed air at the ports of the hydraulic component: 1. If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the brake pipes installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly, loosen and separate one of the brake pipes from the port of the component. For the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, perform these steps in the sequence of system flow; begin with the fluid feed pipes from the master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the component. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the component and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the component. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the component. 9. With the brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly - after all air has been purged from the first port of the component that was bled - loosen and separate the next brake pipe from the component, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8, until each of the ports on the component has been bled. 10. After completing the final component port bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the brake pipe-to-component fittings are properly tightened. 4. Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install the J 44894-A to the brake master cylinder reservoir. 6. Connect the J 29532 , or equivalent, to the J 44894-A. 7. Charge the J 29532 , or equivalent, air tank to 175-205 kPa (25-30 psi). 8. Open the J 29532 , or equivalent, fluid tank valve to allow pressurized brake fluid to enter the brake system. 9. Wait approximately 30 seconds, then inspect the entire hydraulic brake system in order to ensure that there are no existing external brake fluid leaks. Any brake fluid leaks identified require repair prior to completing this procedure. 10. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 11. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 12. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. Allow fluid to flow until air bubbles stop flowing from the bleeder, then tighten the bleeder valve. 13. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 14. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 15. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 17. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit - install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 18. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 19. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 20. Close the J 29532 , or equivalent, fluid tank valve, then disconnect the J 29532 , or equivalent, from the J 44894-A. 21. Remove the J 44894-A from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 22. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. 23. If the brake pedal feels spongy perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. 2. If equipped with Antilock Brakes, using a scan tool, perform the antilock brake system automated bleeding procedure to remove any air that may have been trapped in the BPMV. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 10742 24. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. 25. Important: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 10743 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Secure the mounting flange of the brake master cylinder in a bench vise so that the rear of the primary piston is accessible. 2. Remove the cap from the hose nipple on the master cylinder reservoir. 3. Install suitable fittings to the master cylinder ports that match the type of flare seat required and also provide for hose attachment. 4. Install transparent hoses to the fittings, then route the hoses into the master cylinder reservoir. 5. Ensure that the ends of the transparent hoses running into the reservoir are fully submerged in the brake fluid. 6. Using a smooth, round-ended tool, depress and release the primary piston as far as it will travel, a depth of about 25 mm (1 inch), several times. Observe the flow of fluid coming from the ports. As air is bled from the primary and secondary pistons, the effort required to depress the primary piston will increase and the amount of travel will decrease. 7. Continue to depress and release the primary piston until fluid flows freely from the ports with no evidence of air bubbles. 8. Remove the transparent hoses from the reservoir. 9. Install the cap to the hose nipple on the reservoir, to prevent fluid loss and contamination. 10. Remove the fittings with the transparent hoses from the master cylinder ports. Wrap the master cylinder with a clean shop cloth to prevent brake fluid spills. 11. Remove the master cylinder from the vise. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Caliper: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads Brake Caliper: Customer Interest Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads Bulletin No.: 05-05-23-005A Date: January 23, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise from Front of Vehicle at Slow Speeds on Rough Surfaces When Brake Pedal Is Not Applied (Install New Caliper Pin Bushing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2002-2006 Saturn VUE Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-05-23-005 (Section 05 - Brakes). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise coming from the front of the vehicle while driving at slow speeds over rough road surfaces when the brake pedal is not applied. Cause This condition may be caused by the interface of the front brake caliper guide pins and the front brake caliper bracket. Correction Verify the customer concern. To isolate the brake caliper guide pins as a potential source of the noise, apply the brakes when the noise is apparent. If the noise stops when the brakes are applied and comes back when the brakes are released, then the brake caliper guide pin bushings are the most likely source of the concern. If the brake caliper guide pin bushings have been identified as the source of the noise, then replace the front brake caliper guide pin bushings on the lower pin on the brakes on both sides of the vehicle. Refer to the service procedure in this bulletin. Service Procedure Caution: Avoid taking the following actions when you service wheel brake parts: ^ Do not grind brake linings. ^ Do not sand brake linings. ^ Do not clean wheel brake parts with a dry brush or with compressed air. Some models or aftermarket brake parts may contain asbestos fibers which can become airborne in dust. Breathing dust with asbestos fibers may cause serious bodily harm. Use a water-dampened cloth in order to remove any dust on brake parts. Equipment is available commercially in order to perform this washing function. These wet methods prevent fibers from becoming airborne. Caution: Brake fluid may irritate eyes and skin. In case of contact, take the following actions: ^ Eye contact--rinse thoroughly with water. ^ Skin contact--wash with soap and water. ^ If ingested--consult a physician immediately. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Caliper: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 10752 Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Install and firmly hand tighten 2 wheel nuts to opposite wheel studs in order to retain the rotor to the hub. 4. Install a large C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and against the outboard brake pad. 5. Tighten the C-clamp evenly until the caliper piston is compressed into the caliper bore enough to allow the caliper to slide past the brake rotor. 6. Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 7. Remove the brake caliper lower guide pin bolt. Note: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 8. Without disconnecting the hydraulic brake flexible hose, pivot the caliper upward and secure the caliper with heavy mechanics wire, or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Caliper: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 10753 9. Remove the lower caliper pin taking care not to damage the pin boot. 10. Remove the rubber bushing from the caliper pin. 11. Clean the pin and install a new bushing. 12. Lubricate the caliper pin and bushing assembly with a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant and install in the caliper bracket. 13. Remove the support and rotate the brake caliper into position over the disc brake pads and to the caliper mounting bracket. 14. Repeat Steps 1-13 on opposite side brake assembly. Installation Procedure Note: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners must be the correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring replacement or fasteners requiring the use of thread locking compound or sealant are identified in the service procedure. Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on fasteners or fastener joint surfaces unless specified. These coatings affect fastener torque and joint clamping force and may damage the fastener. Use the correct tightening sequence and specifications when installing fasteners in order to avoid damage to parts and systems. 1. Install the lower brake caliper guide pin bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 44 N.m (32 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Caliper: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 10754 2. Remove the wheel nuts retaining the brake rotor to the hub. 3. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Repeat Steps 1-3 on opposite side brake assembly. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 7. Slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance again until a firm brake pedal apply is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Caliper: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads Brake Caliper: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads Bulletin No.: 05-05-23-005A Date: January 23, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise from Front of Vehicle at Slow Speeds on Rough Surfaces When Brake Pedal Is Not Applied (Install New Caliper Pin Bushing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2002-2006 Saturn VUE Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-05-23-005 (Section 05 - Brakes). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise coming from the front of the vehicle while driving at slow speeds over rough road surfaces when the brake pedal is not applied. Cause This condition may be caused by the interface of the front brake caliper guide pins and the front brake caliper bracket. Correction Verify the customer concern. To isolate the brake caliper guide pins as a potential source of the noise, apply the brakes when the noise is apparent. If the noise stops when the brakes are applied and comes back when the brakes are released, then the brake caliper guide pin bushings are the most likely source of the concern. If the brake caliper guide pin bushings have been identified as the source of the noise, then replace the front brake caliper guide pin bushings on the lower pin on the brakes on both sides of the vehicle. Refer to the service procedure in this bulletin. Service Procedure Caution: Avoid taking the following actions when you service wheel brake parts: ^ Do not grind brake linings. ^ Do not sand brake linings. ^ Do not clean wheel brake parts with a dry brush or with compressed air. Some models or aftermarket brake parts may contain asbestos fibers which can become airborne in dust. Breathing dust with asbestos fibers may cause serious bodily harm. Use a water-dampened cloth in order to remove any dust on brake parts. Equipment is available commercially in order to perform this washing function. These wet methods prevent fibers from becoming airborne. Caution: Brake fluid may irritate eyes and skin. In case of contact, take the following actions: ^ Eye contact--rinse thoroughly with water. ^ Skin contact--wash with soap and water. ^ If ingested--consult a physician immediately. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Caliper: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 10760 Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Install and firmly hand tighten 2 wheel nuts to opposite wheel studs in order to retain the rotor to the hub. 4. Install a large C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and against the outboard brake pad. 5. Tighten the C-clamp evenly until the caliper piston is compressed into the caliper bore enough to allow the caliper to slide past the brake rotor. 6. Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 7. Remove the brake caliper lower guide pin bolt. Note: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 8. Without disconnecting the hydraulic brake flexible hose, pivot the caliper upward and secure the caliper with heavy mechanics wire, or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Caliper: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 10761 9. Remove the lower caliper pin taking care not to damage the pin boot. 10. Remove the rubber bushing from the caliper pin. 11. Clean the pin and install a new bushing. 12. Lubricate the caliper pin and bushing assembly with a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant and install in the caliper bracket. 13. Remove the support and rotate the brake caliper into position over the disc brake pads and to the caliper mounting bracket. 14. Repeat Steps 1-13 on opposite side brake assembly. Installation Procedure Note: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners must be the correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring replacement or fasteners requiring the use of thread locking compound or sealant are identified in the service procedure. Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on fasteners or fastener joint surfaces unless specified. These coatings affect fastener torque and joint clamping force and may damage the fastener. Use the correct tightening sequence and specifications when installing fasteners in order to avoid damage to parts and systems. 1. Install the lower brake caliper guide pin bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 44 N.m (32 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Caliper: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 10762 2. Remove the wheel nuts retaining the brake rotor to the hub. 3. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Repeat Steps 1-3 on opposite side brake assembly. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 7. Slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance again until a firm brake pedal apply is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10763 Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Brake Caliper Inspection 1. Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Inspect the brake caliper housing (1) for cracks, excess wear, and/or damage. If any of these conditions are present, the brake caliper requires replacement. 2. Inspect the caliper piston dust boot seal (2) for cracks, tears, cuts, deterioration and/or improper seating in the caliper body. If any of these conditions are present, the brake caliper requires overhaul or replacement. 3. Inspect for brake fluid leakage around the caliper piston dust boot seal (2) and on the disc brake pads. If there is any evidence of brake fluid leakage, the brake caliper requires overhaul or replacement. 4. Inspect for smooth and complete travel of the caliper piston, or pistons, into the caliper bore, or bores: The movement of a caliper piston into a caliper bore should be smooth and even. If a caliper piston is frozen or difficult to bottom, the caliper requires overhaul or replacement. ^ For single piston caliper applications, insert a discarded inner brake pad (2) or block of wood in front of the piston. Using a large C-clamp (1) installed over the body of the caliper (3) and against the brake pad or block of wood, slowly bottom the piston in the bore. ^ For dual piston caliper applications, insert a discarded inner brake pad (2) or block of wood in front of the pistons. Using 2 large C-clamps (1) installed over the body of the caliper (3) and against the brake pad or block of wood, slowly bottom the pistons evenly into the bores. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure Caution: Do not move the vehicle until a firm brake pedal is obtained. Failure to obtain a firm pedal before moving vehicle may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the brake caliper from the brake caliper bracket. 2. Notice: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. Support the brake caliper (1) with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent; do NOT disconnect the hydraulic brake flexible hose from the caliper. 3. Remove the brake pads (2) from the brake caliper bracket (3). 4. Remove the brake pad retainers (1) from the brake caliper bracket (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement > Page 10766 5. Remove the brake caliper bracket bolts (2). 6. Remove the brake caliper bracket (1) from the knuckle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake caliper bracket (1) to the knuckle. 2. Important: If reusing the caliper bracket bolts, the threads of the caliper bracket bolts and the threads of the knuckle mounting holes must be thoroughly cleaned and free of debris prior to the application of threadlocker. Prepare the bolts and the threaded holes for assembly: 1. Thoroughly clean the residue from the bolt threads by using denatured alcohol or equivalent and allow to dry. 2. Thoroughly clean the residue from the threaded holes by using denatured alcohol or equivalent and allow to dry. 3. Apply threadlocker Saturn P/N 21005994, or equivalent to two-thirds of the threaded length of the lower caliper bracket bolts. 4. Allow the threadlocker to cure approximately 10 minutes before installation. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the 2 brake caliper bracket bolts (2). ^ Tighten the front brake caliper bracket bolts to 185 Nm (136 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the brake pad retainers (1) to the brake caliper bracket (3). 5. Install the brake pads (2) to the brake caliper bracket (3). 6. Install the brake caliper (1) to the front brake caliper bracket (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement > Page 10767 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Replacement Brake Caliper Replacement Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Inspect the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, no brake fluid needs to be removed from the reservoir before proceeding. 3. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, remove brake fluid to the midway point before proceeding. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Install and firmly hand tighten 2 wheel nuts to opposite wheel studs in order to retain the rotor to the hub. 7. Install a large C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and against the outer brake pad. 8. Tighten the C-clamp until the caliper piston is compressed into the caliper bore enough to allow the caliper to slide past the brake rotor. 9. Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 10. Remove the brake hose-to-caliper bolt from the brake caliper. 11. Remove the brake hose from the brake caliper. 12. Remove and discard the 2 copper brake hose gaskets. These gaskets may be stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 13. Cap or plug the opening in the brake caliper and the brake hose to prevent fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement > Page 10768 14. Remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts. 15. Remove the brake caliper from the caliper bracket. 16. Inspect the brake caliper guide pins for freedom of movement, and inspect the condition of the guide pin boots. Move the guide pins inboard and outboard within the bracket bores, without disengaging the slides from the boots, and observe for the following: ^ Restricted caliper guide pin movement ^ Looseness in the brake caliper mounting bracket ^ Seized or binding caliper guide pins ^ Split or torn boots 17. If any of the conditions listed are found, the brake caliper guide pins and/or boots require replacement. Installation Procedure 1. Apply a light, thin coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the caliper guide pins. 2. Install the guide pins to the brake caliper bracket. 3. Install the brake caliper to the brake caliper bracket. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the brake caliper guide pin bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 44 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement > Page 10769 5. Remove the caps or plugs from the brake caliper opening and the brake hose. 6. Important: Do not reuse the copper brake hose gaskets. Install NEW copper brake hose gaskets to the brake hose-to-caliper bolt and to the brake hose. 7. Install the brake hose and the brake hose-to-brake caliper bolt to the brake caliper. ^ Tighten the bolt to 44 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). 8. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 9. Remove the wheel nuts retaining the brake rotor to the wheel hub. 10. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 11. Lower the vehicle. 12. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal to approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 13. Slowly release the brake pedal. 14. Wait 15 seconds, then gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance again until a firm brake pedal apply is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Brake Fluid: Capacity Specifications Information not provided by manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 10774 Brake Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Component Locations Brake Warning System Components Brake Warning System Components 1 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 10779 LR Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10780 Brake Fluid Level Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Pipe Replacement Brake Pipe Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45405 Brake Pipe Flaring Kit Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Caution: Always use double walled steel brake pipe when replacing brake pipes. The use of any other pipe is not recommended and may cause brake system failure. Carefully route and retain replacement brake pipes. Always use the correct fasteners and the original location for replacement brake pipes. Failure to properly route and retain brake pipes may cause damage to the brake pipes and cause brake system failure. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Important: When servicing the brake pipes, note the following: ^ If sectioning the brake pipe, use replacement pipe of the same type and outside diameter. ^ Use fittings of the appropriate size and type. ^ Only create flares of the same type or design as originally equipped on the vehicle. 1. Inspect the area of brake pipe to be repaired or replaced. 2. Release the brake pipe to be replaced from the retainers, as required. 3. Select an appropriate location to section the brake pipe, if necessary. ^ Allow adequate clearance in order to maneuver the J 45405. ^ Avoid sectioning the brake pipe at bends or mounting points. 4. Using a string or wire, measure the length of the pipe to be replaced including all pipe bends. 5. Add to the measurement taken the appropriate additional length required for each flare to be created. ^ 6.35 mm (0.250 inch) for 4.76 mm (3/16 inch) diameter pipe ^ 9.50 mm (0.374 inch) for 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) diameter pipe Important: Ensure that the brake pipe end to be flared is cut at a square, 90 degree angle to the pipe length. 6. Using the pipe cutter included in the J 45405 , carefully cut the brake pipe squarely to the measured length. 7. Remove the sectioned brake pipe from the vehicle. 8. Select the appropriate size of brake pipe and tube nuts, as necessary. The brake pipe outside diameter determines brake pipe size. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 10785 9. Strip the nylon coating from the brake pipe end to be flared, if necessary. ^ Select the appropriate blade on the coating stripping tool included in the J 45405 , by unthreading the blade block from the stripping tool and installing the block with the desired blade facing the tool rollers. ^ 6.35 mm (0.250 inch) blade for 4.76 mm (3/16 inch) diameter pipe ^ 9.50 mm (0.374 inch) blade for 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) diameter pipe ^ Insert the brake pipe end to be flared into the stripping tool to the depth of the ledge on the tool rollers. ^ While holding the brake pipe firmly against the stripping tool roller ledges, rotate the thumbwheel of the tool until the blade contacts the brake pipe coated surface. Important: Do not gouge the metal surface of the brake pipe. ^ Rotate the stripping tool in a clockwise direction, ensuring that the brake pipe end remains against the tool roller ledges. ^ After each successive revolution of the stripping tool, carefully rotate the thumbwheel of the tool clockwise, in order to continue stripping the coating from the brake pipe until the metal pipe surface is exposed. ^ Loosen the thumbwheel of the tool and remove the brake pipe. Important: Ensure that all loose remnants of the nylon coating have been removed from the brake pipe. ^ Inspect the stripped end of the brake pipe to ensure that the proper amount of coating has been removed. ^ 6.35 mm (0.250 inch) for 4.76 mm (3/16 inch) diameter pipe ^ 9.50 mm (0.374 inch) for 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) diameter pipe 10. Chamfer the inside and outside diameter of the pipe with the de-burring tool included in the J 45405. 11. Install the tube nuts on the brake pipe, noting their orientation. 12. Clean the brake pipe and the J 45405 of lubricant, contaminants, and debris. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 10786 13. Loosen the die clamping screw of the J 45405. 14. Select the corresponding die set and install the die halves into the die cage with the full, flat face of one die facing the clamping screw, and the counterbores of both dies facing the forming ram. 15. Place the flat face of an unused die (1) against the die halves in the clamping cage and hold firmly against the counterbored face of the dies. 16. Insert the prepared end of the pipe to be flared through the back of the dies until the pipe is seated against the flat surface of the unused die (1). 17. Remove the unused die (1). 18. Ensure that the rear of both dies are seated firmly against the enclosed end of the die cage. 19. Firmly hand tighten the clamping screw (2) against the dies. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 10787 20. Select the appropriate forming mandrel and place into the forming ram. 21. Rotate the hydraulic fluid control valve clockwise to the closed position. 22. Rotate the body of the J 45405 until it bottoms against the die cage. 23. While guiding the forming mandrel into the exposed end of pipe to be flared, operate the lever of the J 45405 until the forming mandrel bottoms against the clamping dies. 24. Rotate the hydraulic fluid control valve counterclockwise to the open position to allow the hydraulic forming ram to retract. 25. Insert the finishing cone into the forming ram. 26. Rotate the hydraulic fluid control valve clockwise to the closed position. 27. Rotate the body of the J 45405 until it bottoms against the die cage. 28. While guiding the finishing cone into the exposed end of pipe to be flared, operate the lever of the J 45405 until the finishing cone bottoms against the dies. 29. Rotate the hydraulic fluid control valve counterclockwise to the open position to allow the hydraulic forming ram to retract. 30. Loosen the die clamping screw and remove the dies and pipe. 31. If necessary, lightly tap the dies until the die halves separate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 10788 32. Inspect the brake pipe flare for correct shape and diameter (a). ^ 6.92 mm (0.272 inch) 0.18 mm (0.007 inch) flare diameter for 4.76 mm (3/16 inch) diameter pipe ^ 8.92 mm (0.351 inch) 0.18 mm (0.007 inch) flare diameter for 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) diameter pipe 33. If necessary, using the removed section of brake pipe as a template, shape the new pipe with a suitable brake pipe bending tool. Important: When installing the pipe, maintain a clearance of 19 mm (3/4 inch) from all moving or vibrating components. 34. Install the pipe to the vehicle with the appropriate brake pipe unions, as required. 35. If previously released, secure the brake pipe to the retainers. 36. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 37. With the aid of an assistant, inspect the brake pipe flares for leaks by starting the engine and applying the brakes. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 10789 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Hose Replacement - Front Brake Hose Replacement - Front Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Release the wheel speed sensor wire harness retainers and harness from the front brake hose. 4. Clean all dirt and foreign material from the brake hose ends and the brake pipe fitting. 5. Using a backup wrench on the hose fitting, disconnect the brake pipe fitting from the brake hose. Cap or plug the brake pipe fitting end and the brake hose end to prevent fluid loss and contamination. 6. Release the retaining clip from the brake hose mounting bracket and the brake hose. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 10790 7. Remove the brake hose-to-caliper bolt from the brake caliper. 8. Remove the brake hose bracket retaining bolt. 9. Remove the brake hose from the brake caliper. 10. Remove and discard the copper brake hose gaskets. These gaskets may be stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 11. Cap or plug the opening in the brake caliper and the brake hose to prevent fluid loss and contamination. Installation Procedure 1. Remove the caps or plugs from the opening in the brake caliper and the brake hose. 2. Important: Install NEW copper brake hose gaskets. Assemble the NEW copper brake hose gaskets, and the brake hose bolt, to the brake hose. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the brake hose-to-brake caliper bolt to the brake caliper. ^ Tighten the bolt to 44 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the front brake hose bracket retaining bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 10791 5. Remove the caps or plugs from the brake pipe fitting end and the brake hose end. 6. Using a backup wrench on the hose fitting, connect the brake pipe fitting at the front brake hose. ^ Tighten the fitting to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the brake hose retaining clip to the brake hose and the brake hose mounting bracket. 8. Connect the wheel speed sensor wire harness and harness retainers to the front brake hose. 9. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 10. Ensure that the hose does not make contact with any part of the suspension. Check the hose in extreme right and extreme left turn conditions. If the hose makes contact, remove the hose and correct the condition. 11. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 12. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 10792 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Hose Replacement - Rear Brake Hose Replacement - Rear Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Clean all dirt and foreign material from the brake hose ends and brake pipe fittings. 4. Using a backup wrench on the hose fitting, disconnect the brake pipe fittings from the brake hose. Cap or plug the brake pipe fitting ends and the brake hose ends to prevent fluid loss and contamination. 5. Remove the brake hose retaining clips from the hose mounting brackets. 6. Remove the hose from the mounting brackets. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake hose to the brake hose mounting brackets. Align the hose fittings with the notch in the brackets. 2. Install the hose retaining clips onto the hose fittings at the hose brackets. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Using a backup wrench on the hose fitting, connect the brake pipe fittings at the rear brake hose. ^ Tighten the fittings to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 10793 5. Ensure that the hose does not make contact with any part of the suspension. If the hose makes contact, remove the hose and correct the condition. 6. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Service and Repair Proportioning Valve Replacement Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Without disconnecting the electrical connectors, remove the transmission control module (TCM) with the bracket from the bracket on the strut tower and position aside on top of the engine. 2. Place a shop towel under the proportioning valve assembly to catch any brake fluid loss. 3. Important: Prior to disconnecting the brake pipes from the proportioning valve assembly, note the locations of the brake pipes to the valve assembly, to aid during installation. Disconnect the caliper and wheel cylinder brake pipes from the proportioning valve assembly. 4. Cap or plug the brake pipe ends to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 5. Disconnect the master cylinder brake pipes from the proportioning valve assembly. 6. Cap or plug the brake pipe ends to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 7. If the proportioning valve is to be reused, plug the ports to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10797 8. Remove the proportioning valve mounting bolts. 9. Important: Do not exert excessive force on the brake pipes. Remove the proportioning valve from the vehicle while carefully repositioning the brake pipes. Installation Procedure 1. Install the proportioning valve assembly to the vehicle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the proportioning valve assembly bracket mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10798 3. Remove the plugs from the proportioning valve assembly ports. 4. Remove the caps or plugs from the master cylinder brake pipe ends. 5. Connect the master cylinder brake pipes to the proportioning valve assembly. 6. Tighten the brake pipe fittings at the proportioning valve assembly. ^ Tighten the fittings to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the caps or plugs from the caliper and wheel cylinder brake pipe ends. 8. Connect the caliper and wheel cylinder brake pipes to the proportioning valve assembly. 9. Tighten the brake pipe fittings at the proportioning valve assembly. ^ Tighten the fittings to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 10. Remove the shop towel and discard into an approved container. 11. Reposition the TCM with bracket to the bracket on the strut tower. 12. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the transmission control module (TCM), if equipped, from the mounting bracket and position aside. 3. Clean the brake modulator assembly pipe fitting areas of any accumulated dirt and foreign material. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the electronic brake control module (EBCM). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 10803 5. Place a shop towel under the brake modulator assembly to catch any brake fluid loss. 6. Important: Prior to disconnecting the brake pipes from the antilock brake system (ABS) modulator assembly, note the locations of the brake pipes to the valve assembly, to aid during installation. Disconnect the caliper and wheel cylinder brake pipes from the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV). 7. Cap the brake pipe ends to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 8. Disconnect the master cylinder brake pipes from the BPMV. 9. Cap the brake pipe ends to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 10. Plug the modulator brake pipe openings to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 11. Loosen the 2 insulator nuts on the brake pressure modulator valve assembly. 12. Remove the brake modulator assembly from modulator bracket by pulling straight up. Installation Procedure Important: When installing a new brake modulator assembly, do NOT remove the shipping plugs from the pipe ports until after installation into the vehicle. 1. Install the brake modulator assembly to the modulator bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 10804 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the 2 brake pressure modulator assembly insulator nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 3. Remove the caps from the master cylinder brake pipe ends. 4. Remove the plugs from the master cylinder ports on the modulator assembly. 5. Connect the master cylinder brake pipes to the modulator assembly, in the same location as removed. 6. Tighten the brake pipe fittings at the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV). ^ Tighten the fittings to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the caps from the caliper and wheel cylinder brake pipe ends. 8. Remove the plugs from the caliper and wheel cylinder ports on the modulator assembly. 9. Connect the caliper and wheel cylinder brake pipes to the modulator assembly, in the same location as removed. 10. Tighten the brake pipe fittings at the BPMV. ^ Tighten the fittings to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 10805 11. Connect the electrical connector to the EBCM. 12. Reposition the TCM, if equipped, to the mounting bracket. 13. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 14. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. DO NOT start engine. 15. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Proceduresin Vehicle DTC Information. 16. Observe the feel of the brake pedal after performing the diagnostic system check. If the pedal now feels spongy, air may have been in the secondary circuit of the brake modulator assembly, which may have been introduced into the primary circuit. If the pedal feels spongy, perform the ABS Automated Bleed Procedure. 17. Remove the shop towel and discard into an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 10806 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Pressure Modulator Valve (BPMV) Bracket Replacement Brake Pressure Modulator Valve (BPMV) Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control module (TCM), if equipped, from the mounting bracket and position aside. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Disconnect the electronic brake control module (EBCM) electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 10807 4. Loosen the 2 insulator nuts on the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) assembly. 5. Carefully lift the brake modulator assembly just enough to clear the bracket, then support the assembly. 6. Remove the brake pressure modulator assembly bracket mounting bolts. 7. Remove the bracket from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the BPMV assembly bracket to the vehicle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 10808 Install the brake pressure modulator assembly bracket mounting bolts and nut. ^ Tighten the bolts and nut to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 3. Install the brake modulator assembly to the bracket. 4. Tighten the 2 brake pressure modulator assembly insulator nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the EBCM electrical connector. 6. Reposition the TCM, if equipped, to the mounting bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Secure the mounting flange of the brake master cylinder in a bench vise so that the rear of the primary piston is accessible. 2. Remove the cap from the hose nipple on the master cylinder reservoir. 3. Install suitable fittings to the master cylinder ports that match the type of flare seat required and also provide for hose attachment. 4. Install transparent hoses to the fittings, then route the hoses into the master cylinder reservoir. 5. Ensure that the ends of the transparent hoses running into the reservoir are fully submerged in the brake fluid. 6. Using a smooth, round-ended tool, depress and release the primary piston as far as it will travel, a depth of about 25 mm (1 inch), several times. Observe the flow of fluid coming from the ports. As air is bled from the primary and secondary pistons, the effort required to depress the primary piston will increase and the amount of travel will decrease. 7. Continue to depress and release the primary piston until fluid flows freely from the ports with no evidence of air bubbles. 8. Remove the transparent hoses from the reservoir. 9. Install the cap to the hose nipple on the reservoir, to prevent fluid loss and contamination. 10. Remove the fittings with the transparent hoses from the master cylinder ports. Wrap the master cylinder with a clean shop cloth to prevent brake fluid spills. 11. Remove the master cylinder from the vise. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding > Page 10813 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Fluid Level Sensor Replacement Master Cylinder Fluid Level Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the brake fluid level sensor electrical connector. 2. While simultaneously depressing the retaining tabs on the opposite side of the sensor electrical connection, carefully pull the sensor from the master cylinder reservoir. 3. Remove the low brake fluid level sensor. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding > Page 10814 1. While noting the proper orientation, install the brake fluid level sensor to the master cylinder. 2. Press the brake fluid level sensor firmly into the master cylinder reservoir, ensuring that the retaining tabs are fully engaged. 3. Connect the brake fluid level sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding > Page 10815 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Replacement Master Cylinder Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the brake fluid level sensor. 2. Disconnect the brake pipes from the master cylinder. 3. Important: Install a rubber cap or plug to the exposed brake pipe fitting ends in order to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. Plug the open brake pipe ends. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding > Page 10816 4. Remove master cylinder mounting nuts. 5. Remove the master cylinder from the vehicle. 6. Drain the master cylinder reservoir of all brake fluid. Installation Procedure 1. Bench bleed the master cylinder. 2. Install the master cylinder to the brake booster. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the master cylinder mounting nuts. ^ Tighten the master cylinder mounting nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding > Page 10817 4. Remove the plugs from the brake pipes. 5. Connect the brake pipes to the master cylinder. ^ Tighten the brake pipe fittings at the master cylinder to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 6. Connect the electrical connector to the brake fluid level sensor. 7. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding > Page 10818 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Remove the brake fluid from the reservoir. Discard the fluid into an approved container. 2. Disconnect the brake fluid level sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the brake fluid level sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding > Page 10819 4. Remove the master cylinder reservoir attachment pins and discard the pins. 5. Release the reservoir from the master cylinder by carefully pulling reservoir straight up. 6. Remove the reservoir seals from the master cylinder body. Installation Procedure 1. Install the reservoir seals to the master cylinder body. 2. Install the reservoir to the master cylinder body by pushing the reservoir bayonets straight down into the seals in the master cylinder body. 3. Install NEW reservoir attachment pins. Ensure that the attachment pins are fully and firmly seated. 4. Install the brake fluid level sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding > Page 10820 5. Connect the low brake fluid level sensor electrical connector. 6. Fill the master cylinder reservoir. 7. Bleed the brake system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding > Page 10821 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Visually inspect the brake fluid level through the brake master cylinder auxiliary reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is at or below the half-full point during routine fluid checks, the brake system should be inspected for wear and possible brake fluid leaks. 3. If the brake fluid level is at or below the half-full point during routine fluid checks, and an inspection of the brake system did not reveal wear or brake fluid leaks, the brake fluid may be topped-off up to the maximum-fill level. 4. If brake system service was just completed, the brake fluid may be topped-off up to the maximum-fill level. 5. If the brake fluid level is above the half-full point, adding brake fluid is not recommended under normal conditions. 6. If brake fluid is to be added to the master cylinder auxiliary reservoir, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Wheel Cylinder Replacement ^ Tools Required J 38400 Brake Shoe Spanner and Spring Remover Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Clean all dirt and foreign material from the wheel cylinder brake pipe fitting and the bleeder valve. 4. Remove the brake drum. 5. Remove the brake pipe nut. 6. Install a cap over the end of the brake pipe in order to prevent brake fluid loss and/or brake fluid contamination. 7. Remove the wheel cylinder bolts (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10825 8. Use the J 38400 in order to spread the brake shoes apart (1). 9. Remove the wheel cylinder. 10. Clean the old sealant from the backing plate where the wheel cylinder was installed. Clean the sealant from the wheel cylinder if you are reusing the wheel cylinder. Installation Procedure 1. Use the J 38400 in order to spread the brake shoes apart (1). 2. Install the wheel cylinder. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel cylinder bolts (2). ^ Tighten the bolts to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the cap from the brake pipe and install the brake pipe to the wheel cylinder. ^ Tighten the nut to 19 Nm (14 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the brake drum. . 6. Bleed the hydraulic brake system at the wheel cylinder. 7. Install the tire and wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10826 8. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Description and Operation Parking Brake Cable: Description and Operation Park Brake System Description and Operation System Component Description The park brake system consists of the following: Park Brake Lever Assembly Receives, multiplies, and transfers park brake system apply input force from driver to park brake cable system. Releases applied park brake system when lever release button is depressed and lever is returned to the at rest position. Park Brake Cables Transfers input force received from park brake lever, through park brake cable equalizer, to park brake apply lever. Park Brake Cable Equalizer Evenly distributes input force to both the left and right park brake units. Threaded front park brake cable adjuster is also used to remove slack in park brake cables. Park Brake Apply Lever Multiplies and transfers input force to park brake actuator/adjuster. Park Brake Actuator/Adjuster Uses multiplied input force from apply lever to expand drum brake shoes toward the friction surface of the brake drum. Threaded park brake actuators/adjusters are also used to control clearance between the drum brake shoes and the friction surface of the brake drum . System Operation Park brake apply input force is received by the park brake lever assembly being applied. The input force is multiplied by the lever assembly, transferred and evenly distributed, through the park brake cables and the park brake cable equalizer, to the left and right park brake apply levers. The park brake apply levers multiply and transfer the apply input force to the park brake actuators/adjusters which expand the drum brake shoes toward the friction surface of the brake drum in order to prevent the rotation of the rear tire and wheel assemblies. The park brake lever assembly releases an applied park brake system when it is released and returned to the at rest position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10831 Parking Brake Cable: Adjustments Park Brake Adjustment 1. Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Apply and fully release the park brake several times. Verify that the park brake lever releases completely. 2. Turn ON the ignition. Verify the red BRAKE warning lamp is not illuminated. 3. If the red BRAKE warning lamp is illuminated, verify the following conditions: ^ The park brake lever is in the fully released position and against the stop. ^ There is no slack in the park brake cable. 4. Turn OFF the ignition. 5. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 6. Remove the front floor console. 7. With the park brake lever in the released position, using ONLY hand tools, loosen the adjusting nut completely to the end of the front cable threaded rod. 8. Raise and support the vehicle. 9. Remove the rear tire and wheel assemblies. 10. Adjust the rear drum brakes. 11. Ensure there is no brake shoe drag after adjustment by rotating the brake drums. If drag exists, re-center the brake shoes and perform the brake shoe adjustment again. 12. Install 2 wheel nuts to the wheel studs and firmly hand tighten in order to retain the brake drums. 13. Lower the vehicle to permit access to the park brake lever. 14. Raise the park brake lever 1 detent position. 15. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Using ONLY hand tools, tighten the park brake cable adjusting nut (1) until light to moderate drag is exhibited while rotating the rear brake drums. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10832 16. Attempt to rotate the rear brake drums. There should be no rotation forward or rearward. 17. Fully release the park brake lever. 18. Verify the park brake is released by rotating the rear brake drums. The drums should rotate freely and exhibit no brake shoe drag. 19. If the drums do not rotate freely, repeat the park brake cable adjustment procedure. 20. Raise the park brake lever 3 detent positions and attempt to rotate the rear brake drums: ^ One of the brake drums should not rotate forward or rearward. ^ The other brake drum should not rotate forward or rearward, or should require substantial effort to rotate. 21. Raise the vehicle. 22. Remove the wheel nuts retaining the brake drums. 23. Install the rear tire and wheel assemblies. 24. Lower the vehicle. 25. Install the front floor console. 26. Release the park brake lever. 27. Enable the SIR system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Remove the front floor console. 3. With park brake lever in the released position, using ONLY hand tools, remove the park brake cable adjusting nut and washer. 4. Release the rear park brake cable ends from the cable equalizer on the front cable. 5. Remove the front park brake cable from the park brake lever by pulling the cable rearward. Installation Procedure 1. Install the front park brake cable to the park brake lever. 2. Install the rear cable ends to the cable equalizer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 10835 3. Using ONLY hand tools, install the washer and NEW adjusting nut (1) to the front park brake cable. 4. Adjust the park brake cable tension. 5. Install the front floor console. 6. Enable the SIR system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 10836 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Park Brake Cable Replacement - Rear Park Brake Cable Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Remove the front floor console. 3. Ensure that the park brake lever is in the fully released position. 4. Release the tension from the park brake cable system at the front cable adjusting nut (1).Using only hand tools, loosen the adjusting nut (1) completely to the end of the front cable threaded rod. 5. Remove the rear carpet retainers. 6. Position the carpet forward in order to access the rear park brake cables and body pass-through grommets. 7. With the park brake lever (1) in the released position, release the appropriate rear park brake cable (2) from the cable equalizer. 8. Release the rear cable fitting from the park brake lever bracket and remove the cable from the lever assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 10837 9. Fold back the park brake cable routing tabs on the vehicle interior floor. 10. Release the rear park brake cable body pass-through grommet. 11. Raise and support the vehicle. 12. Remove the bolt from the park brake cable-to-underbody retainer. 13. Remove the bolt from the park brake cable retainer at the lower suspension trailing arm. 14. Remove the cable from the opening in the vehicle underbody. 15. Remove the rear tire and wheel assembly. 16. Remove the brake drum. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 10838 17. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, depress the visible retaining tab (1) on the park brake cable fitting, then tilt the released side of the cable end back into the backing plate. 18. Rotate the park brake cable to expose the other retaining tab. 19. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, depress the remaining retaining tab on the park brake cable fitting, and release the cable fitting from the backing plate. 20. Move the majority of the cable return spring back through the opening in the backing plate. 21. Push the cable toward the rear of the vehicle, just enough to clear the cable end from the slot on the park brake lever. 22. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, lift the cable to fully release the cable from the lever, then remove the cable. Installation Procedure 1. Insert the park brake cable through the opening in the backing plate. Only install the cable return spring to just rearward of the spring positioning tab on the backing plate. 2. Push the cable toward the rear of the vehicle, along the outside of the secondary brake shoe, until the cable end is positioned just past the slot on the park brake lever. 3. While holding the cable in position from front to rear, move the cable end to the back of the park brake lever. 4. Press the cable down into the slot on the lever, then pull the cable toward the front of the vehicle to secure the cable end to the slot. 5. While continuing to pull the cable away from the lever, insert a flat-bladed screwdriver into the opening on the lever to prevent the cable from lifting out of the slot on the lever. 6. Move the cable return spring through the opening in the backing plate. 7. Secure the cable fitting to the backing plate. Attempt to pull the park brake cable free of the backing plate, to ensure that the retaining tabs (1) on the fitting are properly secured. 8. Adjust the rear drum brakes. 9. Install the brake drum. 10. Install the rear tire and wheel assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 10839 11. Insert the cable through the opening in the vehicle underbody. 12. Install the park brake cable retaining bracket to the rear suspension lower trailing arm. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 13. Install the bolt and nut to the park brake cable retainer and lower trailing arm. ^ Tighten the bolt and nut to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). 14. Install and secure park brake cable pass-through grommet to the opening in the vehicle underbody. 15. Install the park brake cable to the underbody retainer. 16. Install the bolt to the park brake cable retainer and the vehicle underbody. ^ Tighten the bolt to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 17. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 10840 18. Secure the cable fitting to the park brake lever bracket. Attempt to pull the park brake cable free of the lever bracket, to ensure that the retaining tabs on the fitting are properly secured. 19. Install the cable end (2) to the cable equalizer. 20. Position park brake cable to routing tabs on vehicle interior floor. 21. Secure park brake cable to floor by folding routing tabs over park brake cable. 22. Reposition the carpet to the installed position. 23. Install the rear carpet retainers. 24. Adjust the park brake cable tension. 25. Install the front floor console. 26. Enable the SIR system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Lever: Service and Repair Park Brake Lever Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Remove the front floor console. 3. Ensure that the park brake lever is in the fully released position. 4. Release the tension from the park brake cable system at the front cable adjusting nut (1). 5. Using ONLY hand tools, loosen the adjusting nut (1) completely to the end of the front cable threaded rod. 6. Disconnect the electrical connector from the park brake warning lamp switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10844 7. With the park brake lever (1) in the released position, release the rear park brake cable (2) ends from the cable equalizer. 8. Release the rear cable fittings from the park brake lever bracket. 9. Remove the park brake lever mounting nuts. 10. Remove the park brake lever assembly from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the park brake lever assembly to the vehicle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10845 Install the park brake lever assembly mounting nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Secure the rear cable fittings to the park brake lever bracket. Attempt to pull the park brake cables free of the lever bracket, to ensure that the retaining tabs on the fittings are properly secured. 4. Install the cable ends to the cable equalizer. 5. Connect the electrical connector to the park brake warning lamp switch. 6. Adjust the park brake cable tension. 7. Install the front floor console. 8. Enable the SIR system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Brake Warning System Components Brake Warning System Components 1 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10849 Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10850 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Park Brake Warning Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Remove the front floor console. 3. Disconnect the warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 4. Remove the warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the park brake warning lamp switch locating tab to the locating hole on the park brake lever assembly. 2. Install the switch to the park brake lever. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the park brake warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). ^ Tighten the screw to 4 Nm (35 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the park brake warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 5. Install the front floor console. 6. Enable the SIR system. 7. Verify correct park brake warning lamp operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Vacuum Brake Booster Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect and remove the battery. 2. Remove and position aside the underhood electrical center. 3. Remove the battery tray. 4. Disconnect the coolant surge hose from the surge tank and position aside. 5. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts. Do NOT disconnect the brake pipes from the master cylinder. 6. Carefully pull the master cylinder away from the vacuum booster and position aside. 7. Disconnect the vacuum booster check valve and hose assembly from the booster. 8. Without disconnecting the electrical connectors, remove the transmission control module (TCM) with the bracket from the bracket on the strut tower and position aside on top of the engine. 9. Remove the brake modulator assembly, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10855 10. Remove the brake modulator valve bracket, if equipped. 11. Remove the brake booster push rod-to-brake pedal retaining clip. 12. Remove the foam washer from the brake pedal assembly. 13. Remove the brake booster mounting nuts. 14. Important: Ensure that the foam insulator on the mounting surface of the brake booster withdraws with the booster. Disengage the brake booster from the front of dash and the brake pedal bracket. Maneuver the booster toward the center of the vehicle in order to ease removal. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10856 Installation Procedure 1. Install the foam insulator the vacuum brake booster. 2. Install the brake booster to the vehicle. 3. Install, but do not tighten, the booster mounting nuts. 4. Lightly lubricate the booster push rod pivot pin on the brake pedal with silicone lubricant. 5. Install the booster push rod to the pivot pin on the brake pedal. 6. Install the foam washer to the pivot pin. 7. Install the brake booster push rod retaining clip. 8. Fully seat the brake booster to the front of dash and the brake pedal assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 9. Tighten the vacuum brake booster mounting nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10857 10. Install the brake modulator valve bracket, if equipped. 11. Install the brake modulator assembly, if equipped. 12. Reposition the TCM and bracket to the bracket on the strut tower. 13. Install the vacuum booster check valve and hose assembly to the booster. 14. Reposition and install the master cylinder to the booster. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10858 15. Install the coolant surge hose and clamp to the surge tank. 16. Install the battery tray. 17. Install the underhood electrical center. 18. Install and connect the battery. 19. If necessary, bleed the brake system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Service and Repair Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve and/or Hose Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Release the retaining clamp (1) and remove the vacuum hose (2) from the vacuum port on the engine. 2. Remove the check valve and hose from the brake booster by gently turning the check valve right then left while pulling straight out from the grommet. 3. Remove the vacuum hose from the check valve. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10862 1. Install the vacuum hose to the check valve. 2. Install the brake booster check valve and hose assembly to the booster. 3. Install the vacuum hose (2) to the engine vacuum port. 4. Install the vacuum hose clamp (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Component Locations Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side 1 - EPS Inline Fuse Holder 2 - PSCM Harness Connection to the Underhood Fuse Block 3 Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 10868 Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10869 Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10870 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Always connect or disconnect the wiring harness connector from the EBCM/EBTCM with the ignition switch in the OFF position. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the EBCM/EBTCM. 1. Remove the transmission control module (TCM), if equipped, from the mounting bracket and position aside. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Clean the electronic brake control module (EBCM) to brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) area of any accumulated dirt and foreign material. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the EBCM. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10871 5. Disconnect the pump motor electrical connector. 6. Remove the EBCM attaching screws. 7. Separate the EBCM from the BPMV by carefully pulling apart. Installation Procedure 1. Clean the sealing surface of the BPMV, with denatured alcohol and a clean shop cloth. 2. Install the EBCM to the BPMV. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the EBCM-to-BPMV attaching screws. Tighten the bolts in a cross pattern. ^ Tighten the bolts to 3 Nm (27 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the pump motor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10872 5. Connect the electrical connector to the EBCM. 6. Reposition the TCM, if equipped, to the mounting bracket. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. DO NOT start the engine. 8. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Component Locations Brake Warning System Components Brake Warning System Components 1 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 10878 LR Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10879 Brake Fluid Level Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Brake Warning System Components Brake Warning System Components 1 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10883 Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10884 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Park Brake Warning Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Remove the front floor console. 3. Disconnect the warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 4. Remove the warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the park brake warning lamp switch locating tab to the locating hole on the park brake lever assembly. 2. Install the switch to the park brake lever. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the park brake warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). ^ Tighten the screw to 4 Nm (35 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the park brake warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 5. Install the front floor console. 6. Enable the SIR system. 7. Verify correct park brake warning lamp operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations Left Side of the I/P Left Side of the I/P 1. Ambient Light Sensor 2. Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) 3. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4. Traction Control (TC) Switch (JM4) 5. Hazard Switch 6. Fog Lamp Switch (T96) 7. Radio 8. HVAC Control Module 9. Power Window Switch - Main 10. Transmission Range Indicator 11. Horn Switch/Pad - Part of the Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module 12. Headlamp Switch 13. Dimmer Switch 14. Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 15. Data Link Connector (DLC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10888 Traction Control Switch (JM4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10889 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Traction Control Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel. 2. Carefully release the retaining tabs and remove the traction control switch from the trim bezel. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10890 1. Install the traction control switch to the trim bezel. Ensure that the retaining tabs are fully engaged. 2. Install the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Wheel Speed Sensor: Component Locations Under the Rear of the Vehicle Under the Rear of the Vehicle Under the Rear of the Vehicle 1 - Fuel Tank Harness 2 - C406 3 - Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) Harness 4 - C404 5 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - RR Shown, LR Similar LF Suspension LF Suspension Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 10895 1 - C104 Left Shown, C105 Right Similar 2 - Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - LF, RF Similar Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 10896 Wheel Speed Sensor: Connector Locations LF Suspension Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 10897 Under The Rear Of The Vehicle Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10898 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - LF Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10899 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - LR Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10900 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - RF Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10901 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - RR Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake rotor. 4. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt. 6. Remove the wheel speed sensor. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front > Page 10904 1. Install the wheel speed sensor to the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 3. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the brake rotor. 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front > Page 10905 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake shoes. 4. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt. 6. Remove the wheel speed sensor through the drum brake backing plate. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front > Page 10906 1. Install the wheel speed sensor through the drum brake backing plate to the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 2. Seat the wheel speed sensor harness grommet into the backing plate. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the brake shoes. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 10918 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 10919 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 10920 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 10926 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 10927 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 10928 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10929 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Description and Operation KEY AND LOCK CYLINDER CODING USE INSTRUCTION SHEET SUPPLIED For the key cutting and lock cylinder coding procedure, refer to the instruction sheet supplied in the key and lock cylinder kit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Use Instruction Sheet Supplied For the key cutting and lock cylinder coding procedure, refer to the instruction sheet supplied in the key and lock cylinder kit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 10932 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Important: Vehicle must be in PARK prior to ignition cylinder removal. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disable the SIR system. 3. Remove the steering column trim covers. 4. Insert key into the ignition and rotate to the RUN position. Then rotate ignition cylinder back to ACC position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 10933 5. Depress the locking button through hole on side of ignition module assembly with a thin pick-type tool. Slide the lock cylinder from the ignition housing. Installation Procedure Important: Actuator blade within the ignition module must be in ACC position to install the lock cylinder assembly. If rotated, reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 10934 1. Important: If you are installing a new lock cylinder, refer to Key and Lock Cylinder Coding. Insert key into ignition lock cylinder and install the cylinder into the lock housing. 2. Rotate the lock cylinder in the housing. Verify proper rotation. 3. Install the steering column trim covers. 4. Enable the SIR system. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 10935 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the SIR system. 2. Remove the steering wheel. 3. Remove the steering column trim covers. 4. Remove the multifunction levers. 5. Disconnect the housing electrical connectors. 6. Disengage the retaining tabs and remove the park lock cable assembly from the housing. 7. Remove the lock housing bolts. 8. Turn the ignition key to the ACC position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 10936 9. Separate the lock housing (lock cylinder case) from the multifunction lever bracket. Slide the bracket from the column. 10. Remove the ignition switch screws. 11. Remove the ignition switch. Installation Procedure 1. Ensure the ignition switch is in the ACC position. 2. Notice: Position the ignition switch to housing and install the screws and tighten. ^ Tighten the screws to 2.5 Nm (22 inch lbs.). 3. Pre-assemble the lock housing and multifunction lever bracket. Hand tighten the bolts leaving approximately 3.2 mm (0.125 inch) gap. 4. Slide the bracket onto the column. Ensure lock tab fully engages into the column slot. 5. Hand tighten the lower bolt until snug. 6. Hand tighten the upper bolt until snug. 7. Tighten the lower bolt, then the upper bolt. ^ Tighten the bolts to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 10937 8. Snap the ignition lock cable onto the ignition module. 9. Connect the ignition housing electrical connectors. 10. Important: Ensure both locking tabs are seated. Install the multifunction levers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 10938 11. Install the steering column trim covers. 12. Install the SIR coil. 13. Install the steering wheel. 14. Enable the SIR system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10943 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10944 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10945 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Jump Starting > System Information > Service Precautions Jump Starting: Service Precautions CAUTION: Batteries produce explosive gases. Batteries contain corrosive acid. Batteries supply levels of electrical current high enough to cause burns. Therefore, in order to reduce the risk of personal injury while working near a battery, observe the following guidelines: - Always shield your eyes. - Avoid leaning over the battery whenever possible. - Do not expose the battery to open flames or sparks. - Do not allow battery acid to contact the eyes or the skin. Flush any contacted areas with water immediately and thoroughly. - Get medical help. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Jump Starting > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 10950 Jump Starting: Service and Repair JUMP STARTING IN CASE OF EMERGENCY CAUTION: Batteries produce explosive gases. Batteries contain corrosive acid. Batteries supply levels of electrical current high enough to cause burns. Therefore, in order to reduce the risk of personal injury while working near a battery, observe the following guidelines: - Always shield your eyes. - Avoid leaning over the battery whenever possible. - Do not expose the battery to open flames or sparks. - Do not allow battery acid to contact the eyes or the skin. Flush any contacted areas with water immediately and thoroughly. - Get medical help. NOTE: This vehicle has a 12 volt, negative ground electrical system. Make sure the vehicle or equipment being used to jump start the engine is also 12 volt, negative ground. Use of any other type of system will damage the vehicle's electrical components. 1. Position the vehicle with the booster battery so that the jumper cables will reach. - Do not let the 2 vehicles touch. - Make sure that the jumper cables do not have loose ends, or missing insulation. 2. Place an automatic transmission in PARK. If equipped with a manual transmission, place in NEUTRAL and block the wheels. 3. Turn OFF all electrical loads on both vehicles that are not needed. 4. Turn OFF the ignition on both vehicles. 5. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the battery positive (+) terminal (2) of the vehicle with the discharged battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal (1) of the booster battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 7. Connect the black negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal (3) of the booster battery. 8. The final connection is made to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part (4) of the vehicle with the discharged battery.This final attachment must be at least 46 cm (18 in) away from the dead battery. CAUTION: Do not connect a jumper cable directly to the negative terminal of a discharged battery to prevent sparking and possible explosion of battery gases. 9. Start the engine of the vehicle that is providing the boost. 10. Crank the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery. NOTE: Never operate the starter motor more than 15 seconds at a time without pausing in order to allow it to cool for at least 2 minutes. Overheating will damage the starter motor. 11. The black negative (-) cable must be first disconnected from the vehicle that was boosted (4). 12. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the negative (-) terminal (3) of the booster battery. 13. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the positive (+) terminal (1) of the booster battery. NOTE: Do not let the cable end touch any metal. Damage to the battery and other components may result. 14. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the remote positive (+) terminal (2) of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Disconnect/Connect Procedure Negative: Service and Repair Battery Negative Cable Disconnect/Connect Procedure BATTERY NEGATIVE CABLE DISCONNECT/CONNECT PROCEDURE REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Record all of the customers radio station presets. 2. Turn OFF all the lamps and accessories. 3. Make sure the ignition switch is in the OFF position. 4. Disconnect the powertrain control module (PCM) wire harness (2) from the battery box cover. 5. Remove the PCM bracket with PCM (1) from the top of the battery box cover. 6. Carefully position the PCM and bracket out of the way. 7. Loosen the screws securing the battery box cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Disconnect/Connect Procedure > Page 10956 8. Remove the battery box cover (1). 9. Loosen the battery negative cable terminal bolt. 10. Remove the battery negative cable from the battery. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the battery negative cable to the battery. Tighten the battery negative cable terminal bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Clean any existing corrosion from the battery terminal bolt flange and the battery cable end. 2. Install battery box cover (1). Tighten the battery box cover screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Disconnect/Connect Procedure > Page 10957 3. Install the PCM and bracket to the battery box cover. 4. Connect the PCM wire harness (2) to the battery box cover. 5. Program all of the customer's radio station presets and set the radio clock to the current time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Disconnect/Connect Procedure > Page 10958 Negative: Service and Repair Battery Negative Cable Replacement BATTERY NEGATIVE CABLE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: Always use replacement cables that are of the same type, diameter and length of the cables that you are replacing. - Always route the replacement cable the same way as the original cable. 1. Remove the battery box. 2. Disconnect the battery cable retainers (1) from the battery tray. 3. Remove the negative battery cable nut (2) and cable (1) from the inner fender body ground stud. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Disconnect/Connect Procedure > Page 10959 4. Remove the negative battery cable nut and cable (1) from the transaxle stud. 5. Remove the negative battery cable from the wire loom. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the negative battery cable into the wire loom. 2. Connect the negative battery cable (1) to the transaxle stud. 3. Install the negative battery cable nut to the transaxle stud. Tighten the nut to 45 N.m (33 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Disconnect/Connect Procedure > Page 10960 4. Install the negative battery cable (1) to the inner fender body ground stud. 5. Install the negative battery cable body ground nut (2). Tighten the nut to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 6. Connect the battery cable retainers (1) to the battery tray. 7. Install the battery box. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair Positive: Service and Repair BATTERY POSITIVE CABLE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: Always use replacement cables that are of the same type, diameter and length of the cables that you are replacing. - Always route the replacement cable the same way as the original cable. 1. Remove the battery. 2. Remove the underhood fuse block (UHFB) cover. 3. Remove the positive battery cable nut from the UHFB. 4. Remove the positive battery cable (2) from the UHFB. 5. Remove the battery box. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10964 6. Disconnect the battery cable retainers (1) from the battery tray. 7. Remove the positive battery terminal nut (5) from the starter solenoid. 8. Disconnect the positive battery cable (1) from the starter solenoid. 9. Remove the positive battery cable from the wire loom. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the positive battery cable into the wire loom. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10965 2. Connect the positive battery cable (1) to the starter solenoid. 3. Install the positive battery terminal nut (5) to the starter Tighten the nut to 10 N.m (89 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10966 4. Connect the battery cable retainers (1) to the battery tray. 5. Install the battery box. 6. Install the positive battery cable (2) to the UHFB. 7. Install the positive battery cable nut to the UHFB. Tighten the nut to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 8. Install the UHFB cover. 9. Install the battery. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications Generator Usage Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Alternator: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10973 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10974 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10975 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10976 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10977 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10978 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10979 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10980 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10981 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10982 Alternator: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10983 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10984 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10985 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10986 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10987 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10988 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10989 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10990 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10991 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10992 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10993 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10994 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10995 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10996 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10997 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10998 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10999 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11000 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11001 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11002 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11003 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11004 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11005 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11006 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11007 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11008 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11009 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11010 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11011 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11012 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11013 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11014 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11015 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11016 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11017 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11018 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11019 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11020 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11021 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11022 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11023 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11024 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11025 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11026 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11027 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11028 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11029 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11030 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11031 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11032 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11033 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11034 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11035 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11036 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11037 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11038 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11039 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11040 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11041 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11042 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11043 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11044 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11045 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11046 Generator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator Bracket/Engine Lift Bracket Replacement Alternator: Service and Repair Generator Bracket/Engine Lift Bracket Replacement GENERATOR BRACKET/ENGINE LIFT BRACKET REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the generator. 2. Remove the drive belt tensioner. 3. Remove the generator bracket bolts. 4. Remove the generator bracket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the generator bracket. 2. Install the generator bracket bolts. Tighten the generator bracket bolts in the sequence shown to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the drive belt tensioner. 4. Install the generator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator Bracket/Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 11049 Alternator: Service and Repair Generator Replacement GENERATOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the battery ground (negative) cable from the battery. 2. Remove the generator B+ terminal nut. 3. Remove the generator B+ lead. 4. Remove the generator electrical connector. 5. Remove the drive belt from the generator. 6. Remove the generator bolts. 7. Remove the generator from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator Bracket/Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 11050 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the generator to the generator bracket. 2. Install the generator bolts. Tighten the generator bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the drive belt. 4. Install the generator electrical connector. 5. Install the generator B+ lead. 6. Install the generator B+ terminal nut. Tighten the generator B+ terminal nut to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator Bracket/Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 11051 7. Install the battery ground (negative) cable to the battery. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 11062 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 11063 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 11064 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 11070 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 11071 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 11072 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11073 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Description and Operation KEY AND LOCK CYLINDER CODING USE INSTRUCTION SHEET SUPPLIED For the key cutting and lock cylinder coding procedure, refer to the instruction sheet supplied in the key and lock cylinder kit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Use Instruction Sheet Supplied For the key cutting and lock cylinder coding procedure, refer to the instruction sheet supplied in the key and lock cylinder kit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 11076 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Important: Vehicle must be in PARK prior to ignition cylinder removal. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disable the SIR system. 3. Remove the steering column trim covers. 4. Insert key into the ignition and rotate to the RUN position. Then rotate ignition cylinder back to ACC position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 11077 5. Depress the locking button through hole on side of ignition module assembly with a thin pick-type tool. Slide the lock cylinder from the ignition housing. Installation Procedure Important: Actuator blade within the ignition module must be in ACC position to install the lock cylinder assembly. If rotated, reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 11078 1. Important: If you are installing a new lock cylinder, refer to Key and Lock Cylinder Coding. Insert key into ignition lock cylinder and install the cylinder into the lock housing. 2. Rotate the lock cylinder in the housing. Verify proper rotation. 3. Install the steering column trim covers. 4. Enable the SIR system. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 11079 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the SIR system. 2. Remove the steering wheel. 3. Remove the steering column trim covers. 4. Remove the multifunction levers. 5. Disconnect the housing electrical connectors. 6. Disengage the retaining tabs and remove the park lock cable assembly from the housing. 7. Remove the lock housing bolts. 8. Turn the ignition key to the ACC position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 11080 9. Separate the lock housing (lock cylinder case) from the multifunction lever bracket. Slide the bracket from the column. 10. Remove the ignition switch screws. 11. Remove the ignition switch. Installation Procedure 1. Ensure the ignition switch is in the ACC position. 2. Notice: Position the ignition switch to housing and install the screws and tighten. ^ Tighten the screws to 2.5 Nm (22 inch lbs.). 3. Pre-assemble the lock housing and multifunction lever bracket. Hand tighten the bolts leaving approximately 3.2 mm (0.125 inch) gap. 4. Slide the bracket onto the column. Ensure lock tab fully engages into the column slot. 5. Hand tighten the lower bolt until snug. 6. Hand tighten the upper bolt until snug. 7. Tighten the lower bolt, then the upper bolt. ^ Tighten the bolts to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 11081 8. Snap the ignition lock cable onto the ignition module. 9. Connect the ignition housing electrical connectors. 10. Important: Ensure both locking tabs are seated. Install the multifunction levers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Key and Lock Cylinder Coding > Page 11082 11. Install the steering column trim covers. 12. Install the SIR coil. 13. Install the steering wheel. 14. Enable the SIR system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information Key: Technical Service Bulletins Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-00-89-010 Date: May 27, 2010 Subject: Key Code Security Rules and Information on GM KeyCode Look-Up Application (Canada Only) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saturn and Saab 2002 and Prior Isuzu Attention: This bulletin has been created to address potential issues and questions regarding KeyCode security. This bulletin should be read by all parties involved in KeyCode activity, including dealer operator, partner security coordinator, sales, service and parts departments. A copy of this bulletin should be printed and maintained in the parts department for use as a reference. Important U.S. dealers should refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-00-89-009. Where Are Key Codes Located? General Motors provides access to KeyCodes through three sources when a vehicle is delivered to a dealer. Vehicle KeyCodes are located on the original vehicle invoice to the dealership. There is a small white bar coded tag sent with most new vehicles that also has the key code printed on it. Dealerships should make a practice of comparing the tag's keycode numbers to the keycode listed on the invoice. Any discrepancy should be reported immediately to the GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk. Remember to remove the key tag prior to showing vehicles to potential customers. The third source for Key codes is through the GM KeyCode Look-Up feature within the OEConnection D2DLink application. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 previous model years from the current model year. When a vehicle is received by the dealership, care should be taken to safeguard the original vehicle invoice and KeyCode tag provided with the vehicle. Potential customers should not have access to the invoice or this KeyCode tag prior to the sale being completed. After a sale has been completed, the KeyCode information belongs to the customer and General Motors. Tip Only the original invoice contains key code information, a re-printed invoice does not. GM KeyCode Look-Up Application for GM of Canada Dealers All dealers should review the General Motors of Canada KeyCode Look-Up Policies and Procedures (Service Policy & Procedures Manual Section 3.1.6 "Replacement of VIN plates & keys"). Please note that the KeyCode Access site is restricted. Only authorized users should be using this application. Please see your Parts Manager for site authorized users. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 years from current model year. Important notes about security: - Users may not access the system from multiple computers simultaneously. - Users may only request one KeyCode at a time. - KeyCode information will only be available on the screen for 2 minutes. - Each user is personally responsible for maintaining and protecting their password. - Never share your password with others. - User Id's are suspended after 6 consecutive failed attempts. - User Id's are disabled if not used for 90 days. - Processes must be in place for regular dealership reviews. - The Parts Manager (or assigned management) must have processes in place for employee termination or life change events. Upon termination individuals access must be turned off immediately and access should be re-evaluated upon any position changes within the dealership. - If you think your password or ID security has been breached, contact Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 11087 Each user will be required to accept the following agreement each time the KeyCode application is used. Key Code User Agreement - Key codes are proprietary information belonging to General Motors Corporation and to the vehicle owner. - Unauthorized access to, or use of, key code information is unlawful and may subject the user to criminal and civil penalties. - This information should be treated as strictly confidential and should not be disclosed to anyone unless authorized. I will ensure that the following information is obtained prior to releasing any Key Code information: 1. Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) 2. Registration or other proof of ownership. Registration should have normal markings from the Province that issued the registration and possibly the receipt for payment recorded as well. Important - GM takes this agreement seriously. Each user must be certain of vehicle ownership before giving out key codes. - When the ownership of the vehicle is in doubt, dealership personnel should not provide the information. Key code requests should never be received via a fax or the internet and key codes should never be provided to anyone in this manner. A face to face contact with the owner of the vehicle is the expected manner that dealers will use to release a key code or as otherwise stipulated in this bulletin or other materials. - Key codes should NEVER be sent via a fax or the internet. - Each Dealership should create a permanent file to document all KeyCode Look Up transactions. Requests should be filed by VIN and in each folder retain copies of the following: - Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) - Registration or other proof of ownership. - Copy of the paid customer receipt which has the name of the employee who cut and sold the key to the customer. - Do not put yourself or your Dealership in the position of needing to "explain" a KeyCode Look Up to either GM or law enforcement officials. - Dealership Management has the ability to review all KeyCode Look-Up transactions. - Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) for GM of Canada Dealers How do I request a KeyCode for customer owned vehicle that is not registered? Scrapped, salvaged or stored vehicles that do not have a current registration should still have the ownership verified by requesting the vehicle title, current insurance policy and / or current lien holder information from the customers financing source. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. In these cases, a short description of the vehicle (scrapped, salvaged, etc.) and the dealership location should be kept on file. Any clarifying explanation should be entered into the comments field. How do I document a KeyCode request for a vehicle that is being repossessed? The repossessor must document ownership of the vehicle by providing a court ordered repossession order and lien-holder documents prior to providing key code information. Copies of the repossessors Drivers License and a business card should be retained by the dealership for documentation. What do I do if the registration information is locked in the vehicle? Every effort should be made to obtain complete information for each request. Each Dealership will have to decide on a case by case basis if enough information is available to verify the customer's ownership of the vehicle. Other forms of documentation include vehicle title, insurance policy, and or current lien information from the customers financing source. Dealership Management must be involved in any request without complete information. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. Can I get a print out of the information on the screen? It is important to note that the Key Code Look Up Search Results contain sensitive and/or proprietary information. For this reason GM recommends against printing it. If the Search Results must be printed, store and/or dispose of the printed copy properly to minimize the risk of improper or illegal use. Who in the dealership has access to the KeyCode application? Dealership Parts Manager (or assigned management) will determine, and control, who is authorized to access the KeyCode Look Up application. However, we anticipate that dealership parts and service management will be the primary users of the application. The KeyCode Look Up application automatically tracks each user activity session. Information tracked by the system includes: User name, User ID, all other entered data and the date/time of access. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 11088 What if I input the VIN incorrectly? If an incorrect VIN is entered into the system (meaning that the system does not recognize the VIN or that the VIN has been entered incorrectly) the system will return an error message. If I am an authorized user for the KeyCode application, can I access the application from home? Yes. What if I suspect key code misuse? Your dealership should communicate the proper procedures for requesting key codes. Any suspicious activity either within the dealership or externally should be reported to Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573 or GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. Whose key codes can I access through the system? At this time the following Canadian vehicle codes are available through the system: Chevrolet, Cadillac, Buick, Pontiac, GMC, HUMMER (H2 and H3 only), Oldsmobile, Saturn, Saab and Isuzu (up to 2002 model year) for a maximum of 17 model years. What should I do if I enter a valid VIN and the system does not produce any key code information? Occasionally, the KeyCode Look Up application may not produce a key code for a valid VIN. This may be the result of new vehicle information not yet available. In addition, older vehicle information may have been sent to an archive status. If you do not receive a key code returned for valid VIN, you should contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. How do I access KeyCodes if the KeyCode Look-up system is down? If the KeyCode Look-up system is temporarily unavailable, you can contact the original selling dealer who may have it on file or contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the customer is dealing with an emergency lock-out situation, you need to have the customer contact Roadside assistance, OnStar if subscribed, or 911. What should I do if the KeyCode from the look-up system does not work on the vehicle? On occasion a dealer may encounter a KeyCode that will not work on the vehicle in question. In cases where the KeyCode won't work you will need to verify with the manufacturer of the cutting equipment that the key has been cut correctly. If the key has been cut correctly you may be able to verify the proper KeyCode was given through the original selling dealer. When unable to verify the KeyCode through the original selling dealer contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the key has been cut correctly and the code given does not work, the lock cylinder may have been changed. In these situations following the proper SI document for recoding a key or replacing the lock cylinder may be necessary. How long do I have to keep KeyCode Records? Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Can I get a KeyCode changed in the Look-Up system? Yes, KeyCodes can be changed in the Look-Up system if a lock cylinder has been changed. Contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. What information do I need before I can provide a driver of a company fleet vehicle Keys or KeyCode information? The dealership should have a copy of the individual's driver's license, proof of employment and registration. If there is any question as to the customer's employment by the fleet company, the dealer should attempt to contact the fleet company for verification. If there is not enough information to determine ownership and employment, this information should not be provided. How do I document a request from an Independent Repair facility for a KeyCode or Key? The independent must provide a copy of their driver's license, proof of employment and signed copy of the repair order for that repair facility. The repair order must include customer's name, address, VIN, city, province and license plate number. Copies of this information must be included in your dealer KeyCode file. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 11089 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics Keyless Starting System: Technical Service Bulletins Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-52-002 Date: February 27, 2008 Subject: Diagnostic Information for Inoperative Remote Vehicle Start Models: 2005-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2008 HUMMER H2 with Remote Keyless Entry RPOs AP3 or AP8 Remote Vehicle Start (RVS) Inoperative Diagnostic Concerns Information on Hood Latch Switches One of the many components involved in the Remote Vehicle Starting System is the Hood Latch Switch. The state of this switch is checked by the BCM during a remote vehicle start request and the component must function properly in order for the vehicle to commence a remote start event. During the infancy of this option (RPO AP3/AP8) parts return analysis showed a significantly shorter than expected component life for the Hood Latch Switch shared across many different GM vehicles. The switches currently being factory installed, and sent as service replacement parts, are vastly improved in design and suitably robust. Most hood latch switches currently returned under warranty are analyzed and determined to have no trouble found (NTF). It is understandable and desirable that technicians gain familiarity with the vehicles they service on a daily basis, however it is required that technicians follow Strategy Based Diagnostics before replacing this switch. Important: The ONLY way to repair or replace a hood latch switch is to replace the LATCH ASSEMBLY. The switch CANNOT be serviced separately from the latch and is NOT AVAILABLE from GMSPO. Any effort to remove the switch from the latch will permanently damage the switch and void the warranty coverage of that part. Important: The hood switch provides status of the hood to the BCM for RVS purposes. The switch is integrated into the hood latch assembly. The hood ajar switch provides two separate inputs to the BCM. These separate inputs allow the BCM to actively monitor for a hood ajar switch fault. RVS System Operation The remote vehicle start (RVS) function allows engine starting while not in the vehicle. It also allows the vehicle HVAC system and other vehicle systems to enable providing a comfortable vehicle upon entry. RVS functions have an operating range of up to 59 m (195 ft) depending on conditions. The RVS sequence begins by pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and holding the RVS buttons on the keyless entry transmitter. The turn signal lamps will illuminate to indicate the vehicle has received the remote start request. Each time an RVS is performed the vehicle doors are locked; however they may then be unlocked/locked with the transmitter or vehicle key at any time. Once activated the engine is allowed to run for 10 minutes. The RVS time may be extended by an additional 10 minutes by again pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and holding the RVS buttons on the transmitter. This feature is called an RVS continue and allows a maximum of 20 minutes of engine running. If the RVS continue is performed at 7 minutes into the initial 10 minute time-out a total of 17 minutes of engine running would occur. The RVS event may be suspended at any time by pressing only the RVS button on the transmitter or by entering the vehicle and turning ON the hazard lamps. RVS System Description Remote vehicle start (RVS) begins as a Radio Frequency (RF) message received by the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) from a keyless entry transmitter. The RVS request is sent by the RCDLR to the body control module (BCM) via serial data line. The BCM monitors system conditions such as content theft deterrent (CTD) closures ajar status and body DTCs to determine if an RVS event will occur. If conditions are determined to be acceptable the RVS message is sent to the engine control module (ECM). The ECM monitors system conditions such as engine control parameters and vehicle theft deterrent (VTD) to determine if engine starting will be allowed. If conditions are acceptable the ECM will initiate engine starting. During Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics > Page 11094 the engine run time in an RVS attempt before the operator enters the vehicle the ECM may discontinue engine operation if system conditions require it or a message is received from the BCM requesting the engine be turned OFF. Reasons an RVS event will NOT Happen The RVS System WILL NOT operate if any of the following conditions are present: ^ A current vehicle DTC that illuminates the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is set - obtain vehicle DTCs. ^ Keyless Entry Transmitter is not Operational. ^ The vehicle is in Valet Mode. ^ RVS is Disabled through Vehicle Personalization. ^ More than 2 Remote Starts have been attempted. ^ The HAZARD switch is in the ON position. ^ A current HAZARD switch DTC is set. ^ A current HOOD AJAR DTC is set. ^ Rear compartment lid is ajar. ^ Any Door is not locked. ^ The Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) system detects an alarm trigger. ^ Engine RPM greater than 0 Detected. ^ Excessive Coolant TEMP is registered. ^ Accelerator pedal position greater than 0 percent. ^ Vehicle is not in PARK. ^ A current Vehicle Theft Deterrent Malfunction DTC. ^ A current Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System DTC is set. ^ A vehicle speed sensor signal is detected by the ECM. ^ Vehicle power mode is incorrect. Diagnostic Information Starting Point For additional assistance refer to Remote Vehicle Start Inoperative in the Electronic Service Information. This section will guide you through the complete Strategy Based Diagnostics and provide Specific Diagnostic Procedure Instructions. Warranty Information Please refer to the published Labor Time Guides and claim the corresponding labor operation for the component(s) replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Starter Motor: Service and Repair STARTER MOTOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery. 2. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove the starter motor solenoid positive terminal nut and electrical wires. 4. Remove the starter motor solenoid S terminal nut and electrical wire. 5. Remove the torque converter cover bolt (2). 6. Remove the torque converter cover (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11098 7. Remove the starter motor bolts (2, 3). 8. Remove the starter motor (1). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the starter motor (1). 2. Install the starter motor bolts (2, 3). Tighten the starter motor bolts to 43 N.m (32 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11099 3. Install the torque converter cover (1). 4. Install the torque converter cover bolt (2). Tighten the bolt to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 5. Install the starter motor solenoid S terminal electrical wire and nut. Tighten the solenoid S terminal nut to 3 N.m (27 lb in). 6. Install the starter motor solenoid positive terminal electrical wires and nut. Tighten the solenoid positive terminal nut to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Install the battery negative cable to the battery. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11103 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11104 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11105 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Starter Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations Power Outlets Components View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11115 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11116 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11117 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11118 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11119 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11120 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11121 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11122 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11123 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11124 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11125 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11126 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11127 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11128 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11129 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11130 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11131 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11132 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11133 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11134 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11135 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11136 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11137 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11138 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11139 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11140 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11141 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11142 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11143 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11144 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11145 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11146 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11147 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11148 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11149 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11150 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11151 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11152 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11153 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11154 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11155 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11156 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11157 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11158 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11159 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11160 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11161 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11162 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11163 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11164 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11165 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11166 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11167 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11168 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11169 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11170 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11171 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11172 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11173 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11174 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11175 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11176 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11177 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11178 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11179 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11180 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11181 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11182 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11183 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11184 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11185 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11186 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11187 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11188 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views Auxiliary Power Outlet - Front Auxiliary Power Outlet - Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console ACCESSORY POWER RECEPTACLE REPLACEMENT - FLOOR CONSOLE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuse located in the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block. 2. Lift the tether cap and locate 2 square holes in the receptacle. 3. Hold J 42059 at a 30 degree angle as you insert the tool into the receptacle. 4. Position one side of the tool in each hole. 5. Pull the receptacle straight out. 6. Disconnect the connector and remove the receptacle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console > Page 11191 1. Connect the receptacle connector. 2. Push the receptacle into the side trim. 3. Install the fuse. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console > Page 11192 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - 12 Volt Rear Quarter Trim ACCESSORY POWER RECEPTACLE REPLACEMENT - 12 VOLT - REAR QUARTER TRIM TOOLS REQUIRED J 42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuse located in the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block. 2. Lift the tether cap and locate 2 square holes in the receptacle. 3. Hold J 42059 at a 30 degree angle as you insert the tool into the receptacle. 4. Position one side of the tool in each hole. 5. Pull the receptacle straight out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console > Page 11193 6. Disconnect the connector and remove the receptacle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the receptacle connector. 2. Push the receptacle into the side trim. 3. Install the fuse. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11194 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Fuse: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Bulletin No.: 07-08-45-002 Date: September 05, 2007 ADVANCED SERVICE INFORMATION Subject: Service Alert: Concerns With Aftermarket Fuses in GM Vehicles Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X Concerns with Harbor Freight Tools "Storehouse" Branded Blade Type Fuses General Motors has become aware of a fuse recall by Harbor Freight Tools/Storehouse for a variety of aftermarket fuses. In two cases, these fuses have not provided protection for the wiring system of the vehicles they were customer installed in. Upon testing the 15 amp version, it was found that the fuse still would not "open" when shorted directly across the battery terminals. How to Identify These Fuses Packed in a 120 piece set, the fuse has a translucent, hard plastic, blue body with the amperage stamped into the top. There are no white painted numbers on the fuse to indicate amperage. There are no identifying marks on the fuse to tell who is making it. The fuses are known to be distributed by Harbor Freight Tools but there may be other marketers, and packaging of this style of fuse. It would be prudent to replace these fuses if found in a customers vehicle. Likewise, if wiring overheating is found you should check the fuse panel for the presence of this style of fuse. All GM dealers should use genuine GM fuses on the vehicles they service. You should also encourage the use of GM fuses to your customers to assure they are getting the required electrical system protection. GM has no knowledge of any concerns with other aftermarket fuses. If additional information becomes available, this bulletin will be updated. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block Fuse: Locations Underhood Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11201 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11202 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11203 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11204 Fuse: Locations I/P Fuse Block Label Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11205 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11206 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11209 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11210 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11211 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11212 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11213 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11214 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11215 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11216 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11217 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11218 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11219 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11220 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11221 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11222 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11223 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11224 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11225 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11226 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11227 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11228 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11229 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11230 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11231 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11232 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11233 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11234 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11235 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11236 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11237 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11238 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11239 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11240 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11241 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11242 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11243 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11244 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11245 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11246 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11247 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11248 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11249 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11250 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11251 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11252 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11253 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11254 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11255 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11256 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11257 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11258 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11259 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11260 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11261 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11262 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11263 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11264 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11265 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11266 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11267 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11268 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11269 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11270 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11271 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11272 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11273 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11274 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11275 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11276 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11277 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11278 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11279 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11280 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11281 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block Fuse: Application and ID Underhood Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11284 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11285 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11286 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11287 Fuse: Application and ID I/P Fuse Block Label Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11288 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11289 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11294 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11295 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11296 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11297 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11299 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11300 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11301 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11302 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11303 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11304 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11305 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11306 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11307 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11308 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11309 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11310 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11311 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11312 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11313 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11314 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11315 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11316 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11317 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11318 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11319 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11320 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11321 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11322 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11323 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11324 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11325 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11326 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11327 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11328 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11329 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11330 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11331 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11332 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11333 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11334 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11335 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11336 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11337 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11338 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11339 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11340 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11341 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11342 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11343 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11344 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11345 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11346 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11347 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11348 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11349 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11350 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11351 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11352 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11353 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11354 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11355 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11356 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11357 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11358 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11359 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11360 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11361 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11362 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11363 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11364 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11365 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11366 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11367 Fuse Block: Connector Views Fuse Block - Underhood C1 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11368 Fuse Block - Underhood C1 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11369 Fuse Block - Underhood C2 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11370 Fuse Block - Underhood C2 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11371 Fuse Block - Underhood C3 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11372 Fuse Block - Underhood C3 (Part 2) Fuse Block - Underhood C4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11373 Fuse Block - Underhood C5 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11374 I/P Fuse Block - I/P C1 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11375 I/P Fuse Block - I/P C1 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11376 I/P Fuse Block - I/P C1 (Part 3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11377 I/P Fuse Block - I/P C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11378 Fuse Block - I/P C3 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11379 Fuse Block - I/P C3 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11380 Fuse Block - I/P C3 (Part 3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Fuse Block: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition OFF. IMPORTANT: Record all preset radio stations. 2. Remove the screws from the battery cooling box. Remove the battery cover. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the positive battery cable. 5. Remove the console. 6. Remove the nut holding the following fuse block connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4): - The body 68-way connector (1) - The I/P 68-way connector (2) - The I/P 24-way connector (3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11383 7. Remove the bolt holding the fuse block into place. 8. Remove the ground wire (1). 9. Remove the fuse block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuse block and attach the ground wire (1) and attach the bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11384 2. Connect the harness connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4). Tighten the connectors to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the console. 4. Connect the positive battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the battery cooling box cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 7. Set the radio stations to the preset selections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11385 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the underhood accessory wiring junction block cover. 3. Remove the nut at the end of the fuse block and remove both the positive battery cable and the EPS cable. 4. Loosen the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block until the block can be lifted off the connectors. 5. Remove the I/P connectors (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11386 6. Pull up on each of the following 68-way connectors until they come out. IMPORTANT: All 3 fuse block 68-way connectors are held into place to the fuse block case by push-in retainers. 1. Fuse block case (1) 2. Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) 3. Engine 68-way connector (3) 4. I/P 68-way connector (4) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each of the following 68-way connectors into its proper location. - Fuse block case (1) - Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) - Engine 68-way connector (3) - I/P 68-way connector (4) 2. Push down on each connector until it is fully secured into the fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11387 3. Connect the I/P connectors (2). 4. Tighten the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the underhood accessory wiring junction block harness retaining bolts (1) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 5. Reconnect the positive battery cable and EPS at the end of the fuse block with the nut. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the fuse box cover. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Grounding Point: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11392 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11393 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11394 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11395 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11396 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11397 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 11406 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 11412 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C100 - C199 C102 - Body Harness To The Engine Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11415 C104 - LF WSS Harness To The Body Harness (with RPO Code JM4) C105 - RF WSS Harness To The Body Harness (with RPO Code JM4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11416 C106 - Body Harness To The Forward Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11417 C150 - Engine Harness To The Fuel Rail Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11418 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C200 - C299 C202 - I/P Harness To The HVAC Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11419 C200 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11420 C200 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11421 C204 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11422 C204 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11423 C275 - SIR Coil To The I/P Harness C276 - I/P Harness To The SIR Coil Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11424 C277 - SIR Coil To The Steering Wheel Control Switches Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11425 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C300 - C399 C300 - Body Harness To The Headliner Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11426 C303 - Headliner Jumper Harness To The I/P Harness (with RPO Code UE1) C304 - I/P Harness To The Shifter Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11427 C301 - Body Harness To The Console Harness C302 - Headliner Harness To The Sunroof Harness (with RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11428 C305 - Body Harness To The Driver Seat Harness (with RPO Code AG1/KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11429 C306 - Body Harness To The Front Passenger Seat Harness (with RPO Code KA1) C307 - Roof Rail Harness To The I/P Harness (with RPO Code ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11430 C308 - Roof Rail Module Harness To The I/P Harness (with RPO Code ASF) C310 - Driver Seat Jumper Harness To The Driver Seat Harness (with RPO Code AG1/KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11431 C312 - Body Harness To The Trailer Connector Adapter Harness (with RPO Code V92) C313 - Trailer Connector Adapter Harness To The Trailer Hitch Harness (with RPO Code V92) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11432 C311 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (with RPO Code ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11433 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C400 - C499 C400 - Body Harness To The LR Tail Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11434 C402 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Body Harness C403 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11435 C404 - Body Harness To The Rear WSS Harness (with RPO Code JM4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11436 C406 - Body Harness To The Fuel Tank Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11437 C401 - Body Harness To The RR Tail Lamp Harness C408 - Body Harness To The CHMSL Jumper Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11438 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C102 - Body Harness To The Engine Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11439 C104 - LF WSS Harness To The Body Harness (with RPO Code JM4) C105 - RF WSS Harness To The Body Harness (with RPO Code JM4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11440 C106 - Body Harness To The Forward Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11441 C150 - Engine Harness To The Fuel Rail Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11442 C202 - I/P Harness To The HVAC Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11443 C200 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11444 C200 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11445 C204 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11446 C204 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11447 C275 - SIR Coil To The I/P Harness C276 - I/P Harness To The SIR Coil Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11448 C277 - SIR Coil To The Steering Wheel Control Switches Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11449 C300 - Body Harness To The Headliner Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11450 C303 - Headliner Jumper Harness To The I/P Harness (with RPO Code UE1) C304 - I/P Harness To The Shifter Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11451 C301 - Body Harness To The Console Harness C302 - Headliner Harness To The Sunroof Harness (with RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11452 C305 - Body Harness To The Driver Seat Harness (with RPO Code AG1/KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11453 C306 - Body Harness To The Front Passenger Seat Harness (with RPO Code KA1) C307 - Roof Rail Harness To The I/P Harness (with RPO Code ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11454 C308 - Roof Rail Module Harness To The I/P Harness (with RPO Code ASF) C310 - Driver Seat Jumper Harness To The Driver Seat Harness (with RPO Code AG1/KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11455 C312 - Body Harness To The Trailer Connector Adapter Harness (with RPO Code V92) C313 - Trailer Connector Adapter Harness To The Trailer Hitch Harness (with RPO Code V92) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11456 C311 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (with RPO Code ASF) C400 - Body Harness To The LR Tail Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11457 C402 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Body Harness C403 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11458 C404 - Body Harness To The Rear WSS Harness (with RPO Code JM4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11459 C406 - Body Harness To The Fuel Tank Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11460 C401 - Body Harness To The RR Tail Lamp Harness C408 - Body Harness To The CHMSL Jumper Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11461 C500 - Body Harness To The LF Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11462 C500 - Body Harness To The RF Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11463 C700 - Body Harness To The LR Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11464 C800 - Body Harness To The RR Door Harness Circuit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11465 C900 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Liftgate Harness C901 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Liftgate Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11466 C903 - Right License Lamp To The Liftgate Harness C904 - CHMSL Jumper Harness To The CHMSL Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11467 C902 - Left License Lamp To The Liftgate Harness Splice Pack SP200 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block Relay Box: Application and ID Underhood Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11473 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11474 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11475 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11476 Relay Box: Application and ID I/P Fuse Block Label Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11477 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11478 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Relay Box: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition OFF. IMPORTANT: Record all preset radio stations. 2. Remove the screws from the battery cooling box. Remove the battery cover. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the positive battery cable. 5. Remove the console. 6. Remove the nut holding the following fuse block connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4): - The body 68-way connector (1) - The I/P 68-way connector (2) - The I/P 24-way connector (3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11481 7. Remove the bolt holding the fuse block into place. 8. Remove the ground wire (1). 9. Remove the fuse block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuse block and attach the ground wire (1) and attach the bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11482 2. Connect the harness connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4). Tighten the connectors to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the console. 4. Connect the positive battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the battery cooling box cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 7. Set the radio stations to the preset selections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11483 Relay Box: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the underhood accessory wiring junction block cover. 3. Remove the nut at the end of the fuse block and remove both the positive battery cable and the EPS cable. 4. Loosen the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block until the block can be lifted off the connectors. 5. Remove the I/P connectors (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11484 6. Pull up on each of the following 68-way connectors until they come out. IMPORTANT: All 3 fuse block 68-way connectors are held into place to the fuse block case by push-in retainers. 1. Fuse block case (1) 2. Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) 3. Engine 68-way connector (3) 4. I/P 68-way connector (4) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each of the following 68-way connectors into its proper location. - Fuse block case (1) - Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) - Engine 68-way connector (3) - I/P 68-way connector (4) 2. Push down on each connector until it is fully secured into the fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11485 3. Connect the I/P connectors (2). 4. Tighten the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the underhood accessory wiring junction block harness retaining bolts (1) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 5. Reconnect the positive battery cable and EPS at the end of the fuse block with the nut. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the fuse box cover. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block Relay Box: Application and ID Underhood Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11490 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11491 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11492 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11493 Relay Box: Application and ID I/P Fuse Block Label Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11494 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11495 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Relay Box: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition OFF. IMPORTANT: Record all preset radio stations. 2. Remove the screws from the battery cooling box. Remove the battery cover. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the positive battery cable. 5. Remove the console. 6. Remove the nut holding the following fuse block connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4): - The body 68-way connector (1) - The I/P 68-way connector (2) - The I/P 24-way connector (3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11498 7. Remove the bolt holding the fuse block into place. 8. Remove the ground wire (1). 9. Remove the fuse block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuse block and attach the ground wire (1) and attach the bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11499 2. Connect the harness connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4). Tighten the connectors to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the console. 4. Connect the positive battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the battery cooling box cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 7. Set the radio stations to the preset selections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11500 Relay Box: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the underhood accessory wiring junction block cover. 3. Remove the nut at the end of the fuse block and remove both the positive battery cable and the EPS cable. 4. Loosen the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block until the block can be lifted off the connectors. 5. Remove the I/P connectors (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11501 6. Pull up on each of the following 68-way connectors until they come out. IMPORTANT: All 3 fuse block 68-way connectors are held into place to the fuse block case by push-in retainers. 1. Fuse block case (1) 2. Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) 3. Engine 68-way connector (3) 4. I/P 68-way connector (4) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each of the following 68-way connectors into its proper location. - Fuse block case (1) - Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) - Engine 68-way connector (3) - I/P 68-way connector (4) 2. Push down on each connector until it is fully secured into the fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11502 3. Connect the I/P connectors (2). 4. Tighten the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the underhood accessory wiring junction block harness retaining bolts (1) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 5. Reconnect the positive battery cable and EPS at the end of the fuse block with the nut. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the fuse box cover. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11511 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11512 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11513 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 11518 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11524 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11525 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11526 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11531 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11532 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11533 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11534 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11535 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11536 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 11541 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Bulletin No.: 06-08-45-004 Date: May 02, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Instrument Panel (I/P), Body and General Wiring Harness Repair Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 Important: A part restriction has been implemented on all Body and I/P harnesses and is being administered by the PQC. If a body or I/P harness replacement is required, it can take 12-28 weeks for a harness to be built and delivered to a dealer. The dealer technician is expected to repair any harness damage as the first and best choice before replacing a harness. In an effort to standardize repair practices, General Motors is requiring that all wiring harnesses be repaired instead of replaced. If there is a question concerning which connector and/or terminal you are working on, refer to the information in the appropriate Connector End Views in SI. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal remove information. Important: There are some parts in the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit (i.e. SIR connector CPAs and heat shrink tube (used in high heat area pigtail replacement) and some TPAs that are not available from GMSPO. It is vitally important that each update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit be done as soon as it arrives at the dealer. Utilize the Terminal Repair Kit (J 38125) to achieve an effective wiring repair. The Terminal Repair Kit has been an essential tool for all GM Dealers since 1987. Replacement terminals and tools for this kit are available through SPX/Kent Moore. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-45-001 for more information. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal removal information. U.S. Dealers Only - Training courses (including Tech Assists, Emerging Issues, Web, IDL and Hands-on) are available through the GM Training website. Refer to Resources and then Training Materials for a complete list of available courses. Canadian Dealers Only - Refer to the Training section of GM infoNet for a complete list of available courses and a copy of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit Instruction Manual. Wiring repair information is also available in Service Information (SI). The Wiring Repair section contains information for the following types of wiring repairs: - Testing for intermittent conditions and poor conditions - Flat wire repairs - GMLAN wiring repairs - High temperature wiring repairs - Splicing copper wire using splice clips - Splicing copper wire using splice sleeves - Splicing twisted or shielded cable - Splicing inline harness diodes Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair > Page 11546 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11552 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11553 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11554 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11555 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11556 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11557 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Bulletin No.: 06-08-45-004 Date: May 02, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Instrument Panel (I/P), Body and General Wiring Harness Repair Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 Important: A part restriction has been implemented on all Body and I/P harnesses and is being administered by the PQC. If a body or I/P harness replacement is required, it can take 12-28 weeks for a harness to be built and delivered to a dealer. The dealer technician is expected to repair any harness damage as the first and best choice before replacing a harness. In an effort to standardize repair practices, General Motors is requiring that all wiring harnesses be repaired instead of replaced. If there is a question concerning which connector and/or terminal you are working on, refer to the information in the appropriate Connector End Views in SI. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal remove information. Important: There are some parts in the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit (i.e. SIR connector CPAs and heat shrink tube (used in high heat area pigtail replacement) and some TPAs that are not available from GMSPO. It is vitally important that each update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit be done as soon as it arrives at the dealer. Utilize the Terminal Repair Kit (J 38125) to achieve an effective wiring repair. The Terminal Repair Kit has been an essential tool for all GM Dealers since 1987. Replacement terminals and tools for this kit are available through SPX/Kent Moore. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-45-001 for more information. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal removal information. U.S. Dealers Only - Training courses (including Tech Assists, Emerging Issues, Web, IDL and Hands-on) are available through the GM Training website. Refer to Resources and then Training Materials for a complete list of available courses. Canadian Dealers Only - Refer to the Training section of GM infoNet for a complete list of available courses and a copy of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit Instruction Manual. Wiring repair information is also available in Service Information (SI). The Wiring Repair section contains information for the following types of wiring repairs: - Testing for intermittent conditions and poor conditions - Flat wire repairs - GMLAN wiring repairs - High temperature wiring repairs - Splicing copper wire using splice clips - Splicing copper wire using splice sleeves - Splicing twisted or shielded cable - Splicing inline harness diodes Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair > Page 11562 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations Power Outlets Components View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11569 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11570 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11571 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11572 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11573 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11574 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11575 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11576 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11577 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11578 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11579 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11580 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11581 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11582 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11583 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11584 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11585 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11586 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11587 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11588 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11589 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11590 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11591 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11592 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11593 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11594 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11595 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11596 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11597 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11598 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11599 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11600 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11601 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11602 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11603 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11604 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11605 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11606 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11607 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11608 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11609 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11610 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11611 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11612 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11613 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11614 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11615 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11616 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11617 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11618 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11619 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11620 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11621 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11622 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11623 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11624 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11625 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11626 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11627 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11628 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11629 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11630 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11631 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11632 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11633 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11634 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11635 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11636 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11637 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11638 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11639 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11640 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11641 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11642 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views Auxiliary Power Outlet - Front Auxiliary Power Outlet - Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console ACCESSORY POWER RECEPTACLE REPLACEMENT - FLOOR CONSOLE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuse located in the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block. 2. Lift the tether cap and locate 2 square holes in the receptacle. 3. Hold J 42059 at a 30 degree angle as you insert the tool into the receptacle. 4. Position one side of the tool in each hole. 5. Pull the receptacle straight out. 6. Disconnect the connector and remove the receptacle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console > Page 11645 1. Connect the receptacle connector. 2. Push the receptacle into the side trim. 3. Install the fuse. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console > Page 11646 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - 12 Volt Rear Quarter Trim ACCESSORY POWER RECEPTACLE REPLACEMENT - 12 VOLT - REAR QUARTER TRIM TOOLS REQUIRED J 42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuse located in the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block. 2. Lift the tether cap and locate 2 square holes in the receptacle. 3. Hold J 42059 at a 30 degree angle as you insert the tool into the receptacle. 4. Position one side of the tool in each hole. 5. Pull the receptacle straight out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console > Page 11647 6. Disconnect the connector and remove the receptacle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the receptacle connector. 2. Push the receptacle into the side trim. 3. Install the fuse. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11648 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Fuse: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Bulletin No.: 07-08-45-002 Date: September 05, 2007 ADVANCED SERVICE INFORMATION Subject: Service Alert: Concerns With Aftermarket Fuses in GM Vehicles Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X Concerns with Harbor Freight Tools "Storehouse" Branded Blade Type Fuses General Motors has become aware of a fuse recall by Harbor Freight Tools/Storehouse for a variety of aftermarket fuses. In two cases, these fuses have not provided protection for the wiring system of the vehicles they were customer installed in. Upon testing the 15 amp version, it was found that the fuse still would not "open" when shorted directly across the battery terminals. How to Identify These Fuses Packed in a 120 piece set, the fuse has a translucent, hard plastic, blue body with the amperage stamped into the top. There are no white painted numbers on the fuse to indicate amperage. There are no identifying marks on the fuse to tell who is making it. The fuses are known to be distributed by Harbor Freight Tools but there may be other marketers, and packaging of this style of fuse. It would be prudent to replace these fuses if found in a customers vehicle. Likewise, if wiring overheating is found you should check the fuse panel for the presence of this style of fuse. All GM dealers should use genuine GM fuses on the vehicles they service. You should also encourage the use of GM fuses to your customers to assure they are getting the required electrical system protection. GM has no knowledge of any concerns with other aftermarket fuses. If additional information becomes available, this bulletin will be updated. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block Fuse: Locations Underhood Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11655 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11656 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11657 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11658 Fuse: Locations I/P Fuse Block Label Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11659 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11660 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11663 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11664 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11665 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11666 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11667 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11668 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11669 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11670 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11671 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11672 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11673 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11674 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11675 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11676 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11677 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11678 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11679 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11680 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11681 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11682 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11683 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11684 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11685 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11686 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11687 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11688 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11689 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11690 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11691 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11692 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11693 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11694 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11695 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11696 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11697 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11698 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11699 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11700 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11701 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11702 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11703 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11704 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11705 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11706 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11707 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11708 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11709 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11710 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11711 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11712 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11713 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11714 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11715 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11716 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11717 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11718 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11719 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11720 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11721 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11722 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11723 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11724 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11725 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11726 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11727 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11728 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11729 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11730 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11731 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11732 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11733 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11734 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11735 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block Fuse: Application and ID Underhood Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11738 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11739 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11740 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11741 Fuse: Application and ID I/P Fuse Block Label Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11742 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11743 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11748 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11749 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11750 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11751 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11752 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11753 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11754 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11755 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11756 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11757 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11758 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11759 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11760 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11761 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11762 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11763 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11764 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11765 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11766 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11767 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11768 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11769 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11770 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11771 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11772 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11773 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11774 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11775 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11776 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11777 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11778 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11779 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11780 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11781 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11782 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11783 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11784 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11785 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11786 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11787 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11788 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11789 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11790 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11791 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11792 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11793 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11794 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11795 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11796 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11797 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11798 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11799 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11800 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11801 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11802 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11803 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11804 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11805 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11806 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11807 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11808 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11809 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11810 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11811 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11812 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11813 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11814 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11815 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11816 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11817 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11818 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11819 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11820 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11821 Fuse Block: Connector Views Fuse Block - Underhood C1 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11822 Fuse Block - Underhood C1 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11823 Fuse Block - Underhood C2 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11824 Fuse Block - Underhood C2 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11825 Fuse Block - Underhood C3 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11826 Fuse Block - Underhood C3 (Part 2) Fuse Block - Underhood C4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11827 Fuse Block - Underhood C5 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11828 I/P Fuse Block - I/P C1 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11829 I/P Fuse Block - I/P C1 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11830 I/P Fuse Block - I/P C1 (Part 3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11831 I/P Fuse Block - I/P C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11832 Fuse Block - I/P C3 (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11833 Fuse Block - I/P C3 (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11834 Fuse Block - I/P C3 (Part 3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Fuse Block: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition OFF. IMPORTANT: Record all preset radio stations. 2. Remove the screws from the battery cooling box. Remove the battery cover. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the positive battery cable. 5. Remove the console. 6. Remove the nut holding the following fuse block connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4): - The body 68-way connector (1) - The I/P 68-way connector (2) - The I/P 24-way connector (3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11837 7. Remove the bolt holding the fuse block into place. 8. Remove the ground wire (1). 9. Remove the fuse block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuse block and attach the ground wire (1) and attach the bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11838 2. Connect the harness connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4). Tighten the connectors to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the console. 4. Connect the positive battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the battery cooling box cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 7. Set the radio stations to the preset selections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11839 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the underhood accessory wiring junction block cover. 3. Remove the nut at the end of the fuse block and remove both the positive battery cable and the EPS cable. 4. Loosen the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block until the block can be lifted off the connectors. 5. Remove the I/P connectors (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11840 6. Pull up on each of the following 68-way connectors until they come out. IMPORTANT: All 3 fuse block 68-way connectors are held into place to the fuse block case by push-in retainers. 1. Fuse block case (1) 2. Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) 3. Engine 68-way connector (3) 4. I/P 68-way connector (4) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each of the following 68-way connectors into its proper location. - Fuse block case (1) - Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) - Engine 68-way connector (3) - I/P 68-way connector (4) 2. Push down on each connector until it is fully secured into the fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11841 3. Connect the I/P connectors (2). 4. Tighten the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the underhood accessory wiring junction block harness retaining bolts (1) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 5. Reconnect the positive battery cable and EPS at the end of the fuse block with the nut. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the fuse box cover. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Grounding Point: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11846 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11847 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11848 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11849 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11850 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11851 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 11860 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 11866 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C100 - C199 C102 - Body Harness To The Engine Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11869 C104 - LF WSS Harness To The Body Harness (with RPO Code JM4) C105 - RF WSS Harness To The Body Harness (with RPO Code JM4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11870 C106 - Body Harness To The Forward Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11871 C150 - Engine Harness To The Fuel Rail Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11872 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C200 - C299 C202 - I/P Harness To The HVAC Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11873 C200 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11874 C200 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11875 C204 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11876 C204 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11877 C275 - SIR Coil To The I/P Harness C276 - I/P Harness To The SIR Coil Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11878 C277 - SIR Coil To The Steering Wheel Control Switches Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11879 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C300 - C399 C300 - Body Harness To The Headliner Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11880 C303 - Headliner Jumper Harness To The I/P Harness (with RPO Code UE1) C304 - I/P Harness To The Shifter Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11881 C301 - Body Harness To The Console Harness C302 - Headliner Harness To The Sunroof Harness (with RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11882 C305 - Body Harness To The Driver Seat Harness (with RPO Code AG1/KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11883 C306 - Body Harness To The Front Passenger Seat Harness (with RPO Code KA1) C307 - Roof Rail Harness To The I/P Harness (with RPO Code ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11884 C308 - Roof Rail Module Harness To The I/P Harness (with RPO Code ASF) C310 - Driver Seat Jumper Harness To The Driver Seat Harness (with RPO Code AG1/KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11885 C312 - Body Harness To The Trailer Connector Adapter Harness (with RPO Code V92) C313 - Trailer Connector Adapter Harness To The Trailer Hitch Harness (with RPO Code V92) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11886 C311 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (with RPO Code ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11887 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C400 - C499 C400 - Body Harness To The LR Tail Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11888 C402 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Body Harness C403 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11889 C404 - Body Harness To The Rear WSS Harness (with RPO Code JM4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11890 C406 - Body Harness To The Fuel Tank Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11891 C401 - Body Harness To The RR Tail Lamp Harness C408 - Body Harness To The CHMSL Jumper Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11892 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C102 - Body Harness To The Engine Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11893 C104 - LF WSS Harness To The Body Harness (with RPO Code JM4) C105 - RF WSS Harness To The Body Harness (with RPO Code JM4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11894 C106 - Body Harness To The Forward Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11895 C150 - Engine Harness To The Fuel Rail Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11896 C202 - I/P Harness To The HVAC Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11897 C200 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11898 C200 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11899 C204 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11900 C204 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (Part 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11901 C275 - SIR Coil To The I/P Harness C276 - I/P Harness To The SIR Coil Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11902 C277 - SIR Coil To The Steering Wheel Control Switches Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11903 C300 - Body Harness To The Headliner Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11904 C303 - Headliner Jumper Harness To The I/P Harness (with RPO Code UE1) C304 - I/P Harness To The Shifter Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11905 C301 - Body Harness To The Console Harness C302 - Headliner Harness To The Sunroof Harness (with RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11906 C305 - Body Harness To The Driver Seat Harness (with RPO Code AG1/KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11907 C306 - Body Harness To The Front Passenger Seat Harness (with RPO Code KA1) C307 - Roof Rail Harness To The I/P Harness (with RPO Code ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11908 C308 - Roof Rail Module Harness To The I/P Harness (with RPO Code ASF) C310 - Driver Seat Jumper Harness To The Driver Seat Harness (with RPO Code AG1/KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11909 C312 - Body Harness To The Trailer Connector Adapter Harness (with RPO Code V92) C313 - Trailer Connector Adapter Harness To The Trailer Hitch Harness (with RPO Code V92) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11910 C311 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness (with RPO Code ASF) C400 - Body Harness To The LR Tail Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11911 C402 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Body Harness C403 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11912 C404 - Body Harness To The Rear WSS Harness (with RPO Code JM4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11913 C406 - Body Harness To The Fuel Tank Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11914 C401 - Body Harness To The RR Tail Lamp Harness C408 - Body Harness To The CHMSL Jumper Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11915 C500 - Body Harness To The LF Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11916 C500 - Body Harness To The RF Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11917 C700 - Body Harness To The LR Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11918 C800 - Body Harness To The RR Door Harness Circuit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11919 C900 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Liftgate Harness C901 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Liftgate Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11920 C903 - Right License Lamp To The Liftgate Harness C904 - CHMSL Jumper Harness To The CHMSL Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 11921 C902 - Left License Lamp To The Liftgate Harness Splice Pack SP200 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block Relay Box: Application and ID Underhood Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11927 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11928 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11929 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11930 Relay Box: Application and ID I/P Fuse Block Label Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11931 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11932 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Relay Box: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition OFF. IMPORTANT: Record all preset radio stations. 2. Remove the screws from the battery cooling box. Remove the battery cover. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the positive battery cable. 5. Remove the console. 6. Remove the nut holding the following fuse block connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4): - The body 68-way connector (1) - The I/P 68-way connector (2) - The I/P 24-way connector (3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11935 7. Remove the bolt holding the fuse block into place. 8. Remove the ground wire (1). 9. Remove the fuse block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuse block and attach the ground wire (1) and attach the bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11936 2. Connect the harness connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4). Tighten the connectors to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the console. 4. Connect the positive battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the battery cooling box cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 7. Set the radio stations to the preset selections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11937 Relay Box: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the underhood accessory wiring junction block cover. 3. Remove the nut at the end of the fuse block and remove both the positive battery cable and the EPS cable. 4. Loosen the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block until the block can be lifted off the connectors. 5. Remove the I/P connectors (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11938 6. Pull up on each of the following 68-way connectors until they come out. IMPORTANT: All 3 fuse block 68-way connectors are held into place to the fuse block case by push-in retainers. 1. Fuse block case (1) 2. Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) 3. Engine 68-way connector (3) 4. I/P 68-way connector (4) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each of the following 68-way connectors into its proper location. - Fuse block case (1) - Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) - Engine 68-way connector (3) - I/P 68-way connector (4) 2. Push down on each connector until it is fully secured into the fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11939 3. Connect the I/P connectors (2). 4. Tighten the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the underhood accessory wiring junction block harness retaining bolts (1) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 5. Reconnect the positive battery cable and EPS at the end of the fuse block with the nut. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the fuse box cover. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block Relay Box: Application and ID Underhood Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11944 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11945 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11946 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11947 Relay Box: Application and ID I/P Fuse Block Label Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11948 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 11949 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Relay Box: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition OFF. IMPORTANT: Record all preset radio stations. 2. Remove the screws from the battery cooling box. Remove the battery cover. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the positive battery cable. 5. Remove the console. 6. Remove the nut holding the following fuse block connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4): - The body 68-way connector (1) - The I/P 68-way connector (2) - The I/P 24-way connector (3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11952 7. Remove the bolt holding the fuse block into place. 8. Remove the ground wire (1). 9. Remove the fuse block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuse block and attach the ground wire (1) and attach the bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11953 2. Connect the harness connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4). Tighten the connectors to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the console. 4. Connect the positive battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the battery cooling box cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 7. Set the radio stations to the preset selections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11954 Relay Box: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the underhood accessory wiring junction block cover. 3. Remove the nut at the end of the fuse block and remove both the positive battery cable and the EPS cable. 4. Loosen the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block until the block can be lifted off the connectors. 5. Remove the I/P connectors (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11955 6. Pull up on each of the following 68-way connectors until they come out. IMPORTANT: All 3 fuse block 68-way connectors are held into place to the fuse block case by push-in retainers. 1. Fuse block case (1) 2. Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) 3. Engine 68-way connector (3) 4. I/P 68-way connector (4) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each of the following 68-way connectors into its proper location. - Fuse block case (1) - Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) - Engine 68-way connector (3) - I/P 68-way connector (4) 2. Push down on each connector until it is fully secured into the fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 11956 3. Connect the I/P connectors (2). 4. Tighten the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the underhood accessory wiring junction block harness retaining bolts (1) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 5. Reconnect the positive battery cable and EPS at the end of the fuse block with the nut. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the fuse box cover. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11965 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11966 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11967 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 11972 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11978 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11979 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11980 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11985 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11986 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11987 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11988 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11989 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 11990 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 11995 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Bulletin No.: 06-08-45-004 Date: May 02, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Instrument Panel (I/P), Body and General Wiring Harness Repair Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 Important: A part restriction has been implemented on all Body and I/P harnesses and is being administered by the PQC. If a body or I/P harness replacement is required, it can take 12-28 weeks for a harness to be built and delivered to a dealer. The dealer technician is expected to repair any harness damage as the first and best choice before replacing a harness. In an effort to standardize repair practices, General Motors is requiring that all wiring harnesses be repaired instead of replaced. If there is a question concerning which connector and/or terminal you are working on, refer to the information in the appropriate Connector End Views in SI. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal remove information. Important: There are some parts in the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit (i.e. SIR connector CPAs and heat shrink tube (used in high heat area pigtail replacement) and some TPAs that are not available from GMSPO. It is vitally important that each update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit be done as soon as it arrives at the dealer. Utilize the Terminal Repair Kit (J 38125) to achieve an effective wiring repair. The Terminal Repair Kit has been an essential tool for all GM Dealers since 1987. Replacement terminals and tools for this kit are available through SPX/Kent Moore. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-45-001 for more information. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal removal information. U.S. Dealers Only - Training courses (including Tech Assists, Emerging Issues, Web, IDL and Hands-on) are available through the GM Training website. Refer to Resources and then Training Materials for a complete list of available courses. Canadian Dealers Only - Refer to the Training section of GM infoNet for a complete list of available courses and a copy of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit Instruction Manual. Wiring repair information is also available in Service Information (SI). The Wiring Repair section contains information for the following types of wiring repairs: - Testing for intermittent conditions and poor conditions - Flat wire repairs - GMLAN wiring repairs - High temperature wiring repairs - Splicing copper wire using splice clips - Splicing copper wire using splice sleeves - Splicing twisted or shielded cable - Splicing inline harness diodes Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair > Page 12000 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 12006 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 12007 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 12008 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 12009 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 12010 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 12011 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Bulletin No.: 06-08-45-004 Date: May 02, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Instrument Panel (I/P), Body and General Wiring Harness Repair Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 Important: A part restriction has been implemented on all Body and I/P harnesses and is being administered by the PQC. If a body or I/P harness replacement is required, it can take 12-28 weeks for a harness to be built and delivered to a dealer. The dealer technician is expected to repair any harness damage as the first and best choice before replacing a harness. In an effort to standardize repair practices, General Motors is requiring that all wiring harnesses be repaired instead of replaced. If there is a question concerning which connector and/or terminal you are working on, refer to the information in the appropriate Connector End Views in SI. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal remove information. Important: There are some parts in the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit (i.e. SIR connector CPAs and heat shrink tube (used in high heat area pigtail replacement) and some TPAs that are not available from GMSPO. It is vitally important that each update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit be done as soon as it arrives at the dealer. Utilize the Terminal Repair Kit (J 38125) to achieve an effective wiring repair. The Terminal Repair Kit has been an essential tool for all GM Dealers since 1987. Replacement terminals and tools for this kit are available through SPX/Kent Moore. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-45-001 for more information. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal removal information. U.S. Dealers Only - Training courses (including Tech Assists, Emerging Issues, Web, IDL and Hands-on) are available through the GM Training website. Refer to Resources and then Training Materials for a complete list of available courses. Canadian Dealers Only - Refer to the Training section of GM infoNet for a complete list of available courses and a copy of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit Instruction Manual. Wiring repair information is also available in Service Information (SI). The Wiring Repair section contains information for the following types of wiring repairs: - Testing for intermittent conditions and poor conditions - Flat wire repairs - GMLAN wiring repairs - High temperature wiring repairs - Splicing copper wire using splice clips - Splicing copper wire using splice sleeves - Splicing twisted or shielded cable - Splicing inline harness diodes Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair > Page 12016 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-07-009C Date: December 09, 2010 Subject: Wheel Alignment Specifications, Requirements and Recommendations for GM Vehicles Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being extensively revised to provide technicians and warranty administrators with an all inclusive guide for wheel alignments. PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-07-009B (Section 03 - Suspension). Purpose The purpose of this bulletin is to provide retail, wholesale and fleet personnel with General Motors' warranty service requirements and recommendations for customer concerns related to wheel alignment. For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all of GM's Standard Wheel Alignment Service Procedures, Policy Guidelines and bulletins on wheel alignment warranty service. Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. The following five (5) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a successful wheel alignment service. 1. Verify the vehicle is in an Original Equipment condition for curb weight, tires, wheels, suspension and steering configurations. Vehicles modified in any of these areas are not covered for wheel alignment warranty. 2. Review the customer concern relative to "Normal Operation" definitions. 3. Verify that vehicle is within the "Mileage Policy" range. 4. Document wheel alignment warranty claims appropriately for labor operations E2000 and E2020. The following information must be documented or attached to the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 5. Use the proper wheel alignment equipment (preferred with print-out capability), process and the appropriate calibration maintenance schedules. Important If it is determined that a wheel alignment is necessary under warranty, use the proper labor code for the repair. E2000 for Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe set or E2020 for Wheel Alignment Check/Adjust includes Caster, Camber and Toe set (Wheel alignment labor time for other component repairs is to be charged to the component that causes a wheel alignment operation.). The following flowchart is to help summarize the information detailed in this bulletin and should be used whenever a wheel alignment is performed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 12022 Verify Original Equipment Condition of the Vehicle - Verify that Original Equipment Tires and Wheels or Official GM Accessory Tires and Wheels are on the vehicle. - Verify that aftermarket suspension "Lift" or "Lowering" Kits or other suspension alterations have NOT been done to the vehicle. - Check for accidental damage to the vehicle; for example, severe pothole or curb impacts, collision damage that may have affected the wheel alignment of the vehicle; e.g., engine cradles, suspension control arms, axles, wheels, wheel covers, tires may show evidence of damage/impact. - Check to be sure vehicle has seen "Normal Use" rather than abuse; e.g., very aggressive driving may show up by looking at the tires and condition of the vehicle. - Check for other additional equipment items that may significantly affect vehicle mass such as large tool boxes, campers, snow plow packages (without the snowplow RPO), etc., especially in trucks and cutaway/incomplete vehicles. Significant additional mass can affect trim height and wheel alignment of the vehicle and may necessitate a customer pay wheel alignment when placed semi-permanently in the vehicle (Upfitter instructions are to realign the vehicle after placement of these types of items. (This typically applies to trucks and incomplete vehicles that can be upfit with equipment such as the above.) Customer Concerns, "Normal Operation" Conditions and "Mileage Policy" Possible Concerns The following are typical conditions that may require wheel alignment warranty service: 1. Lead/Pull: defined as "at a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight heading." Important Please evaluate for the condition with hands-on the steering wheel. Follow the "Vehicle Leads/Pulls" diagnostic tree located in SI to determine the cause of a lead/pull concern. Lead/Pull concerns can be due to road crown or road slope, tires, wheel alignment or even in rare circumstances a steering gear issue. Lead/pull concerns due to road crown are considered "Normal Operation" and are NOT a warrantable condition -- the customer should be advised that this is "Normal Operation." Important Some customers may comment on a "Lead/Pull" when they hold the steering wheel in a level condition. If so, this is more likely a "steering wheel angle" concern because the customer is "steering" the vehicle to obtain a "level" steering wheel. 2. Steering wheel angle to the left or right (counter-clockwise or clockwise, respectively): Defined as the steering wheel angle (clocking) deviation from "level" while maintaining a straight heading on a typical straight road. 3. Irregular or Premature tire wear: Slight to very slight "feathering" or "edge" wear on the shoulders of tires is NOT considered unusual and should even out with a tire rotation; if the customer is concerned about a "feathering" condition of the tires, the customer could be advised to rotate the tires earlier than the next scheduled mileage/maintenance interval (but no later than the next interval). Be sure to understand the customer's driving habits as this will also heavily influence the tire wear performance; tire wear from aggressive or abusive driving habits is NOT a warrantable condition. Important Slight or mild feathering, cupping, edge or heel/toe wear of tire tread shoulders is "normal" and can show up very early in a tire/vehicle service mileage; in fact, some new tires can show evidence of feathering from the factory. These issues do NOT affect the overall performance and tread life of the tire. Dealer personnel should always check the customer's maintenance records to ensure that tire inflation pressure is being maintained to placard and that the tires are being rotated (modified-X pattern) at the proper mileage intervals. Wheel alignments are NOT to be performed for the types of "Normal" Tire Feathering shown in Figures 1-4 below. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 12023 Figure 1: Full Tread View - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder/Adjacent/Center Ribs Figure 2: Tire Shoulder View Example 1 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder Figure 3: Tire Shoulder View Example 2 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Figure 4: Detail Side View of Tire Shoulder Area - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Important When a wheel alignment is deemed necessary for tire wear, be sure to document on the repair order, in as much detail as possible, the severity and type of tire wear (e.g., severe center wear or severe inside or outside shoulder wear) and the position of the tire on the vehicle (RF, LF, LR, RR). Please note the customer's concern with the wear such as, noise, appearance, wear life, etc. A field product report with pictures of the tire wear condition is recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002J and #07-00-89-036C. 4. Other repairs that affect wheel alignment; e.g., certain component replacement such as suspension control arm replacement, engine cradle adjustment/replace, steering gear replacement, steering tie rod replace, suspension strut/shock, steering knuckle, etc. may require a wheel alignment. Important If other components or repairs are identified as affecting the wheel alignment, policy calls for the wheel alignment labor time to be charged to the replaced/repaired component's labor operation time rather than the wheel alignment labor operations. Important Vibration type customer concerns are generally NOT due to wheel alignment except in the rare cases; e.g., extreme diagonal wear across the tread. In general, wheel alignments are NOT to be performed as an investigation/correction for vibration concerns. "Normal Operation" Conditions Vehicle Lead/Pull Due to Road Crown or Slope: As part of "Normal Operation," vehicles will follow side-to-side or left to right road crown or slope. Be sure to verify from the customer the types of roads they are driving as they may not recognize the influence of road crown on vehicle lead/pull and steering wheel angle. If a vehicle requires significant steering effort to prevent it from "climbing" the road crown there may be an issue to be looked into further. Important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 12024 A wheel alignment will generally NOT correct vehicles that follow the road crown since this is within "Normal Operation." Mileage Policy The following mileage policy applies for E2020 and E2000 labor operations: Note Wheel Alignment is NOT covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for Express and Savana Cutaway vehicles as these vehicles require Upfitters to set the wheel alignment after completing the vehicles. - 0-800 km (0-500 mi): E2000/E2020 claims ONLY allowed with Call Center Authorization. Due to the tie down during shipping, the vehicle's suspension requires some time to reach normal operating position. For this reason, new vehicles are generally NOT to be aligned until they have accumulated at least 800 km (500 mi). A field product report should accompany any claim within this mileage range. - 801-12,000 km (501-7,500 mi): - If a vehicle came from the factory with incorrect alignment settings, any resulting off-angle steering wheel, lead/pull characteristics or the rare occurrence of excessive tire wear would be apparent early in the life of the vehicle. The following policy applies: - Vehicles 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe - Escalade/ESV/EXT, Tahoe/Suburban, Yukon/XL/Denali, Silverado/Sierra, Express/Savana, Corvette and Colorado/Canyon: E2000/E2020 Claims: Call Center Authorization Required - All Vehicles NOT 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe as noted above: E2000/E2020 Claims: Dealer Service Manager Authorization Required - 12,001 km and beyond (7,501 miles and beyond): During this period, customers are responsible for the wheel alignment expense or dealers may provide on a case-by case basis a one-time customer enthusiasm claim up to 16,000 km (10,000 mi). In the event that a defective component required the use of the subject labor operations, the identified defective component labor operation will include the appropriate labor time for a wheel alignment as an add condition to the component repair. Important Only one wheel alignment labor operation claim (E2000 or E2020) may be used per VIN. Warranty Documentation Requirements When a wheel alignment service has been deemed necessary, the following items will need to be clearly documented on/with the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 1. Document the customer concern in as much detail as possible on the repair order and in the warranty administration system. Preferred examples: - Steering wheel is off angle in the counterclockwise direction by approximately x degrees or clocking position. - Vehicle lead/pulls to the right at approximately x-y mph. Vehicle will climb the road crown. Severe, Moderate or Slight. - RF and LF tires are wearing on the outside shoulders with severe feathering. Important In the event of a lead/pull or steering wheel angle concern, please note the direction of lead/pull (left or right) or direction of steering wheel angle (clockwise or counterclockwise) on the repair order and within the warranty claim verbatim. Important In the event of a tire wear concern, please note the position on the vehicle and where the wear is occurring on the tire; i.e., the RF tire is wearing on the inside shoulder. 2. Document the technician's findings on cause and correction of the issue. Examples: - Reset LF toe from 0.45 degrees to 0.10 degrees and RF toe from -0.25 degrees to 0.10 degrees to correct the steering wheel angle from 5 degrees counterclockwise to 0 degrees. - Reset LF camber from 0.25 degrees to -0.05 degrees to correct the cross-camber condition of +0.30 degrees to 0.00 degrees on the vehicle. - Front Sum toe was found to be 0.50 degrees, reset to 0.20 degrees. 3. Print-out the "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings and attach them to the Repair Order or if print-out capability is not Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 12025 available, measurements may also be clearly and legibly handwritten into the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire attached to this bulletin. 4. Attach the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire below along with the print-out of "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements to the Repair Order and retain for use by GM. Wheel Alignment Equipment and Process Wheel alignments must be performed with a quality machine that will give accurate results when performing checks. "External Reference" (image-based camera technology) is preferred. Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-00-89-029B: General Motors Dealership Critical Equipment Requirements and Recommendations. Requirements: - Computerized four wheel alignment system. - Computer capable of printing before and after alignment reports. - Computer capable of time and date stamp printout. - Racking system must have jacking capability - Racking system must be capable of level to 1.6 mm (1/16 in) - Appropriate wheel stops and safety certification - Built-in turn plates and slip plates - Wheel clamps capable of attaching to 20" or larger wheels - Racking capable of accepting any GM passenger car or light duty truck - Operator properly trained and ASE-certified (U.S. only) in wheel alignment Recommendations: Racking should have front and rear jacking capability. Equipment Maintenance and Calibration: Alignment machines must be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. Most manufacturers recommend the following: - Alignment machines with "internal reference" sensors should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) every six months. - Alignment machines with "external reference" (image-based camera technology) should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) once a year. - Racks must be kept level to within 1.6 mm (1/16 in). - If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged in some way, check the calibration immediately. Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. Wheel Alignment Process When performing wheel alignment measurement and/or adjustment, the following steps should be taken: Preliminary Steps: 1. Verify that the vehicle has a full tank of fuel (compensate as necessary). 2. Inspect the wheels and the tires for damage. 3. Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. 4. Inspect the wheel bearings for excessive play. 5. Inspect all suspension and steering parts for looseness, wear, or damage. 6. Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. 7. Inspect the vehicle trim height. 8. Compensate for frame angle on targeted vehicles (refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI). Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment angles. However, if the wheel alignment angles are not within the range of specifications, adjust the wheel alignment to the specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. Follow the wheel alignment equipment manufacturer's instructions. Measure/Adjust: Important Prior to making any adjustments to wheel alignment on a vehicle, technicians must verify that the wheel alignment specifications loaded into their wheel alignment machine are up-to-date by comparing these to the wheel alignment specifications for the appropriate model and model year in SI. Using incorrect and/or outdated specifications may result in unnecessary adjustments, irregular and/or premature tire wear and repeat customer concerns Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 12026 Important When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front wheel alignment angles. Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. If necessary, adjust the wheel alignment to vehicle specification and record the before and after measurements. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Important Technicians must refer to SI for the correct wheel alignment specifications. SI is the only source of GM wheel alignment specifications that is kept up-to-date throughout the year. Test drive vehicle to ensure proper repair. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 12027 Frame Angle Measurement (Express / Savana Only) ........ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 12028 What corrected the customer concern and was the repair verified? Please Explain: ............. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener Tightening Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener Tightening Specifications > Page 12031 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener Tightening Specifications > Page 12032 Alignment: Specifications Wheel Alignment Specifications WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS FRONT SUSPENSION Camber ................................................................................................................................................ .......................................................... -0.6° ± 0.75° Camber Cross Tolerance .................................... ............................................................................................................................................. 0.0° ± 0.50° Caster ........................................................................................................................................ .................................................................... 3.00° ± 0.75° Caster Cross Tolerance ............................ ....................................................................................................................................................... 0.0° ± 0.50° Total Toe ......................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... +0.15° ± 0.20° Steering Wheel Angle ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . 0.00° ± 3.5° Thrust Angle .................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................. --REAR SUSPENSION Camber ................................................................................................................................................ .......................................................... -0.5° ± 0.75° Camber Cross Tolerance .................................... ............................................................................................................................................. 0.0° ± 0.75° Caster ........................................................................................................................................ ..................................................................................... --- Caster Cross Tolerance ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... --- Total Toe ............................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... +0.2° ± 0.20° Steering Wheel Angle ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .......... --- Thrust Angle ......................................................................................................................... .......................................................................... 0.0° ± 0.20° Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 12033 Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Description Caster Description Caster is the tilting of the uppermost point of the steering axis either forward or backward, when viewed from the side of the vehicle. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Caster influences directional control of the steering but does not affect the tire wear . Caster is affected by the vehicle height, therefore it is important to keep the body at its designed height. Overloading the vehicle or a weak or sagging rear spring will affect caster. When the rear of the vehicle is lower than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a more positive caster. If the rear of the vehicle is higher than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a less positive caster. With too little positive caster, steering may be touchy at high speed and wheel returnability may be diminished when coming out of a turn. If one wheel has more positive caster than the other, that wheel will pull toward the center of the vehicle. This condition will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the least amount of positive caster. Camber Description Camber Description Camber is the tilting of the wheels from the vertical when viewed from the front of the vehicle. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts inward at the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt is measured in degrees from the vertical. Camber settings influence the directional control and the tire wear. Too much positive camber will result in premature wear on the outside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Too much negative camber will result in premature wear on the inside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Unequal side-to-side camber of 1 degree or more will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the most positive camber. Toe Description Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 12034 Toe Description Toe is a measurement of how much the front and/or rear wheels are turned in or out from a straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in, toe is positive (+). When the wheels are turned out, toe is negative (-). The actual amount of toe is normally only a fraction of a degree. The purpose of toe is to ensure that the wheels roll parallel. Toe also offsets the small deflections of the wheel support system that occur when the vehicle is rolling forward. In other words, with the vehicle standing still and the wheels set with toe-in, the wheels tend to roll parallel on the road when the vehicle is moving. Improper toe adjustment will cause premature tire wear and cause steering instability. Setback Description Setback applies to both the front and the rear wheels. Setback is the amount that one wheel may be aligned behind the other wheel. Setback may be the result of a road hazard or a collision. The first clue is a caster difference from side-to-side of more than 1 degree. Thrust Angles Description Thrust Angles Description The front wheels aim or steer the vehicle. The rear wheels control tracking. This tracking action relates to the thrust angle (3). The thrust angle is the path that the rear wheels take. Ideally, the thrust angle is geometrically aligned with the body centerline (2). In the illustration, toe-in is shown on the left rear wheel, moving the thrust line (1) off center. The resulting deviation from the centerline is the thrust angle. Lead/Pull Description Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 12035 At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Lead/pull is usually caused by the following factors: ^ Tire construction ^ Wheel alignment ^ Unbalanced steering gear The way in which a tire is built may produce lead/pull. The rear tires will not cause lead. Torque Steer Description A vehicle pulls or leads in one direction during hard acceleration. A vehicle pulls or leads in the other direction during deceleration. The following factors may cause torque steer to be more apparent on a particular vehicle: ^ A slightly smaller diameter tire on the right front increases a right torque lead. Inspect the front tires for differences in the brand, the construction, or the size. If the tires appear to be similar, change the front tires from side-to-side and retest the vehicle. Tire and wheel assemblies have the most significant effect on torque steer correction. ^ A large difference in the right and left front tire pressure ^ Left-to-right differences in the front view axle angle may cause significant steering pull in a vehicle. The pull will be to the side with the most downward sloping axle from the differential to the wheels. Axles typically slope downward from the differential. The slope of the transaxle pan to level ground may be used as an indication of bias axle angles. The side with the higher transaxle pan (shown on the left side of the illustration) has the most downward sloping axle angle. Memory Steer Description Memory steer is when the vehicle wants to lead or pull in the direction the driver previously turned the vehicle. Additionally, after turning in the opposite direction, the vehicle will want to lead or pull in that direction. Wander Description Wander is the undesired drifting or deviation of a vehicle to either side from a straight path with hand pressure on the steering wheel. Wander is a symptom of the vehicle's sensitivity to external disturbances, such as road crown and crosswind, and accentuated by poor on-center steering feel. Scrub Radius Description Ideally, the scrub radius is as small as possible. Normally, the SAI angle and the centerline of the tire and the wheel intersect below the road surface, causing a positive scrub radius. With struts, the SAI angle is much larger than the long arm/short arm type of suspension. This allows the SAI angle to intersect the camber angle above the road surface, forming a negative scrub radius. The smaller the scrub radius, the better the directional stability. Installing aftermarket wheels that have additional offset will dramatically increase the scrub radius. The newly installed wheels may cause the centerline of the tires to move further away from the spindle. This will increase the scrub radius. A large amount of scrub radius can cause severe shimmy after hitting a bump. Four-wheel drive vehicles with large tires use a steering damper to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 12036 compensate for an increased scrub radius. Scrub radius is not directly measurable by the conventional methods. Scrub radius is projected geometrically by engineers during the design phase of the suspension. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment Alignment: Service and Repair Front Camber Adjustment Front Camber Adjustment 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. 3. Remove the strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. Discard the nuts and bolts. 4. If the strut has not been previously modified, perform the following procedure: 1. Disconnect the strut from the knuckle. 2. Important: ^ Maximum outboard adjustment-(increased negative camber) 2.0 mm of outboard elongation or to within 11.0 mm from outboard edge of lower strut clevis bracket, whichever comes first ^ Maximum inboard adjustment-(increased positive camber) 4.0 mm of inboard elongation ^ If filing the strut, paint the exposed metal with primer. If increasing negative camber, remove material from the outside of the lower strut hole. 3. If decreasing negative camber, remove material from the inside of the lower strut hole. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment > Page 12039 5. Loosely install new strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. 6. Adjust the camber to specifications by moving the top of the wheel in or out as necessary. 7. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. ^ Tighten the nuts and bolts to 180 Nm (133 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment > Page 12040 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Caster Adjustment Front Caster Adjustment The front caster is not adjustable. If the front caster angle is not within specifications, inspect for suspension support misalignment or front suspension damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment > Page 12041 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Toe Adjustment Front Toe Adjustment 1. Position and lock the steering wheel with the vehicle with the wheels in the straight forward position. 2. Loosen both inner tie rod jam nuts. 3. Important: The inner tie rod must rotate freely from the boot seal surface. Do not allow the boot to rotate. Loosen the inner tie rod seal to boot surface. 4. Use a wrench on the tie rod flats to increase or decrease the toe angle specifications. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the inner tie rod jam nuts. ^ Tighten the jam nuts to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). 6. Inspect the toe angle to ensure proper adjustment and adjust as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment > Page 12042 Alignment: Service and Repair Measuring Wheel Alignment Measuring Wheel Alignment Steering and vibration complaints are not always the result of improper alignment. One possible cause is wheel and tire imbalance. Another possibility is tire lead due to worn or improperly manufactured tires. Lead/pull is defined as follows: At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Lead is the vehicle deviation from a straight path on a level road without pressure on the steering wheel. Before performing any adjustment affecting wheel alignment, perform the following inspections and adjustments in order to ensure correct alignment readings: ^ Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. ^ Inspect the runout of the wheels and the tires. ^ Inspect the wheel bearings for backlash and excessive play. ^ Inspect the ball joints and tie rod ends for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the control arms and stabilizer shaft for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the steering gear for looseness at the frame. ^ Inspect the struts/shock absorbers for wear, leaks, and any noticeable noises. ^ Inspect the vehicle trim height. ^ Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. ^ Inspect the fuel level. The fuel tank should be full or the vehicle should have a compensating load added. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. If normally carried in the vehicle, these items should remain in the vehicle during alignment adjustments. Give consideration also to the condition of the equipment being used for the alignment. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment settings. However, if the setting exceeds the service allowable specifications, correct the alignment to the service preferred specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications . Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. 4. Important: When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front alignment angles. Adjust alignment angles to vehicle specification. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment > Page 12043 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Camber Adjustment Front Camber Adjustment 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. 3. Remove the strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. Discard the nuts and bolts. 4. If the strut has not been previously modified, perform the following procedure: 1. Disconnect the strut from the knuckle. 2. Important: ^ Maximum outboard adjustment-(increased negative camber) 2.0 mm of outboard elongation or to within 11.0 mm from outboard edge of lower strut clevis bracket, whichever comes first ^ Maximum inboard adjustment-(increased positive camber) 4.0 mm of inboard elongation ^ If filing the strut, paint the exposed metal with primer. If increasing negative camber, remove material from the outside of the lower strut hole. 3. If decreasing negative camber, remove material from the inside of the lower strut hole. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment > Page 12044 5. Loosely install new strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. 6. Adjust the camber to specifications by moving the top of the wheel in or out as necessary. 7. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. ^ Tighten the nuts and bolts to 180 Nm (133 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Front Caster Adjustment Front Caster Adjustment The front caster is not adjustable. If the front caster angle is not within specifications, inspect for suspension support misalignment or front suspension damage. Front Toe Adjustment Front Toe Adjustment 1. Position and lock the steering wheel with the vehicle with the wheels in the straight forward position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment > Page 12045 2. Loosen both inner tie rod jam nuts. 3. Important: The inner tie rod must rotate freely from the boot seal surface. Do not allow the boot to rotate. Loosen the inner tie rod seal to boot surface. 4. Use a wrench on the tie rod flats to increase or decrease the toe angle specifications. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the inner tie rod jam nuts. ^ Tighten the jam nuts to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). 6. Inspect the toe angle to ensure proper adjustment and adjust as necessary. Measuring Wheel Alignment Measuring Wheel Alignment Steering and vibration complaints are not always the result of improper alignment. One possible cause is wheel and tire imbalance. Another possibility is tire lead due to worn or improperly manufactured tires. Lead/pull is defined as follows: At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Lead is the vehicle deviation from a straight path on a level road without pressure on the steering wheel. Before performing any adjustment affecting wheel alignment, perform the following inspections and adjustments in order to ensure correct alignment readings: ^ Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. ^ Inspect the runout of the wheels and the tires. ^ Inspect the wheel bearings for backlash and excessive play. ^ Inspect the ball joints and tie rod ends for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the control arms and stabilizer shaft for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the steering gear for looseness at the frame. ^ Inspect the struts/shock absorbers for wear, leaks, and any noticeable noises. ^ Inspect the vehicle trim height. ^ Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. ^ Inspect the fuel level. The fuel tank should be full or the vehicle should have a compensating load added. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. If normally carried in the vehicle, these items should remain in the vehicle during alignment adjustments. Give consideration also to the condition of the equipment being used for the alignment. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment settings. However, if the setting exceeds the service allowable specifications, correct the alignment to the service preferred specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications . Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. 4. Important: When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front alignment angles. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment > Page 12046 Adjust alignment angles to vehicle specification. Rear Camber Adjustment Rear Camber Adjustment 1. Loosen the upper control arm-to-frame fastener enough to allow movement. 2. Important: The frame of the vehicle is slotted, turning the cam nut will move the camber in to the designated location. Rotate the upper control arm-to-frame fastener in the direction necessary to the correct the camber measurement. 3. Snug the upper control arm-to-frame fastener, do not tighten at this time. 4. Reinspect the rear camber specifications and adjust as necessary. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Hold the nut and tighten the upper control arm-to-frame bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 6. Repeat the procedure for the other rear wheel. Rear Toe Adjustment Rear Toe Adjustment 1. Loosen the toe link-to-frame fastener enough to allow for movement. 2. Important: The frame of the vehicle is slotted, a cam nut is available for service if required. Rotate the toe link cam nut in the direction necessary to correct the toe angle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Camber Adjustment > Page 12047 3. Snug the toe link-to-frame fastener, do not tighten at this time. 4. Reinspect the rear toe specifications and adjust as necessary. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Hold the nut and tighten the link-to-frame fastener bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 6. Repeat the procedure for the other rear wheel. Trim Height Inspection Trim Height Inspection Procedure Trim Height Measurement Trim height is a predetermined measurement relating to vehicle ride height. Incorrect trim heights can cause the vehicle to bottom out over bumps, damage to the suspension components and symptoms similar to wheel alignment problems. Check the trim heights when diagnosing suspension concerns and before checking the wheel alignment. Perform the following before measuring the trim heights: ^ Set the tire pressure to the specifications shown on the certification label. ^ Check the fuel level. Add additional weight if necessary to simulate a full tank. ^ Make sure the passenger and rear compartments are empty, except for the spare tire. ^ Make sure the vehicle is on a flat and level surface, such as an alignment rack. ^ Check that all the vehicle doors are securely closed. ^ Check that the vehicle hood and rear deck lids are securely closed. ^ Check for installed after market accessories or modifications that could affect trim height measurement. Important: All dimensions are measured vertical to the ground. Trim height should be within ±22.0 mm (±0.87 inch) to be considered correct. Measuring the Bumper Heights Use the following procedure to check the front bumper height: 1. Jounce the front and rear of the vehicle a few times and allow the suspension to settle. 2. The front bumper height measurement is taken outward 390 mm (15.35 inch) from the center of the fascia to ground level. Measurements are made from the inner bumper core to ground level. Measure both sides and average the measurements. 3. Compare the measurement to the front bumper curb height specification. Refer to Trim Height Specifications. 4. If the measurement is outside of the specified range, replace the front springs. 5. Using your hands, lift the rear bumper approximately 38 mm (1.59 inch). 6. Gently remove your hands and allow the vehicle to lower. 7. Using your hands, jounce the rear of the vehicle downward approximately 38 mm (1.59 inch). 8. Gently remove your hands and allow the vehicle to rise. 9. The rear bumper height measurement is taken outward 530 mm (20.86 inch) from the center of the fascia to ground level. Measurements are made from the inner bumper core to ground level. Measure both sides and average the measurements. 10. Compare the measurement to the rear bumper curb height specification. Refer to Trim Height Specifications. 11. If the measurement is outside of the specified range, replace the rear springs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Control Module: Locations Power Steering System Component Views Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side 1 - EPS Inline Fuse Holder 2 - PSCM Harness Connection to the Underhood Fuse Block 3 Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12053 Electronic Power Steering Harness, I/P Side 1 - G207 2 - Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) 3 - Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C3 - EPS Motor Pigtail 4 - Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12054 Steering Control Module: Diagrams Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C1 Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12055 Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 12071 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 12072 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Minimizing Damage to TPM Sensors INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-007 Date: May 16, 2008 Subject: Minimizing Damage to Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Sensors During Tire Mounting/Dismounting Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors Minimizing Damage To TPM Sensors All GM vehicles now in production and sold in the U.S., as well as many vehicles sold in Canada, feature Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems that have valve stem mounted Tire Pressure Sensors. When dismounting and mounting tires, care must be taken when breaking the bead loose from the wheel. If the tire machines bead breaking fixture is positioned too close to the tire pressure sensor, as the tire bead breaks away from the wheel it may be forced into, or catch on the edge of the tire pressure sensor. This can damage the sensor and require the sensor to be replaced. Care must also be taken when transferring the tire bead to the other side of the wheel rim. As the tire machine rotates and the tire bead is stretched around the wheel rim, the bead can come in contact with the sensor if it is not correctly positioned in relation to the mounting/dismounting head prior to tire mounting/dismounting. This can also cause sensor damage requiring replacement. Procedure Notice: Use a tire changing machine in order to dismount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or the wheel rim could result. Notice: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. 1. Remove the valve core from the valve stem. 2. Deflate the tire completely. Important: Rim-clamp European-type tire changers are recommended. 3. Use the tire changer in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Follow steps 4-7 to remove the tire from the wheel. 4. When separating the tire bead from the wheel position the bead breaking fixture 90, 180 and 270 degrees from the valve stem. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 12073 5. Position the wheel and tire so the valve stem is situated at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the outer tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 6. Position the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated again at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the inner tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 7. Remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting on vehicles equipped with TPM replace the tire pressure sensor. 8. Use a wire brush or coarse steel wool in order to remove any rubber, light rust or corrosion from the wheel bead seats. Important: If bead seat corrosion has been identified as an air loss concern on the wheel being worked on, refer to GM Service Bulletin # 08-03-10-006 for additional information on correcting the leak. 9. Apply GM P/N 12345884 (in Canada, P/N 5728223) or equivalent to the tire bead and the wheel rim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 12074 10. Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the inside of the wheel rim. 11. Position the rim so that the valve stem (1) is situated at the 3 o'clock position relative to the head (2). This will protect the sensor when the bottom bead seats. 12. After the bottom bead is on the wheel, reposition the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated at the 9 o'clock position relative to the head. This will protect the sensor while mounting the tire bead to the outside of the wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 12075 13. Use the tire changer in order to install the tire to the wheel. Caution: To avoid serious personal injury, do not stand over tire when inflating. The bead may break when the bead snaps over the safety hump. Do not exceed 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure when inflating any tire if beads are not seated. If 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure will not seat the beads, deflate, lubricate the beads and reinflate. Overinflating may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. Important: Allowable bead seating pressure is 345 kPa (50 psi) on Extended Mobility Tires. 14. Inflate the tire until it passes the bead humps. Be sure that the valve core is not installed at this time. 15. Install the valve core to the valve core stem. 16. Inflate the tire to the proper air pressure. 17. Ensure that the locating rings are visible on both sides of the tire in order to verify that the tire bead is fully seated on the wheel. Parts Information The product shown above is available from GM SPO. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Information not provided by manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 12082 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications POWER STEERING SYSTEM GM Power Steering Fluid GM P/N 89021184 (Canadian P/N 89021186) or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Power Steering Pump Replacement Tips Power Steering Motor: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Power Steering Pump Replacement Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-02-32-013B Date: August 07, 2009 Subject: Diagnostic Tips/Recommendations When Power Steering Pump Replacement is Necessary Models: 1997-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update the information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-32-013A (Section 02 - Steering). A recently completed analysis of returned power steering (PS) pumps that had been replaced for noise, no power assist, no or low pressure and leaking conditions has indicated a high number of "No Trouble Found" results. Corporate Bulletin Number 01-02-32-004 indicates that when attempting to repair a power steering concern, the steering system analyzer should be utilized to assist the technician in a successful diagnosis. Note- Saturn ASTRA does not utilize the Power Steering System Analyzer. In addition, extensive warranty analysis has shown that the following situations are all significant root causes of PS pump failures: - Improper pulley installation - Re-using the O-rings - Using fluid other than the OE-specified steering fluid - Failure to flush the PS system In order to help improve customer satisfaction and reduce comebacks, GM recommends the following tips for replacing a PS pump: 1. Low or no pressure from the PS pump may be the results of dirty or contaminated fluid, which could cause the pressure relief valve to stop functioning. Using the proper tools, flush and bleed the PS system. Any residual contaminants will result in pump failure. 2. When removing the pulley, use the proper special tools. Because the pulley alignment is critical, distorting the pulley may damage bearings on the new PS pump. Note Some new PS pumps may not include a new O-ring. Please refer to the appropriate Parts Catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration Catalog for the vehicle. 3. Be sure to use only the new O-rings included with the PS pump. The new reservoir O-ring must be lubricated with OE-specific PS fluid prior to installation. Also make sure that the control valve O-ring is in its exact groove position and is NOT covering the pressure bypass hole. 4. Bleed the PS system according to the procedures/recommendations in SI. Following these procedures and using the correct tools and fluids should help ensure that the new PS pump operates properly. Skipping steps may cost you time and trouble later. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Control Module: Locations Power Steering System Component Views Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side 1 - EPS Inline Fuse Holder 2 - PSCM Harness Connection to the Underhood Fuse Block 3 Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12090 Electronic Power Steering Harness, I/P Side 1 - G207 2 - Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) 3 - Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C3 - EPS Motor Pigtail 4 - Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12091 Steering Control Module: Diagrams Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C1 Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12092 Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Control Module: Locations Power Steering System Component Views Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side 1 - EPS Inline Fuse Holder 2 - PSCM Harness Connection to the Underhood Fuse Block 3 Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12097 Electronic Power Steering Harness, I/P Side 1 - G207 2 - Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) 3 - Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C3 - EPS Motor Pigtail 4 - Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12098 Steering Control Module: Diagrams Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C1 Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12099 Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12105 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12106 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12107 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12108 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12109 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12110 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12111 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12112 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12113 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12114 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12115 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12116 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12117 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12118 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12119 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12120 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12121 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12122 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center, then remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12123 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the I/P module connector. 7. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12124 2. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12125 5. Locate And Remove The Air Bag Fuse From The Body Control Module Fuse Center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - right, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the right rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12126 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - RF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - RF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - right, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12127 3. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12128 10. Connect the SIS - RF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 8 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12129 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the upper rear window molding. 7. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 9. Remove the rear coat hooks. 10. Gently pull down the right rear corner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 11. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12130 13. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 14. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 15. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 16. Remove the CPA from the I/P module connector. 17. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. 18. Remove the CPA from the steering wheel module coil connector. 19. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12131 20. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 21. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 22. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 23. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 24. Remove the CPA from the roof rail module - left connector. 25. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12132 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 5. Install the lower center pillar trim. 6. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 7. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12133 8. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 9. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 10. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 13. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 14. Install the rear coat hooks. 15. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 12134 16. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 17. Install the upper rear window molding. 18. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 19. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 20. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 21. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replacement Steering Gear: Service and Repair Power Steering Gear Replacement Power Steering Gear Replacement ^ Tools Required J 24319-B Steering Linkage and Tie Rod Puller Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the front tires. 3. Remove both outer tie rod to steering knuckle nuts. Discard the nuts. 4. Notice: Do not free the ball stud by using a pickle fork or a wedge-type tool. Damage to the seal or bushing may result. Important: Hold the ball stud to prevent turning during removal of the nut. Using the J 24319-B, separate the tie rods from the steering knuckles. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replacement > Page 12139 5. Rotate the intermediate steering shaft in order to gain access to the intermediate shaft pinch bolt. 6. Remove the intermediate to steering gear pinch bolt. Discard the bolt. 7. Disconnect the intermediate shaft from the steering gear. 8. Disconnect the stabilizer links from the stabilizer bar. 9. Remove the steering gear to cradle mounting bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replacement > Page 12140 10. Remove the steering gear through the right side of the vehicle. 11. With heat shield equipped steering gears, remove the heat shield. Save for installation. Installation Procedure 1. If applicable, install the heat shield. 2. Important: Ensure the stabilizer is swung in the upmost position for gear clearance. Install the steering gear from the right side of the vehicle. 3. Center the gear mounting bushings into the cradle supports. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Hand start both steering gear to cradle mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 5. Connect the intermediate shaft to the steering gear and install a new pinch bolt. ^ Tighten the intermediate pinch bolt to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replacement > Page 12141 6. Connect the stabilizer links to the stabilizer bar. 7. Important: Hold the ball stud to prevent turning during installation of the nut. Connect the tie rod to the knuckle and install a new nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the front tires and wheels. 9. Check the front wheel alignment and align as necessary. 10. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replacement > Page 12142 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Rack and Pinion Boot Replacement - On Vehicle Rack and Pinion Boot Replacement - On Vehicle ^ Tools Required J 22610 Keystone Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire assembly. 3. Remove the outer tie rod. 4. Remove the jam nut. 5. Remove the spring from the boot, outer end. 6. Cut and remove the crimp clamp, inner end. Discard the clamp. 7. Unseat the boot from the steering gear and remove. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replacement > Page 12143 8. Clean the inner tie rod and boot contact area of grease and debris. Installation Procedure 1. Important: The inner tie rod must be free of debris and moisture. The boot sealing areas must be clean and dry. Apply approximately 3/4 of the supplied grease packet into the small end of the boot cavity. Apply the remainder of the grease on the shaft where the small end of the boot meats the shaft. 2. Important: Ensure the large end of the boot is firmly seated in the gear housing groove. Install the boot with the large clamp loosely attached, not crimped. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replacement > Page 12144 3. Using the J 22610, crimp the large clamp. 4. Important: Ensure the small end of the boot is firmly seated in the inner tie rod end groove. Install the spring clamp to the small end of the boot. 5. Install the jam nut approximately 174 mm (6.85 inch) from the boot clamp. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replacement > Page 12145 6. Install the outer tie rod. 7. Install the tire assembly. 8. Check the front wheel alignment and align as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (Chevrolet W/K34 W/O UK3) Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (Chevrolet W/K34 W/O UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (Chevrolet W/K34 W/O UK3) > Page 12150 Steering Wheel Control Switch - Right (Chevrolet W/K34 W/O UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (Chevrolet W/K34 W/O UK3) > Page 12151 Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (Chevrolet W/K34 and UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (Chevrolet W/K34 W/O UK3) > Page 12152 Steering Wheel Control Switch - Right (Chevrolet W/K34 and UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12153 Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Control Switch Assembly Replacement Disassembly Procedure 1. Remove the screws from the steering wheel shroud. 2. Notice: Cruise control switches must be removed from the rear. Do not attempt to pry them out from front as damage to steering wheel may occur. If the vehicle is equipped with cruise control, push the switches out from the rear of the steering wheel. Assembly Procedure 1. If the vehicle is equipped with cruise control, install the switches by pushing them in place from the front of the wheel. 2. Install the screws in the steering wheel shroud. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Shaft: Service and Repair Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Important: Locking of the steering column will prevent damage and a possible malfunction of the Restraint system. With the steering wheel in the straight forward position, remove the ignition key 2. Remove the intermediate steering shaft to steering gear pinch bolt. Discard the bolt. 3. Disengage the intermediate shaft seal from the body panel. 4. Collapse the intermediate steering shaft, while disconnecting the intermediate steering shaft from the steering gear. 5. Place scribe makes on the intermediate shaft to the steering column connection prior to removal. 6. Remove the intermediate shaft pinch bolt at the steering column. Discard the pinch bolt. 7. Disconnect the intermediate steering shaft from the steering column. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12157 8. Remove the intermediate steering shaft assembly from inside the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Important: Failure to transfer the pre-scribed marks may result in an off-center steering wheel. If installing a new intermediate shaft, transfer the pre-scrubed alignment marks on to the new part. 2. Install the intermediate steering shaft assembly from inside the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12158 3. Align and connect the intermediate steering shaft to the steering gear 4. Notice: Install a new lower intermediate shaft pinch bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). 5. Align the pre-scribed mark on the intermediate steering shaft to the pre-scribed mark on the steering column. 6. Connect the intermediate steering shaft to the steering column. 7. If the intermediate shaft was removed without the use of scribed marks, perform the following: 1. Place the road wheels in the straight ahead position. 2. Align the steering column shaft notch in the 12 o'clock position and connect the intermediate shaft to the steering column. 3. Install a new Upper intermediate shaft pinch bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). 8. Seat the intermediate shaft seal into the body panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Description and Operation > Steering Wheel Controls Description and Operation Steering Wheel: Description and Operation Steering Wheel Controls Description and Operation Steering Wheel Controls Description and Operation The audio steering wheel control switches duplicate the function of the primary controls of the associated component, through a network of multiple momentary contact switches and a series of resistors. The radio supplies voltage to the switches and monitors the return signal for a specific voltage drop to occur unique to the one pressed. The radio then identifies the switch selected to activate the feature, otherwise sends a serial data message that is received by the component controlled, activating the feature. This information is intended to diagnosis the circuits between the radio and the audio steering wheel control switches. If the primary control for the device is inoperative, refer to the appropriate information for the component the steering wheel control switch is functioning. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Description and Operation > Steering Wheel Controls Description and Operation > Page 12163 Steering Wheel: Description and Operation Steering Wheel and Column Description and Operation Steering Wheel and Column Description and Operation The steering wheel and column has 4 primary functions: ^ Vehicle steering ^ Vehicle security ^ Driver convenience ^ Driver safety Vehicle Steering The steering wheel is the first link between the driver and the vehicle. The steering wheel is fastened to a steering shaft within the column. At the lower end of the column, the intermediate shaft connects the column to the steering gear. Vehicle Security-Some Vehicle Models Theft deterrent components are mounted and designed into the steering column. The following components allow the column to be locked in order to minimize theft: ^ The ignition switch ^ The steering column lock ^ The ignition cylinder Driver Convenience The steering wheel and column may also have driver controls attached for convenience and comfort. The following controls may be mounted on or near the steering wheel or column. ^ The turn signal switch ^ The hazard switch ^ The headlamp dimmer switch ^ The wiper/washer switch ^ The horn pad/cruise control switch ^ The tilt or tilt/telescoping functions Driver Safety The energy-absorbing steering column compresses in the event of a front-end collision, which reduces the chance of injury to the driver. The mounting capsules break away from the mounting bracket in the event of an accident. Ignition Lock Cylinder Control Actuator If the vehicle is equipped with a floor mounted console gear shifter, it has a ignition lock cylinder control actuator system in the steering column. The ignition lock cylinder control actuator's purpose is to prevent the ignition key from being turned to the OFF position when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle may still be moving. The column ignition lock system consists of a ignition lock cylinder control actuator, and a Park position switch that is located in the automatic transmission (A/T) shift lock control switch. The ignition lock cylinder control actuator contains a pin that is spring loaded out to mechanically prevent the ignition key cylinder from being turned to the Lock position when vehicle transmission is not in the Park position. If vehicle power is lost, and/or the transmission is not in the Park position the operator will not be able to turn the ignition key to the Lock position and will not be able to remove the ignition key from the column. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 12164 Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Replacement ^ Tools Required J 42578Steering Wheel Puller Legs - J 1859-ASteering Wheel Puller Removal Procedure 1. Disable the SIR system. 2. Remove the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 3. If equipped with cruise control, disconnect the cruise control switch connector from the steering column. 4. Remove the steering wheel nut. 5. Remove the steering wheel. It may be necessary to use the J 42578 and J 1859-A or equivalent to remove the steering wheel. Installation Procedure 1. Align the steering wheel to the steering column and install the steering wheel. 2. Notice: Install the steering wheel nut. ^ Tighten the steering wheel nut to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 12165 3. If equipped with cruise control, connect the cruise control switch connector. 4. Install the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 5. Enable the SIR system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair Tie Rod End: Service and Repair Rack and Pinion Outer Tie Rod End Replacement ^ Tools Required J 24319-B Steering Linkage and Tie Rod Puller Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the front tire assembly. 3. Important: Mark the location of the jam nut for installation. Loosen the tie rod inner jam nut. 4. Important: Hold the ball stud to prevent turning during removal of the nut. Remove the tie rod to knuckle nut. Discard the nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12170 5. Notice: Do not free the ball stud by using a pickle fork or a wedge-type tool. Damage to the seal or bushing may result. Use the J 24319-B to separate the tie rod from the steering knuckle. 6. Remove the outer tie rod from the inner tie rod. Installation Procedure 1. Install the outer tie rod to the inner tie rod. 2. Connect the tie rod to the knuckle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12171 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install a new tie rod retention nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the front tire assembly. 5. Check the wheel alignment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications Ball Joint: Specifications Ball Joint Wear Limit ............................................................................................................................ .................................................................. 3.18 mm (0.125 in) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Page 12176 Step 1 - Step 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Page 12177 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Lower Ball Joint Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the lower control arm. 2. Place the control arm in a vise or suitable holding device. 3. Remove the ball joint rivets using the following procedure. 1. Drill through the rivets using a 8 mm (5/16 inch) drill bit. 2. Enlarge the hole using a 12 mm (31/64 inch) drill bit. 3. Remove any remaining burs from the control arm. 4. Remove the ball joint from the control arm. Note the position of the ball joint for reassembly. Installation Procedure 1. Important: The control arm must be clean and free of debris. Install the ball joint to the control arm as previously noted. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: ^ Only use hardware provided with the new ball joint. ^ The bolts must be installed with the bolt head on top of the ball joint. Install the ball joint to control arm bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts and nuts to 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the lower control arm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Arm Bushing: > 07-03-08-004 > Mar > 07 > Suspension - Front End Rattle Noise on Bumps Control Arm Bushing: Customer Interest Suspension - Front End Rattle Noise on Bumps Bulletin No.: 07-03-08-004 Date: March 29, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise in Front of Vehicle While Driving Over Rough Road Surfaces (Replace Both Front Lower Control Arm Rear Bushings) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise coming from the front of the vehicle while driving at slow speeds (approximately 8-17 km/h (5-10 mph) over rough road surfaces. Correction Replace the right and left front lower control arm rear bushings. Refer to the Front Lower Control Arm Rear Bushing Replacement procedure in SI. The revised bushing will not only address the rattle noise but has been designed for enhanced comfort and road isolation. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Arm Bushing: > 07-03-08-004 > Mar > 07 > Suspension - Front End Rattle Noise on Bumps Control Arm Bushing: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front End Rattle Noise on Bumps Bulletin No.: 07-03-08-004 Date: March 29, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise in Front of Vehicle While Driving Over Rough Road Surfaces (Replace Both Front Lower Control Arm Rear Bushings) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise coming from the front of the vehicle while driving at slow speeds (approximately 8-17 km/h (5-10 mph) over rough road surfaces. Correction Replace the right and left front lower control arm rear bushings. Refer to the Front Lower Control Arm Rear Bushing Replacement procedure in SI. The revised bushing will not only address the rattle noise but has been designed for enhanced comfort and road isolation. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower Control Arm Bushings Replacement (Front) Control Arm Bushing: Service and Repair Lower Control Arm Bushings Replacement (Front) Lower Control Arm Bushings Replacement (Front) ^ Tools Required J 44971 Control Arm Bushing Remover/Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the front tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the lower control arm. 4. Place the control arm in a vise or suitable holding device. 5. Use the J 44971 to press out the front control arm bushing. Installation Procedure 1. Use the J 44971 to press in the front control arm bushing. 2. Install the lower control arm. 3. Install the front tire and wheel assembly. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower Control Arm Bushings Replacement (Front) > Page 12194 Control Arm Bushing: Service and Repair Lower Control Arm Bushings Replacement (Rear) Lower Control Arm Bushings Replacement (Rear) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the front tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the lower control arm. 4. Remove the rear bushing nut. 5. Remove the rear bushing. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the rear bushing to the lower control arm. ^ Tighten the nut to 150 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the lower control arm. 3. Install the front tire and wheel assembly. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower Control Arm Bushings Replacement (Front) > Page 12195 Control Arm Bushing: Service and Repair Rear Axle Lower Control Arm Bushing Replacement Rear Axle Lower Control Arm Bushing Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45097 Rear Control Arm Bushing Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the lower control arm. 2. Using the J 45097 , remove the bushing in the direction of the arrow. 3. Install the push out socket against the bushing from the flanged side of the control arm. 4. Install the through bolt with the washer and bearing against the push out socket. 5. Install a backing socket against the control arm, opposite of the flange. 6. Install the stabilizer between the control arm ears. 7. Install flat washer and nut. 8. Important: Apply high pressure lube to the threads of the tool. Tighten the nut until the bushing is removed. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower Control Arm Bushings Replacement (Front) > Page 12196 1. Important: Apply high pressure lube to the threads of the tool. Install a new bushing from the opposite direction. 2. Using the J 45097, reverse the tool layout from the removal procedure. 3. Tighten the nut until the bushing is fully installed. 4. Install the lower control arm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Rear Cross-Member Bushing > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Cross-Member Bushing: Service and Repair Support Rear Drive Module Mounting Bushing Replacement ^ Tools Required J 44866 Support Bushing Remover and Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the production muffler and resonator as an assembly. 3. Remove the rear stabilizer shaft. 4. Remove the rear drive module bracket to support bolt and nut. Discard the nut. 5. Remove the rear drive module to rear drive module bolts and nuts. Discard the nuts. 6. Remove the rear drive module bracket from the vehicle. 7. Install the J 44866 to the support assembly in the following procedure. 1. Position the large part of the tool over the bushing flange and against the frame. 2. Install the bolt and washer. 3. Install the small part of the tool against the bushing. 4. Lube the threads of the J 44866 with extreme pressure (EP) lube. 5. Important: Ensure the small end of the tool is aligned with the bushing. Install the bearing, washer and nut. 6. Tighten the J 44866 in order to remove the bushing from the support assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Rear Cross-Member Bushing > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 12201 1. Install the J 44866 to the support assembly in the following procedure. 1. Place the bolt washer and large portion of the J 44866 against the frame. 2. Position the bushing against the support assembly. Align the bushing with the slots in the rubber portion straight up and down. 3. Position the small part of the J 44866 against the bushing flange area. 4. Lube the threads of the J 44866 with EP lube. 5. Install the bearing, washer and nut. 6. Important: The bushing must be fully seated. Tighten the J 44866 in order to install the bushing into the support assembly. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the rear drive module bracket to the rear drive module, using new nuts. ^ Tighten the drive module bracket to drive module bolts and nuts to 125 Nm (92 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the rear bracket to support bolt, using a new nut. ^ Tighten the drive module bracket to support assembly bolt and nut to 125 Nm (92 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the rear stabilizer shaft. 5. install the production muffler and resonator as an assembly. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle Alignment Link > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Knuckle Alignment Link: Service and Repair Toe Link Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the toe link to knuckle nut and bolt. 3. Remove the toe link to support nut and bolt. 4. Remove the toe link from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle Alignment Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12205 1. Install the toe link to the support assembly. 2. Important: ^ Install the bolt with the head towards the front of the vehicle. ^ Position the cam nut in same position as in the upper control arm. Install the toe link to support nut and bolt. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the toe link to the knuckle. ^ Tighten the bolt to 160 Nm (118 ft. lbs.). 4. Tighten the toe link to support bolt. Tighten the bolt to 160 Nm (118 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the rear alignment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Stabilizer Bushing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Stabilizer Shaft Insulator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the stabilizer bar clamp to cradle bolts. 3. Remove the stabilizer bar clamps and bushings from the stabilizer bar. Installation Procedure 1. Install the stabilizer bar clamps and bushings to the stabilizer bar. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the stabilizer bar clamp to cradle bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12211 Stabilizer Bushing: Service and Repair Front Stabilizer Shaft Insulator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the stabilizer bar clamp bolts. 3. Remove the insulators from the stabilizer bar. Installation Procedure 1. Install the insulators the stabilizer bar. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the stabilizer bar clamp bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12212 Stabilizer Bushing: Service and Repair Rear Stabilizer Shaft Insulator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the stabilizer bar clamp to cradle bolts. 3. Remove the stabilizer bar clamps and bushings from the stabilizer bar. Installation Procedure 1. Install the stabilizer bar clamps and bushings to the stabilizer bar. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the stabilizer bar clamp to cradle bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Front Suspension Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while removing the link nut. Remove the stabilizer link to strut nut. 4. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while removing the link nut. Remove the stabilizer link to stabilizer bar nut. 5. Remove the stabilizer link. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12217 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while installing the link nut. Connect the stabilizer link to the strut. ^ Tighten the nut to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 2. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while installing the link nut. Connect the stabilizer link to the stabilizer bar. ^ Tighten the nut to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the tire and wheel. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12218 Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Front Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while removing the link nut. Remove the stabilizer link to strut nut. 4. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while removing the link nut. Remove the stabilizer link to stabilizer bar nut. 5. Remove the stabilizer link. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12219 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while installing the link nut. Connect the stabilizer link to the strut. ^ Tighten the nut to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 2. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while installing the link nut. Connect the stabilizer link to the stabilizer bar. ^ Tighten the nut to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the tire and wheel. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12220 Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Rear Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Loosen the stabilizer bar clamp bolts. 3. Important: Hold the ball shaft secure with a TORX® bit, when removing the nut. Remove the stabilizer link to stabilizer bar nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12221 4. Important: When disconnecting the stabilizer link, hold the link with a wrench to prevent turning. Remove the stabilizer link to control arm nut. 5. Remove the stabilizer link from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the stabilizer link through the control arm. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: When connecting the stabilizer link, hold the link with a wrench to prevent turning. Install the stabilizer link to control arm nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12222 3. Important: Hold the ball shaft secure with a TORX® bit, when installing the nut. Install the stabilizer link to stabilizer bar nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 57 Nm (42 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the stabilizer bar clamp bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide Front Strut / Shock Tower: Customer Interest Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 12232 Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 12233 Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 12234 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 12235 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 12236 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide Front Strut / Shock Tower: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 12242 Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 12243 Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 12244 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 12245 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 12246 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 12247 Front Strut / Shock Tower: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-08-57-001A Date: 081008 Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 12248 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 12249 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 12250 Condition 6 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 12251 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 12252 Parts Information Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-08-57-001A Date: 081008 Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 12253 Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 12254 Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 12255 Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 12256 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 12257 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair Front Subframe: Service and Repair Frame Replacement (LNJ) Tools Required * J 43828 Ball Joint Remover * SA9140E Torque Angle Gage Removal Procedure 1. Secure the radiator to the upper radiator support. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair/Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle) in General Information. 3. Remove the front wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Tires and wheels. 4. Remove the side splash shield-to-frame fasteners. 5. Remove the front air dam-to-frame fasteners. 6. Remove the rear transaxle mount-to-frame bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 12262 7. Remove the front transaxle mount through bolt. 8. Remove the steering gear-to-frame bolts. 9. Using mechanics wire, secure the steering gear to the exhaust. 10. Remove the stabilizer shaft clamp-to-frame bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 12263 11. Remove the lower ball joint cotter pins. Discard the cotter pins. 12. Loosen the lower ball joint castle nut until the nut is level with the top of the ball stud. Notice: Do not free the ball stud by using a pickle fork or a wedge-type tool. Damage to the seal or bushing may result. 13. Using the J 43828 , separate the lower control arm from the steering knuckle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 12264 14. Remove the frame-to-body bolts. Discard the bolts. 15. Carefully lower the frame from the vehicle. 16. Remove the lower control arms. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement in Front Suspension. Installation Procedure 1. Install the lower control arms. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement in Front Suspension. 2. Raise the frame to the body. Important: Do not tighten the fasteners at this time. 3. Loosely install new frame-to-body bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 12265 4. Connect the ball joint stud to the steering knuckle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Using the SA9140E , install the ball stud castle nut. Tighten the nut to 10 N.m (89 lb in) + 180 degrees. Important: * Do not loosen the castle nut in order to align the cotter pin slots. * Ensure the cutter pin ends do not contact the wheel speed sensor harness. 6. Continue to tighten the castle nut to align the slots with the opening in the ball stud and install the ball stud cotter pin. 7. Remove the mechanics wire and install the steering gear to the frame. Tighten the bolts to 110 N.m (81 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 12266 8. Install the front transaxle mount through bolt. Tighten the bolt to 110 N.m (81 lb ft). 9. Install the rear transaxle mount-to-frame bolts. Tighten the bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 10. Install the stabilizer shaft clamp. Tighten the bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 11. Tighten the frame-to-body bolts. Tighten the bolts to 155 N.m (114 lb ft). 12. Install the front air dam fasteners. 13. Install the side splash shield-to-frame fasteners. 14. Install the front wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Tires and Wheels. 15. Lower the vehicle. 16. Unsecure the radiator from the upper radiator support. 17. Align the front suspension. Refer to Front Toe Adjustment . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Front Suspension Strut, Strut Component and/or Spring Replacement ^ Tools Required J 42991 Strut Rod Nut Socket - J 45400 Strut Spring Compressor Removal Procedure 1. Install the strut assembly in the J 45400 using the following procedure. 1. Adjust the lower legs of the J 45400 to the lowest possible coil of the spring. 2. Adjust the upper legs of the J 45400 to the highest possible coil of the spring. 3. Inspect the strut assembly to insure hooks on the strut compress legs are properly installed on the spring coils. 4. Verify the strut assembly is parallel with the J 45400. 2. Compress the spring enough to unload the upper strut mount. 3. Notice: Do not allow the front strut stud to rotate during disassembly/reassembly. Use hand tools to keep the strut stud from rotating. If air tools are used, and the stud is allowed to rotate, damage to the strut may occur. Use the J 42991 or equivalent hand tools to remove the strut shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12271 4. Important: Leave the spring in the spring compressor. Lower the strut from the spring assembly. 5. Notice: Do not handle the top mount assembly by the plastic portion. Handle the top mount assembly by the metal portion when removing/installing the top mount from/to the strut assembly. Holding the top mount assembly by the plastic portion may loosen the snap fit of the bearing components and cause the bearing to fall apart. Remove the upper mount assembly, inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary. 6. Remove the strut dust shield and inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary. 7. Remove the hollow bumper from the strut shaft and inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary. 8. Inspect the spring for damage. Replace as necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12272 1. Extend the strut to its limit of travel. 2. Install the hollow bumper and dust boot to the strut shaft. 3. Important: The tag identifying the spring will be closer to the bottom of the spring. The end of the cold sits up against the tab on the spring seat. With the spring in the compressor, install the strut into the spring. 4. Important: The anti-rotation tab on the spring seat must face 180 degrees from the direction that the knuckle bracket points. Assemble the upper spring seat onto the strut shaft and align the flat with the strut to knuckle mounting bracket. 5. Notice: Do not handle the top mount assembly by the plastic portion. Handle the top mount assembly by the metal portion when removing/installing the top mount from/to the strut assembly. Holding the top mount assembly by the plastic portion may loosen the snap fit of the bearing components and cause the bearing to fall apart. Important: The flat on the metal plate of the top mount assembly must face the same direction of the anti-rotation tab on the spring seat. Assemble the top mount onto the strut shaft and align the flat 180 degrees from flat on the upper spring seat. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12273 6. Loosely install the strut shaft nut. 7. Notice: Do not allow the front strut stud to rotate during disassembly/reassembly. Use hand tools to keep the strut stud from rotating. If air tools are used, and the stud is allowed to rotate, damage to the strut may occur. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Hold the strut shaft and use the J 42991 or equivalent hand tools to tighten the shaft while verifying that the upper spring seat flats align with the top mount. ^ Tighten the strut shaft to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 8. Release the tension on the J 45400. 9. Remove the strut assembly from the J 45400. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12274 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Front Coil Spring Strut, Strut Component and/or Spring Replacement ^ Tools Required J 42991 Strut Rod Nut Socket - J 45400 Strut Spring Compressor Removal Procedure 1. Install the strut assembly in the J 45400 using the following procedure. 1. Adjust the lower legs of the J 45400 to the lowest possible coil of the spring. 2. Adjust the upper legs of the J 45400 to the highest possible coil of the spring. 3. Inspect the strut assembly to insure hooks on the strut compress legs are properly installed on the spring coils. 4. Verify the strut assembly is parallel with the J 45400 . 2. Compress the spring enough to unload the upper strut mount. 3. Notice: Do not allow the front strut stud to rotate during disassembly/reassembly. Use hand tools to keep the strut stud from rotating. If air tools are used, and the stud is allowed to rotate, damage to the strut may occur. Use the J 42991 or equivalent hand tools to remove the strut shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12275 4. Important: Leave the spring in the spring compressor. Lower the strut from the spring assembly. 5. Notice: Do not handle the top mount assembly by the plastic portion. Handle the top mount assembly by the metal portion when removing/installing the top mount from/to the strut assembly. Holding the top mount assembly by the plastic portion may loosen the snap fit of the bearing components and cause the bearing to fall apart. Remove the upper mount assembly, inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary. 6. Remove the strut dust shield and inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary. 7. Remove the hollow bumper from the strut shaft and inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary. 8. Inspect the spring for damage. Replace as necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12276 1. Extend the strut to its limit of travel. 2. Install the hollow bumper and dust boot to the strut shaft. 3. Important: The tag identifying the spring will be closer to the bottom of the spring. The end of the cold sits up against the tab on the spring seat. With the spring in the compressor, install the strut into the spring. 4. Important: The anti-rotation tab on the spring seat must face 180 degrees from the direction that the knuckle bracket points. Assemble the upper spring seat onto the strut shaft and align the flat with the strut to knuckle mounting bracket. 5. Notice: Do not handle the top mount assembly by the plastic portion. Handle the top mount assembly by the metal portion when removing/installing the top mount from/to the strut assembly. Holding the top mount assembly by the plastic portion may loosen the snap fit of the bearing components and cause the bearing to fall apart. Important: The flat on the metal plate of the top mount assembly must face the same direction of the anti-rotation tab on the spring seat. Assemble the top mount onto the strut shaft and align the flat 180 degrees from flat on the upper spring seat. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12277 6. Loosely install the strut shaft nut. 7. Notice: Do not allow the front strut stud to rotate during disassembly/reassembly. Use hand tools to keep the strut stud from rotating. If air tools are used, and the stud is allowed to rotate, damage to the strut may occur. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Hold the strut shaft and use the J 42991 or equivalent hand tools to tighten the shaft while verifying that the upper spring seat flats align with the top mount. ^ Tighten the strut shaft to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 8. Release the tension on the J 45400 . 9. Remove the strut assembly from the J 45400 . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12278 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Rear Coil Spring Coil Spring Replacement Coil Spring Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting Vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Important: Hold the link with a wrench during nut removal. Remove the stabilizer link to lower control arm nut. 4. Remove the trailing arm bracket to underbody bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12279 5. Place a screw-type jackstand under the lower control arm. 6. Using the jackstand, compress the coil spring. 7. Remove the lower shock bolt. 8. Loosen the lower control arm to support frame bolt. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12280 9. Remove the lower control arm to knuckle nut and bolt. 10. Lower the control arm in order to unload the coil spring. 11. Remove the coil spring. Installation Procedure 1. Fully seat the top and bottom coil spring insulators to the spring. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12281 2. Important: ^ Spray silicon lubricant on the insulators to aid in installation. ^ Ensure that part number identification tape located on the coil spring is oriented outboard of the vehicle and at the top of the spring. Position the spring with the rubber insulators into the vehicle. 3. Use a screw-type jackstand to compress the spring. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the knuckle to the lower control arm. ^ Tighten the lower control arm to knuckle bolt to 160 Nm (118 ft. lbs.). 5. Tighten the lower control arm to support nut and bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12282 6. Install the shock to the lower control arm. ^ Tighten the lower shock bolt to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the jackstand. 8. Important: Hold the link with a wrench during nut installation. Install the stabilizer link to the lower control arm. ^ Tighten the nut to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 9. Push the trailing arm upward to align the front bracket to body bolt. 10. Use a drift to aid in bracket alignment and install the remaining bolts. ^ Tighten the bracket to body bolts to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12283 11. Install the tire and wheel. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Check the rear alignment. Coil Spring Insulators Replacement Coil Spring Insulators Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the coil spring. 2. Remove the rubber insulators from the coil spring. Installation Procedure 1. Install the rubber insulators to the coil spring. 2. Install the coil spring. Spring Jounce Bumper Replacement Spring Jounce Bumper Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12284 2. Remove the jounce bumper nut at the lower control arm. 3. Remove the coil spring. 4. Remove the jounce bumper. Installation Procedure 1. Install the jounce bumper to the lower control arm. 2. Hand tighten the jounce bumper nut. 3. Install the coil Spring. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12285 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the jounce bumper to lower control arm nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the rear alignment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-08-002C Date: October 16, 2009 Subject: Information on Replacement of Shock Absorbers and Struts Due to Fluid Leaks Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and Inspection Procedures. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-08-002B (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin is intended to help identify the severity of shock absorber and strut fluid seepage. Improper diagnosis may lead to components being replaced that are within the manufacturer's specification. Shock absorbers and strut assemblies are fluid-filled components and will normally exhibit some seepage. Seepage is defined as oil film or dust accumulation on the exterior of the shock housing. Shock absorbers and struts are not to be replaced under warranty for seepage. Use the following information to determine if the condition is normal acceptable seepage or a defective component. Important Electronically controlled shock absorbers (MR) may have a tendency to attract dust to this oil film. Often this film and dust can be wiped off and will not return until similar mileage is accumulated again. Inspection Procedure Note The shock absorber or strut assembly DOES NOT have to be removed from the vehicle to perform the following inspection procedure. Use the following descriptions and graphics to determine the serviceability of the component. Shock Absorbers Do Not Replace shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom or top of the shock absorber and not originating from the shaft seal (the upper part of the lower shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on approximately 1/3 (a) or less of the lower shock tube (A) and originating from the shaft seal. Replace shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme wet film of oil covering more than 1/3 (b) of the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. Coil-over Shock Absorber Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information > Page 12290 Do Not Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the lower shock absorber tube or the coil-over shock absorber components and not originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the coil-over shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on the shock absorber tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme, wet film of oil covering the shock absorber tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Struts Do Not Replace Struts displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the strut tube or on other strut components and not originating from the shaft seal. 2. Light film/residue on the strut tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace Struts displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the strut tube and originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the strut tube). 4. Extreme wet film of oil covering the strut tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Correction Use the information published in SI for diagnosis and repair. Use the applicable published labor operation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber Replacement Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Shock Absorber Replacement Shock Absorber Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting 2. Remove the lower shock bolt. 3. For right side only, remove splash shield. 4. Remove the upper shock bolt. 5. Remove the shock from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the shock to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber Replacement > Page 12293 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the upper shock bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 3. For right side only, install splash shield 4. Install the lower shock bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber Replacement > Page 12294 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Shock Absorber Disposal Shock Absorber Disposal Caution: Gas charged shock absorbers contain high pressure gas. Do not remove the snap ring from inside the top of the tube. If the snap ring is removed, the contents of the shock absorber will come out with extreme force which may result in personal injury. Caution: To prevent personal injury, wear safety glasses when centerpunching and drilling the shock absorber. Use care not to puncture the shock absorber tube with the centerpunch. 1. Make an indentation 10 mm (0.4 inch) from the bottom (4) of the tube (3) using a centerpunch. 2. Clamp the shock absorber in a vise horizontally with the shock absorber rod (1) completely extended. 3. Drill a hole in the shock absorber at the centerpunch (4) using a 5 mm (3/16 inch) drill bit. Gas or a gas/oil mixture will exhaust when the drill bit penetrates the shock absorber. Use shop towels in order to contain the escaping oil. 4. Make an indentation in the middle (2) of the tube (3) with a centerpunch. 5. Drill a second hole in the shock absorber at the centerpunch (2) using a 5 mm (3/16 inch) drill bit. Oil will exhaust when the drill bit penetrates the shock absorber. Use shop towels in order to contain the escaping oil. 6. Remove the shock absorber from the vise. Hold the shock absorber over a drain pan horizontally with the holes down. Move the rod (1) in and out of the tube (3) to completely drain the oil from the shock absorber. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber Replacement > Page 12295 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Strut Assembly Replacement Strut Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the strut assembly to body fasteners. 3. Remove the wheel and tire. 4. Remove the brake hose bracket from the strut assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber Replacement > Page 12296 5. Loosen, do not remove the strut to knuckle bolts and nuts. 6. Disconnect the stabilizer link from the strut assembly. 7. Remove the strut to knuckle bolts and nuts. Discard the bolts and nuts. 8. Remove the strut assembly from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber Replacement > Page 12297 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the strut assembly to the vehicle. ^ Tighten the strut to body bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 2. Attach the strut to the steering knuckle using new bolts and nuts. ^ Tighten the bolts and nuts to 180 Nm (133 ft. lbs.). 3. Inspect the stabilizer link seals for damage and replace the link as necessary. 4. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while installing the link nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber Replacement > Page 12298 Connect the stabilizer link to the strut. ^ Tighten the nut to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the brake hose bracket to the strut assembly. ^ Tighten the brake bracket bolt to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the wheel and tire. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Perform a wheel alignment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber Replacement > Page 12299 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Suspension Strut Disposal Suspension Strut Disposal Caution: Use the proper eye protection when drilling to prevent metal chips from causing physical injury. 1. Clamp the strut in a vise horizontally with the rod (1) completely extended. 2. Drill a hole in the strut at the center of the end cap (3) using a 5 mm (3/16 inch) drill bit. Gas or a gas/oil mixture will exhaust when the drill bit penetrates the strut. Use shop towels in order to contain the escaping oil. 3. Remove the strut from the vise. 4. Hold the strut over a drain pan vertically with the hole down. 5. Move the rod (1) in and out of the tube (2) to completely drain the oil from the strut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber Replacement > Page 12300 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Strut, Strut Component and/or Spring Replacement Strut, Strut Component and/or Spring Replacement ^ Tools Required J 42991 Strut Rod Nut Socket - J 45400 Strut Spring Compressor Removal Procedure 1. Install the strut assembly in the J 45400 using the following procedure. 1. Adjust the lower legs of the J 45400 to the lowest possible coil of the spring. 2. Adjust the upper legs of the J 45400 to the highest possible coil of the spring. 3. Inspect the strut assembly to insure hooks on the strut compress legs are properly installed on the spring coils. 4. Verify the strut assembly is parallel with the J 45400. 2. Compress the spring enough to unload the upper strut mount. 3. Notice: Do not allow the front strut stud to rotate during disassembly/reassembly. Use hand tools to keep the strut stud from rotating. If air tools are used, and the stud is allowed to rotate, damage to the strut may occur. Use the J 42991 or equivalent hand tools to remove the strut shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber Replacement > Page 12301 4. Important: Leave the spring in the spring compressor. Lower the strut from the spring assembly. 5. Notice: Do not handle the top mount assembly by the plastic portion. Handle the top mount assembly by the metal portion when removing/installing the top mount from/to the strut assembly. Holding the top mount assembly by the plastic portion may loosen the snap fit of the bearing components and cause the bearing to fall apart. Remove the upper mount assembly, inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary. 6. Remove the strut dust shield and inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary. 7. Remove the hollow bumper from the strut shaft and inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary. 8. Inspect the spring for damage. Replace as necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber Replacement > Page 12302 1. Extend the strut to its limit of travel. 2. Install the hollow bumper and dust boot to the strut shaft. 3. Important: The tag identifying the spring will be closer to the bottom of the spring. The end of the cold sits up against the tab on the spring seat. With the spring in the compressor, install the strut into the spring. 4. Important: The anti-rotation tab on the spring seat must face 180 degrees from the direction that the knuckle bracket points. Assemble the upper spring seat onto the strut shaft and align the flat with the strut to knuckle mounting bracket. 5. Notice: Do not handle the top mount assembly by the plastic portion. Handle the top mount assembly by the metal portion when removing/installing the top mount from/to the strut assembly. Holding the top mount assembly by the plastic portion may loosen the snap fit of the bearing components and cause the bearing to fall apart. Important: The flat on the metal plate of the top mount assembly must face the same direction of the anti-rotation tab on the spring seat. Assemble the top mount onto the strut shaft and align the flat 180 degrees from flat on the upper spring seat. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber Replacement > Page 12303 6. Loosely install the strut shaft nut. 7. Notice: Do not allow the front strut stud to rotate during disassembly/reassembly. Use hand tools to keep the strut stud from rotating. If air tools are used, and the stud is allowed to rotate, damage to the strut may occur. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Hold the strut shaft and use the J 42991 or equivalent hand tools to tighten the shaft while verifying that the upper spring seat flats align with the top mount. ^ Tighten the strut shaft to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 8. Release the tension on the J 45400. 9. Remove the strut assembly from the J 45400. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Service and Repair Suspension Travel Bumper: Service and Repair Spring Jounce Bumper Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the jounce bumper nut at the lower control arm. 3. Remove the coil spring. 4. Remove the jounce bumper. Installation Procedure 1. Install the jounce bumper to the lower control arm. 2. Hand tighten the jounce bumper nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12307 3. Install the coil Spring. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the jounce bumper to lower control arm nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the rear alignment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement Trailing Arm: Service and Repair Trailing Arm Replacement Trailing Arm Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the trailing arm bracket to body bolts. 3. Remove the trailing arm bushing to bracket nut and bolt. 4. Remove the park brake cable clip from the trailing arm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement > Page 12312 5. Remove the trailing arm to knuckle bolts. 6. Remove the trailing arm. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Install the trailing arm to the knuckle. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 110 N.m (81 lb ft). 2. Position the trailing arm bracket to the trailing arm. 3. Loosely install the trailing arm bushing to bracket nut and bolt. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement > Page 12313 4. Push upward on the trailing arm and loosely install the front bolt. 5. Use a drift to align the remaining bolts. Tighten Tighten the trailing arm bracket to body bolts to 110 N.m (81 lb ft). 6. Tighten the trailing arm bushing to bracket nut and bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 160 N.m (118 lb ft). 7. Install the park brake cable clip. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 8. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement > Page 12314 Trailing Arm: Service and Repair Trailing Arm Bracket Replacement Trailing Arm Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the park brake clip from the trailing arm. 3. Remove the bracket to underbody bolts. 4. Remove the trailing arm to bracket nut and bolt. 5. Remove the bracket. Installation Procedure 1. Install the bracket to the trailing arm. 2. Loosely install the trailing arm bracket nut and bolt. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement > Page 12315 3. Push the trailing arm upward to align the front bracket to body bolt. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Use a drift to aid in bracket alignment and install the remaining bolts. Tighten Tighten the bracket to body bolts to 110 N.m (81 lb ft). 5. Install the parking brake cable clip to the trailing arm. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 6. Tighten the bracket to trailing arm bushing bolt. Tighten Tighten the nut and bolt to 160 N.m (118 lb ft). 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Step 1 - Step 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front brake rotor. 2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12321 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor electrical connector form the connector bracket. 4. Remove the front wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 5. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire or equivalent. 6. Remove and discard the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 7. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the steering knuckle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12322 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 130 Nm (96 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12323 4. Install the wheel speed sensor electrical connector to the mounting bracket, if equipped. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the front brake rotor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12324 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Rear Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear brake drum. 2. On vehicles with all-wheel drive, remove the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12325 4. Important: Do not damage the wheel drive shaft joint seal. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent. 5. Remove the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 6. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the suspension knuckle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 84 Nm (62 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12326 3. On all-wheel drive vehicles, install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 125 Nm (92 ft. lbs.). 4. If equipped, route the wheel speed sensor electrical harness through the backing plate and seat the grommet. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the rear brake drum. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12327 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front brake rotor. 2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12328 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor electrical connector form the connector bracket. 4. Remove the front wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 5. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire or equivalent. 6. Remove and discard the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 7. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the steering knuckle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12329 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 130 Nm (96 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12330 4. Install the wheel speed sensor electrical connector to the mounting bracket, if equipped. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the front brake rotor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to .............................................................................................................................. .................................. 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions Vehicle Lifting: Service Precautions CAUTION: - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Information Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair General Information LIFTING AND JACKING THE VEHICLE CAUTION: - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. NOTE: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: - Remove or secure all of the vehicle's contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. - The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. - The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment's manufacturer. - Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. - Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle's contents. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Information > Page 12341 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. Notice: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: * Remove or secure all of the vehicle's contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment's manufacturer. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle's contents. Vehicle Lifting-Frame Contact Lift Front Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the front lift pads approximately 12.2 in (310 mm) inboard from the front pinchweld flanges. Rear Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the rear lift pads 10.0 in (255 mm) inboard from the rear pinchweld flanges. Vehicle Jacking Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Information > Page 12342 Under the Center of the Rear Suspension Lift the rear of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad at the center of the rear suspension. Supporting the Vehicle with Jackstands Important: Place jackstands ONLY under strong and stable vehicle structures. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 12357 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 12358 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Minimizing Damage to TPM Sensors INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-007 Date: May 16, 2008 Subject: Minimizing Damage to Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Sensors During Tire Mounting/Dismounting Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors Minimizing Damage To TPM Sensors All GM vehicles now in production and sold in the U.S., as well as many vehicles sold in Canada, feature Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems that have valve stem mounted Tire Pressure Sensors. When dismounting and mounting tires, care must be taken when breaking the bead loose from the wheel. If the tire machines bead breaking fixture is positioned too close to the tire pressure sensor, as the tire bead breaks away from the wheel it may be forced into, or catch on the edge of the tire pressure sensor. This can damage the sensor and require the sensor to be replaced. Care must also be taken when transferring the tire bead to the other side of the wheel rim. As the tire machine rotates and the tire bead is stretched around the wheel rim, the bead can come in contact with the sensor if it is not correctly positioned in relation to the mounting/dismounting head prior to tire mounting/dismounting. This can also cause sensor damage requiring replacement. Procedure Notice: Use a tire changing machine in order to dismount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or the wheel rim could result. Notice: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. 1. Remove the valve core from the valve stem. 2. Deflate the tire completely. Important: Rim-clamp European-type tire changers are recommended. 3. Use the tire changer in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Follow steps 4-7 to remove the tire from the wheel. 4. When separating the tire bead from the wheel position the bead breaking fixture 90, 180 and 270 degrees from the valve stem. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 12359 5. Position the wheel and tire so the valve stem is situated at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the outer tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 6. Position the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated again at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the inner tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 7. Remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting on vehicles equipped with TPM replace the tire pressure sensor. 8. Use a wire brush or coarse steel wool in order to remove any rubber, light rust or corrosion from the wheel bead seats. Important: If bead seat corrosion has been identified as an air loss concern on the wheel being worked on, refer to GM Service Bulletin # 08-03-10-006 for additional information on correcting the leak. 9. Apply GM P/N 12345884 (in Canada, P/N 5728223) or equivalent to the tire bead and the wheel rim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 12360 10. Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the inside of the wheel rim. 11. Position the rim so that the valve stem (1) is situated at the 3 o'clock position relative to the head (2). This will protect the sensor when the bottom bead seats. 12. After the bottom bead is on the wheel, reposition the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated at the 9 o'clock position relative to the head. This will protect the sensor while mounting the tire bead to the outside of the wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 12361 13. Use the tire changer in order to install the tire to the wheel. Caution: To avoid serious personal injury, do not stand over tire when inflating. The bead may break when the bead snaps over the safety hump. Do not exceed 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure when inflating any tire if beads are not seated. If 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure will not seat the beads, deflate, lubricate the beads and reinflate. Overinflating may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. Important: Allowable bead seating pressure is 345 kPa (50 psi) on Extended Mobility Tires. 14. Inflate the tire until it passes the bead humps. Be sure that the valve core is not installed at this time. 15. Install the valve core to the valve core stem. 16. Inflate the tire to the proper air pressure. 17. Ensure that the locating rings are visible on both sides of the tire in order to verify that the tire bead is fully seated on the wheel. Parts Information The product shown above is available from GM SPO. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 12367 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 12368 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 12369 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 12370 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 12371 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12372 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation This vehicle is not equipped with a factory installed Tire Pressure Monitor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 12385 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 12386 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Minimizing Damage to TPM Sensors INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-007 Date: May 16, 2008 Subject: Minimizing Damage to Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Sensors During Tire Mounting/Dismounting Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors Minimizing Damage To TPM Sensors All GM vehicles now in production and sold in the U.S., as well as many vehicles sold in Canada, feature Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems that have valve stem mounted Tire Pressure Sensors. When dismounting and mounting tires, care must be taken when breaking the bead loose from the wheel. If the tire machines bead breaking fixture is positioned too close to the tire pressure sensor, as the tire bead breaks away from the wheel it may be forced into, or catch on the edge of the tire pressure sensor. This can damage the sensor and require the sensor to be replaced. Care must also be taken when transferring the tire bead to the other side of the wheel rim. As the tire machine rotates and the tire bead is stretched around the wheel rim, the bead can come in contact with the sensor if it is not correctly positioned in relation to the mounting/dismounting head prior to tire mounting/dismounting. This can also cause sensor damage requiring replacement. Procedure Notice: Use a tire changing machine in order to dismount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or the wheel rim could result. Notice: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. 1. Remove the valve core from the valve stem. 2. Deflate the tire completely. Important: Rim-clamp European-type tire changers are recommended. 3. Use the tire changer in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Follow steps 4-7 to remove the tire from the wheel. 4. When separating the tire bead from the wheel position the bead breaking fixture 90, 180 and 270 degrees from the valve stem. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 12387 5. Position the wheel and tire so the valve stem is situated at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the outer tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 6. Position the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated again at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the inner tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 7. Remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting on vehicles equipped with TPM replace the tire pressure sensor. 8. Use a wire brush or coarse steel wool in order to remove any rubber, light rust or corrosion from the wheel bead seats. Important: If bead seat corrosion has been identified as an air loss concern on the wheel being worked on, refer to GM Service Bulletin # 08-03-10-006 for additional information on correcting the leak. 9. Apply GM P/N 12345884 (in Canada, P/N 5728223) or equivalent to the tire bead and the wheel rim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 12388 10. Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the inside of the wheel rim. 11. Position the rim so that the valve stem (1) is situated at the 3 o'clock position relative to the head (2). This will protect the sensor when the bottom bead seats. 12. After the bottom bead is on the wheel, reposition the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated at the 9 o'clock position relative to the head. This will protect the sensor while mounting the tire bead to the outside of the wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 12389 13. Use the tire changer in order to install the tire to the wheel. Caution: To avoid serious personal injury, do not stand over tire when inflating. The bead may break when the bead snaps over the safety hump. Do not exceed 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure when inflating any tire if beads are not seated. If 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure will not seat the beads, deflate, lubricate the beads and reinflate. Overinflating may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. Important: Allowable bead seating pressure is 345 kPa (50 psi) on Extended Mobility Tires. 14. Inflate the tire until it passes the bead humps. Be sure that the valve core is not installed at this time. 15. Install the valve core to the valve core stem. 16. Inflate the tire to the proper air pressure. 17. Ensure that the locating rings are visible on both sides of the tire in order to verify that the tire bead is fully seated on the wheel. Parts Information The product shown above is available from GM SPO. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 12394 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 12395 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 12396 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 12397 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 12398 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 10-03-16-001 > Jul > 10 > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tires: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-001F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Puncture Repair Procedures For All Cars and Light Duty Trucks Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001E (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin covers puncture repair procedures for passenger car and light duty truck radial tires in the tread area only. The tire manufacturer must be contacted for its individual repair policy and whether or not the speed rating is retained after repair. Caution - Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall. - Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while repairing tires. - NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads. Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. - NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation. Repairable area on a radial tire. Important - NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32") remaining depth). - NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4"). - NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair. - NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel). - Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair. - Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury. - Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and repair tools/repair material recommendations. Three basic steps for tire puncture repair: 1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 12408 2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent air loss. External Inspection 1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak by using a water and soap solution. Mark the injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core. 2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader. Internal Inspection 1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4. Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5. Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4") should not be repaired. Cleaning 1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool. 2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow guidelines for handling and disposal. Clean the Injury Channel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 12409 1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended reaming tool(s). Fill the Injury 1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. (For combination repair/plug units skip this step.) Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug per repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just above the inside tire surface. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection. Repair Unit Selection Important Do not install the repair unit in this step. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 12410 1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit selection. Buffing 1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine wire brush or gritted rasp. 2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool. Cementing Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures. Repair Unit Application Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 12411 1. The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed (Do not spread the beads excessively). Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units 1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out. 3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread. Combination Repair/Plug Units 1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2. Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions. 2. Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool. Safety Cage Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 12412 Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. Final Inspection 1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - OFF Vehicle. For additional tire puncture repair information, contact: Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 05-03-10-020C > Apr > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-020C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-020B (Section 03 - Suspension). GM's Position on the Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires General Motors does not oppose the use of purified nitrogen as an inflation gas for tires. We expect the theoretical benefits to be reduced in practical use due to the lack of an existing infrastructure to continuously facilitate inflating tires with nearly pure nitrogen. Even occasional inflation with compressed atmospheric air will negate many of the theoretical benefits. Given those theoretical benefits, practical limitations, and the robust design of GM original equipment TPC tires, the realized benefits to our customer of inflating their tires with purified nitrogen are expected to be minimal. The Promise of Nitrogen: Under Controlled Conditions Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general consumer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. The following benefits under controlled conditions are attributed to nitrogen gas and its unique properties: - A reduction in the expected loss of Tire Pressure over time. - A reduction in the variance of Tire Pressures with temperature changes due to reduction of water vapor concentration. - A reduction of long term rubber degradation due to a decrease in oxygen concentrations. Important These are obtainable performance improvements when relatively pure nitrogen gas is used to inflate tires under controlled conditions. The Promise of Nitrogen: Real World Use Nitrogen inflation can provide some benefit by reducing gas migration (pressure loss) at the molecular level through the tire structure. NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) has stated that the inflation pressure loss of tires can be up to 5% a month. Nitrogen molecules are larger than oxygen molecules and, therefore, are less prone to "seeping" through the tire casing. The actual obtainable benefits of nitrogen vary, based on the physical construction and the materials used in the manufacturing of the tire being inflated. Another potential benefit of nitrogen is the reduced oxidation of tire components. Research has demonstrated that oxygen consumed in the oxidation process of the tire primarily comes from the inflation media. Therefore, it is reasonable to assume that oxidation of tire components can be reduced if the tire is inflated with pure nitrogen. However, only very small amounts of oxygen are required to begin the normal oxidation process. Even slight contamination of the tire inflation gas with compressed atmospheric air during normal inflation pressure maintenance, may negate the benefits of using nitrogen. GM Tire Quality, Technology and Focus of Importance Since 1972, General Motors has designed tires under the TPC (Tire Performance Criteria) specification system, which includes specific requirements that ensure robust tire performance under normal usage. General Motors works with tire suppliers to design and manufacture original equipment tires for GM vehicles. The GM TPC addresses required performance with respect to both inflation pressure retention, and endurance properties for original equipment tires. The inflation pressure retention requirements address availability of oxygen and oxidation concerns, while endurance requirements ensure the mechanical structure of the tire has sufficient strength. This combination has provided our customers with tires that maintain their structural integrity throughout their useful treadlife under normal operating conditions. Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Maintaining the correct inflation pressure allows the tire to perform as intended by the vehicle manufacturer in many areas, including comfort, fuel economy, stopping distance, cornering, traction, treadwear, and noise. Since the load carrying capability of a tire is related to inflation pressure, proper inflation pressure maintenance is necessary for the tire to support the load imposed by the vehicle without excessive structural Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 05-03-10-020C > Apr > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires > Page 12417 degradation. Important Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 09-03-16-002A > Apr > 10 > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 09-03-16-002A > Apr > 10 > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 12422 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 09-03-16-002A > Apr > 10 > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 12423 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 09-03-16-002A > Apr > 10 > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 12424 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 09-03-16-002A > Apr > 10 > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 12425 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 09-03-16-002A > Apr > 10 > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 12426 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 07-03-10-008B > Aug > 09 > Tires - Slight/Mild Edge Feathering Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Slight/Mild Edge Feathering Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-03-10-008B Date: August 13, 2009 Subject: Information on Slight or Mild Tire Feathering and Recommended Practices (Normal Tire Wear Condition) Models: 2006-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-10-008A (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin provides information regarding the normal tire wear condition of slight or mild tire feathering and recommended practices. If a vehicle comes into a dealership with a concern of slight or mild feathering-type wear on the tires, review with the customer their past tire rotation history. Tires should be rotated every 8,000 to 13,000 km (5,000 to 8,000 mi) for applicable vehicles with tires where a tire rotation is possible or recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-015B for information on tire rotation for vehicles with different front/rear tire/wheel sizes. SOME TIRE FEATHERING IS A NORMAL PART OF TIRE WEAR AND THROUGH PROPER TIRE ROTATION AND INFLATION, THIS TIRE WEAR CAN BE MINIMIZED AND TIRE LIFE MAXIMIZED. If the customer has not rotated the tires within the last 8,000 to 13,000 km (5,000 to 8,000 mi), a tire rotation in the modified X-pattern is necessary to clean-up the feathering, rather than placing the vehicle on the alignment machine. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 00-00-90-002J > Jan > 09 > Tires - Correct Inflation Pressure Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Correct Inflation Pressure Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-00-90-002J Date: January 28, 2009 Subject: Information on Proper Tire Pressure Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3, H3T 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and clarify additional information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-00-90-002I (Section 00 - General Information). Important: ^ Adjustment of tire pressure for a customer with a Low Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light on and no codes in the TPM system is NOT a warrantable repair. Claims to simply adjust the tire pressure will be rejected. ^ ALL tires (including the spare tire) MUST be set to the recommended inflation pressure stated on the vehicle's tire placard (on driver's door) during the PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION (PDI). Recommended inflation pressure is not the pressure printed on tire sidewall. ^ Tires may be over-inflated from the assembly plant due to the mounting process. ^ Generally a 5.6°C (10°F) temperature change will result in (is equivalent to) a 6.9 kPa (1 psi) tire pressure change. ^ 2008-2009 HUMMER H2 Only - The H2 comes standard with Light Truck "D" Load Range tires with a recommended cold inflation pressure of 289 kPa (42 psi). These tires will alert the driver to a low pressure situation at roughly 262 kPa (38 psi) due to a requirement in FMVSS 138 which specifies a Minimum Activation Pressure for each tire type. This creates a relatively narrow window of "usable" pressure values and the warning will be more sensitive to outside temperature changes during the colder months. As with other cold temperature/tire pressure issues, there is nothing wrong with the system itself. If a vehicle is brought in with this concern, check for tire damage and set all tires to the Recommended Cold Inflation Pressure shown on the vehicle placard. Accurate tire pressures ensure the safe handling and appropriate ride characteristics of GM cars and trucks. It is critical that the tire pressure be adjusted to the specifications on the vehicle¡C■s tire placard during PDI. Ride, handling and road noise concerns may be caused by improperly adjusted tire pressure. The first step in the diagnosis of these concerns is to verify that the tires are inflated to the correct pressures. The recommended tire inflation pressure is listed on the vehicle¡C■s tire placard. The tire placard is located on the driver¡C■s side front or rear door edge, center pillar, or the rear compartment lid. Tip ^ Generally a 5.6°C (10°F) temperature increase will result in (is equivalent to) a 6.9 kPa (1 psi) tire pressure increase. ^ The definition of a "cold" tire is one that has been sitting for at least 3 hours, or driven no more than 1.6 km (1 mi). ^ On extremely cold days, if the vehicle has been indoors, it may be necessary to compensate for the low external temperature by adding additional air to the tire during PDI. ^ During cold weather, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator light (a yellow horseshoe with an exclamation point) may illuminate. If this indicator turns off after the tires warm up (reach operating temperature), the tire pressure should be reset to placard pressure at the cold temperature. ^ The TPM system will work correctly with nitrogen in tires. ^ The TPM system is compatible with the GM Vehicle Care Tire Sealant but may not be with other commercially available sealants. Important: ^ Do not use the tire pressure indicated on the tire itself as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 00-00-90-002J > Jan > 09 > Tires - Correct Inflation Pressure Information > Page 12435 ^ Always inspect and adjust the pressure when the tires are cold. ^ Vehicles that have different pressures for the front and the rear need to be adjusted after tire rotation. Improper tire inflation may result in any or all of the following conditions: ^ Premature tire wear ^ Harsh ride ^ Excessive road noise ^ Poor handling ^ Reduced fuel economy ^ Low Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Light ON ^ Low Tire Pressure Message on the Drivers Information Center (DIC) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 12436 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 12437 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-020C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-020B (Section 03 - Suspension). GM's Position on the Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires General Motors does not oppose the use of purified nitrogen as an inflation gas for tires. We expect the theoretical benefits to be reduced in practical use due to the lack of an existing infrastructure to continuously facilitate inflating tires with nearly pure nitrogen. Even occasional inflation with compressed atmospheric air will negate many of the theoretical benefits. Given those theoretical benefits, practical limitations, and the robust design of GM original equipment TPC tires, the realized benefits to our customer of inflating their tires with purified nitrogen are expected to be minimal. The Promise of Nitrogen: Under Controlled Conditions Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general consumer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. The following benefits under controlled conditions are attributed to nitrogen gas and its unique properties: - A reduction in the expected loss of Tire Pressure over time. - A reduction in the variance of Tire Pressures with temperature changes due to reduction of water vapor concentration. - A reduction of long term rubber degradation due to a decrease in oxygen concentrations. Important These are obtainable performance improvements when relatively pure nitrogen gas is used to inflate tires under controlled conditions. The Promise of Nitrogen: Real World Use Nitrogen inflation can provide some benefit by reducing gas migration (pressure loss) at the molecular level through the tire structure. NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) has stated that the inflation pressure loss of tires can be up to 5% a month. Nitrogen molecules are larger than oxygen molecules and, therefore, are less prone to "seeping" through the tire casing. The actual obtainable benefits of nitrogen vary, based on the physical construction and the materials used in the manufacturing of the tire being inflated. Another potential benefit of nitrogen is the reduced oxidation of tire components. Research has demonstrated that oxygen consumed in the oxidation process of the tire primarily comes from the inflation media. Therefore, it is reasonable to assume that oxidation of tire components can be reduced if the tire is inflated with pure nitrogen. However, only very small amounts of oxygen are required to begin the normal oxidation process. Even slight contamination of the tire inflation gas with compressed atmospheric air during normal inflation pressure maintenance, may negate the benefits of using nitrogen. GM Tire Quality, Technology and Focus of Importance Since 1972, General Motors has designed tires under the TPC (Tire Performance Criteria) specification system, which includes specific requirements that ensure robust tire performance under normal usage. General Motors works with tire suppliers to design and manufacture original equipment tires for GM vehicles. The GM TPC addresses required performance with respect to both inflation pressure retention, and endurance properties for original equipment tires. The inflation pressure retention requirements address availability of oxygen and oxidation concerns, while endurance requirements ensure the mechanical structure of the tire has sufficient strength. This combination has provided our customers with tires that maintain their structural integrity throughout their useful treadlife under normal operating conditions. Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Maintaining the correct inflation pressure allows the tire to perform as intended by the vehicle manufacturer in many areas, including comfort, fuel economy, stopping distance, cornering, traction, treadwear, and noise. Since the load carrying capability of a tire is related to inflation pressure, proper inflation pressure maintenance is necessary for the tire to support the load imposed by the vehicle without excessive structural Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 12438 degradation. Important Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 12439 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-001F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Puncture Repair Procedures For All Cars and Light Duty Trucks Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001E (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin covers puncture repair procedures for passenger car and light duty truck radial tires in the tread area only. The tire manufacturer must be contacted for its individual repair policy and whether or not the speed rating is retained after repair. Caution - Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall. - Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while repairing tires. - NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads. Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. - NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation. Repairable area on a radial tire. Important - NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32") remaining depth). - NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4"). - NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair. - NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel). - Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair. - Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury. - Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and repair tools/repair material recommendations. Three basic steps for tire puncture repair: 1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 12440 2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent air loss. External Inspection 1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak by using a water and soap solution. Mark the injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core. 2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader. Internal Inspection 1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4. Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5. Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4") should not be repaired. Cleaning 1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool. 2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow guidelines for handling and disposal. Clean the Injury Channel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 12441 1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended reaming tool(s). Fill the Injury 1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. (For combination repair/plug units skip this step.) Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug per repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just above the inside tire surface. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection. Repair Unit Selection Important Do not install the repair unit in this step. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 12442 1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit selection. Buffing 1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine wire brush or gritted rasp. 2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool. Cementing Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures. Repair Unit Application Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 12443 1. The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed (Do not spread the beads excessively). Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units 1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out. 3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread. Combination Repair/Plug Units 1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2. Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions. 2. Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool. Safety Cage Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 12444 Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. Final Inspection 1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - OFF Vehicle. For additional tire puncture repair information, contact: Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12445 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12446 Tires: Description and Operation Tread Wear Indicators Description Tread Wear Indicators Description The original equipment tires have tread wear indicators that show when you should replace the tires. The location of these indicators are at 72 degree intervals around the outer diameter of the tire. The indicators appear as a 6 mm (0.25 inch) wide band when the tire tread depth becomes 1.6 mm (2/32 inch). Tire Inflation Description When you inflate the tires to the recommended inflation pressures, the factory-installed wheels and tires are designed in order to handle loads to the tire's rated load capacity. Incorrect tire pressures, or under-inflated tires, can cause the following conditions: ^ Vehicle handling concerns ^ Poor fuel economy ^ Shortened tire life ^ Tire overloading Inspect the tire pressure when the following conditions apply: ^ The vehicle has been sitting at least 3 hours. ^ The vehicle has not been driven for more than 1.6 km (1 mi). ^ The tires are cool. Inspect the tires monthly or before any extended trip. Adjust the tire pressure to the specifications on the tire label. Install the valve caps or the extensions on the valves. The caps or the extensions keep out dust and water. The kilopascal (kPa) is the metric term for pressure. The tire pressure may be printed in both kilopascal (kPa) and psi. One psi equals 6.9 kPa. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12447 Inflation Pressure Conversion (Kilopascals to PSI) Tires with a higher than recommended pressure can cause the following conditions: ^ A hard ride ^ Tire bruising ^ Rapid tread wear at the center of the tire Tires with a lower than recommended pressure can cause the following conditions: ^ A tire squeal on turns ^ Hard steering ^ Rapid wear and uneven wear on the edge of the tread ^ Tire rim bruises and tire rim rupture ^ Tire cord breakage ^ High tire temperatures ^ Reduced vehicle handling ^ High fuel consumption ^ Soft riding Unequal pressure on the same axle can cause the following conditions: ^ Uneven braking ^ Steering lead ^ Reduced vehicle handling Refer to the Tire Placard for specific tire and wheel applications and tire pressures. All Seasons Tires Description All Seasons Tires Description Most Saturn vehicles are equipped with steel belted all-season radial tires as standard equipment. These tires qualify as snow tires, with a higher than average rating for snow traction than the non-all season radial tires previously used. Other performance areas, such as wet traction, rolling resistance, tread life, and air retention, are also improved. This is done by improvements in both tread design and tread compounds. These tires are identified by an M + S molded in the tire side wall after the tire size. The suffix MS is also molded in the tire side wall after the TPC specification number. P-Metric Sized Tires Description Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12448 P-Metric Sized Tires Description Most P-metric tire sizes do not have exact corresponding alphanumeric tire sizes. Replacement tires should be of the same tire performance criteria TPC specification number including the same size, the same load range, and the same construction as those originally installed on the vehicle. Consult a tire dealer if you must replace the P-metric tire with other sizes. Tire companies can best recommend the closest match of alphanumeric to P-metric sizes within their own tire lines. The above illustration may not correspond with your vehicle, but is meant as an example. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Mounting and Dismounting Tires: Service and Repair Tire Mounting and Dismounting Tire Mounting and Dismounting Notice: Use a tire changing machine in order to dismount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or the wheel rim could result. Notice: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. 1. Notice: Damage to either the tire bead or the wheel mounting holes can result from the use of improper wheel attachment or tire mounting procedures. It takes up to 70 seconds for all of the air to completely exhaust from a large tire. Failure to follow the proper procedures could cause the tire changer to put enough force on the tire to bend the wheel at the mounting surface. Such damage may result in vibration and/or shimmy, and under severe usage lead to wheel cracking. Deflate the tire completely. 2. Important: Rim-clamp European-type tire changers are recommended. Use the tire changer in order to remove the tire from the wheel. 3. Use a wire brush or coarse steel wool in order to remove any rubber, light rust or corrosion from the wheel bead seats. 4. Notice: When mounting the tires, use an approved tire mounting lubricant. DO NOT use silicon or corrosive base compounds to lubricate the tire bead and the wheel rim. A silicon base compound can cause the tire to slip on the rim. A corrosive type compound can cause tire or rim deterioration. Apply an approved Lubricant to the tire bead and the wheel rim. 5. Use the tire changer in order to install the tire to the wheel. 6. Caution: To avoid serious personal injury, do not stand over tire when inflating. The bead may break when the bead snaps over the safety hump. Do not exceed 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure when inflating any tire if beads are not seated. If 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure will not seat the beads, deflate, relubricate the beads and reinflate. Overinflation may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. Inflate the tire to the proper air pressure. 7. Ensure that the locating rings are visible on both sides of the tire in order to verify that the tire bead is fully seated on the wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Mounting and Dismounting > Page 12451 Tires: Service and Repair Tire Repair Tire Repair Many different materials and techniques are available on the market in order to repair tires. Not all of the materials and techniques work on some types of tires. Tire manufacturers have published detailed instructions on how and when to repair tires. Obtain the instructions from the manufacturer. If the vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire, do not repair the compact spare. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Mounting and Dismounting > Page 12452 Tires: Service and Repair Tire Rotation Tire Rotation Rotate the tires and wheels at frequent intervals to equalize wear. Refer to Maintenance Schedule in Maintenance and Lubrication. In addition to scheduled rotation, rotate the tire and wheel whenever uneven tire wear is noticed. Radial tires tend to wear faster in the shoulder area, particularly in front positions. Radial tires in non-drive locations may develop an irregular wear pattern that may increase tire noise. This makes regular rotation especially necessary. Always use a 4-wheel rotation. After rotation, check the wheel nuts for specified torque. Then, set the tire pressure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 12461 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 12462 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 12463 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 12468 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 12473 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 12474 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 12475 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 12481 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 12482 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 12483 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 12488 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 12493 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 12494 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 12499 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 12500 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 12501 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 12506 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 12511 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 12512 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 12513 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 04-03-10-012B > Feb > 08 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-012B Date: February 01, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Pitting and Brake Dust on Chrome wheels Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-012A (Section 03 - Suspension). Analysis of Returned Wheels Chrome wheels returned under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for pitting concerns have recently been evaluated. This condition is usually most severe in the vent (or window) area of the front wheels. This "pitting" may actually be brake dust that has been allowed to accumulate on the wheel. The longer this accumulation builds up, the more difficult it is to remove. Cleaning the Wheels In all cases, the returned wheels could be cleaned to their original condition using GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, P/N 10952905). When using this product, you should confine your treatment to the areas of the wheel that show evidence of the brake dust build-up. This product is only for use on chromed steel or chromed aluminum wheels. Parts Information Warranty Information Wheel replacement for this condition is NOT applicable under the terms of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 12523 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 12524 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 12525 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 12530 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 12535 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 12536 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 04-03-10-012B > Feb > 08 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-012B Date: February 01, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Pitting and Brake Dust on Chrome wheels Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-012A (Section 03 - Suspension). Analysis of Returned Wheels Chrome wheels returned under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for pitting concerns have recently been evaluated. This condition is usually most severe in the vent (or window) area of the front wheels. This "pitting" may actually be brake dust that has been allowed to accumulate on the wheel. The longer this accumulation builds up, the more difficult it is to remove. Cleaning the Wheels In all cases, the returned wheels could be cleaned to their original condition using GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, P/N 10952905). When using this product, you should confine your treatment to the areas of the wheel that show evidence of the brake dust build-up. This product is only for use on chromed steel or chromed aluminum wheels. Parts Information Warranty Information Wheel replacement for this condition is NOT applicable under the terms of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12541 Wheels: Description and Operation Replacement Wheels Description Replace the wheel if any of the following conditions exist: ^ The wheel exhibits excessive runout ^ The wheel is bent ^ The wheel is cracked ^ The wheel is severely rusted ^ The wheel is severely corroded ^ Important: Air leaks caused by porosity on aluminum wheels are repairable. The wheel leaks air Caution: If you are replacing the wheel(s), the wheel stud(s), the wheel nut(s) or the wheel bolt(s), install only new Saturn original equipment parts. Installation of used parts or non-Saturn original equipment parts may cause the wheel to loosen, loss of tire air pressure, poor vehicle handling and loss of vehicle control resulting in personal injury. Notice: The use of non-Saturn original equipment wheels may cause: ^ Damage to the wheel bearing, the wheel fasteners and the wheel ^ Tire damage caused by the modified clearance to the adjacent vehicle components ^ Adverse vehicle steering stability caused by the modified scrub radius ^ Damage to the vehicle caused by the modified ground clearance ^ Speedometer and odometer inaccuracy Replace the wheel, the wheel studs and the wheel/nuts, or the wheel bolts if applicable, if any of the following conditions exist: ^ The wheel has elongated bolt holes. ^ The wheel/nuts, or bolts if applicable, loosen repeatedly. Steel wheel identification is stamped into the wheel near the valve stem. Aluminum wheel identification is cast into the inboard side of the wheel. Steel Wheel Repair Description Notice: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening or repair damage from striking curbs, etc. Do not weld wheels. The alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated and uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material. Notice: The use of tubes in tubeless tires is not a recommended repair due to the fact that speed ratings are greatly reduced. If leaks are found in a steel wheel, replace the wheel with a wheel of original equipment quality. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Step 1 - Step 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front brake rotor. 2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12547 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor electrical connector form the connector bracket. 4. Remove the front wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 5. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire or equivalent. 6. Remove and discard the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 7. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the steering knuckle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12548 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 130 Nm (96 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12549 4. Install the wheel speed sensor electrical connector to the mounting bracket, if equipped. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the front brake rotor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12550 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Rear Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear brake drum. 2. On vehicles with all-wheel drive, remove the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12551 4. Important: Do not damage the wheel drive shaft joint seal. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent. 5. Remove the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 6. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the suspension knuckle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 84 Nm (62 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12552 3. On all-wheel drive vehicles, install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 125 Nm (92 ft. lbs.). 4. If equipped, route the wheel speed sensor electrical harness through the backing plate and seat the grommet. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the rear brake drum. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12553 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front brake rotor. 2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12554 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor electrical connector form the connector bracket. 4. Remove the front wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 5. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire or equivalent. 6. Remove and discard the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 7. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the steering knuckle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12555 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 130 Nm (96 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 12556 4. Install the wheel speed sensor electrical connector to the mounting bracket, if equipped. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the front brake rotor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Cover: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Wheel Cover: Customer Interest Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-013B Date: March 29, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle/Click/Ticking Type Noise Coming From Wheel Cover (Install Wheel Cover Insulators) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Buick Terraza with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2006 Chevrolet HHR with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Pontiac Montana SV6 with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Saturn Relay with 17 Inch Wheel Cover Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-013A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle/click/ticking type noise coming from the front or rear wheels. This condition is most apparent while driving at low speeds (0-24 km/h (0-15 mph)) and is relative to wheel rotation. Cause This condition may be caused by hard contact between the inner edge of the wheel cover and the outer edge of the steel rim. This contact occurs when the delrin ring comes out of its channel and separates from the wheel cover. In most cases, the delrin ring will be completely gone. Correction If the delrin ring is missing, install insulators on the backside of all four wheel covers. Use the following service procedure listed below. Remove the wheel covers. Clean the back side of each wheel cover using a mild liquid detergent in a distilled or deionized water solution. Rinse each wheel cover with clean water. Dry each wheel cover using compressed air or a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Cover: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 12565 Saturn Relay Shown, others Similar After the wheel covers are completely dry, each wheel cover should be wiped with isopropyl alcohol on a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth and apply Adhesion Promoter, P/N 12378462, or equivalent, at the insulator locations. Insulator location is at the center of each spoke in the groove. Place two insulators at the location where a divider prevents one from going in the center. Refer to the illustrations above. Peel the red non-stick backing off of the insulator. Carefully place the insulator onto the wheel cover so that the area under the lip is resting against the corner of the inside edge of the wheel cover lip. This should place the insulator flush with the outside edge of the wheel cover. Press down firmly on the insulator to ensure that the adhesive is bonding to the wheel cover. Place another insulator in the next location by repeating Steps 5 through 7. There should be an insulator at each spoke location with two being placed at Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Cover: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 12566 the above specified location. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Cover: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Wheel Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-013B Date: March 29, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle/Click/Ticking Type Noise Coming From Wheel Cover (Install Wheel Cover Insulators) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Buick Terraza with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2006 Chevrolet HHR with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Pontiac Montana SV6 with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Saturn Relay with 17 Inch Wheel Cover Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-013A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle/click/ticking type noise coming from the front or rear wheels. This condition is most apparent while driving at low speeds (0-24 km/h (0-15 mph)) and is relative to wheel rotation. Cause This condition may be caused by hard contact between the inner edge of the wheel cover and the outer edge of the steel rim. This contact occurs when the delrin ring comes out of its channel and separates from the wheel cover. In most cases, the delrin ring will be completely gone. Correction If the delrin ring is missing, install insulators on the backside of all four wheel covers. Use the following service procedure listed below. Remove the wheel covers. Clean the back side of each wheel cover using a mild liquid detergent in a distilled or deionized water solution. Rinse each wheel cover with clean water. Dry each wheel cover using compressed air or a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Cover: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 12572 Saturn Relay Shown, others Similar After the wheel covers are completely dry, each wheel cover should be wiped with isopropyl alcohol on a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth and apply Adhesion Promoter, P/N 12378462, or equivalent, at the insulator locations. Insulator location is at the center of each spoke in the groove. Place two insulators at the location where a divider prevents one from going in the center. Refer to the illustrations above. Peel the red non-stick backing off of the insulator. Carefully place the insulator onto the wheel cover so that the area under the lip is resting against the corner of the inside edge of the wheel cover lip. This should place the insulator flush with the outside edge of the wheel cover. Press down firmly on the insulator to ensure that the adhesive is bonding to the wheel cover. Place another insulator in the next location by repeating Steps 5 through 7. There should be an insulator at each spoke location with two being placed at Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Cover: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 12573 the above specified location. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to .............................................................................................................................. .................................. 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications The contents of this article reflects the changes identified in TSB 05-03-10-014 Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-014 Date: October 05, 2005 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE Subject: Revised Wheel Nut Torque Specification Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox 2002-2005 Saturn VUE The revised wheel nut torque is 140 Nm (100 lb ft). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications > Page 12581 Wheel Nut Torque Sequence Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications > Page 12582 Wheel Fastener: Description and Operation Metric Wheel Nuts and Bolts Description Metric wheel/nuts and bolts are identified in the following way: ^ The wheel/nut has the word Metric stamped on the face. ^ The letter M is stamped on the end of the wheel bolt. The thread sizes of metric wheel/nuts and the bolts are indicated by the following example: M12 x 1.5. ^ M = Metric ^ 12 = Diameter in millimeters ^ 1.5 = Millimeters gap per thread Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Stud Replacement ^ Tools Required J 43631 Ball Joint Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 4. Using the J 43631, press out the wheel stud from the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12585 1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the bearing side of the hub flange. 2. Place flat washers over the wheel stud being installer. 3. Install the wheel nut or a hex head nut to the wheel stud. 4. Gradually tighten the nut in order to draw the stud into the hub flange until the head of the wheel stud is fully seated against the hub flange. 5. Remove the nut and flat washers. 6. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 7. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 8. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12586 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Wheel Stud Replacement ^ Tools Required J 43631 Ball Joint Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 4. Using the J 43631 , press out the wheel stud from the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12587 1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the bearing side of the hub flange. 2. Place flat washers over the wheel stud being installer. 3. Install the wheel nut or a hex head nut to the wheel stud. 4. Gradually tighten the nut in order to draw the stud into the hub flange until the head of the wheel stud is fully seated against the hub flange. 5. Remove the nut and flat washers. 6. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 7. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 8. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12588 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Stud Replacement ^ Tools Required J 43631 Ball Joint Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Using the J 43631 , press out the wheel stud from the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 12589 1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the bearing side of the hub flange. 2. Place flat washers over the wheel stud being installed. 3. Install the wheel nut or a hex head nut to the wheel stud. 4. Gradually tighten the nut in order to draw the stud into the hub flange until the head of the wheel stud is fully seated against the hub flange. 5. Remove the nut and flat washers. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 06-01-38-006 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Mode Door Flutter Noise Air Door Actuator / Motor: Customer Interest A/C - Mode Door Flutter Noise Bulletin No.: 06-01-38-006 Date: August 04, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: HVAC Mode Door Flutter Noise (Install New Mode Door Actuator Levers) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Built On or Prior to November 30, 2005 Condition Some customers may comment on a Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) mode door flutter noise. This condition usually occurs when the mode knob on the HVAC control head is set one detent counterclockwise from floor mode. Cause This condition may be caused by a loose fit between the levers that drive the mode door and the door. Correction Important: Re-calibrating the HVAC control head actuators may eliminate the noise temporarily but it is not to be used as a long term repair. The noise may come back. Technicians are to replace the mode valve cam actuator levers using the following procedure: 1. Remove the left insulator panel. Refer to the illustration above and the Instrument Panel Insulator Panel Replacement-Left Side procedure in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 06-01-38-006 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Mode Door Flutter Noise > Page 12600 2. Remove the knee bolster. Refer to the illustration above and the Knee Bolster Replacement procedure in SI. 3. Remove the communication interface module from the support bracket and position it aside. Refer to the illustration above and the Communication Interface Module Replacement procedure in SI. 4. Remove the mode actuator. Refer to the illustration above and the Mode Actuator Replacement procedure in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 06-01-38-006 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Mode Door Flutter Noise > Page 12601 5. Remove the mode cam bracket (1), mode cam (2) and the mode cam levers (3 and 4). Refer to the illustration above and the Mode Cam Replacement procedure in SI. 6. Install the new mode cam levers (3 and 4), mode cam (2) and the mode cam bracket (1). 7. Install the mode cam actuator. 8. Install the communication interface module into the support bracket. 9. Install the knee bolster. 10. Install the left insulator panel. Important: Any time a mode actuator or the HVAC control module is replaced, the HVAC control module must be calibrated to ensure proper air distribution. 11. Calibrate the mode actuator by simultaneously pushing the A/C and RECIRC buttons on the HVAC control module 3 times each, within 2 seconds of the initial push. ^ The A/C and RECIRC button LEDs will flash while this calibration is taking place. ^ The calibration will take anywhere between 10-30 seconds depending on battery voltage. ^ The LEDs will quit flashing when the calibration is complete. 12. Cycle the ignition and verify proper operation of the HVAC system. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 06-01-38-006 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Mode Door Flutter Noise > Page 12602 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 06-01-38-006 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Mode Door Flutter Noise Air Door Actuator / Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Mode Door Flutter Noise Bulletin No.: 06-01-38-006 Date: August 04, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: HVAC Mode Door Flutter Noise (Install New Mode Door Actuator Levers) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Built On or Prior to November 30, 2005 Condition Some customers may comment on a Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) mode door flutter noise. This condition usually occurs when the mode knob on the HVAC control head is set one detent counterclockwise from floor mode. Cause This condition may be caused by a loose fit between the levers that drive the mode door and the door. Correction Important: Re-calibrating the HVAC control head actuators may eliminate the noise temporarily but it is not to be used as a long term repair. The noise may come back. Technicians are to replace the mode valve cam actuator levers using the following procedure: 1. Remove the left insulator panel. Refer to the illustration above and the Instrument Panel Insulator Panel Replacement-Left Side procedure in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 06-01-38-006 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Mode Door Flutter Noise > Page 12608 2. Remove the knee bolster. Refer to the illustration above and the Knee Bolster Replacement procedure in SI. 3. Remove the communication interface module from the support bracket and position it aside. Refer to the illustration above and the Communication Interface Module Replacement procedure in SI. 4. Remove the mode actuator. Refer to the illustration above and the Mode Actuator Replacement procedure in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 06-01-38-006 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Mode Door Flutter Noise > Page 12609 5. Remove the mode cam bracket (1), mode cam (2) and the mode cam levers (3 and 4). Refer to the illustration above and the Mode Cam Replacement procedure in SI. 6. Install the new mode cam levers (3 and 4), mode cam (2) and the mode cam bracket (1). 7. Install the mode cam actuator. 8. Install the communication interface module into the support bracket. 9. Install the knee bolster. 10. Install the left insulator panel. Important: Any time a mode actuator or the HVAC control module is replaced, the HVAC control module must be calibrated to ensure proper air distribution. 11. Calibrate the mode actuator by simultaneously pushing the A/C and RECIRC buttons on the HVAC control module 3 times each, within 2 seconds of the initial push. ^ The A/C and RECIRC button LEDs will flash while this calibration is taking place. ^ The calibration will take anywhere between 10-30 seconds depending on battery voltage. ^ The LEDs will quit flashing when the calibration is complete. 12. Cycle the ignition and verify proper operation of the HVAC system. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 06-01-38-006 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Mode Door Flutter Noise > Page 12610 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12611 HVAC Module Assembly Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12614 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12615 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12616 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12617 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12618 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12619 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12620 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12621 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12622 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12623 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12624 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12625 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12626 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12627 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12628 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12629 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12630 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12631 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12632 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12633 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12634 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12635 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12636 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12637 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12638 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12639 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12640 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12641 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12642 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12643 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12644 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12645 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12646 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12647 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12648 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12649 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12650 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12651 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12652 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12653 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12654 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12655 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12656 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12657 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12658 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12659 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12660 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12661 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12662 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12663 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12664 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12665 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12666 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12667 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12668 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12669 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12670 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12671 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12672 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12673 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12674 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12675 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12676 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12677 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12678 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12679 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12680 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12681 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12682 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12683 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12684 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12685 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12686 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12687 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Connector Views Air Temperature Actuator Mode Actuator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12688 Recirculation Actuator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Temperature Actuator Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Air Temperature Actuator AIR TEMPERATURE ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel compartment. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the air temperature actuator. 3. Remove the air temperature actuator screws from the HVAC module. 4. Remove the air temperature actuator from the HVAC module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Align the air temperature actuator with the door shaft and rotate into position. 2. Install the air temperature actuator screws to the HVAC module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Temperature Actuator > Page 12691 Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Connect the electrical connector to the air temperature actuator. 4. Calibrate the actuators by simultaneously pushing the A/C and RECIRC buttons on the HVAC control module three times each, within two seconds of initial push. The A/C and RECIRC button LED's will flash while this calibration is taking place. - The calibration will take anywhere between 10 to 30 seconds depending on battery voltage. - The LEDs will quit flashing when the calibration is complete. IMPORTANT: Any time an actuator or the HVAC control module is replaced, the HVAC control module must be calibrated to ensure proper air distribution. 5. Cycle the ignition and verify proper operation. 6. Install the instrument panel compartment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Temperature Actuator > Page 12692 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Actuator MODE ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left side insulator/closeout panel. 2. Remove the communication interface module, if equipped. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the mode actuator. 4. Remove the mode actuator screws from the evaporator case assembly. 5. Remove the mode actuator from the evaporator case assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the mode actuator to the evaporator case assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Temperature Actuator > Page 12693 2. Install the mode actuator screws to the evaporator case assembly. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Connect the electrical connector to the mode actuator. 4. Install the communication interface module, if equipped. 5. Install the left side insulator/closeout panel. 6. Calibrate the mode actuators by simultaneously pushing the A/C and RECIRC buttons on the HVAC control module 3 times each, within 2 seconds of initial push. The A/C and RECIRC button LED's will flash while this calibration is taking place. - The calibration will take anywhere between 10-30 seconds depending on battery voltage. - The LED's will quit flashing when the calibration is complete. IMPORTANT: Any time a mode actuator or the HVAC control module is replaced, the HVAC control module must be calibrated to ensure proper air distribution. 7. Cycle the ignition and verify proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Temperature Actuator > Page 12694 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Cam Replacement MODE CAM REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left side insulator/closeout panel. 2. Remove the communication interface module, if equipped. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the mode actuator. 4. Remove the mode actuator screws from the evaporator case assembly. 5. Remove the mode actuator from the evaporator case assembly. 6. Remove the screws retaining the mode cam bracket (1) to the evaporator case assembly. 7. Remove the mode cam bracket (1) from the evaporator case assembly. 8. Remove the mode cam (2) and the mode cam levers (3) from the evaporator case assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Temperature Actuator > Page 12695 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the mode cam levers (3) to the evaporator case assembly. 2. Align and install the mode cam (2) to the mode cam levers (3). Rotate the mode cam (2) to verify mode door operation. 3. Install the mode cam bracket (1) to the evaporator case assembly. 4. Install the mode cam bracket screws to the evaporator case assembly. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 5. Install the mode actuator to the evaporator case assembly. 6. Install the mode actuator screws to the evaporator case assembly. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Temperature Actuator > Page 12696 7. Connect the electrical connector to the mode actuator. 8. Install the communication interface module, if equipped. 9. Install the left side insulator/closeout panel. 10. Calibrate the mode actuators by simultaneously pushing the A/C and RECIRC buttons on the HVAC control module 3 times each, within 2 seconds of initial push. The A/C and RECIRC button LED's will flash while this calibration is taking place. - The calibration will take anywhere between 10-30 seconds depending on battery voltage. - The LED's will quit flashing when the calibration is complete. IMPORTANT: Any time a mode actuator or the HVAC control module is replaced, the HVAC control module must be calibrated to ensure proper air distribution. 11. Cycle the ignition and verify proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Temperature Actuator > Page 12697 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Recirculation Actuator Replacement RECIRCULATION ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel upper trim panel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the recirculation actuator. 3. Remove the recirculation actuator screws from the HVAC module. 4. Remove the recirculation actuator from the HVAC module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Align the recirculation actuator with the door shaft and rotate into position. 2. Install the recirculation actuator screws to the HVAC module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Temperature Actuator > Page 12698 Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Connect the electrical connector to the recirculation actuator. 4. Cycle the ignition and verify proper operation. 5. Install the instrument panel upper trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlet Duct - Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Left Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Outlet Duct - Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Left AIR OUTLET DUCT REPLACEMENT - INSTRUMENT PANEL (I/P) - UPPER LEFT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the LH I/P trim panel. 2. Remove the LH air outlet duct screws from the instrument panel retainer. 3. Remove the LH air outlet duct from the instrument panel retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlet Duct - Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Left > Page 12703 1. Inspect the seals, and replace if damaged, using Kent Industries adhesive backed foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. 2. Install the LH air outlet duct to the instrument panel retainer. 3. Install the LH air outlet duct screws to the instrument panel retainer. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). 4. Install the LH I/P trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlet Duct - Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Left > Page 12704 Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Outlet Duct - Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Right AIR OUTLET DUCT REPLACEMENT - INSTRUMENT PANEL (I/P) - UPPER RIGHT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the RH I/P trim panel. 2. Remove the RH air outlet duct screws from the instrument panel retainer. 3. Remove the RH air outlet duct from the instrument panel retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlet Duct - Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Left > Page 12705 1. Inspect the seals, and replace if damaged, using Kent Industries adhesive backed foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. 2. Install the RH air outlet duct to the instrument panel retainer. 3. Install the RH air outlet duct screws to the instrument panel retainer. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). 4. Install the RH I/P trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlet Duct - Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Left > Page 12706 Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Outlet Duct - Center AIR OUTLET DUCT REPLACEMENT - CENTER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel retainer. 2. Remove the center air outlet duct push pins from the cross car beam. 3. Remove the center air outlet duct from the cross car beam. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the seals, and replace if damaged, using Kent Industries adhesive backed foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. 2. Install the center air outlet duct to the cross car beam. 3. Install the center air outlet duct push pins to the cross car beam. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlet Duct - Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Left > Page 12707 4. Install the instrument panel retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlet Duct - Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Left > Page 12708 Air Duct: Service and Repair Defroster Duct - Windshield DEFROSTER DUCT REPLACEMENT - WINDSHIELD REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel upper trim panel. 2. Remove the windshield defrost duct from the HVAC module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the windshield defrost duct seals. If damaged, replace using Kent Industries adhesive back foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. 2. Install the windshield defrost duct to the HVAC module. 3. Install the instrument panel upper trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlet Duct - Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Left > Page 12709 Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Outlet Duct - Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Left AIR OUTLET DUCT REPLACEMENT - INSTRUMENT PANEL (I/P) - UPPER LEFT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the LH I/P trim panel. 2. Remove the LH air outlet duct screws from the instrument panel retainer. 3. Remove the LH air outlet duct from the instrument panel retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlet Duct - Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Left > Page 12710 1. Inspect the seals, and replace if damaged, using Kent Industries adhesive backed foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. 2. Install the LH air outlet duct to the instrument panel retainer. 3. Install the LH air outlet duct screws to the instrument panel retainer. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). 4. Install the LH I/P trim panel. Air Outlet Duct - Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Right AIR OUTLET DUCT REPLACEMENT - INSTRUMENT PANEL (I/P) - UPPER RIGHT REMOVAL PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlet Duct - Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Left > Page 12711 1. Remove the RH I/P trim panel. 2. Remove the RH air outlet duct screws from the instrument panel retainer. 3. Remove the RH air outlet duct from the instrument panel retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the seals, and replace if damaged, using Kent Industries adhesive backed foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. 2. Install the RH air outlet duct to the instrument panel retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlet Duct - Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Left > Page 12712 3. Install the RH air outlet duct screws to the instrument panel retainer. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). 4. Install the RH I/P trim panel. Air Outlet Duct - Center AIR OUTLET DUCT REPLACEMENT - CENTER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel retainer. 2. Remove the center air outlet duct push pins from the cross car beam. 3. Remove the center air outlet duct from the cross car beam. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the seals, and replace if damaged, using Kent Industries adhesive backed foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlet Duct - Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Left > Page 12713 2. Install the center air outlet duct to the cross car beam. 3. Install the center air outlet duct push pins to the cross car beam. 4. Install the instrument panel retainer. Defroster Duct - Windshield DEFROSTER DUCT REPLACEMENT - WINDSHIELD REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel upper trim panel. 2. Remove the windshield defrost duct from the HVAC module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlet Duct - Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Left > Page 12714 1. Inspect the windshield defrost duct seals. If damaged, replace using Kent Industries adhesive back foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. 2. Install the windshield defrost duct to the HVAC module. 3. Install the instrument panel upper trim panel. Defogger Outlet Duct - Side Window, LH DEFOGGER OUTLET DUCT REPLACEMENT - SIDE WINDOW, LH REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) upper trim panel. 2. Remove the LH defogger duct screws from the I/P upper trim panel. 3. Remove the LH defogger duct from the I/P upper trim panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the seals, and replace if damaged, using Kent Industries adhesive backed foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlet Duct - Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Left > Page 12715 2. Install the LH defogger duct to the I/P upper trim panel. 3. Install the LH defogger duct screws to the I/P upper trim panel. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the instrument panel upper trim panel Defogger Outlet Duct - Side Window, RH DEFOGGER OUTLET DUCT REPLACEMENT - SIDE WINDOW, RH REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) upper trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlet Duct - Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Left > Page 12716 2. Remove the RH defogger duct screws from the I/P upper trim panel. 3. Remove the RH defogger duct from the I/P upper trim panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the seals, and replace if damaged, using Kent Industries adhesive backed foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. 2. Install the RH defogger duct to the I/P upper trim panel. 3. Install the RH defogger duct screws to the I/P upper trim panel. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the instrument panel upper trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Vent Air Register: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Vent AIR OUTLET REPLACEMENT - INSTRUMENT PANEL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) upper trim panel. 2. Depress the locking tabs on the outlet. 3. Carefully slide the outlet out of the I/P trim and the surrounding outlet bezel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the outlet to the I/P trim panel. The outlet will snap into place. 2. Install the I/P upper trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Vent > Page 12721 Air Register: Service and Repair Center Floor Vent AIR OUTLET REPLACEMENT - CENTER FLOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the shift control. 2. Slide the center floor air outlet duct forward enough to clear the rear floor air outlet duct, and then up, and rearward to remove. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Slide the center floor air outlet duct forward enough to clear rear floor air duct, and then down, and rearward to install. 2. Install the shift control. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Vent > Page 12722 Air Register: Service and Repair Rear Floor Vent AIR OUTLET REPLACEMENT - REAR FLOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front seats. 2. Remove the floor console. 3. Partially remove the floor carpet from the front foot wells to the B-pillars. 4. Remove the rear floor air outlet push pins from the floor pan. 5. Remove the rear floor air outlet from the floor pan. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the rear floor air outlet to the floor pan. 2. Install the rear floor air outlet push pins to the floor pan. 3. Install the floor carpet to the B-pillars and the front foot wells. 4. Install the floor console. 5. Install the front seats. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Vent > Page 12723 Air Register: Service and Repair Defroster Vent AIR OUTLET REPLACEMENT - DEFROSTER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) upper trim panel. 2. Remove the defroster air outlet screws from the I/P upper trim panel. 3. Remove the defroster air outlet from the I/P upper trim panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the seals, and replace if damaged, using Kent Industries adhesive backed foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. 2. Install the defroster air outlet to the I/P upper trim panel. 3. Install the defroster air outlet screws to the I/P upper trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Vent > Page 12724 Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the instrument panel upper trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12729 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12730 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12731 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12732 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12733 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12734 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12735 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12736 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12737 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12738 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12739 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12740 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12741 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12742 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12743 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12744 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12745 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12746 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12747 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12748 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12749 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12750 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12751 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12752 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12753 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12754 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12755 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12756 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12757 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12758 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12759 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12760 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12761 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12762 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12763 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12764 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12765 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12766 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12767 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12768 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12769 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12770 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12771 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12772 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12773 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12774 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12775 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12776 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12777 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12778 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12779 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12780 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12781 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12782 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12783 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12784 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12785 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12786 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12787 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12788 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12789 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12790 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12791 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12792 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12793 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12794 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12795 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12796 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12797 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12798 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12799 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12800 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12801 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Blower Motor: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON Blower Motor: Customer Interest Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON Bulletin No.: 03-08-45-003D Date: February 24, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Reduced Power, Stuck in High Gear, SES Light On, DTCs P0223, P0504, P0700, P1228, P1271, P1280, P1599, P1779, P1791, P2119, P2101, P2128, P2135, or P2138 Set, Speaker Buzz Noise, HVAC Inoperative (Inspect/Replace Corroded or Bent Terminals) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2002-2003 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update an illustration. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-45-003C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the vehicle is exhibiting one or more of the following conditions: ^ Reduced power ^ Transaxle not down shifting ^ SES light on ^ Buzz noise from door speaker(s) ^ Speaker(s) inoperative ^ HVAC blower motor inoperative ^ A/C compressor commanded OFF with vehicle speed (evaporator temperature sensor circuit 719 and/or 731 may be open) These conditions may be intermittent. Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) P0223, P0504, P0700, P1228, P1271, P1280, P1599, P1779, P1791, P2119, P2101, P2128, P2135, or P2138 may also be present. Cause The instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector), located behind the left hinge pillar garnish molding, may have bent or corroded terminals. Correction Disconnect and inspect the instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector). If necessary, replace damaged terminals and apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Blower Motor: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 12810 1. Starting at the left hinge pillar garnish, pull upward to disengage the attaching clips. 2. Reach under the instrument panel and pull upwards to disengage the additional clips and remove the molding from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector). 4. Inspect the connector for bent or corroded terminals. Important: If no corrosion or bent terminals are found, proceed to Step 7 and follow trouble code diagnostics in the service manual or SI. 5. Remove any bent or corroded pins from the connector. 6. Install the new terminal cut lead (verify correct size using connector/harness face views and electrical schematics in the appropriate service manual or SI). 7. Pack the connector terminals with dielectric grease in order to prevent any further corrosion. 8. Connect the instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector). 9. Install the molding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Blower Motor: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 12811 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Blower Motor: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 12812 Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Blower Motor: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 12813 To receive credit for any repairs during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim for the information shown. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Blower Motor: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON Blower Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON Bulletin No.: 03-08-45-003D Date: February 24, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Reduced Power, Stuck in High Gear, SES Light On, DTCs P0223, P0504, P0700, P1228, P1271, P1280, P1599, P1779, P1791, P2119, P2101, P2128, P2135, or P2138 Set, Speaker Buzz Noise, HVAC Inoperative (Inspect/Replace Corroded or Bent Terminals) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2002-2003 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update an illustration. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-45-003C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the vehicle is exhibiting one or more of the following conditions: ^ Reduced power ^ Transaxle not down shifting ^ SES light on ^ Buzz noise from door speaker(s) ^ Speaker(s) inoperative ^ HVAC blower motor inoperative ^ A/C compressor commanded OFF with vehicle speed (evaporator temperature sensor circuit 719 and/or 731 may be open) These conditions may be intermittent. Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) P0223, P0504, P0700, P1228, P1271, P1280, P1599, P1779, P1791, P2119, P2101, P2128, P2135, or P2138 may also be present. Cause The instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector), located behind the left hinge pillar garnish molding, may have bent or corroded terminals. Correction Disconnect and inspect the instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector). If necessary, replace damaged terminals and apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Blower Motor: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 12819 1. Starting at the left hinge pillar garnish, pull upward to disengage the attaching clips. 2. Reach under the instrument panel and pull upwards to disengage the additional clips and remove the molding from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector). 4. Inspect the connector for bent or corroded terminals. Important: If no corrosion or bent terminals are found, proceed to Step 7 and follow trouble code diagnostics in the service manual or SI. 5. Remove any bent or corroded pins from the connector. 6. Install the new terminal cut lead (verify correct size using connector/harness face views and electrical schematics in the appropriate service manual or SI). 7. Pack the connector terminals with dielectric grease in order to prevent any further corrosion. 8. Connect the instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector). 9. Install the molding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Blower Motor: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 12820 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Blower Motor: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 12821 Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Blower Motor: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 12822 To receive credit for any repairs during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim for the information shown. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12823 HVAC Module Assembly Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12826 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12827 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12828 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12829 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12830 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12831 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12832 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12833 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12834 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12835 Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12836 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12837 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12838 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12839 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12840 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12841 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12842 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12843 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12844 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12845 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12846 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12847 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12848 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12849 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12850 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12851 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12852 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12853 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12854 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12855 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12856 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12857 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12858 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12859 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12860 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12861 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12862 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12863 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12864 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12865 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12866 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12867 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12868 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12869 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12870 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12871 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12872 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12873 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12874 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12875 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12876 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12877 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12878 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12879 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12880 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12881 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12882 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12883 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12884 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12885 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12886 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12887 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12888 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12889 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12890 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12891 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12892 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12893 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12894 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12895 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12896 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12897 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12898 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12899 HVAC Blower Motor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12900 Blower Motor: Service and Repair BLOWER MOTOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the blower motor. 2. Remove the blower motor screws from the HVAC module. 3. Remove the blower motor from the HVAC module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the blower motor to the HVAC module. 2. Install the blower motor screws to the HVAC module. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12901 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Connect the electrical connector to the blower motor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 12905 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 12906 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12909 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12910 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12911 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12912 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12913 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12914 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12915 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12916 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12917 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12918 Blower Motor Relay: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12919 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12920 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12921 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12922 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12923 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12924 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12925 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12926 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12927 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12928 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12929 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12930 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12931 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12932 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12933 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12934 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12935 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12936 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12937 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12938 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12939 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12940 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12941 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12942 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12943 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12944 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12945 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12946 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12947 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12948 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12949 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12950 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12951 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12952 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12953 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12954 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12955 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12956 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12957 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12958 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12959 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12960 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12961 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12962 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12963 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12964 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12965 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12966 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12967 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12968 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12969 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12970 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12971 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12972 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12973 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12974 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12975 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12976 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12977 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12978 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12979 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12980 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12981 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations HVAC Module Assembly Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12985 HVAC Blower Motor Resistor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12986 Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the blower motor resistor. 2. Remove the blower motor resistor screws from the HVAC module. 3. Remove the blower motor resistor from the HVAC module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the blower motor resistor to the HVAC module. 2. Install the blower motor resistor screws to the HVAC module. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12987 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Connect the electrical connector to the blower motor resistor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Replacement Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Replacement PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR FILTER HOUSING REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the push pins from the rear of the RH air inlet panel. 2. Open the hood. 3. Remove the push pins from the top and forward edge of the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Replacement > Page 12992 4. Remove the RH air inlet panel. 5. Remove the LH air inlet panel. 6. Remove the filter housing nuts from the vehicle. 7. Remove the filter housing from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Replacement > Page 12993 1. Inspect the foam seal. If the seal is damaged, replace the seal using Kent Industries adhesive back foam tape P/N 46485 (or equivalent). 2. Install the filter housing to the vehicle. 3. Install the new seal nuts to the filter housing. Tighten the nuts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: New seal nuts must be used when installing passenger compartment air filter housing to prevent leaks. 4. Install the LH air inlet panel. 5. Install the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Replacement > Page 12994 6. Install the push pins to the top and forward edge of the RH air inlet panel. 7. Close the hood. 8. Install the push pins to the rear of the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Replacement > Page 12995 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Passenger Compartment Air Filter Replacement PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR FILTER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the push pins from the rear of the RH air inlet panel. 2. Open the hood. 3. Remove the push pins from the top and forward edge of the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Replacement > Page 12996 4. Remove the RH air inlet panel. 5. Remove the filter from the filter housing by depressing the release tab at the inboard edge of the filter housing. 6. Remove the filter from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Replacement > Page 12997 1. Install the filter to the vehicle. 2. Install the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Replacement > Page 12998 3. Install the push pins to the top and forward edge of the RH air inlet panel. 4. Close the hood. 5. Install the push pins to the rear of the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Ventilation Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Ventilation Duct: Service and Repair AIR INLET ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the HVAC module. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the recirculation actuator. 3. Remove the recirculation actuator screws. 4. Remove the recirculation actuator. 5. Remove the air inlet assembly screws. 6. Remove the air inlet assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Ventilation Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13002 1. Install the air inlet assembly. 2. Install the air inlet assembly screws. Tighten the screws to 11.5 N.m (13 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Install the recirculation actuator. 4. Install the recirculation actuator screws. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). 5. Install the electrical connector to the recirculation actuator. 6. Install the HVAC module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications Compressor Clutch: Specifications Clearance between the Compressor Clutch and the Compressor Pulley. Ensure the clearance is 0.3 mm to 0.6 mm (0.012 in to 0.024 in) Clutch Field Coil screws to the compressor. Tighten the screws to 4.9 N.m (43 lb in) Clutch Field Coil Connector Bracket screw to the compressor. Tighten the screws to 3 N.m (27 lb in) Compressor Clutch, tighten the Clutch Bolt. Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 13007 A/C Compressor Clutch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 13008 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair COMPRESSOR CLUTCH ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED - J 25031-A Three Jaw Puller - J 37872 Universal Spanner Wrench - GE-47849 Clutch Remover - GE-47850 Center Puller - GE-47851 Armature Replacer REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the compressor from the vehicle. 2. Use J 37872 to hold the compressor clutch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 13009 3. Remove the bolt retaining the compressor clutch to the compressor. 4. Install GE-47849 to the compressor clutch. 5. Using GE-47849 , remove the compressor clutch from the compressor. 6. Remove the compressor clutch shims from the compressor shaft. 7. Remove the snap ring from the compressor pulley. 8. Using GE-47850 with J 25031-A , remove the compressor pulley from the compressor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 13010 9. Remove the clutch field coil connector bracket screw from the compressor. 10. Remove the clutch field coil screws from the compressor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 13011 11. Remove the clutch field coil from the compressor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Clean the clutch field coil and the pulley mounting surfaces. 2. Install the clutch field coil to the compressor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 13012 3. Install the clutch field coil screws to the compressor. Tighten the screws to 4.9 N.m (43 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 4. Install the clutch field coil connector bracket screw to the compressor. Tighten the screws to 3 N.m (27 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 13013 5. Using GE-47851 , install the compressor pulley to the compressor. 6. Install the snap ring to the compressor pulley. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the compressor pulley snap ring is installed with the rounded edge face up. 7. Install the compressor clutch shims to the compressor shaft. 8. Align the compressor clutch with the compressor shaft and install to the compressor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 13014 9. Using GE-47851 , install the compressor clutch to the compressor. 10. Using a feeler gauge, check the clearance between the compressor clutch and the compressor pulley. Ensure the clearance is 0.3 mm to 0.6 mm (0.012 in to 0.024 in). 11. Once the correct air gap is obtained, install the new clutch bolt. 12. Using J 37872 to hold the compressor clutch, tighten the clutch bolt. Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 13. After the clutch bolt is installed, verify that the compressor pulley spins freely. 14. Install the compressor to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13018 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13019 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13020 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair CONDENSER REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the front fascia. 3. For Pontiac models, remove the hood latch. 4. Remove the battery box air duct. 5. Remove the condenser radiator fan module (CRFM) closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13024 6. Remove the liquid line nut from the condenser. 7. Remove the liquid line from the condenser. 8. Install a protective cap to the liquid line to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. 9. Remove the compressor hose nut from the condenser. 10. Remove the compressor hose from the condenser. 11. Install a protective cap to the compressor hose to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13025 12. Remove the CRFM bracket bolts from the radiator support. 13. Remove the CRFM brackets from the vehicle. 14. Remove the bolts retaining the top of the condenser to the radiator. 15. Remove the condenser from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13026 1. Add the specified amount of PAG oil to the condenser. Refer to Refrigerant System Capacities. 2. Inspect the radiator to condenser seals for the proper position. 3. Install the condenser to the lower retention clips on the radiator. 4. Install the bolts to retain the top of the condenser to the radiator. Tighten the bolts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 5. Install the CRFM brackets to the vehicle. 6. Install the CRFM bracket bolts to the radiator support. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13027 7. Remove the protective cap from the compressor hose. 8. Install a new sealing washer to the compressor hose. 9. Install the compressor hose to the condenser. 10. Install compressor hose nut to the condenser. Tighten the nut to 22 N.m (16 lb ft). 11. Install a new seal washer to the liquid line. 12. Install the liquid line to the condenser. 13. Install the liquid line nut to the condenser. Tighten the nut to 22 N.m (16 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13028 14. Install the CRFM closeout panel. 15. Install the battery box air duct. 16. For Pontiac models, install the hood latch assembly. 17. Install the front fascia. 18. Evacuate and charge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 19. Test the affected A/C joints leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Control Assembly: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13033 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13034 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13035 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13036 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13037 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13038 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13039 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13040 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13041 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13042 Control Assembly: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13043 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13044 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13045 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13046 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13047 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13048 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13049 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13050 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13051 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13052 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13053 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13054 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13055 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13056 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13057 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13058 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13059 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13060 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13061 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13062 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13063 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13064 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13065 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13066 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13067 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13068 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13069 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13070 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13071 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13072 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13073 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13074 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13075 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13076 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13077 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13078 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13079 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13080 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13081 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13082 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13083 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13084 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13085 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13086 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13087 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13088 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13089 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13090 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13091 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13092 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13093 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13094 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13095 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13096 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13097 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13098 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13099 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13100 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13101 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13102 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13103 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13104 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13105 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 13106 Control Assembly: Service and Repair HVAC CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the center trim bezel from the instrument panel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the HVAC control module. 3. Remove the HVAC control module screws from the center trim bezel. 4. Remove the HVAC control module from the center trim bezel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the HVAC control module to the center trim bezel. 2. Install the HVAC control module screws to the center trim bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 13107 Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Connect the electrical connectors to the HVAC control module. 4. Install the center trim bezel to the instrument panel. 5. Calibrate the mode actuators by simultaneously pushing the A/C and RECIRC buttons on the HVAC control module 3 times each, within 2 seconds of initial push. IMPORTANT: Any time a mode actuator or the HVAC control module is replaced, the HVAC control module must be calibrated to ensure proper air distribution. 6. Calibrate the mode actuators by simultaneously pushing the A/C and RECIRC buttons on the HVAC control module 3 times each, within 2 seconds of initial push. The A/C and RECIRC button LED's will flash while this calibration is taking place. - The calibration will take anywhere between 10-30 seconds depending on battery voltage. - The LED's will quit flashing when the calibration is complete. 7. Cycle the ignition and verify proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Control Module HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13113 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13114 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13115 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13116 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13117 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13118 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13119 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13120 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13121 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13122 Control Module HVAC: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13123 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13124 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13125 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13126 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13127 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13128 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13129 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13130 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13131 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13132 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13133 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13134 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13135 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13136 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13137 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13138 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13139 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13140 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13141 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13142 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13143 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13144 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13145 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13146 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13147 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13148 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13149 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13150 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13151 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13152 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13153 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13154 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13155 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13156 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13157 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13158 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13159 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13160 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13161 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13162 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13163 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13164 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13165 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13166 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13167 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13168 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13169 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13170 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13171 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13172 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13173 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13174 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13175 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13176 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13177 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13178 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13179 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13180 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13181 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13182 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13183 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13184 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13185 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13186 Control Module HVAC: Connector Views HVAC Control Module C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13187 HVAC Control Module C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > A/C Coupler O-ring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sealing Washer A/C Coupler O-ring: Service and Repair Sealing Washer SEALING WASHER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seal washer from the A/C refrigerant component. 2. Inspect the seal washer for signs of damage to help determine the root cause of the failure. IMPORTANT: Cap or tape the open A/C refrigerant components immediately to prevent system contamination. 3. Inspect the A/C refrigerant components for damage or burrs. Repair if necessary. 4. Discard the sealing washer. IMPORTANT: DO NOT reuse sealing washer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the new seal washer for any signs of cracks, cuts, or damage.Do not use a damaged seal washer. IMPORTANT: Flat washer type seals do not require lubrication. 2. Remove the cap or tape from the A/C refrigerant components. 3. Using a lint-free clean, dry cloth, clean the sealing surfaces of the A/C refrigerant components. 4. Carefully install the new seal washer onto the A/C refrigerant component.The washer must completely bottom against the surface of the fitting. 5. Assemble the remaining A/C refrigerant components. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure. IMPORTANT: After tightening the A/C components, there should be a slight sealing washer gap of approximately 1.2 mm (3/64 in) between the A/C line and the A/C component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > A/C Coupler O-ring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sealing Washer > Page 13193 A/C Coupler O-ring: Service and Repair O-Ring O-RING REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disassemble the A/C refrigerant components. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure - For compression style fittings use a back up wrench on the fitting (2) and loosen the fitting nut (1). - For banjo style fittings remove the bolt retaining the banjo type fitting. 2. Remove the O-ring seal from the A/C refrigerant component. 3. Inspect the O-ring seal for signs of damage to help determine the root cause of the failure. 4. Inspect the A/C refrigerant components for damage or burrs. Repair if necessary. 5. Cap or tape the A/C refrigerant components. IMPORTANT: Cap or tape the open A/C refrigerant components immediately to prevent system contamination. 6. Discard the O-ring seal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the new O-ring seal for any sign or cracks, cuts, or damage. Replace if necessary. 2. Remove the cap or tape from the A/C refrigerant components. 3. Using a lint-free clean, dry cloth, carefully clean the sealing surfaces of the A/C refrigerant components. 4. Lightly coat the new O-ring seal with mineral base 525 viscosity refrigerant oil. IMPORTANT: DO NOT allow any of the mineral base 525 viscosity refrigerant oil on the new O-ring seal to enter the refrigerant system. 5. Carefully slide the new O-ring seal onto the A/C refrigerant component. IMPORTANT: DO NOT reuse O-ring seals. 6. The O-ring seal must be fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > A/C Coupler O-ring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sealing Washer > Page 13194 7. Assemble the A/C components.Refer to the appropriate repair procedure. - For compression style fittings use a back up wrench on the fitting (2) and tighten the fitting nut (1) to specification. - For banjo style fittings install the bolt retaining the banjo type fitting and tighten to specification. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporator Case: Service and Repair AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) EVAPORATOR CASE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the HVAC module. 2. Remove the heater core cover screws from the evaporator case assembly. 3. Remove the heater core cover from the evaporator case assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13198 4. Remove the heater core from the HVAC module. 5. Remove the evaporator case assembly screws from the blower case assembly. 6. Remove the evaporator case assembly from the blower case assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13199 1. Install evaporator case assembly to the blower case assembly. 2. Install evaporator case assembly screws to the blower case assembly. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Install heater core to the HVAC module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13200 4. Install heater core cover. 5. Install heater core cover screws. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). 6. Install the HVAC module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System Evaporator Core: Customer Interest A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 99-01-39-004C Date: June 12, 2009 Subject: Air Conditioning Odor (Install Evaporator Core Dryer Kit and Apply Cooling Coil Coating) Models: 1993-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 All Equipped with Air Conditioning Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 and 2010 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-01-39-004B (Section 01 - HVAC). Condition Some customers may comment about musty odors emitted from the Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) system at vehicle start-up in hot, humid conditions. Cause This condition may be caused by condensate build-up on the evaporator core, which does not evaporate by itself in high humidity conditions. The odor may be the result of microbial growth on the evaporator core. When the blower motor fan is turned on, the microbial growth may release an unpleasant musty odor into the passenger compartment. There are several other possible sources of a musty odor in a vehicle. A common source is a water leak into the interior of the vehicle or foreign material in the HVAC air distribution system. Follow the procedures in SI for identifying and correcting water leaks and air inlet inspection. The procedure contained in this bulletin is only applicable if the odor source has been determined to be microbial growth on the evaporator core inside the HVAC module. Correction Many vehicles currently incorporate an afterblow function within the HVAC control module software. The afterblow feature, when enabled, employs the HVAC blower fan to dry the evaporator after vehicle shut down and this function will inhibit microbial growth. Technicians are to confirm that the customer concern is evaporator core odor and that the vehicle has the imbedded afterblow feature, as defined in the SI document for that specific vehicle model, model year and specific HVAC option. Refer to SI for enabling the afterblow function. Vehicles being delivered in areas prone to high humidity conditions may benefit from having the afterblow enabled calibration installed prior to any customer comment. Important If the vehicle is not factory equipped with the imbedded afterblow enable feature, it may be added with the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module Kit (P/N 12497910 or AC Delco 15-5876). Important When installing the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module, you MUST use the included electrical splice connectors to ensure a proper splice. Complete detailed installation instructions and self testing procedures are supplied with the kit. If necessary, the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module may be installed underhood if it is protected from extreme heat and water splash areas. To immediately remove the evaporator core odor on all suspect vehicles, it is necessary to eliminate the microbial growth and prevent its re-occurrence. To accomplish this, perform the following procedure: Vehicle and Applicator Tool Preparation 1. The evaporator core must be dry. This may be accomplished by disabling the compressor and running the blower fan on the recirc heat setting for an extended period of time. Note Compressor engagement will cause the evaporator core to remain wet and will prevent full adherence of the Coiling Coil Coating to the evaporator core surfaces. 2. Verify that the air conditioning drain hose is not clogged and place a drain pan beneath the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 13209 3. Place a protective cover over the carpet below the evaporator core. 4. Remove the cabin air filter, if equipped, and cover the opening prior to applying the Cooling Coil Coating, as the product may clog the filter. If the cabin air filter appears to have little or no remaining life, suggest a replacement to your customer. 5. If the HVAC module has a blower motor cooling tube, be careful NOT TO SPRAY THE COOLING COIL COATING INTO THE BLOWER MOTOR COOLING TUBE. 6. Attach the Flexible Applicator Pressure Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) to a compressed air line operating at 586 kPa (85 psi) to 793 kPa (115 psi). 7. Shake the bottle of Cooling Coil Coating well. Screw the bottle onto the cap on the applicator tool's pick-up tube. Note The pick-up tube is designed for 120 ml (4 oz) and 240 ml (8 oz) bottles and should coil slightly in the bottom of a 120 ml (4 oz) bottle. 8. Use one of the following three methods to apply the Cooling Coil Coating. Important If the Pressure Applicator Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) is not available, the Cooling Coil Coating is also available in an aerosol can (P/N 12377951 (in Canada, 10953503)). Application Through Blower Motor Control Module Opening - Remove the blower motor control module (blower motor resistor). Refer to the applicable procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor resistor) opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor control module). Application Through Blower Motor Opening - Remove the blower motor. Refer to the applicable blower motor removal procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor. Application Through a Hole in the HVAC Module - If neither of the two previous application methods are available, it may be necessary to drill a hole in the HVAC module. - Locate an area of the HVAC module between the blower motor and the evaporator core. Drill a 10 mm (3/8 in) hole in the HVAC module. Use caution to keep the drill clear of the evaporator core and the blower motor fan. - With the air distribution vents closed and the blower motor fan speed on HIGH, insert the applicator tool into the hole and spray the Cooling Coil Coating into the airstream toward the evaporator core. - Use a GM approved RTV sealant to plug the hole in the HVAC module. 9. After the Cooling Coil Coating application is complete, start and run the vehicle for approximately 10 minutes, with the compressor disabled, HVAC mode set to Recirculate/Max, heat set to full warm, blower motor fan speed on high, and one window open approximately 12 mm (1/2 in). This cures the Cooling Coil Coating onto the evaporator core surface. 10. While the engine is running, rinse the applicator tool with warm water to prolong the life of the tool. Be sure to spray warm water through the nozzle to rinse out any residual Cooling Coil Coating still in the capillary pick up tube, otherwise it will dry and clog the applicator tool. Also remove the small green valve from the bottle cap and rinse it thoroughly while rolling it between two fingers and then reinstall it. If this valve is clogged , the Cooling Coil Coating will not flow through the applicator tool. 11. Shut off the engine and enable the compressor again. 12. Verify proper HVAC system operation. 13. Remove the protective cover from inside the vehicle. 14. Remove the drain pan from underneath the vehicle. 15. Reinstall the cabin air filter if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 13210 Parts Information Important The Cooling Coil Coating listed below is the only GM approved product for use under warranty as an evaporator core disinfectant and for the long term control of evaporator core microbial growth. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Evaporator Core: Customer Interest A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Bulletin No.: 07-01-38-005 Date: July 18, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Poor A/C Performance, A/C Does Not Get Cold Enough After Long Drive Cycle (Recalibrate BCM with Tech 2) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on poor A/C performance or that the A/C does not get cold enough after a long drive. Some of the possible symptoms of this condition are: Blowing warm air Reduced air flow Mist/Vapor coming out of vents Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the evaporator core freezing up. Fix It Right the First Time Tips DO NOT replace the evaporator temperature sensor for this condition unless diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. The sensor can be checked for proper function using the Tech 2(R). Check the sensor for volts varying around 2.3V to 2.6V. This data is within the BCM and is displayed in the accessory list. If the volts are near zero, check for a good connection at the sensor. Also, inspect the harness for possible damage. The sensor is located on the driver's side of the HVAC module and can be accessed from underneath the instrument panel by removing the closeout panel and OnStar(R) module, if equipped. DO NOT replace the thermal expansion valve (TXV) for this condition unless published SI diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. If AC components have been replaced or the refrigerant has been evacuated and recharged and no PAG oil has been added back into the system, it may have a reduced oil level. Please ensure that the vehicle has the proper amount of PAG oil in the system, as low oil level will contribute to the evaporator freezing up. To return to a nominal level of PAG oil, it may be necessary to flush the system. Refer to SI for flushing instructions. Correction The Tech 2(R) must have software version 27.009 or later. Recalibrate the BCM with new software using the Tech 2(R) and following the procedure below. This updated software will control the cycling of the compressor clutch to prevent freezing of the evaporator core. Install the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle and power on. Turn ON the ignition, with engine OFF. Select "Diagnostics." Build the vehicle. Select "Body Control Module". Select "Module Setup". Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough > Page 13215 Then press "BCM Setup" soft key to execute update. When completed command state will change from "None" to "BCM Setup". Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System Evaporator Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 99-01-39-004C Date: June 12, 2009 Subject: Air Conditioning Odor (Install Evaporator Core Dryer Kit and Apply Cooling Coil Coating) Models: 1993-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 All Equipped with Air Conditioning Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 and 2010 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-01-39-004B (Section 01 - HVAC). Condition Some customers may comment about musty odors emitted from the Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) system at vehicle start-up in hot, humid conditions. Cause This condition may be caused by condensate build-up on the evaporator core, which does not evaporate by itself in high humidity conditions. The odor may be the result of microbial growth on the evaporator core. When the blower motor fan is turned on, the microbial growth may release an unpleasant musty odor into the passenger compartment. There are several other possible sources of a musty odor in a vehicle. A common source is a water leak into the interior of the vehicle or foreign material in the HVAC air distribution system. Follow the procedures in SI for identifying and correcting water leaks and air inlet inspection. The procedure contained in this bulletin is only applicable if the odor source has been determined to be microbial growth on the evaporator core inside the HVAC module. Correction Many vehicles currently incorporate an afterblow function within the HVAC control module software. The afterblow feature, when enabled, employs the HVAC blower fan to dry the evaporator after vehicle shut down and this function will inhibit microbial growth. Technicians are to confirm that the customer concern is evaporator core odor and that the vehicle has the imbedded afterblow feature, as defined in the SI document for that specific vehicle model, model year and specific HVAC option. Refer to SI for enabling the afterblow function. Vehicles being delivered in areas prone to high humidity conditions may benefit from having the afterblow enabled calibration installed prior to any customer comment. Important If the vehicle is not factory equipped with the imbedded afterblow enable feature, it may be added with the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module Kit (P/N 12497910 or AC Delco 15-5876). Important When installing the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module, you MUST use the included electrical splice connectors to ensure a proper splice. Complete detailed installation instructions and self testing procedures are supplied with the kit. If necessary, the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module may be installed underhood if it is protected from extreme heat and water splash areas. To immediately remove the evaporator core odor on all suspect vehicles, it is necessary to eliminate the microbial growth and prevent its re-occurrence. To accomplish this, perform the following procedure: Vehicle and Applicator Tool Preparation 1. The evaporator core must be dry. This may be accomplished by disabling the compressor and running the blower fan on the recirc heat setting for an extended period of time. Note Compressor engagement will cause the evaporator core to remain wet and will prevent full adherence of the Coiling Coil Coating to the evaporator core surfaces. 2. Verify that the air conditioning drain hose is not clogged and place a drain pan beneath the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 13221 3. Place a protective cover over the carpet below the evaporator core. 4. Remove the cabin air filter, if equipped, and cover the opening prior to applying the Cooling Coil Coating, as the product may clog the filter. If the cabin air filter appears to have little or no remaining life, suggest a replacement to your customer. 5. If the HVAC module has a blower motor cooling tube, be careful NOT TO SPRAY THE COOLING COIL COATING INTO THE BLOWER MOTOR COOLING TUBE. 6. Attach the Flexible Applicator Pressure Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) to a compressed air line operating at 586 kPa (85 psi) to 793 kPa (115 psi). 7. Shake the bottle of Cooling Coil Coating well. Screw the bottle onto the cap on the applicator tool's pick-up tube. Note The pick-up tube is designed for 120 ml (4 oz) and 240 ml (8 oz) bottles and should coil slightly in the bottom of a 120 ml (4 oz) bottle. 8. Use one of the following three methods to apply the Cooling Coil Coating. Important If the Pressure Applicator Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) is not available, the Cooling Coil Coating is also available in an aerosol can (P/N 12377951 (in Canada, 10953503)). Application Through Blower Motor Control Module Opening - Remove the blower motor control module (blower motor resistor). Refer to the applicable procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor resistor) opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor control module). Application Through Blower Motor Opening - Remove the blower motor. Refer to the applicable blower motor removal procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor. Application Through a Hole in the HVAC Module - If neither of the two previous application methods are available, it may be necessary to drill a hole in the HVAC module. - Locate an area of the HVAC module between the blower motor and the evaporator core. Drill a 10 mm (3/8 in) hole in the HVAC module. Use caution to keep the drill clear of the evaporator core and the blower motor fan. - With the air distribution vents closed and the blower motor fan speed on HIGH, insert the applicator tool into the hole and spray the Cooling Coil Coating into the airstream toward the evaporator core. - Use a GM approved RTV sealant to plug the hole in the HVAC module. 9. After the Cooling Coil Coating application is complete, start and run the vehicle for approximately 10 minutes, with the compressor disabled, HVAC mode set to Recirculate/Max, heat set to full warm, blower motor fan speed on high, and one window open approximately 12 mm (1/2 in). This cures the Cooling Coil Coating onto the evaporator core surface. 10. While the engine is running, rinse the applicator tool with warm water to prolong the life of the tool. Be sure to spray warm water through the nozzle to rinse out any residual Cooling Coil Coating still in the capillary pick up tube, otherwise it will dry and clog the applicator tool. Also remove the small green valve from the bottle cap and rinse it thoroughly while rolling it between two fingers and then reinstall it. If this valve is clogged , the Cooling Coil Coating will not flow through the applicator tool. 11. Shut off the engine and enable the compressor again. 12. Verify proper HVAC system operation. 13. Remove the protective cover from inside the vehicle. 14. Remove the drain pan from underneath the vehicle. 15. Reinstall the cabin air filter if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 13222 Parts Information Important The Cooling Coil Coating listed below is the only GM approved product for use under warranty as an evaporator core disinfectant and for the long term control of evaporator core microbial growth. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Evaporator Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Bulletin No.: 07-01-38-005 Date: July 18, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Poor A/C Performance, A/C Does Not Get Cold Enough After Long Drive Cycle (Recalibrate BCM with Tech 2) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on poor A/C performance or that the A/C does not get cold enough after a long drive. Some of the possible symptoms of this condition are: Blowing warm air Reduced air flow Mist/Vapor coming out of vents Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the evaporator core freezing up. Fix It Right the First Time Tips DO NOT replace the evaporator temperature sensor for this condition unless diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. The sensor can be checked for proper function using the Tech 2(R). Check the sensor for volts varying around 2.3V to 2.6V. This data is within the BCM and is displayed in the accessory list. If the volts are near zero, check for a good connection at the sensor. Also, inspect the harness for possible damage. The sensor is located on the driver's side of the HVAC module and can be accessed from underneath the instrument panel by removing the closeout panel and OnStar(R) module, if equipped. DO NOT replace the thermal expansion valve (TXV) for this condition unless published SI diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. If AC components have been replaced or the refrigerant has been evacuated and recharged and no PAG oil has been added back into the system, it may have a reduced oil level. Please ensure that the vehicle has the proper amount of PAG oil in the system, as low oil level will contribute to the evaporator freezing up. To return to a nominal level of PAG oil, it may be necessary to flush the system. Refer to SI for flushing instructions. Correction The Tech 2(R) must have software version 27.009 or later. Recalibrate the BCM with new software using the Tech 2(R) and following the procedure below. This updated software will control the cycling of the compressor clutch to prevent freezing of the evaporator core. Install the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle and power on. Turn ON the ignition, with engine OFF. Select "Diagnostics." Build the vehicle. Select "Body Control Module". Select "Module Setup". Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough > Page 13227 Then press "BCM Setup" soft key to execute update. When completed command state will change from "None" to "BCM Setup". Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13228 Evaporator Core: Service and Repair EVAPORATOR CORE REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the HVAC module. 2. Remove the evaporator case assembly. 3. Remove the thermal expansion valve (TXV) bolts from the backing plate. 4. Remove the TXV and the backing plate from the evaporator pipes. 5. Remove the seal washers from evaporator pipes. 6. Remove the HVAC module front of dash seal. 7. Remove the screws retaining the two halves of the blower case assembly. 8. Separate the two halves of the blower case assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13229 9. Remove the evaporator core from the blower case assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Add the proper of polyalkylene glycol (PAG) oil to the evaporator core. Refer to Refrigerant System Capacities. 2. Inspect the seal around the evaporator core. Make sure the seal is in correct position and retained properly. 3. Install the evaporator core to the blower case assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13230 4. Assemble the two halves of the blower case assembly. 5. Install the blower case assembly screws. Tighten the screw to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 6. Install the HVAC module front of dash seal. 7. Install new seal washers to the evaporator pipes. 8. Instal the TXV and the backing plate to the evaporator pipes. 9. Install the TXV screws to the backing plate. Tighten the screws to 3.5 N.m (31 lb in). 10. Install the evaporator case assembly. 11. Install the HVAC module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations HVAC Module Assembly Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13234 Evaporator Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Expansion Valve: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Expansion Valve: Customer Interest A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Bulletin No.: 07-01-38-005 Date: July 18, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Poor A/C Performance, A/C Does Not Get Cold Enough After Long Drive Cycle (Recalibrate BCM with Tech 2) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on poor A/C performance or that the A/C does not get cold enough after a long drive. Some of the possible symptoms of this condition are: Blowing warm air Reduced air flow Mist/Vapor coming out of vents Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the evaporator core freezing up. Fix It Right the First Time Tips DO NOT replace the evaporator temperature sensor for this condition unless diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. The sensor can be checked for proper function using the Tech 2(R). Check the sensor for volts varying around 2.3V to 2.6V. This data is within the BCM and is displayed in the accessory list. If the volts are near zero, check for a good connection at the sensor. Also, inspect the harness for possible damage. The sensor is located on the driver's side of the HVAC module and can be accessed from underneath the instrument panel by removing the closeout panel and OnStar(R) module, if equipped. DO NOT replace the thermal expansion valve (TXV) for this condition unless published SI diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. If AC components have been replaced or the refrigerant has been evacuated and recharged and no PAG oil has been added back into the system, it may have a reduced oil level. Please ensure that the vehicle has the proper amount of PAG oil in the system, as low oil level will contribute to the evaporator freezing up. To return to a nominal level of PAG oil, it may be necessary to flush the system. Refer to SI for flushing instructions. Correction The Tech 2(R) must have software version 27.009 or later. Recalibrate the BCM with new software using the Tech 2(R) and following the procedure below. This updated software will control the cycling of the compressor clutch to prevent freezing of the evaporator core. Install the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle and power on. Turn ON the ignition, with engine OFF. Select "Diagnostics." Build the vehicle. Select "Body Control Module". Select "Module Setup". Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Expansion Valve: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough > Page 13243 Then press "BCM Setup" soft key to execute update. When completed command state will change from "None" to "BCM Setup". Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Expansion Valve: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Expansion Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Bulletin No.: 07-01-38-005 Date: July 18, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Poor A/C Performance, A/C Does Not Get Cold Enough After Long Drive Cycle (Recalibrate BCM with Tech 2) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on poor A/C performance or that the A/C does not get cold enough after a long drive. Some of the possible symptoms of this condition are: Blowing warm air Reduced air flow Mist/Vapor coming out of vents Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the evaporator core freezing up. Fix It Right the First Time Tips DO NOT replace the evaporator temperature sensor for this condition unless diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. The sensor can be checked for proper function using the Tech 2(R). Check the sensor for volts varying around 2.3V to 2.6V. This data is within the BCM and is displayed in the accessory list. If the volts are near zero, check for a good connection at the sensor. Also, inspect the harness for possible damage. The sensor is located on the driver's side of the HVAC module and can be accessed from underneath the instrument panel by removing the closeout panel and OnStar(R) module, if equipped. DO NOT replace the thermal expansion valve (TXV) for this condition unless published SI diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. If AC components have been replaced or the refrigerant has been evacuated and recharged and no PAG oil has been added back into the system, it may have a reduced oil level. Please ensure that the vehicle has the proper amount of PAG oil in the system, as low oil level will contribute to the evaporator freezing up. To return to a nominal level of PAG oil, it may be necessary to flush the system. Refer to SI for flushing instructions. Correction The Tech 2(R) must have software version 27.009 or later. Recalibrate the BCM with new software using the Tech 2(R) and following the procedure below. This updated software will control the cycling of the compressor clutch to prevent freezing of the evaporator core. Install the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle and power on. Turn ON the ignition, with engine OFF. Select "Diagnostics." Build the vehicle. Select "Body Control Module". Select "Module Setup". Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Expansion Valve: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough > Page 13249 Then press "BCM Setup" soft key to execute update. When completed command state will change from "None" to "BCM Setup". Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13250 Expansion Valve: Service and Repair THERMAL EXPANSION VALVE REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line retainer plate nut from the TXV. IMPORTANT: When removing the thermal expansion valve (TXV), keep dirt and foreign material from getting on or into the sealing surfaces. Clean tools and a clean work area are important for proper service. The TXV seal area should be cleaned before any repairs are performed. The parts must be kept clean at all times and any parts to be assembled should be cleaned with a non-petroleum based solvent and dried with air. Use only lint free cloths to wipe parts. Do not allow solvent to enter evaporator or hoses. 3. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line from the TXV. 4. Remove and discard the sealing washers from the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line. 5. Install protective caps to the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13251 6. Remove the TXV bolts from the backing plate. 7. Remove the TXV and the backing plate from the vehicle. 8. Remove and discard the seal washers from the evaporator pipes. 9. Install a protective cap to the evaporator pipes to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the protective caps from the evaporator pipes and ensure the seal areas are clean, dry and lint free. IMPORTANT: Use only lint free cloths to wipe parts. Do not allow any solvent to enter evaporator or hoses. 2. Install new seal washers to the evaporator pipes. 3. Remove the protective caps from the TXV. 4. Install the TXV and the backing plate to the evaporator pipes. 5. Install the TXV bolts to the backing plate. Tighten the bolts to 3.5 N.m (31 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13252 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 6. Remove the protective caps from the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose. 7. Install new seal washers to the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose. 8. Install the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose to the TXV. 9. Install the liquid line and evaporator outlet hose retainer plate nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). 10. Evacuate and charge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 11. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators Heater Core: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-06-02-001A Date: July 16, 2008 Subject: Information On Aluminum Heater Core and/or Radiator Replacement Models: 2005 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-02-001 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important: 2004-05 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX-COOL(R). Refer to the flushing procedure explained later in this bulletin. The following information should be utilized when servicing aluminum heater core and/or radiators on repeat visits. A replacement may be necessary because erosion, corrosion, or insufficient inhibitor levels may cause damage to the heater core, radiator or water pump. A coolant check should be performed whenever a heater core, radiator, or water pump is replaced. The following procedures/ inspections should be done to verify proper coolant effectiveness. Caution: To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam under pressure if the radiator cap or surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. Important: If the vehicle's coolant is low, drained out, or the customer has repeatedly added coolant or water to the system, then the system should be completely flushed using the procedure explained later in this bulletin. Technician Diagnosis ^ Verify coolant concentration. A 50% coolant/water solution ensures proper freeze and corrosion protection. Inhibitor levels cannot be easily measured in the field, but can be indirectly done by the measurement of coolant concentration. This must be done by using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale), or equivalent, coolant tester. The Refractometer uses a minimal amount of coolant that can be taken from the coolant recovery reservoir, radiator or the engine block. Inexpensive gravity float testers (floating balls) will not completely analyze the coolant concentration fully and should not be used. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65% coolant concentrate. This mixture will have a freeze point protection of -34 degrees Fahrenheit (-37 degrees Celsius). If the concentration is below 50%, the cooling system must be flushed. ^ Inspect the coolant flow restrictor if the vehicle is equipped with one. Refer to Service Information (SI) and/or the appropriate Service Manual for component location and condition for operation. ^ Verify that no electrolysis is present in the cooling system. This electrolysis test can be performed before or after the system has been repaired. Use a digital voltmeter set to 12 volts. Attach one test lead to the negative battery post and insert the other test lead into the radiator coolant, making sure the lead does not touch the filler neck or core. Any voltage reading over 0.3 volts indicates that stray current is finding its way into the coolant. Electrolysis is often an intermittent condition that occurs when a device or accessory that is mounted to the radiator is energized. This type of current could be caused from a poorly grounded cooling fan or some other accessory and can be verified by watching the volt meter and turning on and off various accessories or engage the starter motor. Before using one of the following flush procedures, the coolant recovery reservoir must be removed, drained, cleaned and reinstalled before refilling the system. Notice: ^ Using coolant other than DEX‐COOL(R) may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX‐COOL(R) (silicate free) coolant in your vehicle. ^ If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 13257 Flushing Procedures using DEX-COOL(R) Important: The following procedure recommends refilling the system with DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. This coolant is orange in color and has a service interval of 5 years or 240,000 km (150,000 mi). However, when used on vehicles built prior to the introduction of DEX-COOL(R), maintenance intervals will remain the same as specified in the Owner's Manual. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling system flush and fill machine is not available, drain the coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run the vehicle until the thermostat opens. Repeat and run the vehicle three (3) times to totally remove the old coolant or until the drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with DEX‐COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to the system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and reverify the coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore the coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, reverify the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Flushing Procedures using Conventional Silicated (Green Colored) Coolant Important: 2004-2005 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX‐COOL(R). The Aveo and Wave are filled with conventional, silicated engine coolant that is blue in color. Silicated coolants are typically green in color and are required to be drained, flushed and refilled every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). The Aveo and Wave are to be serviced with conventional, silicated coolant. Use P/N 12378560 (1 gal) (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 (1 L). Refer to the Owner's Manual or Service Information (SI) for further information on OEM coolant. Important: Do not mix the OEM orange colored DEX-COOL(R) coolant with green colored coolant when adding coolant to the system or when servicing the vehicle's cooling system. Mixing the orange and green colored coolants will produce a brown coolant which may be a customer dissatisfier and will not extend the service interval to that of DEX-COOL(R). Conventional silicated coolants offered by GM Service and Parts Operations are green in color. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling systems flush and fill machine is not available, drain coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run vehicle until thermostat opens. Repeat and run vehicle three (3) times to totally remove old coolant or until drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with a good quality ethylene glycol base engine coolant, P/N 12378560, 1 gal (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L), conforming to GM specification 1825M, or recycled coolant conforming to GM specification 1825M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% good quality ethylene glycol base (green colored) engine coolant, P/N 12378560 1 gal., (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L) conforming to GM specification 1825M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and recheck coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, recheck the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. Concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 13258 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13259 Heater Core: Service and Repair HEATER CORE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the HVAC module from the vehicle. 2. Remove the heater heater core cover screws from the HVAC module. 3. Remove the heater core cover from the HVAC module. 4. Remove the heater core from the HVAC module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13260 1. Install the heater core to the HVAC module. 2. Install the heater core cover to the HVAC module. 3. Install the heater core cover screws to the HVAC module. Tighten the screw to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the HVAC module to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inlet Heater Hose: Service and Repair Inlet HEATER HOSE REPLACEMENT - INLET REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill). 2. Remove the heater inlet hose clamp from the heater core. 3. Remove the heater inlet hose (2) from the heater core. 4. Remove the heater inlet hose clamp from the engine. 5. Remove the heater inlet hose (2) from the engine. 6. Remove the heater inlet hose (2) from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inlet > Page 13265 1. Install the heater inlet hose (2) to the vehicle. 2. Install the heater inlet hose (2) to the engine. 3. Install the heater inlet hose clamp to the engine. 4. Install the heater inlet hose (2) to the heater core. 5. Install the heater inlet hose clamp to the heater core. 6. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inlet > Page 13266 Heater Hose: Service and Repair Outlet HEATER HOSE REPLACEMENT - OUTLET REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill). 2. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the heater core. 3. Remove the heater outlet hose (1) from the heater core. 4. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the engine. 5. Remove the heater outlet hose (1) from the engine. 6. Position the loose end of the heater outlet hose (1) outboard to ease in the removal of the surge tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inlet > Page 13267 7. Remove the surge tank inlet hose clamp from the surge tank. 8. Disconnect the surge tank inlet hose from the surge tank. 9. Remove the surge tank bolts from the surge tank. 10. Lift the surge tank to gain access to the heater outlet hose. 11. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the surge tank. 12. Remove the heater outlet hose from the surge tank. 13. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. 14. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the hose. This will aid in routing the heater outlet hose from the vehicle. 15. Remove the heater outlet hose from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inlet > Page 13268 1. Install the heater outlet hose to the vehicle. Route the hose into position for attachment to the surge tank. 2. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the hose. 3. Install the heater outlet hose to the surge tank. 4. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. 5. Install the surge tank bolts to the surge tank. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 6. Connect the surge tank inlet hose to the surge tank. 7. Install the surge tank inlet hose clamp to the surge tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inlet > Page 13269 8. Install the heater outlet hose (1) to the engine. 9. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the engine. 10. Install the heater outlet hose (1) to the heater core. 11. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the heater core. 12. Fill the engine coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair COMPRESSOR PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove the pressure relief valve from the compressor. 4. Remove and discard the O-ring from the pressure relief valve. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13273 1. Lightly coat the new O-ring with mineral base 525 viscosity refrigerant oil. IMPORTANT: Lubricate the new O-ring prior to installation on the compressor hose. 2. Install the new O-ring to the pressure relief valve. 3. Install the pressure relief valve to the compressor. Tighten the pressure relief valve to 9.8 N.m (87 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 4. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 6. Test the affected A/C joint for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement COMPRESSOR HOSE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the left headlamp. 3. Remove the compressor hose retainer nut from the battery box. 4. Remove the evaporator outlet hose nut from the evaporator outlet hose. 5. Remove the evaporator outlet hose from the compressor hose. 6. Install a protective cap to the evaporator outlet hose to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 13278 7. Remove the compressor hose nut from the condenser. 8. Remove the compressor hose from the condenser. 9. Install a protective cap to the condenser to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. 10. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 11. Disconnect the electrical connector from the pressure transducer. 12. Remove the compressor hose nut at the compressor. 13. Remove the compressor hose from the compressor. 14. Install a protective cap to the compressor to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. 15. Remove the compressor hose from the vehicle. 16. Remove and discard the sealing washers from the compressor hose. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 13279 1. Remove protective cap from compressor end of the compressor hose and the compressor. 2. Install new seal washers to the compressor hose. 3. Install the compressor hose to the compressor. 4. Install the compressor hose nut to the compressor. Tighten the nut to 22 N.m (16 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 5. Connect the electrical connector to the pressure transducer. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Position the compressor hose in the vehicle. 8. Install a new sealing washer to the evaporator outlet hose. 9. Install the evaporator outlet hose to the compressor hose. 10. Install the evaporator outlet hose nut to the evaporator outlet hose. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 13280 Tighten the nut to 22 N.m (16 lb ft). 11. Install a new sealing washer to the compressor hose at the condenser. 12. Install the compressor hose to the condenser. 13. Install the compressor hose nut to the condenser. Tighten the nut to 22 N.m (16 lb ft). 14. Install the compressor hose retainer nut to the battery box. Tighten the nut to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 15. Install the left headlamp. 16. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 17. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 13281 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Hose Replacement - Outlet EVAPORATOR HOSE REPLACEMENT - OUTLET TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the evaporator outlet hose nut from the evaporator outlet hose. 3. Remove the evaporator outlet hose from the compressor hose. 4. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line retainer plate nut from the TXV. 5. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line from the TXV. 6. Remove evaporator outlet hose from the vehicle. 7. Remove and discard the sealing washers from the evaporator outlet hose and the compressor hose. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 13282 8. Install protective caps to the TXV, the liquid line, and the compressor hose to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the protective caps from the TXV, the liquid line, and the compressor hose. 2. Install new sealing washers to the evaporator outlet hose, liquid line, and the compressor hose. 3. Install the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the TXV. 4. Install the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 5. Install the evaporator outlet hose to the compressor hose. 6. Install the evaporator outlet hose nut to the evaporator outlet hose. Tighten the nut to 22 N.m (16 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 13283 7. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 8. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 13284 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Liquid Line Replacement LIQUID LINE REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the left headlamp. 3. Remove the surge tank. 4. Remove the washer bottle. 5. Remove the battery. 6. Remove the battery box bolts from the battery box. 7. Disconnect the negative battery cable nut from the wheelhouse. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 13285 8. Remove the nut retaining the liquid line to the strut tower. 9. Disconnect the harness and vent hose retainers from the liquid line. 10. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line retainer plate nut from the TXV. 11. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line from the TXV. 12. Remove the liquid line nut from the condenser. 13. Remove the liquid line from the condenser. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 13286 14. Remove the bolt retaining the liquid line to the body. 15. Position the battery box inboard to allow for routing of the liquid line. 16. Route the liquid line above the battery box and the ground lug. 17. Lift the rear portion of the liquid line upward and remove the liquid line from the vehicle. 18. Remove and discard the sealing washer from the liquid line. 19. Install protective caps to the condenser, the evaporator outlet hose, and the TXV to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 13287 1. Route the liquid line below the battery box and the ground lug. 2. Connect the negative battery cable nut to the wheelhouse. Tighten the nut to 12 N.m (106 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Remove the protective caps from the condenser, the evaporator outlet hose, and the TXV. 4. Install the new sealing washer to the liquid line. 5. Route the condenser end of the liquid line into position. 6. Install the liquid line to the condenser. 7. Install the liquid line nut to the condenser. Tighten the nut to 22 N.m (16 lb ft). IMPORTANT: Use a large pair of pliers to hold the fitting while tightening the nut. Be careful not to twist the line. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 13288 8. Install the bolt to retain the liquid line to the body. Tighten the nut to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 9. Remove the protective cap from the TXV, the liquid line, and the evaporator outlet hose. 10. Install new seal washers to the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose. 11. Install the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose to the TXV. 12. Install the liquid line and evaporator outlet hose retainer plate nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 13289 13. Install the four battery box bolts to the inside of the battery box. Tighten the nut to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 14. Install the battery box bolt to the outside of the battery box. Tighten the nut to 10 N.m (86 lb in). 15. Install the battery. 16. Install the liquid line to the strut tower. 17. Install the liquid line nut to the strut tower. Tighten the nut to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 18. Connect the harness and vent hose retainers to the liquid line. 19. Install the surge tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement > Page 13290 20. Install the washer bottle. 21. Install the left headlamp. 22. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 23. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC Module Assembly Replacement Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair HVAC Module Assembly Replacement HVAC MODULE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector 1. Disable the frontal and curtain air bags. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 , SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 , SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 , and SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. 2. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 3. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill). 4. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line nut from the thermal expansion valve (TXV). 5. Remove the evaporator outlet hose from the TXV. 6. Remove and discard the sealing washer from the evaporator outlet hose. 7. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line from the TXV. 8. Remove and discard the sealing washer from the liquid line. 9. Install a protective caps to the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC Module Assembly Replacement > Page 13295 10. Reposition the heater outlet hose clamp at the heater core. 11. Remove the heater outlet hose from the heater core. 12. Reposition the heater inlet hose clamp at the heater core. 13. Remove the heater inlet hose at the heater core. 14. Plug the heater core and the evaporator core with clean towels to prevent spillage when the HVAC module is removed. 15. Remove the HVAC module seal nuts from the front of dash. 16. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) retainer. 17. Remove the shift control bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC Module Assembly Replacement > Page 13296 18. Remove the center floor air outlet duct by sliding the duct forward then up at the rear. 19. Remove the center I/P air outlet duct retainers from the instrument panel tie bar. 20. Remove the center I/P air outlet duct from the instrument panel tie bar. 21. Remove the instrument panel tie bar. 22. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector from the I/P wire harness. 23. Disconnect the blower motor resistor electrical connector from the I/P wire harness. 24. Disconnect the HVAC module electrical connector from the I/P wire harness. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC Module Assembly Replacement > Page 13297 25. Remove the defroster duct retainer from the instrument panel tie bar. 26. Remove the defroster duct from the HVAC module. 27. Disconnect the I/P wire harness clips from the HVAC module. 28. Remove the HVAC module from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC Module Assembly Replacement > Page 13298 1. Inspect the front of dash seal for proper alignment. IMPORTANT: Make sure the HVAC module seals are flush and even as they meet their mating surfaces. This will reduce the chance of leaks and ensure proper fit. 2. Inspect the seal mating surfaces to ensure there are no obstructions. 3. Position the HVAC module in the vehicle. 4. Install, but do not tighten, the seal nuts to the front of dash. 5. Install the instrument panel tie bar. 6. Tighten the HVAC module seal nuts to the front of dash. Draw the HVAC module to the front of dash evenly by alternating between the seal nuts. Tighten the nuts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. IMPORTANT: New front of dash seal nuts must be used to prevent leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC Module Assembly Replacement > Page 13299 7. Install the defroster duct to the HVAC module. 8. Install the defroster duct retainer to the instrument panel tie bar. 9. Connect the I/P wire harness clips to the HVAC module. 10. Connect the blower motor electrical connector to the I/P wire harness. 11. Connect the blower motor resistor electrical connector to the I/P wire harness. 12. Connect the HVAC module electrical connector to the I/P wire harness. 13. Install the center I/P duct to the instrument panel tie bar. 14. Install the center I/P duct retainers to the instrument panel tie bar. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC Module Assembly Replacement > Page 13300 15. Install the center floor air outlet by sliding forward onto the front floor air outlet then down and rearward over the rear floor air outlet. 16. Install the shift control bracket. 17. Install the I/P retainer. 18. Install the heater inlet hose to the heater core. 19. Install the heater inlet hose clamp to the heater core. 20. Install the heater outlet hose to heater core outlet. 21. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the heater core. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC Module Assembly Replacement > Page 13301 22. Ensure the mating surfaces are clean and free of debris, and install new seal washers to the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line. Refer to Sealing Washer Replacement. 23. Install the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the TXV. 24. Install the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 25. Enable the frontal and curtain air bags. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 , SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 , SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 , and SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. 26. Fill the coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System (Static Fill) Draining and Filling Cooling System (GE 47716 Fill). 27. Evacuate and charge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 28. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC Module Assembly Replacement > Page 13302 Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair Blower Case Assembly Replacement BLOWER CASE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the HVAC module assembly. 2. Remove the evaporator case assembly. 3. Remove the air inlet assembly. 4. Remove the HVAC module wire harness from the blower case assembly. 5. Remove the blower motor screws from the blower case assembly. 6. Remove the blower motor from the blower case assembly. 7. Remove the blower motor resistor screws from the blower case assembly. 8. Remove the blower motor resistor from the blower case assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC Module Assembly Replacement > Page 13303 9. Remove the screws retaining the two halves of the blower case assembly. 10. Separate the two halves of the blower case assembly. 11. Remove the evaporator core from the blower case assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the evaporator core to the blower case assembly. 2. Assemble the two halves of the blower case assembly. 3. Install the screws to retain the two halves of the blower case assembly. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC Module Assembly Replacement > Page 13304 4. Install the blower motor resistor to the blower case assembly. 5. Install the blower motor resistor screws to the blower case assembly. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). 6. Install the blower motor to the blower case assembly. 7. Install the blower motor screws to the blower case assembly. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). 8. Install the HVAC module wire harness from the blower case assembly. 9. Install the air inlet assembly. 10. Install the evaporator case assembly. 11. Install the HVAC module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Service and Repair Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair RECEIVER DEHYDRATOR REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the front bumper fascia. 3. Remove the bolt retaining the receiver dehydrator mounting clamp to the condenser. 4. Remove the receiver dehydrator mounting clamp from the condenser. 5. Remove the lower receiver dehydrator bolt from the condenser. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13308 6. Remove the receiver dehydrator from the condenser. 7. Install protective caps to the condenser to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the protective caps from the condenser. 2. Add the specified amount of PAG oil to the receiver dehydrator. Refer to Refrigerant System Capacities. 3. Install new O-rings to the receiver dehydrator. 4. Install the receiver dehydrator to the condenser. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13309 5. Install the lower receiver dehydrator bolt to the condenser. Tighten the bolt to 6.5 N.m (58 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 6. Install the receiver dehydrator mounting clamp to the condenser. 7. Install the receiver dehydrator mounting clamp bolt to the condenser. Tighten the bolt to 4.2 N.m (37 lb in). 8. Install the front bumper fascia. 9. Evacuate and charge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 10. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment Bulletin No.: 08-01-38-001 Date: January 25, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Information On New GE-48800 CoolTech Refrigerant Recovery/Recharge Equipment Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Attention: This bulletin is being issued to announce the release of GM approved Air Conditioning (A/C) Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging Equipment that meets the new Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2788 Refrigerant Recovery Standards. The ACR2000 (J-43600) cannot be manufactured in its current state after December 2007 and will be superseded by GE-48800. The new J2788 standard does not require that GM Dealers replace their ACR2000 units. ACR2000's currently in use are very capable of servicing today's refrigerant systems when used correctly and can continue to be used. Details regarding the new SAE J2788 standard are outlined in GM Bulletin 07-01-38-004. Effective February 1 2008, new A/C Refrigerant Recovery/Recharging equipment (P/N GE-48800) will be released as a required replacement for the previously essential ACR2000 (J-43600). This equipment is SAE J2788 compliant and meets GM requirements for A/C Refrigerant System Repairs on all General Motors vehicles, including Hybrid systems with Polyolester (POE) refrigerant oil. This equipment will not be shipped as an essential tool to GM Dealerships. In addition, this equipment is Hybrid compliant and designed to prevent oil cross contamination when servicing Hybrid vehicles with Electric A/C Compressors that use POE refrigerant oil. The ACR2000 (J-43600) will need to be retrofitted with a J-43600-50 (Hose - ACR2000 Oil Flush Loop) to be able to perform Hybrid A/C service work. All Hybrid dealers will receive the J-43600-50, with installation instructions, as a component of the Hybrid essential tool package. Dealerships that do not sell Hybrids, but may need to service Hybrids, can obtain J-43600-50 from SPX Kent Moore. Refer to GM Bulletin 08-01-39-001 for the ACR2000 Hose Flush procedure. The High Voltage (HV) electric A/C compressor used on Two Mode Hybrid vehicles uses a Polyolester (POE) refrigerant oil instead of a Polyalkylene Glycol (PAG) synthetic refrigerant oil. This is due to the better electrical resistance of the POE oil and its ability to provide HV isolation. Failure to flush the hoses before adding refrigerant to a Hybrid vehicle with an electric A/C compressor may result in an unacceptable amount of PAG oil entering the refrigerant system. It may cause a Battery Energy Control Module Hybrid Battery Voltage System Isolation Lost Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC P1AE7) to be set. Additionally, the A/C system warranty will be voided. Warranty Submission Requirements The Electronically Generated Repair Data (snapshot summary) and printer functions have been eliminated from the GE-48800. The VGA display and temperature probes were eliminated to reduce equipment costs. As a result, effective immediately the 18 digit "Snapshot/Charge Summary" code is no longer required for Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant system repairs that are submitted for warranty reimbursement. The charge summary data from before and after system repairs will continue to required, but documented on the repair order only. Both high and low pressures and the recovery and charge amounts should be noted during the repair and entered on the repair order. If using ACR2000 (J-43600), the "Snapshot/Charge Summary" printouts should continue to be attached to the shops copy of the repair order. The labor codes that are affected by this requirement are D3000 through D4500. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment > Page 13314 Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Contaminated R134A Refrigerant Bulletin No.: 06-01-39-007 Date: July 25, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Contaminated R134a Refrigerant Found on Market for Automotive Air-Conditioning Systems Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2007 and Prior Saab 9-7X Attention: This bulletin should be directed to the Service Manager as well as the Parts Manager. Commercially Available Contaminated R134a Refrigerant Impurities have been found in new commercially available containers of R134a. High levels of contaminates may cause decreased performance, and be detrimental to some air-conditioning components. Accompanying these contaminates has been high levels of moisture. Tip: Excessive moisture may cause system concerns such as orifice tube freeze-up and reduced performance. Industry Reaction: New Industry Purity Standards Due to the potential availability of these lower quality refrigerants, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), and the Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Industry (ARI) are in the process of instituting reliable standards that will be carried on the labels of future R134a refrigerant containers. This identifying symbol will be your assurance of a product that conforms to the minimum standard for OEM Automotive Air-Conditioning use. How Can You Protect Yourself Today? It is recommended to use GM or ACDelco(R) sourced refrigerants for all A/C repair work. These refrigerants meet General Motors own internal standards for quality and purity, insuring that your completed repairs are as good as the way it left the factory. Parts Information The part numbers shown are available through GMSPO or ACDelco(R). The nearest ACDelco(R) distributor in your area can be found by calling 1-800-223-3526 (U.S. Only). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment > Page 13315 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant System Capacities Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 13318 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Air Conditioning Refrigerant ....................................................................................................................... R134a P/N 12356150 U.S. (10953485 Canada) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 13319 Refrigerant: Service and Repair REFRIGERANT RECOVERY AND RECHARGING TOOLS REQUIRED J 43600 ACR 2000 Air Conditioning Service Center CAUTION: - Avoid breathing the A/C Refrigerant 134a (R-134a) and the lubricant vapor or the mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose, and throat. Work in a well ventilated area. In order to remove R-134a from the A/C system, use service equipment that is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J 2210 (R-134a recycling equipment). If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before continuing service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. - For personal protection, goggles and gloves should be worn and a clean cloth wrapped around fittings, valves, and connections when doing work that includes opening the refrigerant system. If R-134a comes in contact with any part of the body severe frostbite and personal injury can result. The exposed area should be flushed immediately with cold water and prompt medical help should be obtained. NOTE: - R-134a is the only approved refrigerant for use in this vehicle. The use of any other refrigerant may result in poor system performance or component failure. - To avoid system damage use only R-134a dedicated tools when servicing the A/C system. - Use only Polyalkylene Glycol Synthetic Refrigerant Oil (PAG) for internal circulation through the R-134a A/C system and only 525 viscosity mineral oil on fitting threads and O-rings. If lubricants other than those specified are used, compressor failure and/or fitting seizure may result. - R-12 refrigerant and R-134a refrigerant must never be mixed, even in the smallest of amounts, as they are incompatible with each other. If the refrigerants are mixed, compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer to the manufacturer instructions included with the service equipment before servicing. The J 43600 is a complete air conditioning service center for R-134a. The ACR 2000 recovers, recycles, evacuates and recharges A/C refrigerant quickly, accurately and automatically. The unit has a display screen that contains the function controls and displays prompts that will lead the technician through the recover, recycle, evacuate and recharge operations. R-134a is recovered into and charged out of an internal storage vessel. The ACR 2000 automatically replenishes this vessel from an external source tank in order to maintain a constant 5.45-6.82 kg (12-15 lbs) of A/C refrigerant. The ACR 2000 has a built in A/C refrigerant identifier that will test for contamination, prior to recovery and will notify the technician if there are foreign gases present in the A/C system. If foreign gases are present, the ACR 2000 will not recover the refrigerant from the A/C system. The ACR 2000 also features automatic air purge, single pass recycling and an automatic oil drain. Refer to the J 43600 ACR 2000 manual for operation and setup instruction. Always recharge the A/C System with the proper amount of R-134a. Refer to Refrigerant System Capacities for the correct amount. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - New PAG Oil Refrigerant Oil: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - New PAG Oil Bulletin No.: 02-01-39-004B Date: November 16, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: New PAG Oil Released Models: 2006 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Built With R-134a Refrigeration System All Air Conditioning Compressor Types (Excluding R4 and A6 Type Compressors) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to change the PAG oil part number used for R4 and A6 compressors with R-134a refrigerant systems. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-01-39-004A (Section 01 - HVAC). All General Motors vehicles built with R-134a refrigerant systems shall now be serviced with GM Universal PAG Oil (excluding vehicles equipped with an R4 or A6 compressor). R4 and A6 compressors with R-134a refrigerant systems shall use PAG OIL, GM P/N 12356151 (A/C Delco part number 15-118) (in Canada, use P/N 10953486). Important: The PAG oil referenced in this bulletin is formulated with specific additive packages that meet General Motors specifications and use of another oil may void the A/C systems warranty. Use this new PAG oil when servicing the A/C system on the vehicles listed above. Oil packaged in an 8 oz tube should be installed using A/C Oil Injector, J 45037. Refer to the HVAC Section of Service Information for detailed information on Oil Balancing and Capacities. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL CAPACITIES ABRUPT REFRIGERANT LOSS .................................................................................................................................................. 65 ml (2.20 ounces) NOTE: Abrupt refrigerant loss due to a large leak, hose rupture, collision, or pressure relief valve opening. Conditions that allow the refrigerant to seep or bleed off over time do not cause this oil loss. Upon replacement of a component that caused a large refrigerant loss, also add the required amount of oil for the particular component. COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT The Zexel model DKS17DS service compressor is precharged with the specified amount of PAG oil. .......................................... 74 ml (2.50 ounces) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. CONDENSER REPLACEMENT WITH RECEIVER DEHYDRATOR ............................................................................................................................................. 60 ml (2.0 ounces) WITHOUT RECEIVER DEHYDRATOR ..................................................................................................................................... 30 ml (1.0 ounces) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. EVAPORATOR REPLACEMENT .................................................................................................................................................. 30 ml (1.0 ounces) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. RECEIVER DEHYDRATOR REPLACEMENT ............................................................................................................................ 30 ml (1.0 ounces) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. THERMAL EXPANSION VALVE REPLACEMENT ................................................................................................................ 20 ml (0.75 ounces) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. TOTAL SYSTEM PAG OIL CAPACITY ................................................................................................................................... 130 ml (4.40 ounces) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 13326 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL Polyalkylene glycol (PAG) Oil ................................................................................................................ GM P/N 12378526 (Canadian P/N 88900060) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 13327 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair A/C REFRIGERANT SYSTEM OIL CHARGE REPLENISHING If oil was removed from the A/C system during the recovery process or due to component replacement, the oil must be replenished. Oil can be added to the system by pouring the correct amount into the replaced component or into an open refrigerant line. For the proper quantities of oil to add to the A/C refrigerant system, refer to Refrigerant System Capacities. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Low Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Low Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) REFRIGERANT LOW TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left side insulator/closeout panel. 2. Disconnect the temperature sensor connector from the temperature sensor. 3. Twist the temperature sensor one quarter turn to disengage from the evaporator case assembly. 4. Remove the temperature sensor from the evaporator case assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the temperature sensor to the evaporator case assembly. 2. Twist the temperature sensor one quarter turn to engage to the evaporator case assembly. 3. Install the temperature sensor connector to the temperature sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Low Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13332 4. Install the left side insulator/closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13337 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13338 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13341 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13342 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13343 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13344 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13345 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13346 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13347 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13348 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13349 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13350 Blower Motor Relay: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13351 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13352 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13353 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13354 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13355 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13356 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13357 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13358 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13359 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13360 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13361 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13362 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13363 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13364 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13365 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13366 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13367 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13368 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13369 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13370 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13371 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13372 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13373 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13374 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13375 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13376 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13377 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13378 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13379 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13380 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13381 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13382 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13383 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13384 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13385 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13386 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13387 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13388 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13389 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13390 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13391 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13392 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13393 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13394 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13395 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13396 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13397 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13398 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13399 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13400 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13401 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13402 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13403 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13404 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13405 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13406 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13407 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13408 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13409 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13410 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13411 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13412 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13413 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13417 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13418 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13419 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Control Module HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13425 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13426 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13427 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13428 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13429 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13430 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13431 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13432 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13433 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13434 Control Module HVAC: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13435 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13436 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13437 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13438 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13439 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13440 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13441 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13442 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13443 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13444 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13445 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13446 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13447 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13448 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13449 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13450 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13451 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13452 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13453 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13454 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13455 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13456 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13457 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13458 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13459 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13460 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13461 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13462 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13463 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13464 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13465 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13466 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13467 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13468 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13469 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13470 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13471 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13472 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13473 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13474 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13475 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13476 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13477 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13478 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13479 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13480 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13481 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13482 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13483 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13484 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13485 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13486 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13487 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13488 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13489 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13490 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13491 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13492 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13493 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13494 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13495 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13496 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13497 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13498 Control Module HVAC: Connector Views HVAC Control Module C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13499 HVAC Control Module C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13505 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13506 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13507 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13508 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13509 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13510 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13511 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13512 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13513 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13514 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13515 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13516 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13517 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13518 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13519 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13520 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13521 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13522 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13523 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13524 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13525 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13526 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13527 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13528 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13529 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13530 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13531 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13532 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13533 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13534 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13535 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13536 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13537 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13538 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13539 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13540 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13541 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13542 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13543 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13544 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13545 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13546 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13547 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13548 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13549 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13550 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13551 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13552 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13553 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13554 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13555 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13556 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13557 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13558 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13559 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13560 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13561 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13562 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13563 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13564 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13565 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13566 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13567 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13568 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13569 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13570 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13571 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13572 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13573 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13574 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13575 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13576 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13577 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations HVAC Module Assembly Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13581 Evaporator Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Low Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Low Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) REFRIGERANT LOW TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left side insulator/closeout panel. 2. Disconnect the temperature sensor connector from the temperature sensor. 3. Twist the temperature sensor one quarter turn to disengage from the evaporator case assembly. 4. Remove the temperature sensor from the evaporator case assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the temperature sensor to the evaporator case assembly. 2. Twist the temperature sensor one quarter turn to engage to the evaporator case assembly. 3. Install the temperature sensor connector to the temperature sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Low Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13586 4. Install the left side insulator/closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Service Port HVAC: Service and Repair SERVICE PORT VALVE CORE REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED - J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector - J 46246 Valve Core Removal Tool REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Use J 46246 or equivalent to remove the valve core. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Use J 46246 or equivalent to install and tighten the valve core. 2. Evacuate and charge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 3. Test the affected A/C fittings for leaks using J 39400-A. IMPORTANT: To prevent loss of refrigerant charge, tighten the cap. Replace the cap if the seal is missing or damaged. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belts Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Seat Belts REPAIRS AND INSPECTIONS REQUIRED AFTER A COLLISION CAUTION: Restraint systems can be damaged in a collision. To help avoid injury and ensure that all parts in need of replacement are replaced: - Replace any seat belt system that was in use during the collision serious enough to deploy any automatic restraint device such as air bags and seat belt pretensioners. This not only includes seat belt systems in use by people of adult size, but seat belt systems used to secure child restraints, infant carriers and booster seats, including LATCH system and top tether anchorages. - Replace any seat belt system that has torn, worn, or damaged components. This not only includes adult seat belt systems, but built-in child restraints and LATCH system components, if any. - Replace any seat belt system if you observe the words "REPLACE" or "CAUTION", or if a yellow tag is visible. Do not replace a seat belt if only the child seat caution label is visible. - Replace any seat belt system if you are doubtful about its condition. This not only includes adult seat belt systems, but built-in child restraints, LATCH system components, and any restraint system used to secure infant carriers, child restraints, and booster seats. Do NOT replace single seat belt system components in vehicles that have been in a collision as described above. Always replace the entire seat belt system with the buckle, guide and retractor assembly, which includes the latch and webbing material. After a minor collision where no automatic restraint device was deployed, seat belt system replacement may not be necessary unless some of the parts are torn, worn, or damaged. After any collision, verify that the pretentioners on the front seat belt retractor have not deployed. 1. Pull the seat belt webbing. 2. If you hear a grinding or a rattling, replace the retractor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belts > Page 13595 Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Steering Column Steering Column Accident Damage Inspection Inspection This vehicle is equipped with electric power steering (EPS), with the electric motor and torque sensor mounted on the steering column. When involved in an accident resulting in sheet metal damage or driver-side air bag deployment, the steering column must be inspected for both electrical system integrity and steering column collapse. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures ^ If the steering column electrical system integrity is not within specifications, the complete steering column must be replaced. Refer to Steering Column Replacement. ^ If the steering column collapse mechanism is not within specifications, but the electrical system integrity is within specifications, then the steering column upper jacket must be replaced. Road test the vehicle when ever any steering system repairs or diagnostics have been performed. Electric Power Steering (EPS) Inspection 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Start the engine. 3. Important: After centering the steering wheel, remove hands and other objects from the steering wheel. Ensure the suspension is relaxed and that no bias, or uneven force is being applied to the steering system. Turn the steering wheel 90 degrees to the left, then 90 degrees to the right, then return the steering wheel to center. 4. Using the scan tool, observe the Torque Sensor Main data parameter in the EPS data list. Correct parameter range for the torque sensor is <+ or 1 Nm (0.7 ft. lbs.). 5. If the value is greater than the specified range then replace the steering column assembly. Refer to Steering Column Replacement. Collapse Measurement A vehicle involved in an accident resulting in sheet metal damage or drivers-side air bag deployment will require an inspection for steering column collapse. If the steering column collapse measurement is greater than 3 mm than the steering column upper jacket must be replaced. For steering column collapse measurement, use the following procedure: 1. Remove the steering column trim covers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belts > Page 13596 2. Inspect the upper steering column mounting capsule nuts for movement (a). If the steering column collapse measurement is greater than 3 mm than the steering column upper jacket must be replaced. 3. Install the steering column trim covers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belts > Page 13597 Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Supplemental Inflatable Restraints REPAIRS AND INSPECTIONS REQUIRED AFTER A COLLISION ACCIDENT WITH OR WITHOUT AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT - COMPONENT INSPECTIONS CAUTION: Proper operation of the SIR sensing system requires that any repairs to the vehicle structure return the vehicle structure to the original production configuration. Not properly repairing the vehicle structure could cause non-deployment in a collision or deployment for conditions less severe than intended. After any collision, inspect the following components as indicated. If damage is detected, replace the component. If damage to the mounting points or mounting hardware is detected, repair the component or replace the hardware as needed. Steering column-Perform the steering column accident damage inspection procedures. Refer to Steering Column Accident Damage Inspection in Steering Wheel and Column. See: Steering Column - I/P knee bolsters and mounting points-Inspect the knee bolsters for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. - I/P brackets, braces, etc.-Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. - Seat belts-Perform the seat belt operational and functional checks. Refer to Operational and Functional Checks in Seat Belts. See: Seat Belt Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Operational and Functional Checks - I/P cross car beam-Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. - I/P mounting points and brackets-Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. - Seats and seat mounting points-Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. FRONTAL INFLATOR MODULE DEPLOYMENT - COMPONENT REPLACEMENT AND INSPECTIONS After a collision involving inflator module deployment, replace the following components. Inflatable restraint I/P module - Inflatable restraint steering wheel module - Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). Replace only if DTC B0051 or DTC B0053 cannot be cleared using the scan tool. Refer to DTC B0051 or DTC B0053. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/B Code Charts - Inflatable restraint front end sensor. - Inflatable restraint seat belt pretensioners Perform additional inspections on the following components: Inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil and coil wiring pigtail-Inspect for melting, scorching, or other damage due to excessive heat. - Mounting point or mounting hardware for the I/P module, steering wheel module, and SDM-Inspect for any damage and repair or replace each component as needed. ROOF RAIL INFLATOR MODULE DEPLOYMENT - COMPONENT REPLACEMENT AND INSPECTIONS After a collision involving a roof rail inflator module deployment, replace the following components on the side of the impact. Inflatable restraint seat belt pretensioners - Inflatable restraint roof rail modules, left/right, on the side of the impact - Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) - Inflatable restraint side impact sensor (SIS), left/right, on the side of the impact Perform additional inspections on the following components. Mounting points or mounting hardware for the inflatable restraint SIS on the side of the impact-Inspect for any damage and repair or replace each component as needed. - Mounting points or mounting hardware for the inflatable restraint SDM and seat belt pretensioners-Inspect for any damage and repair or replace each component as needed. SENSOR REPLACEMENT GUIDELINES The SIS replacement policy requires replacing sensors in the area of accident damage. The area of accident damage is defined as the portion of the vehicle which is crushed, bent, or damaged due to a collision. Replace the sensor whether or not the air bags have deployed. - Replace the sensor even if it appears to be undamaged. Sensor damage which is not visible, such as a slight bending of the mounting bracket or cuts in the wire insulation, can cause improper operation of the sensor. Do not try to determine whether the sensor is undamaged. Replace the sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13603 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13604 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13605 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13606 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13607 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13608 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13609 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13610 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13611 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13612 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13613 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13614 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13615 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13616 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13617 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13618 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13619 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13620 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center, then remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13621 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the I/P module connector. 7. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13622 2. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13623 5. Locate And Remove The Air Bag Fuse From The Body Control Module Fuse Center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - right, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the right rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13624 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - RF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - RF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - right, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13625 3. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13626 10. Connect the SIS - RF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 8 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13627 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the upper rear window molding. 7. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 9. Remove the rear coat hooks. 10. Gently pull down the right rear corner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 11. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13628 13. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 14. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 15. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 16. Remove the CPA from the I/P module connector. 17. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. 18. Remove the CPA from the steering wheel module coil connector. 19. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13629 20. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 21. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 22. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 23. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 24. Remove the CPA from the roof rail module - left connector. 25. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13630 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 5. Install the lower center pillar trim. 6. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 7. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13631 8. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 9. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 10. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 13. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 14. Install the rear coat hooks. 15. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13632 16. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 17. Install the upper rear window molding. 18. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 19. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 20. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 21. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Harness: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Air Bag Harness: Customer Interest Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Bulletin No.: 04-09-41-005A Date: October 26, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Scraping Noise from Upper Steering Column Behind Steering Wheel (Reposition Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Wires) Models: 2004 Saturn VUE Built Up To and Including VIN Breakpoints 4S885734 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-09-41-005 (Section 09 - Restraints). Condition Some customers may comment on noise from the steering column and/or noise from behind the steering wheel when turning the steering wheel. Cause The inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires that go between the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) coil and the inflatable restraint steering wheel module are applying a downward force where the wires come out of the SIR coil. This force may be causing the top cover of the SIR coil to make contact with the SIR coil housing which creates a scraping noise. This force is primarily due to the routing of the wires during installation of the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Correction On vehicles with this condition, follow the service procedure below to reposition the inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires in order to eliminate the noise condition. 1. Disable the SIR system (Zone 3). 2. Remove the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 3. If both yellow airbag wires are taped together, then remove both pieces of black tape (only 2004 Saturn VUE should have tape condition). 4. Straighten out the yellow wires to remove kinks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Harness: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 13642 5. Orient the yellow wires as if they have never been taped together. Yellow wires should be separate, starting from the SIR coil connector. Refer to the illustration. 6. Reconnect both yellow wires to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. For Saturn VUE only, do not connect the horn switch connector at this time. 7. Rotate the inflatable restraint steering wheel module one revolution clockwise while keeping the steering wheel from turning. 8. Connect the horn switch connector from the steering wheel to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Important: When reinstalling the inflatable restraint steering wheel module, pull the airbag leads (yellow wires) in an upward direction, towards the top of the steering wheel hub. This will prevent the wires from pressing down on the SIR coil connector. Then make sure the wires go back into "pocket" area behind the SIR coil. 9. Reinstall the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 10. Enable the SIR system (Zone 3). 11. Start the vehicle and verify that the noise has been eliminated. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Harness: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 13643 To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Harness: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Air Bag Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Bulletin No.: 04-09-41-005A Date: October 26, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Scraping Noise from Upper Steering Column Behind Steering Wheel (Reposition Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Wires) Models: 2004 Saturn VUE Built Up To and Including VIN Breakpoints 4S885734 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-09-41-005 (Section 09 - Restraints). Condition Some customers may comment on noise from the steering column and/or noise from behind the steering wheel when turning the steering wheel. Cause The inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires that go between the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) coil and the inflatable restraint steering wheel module are applying a downward force where the wires come out of the SIR coil. This force may be causing the top cover of the SIR coil to make contact with the SIR coil housing which creates a scraping noise. This force is primarily due to the routing of the wires during installation of the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Correction On vehicles with this condition, follow the service procedure below to reposition the inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires in order to eliminate the noise condition. 1. Disable the SIR system (Zone 3). 2. Remove the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 3. If both yellow airbag wires are taped together, then remove both pieces of black tape (only 2004 Saturn VUE should have tape condition). 4. Straighten out the yellow wires to remove kinks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Harness: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 13649 5. Orient the yellow wires as if they have never been taped together. Yellow wires should be separate, starting from the SIR coil connector. Refer to the illustration. 6. Reconnect both yellow wires to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. For Saturn VUE only, do not connect the horn switch connector at this time. 7. Rotate the inflatable restraint steering wheel module one revolution clockwise while keeping the steering wheel from turning. 8. Connect the horn switch connector from the steering wheel to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Important: When reinstalling the inflatable restraint steering wheel module, pull the airbag leads (yellow wires) in an upward direction, towards the top of the steering wheel hub. This will prevent the wires from pressing down on the SIR coil connector. Then make sure the wires go back into "pocket" area behind the SIR coil. 9. Reinstall the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 10. Enable the SIR system (Zone 3). 11. Start the vehicle and verify that the noise has been eliminated. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Harness: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 13650 To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13654 I/P Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13655 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Inflatable Restraint Sensing And Diagnostic Module (SDM) Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13656 Inflatable Restraint Sensing And Diagnostic Module (SDM) Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13657 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM) The sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) is a microprocessor and the control center for the SIR system. The SDM contains internal sensors along with several external sensors, if equipped, mounted at strategic locations on the vehicle. In the event of a collision, the SDM compares the signals from the internal and external sensors to a value stored in memory. When the generated signals exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the appropriate deployment loops to deploy the air bags or seat belt pretensioners. If the force of the impact is not sufficient to warrant inflator module deployment, the SDM may still deploy the seat belt pretensioners. The SDM records the SIR system status when a deployment occurs and turns the AIR BAG indicator located in the IPC ON. As soon as three distinct deployment commands (representing different events) have been issued to any belt pretensioner, or the SDM commands any front and side air bag to deploy once, the SDM shall be considered to not be reusable. The SDM performs continuous diagnostic monitoring of the SIR system electrical components and circuitry when the ignition is turned ON. If the SDM detects a malfunction, a DTC will be stored and the SDM will command the AIR BAG indicator ON, notifying the driver that a malfunction exist. In the event that ignition positive voltage is lost during a collision, the SDM maintains a 23-volt loop reserve (23 VLR) for deployment of the air bags. It is important when disabling the SIR system for servicing or rescue operations to allow the 23 VLR to dissipate, which could take up to 1 minute. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13658 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8. CAUTION: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). Before applying power to the SDM, make sure that it is securely fastened with the arrow facing toward the front of the vehicle. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. 2. Remove the console assembly. 3. Remove the retainers from the connector position assurance (CPA) and disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the nuts and remove the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other contaminants from the mounting surface. 2. Install the SDM to the vehicle with the nuts. Tighten the nuts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the console assembly. 4. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8. 5. Reprogram the BCM. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration in Computer/Integrating Systems. IMPORTANT: If you do NOT perform the BCM programming procedure, the vehicle option content information which is read by the BCM may be Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13659 incorrect and a DTC B1001 Option Configuration Error will set in both the SDM and the BCM. This will illuminate the AIR BAG telltale. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Customer Interest Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Bulletin No.: 04-09-41-005A Date: October 26, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Scraping Noise from Upper Steering Column Behind Steering Wheel (Reposition Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Wires) Models: 2004 Saturn VUE Built Up To and Including VIN Breakpoints 4S885734 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-09-41-005 (Section 09 - Restraints). Condition Some customers may comment on noise from the steering column and/or noise from behind the steering wheel when turning the steering wheel. Cause The inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires that go between the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) coil and the inflatable restraint steering wheel module are applying a downward force where the wires come out of the SIR coil. This force may be causing the top cover of the SIR coil to make contact with the SIR coil housing which creates a scraping noise. This force is primarily due to the routing of the wires during installation of the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Correction On vehicles with this condition, follow the service procedure below to reposition the inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires in order to eliminate the noise condition. 1. Disable the SIR system (Zone 3). 2. Remove the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 3. If both yellow airbag wires are taped together, then remove both pieces of black tape (only 2004 Saturn VUE should have tape condition). 4. Straighten out the yellow wires to remove kinks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 13668 5. Orient the yellow wires as if they have never been taped together. Yellow wires should be separate, starting from the SIR coil connector. Refer to the illustration. 6. Reconnect both yellow wires to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. For Saturn VUE only, do not connect the horn switch connector at this time. 7. Rotate the inflatable restraint steering wheel module one revolution clockwise while keeping the steering wheel from turning. 8. Connect the horn switch connector from the steering wheel to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Important: When reinstalling the inflatable restraint steering wheel module, pull the airbag leads (yellow wires) in an upward direction, towards the top of the steering wheel hub. This will prevent the wires from pressing down on the SIR coil connector. Then make sure the wires go back into "pocket" area behind the SIR coil. 9. Reinstall the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 10. Enable the SIR system (Zone 3). 11. Start the vehicle and verify that the noise has been eliminated. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 13669 To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Bulletin No.: 04-09-41-005A Date: October 26, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Scraping Noise from Upper Steering Column Behind Steering Wheel (Reposition Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Wires) Models: 2004 Saturn VUE Built Up To and Including VIN Breakpoints 4S885734 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-09-41-005 (Section 09 - Restraints). Condition Some customers may comment on noise from the steering column and/or noise from behind the steering wheel when turning the steering wheel. Cause The inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires that go between the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) coil and the inflatable restraint steering wheel module are applying a downward force where the wires come out of the SIR coil. This force may be causing the top cover of the SIR coil to make contact with the SIR coil housing which creates a scraping noise. This force is primarily due to the routing of the wires during installation of the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Correction On vehicles with this condition, follow the service procedure below to reposition the inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires in order to eliminate the noise condition. 1. Disable the SIR system (Zone 3). 2. Remove the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 3. If both yellow airbag wires are taped together, then remove both pieces of black tape (only 2004 Saturn VUE should have tape condition). 4. Straighten out the yellow wires to remove kinks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 13675 5. Orient the yellow wires as if they have never been taped together. Yellow wires should be separate, starting from the SIR coil connector. Refer to the illustration. 6. Reconnect both yellow wires to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. For Saturn VUE only, do not connect the horn switch connector at this time. 7. Rotate the inflatable restraint steering wheel module one revolution clockwise while keeping the steering wheel from turning. 8. Connect the horn switch connector from the steering wheel to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Important: When reinstalling the inflatable restraint steering wheel module, pull the airbag leads (yellow wires) in an upward direction, towards the top of the steering wheel hub. This will prevent the wires from pressing down on the SIR coil connector. Then make sure the wires go back into "pocket" area behind the SIR coil. 9. Reinstall the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 10. Enable the SIR system (Zone 3). 11. Start the vehicle and verify that the noise has been eliminated. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 13676 To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13677 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Description and Operation INFLATABLE RESTRAINT STEERING WHEEL MODULE COIL The steering wheel module coil is attached to the steering column and is located under the steering wheel. The steering wheel module coil consists of two or more current-carrying coils. The coils allow the rotation of the steering wheel while maintaining continuous electrical contact between the steering wheel module deployment loop and the steering wheel module. Two coil wires are used for the steering wheel module deployment loop. Additional coil wires are used for accessories that are attached to the steering wheel, depending on the vehicle model. The steering wheel module coil connector is located near the base of the steering column. The connector contains a shorting bar that shorts the steering wheel module coil deployment loop circuitry to prevent unwanted deployment of the steering wheel module when the connector is disconnected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13678 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair INFLATABLE RESTRAINT STEERING WHEEL MODULE COIL REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the front wheels in the straight forward position with the steering wheel centered. NOTE: The new SIR coil assembly will be centered. Improper alignment of the SIR coil assembly may damage the unit, causing an inflatable restraint malfunction. 2. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. 3. Remove the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 4. Remove the steering wheel. 5. Remove the steering column covers. 6. Release the SIR coil harness clips from the bracket below the column. 7. Disconnect both the SIR coil and horn/cruise connectors. 8. Using a small flat-bladed tool, carefully pry the retaining tabs away from the SIR coil assembly and slide the SIR coil assembly off the steering column. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Route the SIR wiring harness and horn/cruise connector down steering column. IMPORTANT: A new roll connector is equipped with a yellow tab that is removed after the steering wheel is installed. This tab passes through the steering wheel. 2. Snap the SIR coil into position on the column. 3. Connect the SIR coil and horn/cruise electrical connectors. 4. Attach the wiring harness clips to the bracket below the column. 5. Install the steering column covers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13679 6. Install the steering wheel. 7. Install the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 8. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Impact Sensor: Diagrams Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) - Left (ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) > Page 13685 Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) - Right (ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) > Page 13686 Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front End Sensor Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Front End Sensor INFLATABLE RESTRAINT FRONT END SENSOR The front end sensor, also known as the electronic frontal sensor (EFS), is equipped on vehicles to supplement the SIR system performance. The EFS is an electronic sensor and is not part of the deployment loops, but instead provides an input to the SDM. The EFS can assist in determining the severity of some frontal collisions. The SDM contains a microprocessor which performs calculations using the measured accelerations and compares these calculations to a value stored in memory. When the generated calculations exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the frontal deployment loops deploying the frontal air bags. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front End Sensor > Page 13689 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Side Impact Sensor (SIS) INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (SIS) The side impact sensor (SIS) contains a sensing device which monitors vehicle acceleration and velocity changes to detect side collisions that are severe enough to warrant air bag deployment. The SIS is not part of the deployment loop, but instead provides an input to the SDM. The SDM contains a microprocessor that performs calculations using the measured accelerations and compares these calculations to a value stored in memory. When the generated calculations exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the deployment loops deploying the side air bags. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor Replacement Caution: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint front end sensor. Before applying power to the front end sensor make sure that it is securely fastened. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. Preliminary Procedure: Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. 1. Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Front End Discriminating Sensor Bolt. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. Tip: Loosen the TORX head bolt in order to remove sensor. The bolt has left hand threads. Tighten 8 N.m (71 lb in) 2. Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Front End Discriminating Sensor Assembly. Procedure: 1. Slide the sensor towards the front of vehicle to guide the sensor bolt out of release slot. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 13692 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 or to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. CAUTION: When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must be disabled. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR components, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. - Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint side impact sensor (SIS). Before applying power to the SIS make sure that it is securely fastened. Failure to observe the correct installation procedures could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. 2. Remove the center pillar lower molding. 3. Loosen the fasteners on the side impact sensor (SIS). 4. Remove the SIS by sliding the module up and out of the key slots in the sheet metal. 5. Disconnect the SIS electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other contaminants from the mounting surface. 2. Connect the SIS electrical connector and insert into the connector position assurance (CPA) to secure. 3. Place the SIS through the access hole in the lock pillar. 4. Slide the module down and locate the captured fastener in the key slots of the lock pillar. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 13693 Tighten the fastener to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the center pillar lower molding. 6. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 or to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 08-09-41-004 > Mar > 08 > Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Customer Interest Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-004 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: Airbag Light On, DTC B1000 Set (Reprogram Passenger Presence System (PPS) Module) Models: 2008 Buick Enclave 2005-2008 Cadillac SRX 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 GMC Acadia 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2008 Saturn OUTLOOK 2007-2008 Suzuki XL-7 Condition Some customers may comment on the airbag light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find DTC B1000 with symptom code 37 set as current or in history. Correction Important: You must contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. New software for the Passenger Presence System (PPS) has been released to disable this diagnostic check to prevent false setting of DTC B1000. Reprogram the PPS module with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Perform a PPS rezero/preload procedure upon a successful module reprogramming event. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 08-09-41-004 > Mar > 08 > Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-004 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: Airbag Light On, DTC B1000 Set (Reprogram Passenger Presence System (PPS) Module) Models: 2008 Buick Enclave 2005-2008 Cadillac SRX 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 GMC Acadia 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2008 Saturn OUTLOOK 2007-2008 Suzuki XL-7 Condition Some customers may comment on the airbag light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find DTC B1000 with symptom code 37 set as current or in history. Correction Important: You must contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. New software for the Passenger Presence System (PPS) has been released to disable this diagnostic check to prevent false setting of DTC B1000. Reprogram the PPS module with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Perform a PPS rezero/preload procedure upon a successful module reprogramming event. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing System Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly, sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or between the occupant and the seat fabric. Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE NECESSARY BY SUCH USE. Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers. Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the passenger air bag. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Description and Operation AIR BAG INDICATOR The AIR BAG indicator, located in the IPC, is used to notify the driver of SIR system malfunctions and to verify that the SDM is communicating with the IPC. When the ignition is turned ON, the SDM is supplied with ignition positive voltage. The SDM requests the IPC to flash the AIR BAG indicator seven times. While flashing the indicator, the SDM conducts tests on all SIR system components and circuits. If no malfunctions are detected, the SDM will communicate with the IPC through the class 2 serial data circuit and command the AIR BAG indicator OFF. The SDM provides continuous monitoring of the air bag circuits by conducting a sequence of checks. If a malfunction is detected the SDM will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and command the IPC to turn the AIR BAG indicator ON via class 2 serial data. The presence of a SIR system malfunction could result in non-deployment of the air bags or deployment in conditions less severe than intended. The AIR BAG indicator will remain ON until the malfunction has been repaired. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Head Restraint System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information Head Restraint System: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-003A Date: March 24, 2011 Subject: Information on Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Concerns with Comfort, Custom Upholstery or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Adjustable Head Restraints Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-003 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS, USE THE HEAD RESTRAINT COVERS, FOAM AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER OR REPOSITION THE HEAD RESTRAINT SYSTEM. ANY ALTERATIONS TO HEAD RESTRAINTS DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER DESIGN ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. You may have a customer with a concern that the head restraint is uncomfortable or sits too far forward. The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with head restraints that have been designed to help minimize injuries while still providing comfort to the occupants. Each GM vehicle has its own specifically designed head restraint. The head restraints should only be used in the vehicle for which they were designed. The head restraint will not operate to its design intent if the original foam is replaced (1) by non-GM foam or head restraint, (2) by GM foam or head restraint designed for a different vehicle, (3) by GM foam or head restraint that has been altered by a trim shop or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket comfort enhancing pad or device, is installed. Never modify the design of the head restraint or remove the head restraint from the vehicle as this may interfere with the operation of the seating and restraint systems and may prevent proper positioning of the passenger within the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Knee Diverter > Component Information > Description and Operation Knee Diverter: Description and Operation KNEE BOLSTER The knee bolsters are designed to help restrain the lower torso of front seat occupants by absorbing the energy through the front seat occupants upper legs. In a collision, the front seat occupants legs may come in contact with the knee bolsters. The knee bolsters are designed to crush and deform, absorbing some of the impact and helping to reduce bodily injuries. The driver and passenger knee bolsters are located in the lower part of the instrument panel and must be inspected for damages after a collision. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Knee Diverter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 13721 Knee Diverter: Service and Repair KNEE BOLSTER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the screws from the trim panel. 2. Remove the filler panel by pulling until the trim clips disengage. 3. Remove the trim panel by pulling on the panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the outer trim panel. 2. Push to install the panel. 3. Fasten the screws that hold the left side trim panel to the I/P. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13726 I/P Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13727 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Inflatable Restraint Sensing And Diagnostic Module (SDM) Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13728 Inflatable Restraint Sensing And Diagnostic Module (SDM) Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13729 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM) The sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) is a microprocessor and the control center for the SIR system. The SDM contains internal sensors along with several external sensors, if equipped, mounted at strategic locations on the vehicle. In the event of a collision, the SDM compares the signals from the internal and external sensors to a value stored in memory. When the generated signals exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the appropriate deployment loops to deploy the air bags or seat belt pretensioners. If the force of the impact is not sufficient to warrant inflator module deployment, the SDM may still deploy the seat belt pretensioners. The SDM records the SIR system status when a deployment occurs and turns the AIR BAG indicator located in the IPC ON. As soon as three distinct deployment commands (representing different events) have been issued to any belt pretensioner, or the SDM commands any front and side air bag to deploy once, the SDM shall be considered to not be reusable. The SDM performs continuous diagnostic monitoring of the SIR system electrical components and circuitry when the ignition is turned ON. If the SDM detects a malfunction, a DTC will be stored and the SDM will command the AIR BAG indicator ON, notifying the driver that a malfunction exist. In the event that ignition positive voltage is lost during a collision, the SDM maintains a 23-volt loop reserve (23 VLR) for deployment of the air bags. It is important when disabling the SIR system for servicing or rescue operations to allow the 23 VLR to dissipate, which could take up to 1 minute. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13730 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8. CAUTION: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). Before applying power to the SDM, make sure that it is securely fastened with the arrow facing toward the front of the vehicle. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. 2. Remove the console assembly. 3. Remove the retainers from the connector position assurance (CPA) and disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the nuts and remove the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other contaminants from the mounting surface. 2. Install the SDM to the vehicle with the nuts. Tighten the nuts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the console assembly. 4. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8. 5. Reprogram the BCM. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration in Computer/Integrating Systems. IMPORTANT: If you do NOT perform the BCM programming procedure, the vehicle option content information which is read by the BCM may be Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13731 incorrect and a DTC B1001 Option Configuration Error will set in both the SDM and the BCM. This will illuminate the AIR BAG telltale. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 08-09-41-004 > Mar > 08 > Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Customer Interest Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-004 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: Airbag Light On, DTC B1000 Set (Reprogram Passenger Presence System (PPS) Module) Models: 2008 Buick Enclave 2005-2008 Cadillac SRX 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 GMC Acadia 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2008 Saturn OUTLOOK 2007-2008 Suzuki XL-7 Condition Some customers may comment on the airbag light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find DTC B1000 with symptom code 37 set as current or in history. Correction Important: You must contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. New software for the Passenger Presence System (PPS) has been released to disable this diagnostic check to prevent false setting of DTC B1000. Reprogram the PPS module with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Perform a PPS rezero/preload procedure upon a successful module reprogramming event. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 08-09-41-004 > Mar > 08 > Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-004 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: Airbag Light On, DTC B1000 Set (Reprogram Passenger Presence System (PPS) Module) Models: 2008 Buick Enclave 2005-2008 Cadillac SRX 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 GMC Acadia 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2008 Saturn OUTLOOK 2007-2008 Suzuki XL-7 Condition Some customers may comment on the airbag light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find DTC B1000 with symptom code 37 set as current or in history. Correction Important: You must contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. New software for the Passenger Presence System (PPS) has been released to disable this diagnostic check to prevent false setting of DTC B1000. Reprogram the PPS module with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Perform a PPS rezero/preload procedure upon a successful module reprogramming event. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13750 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13751 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13752 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13753 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13754 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13755 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13756 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13757 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13758 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13759 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13760 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13761 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13762 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13763 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13764 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13765 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13766 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13767 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center, then remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13768 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the I/P module connector. 7. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13769 2. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13770 5. Locate And Remove The Air Bag Fuse From The Body Control Module Fuse Center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - right, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the right rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13771 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - RF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - RF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - right, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13772 3. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13773 10. Connect the SIS - RF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 8 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13774 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the upper rear window molding. 7. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 9. Remove the rear coat hooks. 10. Gently pull down the right rear corner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 11. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13775 13. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 14. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 15. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 16. Remove the CPA from the I/P module connector. 17. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. 18. Remove the CPA from the steering wheel module coil connector. 19. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13776 20. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 21. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 22. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 23. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 24. Remove the CPA from the roof rail module - left connector. 25. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13777 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 5. Install the lower center pillar trim. 6. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 7. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13778 8. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 9. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 10. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 13. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 14. Install the rear coat hooks. 15. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 13779 16. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 17. Install the upper rear window molding. 18. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 19. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 20. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 21. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Bezel Replacement - Child Restraint Tether Anchor Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Bezel Replacement - Child Restraint Tether Anchor BEZEL REPLACEMENT - CHILD RESTRAINT TETHER ANCHOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Fold down the rear seat back. 2. Remove the tether anchor bezel by pulling up at the sides. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the tether anchor bezel by pushing down on the sides. 2. Move the rear seat back to the upright position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Bezel Replacement - Child Restraint Tether Anchor > Page 13785 Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Child Restraint Tether Anchor Replacement (Early Production) CHILD RESTRAINT TETHER ANCHOR REPLACEMENT (EARLY PRODUCTION) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Fold down the rear seat back. 2. Remove the tether anchor escutcheon by pulling up at the sides. 3. Remove the tether anchor fastener and remove the tether anchor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Bezel Replacement - Child Restraint Tether Anchor > Page 13786 1. Position the tether anchor onto the rear seat structure. 2. Install the tether anchor fastener. Tighten the fastener to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Verify that the tether anchor tab is inserted into the notch. 3. Install the tether anchor escutcheon. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-09-40-003 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move Seat Belt: Customer Interest Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-003 Date: August 03, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard To Move Past Stitching And/Or Finish Knot Is Fraying (Trim Frayed Stitching) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse 2005-2006 Cadillac XLR 2005-2006 Chevrolet Colorado, Corvette, Equinox 2005-2006 GMC Canyon 2005-2006 Pontiac G6 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition 1 Some customers may comment that the seat belt buckle is hard to move down the belt past the park stitching. Condition 2 Some customers may comment that the seat belt park stitching finish knot is fraying. Cause 1 This stitching is meant to prevent the seat belt latch plate from contacting the door trim or the "B" pillar molding when passengers are not present and if the plate is left below the stitching, it may rattle. Cause 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-09-40-003 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move > Page 13795 The finish knot on the corner of the stitching is slightly larger than the stitching and may be frayed from the seat belt buckle passing over it as shown in the illustration above. Correction 1 Move the seat belt plate past the park stitching several times. This will help ease any difficulty the customer may encounter. Correction 2 Trim the frayed end of the stitching Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-09-40-002E > Oct > 10 > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-002E Date: October 21, 2010 Subject: Safety Belt Locking Conditions (Normal Operating Characteristic) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-09-40-002D (Section 09 - Restraints). The purpose of this bulletin is to explain when the safety belts are supposed to lock. There are several different locking situations for both front and rear safety belts. Overspool Lock There is an unintentional locking condition that ALL safety belts from ALL manufacturers may experience called "overspool lock". If the webbing snaps back to the stowed position rapidly enough, the retractor will lock with the belt fully stowed. This is more likely to occur when customers "help" the belt to retract. Without the weight of the latch plate and friction to slow the retractive speed of the webbing, the higher than normal webbing retraction speed that occurs engages the locking mechanism when a sudden stop occurs at the end of web travel. Since the webbing is now fully loaded on the spool, the retractor cannot rewind itself further to release the locking mechanism. When this happens, the occupant cannot extract the belt to wear it. DO NOT replace the retractor for this condition until first attempting to disengage the locking mechanism by following the recommendation listed below. Recommendation Pull hard on the locked webbing and then release. The hard pull extracts a small amount of webbing from the retractor which, in turn, permits a small amount of retraction to occur when released. This is all that is needed to disengage the locking mechanism. The safety belt will now function properly. Vehicle Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the vehicle under the following conditions: - The vehicle changes speed or direction abruptly (the vehicle goes into rapid acceleration OR rapid deceleration or there is aggressive cornering). - It can also occur in a static condition when a vehicle is parked on a large slant (fore-aft or side-to-side), such as streets in San Francisco, California. - It may also occur over rough road conditions where the retractor mechanism is bounced into a locked condition. In all of these conditions, as long as tension is maintained on the webbing, the belt will stay locked. When the tension is released, the belt retracts slightly, the lock bar disengages and the safety belt should return to normal function. Please inform customers that may comment that "the belt locks intermittently" that this is the design intent and the belt is functioning properly. Web Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the extraction of webbing. When the webbing reels out at an accelerated rate, it goes into lock mode and stays there until tension is again released. To observe this condition, extract the webbing quickly. Customers may refer to this condition as "intermittent lock-up" and encounter it when trying to put the belt on too quickly. Automatic Locking (ALR) When the webbing is pulled all the way out, it automatically converts the retractor into a cinch-down mode (i.e. ALR). This is typically used to tightly secure a child seat to the vehicle. Some customers may experience inadvertent activation of ALR mode if they happen to pull the belt all the way out to the end of travel while they are putting the belt on. The ALR mode of operation is automatically cancelled when the belt is unfastened and stowed (the belt returns to normal sensitive function). Corvette only - This locking mechanism is also provided at the driver's position of the Corvette only, as a unique feature. Corvette customers may find this feature appealing when they plan to operate the vehicle in a "spirited" manner (such as driving in mountainous terrain). With the ALR active, the operator is snugly cinched into the seat and kept firmly in place during high G-force driving maneuvers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-09-40-002E > Oct > 10 > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 13801 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-09-40-003 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-003 Date: August 03, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard To Move Past Stitching And/Or Finish Knot Is Fraying (Trim Frayed Stitching) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse 2005-2006 Cadillac XLR 2005-2006 Chevrolet Colorado, Corvette, Equinox 2005-2006 GMC Canyon 2005-2006 Pontiac G6 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition 1 Some customers may comment that the seat belt buckle is hard to move down the belt past the park stitching. Condition 2 Some customers may comment that the seat belt park stitching finish knot is fraying. Cause 1 This stitching is meant to prevent the seat belt latch plate from contacting the door trim or the "B" pillar molding when passengers are not present and if the plate is left below the stitching, it may rattle. Cause 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-09-40-003 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move > Page 13806 The finish knot on the corner of the stitching is slightly larger than the stitching and may be frayed from the seat belt buckle passing over it as shown in the illustration above. Correction 1 Move the seat belt plate past the park stitching several times. This will help ease any difficulty the customer may encounter. Correction 2 Trim the frayed end of the stitching Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-09-40-002E > Oct > 10 > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-002E Date: October 21, 2010 Subject: Safety Belt Locking Conditions (Normal Operating Characteristic) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-09-40-002D (Section 09 - Restraints). The purpose of this bulletin is to explain when the safety belts are supposed to lock. There are several different locking situations for both front and rear safety belts. Overspool Lock There is an unintentional locking condition that ALL safety belts from ALL manufacturers may experience called "overspool lock". If the webbing snaps back to the stowed position rapidly enough, the retractor will lock with the belt fully stowed. This is more likely to occur when customers "help" the belt to retract. Without the weight of the latch plate and friction to slow the retractive speed of the webbing, the higher than normal webbing retraction speed that occurs engages the locking mechanism when a sudden stop occurs at the end of web travel. Since the webbing is now fully loaded on the spool, the retractor cannot rewind itself further to release the locking mechanism. When this happens, the occupant cannot extract the belt to wear it. DO NOT replace the retractor for this condition until first attempting to disengage the locking mechanism by following the recommendation listed below. Recommendation Pull hard on the locked webbing and then release. The hard pull extracts a small amount of webbing from the retractor which, in turn, permits a small amount of retraction to occur when released. This is all that is needed to disengage the locking mechanism. The safety belt will now function properly. Vehicle Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the vehicle under the following conditions: - The vehicle changes speed or direction abruptly (the vehicle goes into rapid acceleration OR rapid deceleration or there is aggressive cornering). - It can also occur in a static condition when a vehicle is parked on a large slant (fore-aft or side-to-side), such as streets in San Francisco, California. - It may also occur over rough road conditions where the retractor mechanism is bounced into a locked condition. In all of these conditions, as long as tension is maintained on the webbing, the belt will stay locked. When the tension is released, the belt retracts slightly, the lock bar disengages and the safety belt should return to normal function. Please inform customers that may comment that "the belt locks intermittently" that this is the design intent and the belt is functioning properly. Web Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the extraction of webbing. When the webbing reels out at an accelerated rate, it goes into lock mode and stays there until tension is again released. To observe this condition, extract the webbing quickly. Customers may refer to this condition as "intermittent lock-up" and encounter it when trying to put the belt on too quickly. Automatic Locking (ALR) When the webbing is pulled all the way out, it automatically converts the retractor into a cinch-down mode (i.e. ALR). This is typically used to tightly secure a child seat to the vehicle. Some customers may experience inadvertent activation of ALR mode if they happen to pull the belt all the way out to the end of travel while they are putting the belt on. The ALR mode of operation is automatically cancelled when the belt is unfastened and stowed (the belt returns to normal sensitive function). Corvette only - This locking mechanism is also provided at the driver's position of the Corvette only, as a unique feature. Corvette customers may find this feature appealing when they plan to operate the vehicle in a "spirited" manner (such as driving in mountainous terrain). With the ALR active, the operator is snugly cinched into the seat and kept firmly in place during high G-force driving maneuvers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-09-40-002E > Oct > 10 > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 13812 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Quick Connect) Seat Belt: Service and Repair Front (Quick Connect) SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT - FRONT (QUICK CONNECT) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a small flat-bladed tool, depress the button on the seat buckle quick disconnect feature while pulling up on the shoulder belt to disengage the shoulder belt from the front seat assembly. 2. Remove the lower garnish molding from the center pillar. 3. Remove the retractor fastener and remove the retractor. 4. Remove the shoulder belt webbing retainer by pulling on the retainer while using a flat-bladed tool to disengage the attaching clips. 5. Remove the shoulder belt from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Quick Connect) > Page 13815 1. Position the shoulder belt retractor into the center pillar positioning unit with the locking tab in the body structure notch. IMPORTANT: Apply Permatex(R) 24200 on all restraint fasteners prior to installation. 2. Install the retractor fastener. Tighten the fastener to 45 N.m (33 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Snap the shoulder belt webbing retainer into the center pillar. 4. Install the lower garnish molding into the center pillar. 5. Install the seat belt to the seat assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Quick Connect) > Page 13816 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Center Rear SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT - CENTER REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat assembly. 2. Remove the seat back cover. 3. Remove the comfort guide, if equipped. 4. Remove the seat back cover. 5. Feed the seat belt webbing, the bezel, and the anchor plate through the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Quick Connect) > Page 13817 6. Remove the retractor cover fasteners. 7. Remove the rear shoulder belt fasteners. 8. Pull upward on the retractor unit cover and remove the retractor from the rear seat back frame. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the retractor into the rear seat back frame and install the fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 45 N.m (33 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Apply Permatex(R) 24200 on all restraint fasteners prior to installation. 2. Position the retractor cover over the shoulder belt retractor and install the TORX(R) fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Quick Connect) > Page 13818 3. Route the webbing and the escutcheon through the seat back trim cover. IMPORTANT: Verify that the shoulder belt is not twisted. 4. Continue to install the seat back trim cover by pressing over the hook and loop locations to ensure proper engagement. 5. Install the seat belt webbing bezel. Tighten the rear seat belt center bezel screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 6. Install the seat back cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Quick Connect) > Page 13819 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Rear SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat assembly. 2. Remove the rear lower quarter trim. 3. Remove the rear wheel quarter trim panel by pulling at the attaching clip locations. 4. On the driver side, disconnect the auxiliary plug wire harness connection. 5. Remove the shoulder belt fastener at the floor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Quick Connect) > Page 13820 6. Remove the retractor fastener and remove the retractor. 7. Unsnap the upper fastener cover and remove the shoulder belt upper fastener. Remove the shoulder belt assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the retractor into the structure. Verify that the locking tabs are in place. Install the fastener. Tighten the fastener to 45 N.m (33 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Quick Connect) > Page 13821 IMPORTANT: Apply Permatex(R) 24200 on all restraint fasteners prior to installation. 2. Install the shoulder belt upper fastener. Tighten the fastener to 45 N.m (33 lb ft). 3. Snap the fastener cover closed. 4. Install the shoulder belt to the floor with the fastener. Tighten the fastener to 45 N.m (33 lb ft). IMPORTANT: Verify that the belt is not twisted during installation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Quick Connect) > Page 13822 5. On the driver side, connect the auxiliary plug connection. 6. Install the lower quarter trim. 7. Install the rear seat assembly. 8. Install the rear seat fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 9. Operate the shoulder belt to ensure proper installation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues Seat Belt Buckle: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-09-40-001A Date: February 02, 2011 Subject: Seat Belt Buckle Latching Issues and/or Seat Belt Warning Lights Illuminated Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7 X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-09-40-001 (Section 09 - Restraints). This bulletin is being published to advise dealers about seat belt buckles not operating and/or seat belt warning light illumination, as well as difficulty latching and unlatching the buckle or the buckle release button sticking. Analysis of warranty data has determined that this condition may be caused by sticky beverages being spilled onto or into the seat belt buckle assembly. Foreign debris from food, candy wrappers, paper and coins can also contribute to this condition. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise the customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. Important Never insert anything other than the seat belt latch plate into the buckle assembly. Do not attempt to dig anything out of a buckle with a tool. Never try to wash out a buckle to remove a spilled liquid as this may damage the buckle. Use the following steps to determine the cause of the concern. 1. Inspect the buckle assembly with a light shining on the latch plate insertion area. Look for any debris or foreign objects in the buckle. 2. If any debris or foreign objects are observed, try to vacuum out the item. After the foreign material is removed, latch and unlatch the seat belt. If the system functions properly, do not replace the seat belt buckle assembly. 3. If the condition has not been corrected, inspect the buckle assembly for any sticky residue. If sticky residue is found, inform the customer that a substance was spilled on the seat belt buckle assembly causing the malfunction. The buckle assembly will need to be replaced at the customer's expense. 4. Refer to SI for seat belt component replacement. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced at the customer's expense. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. 5. If further restraint diagnosis is required, refer to Seat Belt System Operational and Functional Checks in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues > Page 13831 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-09-40-003 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move Seat Belt Buckle: Customer Interest Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-003 Date: August 03, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard To Move Past Stitching And/Or Finish Knot Is Fraying (Trim Frayed Stitching) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse 2005-2006 Cadillac XLR 2005-2006 Chevrolet Colorado, Corvette, Equinox 2005-2006 GMC Canyon 2005-2006 Pontiac G6 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition 1 Some customers may comment that the seat belt buckle is hard to move down the belt past the park stitching. Condition 2 Some customers may comment that the seat belt park stitching finish knot is fraying. Cause 1 This stitching is meant to prevent the seat belt latch plate from contacting the door trim or the "B" pillar molding when passengers are not present and if the plate is left below the stitching, it may rattle. Cause 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-09-40-003 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move > Page 13836 The finish knot on the corner of the stitching is slightly larger than the stitching and may be frayed from the seat belt buckle passing over it as shown in the illustration above. Correction 1 Move the seat belt plate past the park stitching several times. This will help ease any difficulty the customer may encounter. Correction 2 Trim the frayed end of the stitching Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-09-40-001A Date: February 02, 2011 Subject: Seat Belt Buckle Latching Issues and/or Seat Belt Warning Lights Illuminated Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7 X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-09-40-001 (Section 09 - Restraints). This bulletin is being published to advise dealers about seat belt buckles not operating and/or seat belt warning light illumination, as well as difficulty latching and unlatching the buckle or the buckle release button sticking. Analysis of warranty data has determined that this condition may be caused by sticky beverages being spilled onto or into the seat belt buckle assembly. Foreign debris from food, candy wrappers, paper and coins can also contribute to this condition. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise the customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. Important Never insert anything other than the seat belt latch plate into the buckle assembly. Do not attempt to dig anything out of a buckle with a tool. Never try to wash out a buckle to remove a spilled liquid as this may damage the buckle. Use the following steps to determine the cause of the concern. 1. Inspect the buckle assembly with a light shining on the latch plate insertion area. Look for any debris or foreign objects in the buckle. 2. If any debris or foreign objects are observed, try to vacuum out the item. After the foreign material is removed, latch and unlatch the seat belt. If the system functions properly, do not replace the seat belt buckle assembly. 3. If the condition has not been corrected, inspect the buckle assembly for any sticky residue. If sticky residue is found, inform the customer that a substance was spilled on the seat belt buckle assembly causing the malfunction. The buckle assembly will need to be replaced at the customer's expense. 4. Refer to SI for seat belt component replacement. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced at the customer's expense. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. 5. If further restraint diagnosis is required, refer to Seat Belt System Operational and Functional Checks in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues > Page 13842 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-09-40-002A > Jun > 09 > Restraints - Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Availability Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Availability INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-09-40-002A Date: June 04, 2009 Subject: Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Available for Service Models: 2005-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2009-2010 HUMMER H3T .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-09-40-002 (Section 09 - Restraints). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. All seat belt retractor assemblies contain a stop button. If a stop button becomes damaged, the button can be replaced by ordering a replacement button through the GM Parts Catalog. The seat belt retractor assembly does not need replacement. Refer to the Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation procedure in SI for the complete installation procedure. Parts Information For part numbers, usage and availability of stop buttons, see Stop Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate Parts Catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration Catalog for the vehicle. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-09-40-003 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-003 Date: August 03, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard To Move Past Stitching And/Or Finish Knot Is Fraying (Trim Frayed Stitching) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse 2005-2006 Cadillac XLR 2005-2006 Chevrolet Colorado, Corvette, Equinox 2005-2006 GMC Canyon 2005-2006 Pontiac G6 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition 1 Some customers may comment that the seat belt buckle is hard to move down the belt past the park stitching. Condition 2 Some customers may comment that the seat belt park stitching finish knot is fraying. Cause 1 This stitching is meant to prevent the seat belt latch plate from contacting the door trim or the "B" pillar molding when passengers are not present and if the plate is left below the stitching, it may rattle. Cause 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-09-40-003 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move > Page 13851 The finish knot on the corner of the stitching is slightly larger than the stitching and may be frayed from the seat belt buckle passing over it as shown in the illustration above. Correction 1 Move the seat belt plate past the park stitching several times. This will help ease any difficulty the customer may encounter. Correction 2 Trim the frayed end of the stitching Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Wheel Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-013B Date: March 29, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle/Click/Ticking Type Noise Coming From Wheel Cover (Install Wheel Cover Insulators) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Buick Terraza with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2006 Chevrolet HHR with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Pontiac Montana SV6 with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Saturn Relay with 17 Inch Wheel Cover Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-013A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle/click/ticking type noise coming from the front or rear wheels. This condition is most apparent while driving at low speeds (0-24 km/h (0-15 mph)) and is relative to wheel rotation. Cause This condition may be caused by hard contact between the inner edge of the wheel cover and the outer edge of the steel rim. This contact occurs when the delrin ring comes out of its channel and separates from the wheel cover. In most cases, the delrin ring will be completely gone. Correction If the delrin ring is missing, install insulators on the backside of all four wheel covers. Use the following service procedure listed below. Remove the wheel covers. Clean the back side of each wheel cover using a mild liquid detergent in a distilled or deionized water solution. Rinse each wheel cover with clean water. Dry each wheel cover using compressed air or a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 13857 Saturn Relay Shown, others Similar After the wheel covers are completely dry, each wheel cover should be wiped with isopropyl alcohol on a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth and apply Adhesion Promoter, P/N 12378462, or equivalent, at the insulator locations. Insulator location is at the center of each spoke in the groove. Place two insulators at the location where a divider prevents one from going in the center. Refer to the illustrations above. Peel the red non-stick backing off of the insulator. Carefully place the insulator onto the wheel cover so that the area under the lip is resting against the corner of the inside edge of the wheel cover lip. This should place the insulator flush with the outside edge of the wheel cover. Press down firmly on the insulator to ensure that the adhesive is bonding to the wheel cover. Place another insulator in the next location by repeating Steps 5 through 7. There should be an insulator at each spoke location with two being placed at Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 13858 the above specified location. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 13864 Saturn Relay Shown, others Similar After the wheel covers are completely dry, each wheel cover should be wiped with isopropyl alcohol on a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth and apply Adhesion Promoter, P/N 12378462, or equivalent, at the insulator locations. Insulator location is at the center of each spoke in the groove. Place two insulators at the location where a divider prevents one from going in the center. Refer to the illustrations above. Peel the red non-stick backing off of the insulator. Carefully place the insulator onto the wheel cover so that the area under the lip is resting against the corner of the inside edge of the wheel cover lip. This should place the insulator flush with the outside edge of the wheel cover. Press down firmly on the insulator to ensure that the adhesive is bonding to the wheel cover. Place another insulator in the next location by repeating Steps 5 through 7. There should be an insulator at each spoke location with two being placed at Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 13865 the above specified location. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (quick Connect) Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Front (quick Connect) SEAT BELT BUCKLE REPLACEMENT - FRONT (QUICK CONNECT) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a small flat-bladed tool, depress the button on the seat buckle quick disconnect while pulling up on the shoulder belt to disengage the shoulder belt from the front seat. 2. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. 3. On the driver side, using a 90-degree pair of pliers, pull firmly on the recliner and riser handle cover to remove the handle cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (quick Connect) > Page 13868 4. On the passenger side, remove the recliner side cover fastener and remove the cover. 5. Remove the side trim fasteners and remove the side trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (quick Connect) > Page 13869 6. Remove the fastener and remove the shoulder belt quick disconnect. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the shoulder belt quick disconnect. Tighten the fasteners to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Apply Permatex(R) 24200 on all restraint fasteners prior to installation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (quick Connect) > Page 13870 2. Install the side trim with the fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. On the passenger side, install the recliner side cover with the fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (quick Connect) > Page 13871 4. On the driver side, install the recliner and seat riser covers by firmly pushing on the handle cover. 5. Install the front seat to the vehicle. 6. Install the shoulder belt into the shoulder belt quick disconnect. IMPORTANT: Verify that the shoulder belt is not twisted. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (quick Connect) > Page 13872 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Front (Side Mount) SEAT BELT BUCKLE REPLACEMENT - FRONT (SIDE MOUNT) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a small flat-bladed tool, depress the button on the seat buckle quick disconnect while pulling up on the shoulder belt to disengage the shoulder belt from the front seat. 2. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. 3. Remove the seat belt buckle fastener and remove the seat belt buckle. 4. On the driver side, remove the belt buckle wiring clip from the seat adjuster. Remove the seat belt buckle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the seat belt buckle and the fastener to the seat adjuster. Tighten the fasteners to 45 N.m (33 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Apply Permatex(R) 24200 on all restraint fasteners prior to installation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (quick Connect) > Page 13873 2. On the driver side, attach the seat belt wiring clip to the seat adjuster. 3. Install the front seat in the vehicle. 4. Snap the shoulder belt assembly into the front seat mini-belt buckle. IMPORTANT: Verify that the shoulder belt is not twisted. 5. Operate the front seat shoulder belt. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (quick Connect) > Page 13874 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Center Rear SEAT BELT BUCKLE REPLACEMENT - CENTER REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat assembly. 2. Remove the fastener from the seat belt center buckle. 3. Pull the buckle through the opening gin the seat cushion and remove the buckle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Route the buckle through the openings in the seat cushion. IMPORTANT: Apply Permatex(R) 24200 on all restraint fasteners prior to installation. 2. Install the seat belt buckle with the fastener. Tighten the fasteners to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the rear seat assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Component Views Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13878 Seat Belt Switch - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Extension > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Extender Availability For Seat Belt Seat Belt Extension: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Extender Availability For Seat Belt INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-09-40-005F Date: June 23, 2010 Subject: Seat Belt Extender Availability Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009‐2011 model years and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-09-40-005E (Section 09 Restraints). Important: DO NOT use belt extenders when securing a child restraint. The seat and shoulder belt restraint systems used in all General Motors vehicles have sufficient belt length to accommodate most drivers and passengers. Consequently, requests for belt extensions (extenders) should be minimal. Seat belt extenders are available ONLY IN BLACK for most GM passenger cars and trucks produced in recent years. They are available in two different lengths, 23 cm (9 in) and 38 cm (15 in). They are designed to be coupled with the existing belts in each vehicle. When in use, the extender makes the belt arrangement a "custom fit" and use by anyone else or in another vehicle will lessen or nullify the protection offered by the vehicle's restraint system. For this reason, it is extremely important that the correct length extender be used for the vehicle and occupant intended. Important: Do not use an extender just to make it easier to buckle the safety belt. Use an extender only when you cannot buckle the safety belt without using an extender. Parts Information For part numbers, usage and availability of extenders, see Extension Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate parts catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration catalog for the vehicle. U.S. Saab dealers should contact the Parts Help line. Canadian Saab dealers should fax requests to Partech Canada. Warranty Information ^ Seat belt extenders are a NO CHARGE item to all GM customers who request them for their specific vehicles. ^ Dealers should not be charging part costs since these extenders are supplied by GM to the dealers. ^ Dealers should not be charging labor costs since the extender can be customer installed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Guide Track > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Belt Guide Track: Service and Repair GUIDE REPLACEMENT - REAR SEAT SHOULDER BELT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Lower the rear seat assembly. 2. Remove the shoulder belt from the comfort guide. 3. Remove the comfort guide retainer and remove the comfort guide. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the comfort guide to the rear seat back with the retainer. 2. Install the comfort guide to the shoulder belt assembly. 3. Operate the rear seat shoulder belt assembly to verify proper installation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTER REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the center pillar upper garnish molding. 2. Remove the fasteners from the shoulder belt height adjuster. Remove the height adjuster. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the shoulder belt height adjuster with the fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 40 N.m (30 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Apply Permatex(R) 24200 on all restraint fasteners prior to installation. 2. Install the center pillar upper garnish molding. 3. Operate the shoulder belt to ensure proper installation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions Seat Belt Retractor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-002E Date: October 21, 2010 Subject: Safety Belt Locking Conditions (Normal Operating Characteristic) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-09-40-002D (Section 09 - Restraints). The purpose of this bulletin is to explain when the safety belts are supposed to lock. There are several different locking situations for both front and rear safety belts. Overspool Lock There is an unintentional locking condition that ALL safety belts from ALL manufacturers may experience called "overspool lock". If the webbing snaps back to the stowed position rapidly enough, the retractor will lock with the belt fully stowed. This is more likely to occur when customers "help" the belt to retract. Without the weight of the latch plate and friction to slow the retractive speed of the webbing, the higher than normal webbing retraction speed that occurs engages the locking mechanism when a sudden stop occurs at the end of web travel. Since the webbing is now fully loaded on the spool, the retractor cannot rewind itself further to release the locking mechanism. When this happens, the occupant cannot extract the belt to wear it. DO NOT replace the retractor for this condition until first attempting to disengage the locking mechanism by following the recommendation listed below. Recommendation Pull hard on the locked webbing and then release. The hard pull extracts a small amount of webbing from the retractor which, in turn, permits a small amount of retraction to occur when released. This is all that is needed to disengage the locking mechanism. The safety belt will now function properly. Vehicle Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the vehicle under the following conditions: - The vehicle changes speed or direction abruptly (the vehicle goes into rapid acceleration OR rapid deceleration or there is aggressive cornering). - It can also occur in a static condition when a vehicle is parked on a large slant (fore-aft or side-to-side), such as streets in San Francisco, California. - It may also occur over rough road conditions where the retractor mechanism is bounced into a locked condition. In all of these conditions, as long as tension is maintained on the webbing, the belt will stay locked. When the tension is released, the belt retracts slightly, the lock bar disengages and the safety belt should return to normal function. Please inform customers that may comment that "the belt locks intermittently" that this is the design intent and the belt is functioning properly. Web Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the extraction of webbing. When the webbing reels out at an accelerated rate, it goes into lock mode and stays there until tension is again released. To observe this condition, extract the webbing quickly. Customers may refer to this condition as "intermittent lock-up" and encounter it when trying to put the belt on too quickly. Automatic Locking (ALR) When the webbing is pulled all the way out, it automatically converts the retractor into a cinch-down mode (i.e. ALR). This is typically used to tightly secure a child seat to the vehicle. Some customers may experience inadvertent activation of ALR mode if they happen to pull the belt all the way out to the end of travel while they are putting the belt on. The ALR mode of operation is automatically cancelled when the belt is unfastened and stowed (the belt returns to normal sensitive function). Corvette only - This locking mechanism is also provided at the driver's position of the Corvette only, as a unique feature. Corvette customers may find this feature appealing when they plan to operate the vehicle in a "spirited" manner (such as driving in mountainous terrain). With the ALR active, the operator is snugly cinched into the seat and kept firmly in place during high G-force driving maneuvers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 13893 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 13894 Seat Belt Retractor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Availability INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-09-40-002A Date: June 04, 2009 Subject: Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Available for Service Models: 2005-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2009-2010 HUMMER H3T .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-09-40-002 (Section 09 - Restraints). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. All seat belt retractor assemblies contain a stop button. If a stop button becomes damaged, the button can be replaced by ordering a replacement button through the GM Parts Catalog. The seat belt retractor assembly does not need replacement. Refer to the Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation procedure in SI for the complete installation procedure. Parts Information For part numbers, usage and availability of stop buttons, see Stop Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate Parts Catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration Catalog for the vehicle. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Left Front Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Left Front SEAT BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER REPLACEMENT - LEFT FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2. 2. Remove the front bucket seat. 3. Remove the front seat belt anchor from the rear outboard stud. 4. Open the seat belt guide loop cover. 5. Remove the nut from seat belt guide loop. 6. Remove the seat belt guide loop from the guide adjuster bracket. 7. Remove the center pillar lower trim. 8. Remove the bolt from the seat belt retractor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Left Front > Page 13897 9. Remove the seat belt retractor from the center pillar. 10. Remove the front seat belt from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the seat belt retractor to the center pillar. 2. Install the bolt to the seat belt retractor. Tighten the bolt to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the center pillar lower trim. 4. Place the seat belt guide loop to the guide adjuster bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Left Front > Page 13898 5. Install the nut to the seat belt guide loop. Tighten the nut to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 6. Install the seat belt guide loop cover. 7. Place the seat belt anchor plate to the seat rear outboard stud. 8. Install the front bucket seat. 9. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Left Front > Page 13899 Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Right Front SEAT BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER REPLACEMENT - RIGHT FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. 2. Remove the front bucket seat. 3. Remove the front seat belt anchor from the rear outboard stud. 4. Open the seat belt guide loop cover. 5. Remove the nut from seat belt guide loop. 6. Remove the seat belt guide loop from the guide adjuster bracket. 7. Remove the center pillar lower trim. 8. Remove the bolt from the seat belt retractor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Left Front > Page 13900 9. Remove the seat belt retractor from the center pillar. 10. Remove the front seat belt from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the seat belt retractor to the center pillar. 2. Install the bolt to the seat belt retractor. Tighten the bolt to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the center pillar lower trim. 4. Place the seat belt guide loop to the guide adjuster bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Left Front > Page 13901 5. Install the nut to the seat belt guide loop. Tighten the nut to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 6. Install the seat belt guide loop cover. 7. Place the seat belt anchor plate to the seat rear outboard stud. 8. Install the front bucket seat. 9. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Seat Belt Pretensioner - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 13905 Seat Belt Pretensioner - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 13906 Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER The seat belt pretensioner modules contain a housing, a seat belt retractor, the seat belt webbing, an initiating device, and a canister of gas generating material. The initiator is part of the seat belt pretensioner deployment loop. When the vehicle is involved in a collision of sufficient force, the SDM will cause current to flow through the deployment loops to the initiator. Current passing through the initiator ignites the material in the canister producing a rapid generation of gas and the release of compressed gas, if present. The gas produced from this reaction deploys the seat belt pretensioner and retracts the seat belt webbing, which removes slack in the seat belt. Depending on the severity of the collision, the seat belt pretension may deploy without the frontal inflator modules deploying, or they will deploy immediately before the frontal inflator modules deploy. As soon as three distinct deployment commands (representing different events) have been issued to any belt pretensioner the SDM shall be considered to not be reusable. Each seat belt pretensioner is equipped with a shorting bar located on the connector of the pretensioner. The shorting bar shorts the seat belt pretensioner deployment loop circuitry to prevent unwanted deployment of the pretensioner when servicing the seat belt pretensioner. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pretensioner Handling and Scrapping Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Pretensioner Handling and Scrapping PRETENSIONER HANDLING AND SCRAPPING TOOLS REQUIRED - J 38826 SIR Deployment Harness - J 39401-B SIR Deployment Fixture - An appropriate pigtail adapter CAUTION: When carrying an undeployed inflatable restraint seat belt retractor pretensioner: Do not carry the seat belt pretensioner by the seat belt webbing or pigtail connector, if equipped. - Carry the seat belt pretensioner by the housing, keeping hands and fingers away from the seat belt webbing. - Make sure the opening, from which the seat belt webbing extends, faces downward and the seat belt webbing hangs freely. Failure to observe these guidelines may result in personal injury. SCRAPPING PROCEDURE During the course of a vehicles useful life, certain situations may arise which will require the disposal of a live and undeployed seat belt pretensioner. Do not dispose of a live and undeployed seat belt pretensioner through normal disposal channels until the seat belt pretensioner has been deployed. The following information covers the proper procedures for disposing of a live and undeployed seat belt pretensioner. Do not deploy the seat belt pretensioner in the following situations: After replacement of a seat belt pretensioner under warranty. The seat belt pretensioner may need to be returned undeployed to the manufacturer. - If the vehicle is the subject of a Product Liability report, GM1241, related to the SIR system or the seat belt system. If the vehicle is subject to the Product Liability report, do not alter the SIR or seat belt system in any manner. - If the vehicle is involved in a campaign affecting the seat belt pretensioners. Follow the instructions in the Campaign Service Bulletin for proper SIR handling procedures. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pretensioner Handling and Scrapping > Page 13909 Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Deployment Procedures DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES The seat belt pretensioner can be deployed inside or outside of the vehicle. The method used depends upon the final disposition of the vehicle. Review the deployment procedures in order to determine which will work best in a given situation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pretensioner Handling and Scrapping > Page 13910 Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Deployment Outside Vehicle For Seat Belt Pretensioners DEPLOYMENT OUTSIDE VEHICLE FOR SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Deploy the seat belt pretensioners outside of the vehicle when the vehicle will be returned to service. Situations that require deployment outside of the vehicle include the following: - Using the SIR diagnostics, it is determined that the seat belt pretensioner is malfunctioning. - The seat belt pretensioner pigtail, if equipped, is damaged. - The seat belt pretensioner connector is damaged. - The seat belt pretensioner connector terminals are damaged. Deployment and disposal of a malfunctioning seat belt pretensioner is subject to any required retention period. CAUTION: In order to prevent accidental deployment and the risk of personal injury, do not dispose of an undeployed inflatable restraint seat belt pretensioner as normal shop waste. Undeployed seat belt pretensioners contain substances that could cause severe illness or personal injury if their sealed containers are damaged during disposal. Use the following deployment procedures to safely dispose of an undeployed seat belt pretensioner. Failure to observe the following disposal methods may be a violation of federal, state, or local laws. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Remove the ignition key. 3. Put on safety glasses. 4. Remove the seat belt pretensioner from the vehicle. 5. When carrying a seat belt pretensioner to the deployment area, keep fingers clear of the seat belt webbing. 6. Clear a space on the ground about 1.85 m (6 ft) in diameter for deployment of the seat belt pretensioner. If possible, use a paved, outdoor location free of activity. Otherwise, use a space free of activity on the shop floor. Make sure you have sufficient ventilation. 7. Make sure no loose or flammable objects are in the area. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pretensioner Handling and Scrapping > Page 13911 8. Place the J 39401-B in the center of the cleared area. 9. Fill the fixture plastic reservoir with water or sand. 10. Mount the seat belt pretensioner in the SIR deployment fixture with the seat belt webbing exiting through the top of the pretensioner. Use the following mounting method. Adjust and secure two of the J 39401-B arms to the deployment fixture, with the short slotted portions of the arms standing vertically and facing toward the center of the deployment fixture. - To mount, use the proper size bolt and nut with washers in order to secure the seat belt pretensioner mounting hole between the two deployment fixture brackets. - Securely tighten all fasteners prior to deployment. 11. Inspect the J 38826 and the appropriate pigtail adapter for damage. Replace as needed. 12. Short the 2 SIR deployment harness (1) leads together using one banana plug seated into the other. 13. Connect the appropriate pigtail adapter (2) to the SIR deployment harness (1). 14. Extend the SIR deployment harness and adapter to full length from the deployment fixture. 15. Connect the seat belt pretensioner connector to the adapter on the deployment harness. 16. Clear the area of people. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pretensioner Handling and Scrapping > Page 13912 IMPORTANT: When deploying a seat belt pretensioner, the rapid expansion of gas is very loud. Notify the people in the immediate area that a seat belt pretensioner will be deployed. 17. Place a 12-volt minimum/2-amp minimum power source, such as a vehicle battery, near the shorted end of the harness. 18. Separate the 2 banana plugs on the SIR deployment harness. 19. Connect the SIR deployment harness wires to the power source. Seat belt pretensioner deployment will occur when contact is made. 20. Disconnect the SIR deployment harness from the power source after the seat belt pretensioner deploys. 21. Seat one banana plug into the other in order to short the deployment harness leads. 22. If the seat pretensioner did not deploy, disconnect the adapter and discontinue the procedure. Contact the Technical Assistance Group. Otherwise, proceed to the following steps. 23. Put on a pair of shop gloves. 24. Disconnect the pigtail adapter from the seat belt pretensioner as soon as possible. 25. Dispose of the deployed seat belt pretensioner through normal refuse channels. 26. Wash hands with a mild soap. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pretensioner Handling and Scrapping > Page 13913 Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Deployment Inside Vehicle (Vehicle Scrapping Procedure) DEPLOYMENT INSIDE VEHICLE (VEHICLE SCRAPPING PROCEDURE) Deploy the seat belt pretensioners inside of the vehicle when destroying the vehicle or when salvaging the vehicle for parts. This includes but is not limited to the following situations: - The vehicle has completed its useful life. - Irreparable damage occurs to the vehicle in a non-deployment type accident. - Irreparable damage occurs to the vehicle during a theft. - The vehicle is being salvaged for parts to be used on a vehicle with a different VIN as opposed to rebuilding as the same VIN. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Remove the ignition key. 3. Put on safety glasses. 4. Remove all loose objects from the front seats. 5. Disable the SIR System. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones. 6. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 7. Cut the seat belt pretensioner harness connector out of the vehicle, leaving at least 16 cm (6 in) of wire at the connector. 8. Strip 13 mm (0.5 in) of insulation from each of the connector wire leads. 9. Cut two 6.1 m (20 ft) deployment wires from a 0.8 mm (18 gage) or thicker multi-strand wire. These wires will be used for the seat belt pretensioner deployment harness. 10. Strip 13 mm (0.5 in) of insulation from both ends of the wires cut in the previous step. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pretensioner Handling and Scrapping > Page 13914 11. Twist together one end from each of the wires in order to short the wires. Deployment wires shall remain shorted, and not connected to a power source until you are ready to deploy the seat belt pretensioner. 12. Twist together one connector wire lead to one deployment wire. 13. Inspect that the previous connections is secure. 14. Bend flat the twisted connection. 15. Secure and insulate the connection using electrical tape. 16. Twist together, bend, and tape the remaining connector wire lead to the remaining deployment wire. 17. Connect the deployment harness to the seat belt pretensioner connector. 18. Route the deployment harness out of the driver side of the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pretensioner Handling and Scrapping > Page 13915 19. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 20. Cut the seat belt pretensioner connector out of the vehicle, leaving at least 16 cm (6 in) of wire at the connector. 21. Strip 13 mm (0.5 in) of insulation from each of the connector wire leads. 22. Cut two 6.1 m (20 ft) deployment wires from a 0.8 mm (18 gage) or thicker multi-strand wire. These wires will be used for the seat belt pretensioner deployment harness. 23. Strip 13 mm (0.5 in) of insulation from both ends of the wires cut in the previous step. 24. Twist together one end from each of the wires in order to short the wires. The deployment wires are to remain shorted, and not connected to a power source until you are ready to deploy the seat belt pretensioner. 25. Twist together one connector wire lead to one deployment wire. 26. Inspect that the previous connection is secure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pretensioner Handling and Scrapping > Page 13916 27. Bend flat the twisted connection. 28. Secure and insulate the connection using electrical tape. 29. Twist together, bend, and tape the remaining connector wire lead to the remaining deployment wire. 30. Connect the deployment harness to the seat belt pretensioner connector. 31. Route the deployment harness out of the passengers side of the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pretensioner Handling and Scrapping > Page 13917 32. Completely cover the windshield and the front door openings with a drop cloth. 33. Stretch out all of the deployment harness wires on the passenger side of the vehicle to their full length. 34. Deploy each deployment loop one at a time. 35. Place a power source, 12-volt minimum/2-amp minimum, such as a vehicle battery, near the shorted end of the harnesses. 36. Separate one set of wires and touch the wire ends to the power source in order to deploy the seat belt pretensioners. 37. Disconnect the deployment harness from the power source and twist the wire ends together. 38. Continue the same process with the remaining deployment harnesses that are available. 39. Stretch out all the deployment harness wires on the driver side of the vehicle to their full length. 40. Place a power source, 12-volt minimum/2-amp minimum, such as a vehicle battery, near the shorted end of harness. 41. Separate one set of wires and touch the wire ends to the power source in order to deploy the seat belt pretensioner. 42. Remove the drop cloth from the vehicle. 43. Disconnect all harnesses from the vehicle. 44. Discard the harnesses. 45. Scrap the vehicle in the same manner as a non - Restraint Systems equipped vehicle. 46. If one or more of the seat belt pretensioners did not deploy, perform the following steps to remove the undeployed seat belt pretensioner from the vehicle, refer to Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner Replacement - Left Front or Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner Replacement - Right Front. 47. Call the Technical Assistance Group for further assistance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Impact Sensor: Diagrams Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) - Left (ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) > Page 13924 Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) - Right (ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) > Page 13925 Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front End Sensor Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Front End Sensor INFLATABLE RESTRAINT FRONT END SENSOR The front end sensor, also known as the electronic frontal sensor (EFS), is equipped on vehicles to supplement the SIR system performance. The EFS is an electronic sensor and is not part of the deployment loops, but instead provides an input to the SDM. The EFS can assist in determining the severity of some frontal collisions. The SDM contains a microprocessor which performs calculations using the measured accelerations and compares these calculations to a value stored in memory. When the generated calculations exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the frontal deployment loops deploying the frontal air bags. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front End Sensor > Page 13928 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Side Impact Sensor (SIS) INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (SIS) The side impact sensor (SIS) contains a sensing device which monitors vehicle acceleration and velocity changes to detect side collisions that are severe enough to warrant air bag deployment. The SIS is not part of the deployment loop, but instead provides an input to the SDM. The SDM contains a microprocessor that performs calculations using the measured accelerations and compares these calculations to a value stored in memory. When the generated calculations exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the deployment loops deploying the side air bags. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor Replacement Caution: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint front end sensor. Before applying power to the front end sensor make sure that it is securely fastened. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. Preliminary Procedure: Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. 1. Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Front End Discriminating Sensor Bolt. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. Tip: Loosen the TORX head bolt in order to remove sensor. The bolt has left hand threads. Tighten 8 N.m (71 lb in) 2. Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Front End Discriminating Sensor Assembly. Procedure: 1. Slide the sensor towards the front of vehicle to guide the sensor bolt out of release slot. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 13931 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 or to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. CAUTION: When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must be disabled. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR components, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. - Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint side impact sensor (SIS). Before applying power to the SIS make sure that it is securely fastened. Failure to observe the correct installation procedures could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. 2. Remove the center pillar lower molding. 3. Loosen the fasteners on the side impact sensor (SIS). 4. Remove the SIS by sliding the module up and out of the key slots in the sheet metal. 5. Disconnect the SIS electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other contaminants from the mounting surface. 2. Connect the SIS electrical connector and insert into the connector position assurance (CPA) to secure. 3. Place the SIS through the access hole in the lock pillar. 4. Slide the module down and locate the captured fastener in the key slots of the lock pillar. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 13932 Tighten the fastener to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the center pillar lower molding. 6. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 or to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Component Views Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13936 Seat Belt Switch - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing System Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly, sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or between the occupant and the seat fabric. Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE NECESSARY BY SUCH USE. Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers. Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the passenger air bag. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna Mast > Component Information > Service and Repair Antenna Mast: Service and Repair FIXED ANTENNA MAST REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE Turn the antenna mast counterclockwise to remove the mast. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Install the antenna mast. Turn the mast clockwise to tighten. Tighten the mast to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Global Positioning System Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair Global Positioning System Antenna: Service and Repair ANTENNA ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT - CELLULAR AND NAVIGATION REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the windshield garnish molding. 2. Remove the sunshade from the headliner. 3. Remove the door edge molding from the door opening. 4. Lower the front corner of the headliner. Refer to Headliner Replacement in Interior Trim. 5. Disconnect the wire harness from the roof antenna. 6. Remove the antenna nut. 7. Remove the antenna from the roof. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Attach the antenna base to the roof and fasten the antenna nut. Tighten the nut to 2 N.m (18 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the antenna. 3. Push the headliner back into place. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door in Interior Trim. 4. Attach the sunshade to the headliner. Refer to Sunshade Replacement in Interior Trim. 5. Attach the windshield garnish molding. Refer to Windshield Upper Garnish Molding Replacement in Interior Trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable Replacement Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Antenna Cable Replacement ANTENNA CABLE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel center trim plate. 2. Disconnect the extension cable from the radio. 3. Disconnect the extension cable from the antenna. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the extension cable to the antenna. 2. Connect the extension cable to the radio. 3. Install the instrument panel center trim plate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable Replacement > Page 13954 Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Coaxial Cable Replacement - Digital Radio COAXIAL CABLE REPLACEMENT - DIGITAL RADIO REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel center trim plate. 2. Disconnect the cable from the radio. 3. Disconnect the digital radio cable from the antenna. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the digital radio cable to the antenna. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable Replacement > Page 13955 2. Connect the cable to the radio. 3. Install the instrument panel center trim plate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Alarm Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13961 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13962 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13963 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13964 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13965 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13966 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13967 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13968 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13969 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13970 Alarm Module: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13971 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13972 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13973 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13974 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13975 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13976 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13977 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13978 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13979 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13980 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13981 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13982 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13983 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13984 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13985 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13986 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13987 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13988 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13989 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13990 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13991 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13992 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13993 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13994 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13995 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13996 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13997 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13998 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13999 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14000 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14001 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14002 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14003 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14004 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14005 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14006 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14007 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14008 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14009 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14010 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14011 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14012 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14013 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14014 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14015 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14016 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14017 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14018 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14019 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14020 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14021 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14022 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14023 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14024 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14025 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14026 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14027 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14028 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14029 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14030 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14031 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14032 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14033 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics Keyless Starting System: Technical Service Bulletins Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-52-002 Date: February 27, 2008 Subject: Diagnostic Information for Inoperative Remote Vehicle Start Models: 2005-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2008 HUMMER H2 with Remote Keyless Entry RPOs AP3 or AP8 Remote Vehicle Start (RVS) Inoperative Diagnostic Concerns Information on Hood Latch Switches One of the many components involved in the Remote Vehicle Starting System is the Hood Latch Switch. The state of this switch is checked by the BCM during a remote vehicle start request and the component must function properly in order for the vehicle to commence a remote start event. During the infancy of this option (RPO AP3/AP8) parts return analysis showed a significantly shorter than expected component life for the Hood Latch Switch shared across many different GM vehicles. The switches currently being factory installed, and sent as service replacement parts, are vastly improved in design and suitably robust. Most hood latch switches currently returned under warranty are analyzed and determined to have no trouble found (NTF). It is understandable and desirable that technicians gain familiarity with the vehicles they service on a daily basis, however it is required that technicians follow Strategy Based Diagnostics before replacing this switch. Important: The ONLY way to repair or replace a hood latch switch is to replace the LATCH ASSEMBLY. The switch CANNOT be serviced separately from the latch and is NOT AVAILABLE from GMSPO. Any effort to remove the switch from the latch will permanently damage the switch and void the warranty coverage of that part. Important: The hood switch provides status of the hood to the BCM for RVS purposes. The switch is integrated into the hood latch assembly. The hood ajar switch provides two separate inputs to the BCM. These separate inputs allow the BCM to actively monitor for a hood ajar switch fault. RVS System Operation The remote vehicle start (RVS) function allows engine starting while not in the vehicle. It also allows the vehicle HVAC system and other vehicle systems to enable providing a comfortable vehicle upon entry. RVS functions have an operating range of up to 59 m (195 ft) depending on conditions. The RVS sequence begins by pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and holding the RVS buttons on the keyless entry transmitter. The turn signal lamps will illuminate to indicate the vehicle has received the remote start request. Each time an RVS is performed the vehicle doors are locked; however they may then be unlocked/locked with the transmitter or vehicle key at any time. Once activated the engine is allowed to run for 10 minutes. The RVS time may be extended by an additional 10 minutes by again pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and holding the RVS buttons on the transmitter. This feature is called an RVS continue and allows a maximum of 20 minutes of engine running. If the RVS continue is performed at 7 minutes into the initial 10 minute time-out a total of 17 minutes of engine running would occur. The RVS event may be suspended at any time by pressing only the RVS button on the transmitter or by entering the vehicle and turning ON the hazard lamps. RVS System Description Remote vehicle start (RVS) begins as a Radio Frequency (RF) message received by the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) from a keyless entry transmitter. The RVS request is sent by the RCDLR to the body control module (BCM) via serial data line. The BCM monitors system conditions such as content theft deterrent (CTD) closures ajar status and body DTCs to determine if an RVS event will occur. If conditions are determined to be acceptable the RVS message is sent to the engine control module (ECM). The ECM monitors system conditions such as engine control parameters and vehicle theft deterrent (VTD) to determine if engine starting will be allowed. If conditions are acceptable the ECM will initiate engine starting. During Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics > Page 14039 the engine run time in an RVS attempt before the operator enters the vehicle the ECM may discontinue engine operation if system conditions require it or a message is received from the BCM requesting the engine be turned OFF. Reasons an RVS event will NOT Happen The RVS System WILL NOT operate if any of the following conditions are present: ^ A current vehicle DTC that illuminates the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is set - obtain vehicle DTCs. ^ Keyless Entry Transmitter is not Operational. ^ The vehicle is in Valet Mode. ^ RVS is Disabled through Vehicle Personalization. ^ More than 2 Remote Starts have been attempted. ^ The HAZARD switch is in the ON position. ^ A current HAZARD switch DTC is set. ^ A current HOOD AJAR DTC is set. ^ Rear compartment lid is ajar. ^ Any Door is not locked. ^ The Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) system detects an alarm trigger. ^ Engine RPM greater than 0 Detected. ^ Excessive Coolant TEMP is registered. ^ Accelerator pedal position greater than 0 percent. ^ Vehicle is not in PARK. ^ A current Vehicle Theft Deterrent Malfunction DTC. ^ A current Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System DTC is set. ^ A vehicle speed sensor signal is detected by the ECM. ^ Vehicle power mode is incorrect. Diagnostic Information Starting Point For additional assistance refer to Remote Vehicle Start Inoperative in the Electronic Service Information. This section will guide you through the complete Strategy Based Diagnostics and provide Specific Diagnostic Procedure Instructions. Warranty Information Please refer to the published Labor Time Guides and claim the corresponding labor operation for the component(s) replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery > Component Information > Service and Repair Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Service and Repair TRANSMITTER BATTERY REPLACEMENT NOTE: - Use of the wrong battery size may damage the transmitter. - When removing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter. IMPORTANT: If the transmitter won't work, perform the RKE System Check before replacing the battery. Also, before replacing the battery in the transmitter, make sure that the battery is touching both the negative and positive contacts inside of the transmitter. For battery replacement, use a Panasonic type CR2032 3-volt battery, or equivalent. 1. Use a small coin, or flat-head screwdriver, to separate the bottom of the transmitter from the top. 2. Remove the circuit board from the transmitter housing and key pad by pressing on the LOCK button. NOTE: Do not use sharp objects to help slide the battery out of the clip. This may result in damage to the circuit board. 3. Remove the battery by sliding the battery out of the battery clip. This may require a push from the back side of the clip. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 14044 4. Replace the battery with the new one making sure that the (+) side of the battery faces away from the circuit board. 5. Reassemble the circuit board and key pad, and replace them in the transmitter housing which does not contain the key pad openings. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to pinch the key pad while closing the housing. 6. Line up and replace the lower housing by snapping the upper and lower housings together. 7. Test the operation of the transmitter with the vehicle by pressing and holding the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons for 7 or more seconds. This is required to reestablish communications with the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P, Steering Column Connections Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14048 Passlock Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Diagrams Cellular Telephone Microphone Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 14053 Cellular Phone Microphone: Service and Repair ONSTAR MICROPHONE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a small, flat-bladed tool, pry at the forward edge of the reading lamp cover to disengage the forward clips. Slide the cover forward to disengage the rearward hooks. 2. Disconnect the OnStar(R) microphone harness. 3. Depress the microphone snap tabs. 4. Push on the rear face of the microphone to remove the microphone from the cover. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the OnStar(R) microphone in the cover. 2. Install the microphone by snapping into place. 3. Connect the wiring harness. 4. Snap the cover to engage the snap tabs. 5. Slide the cover rearward to engage the rear hooks. 6. Snap the reading lamp cover into place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 14062 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 14067 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 14072 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 14073 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 14079 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-008C Date: September 18, 2008 Subject: Information on OnStar(R) Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Systems Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to correct the model year range for the Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo and update the reference to GM Dealerworld. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). All 2000-2003 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar® from the list above were built with Analog/Digital-Ready OnStar(R) Hardware. Some of these vehicles may have been upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital). Certain 2004-2005 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) from the list above may have been either: ^ Originally built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware OR ^ Upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Hardware All 2006 model year and newer vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) were built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware. If a vehicle has Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware, then the system is capable of operating on both the analog and digital cellular Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information > Page 14088 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 14101 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 14106 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 14107 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-009B Date: June 29, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Language Change for OnStar(R) System (U.S. and Canada Only) Models: 2006-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2006-2008 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Built After and Including VIN Breakpoints Listed Below (2006 MY Only) Attention: This bulletin only applies to vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) Generation 6.1 or later with a Station Identification (STID) Number in the following range: 16,000,000-17,000,000 or 20,000,000-21,999,999 or 23,500,001-26,000,000 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the service procedure and add a Canadian procedure. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Numbers 05-08-46-009A and 05-08-46-008A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14112 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14113 Built After and Including the VIN Breakpoints shown. The Generation (Gen) 6.1 OnStar(R) system found in these vehicles has the capability to change the default English voice recognition to French or Spanish. Changing the language of the OnStar(R) system will change the following features to the language you select: Voice recognition command prompts will be played in the language selected. The voice recognition system will only recognize commands given in the selected language. Once completed, this process completely changes all voice recognition and voice commands of the OnStar(R) system. The process will need to be repeated in its entirety to change to a different language, including English. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14114 Method 1 Method 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14115 Method 3 The Gen 6.1 version of OnStar(R) does not require the use of the Service Programming System (SPS) to change the voice recognition system. However, there are three ways to change the language. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-008C Date: September 18, 2008 Subject: Information on OnStar(R) Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Systems Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to correct the model year range for the Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo and update the reference to GM Dealerworld. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). All 2000-2003 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar® from the list above were built with Analog/Digital-Ready OnStar(R) Hardware. Some of these vehicles may have been upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital). Certain 2004-2005 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) from the list above may have been either: ^ Originally built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware OR ^ Upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Hardware All 2006 model year and newer vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) were built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware. If a vehicle has Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware, then the system is capable of operating on both the analog and digital cellular Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information > Page 14125 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-009B Date: June 29, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Language Change for OnStar(R) System (U.S. and Canada Only) Models: 2006-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2006-2008 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Built After and Including VIN Breakpoints Listed Below (2006 MY Only) Attention: This bulletin only applies to vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) Generation 6.1 or later with a Station Identification (STID) Number in the following range: 16,000,000-17,000,000 or 20,000,000-21,999,999 or 23,500,001-26,000,000 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the service procedure and add a Canadian procedure. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Numbers 05-08-46-009A and 05-08-46-008A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14138 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14139 Built After and Including the VIN Breakpoints shown. The Generation (Gen) 6.1 OnStar(R) system found in these vehicles has the capability to change the default English voice recognition to French or Spanish. Changing the language of the OnStar(R) system will change the following features to the language you select: Voice recognition command prompts will be played in the language selected. The voice recognition system will only recognize commands given in the selected language. Once completed, this process completely changes all voice recognition and voice commands of the OnStar(R) system. The process will need to be repeated in its entirety to change to a different language, including English. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14140 Method 1 Method 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14141 Method 3 The Gen 6.1 version of OnStar(R) does not require the use of the Service Programming System (SPS) to change the voice recognition system. However, there are three ways to change the language. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Headphones / Earphones > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Entertainment System - Headphone Foam Pad Replacement Headphones / Earphones: Technical Service Bulletins Entertainment System - Headphone Foam Pad Replacement Bulletin No.: 05-08-44-005A Date: July 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Rear Seat Headphone Foam Ear Pad Replacement if Worn or Damaged Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with Rear Seat Entertainment System (RPOs U32, U42) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years and update the shipping costs. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-44-005 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Foam ear pads on the rear headphone may become worn or damaged. The headphone foam ear pads may wear out when not handled and stored carefully. If the headphone foam ear pads become damaged or worn out, the foam pads can be replaced separately from the headphone set. It is not necessary to replace the complete headphone set. Parts Information All pricing information listed in this bulletin is in U.S. dollars and is subject to change without notice. The headphone replacement foam ear pads can be ordered in pairs directly through the supplier. Have your customer call Unwired at 1-888-293-3332, then prompt zero (0). The replacement, P/N CS-980 (thick earfoam), can be ordered for $3.50 (USD) per pair plus $2.50 USPS shipping. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair Global Positioning System Antenna: Service and Repair ANTENNA ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT - CELLULAR AND NAVIGATION REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the windshield garnish molding. 2. Remove the sunshade from the headliner. 3. Remove the door edge molding from the door opening. 4. Lower the front corner of the headliner. Refer to Headliner Replacement in Interior Trim. 5. Disconnect the wire harness from the roof antenna. 6. Remove the antenna nut. 7. Remove the antenna from the roof. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Attach the antenna base to the roof and fasten the antenna nut. Tighten the nut to 2 N.m (18 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the antenna. 3. Push the headliner back into place. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door in Interior Trim. 4. Attach the sunshade to the headliner. Refer to Sunshade Replacement in Interior Trim. 5. Attach the windshield garnish molding. Refer to Windshield Upper Garnish Molding Replacement in Interior Trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations VCIM Location Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 14154 Global Positioning System Module: Diagrams Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 14155 Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) C2 Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 14156 Global Positioning System Module: Service and Repair COMMUNICATION INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fastener located on the bottom of the OnStar(R) bracket. IMPORTANT: The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) has a specific set of unique numbers that tie the module to each vehicle. These numbers, the 10-digit station identification and the 11-digit electronic serial number, are used by the National Cellular Network and OnStar(R) to identify the specific vehicle. Because these numbers are tied to the vehicle identification number of the vehicle, you must never exchange these parts with those of another vehicle. 2. Tilt the module inboard to the center of the vehicle and pull down the communication interface module (CIM) 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors, the GPS antenna, and the cellular coax cable. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. If replacing the VCIM, record the 10-digit STID number, and the 11-digit ESN number from the labels on the new module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 14157 2. Connect the electrical connectors, the GPS antenna, and the cellular coax cable. 3. Tilt the CIM inboard and install the CIM. 4. Install the CIM fastener. Tighten the fastener to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Reconfigure the OnStar(R) system. Refer to OnStar Reconfiguration. IMPORTANT: After replacing the vehicle communication interface module, you must reconfigure the OnStar(R) system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. In addition, pressing and holding the white dot button on the keypad will NOT reset this version of the OnStar(R) system. This action will cause a DTC to set. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Description and Operation > Personalization Memory Positioning Systems: Description and Operation Personalization PERSONALIZATION DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Personalization features may be set for the vehicle or the driver. Vehicle features do not change with each driver. For more information on vehicle personalization features for this vehicle, refer to Vehicle Personalization. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Description and Operation > Personalization > Page 14162 Memory Positioning Systems: Description and Operation Vehicle Personalization VEHICLE PERSONALIZATION PROGRAMMING FEATURES WITH TECH 2 Enter Programming To enter Programming with the Tech 2, perform the following actions: 1. Install the scan tool. 2. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 3. Select the correct vehicle and model year. 4. Select F1: Body Control Module 5. Select F2: Special Functions 6. Select F2: Personalization SETTING OPTIONS Select an option with the UP/DOWN ARROW keys. The selected option will be highlighted. Use the SIDE TO SIDE ARROW keys to activate or deactivate the highlighted options, an ASTERISK will be displayed when an option has been ACTIVATED. Use the SOFT keys to save the selected options or use the EXIT key to leave the options unchanged. After all options have been selected press the SOFT key to continue. The following is a list of the selectable options: F0: Pre-alarm Option - F1: CTD Operation - F2: Door Lock Operation - F3: Fob Feedback - F4: Afterblow Option Pre-alarm Option Refer to Theft Systems Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent for information. CTD Operation Refer to Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent for information. Door Lock Operation Automatic Door Lock and Automatic Door Unlock can be configured with the Tech 2. Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors for more information. Fob Feedback Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry for information. Afterblow Option Refer to SIR Syste Description and Operation in Restraint Systems for information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 10037 Date: 100420 Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) CUSTOMER SATISFACTION Bulletin No.: 10037 Date: April 20, 2010 Subject: 10037 - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) Models: 2003 Buick LeSabre 2004-2006 Buick Rendezvous 2005 Buick LeSabre, Terraza 2005-2006 Buick LaCrosse/Allure 2006-2008 Buick Lucerne 2008 Buick LaCrosse/Allure 2008-2009 Buick Enclave 2003 Cadillac CTS 2004 Cadillac Escalade 2004-2005 Cadillac CTS-V, Deville 2005 Cadillac Escalade ESV, SRX 2005-2006 Cadillac STS 2005-2008 Cadillac CTS 2006-2008 Cadillac DTS 2007 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade EXT 2007-2008 Cadillac Escalade ESV 2008 Cadillac SRX, STS 2002 Chevrolet Impala 2003-2008 Chevrolet Suburban 2003-2009 Chevrolet Silverado 2004-2008 Chevrolet Impala 2005 Chevrolet Colorado, Corvette, Malibu 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander 2005-2008 Chevrolet Avalanche, Tahoe, TrailBlazer 2006 Chevrolet HHR, Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 Chevrolet Corvette 2008 Chevrolet HHR 2008-2009 Chevrolet Cobalt, Colorado, Malibu, Uplander 2003 GMC Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon XL 2004-2008 GMC Yukon 2005-2009 GMC Sierra 2005-2008 GMC Yukon XL 2006-2008 GMC Envoy 2007 GMC Canyon 2007-2009 GMC Acadia 2006 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2008 HUMMER H2 2003 Oldsmobile Silhouette 2005 Montana SV6 2005-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006 Pontiac G6, Vibe 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 2007-2008 Pontiac Solstice 2008 Pontiac G6, Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G5, G8 2009 Pontiac G3, Montana SV6 2005-2007 Saturn ION 2006-2009Saturn VUE 2007-2008 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK, SKY Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 14171 THIS PROGRAM IS IN EFFECT UNTIL APRIL 30, 2011. Condition Certain 2002-2009 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may have a condition in which the vehicle's OnStar(R) system repeatedly makes incomplete calls to OnStar(R) without the vehicle's occupant(s) input or knowledge. Customer initiated Blue Button call, Emergency calls, and Automatic Crash Notification calls will also fail to establish a data connection with the OnStar(R) Call Center. Eventually, the customer's call will connect as a voice only line and the customer will be able to talk with an OnStar(R) advisor; however, the advisor will not get crucial customer data such as vehicle identification and location. Correction Dealers/retailers are to replace the OnStar(R) module (VCIM). Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2002-2009 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R), and built within these VIN breakpoints: Note: Some model years/models have only one vehicle involved. Important Dealers/retailers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers/retailers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers/retailers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers/retailers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to dealers/retailers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports. Dealers/retailers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this program is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this program. Parts Information US: OnStar(R) modules required for this program are to be obtained by contacting Autocraft Electronics via the web at www.autocraft.com, and selecting the catalog item that contains bulletin number 10037 (or PIC 4893B), or by calling 1-800-336-3998. Dealer must provide the VIN, R.O. number, and the current vehicle mileage. Canada: OnStar(R) modules required for this program are to be obtained by contacting MASS Electronics at 1-877-410-6277. Dealer must provide the VIN, R.O. number, and the current vehicle mileage. DO NOT ORDER ONSTAR(R) MODULES FROM GENERAL MOTORS CUSTOMER CARE AND AFTERSALES (GMCC&A;), SATURN SERVICE PARTS OPERATION (SSPO), OR THE TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE CENTER (TAC). Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers/retailers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table below. 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers/retailers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers/retailers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 14172 * Dealers using WINs: Add 0.2 hours to the labor time for administrative allowance for the module exchange. Dealers using GWM: Submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under "Administration Time" for the module exchange. ** The $25 represents the additional net amount allowed for the module exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the module is replaced by Masscomp's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit the 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealer using GWM should submit the 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Customer Notification OnStar will notify customers of this program on their vehicle. Dealer Program Responsibility All unsold new vehicles in dealers'/retailers' possession and subject to this program must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this program bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers/retailers are to service all vehicles subject to this program at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, through April 30, 2011. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer/retailer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer/retailer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Program follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 14173 In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this program enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership/facility for service through April 30, 2011, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the program correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure Note Do NOT replace the inside rear view mirror in tandem with this concern. The mirror has no bearing on this specific issue. 1. Remove the OnStar(R) module (referred to as the Communication Interface Module (CIM) or Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in SI). Refer to SI for module removal instructions. Note Inform customer that all Bluetooth devices must be paired with the new VCIM. Bluetooth devices that have not been paired to the new VCIM will not function properly. 2. Install the new OnStar(R) module (referred to as the Communication Interface Module (CIM) or Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in SI). Refer to SI for module installation instructions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Navigation System: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 14179 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Navigation System: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 14184 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 14190 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10-08-44-006 > Oct > 10 > Navigation - Report Missing/Inaccurate Nav. Map Info Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation - Report Missing/Inaccurate Nav. Map Info INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-44-006 Date: October 11, 2010 Subject: Reporting Missing or Inaccurate Navigation Radio Map Disc Information - Complete and Submit Feedback Form at GM Navigation Disc Center Website Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Navigation Radio Some customers may notice that some navigation radio map discs may have missing or incorrect information. The following list contains some examples: - Missing or incorrect roads, road names or road shapes - Missing or incorrect addresses - Missing or incorrect highway labeling - Missing or incorrect highway exit numbers - Missing or incorrect traffic restrictions - Missing points of interest (POI) or incorrect details, such as location, category or phone number General Motors uses a map database from two different suppliers. The two map suppliers are consistently updating their map database and will gladly accept any input regarding missing or incorrect information on the navigation radio map disc. To report any missing or incorrect information, please access the GM Navigation Disc Center at the following web site: http://www.gmnavdisc.com. At the GM Navigation Disc Center home page, select the tab: Your Feedback. In the Navigation Data Feedback form, fill in the appropriate information as required and then select: Submit, to send the form. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-44-012E > Apr > 10 > Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-44-012E Date: April 20, 2010 Subject: DVD Navigation Update Program, Navigation Disc Diagnostic Aid, AVN Software Update Discs and Ordering Information Models: 2002-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2004-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Attention: Please direct this information to your Sales Consultants, Service Consultants, Parts Personnel and Used Car Department. This bulletin ONLY applies to North American dealers/retailers. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2010 model year and update the usage table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-44-012D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). DVD Navigation Update Program The data on the DVD map disc ages at a rate of 15-20% per year. As the data ages, the functionality of the navigation system declines. Offering GM customers new navigation DVDs will ensure that the customers have the latest information for their system. General Motors offered a Navigation Disc Update Program for 2006 and 2007 model year vehicles. This program concluded on December 31, 2009. The DVD Navigation Update Program policy has changed and customers are no longer eligible for free annual updates, however, a navigation DVD update disc can be purchased for $199 (USD) + shipping. If the navigation disc is needed for a warranty situation, the disc can be purchased for $120 (USD). The dealer must provide a VIN and RO# to qualify for the reduced price. The dealer must call the GM Navigation Disc Center, as this option is not available on the website. The GM Navigation Disc Center launched on March 15, 2006. There are two ways to obtain an updated disc: - Via the web through gmnavdisc.com - GM Navigation Disc Center Navigation Disc Diagnostic Aid The following table can be used to identify acceptable discs for testing the navigation unit's map drive functionality. This should only be used to verify the map drive's ability to read the map disc properly and to determine if there is an issue with the unit's map drive or the disc. Some functions, such as voice recognition, may not work properly with some of the discs in the list. If the disc is found to be defective always contact the GM Navigation Disc Center to obtain the most recent disc for the vehicle. AVN Software Update Discs Technical Service Bulletins are sometimes generated to address specific navigation radio operational or performance issues. When a navigation radio bulletin is issued, it may contain instructions to utilize an advanced vehicle navigation (AVN) software update with a specific part number. GM dealers must order advanced vehicle navigation (AVN) software update discs as directed in the specific bulletin. AVN software update discs are for the dealer to update the navigation radio software only. They do NOT update or replace the navigation map disc that is supplied with the vehicle. Please order these parts only as needed. There is a limited supply of these discs available. Do not order these discs for stock. AVN software update discs can be used to reprogram more than one vehicle. The first update disc for each P/N is free. Subsequent copies of the same P/N for the same dealer will cost $50 (USD). To obtain an AVN software update disc, follow the specific ordering information provided in the bulletin. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-44-012E > Apr > 10 > Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program > Page 14199 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 10037 Date: 100420 Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) CUSTOMER SATISFACTION Bulletin No.: 10037 Date: April 20, 2010 Subject: 10037 - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) Models: 2003 Buick LeSabre 2004-2006 Buick Rendezvous 2005 Buick LeSabre, Terraza 2005-2006 Buick LaCrosse/Allure 2006-2008 Buick Lucerne 2008 Buick LaCrosse/Allure 2008-2009 Buick Enclave 2003 Cadillac CTS 2004 Cadillac Escalade 2004-2005 Cadillac CTS-V, Deville 2005 Cadillac Escalade ESV, SRX 2005-2006 Cadillac STS 2005-2008 Cadillac CTS 2006-2008 Cadillac DTS 2007 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade EXT 2007-2008 Cadillac Escalade ESV 2008 Cadillac SRX, STS 2002 Chevrolet Impala 2003-2008 Chevrolet Suburban 2003-2009 Chevrolet Silverado 2004-2008 Chevrolet Impala 2005 Chevrolet Colorado, Corvette, Malibu 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander 2005-2008 Chevrolet Avalanche, Tahoe, TrailBlazer 2006 Chevrolet HHR, Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 Chevrolet Corvette 2008 Chevrolet HHR 2008-2009 Chevrolet Cobalt, Colorado, Malibu, Uplander 2003 GMC Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon XL 2004-2008 GMC Yukon 2005-2009 GMC Sierra 2005-2008 GMC Yukon XL 2006-2008 GMC Envoy 2007 GMC Canyon 2007-2009 GMC Acadia 2006 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2008 HUMMER H2 2003 Oldsmobile Silhouette 2005 Montana SV6 2005-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006 Pontiac G6, Vibe 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 2007-2008 Pontiac Solstice 2008 Pontiac G6, Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G5, G8 2009 Pontiac G3, Montana SV6 2005-2007 Saturn ION 2006-2009Saturn VUE 2007-2008 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK, SKY Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 14204 THIS PROGRAM IS IN EFFECT UNTIL APRIL 30, 2011. Condition Certain 2002-2009 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may have a condition in which the vehicle's OnStar(R) system repeatedly makes incomplete calls to OnStar(R) without the vehicle's occupant(s) input or knowledge. Customer initiated Blue Button call, Emergency calls, and Automatic Crash Notification calls will also fail to establish a data connection with the OnStar(R) Call Center. Eventually, the customer's call will connect as a voice only line and the customer will be able to talk with an OnStar(R) advisor; however, the advisor will not get crucial customer data such as vehicle identification and location. Correction Dealers/retailers are to replace the OnStar(R) module (VCIM). Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2002-2009 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R), and built within these VIN breakpoints: Note: Some model years/models have only one vehicle involved. Important Dealers/retailers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers/retailers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers/retailers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers/retailers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to dealers/retailers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports. Dealers/retailers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this program is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this program. Parts Information US: OnStar(R) modules required for this program are to be obtained by contacting Autocraft Electronics via the web at www.autocraft.com, and selecting the catalog item that contains bulletin number 10037 (or PIC 4893B), or by calling 1-800-336-3998. Dealer must provide the VIN, R.O. number, and the current vehicle mileage. Canada: OnStar(R) modules required for this program are to be obtained by contacting MASS Electronics at 1-877-410-6277. Dealer must provide the VIN, R.O. number, and the current vehicle mileage. DO NOT ORDER ONSTAR(R) MODULES FROM GENERAL MOTORS CUSTOMER CARE AND AFTERSALES (GMCC&A;), SATURN SERVICE PARTS OPERATION (SSPO), OR THE TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE CENTER (TAC). Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers/retailers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table below. 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers/retailers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers/retailers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 14205 * Dealers using WINs: Add 0.2 hours to the labor time for administrative allowance for the module exchange. Dealers using GWM: Submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under "Administration Time" for the module exchange. ** The $25 represents the additional net amount allowed for the module exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the module is replaced by Masscomp's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit the 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealer using GWM should submit the 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Customer Notification OnStar will notify customers of this program on their vehicle. Dealer Program Responsibility All unsold new vehicles in dealers'/retailers' possession and subject to this program must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this program bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers/retailers are to service all vehicles subject to this program at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, through April 30, 2011. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer/retailer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer/retailer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Program follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 14206 In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this program enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership/facility for service through April 30, 2011, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the program correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure Note Do NOT replace the inside rear view mirror in tandem with this concern. The mirror has no bearing on this specific issue. 1. Remove the OnStar(R) module (referred to as the Communication Interface Module (CIM) or Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in SI). Refer to SI for module removal instructions. Note Inform customer that all Bluetooth devices must be paired with the new VCIM. Bluetooth devices that have not been paired to the new VCIM will not function properly. 2. Install the new OnStar(R) module (referred to as the Communication Interface Module (CIM) or Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in SI). Refer to SI for module installation instructions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-010F Date: March 09, 2009 Subject: Navigation Radio Diagnostic Tips Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X All Equipped with Navigation Radio Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years involved, the radio part number list, remove the PQC parts restriction and revise the diagnostic information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-44-010E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Recent part reviews indicate that the majority of Navigation Radios returned for analysis do not test as defective. In many cases, published SI documents were available to correct the condition without the need for an exchange unit. The following Diagnostic Tips may assist with the proper diagnosis and repair of Navigation Radio Concerns. Note For U.S. dealers the 2009 and 2010 Model Year Navigation Radios are currently on restriction through the Technical Assistance Center (TAC). Refer to PI PIC5102. To order Radios and Instrument Panel Clusters (IPC) for 2008 and prior model year vehicles, please continue to follow the normal process and contact an authorized Electronic Service Center (ESC) for assistance. For any Navigation Radio replaced, a copy of the Repair Order (RO) must be included with the returned radio. Be sure to document the customer's concern in detail, including unusual noises and what functions are affected. List any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) on the RO. Ensure the radio is sufficiently protected during shipping to prevent damage to the radio assembly. Note Navigation Radios with physical damage (for example: shattered displays, impact damage to the radio face and fluid damage) must be reviewed with the District Service Manager for appropriate coverage prior to replacing the radio. The dealership must note the District Service Manager's approval on the Repair Order, along with the reason for the goodwill assistance. Do NOT disassemble the radio to try and retrieve stuck CDs/DVDs as this may result in a debit to the dealership. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-44-015, Information on Inappropriate Warranty Claims submitted for Damaged Radios and Instrument Panel Clusters. Getting Started Retrieve the Navigation Radio part number using the Tech 2(R). Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-44-005C - Utilizing Tech 2 to Retrieve Part Numbers for Radios, Compact Disc (CD) Changers and Instrument Panel Clusters (IPC). Use the table below to determine the appropriate Diagnostic Tips Review to follow based on the radio part number. Scroll down the bulletin to find the corresponding Diagnostic Tips Review. Printing This Document To print the applicable Diagnostic Tips Review pages, select File then Print Preview. Use the arrows at the top of the screen to scroll left and right through the bulletin to identify the correct pages containing the questions. With the pages identified, click on the Print button at the top left. In the pop-up box, select "Pages" in the "Print Range" and type in the pages. For example, to print pages 19 through 22, type in the box provided "19-22". Once the page range has been filled in, click the Print box at the bottom of the pop-up box. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14215 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14216 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14217 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14218 Diagnostic Tips Review Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14219 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14220 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14221 Diagnostic Tips Review # 1 - Delphi Super Nav and Black Tie Nav Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14222 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14223 Diagnostic Tips Review # 2 - Delphi Legacy Navigation Radio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14224 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14225 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14226 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14227 Diagnostic Tips Review # 3 - Denso Navigation Radios Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14228 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14229 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14230 Diagnostic Tips Review # 4 - Denso legacy Navigation Radio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14231 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14232 Diagnostic Tips Review # 5 - Alpine Silver Box Navigation Radio Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-008C Date: September 18, 2008 Subject: Information on OnStar(R) Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Systems Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to correct the model year range for the Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo and update the reference to GM Dealerworld. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). All 2000-2003 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar® from the list above were built with Analog/Digital-Ready OnStar(R) Hardware. Some of these vehicles may have been upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital). Certain 2004-2005 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) from the list above may have been either: ^ Originally built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware OR ^ Upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Hardware All 2006 model year and newer vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) were built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware. If a vehicle has Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware, then the system is capable of operating on both the analog and digital cellular Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information > Page 14237 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-023 > Jun > 08 > Navigation Radio - Adaptation After Radio/Battery R&R; Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Adaptation After Radio/Battery R&R; INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-023 Date: June 18, 2008 Subject: Information On Navigation Radio Not Displaying Accurate Vehicle Location After Radio Replacement, Power Loss Or Battery Replacement Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Navigation Radio The purpose of this bulletin is to inform technicians and customers that the Navigation Radio may not display the vehicle location icon on the map accurately after a radio or battery has been replaced or after battery power has been removed from the radio. The vehicle location icon accuracy may be degraded if the GPS signal is not available and the GPS displayed icon has a red line through it. The Navigation Radio does not keep learned GPS information or gyroscope and vehicle speed signals stored when the battery power is removed from the radio. The Navigation radio continually uses GPS, gyroscope and vehicle speed data to maintain the vehicle location icon positioned accurately on the displayed map. There may be periods of time during a drive cycle when the GPS signal may not be available and the vehicle location icon still appears to be accurate. This is due to the radio having internal gyroscopes and receiving a vehicle speed signal to maintain accuracy if the radio had received a good GPS signal earlier in the drive cycle. Normal driving will improve the accuracy of the vehicle location icon on the displayed map. It may be necessary for the vehicle to be driven up to 40 km (25 mi) with 15 left and 15 right turns while the vehicle location icon is matched to roads on the displayed map. Do not replace the radio for this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 14254 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-009B Date: June 29, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Language Change for OnStar(R) System (U.S. and Canada Only) Models: 2006-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2006-2008 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Built After and Including VIN Breakpoints Listed Below (2006 MY Only) Attention: This bulletin only applies to vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) Generation 6.1 or later with a Station Identification (STID) Number in the following range: 16,000,000-17,000,000 or 20,000,000-21,999,999 or 23,500,001-26,000,000 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the service procedure and add a Canadian procedure. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Numbers 05-08-46-009A and 05-08-46-008A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14259 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14260 Built After and Including the VIN Breakpoints shown. The Generation (Gen) 6.1 OnStar(R) system found in these vehicles has the capability to change the default English voice recognition to French or Spanish. Changing the language of the OnStar(R) system will change the following features to the language you select: Voice recognition command prompts will be played in the language selected. The voice recognition system will only recognize commands given in the selected language. Once completed, this process completely changes all voice recognition and voice commands of the OnStar(R) system. The process will need to be repeated in its entirety to change to a different language, including English. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14261 Method 1 Method 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14262 Method 3 The Gen 6.1 version of OnStar(R) does not require the use of the Service Programming System (SPS) to change the voice recognition system. However, there are three ways to change the language. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 07-08-44-007 > Apr > 07 > Navigation System - Replacement Navigation Discs Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation System - Replacement Navigation Discs Bulletin No.: 07-08-44-007 Date: April 17, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Obtaining Replacement Navigation Discs When Radios are Exchanged Order Replacement Navigation Disc Through Navigation Disc Center Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2007 and Prior Saab 9-7X with a Navigation Radio Attention: The purpose of this bulletin is to inform dealership personnel of a new procedure for obtaining a replacement navigation disc for radios that are sent to an ESC for exchange. This bulletin applies to U.S. and Canadian dealers only and is not intended for use by export dealers. When a navigation radio warranty exchange is performed, the customer must have a navigation disc to operate the new radio. If the customer's navigation disc was damaged or is stuck in the failed radio, the customer would have to wait for an excessive period of time for the disc to be returned or replaced. The Electronic Service Centers (ESC) are not authorized to remove stuck navigation discs from cores, as the cores must be returned to the supplier for analysis prior to any disassembly. The time it would take for the supplier to return the navigation disc would significantly delay the completion of the repair at the dealership. If the customer's navigation disc is damaged or cannot be removed from the radio, the dealership is to obtain an exchange radio through an ESC and a new navigation disc through the GM Navigation Disc Center. Both items can be shipped overnight to the dealership upon request. GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information Via the web through gmnavdisc.com The GM Navigation Disc Center is also the center of expertise for navigation system questions. Warranty Information Include the part number and cost of the new navigation disc on the warranty claim for the navigation radio exchange. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 14272 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10-08-44-006 > Oct > 10 > Navigation Report Missing/Inaccurate Nav. Map Info Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation - Report Missing/Inaccurate Nav. Map Info INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-44-006 Date: October 11, 2010 Subject: Reporting Missing or Inaccurate Navigation Radio Map Disc Information - Complete and Submit Feedback Form at GM Navigation Disc Center Website Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Navigation Radio Some customers may notice that some navigation radio map discs may have missing or incorrect information. The following list contains some examples: - Missing or incorrect roads, road names or road shapes - Missing or incorrect addresses - Missing or incorrect highway labeling - Missing or incorrect highway exit numbers - Missing or incorrect traffic restrictions - Missing points of interest (POI) or incorrect details, such as location, category or phone number General Motors uses a map database from two different suppliers. The two map suppliers are consistently updating their map database and will gladly accept any input regarding missing or incorrect information on the navigation radio map disc. To report any missing or incorrect information, please access the GM Navigation Disc Center at the following web site: http://www.gmnavdisc.com. At the GM Navigation Disc Center home page, select the tab: Your Feedback. In the Navigation Data Feedback form, fill in the appropriate information as required and then select: Submit, to send the form. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-44-012E > Apr > 10 > Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-44-012E Date: April 20, 2010 Subject: DVD Navigation Update Program, Navigation Disc Diagnostic Aid, AVN Software Update Discs and Ordering Information Models: 2002-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2004-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Attention: Please direct this information to your Sales Consultants, Service Consultants, Parts Personnel and Used Car Department. This bulletin ONLY applies to North American dealers/retailers. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2010 model year and update the usage table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-44-012D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). DVD Navigation Update Program The data on the DVD map disc ages at a rate of 15-20% per year. As the data ages, the functionality of the navigation system declines. Offering GM customers new navigation DVDs will ensure that the customers have the latest information for their system. General Motors offered a Navigation Disc Update Program for 2006 and 2007 model year vehicles. This program concluded on December 31, 2009. The DVD Navigation Update Program policy has changed and customers are no longer eligible for free annual updates, however, a navigation DVD update disc can be purchased for $199 (USD) + shipping. If the navigation disc is needed for a warranty situation, the disc can be purchased for $120 (USD). The dealer must provide a VIN and RO# to qualify for the reduced price. The dealer must call the GM Navigation Disc Center, as this option is not available on the website. The GM Navigation Disc Center launched on March 15, 2006. There are two ways to obtain an updated disc: - Via the web through gmnavdisc.com - GM Navigation Disc Center Navigation Disc Diagnostic Aid The following table can be used to identify acceptable discs for testing the navigation unit's map drive functionality. This should only be used to verify the map drive's ability to read the map disc properly and to determine if there is an issue with the unit's map drive or the disc. Some functions, such as voice recognition, may not work properly with some of the discs in the list. If the disc is found to be defective always contact the GM Navigation Disc Center to obtain the most recent disc for the vehicle. AVN Software Update Discs Technical Service Bulletins are sometimes generated to address specific navigation radio operational or performance issues. When a navigation radio bulletin is issued, it may contain instructions to utilize an advanced vehicle navigation (AVN) software update with a specific part number. GM dealers must order advanced vehicle navigation (AVN) software update discs as directed in the specific bulletin. AVN software update discs are for the dealer to update the navigation radio software only. They do NOT update or replace the navigation map disc that is supplied with the vehicle. Please order these parts only as needed. There is a limited supply of these discs available. Do not order these discs for stock. AVN software update discs can be used to reprogram more than one vehicle. The first update disc for each P/N is free. Subsequent copies of the same P/N for the same dealer will cost $50 (USD). To obtain an AVN software update disc, follow the specific ordering information provided in the bulletin. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-44-012E > Apr > 10 > Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program > Page 14281 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-010F Date: March 09, 2009 Subject: Navigation Radio Diagnostic Tips Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X All Equipped with Navigation Radio Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years involved, the radio part number list, remove the PQC parts restriction and revise the diagnostic information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-44-010E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Recent part reviews indicate that the majority of Navigation Radios returned for analysis do not test as defective. In many cases, published SI documents were available to correct the condition without the need for an exchange unit. The following Diagnostic Tips may assist with the proper diagnosis and repair of Navigation Radio Concerns. Note For U.S. dealers the 2009 and 2010 Model Year Navigation Radios are currently on restriction through the Technical Assistance Center (TAC). Refer to PI PIC5102. To order Radios and Instrument Panel Clusters (IPC) for 2008 and prior model year vehicles, please continue to follow the normal process and contact an authorized Electronic Service Center (ESC) for assistance. For any Navigation Radio replaced, a copy of the Repair Order (RO) must be included with the returned radio. Be sure to document the customer's concern in detail, including unusual noises and what functions are affected. List any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) on the RO. Ensure the radio is sufficiently protected during shipping to prevent damage to the radio assembly. Note Navigation Radios with physical damage (for example: shattered displays, impact damage to the radio face and fluid damage) must be reviewed with the District Service Manager for appropriate coverage prior to replacing the radio. The dealership must note the District Service Manager's approval on the Repair Order, along with the reason for the goodwill assistance. Do NOT disassemble the radio to try and retrieve stuck CDs/DVDs as this may result in a debit to the dealership. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-44-015, Information on Inappropriate Warranty Claims submitted for Damaged Radios and Instrument Panel Clusters. Getting Started Retrieve the Navigation Radio part number using the Tech 2(R). Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-44-005C - Utilizing Tech 2 to Retrieve Part Numbers for Radios, Compact Disc (CD) Changers and Instrument Panel Clusters (IPC). Use the table below to determine the appropriate Diagnostic Tips Review to follow based on the radio part number. Scroll down the bulletin to find the corresponding Diagnostic Tips Review. Printing This Document To print the applicable Diagnostic Tips Review pages, select File then Print Preview. Use the arrows at the top of the screen to scroll left and right through the bulletin to identify the correct pages containing the questions. With the pages identified, click on the Print button at the top left. In the pop-up box, select "Pages" in the "Print Range" and type in the pages. For example, to print pages 19 through 22, type in the box provided "19-22". Once the page range has been filled in, click the Print box at the bottom of the pop-up box. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14290 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14291 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14292 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14293 Diagnostic Tips Review Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14294 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14295 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14296 Diagnostic Tips Review # 1 - Delphi Super Nav and Black Tie Nav Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14297 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14298 Diagnostic Tips Review # 2 - Delphi Legacy Navigation Radio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14299 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14300 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14301 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14302 Diagnostic Tips Review # 3 - Denso Navigation Radios Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14303 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14304 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14305 Diagnostic Tips Review # 4 - Denso legacy Navigation Radio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14306 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14307 Diagnostic Tips Review # 5 - Alpine Silver Box Navigation Radio Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital System Information Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-008C Date: September 18, 2008 Subject: Information on OnStar(R) Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Systems Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to correct the model year range for the Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo and update the reference to GM Dealerworld. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). All 2000-2003 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar® from the list above were built with Analog/Digital-Ready OnStar(R) Hardware. Some of these vehicles may have been upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital). Certain 2004-2005 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) from the list above may have been either: ^ Originally built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware OR ^ Upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Hardware All 2006 model year and newer vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) were built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware. If a vehicle has Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware, then the system is capable of operating on both the analog and digital cellular Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital System Information > Page 14312 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) Aftermarket Device Interference Information Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-023 > Jun > 08 > Navigation Radio - Adaptation After Radio/Battery R&R; Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Adaptation After Radio/Battery R&R; INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-023 Date: June 18, 2008 Subject: Information On Navigation Radio Not Displaying Accurate Vehicle Location After Radio Replacement, Power Loss Or Battery Replacement Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Navigation Radio The purpose of this bulletin is to inform technicians and customers that the Navigation Radio may not display the vehicle location icon on the map accurately after a radio or battery has been replaced or after battery power has been removed from the radio. The vehicle location icon accuracy may be degraded if the GPS signal is not available and the GPS displayed icon has a red line through it. The Navigation Radio does not keep learned GPS information or gyroscope and vehicle speed signals stored when the battery power is removed from the radio. The Navigation radio continually uses GPS, gyroscope and vehicle speed data to maintain the vehicle location icon positioned accurately on the displayed map. There may be periods of time during a drive cycle when the GPS signal may not be available and the vehicle location icon still appears to be accurate. This is due to the radio having internal gyroscopes and receiving a vehicle speed signal to maintain accuracy if the radio had received a good GPS signal earlier in the drive cycle. Normal driving will improve the accuracy of the vehicle location icon on the displayed map. It may be necessary for the vehicle to be driven up to 40 km (25 mi) with 15 left and 15 right turns while the vehicle location icon is matched to roads on the displayed map. Do not replace the radio for this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 14329 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) Language Change Information Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-009B Date: June 29, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Language Change for OnStar(R) System (U.S. and Canada Only) Models: 2006-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2006-2008 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Built After and Including VIN Breakpoints Listed Below (2006 MY Only) Attention: This bulletin only applies to vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) Generation 6.1 or later with a Station Identification (STID) Number in the following range: 16,000,000-17,000,000 or 20,000,000-21,999,999 or 23,500,001-26,000,000 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the service procedure and add a Canadian procedure. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Numbers 05-08-46-009A and 05-08-46-008A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) Language Change Information > Page 14334 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) Language Change Information > Page 14335 Built After and Including the VIN Breakpoints shown. The Generation (Gen) 6.1 OnStar(R) system found in these vehicles has the capability to change the default English voice recognition to French or Spanish. Changing the language of the OnStar(R) system will change the following features to the language you select: Voice recognition command prompts will be played in the language selected. The voice recognition system will only recognize commands given in the selected language. Once completed, this process completely changes all voice recognition and voice commands of the OnStar(R) system. The process will need to be repeated in its entirety to change to a different language, including English. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) Language Change Information > Page 14336 Method 1 Method 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) Language Change Information > Page 14337 Method 3 The Gen 6.1 version of OnStar(R) does not require the use of the Service Programming System (SPS) to change the voice recognition system. However, there are three ways to change the language. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 07-08-44-007 > Apr > 07 > Navigation System - Replacement Navigation Discs Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation System - Replacement Navigation Discs Bulletin No.: 07-08-44-007 Date: April 17, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Obtaining Replacement Navigation Discs When Radios are Exchanged Order Replacement Navigation Disc Through Navigation Disc Center Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2007 and Prior Saab 9-7X with a Navigation Radio Attention: The purpose of this bulletin is to inform dealership personnel of a new procedure for obtaining a replacement navigation disc for radios that are sent to an ESC for exchange. This bulletin applies to U.S. and Canadian dealers only and is not intended for use by export dealers. When a navigation radio warranty exchange is performed, the customer must have a navigation disc to operate the new radio. If the customer's navigation disc was damaged or is stuck in the failed radio, the customer would have to wait for an excessive period of time for the disc to be returned or replaced. The Electronic Service Centers (ESC) are not authorized to remove stuck navigation discs from cores, as the cores must be returned to the supplier for analysis prior to any disassembly. The time it would take for the supplier to return the navigation disc would significantly delay the completion of the repair at the dealership. If the customer's navigation disc is damaged or cannot be removed from the radio, the dealership is to obtain an exchange radio through an ESC and a new navigation disc through the GM Navigation Disc Center. Both items can be shipped overnight to the dealership upon request. GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information Via the web through gmnavdisc.com The GM Navigation Disc Center is also the center of expertise for navigation system questions. Warranty Information Include the part number and cost of the new navigation disc on the warranty claim for the navigation radio exchange. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-44-012E > Apr > 10 > Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program > Page 14351 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 10037 Date: 100420 Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) CUSTOMER SATISFACTION Bulletin No.: 10037 Date: April 20, 2010 Subject: 10037 - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) Models: 2003 Buick LeSabre 2004-2006 Buick Rendezvous 2005 Buick LeSabre, Terraza 2005-2006 Buick LaCrosse/Allure 2006-2008 Buick Lucerne 2008 Buick LaCrosse/Allure 2008-2009 Buick Enclave 2003 Cadillac CTS 2004 Cadillac Escalade 2004-2005 Cadillac CTS-V, Deville 2005 Cadillac Escalade ESV, SRX 2005-2006 Cadillac STS 2005-2008 Cadillac CTS 2006-2008 Cadillac DTS 2007 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade EXT 2007-2008 Cadillac Escalade ESV 2008 Cadillac SRX, STS 2002 Chevrolet Impala 2003-2008 Chevrolet Suburban 2003-2009 Chevrolet Silverado 2004-2008 Chevrolet Impala 2005 Chevrolet Colorado, Corvette, Malibu 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander 2005-2008 Chevrolet Avalanche, Tahoe, TrailBlazer 2006 Chevrolet HHR, Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 Chevrolet Corvette 2008 Chevrolet HHR 2008-2009 Chevrolet Cobalt, Colorado, Malibu, Uplander 2003 GMC Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon XL 2004-2008 GMC Yukon 2005-2009 GMC Sierra 2005-2008 GMC Yukon XL 2006-2008 GMC Envoy 2007 GMC Canyon 2007-2009 GMC Acadia 2006 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2008 HUMMER H2 2003 Oldsmobile Silhouette 2005 Montana SV6 2005-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006 Pontiac G6, Vibe 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 2007-2008 Pontiac Solstice 2008 Pontiac G6, Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G5, G8 2009 Pontiac G3, Montana SV6 2005-2007 Saturn ION 2006-2009Saturn VUE 2007-2008 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK, SKY Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 14356 THIS PROGRAM IS IN EFFECT UNTIL APRIL 30, 2011. Condition Certain 2002-2009 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may have a condition in which the vehicle's OnStar(R) system repeatedly makes incomplete calls to OnStar(R) without the vehicle's occupant(s) input or knowledge. Customer initiated Blue Button call, Emergency calls, and Automatic Crash Notification calls will also fail to establish a data connection with the OnStar(R) Call Center. Eventually, the customer's call will connect as a voice only line and the customer will be able to talk with an OnStar(R) advisor; however, the advisor will not get crucial customer data such as vehicle identification and location. Correction Dealers/retailers are to replace the OnStar(R) module (VCIM). Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2002-2009 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R), and built within these VIN breakpoints: Note: Some model years/models have only one vehicle involved. Important Dealers/retailers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers/retailers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers/retailers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers/retailers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to dealers/retailers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports. Dealers/retailers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this program is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this program. Parts Information US: OnStar(R) modules required for this program are to be obtained by contacting Autocraft Electronics via the web at www.autocraft.com, and selecting the catalog item that contains bulletin number 10037 (or PIC 4893B), or by calling 1-800-336-3998. Dealer must provide the VIN, R.O. number, and the current vehicle mileage. Canada: OnStar(R) modules required for this program are to be obtained by contacting MASS Electronics at 1-877-410-6277. Dealer must provide the VIN, R.O. number, and the current vehicle mileage. DO NOT ORDER ONSTAR(R) MODULES FROM GENERAL MOTORS CUSTOMER CARE AND AFTERSALES (GMCC&A;), SATURN SERVICE PARTS OPERATION (SSPO), OR THE TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE CENTER (TAC). Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers/retailers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table below. 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers/retailers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers/retailers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 14357 * Dealers using WINs: Add 0.2 hours to the labor time for administrative allowance for the module exchange. Dealers using GWM: Submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under "Administration Time" for the module exchange. ** The $25 represents the additional net amount allowed for the module exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the module is replaced by Masscomp's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit the 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealer using GWM should submit the 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Customer Notification OnStar will notify customers of this program on their vehicle. Dealer Program Responsibility All unsold new vehicles in dealers'/retailers' possession and subject to this program must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this program bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers/retailers are to service all vehicles subject to this program at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, through April 30, 2011. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer/retailer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer/retailer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Program follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 14358 In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this program enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership/facility for service through April 30, 2011, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the program correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure Note Do NOT replace the inside rear view mirror in tandem with this concern. The mirror has no bearing on this specific issue. 1. Remove the OnStar(R) module (referred to as the Communication Interface Module (CIM) or Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in SI). Refer to SI for module removal instructions. Note Inform customer that all Bluetooth devices must be paired with the new VCIM. Bluetooth devices that have not been paired to the new VCIM will not function properly. 2. Install the new OnStar(R) module (referred to as the Communication Interface Module (CIM) or Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in SI). Refer to SI for module installation instructions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14367 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14368 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14369 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14370 Diagnostic Tips Review Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14371 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14372 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14373 Diagnostic Tips Review # 1 - Delphi Super Nav and Black Tie Nav Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14374 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14375 Diagnostic Tips Review # 2 - Delphi Legacy Navigation Radio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14376 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14377 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14378 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14379 Diagnostic Tips Review # 3 - Denso Navigation Radios Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14380 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14381 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14382 Diagnostic Tips Review # 4 - Denso legacy Navigation Radio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14383 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 14384 Diagnostic Tips Review # 5 - Alpine Silver Box Navigation Radio Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital System Information > Page 14389 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) Language Change Information > Page 14406 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) Language Change Information > Page 14407 Built After and Including the VIN Breakpoints shown. The Generation (Gen) 6.1 OnStar(R) system found in these vehicles has the capability to change the default English voice recognition to French or Spanish. Changing the language of the OnStar(R) system will change the following features to the language you select: Voice recognition command prompts will be played in the language selected. The voice recognition system will only recognize commands given in the selected language. Once completed, this process completely changes all voice recognition and voice commands of the OnStar(R) system. The process will need to be repeated in its entirety to change to a different language, including English. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) Language Change Information > Page 14408 Method 1 Method 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) Language Change Information > Page 14409 Method 3 The Gen 6.1 version of OnStar(R) does not require the use of the Service Programming System (SPS) to change the voice recognition system. However, there are three ways to change the language. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - Revised Amplifier Replacement Amplifier: Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - Revised Amplifier Replacement Bulletin No.: 05-08-44-038 Date: December 09, 2005 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE Subject: Revised Amplifier Replacement Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with Premium 7 Speaker System (RPO U65) This bulletin is being issued to revise the Amplifier Replacement procedure in the Entertainment sub-section of the Service Manual. Please replace the current information in the Service Manual with the following information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - Revised Amplifier Replacement > Page 14419 The information shown has been updated within SI. If you are using a paper version of this Service Manual, please make a reference to this bulletin on the affected page. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14420 Amplifier: Diagrams Amplifier C1 (With RPO Code U65) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14421 Amplifier C2 (With RPO Code U65) Amplifier C3 (With RPO Code U65) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14422 Amplifier: Service and Repair AMPLIFIER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat. 2. Remove the fasteners that hold the amplifier. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the amplifier. 4. Remove the amplifier from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the amplifier in the vehicle 2. Install the electrical connectors to the amplifier. 3. Install the fasteners to the amplifier. Tighten the fasteners to 3 N.m (26 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the rear seat. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > Component Information > Service and Repair Compact Disc Player (CD): Service and Repair COMPACT DISC CARE AND CLEANING CARE OF CDs Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, scratched, or wrinkled labeling, the CD will not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it. This could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge. CARE OF THE CD PLAYER The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the internal lens of the CD optics with lubricants. STUCK CDS Interrupting the battery power by pulling the fuse will sometimes release a stuck CD. If a CD is stuck, and removed, inspect it for warps, cracks, etc. If the CD is damaged, do not replace the radio. LABELING CDS Paper labels can eventually warp and wrinkle, and this will cause the disc to jam inside the CD player. Try labeling the top of the discs with a soft magic marker instead. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation Remote Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-028 Date: August 28, 2008 Subject: Information On Inadvertent Steering Wheel Control (SWC) Button Press Causing Radio Anomalies Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X All Vehicles with Steering Wheel Controls This bulletin is being issued to provide a recommendation for vehicles with a customer concern of the radio station tuning changing by itself, volume changing by itself, radio changing by itself, or radio muting or going silent when driving and turning the steering wheel. The switches on the right hand side of the steering wheel are easily pressed and may inadvertently be pressed when turning the steering wheel. These concerns may be affected by the location of the steering wheel controls. Recommendation Do Not Replace The Radio 1. Please determine that the switch controls on the steering wheel are functioning correctly. 2. Ask the customer if their hand was in close proximity to the steering wheel controls when the condition happened. Explain to the customer that bumping the controls would have caused this undesired action. Explain to the customer the proper use and function of the steering wheel controls. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left Remote Control: Diagrams Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (With RPO Code K34 Without RPO Code UK3) Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (With RPO Code K34 And UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left > Page 14435 Remote Control: Diagrams Steering Wheel Control Switch - Right Steering Wheel Control Switch - Right (With RPO Code K34 Without RPO Code UK3) Steering Wheel Control Switch - Right (With RPO Code K34 And UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON Speaker: Customer Interest Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON Bulletin No.: 03-08-45-003D Date: February 24, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Reduced Power, Stuck in High Gear, SES Light On, DTCs P0223, P0504, P0700, P1228, P1271, P1280, P1599, P1779, P1791, P2119, P2101, P2128, P2135, or P2138 Set, Speaker Buzz Noise, HVAC Inoperative (Inspect/Replace Corroded or Bent Terminals) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2002-2003 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update an illustration. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-45-003C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the vehicle is exhibiting one or more of the following conditions: ^ Reduced power ^ Transaxle not down shifting ^ SES light on ^ Buzz noise from door speaker(s) ^ Speaker(s) inoperative ^ HVAC blower motor inoperative ^ A/C compressor commanded OFF with vehicle speed (evaporator temperature sensor circuit 719 and/or 731 may be open) These conditions may be intermittent. Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) P0223, P0504, P0700, P1228, P1271, P1280, P1599, P1779, P1791, P2119, P2101, P2128, P2135, or P2138 may also be present. Cause The instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector), located behind the left hinge pillar garnish molding, may have bent or corroded terminals. Correction Disconnect and inspect the instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector). If necessary, replace damaged terminals and apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 14444 1. Starting at the left hinge pillar garnish, pull upward to disengage the attaching clips. 2. Reach under the instrument panel and pull upwards to disengage the additional clips and remove the molding from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector). 4. Inspect the connector for bent or corroded terminals. Important: If no corrosion or bent terminals are found, proceed to Step 7 and follow trouble code diagnostics in the service manual or SI. 5. Remove any bent or corroded pins from the connector. 6. Install the new terminal cut lead (verify correct size using connector/harness face views and electrical schematics in the appropriate service manual or SI). 7. Pack the connector terminals with dielectric grease in order to prevent any further corrosion. 8. Connect the instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector). 9. Install the molding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 14445 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 14446 Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 14447 To receive credit for any repairs during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim for the information shown. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON Speaker: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON Bulletin No.: 03-08-45-003D Date: February 24, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Reduced Power, Stuck in High Gear, SES Light On, DTCs P0223, P0504, P0700, P1228, P1271, P1280, P1599, P1779, P1791, P2119, P2101, P2128, P2135, or P2138 Set, Speaker Buzz Noise, HVAC Inoperative (Inspect/Replace Corroded or Bent Terminals) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2002-2003 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update an illustration. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-45-003C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the vehicle is exhibiting one or more of the following conditions: ^ Reduced power ^ Transaxle not down shifting ^ SES light on ^ Buzz noise from door speaker(s) ^ Speaker(s) inoperative ^ HVAC blower motor inoperative ^ A/C compressor commanded OFF with vehicle speed (evaporator temperature sensor circuit 719 and/or 731 may be open) These conditions may be intermittent. Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) P0223, P0504, P0700, P1228, P1271, P1280, P1599, P1779, P1791, P2119, P2101, P2128, P2135, or P2138 may also be present. Cause The instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector), located behind the left hinge pillar garnish molding, may have bent or corroded terminals. Correction Disconnect and inspect the instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector). If necessary, replace damaged terminals and apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 14453 1. Starting at the left hinge pillar garnish, pull upward to disengage the attaching clips. 2. Reach under the instrument panel and pull upwards to disengage the additional clips and remove the molding from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector). 4. Inspect the connector for bent or corroded terminals. Important: If no corrosion or bent terminals are found, proceed to Step 7 and follow trouble code diagnostics in the service manual or SI. 5. Remove any bent or corroded pins from the connector. 6. Install the new terminal cut lead (verify correct size using connector/harness face views and electrical schematics in the appropriate service manual or SI). 7. Pack the connector terminals with dielectric grease in order to prevent any further corrosion. 8. Connect the instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector). 9. Install the molding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 14454 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 14455 Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 14456 To receive credit for any repairs during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim for the information shown. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF Speaker - LF Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF > Page 14459 Speaker - LF (Tweeter) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF > Page 14460 Speaker - LR Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF > Page 14461 Speaker - RF Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF > Page 14462 Speaker: Diagrams Speaker - LF Speaker - LF (Tweeter) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF > Page 14463 Speaker - LR Speaker - RF Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF > Page 14464 Speaker - RF (Tweeter) Speaker - RR Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF > Page 14465 Speaker - Subwoofer (With RPO Code U65) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker Replacement Reference Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker Replacement Reference > Page 14468 Speaker: Service and Repair Front Door SPEAKER REPLACEMENT - FRONT DOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Remove the front door speaker screws. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the speaker. 4. Remove the speaker from the front door. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the speaker. 2. Install the speaker to the front door. 3. Install the screws to the speaker. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the front door trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker Replacement Reference > Page 14469 Speaker: Service and Repair Front Side Door Upper SPEAKER REPLACEMENT - FRONT SIDE DOOR UPPER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the upper extension of the door trim panel. 1. Pull at the top of the trim panel to disengage the trim clip. 2. Lift up to remove the lower tabs from behind the door trim. 3. Disconnect the speaker wiring harness. 2. Rotate and remove the tweeter from the trim panel. 3. Remove the speaker. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker Replacement Reference > Page 14470 1. Position the speaker on the trim panel and twist to install the speaker. 2. Connect the speaker wiring harness. 3. Install the upper extension of the door trim panel. 1. Insert the tabs behind the door trim. 2. Push to engage the clip. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker Replacement Reference > Page 14471 Speaker: Service and Repair Rear Door SPEAKER REPLACEMENT - REAR DOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Remove the speaker screws. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the speaker. 4. Remove the speaker from the rear door. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the speaker. 2. Install the speaker to the rear door. 3. Install the screws to the speaker. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the rear door trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker Replacement Reference > Page 14472 Speaker: Service and Repair Rear SPEAKER REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel. 2. Remove the rear speaker fasteners. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the speaker. 4. Remove the speaker from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the speaker into the vehicle. 2. Connect the electrical connectors to the speaker. 3. Install the fasteners to the speaker. Tighten the fasteners to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the rear quarter trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Alarm Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14478 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14479 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14480 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14481 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14482 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14483 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14484 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14485 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14486 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14487 Alarm Module: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14488 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14489 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14490 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14491 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14492 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14493 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14494 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14495 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14496 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14497 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14498 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14499 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14500 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14501 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14502 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14503 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14504 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14505 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14506 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14507 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14508 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14509 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14510 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14511 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14512 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14513 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14514 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14515 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14516 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14517 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14518 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14519 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14520 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14521 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14522 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14523 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14524 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14525 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14526 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14527 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14528 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14529 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14530 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14531 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14532 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14533 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14534 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14535 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14536 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14537 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14538 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14539 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14540 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14541 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14542 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14543 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14544 IMPORTANT: - Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14545 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14546 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14547 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14548 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14549 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14550 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 10037 Date: 100420 Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) CUSTOMER SATISFACTION Bulletin No.: 10037 Date: April 20, 2010 Subject: 10037 - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) Models: 2003 Buick LeSabre 2004-2006 Buick Rendezvous 2005 Buick LeSabre, Terraza 2005-2006 Buick LaCrosse/Allure 2006-2008 Buick Lucerne 2008 Buick LaCrosse/Allure 2008-2009 Buick Enclave 2003 Cadillac CTS 2004 Cadillac Escalade 2004-2005 Cadillac CTS-V, Deville 2005 Cadillac Escalade ESV, SRX 2005-2006 Cadillac STS 2005-2008 Cadillac CTS 2006-2008 Cadillac DTS 2007 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade EXT 2007-2008 Cadillac Escalade ESV 2008 Cadillac SRX, STS 2002 Chevrolet Impala 2003-2008 Chevrolet Suburban 2003-2009 Chevrolet Silverado 2004-2008 Chevrolet Impala 2005 Chevrolet Colorado, Corvette, Malibu 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander 2005-2008 Chevrolet Avalanche, Tahoe, TrailBlazer 2006 Chevrolet HHR, Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 Chevrolet Corvette 2008 Chevrolet HHR 2008-2009 Chevrolet Cobalt, Colorado, Malibu, Uplander 2003 GMC Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon XL 2004-2008 GMC Yukon 2005-2009 GMC Sierra 2005-2008 GMC Yukon XL 2006-2008 GMC Envoy 2007 GMC Canyon 2007-2009 GMC Acadia 2006 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2008 HUMMER H2 2003 Oldsmobile Silhouette 2005 Montana SV6 2005-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006 Pontiac G6, Vibe 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 2007-2008 Pontiac Solstice 2008 Pontiac G6, Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G5, G8 2009 Pontiac G3, Montana SV6 2005-2007 Saturn ION 2006-2009Saturn VUE 2007-2008 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK, SKY Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 14559 THIS PROGRAM IS IN EFFECT UNTIL APRIL 30, 2011. Condition Certain 2002-2009 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may have a condition in which the vehicle's OnStar(R) system repeatedly makes incomplete calls to OnStar(R) without the vehicle's occupant(s) input or knowledge. Customer initiated Blue Button call, Emergency calls, and Automatic Crash Notification calls will also fail to establish a data connection with the OnStar(R) Call Center. Eventually, the customer's call will connect as a voice only line and the customer will be able to talk with an OnStar(R) advisor; however, the advisor will not get crucial customer data such as vehicle identification and location. Correction Dealers/retailers are to replace the OnStar(R) module (VCIM). Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2002-2009 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R), and built within these VIN breakpoints: Note: Some model years/models have only one vehicle involved. Important Dealers/retailers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers/retailers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers/retailers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers/retailers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to dealers/retailers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports. Dealers/retailers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this program is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this program. Parts Information US: OnStar(R) modules required for this program are to be obtained by contacting Autocraft Electronics via the web at www.autocraft.com, and selecting the catalog item that contains bulletin number 10037 (or PIC 4893B), or by calling 1-800-336-3998. Dealer must provide the VIN, R.O. number, and the current vehicle mileage. Canada: OnStar(R) modules required for this program are to be obtained by contacting MASS Electronics at 1-877-410-6277. Dealer must provide the VIN, R.O. number, and the current vehicle mileage. DO NOT ORDER ONSTAR(R) MODULES FROM GENERAL MOTORS CUSTOMER CARE AND AFTERSALES (GMCC&A;), SATURN SERVICE PARTS OPERATION (SSPO), OR THE TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE CENTER (TAC). Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers/retailers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table below. 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers/retailers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers/retailers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 14560 * Dealers using WINs: Add 0.2 hours to the labor time for administrative allowance for the module exchange. Dealers using GWM: Submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under "Administration Time" for the module exchange. ** The $25 represents the additional net amount allowed for the module exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the module is replaced by Masscomp's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit the 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealer using GWM should submit the 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Customer Notification OnStar will notify customers of this program on their vehicle. Dealer Program Responsibility All unsold new vehicles in dealers'/retailers' possession and subject to this program must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this program bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers/retailers are to service all vehicles subject to this program at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, through April 30, 2011. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer/retailer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer/retailer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Program follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 14561 In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this program enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership/facility for service through April 30, 2011, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the program correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure Note Do NOT replace the inside rear view mirror in tandem with this concern. The mirror has no bearing on this specific issue. 1. Remove the OnStar(R) module (referred to as the Communication Interface Module (CIM) or Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in SI). Refer to SI for module removal instructions. Note Inform customer that all Bluetooth devices must be paired with the new VCIM. Bluetooth devices that have not been paired to the new VCIM will not function properly. 2. Install the new OnStar(R) module (referred to as the Communication Interface Module (CIM) or Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in SI). Refer to SI for module installation instructions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 10037 Date: 100420 Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) CUSTOMER SATISFACTION Bulletin No.: 10037 Date: April 20, 2010 Subject: 10037 - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) Models: 2003 Buick LeSabre 2004-2006 Buick Rendezvous 2005 Buick LeSabre, Terraza 2005-2006 Buick LaCrosse/Allure 2006-2008 Buick Lucerne 2008 Buick LaCrosse/Allure 2008-2009 Buick Enclave 2003 Cadillac CTS 2004 Cadillac Escalade 2004-2005 Cadillac CTS-V, Deville 2005 Cadillac Escalade ESV, SRX 2005-2006 Cadillac STS 2005-2008 Cadillac CTS 2006-2008 Cadillac DTS 2007 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade EXT 2007-2008 Cadillac Escalade ESV 2008 Cadillac SRX, STS 2002 Chevrolet Impala 2003-2008 Chevrolet Suburban 2003-2009 Chevrolet Silverado 2004-2008 Chevrolet Impala 2005 Chevrolet Colorado, Corvette, Malibu 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander 2005-2008 Chevrolet Avalanche, Tahoe, TrailBlazer 2006 Chevrolet HHR, Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 Chevrolet Corvette 2008 Chevrolet HHR 2008-2009 Chevrolet Cobalt, Colorado, Malibu, Uplander 2003 GMC Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon XL 2004-2008 GMC Yukon 2005-2009 GMC Sierra 2005-2008 GMC Yukon XL 2006-2008 GMC Envoy 2007 GMC Canyon 2007-2009 GMC Acadia 2006 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2008 HUMMER H2 2003 Oldsmobile Silhouette 2005 Montana SV6 2005-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006 Pontiac G6, Vibe 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 2007-2008 Pontiac Solstice 2008 Pontiac G6, Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G5, G8 2009 Pontiac G3, Montana SV6 2005-2007 Saturn ION 2006-2009Saturn VUE 2007-2008 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK, SKY Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 14567 THIS PROGRAM IS IN EFFECT UNTIL APRIL 30, 2011. Condition Certain 2002-2009 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may have a condition in which the vehicle's OnStar(R) system repeatedly makes incomplete calls to OnStar(R) without the vehicle's occupant(s) input or knowledge. Customer initiated Blue Button call, Emergency calls, and Automatic Crash Notification calls will also fail to establish a data connection with the OnStar(R) Call Center. Eventually, the customer's call will connect as a voice only line and the customer will be able to talk with an OnStar(R) advisor; however, the advisor will not get crucial customer data such as vehicle identification and location. Correction Dealers/retailers are to replace the OnStar(R) module (VCIM). Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2002-2009 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R), and built within these VIN breakpoints: Note: Some model years/models have only one vehicle involved. Important Dealers/retailers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers/retailers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers/retailers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers/retailers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to dealers/retailers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports. Dealers/retailers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this program is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this program. Parts Information US: OnStar(R) modules required for this program are to be obtained by contacting Autocraft Electronics via the web at www.autocraft.com, and selecting the catalog item that contains bulletin number 10037 (or PIC 4893B), or by calling 1-800-336-3998. Dealer must provide the VIN, R.O. number, and the current vehicle mileage. Canada: OnStar(R) modules required for this program are to be obtained by contacting MASS Electronics at 1-877-410-6277. Dealer must provide the VIN, R.O. number, and the current vehicle mileage. DO NOT ORDER ONSTAR(R) MODULES FROM GENERAL MOTORS CUSTOMER CARE AND AFTERSALES (GMCC&A;), SATURN SERVICE PARTS OPERATION (SSPO), OR THE TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE CENTER (TAC). Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers/retailers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table below. 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers/retailers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers/retailers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 14568 * Dealers using WINs: Add 0.2 hours to the labor time for administrative allowance for the module exchange. Dealers using GWM: Submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under "Administration Time" for the module exchange. ** The $25 represents the additional net amount allowed for the module exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the module is replaced by Masscomp's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit the 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealer using GWM should submit the 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Customer Notification OnStar will notify customers of this program on their vehicle. Dealer Program Responsibility All unsold new vehicles in dealers'/retailers' possession and subject to this program must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this program bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers/retailers are to service all vehicles subject to this program at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, through April 30, 2011. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer/retailer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer/retailer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Program follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 14569 In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this program enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership/facility for service through April 30, 2011, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the program correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure Note Do NOT replace the inside rear view mirror in tandem with this concern. The mirror has no bearing on this specific issue. 1. Remove the OnStar(R) module (referred to as the Communication Interface Module (CIM) or Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in SI). Refer to SI for module removal instructions. Note Inform customer that all Bluetooth devices must be paired with the new VCIM. Bluetooth devices that have not been paired to the new VCIM will not function properly. 2. Install the new OnStar(R) module (referred to as the Communication Interface Module (CIM) or Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in SI). Refer to SI for module installation instructions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 14578 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 14583 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 14588 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 14589 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 14595 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-008C Date: September 18, 2008 Subject: Information on OnStar(R) Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Systems Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to correct the model year range for the Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo and update the reference to GM Dealerworld. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). All 2000-2003 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar® from the list above were built with Analog/Digital-Ready OnStar(R) Hardware. Some of these vehicles may have been upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital). Certain 2004-2005 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) from the list above may have been either: ^ Originally built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware OR ^ Upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Hardware All 2006 model year and newer vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) were built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware. If a vehicle has Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware, then the system is capable of operating on both the analog and digital cellular Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information > Page 14604 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 14617 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 14622 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 14623 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-009B Date: June 29, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Language Change for OnStar(R) System (U.S. and Canada Only) Models: 2006-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2006-2008 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Built After and Including VIN Breakpoints Listed Below (2006 MY Only) Attention: This bulletin only applies to vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) Generation 6.1 or later with a Station Identification (STID) Number in the following range: 16,000,000-17,000,000 or 20,000,000-21,999,999 or 23,500,001-26,000,000 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the service procedure and add a Canadian procedure. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Numbers 05-08-46-009A and 05-08-46-008A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14628 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14629 Built After and Including the VIN Breakpoints shown. The Generation (Gen) 6.1 OnStar(R) system found in these vehicles has the capability to change the default English voice recognition to French or Spanish. Changing the language of the OnStar(R) system will change the following features to the language you select: Voice recognition command prompts will be played in the language selected. The voice recognition system will only recognize commands given in the selected language. Once completed, this process completely changes all voice recognition and voice commands of the OnStar(R) system. The process will need to be repeated in its entirety to change to a different language, including English. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14630 Method 1 Method 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14631 Method 3 The Gen 6.1 version of OnStar(R) does not require the use of the Service Programming System (SPS) to change the voice recognition system. However, there are three ways to change the language. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-008C Date: September 18, 2008 Subject: Information on OnStar(R) Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Systems Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to correct the model year range for the Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo and update the reference to GM Dealerworld. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). All 2000-2003 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar® from the list above were built with Analog/Digital-Ready OnStar(R) Hardware. Some of these vehicles may have been upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital). Certain 2004-2005 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) from the list above may have been either: ^ Originally built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware OR ^ Upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Hardware All 2006 model year and newer vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) were built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware. If a vehicle has Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware, then the system is capable of operating on both the analog and digital cellular Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information > Page 14641 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-009B Date: June 29, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Language Change for OnStar(R) System (U.S. and Canada Only) Models: 2006-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2006-2008 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Built After and Including VIN Breakpoints Listed Below (2006 MY Only) Attention: This bulletin only applies to vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) Generation 6.1 or later with a Station Identification (STID) Number in the following range: 16,000,000-17,000,000 or 20,000,000-21,999,999 or 23,500,001-26,000,000 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the service procedure and add a Canadian procedure. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Numbers 05-08-46-009A and 05-08-46-008A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14654 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14655 Built After and Including the VIN Breakpoints shown. The Generation (Gen) 6.1 OnStar(R) system found in these vehicles has the capability to change the default English voice recognition to French or Spanish. Changing the language of the OnStar(R) system will change the following features to the language you select: Voice recognition command prompts will be played in the language selected. The voice recognition system will only recognize commands given in the selected language. Once completed, this process completely changes all voice recognition and voice commands of the OnStar(R) system. The process will need to be repeated in its entirety to change to a different language, including English. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14656 Method 1 Method 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 14657 Method 3 The Gen 6.1 version of OnStar(R) does not require the use of the Service Programming System (SPS) to change the voice recognition system. However, there are three ways to change the language. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations VCIM Location Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 14661 Global Positioning System Module: Diagrams Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 14662 Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) C2 Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 14663 Global Positioning System Module: Service and Repair COMMUNICATION INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fastener located on the bottom of the OnStar(R) bracket. IMPORTANT: The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) has a specific set of unique numbers that tie the module to each vehicle. These numbers, the 10-digit station identification and the 11-digit electronic serial number, are used by the National Cellular Network and OnStar(R) to identify the specific vehicle. Because these numbers are tied to the vehicle identification number of the vehicle, you must never exchange these parts with those of another vehicle. 2. Tilt the module inboard to the center of the vehicle and pull down the communication interface module (CIM) 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors, the GPS antenna, and the cellular coax cable. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. If replacing the VCIM, record the 10-digit STID number, and the 11-digit ESN number from the labels on the new module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 14664 2. Connect the electrical connectors, the GPS antenna, and the cellular coax cable. 3. Tilt the CIM inboard and install the CIM. 4. Install the CIM fastener. Tighten the fastener to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Reconfigure the OnStar(R) system. Refer to OnStar Reconfiguration. IMPORTANT: After replacing the vehicle communication interface module, you must reconfigure the OnStar(R) system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. In addition, pressing and holding the white dot button on the keypad will NOT reset this version of the OnStar(R) system. This action will cause a DTC to set. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 14673 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 14674 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 14675 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 14681 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 14682 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 14683 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 14692 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 14693 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 14694 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 14700 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 14701 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 14702 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P, Steering Column Connections Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14707 Passlock Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation Remote Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-028 Date: August 28, 2008 Subject: Information On Inadvertent Steering Wheel Control (SWC) Button Press Causing Radio Anomalies Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X All Vehicles with Steering Wheel Controls This bulletin is being issued to provide a recommendation for vehicles with a customer concern of the radio station tuning changing by itself, volume changing by itself, radio changing by itself, or radio muting or going silent when driving and turning the steering wheel. The switches on the right hand side of the steering wheel are easily pressed and may inadvertently be pressed when turning the steering wheel. These concerns may be affected by the location of the steering wheel controls. Recommendation Do Not Replace The Radio 1. Please determine that the switch controls on the steering wheel are functioning correctly. 2. Ask the customer if their hand was in close proximity to the steering wheel controls when the condition happened. Explain to the customer that bumping the controls would have caused this undesired action. Explain to the customer the proper use and function of the steering wheel controls. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (Chevrolet W/K34 W/O UK3) Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (Chevrolet W/K34 W/O UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (Chevrolet W/K34 W/O UK3) > Page 14716 Steering Wheel Control Switch - Right (Chevrolet W/K34 W/O UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (Chevrolet W/K34 W/O UK3) > Page 14717 Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (Chevrolet W/K34 and UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (Chevrolet W/K34 W/O UK3) > Page 14718 Steering Wheel Control Switch - Right (Chevrolet W/K34 and UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 14719 Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Control Switch Assembly Replacement Disassembly Procedure 1. Remove the screws from the steering wheel shroud. 2. Notice: Cruise control switches must be removed from the rear. Do not attempt to pry them out from front as damage to steering wheel may occur. If the vehicle is equipped with cruise control, push the switches out from the rear of the steering wheel. Assembly Procedure 1. If the vehicle is equipped with cruise control, install the switches by pushing them in place from the front of the wheel. 2. Install the screws in the steering wheel shroud. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams Trailer Connector (with RPO Code V92) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams Trailer Connector (with RPO Code V92) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Body Control Module: Customer Interest A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Bulletin No.: 07-01-38-005 Date: July 18, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Poor A/C Performance, A/C Does Not Get Cold Enough After Long Drive Cycle (Recalibrate BCM with Tech 2) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on poor A/C performance or that the A/C does not get cold enough after a long drive. Some of the possible symptoms of this condition are: Blowing warm air Reduced air flow Mist/Vapor coming out of vents Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the evaporator core freezing up. Fix It Right the First Time Tips DO NOT replace the evaporator temperature sensor for this condition unless diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. The sensor can be checked for proper function using the Tech 2(R). Check the sensor for volts varying around 2.3V to 2.6V. This data is within the BCM and is displayed in the accessory list. If the volts are near zero, check for a good connection at the sensor. Also, inspect the harness for possible damage. The sensor is located on the driver's side of the HVAC module and can be accessed from underneath the instrument panel by removing the closeout panel and OnStar(R) module, if equipped. DO NOT replace the thermal expansion valve (TXV) for this condition unless published SI diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. If AC components have been replaced or the refrigerant has been evacuated and recharged and no PAG oil has been added back into the system, it may have a reduced oil level. Please ensure that the vehicle has the proper amount of PAG oil in the system, as low oil level will contribute to the evaporator freezing up. To return to a nominal level of PAG oil, it may be necessary to flush the system. Refer to SI for flushing instructions. Correction The Tech 2(R) must have software version 27.009 or later. Recalibrate the BCM with new software using the Tech 2(R) and following the procedure below. This updated software will control the cycling of the compressor clutch to prevent freezing of the evaporator core. Install the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle and power on. Turn ON the ignition, with engine OFF. Select "Diagnostics." Build the vehicle. Select "Body Control Module". Select "Module Setup". Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough > Page 14737 Then press "BCM Setup" soft key to execute update. When completed command state will change from "None" to "BCM Setup". Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: Customer Interest Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 14742 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 14743 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough Bulletin No.: 07-01-38-005 Date: July 18, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Poor A/C Performance, A/C Does Not Get Cold Enough After Long Drive Cycle (Recalibrate BCM with Tech 2) Models: 2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on poor A/C performance or that the A/C does not get cold enough after a long drive. Some of the possible symptoms of this condition are: Blowing warm air Reduced air flow Mist/Vapor coming out of vents Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the evaporator core freezing up. Fix It Right the First Time Tips DO NOT replace the evaporator temperature sensor for this condition unless diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. The sensor can be checked for proper function using the Tech 2(R). Check the sensor for volts varying around 2.3V to 2.6V. This data is within the BCM and is displayed in the accessory list. If the volts are near zero, check for a good connection at the sensor. Also, inspect the harness for possible damage. The sensor is located on the driver's side of the HVAC module and can be accessed from underneath the instrument panel by removing the closeout panel and OnStar(R) module, if equipped. DO NOT replace the thermal expansion valve (TXV) for this condition unless published SI diagnosis proves it to be the root cause. If AC components have been replaced or the refrigerant has been evacuated and recharged and no PAG oil has been added back into the system, it may have a reduced oil level. Please ensure that the vehicle has the proper amount of PAG oil in the system, as low oil level will contribute to the evaporator freezing up. To return to a nominal level of PAG oil, it may be necessary to flush the system. Refer to SI for flushing instructions. Correction The Tech 2(R) must have software version 27.009 or later. Recalibrate the BCM with new software using the Tech 2(R) and following the procedure below. This updated software will control the cycling of the compressor clutch to prevent freezing of the evaporator core. Install the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle and power on. Turn ON the ignition, with engine OFF. Select "Diagnostics." Build the vehicle. Select "Body Control Module". Select "Module Setup". Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 07-01-38-005 > Jul > 07 > A/C Poor Performance/Not Cold Enough > Page 14749 Then press "BCM Setup" soft key to execute update. When completed command state will change from "None" to "BCM Setup". Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 14754 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 14755 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14756 Center Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14759 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14760 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14761 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14762 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14763 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14764 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14765 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14766 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14767 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14768 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14769 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14770 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14771 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14772 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14773 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14774 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14775 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14776 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14777 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14778 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14779 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14780 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14781 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14782 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14783 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14784 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14785 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14786 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14787 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14788 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14789 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14790 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14791 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14792 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14793 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14794 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14795 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14796 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14797 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14798 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14799 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14800 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14801 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14802 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14803 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14804 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14805 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14806 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14807 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14808 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14809 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14810 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14811 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14812 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14813 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14814 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14815 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14816 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14817 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14818 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14819 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14820 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14821 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14822 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14823 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14824 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14825 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14826 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14827 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14828 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14829 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14830 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14831 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14832 Body Control Module: Connector Views Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14833 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14834 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14835 Body Control Module (BCM) C4 Splice Pack SP200 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System Body Control Module: Description and Operation Body Control System BODY CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION BCM OVERVIEW The main features of the body control module (BCM) are: The BCM is the gateway between class 2 serial data circuit and high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. - The BCM controls multiple functions. - The BCM is the power mode master. GATEWAY The body control module (BCM) communicates functionally on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data buses. The BCM is the gateway between the buses and transfers serial data messages from one subnet to another. Physical communication of the BCM with the scan tool is through class 2 serial data circuit. BCM FUNCTIONS The body control module (BCM) performs multiple body control functions. The BCM can control devices directly connected to its outputs based on input information. The BCM evaluates this information and controls certain body control systems by commanding outputs on or off. The BCM inputs can be: Sensors and switches that are directly connected to the BCM - Class 2 serial data messages received from other vehicle systems connected to the class 2 serial data link - GMLAN serial data messages received from other vehicles systems connected to the high speed GMLAN serial data link The BCM is also capable of controlling other vehicle systems that are not directly wired to the BCM. The BCM does this by sending specific messages on the class 2 serial data link or high speed GMLAN serial data link. The system capable of performing the required function will respond to the BCM messages. Some of the other system functions that BCM controls or contributes to are: Audible warnings-Refer to Audible Warnings Description and Operation in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. - Exterior lighting control-Refer to Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Interior lighting-Refer to Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Automatic door locks-Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors. - Keyless entry-Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry. - Theft deterrent-Refer to Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent. - Wipers/washers-Refer to Wiper/Washer System Description and Operation in Wipers/Washer Systems. - Rear defogger-Refer to Rear Window Defogger Description and Operation in Heated Glass Element. - Horn-Refer to Horns System Description and Operation in Horns. POWER MODE The BCM is the power mode master (PMM). Refer to Power Mode Description and Operation for more information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 14838 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Power Mode POWER MODE DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SERIAL DATA POWER MODE On vehicles that have several control modules connected by serial data circuits, one module is the power mode master (PMM). On this vehicle the PMM is the body control module (BCM). The BCM monitors Ignition 1 (Run/Crank), Ignition 2 (Acc/Run), and Ignition 3 (Run) signals from the ignition switch, and the engine run flag (ERF) message from the engine control module (ECM) in order to determine the present power mode. To determine the correct power mode the BCM uses: The state of these signals - The sequence of switch closures received by the BCM - The status of the engine run flag Correct Ignition Switch Inputs The chart indicates the power modes detected and transmitted by the BCM. The power mode message is a periodic with event message type and is transmitted by the PMM at every 2 seconds on class 2 link and at every 250 ms on high speed GMLAN link. The power modes are identical transmitted on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data circuits with the exception of retained accessory power (RAP). RAP is transmitted only on class 2 and it is mapped on high speed GMLAN as Off Awake. FAIL-SAFE OPERATION Since the operation of the vehicle systems depends on the power mode, there is a fail-safe plan in place should the body control module (BCM) fail to send a power mode message. The fail-safe plan covers modules with discrete ignition signal inputs as well as those modules using exclusively serial data control of power mode. SERIAL DATA MESSAGE The modules that depend exclusively on serial data messages for power modes stay in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message until they receive the engine status from the powertrain control module (PCM). If the BCM fails, the modules monitor the serial data circuit for the engine run flag serial data. If the engine run flag serial data is true, indicating that the engine is running, the modules fail-safe to Run. In this state the modules and their subsystems can support all operator requirements. If the engine run flag serial data is false, indicating that the engine is not running, the modules fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. DISCRETE IGNITION SIGNALS Those modules that have discrete ignition signal inputs also remain in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message received on the serial data circuits. They then check the state of their discrete ignition input to determine the current valid state. If the discrete ignition input is active, B+, the modules will fail-safe to the RUN power mode. If the discrete ignition input is not active, open or 0 voltage, the modules will fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 14839 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Retained Accessory Power (RAP) RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SERIAL DATA CONTROL OF RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) Retained accessory power (RAP) is a vehicle power mode that permits the operation of selected customer convenience items after the ignition switch is turned OFF. These selected items will remain in operation until a passenger compartment door or liftgate is opened or until the RAP function timer reaches its shut-off limit. The class 2 RAP power mode is mapped to GMLAN serial data circuit as Off Awake power mode. Refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation for more information on data link communications. The BCM monitors the ignition switch signals, battery condition and the doors status to determine whether RAP should be initiated. The modules that support the RAP power mode will operate the systems under their control as required by their RAP power mode strategy. RAP will end when one of the following conditions is met: The BCM detects the opening of a passenger compartment door. - The RAP timer expires. - The battery capacity decreases below a prescribed limit. - Any other ignition switch state is chosen. The function supported in the RAP power mode is the operation of the radio. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Body Control Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT Begin the system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. The Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will provide the following information: - The identification of the control modules which are not communicating. - The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures The use of the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will identify the correct procedures to begin vehicle diagnosis. These must be performed before system DTC or symptom diagnosis. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 14842 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures A Symptoms - Computer/Integrating Systems SYMPTOMS IMPORTANT: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: - There are no DTCs set. - The control modules can communicate via the serial data links. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to: - Data Link Communications Description and Operation - Body Control System Description and Operation - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation Visual/Physical Inspection Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. - Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: - Scan Tool Does Not Power Up See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Does Not Power Up - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device - Power Mode Mismatch See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Power Mode Mismatch - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After TimeOut See: Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Time-Out - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative See: Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 14843 Step 1 - Step 6 Step 1 - Step 6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 14844 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BODY CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Rotate the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the radio bezel. 3. Disconnect the body control module (BCM) electrical harnesses. 4. Remove the BCM from the instrument panel (I/P) retainer: 1. Pry the BCM tabs from the locking tabs on the underside of the restraint. 2. Slide the BCM out of the retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the BCM. 2. Install the radio bezel. 3. Slide the BCM tabs into the slots in the I/P retainer until the tabs lock into place. 4. Connect the electrical connectors. 5. Program a new or a remanufactured BCM. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Technical Service Bulletins Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-51-002 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: New Primer For TPO Fascias and Affected Cleaning Process of Painting Operation Models: 2009 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician that General Motors has made a change in the primer it uses for TPO plastic for service parts. This new primer comes in several different colors from five different suppliers. This change affects the cleaning process of the painting operation. The new process is as follows. 1. Wash with soap and water. 2. Clean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). Check with your paint supplier for product recommendations. 3. Scuff sand per your paint suppliers recommendations. Note: The use of a solvent-type cleaner will soften, or begin to dissolve the primer. Base coats do not have any affect on this primer. 4. Reclean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). All fascias, with the exception of the Corvette, Camaro, and Cadillac XLR, are made of TPO. You may find other TPO parts with this primer. If the technician has a question as to the type of plastic they are painting, inspect the back of the part for the plastic symbol (TPO). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox) Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox) Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 2. Remove the fascia to fender screw from inside the wheelhouse. 3. Remove the fascia to wheelhouse liner push-in retainers (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox) > Page 14853 4. Remove the fascia to vehicle push-in retainers (3, 5). 5. Gently pull the fascia away from the vehicle, near the headlamps, to disengage the radiator grille strap to headlamp retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox) > Page 14854 6. Pull the fascia away from the vehicle, by the fender, to disengage. 7. Slide the fascia forward off the vehicle. 8. Disconnect the fog lamp from the fog lamp housing, if equipped. Installation Procedure 1. Position the front fascia assembly (3) to the vehicle. 2. Connect the fog lamp to the fog lamp housing, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox) > Page 14855 3. Push the fascia in at the fender to secure. 4. Secure the radiator grille strap retainer to the headlamp by pushing inward until secure. 5. Install the fascia to vehicle push-in retainers (3, 5). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox) > Page 14856 6. Install the fascia to the wheelhouse liner push-in retainers (1). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 7. Install the fascia to fender screw from inside the wheelhouse. Tighten the screw to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 8. Install the fascia to the tie bar push-in retainers (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox) > Page 14857 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Fascia Grille Replacement Fascia Grille Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front fascia assembly (3). Refer to Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox) (See: Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox)). 2. Remove the front fascia support. Refer to Fascia Support Replacement - Front Bumper (See: Fascia Support Replacement - Front Bumper) . 3. Remove the radiator grille strap (2) from the back of the grille by depressing the grille strap fingers and pushing through the front of the grille. 4. Remove the screw from the bottom center of the grille. 5. Remove the grille from the front fascia by releasing the retainers around the perimeter of the grille. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox) > Page 14858 1. Position the grille to the front fascia. 2. Install the grille to the front fascia by pushing in to secure the retainers around the perimeter of the grille. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the screw to the bottom center of the grille. Tighten the screw to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 4. Install the radiator grille strap into the front fascia and grille by pushing the fingers on the strap into the grille and fascia until fully secured. 5. Install the front fascia support. Refer to Fascia Support Replacement - Front Bumper (See: Fascia Support Replacement - Front Bumper) . 6. Install the front fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox) (See: Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox)) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox) > Page 14859 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Fascia Support Replacement - Front Bumper Fascia Support Replacement - Front Bumper Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox) (See: Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox)) . 2. Remove the fascia support to grille screws (1). 3. Remove the fascia support from the fascia assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Position the fascia support to the fascia assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox) > Page 14860 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the fascia support to grille screws (1). Tighten the screw to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Install the front fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox) (See: Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox)) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Polypropylene Energy Absorber Replacement Front Bumper Reinforcement: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Polypropylene Energy Absorber Replacement Bulletin No.: 07-08-63-001 Date: April 17, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Repair of Polypropylene Energy Absorbers Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to change the repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 63-20-02 (Section 8 - Body and Accessories). Because the energy absorbers are relatively low in cost to replace, it is now more cost efficient to replace the energy absorbers whenever they are damaged. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14865 Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Impact Bar Replacement - Front Bumper Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox) (See: Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox)) . 2. Remove the energy absorber. Refer to Energy Absorber Replacement - Front (Equinox) (See: Front Bumper Shock Absorber/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the bolts (2). 4. Remove the impact bar from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the impact bar to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14866 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the bolts (2). Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Install the energy absorber. Refer to Energy Absorber Replacement - Front (Equinox) (See: Front Bumper Shock Absorber/Service and Repair) . 4. Install the front fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox) (See: Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox)) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Shock Absorber > System Information > Service and Repair Front Bumper Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Energy Absorber Replacement - Front (Equinox) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox) (See: Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox)) . 2. Remove the push-in retainers. 3. Remove the energy absorber from the impact bar. Installation Procedure 1. Install the energy absorber to the impact bar. 2. Install the push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Shock Absorber > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 14870 3. Install the front fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox) (See: Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Equinox)) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Technical Service Bulletins Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-51-002 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: New Primer For TPO Fascias and Affected Cleaning Process of Painting Operation Models: 2009 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician that General Motors has made a change in the primer it uses for TPO plastic for service parts. This new primer comes in several different colors from five different suppliers. This change affects the cleaning process of the painting operation. The new process is as follows. 1. Wash with soap and water. 2. Clean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). Check with your paint supplier for product recommendations. 3. Scuff sand per your paint suppliers recommendations. Note: The use of a solvent-type cleaner will soften, or begin to dissolve the primer. Base coats do not have any affect on this primer. 4. Reclean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). All fascias, with the exception of the Corvette, Camaro, and Cadillac XLR, are made of TPO. You may find other TPO parts with this primer. If the technician has a question as to the type of plastic they are painting, inspect the back of the part for the plastic symbol (TPO). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Reflector Replacement Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Fascia Reflector Replacement Rear Bumper Fascia Reflector Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear fascia. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper (See: Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper) . 2. Remove the reflector to fascia nut. 3. Remove the reflector from the fascia. Installation Procedure 1. Position the reflector to the rear fascia. Notice: Refer toFastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Reflector Replacement > Page 14878 2. Install the reflector to fascia nut. Tighten the nut to 6 N.m (53 lb in). 3. Install the rear fascia. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper (See: Fascia Replacement Rear Bumper) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Reflector Replacement > Page 14879 Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear fascia bolt covers. 2. Remove the rear fascia bolts. 3. Remove the screw from inside the rear wheelhouse. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Reflector Replacement > Page 14880 4. Remove the wheelhouse liner to rear fascia push-in retainers (1). 5. Remove the push-in retainers (1) from the bottom of the fascia. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Reflector Replacement > Page 14881 6. Pull the fascia out at the rear wheelhouse liner to disengage. 7. Pull rearward from the vehicle to remove. Installation Procedure 1. Position the rear fascia to the vehicle. 2. Install the push-in retainers (1) to the bottom of the fascia. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Reflector Replacement > Page 14882 3. Install the wheelhouse liner to the fascia push-in retainers (1). 4. Install the screws from inside the rear wheelhouse. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 5. Install the rear fascia screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 6. Install the rear fascia bolt covers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Polypropylene Energy Absorber Replacement Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Polypropylene Energy Absorber Replacement Bulletin No.: 07-08-63-001 Date: April 17, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Repair of Polypropylene Energy Absorbers Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to change the repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 63-20-02 (Section 8 - Body and Accessories). Because the energy absorbers are relatively low in cost to replace, it is now more cost efficient to replace the energy absorbers whenever they are damaged. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14887 Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Impact Bar Replacement - Rear Bumper Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper (See: Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper) . 2. Remove the energy absorber. Refer to Energy Absorber Replacement - Rear (See: Rear Bumper Shock Absorber/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the bolts. 4. Remove the impact bar from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the impact bar to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14888 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the bolts. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Install the energy absorber. Refer to Energy Absorber Replacement - Rear (See: Rear Bumper Shock Absorber/Service and Repair) . 4. Install the rear fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper (See: Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Shock Absorber > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Bumper Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Energy Absorber Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper (See: Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper) . 2. Remove the push-in retainers. 3. Remove the energy absorber from the impact bar. Installation Procedure 1. Install the energy absorber to the impact bar. 2. Install the push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Shock Absorber > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 14892 3. Install the rear fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper (See: Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cabin Ventilation Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Ventilation Duct: Service and Repair AIR INLET ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the HVAC module. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the recirculation actuator. 3. Remove the recirculation actuator screws. 4. Remove the recirculation actuator. 5. Remove the air inlet assembly screws. 6. Remove the air inlet assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cabin Ventilation Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 14896 1. Install the air inlet assembly. 2. Install the air inlet assembly screws. Tighten the screws to 11.5 N.m (13 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Install the recirculation actuator. 4. Install the recirculation actuator screws. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). 5. Install the electrical connector to the recirculation actuator. 6. Install the HVAC module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Grille Panel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the wiper arms. Refer to Wiper Arm Replacement in Wipers/Washer Systems. 2. Remove the right side air inlet grille push-in retainers. 3. Remove the right side air inlet grille from the vehicle. 4. Remove the left side air inlet grille push-in retainers. 5. Lift up the left side air inlet grille and disconnect the front washer nozzle hose from the front nozzles. 6. Depress the nozzle retaining tabs on the under side of the air inlet grille and pull front nozzles up. 7. Remove the left side air inlet grille. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 14901 1. Install the front washer nozzles into the air inlet grille. 2. Connect the washer nozzle hose to the front washer nozzles. 3. Install the left side air inlet grille. 4. Install the right side air inlet grille. 5. Install the push-in retainers. 6. Install the wiper arms. Refer to Wiper Arm Replacement in Wipers/Washer Systems. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Replacement - Front Outside Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door handle bolt cap. 2. Remove the door handle screw through the door shut face. 3. Remove the door handle cap. 4. Remove the door handle by sliding rearward and pulling away from the door. 5. Remove the gasket, if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 14909 1. Install the gasket, if necessary. 2. Install the handle by placing into position and sliding rearward ensuring to engage the outside handle lever. 3. Install the door handle cap. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 4. Install the door handle screw through door shut face. Tighten the screw to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 5. Install the door handle bolt cap. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Replacement - Inside Removal Procedure 1. Remove the screw from the center of the inside handle pocket. 2. Slide the handle forward and pull outward to expose the lock rods. 3. Using a thin-bladed tool, disengage the rods from the retaining clips. 4. If the vehicle is equipped with power windows, disconnect the electrical connector from the switch by depressing the retaining tabs. Installation Procedure 1. Connect the electrical connector to the power window switch. 2. Position the inside handle to the door trim and partially seat the rear tangs. 3. Lift the lock rods into the retaining clips. Secure the rods into the handle by latching the clips over the rods. 4. Push the handle into the trim panel and slide rearward to fully engage the tangs. Verify that the rods clear the water deflector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 14913 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Install the screw in the handle. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 6. Verify the correct installation of the lock rods by testing for smooth movement of the lock button and of the inside handle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Hinge Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure Caution: In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS. 1. Remove the front fender. Refer to Fender Replacement - Front (See: Fender/Front Fender/Service and Repair) in Body Front End. 2. Mark around the hinge location with a soft marker for installation alignment purposes. 3. Support the door. 4. With the door fully latched on the striker, remove the hinge to door bolts. 5. Remove the hinge to body bolts and remove the hinges one at a time. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 14917 1. Position the hinge to the vehicle with the marks made prior to removal. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the hinge to door bolts. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Install the hinge to body bolts. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Inspect the door for proper alignment. Refer to Door Adjustment - Front (See: Adjustments) . 5. Install the front fender. Refer to Fender Replacement - Front (See: Fender/Front Fender/Service and Repair) in Body Front End. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Front Door Latch: Customer Interest Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold > Page 14926 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Front Door Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold > Page 14932 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 14933 Front Door Latch: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-64-002B Date: 060403 Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 14934 The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-64-002B Date: 060403 Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 14935 Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 14936 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14937 Front Door Latch: Diagrams Door Latch - Driver Door Latch - Front Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14938 Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Latch Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door window regulator module. Refer to Window Regulator Replacement Front Door (See: Front Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair) . 2. Disconnect the outside handle rod from the latch. 3. Remove the outside handle bracket. 4. Disconnect the lock cylinder rod from the latch. 5. Disconnect the latch electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14939 6. Disconnect the latch arm from the window regulator module by depressing the tab and sliding rearward. 7. Disconnect the inside handle rod and lock button rod by twisting the latch. 8. Remove the latch from the latch arm by twisting. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14940 1. Install the latch to the latch arm by twisting. 2. Connect the inside handle rod and lock button rod by aligning the rods with clips and twisting the latch. 3. Connect the latch arm to the window regulator module by depressing the table and sliding rearward. 4. Connect the latch electrical connector. 5. Connect the lock cylinder rod to the latch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14941 6. Install the outside handle bracket. 7. Connect the outside handle rod to the latch. 8. Install the front door window regulator module. Refer to Window Regulator Replacement - Front Door (See: Front Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Limiter > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Limiter: Service and Repair Door Check Link Replacement - Front Removal Procedure Caution: In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS. 1. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the front door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Front Door in Entertainment. 3. Remove the check link bolts at the hinge pillar. 4. Remove the check link nuts from the door frame. 5. Remove the check link from the door through the speaker opening. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Limiter > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 14945 Installation Procedure 1. Install the check link to the door frame. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the nuts to the check link. Tighten the nuts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 3. Install the check link bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Install the front door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Front Door in Entertainment. 5. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Power Mirror Switch Replacement Power Mirror Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Use a flat blade tool to remove the left front air deflector. 2. Disconnect the electrical connection from the power mirror switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14950 3. Remove the power mirror switch. Installation Procedure 1. Install the power mirror switch to the air deflector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14951 2. Connect the electrical connection to the power mirror switch 3. Push the air deflector to the instrument panel until the air deflector is seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14952 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Power Window Switch Replacement Power Window Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the console shift lever bezel. Refer to Trim Bezel Replacement - Center (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. 2. Remove the screws from the power window switch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14953 3. Remove the switch assembly from the bezel. Installation Procedure 1. Position the switch assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the screws to the switch assembly. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14954 3. Install the console shift lever bezel. Refer to Trim Bezel Replacement - Center (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14955 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Power Window Switch Replacement - Rear Door Power Window Switch Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 2. Use a flat-bladed tool to pry the switch from the door handle assembly. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove the switch. Installation Procedure 1. Connect the electrical connector to the switch.. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14956 2. Position the switch on the door handle assembly. Push in the switch to seat. 3. Install the door trim panel assembly. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14957 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the trim panel upper extension. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Upper Extension (See: ) . 2. Remove the armrest trim cover. 3. Remove the door handle bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14958 4. Remove the door trim panel fasteners. 5. Remove the door trim panel Installation Procedure 1. Align the door trim panel to the door. Press firmly to seat all trim panel fastners. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14959 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the door trim panel fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Install the door handle bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14960 4. Install the armrest trim cover. 5. Install the trim panel upper extension. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Upper Extension (See: ). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14961 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Power Mirror Switch Replacement Power Mirror Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Use a flat blade tool to remove the left front air deflector. 2. Disconnect the electrical connection from the power mirror switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14962 3. Remove the power mirror switch. Installation Procedure 1. Install the power mirror switch to the air deflector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14963 2. Connect the electrical connection to the power mirror switch 3. Push the air deflector to the instrument panel until the air deflector is seated. Power Window Switch Replacement Power Window Switch Replacement Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14964 1. Remove the console shift lever bezel. Refer to Trim Bezel Replacement - Center (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. 2. Remove the screws from the power window switch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14965 3. Remove the switch assembly from the bezel. Installation Procedure 1. Position the switch assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the screws to the switch assembly. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14966 3. Install the console shift lever bezel. Refer to Trim Bezel Replacement - Center (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. Power Window Switch Replacement - Rear Door Power Window Switch Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14967 2. Use a flat-bladed tool to pry the switch from the door handle assembly. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove the switch. Installation Procedure 1. Connect the electrical connector to the switch.. 2. Position the switch on the door handle assembly. Push in the switch to seat. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14968 3. Install the door trim panel assembly. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the trim panel upper extension. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Upper Extension (See: ) . 2. Remove the armrest trim cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14969 3. Remove the door handle bezel. 4. Remove the door trim panel fasteners. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14970 5. Remove the door trim panel Installation Procedure 1. Align the door trim panel to the door. Press firmly to seat all trim panel fastners. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the door trim panel fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14971 3. Install the door handle bezel. 4. Install the armrest trim cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14972 5. Install the trim panel upper extension. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Upper Extension (See: ). Trim Panel Replacement - Upper Extension Trim Panel Replacement - Upper Extension Removal Procedure 1. Gently pull at the top end of the extension panel cover to disengage the attaching clips. 2. Lift the extension panel out from behind the door trim panel. 3. While holding the extension panel, disconnect the electrical connector from the speaker. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14973 4. While holding the extension panel, disconnect the electrical connector from the speaker. Installation Procedure 1. Connect the electrical connector to the speaker. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14974 2. Position the extension panel over the door trim panel with the extension panel mounting tabs behind the door trim panel. 3. Gently push on the extension panel to engage the attaching clips. Water Deflector Replacement - Front Door Water Deflector Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer toTrim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: ) . 2. Remove the front door water deflector, starting at the top rear corner, pull downward. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Power Mirror Switch Replacement > Page 14975 1. Align the locating tabs near the top edge of the water deflector to the door structure. 2. Stretch the water deflector tight across the top edge and set in place. 3. Wet-out adhesive around the entire perimeter of the water deflector to ensure proper sealing. 4. Install the front door trim panel front. Refer toTrim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: ) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Striker: Adjustments Door Striker Adjustment - Front Door To determine if striker adjustment is required, proceed as follows: Caution: In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS. 1. Ensure the door is properly aligned within the door opening before proceeding with the striker adjustment. 2. Close the door onto the striker and note if the door drags on the striker causing the door to move upward or downward upon contact with the striker. Also note the closing effort to fully engage the latch. 3. Using a grease pencil, mark around the striker for reference of the original position. Loosen the striker. 4. Move the striker to eliminate drag on the striker and door latch and to achieve the proper door position within the door opening. Start with the up/down position, then position the striker to achieve proper alignment to the door opening. Set the in/out adjustment for the proper door seal engagement making sure the door closing efforts are correct. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Tighten the striker bolts. Tighten the door striker bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments > Page 14979 Front Door Striker: Service and Repair Door Striker Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure Caution: In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS. 1. Using a grease pencil, mark around the striker for installation purposes. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the striker. Installation Procedure 1. Loosely install the striker with the bolts. 2. Align the striker with the marks made prior to removal. 3. Tighten the bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments > Page 14980 4. Inspect the door closing and align the striker as required. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Tighten the striker bolts. Tighten the door striker bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Front Door Opening Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. 2. Remove the front door weatherstrip seal from the door flange by starting at the seal joint at the bottom of the door opening. 3. Separate the seal at the joint, note the position for installation. 4. Remove the seal from the door flange. Installation Procedure 1. Position the seal over the flange in the position noted in the removal procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 14984 2. Press the seal over the flange firmly to fully secure. 3. Locate an exposed end of the ripcord at the seal joint and pull the ripcord around the door opening. If the seal lip is positioned under any door trim, this process will bring the seal lip over the door trim and headliner. 4. Secure the seal lip under the end of the instrument panel. 5. Install the front door carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Window Run Channel Replacement Front Door Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Front Door (See: Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the front door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer to Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front ( See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front) . 3. Remove the outside rearview mirror. Refer to Mirror Replacement (See: Mirrors/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Doors) . 4. Remove the front door frame applique. Refer to Door Frame Applique Replacement - Front () . 5. Remove the window run channel bolts. 6. Remove the front door window run channel. Starting from the rear corner of the door, remove the seal from the door header flange. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 14990 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Install the window run channel seal to the door header flange, starting from the rear corner. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 2. Install the front door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer to Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front ( See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front) . 3. Install the front door frame applique. Refer to Door Frame Applique Replacement - Front () . 4. Install the outside rearview mirror. Refer to Mirror Replacement (See: Mirrors/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Doors) . 5. Install the front door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Front Door (See: Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 14991 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Lower the front door window. 2. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner (See: Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner) . 4. Starting at one end, carefully pull the window weatherstrip run channel assembly from the door frame. Installation Procedure 1. Install the window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 14992 1. Starting at the lower rear corner of the window opening, press the weatherstrip run channel onto the door flange. 2. Ensure the channel is fully secured into the upper corners of the door frame. 2. Install the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner (See: Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner) . 3. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 14993 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Outer Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Outer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the belt seal retaining screw at the rear edge of the door. 2. Remove the outside rearview mirror. Refer to Mirror Replacement (See: Mirrors/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Doors) . 3. Remove the outer belt seal by lifting up on the seal starting at the rear and working forward. Installation Procedure 1. Align the outer belt seal fastener location with the hole in the door structure and outer panel retaining tabs. 2. Starting at the rear of the belt seal, push the belt seal down onto the flange until fully seated. 3. Install the outside rearview mirror. Refer to Mirror Replacement (See: Mirrors/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Doors) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 14994 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 4. Install the outer belt seal retaining screw. Tighten the screw to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 14995 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the inner belt seal from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Install the inner belt seal. 2. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement Side Front Door (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams Front Door Window Motor: Diagrams Window Motor - Driver Window Motor - Front Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 14999 Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair Window Regulator Motor Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the water deflector. Refer to Water Deflector Replacement - Front Door (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the front door window regulator motor. 4. Remove the window from the regulator. 1. Raise the window. 2. Tape the window into position. 5. Remove the front door window regulator motor screws. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15000 1. Align the front door window regulator motor assembly to the front door window regulator. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the front door window regulator motor to regulator screws. Tighten the front door window regulator motor to door screws to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the front door window regulator motor. 4. Install the water deflector. Refer to Water Deflector Replacement - Front Door (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 5. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door outside handle. Refer to Door Handle Replacement - Front Outside (See: Front Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the front door window run channel assembly. Refer to Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door (See: Front Door Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door) . 3. Remove the front door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Front Door in Entertainment. 4. Disconnect the mirror electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the 4 electrical connector rosebuds (2 at the mirror and 2 under the speaker). 6. Loosen the 2 rear module bolts. 7. Remove the 4 remaining module bolts. 8. Remove the 3 latch bolts from the door shut face. 9. Disconnect the door harness at the door jamb. 10. Remove the window regulator module from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 15004 1. Install the window regulator module into the door. 2. Connect the door harness at the door jamb. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the 3 latch bolts to the door shut face. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Install the 4 module bolts. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 5. Connect the 4 electrical connector rosebuds (2 at the mirror and 2 under the speaker). 6. Connect the mirror electrical connector. 7. Install the front door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Front Door in Entertainment. 8. Install the front door window run channel assembly. Refer to Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door (See: Front Door Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door) . 9. Install the front door outside handle. Refer to Door Handle Replacement - Front Outside (See: Front Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Replacement - Rear Outside Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door handle bolt cap. 2. Remove the door handle screw through the door shut face. 3. Remove the door handle cap. 4. Remove the door handle by sliding rearward and pulling away from the door. 5. Remove the gasket, if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 15010 1. Install the gasket, if necessary. 2. Install the handle by placing into position and sliding rearward ensuring to engage the outside handle lever. 3. Install the door handle cap. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 4. Install the door handle screw through the door shut face. Tighten the screw to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 5. Install the door handle bolt cap. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Hinge: Service and Repair Hinge Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure Caution: In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS. 1. Mark around the hinge location with a soft marker for installation alignment purposes. 2. Support the door. 3. With the door fully latched on the striker, remove the hinge to door bolts. 4. Remove the hinge to body bolts and remove the hinges one at a time. Installation Procedure 1. Position the hinge to the vehicle with the marks made prior to removal. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 15014 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the hinge to door bolts. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Install the hinge to body bolts. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Inspect the door for proper alignment. Refer to Door Adjustment - Rear (See: Adjustments) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Rear Door Latch: Customer Interest Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold > Page 15023 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Rear Door Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold > Page 15029 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 15030 Rear Door Latch: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-64-002B Date: 060403 Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 15031 The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-64-002B Date: 060403 Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 15032 Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 15033 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 15034 Rear Door Latch: Diagrams Door Latch - LR Door Latch - RR Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 15035 Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair Latch Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door window regulator module. Refer to Window Regulator Replacement Rear Door (See: Rear Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair) . 2. Disconnect the outside handle rod from the latch. 3. Remove the outside handle bracket. 4. Disconnect the latch electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 15036 5. Disconnect the latch arm from the window regulator module by depressing the tab and sliding rearward. 6. Disconnect the inside handle rod and lock button rod by twisting the latch. 7. Remove the latch from the latch arm by twisting. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 15037 1. Install the latch to the latch arm by twisting. 2. Connect the inside handle rod and lock button rod by aligning the rods with clips and twisting the latch. 3. Connect the latch arm to the window regulator module by depressing the table and sliding rearward. 4. Connect the latch electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 15038 5. Install the outside handle bracket. 6. Connect the outside handle rod to the latch. 7. Install the rear door window regulator module. Refer to Window Regulator Replacement - Rear Door (See: Rear Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Limiter > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Limiter: Service and Repair Door Check Link Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure Caution: In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS. 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer toTrim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the rear door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Rear Door in Entertainment. 3. Remove the check link bolts at the hinge pillar. 4. Remove the check link nuts from the door frame. 5. Remove the check link from the door through the speaker opening. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Limiter > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 15042 Installation Procedure 1. Install the check link to the door frame. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the nuts to the check link. Tighten the nuts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 3. Install the check link bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Install the rear door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Rear Door in Entertainment. 5. Install the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the armrest cover. 2. Remove the door handle bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door > Page 15047 3. Remove the door trim panel fasteners. 4. Remove the door trim panel. Installation Procedure 1. Align the door trim panel to the door. Press firmly to seat all trim panel fasteners. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door > Page 15048 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the door trim panel fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Install the door handle bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door > Page 15049 4. Install the armrest cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door > Page 15050 Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Trim Panel Replacement - Upper Extension TRIM PANEL REPLACEMENT - UPPER EXTENSION REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Gently pull at the top end of the extension panel cover to disengage the attaching clips. 2. Lift the extension panel out from behind the door trim panel. 3. While holding the extension panel, disconnect the electrical connector from the speaker. 4. While holding the extension panel, disconnect the electrical connector from the speaker. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door > Page 15051 1. Connect the electrical connector to the speaker. 2. Position the extension panel over the door trim panel with the extension panel mounting tabs behind the door trim panel. 3. Gently push on the extension panel to engage the attaching clips. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door > Page 15052 Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Water Deflector Replacement - Rear Door Water Deflector Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: ) . 2. Remove the rear door water deflector, starting at the top rear corner, pull the water deflector away from the door structure. Installation Procedure 1. Align the locating tabs near the top edge of the water deflector to the door structure. 2. Stretch the water deflector tight across the top edge and set in place. 3. Wet-out adhesive around the entire perimeter of the water deflector to ensure proper sealing. 4. Install the door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: ) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Rear Door Striker: Adjustments Door Striker Adjustment - Rear Door To determine if striker adjustment is required, proceed as follows: Caution: In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS. 1. Ensure the door is properly aligned within the door opening before proceeding with the striker adjustment. 2. Close the door onto the striker and note if the door drags on the striker causing the door to move upward or downward upon contact with the striker. Also note the closing effort to fully engage the latch. 3. Using a grease pencil, mark around the striker for reference of the original position. Loosen the striker. 4. Move the striker to eliminate drag on the striker and door latch and to achieve the proper door position within the door opening. Start with the up/down position, then position the striker to achieve proper alignment to the door opening. Set the in/out adjustment for the proper door seal engagement making sure the door closing efforts are correct. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Tighten the striker bolts. Tighten the door striker bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments > Page 15056 Rear Door Striker: Service and Repair Door Striker Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure Caution: In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS. 1. Using a grease pencil, mark around the striker for installation purposes. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the striker. Installation Procedure 1. Install the striker loosely with the bolts. 2. Align the striker with the marks made prior to removal. 3. Tighten the bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments > Page 15057 4. Inspect the door closing and align the striker as required. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Tighten the striker bolts. Tighten the door striker bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Rear Door Opening Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. 2. Remove the rear door weatherstrip seal from the door flange by starting at the seal joint at the bottom of the door opening. 3. Separate the seal at the joint, note the position for installation. 4. Remove the seal from the door flange. Installation Procedure 1. Position the seal over the flange in the position noted in the removal procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15061 2. Press the seal over the flange firmly to fully secure. 3. Locate an exposed end of the ripcord at the seal joint and pull the ripcord around the door opening. If the seal lip is positioned under any door trim, this process will bring the seal lip over the door trim and headliner. 4. Install the rear door carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Lower the rear door window. 2. Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner (See: Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner) . 4. Starting at one end, carefully pull the window weatherstrip run channel assembly from the door frame. Installation Procedure 1. Align the notch in the window weatherstrip seal to the fixed window post and press the weatherstrip onto the window flange. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 15067 1. Press the weatherstrip run channel onto the door flange. 2. Ensure the channel is fully secured into the upper corners of the door frame. 2. Install the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner (See: Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner) . 3. Install the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 15068 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Window Run Channel Replacement Rear Door Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Rear Door (See: Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the rear door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer toWindow Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear ( See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear) . 3. Remove the rear door window run channel and fixed window assembly. 1. Starting from the front corner of the door, remove the seal from the door header flange. 2. Remove the seal assembly from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 15069 1. Install the window run channel seal assembly. 1. Place the seal assembly into the door frame. 2. Place the seal assembly on the door header. 3. Install the seal to the door header flange, starting from the front corner. 2. Install the rear door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer to Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear (See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear) . 3. Install the rear door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Rear Door (See: Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 15070 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Outer Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Outer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the belt seal retaining screw at the front edge of the door. 2. Remove the outer belt seal by lifting up on the seal starting at the rear and working forward. Installation Procedure 1. Align the outer belt seal fastener location with the hole in the door structure and outer panel retaining tabs. 2. Starting at the rear of the belt seal, push the belt seal down onto the flange until fully seated. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 15071 3. Install the outer belt seal retaining screw. Tighten the screw to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 15072 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the inner belt seal from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Install the inner belt seal. 2. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement Side Rear Door (See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams Rear Door Window Motor: Diagrams Window Motor - LR Window Motor - RR Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15076 Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair Window Regulator Motor Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the water deflector. Refer to Water Deflector Replacement - Rear Door (See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the rear door window regulator motor. 4. Remove the rear door window regulator motor to regulator screws. 5. Remove the rear door window regulator motor assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the rear door window regulator motor assembly to the rear door window regulator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15077 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the rear door window regulator motor to regulator screws. Tighten the rear door window regulator motor to regulator screws to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the rear door window regulator motor. 4. Install the water deflector. Refer to Water Deflector Replacement - Rear Door (See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 5. Install the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door outside handle. Refer to Door Handle Replacement - Rear Outside (See: Rear Door Handle/Rear Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the rear door window run channel assembly. Refer to Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door (See: Rear Door Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door) . 3. Remove the rear door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Rear Door in Entertainment. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector rosebuds. 5. Loosen the 2 rear module bolts. 6. Remove the 4 remaining module bolts. 7. Remove the 3 latch bolts from the door shut face. 8. Disconnect the door harness at the door jamb. 9. Remove the window regulator module from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 15081 1. Install the window regulator module into the door. 2. Connect the door harness at the door jamb. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the 3 latch bolts to the door shut face. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Install the 4 module bolts. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 5. Connect the electrical connector rosebuds. 6. Install the rear door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Rear Door in Entertainment. 7. Install the rear door window run channel assembly. Refer to Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door (See: Rear Door Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door) . 8. Install the rear door outside handle. Refer to Door Handle Replacement - Rear Outside (See: Rear Door Handle/Rear Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Door: Service and Repair Fuel Filler Door Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Loosen the bolts from the fuel tank filler door. 2. Disconnect the fuel cap strap from the fuel filler door. 3. Remove the fuel tank filler door by sliding it out of the slots in the quarter panel. Installation Procedure 1. Align fuel tank filler door to quarter panel and slide into slots in the quarter panel. Notice: Refer toFastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15085 2. Install the bolts to the fuel tank filler door. Tighten the fuel tank filler door bolts to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Install the fuel cap strap to the fuel filler door. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Hinge: Service and Repair Hood Hinge Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: When a hood hold open device is being removed or installed, provide alternate support to avoid the possibility of damage to the vehicle or personal injury. 1. Raise and support the hood. 2. Using a grease pencil, mark the position of the hood hinge. 3. With an assistant to support the hood, remove the hinge bolts and the hinge. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15090 1. With an assistant, position the hood hinge to the alignment marks on the vehicle. Notice: Refer toFastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the hinge to hood bolts. Tighten the hinge to hood bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Slowly lower the hood. 4. Inspect the hood alignment. Align the hood if necessary. Refer to Hood Adjustment (See: Adjustments) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Insulator / Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Insulator / Pad: Service and Repair Hood Insulator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the hood with the prop rod. 2. Remove the hood insulator push-in retainers (3) from the hood (1). 3. Remove the hood insulator (2). Installation Procedure 1. Align the hood insulator (2) to the hood (1). 2. Install the hood insulator push-in retainers (3). 3. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: When a hood hold open device is being removed or installed, provide alternate support to avoid the possibility of damage to the vehicle or personal injury. 1. Open and support the hood. 2. Mark the hood latch location to the support bracket with a grease pencil. 3. Remove the hood latch bolts. 4. Disconnect the release cable from the hood latch. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15097 1. Install the hood latch release cable to the hood latch. 2. Position the hood latch to the alignment marks on the support bracket. 3. Install the hood latch bolts. 4. Tighten the hood latch bolts. 5. Slowly close the hood and inspect latch operation. Notice: Refer toFastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 6. Open the hood. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 7. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair Hood Latch Release Cable Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the hood latch. Refer to Hood Latch Replacement (See: Hood Latch/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the release cable from the structure. Note the routing of the hood cable in the engine compartment for installation. 4. Inside the vehicle, remove the left front carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement Front (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. 5. Reposition the carpet aside to expose release handle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15101 6. Pull release handle to up position. 7. Pry back front of handle slip to disengage from the hinge pillar. 8. Remove the hood hinge cable grommet from the front of the dash and remove the cable from the core support. Installation Procedure 1. Install the hood hinge cable and grommet through the front of the dash. 2. Slide the hood release handle into the hinge pillar and secure into place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15102 3. Reposition the carpet and install the front carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. 4. Route the hood cable through the body structure. 5. Install the hood latch. Refer to Hood Latch Replacement (See: Hood Latch/Service and Repair) . 6. Inspect the hood latch cable for proper operation. 7. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Shock / Support: Service and Repair Hood Hold-Open Rod Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: When a hood hold open device is being removed or installed, provide alternate support to avoid the possibility of damage to the vehicle or personal injury. 1. Open and support the hood. 2. Push the rod toward the engine and twist rod out of the bushing. 3. Remove rod from vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. If removed, install bushing into upper tie bar. 2. Install rod by using rod end into bushing and twisting. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15106 3. Remove the hood support. 4. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Removal Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. Pull the hood rear seal from the cowl panel flange. Installation Procedure 1. Position the hood rear seal to the vehicle. 2. Push the hood rear seal onto the cowl panel flange in order to fully seat the seal. 3. Verify hood seal fits flush against the hood rear side seals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Hood Rear > Page 15111 Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Side Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Side Removal Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. Pull the rear side hood seal, located at the end of the hood seal, from the fender. 3. Remove the seal from the vehicle. 4. To clean the area use a lint-free cloth and Varnish Makers and Painters (VMP) naptha or a 50/50 mixture by volume of isopropyl alcohol and water to remove any adhesive. Installation Procedure 1. Prepare the body surface by wiping with isopropyl alcohol. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Hood Rear > Page 15112 2. Remove the protective backing paper from the adhesive on the rear side hood seal. 3. Install the rear side hood seal. 4. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair Window Replacement - Liftgate Tools Required * J 24402-A Glass Sealant (Cold Knife) Remover * J 39032 Stationary Glass Removal Tool * Urethane Adhesive Kit GM P/N 12346392 or Equivalent * Isopropyl Alcohol or equivalent * Cartridge-Type Caulking Gun * Commercial-Type Utility Knife * Razor Blade Scraper * Suction Cups * Plastic Paddle Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Cracked Window Caution in Cautions and Notices. Important: Before cutting out a stationary window, apply a double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the liftgate trim. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) in Body Rear End. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the liftgate window defogger bus bar. Caution: Refer to Defroster Outlet Caution in Cautions and Notices. 4. Cover the following parts to protect from broken glass: * Upper dash pad * Defroster outlets and A/C outlets * Seats and carpeting Caution: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Caution in Cautions and Notices. Important: Keep the cutting edge of the tool against the window. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15117 5. Remove the liftgate window from the urethane adhesive. * Leave a base of urethane approximately 2 mm (0.078 in) on the pinch-weld flange. * The only suitable lubrication is clear water. * Use J 24402-A , J 39032 or equivalent in order to remove the window. 6. With the aid of an assistant, remove the window from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the liftgate window into the opening. Refer to Urethane Adhesive Installation of Stationary Windows (Windshield) (See: Windows and Glass/Windows/Service and Repair/Urethane Adhesive Installation of Stationary Windows (Windshield))Urethane Adhesive Installation of Stationary Windows (Liftgate) (See: Windows and Glass/Windows/Service and Repair/Urethane Adhesive Installation of Stationary Windows (Liftgate)) . 2. Connect the liftgate window defogger electrical connectors to the bus bar. 3. Install the liftgate trim. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) in Body Rear End. 4. Remove the double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 5. Close the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Hinge: Service and Repair Hinge Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure Caution: When a lift gate hold open device is being removed or installed, provide alternate support to avoid the possibility of damage to the vehicle or personal injury. 1. Open the liftgate and support. 2. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Mark the location of the liftgate hinges with a grease pencil. 4. Remove the liftgate struts. Refer to Strut Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support/Service and Repair) . 5. Remove the hinge to liftgate bolts. 6. Remove the hinge to body nuts. 7. Remove the hinges one at a time. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15121 Important: New hinge to body nuts must be used to ensure a proper seal. 1. Align the hinge to body alignments marks made in the removal process and install the nuts. 2. Align the hinge to liftgate alignment marks made in the removal process and install the bolts. 3. Install the liftgate struts. Refer to Strut Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support/Service and Repair) . 4. Lower the liftgate slowly and inspect the alignment. Align as needed. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Tighten the nuts to the liftgate hinges. Tighten the hinge to body nuts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 6. Tighten the hinge to liftgate bolts. Tighten the hinge to liftgate bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 7. Install the liftgate trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Service and Repair Handle Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Disconnect the outside handle swing over clip from the outside handle rod. 4. Remove the liftgate outside handle nuts. 5. Remove the liftgate handle from the liftgate. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15125 1. Position the liftgate handle to the liftgate. Notice: Refer toFastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the nuts to the liftgate handle. Tighten the liftgate handle nuts to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Reconnect the outside handle swing over clip to the outside handle rod. 4. Install the liftgate trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . 5. Close the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the liftgate trim, beginning with the top. 3. Remove the liftgate trim fasteners. 4. Pull to release and remove the trim. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15129 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Install the bottom trim and the fasteners. Tighten the trim screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Close the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Diagrams Liftgate Latch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15133 Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Lock Plate and Rod Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the liftgate latch. 4. Remove the outside handle rod from the outside handle. 5. Remove the bell crank bolts. 6. Remove the bell crank by sliding the latch to crank rod out of the bell crank. 7. Remove the latch bolts. 8. Remove the latch from the liftgate. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15134 1. Position the latch to the liftgate. Notice: Refer toFastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the bolts to the liftgate latch. Tighten the liftgate latch bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 3. Install the crank by sliding the latch to crank rod into the crank. 4. Install the crank bolts. Tighten the crank bolts to 12 N.m (9 lb ft). 5. Install the outside handle rod to the latch and the outside handle. 6. Inspect the function of the latch by performing the following: 1. Reset the liftgate latch by inserting a screwdriver into the mouth of the latch. 2. Pull the outside handle. 7. Connect the electrical connector to the liftgate latch. 8. Install the liftgate trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . 9. Close the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 08-08-66-002A > Jan > 10 > Body - Liftgate Hard To Open In Cold Weather Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: Customer Interest Body - Liftgate Hard To Open In Cold Weather TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-002A Date: January 07, 2010 Subject: Liftgate Hard to Open in Cold Weather (Replace Both Liftgate Struts) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the liftgate is hard to open in cold weather (below 0°C (32°F)). Cause The valve in the strut may be the cause. Correction Replace BOTH liftgate struts. The new strut has a temperature compensating valve that will improve cold weather performance. Refer to Liftgate Strut Replacement in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 08-08-66-002A > Jan > 10 > Body - Liftgate Is Hard to Open in Cold Weather Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: Customer Interest Body - Liftgate Is Hard to Open in Cold Weather TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-002A Date: January 07, 2010 Subject: Liftgate Hard to Open in Cold Weather (Replace Both Liftgate Struts) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the liftgate is hard to open in cold weather (below 0°C (32°F)). Cause The valve in the strut may be the cause. Correction Replace BOTH liftgate struts. The new strut has a temperature compensating valve that will improve cold weather performance. Refer to Liftgate Strut Replacement in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 08-08-66-002A > Jan > 10 > Body - Liftgate Hard To Open In Cold Weather Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Liftgate Hard To Open In Cold Weather TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-002A Date: January 07, 2010 Subject: Liftgate Hard to Open in Cold Weather (Replace Both Liftgate Struts) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the liftgate is hard to open in cold weather (below 0°C (32°F)). Cause The valve in the strut may be the cause. Correction Replace BOTH liftgate struts. The new strut has a temperature compensating valve that will improve cold weather performance. Refer to Liftgate Strut Replacement in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 08-08-66-002A > Jan > 10 > Body - Liftgate Is Hard to Open in Cold Weather Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Liftgate Is Hard to Open in Cold Weather TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-002A Date: January 07, 2010 Subject: Liftgate Hard to Open in Cold Weather (Replace Both Liftgate Struts) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the liftgate is hard to open in cold weather (below 0°C (32°F)). Cause The valve in the strut may be the cause. Correction Replace BOTH liftgate struts. The new strut has a temperature compensating valve that will improve cold weather performance. Refer to Liftgate Strut Replacement in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 15156 Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: Service and Repair Strut Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure Caution: When a lift gate hold open device is being removed or installed, provide alternate support to avoid the possibility of damage to the vehicle or personal injury. 1. Open and support the liftgate. Important: Spring clips should not be removed from the struts. 2. Lift up and partially remove the spring clips on the strut using a small flat-bladed tool. 3. Remove the upper end of the strut from the ball joint. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 15157 4. Remove the lower end of the strut from the ball joint. 5. Remove the strut from the liftgate. Installation Procedure 1. Position the strut to the liftgate. 2. Install the upper end of the strut to the ball joint. Press in to place until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 15158 3. Install the lower end of the strut to the ball joint. Press in to place until fully seated. 4. Remove the support from the liftgate. 5. Close the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Stop > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Stop: Service and Repair Bumper Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the tail lamp. Refer to Tail Lamp Assembly and /or Backup, Sidemarker, Stop, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement (Equinox) Tail Lamp Assembly and /or Backup, Sidemarker, Stop, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement (Torrent) in Lighting Systems. 3. Remove the liftgate bumper bolts. 4. Remove the bumper. Installation Procedure 1. Position the liftgate bumper on the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Stop > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15162 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the bumper bolts. Tighten the bumper bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 3. Install the tail lamp. Refer to Tail Lamp Assembly and /or Backup, Sidemarker, Stop, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement (Equinox) Tail Lamp Assembly and /or Backup, Sidemarker, Stop, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement (Torrent) in Lighting Systems. 4. Close the liftgate. 5. Inspect for proper engagement of the liftgate bumper. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Adjustments Trunk / Liftgate Striker: Adjustments Lock Striker Adjustment Important: Make certain the lift gate is properly aligned within the lift gate opening before proceeding with the striker adjustment. 1. Close the lift gate onto the striker and note if lift gate drags on striker causing the lift gate to move side to side upon contact with the striker. Also note closing efforts to fully engage latch. 2. Mark around the striker with a grease pencil for reference of original position. 3. Loosen striker bolts. 4. Move the striker to eliminate drag on striker and lift gate latch and to achieve proper lift gate position within the lift gate opening. 5. Align the left/right lift gate position, then position the striker to achieve proper alignment to lift gate opening. 6. Align the in/out adjustment for proper lift gate seal engagement making sure the lift gate closing efforts are correct. Notice: Refer toFastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 7. Verify correct alignment of striker and tighten striker bolts. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 15166 Trunk / Liftgate Striker: Service and Repair Lock Striker Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure 1. Open the lift gate. 2. Mark the location of the striker with a grease pencil for installation purposes. 3. Remove bolts from lift gate striker. 4. Remove lift gate striker from vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Align the striker to the marks made in the removal procedure. Notice: Refer toFastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 15167 2. Install the lift gate striker bolts. Tighten the lift gate striker retaining bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Check lift gate closing efforts and align striker as required. Refer to Lock Striker Adjustment (See: Adjustments) . 4. Close the lift gate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15176 Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15177 Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15178 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15179 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15180 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15186 Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15187 Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15188 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15189 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15190 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > 06-08-111-004B - BULLETIN CANCELLATION NOTIFICATION Body Emblem: Technical Service Bulletins 06-08-111-004B - BULLETIN CANCELLATION NOTIFICATION TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 06-08-111-004B Date: September 25, 2009 Subject: Information on Discoloration, Blistering, Peeling or Erosion of Various Exterior Emblems Including Chevy Bowtie (Bulletin Cancelled) Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being cancelled. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-111-004A (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). This bulletin is being cancelled. The information is no longer applicable. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Emblem/Nameplate Replacement - Door (AWD) Body Emblem: Service and Repair Emblem/Nameplate Replacement - Door (AWD) Emblem/Nameplate Replacement - Door (AWD) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Emblem/Nameplate Replacement - Door (AWD) > Page 15198 Body Emblem: Service and Repair Emblem/Nameplate Replacement - Door (GM) Emblem/Nameplate Replacement - Door (GM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Emblem/Nameplate Replacement - Door (AWD) > Page 15199 Body Emblem: Service and Repair Emblem/Nameplate Replacement - Liftgate (Equinox) Emblem/Nameplate Replacement - Liftgate (Equinox) Removal Procedure 1. When replacing an emblem/nameplate do the following: 1. Use tape to protect the mounting surface during removal. 2. Use tape for alignment marks for installation of the emblem/nameplate. 2. To remove an emblem/nameplate, heat the emblem/nameplate using a heat gun. 3. Apply the heat using a circular motion for about 30 seconds holding the heat gun approximately 152 mm (6 in) from the surface. Notice: Refer to Exterior Trim Emblem Removal Notice in Cautions and Notices. 4. Use a plastic, flat-bladed tool to remove the emblem/nameplate from the panel surface. 5. When replacing, remove all adhesive as follows: * For body panels use a 3M(TM) Scotch Brite molding adhesive remover disk 3M(TM) P/N 07501 or equivalent. * For plastic panels use a lint free cloth and Varnish Makers and Painters (VMP) naphtha or a 50/50 mixture by volume of isopropyl alcohol and water to remove the adhesive. Installation Procedure Important: Apply the emblem/nameplate in an environment that is free from dust or other dirt that could come into contact with the sticky backing. Foreign material may cause improper adhesion. 1. Clean the area where the emblem/nameplate will be installed. Use a lint free cloth and Varnish Makers and Painters (VMP) naphtha or a 50/50 mixture by volume of isopropyl alcohol and water to clean the area. 2. Dry the area thoroughly. 3. If the location of the emblem/nameplate has not been marked, apply tape and mark the location as shown below. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Emblem/Nameplate Replacement - Door (AWD) > Page 15200 4. For the EQUINOX emblem/nameplate install to the following dimensions: Important: All dimensions are arc length measurements. * Dimension (a) is 11 mm (0.043 in) from the side of the emblem/nameplate to the left edge of the lift gate. * Dimension (b) is 160 mm (6.30 in) from the center of the emblem/nameplate to the bottom of the lift gate. 5. For the CHEVROLET emblem/nameplate install to the following dimensions: Important: All dimensions are arc length measurements. * Dimension (a) is 31 mm (1.22 in) from the side of the emblem/nameplate to the right edge of the lift gate. * Dimension (b) is 160 mm (6.30 in) from the center of the emblem/nameplate to the bottom of the lift gate. 6. Heat the mounting surface to approximately 27-41°C (80-105°F) using the heat gun, if necessary. 7. Ensure that the temperature of the emblem/nameplate is approximately 29-32°C (85-90°F). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Emblem/Nameplate Replacement - Door (AWD) > Page 15201 Important: Do not touch the adhesive backing on the emblem/nameplate. 8. Remove the protective liner from the back of the emblem/nameplate. 9. Position the emblem/nameplate to the location marks and press the emblem/nameplate to the mounting surface. 10. Apply equal pressure along the emblem/nameplate to uniformly bond the item to the mounting surface. 11. Remove the protective tape from the mounting surface. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Grille Panel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the wiper arms. Refer to Wiper Arm Replacement in Wipers/Washer Systems. 2. Remove the right side air inlet grille push-in retainers. 3. Remove the right side air inlet grille from the vehicle. 4. Remove the left side air inlet grille push-in retainers. 5. Lift up the left side air inlet grille and disconnect the front washer nozzle hose from the front nozzles. 6. Depress the nozzle retaining tabs on the under side of the air inlet grille and pull front nozzles up. 7. Remove the left side air inlet grille. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 15205 1. Install the front washer nozzles into the air inlet grille. 2. Connect the washer nozzle hose to the front washer nozzles. 3. Install the left side air inlet grille. 4. Install the right side air inlet grille. 5. Install the push-in retainers. 6. Install the wiper arms. Refer to Wiper Arm Replacement in Wipers/Washer Systems. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > License Plate Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair License Plate Bracket: Service and Repair License Plate Pocket Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear license plate screws (1). 2. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Trunk / Liftgate/Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the rear liftgate center applique. 4. Remove the nuts (2) that secure the license pocket to the liftgate. 5. Release the center retainer (3) on the license plate pocket. 6. Remove the rear license plate pocket (4) from the liftgate. Installation Procedure 1. Position the rear license plate pocket (4) to the liftgate. 2. Secure the center retainer (3). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the nuts (2) that secure the license pocket to the liftgate. Tighten the nuts to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 4. Install the liftgate center applique. 5. Install the liftgate trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Trunk / Liftgate/Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . 6. Install the rear license plate screws (1). Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Applique Replacement - Windshield Frame Removal Procedure 1. Remove the screws from the windshield pillar applique. 2. Remove applique from the vehicle by carefully pulling from the front of the molding rearward to disengage the retainers. Installation Procedure 1. Position the windshield pillar applique to the vehicle and push in to secure the retainers. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the screws that secure the applique to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15212 Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Wheelhouse Liner Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the push-in retainers from the front wheelhouse liner. 2. Remove the wheelhouse liner to rocker molding screw. 3. Remove the wheelhouse liner from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the front wheelhouse liner to the vehicle. 2. Install the push-in retainers. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 15218 3. Install the wheelhouse liner to rocker molding screw. Tighten the screw to 4 N.m (35 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Rear Fender > Rear Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Fender Liner: Service and Repair Wheelhouse Liner Panel Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear wheelhouse liner push-in retainers. 2. Remove the rear wheelhouse liner from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the rear wheelhouse liner to the vehicle. 2. Install the push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Firewall > Component Information > Service and Repair Firewall: Service and Repair Plenum Panel Replacement - Upper Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Approved Equipment for Collision Repair Caution in Cautions and Notices. 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones in SIR. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnect/Connect Procedure in Engine Electrical. 3. Remove all related panels and components. 4. Repair as much of the damage as possible to factory specifications. Refer to Dimensions - Body () . 5. Note the location and remove the sealers and anti-corrosion materials from the repair area, as necessary. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair () in Paint/Coatings. Important: Do not damage any inner panels or reinforcements. 6. Locate and drill out all factory welds. Note the number and location of the welds for installation of the plenum top panel. 7. Remove the damaged plenum top panel. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Firewall > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15226 Important: If the location of the original plug weld holes can not be determined, space the plug weld holes every 40 mm (1 1/2 in) apart. Some panels may have structural weld-thru adhesive. It is necessary to replace the weld-thru adhesive with an additional spot weld between each factory spot weld. 1. Drill 8-mm (5/16-in) plug weld holes in the service part as necessary in the locations noted from the original panel. 2. Prepare all mating surfaces as necessary. 3. Apply 3M Weld-Thru Coating P/N 05916 or equivalent to all mating surfaces. 4. Position the plenum top panel to the vehicle using 3-dimensional measuring equipment. Clamp the plenum top panel into place. 5. Plug weld accordingly. 6. Clean and prepare all welded surfaces. 7. Apply the sealers and anti-corrosion materials to the repair area, as necessary. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair () in Paint/Coatings. 8. Paint the repair area. Refer to Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems (See: Paint, Striping and Decals/Paint/Application and ID/Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems) in Paint/Coatings. 9. Install all related panels and components. 10. Connect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnect/Connect Procedure in Engine Electrical. 11. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones in SIR. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Rear Cross-Member Bushing > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Cross-Member Bushing: Service and Repair Support Rear Drive Module Mounting Bushing Replacement ^ Tools Required J 44866 Support Bushing Remover and Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the production muffler and resonator as an assembly. 3. Remove the rear stabilizer shaft. 4. Remove the rear drive module bracket to support bolt and nut. Discard the nut. 5. Remove the rear drive module to rear drive module bolts and nuts. Discard the nuts. 6. Remove the rear drive module bracket from the vehicle. 7. Install the J 44866 to the support assembly in the following procedure. 1. Position the large part of the tool over the bushing flange and against the frame. 2. Install the bolt and washer. 3. Install the small part of the tool against the bushing. 4. Lube the threads of the J 44866 with extreme pressure (EP) lube. 5. Important: Ensure the small end of the tool is aligned with the bushing. Install the bearing, washer and nut. 6. Tighten the J 44866 in order to remove the bushing from the support assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Rear Cross-Member Bushing > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 15232 1. Install the J 44866 to the support assembly in the following procedure. 1. Place the bolt washer and large portion of the J 44866 against the frame. 2. Position the bushing against the support assembly. Align the bushing with the slots in the rubber portion straight up and down. 3. Position the small part of the J 44866 against the bushing flange area. 4. Lube the threads of the J 44866 with EP lube. 5. Install the bearing, washer and nut. 6. Important: The bushing must be fully seated. Tighten the J 44866 in order to install the bushing into the support assembly. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the rear drive module bracket to the rear drive module, using new nuts. ^ Tighten the drive module bracket to drive module bolts and nuts to 125 Nm (92 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the rear bracket to support bolt, using a new nut. ^ Tighten the drive module bracket to support assembly bolt and nut to 125 Nm (92 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the rear stabilizer shaft. 5. install the production muffler and resonator as an assembly. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair Front Subframe: Service and Repair Frame Replacement (LNJ) Tools Required * J 43828 Ball Joint Remover * SA9140E Torque Angle Gage Removal Procedure 1. Secure the radiator to the upper radiator support. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair/Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle) in General Information. 3. Remove the front wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Tires and wheels. 4. Remove the side splash shield-to-frame fasteners. 5. Remove the front air dam-to-frame fasteners. 6. Remove the rear transaxle mount-to-frame bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 15237 7. Remove the front transaxle mount through bolt. 8. Remove the steering gear-to-frame bolts. 9. Using mechanics wire, secure the steering gear to the exhaust. 10. Remove the stabilizer shaft clamp-to-frame bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 15238 11. Remove the lower ball joint cotter pins. Discard the cotter pins. 12. Loosen the lower ball joint castle nut until the nut is level with the top of the ball stud. Notice: Do not free the ball stud by using a pickle fork or a wedge-type tool. Damage to the seal or bushing may result. 13. Using the J 43828 , separate the lower control arm from the steering knuckle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 15239 14. Remove the frame-to-body bolts. Discard the bolts. 15. Carefully lower the frame from the vehicle. 16. Remove the lower control arms. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement in Front Suspension. Installation Procedure 1. Install the lower control arms. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement in Front Suspension. 2. Raise the frame to the body. Important: Do not tighten the fasteners at this time. 3. Loosely install new frame-to-body bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 15240 4. Connect the ball joint stud to the steering knuckle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Using the SA9140E , install the ball stud castle nut. Tighten the nut to 10 N.m (89 lb in) + 180 degrees. Important: * Do not loosen the castle nut in order to align the cotter pin slots. * Ensure the cutter pin ends do not contact the wheel speed sensor harness. 6. Continue to tighten the castle nut to align the slots with the opening in the ball stud and install the ball stud cotter pin. 7. Remove the mechanics wire and install the steering gear to the frame. Tighten the bolts to 110 N.m (81 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 15241 8. Install the front transaxle mount through bolt. Tighten the bolt to 110 N.m (81 lb ft). 9. Install the rear transaxle mount-to-frame bolts. Tighten the bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 10. Install the stabilizer shaft clamp. Tighten the bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 11. Tighten the frame-to-body bolts. Tighten the bolts to 155 N.m (114 lb ft). 12. Install the front air dam fasteners. 13. Install the side splash shield-to-frame fasteners. 14. Install the front wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Tires and Wheels. 15. Lower the vehicle. 16. Unsecure the radiator from the upper radiator support. 17. Align the front suspension. Refer to Front Toe Adjustment . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle Carpet: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-00-89-029F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Interior Cleaning - Instrument Panel (IP), Hard or Plastic Surfaces, Seats, Carpet, Leather, Vinyl, Fabric Cleaner, Stain Remover, Restorer - Product Availability Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks including Saturn (EXCLUDES Cadillac DTS Platinum and Escalade Platinum with RPO R9N - Tehama Leather) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-00-89-029E (Section 00 - General Information). To keep the vehicle interior looking the best, it should be cleaned often. It is important to keep the upholstery from becoming heavily soiled. The vehicle's interior can experience extreme heat, which can cause stains to set quickly. Lighter color interiors may require more frequent cleaning. Care should be taken because newspapers and garments may transfer color to the vehicle's interior. Many of today's interiors are made with new low gloss materials. Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on ANY surfaces (interior trim, instrument panel, carpet, leather, vinyl and fabric) for which they are not intended. Using non-approved products can actually set the stain to the point that nothing can remove it. Important Do not use silicone or wax-based products or those containing organic solvents (such as naptha, alcohol, etc.) to clean your vehicle's interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner. The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions. - Never use a STIFF brush or a brush that has been previously used with a harsh chemical. This can cause damage to the vehicle's interior surfaces. - Use only mild, Neutral-pH cleaners. Avoid laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers. Using too much soap will leave residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt. Because it is critical to use only mild, neutral-pH cleaners, General Motors has approved the use of the cleaners and conditioners listed in this bulletin for the cleaning of interiors. These products are in the neutral-pH range and will maintain the best vehicle interior appearance. These products are water-based, biodegradable, and do not contain bleach, solvents or harsh chemicals. Interior trim pieces on new vehicles, as well as service components, arrive with a protective film. When removing the protective film, adhesive residue may be left on the trim panels/components. The cleaner (for leather, vinyl, plastic and interior paint) is an effective cleaner in removing adhesive residue without causing damage to the component. Important - If soapy, alkaline cleaning solutions are used on fabrics, and not thoroughly rinsed out, the residual left in the fabric will attract dirt. Because the recommended cleaners/conditioners are in the pH neutral range, they won't leave behind soapy residue. - On heavily stained or difficult to clean fabric/carpet, it is recommended that the entire surface be treated and cleaned vs. spot cleaning. Refer to Extractor Machine and Concentrate section of this bulletin for more information. Effective cleaning steps for hard and/or plastic surfaces: 1. Using a clean towel, apply/spray cleaner - leather, vinyl, plastic, interior paint, directly onto the towel. 2. Wipe the surface with the towel/cleaner. 3. If necessary, use a soft bristle brush to work cleaner into the crevasses of the area being cleaned. 4. Wipe off any excess cleaner from the surface. 5. Using a clean towel, apply/spray the conditioner (leather, vinyl restorer) directly onto the towel. 6. Wipe the conditioner onto the previously cleaned area to restore the material to it's original luster. Important Today's interiors are developed and intended to have a low-gloss appearance. It is important to use only products which provide a low-gloss finish in order to maintain the interior's integrity, customer appeal and satisfaction. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 15247 Effective cleaning steps for fabric: 1. Remove any residue by lightly rubbing the surface with a clean towel. 2. Choose the appropriate stain remover based on the stain type. 3. Spray and lightly brush the area with a clean, soft bristle brush. 4. Gently blot up the stain. 5. On upholstery/carpet, the use of a fabric protector can help to reduce or eliminate future staining. Upholstery and Carpet Stains When cleaning upholstery and carpet stains ONLY, the following cleaning chart will help you determine which cleaner/formula works best on a particular stain. The chart lists many of the common stains. Some complex stains may require the application of both stain removers, one after the other, to remove both food-based oils and synthetic oils. A soft bristle brush (P/N 88861425) should be used to safely work the cleaner into the leather grain or material. This enables the dirt/stain to be completely removed from the material. Leather Conditioner/Restorer A Leather Conditioner/Restorer is also available. The restorer is safe for all vinyl and leather. It is a water-based product and contains essential emollients to restore suppleness, conditions and adds luster without adding gloss. The restorer will also provide protection against re-staining. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 15248 Dye Transfer: Dye transfer will happen any time a natural fiber like cotton, silk, wool, or suede comes into contact with leather. The lighter the leather color, the more quickly the dye transfer will appear. Leather should be cleaned on a regular basis so that the dirt and grime do not adversely affect the top coat of the leather. After cleaning the leather, it is important to treat the surface with the restorer. Extractor Machine and Concentrate For difficult to clean materials or when cleaning a large area, the best results will be achieved when using an extractor machine and concentrate. General Motors offers the Ruby Extractor (P/N 627-CC-3000AU) through GM Tools and Equipment 1-800-GM-TOOLS, and has recently released a concentrate for use with the extractor machine. Whichever extractor machine is used, it should meet the minimum specifications of the Ruby Extractor: Ruby Extractor Specifications: - Pump PSI: 55 - Water Lift: 85" - Hose Length: 10 ft Important The Ruby Extractor also comes with a 6 year Outer Body and 3 year Parts warranty. Extractor: The Ruby Extractor machine was designed for automotive use and works effectively in the vehicle's interior. The narrow design of the vacuum head allows detail work in tight areas. The water pressure pump is reduced so the fabric surface is not wet more than is necessary. The dry time is greatly reduced due to less water on the fabric surface, the vacuum head making better contact with the surface and the significant water lift capability of the machine. Concentrate: The concentrated extraction cleaner is engineered with lower pH levels to help remove alkaline buildup on fabrics. The concentrate should be mixed according to the instructions listed on the container. The available concentrate helps to break the stain down and then the stain is easily removed with less water. The concentrate used in the Ruby Extractor is slightly acidic to remove soap and alkalinity from the fabric surfaces left behind by using improper, soapy solutions. Dirt, grease and grime are more easily removed when the proper solution is used during the extraction process. Parts Information Products are available in two sizes; 8 oz / 235 ML and 24 oz / 710 ML bottles. Available Equipment Equipment is available by contacting 1-800-GMTOOLS. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 15249 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 15250 Carpet: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-110-001 Date: March 30, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Use of Floor Mats Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3, H3T 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X GM's carpeted and all-weather (rubber) floor mats are especially designed for use in specific GM vehicles. Using floor mats that were not designed for the specific vehicle or using them incorrectly may cause interference with the accelerator or brake pedal. Please review the following safety guidelines regarding proper driver's side floor mat usage with the customer. Warning If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the accelerator pedal and/or brake pedal. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distance which can cause a crash and injury. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal. - Do not flip the driver's floor mat over (in an effort to keep the floor mat clean) - Do not place anything on top of the driver's floor mat (e.g. carpet remnant, towel) - Do not place another mat on top of the driver's floor mat (e.g. do not place all-weather rubber mats over carpeted floor mats) - Only use floor mats that are designed specifically for your vehicle - When using replacement mats, make certain the mats do not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal before driving the vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with a floor mat retaining pin(s) or clip(s), make certain the mat is installed correctly and according to the instructions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 15251 After installing floor mats, make certain they cannot move and do not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedals. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 15252 Carpet: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Elimination Of Unwanted Odors INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-00-89-027E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Eliminating Unwanted Odors in Vehicles Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and refine the instructions. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-00-89-027D (Section 00 - General Information). Vehicle Odor Elimination General Motors offers a product that may control or eliminate odors in the interior and luggage compartment areas of GM vehicles. GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator is a non-toxic, biodegradable odor remover. This odorless product has been shown to greatly reduce or remove objectionable smells of mold and mildew resulting from vehicle water leaks (as well as customer created odors, i.e. smoke). You may use GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator on fabrics, vinyl, leather, carpet and sound deadening materials. It may also be induced into HVAC modules and instrument panel ducts (for the control of non-bacterial related odors). Important: This product leaves no residual scent and should not be sold as or considered an air freshener. Product action may result in the permanent elimination of an odor and may be preferable to customers with allergies who are sensitive to perfumes. How to Use This Product GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator may be sprayed on in a ready-to-use formula or used in steam cleaners as an additive with carpet shampoo. This water-based, odorless product is safe for all vehicle interiors. Do not wet or soak any interior surface that plain water would cause to deteriorate, as this product will have the same effect. Also avoid letting this product come into contact with vinegar or any acidic substance. Acid-based products will hamper the effectiveness of, or render GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator inert. Note: Complete eight page treatment sheets are enclosed within each case of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator. These treatment instructions range from simple vehicle odor elimination to full step by step procedures for odor removal from water leaks. If lost, contact 800-977-4145 to get a replacement set faxed or e-mailed to your dealership. Instructions and cautions are printed on the bottle, but additional help is available. If you encounter a difficult to eliminate or reoccurring odor, you may call 1-800-955-8591 (in Canada, 1-800-977-4145) to obtain additional information and usage suggestions. Important: This product may effectively remove odors when directly contacting the odor source. It should be used in conjunction with diagnostic procedures (in cases such as a water leak) to first eliminate the root cause of the odor, and then the residual odor to permanently correct the vehicle condition. Vehicle Waterleak Odor Elimination STEP ONE: Confirm that all water leaks have been repaired. Determine what areas of the vehicle were water soaked or wet. Components with visible mold/mildew staining should be replaced. Isolate the odor source inside the vehicle. Often an odor can be isolated to an area or component of the vehicle interior by careful evaluation. Odor evaluation may need to be performed by multiple persons. Another method of isolating an odor source is to remove and segregate interior trim and components. Plastic sheeting or drop cloths can be used to confine seats, headliners, etc. to assist in evaluation and diagnoses. If appropriate the vehicle and interior trim should be evaluated separately to determine if the odor stays with the vehicle or the interior components. Odors that stay with the vehicle may be isolated to insulating and sound deadening materials (i.e. water leak at the windshield or standing water in the front foot well area caused mold/mildew to form on the bulkhead or kick panel sound deadening pads. If the interior is removed the floor pan and primed/painted surfaces should be treated with bleach/soap solution, rinsed with clean water and dried. Interior surfaces should then be treated with GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator product before reinstalling carpet or reassembling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 15253 The GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator product is an effective odor elimination product when used properly. It must come into direct contact with the odor source. It should be used in conjunction with diagnostic procedures to first eliminate the root cause of the odor. Some procedures for use after odor root cause correction are: STEP TWO: ^ Use the trigger spray head. ^ Put a drop of dish soap the size of a quarter in the bottom of a bottle. ^ Add 8 oz. of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator (1 cup) to the dish soap and top off the bottle with tap water. ^ This formula should be used on hard surfaces (dash, interior plastic molding, and floor pan) STEP THREE: The third step to neutralizing the vehicle is a light to medium treatment of all carpeting and upholstered seats with the GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator formula and a wide fan spray setting (at full strength) (i.e.: carpeting on the driver's side requires 4-5 triggers pulls for coverage). The headliner and trunk should be sprayed next. Lightly brushing the formula into the carpeting and upholstery is a recommended step for deep odor problems. The dash and all hard surfaces should be sprayed with dish soap/water mixture. Let stand for 1-2 minutes then wipe off the surface. STEP FOUR: (vehicle ventilation system treatment) The ventilation system is generally the last step in the treatment of the vehicle. a. Spray the GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator formula into all dash vents. (1-2 trigger pulls per vent). b. Start the vehicle and turn the vehicle fan on high cool (not A/C setting). c. Spray the formula (10 trigger pulls) into the outside fresh air intake vent (cowl at base of windshield) d. Enter the vehicle after 1 minute and wipe off the excess formula spurting out of the dash vents. e. Smell the air coming from the dash vents. If odors are still present, spray another 5 triggers into the cowl, wait another minute and smell the results. Once you have obtained a fresh, clean smell coming from the vents, turn the system to the A/C re-circulation setting. Roll up the windows, spray 3-5 pumps into the right lower IP area and let the vehicle run with the fan set on high for 5-7 minutes. Please follow this diagnosis process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved without completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If these steps do not resolve the condition, please contact GM TAC for further diagnostic assistance. Additional Suggestions to Increase Customer Satisfaction Here are some additional ideas to benefit your dealership and to generate greater customer enthusiasm for this product. ^ Keep this product on-hand for both the Service Department and the Used Car lot. Add value to your used car trades; treat loaner and demo cars during service and at final sale to eliminate smoke, pet, and other common odors offensive to customers. Make deodorizing a vehicle part of your normal vehicle detailing service. ^ Consider including GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator as a give-away item with new vehicle purchases. Many dealers give away as "gifts" various cleaning supplies at time of delivery. GM Odor Eliminator is one of a few products GM offers that has as many uses in the home as in the vehicle. Customers may find this product can be used for a host of recreational activities associated with their new vehicle, such as deodorizing a boat they tow, or a camper. ^ GM Odor Eliminator and many of the GM Vehicle Care products offer you the chance to increase dealership traffic as these superior quality products cannot be purchased in stores. Many Dealerships have product displays at the parts counter. Consider additional displays in the Customer Service Lounge, the Showroom and at the Service Desk or Cashier Window. Many customers who purchase vehicles and receive regular maintenance at your dealership may never visit the parts counter, and subsequently are not exposed to the variety and value that these products offer. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 15254 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet Replacement Carpet: Service and Repair Carpet Replacement Carpet Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seats. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement Front Bucket) in Seats. 2. Remove the rear seats. Refer to Seat Replacement - Rear (See: Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Rear) in Seats. 3. Remove the front carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front (See: ) . 4. Remove the rear carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear (See: ) . 5. Remove the center console trim panels and the center console. Refer to Console Replacement (See: Console/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. 6. Remove the floor carpet by pulling the carpet from under the center pillar assemblies and lifting the carpet out of the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet Replacement > Page 15257 1. Position the carpet in the vehicle. 2. Tuck the carpet under the center pillar assemblies. 3. Install the center console trim panels and the center console. Refer to Console Replacement (See: Console/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. 4. Install the rear carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear (See: ) . 5. Install the front carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front (See: ) . 6. Install the rear seats. Refer to Seat Replacement - Rear (See: Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Rear) in Seats. 7. Install the front seats. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement Front Bucket) in Seats. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet Replacement > Page 15258 Carpet: Service and Repair Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Starting at the rear of the door sill plate, pull upward to disengage the attaching clips. 2. Reach under the instrument panel and pull inward to disengage the additional attaching clips. 3. Remove the door sill plate from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Rotate the door sill plate under the instrument panel. 2. Position the part over the frame. 3. Push at the clip locations to secure the plate to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet Replacement > Page 15259 Carpet: Service and Repair Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Starting at the front of the retainer, pull upward to disengage the attaching clips. 2. Slide the retainer out from beneath the quarter trim. 3. Remove the carpet retainer from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the carpet retainer to the vehicle with the rear tabs installed under the cargo trim panel. 2. Push at the clip locations to secure the carpet retainer to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet Replacement > Page 15260 Carpet: Service and Repair Eliminating Unwanted Odors in Vehicles Eliminating Unwanted Odors in Vehicles GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator, GM P/N 12378554 (Canadian P/N 88901678), may control or eliminate odors in the interior and luggage compartment areas of GM vehicles. This non-toxic, biodegradable, odorless product has been shown to greatly reduce or remove the following types of odor: * Objectionable smells of mold and mildew resulting from vehicle water leaks * Customer created odors, such as smoke You may safely use GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator on fabrics, vinyl, leather, carpet, and sound deadening materials. You may also induce this product into HVAC modules and instrument panel ducts for the control of non-bacterial related odors. Important: This product leaves no residual scent and should not be used as an air freshener. This product may result in the permanent elimination of an odor and may be preferable to customers whose allergies make them sensitive to perfumes. This product may effectively remove odors when directly contacting the odor source. In cases such as water leaks, use this product with diagnostic procedures to first eliminate the primary cause of the odor. Then use further applications on the residual odor to permanently correct the vehicle condition. How to Use this Product * Spray GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator directly or as an additive with carpet shampoo in steam cleaners. * Do not use on any interior surface that plain water would deteriorate, because this product will have the same effect. Also avoid letting this product come into contact with vinegar or any acidic substance. Acid-based products will hamper the effectiveness of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator. * Instructions and cautions are printed on the bottle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Description and Operation Console: Description and Operation KEY AND LOCK CYLINDER CODING USE INSTRUCTION SHEET SUPPLIED For the key cutting and lock cylinder coding procedure, refer to the instruction sheet supplied in the key and lock cylinder kit. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Console: Procedures Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor CONSOLE ARMREST REPLACEMENT - FRONT FLOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Move the front seats rearward and open the center armrest cover. 2. Remove the screws from the hinge holding the armrest cover to the center console. 3. Remove the armrest cover. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15266 1. Align the armrest cover with the hinge positioned correctly. 2. Install the screws to the hinge holding the armrest cover to the center console. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Close the armrest cover. Inspect the cover for proper alignment and operation. 4. Return the front seat to the proper position. Console Replacement CONSOLE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Position the front seats rearward. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15267 2. Reach under the front seats to access the lower console screws. 3. Remove the console screws. 4. Lift the rear of the center floor console. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector to the auxiliary power outlet. 6. Slide the center floor console rearward to access the upper console screws. 7. Remove the bolts which hold the console to the center stack. 8. Remove the floor console. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15268 1. Position the console with the mounting bracket. 2. Install the console screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the auxiliary power outlet. 4. Reposition the center console. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15269 5. Reach under the front seats to access the lower console screws. 6. Install the center console screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 7. Position the front seat forward to the original position. Console Storage Bin Replacement CONSOLE STORAGE BIN REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the console lid to expose the hinge. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15270 2. Remove the screws that retain the console hinge to the base. Remove the console hinge. 3. Remove the console storage bin. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Insert the new storage bin. 2. Fasten the storage bin cover with the hinge screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Inspect the lid for alignment and operation. Console Trim Panel Replacement - Left CONSOLE TRIM PANEL REPLACEMENT - LEFT Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15271 REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Position the front seats rearward. 2. Remove the center trim panel by pulling outward. 3. Remove the screws from the left console trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15272 4. Remove the push-in fastener from the trim panel. 5. Remove the trim panel from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15273 1. Position the left console trim panel. 2. Install the push-in fastener. 3. Install the screws to the left console trim panel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 4. Position the center trim plate to the front console. 5. Push until the trim clips engage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15274 6. Install the center trim panel. 7. Position the front seat forward to the original position. Console Trim Panel Replacement - Right CONSOLE TRIM PANEL REPLACEMENT - RIGHT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Position the front seats rearward. 2. Remove the center trim panel by pulling outward. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15275 3. Remove the screws from the right console trim panel. 4. Remove the push-in fastener from the trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15276 5. Remove the trim panel from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the right console trim panel. 2. Install the push-in fastener. 3. Install the screws to the right console trim panel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15277 4. Position the center trim plate to the front console. 5. Push until the trim clips engage. 6. Connect the electrical connectors to the center trim panel. 7. Snap the center trim panel into place. 8. Position the front seat forward to the original position. Cup Holder Replacement - Front Floor Console - Front CUP HOLDER REPLACEMENT - FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15278 1. Open the arm rest on the console. 2. Remove the cupholder cover. 3. Remove the screws from the cup holder track. 4. Remove the cup holder and the track from the console. 5. Pull to separate the cup holder from the track. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15279 1. Install the cup holder to the track. 2. Position the track in the console assembly. 3. Install the console track screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 4. Snap the cupholder cover in place. 5. Inspect the cupholder for correct operation. Cup Holder Replacement - Front Floor Console - Rear CUP HOLDER REPLACEMENT - FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull all the way out on the cup holder. 2. Remove the screws from the cup holder track. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15280 3. Remove the cup holder and the track from the console. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the console track screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Verify the rear cup holder for correct operation. Key and Lock Cylinder Coding KEY AND LOCK CYLINDER CODING USE INSTRUCTION SHEET SUPPLIED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15281 For the key cutting and lock cylinder coding procedure, refer to the instruction sheet supplied in the key and lock cylinder kit. Latch Replacement - Console Compartment Door LATCH REPLACEMENT - CONSOLE COMPARTMENT DOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Lift the armrest cover to expose the armrest hinge and insert. 2. Remove the screws from the armrest cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15282 3. Remove the console latch cover to expose the latch screws. 4. Remove the latch screws from the center console armrest cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15283 5. Remove the latch from the armrest cover. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Align the new latch to the armrest cover. 2. Install the latch screws to the armrest cover. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15284 3. Install the screws that secure the armrest cover to the center console. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 4. Snap the console insert to the armrest cover. 5. Close the armrest cover. Inspect the cover for alignment and operation. Trim Plate Replacement - Console TRIM PLATE REPLACEMENT - CONSOLE REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Position the front seats rearward. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15285 2. Reach under the front seats to access the lower console screws. 3. Remove the console screws. 4. Lift the rear of the center floor console. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector to the auxiliary power outlet. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15286 6. Slide the center floor console rearward. 7. Remove the center trim panel by pulling outward. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15287 1. Position the center trim plate to the front console. 2. Push until the trim clips engage. 3. Lift the rear of the center floor console. 4. Connect the electrical connector to the auxiliary power outlet. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15288 5. Reposition the center console. 6. Reach under the front seats to access the lower console screws. 7. Install the center console screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 8. Position the front seat forward to the original position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15289 Console: Removal and Replacement Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor Removal Procedure 1. Move the front seats rearward and open the center armrest cover. 2. Remove the screws from the hinge holding the armrest cover to the center console. 3. Remove the armrest cover. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15290 1. Align the armrest cover with the hinge positioned correctly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the screws to the hinge holding the armrest cover to the center console. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Close the armrest cover. Inspect the cover for proper alignment and operation. 4. Return the front seat to the proper position. Console Replacement Console Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Position the front seats rearward. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15291 2. Reach under the front seats to access the lower console screws. 3. Remove the console screws. 4. Lift the rear of the center floor console. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector to the auxiliary power outlet. 6. Slide the center floor console rearward to access the upper console screws. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15292 7. Remove the bolts which hold the console to the center stack. 8. Remove the floor console. Installation Procedure 1. Position the console with the mounting bracket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the console screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15293 3. Connect the electrical connector to the auxiliary power outlet. 4. Reposition the center console. 5. Reach under the front seats to access the lower console screws. 6. Install the center console screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 7. Position the front seat forward to the original position. Console Storage Bin Replacement Console Storage Bin Replacement Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15294 1. Raise the console lid to expose the hinge. 2. Remove the screws that retain the console hinge to the base. Remove the console hinge. 3. Remove the console storage bin. Installation Procedure 1. Insert the new storage bin. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15295 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Fasten the storage bin cover with the hinge screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Inspect the lid for alignment and operation. Console Trim Panel Replacement - Left Console Trim Panel Replacement - Left Removal Procedure 1. Position the front seats rearward. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15296 2. Remove the center trim panel by pulling outward. 3. Remove the screws from the left console trim panel. 4. Remove the push-in fastener from the trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15297 5. Remove the trim panel from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the left console trim panel. 2. Install the push-in fastener. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the screws to the left console trim panel. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15298 4. Position the center trim plate to the front console. 5. Push until the trim clips engage. 6. Install the center trim panel. 7. Position the front seat forward to the original position. Console Trim Panel Replacement - Right Console Trim Panel Replacement - Right Removal Procedure 1. Position the front seats rearward. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15299 2. Remove the center trim panel by pulling outward. 3. Remove the screws from the right console trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15300 4. Remove the push-in fastener from the trim panel. 5. Remove the trim panel from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15301 1. Position the right console trim panel. 2. Install the push-in fastener. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the screws to the right console trim panel. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 4. Position the center trim plate to the front console. 5. Push until the trim clips engage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15302 6. Connect the electrical connectors to the center trim panel. 7. Snap the center trim panel into place. 8. Position the front seat forward to the original position. Latch Replacement - Console Compartment Door Latch Replacement - Console Compartment Door Removal Procedure 1. Lift the armrest cover to expose the armrest hinge and insert. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15303 2. Remove the screws from the armrest cover. 3. Remove the console latch cover to expose the latch screws. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15304 4. Remove the latch screws from the center console armrest cover. 5. Remove the latch from the armrest cover. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15305 1. Align the new latch to the armrest cover. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the latch screws to the armrest cover. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Install the screws that secure the armrest cover to the center console. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15306 4. Snap the console insert to the armrest cover. 5. Close the armrest cover. Inspect the cover for alignment and operation. Trim Plate Replacement - Console Trim Plate Replacement - Console Removal Procedure 1. Position the front seats rearward. 2. Reach under the front seats to access the lower console screws. 3. Remove the console screws. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15307 4. Lift the rear of the center floor console. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector to the auxiliary power outlet. 6. Slide the center floor console rearward. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15308 7. Remove the center trim panel by pulling outward. Installation Procedure 1. Position the center trim plate to the front console. 2. Push until the trim clips engage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15309 3. Lift the rear of the center floor console. 4. Connect the electrical connector to the auxiliary power outlet. 5. Reposition the center console. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15310 6. Reach under the front seats to access the lower console screws. 7. Install the center console screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 8. Position the front seat forward to the original position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15316 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15317 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15318 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15319 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15320 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15321 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15322 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15323 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15324 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15325 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15326 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15327 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15328 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15329 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15330 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15331 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15332 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15333 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center, then remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15334 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the I/P module connector. 7. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15335 2. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15336 5. Locate And Remove The Air Bag Fuse From The Body Control Module Fuse Center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - right, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the right rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15337 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - RF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - RF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - right, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15338 3. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15339 10. Connect the SIS - RF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 8 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15340 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the upper rear window molding. 7. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 9. Remove the rear coat hooks. 10. Gently pull down the right rear corner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 11. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15341 13. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 14. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 15. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 16. Remove the CPA from the I/P module connector. 17. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. 18. Remove the CPA from the steering wheel module coil connector. 19. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15342 20. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 21. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 22. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 23. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 24. Remove the CPA from the roof rail module - left connector. 25. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15343 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 5. Install the lower center pillar trim. 6. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 7. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15344 8. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 9. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 10. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 13. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 14. Install the rear coat hooks. 15. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 15345 16. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 17. Install the upper rear window molding. 18. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 19. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 20. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 21. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Drink Holders > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cup Holder Replacement - Front Floor Console - Front Drink Holders: Service and Repair Cup Holder Replacement - Front Floor Console - Front Cup Holder Replacement - Front Floor Console - Front Removal Procedure 1. Open the arm rest on the console. 2. Remove the cupholder cover. 3. Remove the screws from the cup holder track. 4. Remove the cup holder and the track from the console. 5. Pull to separate the cup holder from the track. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Drink Holders > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cup Holder Replacement - Front Floor Console - Front > Page 15350 1. Install the cup holder to the track. 2. Position the track in the console assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the console track screws. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 4. Snap the cupholder cover in place. 5. Inspect the cupholder for correct operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Drink Holders > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cup Holder Replacement - Front Floor Console - Front > Page 15351 Drink Holders: Service and Repair Cup Holder Replacement - Front Floor Console - Rear Cup Holder Replacement - Front Floor Console - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Pull all the way out on the cup holder. 2. Remove the screws from the cup holder track. 3. Remove the cup holder and the track from the console. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Drink Holders > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cup Holder Replacement - Front Floor Console - Front > Page 15352 1. Install the console track screws. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Verify the rear cup holder for correct operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Glove Compartment Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair Glove Compartment Lock: Service and Repair LATCH REPLACEMENT - INSTRUMENT PANEL (I/P) COMPARTMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the I/P compartment door. 2. Remove the compartment latch screws. 3. Remove the latch and rod assembly from the compartment door. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the latch and rod assembly to the handle. 2. Install the latch screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Glove Compartment Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15357 3. Install the I/P compartment door. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair Headliner: Service and Repair Headliner Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Use care when working around the head curtain inflator module. Sharp tools may puncture the curtain airbag. If the head curtain inflator module is damaged in any way, it must be replaced. Notice: If a vehicle is equipped with a head curtain inflator module ensure that the inflator module and tether are undamaged. If tether or curtain airbag are damaged in any way, they must be replaced. 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in SIR. 2. Remove the sunshade. Refer to Sunshade Replacement (See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the optional reading lamp cover. Refer to Reading Lamp Replacement in Lighting Systems. 4. Disconnect the optional OnStar(R) microphone harness. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15361 5. Disconnect the optional sunroof switch. 6. Remove the windshield upper garnish molding. Refer to Windshield Upper Garnish Molding Replacement (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . 7. Remove the upper center pillar molding. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Lower (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . 8. Remove the dome lamp. Refer to Dome Lamp Replacement in Lighting Systems. 9. Remove the lock pillar garnish molding. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Lock Pillar Upper (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . 10. Remove the rear corner garnish molding. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Corner (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . 11. Remove the coat hooks. Refer to Coat Hook Replacement (See: Service and Repair) . 12. Remove the rear pushpin. 13. Pull back the quarter trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Rear Quarter Lower (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . 14. Remove the door seal from the headliner edge. 15. Disconnect the headliner electrical connector behind the trim panel. 16. Fold the passenger seat flat and the driver seat forward. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15362 17. Carefully disengage the Velcro(R) and the magnet attachments from the headliner and remove the headliner out from the liftgate opening. Installation Procedure 1. Position the headliner into the vehicle through the liftgate opening. 2. Push on the Velcro(R) and the magnet attachments to partially secure the liner. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15363 3. Install the pushpin fastener at the rear of the headliner. 4. Secure the weatherstrip over the edge of the headliner. 5. Connect the sunroof switch electrical connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15364 6. Connect the OnStar(R) microphone electrical connector. 7. Install the reading lamp cover. Refer to Reading Lamp Replacement in Lighting Systems. 8. Connect the OnStar(R) electrical connector. 9. Install the sunshades. Refer to Sunshade Replacement (See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair) . 10. Install the windshield upper garnish molding. Refer to Windshield Upper Garnish Molding Replacement (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . 11. Install the center pillar molding. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Lower (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . 12. Install the dome lamp. Refer to Dome Lamp Replacement . 13. Connect the headliner electrical connectors behind the cargo area trim panel. Connect the clips holding the wire to the metal. 14. Install the driver side quarter trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Rear Quarter Lower (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . 15. Install the lock pillar garnish moldings. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Lock Pillar Upper (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . 16. Install the rear garnish molding. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Corner (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . 17. Install the coat hooks. Refer to Coat Hook Replacement (See: Service and Repair) . 18. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in SIR. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair Scuff Plate: Service and Repair Door Sill Plate Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure 1. Remove the cargo hooks in the rear sill plate. 2. Remove the load floor from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15368 3. Lift the sill plate to release the fasteners. 4. Remove the sill plate. Installation Procedure 1. Install the sill plate. Snap the sill plate into place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15369 2. Install the load floor. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the cargo hooks to the sill plate. Tighten the cargo hooks to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunshade Anchor Replacement Sun Visor: Service and Repair Sunshade Anchor Replacement Sunshade Anchor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Unsnap the sunshade from the inner retainer clip. 2. Remove the inner retainer fastener and the retainer. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Position the retainer and install the retainer fastener. Tighten the fastener to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunshade Anchor Replacement > Page 15374 2. Snap the sunshade into the retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunshade Anchor Replacement > Page 15375 Sun Visor: Service and Repair Sunshade Replacement Sunshade Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Unsnap the sunshade from the inner retainer clip. 2. Remove the sunshade fasteners and remove the sunshade. Installation Procedure 1. Position the sunshade to the headliner. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the sunshade with the fasteners. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunshade Anchor Replacement > Page 15376 Tighten the fasteners to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Snap the sunshade into the inner retainer clip. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Trim Panel: Procedures Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Lower GARNISH MOLDING REPLACEMENT - CENTER PILLAR LOWER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in Restraint Systems. 2. Move the front seat to the forward position. 3. Remove the rear most clip from the hinge pillar garnish molding. 4. Remove the rear carpet retainer. 5. Remove the center pillar upper molding. 6. Starting at the top of the lower garnish molding, pull at the clip locations to disengage the clips. 7. Remove the molding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15381 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the molding to the frame. CAUTION: Striking the vehicle near the side air bag impact sensor can cause an air bag deployment if the ignition switch is not OFF. To help avoid personal injury and damage to the vehicle from a deployment. Always turn the ignition switch OFF during body repairs. 2. Push at the clip locations to secure the attaching clips. 3. Position the weatherstrip over the edge of the garnish molding. 4. Install the hinge pillar garnish molding. 5. Install the rear carpet retainer. 6. Install the center pillar upper molding. 7. Position the weatherstrip over all of the moldings. 8. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in Restraint Systems. Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15382 GARNISH MOLDING REPLACEMENT - CENTER PILLAR UPPER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Unsnap the fastener cover from the D-ring bolt. 2. Remove the D-ring bolt. 3. Remove the shoulder belt from the center pillar. 4. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove the height adjuster button from the shoulder belt, by prying at the top and the bottom slots and pulling on the button. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15383 5. Starting at the top, gently pull on the garnish molding to disengage the attaching clips. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the center pillar garnish molding over the lower garnish molding with the bottom tabs behind the lower molding. 2. Gently push at the clip locations to install the garnish molding. 3. Insert the weatherstripping over the trim edge. 4. Install the fastener cover to the garnish molding. 5. Install the height adjuster knob. 6. Install the shoulder belt assembly and fasteners. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the fasteners to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 7. Press on the shoulder belt fastener cover until the cover snaps closed. 8. Ensure proper operation of the seat belt. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15384 Garnish Molding Replacement - Lock Pillar Upper GARNISH MOLDING REPLACEMENT - LOCK PILLAR UPPER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear quarter trim. 2. Open the shoulder belt guide loop cover. 3. Remove the shoulder belt guide and fastener. 4. Remove the lock pillar upper garnish molding from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15385 1. Align and push to seat the garnish molding. 2. Install the shoulder belt guide loop to the lock pillar. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the shoulder belt guide loop bolt to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 3. Install the rear quarter panel. Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Corner GARNISH MOLDING REPLACEMENT - REAR CORNER REMOVAL PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15386 1. Remove the rear door sill. 2. Remove the cargo hook from the rear quarter trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15387 3. Remove the push pins from the rear quarter trim. 4. Pull the quarter trim away from the rear corner garnish molding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15388 5. Pull the corner garnish molding to release. 6. Remove the corner molding from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Push the rear corner garnish molding until the fasteners are seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15389 2. Push the quarter trim until the fasteners are seated. 3. Install the push pins to the quarter trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15390 4. Install the cargo hooks. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the cargo hooks to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 5. Install the rear sill plate. 6. Close the liftgate. Trim Panel Replacement - Rear Quarter Lower TRIM PANEL REPLACEMENT - REAR QUARTER LOWER REMOVAL PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15391 1. Remove the rear sill plate. 2. Move the rear seat forward. 3. Remove the load floor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15392 4. Disconnect the cargo hooks in the rear side trim panel. 5. Remove the push pins from the side trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15393 6. If necessary, remove the jack to access the driver side rear side trim panel. 7. Remove the rear side trim panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Align the rear side trim panel. Snap the panel into place. 2. Install the push pins to the side trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15394 3. Install the cargo hooks. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the cargo hooks to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Install the load floor. 5. Install the rear sill plate. Windshield Upper Garnish Molding Replacement WINDSHIELD UPPER GARNISH MOLDING REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a small flat-bladed tool, remove the fastener cover from the windshield upper garnish molding, by prying at the bottom edge. NOTE: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15395 - Use care when working around the head curtain inflator module. Sharp tools may puncture the curtain airbag. If the head curtain inflator module is damaged in any way, it must be replaced. - If a vehicle is equipped with a head curtain inflator module ensure that the inflator module and tether are undamaged. If tether or curtain airbag are damaged in any way, they must be replaced. 2. Remove the fastener from the garnish molding. 3. Starting at the top, gently pull on the garnish molding to disengage the clips. 4. Remove the molding from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the windshield upper garnish molding to the top of the instrument panel. Align the molding to the body structure. 2. Gently push at the clip locations to install the garnish molding. IMPORTANT: If the vehicle is equipped with a side inflator module, position the module tether rearward of the molding attaching clips. 3. Install the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15396 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the fastener to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 4. Install the fastener plug to the garnish molding. 5. Replace the door seal over the edge of the garnish molding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15397 Trim Panel: Removal and Replacement Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Lower Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Lower Removal Procedure 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in SIR. 2. Move the front seat to the forward position. 3. Remove the rearmost clip from the hinge pillar garnish molding. 4. Remove the rear carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear (See: Carpet/Service and Repair) . 5. Remove the center pillar upper molding. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper (See: ) . 6. Starting at the top of the lower garnish molding, pull at the clip locations to disengage the clips. 7. Remove the molding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15398 Installation Procedure Caution: Striking the vehicle near the side air bag impact sensor can cause an air bag deployment if the ignition switch is not OFF. To help avoid personal injury and damage to the vehicle from a deployment. Always turn the ignition switch OFF during body repairs. 1. Position the molding to the frame. 2. Push at the clip locations to secure the attaching clips. 3. Position the weatherstrip over the edge of the garnish molding. 4. Install the hinge pillar garnish molding. 5. Install the rear carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear (See: Carpet/Service and Repair) . 6. Install the center pillar upper molding. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper (See: ) . 7. Position the weatherstrip over all of the moldings. 8. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in SIR. Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15399 Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper Removal Procedure 1. Unsnap the fastener cover from the D-ring bolt . 2. Remove the D-ring bolt. 3. Remove the shoulder belt from the center pillar. 4. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove the height adjuster button from the shoulder belt, by prying at the top and the bottom slots and pulling on the button. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15400 5. Starting at the top, gently pull on the garnish molding to disengage the attaching clips. Installation Procedure 1. Position the center pillar garnish molding over the lower garnish molding with the bottom tabs behind the lower molding. 2. Gently push at the clip locations to install the garnish molding. 3. Insert the weatherstripping over the trim edge. 4. Install the fastener cover to the garnish molding. 5. Install the height adjuster knob. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 6. Install the shoulder belt assembly and fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15401 7. Press on the shoulder belt fastener cover until the cover snaps closed. 8. Ensure proper operation of the seat belt. Garnish Molding Replacement - Lock Pillar Upper Garnish Molding Replacement - Lock Pillar Upper Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear quarter trim. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Rear Quarter Lower (See: ) . 2. Open the shoulder belt guide loop cover. 3. Remove the shoulder belt guide and fastener. 4. Remove the lock pillar upper garnish molding from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15402 1. Align and push to seat the garnish molding. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the shoulder belt guide loop to the lock pillar. Tighten the shoulder belt guide loop bolt to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 3. Install the rear quarter panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Rear Quarter Lower (See: ) . Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Corner Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Corner Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15403 1. Remove the rear door sill. Refer to Door Sill Plate Replacement - Liftgate (See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the cargo hook from the rear quarter trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15404 3. Remove the push pins from the rear quarter trim. 4. Pull the quarter trim away from the rear corner garnish molding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15405 5. Pull the corner garnish molding to release. 6. Remove the corner molding from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Push the rear corner garnish molding until the fasteners are seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15406 2. Push the quarter trim until the fasteners are seated. 3. Install the push pins to the quarter trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15407 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 4. Install the cargo hooks. Tighten the cargo hooks to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 5. Install the rear sill plate. Refer to Door Sill Plate Replacement - Liftgate (See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair) . 6. Close the liftgate. Trim Panel Replacement - Rear Quarter Lower Trim Panel Replacement - Rear Quarter Lower Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15408 1. Remove the rear sill plate. Refer to Door Sill Plate Replacement - Liftgate (See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair) . 2. Move the rear seat forward. 3. Remove the load floor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15409 4. Disconnect the cargo hooks in the rear side trim panel. 5. Remove the push pins from the side trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15410 6. If necessary, remove the jack to access the driver side rear side trim panel. 7. Remove the rear side trim panel. Installation Procedure 1. Align the rear side trim panel. Snap the panel into place. 2. Install the push pins to the side trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15411 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the cargo hooks. Tighten the cargo hooks to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Install the load floor. 5. Install the rear sill plate. Refer to Door Sill Plate Replacement - Liftgate (See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair) . Windshield Upper Garnish Molding Replacement Windshield Upper Garnish Molding Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Use care when working around the head curtain inflator module. Sharp tools may puncture the curtain airbag. If the head curtain inflator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15412 module is damaged in any way, it must be replaced. Notice: If a vehicle is equipped with a head curtain inflator module ensure that the inflator module and tether are undamaged. If tether or curtain airbag are damaged in any way, they must be replaced. 1. Using a small flat-bladed tool, remove the fastener cover from the windshield upper garnish molding, by prying at the bottom edge. 2. Remove the fastener from the garnish molding. 3. Starting at the top, gently pull on the garnish molding to disengage the clips. 4. Remove the molding from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the windshield upper garnish molding to the top of the instrument panel. Align the molding to the body structure. Important: If the vehicle is equipped with a side inflator module, position the module tether rearward of the molding attaching clips. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15413 2. Gently push at the clip locations to install the garnish molding. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the fastener. Tighten the fastener to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 4. Install the fastener plug to the garnish molding. 5. Replace the door seal over the edge of the garnish molding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Lock Cylinder Replacement - Door Removal Procedure Important: Do not attempt repairs in order to correct lock cylinder discrepancies. Replace the lock cylinder. 1. Remove the front door window regulator module. Refer to Window Regulator Replacement Front Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the lock cylinder retainer clip (1). 3. Remove the lock cylinder from the outside door handle housing (2). Installation Procedure 1. Install the lock cylinder to the outside door handle housing (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15419 2. Install the lock cylinder retainer clip (1). 3. Install the front door window regulator module. Refer to Window Regulator Replacement - Front Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information Key: Technical Service Bulletins Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-00-89-010 Date: May 27, 2010 Subject: Key Code Security Rules and Information on GM KeyCode Look-Up Application (Canada Only) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saturn and Saab 2002 and Prior Isuzu Attention: This bulletin has been created to address potential issues and questions regarding KeyCode security. This bulletin should be read by all parties involved in KeyCode activity, including dealer operator, partner security coordinator, sales, service and parts departments. A copy of this bulletin should be printed and maintained in the parts department for use as a reference. Important U.S. dealers should refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-00-89-009. Where Are Key Codes Located? General Motors provides access to KeyCodes through three sources when a vehicle is delivered to a dealer. Vehicle KeyCodes are located on the original vehicle invoice to the dealership. There is a small white bar coded tag sent with most new vehicles that also has the key code printed on it. Dealerships should make a practice of comparing the tag's keycode numbers to the keycode listed on the invoice. Any discrepancy should be reported immediately to the GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk. Remember to remove the key tag prior to showing vehicles to potential customers. The third source for Key codes is through the GM KeyCode Look-Up feature within the OEConnection D2DLink application. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 previous model years from the current model year. When a vehicle is received by the dealership, care should be taken to safeguard the original vehicle invoice and KeyCode tag provided with the vehicle. Potential customers should not have access to the invoice or this KeyCode tag prior to the sale being completed. After a sale has been completed, the KeyCode information belongs to the customer and General Motors. Tip Only the original invoice contains key code information, a re-printed invoice does not. GM KeyCode Look-Up Application for GM of Canada Dealers All dealers should review the General Motors of Canada KeyCode Look-Up Policies and Procedures (Service Policy & Procedures Manual Section 3.1.6 "Replacement of VIN plates & keys"). Please note that the KeyCode Access site is restricted. Only authorized users should be using this application. Please see your Parts Manager for site authorized users. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 years from current model year. Important notes about security: - Users may not access the system from multiple computers simultaneously. - Users may only request one KeyCode at a time. - KeyCode information will only be available on the screen for 2 minutes. - Each user is personally responsible for maintaining and protecting their password. - Never share your password with others. - User Id's are suspended after 6 consecutive failed attempts. - User Id's are disabled if not used for 90 days. - Processes must be in place for regular dealership reviews. - The Parts Manager (or assigned management) must have processes in place for employee termination or life change events. Upon termination individuals access must be turned off immediately and access should be re-evaluated upon any position changes within the dealership. - If you think your password or ID security has been breached, contact Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 15424 Each user will be required to accept the following agreement each time the KeyCode application is used. Key Code User Agreement - Key codes are proprietary information belonging to General Motors Corporation and to the vehicle owner. - Unauthorized access to, or use of, key code information is unlawful and may subject the user to criminal and civil penalties. - This information should be treated as strictly confidential and should not be disclosed to anyone unless authorized. I will ensure that the following information is obtained prior to releasing any Key Code information: 1. Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) 2. Registration or other proof of ownership. Registration should have normal markings from the Province that issued the registration and possibly the receipt for payment recorded as well. Important - GM takes this agreement seriously. Each user must be certain of vehicle ownership before giving out key codes. - When the ownership of the vehicle is in doubt, dealership personnel should not provide the information. Key code requests should never be received via a fax or the internet and key codes should never be provided to anyone in this manner. A face to face contact with the owner of the vehicle is the expected manner that dealers will use to release a key code or as otherwise stipulated in this bulletin or other materials. - Key codes should NEVER be sent via a fax or the internet. - Each Dealership should create a permanent file to document all KeyCode Look Up transactions. Requests should be filed by VIN and in each folder retain copies of the following: - Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) - Registration or other proof of ownership. - Copy of the paid customer receipt which has the name of the employee who cut and sold the key to the customer. - Do not put yourself or your Dealership in the position of needing to "explain" a KeyCode Look Up to either GM or law enforcement officials. - Dealership Management has the ability to review all KeyCode Look-Up transactions. - Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) for GM of Canada Dealers How do I request a KeyCode for customer owned vehicle that is not registered? Scrapped, salvaged or stored vehicles that do not have a current registration should still have the ownership verified by requesting the vehicle title, current insurance policy and / or current lien holder information from the customers financing source. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. In these cases, a short description of the vehicle (scrapped, salvaged, etc.) and the dealership location should be kept on file. Any clarifying explanation should be entered into the comments field. How do I document a KeyCode request for a vehicle that is being repossessed? The repossessor must document ownership of the vehicle by providing a court ordered repossession order and lien-holder documents prior to providing key code information. Copies of the repossessors Drivers License and a business card should be retained by the dealership for documentation. What do I do if the registration information is locked in the vehicle? Every effort should be made to obtain complete information for each request. Each Dealership will have to decide on a case by case basis if enough information is available to verify the customer's ownership of the vehicle. Other forms of documentation include vehicle title, insurance policy, and or current lien information from the customers financing source. Dealership Management must be involved in any request without complete information. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. Can I get a print out of the information on the screen? It is important to note that the Key Code Look Up Search Results contain sensitive and/or proprietary information. For this reason GM recommends against printing it. If the Search Results must be printed, store and/or dispose of the printed copy properly to minimize the risk of improper or illegal use. Who in the dealership has access to the KeyCode application? Dealership Parts Manager (or assigned management) will determine, and control, who is authorized to access the KeyCode Look Up application. However, we anticipate that dealership parts and service management will be the primary users of the application. The KeyCode Look Up application automatically tracks each user activity session. Information tracked by the system includes: User name, User ID, all other entered data and the date/time of access. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 15425 What if I input the VIN incorrectly? If an incorrect VIN is entered into the system (meaning that the system does not recognize the VIN or that the VIN has been entered incorrectly) the system will return an error message. If I am an authorized user for the KeyCode application, can I access the application from home? Yes. What if I suspect key code misuse? Your dealership should communicate the proper procedures for requesting key codes. Any suspicious activity either within the dealership or externally should be reported to Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573 or GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. Whose key codes can I access through the system? At this time the following Canadian vehicle codes are available through the system: Chevrolet, Cadillac, Buick, Pontiac, GMC, HUMMER (H2 and H3 only), Oldsmobile, Saturn, Saab and Isuzu (up to 2002 model year) for a maximum of 17 model years. What should I do if I enter a valid VIN and the system does not produce any key code information? Occasionally, the KeyCode Look Up application may not produce a key code for a valid VIN. This may be the result of new vehicle information not yet available. In addition, older vehicle information may have been sent to an archive status. If you do not receive a key code returned for valid VIN, you should contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. How do I access KeyCodes if the KeyCode Look-up system is down? If the KeyCode Look-up system is temporarily unavailable, you can contact the original selling dealer who may have it on file or contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the customer is dealing with an emergency lock-out situation, you need to have the customer contact Roadside assistance, OnStar if subscribed, or 911. What should I do if the KeyCode from the look-up system does not work on the vehicle? On occasion a dealer may encounter a KeyCode that will not work on the vehicle in question. In cases where the KeyCode won't work you will need to verify with the manufacturer of the cutting equipment that the key has been cut correctly. If the key has been cut correctly you may be able to verify the proper KeyCode was given through the original selling dealer. When unable to verify the KeyCode through the original selling dealer contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the key has been cut correctly and the code given does not work, the lock cylinder may have been changed. In these situations following the proper SI document for recoding a key or replacing the lock cylinder may be necessary. How long do I have to keep KeyCode Records? Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Can I get a KeyCode changed in the Look-Up system? Yes, KeyCodes can be changed in the Look-Up system if a lock cylinder has been changed. Contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. What information do I need before I can provide a driver of a company fleet vehicle Keys or KeyCode information? The dealership should have a copy of the individual's driver's license, proof of employment and registration. If there is any question as to the customer's employment by the fleet company, the dealer should attempt to contact the fleet company for verification. If there is not enough information to determine ownership and employment, this information should not be provided. How do I document a request from an Independent Repair facility for a KeyCode or Key? The independent must provide a copy of their driver's license, proof of employment and signed copy of the repair order for that repair facility. The repair order must include customer's name, address, VIN, city, province and license plate number. Copies of this information must be included in your dealer KeyCode file. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 15426 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics Keyless Starting System: Technical Service Bulletins Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-52-002 Date: February 27, 2008 Subject: Diagnostic Information for Inoperative Remote Vehicle Start Models: 2005-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2008 HUMMER H2 with Remote Keyless Entry RPOs AP3 or AP8 Remote Vehicle Start (RVS) Inoperative Diagnostic Concerns Information on Hood Latch Switches One of the many components involved in the Remote Vehicle Starting System is the Hood Latch Switch. The state of this switch is checked by the BCM during a remote vehicle start request and the component must function properly in order for the vehicle to commence a remote start event. During the infancy of this option (RPO AP3/AP8) parts return analysis showed a significantly shorter than expected component life for the Hood Latch Switch shared across many different GM vehicles. The switches currently being factory installed, and sent as service replacement parts, are vastly improved in design and suitably robust. Most hood latch switches currently returned under warranty are analyzed and determined to have no trouble found (NTF). It is understandable and desirable that technicians gain familiarity with the vehicles they service on a daily basis, however it is required that technicians follow Strategy Based Diagnostics before replacing this switch. Important: The ONLY way to repair or replace a hood latch switch is to replace the LATCH ASSEMBLY. The switch CANNOT be serviced separately from the latch and is NOT AVAILABLE from GMSPO. Any effort to remove the switch from the latch will permanently damage the switch and void the warranty coverage of that part. Important: The hood switch provides status of the hood to the BCM for RVS purposes. The switch is integrated into the hood latch assembly. The hood ajar switch provides two separate inputs to the BCM. These separate inputs allow the BCM to actively monitor for a hood ajar switch fault. RVS System Operation The remote vehicle start (RVS) function allows engine starting while not in the vehicle. It also allows the vehicle HVAC system and other vehicle systems to enable providing a comfortable vehicle upon entry. RVS functions have an operating range of up to 59 m (195 ft) depending on conditions. The RVS sequence begins by pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and holding the RVS buttons on the keyless entry transmitter. The turn signal lamps will illuminate to indicate the vehicle has received the remote start request. Each time an RVS is performed the vehicle doors are locked; however they may then be unlocked/locked with the transmitter or vehicle key at any time. Once activated the engine is allowed to run for 10 minutes. The RVS time may be extended by an additional 10 minutes by again pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and holding the RVS buttons on the transmitter. This feature is called an RVS continue and allows a maximum of 20 minutes of engine running. If the RVS continue is performed at 7 minutes into the initial 10 minute time-out a total of 17 minutes of engine running would occur. The RVS event may be suspended at any time by pressing only the RVS button on the transmitter or by entering the vehicle and turning ON the hazard lamps. RVS System Description Remote vehicle start (RVS) begins as a Radio Frequency (RF) message received by the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) from a keyless entry transmitter. The RVS request is sent by the RCDLR to the body control module (BCM) via serial data line. The BCM monitors system conditions such as content theft deterrent (CTD) closures ajar status and body DTCs to determine if an RVS event will occur. If conditions are determined to be acceptable the RVS message is sent to the engine control module (ECM). The ECM monitors system conditions such as engine control parameters and vehicle theft deterrent (VTD) to determine if engine starting will be allowed. If conditions are acceptable the ECM will initiate engine starting. During Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics > Page 15432 the engine run time in an RVS attempt before the operator enters the vehicle the ECM may discontinue engine operation if system conditions require it or a message is received from the BCM requesting the engine be turned OFF. Reasons an RVS event will NOT Happen The RVS System WILL NOT operate if any of the following conditions are present: ^ A current vehicle DTC that illuminates the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is set - obtain vehicle DTCs. ^ Keyless Entry Transmitter is not Operational. ^ The vehicle is in Valet Mode. ^ RVS is Disabled through Vehicle Personalization. ^ More than 2 Remote Starts have been attempted. ^ The HAZARD switch is in the ON position. ^ A current HAZARD switch DTC is set. ^ A current HOOD AJAR DTC is set. ^ Rear compartment lid is ajar. ^ Any Door is not locked. ^ The Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) system detects an alarm trigger. ^ Engine RPM greater than 0 Detected. ^ Excessive Coolant TEMP is registered. ^ Accelerator pedal position greater than 0 percent. ^ Vehicle is not in PARK. ^ A current Vehicle Theft Deterrent Malfunction DTC. ^ A current Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System DTC is set. ^ A vehicle speed sensor signal is detected by the ECM. ^ Vehicle power mode is incorrect. Diagnostic Information Starting Point For additional assistance refer to Remote Vehicle Start Inoperative in the Electronic Service Information. This section will guide you through the complete Strategy Based Diagnostics and provide Specific Diagnostic Procedure Instructions. Warranty Information Please refer to the published Labor Time Guides and claim the corresponding labor operation for the component(s) replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery > Component Information > Service and Repair Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Service and Repair TRANSMITTER BATTERY REPLACEMENT NOTE: - Use of the wrong battery size may damage the transmitter. - When removing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter. IMPORTANT: If the transmitter won't work, perform the RKE System Check before replacing the battery. Also, before replacing the battery in the transmitter, make sure that the battery is touching both the negative and positive contacts inside of the transmitter. For battery replacement, use a Panasonic type CR2032 3-volt battery, or equivalent. 1. Use a small coin, or flat-head screwdriver, to separate the bottom of the transmitter from the top. 2. Remove the circuit board from the transmitter housing and key pad by pressing on the LOCK button. NOTE: Do not use sharp objects to help slide the battery out of the clip. This may result in damage to the circuit board. 3. Remove the battery by sliding the battery out of the battery clip. This may require a push from the back side of the clip. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15437 4. Replace the battery with the new one making sure that the (+) side of the battery faces away from the circuit board. 5. Reassemble the circuit board and key pad, and replace them in the transmitter housing which does not contain the key pad openings. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to pinch the key pad while closing the housing. 6. Line up and replace the lower housing by snapping the upper and lower housings together. 7. Test the operation of the transmitter with the vehicle by pressing and holding the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons for 7 or more seconds. This is required to reestablish communications with the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Relay > Component Information > Locations Power Door Lock Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 15442 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 15443 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Switch - Driver Door Lock Switch - Front Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15447 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool to pry the switch from the door handle assembly. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 2. Position the switch on the door handle assembly. Push inward to seat the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15448 3. Install the door trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Mirrors - Heated Mirrors, Defrosting Time Heated Element: Technical Service Bulletins Mirrors - Heated Mirrors, Defrosting Time INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-64-011A Date: February 25, 2010 Subject: Information on Heated Electrochromatic Outside Rearview Mirror Performance Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-64-011 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Defrosting Time/Performance Concern The electrochromatic (auto-dimming) outside rearview mirror used on the driver's side of many GM vehicles is slower to defrost than the passenger side outside rearview mirror. This is a normal condition. The glass on the driver's side electrochromatic mirror is twice as thick as the traditional glass on the passenger side mirror. The heating elements for the mirrors on both sides draw the same wattage, therefore the driver's side mirror will take approximately twice as long to defrost as the passenger mirror (approximately four minutes versus two minutes). Should a customer indicate that the driver's side heated mirror is not functioning correctly, verify it's function based upon this information prior to replacing the mirror. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Description and Operation > Personalization Memory Positioning Systems: Description and Operation Personalization PERSONALIZATION DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Personalization features may be set for the vehicle or the driver. Vehicle features do not change with each driver. For more information on vehicle personalization features for this vehicle, refer to Vehicle Personalization. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Description and Operation > Personalization > Page 15458 Memory Positioning Systems: Description and Operation Vehicle Personalization VEHICLE PERSONALIZATION PROGRAMMING FEATURES WITH TECH 2 Enter Programming To enter Programming with the Tech 2, perform the following actions: 1. Install the scan tool. 2. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 3. Select the correct vehicle and model year. 4. Select F1: Body Control Module 5. Select F2: Special Functions 6. Select F2: Personalization SETTING OPTIONS Select an option with the UP/DOWN ARROW keys. The selected option will be highlighted. Use the SIDE TO SIDE ARROW keys to activate or deactivate the highlighted options, an ASTERISK will be displayed when an option has been ACTIVATED. Use the SOFT keys to save the selected options or use the EXIT key to leave the options unchanged. After all options have been selected press the SOFT key to continue. The following is a list of the selectable options: F0: Pre-alarm Option - F1: CTD Operation - F2: Door Lock Operation - F3: Fob Feedback - F4: Afterblow Option Pre-alarm Option Refer to Theft Systems Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent for information. CTD Operation Refer to Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent for information. Door Lock Operation Automatic Door Lock and Automatic Door Unlock can be configured with the Tech 2. Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors for more information. Fob Feedback Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry for information. Afterblow Option Refer to SIR Syste Description and Operation in Restraint Systems for information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Outside Rearview Mirror Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15462 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair POWER MIRROR SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Use a flat blade tool to remove the left front air deflector. 2. Disconnect the electrical connection from the power mirror switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15463 3. Remove the power mirror switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the power mirror switch to the air deflector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15464 2. Connect the electrical connection to the power mirror switch 3. Push the air deflector to the instrument panel until the air deflector is seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Paint: Customer Interest Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust) Models: 1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust. Cause Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface. Correction Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust: 1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID: - Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel consistency. 2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED: - Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available. Caution Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions closely because it may require special handling and disposal. If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes can be repeated. After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most cases, with a finesse/polish operation. Procedure 1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY PANELS. 2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical manufacturer's directions. Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process. Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint > Page 15474 Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from: Auto Wax Company, Inc. 1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or (214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax (214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com [email protected] E038 Fallout Gel or E038E Liquid Fallout Remover II available from: Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com [email protected] *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from other sources. If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a distributor near your location. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information regarding warranty coverage for this condition. Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours" field. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust) Models: 1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust. Cause Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface. Correction Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust: 1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID: - Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel consistency. 2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED: - Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available. Caution Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions closely because it may require special handling and disposal. If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes can be repeated. After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most cases, with a finesse/polish operation. Procedure 1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY PANELS. 2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical manufacturer's directions. Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process. Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint > Page 15480 Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from: Auto Wax Company, Inc. 1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or (214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax (214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com [email protected] E038 Fallout Gel or E038E Liquid Fallout Remover II available from: Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com [email protected] *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from other sources. If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a distributor near your location. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information regarding warranty coverage for this condition. Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours" field. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 08-08-51-002 > Mar > 08 > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-51-002 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: New Primer For TPO Fascias and Affected Cleaning Process of Painting Operation Models: 2009 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician that General Motors has made a change in the primer it uses for TPO plastic for service parts. This new primer comes in several different colors from five different suppliers. This change affects the cleaning process of the painting operation. The new process is as follows. 1. Wash with soap and water. 2. Clean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). Check with your paint supplier for product recommendations. 3. Scuff sand per your paint suppliers recommendations. Note: The use of a solvent-type cleaner will soften, or begin to dissolve the primer. Base coats do not have any affect on this primer. 4. Reclean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). All fascias, with the exception of the Corvette, Camaro, and Cadillac XLR, are made of TPO. You may find other TPO parts with this primer. If the technician has a question as to the type of plastic they are painting, inspect the back of the part for the plastic symbol (TPO). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 04-08-51-004A > Aug > 05 > Paint - Info On Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Info On Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation Info - Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation Tips and Techniques #04-08-51-004A - (Aug 11, 2005) Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation Tips and Techniques 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 1991-2006 Saturn Vehicles Technician This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-51-004 (Section 08 -- Body & Accessories). Purpose The purpose of this bulletin is to provide service information regarding the proper installation of pinstripes and vinyl graphics. Pinstripe Installation Procedures Surface Preparation Important: The vehicle surface must be properly prepared prior to installation of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics. All surfaces must be cleaned prior to any application of pinstripe/vinyl graphic products. 1. For best results, the pinstripe/vinyl graphic application should be done in temperatures ranging between 16°C - 32°C (60°F - 90°F). Do not install pinstripes/vinyl graphics outdoors if winds exceed 16 km/h (10 mph). Dirt, dust or other contaminants can interfere with the bonding of the adhesive to the vehicle during installation. 2. Wash the vehicle surface with an approved vehicle detergent, Saturn P/N 21112715 (in Canada, GM P/N 993279), or equivalent, and water, then thoroughly rinse the surface with water and dry completely. Notice: Do not use any aromatic solvents such as acetone, methylethylketone (M.E.K.), toluene, paint thinner, lacquer thinner, gasoline or ammonia-based cleaners to clean the vehicle surface. Use of these solvents may result in damage to vehicle finish. 3. Saturate a clean cloth with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol and wipe the surface of the vehicle where the graphic is to be applied to remove any contaminants such as silicone, wax, or adhesives. Important: Isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol evaporates quickly and must be wiped off the surface before it evaporates to effectively clean the surface. 4. Dry surface with a lint free paper towel. Application Procedure 1. For best results, make sure the pinstripes/vinyl graphics and vehicle temperatures are between 16°C - 32°C (60°F - 90°F). 2. Position the pinstripes/vinyl graphics as desired on the vehicle. Use one of the following methods - For large pieces or stripes, use masking tape to position and hold the pinstripes/vinyl graphics on the vehicle. Apply a masking tape "hinge" to the piece or stripe, if necessary, to further stabilize the piece or stripe. - For small pieces, freely position and apply the pinstripes/vinyl graphics after liner removal. 4. Remove the liner by flicking a corner of the film away from the liner and pulling the liner away from the pinstripes/vinyl graphics at a 180° angle. 5. Remove the application tape from the pinstripes/vinyl graphics by pulling it directly back upon itself at a 180° angle to the pinstripes/vinyl graphics. Use a slow, constant speed, taking care to avoid pulling against the graphic areas that contain points or sharp corners. 6. Using a plastic squeegee, 3M(R) P/N 71602 squeegee with 3M(R) P/N 71603 squeegee sleeve, or equivalent, press the pinstripes/vinyl graphics firmly to the vehicle. Use vertical, firm, overlapping strokes. Hold the end of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics off the vehicle with light tension to prevent it from pre-adhering and forming air bubbles. If narrow striping is applied with thumb pressure to avoid stretching the stripe, a second pass with a squeegee will avoid post-application film bubbling. Notice: A light touch must be used when trimming the striping to avoid cutting into and damaging the painted surface of the vehicle. 7. Using a specialized trim knife or razor knife, trim the pinstripes/vinyl graphics back approximately 3 mm (1/8 in) from the edge to help avoid lifting. 8. Re-squeegee the entire surface to obtain maximum adhesion to the surface and to remove all air bubbles and wrinkles. 9. Inspect application for bubbles and/or areas not completely adhered. Remove bubbles as follows: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 04-08-51-004A > Aug > 05 > Paint - Info On Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation > Page 15489 A. Use an air release tool, 3M(R) P/N 71604, or equivalent, or straight pin to puncture the bubble at its edge. B. Use finger or squeegee to force air out through the hole made in the film. Pinstripe Care - DO wash the pinstripe with an approved car wash detergent, Saturn P/N 21112715 (in Canada, GM P/N 993279), or equivalent, and rinse thoroughly. - DO keep high pressure car wash nozzles at least 0.46 m (1.5 ft) from the edge of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics. High pressure spray may cause the edge of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics to peel. - DO test any cleaning solution on a small section of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics before using the solution. - DON T use any aromatic solvents such as acetone, M.E.K., toluene, paint thinner, lacquer thinner on the pinstripes/vinyl graphics. Any solvent may soften or smear colors. - DON T overcoat the pinstripes/vinyl graphics with clear paint. - DON T apply wax over pinstripes/vinyl graphics, especially if the wax contains any petroleum distillates such as silicone. Wax that has dried along the edges of pinstripes and graphics can be removed by softening it with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol and cotton swabs. Be sure to rinse the area after cleaning. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > 08-08-51-002 > Mar > 08 > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-51-002 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: New Primer For TPO Fascias and Affected Cleaning Process of Painting Operation Models: 2009 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician that General Motors has made a change in the primer it uses for TPO plastic for service parts. This new primer comes in several different colors from five different suppliers. This change affects the cleaning process of the painting operation. The new process is as follows. 1. Wash with soap and water. 2. Clean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). Check with your paint supplier for product recommendations. 3. Scuff sand per your paint suppliers recommendations. Note: The use of a solvent-type cleaner will soften, or begin to dissolve the primer. Base coats do not have any affect on this primer. 4. Reclean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). All fascias, with the exception of the Corvette, Camaro, and Cadillac XLR, are made of TPO. You may find other TPO parts with this primer. If the technician has a question as to the type of plastic they are painting, inspect the back of the part for the plastic symbol (TPO). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > 04-08-51-004A > Aug > 05 > Paint - Info On Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Info On Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation Info - Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation Tips and Techniques #04-08-51-004A - (Aug 11, 2005) Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation Tips and Techniques 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 1991-2006 Saturn Vehicles Technician This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-51-004 (Section 08 -- Body & Accessories). Purpose The purpose of this bulletin is to provide service information regarding the proper installation of pinstripes and vinyl graphics. Pinstripe Installation Procedures Surface Preparation Important: The vehicle surface must be properly prepared prior to installation of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics. All surfaces must be cleaned prior to any application of pinstripe/vinyl graphic products. 1. For best results, the pinstripe/vinyl graphic application should be done in temperatures ranging between 16°C - 32°C (60°F - 90°F). Do not install pinstripes/vinyl graphics outdoors if winds exceed 16 km/h (10 mph). Dirt, dust or other contaminants can interfere with the bonding of the adhesive to the vehicle during installation. 2. Wash the vehicle surface with an approved vehicle detergent, Saturn P/N 21112715 (in Canada, GM P/N 993279), or equivalent, and water, then thoroughly rinse the surface with water and dry completely. Notice: Do not use any aromatic solvents such as acetone, methylethylketone (M.E.K.), toluene, paint thinner, lacquer thinner, gasoline or ammonia-based cleaners to clean the vehicle surface. Use of these solvents may result in damage to vehicle finish. 3. Saturate a clean cloth with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol and wipe the surface of the vehicle where the graphic is to be applied to remove any contaminants such as silicone, wax, or adhesives. Important: Isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol evaporates quickly and must be wiped off the surface before it evaporates to effectively clean the surface. 4. Dry surface with a lint free paper towel. Application Procedure 1. For best results, make sure the pinstripes/vinyl graphics and vehicle temperatures are between 16°C - 32°C (60°F - 90°F). 2. Position the pinstripes/vinyl graphics as desired on the vehicle. Use one of the following methods - For large pieces or stripes, use masking tape to position and hold the pinstripes/vinyl graphics on the vehicle. Apply a masking tape "hinge" to the piece or stripe, if necessary, to further stabilize the piece or stripe. - For small pieces, freely position and apply the pinstripes/vinyl graphics after liner removal. 4. Remove the liner by flicking a corner of the film away from the liner and pulling the liner away from the pinstripes/vinyl graphics at a 180° angle. 5. Remove the application tape from the pinstripes/vinyl graphics by pulling it directly back upon itself at a 180° angle to the pinstripes/vinyl graphics. Use a slow, constant speed, taking care to avoid pulling against the graphic areas that contain points or sharp corners. 6. Using a plastic squeegee, 3M(R) P/N 71602 squeegee with 3M(R) P/N 71603 squeegee sleeve, or equivalent, press the pinstripes/vinyl graphics firmly to the vehicle. Use vertical, firm, overlapping strokes. Hold the end of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics off the vehicle with light tension to prevent it from pre-adhering and forming air bubbles. If narrow striping is applied with thumb pressure to avoid stretching the stripe, a second pass with a squeegee will avoid post-application film bubbling. Notice: A light touch must be used when trimming the striping to avoid cutting into and damaging the painted surface of the vehicle. 7. Using a specialized trim knife or razor knife, trim the pinstripes/vinyl graphics back approximately 3 mm (1/8 in) from the edge to help avoid lifting. 8. Re-squeegee the entire surface to obtain maximum adhesion to the surface and to remove all air bubbles and wrinkles. 9. Inspect application for bubbles and/or areas not completely adhered. Remove bubbles as follows: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > 04-08-51-004A > Aug > 05 > Paint - Info On Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation > Page 15499 A. Use an air release tool, 3M(R) P/N 71604, or equivalent, or straight pin to puncture the bubble at its edge. B. Use finger or squeegee to force air out through the hole made in the film. Pinstripe Care - DO wash the pinstripe with an approved car wash detergent, Saturn P/N 21112715 (in Canada, GM P/N 993279), or equivalent, and rinse thoroughly. - DO keep high pressure car wash nozzles at least 0.46 m (1.5 ft) from the edge of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics. High pressure spray may cause the edge of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics to peel. - DO test any cleaning solution on a small section of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics before using the solution. - DON T use any aromatic solvents such as acetone, M.E.K., toluene, paint thinner, lacquer thinner on the pinstripes/vinyl graphics. Any solvent may soften or smear colors. - DON T overcoat the pinstripes/vinyl graphics with clear paint. - DON T apply wax over pinstripes/vinyl graphics, especially if the wax contains any petroleum distillates such as silicone. Wax that has dried along the edges of pinstripes and graphics can be removed by softening it with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol and cotton swabs. Be sure to rinse the area after cleaning. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 15500 Paint: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-51-008C Date: 090622 Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust) Models: 1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust. Cause Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface. Correction Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust: 1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID: - Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel consistency. 2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED: - Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available. Caution Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions closely because it may require special handling and disposal. If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes can be repeated. After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most cases, with a finesse/polish operation. Procedure 1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY PANELS. 2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical manufacturer's directions. Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process. Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 15501 Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent: Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from: Auto Wax Company, Inc. 1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or (214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax (214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com [email protected] E038 Fallout Gel or E038E Liquid Fallout Remover II available from: Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com [email protected] *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from other sources. If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a distributor near your location. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information regarding warranty coverage for this condition. Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours" field. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-51-008C Date: 090622 Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 15502 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust) Models: 1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust. Cause Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface. Correction Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust: 1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID: - Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel consistency. 2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED: - Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available. Caution Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions closely because it may require special handling and disposal. If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes can be repeated. After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most cases, with a finesse/polish operation. Procedure 1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY PANELS. 2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical manufacturer's directions. Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process. Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent: Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from: Auto Wax Company, Inc. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 15503 1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or (214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax (214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com [email protected] E038 Fallout Gel or E038E Liquid Fallout Remover II available from: Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com [email protected] *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from other sources. If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a distributor near your location. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information regarding warranty coverage for this condition. Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours" field. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Paint: Technician Safety Information Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems CAUTION: - Exposure to isocyanates during paint preparation and application processes can cause severe breathing problems. Read and follow all of the instructions from the manufacturers of painting materials, equipment, and protective gear. - Approved safety glasses and gloves should be worn when performing this procedure to reduce the chance of personal injury. All paint finish repairs of rigid exterior surfaces must meet GM standards. The GM Approved Refinish Materials book GM P/N GM4901M-D identifies the paint systems you may use. Always refer to the latest revision of the 4901M-D book. All approved products, including volatile organic compound (VOC) compliant regulations are listed in the system approach recommended by the individual manufacturer. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for the detailed procedures for materials used in the paint system in the painting repairs of rigid exterior surfaces. All components of an approved paint system have been engineered in order to ensure proper adhesion between layers.If necessary, spot repairs or color blending in an open panel can be done. However, do not blend clear coat in an open panel. Always apply clearcoat to the next break point (body side molding, feature line, or the next panel) Do not mix paint systems or substitute a product of one manufacturer for another manufacturer's product. If incompatible products are used together the following problems may occur: - Lifting of primer coats caused by overly aggressive solvents in subsequent layers - Loss of adhesion between layers due to incompatibility of resin systems - Solvent popping or pin holing due to inappropriate solvent selection - Poor through-curing due to incompatible hardener resins or insufficient reactivity - Gloss reduction due to incompatible resins and/or solvents - Poor color accuracy due to pigment interactions with incompatible resins and/or solvents - Film defects (craters, blisters, orange peel loss of gloss) due to the use of inferior quality raw materials in incompatible products. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 15506 Paint: Vehicle Damage Warnings Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems CAUTION: - Exposure to isocyanates during paint preparation and application processes can cause severe breathing problems. Read and follow all of the instructions from the manufacturers of painting materials, equipment, and protective gear. - Approved safety glasses and gloves should be worn when performing this procedure to reduce the chance of personal injury. All paint finish repairs of rigid exterior surfaces must meet GM standards. The GM Approved Refinish Materials book GM P/N GM4901M-D identifies the paint systems you may use. Always refer to the latest revision of the 4901M-D book. All approved products, including volatile organic compound (VOC) compliant regulations are listed in the system approach recommended by the individual manufacturer. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for the detailed procedures for materials used in the paint system in the painting repairs of rigid exterior surfaces. All components of an approved paint system have been engineered in order to ensure proper adhesion between layers.If necessary, spot repairs or color blending in an open panel can be done. However, do not blend clear coat in an open panel. Always apply clearcoat to the next break point (body side molding, feature line, or the next panel) Do not mix paint systems or substitute a product of one manufacturer for another manufacturer's product. If incompatible products are used together the following problems may occur: - Lifting of primer coats caused by overly aggressive solvents in subsequent layers - Loss of adhesion between layers due to incompatibility of resin systems - Solvent popping or pin holing due to inappropriate solvent selection - Poor through-curing due to incompatible hardener resins or insufficient reactivity - Gloss reduction due to incompatible resins and/or solvents - Poor color accuracy due to pigment interactions with incompatible resins and/or solvents - Film defects (craters, blisters, orange peel loss of gloss) due to the use of inferior quality raw materials in incompatible products. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 15509 Paint: Application and ID Label Information Service Parts ID Label Label - Vehicle Certification, Tire Place Card, Anti-Theft And Service Parts ID Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 15510 Paint: Application and ID Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems Caution: Exposure to isocyanates during paint preparation and application processes can cause severe breathing problems. Read and follow all of the instructions from the manufacturers of painting materials, equipment, and protective gear. All paint finish repairs of rigid exterior surfaces must meet GM standards. Refer to the latest revision of the GM Approved Refinish Materials book GM P/N GM4901M-D to identify the paint systems you may use that have been engineered to meet GM standards. The GM Approved Refinish Materials book supplies all approved products, including volatile organic compound (VOC) compliant regulations recommended by the individual manufacturer, and detailed procedures for materials used in their paint system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 15511 Paint: Application and ID Paint Identification Paint Identification Caution: Exposure to isocyanates during paint preparation and application processes can cause severe breathing problems. Read and follow all of the instructions from the manufacturers of painting materials, equipment, and protective gear. Important: Always refer to the GM Approved Refinish Materials book GM P/N 4901M-D. This book identifies the paint systems you may use. Use the service parts identification label to identify the type of paint technology, paint codes, trim level, and any special order paint colors on the vehicle. Refer to Label - Vehicle Certification, Tire Place Card, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID (See: Application and ID) in General Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Relay > Component Information > Locations Power Door Lock Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 15516 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 15517 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Heated Seat Module - Driver Heated Seat Module - Driver C1 (with RPO Code KA1) Heated Seat Module - Driver C2 (with RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 15523 Heated Seat Module - Driver C3 (with RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 15524 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger C1 (with RPO Code KA1) Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger C2 (with RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 15525 Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger C3 (with RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Seat Heater Control Module: Procedures HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the heated seat module retainer. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the heated seat module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15528 3. Remove the module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the heated seat module. 2. Install the module with the retainer to the seat pan. 3. Test for proper operation of the seat heater. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15529 Seat Heater Control Module: Removal and Replacement Heated Seat Control Module Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the heated seat module retainer. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the heated seat module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15530 3. Remove the module. Installation Procedure 1. Connect the electrical connector to the heated seat module. 2. Install the module with the retainer to the seat pan. 3. Test for proper operation of the seat heater. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Headliner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 15534 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Diagrams Sunroof Control Module C1 (with RPO Code CF5) Sunroof Control Module C2 (with RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 15535 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Depress the tab on the side of the control module. 3. With the tab depressed, slide the sunroof control module toward the sunroof motor. This will release the control module from the sunroof module. 4. Remove the control module from the sunroof module and disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 15536 1. Connect the electrical connector to the sunroof control module. 2. Insert the control module tabs into the sunroof module slots. 3. Slide the sunroof express module away from the sunroof motor until it is fully engaged. 4. Verify the proper operation of the sunroof before securing the headliner. 5. Install the headliner. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Luggage Rack: Procedures LUGGAGE CARRIER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the luggage carrier side rail front covers using a trim tool or equivalent. 2. Remove the luggage carrier side rail rear covers using a trim tool or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15542 3. Remove the luggage carrier center rails by flipping up the side retainers and sliding the center rails rearward off the side rails. 4. Remove the nuts that attach the front of the side rails to the roof. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15543 5. Remove the nuts that attach the rear of the side rails to the roof. 6. Remove the side rails from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15544 7. Remove the rubber gasket from the side rails. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the rubber gasket to the side rails. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15545 2. Install the side rails to the vehicle. 3. Install the nuts that attach the rear of the side rails to the roof. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the nuts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15546 4. Install the nuts that attach the front of the side rails to the roof. Tighten the nuts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 5. Install the luggage carrier center rails by sliding into the side rails from the rear. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15547 6. Install the rear side rail covers. 7. Install the front side rail covers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15548 Luggage Rack: Removal and Replacement Luggage Carrier Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the luggage carrier side rail front covers using a trim tool or equivalent. 2. Remove the luggage carrier side rail rear covers using a trim tool or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15549 3. Remove the luggage carrier center rails by flipping up the side retainers and sliding the center rails rearward off the side rails. 4. Remove the nuts that attach the front of the side rails to the roof. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15550 5. Remove the nuts that attach the rear of the side rails to the roof. 6. Remove the side rails from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15551 7. Remove the rubber gasket from the side rails. Installation Procedure 1. Install the rubber gasket to the side rails. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15552 2. Install the side rails to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the nuts that attach the rear of the side rails to the roof. Tighten the nuts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15553 4. Install the nuts that attach the front of the side rails to the roof. Tighten the nuts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 5. Install the luggage carrier center rails by sliding into the side rails from the rear. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15554 6. Install the rear side rail covers. 7. Install the front side rail covers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body Wind Noise From Various Locations Technical Service Bulletin # 06-08-58-001 Date: 060131 Body - Wind Noise From Various Locations Bulletin No.: 06-08-58-001 Date: January 31, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: General Windnoise Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Condition # 1 For vehicles built prior to October 7, 2005: Windnoise from around the outside rear view mirror. Cause The mirror gasket may not be making enough compression to the sheet metal and allowing noise to come in through the trim panel extension cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 15563 Parts Information Disclaimer Correction Gently pull at the top end of the trim panel extension cover to disengage the attaching clip. Install the insulator behind the extension cover. Refer to the illustration above. Condition # 2 Wind noise coming from the window seal (front and rear doors). Cause The door glass seal contact with the glass may be light. Correction Correction for vehicles built prior to VIN breakpoints 66032861 (for Chevrolet) and 66038652 (for Pontiac): Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 15564 1. Remove the door glass seal from all the doors. Refer to the illustration above. 2. Check the gap between the glass and the metal flange. The gap should be 10 to 12 mm (3/8 in) for good contact pressure of the seal to the glass. Refer to the illustration above. If the gap is greater than 12 mm (1/2 in), refer to the next step. 3. To protect the sheet metal finish, use duck bill pliers and bend the flange slightly to achieve 10 to 12 mm (1/2 in). Correction for vehicles built AFTER VIN breakpoints 66032861 (for Chevrolet) and 66038652 (for Pontiac) without secondary seal two lip design: - Replace all the window seals. Refer to the illustration above. Condition # 3 Wind noise coming from the roof rack area. Cause Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 15565 ^ The position of the roof rack is not the optimum position for wind rush. ^ The lock tab is not seated properly. Correction For Pontiac Torrent 1. The position of the front crossmember needs to be aligned to the plastic cover as shown in the illustration above. 2. The position of the rear (second) crossmember needs to be at the far rear position of the roof racks bar. Refer to the illustration above. 3. Make sure that all tabs are in "lock" position and the arrow (shown in red) in both bars is pointing forward. Refer to the illustration above. Correction For Chevrolet Equinox Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 15566 1. The position of the front crossmember needs to be aligned to the second slot of the roof rack (front to back). The position of the rear (second) crossmember needs to be at the last position (slot) of the roof racks bar as shown in the illustration above. 2. Make sure that all tabs are in "lock" position and the arrow in both bars is pointing forward. Refer to the illustration above. Condition # 4 For vehicles built prior to VIN breakpoints 66053314 (for Chevrolet) and 66051985 (for Pontiac): Wind noise coming from the B pillar area in the front doors. Cause The B pillar applique' has a gap to the door. Refer to the illustration above. Correction Replace the B pillar applique' on the front & rear doors. Condition # 5 For vehicles built prior to VIN breakpoints 66079786 (for Chevrolet) and 66077742 (for Pontiac): Wind noise coming from the C pillar area in the rear doors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 15567 Cause The C pillar trim has a gap to the door. Refer to the illustration above. Correction Replace the C pillar trim. Condition # 6 The applique' inner is separating from the rest of the applique'. Cause The applique' inner is separating from the rest of the applique'. Refer to the illustration above. Correction Remove the "A" pillar molding 1. Remove all the screws. 2. Pull outboard on the molding at the top rear to disengage. 3. Push the plastic extension back in place and hot melt the extension from the back side to secure. 4. Reinstall the molding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body - Wind Noise From Various Locations Technical Service Bulletin # 06-08-58-001 Date: 060131 Body - Wind Noise From Various Locations Bulletin No.: 06-08-58-001 Date: January 31, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: General Windnoise Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Condition # 1 For vehicles built prior to October 7, 2005: Windnoise from around the outside rear view mirror. Cause The mirror gasket may not be making enough compression to the sheet metal and allowing noise to come in through the trim panel extension cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body - Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 15573 Parts Information Disclaimer Correction Gently pull at the top end of the trim panel extension cover to disengage the attaching clip. Install the insulator behind the extension cover. Refer to the illustration above. Condition # 2 Wind noise coming from the window seal (front and rear doors). Cause The door glass seal contact with the glass may be light. Correction Correction for vehicles built prior to VIN breakpoints 66032861 (for Chevrolet) and 66038652 (for Pontiac): Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body - Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 15574 1. Remove the door glass seal from all the doors. Refer to the illustration above. 2. Check the gap between the glass and the metal flange. The gap should be 10 to 12 mm (3/8 in) for good contact pressure of the seal to the glass. Refer to the illustration above. If the gap is greater than 12 mm (1/2 in), refer to the next step. 3. To protect the sheet metal finish, use duck bill pliers and bend the flange slightly to achieve 10 to 12 mm (1/2 in). Correction for vehicles built AFTER VIN breakpoints 66032861 (for Chevrolet) and 66038652 (for Pontiac) without secondary seal two lip design: - Replace all the window seals. Refer to the illustration above. Condition # 3 Wind noise coming from the roof rack area. Cause Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body - Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 15575 ^ The position of the roof rack is not the optimum position for wind rush. ^ The lock tab is not seated properly. Correction For Pontiac Torrent 1. The position of the front crossmember needs to be aligned to the plastic cover as shown in the illustration above. 2. The position of the rear (second) crossmember needs to be at the far rear position of the roof racks bar. Refer to the illustration above. 3. Make sure that all tabs are in "lock" position and the arrow (shown in red) in both bars is pointing forward. Refer to the illustration above. Correction For Chevrolet Equinox Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body - Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 15576 1. The position of the front crossmember needs to be aligned to the second slot of the roof rack (front to back). The position of the rear (second) crossmember needs to be at the last position (slot) of the roof racks bar as shown in the illustration above. 2. Make sure that all tabs are in "lock" position and the arrow in both bars is pointing forward. Refer to the illustration above. Condition # 4 For vehicles built prior to VIN breakpoints 66053314 (for Chevrolet) and 66051985 (for Pontiac): Wind noise coming from the B pillar area in the front doors. Cause The B pillar applique' has a gap to the door. Refer to the illustration above. Correction Replace the B pillar applique' on the front & rear doors. Condition # 5 For vehicles built prior to VIN breakpoints 66079786 (for Chevrolet) and 66077742 (for Pontiac): Wind noise coming from the C pillar area in the rear doors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body - Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 15577 Cause The C pillar trim has a gap to the door. Refer to the illustration above. Correction Replace the C pillar trim. Condition # 6 The applique' inner is separating from the rest of the applique'. Cause The applique' inner is separating from the rest of the applique'. Refer to the illustration above. Correction Remove the "A" pillar molding 1. Remove all the screws. 2. Pull outboard on the molding at the top rear to disengage. 3. Push the plastic extension back in place and hot melt the extension from the back side to secure. 4. Reinstall the molding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair Sun Shade: Service and Repair SUNROOF SUNSHADE PANEL REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the sunroof window. 2. Remove the screws from the sunroof drip channel. 3. Remove the sunroof drip channel. 4. Slide the sunshade forward to the closed position. 5. Push the spring retainer clips on the right side of the sunshade inward to disengage them from the track using an upward lifting motion. 6. Remove the sunshade from the sunroof module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Engage one side of the sunshade by positioning the spring clips into the track. 2. Push the spring retainer clips inward on the opposite side of the sunshade to engage them into the track. 3. Slide the sunshade back and forth to ensure proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15582 4. Slide the sunshade to the half closed position. 5. Install the rear drain drip channel. 6. Install the sunroof window. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Headliner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Headliner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 15589 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Diagrams Sunroof Motor C1 (with RPO Code CF5) Sunroof Motor C2 (with RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 15590 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair SUNROOF MOTOR/ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Remove the sunroof window. 3. Disconnect the sunroof motor harness. 4. Remove the screws securing the sunroof actuator to the sunroof module. 5. Remove the sunroof motor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Manually adjust the track to achieve a distance of (a) 44.5 mm (1.75 in) between the left slide and track bracket. 2. Manually adjust the track to achieve a distance of (a) 44.5 mm (1.75 in) between the right slide and track bracket. 3. Install the sunroof motor to the sunroof module. 4. Install the sunroof motor screws. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 15591 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 5. Connect the electrical connectors to the sunroof motor. 6. Secure the electrical harness to the sunroof module. 7. Verify the sunroof operation. 8. Install the sunroof window. 9. Install the headliner. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Sunroof Switch (with RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15595 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Pull gently at front of reading lamp cover to disengage retaining clips. 2. Rotate cover rearward until rear attaching hooks are released. 3. Disconnect sunroof switch harness from sunroof switch. 4. Remove sunroof switch fasteners and remove sunroof switch. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15596 1. Install sunroof switch with fasteners. Tighten sunroof switch to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in) 2. Connect sunroof switch harness to sunroof switch. 3. Position front reading lamp cover into rear attaching hooks. 4. Rotate front reading lamp cover into lamp assembly forward, then snap cover into place. 5. Function sunroof switch to ensure proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 09-08-67-001 > Jan > 09 > Body - Rattling Noise From The Sunroof Area Sunroof / Moonroof Track: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Rattling Noise From The Sunroof Area TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-67-001 Date: January 06, 2009 Subject: Sunroof Frame Tox Rivet Rattle (Install Flocking Tape) Models: 2006-2009 Buick Lucerne 2003-2007 Cadillac CTS 2005-2009 Cadillac STS 2006-2009 Cadillac DTS 2005-2009 Chevrolet Cobalt, Equinox 2006-2009 Chevrolet HHR 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2009 Pontiac G5 2004-2007 Saturn VUE Condition Some customers may comment of a rattling noise coming from the sunroof or roof area. Cause This condition may be caused by the inboard tox rivets, which retain the sunroof center support beam to the side rails, pulling through the side rail track on one or both sides. This may cause the support beam to rattle against the side rail track. Correction Important: Once the sunroof module is bolted into the roof ring of the vehicle, the support provided by the center beam is no longer necessary. DO NOT replace the sunroof frame when the above condition is noted. Install flocking tape between the sunroof center support beam and the side rail track. 1. Following SI, lower the front portion of the headliner enough to gain access to the sunroof module center support beam through the opening in the headliner. 2. Check both sides of the center support beam for loose rivets (2) by inserting a trim stick (1) between the center support and the side rail track. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 09-08-67-001 > Jan > 09 > Body - Rattling Noise From The Sunroof Area > Page 15605 3. Look for separation of the center support beam and the side rail track. 4. Cut a piece of Kent-Automotive(TM) 30 mm wide BRS Flocking tape, or equivalent, approximately 152 mm (6 in) in length. 5. Install the flocking tape (1) underneath the center support beam using the trim stick (2) to separate the center support beam and the side rail track. 6. Ensure that the flocking tape is positioned underneath the complete width of the center support beam. 7. Reinstall the headliner. Parts Information Warranty Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 09-08-67-001 > Jan > 09 > Body - Rattling Noise From The Sunroof Area Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Customer Interest Body - Rattling Noise From The Sunroof Area TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-67-001 Date: January 06, 2009 Subject: Sunroof Frame Tox Rivet Rattle (Install Flocking Tape) Models: 2006-2009 Buick Lucerne 2003-2007 Cadillac CTS 2005-2009 Cadillac STS 2006-2009 Cadillac DTS 2005-2009 Chevrolet Cobalt, Equinox 2006-2009 Chevrolet HHR 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2009 Pontiac G5 2004-2007 Saturn VUE Condition Some customers may comment of a rattling noise coming from the sunroof or roof area. Cause This condition may be caused by the inboard tox rivets, which retain the sunroof center support beam to the side rails, pulling through the side rail track on one or both sides. This may cause the support beam to rattle against the side rail track. Correction Important: Once the sunroof module is bolted into the roof ring of the vehicle, the support provided by the center beam is no longer necessary. DO NOT replace the sunroof frame when the above condition is noted. Install flocking tape between the sunroof center support beam and the side rail track. 1. Following SI, lower the front portion of the headliner enough to gain access to the sunroof module center support beam through the opening in the headliner. 2. Check both sides of the center support beam for loose rivets (2) by inserting a trim stick (1) between the center support and the side rail track. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 09-08-67-001 > Jan > 09 > Body - Rattling Noise From The Sunroof Area > Page 15611 3. Look for separation of the center support beam and the side rail track. 4. Cut a piece of Kent-Automotive(TM) 30 mm wide BRS Flocking tape, or equivalent, approximately 152 mm (6 in) in length. 5. Install the flocking tape (1) underneath the center support beam using the trim stick (2) to separate the center support beam and the side rail track. 6. Ensure that the flocking tape is positioned underneath the complete width of the center support beam. 7. Reinstall the headliner. Parts Information Warranty Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair SUNROOF AIR DEFLECTOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Cycle the sunroof window to the rear. 2. Push down on the right front side of the air deflector. 3. Do the following while holding the right side down: - Push the left front side of the air deflector towards the right side. - Pull up on the left side until the lower tab clears the roof opening. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15615 4. Swing the air deflector in an upward arc, rearward, to disengage air deflector from the hooks on both sides of the sunroof module. 5. Remove the air deflector from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Engage the rear of the air deflector into the side hooks on the sunroof module. 2. Arc the air deflector in a forward motion. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15616 3. Push the right side of the air deflector down into the roof opening. 4. Push the left front side of the air deflector inward and down so the tab clears the roof opening. 5. Close the sunroof window. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Procedures Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front SUNROOF DRAIN HOSE REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Lower the headliner. Refer to Headliner Replacement in Interior Trim. 2. Remove the front drain hose from the sunroof module. 3. Remove tape from the drain hose. 4. Remove the front drain hose from the retaining clips. 5. Pull the front drain hose out of the front hinge pillar. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15621 1. Push the drain hose into the hole in the front hinge pillar. 2. Connect the front drain hose to the retaining clips. 3. Connect the drain hose to the sunroof module. 4. Install the headliner. Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Rear SUNROOF DRAIN HOSE REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headliner. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15622 2. Remove the rear drain hoses from the sunroof module. 3. Remove the tape from the drain hose. 4. Remove the upper portion of the rear drain hoses from the retaining clips. 5. Remove the rear side trim panels. 6. Remove the lower portion of the rear drain hoses from the retaining clips. 7. Pull the rear drain hoses up through the side rail. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Route the rear drain hose down through the access hole in the side rail. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15623 2. Push the end of the rear drain hoses down into the rear compartment opening. 3. Clip the lower portion of the rear drain hoses into position. 4. Install the rear side trim panels. 5. Clip the upper portion of the rear drain hoses into position. 6. Install the rear drain hoses to the sunroof module. 7. Install the headliner. Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement (Rear) Sunroof Drain Inspection and Cleaning Drain Hose Routing A drain trough encircles the sunroof window panel and water is drained off by the drain hoses located at each corner of the housing. A drain channel spans across the sunroof module at the rear of the window panel and directs water into the trough. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15624 1. Ensure the front drain hoses are routed down the windshield pillars and out the center of the pillar between the door hinges. Ensure the hoses are not kinked. Replace any torn or cracked hose. Refer to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement) . 2. Ensure the rear drain hoses are routed through the rear pillars and out of the rocker panel. Ensure the rear hoses are properly routed in the metal roof slot and taped in place. Replace any torn or cracked hoses. Refer to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Rear (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front (Monte Carlo)) . Plugged Drain Hose If a waterleak has occurred inspect for a plugged drain hose at each corner of trough. 1. Open the sunroof window. 2. To test for blockage, pour a small container of water into the module housing trough. Inspect each corner to confirm the drain hose is draining water. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. 3. Use compressed air, 35 psi or less to blow out any drain hose that is plugged. 4. Test the system again. 5. If the hose remains plugged, inspect to see it is properly routed and does not have a kink. 6. Remove any hoses that remain plugged. Refer to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement) or to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Rear (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front (Monte Carlo)) . 7. Remove the blockage. 1. Push mechanics wire through the hose to remove the obstruction. 2. Use compressed air in order to blow out any remaining debris. 8. Install the hose. Refer to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement) or to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Rear (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front (Monte Carlo)) . Disconnected Drain Hose Inspect the drainage system for disconnected drain hoses. Complete the following steps in order to obtain partial access to the drain hoses and to inspect for disconnected hoses. 1. Open the sunroof window panel. 2. Lower the headliner as needed. Refer to Headliner Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. 3. Connect any disconnected hoses. 4. Ensure that the drain hoses are properly routed in the metal roof slot and secured into place. Sunroof Drain Inspection and Cleaning Sunroof Drain Inspection and Cleaning Drain Hose Routing A drain trough encircles the sunroof window panel and water is drained off by the drain hoses located at each corner of the housing. A drain channel spans across the sunroof module at the rear of the window panel and directs water into the trough. 1. Ensure the front drain hoses are routed down the windshield pillars and out the center of the pillar between the door hinges. Ensure the hoses are not kinked. Replace any torn or cracked hose. Refer to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement) . 2. Ensure the rear drain hoses are routed through the rear pillars and out of the rocker panel. Ensure the rear hoses are properly routed in the metal roof slot and taped in place. Replace any torn or cracked hoses. Refer to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Rear (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front (Monte Carlo)) . Plugged Drain Hose If a waterleak has occurred inspect for a plugged drain hose at each corner of trough. 1. Open the sunroof window. 2. To test for blockage, pour a small container of water into the module housing trough. Inspect each corner to confirm the drain hose is draining water. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15625 Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. 3. Use compressed air, 35 psi or less to blow out any drain hose that is plugged. 4. Test the system again. 5. If the hose remains plugged, inspect to see it is properly routed and does not have a kink. 6. Remove any hoses that remain plugged. Refer to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement) or to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Rear (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front (Monte Carlo)) . 7. Remove the blockage. 1. Push mechanics wire through the hose to remove the obstruction. 2. Use compressed air in order to blow out any remaining debris. 8. Install the hose. Refer to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement) or to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Rear (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front (Monte Carlo)) . Disconnected Drain Hose Inspect the drainage system for disconnected drain hoses. Complete the following steps in order to obtain partial access to the drain hoses and to inspect for disconnected hoses. 1. Open the sunroof window panel. 2. Lower the headliner as needed. Refer to Headliner Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. 3. Connect any disconnected hoses. 4. Ensure that the drain hoses are properly routed in the metal roof slot and secured into place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15626 Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Removal and Replacement Roof Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the headliner. Refer to Headliner Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. 2. Remove the rear drain hoses from the sunroof module. 3. Remove the tape from the drain hose. 4. Remove the upper portion of the rear drain hoses from the retaining clips. 5. Remove the rear side trim panels. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) in Interior Trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15627 6. Remove the lower portion of the rear drain hoses from the retaining clips. 7. Pull the rear drain hoses up through the side rail. Installation Procedure 1. Route the rear drain hose down through the access hole in the side rail. 2. Push the end of the rear drain hoses down into the rear compartment opening. 3. Clip the lower portion of the rear drain hoses into position. 4. Install the rear side trim panels. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) in Interior Trim. 5. Clip the upper portion of the rear drain hoses into position. 6. Install the rear drain hoses to the sunroof module. 7. Install the headliner. Refer to Headliner Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15628 Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Lower the headliner. Refer to Headliner Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. 2. Remove the front drain hose from the sunroof module. 3. Remove tape from the drain hose. 4. Remove the front drain hose from the retaining clips. 5. Pull the front drain hose out of the front hinge pillar. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15629 1. Push the drain hose into the hole in the front hinge pillar. 2. Connect the front drain hose to the retaining clips. 3. Connect the drain hose to the sunroof module. 4. Install the headliner. Refer to Headliner Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front (Monte Carlo) Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the headliner. Refer to Headliner Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15630 2. Remove the rear drain hoses from the sunroof module. 3. Remove the tape from the drain hose. 4. Remove the upper portion of the rear drain hoses from the retaining clips. 5. Remove the rear side trim panels. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) in Interior Trim. 6. Remove the lower portion of the rear drain hoses from the retaining clips. 7. Pull the rear drain hoses up through the side rail. Installation Procedure 1. Route the rear drain hose down through the access hole in the side rail. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15631 2. Push the end of the rear drain hoses down into the rear compartment opening. 3. Clip the lower portion of the rear drain hoses into position. 4. Install the rear side trim panels. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) in Interior Trim. 5. Clip the upper portion of the rear drain hoses into position. 6. Install the rear drain hoses to the sunroof module. 7. Install the headliner. Refer to Headliner Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Headliner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 15635 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Diagrams Sunroof Control Module C1 (with RPO Code CF5) Sunroof Control Module C2 (with RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 15636 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Depress the tab on the side of the control module. 3. With the tab depressed, slide the sunroof control module toward the sunroof motor. This will release the control module from the sunroof module. 4. Remove the control module from the sunroof module and disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 15637 1. Connect the electrical connector to the sunroof control module. 2. Insert the control module tabs into the sunroof module slots. 3. Slide the sunroof express module away from the sunroof motor until it is fully engaged. 4. Verify the proper operation of the sunroof before securing the headliner. 5. Install the headliner. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair SUNROOF WINDOW REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Cycle the sunroof window to the vent position. NOTE: In order to prevent damage to the paint, mask the roof panel in front of the sunroof opening using masking tape and paper. 2. Slide the sunshade rearward. 3. Remove the sunroof window screws on both sides. 4. Lift the sunroof window from the sunroof opening. IMPORTANT: If operating the sunroof without the window, refer to Sunroof Air Deflector Replacement. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15641 1. Position the sunroof window into the opening. 2. Install the sunroof window screws. Do not tighten the screws. 3. Carefully close the sunroof window from the vent position to the full closed position. 4. Adjust the sunroof window. Refer to Sunroof Window Height and Opening Fit Adjustment. 5. Tighten the sunroof window screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 5 N.m (44 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Head Rest: Procedures Head Restraint Guide Replacement - Front Seat HEAD RESTRAINT GUIDE REPLACEMENT - FRONT SEAT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headrest. 2. Disconnect the lower J-hook retainer from the seat back trim cover. 3. Carefully pull up the trim cover, disengaging the hoop and loop retainers, until the headrest guides are exposed. 4. Squeeze the locking tabs on the headrest guide and pull the guides up and out of the seat back pad. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the seat back trim cover over the top of the seat back. 2. Install the headrest guides by pressing the guides into position until the locking tabs engage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15647 3. Install the headrest. Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat HEAD RESTRAINT REPLACEMENT - FRONT SEAT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the head restraint to the full-up position. 2. Insert an awl into the guide hole. 3. Pull up to remove the head restraint. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the restraint in the head restraint guides. 2. Push downward to install the head restraint. 3. Pull up on the restraint to ensure that the restraints are locked in place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15648 Head Restraint Replacement - Rear Seat HEAD RESTRAINT REPLACEMENT - REAR SEAT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the head restraint to the full-up position. 2. Insert an awl into the guide hole. 3. Pull up to remove the head restraint. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the restraint in the head restraint guides. 2. Push downward to install the head restraint. 3. Pull up on the restraint to ensure that the restraints are locked in place. Head Restraint Retainer Replacement - Rear Seat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15649 HEAD RESTRAINT RETAINER REPLACEMENT - REAR SEAT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headrest. 2. Disconnect the lower J-hook retainer from the seat back trim cover. 3. Carefully pull up the trim cover, disengaging the hoop and loop retainers, until the headrest guides are exposed. 4. Squeeze the locking tabs on the headrest guide and pull the guides up and out of the seat back pad. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the seat back trim cover over the top of the seat back. 2. Install the headrest guides by pressing the guides into position until the locking tabs engage. 3. Install the headrest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15650 Head Rest: Removal and Replacement Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat Removal Procedure 1. Raise the head restraint to the full-up position. 2. Insert an awl into the guide hole. 3. Pull up to remove the head restraint. Installation Procedure 1. Position the restraint in the head restraint guides. 2. Push downward to install the head restraint. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15651 3. Pull up on the restraint to ensure that the restraints are locked in place. Head Restraint Guide Replacement - Front Seat Head Restraint Guide Replacement - Front Seat Removal Procedure 1. Remove the headrest. Refer to Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat (See: Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat) . 2. Disconnect the lower J-hook retainer from the seat back trim cover. Refer to Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) (See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement Front (Fold Flat))Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front (Non-Fold Flat) (See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement Front (Non-Fold Flat)) . 3. Carefully pull up the trim cover, disengaging the hoop and loop retainers, until the headrest guides are exposed. 4. Squeeze the locking tabs on the headrest guide and pull the guides up and out of the seat back pad. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15652 1. Install the seat back trim cover over the top of the seat back. Refer to Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) (See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement Front (Fold Flat))Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front (Non-Fold Flat) (See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement Front (Non-Fold Flat)) . 2. Install the headrest guides by pressing the guides into position until the locking tabs engage. 3. Install the headrest. Refer to Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat (See: Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat) . Head Restraint Replacement - Rear Seat Head Restraint Replacement - Rear Seat Removal Procedure 1. Raise the head restraint to the full-up position. 2. Insert an awl into the guide hole. 3. Pull up to remove the head restraint. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15653 1. Position the restraint in the head restraint guides. 2. Push downward to install the head restraint. 3. Pull up on the restraint to ensure that the restraints are locked in place. Seats Head Restraint Retainer Replacement - Rear Seat Removal Procedure 1. Remove the headrest. Refer to Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat (See: Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat) . 2. Disconnect the lower J-hook retainer from the seat back trim cover. Refer to Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) (See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement Front (Fold Flat))Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front (Non-Fold Flat) (See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement Front (Non-Fold Flat)) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15654 3. Carefully pull up the trim cover, disengaging the hoop and loop retainers, until the headrest guides are exposed. 4. Squeeze the locking tabs on the headrest guide and pull the guides up and out of the seat back pad. Installation Procedure 1. Install the seat back trim cover over the top of the seat back. Refer to Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) (See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement Front (Fold Flat))Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front (Non-Fold Flat) (See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement Front (Non-Fold Flat)) . 2. Install the headrest guides by pressing the guides into position until the locking tabs engage. 3. Install the headrest. Refer to Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat (See: Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Restraint System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information Head Restraint System: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-003A Date: March 24, 2011 Subject: Information on Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Concerns with Comfort, Custom Upholstery or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Adjustable Head Restraints Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-003 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS, USE THE HEAD RESTRAINT COVERS, FOAM AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER OR REPOSITION THE HEAD RESTRAINT SYSTEM. ANY ALTERATIONS TO HEAD RESTRAINTS DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER DESIGN ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. You may have a customer with a concern that the head restraint is uncomfortable or sits too far forward. The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with head restraints that have been designed to help minimize injuries while still providing comfort to the occupants. Each GM vehicle has its own specifically designed head restraint. The head restraints should only be used in the vehicle for which they were designed. The head restraint will not operate to its design intent if the original foam is replaced (1) by non-GM foam or head restraint, (2) by GM foam or head restraint designed for a different vehicle, (3) by GM foam or head restraint that has been altered by a trim shop or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket comfort enhancing pad or device, is installed. Never modify the design of the head restraint or remove the head restraint from the vehicle as this may interfere with the operation of the seating and restraint systems and may prevent proper positioning of the passenger within the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Description and Operation > Personalization Memory Positioning Systems: Description and Operation Personalization PERSONALIZATION DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Personalization features may be set for the vehicle or the driver. Vehicle features do not change with each driver. For more information on vehicle personalization features for this vehicle, refer to Vehicle Personalization. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Description and Operation > Personalization > Page 15663 Memory Positioning Systems: Description and Operation Vehicle Personalization VEHICLE PERSONALIZATION PROGRAMMING FEATURES WITH TECH 2 Enter Programming To enter Programming with the Tech 2, perform the following actions: 1. Install the scan tool. 2. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 3. Select the correct vehicle and model year. 4. Select F1: Body Control Module 5. Select F2: Special Functions 6. Select F2: Personalization SETTING OPTIONS Select an option with the UP/DOWN ARROW keys. The selected option will be highlighted. Use the SIDE TO SIDE ARROW keys to activate or deactivate the highlighted options, an ASTERISK will be displayed when an option has been ACTIVATED. Use the SOFT keys to save the selected options or use the EXIT key to leave the options unchanged. After all options have been selected press the SOFT key to continue. The following is a list of the selectable options: F0: Pre-alarm Option - F1: CTD Operation - F2: Door Lock Operation - F3: Fob Feedback - F4: Afterblow Option Pre-alarm Option Refer to Theft Systems Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent for information. CTD Operation Refer to Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent for information. Door Lock Operation Automatic Door Lock and Automatic Door Unlock can be configured with the Tech 2. Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors for more information. Fob Feedback Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry for information. Afterblow Option Refer to SIR Syste Description and Operation in Restraint Systems for information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Seat Motor: > 06-08-50-011 > Oct > 06 > Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise Power Seat Motor: Customer Interest Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise Subject: Left Power Seat Inoperative/Grinding Noise (Replace Power Seat Motor) # 06-08-50-011 (10/12/2006) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on a grinding noise when moving the driver power seat. Cause This cause may be due to the customer pulling on the motor assembly by mistake. Correction Replace the power seat motor assembly using the following procedure: 1. Release the seat belt from the seat. 2. Remove the two retaining bolts and move the seat back. 3. Tilt the seat forward to release it from the floor and disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the recliner handle by pulling it off the mechanism. 5. Remove the left side outer seat trim panel and connector from the power seat switch. 6. If the motor works but is noisy proceed to step 8. If the seat motor is inoperative, remove the two bolts that retain the track to the worm gear as see in the illustration above. 7. Slide the track back to gain access to the four T-20 TORX screws. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Seat Motor: > 06-08-50-011 > Oct > 06 > Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise > Page 15672 8. Remove the four T-20 TORX screws at the actuators and cables. 9. Remove the lock from the wire harness connector. 10. With a small pick or screwdriver, remove the red wire from cavity C and the black wire from cavity F. Remove the motor assembly. 11. Install the red wire into cavity C and the black wire into cavity F and install the lock. Install the motor assembly. 12. Install the motor assembly and tighten the four T-20 TORX screws. If the motor works but is noisy, proceed to step 13. Tighten Tighten the T-20 TORX Screws to 3 Nm (19 lb-in). 13. Slide both tracks back in line with the worm gear and install the two bolts. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 17 Nm (13 lb-ft). 14. Install the left side outer seat trim panel and switch connector. 15. Install the recliner handle. 16. Install the seat assembly into vehicle. Connect the electrical connector and install the seat track bolts. Tighten Tighten the seat bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 17. Install the seat bolt. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Seat Motor: > 06-08-50-011 > Oct > 06 > Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise > Page 15673 18. Verify proper operation of the seat. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Seat Motor: > 06-08-50-011 > Oct > 06 > Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise Power Seat Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise Subject: Left Power Seat Inoperative/Grinding Noise (Replace Power Seat Motor) # 06-08-50-011 (10/12/2006) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on a grinding noise when moving the driver power seat. Cause This cause may be due to the customer pulling on the motor assembly by mistake. Correction Replace the power seat motor assembly using the following procedure: 1. Release the seat belt from the seat. 2. Remove the two retaining bolts and move the seat back. 3. Tilt the seat forward to release it from the floor and disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the recliner handle by pulling it off the mechanism. 5. Remove the left side outer seat trim panel and connector from the power seat switch. 6. If the motor works but is noisy proceed to step 8. If the seat motor is inoperative, remove the two bolts that retain the track to the worm gear as see in the illustration above. 7. Slide the track back to gain access to the four T-20 TORX screws. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Seat Motor: > 06-08-50-011 > Oct > 06 > Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise > Page 15679 8. Remove the four T-20 TORX screws at the actuators and cables. 9. Remove the lock from the wire harness connector. 10. With a small pick or screwdriver, remove the red wire from cavity C and the black wire from cavity F. Remove the motor assembly. 11. Install the red wire into cavity C and the black wire into cavity F and install the lock. Install the motor assembly. 12. Install the motor assembly and tighten the four T-20 TORX screws. If the motor works but is noisy, proceed to step 13. Tighten Tighten the T-20 TORX Screws to 3 Nm (19 lb-in). 13. Slide both tracks back in line with the worm gear and install the two bolts. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 17 Nm (13 lb-ft). 14. Install the left side outer seat trim panel and switch connector. 15. Install the recliner handle. 16. Install the seat assembly into vehicle. Connect the electrical connector and install the seat track bolts. Tighten Tighten the seat bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 17. Install the seat bolt. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Seat Motor: > 06-08-50-011 > Oct > 06 > Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise > Page 15680 18. Verify proper operation of the seat. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 15681 Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 15682 Power Seat Motor: Diagrams Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Driver (with RPO Code AG1) Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver (with RPO Code AG1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 15683 Power Seat Motor: Service and Repair LUMBAR ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT - MANUAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the lumbar cable from the actuator: 1. Adjust the knob until the lumbar basket is in the position of least support. 2. Pull back on the lumbar cable sleeve. 3. Remove the barrel end of the cable from the lumbar actuator. 3. Remove the lumbar knob by pulling firmly on the knob. 4. Drill out the rivets from the lumbar actuator, if necessary. 5. Remove the lumbar actuator screws. 6. Remove the actuator from the seat. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 15684 1. Install the lumbar actuator to the seat cushion frame with screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 2. Install the lumbar knob. 3. Install the lumbar cable in the actuator: 1. Pull back on the lumbar cable sleeve. 2. Install the barrel end of the cable from the lumbar actuator. 3. Adjust the knob to ensure that the cable is properly installed. 4. Install the front seat. 4. Install the front seat. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15688 Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (with RPO Code AG1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Power Seat Switch: Procedures Seat Switch Replacement - Power SEAT SWITCH REPLACEMENT - POWER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat switch bezel. 2. Remove the outer trim panel from the seat cushion. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the switch. 4. Use a small flat-bladed tool to remove the switch from the trim panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15691 1. Install the switch into the trim panel. 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the outer trim panel to the seat cushion. 4. Install the seat switch bezel. Seat Switch Bezel Replacement SEAT SWITCH BEZEL REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Move the seat to the most forward position. 2. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove the bezel from the seat switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15692 1. Install the seat switch bezel. Press into place. 2. Return the seat to the original position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15693 Power Seat Switch: Removal and Replacement Seat Switch Bezel Replacement Seat Switch Bezel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Move the seat to the most forward position. 2. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove the bezel from the seat switch. Installation Procedure 1. Install the seat switch bezel. Press into place. 2. Return the seat to the original position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15694 Seat Switch Replacement - Power Seat Switch Replacement - Power Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seat switch bezel. Refer to Seat Switch Bezel Replacement (See: Seat Switch Bezel Replacement) . 2. Remove the outer trim panel from the seat cushion. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the switch. 4. Use a small flat-bladed tool to remove the switch from the trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15695 Installation Procedure 1. Install the switch into the trim panel. 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the outer trim panel to the seat cushion. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 4. Install the seat switch bezel. Refer to Seat Switch Bezel Replacement (See: Seat Switch Bezel Replacement) . Lumbar Actuator Replacement - Manual Lumbar Actuator Replacement - Manual Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15696 2. Remove the lumbar cable from the actuator: 1. Adjust the knob until the lumbar basket is in the position of least support. 2. Pull back on the lumbar cable sleeve. 3. Remove the barrel end of the cable from the lumbar actuator. 3. Remove the lumbar knob by pulling firmly on the knob. 4. Drill out the rivets from the lumbar actuator, if necessary. 5. Remove the lumbar actuator screws. 6. Remove the actuator from the seat. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15697 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Install the lumbar actuator to the seat cushion frame with screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 2. Install the lumbar knob. 3. Install the lumbar cable in the actuator: 1. Pull back on the lumbar cable sleeve. 2. Install the barrel end of the cable from the lumbar actuator. 3. Adjust the knob to ensure that the cable is properly installed. 4. Install the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Seat Back Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Back Frame: Service and Repair SEAT BACK FRAME REPLACEMENT - FRONT The seat back frame is exposed after you remove the seat back trim cover and pad. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-08-50-005D > Jul > 10 > Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose Seat Cover: Customer Interest Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-005D Date: July 23, 2010 Subject: Seat Cushion Cover Loose (Secure J-Strip to Seat Frame With Hog Rings) Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2005-2010 Chevrolet Cobalt 2005-2006 Pontiac Pursuit (Canada Only) 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2010 Pontiac G5 2002-2009 Saturn VUE 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add the 2010 Cobalt and G5 models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-005C (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the seat cushion cover (cover on the lower part of the seat) is loose. Cause This condition may be caused by the J-strip seat cover retaining feature releasing from the seat frame. Correction 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle, if necessary. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket in SI. Tip The seats do not have to be removed on 2008-2009 Saturn VUE models. (For 2008-2009 Saturn VUE models, the tray under the passenger seat should be removed prior to performing Step 2.) 2. Reattach the J-strip to the seat frame. 3. Secure the J-strip to the seat frame with hog rings. Snap the hog rings through each end of the J-strip and around the seat frame. 4. Reinstall the seat to the vehicle. Refer to Seat Replacement Front Bucket in SI. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-08-50-005D > Jul > 10 > Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose > Page 15710 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 04-08-50-006D > Sep > 10 > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info Seat Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-08-50-006D Date: September 09, 2010 Subject: Minor Wrinkles/Creases, Discoloration, Cigarette Burns and Customer Induced Cuts and Stains on Front and Rear Driver and Passenger Seats with Leather, Vinyl or Cloth Seat Covers Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-50-006C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). If a customer comes in to your dealership due to certain conditions of the seat covers (splits, wrinkles, loose stitching, etc.), you must examine the seat cover in order to determine the validity of the customer claim. Some components from the above listed vehicles have been returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) and analysis of these parts showed "customer induced damage" or No Trouble Found (NTF). The dealer should pay particular attention to the following conditions: - Cigarette burns Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 04-08-50-006D > Sep > 10 > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 15716 - Customer induced cuts (knife cuts, cut by customer tools, etc.) - Paint stains (customer should have cleaned paint stains while paint was still wet) - Coffee stains and other removable dirt These should be cleaned as described in the Owner's Manual under Appearance Care. Also, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-00-89-029A or later. - Evidence of chemicals used for cleaning, other than those specified in the Owner's Manual - Other chemical spills - Minor and normal leather wrinkles as a result of use - Other defects to the seat cover not detected during the pre-delivery inspection (PDI). Inform the customer that the above issues were not present when the vehicle was purchased and cannot be replaced under warranty. The covers, however, may be repaired or replaced at the customer's expense. The following conditions are not caused by the customer and should be covered by warranty: - Split seams Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 04-08-50-006D > Sep > 10 > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 15717 - Wear/cracking/peeling - Discoloration/dye transfer from customer clothing (if discoloration/dye transfer is not removed after using GM Leather and Vinyl Plastic Cleaner, P/N 88861401 (in Canada, P/N 88861409), replace the covers.) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 06-08-50-005D > Jul > 10 > Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose Seat Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-005D Date: July 23, 2010 Subject: Seat Cushion Cover Loose (Secure J-Strip to Seat Frame With Hog Rings) Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2005-2010 Chevrolet Cobalt 2005-2006 Pontiac Pursuit (Canada Only) 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2010 Pontiac G5 2002-2009 Saturn VUE 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add the 2010 Cobalt and G5 models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-005C (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the seat cushion cover (cover on the lower part of the seat) is loose. Cause This condition may be caused by the J-strip seat cover retaining feature releasing from the seat frame. Correction 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle, if necessary. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket in SI. Tip The seats do not have to be removed on 2008-2009 Saturn VUE models. (For 2008-2009 Saturn VUE models, the tray under the passenger seat should be removed prior to performing Step 2.) 2. Reattach the J-strip to the seat frame. 3. Secure the J-strip to the seat frame with hog rings. Snap the hog rings through each end of the J-strip and around the seat frame. 4. Reinstall the seat to the vehicle. Refer to Seat Replacement Front Bucket in SI. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 06-08-50-005D > Jul > 10 > Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose > Page 15722 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 06-00-89-029F > Apr > 10 > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle Seat Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-00-89-029F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Interior Cleaning - Instrument Panel (IP), Hard or Plastic Surfaces, Seats, Carpet, Leather, Vinyl, Fabric Cleaner, Stain Remover, Restorer - Product Availability Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks including Saturn (EXCLUDES Cadillac DTS Platinum and Escalade Platinum with RPO R9N - Tehama Leather) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-00-89-029E (Section 00 - General Information). To keep the vehicle interior looking the best, it should be cleaned often. It is important to keep the upholstery from becoming heavily soiled. The vehicle's interior can experience extreme heat, which can cause stains to set quickly. Lighter color interiors may require more frequent cleaning. Care should be taken because newspapers and garments may transfer color to the vehicle's interior. Many of today's interiors are made with new low gloss materials. Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on ANY surfaces (interior trim, instrument panel, carpet, leather, vinyl and fabric) for which they are not intended. Using non-approved products can actually set the stain to the point that nothing can remove it. Important Do not use silicone or wax-based products or those containing organic solvents (such as naptha, alcohol, etc.) to clean your vehicle's interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner. The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions. - Never use a STIFF brush or a brush that has been previously used with a harsh chemical. This can cause damage to the vehicle's interior surfaces. - Use only mild, Neutral-pH cleaners. Avoid laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers. Using too much soap will leave residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt. Because it is critical to use only mild, neutral-pH cleaners, General Motors has approved the use of the cleaners and conditioners listed in this bulletin for the cleaning of interiors. These products are in the neutral-pH range and will maintain the best vehicle interior appearance. These products are water-based, biodegradable, and do not contain bleach, solvents or harsh chemicals. Interior trim pieces on new vehicles, as well as service components, arrive with a protective film. When removing the protective film, adhesive residue may be left on the trim panels/components. The cleaner (for leather, vinyl, plastic and interior paint) is an effective cleaner in removing adhesive residue without causing damage to the component. Important - If soapy, alkaline cleaning solutions are used on fabrics, and not thoroughly rinsed out, the residual left in the fabric will attract dirt. Because the recommended cleaners/conditioners are in the pH neutral range, they won't leave behind soapy residue. - On heavily stained or difficult to clean fabric/carpet, it is recommended that the entire surface be treated and cleaned vs. spot cleaning. Refer to Extractor Machine and Concentrate section of this bulletin for more information. Effective cleaning steps for hard and/or plastic surfaces: 1. Using a clean towel, apply/spray cleaner - leather, vinyl, plastic, interior paint, directly onto the towel. 2. Wipe the surface with the towel/cleaner. 3. If necessary, use a soft bristle brush to work cleaner into the crevasses of the area being cleaned. 4. Wipe off any excess cleaner from the surface. 5. Using a clean towel, apply/spray the conditioner (leather, vinyl restorer) directly onto the towel. 6. Wipe the conditioner onto the previously cleaned area to restore the material to it's original luster. Important Today's interiors are developed and intended to have a low-gloss appearance. It is important to use only products which provide a low-gloss finish in order to maintain the interior's integrity, customer appeal and satisfaction. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 06-00-89-029F > Apr > 10 > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 15727 Effective cleaning steps for fabric: 1. Remove any residue by lightly rubbing the surface with a clean towel. 2. Choose the appropriate stain remover based on the stain type. 3. Spray and lightly brush the area with a clean, soft bristle brush. 4. Gently blot up the stain. 5. On upholstery/carpet, the use of a fabric protector can help to reduce or eliminate future staining. Upholstery and Carpet Stains When cleaning upholstery and carpet stains ONLY, the following cleaning chart will help you determine which cleaner/formula works best on a particular stain. The chart lists many of the common stains. Some complex stains may require the application of both stain removers, one after the other, to remove both food-based oils and synthetic oils. A soft bristle brush (P/N 88861425) should be used to safely work the cleaner into the leather grain or material. This enables the dirt/stain to be completely removed from the material. Leather Conditioner/Restorer A Leather Conditioner/Restorer is also available. The restorer is safe for all vinyl and leather. It is a water-based product and contains essential emollients to restore suppleness, conditions and adds luster without adding gloss. The restorer will also provide protection against re-staining. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 06-00-89-029F > Apr > 10 > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 15728 Dye Transfer: Dye transfer will happen any time a natural fiber like cotton, silk, wool, or suede comes into contact with leather. The lighter the leather color, the more quickly the dye transfer will appear. Leather should be cleaned on a regular basis so that the dirt and grime do not adversely affect the top coat of the leather. After cleaning the leather, it is important to treat the surface with the restorer. Extractor Machine and Concentrate For difficult to clean materials or when cleaning a large area, the best results will be achieved when using an extractor machine and concentrate. General Motors offers the Ruby Extractor (P/N 627-CC-3000AU) through GM Tools and Equipment 1-800-GM-TOOLS, and has recently released a concentrate for use with the extractor machine. Whichever extractor machine is used, it should meet the minimum specifications of the Ruby Extractor: Ruby Extractor Specifications: - Pump PSI: 55 - Water Lift: 85" - Hose Length: 10 ft Important The Ruby Extractor also comes with a 6 year Outer Body and 3 year Parts warranty. Extractor: The Ruby Extractor machine was designed for automotive use and works effectively in the vehicle's interior. The narrow design of the vacuum head allows detail work in tight areas. The water pressure pump is reduced so the fabric surface is not wet more than is necessary. The dry time is greatly reduced due to less water on the fabric surface, the vacuum head making better contact with the surface and the significant water lift capability of the machine. Concentrate: The concentrated extraction cleaner is engineered with lower pH levels to help remove alkaline buildup on fabrics. The concentrate should be mixed according to the instructions listed on the container. The available concentrate helps to break the stain down and then the stain is easily removed with less water. The concentrate used in the Ruby Extractor is slightly acidic to remove soap and alkalinity from the fabric surfaces left behind by using improper, soapy solutions. Dirt, grease and grime are more easily removed when the proper solution is used during the extraction process. Parts Information Products are available in two sizes; 8 oz / 235 ML and 24 oz / 710 ML bottles. Available Equipment Equipment is available by contacting 1-800-GMTOOLS. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 06-00-89-029F > Apr > 10 > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 15729 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 00-00-89-027E > Sep > 08 > Interior - Elimination Of Unwanted Odors Seat Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Elimination Of Unwanted Odors INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-00-89-027E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Eliminating Unwanted Odors in Vehicles Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and refine the instructions. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-00-89-027D (Section 00 - General Information). Vehicle Odor Elimination General Motors offers a product that may control or eliminate odors in the interior and luggage compartment areas of GM vehicles. GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator is a non-toxic, biodegradable odor remover. This odorless product has been shown to greatly reduce or remove objectionable smells of mold and mildew resulting from vehicle water leaks (as well as customer created odors, i.e. smoke). You may use GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator on fabrics, vinyl, leather, carpet and sound deadening materials. It may also be induced into HVAC modules and instrument panel ducts (for the control of non-bacterial related odors). Important: This product leaves no residual scent and should not be sold as or considered an air freshener. Product action may result in the permanent elimination of an odor and may be preferable to customers with allergies who are sensitive to perfumes. How to Use This Product GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator may be sprayed on in a ready-to-use formula or used in steam cleaners as an additive with carpet shampoo. This water-based, odorless product is safe for all vehicle interiors. Do not wet or soak any interior surface that plain water would cause to deteriorate, as this product will have the same effect. Also avoid letting this product come into contact with vinegar or any acidic substance. Acid-based products will hamper the effectiveness of, or render GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator inert. Note: Complete eight page treatment sheets are enclosed within each case of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator. These treatment instructions range from simple vehicle odor elimination to full step by step procedures for odor removal from water leaks. If lost, contact 800-977-4145 to get a replacement set faxed or e-mailed to your dealership. Instructions and cautions are printed on the bottle, but additional help is available. If you encounter a difficult to eliminate or reoccurring odor, you may call 1-800-955-8591 (in Canada, 1-800-977-4145) to obtain additional information and usage suggestions. Important: This product may effectively remove odors when directly contacting the odor source. It should be used in conjunction with diagnostic procedures (in cases such as a water leak) to first eliminate the root cause of the odor, and then the residual odor to permanently correct the vehicle condition. Vehicle Waterleak Odor Elimination STEP ONE: Confirm that all water leaks have been repaired. Determine what areas of the vehicle were water soaked or wet. Components with visible mold/mildew staining should be replaced. Isolate the odor source inside the vehicle. Often an odor can be isolated to an area or component of the vehicle interior by careful evaluation. Odor evaluation may need to be performed by multiple persons. Another method of isolating an odor source is to remove and segregate interior trim and components. Plastic sheeting or drop cloths can be used to confine seats, headliners, etc. to assist in evaluation and diagnoses. If appropriate the vehicle and interior trim should be evaluated separately to determine if the odor stays with the vehicle or the interior components. Odors that stay with the vehicle may be isolated to insulating and sound deadening materials (i.e. water leak at the windshield or standing water in the front foot well area caused mold/mildew to form on the bulkhead or kick panel sound deadening pads. If the interior is removed the floor pan and primed/painted surfaces should be treated with bleach/soap solution, rinsed with clean water and dried. Interior surfaces should then be treated with GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator product before reinstalling carpet or reassembling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 00-00-89-027E > Sep > 08 > Interior - Elimination Of Unwanted Odors > Page 15734 The GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator product is an effective odor elimination product when used properly. It must come into direct contact with the odor source. It should be used in conjunction with diagnostic procedures to first eliminate the root cause of the odor. Some procedures for use after odor root cause correction are: STEP TWO: ^ Use the trigger spray head. ^ Put a drop of dish soap the size of a quarter in the bottom of a bottle. ^ Add 8 oz. of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator (1 cup) to the dish soap and top off the bottle with tap water. ^ This formula should be used on hard surfaces (dash, interior plastic molding, and floor pan) STEP THREE: The third step to neutralizing the vehicle is a light to medium treatment of all carpeting and upholstered seats with the GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator formula and a wide fan spray setting (at full strength) (i.e.: carpeting on the driver's side requires 4-5 triggers pulls for coverage). The headliner and trunk should be sprayed next. Lightly brushing the formula into the carpeting and upholstery is a recommended step for deep odor problems. The dash and all hard surfaces should be sprayed with dish soap/water mixture. Let stand for 1-2 minutes then wipe off the surface. STEP FOUR: (vehicle ventilation system treatment) The ventilation system is generally the last step in the treatment of the vehicle. a. Spray the GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator formula into all dash vents. (1-2 trigger pulls per vent). b. Start the vehicle and turn the vehicle fan on high cool (not A/C setting). c. Spray the formula (10 trigger pulls) into the outside fresh air intake vent (cowl at base of windshield) d. Enter the vehicle after 1 minute and wipe off the excess formula spurting out of the dash vents. e. Smell the air coming from the dash vents. If odors are still present, spray another 5 triggers into the cowl, wait another minute and smell the results. Once you have obtained a fresh, clean smell coming from the vents, turn the system to the A/C re-circulation setting. Roll up the windows, spray 3-5 pumps into the right lower IP area and let the vehicle run with the fan set on high for 5-7 minutes. Please follow this diagnosis process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved without completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If these steps do not resolve the condition, please contact GM TAC for further diagnostic assistance. Additional Suggestions to Increase Customer Satisfaction Here are some additional ideas to benefit your dealership and to generate greater customer enthusiasm for this product. ^ Keep this product on-hand for both the Service Department and the Used Car lot. Add value to your used car trades; treat loaner and demo cars during service and at final sale to eliminate smoke, pet, and other common odors offensive to customers. Make deodorizing a vehicle part of your normal vehicle detailing service. ^ Consider including GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator as a give-away item with new vehicle purchases. Many dealers give away as "gifts" various cleaning supplies at time of delivery. GM Odor Eliminator is one of a few products GM offers that has as many uses in the home as in the vehicle. Customers may find this product can be used for a host of recreational activities associated with their new vehicle, such as deodorizing a boat they tow, or a camper. ^ GM Odor Eliminator and many of the GM Vehicle Care products offer you the chance to increase dealership traffic as these superior quality products cannot be purchased in stores. Many Dealerships have product displays at the parts counter. Consider additional displays in the Customer Service Lounge, the Showroom and at the Service Desk or Cashier Window. Many customers who purchase vehicles and receive regular maintenance at your dealership may never visit the parts counter, and subsequently are not exposed to the variety and value that these products offer. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 00-00-89-027E > Sep > 08 > Interior - Elimination Of Unwanted Odors > Page 15735 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 04-08-50-006D > Sep > 10 > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info Seat Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-08-50-006D Date: September 09, 2010 Subject: Minor Wrinkles/Creases, Discoloration, Cigarette Burns and Customer Induced Cuts and Stains on Front and Rear Driver and Passenger Seats with Leather, Vinyl or Cloth Seat Covers Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-50-006C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). If a customer comes in to your dealership due to certain conditions of the seat covers (splits, wrinkles, loose stitching, etc.), you must examine the seat cover in order to determine the validity of the customer claim. Some components from the above listed vehicles have been returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) and analysis of these parts showed "customer induced damage" or No Trouble Found (NTF). The dealer should pay particular attention to the following conditions: - Cigarette burns Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 04-08-50-006D > Sep > 10 > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 15741 - Customer induced cuts (knife cuts, cut by customer tools, etc.) - Paint stains (customer should have cleaned paint stains while paint was still wet) - Coffee stains and other removable dirt These should be cleaned as described in the Owner's Manual under Appearance Care. Also, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-00-89-029A or later. - Evidence of chemicals used for cleaning, other than those specified in the Owner's Manual - Other chemical spills - Minor and normal leather wrinkles as a result of use - Other defects to the seat cover not detected during the pre-delivery inspection (PDI). Inform the customer that the above issues were not present when the vehicle was purchased and cannot be replaced under warranty. The covers, however, may be repaired or replaced at the customer's expense. The following conditions are not caused by the customer and should be covered by warranty: - Split seams Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 04-08-50-006D > Sep > 10 > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 15742 - Wear/cracking/peeling - Discoloration/dye transfer from customer clothing (if discoloration/dye transfer is not removed after using GM Leather and Vinyl Plastic Cleaner, P/N 88861401 (in Canada, P/N 88861409), replace the covers.) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 06-00-89-029F > Apr > 10 > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle Seat Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-00-89-029F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Interior Cleaning - Instrument Panel (IP), Hard or Plastic Surfaces, Seats, Carpet, Leather, Vinyl, Fabric Cleaner, Stain Remover, Restorer - Product Availability Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks including Saturn (EXCLUDES Cadillac DTS Platinum and Escalade Platinum with RPO R9N - Tehama Leather) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-00-89-029E (Section 00 - General Information). To keep the vehicle interior looking the best, it should be cleaned often. It is important to keep the upholstery from becoming heavily soiled. The vehicle's interior can experience extreme heat, which can cause stains to set quickly. Lighter color interiors may require more frequent cleaning. Care should be taken because newspapers and garments may transfer color to the vehicle's interior. Many of today's interiors are made with new low gloss materials. Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on ANY surfaces (interior trim, instrument panel, carpet, leather, vinyl and fabric) for which they are not intended. Using non-approved products can actually set the stain to the point that nothing can remove it. Important Do not use silicone or wax-based products or those containing organic solvents (such as naptha, alcohol, etc.) to clean your vehicle's interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner. The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions. - Never use a STIFF brush or a brush that has been previously used with a harsh chemical. This can cause damage to the vehicle's interior surfaces. - Use only mild, Neutral-pH cleaners. Avoid laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers. Using too much soap will leave residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt. Because it is critical to use only mild, neutral-pH cleaners, General Motors has approved the use of the cleaners and conditioners listed in this bulletin for the cleaning of interiors. These products are in the neutral-pH range and will maintain the best vehicle interior appearance. These products are water-based, biodegradable, and do not contain bleach, solvents or harsh chemicals. Interior trim pieces on new vehicles, as well as service components, arrive with a protective film. When removing the protective film, adhesive residue may be left on the trim panels/components. The cleaner (for leather, vinyl, plastic and interior paint) is an effective cleaner in removing adhesive residue without causing damage to the component. Important - If soapy, alkaline cleaning solutions are used on fabrics, and not thoroughly rinsed out, the residual left in the fabric will attract dirt. Because the recommended cleaners/conditioners are in the pH neutral range, they won't leave behind soapy residue. - On heavily stained or difficult to clean fabric/carpet, it is recommended that the entire surface be treated and cleaned vs. spot cleaning. Refer to Extractor Machine and Concentrate section of this bulletin for more information. Effective cleaning steps for hard and/or plastic surfaces: 1. Using a clean towel, apply/spray cleaner - leather, vinyl, plastic, interior paint, directly onto the towel. 2. Wipe the surface with the towel/cleaner. 3. If necessary, use a soft bristle brush to work cleaner into the crevasses of the area being cleaned. 4. Wipe off any excess cleaner from the surface. 5. Using a clean towel, apply/spray the conditioner (leather, vinyl restorer) directly onto the towel. 6. Wipe the conditioner onto the previously cleaned area to restore the material to it's original luster. Important Today's interiors are developed and intended to have a low-gloss appearance. It is important to use only products which provide a low-gloss finish in order to maintain the interior's integrity, customer appeal and satisfaction. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 06-00-89-029F > Apr > 10 > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 15747 Effective cleaning steps for fabric: 1. Remove any residue by lightly rubbing the surface with a clean towel. 2. Choose the appropriate stain remover based on the stain type. 3. Spray and lightly brush the area with a clean, soft bristle brush. 4. Gently blot up the stain. 5. On upholstery/carpet, the use of a fabric protector can help to reduce or eliminate future staining. Upholstery and Carpet Stains When cleaning upholstery and carpet stains ONLY, the following cleaning chart will help you determine which cleaner/formula works best on a particular stain. The chart lists many of the common stains. Some complex stains may require the application of both stain removers, one after the other, to remove both food-based oils and synthetic oils. A soft bristle brush (P/N 88861425) should be used to safely work the cleaner into the leather grain or material. This enables the dirt/stain to be completely removed from the material. Leather Conditioner/Restorer A Leather Conditioner/Restorer is also available. The restorer is safe for all vinyl and leather. It is a water-based product and contains essential emollients to restore suppleness, conditions and adds luster without adding gloss. The restorer will also provide protection against re-staining. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 06-00-89-029F > Apr > 10 > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 15748 Dye Transfer: Dye transfer will happen any time a natural fiber like cotton, silk, wool, or suede comes into contact with leather. The lighter the leather color, the more quickly the dye transfer will appear. Leather should be cleaned on a regular basis so that the dirt and grime do not adversely affect the top coat of the leather. After cleaning the leather, it is important to treat the surface with the restorer. Extractor Machine and Concentrate For difficult to clean materials or when cleaning a large area, the best results will be achieved when using an extractor machine and concentrate. General Motors offers the Ruby Extractor (P/N 627-CC-3000AU) through GM Tools and Equipment 1-800-GM-TOOLS, and has recently released a concentrate for use with the extractor machine. Whichever extractor machine is used, it should meet the minimum specifications of the Ruby Extractor: Ruby Extractor Specifications: - Pump PSI: 55 - Water Lift: 85" - Hose Length: 10 ft Important The Ruby Extractor also comes with a 6 year Outer Body and 3 year Parts warranty. Extractor: The Ruby Extractor machine was designed for automotive use and works effectively in the vehicle's interior. The narrow design of the vacuum head allows detail work in tight areas. The water pressure pump is reduced so the fabric surface is not wet more than is necessary. The dry time is greatly reduced due to less water on the fabric surface, the vacuum head making better contact with the surface and the significant water lift capability of the machine. Concentrate: The concentrated extraction cleaner is engineered with lower pH levels to help remove alkaline buildup on fabrics. The concentrate should be mixed according to the instructions listed on the container. The available concentrate helps to break the stain down and then the stain is easily removed with less water. The concentrate used in the Ruby Extractor is slightly acidic to remove soap and alkalinity from the fabric surfaces left behind by using improper, soapy solutions. Dirt, grease and grime are more easily removed when the proper solution is used during the extraction process. Parts Information Products are available in two sizes; 8 oz / 235 ML and 24 oz / 710 ML bottles. Available Equipment Equipment is available by contacting 1-800-GMTOOLS. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 06-00-89-029F > Apr > 10 > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 15749 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 00-00-89-027E > Sep > 08 > Interior - Elimination Of Unwanted Odors Seat Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Elimination Of Unwanted Odors INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-00-89-027E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Eliminating Unwanted Odors in Vehicles Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and refine the instructions. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-00-89-027D (Section 00 - General Information). Vehicle Odor Elimination General Motors offers a product that may control or eliminate odors in the interior and luggage compartment areas of GM vehicles. GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator is a non-toxic, biodegradable odor remover. This odorless product has been shown to greatly reduce or remove objectionable smells of mold and mildew resulting from vehicle water leaks (as well as customer created odors, i.e. smoke). You may use GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator on fabrics, vinyl, leather, carpet and sound deadening materials. It may also be induced into HVAC modules and instrument panel ducts (for the control of non-bacterial related odors). Important: This product leaves no residual scent and should not be sold as or considered an air freshener. Product action may result in the permanent elimination of an odor and may be preferable to customers with allergies who are sensitive to perfumes. How to Use This Product GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator may be sprayed on in a ready-to-use formula or used in steam cleaners as an additive with carpet shampoo. This water-based, odorless product is safe for all vehicle interiors. Do not wet or soak any interior surface that plain water would cause to deteriorate, as this product will have the same effect. Also avoid letting this product come into contact with vinegar or any acidic substance. Acid-based products will hamper the effectiveness of, or render GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator inert. Note: Complete eight page treatment sheets are enclosed within each case of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator. These treatment instructions range from simple vehicle odor elimination to full step by step procedures for odor removal from water leaks. If lost, contact 800-977-4145 to get a replacement set faxed or e-mailed to your dealership. Instructions and cautions are printed on the bottle, but additional help is available. If you encounter a difficult to eliminate or reoccurring odor, you may call 1-800-955-8591 (in Canada, 1-800-977-4145) to obtain additional information and usage suggestions. Important: This product may effectively remove odors when directly contacting the odor source. It should be used in conjunction with diagnostic procedures (in cases such as a water leak) to first eliminate the root cause of the odor, and then the residual odor to permanently correct the vehicle condition. Vehicle Waterleak Odor Elimination STEP ONE: Confirm that all water leaks have been repaired. Determine what areas of the vehicle were water soaked or wet. Components with visible mold/mildew staining should be replaced. Isolate the odor source inside the vehicle. Often an odor can be isolated to an area or component of the vehicle interior by careful evaluation. Odor evaluation may need to be performed by multiple persons. Another method of isolating an odor source is to remove and segregate interior trim and components. Plastic sheeting or drop cloths can be used to confine seats, headliners, etc. to assist in evaluation and diagnoses. If appropriate the vehicle and interior trim should be evaluated separately to determine if the odor stays with the vehicle or the interior components. Odors that stay with the vehicle may be isolated to insulating and sound deadening materials (i.e. water leak at the windshield or standing water in the front foot well area caused mold/mildew to form on the bulkhead or kick panel sound deadening pads. If the interior is removed the floor pan and primed/painted surfaces should be treated with bleach/soap solution, rinsed with clean water and dried. Interior surfaces should then be treated with GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator product before reinstalling carpet or reassembling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 00-00-89-027E > Sep > 08 > Interior - Elimination Of Unwanted Odors > Page 15754 The GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator product is an effective odor elimination product when used properly. It must come into direct contact with the odor source. It should be used in conjunction with diagnostic procedures to first eliminate the root cause of the odor. Some procedures for use after odor root cause correction are: STEP TWO: ^ Use the trigger spray head. ^ Put a drop of dish soap the size of a quarter in the bottom of a bottle. ^ Add 8 oz. of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator (1 cup) to the dish soap and top off the bottle with tap water. ^ This formula should be used on hard surfaces (dash, interior plastic molding, and floor pan) STEP THREE: The third step to neutralizing the vehicle is a light to medium treatment of all carpeting and upholstered seats with the GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator formula and a wide fan spray setting (at full strength) (i.e.: carpeting on the driver's side requires 4-5 triggers pulls for coverage). The headliner and trunk should be sprayed next. Lightly brushing the formula into the carpeting and upholstery is a recommended step for deep odor problems. The dash and all hard surfaces should be sprayed with dish soap/water mixture. Let stand for 1-2 minutes then wipe off the surface. STEP FOUR: (vehicle ventilation system treatment) The ventilation system is generally the last step in the treatment of the vehicle. a. Spray the GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator formula into all dash vents. (1-2 trigger pulls per vent). b. Start the vehicle and turn the vehicle fan on high cool (not A/C setting). c. Spray the formula (10 trigger pulls) into the outside fresh air intake vent (cowl at base of windshield) d. Enter the vehicle after 1 minute and wipe off the excess formula spurting out of the dash vents. e. Smell the air coming from the dash vents. If odors are still present, spray another 5 triggers into the cowl, wait another minute and smell the results. Once you have obtained a fresh, clean smell coming from the vents, turn the system to the A/C re-circulation setting. Roll up the windows, spray 3-5 pumps into the right lower IP area and let the vehicle run with the fan set on high for 5-7 minutes. Please follow this diagnosis process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved without completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If these steps do not resolve the condition, please contact GM TAC for further diagnostic assistance. Additional Suggestions to Increase Customer Satisfaction Here are some additional ideas to benefit your dealership and to generate greater customer enthusiasm for this product. ^ Keep this product on-hand for both the Service Department and the Used Car lot. Add value to your used car trades; treat loaner and demo cars during service and at final sale to eliminate smoke, pet, and other common odors offensive to customers. Make deodorizing a vehicle part of your normal vehicle detailing service. ^ Consider including GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator as a give-away item with new vehicle purchases. Many dealers give away as "gifts" various cleaning supplies at time of delivery. GM Odor Eliminator is one of a few products GM offers that has as many uses in the home as in the vehicle. Customers may find this product can be used for a host of recreational activities associated with their new vehicle, such as deodorizing a boat they tow, or a camper. ^ GM Odor Eliminator and many of the GM Vehicle Care products offer you the chance to increase dealership traffic as these superior quality products cannot be purchased in stores. Many Dealerships have product displays at the parts counter. Consider additional displays in the Customer Service Lounge, the Showroom and at the Service Desk or Cashier Window. Many customers who purchase vehicles and receive regular maintenance at your dealership may never visit the parts counter, and subsequently are not exposed to the variety and value that these products offer. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 00-00-89-027E > Sep > 08 > Interior - Elimination Of Unwanted Odors > Page 15755 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Cushion: > 06-08-50-005D > Jul > 10 > Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose Seat Cushion: Customer Interest Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-005D Date: July 23, 2010 Subject: Seat Cushion Cover Loose (Secure J-Strip to Seat Frame With Hog Rings) Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2005-2010 Chevrolet Cobalt 2005-2006 Pontiac Pursuit (Canada Only) 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2010 Pontiac G5 2002-2009 Saturn VUE 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add the 2010 Cobalt and G5 models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-005C (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the seat cushion cover (cover on the lower part of the seat) is loose. Cause This condition may be caused by the J-strip seat cover retaining feature releasing from the seat frame. Correction 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle, if necessary. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket in SI. Tip The seats do not have to be removed on 2008-2009 Saturn VUE models. (For 2008-2009 Saturn VUE models, the tray under the passenger seat should be removed prior to performing Step 2.) 2. Reattach the J-strip to the seat frame. 3. Secure the J-strip to the seat frame with hog rings. Snap the hog rings through each end of the J-strip and around the seat frame. 4. Reinstall the seat to the vehicle. Refer to Seat Replacement Front Bucket in SI. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Cushion: > 06-08-50-005D > Jul > 10 > Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose > Page 15764 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cushion: > 06-08-50-005D > Jul > 10 > Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose Seat Cushion: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-005D Date: July 23, 2010 Subject: Seat Cushion Cover Loose (Secure J-Strip to Seat Frame With Hog Rings) Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2005-2010 Chevrolet Cobalt 2005-2006 Pontiac Pursuit (Canada Only) 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2010 Pontiac G5 2002-2009 Saturn VUE 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add the 2010 Cobalt and G5 models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-005C (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the seat cushion cover (cover on the lower part of the seat) is loose. Cause This condition may be caused by the J-strip seat cover retaining feature releasing from the seat frame. Correction 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle, if necessary. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket in SI. Tip The seats do not have to be removed on 2008-2009 Saturn VUE models. (For 2008-2009 Saturn VUE models, the tray under the passenger seat should be removed prior to performing Step 2.) 2. Reattach the J-strip to the seat frame. 3. Secure the J-strip to the seat frame with hog rings. Snap the hog rings through each end of the J-strip and around the seat frame. 4. Reinstall the seat to the vehicle. Refer to Seat Replacement Front Bucket in SI. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cushion: > 06-08-50-005D > Jul > 10 > Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose > Page 15770 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Seat Cushion: Procedures Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement - Rear SEAT CUSHION COVER AND PAD REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat assembly. 2. Remove the anchor bolts from the rear seat buckle. 3. Turn the seat over. 4. Disconnect the remaining cushion cover retainers from the rear seat cushion frame. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15773 5. Feed the anchor through to the top of the seat cushion. 6. Pull the seat cushion cover and pad over the latch locations. 7. Remove the seat cushion cover and pad from the frame. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15774 8. Use a small flat-bladed tool to remove the seat cushion cover from the pad by carefully disengaging the hook and loop fasteners. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the trim cover to the pad. Engage the hook and loop locations by pressing firmly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15775 2. Position the seat cushion cover and pad to the frame. 3. Tuck the seat cushion cover into the seat belt buckle opening. 4. Insert the anchor plates for the seat belt buckle through the cushion. 5. Attach the cushion cover retainers to the seat frame. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15776 6. Install the anchor bolts to the rear seat buckle. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 7. Install the rear seat. Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement - Front SEAT CUSHION COVER AND PAD REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15777 2. If the seat is equipped with a lumbar support, perform the following procedure: 1. Adjust the lumbar knob until the lumbar is in the setting of the least support. 2. Remove the lumbar knob by pulling firmly. 3. Remove the seat cushion pan bolts and remove the seat cushion assembly. 4. Disconnect the J-hook retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15778 5. Disengage the J-strip at the rear of the cushion. 6. Remove the seat cushion cover from the pad by carefully disengaging the hook and loop retainers. NOTE: Use care when disengaging the hook and loop fasteners. The hook end may pull from the seat foam pad, requiring foam pad replacement. 7. Remove the seat cushion pad from the frame. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the seat cushion pad to the frame. 2. Engage the hook and loop retainers by pressing down on the retainers. 3. Engage the J-strip at the rear of the cushion cover to the seat pan. 4. Connect the J-hook retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15779 5. Position the seat cushion pan over the seat adjusters. 6. Install the frame bolts. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 12 N.m (9 lb ft). 7. If the seat is equipped with a lumbar support, perform the following procedure: 1. Pull the lumbar cable sleeve forward. 2. Using a sharp-bladed tool, make a small slit where the lumbar actuator meets the cover. 3. Install the lumbar knob by pushing firmly. 4. Adjust the lumbar knob to ensure that the lumbar is operating correctly. 8. Install the front seat into the vehicle. Seat Cushion Heater Element Replacement - Front SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15780 1. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. 2. Place the seat on a clean work bench. 3. Remove the seat cushion cover and pad. 4. Gently pull on the heater element to remove the element from the seat foam. Be careful not to damage the foam pad. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Peel off the self-stick tape from the back of the heater element. 2. Position the heater element over the seat foam pad. Press firmly to engage the adhesive. 3. Route the heating element wiring harness under the seat pad and connect the harness to the heater module. Secure the wire with tie straps. 4. Install the seat cushion cover and pad. 5. Install the front seat to the vehicle. Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) SEAT CUSHION OUTER TRIM PANEL REPLACEMENT - FRONT SEAT (2-WAY) REMOVAL PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15781 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the trim cover screws from the outer cover of the seat back recliner. 3. Remove the seat back recliner trim cover. 4. Remove the outer trim panel screws from the seat cushion. 5. Remove the trim panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15782 1. Install the trim panel and secure with the trim panel screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Position the outboard recliner trim cover on the seat and secure with the trim cover screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Install the front seat. Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) SEAT CUSHION OUTER TRIM PANEL REPLACEMENT - FRONT SEAT (4-WAY) REMOVAL PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15783 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the riser handle trim by pulling firmly on the trim. 3. Remove the recliner handle trim by pulling firmly on the trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15784 4. Remove the trim panel screws. 5. Remove the trim panel from the seat. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the outer trim panel on the seat. Secure the panel with the panel screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15785 2. Position the cover over the recliner handle. Push firmly to lock the handle into place. 3. Position the cover over the seat riser handle. Push firmly to lock the handle into place. 4. Install the front seat. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15786 Seat Cushion: Removal and Replacement Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . 2. Remove the trim cover screws from the outer cover of the seat back recliner. 3. Remove the seat back recliner trim cover. 4. Remove the outer trim panel screws from the seat cushion. 5. Remove the trim panel. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15787 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Install the trim panel and secure with the trim panel screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Position the outboard recliner trim cover on the seat and secure with the trim cover screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Install the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15788 Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . 2. Remove the riser handle trim by pulling firmly on the trim. 3. Remove the recliner handle trim by pulling firmly on the trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15789 4. Remove the trim panel screws. 5. Remove the trim panel from the seat. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Position the outer trim panel on the seat. Secure the panel with the panel screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15790 2. Position the cover over the recliner handle. Push firmly to lock the handle into place. 3. Position the cover over the seat riser handle. Push firmly to lock the handle into place. 4. Install the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement - Rear Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear seat assembly. Refer to Seat Replacement - Rear (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Rear) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15791 2. Remove the anchor bolts from the rear seat buckle. 3. Turn the seat over. 4. Disconnect the remaining cushion cover retainers from the rear seat cushion frame. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15792 5. Feed the anchor through to the top of the seat cushion. 6. Pull the seat cushion cover and pad over the latch locations. 7. Remove the seat cushion cover and pad from the frame. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15793 8. Use a small flat-bladed tool to remove the seat cushion cover from the pad by carefully disengaging the hook and loop fasteners. Installation Procedure 1. Install the trim cover to the pad. Engage the hook and loop locations by pressing firmly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15794 2. Position the seat cushion cover and pad to the frame. 3. Tuck the seat cushion cover into the seat belt buckle opening. 4. Insert the anchor plates for the seat belt buckle through the cushion. 5. Attach the cushion cover retainers to the seat frame. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15795 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 6. Install the anchor bolts to the rear seat buckle. Tighten the bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 7. Install the rear seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Rear (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Rear) . Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement - Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15796 2. If the seat is equipped with a lumbar support, perform the following procedure: 1. Adjust the lumbar knob until the lumbar is in the setting of the least support. 2. Remove the lumbar knob by pulling firmly. 3. Remove the seat cushion pan bolts and remove the seat cushion assembly. 4. Disconnect the J-hook retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15797 5. Disengage the J-strip at the rear of the cushion. Notice: Use care when disengaging the hook and loop fasteners. The hook end may pull from the seat foam pad, requiring foam pad replacement. 6. Remove the seat cushion cover from the pad by carefully disengaging the hook and loop retainers. 7. Remove the seat cushion pad from the frame. Installation Procedure 1. Position the seat cushion pad to the frame. 2. Engage the hook and loop retainers by pressing down on the retainers. 3. Engage the J-strip at the rear of the cushion cover to the seat pan. 4. Connect the J-hook retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15798 5. Position the seat cushion pan over the seat adjusters. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 6. Install the frame bolts. Tighten the bolts to 12 N.m (9 lb ft). 7. If the seat is equipped with a lumbar support, perform the following procedure: 1. Pull the lumbar cable sleeve forward. 2. Using a sharp-bladed tool, make a small slit where the lumbar actuator meets the cover. 3. Install the lumbar knob by pushing firmly. 4. Adjust the lumbar knob to ensure that the lumbar is operating correctly. 8. Install the front seat into the vehicle. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Heater: Description and Operation HEATED SEATS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION HEATED SEAT SYSTEM COMPONENTS The driver and front passenger heated seat systems each consists of the following components: Driver Heated Seat Switch-Controls off and hi/low temperature settings - Driver Heated Seat Module-Regulates the heated seats modes of operation - Driver Seat Cushion Heater Element-Incorporated in the seat cushion - Driver Seat Back Heater Element-Incorporated in the seat back - Driver Seat Temperature Sensor-Incorporated in the seat cushion - Passenger Heated Seat Switch-Controls OFF and hi/low temperature settings - Passenger Heated Seat Module-Regulates the heated seats modes of operation - Passenger Seat Cushion Heater Element-Incorporated in the seat cushion - Passenger Seat Back Heater Element-Incorporated in the seat back - Passenger Seat Temperature Sensor-Incorporated in the seat cushion - HTD Seats 10 A fuse-Located in the I/P fuse block and supplies voltage in the RUN position only - HTD Seats 20 A fuse-Located in the underhood fuse block and supplies battery positive voltage at all times HEATED SEAT SYSTEM CONTROLS The heated seat system will operate any time the ignition is the RUN position. The heated seat switch controls the OFF or temperature settings to low or high. HEATED SEAT OPERATION Ignition voltage is supplied to the heated seat switches from the HTD Seats 10 A fuse only with the ignition in the RUN position. Battery voltage is supplied to the heated seat modules from the HTD Seats 20 A fuse at all times. Ground is supplied to the heated seat switches and modules from G301. The driver and front passenger seats are heated using electric heater elements located in the seat cushions and seat backs. Battery positive voltage to the heater elements is controlled by the heated seat modules using inputs from the heated seat switches and the heated seat thermistors. When the heated seat switch is in the high or low position, voltage is supplied through the heated seat high/low signal circuit to the heated seat module. Voltage to the high/low signal circuit is reduced by the resistors within the heated seat switch to signal the heated seat module that a high or low temperature setting is requested. Voltage to the high/low signal circuit from the heated seat switch is removed to request the off setting. TEMPERATURE REGULATION The heated seat module monitors the seat temperature through the temperature sensor (thermistor) that is located in the seat cushion. The temperature sensor is a variable resistor, its resistance changes as the temperature of the seat changes. When the temperature sensor resistance indicates to the heated seat module that the seat has reached the desired temperature, the module will cycle supply voltage as necessary to the seat heating element in order to maintain the desired temperature. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) Seat Heater: Service and Repair Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . 2. Remove the screws from the outboard recliner trim panel. Remove the trim panel. 3. Remove the screws from the inboard recliner trim panel. Remove the trim panel. 4. Remove the head restraint. Refer to Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat (See: Head Rest/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat) . 5. Disconnect the electrical connector from the seat heater element. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) > Page 15804 6. Remove the bolts from the seat back frame. Remove the seat back assembly. 7. Remove the screws from the back panel. Remove the back panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) > Page 15805 8. Disconnect the lower J-hook retainer from the seat back trim cover. 9. Lift the trim cover, carefully disengaging the hook and loop retainers until the heater element is exposed. 10. Gently pull to remove the element from the seat back pad. Be careful not to damage the pad. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) > Page 15806 1. Peel off the self-stick paper backing from the heater element. 2. Position the element on the pad and press firmly to install the element. 3. Lower the seat back trim cover. Press on the hook and loop retainers to engage the retainers. 4. Connect the lower J-hook retainer on the seat back trim cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) > Page 15807 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Position the seat back panel. Secure the panel with the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 6. Position the seat back assembly between the fold-flat recliners. Secure with the seat back bolts. Tighten the bolts to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). 7. Connect the electrical connectors to the seat heater element. 8. Install the head restraint. Refer to Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat (See: Head Rest/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) > Page 15808 9. Position the inboard recliner trim panel. Secure with the panel screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 10. Position the outboard recliner trim panel. Secure with the panel screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 11. Install the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) > Page 15809 Seat Heater: Service and Repair Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Non-Fold Flat) Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Non-Fold Flat) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . 2. Remove the outer trim panel from the seat cushion. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the seat heat module. 4. Disconnect the lower J-hook retainer from the seat back trim cover. 5. Carefully lift the trim cover, disengaging the hook and loop retainers until the heater element is exposed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) > Page 15810 6. Gently pull on the heater element in order to remove the element from the seat foam. Be careful not to damage the foam pad. Installation Procedure 1. Peel off the self-stick tape from the back side of the heater element. 2. Position the heater element over the seat foam pad. Press firmly to engage the adhesive. 3. Lower the seat back trim cover, pressing on the hook and loop retainers in order to engage the retainers. 4. Connect the lower J-hook retainer to the seat back trim. 5. Connect the electrical connector to the heater element module. 6. Install the outer trim panel to the seat cushion. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 7. Install the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) > Page 15811 Seat Heater: Service and Repair Seat Cushion Heater Element Replacement - Front Seat Cushion Heater Element Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . 2. Place the seat on a clean work bench. 3. Remove the seat cushion cover and pad. Refer to Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement - Front (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement - Front) . 4. Gently pull on the heater element to remove the element from the seat foam. Be careful not to damage the foam pad. Installation Procedure 1. Peel off the self-stick tape from the back of the heater element. 2. Position the heater element over the seat foam pad. Press firmly to engage the adhesive. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) > Page 15812 3. Route the heating element wiring harness under the seat pad and connect the harness to the heater module. Secure the wire with tie straps. 4. Install the seat cushion cover and pad. Refer to Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement - Front (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement - Front) . 5. Install the front seat to the vehicle. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Heated Seat Module - Driver Heated Seat Module - Driver C1 (with RPO Code KA1) Heated Seat Module - Driver C2 (with RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 15818 Heated Seat Module - Driver C3 (with RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 15819 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger C1 (with RPO Code KA1) Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger C2 (with RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 15820 Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger C3 (with RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Seat Heater Control Module: Procedures HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the heated seat module retainer. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the heated seat module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15823 3. Remove the module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the heated seat module. 2. Install the module with the retainer to the seat pan. 3. Test for proper operation of the seat heater. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15824 Seat Heater Control Module: Removal and Replacement Heated Seat Control Module Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the heated seat module retainer. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the heated seat module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15825 3. Remove the module. Installation Procedure 1. Connect the electrical connector to the heated seat module. 2. Install the module with the retainer to the seat pan. 3. Test for proper operation of the seat heater. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Seat Heater Switch: Procedures HEATED SEAT SWITCH REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat outer trim. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the seat heater switch. 3. Remove the heater switch from the trim. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15831 1. Install the heater switch to the seat trim. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the heater switch. 3. Install the seat outer trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15832 Seat Heater Switch: Removal and Replacement Heated Seat Switch Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seat outer trim. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the seat heater switch. 3. Remove the heater switch from the trim. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15833 1. Install the heater switch to the seat trim. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the heater switch. 3. Install the seat outer trim. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Switch - Driver Door Lock Switch - Front Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15838 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool to pry the switch from the door handle assembly. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 2. Position the switch on the door handle assembly. Push inward to seat the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15839 3. Install the door trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Outside Rearview Mirror Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15843 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair POWER MIRROR SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Use a flat blade tool to remove the left front air deflector. 2. Disconnect the electrical connection from the power mirror switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15844 3. Remove the power mirror switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the power mirror switch to the air deflector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15845 2. Connect the electrical connection to the power mirror switch 3. Push the air deflector to the instrument panel until the air deflector is seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15849 Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (with RPO Code AG1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Power Seat Switch: Procedures Seat Switch Replacement - Power SEAT SWITCH REPLACEMENT - POWER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat switch bezel. 2. Remove the outer trim panel from the seat cushion. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the switch. 4. Use a small flat-bladed tool to remove the switch from the trim panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15852 1. Install the switch into the trim panel. 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the outer trim panel to the seat cushion. 4. Install the seat switch bezel. Seat Switch Bezel Replacement SEAT SWITCH BEZEL REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Move the seat to the most forward position. 2. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove the bezel from the seat switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15853 1. Install the seat switch bezel. Press into place. 2. Return the seat to the original position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15854 Power Seat Switch: Removal and Replacement Seat Switch Bezel Replacement Seat Switch Bezel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Move the seat to the most forward position. 2. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove the bezel from the seat switch. Installation Procedure 1. Install the seat switch bezel. Press into place. 2. Return the seat to the original position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15855 Seat Switch Replacement - Power Seat Switch Replacement - Power Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seat switch bezel. Refer to Seat Switch Bezel Replacement (See: Seat Switch Bezel Replacement) . 2. Remove the outer trim panel from the seat cushion. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the switch. 4. Use a small flat-bladed tool to remove the switch from the trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15856 Installation Procedure 1. Install the switch into the trim panel. 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the outer trim panel to the seat cushion. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 4. Install the seat switch bezel. Refer to Seat Switch Bezel Replacement (See: Seat Switch Bezel Replacement) . Lumbar Actuator Replacement - Manual Lumbar Actuator Replacement - Manual Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15857 2. Remove the lumbar cable from the actuator: 1. Adjust the knob until the lumbar basket is in the position of least support. 2. Pull back on the lumbar cable sleeve. 3. Remove the barrel end of the cable from the lumbar actuator. 3. Remove the lumbar knob by pulling firmly on the knob. 4. Drill out the rivets from the lumbar actuator, if necessary. 5. Remove the lumbar actuator screws. 6. Remove the actuator from the seat. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15858 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Install the lumbar actuator to the seat cushion frame with screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 2. Install the lumbar knob. 3. Install the lumbar cable in the actuator: 1. Pull back on the lumbar cable sleeve. 2. Install the barrel end of the cable from the lumbar actuator. 3. Adjust the knob to ensure that the cable is properly installed. 4. Install the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Replacement Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Seat Heater Switch: Procedures HEATED SEAT SWITCH REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat outer trim. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the seat heater switch. 3. Remove the heater switch from the trim. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15864 1. Install the heater switch to the seat trim. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the heater switch. 3. Install the seat outer trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15865 Seat Heater Switch: Removal and Replacement Heated Seat Switch Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seat outer trim. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the seat heater switch. 3. Remove the heater switch from the trim. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 15866 1. Install the heater switch to the seat trim. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the heater switch. 3. Install the seat outer trim. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Headliner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Sunroof Switch (with RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15873 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Pull gently at front of reading lamp cover to disengage retaining clips. 2. Rotate cover rearward until rear attaching hooks are released. 3. Disconnect sunroof switch harness from sunroof switch. 4. Remove sunroof switch fasteners and remove sunroof switch. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15874 1. Install sunroof switch with fasteners. Tighten sunroof switch to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in) 2. Connect sunroof switch harness to sunroof switch. 3. Position front reading lamp cover into rear attaching hooks. 4. Rotate front reading lamp cover into lamp assembly forward, then snap cover into place. 5. Function sunroof switch to ensure proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Service and Repair Splash Guard: Service and Repair Splash Shield Replacement - Engine Removal Procedure 1. Remove the splash shield to structure push-in retainers. 2. Slide the splash shield forward to remove. Installation Procedure 1. Position the splash shield to the vehicle by sliding rearward and aligning holes. 2. Install the splash shield to structure push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Air Dam > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Dam: Service and Repair Air Deflector Replacement - Front Bumper Fascia Removal Procedure 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the air deflector to fascia push-in retainers. 3. Remove the air deflector to engine cradle push-in retainers (3). 4. Remove the air deflector from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the air deflector to the vehicle. 2. Install the air deflector to engine cradle push-in retainers (3). 3. Install the air deflector to fascia push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Air Dam > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15882 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 4. Install the screws (2). Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Service and Repair Spoiler: Service and Repair Spoiler Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the liftgate upper interior trim panel to expose the center bolt. 3. Remove the spoiler to liftgate bolts (3). 4. Disconnect the stop lamp harness (2). 5. Disconnect the rear washer hose. 6. Lift the spoiler to disengage the locating retainers and remove the spoiler from the liftgate. Installation Procedure 1. Position the spoiler loosely over the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15886 2. Connect the rear washer hose. 3. Connect the stop lamp harness (2). 4. Push down the spoiler to the liftgate to secure the locating tab retainers. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Install the spoiler to liftgate bolts. Tighten the bolts to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 6. Install the liftgate upper interior trim panel. 7. Close the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide Front Strut / Shock Tower: Customer Interest Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15896 Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15897 Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15898 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15899 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15900 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide Front Strut / Shock Tower: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15906 Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15907 Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15908 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15909 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15910 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 15911 Front Strut / Shock Tower: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-08-57-001A Date: 081008 Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 15912 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 15913 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 15914 Condition 6 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 15915 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 15916 Parts Information Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-08-57-001A Date: 081008 Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 15917 Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 15918 Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 15919 Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 15920 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 15921 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Grille Panel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the wiper arms. Refer to Wiper Arm Replacement in Wipers/Washer Systems. 2. Remove the right side air inlet grille push-in retainers. 3. Remove the right side air inlet grille from the vehicle. 4. Remove the left side air inlet grille push-in retainers. 5. Lift up the left side air inlet grille and disconnect the front washer nozzle hose from the front nozzles. 6. Depress the nozzle retaining tabs on the under side of the air inlet grille and pull front nozzles up. 7. Remove the left side air inlet grille. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 15927 1. Install the front washer nozzles into the air inlet grille. 2. Connect the washer nozzle hose to the front washer nozzles. 3. Install the left side air inlet grille. 4. Install the right side air inlet grille. 5. Install the push-in retainers. 6. Install the wiper arms. Refer to Wiper Arm Replacement in Wipers/Washer Systems. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Front Door Opening Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. 2. Remove the front door weatherstrip seal from the door flange by starting at the seal joint at the bottom of the door opening. 3. Separate the seal at the joint, note the position for installation. 4. Remove the seal from the door flange. Installation Procedure 1. Position the seal over the flange in the position noted in the removal procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15932 2. Press the seal over the flange firmly to fully secure. 3. Locate an exposed end of the ripcord at the seal joint and pull the ripcord around the door opening. If the seal lip is positioned under any door trim, this process will bring the seal lip over the door trim and headliner. 4. Secure the seal lip under the end of the instrument panel. 5. Install the front door carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Window Run Channel Replacement Front Door Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Front Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Window Glass/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the front door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer to Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front ( See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front) . 3. Remove the outside rearview mirror. Refer to Mirror Replacement (See: Mirrors/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Doors) . 4. Remove the front door frame applique. Refer to Door Frame Applique Replacement - Front () . 5. Remove the window run channel bolts. 6. Remove the front door window run channel. Starting from the rear corner of the door, remove the seal from the door header flange. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 15937 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Install the window run channel seal to the door header flange, starting from the rear corner. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 2. Install the front door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer to Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front ( See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front) . 3. Install the front door frame applique. Refer to Door Frame Applique Replacement - Front () . 4. Install the outside rearview mirror. Refer to Mirror Replacement (See: Mirrors/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Doors) . 5. Install the front door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Front Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Window Glass/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 15938 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Lower the front door window. 2. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner (See: Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner) . 4. Starting at one end, carefully pull the window weatherstrip run channel assembly from the door frame. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 15939 1. Install the window weatherstrip run channel assembly. 1. Starting at the lower rear corner of the window opening, press the weatherstrip run channel onto the door flange. 2. Ensure the channel is fully secured into the upper corners of the door frame. 2. Install the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner (See: Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner) . 3. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 15940 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Outer Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Outer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the belt seal retaining screw at the rear edge of the door. 2. Remove the outside rearview mirror. Refer to Mirror Replacement (See: Mirrors/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Doors) . 3. Remove the outer belt seal by lifting up on the seal starting at the rear and working forward. Installation Procedure 1. Align the outer belt seal fastener location with the hole in the door structure and outer panel retaining tabs. 2. Starting at the rear of the belt seal, push the belt seal down onto the flange until fully seated. 3. Install the outside rearview mirror. Refer to Mirror Replacement (See: Mirrors/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Doors) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 15941 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 4. Install the outer belt seal retaining screw. Tighten the screw to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 15942 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the inner belt seal from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Install the inner belt seal. 2. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement Side Front Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 15943 Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Removal Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. Pull the hood rear seal from the cowl panel flange. Installation Procedure 1. Position the hood rear seal to the vehicle. 2. Push the hood rear seal onto the cowl panel flange in order to fully seat the seal. 3. Verify hood seal fits flush against the hood rear side seals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Hood Rear > Page 15948 Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Side Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Side Removal Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. Pull the rear side hood seal, located at the end of the hood seal, from the fender. 3. Remove the seal from the vehicle. 4. To clean the area use a lint-free cloth and Varnish Makers and Painters (VMP) naptha or a 50/50 mixture by volume of isopropyl alcohol and water to remove any adhesive. Installation Procedure 1. Prepare the body surface by wiping with isopropyl alcohol. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Hood Rear > Page 15949 2. Remove the protective backing paper from the adhesive on the rear side hood seal. 3. Install the rear side hood seal. 4. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Rear Door Opening Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. 2. Remove the rear door weatherstrip seal from the door flange by starting at the seal joint at the bottom of the door opening. 3. Separate the seal at the joint, note the position for installation. 4. Remove the seal from the door flange. Installation Procedure 1. Position the seal over the flange in the position noted in the removal procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 15953 2. Press the seal over the flange firmly to fully secure. 3. Locate an exposed end of the ripcord at the seal joint and pull the ripcord around the door opening. If the seal lip is positioned under any door trim, this process will bring the seal lip over the door trim and headliner. 4. Install the rear door carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Lower the rear door window. 2. Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner (See: Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner) . 4. Starting at one end, carefully pull the window weatherstrip run channel assembly from the door frame. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 15958 1. Align the notch in the window weatherstrip seal to the fixed window post and press the weatherstrip onto the window flange. 1. Press the weatherstrip run channel onto the door flange. 2. Ensure the channel is fully secured into the upper corners of the door frame. 2. Install the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner (See: Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner) . 3. Install the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 15959 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Window Run Channel Replacement Rear Door Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Rear Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Window Glass/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the rear door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer toWindow Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear ( See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear) . 3. Remove the rear door window run channel and fixed window assembly. 1. Starting from the front corner of the door, remove the seal from the door header flange. 2. Remove the seal assembly from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 15960 1. Install the window run channel seal assembly. 1. Place the seal assembly into the door frame. 2. Place the seal assembly on the door header. 3. Install the seal to the door header flange, starting from the front corner. 2. Install the rear door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer to Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear (See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear) . 3. Install the rear door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Rear Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Window Glass/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 15961 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Outer Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Outer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the belt seal retaining screw at the front edge of the door. 2. Remove the outer belt seal by lifting up on the seal starting at the rear and working forward. Installation Procedure 1. Align the outer belt seal fastener location with the hole in the door structure and outer panel retaining tabs. 2. Starting at the rear of the belt seal, push the belt seal down onto the flange until fully seated. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 15962 3. Install the outer belt seal retaining screw. Tighten the screw to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 15963 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the inner belt seal from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Install the inner belt seal. 2. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement Side Rear Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 15964 Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15973 Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15974 Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15975 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15976 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15977 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15983 Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15984 Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15985 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15986 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 15987 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-66-002A > Jan > 10 > Body - Liftgate Hard To Open In Cold Weather Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Liftgate Hard To Open In Cold Weather TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-002A Date: January 07, 2010 Subject: Liftgate Hard to Open in Cold Weather (Replace Both Liftgate Struts) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the liftgate is hard to open in cold weather (below 0°C (32°F)). Cause The valve in the strut may be the cause. Correction Replace BOTH liftgate struts. The new strut has a temperature compensating valve that will improve cold weather performance. Refer to Liftgate Strut Replacement in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-66-002A > Jan > 10 > Body - Liftgate Is Hard to Open in Cold Weather Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Liftgate Is Hard to Open in Cold Weather TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-002A Date: January 07, 2010 Subject: Liftgate Hard to Open in Cold Weather (Replace Both Liftgate Struts) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the liftgate is hard to open in cold weather (below 0°C (32°F)). Cause The valve in the strut may be the cause. Correction Replace BOTH liftgate struts. The new strut has a temperature compensating valve that will improve cold weather performance. Refer to Liftgate Strut Replacement in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 16010 Cruise/Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 16011 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Adjustments CRUISE RELEASE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Disconnect the cruise brake switch harness connector. NOTE: Improper cruise control release switch adjustment may cause brake damage such as brake drag, heat buildup and excessive brake lining wear. 3. Rotate the cruise brake switch counterclockwise and remove the cruise brake switch from the switch retainer. 4. Install the cruise brake switch. - Position the switch into the retainer with the electrical connector index notch pointing to the 1 o'clock position. - Slide the switch in the retainer until the plunger is fully depressed into the barrel. - Rotate the switch clockwise until the travel stop has been reached, approximately 60 degrees. - Inspect the cruise brake switch to ensure the switch is properly locked into the switch retainer with the cruise brake switch electrical connector index notch pointing to the 3 o'clock position. IMPORTANT: Do not depress the brake pedal assembly during the brake switch installation. Depressing the brake pedal will cause a brake drag condition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 16012 5. Connect the cruise brake switch harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 7. Use the scan tool to monitor CRUISE BRAKE SWITCH in the engine control module (ECM) General Information data table, while depressing and releasing the brake pedal. Verify the APPLIED and RELEASED states read correctly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 16013 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair CRUISE RELEASE SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Disconnect the cruise brake switch connector. 3. Rotate the cruise brake switch counterclockwise and remove the cruise brake switch from the switch retainer. 4. Gently compress the locking tabs on the cruise brake retainer and remove the switch retainer from the brake pedal assembly. IMPORTANT: Depressing the brake pedal will allow easier access of the retainer locking tabs. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 16014 1. Install the cruise brake switch retainer into the upper hole of the brake pedal assembly with the retainer arrow pointing in the 3 o'clock position. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the indexing arrow is facing to the right and the ears on the retainer are fully extended on the back side of the bracket to prevent the retainer from being pushed out. 2. Install the cruise brake switch. - Position the switch into the retainer with the electrical connector index notch pointing to the 1 o'clock position. - Slide the switch in the retainer until the plunger is fully depressed into the barrel. - Rotate the switch clockwise until the travel stop has been reached, approximately 60 degrees. - Inspect the cruise brake switch to ensure the switch is properly locked into the switch retainer with the cruise brake switch electrical connector index notch pointing to the 3 o'clock position. IMPORTANT: Do not depress the brake pedal assembly during the cruise brake switch installation. Depressing the brake pedal during the cruise brake switch installation will cause a brake drag condition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 16015 3. Connect the cruise brake switch harness connector. 4. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 5. Use the scan tool to monitor CRUISE BRAKE SWITCH in the engine control module (ECM) General Information data table, while depressing and releasing the brake pedal. Verify the APPLIED and RELEASED states read correctly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (With RPO Code K34 Without RPO Code UK3) Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (With RPO Code K34 And UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left > Page 16020 Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Steering Wheel Control Switch - Right Steering Wheel Control Switch - Right (With RPO Code K34 Without RPO Code UK3) Steering Wheel Control Switch - Right (With RPO Code K34 And UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16021 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the switch assembly from the steering wheel. 2. Disconnect the cruise switch electrical harness connector from the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the switch electrical harness connector to the switch. Push in the connector until a click is heard and pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 2. Insert the cruise switch into the steering wheel and gently apply pressure to fasten the switch in the opening. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 16026 Cruise/Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 16027 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Adjustments CRUISE RELEASE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Disconnect the cruise brake switch harness connector. NOTE: Improper cruise control release switch adjustment may cause brake damage such as brake drag, heat buildup and excessive brake lining wear. 3. Rotate the cruise brake switch counterclockwise and remove the cruise brake switch from the switch retainer. 4. Install the cruise brake switch. - Position the switch into the retainer with the electrical connector index notch pointing to the 1 o'clock position. - Slide the switch in the retainer until the plunger is fully depressed into the barrel. - Rotate the switch clockwise until the travel stop has been reached, approximately 60 degrees. - Inspect the cruise brake switch to ensure the switch is properly locked into the switch retainer with the cruise brake switch electrical connector index notch pointing to the 3 o'clock position. IMPORTANT: Do not depress the brake pedal assembly during the brake switch installation. Depressing the brake pedal will cause a brake drag condition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 16028 5. Connect the cruise brake switch harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 7. Use the scan tool to monitor CRUISE BRAKE SWITCH in the engine control module (ECM) General Information data table, while depressing and releasing the brake pedal. Verify the APPLIED and RELEASED states read correctly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 16029 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair CRUISE RELEASE SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Disconnect the cruise brake switch connector. 3. Rotate the cruise brake switch counterclockwise and remove the cruise brake switch from the switch retainer. 4. Gently compress the locking tabs on the cruise brake retainer and remove the switch retainer from the brake pedal assembly. IMPORTANT: Depressing the brake pedal will allow easier access of the retainer locking tabs. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 16030 1. Install the cruise brake switch retainer into the upper hole of the brake pedal assembly with the retainer arrow pointing in the 3 o'clock position. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the indexing arrow is facing to the right and the ears on the retainer are fully extended on the back side of the bracket to prevent the retainer from being pushed out. 2. Install the cruise brake switch. - Position the switch into the retainer with the electrical connector index notch pointing to the 1 o'clock position. - Slide the switch in the retainer until the plunger is fully depressed into the barrel. - Rotate the switch clockwise until the travel stop has been reached, approximately 60 degrees. - Inspect the cruise brake switch to ensure the switch is properly locked into the switch retainer with the cruise brake switch electrical connector index notch pointing to the 3 o'clock position. IMPORTANT: Do not depress the brake pedal assembly during the cruise brake switch installation. Depressing the brake pedal during the cruise brake switch installation will cause a brake drag condition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 16031 3. Connect the cruise brake switch harness connector. 4. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 5. Use the scan tool to monitor CRUISE BRAKE SWITCH in the engine control module (ECM) General Information data table, while depressing and releasing the brake pedal. Verify the APPLIED and RELEASED states read correctly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (With RPO Code K34 Without RPO Code UK3) Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (With RPO Code K34 And UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left > Page 16036 Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Steering Wheel Control Switch - Right Steering Wheel Control Switch - Right (With RPO Code K34 Without RPO Code UK3) Steering Wheel Control Switch - Right (With RPO Code K34 And UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16037 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the switch assembly from the steering wheel. 2. Disconnect the cruise switch electrical harness connector from the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the switch electrical harness connector to the switch. Push in the connector until a click is heard and pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 2. Insert the cruise switch into the steering wheel and gently apply pressure to fasten the switch in the opening. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Audible Warning Device: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16043 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16044 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16045 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16046 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16047 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16048 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16049 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16050 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16051 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16052 Audible Warning Device: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16053 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16054 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16055 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16056 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16057 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16058 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16059 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16060 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16061 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16062 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16063 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16064 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16065 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16066 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16067 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16068 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16069 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16070 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16071 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16072 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16073 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16074 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16075 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16076 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16077 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16078 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16079 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16080 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16081 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16082 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16083 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16084 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16085 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16086 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16087 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16088 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16089 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16090 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16091 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16092 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16093 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16094 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16095 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16096 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16097 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16098 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16099 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16100 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16101 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16102 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16103 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16104 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16105 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16106 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16107 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16108 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16109 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16110 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16111 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16112 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16113 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16114 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16115 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16116 Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation AUDIBLE WARNINGS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The audible warnings alert the driver of a system concern or a critical vehicle condition. The body control module (BCM) generates the audible warnings. The BCM receives audible warning requests via the class 2 serial data line or the controller area network (CAN) data line. If the BCM receives multiple audible warning requests, the warning with the highest priority sounds first. The following lists the audible warning priority and the pulse rate: 1. Fast rate chime-200 pulses per minute 2. Medium rate chime-150 pulses per minute 3. Slow rate chime-50 pulses per minute 4. Single chime Fasten Safety Belt Warning The BCM activates the fasten safety belt audible warning as requested by the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). The SDM sends a class 2 message to the BCM. The fasten safety belt warning sounds and the fasten safety belt indicator illuminates when the following occurs: The ignition switch transitions to ON. - The inflatable restraint SDM detects that the driver seat belt is not buckled and or the signal is low. The BCM receives a class 2 message from the SDM indicating the driver seat belt status. If the seat belt is buckled when the ignition is turned ON, the chime does not sound. If the seat belt is buckled while the chime is sounding, the chime stops. If the seat belt is unbuckled after the initial transition to ON, the chime does not sound. Key In Ignition Warning The BCM monitors the signal circuit of the ignition switch. The BCM activates the key-in-ignition audible warning. The key-in-ignition warning sounds when the following occurs: The ignition switch is OFF. - The BCM determines that the driver door is open and the signal circuit is low. - The BCM determines that the key-in-ignition switch is closed and the signal circuit is low. Lights On Warning The BCM activates the lights on warning. The BCM chimes a frequency of a fast rate and a continuous duration. The lights on warning sounds when the following occurs: The ignition is OFF. - The BCM determines that the driver door is open and the signal circuit is low. - The BCM determines that the headlamp switch is in the park or head position. Park Brake Warning The BCM activates the park brake audible warning. The park brake warning sounds and the BRAKE indicator illuminates when the following occurs: The ignition is ON. - The vehicle speed is greater than 5 km/h (3.1 mph). The BCM receives a CAN serial message from the ECM indicating the vehicle speed. - The BCM determines that the park brake is engaged and the signal circuit is low. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams Cigar Lighter Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair Compass: Service and Repair COMPASS CALIBRATION AND VARIANCE PROCEDURE COMPASS CALIBRATION Before calibrating the compass, drive the vehicle to an open area that is magnetically clean or free of large metallic objects such as high tension power lines or large steel buildings. Verify there are no magnetized roof antennas, magnets on or hanging from the mirror, or any other magnetized objects on the inside or outside of the vehicle close to the mirror. 1. Start the engine. 2. Press and hold the on/off switch for the compass until the letter "C" or "CAL" is displayed. IMPORTANT: Before calibrating the compass, make sure the mirror has the correct zone number. Refer to Compass Magnetic Variation Adjustment mentioned below. 3. Drive the vehicle in circles at a speed of less than 8 km/h (5 mph) until the "C" or "CAL" is replaced by a proper vehicle heading. The calibration procedure is now complete. COMPASS MAGNETIC VARIATION ADJUSTMENT Magnetic variation adjustments are required when the compass displays a constant error in heading. Variation is the difference between magnetic north and true north due to geographical location. 1. Locate your current geographic location on the World Magnetic Variation Map. 2. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 3. Press and hold the on/off switch for the compass until a zone number appears on the compass display. 4. Depress the switch for the compass to select the desired zone number. 5. Wait 5 seconds. The display will return to a compass heading. The variance procedure is now complete. 6. Calibrate the compass. Refer to Compass Calibration mentioned above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16128 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16129 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16130 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16131 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16132 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16133 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16134 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16135 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16136 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16137 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16138 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16139 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16140 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16141 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16142 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16143 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16144 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16145 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center, then remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16146 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the I/P module connector. 7. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16147 2. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16148 5. Locate And Remove The Air Bag Fuse From The Body Control Module Fuse Center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - right, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the right rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16149 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - RF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - RF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - right, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16150 3. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16151 10. Connect the SIS - RF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 8 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16152 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the upper rear window molding. 7. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 9. Remove the rear coat hooks. 10. Gently pull down the right rear corner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 11. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16153 13. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 14. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 15. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 16. Remove the CPA from the I/P module connector. 17. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. 18. Remove the CPA from the steering wheel module coil connector. 19. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16154 20. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 21. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 22. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 23. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 24. Remove the CPA from the roof rail module - left connector. 25. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16155 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 5. Install the lower center pillar trim. 6. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 7. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16156 8. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 9. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 10. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 13. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 14. Install the rear coat hooks. 15. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16157 16. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 17. Install the upper rear window molding. 18. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 19. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 20. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 21. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16161 Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16162 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair INSTRUMENT PANEL (I/P) DIMMER SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left side air deflector from the instrument panel (I/P). 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the dimmer switch. 3. Remove the screw from the I/P dimmer switch. 4. Remove the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the dimmer switch to the left side air deflector panel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16163 Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Install the electrical connector to the dimmer switch. 3. Install the left side air deflector panel to the I/P. 4. Test the dimmer switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp: Description and Operation DOOR AJAR INDICATOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION DOOR AJAR INDICATOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS The door ajar indicator system consists of the following components: The body control module (BCM) - The instrument panel cluster (IPC) - The driver information center (DIC) - The driver door jamb switch - The passenger door jamb switch - The left rear door jamb switch - The right rear door jamb switch - The liftgate actuator/ajar switch DRIVER AND PASSENGER DOOR AJAR OPERATION The body control module (BCM) receives a discrete input from the respective jamb switch to indicate the status of the door. The BCM then communicates this status to the instrument panel cluster (IPC) via a class 2 message. The IPC, upon receipt of this class 2 message, will illuminate the appropriate ajar message in the driver information center (DIC) and also send a class 2 message to the radio to activate the door ajar audible warning when the following conditions are met: The transmission is removed from PARK. - The vehicle speed is greater then 8.05 km/h (5 mph). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Specifications Fuel Gauge: Specifications FUEL LEVEL SPECIFICATIONS The information in this table is intended for use with the J 33431-C Signal Generator and Instrument Panel Tester. The fuel level sensor values represent the test values to be used on the Signal Generator to drive the fuel gage display to the indicated positions. Vehicles that require more than one fuel level sensor calculate gage position from many possible resistance combinations of fuel levels between the two tanks. Therefore, the values in the table may not correlate directly to readings taken from the vehicle primary or secondary sending units. The values in the table are approximate values based on information obtained from properly operating vehicles. Actual results may vary slightly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Gauge: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16172 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16173 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16174 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16175 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16176 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16177 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16178 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16179 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16180 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16181 Fuel Gauge: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16182 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16183 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16184 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16185 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16186 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16187 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16188 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16189 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16190 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16191 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16192 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16193 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16194 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16195 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16196 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16197 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16198 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16199 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16200 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16201 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16202 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16203 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16204 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16205 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16206 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16207 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16208 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16209 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16210 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16211 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16212 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16213 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16214 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16215 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16216 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16217 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16218 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16219 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16220 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16221 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16222 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16223 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16224 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16225 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16226 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16227 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16228 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16229 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16230 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16231 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16232 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16233 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16234 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16235 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16236 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16237 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16238 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16239 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16240 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16241 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16242 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16243 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16244 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16245 Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation FUEL GAGE The PCM sends fuel level percent to the BCM via CAN serial data. The IPC displays the fuel level as determined by the BCM. The fuel gage defaults to E (empty) if: - The PCM detects a malfunction in the fuel level sensor circuit. - The IPC detects a loss of class 2 communications with the BCM. - The BCM detects a loss of CAN communications with the PCM. When the fuel level is less than a pre-determined value, the Low Fuel indicator message illuminates. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagrams Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Primary Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Secondary Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16254 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16255 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16256 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16257 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16258 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16259 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16260 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16261 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16262 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16263 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16264 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16265 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16266 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16267 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16268 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16269 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16270 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16271 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center, then remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16272 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the I/P module connector. 7. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16273 2. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16274 5. Locate And Remove The Air Bag Fuse From The Body Control Module Fuse Center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - right, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the right rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16275 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - RF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - RF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - right, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16276 3. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16277 10. Connect the SIS - RF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 8 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16278 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the upper rear window molding. 7. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 9. Remove the rear coat hooks. 10. Gently pull down the right rear corner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 11. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16279 13. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 14. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 15. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 16. Remove the CPA from the I/P module connector. 17. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. 18. Remove the CPA from the steering wheel module coil connector. 19. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16280 20. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 21. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 22. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 23. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 24. Remove the CPA from the roof rail module - left connector. 25. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16281 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 5. Install the lower center pillar trim. 6. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 7. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16282 8. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 9. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 10. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 13. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 14. Install the rear coat hooks. 15. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 16283 16. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 17. Install the upper rear window molding. 18. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 19. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 20. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 21. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 16288 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 16289 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 16290 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 16291 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 16292 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 16293 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation This vehicle is not equipped with a factory installed Tire Pressure Monitor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation SERVICE VEHICLE SOON INDICATOR The "SERVICE VEHICLE SOON" light, (if equipped) will come on if there are certain non-emission related vehicle problems. These problems may not be obvious and may affect vehicle performance or durability. The light will come on briefly when the ignition is turned on to show that it is working properly. This light does NOT come on at certain mileage intervals. There is probably a PCM or a BCM Code set that will aid you in diagnosis. RESET PROCEDURE The only way to get the light to go off is to clear the PCM or BCM code(s). This light can NOT be reset or shut off any other way. PCM/BCM codes should be read & repaired before clearing them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) OPERATION The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located in the instrument panel cluster. The MIL will display as either SERVICE ENGINE SOON or one of the following symbols when commanded ON: The MIL indicates that an emissions related fault has occurred and vehicle service is required. The following is a list of the modes of operation for the MIL: - The MIL illuminates when the ignition is turned ON, with the engine OFF. This is a bulb test to ensure that the MIL is able to illuminate. - The MIL turns OFF after the engine is started if a diagnostic fault is not present. - The MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started if the control module detects a fault. A DTC is stored any time the control module illuminates the MIL due to an emissions related fault. The MIL turns OFF after 3 consecutive ignition cycles in which a Test Passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. - The MIL flashes if the control module detects a misfire condition which could damage the catalytic converter. - When the MIL is illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated as long as the ignition is ON. - When the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition is cycled OFF and then ON. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide Odometer: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-08-49-020D Date: December 06, 2010 Subject: IPC Odometer Programming Method Quick Reference Guide Models: 2003-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Attention: This bulletin applies to vehicles sold in the U.S. and Canada Only. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add information for the 2011 model year and add new 2011 vehicles. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-49-020C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The purpose of this bulletin is to provide a reference guide to help identify which season odometer programming method to use after replacing the instrument panel cluster (IPC). The three season odometer programming methods in use today are listed below. In addition, this reference guide lists the component where the season odometer value is stored. The season odometer value may be stored in the IPC, the driver information center (DIC) or the integrated body control module (IBCM), also commonly called a body control module (BCM). Season Odometer Programming Methods in Use Today 1. IPC reprogramming and setup using the service programming system (SPS). 2. Odometer setup at the electronic service center (ESC) when using an exchange IPC/DIC. 3. Tech 2(R) - The Tech 2 is used to set up a replacement BCM, which includes loading the odometer value that is displayed and stored in the IPC. A replacement IPC will display the previously stored vehicle odometer value, communicated from the BCM, after cycling the ignition or driving the vehicle. *The odometer programming is integrated as part of the BCM programming procedure. It is not a stand-alone event. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 16304 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 16305 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 16306 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 16307 Odometer: Description and Operation ODOMETER The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven, in either miles (domestic) or kilometers (export). The odometer is shown on display when any of the following occur: - Ignition is in ACC - Ignition is in RUN, with no messages on - The trip reset stem is pressed with the ignition OFF Odometer readings are displayed in the IPC based on a class 2 message from the BCM. The PCM calculates the distance traveled from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) input. The BCM receives a CAN serial data message from the PCM and stores the current mileage. The IPC stores the last valid odometer reading from the BCM in non-volatile memory. When a new valid odometer reading is received from the BCM, the IPC will update the display and store the new reading. The IPC also receives class 2 messages from the BCM regarding VIN and Vehicle content information. Valid information is stored in non-volatile memory at the first key-up with a new IPC. If the VIN or option content do not match the stored information, the odometer will display ERROR. TRIP ODOMETER Trip odometer readings are calculated by the IPC based on the odometer reading received through a class 2 message from the BCM. The trip odometer is shown when selected with the odometer trip reset stem. To reset the trip odometer, press and hold the trip reset stem for about two seconds, until the trip odometer shows zero. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair ENGINE OIL LIFE SYSTEM WHEN TO CHANGE ENGINE OIL Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is changed. When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary. A "change engine oil" light will come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. HOW TO RESET THE ENGINE OIL LIFE SYSTEM The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a change engine oil light being turned on, reset the system. 1. Turn the ignition key to "RUN" with the engine off. 2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three times within five seconds. The "change engine oil" light will flash while the system is resetting. 3. Turn the key to "LOCK". If the change engine oil light comes back on and stays on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure. WHAT TO DO WITH USED OIL Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's warnings about the use and disposal of oil products. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 16314 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (with RPO Code DH3/DF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16319 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front fascia. 2. Remove the push-in retainer that secures the ambient air temperature sensor to the impact bar. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the ambient air temperature sensor. 4. Remove the sensor from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the ambient air temperature sensor. 2. Install the ambient air temperature sensor to the impact bar and with the push-in retainer. 3. Install the front fascia. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Brake Warning System Components Brake Warning System Components 1 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16323 Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16324 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Park Brake Warning Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Remove the front floor console. 3. Disconnect the warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 4. Remove the warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the park brake warning lamp switch locating tab to the locating hole on the park brake lever assembly. 2. Install the switch to the park brake lever. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the park brake warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). ^ Tighten the screw to 4 Nm (35 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the park brake warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 5. Install the front floor console. 6. Enable the SIR system. 7. Verify correct park brake warning lamp operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16329 Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16330 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair INSTRUMENT PANEL (I/P) DIMMER SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left side air deflector from the instrument panel (I/P). 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the dimmer switch. 3. Remove the screw from the I/P dimmer switch. 4. Remove the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the dimmer switch to the left side air deflector panel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16331 Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Install the electrical connector to the dimmer switch. 3. Install the left side air deflector panel to the I/P. 4. Test the dimmer switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagrams Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Primary Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Secondary Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (with RPO Code DH3/DF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16338 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front fascia. 2. Remove the push-in retainer that secures the ambient air temperature sensor to the impact bar. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the ambient air temperature sensor. 4. Remove the sensor from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the ambient air temperature sensor. 2. Install the ambient air temperature sensor to the impact bar and with the push-in retainer. 3. Install the front fascia. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Brake Warning System Components Brake Warning System Components 1 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16342 Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16343 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Park Brake Warning Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Remove the front floor console. 3. Disconnect the warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 4. Remove the warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the park brake warning lamp switch locating tab to the locating hole on the park brake lever assembly. 2. Install the switch to the park brake lever. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the park brake warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). ^ Tighten the screw to 4 Nm (35 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the park brake warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 5. Install the front floor console. 6. Enable the SIR system. 7. Verify correct park brake warning lamp operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Shift Indicator: Description and Operation SHIFT INDICATOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The shift indicator, located in the console, displays the selected gear position. The body control module (BCM) controls the LEDs in the PRNDL display of the shift indicator through 4 control circuits. The parameters of the 4 control circuits to the shift indicator are bits A, B, C, and parity. These outputs are available for display on the scan tool. The BCM has 8 DTCs for these 4 control circuits. These DTCs diagnose a short or an open for each circuit. The BCM receives selected gear position information from the transmission control module (TCM) via serial data. The TCM receives the gear position through four inputs from the park/neutral position switch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Description and Operation Speedometer Head: Description and Operation SPEEDOMETER The IPC displays the vehicle speed based on the information from the BCM. The PCM calculates the vehicle speed based on the CAN serial data message indicating the wheel reference speed from the electronic brake control module (EBCM). The PCM sends a CAN serial data message to the BCM indicating the vehicle speed. The BCM sends a class 2 message to the IPC indicating the vehicle speed. The speedometer defaults to 0 km/h (0 mph) when any of the following occur: - The EBCM detects a malfunction in the vehicle speed sensor circuit. - The PCM detects a loss of CAN communications with the EBCM. - The BCM detects a loss of CAN communications with the PCM. - The IPC detects a loss of class 2 communications with the BCM. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tachometer > Component Information > Description and Operation Tachometer: Description and Operation TACHOMETER The IPC displays the engine speed as determined by the BCM via a class 2 message. The PCM determines the engine speed and sends a CAN serial data message to the BCM indicating the engine speed. The tachometer will default to 0 RPM if: - The PCM detects a malfunction in the engine speed sensor circuit. - The BCM detects a loss of CAN communications with the PCM. - The IPC detects a loss of class 2 communications with the BCM. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 16358 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 16359 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 16360 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 16361 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 16362 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 16363 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation This vehicle is not equipped with a factory installed Tire Pressure Monitor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 16376 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 16377 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Minimizing Damage to TPM Sensors INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-007 Date: May 16, 2008 Subject: Minimizing Damage to Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Sensors During Tire Mounting/Dismounting Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors Minimizing Damage To TPM Sensors All GM vehicles now in production and sold in the U.S., as well as many vehicles sold in Canada, feature Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems that have valve stem mounted Tire Pressure Sensors. When dismounting and mounting tires, care must be taken when breaking the bead loose from the wheel. If the tire machines bead breaking fixture is positioned too close to the tire pressure sensor, as the tire bead breaks away from the wheel it may be forced into, or catch on the edge of the tire pressure sensor. This can damage the sensor and require the sensor to be replaced. Care must also be taken when transferring the tire bead to the other side of the wheel rim. As the tire machine rotates and the tire bead is stretched around the wheel rim, the bead can come in contact with the sensor if it is not correctly positioned in relation to the mounting/dismounting head prior to tire mounting/dismounting. This can also cause sensor damage requiring replacement. Procedure Notice: Use a tire changing machine in order to dismount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or the wheel rim could result. Notice: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. 1. Remove the valve core from the valve stem. 2. Deflate the tire completely. Important: Rim-clamp European-type tire changers are recommended. 3. Use the tire changer in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Follow steps 4-7 to remove the tire from the wheel. 4. When separating the tire bead from the wheel position the bead breaking fixture 90, 180 and 270 degrees from the valve stem. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 16378 5. Position the wheel and tire so the valve stem is situated at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the outer tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 6. Position the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated again at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the inner tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 7. Remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting on vehicles equipped with TPM replace the tire pressure sensor. 8. Use a wire brush or coarse steel wool in order to remove any rubber, light rust or corrosion from the wheel bead seats. Important: If bead seat corrosion has been identified as an air loss concern on the wheel being worked on, refer to GM Service Bulletin # 08-03-10-006 for additional information on correcting the leak. 9. Apply GM P/N 12345884 (in Canada, P/N 5728223) or equivalent to the tire bead and the wheel rim. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 16379 10. Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the inside of the wheel rim. 11. Position the rim so that the valve stem (1) is situated at the 3 o'clock position relative to the head (2). This will protect the sensor when the bottom bead seats. 12. After the bottom bead is on the wheel, reposition the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated at the 9 o'clock position relative to the head. This will protect the sensor while mounting the tire bead to the outside of the wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 16380 13. Use the tire changer in order to install the tire to the wheel. Caution: To avoid serious personal injury, do not stand over tire when inflating. The bead may break when the bead snaps over the safety hump. Do not exceed 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure when inflating any tire if beads are not seated. If 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure will not seat the beads, deflate, lubricate the beads and reinflate. Overinflating may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. Important: Allowable bead seating pressure is 345 kPa (50 psi) on Extended Mobility Tires. 14. Inflate the tire until it passes the bead humps. Be sure that the valve core is not installed at this time. 15. Install the valve core to the valve core stem. 16. Inflate the tire to the proper air pressure. 17. Ensure that the locating rings are visible on both sides of the tire in order to verify that the tire bead is fully seated on the wheel. Parts Information The product shown above is available from GM SPO. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Reduced PRNDL Display Visibility Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Reduced PRNDL Display Visibility Bulletin No.: 02-08-42-004A Date: March 30, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: PRNDL Display Reduced Visibility For Approximately One Minute Models: 2007 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with Automatic Headlamp Control and Vacuum Fluorescent PRNDL Indicator Instrument Panel Cluster Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-42-0004 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). After backing the vehicle out of a garage or dark environment into a daylight environment, the PRNDL display has reduced visibility for approximately one minute. While the vehicle is parked in a dark environment, the sensor for the automatic headlamp/driving lamps senses that it is dark. When the key is turned to the run/start position, the automatic headlamp module will turn all driving lamps, the instrument panel cluster and PRNDL display ON in the night-time mode. The night-time mode intensity of the instrument panel lamps and PRNDL display is controlled by the automatic headlamp module and can be dimmed further by the customer using the dimming control of the headlamp switch. When the customer then moves the vehicle from the dark environment into the bright sunlight, it will take approximately one minute before the headlamp control module recognizes this as true daylight and not just a bright overhead street lamp shining on the sensor. The headlamp control module will then turn the headlamps off and restore the instrument panel and PRNDL display to full brilliance. Without the time delay, the automatic headlamp control module would switch to the night mode (turn on all driving lamps, instrument panel lamps and PRNDL display would dim) each time the vehicle was driven under an overpass or other darkened environment. This is a normal condition and no repair should be attempted. Ensure the instrument panel backlighting control is in the full bright position. This will help alleviate the condition. You may demonstrate to the customer what happens by placing a repair order over the automatic headlamp control light sensor, which will cause the automatic headlamp control module to switch to the night mode in approximately one minute. All driving lamps will come ON, the instrument panel backlight will be dim, and the PRNDL display will also dim to the night setting in conjunction with the position of the headlamp switch dimming control. Demonstrate to the customer the variance in the instrument panel backlighting and PRNDL display while adjusting the headlamp switch dimming control to both ends of its allowable range. Advise the customer to keep the headlight switch dimming control in the highest position to allow viewing of the PRNDL display in a bright environment. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 16385 Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Service and Repair TRANS FLOOR SHIFT CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the PRNDL assembly. 3. Remove the screws that retain the PRNDL assembly to the I/P bezel. Remove the PRNDL assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Align the PRNDL assembly with the trim bezel and fasten in place. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Connect the electrical connector to the PRNDL assembly. 3. Install the I/P trim bezel. 4. Test the PRNDL assembly for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 16390 Ambient Light Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 16391 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the access panel covers from the upper trim pad. 2. Remove the I/P cluster trim panel. 3. Remove the windshield garnish moldings. 4. Remove the upper trim pad bolts. 5. Lift the upper trim pad to disengage the clips. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 16392 6. Twist the ambient light sensor to remove the sensor from the upper trim pad. 7. Disconnect the electrical connector from the ambient light sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the ambient light sensor. 2. Align the sensor to the upper trim pad and twist into place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 16393 3. Align the upper trim pad to the I/P and fasten the bolts in place. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Install the windshield garnish moldings. 5. Install the I/P cluster trim panel. 6. Install the access panel covers to the upper trim pad. 7. Test the ambient light sensor for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Backup Lamp Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16398 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16399 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16400 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Backup Light Bulb: Service and Repair TAIL LAMP ASSEMBLY AND /OR BACKUP, SIDEMARKER, STOP, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the tail lamp bolt covers. 2. Remove the tail lamp bolts (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16404 3. Pull outward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to disengage the retainers from the body side. 4. Remove the bulbs from the tail lamp assembly. 5. Remove the tail lamp assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 2. Install the bulbs into the tail lamp assembly. 3. Push inward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to engage the retainers into the body side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16405 4. Install the tail lamp bolts (3). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the tail lamp bolts to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the tail lamp bolt covers (4). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Brake Light Bulb: Service and Repair TAIL LAMP ASSEMBLY AND /OR BACKUP, SIDEMARKER, STOP, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the tail lamp bolt covers. 2. Remove the tail lamp bolts (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16410 3. Pull outward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to disengage the retainers from the body side. 4. Remove the bulbs from the tail lamp assembly. 5. Remove the tail lamp assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 2. Install the bulbs into the tail lamp assembly. 3. Push inward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to engage the retainers into the body side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16411 4. Install the tail lamp bolts (3). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the tail lamp bolts to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the tail lamp bolt covers (4). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Switches Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Stop Lamp Switch - Lower Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Stop Lamp Switch - Lower Stop Lamp Switch - Lower Stop Lamp Switch - Lower Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Stop Lamp Switch - Lower > Page 16417 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Stop Lamp Switch - Upper Stop Lamp Switch - Upper Stop Lamp Switch - Upper Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16418 Brake Light Switch: Adjustments STOP LAMP SWITCH ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 1. Improper stoplamp switch adjustment may cause brake drag, heat buildup and excessive brake lining wear. NOTE: Proper stoplamp switch adjustment is essential. Disconnect the electrical connector from the stop lamp switch. 2. Rotate the switch counterclockwise and remove the switch from the switch retainer. 3. Install the switch to the bracket by turning and pushing the switch until the switch bottoms on the brake pedal. IMPORTANT: Do NOT depress the brake pedal assembly during the stop lamp switch installation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16419 This will cause a drag condition on the brake. 4. Connect the electrical connector to the stop lamp switch. 5. Inspect the stop lamps for proper operation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16420 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair STOP LAMP SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the stop lamp switch. 2. Rotate the stop lamp switch counterclockwise and remove the switch from the switch retainer. 3. Gently compress the locking tabs on the switch retainer and remove the switch retainer from the brake pedal assembly. IMPORTANT: Depressing the brake pedal will allow easier access to the locking tabs on the stop lamp retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16421 1. Connect the electrical connectors on the stop lamp switch. NOTE: Proper stoplamp switch adjustment is essential. Improper stoplamp switch adjustment may cause brake drag, heat buildup and excessive brake lining wear. IMPORTANT: Do NOT depress the brake pedal assembly during the stop lamp switch installation. This will cause a drag condition on the brake. - Inspect the retainer to insure that the locking tabs have locked into position and the retainer is in place. 2. Install the switch to the bracket by turning and pushing the switch until the switch bottoms on the brake pedal. 3. Inspect the stop lamps for proper operation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cargo Lamp Bulb Replacement Cargo Lamp: Service and Repair Cargo Lamp Bulb Replacement CARGO LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cover from the dome lamp/cargo lamp. 2. Remove the bulb from the lamp. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install a new bulb to the lamp. 2. Install the cover to the lamp. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cargo Lamp Bulb Replacement > Page 16426 Cargo Lamp: Service and Repair Cargo Lamp Replacement CARGO LAMP REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a flat-bladed tool, unsnap the lens from the cargo lamp assembly. 2. Using a flat-bladed tool, disengage the cargo lamp attaching clips by gently prying inboard, being careful not to break the attaching clips. 3. Pull downward and rearward on the cargo lamp to disengage the lamp from the headliner. 4. Disconnect the electrical harness from the cargo lamp. 5. Remove the cargo lamp. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cargo Lamp Bulb Replacement > Page 16427 1. Position the cargo lamp to the headliner and connect the electrical connector. 2. Slide the cargo lamp into place. 3. Snap the cargo lamp clips back into the closed position. 4. Snap the lens into the cargo lamp assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16431 Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Service and Repair HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the spoiler from the liftgate. 2. Remove the spoiler to high mounted stop lamp screws. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the washer hose. 5. Remove the stop lamp from the spoiler. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the high mounted stop lamp to the spoiler. 2. Connect the washer hose. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16432 3. Connect the electrical connector. 4. Install the spoiler to the high mounted stop lamp screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the spoiler to the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Cornering Lamp: Service and Repair HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY OR HEADLAMP BULB AND/OR CORNERING, SIDEMARKER, PARK, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 3. Gently pull the top of the fascia assembly several inches away from the vehicle to release the radiator grille strap from the headlamp. 4. Place a piece of tape over the radiator grille strap to headlamp retaining clip to prevent scratching of the headlamp lens. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16436 5. Remove the headlamp bolts (1, 2). 6. Pull gently on the bottom outboard corner of the headlamp to disengage the lower rear headlamp retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16437 7. Remove the bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5) from the backside of the headlamp. 8. Remove the headlamp from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the headlamp into the headlamp opening. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16438 2. Install the headlamp bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5). 3. Push the headlamp back into position until the lower rear retainer is fully engaged. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16439 4. Install the headlamp bolts (1, 2) NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the headlamp bolts to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 5. Remove the tape from the radiator grille strap retainer. 6. Position the fascia assembly and engage the radiator grille strap retainer into the headlamp. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16440 7. Install the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 8. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Courtesy Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16445 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16446 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16447 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16448 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16449 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16450 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16451 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16452 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16453 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16454 Courtesy Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16455 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16456 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16457 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16458 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16459 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16460 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16461 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16462 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16463 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16464 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16465 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16466 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16467 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16468 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16469 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16470 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16471 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16472 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16473 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16474 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16475 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16476 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16477 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16478 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16479 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16480 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16481 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16482 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16483 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16484 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16485 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16486 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16487 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16488 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16489 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16490 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16491 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16492 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16493 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16494 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16495 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16496 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16497 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16498 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16499 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16500 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16501 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16502 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16503 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16504 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16505 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16506 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16507 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16508 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16509 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16510 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16511 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16512 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16513 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16514 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16515 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16516 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16517 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16518 Courtesy/Map Lamp Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16519 Courtesy Lamp: Description and Operation COURTESY/ILLUMINATED ENTRY LAMPS The following lamps may be manually turned ON by placing the interior lamp switch in the ON position, or by opening a door while the switch is in the AUTO position. - The dome lamp - The liftgate lamps - Courtesy/map lights The courtesy lamp supply voltage circuit of the body control module (BCM) supplies battery positive voltage to the dome lamp, the liftgate lamps, and the map lamps. When any door is opened, the door jamb switch contacts close providing a door open input to the BCM. The BCM then provides a ground to the interior lamps with the switch in the AUTO position. The interior lamps receive a ground at G401 with the switch in the ON position. IMPORTANT: If the liftgate is opened after all the modules go to sleep, the dome light will not come on. The liftgate ajar switch input to the BCM will not wake up the BCM once it has gone to sleep, so the dome light will not come on. Once the BCM gets an input to wake it up, from remote keyless entry (RKE) or a door handle, the dome light will turn on when the liftgate is opened. If the driver inadvertently leaves any interior lamp ON, the BCM will turn it OFF after a 20 minute time-out. The courtesy lamps will turn OFF immediately if the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or approximately 20 seconds after all doors are closed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16524 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16525 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16526 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) Technical Service Bulletin # 08050 Date: 080331 Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) # 08050: Special Coverage - Daytime Running Lamps May Become Inoperative (Canada Only) (Mar 31, 2008) Subject: 08050 -- DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS MAY BECOME INOPERATIVE Models: 2005-2006 CHEVROLET EQUINOX 2006 PONTIAC TORRENT 2002-2007 SATURN VUE CANADIAN VEHICLES Condition On some 2005-2006 model year Chevrolet Equinox, 2006 model year Pontiac Torrent, and 2002-2007 model year Saturn VUE vehicles, the daytime running lamp (DRL) resistor may crack. If water and road salt enters the crack, it could corrode the resistor. A corroded resistor could result in a loss of DRL illumination, and therefore, vehicles may be less visible to other motorists and pedestrians during daylight hours. Correction This bulletin covers the condition described above for a period of 7 years or 112,000 km, whichever occurs first, from the date the vehicle was originally placed in service, regardless of ownership. Dealers/retailers are to verify the condition and install a new resistor, if necessary. The repairs will be made at no charge to the customer. For vehicles covered by Vehicle Service Contracts, all eligible claims with repair orders on or after March 31, 2008 are covered by this special coverage and must be submitted using the labor operation codes provided with this bulletin. Claims with repair orders prior to March 31, 2008 must be submitted to the Service Contract provider. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2005-2006 model year Chevrolet Equinox, 2006 model year Pontiac Torrent, and 2002-2007 model year Saturn VUE vehicles built within the VIN breakpoints shown. Parts Information Parts required to complete this program are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this program on their vehicles (see copy of typical customer letter shown in this bulletin - actual divisional letter may vary slightly). Service Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 16535 1. Verify that the DRLs are not working. If they are not, raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. Important: The DRL resistor (1) is located on the left front bumper support and may require cleaning before inspection. 2. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, loosen the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia to gain access to the DRL resistor. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models do not require the removal of the left front wheel or inner wheel liner to gain access to the DRL resistor (1). 3. Use a mirror and light to visually inspect the daytime running lamp resistor for cracks or corrosion. ^ If the resistor is cracked or corroded, the resistor requires replacement. Remove the resistor. Refer to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Resistor Replacement in SI. Proceed to Step 4. ^ If the resistor appears to be in good condition, the vehicle does not have this condition. Follow normal SI diagnostics. Diagnosis and repairs for any other conditions are not covered under this program. 4. Install the new DRL resistor assembly to the left front bumper support with the washer (1) between the resistor and bumper support. 5. Tighten the new DRL resistor bolt. Tighten Tighten the DRL resistor bolt to 6 Nm (53 lb in). DO NOT EXCEED 6 Nm (53 lb in). 6. Connect the DRL electrical connector to the DRL resistor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 16536 7. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, install the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models did not require the inner wheel liner to be removed. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Clear any DTCs and verify the operation of the daytime running lamps. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under the terms of this program, submit a claim with the information shown. Customer Reimbursement Customer requests for reimbursement of previously paid repairs to correct a corroded DRL resistor are to be submitted to the dealer/retailer prior to or by March 31, 2009. Repairs must have occurred within the 7 years of the date the vehicle was originally placed in service, or 112,000 km, whichever occurs first. When a customer requests reimbursement, they must provide the following: ^ Proof of ownership at time of repair. ^ Original paid receipt confirming the amount of unreimbursed repair expense(s) (including Service Contract deductibles), a description of the repair, and the person or entity performing the repair. If the work was done by someone other than a GM dealership or Saturn retail facility, the amount of reimbursement will be limited to the amount that the repair would have cost GM to have it completed by a GM dealership or Saturn retail facility. Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers/retailers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. GM dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Saturn retailers should refer to applicable Home Office letter on this subject. Daytime Running Lamp Inspection Procedure Perform the following procedure in daylight hours and with the vehicle parked outside. 1. Turn the headlamp switch to the "ON" position. Ensure that you do not have your bright lights (High Beams) on. 2. Standing in front of the vehicle, check the headlamps to ensure that both the left and right bulbs are working. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 16537 3. If either bulb is not working, replace it before proceeding to Step 4. 4. Enter the vehicle and turn the headlamp switch to the AUTO position. 5. Place your foot on the brake pedal and release the parking/emergency brake (if it is on). 6. Start your vehicle, and with your foot still on the brake, shift your vehicle out of "PARK" while monitoring the upper left corner of the instrument cluster for the green DRL indicator lamp. 7. If the DRL lamp comes on and stays on, your DRLs are working normally and no further action is required. 8. If the DRL lamp flashes rapidly and then turns off, your DRL lamps are not working. Make an appointment with your dealer/retailer. If the resistor is cracked or corroded, your dealer/retailer will replace it at no cost to you. Diagnosis or repair for conditions other than a cracked resistor are not covered under this program. Important: You may continue to drive your vehicle without DRLs; however, we suggest that you turn your headlamps to the ON position while driving until you have had the DRL resistor replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 16538 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-08-42-002A > Apr > 08 > Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: Customer Interest Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-08-42-002A Date: April 03, 2008 Subject: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) May Not Work or DRL Indicator on IP Cluster Flashes and Then Goes Out, DTC B2600 (Inspect DRL Resistor and Replace, If Necessary) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox (U.S. Only) 2006 Pontiac Torrent (U.S Only) 2002-2007 Saturn VUE (U.S Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models affected, change the procedure and Parts Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-42-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important: This bulletin applies to vehicles sold and registered in the U.S. ONLY. Vehicles sold and registered in Canada should refer to Special Coverage Bulletin 08050. Condition Some customers may comment that the daytime running lamps (DRL) may not work or that the DRL indicator on the IP cluster flashes and then goes out. A technician may find DTC B2600 (Daytime Running Lamp Control Circuit) set. Cause The DRL resistor may be cracked. Correction Inspect the DRL resistor using the steps below. 1. Verify that the daytime running lamps are not illuminated by following the steps below: 1. Park the vehicle outside or hold a shop trouble light over the ambient light sensor for 30 seconds. 2. Position the headlamp switch to the "Auto" position. 3. Make sure the parking brake is not applied or set. 4. Depress the brake pedal. 5. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position. 6. Shift the transmission out of "Park" position or place the vehicle into gear if equipped with a manual transmission. 7. Visually watch the green DRL telltale lamp on the IP cluster and note the operation of the DRL lamps. ^ If the DRL telltale lamp stays on and both DRL lamps are on, then the DRLs are functioning properly. No further action is required. ^ If the DRL telltale flashes rapidly, goes out and one DRL lamp flashes rapidly a DRL bulb may be burned out. Inspect the DRL bulb and replace if necessary. ^ If the DRL telltale flashes rapidly, goes out and no DRL lamps come on then proceed to the next step. 8. Check for DTCs and verify DTC B2600-Daytime Running Lamp Control Circuit is present. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-08-42-002A > Apr > 08 > Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 > Page 16544 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2007 Saturn Model shown. Tip The DRL resistor (1) is located on the left front bumper support and may require cleaning before inspection. 3. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, loosen the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia to gain access to the DRL resistor. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models do not require the removal of the left front wheel or inner wheel liner to gain access to the DRL resistor (1). Proceed to Step 4. 4. Use a mirror and light to visually inspect the daytime running lamps resistor for cracks or corrosion. 1. If the resistor is cracked or corroded, remove the resistor. Refer to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Resistor Replacement in SI. Proceed to Step 5. 2. If the resistor appears to be in good condition, follow normal SI diagnostics. ^ If DTC B2600 is set, refer to DTC B2600 in SI. ^ If no codes were set, refer to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Inoperative in SI. 5. Install the new DRL resistor assembly to the left front bumper support with the washer (1) between the resistor and bumper support. 6. Tighten the new DRL resistor bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 6 N.m (53 lb in). DO NOT EXCEED 6 N.m (53 lb in). 7. Connect the DRL electrical connector to the DRL resistor. 8. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, install the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models did not require the inner wheel liner to be removed. Proceed to Step 9. 9. Lower the vehicle and unhoist. 10. Clear any DTCs and verify the operation of the daytime running lamps. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-08-42-002A > Apr > 08 > Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 > Page 16545 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 07-08-42-002A > Apr > 08 > Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-08-42-002A Date: April 03, 2008 Subject: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) May Not Work or DRL Indicator on IP Cluster Flashes and Then Goes Out, DTC B2600 (Inspect DRL Resistor and Replace, If Necessary) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox (U.S. Only) 2006 Pontiac Torrent (U.S Only) 2002-2007 Saturn VUE (U.S Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models affected, change the procedure and Parts Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-42-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important: This bulletin applies to vehicles sold and registered in the U.S. ONLY. Vehicles sold and registered in Canada should refer to Special Coverage Bulletin 08050. Condition Some customers may comment that the daytime running lamps (DRL) may not work or that the DRL indicator on the IP cluster flashes and then goes out. A technician may find DTC B2600 (Daytime Running Lamp Control Circuit) set. Cause The DRL resistor may be cracked. Correction Inspect the DRL resistor using the steps below. 1. Verify that the daytime running lamps are not illuminated by following the steps below: 1. Park the vehicle outside or hold a shop trouble light over the ambient light sensor for 30 seconds. 2. Position the headlamp switch to the "Auto" position. 3. Make sure the parking brake is not applied or set. 4. Depress the brake pedal. 5. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position. 6. Shift the transmission out of "Park" position or place the vehicle into gear if equipped with a manual transmission. 7. Visually watch the green DRL telltale lamp on the IP cluster and note the operation of the DRL lamps. ^ If the DRL telltale lamp stays on and both DRL lamps are on, then the DRLs are functioning properly. No further action is required. ^ If the DRL telltale flashes rapidly, goes out and one DRL lamp flashes rapidly a DRL bulb may be burned out. Inspect the DRL bulb and replace if necessary. ^ If the DRL telltale flashes rapidly, goes out and no DRL lamps come on then proceed to the next step. 8. Check for DTCs and verify DTC B2600-Daytime Running Lamp Control Circuit is present. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 07-08-42-002A > Apr > 08 > Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 > Page 16551 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2007 Saturn Model shown. Tip The DRL resistor (1) is located on the left front bumper support and may require cleaning before inspection. 3. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, loosen the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia to gain access to the DRL resistor. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models do not require the removal of the left front wheel or inner wheel liner to gain access to the DRL resistor (1). Proceed to Step 4. 4. Use a mirror and light to visually inspect the daytime running lamps resistor for cracks or corrosion. 1. If the resistor is cracked or corroded, remove the resistor. Refer to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Resistor Replacement in SI. Proceed to Step 5. 2. If the resistor appears to be in good condition, follow normal SI diagnostics. ^ If DTC B2600 is set, refer to DTC B2600 in SI. ^ If no codes were set, refer to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Inoperative in SI. 5. Install the new DRL resistor assembly to the left front bumper support with the washer (1) between the resistor and bumper support. 6. Tighten the new DRL resistor bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 6 N.m (53 lb in). DO NOT EXCEED 6 N.m (53 lb in). 7. Connect the DRL electrical connector to the DRL resistor. 8. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, install the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models did not require the inner wheel liner to be removed. Proceed to Step 9. 9. Lower the vehicle and unhoist. 10. Clear any DTCs and verify the operation of the daytime running lamps. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 07-08-42-002A > Apr > 08 > Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 > Page 16552 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) Technical Service Bulletin # 08050 Date: 080331 Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) # 08050: Special Coverage - Daytime Running Lamps May Become Inoperative (Canada Only) (Mar 31, 2008) Subject: 08050 -- DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS MAY BECOME INOPERATIVE Models: 2005-2006 CHEVROLET EQUINOX 2006 PONTIAC TORRENT 2002-2007 SATURN VUE CANADIAN VEHICLES Condition On some 2005-2006 model year Chevrolet Equinox, 2006 model year Pontiac Torrent, and 2002-2007 model year Saturn VUE vehicles, the daytime running lamp (DRL) resistor may crack. If water and road salt enters the crack, it could corrode the resistor. A corroded resistor could result in a loss of DRL illumination, and therefore, vehicles may be less visible to other motorists and pedestrians during daylight hours. Correction This bulletin covers the condition described above for a period of 7 years or 112,000 km, whichever occurs first, from the date the vehicle was originally placed in service, regardless of ownership. Dealers/retailers are to verify the condition and install a new resistor, if necessary. The repairs will be made at no charge to the customer. For vehicles covered by Vehicle Service Contracts, all eligible claims with repair orders on or after March 31, 2008 are covered by this special coverage and must be submitted using the labor operation codes provided with this bulletin. Claims with repair orders prior to March 31, 2008 must be submitted to the Service Contract provider. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2005-2006 model year Chevrolet Equinox, 2006 model year Pontiac Torrent, and 2002-2007 model year Saturn VUE vehicles built within the VIN breakpoints shown. Parts Information Parts required to complete this program are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this program on their vehicles (see copy of typical customer letter shown in this bulletin - actual divisional letter may vary slightly). Service Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 16557 1. Verify that the DRLs are not working. If they are not, raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. Important: The DRL resistor (1) is located on the left front bumper support and may require cleaning before inspection. 2. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, loosen the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia to gain access to the DRL resistor. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models do not require the removal of the left front wheel or inner wheel liner to gain access to the DRL resistor (1). 3. Use a mirror and light to visually inspect the daytime running lamp resistor for cracks or corrosion. ^ If the resistor is cracked or corroded, the resistor requires replacement. Remove the resistor. Refer to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Resistor Replacement in SI. Proceed to Step 4. ^ If the resistor appears to be in good condition, the vehicle does not have this condition. Follow normal SI diagnostics. Diagnosis and repairs for any other conditions are not covered under this program. 4. Install the new DRL resistor assembly to the left front bumper support with the washer (1) between the resistor and bumper support. 5. Tighten the new DRL resistor bolt. Tighten Tighten the DRL resistor bolt to 6 Nm (53 lb in). DO NOT EXCEED 6 Nm (53 lb in). 6. Connect the DRL electrical connector to the DRL resistor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 16558 7. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, install the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models did not require the inner wheel liner to be removed. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Clear any DTCs and verify the operation of the daytime running lamps. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under the terms of this program, submit a claim with the information shown. Customer Reimbursement Customer requests for reimbursement of previously paid repairs to correct a corroded DRL resistor are to be submitted to the dealer/retailer prior to or by March 31, 2009. Repairs must have occurred within the 7 years of the date the vehicle was originally placed in service, or 112,000 km, whichever occurs first. When a customer requests reimbursement, they must provide the following: ^ Proof of ownership at time of repair. ^ Original paid receipt confirming the amount of unreimbursed repair expense(s) (including Service Contract deductibles), a description of the repair, and the person or entity performing the repair. If the work was done by someone other than a GM dealership or Saturn retail facility, the amount of reimbursement will be limited to the amount that the repair would have cost GM to have it completed by a GM dealership or Saturn retail facility. Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers/retailers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. GM dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Saturn retailers should refer to applicable Home Office letter on this subject. Daytime Running Lamp Inspection Procedure Perform the following procedure in daylight hours and with the vehicle parked outside. 1. Turn the headlamp switch to the "ON" position. Ensure that you do not have your bright lights (High Beams) on. 2. Standing in front of the vehicle, check the headlamps to ensure that both the left and right bulbs are working. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 16559 3. If either bulb is not working, replace it before proceeding to Step 4. 4. Enter the vehicle and turn the headlamp switch to the AUTO position. 5. Place your foot on the brake pedal and release the parking/emergency brake (if it is on). 6. Start your vehicle, and with your foot still on the brake, shift your vehicle out of "PARK" while monitoring the upper left corner of the instrument cluster for the green DRL indicator lamp. 7. If the DRL lamp comes on and stays on, your DRLs are working normally and no further action is required. 8. If the DRL lamp flashes rapidly and then turns off, your DRL lamps are not working. Make an appointment with your dealer/retailer. If the resistor is cracked or corroded, your dealer/retailer will replace it at no cost to you. Diagnosis or repair for conditions other than a cracked resistor are not covered under this program. Important: You may continue to drive your vehicle without DRLs; however, we suggest that you turn your headlamps to the ON position while driving until you have had the DRL resistor replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 16560 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 07-08-42-002A > Apr > 08 > Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-08-42-002A Date: April 03, 2008 Subject: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) May Not Work or DRL Indicator on IP Cluster Flashes and Then Goes Out, DTC B2600 (Inspect DRL Resistor and Replace, If Necessary) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox (U.S. Only) 2006 Pontiac Torrent (U.S Only) 2002-2007 Saturn VUE (U.S Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models affected, change the procedure and Parts Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-42-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important: This bulletin applies to vehicles sold and registered in the U.S. ONLY. Vehicles sold and registered in Canada should refer to Special Coverage Bulletin 08050. Condition Some customers may comment that the daytime running lamps (DRL) may not work or that the DRL indicator on the IP cluster flashes and then goes out. A technician may find DTC B2600 (Daytime Running Lamp Control Circuit) set. Cause The DRL resistor may be cracked. Correction Inspect the DRL resistor using the steps below. 1. Verify that the daytime running lamps are not illuminated by following the steps below: 1. Park the vehicle outside or hold a shop trouble light over the ambient light sensor for 30 seconds. 2. Position the headlamp switch to the "Auto" position. 3. Make sure the parking brake is not applied or set. 4. Depress the brake pedal. 5. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position. 6. Shift the transmission out of "Park" position or place the vehicle into gear if equipped with a manual transmission. 7. Visually watch the green DRL telltale lamp on the IP cluster and note the operation of the DRL lamps. ^ If the DRL telltale lamp stays on and both DRL lamps are on, then the DRLs are functioning properly. No further action is required. ^ If the DRL telltale flashes rapidly, goes out and one DRL lamp flashes rapidly a DRL bulb may be burned out. Inspect the DRL bulb and replace if necessary. ^ If the DRL telltale flashes rapidly, goes out and no DRL lamps come on then proceed to the next step. 8. Check for DTCs and verify DTC B2600-Daytime Running Lamp Control Circuit is present. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 07-08-42-002A > Apr > 08 > Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 > Page 16566 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2007 Saturn Model shown. Tip The DRL resistor (1) is located on the left front bumper support and may require cleaning before inspection. 3. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, loosen the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia to gain access to the DRL resistor. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models do not require the removal of the left front wheel or inner wheel liner to gain access to the DRL resistor (1). Proceed to Step 4. 4. Use a mirror and light to visually inspect the daytime running lamps resistor for cracks or corrosion. 1. If the resistor is cracked or corroded, remove the resistor. Refer to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Resistor Replacement in SI. Proceed to Step 5. 2. If the resistor appears to be in good condition, follow normal SI diagnostics. ^ If DTC B2600 is set, refer to DTC B2600 in SI. ^ If no codes were set, refer to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Inoperative in SI. 5. Install the new DRL resistor assembly to the left front bumper support with the washer (1) between the resistor and bumper support. 6. Tighten the new DRL resistor bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 6 N.m (53 lb in). DO NOT EXCEED 6 N.m (53 lb in). 7. Connect the DRL electrical connector to the DRL resistor. 8. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, install the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models did not require the inner wheel liner to be removed. Proceed to Step 9. 9. Lower the vehicle and unhoist. 10. Clear any DTCs and verify the operation of the daytime running lamps. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 07-08-42-002A > Apr > 08 > Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 > Page 16567 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) Technical Service Bulletin # 08050 Date: 080331 Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) # 08050: Special Coverage - Daytime Running Lamps May Become Inoperative (Canada Only) (Mar 31, 2008) Subject: 08050 -- DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS MAY BECOME INOPERATIVE Models: 2005-2006 CHEVROLET EQUINOX 2006 PONTIAC TORRENT 2002-2007 SATURN VUE CANADIAN VEHICLES Condition On some 2005-2006 model year Chevrolet Equinox, 2006 model year Pontiac Torrent, and 2002-2007 model year Saturn VUE vehicles, the daytime running lamp (DRL) resistor may crack. If water and road salt enters the crack, it could corrode the resistor. A corroded resistor could result in a loss of DRL illumination, and therefore, vehicles may be less visible to other motorists and pedestrians during daylight hours. Correction This bulletin covers the condition described above for a period of 7 years or 112,000 km, whichever occurs first, from the date the vehicle was originally placed in service, regardless of ownership. Dealers/retailers are to verify the condition and install a new resistor, if necessary. The repairs will be made at no charge to the customer. For vehicles covered by Vehicle Service Contracts, all eligible claims with repair orders on or after March 31, 2008 are covered by this special coverage and must be submitted using the labor operation codes provided with this bulletin. Claims with repair orders prior to March 31, 2008 must be submitted to the Service Contract provider. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2005-2006 model year Chevrolet Equinox, 2006 model year Pontiac Torrent, and 2002-2007 model year Saturn VUE vehicles built within the VIN breakpoints shown. Parts Information Parts required to complete this program are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this program on their vehicles (see copy of typical customer letter shown in this bulletin - actual divisional letter may vary slightly). Service Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 16573 1. Verify that the DRLs are not working. If they are not, raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. Important: The DRL resistor (1) is located on the left front bumper support and may require cleaning before inspection. 2. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, loosen the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia to gain access to the DRL resistor. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models do not require the removal of the left front wheel or inner wheel liner to gain access to the DRL resistor (1). 3. Use a mirror and light to visually inspect the daytime running lamp resistor for cracks or corrosion. ^ If the resistor is cracked or corroded, the resistor requires replacement. Remove the resistor. Refer to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Resistor Replacement in SI. Proceed to Step 4. ^ If the resistor appears to be in good condition, the vehicle does not have this condition. Follow normal SI diagnostics. Diagnosis and repairs for any other conditions are not covered under this program. 4. Install the new DRL resistor assembly to the left front bumper support with the washer (1) between the resistor and bumper support. 5. Tighten the new DRL resistor bolt. Tighten Tighten the DRL resistor bolt to 6 Nm (53 lb in). DO NOT EXCEED 6 Nm (53 lb in). 6. Connect the DRL electrical connector to the DRL resistor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 16574 7. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, install the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models did not require the inner wheel liner to be removed. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Clear any DTCs and verify the operation of the daytime running lamps. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under the terms of this program, submit a claim with the information shown. Customer Reimbursement Customer requests for reimbursement of previously paid repairs to correct a corroded DRL resistor are to be submitted to the dealer/retailer prior to or by March 31, 2009. Repairs must have occurred within the 7 years of the date the vehicle was originally placed in service, or 112,000 km, whichever occurs first. When a customer requests reimbursement, they must provide the following: ^ Proof of ownership at time of repair. ^ Original paid receipt confirming the amount of unreimbursed repair expense(s) (including Service Contract deductibles), a description of the repair, and the person or entity performing the repair. If the work was done by someone other than a GM dealership or Saturn retail facility, the amount of reimbursement will be limited to the amount that the repair would have cost GM to have it completed by a GM dealership or Saturn retail facility. Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers/retailers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. GM dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Saturn retailers should refer to applicable Home Office letter on this subject. Daytime Running Lamp Inspection Procedure Perform the following procedure in daylight hours and with the vehicle parked outside. 1. Turn the headlamp switch to the "ON" position. Ensure that you do not have your bright lights (High Beams) on. 2. Standing in front of the vehicle, check the headlamps to ensure that both the left and right bulbs are working. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 16575 3. If either bulb is not working, replace it before proceeding to Step 4. 4. Enter the vehicle and turn the headlamp switch to the AUTO position. 5. Place your foot on the brake pedal and release the parking/emergency brake (if it is on). 6. Start your vehicle, and with your foot still on the brake, shift your vehicle out of "PARK" while monitoring the upper left corner of the instrument cluster for the green DRL indicator lamp. 7. If the DRL lamp comes on and stays on, your DRLs are working normally and no further action is required. 8. If the DRL lamp flashes rapidly and then turns off, your DRL lamps are not working. Make an appointment with your dealer/retailer. If the resistor is cracked or corroded, your dealer/retailer will replace it at no cost to you. Diagnosis or repair for conditions other than a cracked resistor are not covered under this program. Important: You may continue to drive your vehicle without DRLs; however, we suggest that you turn your headlamps to the ON position while driving until you have had the DRL resistor replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 16576 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 16577 Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) Resistor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16581 Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16582 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair INSTRUMENT PANEL (I/P) DIMMER SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left side air deflector from the instrument panel (I/P). 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the dimmer switch. 3. Remove the screw from the I/P dimmer switch. 4. Remove the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the dimmer switch to the left side air deflector panel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16583 Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Install the electrical connector to the dimmer switch. 3. Install the left side air deflector panel to the I/P. 4. Test the dimmer switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Dome Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair DOME LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cover from the dome lamp/cargo lamp. 2. Remove the bulb from the lamp. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install a new bulb to the lamp. 2. Install the cover to the lamp. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair FOG LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the push-in retainers (1) that hold the front flap of the front wheelhouse liner to the fascia. 2. Bend the front flap of the wheelhouse liner out of the way to gain access to the fog lamp. 3. Turn the fog lamp socket (1) counterclockwise in order to release the fog lamp socket from the fog lamp housing. 4. Remove the bulb from the socket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16592 1. Install the fog lamp bulb into the socket. 2. Install the fog lamp bulb socket (1) into the housing. 3. Position the front flap of the wheelhouse liner back into place. 4. Install the wheelhouse liner push-in retainers (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16596 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16597 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16598 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16602 Fog Lamp Switch (with RPO Code T96) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16603 Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair FOG LAMP SWITCH REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel from the center stack. 2. Remove the screw that retains the center air deflector assembly to the I/P trim bezel. Remove the air deflector assembly. 3. Use a flat-bladed tool to release the fasteners on the fog lamp switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16604 4. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the fog lamp switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Align the fog lamp switch with the center air deflector assembly and snap into place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16605 2. Install the center air deflector assembly to the I/P trim bezel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the fog lamp switch. 4. Install the I/P trim bezel. 5. Test the fog lamp switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Service and Repair Hazard Warning Flasher: Service and Repair HAZARD AND TURN SIGNAL FLASHER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) center trim bezel. 2. Remove the screws that retain the hazard and turn signal flasher switch to the I/P center stack. Remove the switch. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the hazard and turn signal flasher switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16610 1. Align the switch with the trim bezel and fasten in place. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Connect the electrical connector to the hazard and turn signal flasher switch. 3. Install the I/P center trim bezel. 4. Test the flasher switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16614 Hazard Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY OR HEADLAMP BULB AND/OR CORNERING, SIDEMARKER, PARK, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 3. Gently pull the top of the fascia assembly several inches away from the vehicle to release the radiator grille strap from the headlamp. 4. Place a piece of tape over the radiator grille strap to headlamp retaining clip to prevent scratching of the headlamp lens. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16619 5. Remove the headlamp bolts (1, 2). 6. Pull gently on the bottom outboard corner of the headlamp to disengage the lower rear headlamp retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16620 7. Remove the bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5) from the backside of the headlamp. 8. Remove the headlamp from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the headlamp into the headlamp opening. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16621 2. Install the headlamp bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5). 3. Push the headlamp back into position until the lower rear retainer is fully engaged. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16622 4. Install the headlamp bolts (1, 2) NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the headlamp bolts to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 5. Remove the tape from the radiator grille strap retainer. 6. Position the fascia assembly and engage the radiator grille strap retainer into the headlamp. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16623 7. Install the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 8. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Lens > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Headlamp Polycarbonate Lens Damage Prevention Headlamp Lens: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Headlamp Polycarbonate Lens Damage Prevention INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-42-001D Date: June 21, 2010 Subject: Headlamp Lens Overheating When Covered and Chemical Damage to Exterior Polycarbonate Headlamp Lenses Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and to revise the warning statements. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-42-001C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The bulletin is being issued to make dealers and customers aware of chemical damage that may be caused to exterior polycarbonate headlamp lenses. Most late model vehicles have these types of headlamp lenses. This material is used because of its temperature and high impact resistance. A variety of chemicals can cause crazing or cracking of the headlamp lens. Headlamp lenses are very sensitive. Care should be exercised to avoid contact with all exterior headlamp lenses when treating a vehicle with any type of chemical, such as those recommended for rail dust removal. Rubbing compound, grease tar and oil removers, tire cleaners, cleaner waxes and even car wash soaps in too high a concentration may also attribute to this condition. This could result in the need to replace the entire headlamp housing. Warning Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Also, crazing or deformations of the lens may occur if a shop mat or fender cover is draped over the fender and covers a portion or all of the headlamp assembly while the DRL or headlamps are on. This action restricts the amount of heat dissipated by the headlamps. Warning Care should be taken to not cover headlamps with shop mats or fender covers if the vehicle is being serviced with the headlamps or DRL illuminated. Covering an illuminated lamp can cause excessive heat build up and crazing/deformation of the lens may occur. The degradation of the lens can be unnoticeable at first and eventually become hairline cracks in the lens. In extreme cases, it could cause the lens to deform. This damage can also be caused by aftermarket shields that are often tinted in color. Once a heat buildup is generated by the headlamp, a degradation of the headlamp lens begins. This degradation of the lens can be unnoticeable at first and eventually manifest as spider cracks. In more extreme cases, it will begin to melt the lens of the headlamp. Notice Headlamps damaged by chemicals, improper cleaning, or overheating due to being covered are not covered under the new vehicle warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16631 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16632 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16636 Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Horn Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16641 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16642 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16643 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > License Plate Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair License Plate Bulb: Service and Repair LICENSE LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the screws (2) attaching the rear license plate lamp assembly to the rear license plate lamp bezel. 2. Lower the license plate lamp assembly (1) from the bezel. 3. Rotate the license plate lamp bulb assembly counterclockwise and remove it from the housing. 4. Pull the license plate lamp bulb out of the bulb socket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Press the license plate lamp bulb into the lamp socket until seated. 2. Install the license plate lamp bulb socket assembly (1) in the license plate lamp lens and rotate clockwise until seated. 3. Align license plate lamp assembly with the license plate lamp bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > License Plate Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16651 4. Install the license plate lamp assembly to license plate lamp bezel screws (2). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws (2) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Map Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Map Light Bulb: Service and Repair READING LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Insert a small flat-bladed tool at the front of the reading lamp. Disengage the reading lamp. 2. Pull the reading lamp down. 3. Remove the bulb. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Map Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16656 1. Install the reading lamp bulb. 2. Install the reading lamp cover, begining with the back of the cover. 3. Push the front of the lamp cover up until seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY OR HEADLAMP BULB AND/OR CORNERING, SIDEMARKER, PARK, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 3. Gently pull the top of the fascia assembly several inches away from the vehicle to release the radiator grille strap from the headlamp. 4. Place a piece of tape over the radiator grille strap to headlamp retaining clip to prevent scratching of the headlamp lens. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 16662 5. Remove the headlamp bolts (1, 2). 6. Pull gently on the bottom outboard corner of the headlamp to disengage the lower rear headlamp retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 16663 7. Remove the bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5) from the backside of the headlamp. 8. Remove the headlamp from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the headlamp into the headlamp opening. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 16664 2. Install the headlamp bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5). 3. Push the headlamp back into position until the lower rear retainer is fully engaged. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 16665 4. Install the headlamp bolts (1, 2) NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the headlamp bolts to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 5. Remove the tape from the radiator grille strap retainer. 6. Position the fascia assembly and engage the radiator grille strap retainer into the headlamp. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 16666 7. Install the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 8. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 16667 Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Tail Lamp Assembly and /or Backup, Sidemarker, Stop, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement TAIL LAMP ASSEMBLY AND /OR BACKUP, SIDEMARKER, STOP, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the tail lamp bolt covers. 2. Remove the tail lamp bolts (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 16668 3. Pull outward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to disengage the retainers from the body side. 4. Remove the bulbs from the tail lamp assembly. 5. Remove the tail lamp assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 2. Install the bulbs into the tail lamp assembly. 3. Push inward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to engage the retainers into the body side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 16669 4. Install the tail lamp bolts (3). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the tail lamp bolts to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the tail lamp bolt covers (4). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Parking Lamp Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16674 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16675 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Light Bulb: Service and Repair HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY OR HEADLAMP BULB AND/OR CORNERING, SIDEMARKER, PARK, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 3. Gently pull the top of the fascia assembly several inches away from the vehicle to release the radiator grille strap from the headlamp. 4. Place a piece of tape over the radiator grille strap to headlamp retaining clip to prevent scratching of the headlamp lens. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16679 5. Remove the headlamp bolts (1, 2). 6. Pull gently on the bottom outboard corner of the headlamp to disengage the lower rear headlamp retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16680 7. Remove the bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5) from the backside of the headlamp. 8. Remove the headlamp from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the headlamp into the headlamp opening. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16681 2. Install the headlamp bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5). 3. Push the headlamp back into position until the lower rear retainer is fully engaged. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16682 4. Install the headlamp bolts (1, 2) NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the headlamp bolts to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 5. Remove the tape from the radiator grille strap retainer. 6. Position the fascia assembly and engage the radiator grille strap retainer into the headlamp. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16683 7. Install the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 8. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Backup Lamp Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16688 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16689 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16690 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16694 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16695 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16696 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16700 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16701 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16702 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16706 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16707 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Horn Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16711 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16712 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16713 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Parking Lamp Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16717 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16718 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations Behind The Center Of The I/P - Turn Signal Relay Location Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16722 Turn Signal Relay Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 16727 Ambient Light Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 16728 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the access panel covers from the upper trim pad. 2. Remove the I/P cluster trim panel. 3. Remove the windshield garnish moldings. 4. Remove the upper trim pad bolts. 5. Lift the upper trim pad to disengage the clips. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 16729 6. Twist the ambient light sensor to remove the sensor from the upper trim pad. 7. Disconnect the electrical connector from the ambient light sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the ambient light sensor. 2. Align the sensor to the upper trim pad and twist into place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 16730 3. Align the upper trim pad to the I/P and fasten the bolts in place. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Install the windshield garnish moldings. 5. Install the I/P cluster trim panel. 6. Install the access panel covers to the upper trim pad. 7. Test the ambient light sensor for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Switches Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Stop Lamp Switch - Lower Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Stop Lamp Switch - Lower Stop Lamp Switch - Lower Stop Lamp Switch - Lower Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Stop Lamp Switch - Lower > Page 16736 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Stop Lamp Switch - Upper Stop Lamp Switch - Upper Stop Lamp Switch - Upper Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16737 Brake Light Switch: Adjustments STOP LAMP SWITCH ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 1. Improper stoplamp switch adjustment may cause brake drag, heat buildup and excessive brake lining wear. NOTE: Proper stoplamp switch adjustment is essential. Disconnect the electrical connector from the stop lamp switch. 2. Rotate the switch counterclockwise and remove the switch from the switch retainer. 3. Install the switch to the bracket by turning and pushing the switch until the switch bottoms on the brake pedal. IMPORTANT: Do NOT depress the brake pedal assembly during the stop lamp switch installation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16738 This will cause a drag condition on the brake. 4. Connect the electrical connector to the stop lamp switch. 5. Inspect the stop lamps for proper operation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16739 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair STOP LAMP SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the stop lamp switch. 2. Rotate the stop lamp switch counterclockwise and remove the switch from the switch retainer. 3. Gently compress the locking tabs on the switch retainer and remove the switch retainer from the brake pedal assembly. IMPORTANT: Depressing the brake pedal will allow easier access to the locking tabs on the stop lamp retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16740 1. Connect the electrical connectors on the stop lamp switch. NOTE: Proper stoplamp switch adjustment is essential. Improper stoplamp switch adjustment may cause brake drag, heat buildup and excessive brake lining wear. IMPORTANT: Do NOT depress the brake pedal assembly during the stop lamp switch installation. This will cause a drag condition on the brake. - Inspect the retainer to insure that the locking tabs have locked into position and the retainer is in place. 2. Install the switch to the bracket by turning and pushing the switch until the switch bottoms on the brake pedal. 3. Inspect the stop lamps for proper operation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16744 Fog Lamp Switch (with RPO Code T96) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16745 Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair FOG LAMP SWITCH REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel from the center stack. 2. Remove the screw that retains the center air deflector assembly to the I/P trim bezel. Remove the air deflector assembly. 3. Use a flat-bladed tool to release the fasteners on the fog lamp switch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16746 4. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the fog lamp switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Align the fog lamp switch with the center air deflector assembly and snap into place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16747 2. Install the center air deflector assembly to the I/P trim bezel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the fog lamp switch. 4. Install the I/P trim bezel. 5. Test the fog lamp switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16751 Hazard Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 16755 Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Multifunction Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Multifunction Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement Multifunction Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disable the SIR system. 3. Remove the steering wheel. 4. Remove the SIR coil. 5. Remove the steering column trim covers. 6. Depress the lock tabs on the left and right multifunction levers. Remove the multifunction levers. 7. Disconnect the housing electrical connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Multifunction Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement > Page 16763 8. Remove the lock housing bolts. 9. Separate the ignition housing from the multifunction lever bracket. Slide the bracket from the column. Installation Procedure 1. Pre-assemble the lock housing and multifunction lever bracket. Hand-tighten the bolts, leaving approximately 3.2 mm (0.125 inch) gap at the bolt ends. 2. Important: Ensure that the lock tab fully engages into the column slot. Slide the bracket onto the column. 3. Hand-tighten the lower bolt until snug. 4. Hand-tighten the upper bolt until snug. 5. Notice: Tighten the lower bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.) 6. Tighten the upper bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Multifunction Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement > Page 16764 7. Connect the ignition housing electrical connectors. 8. Important: Ensure that both locking tabs are seated. Install the multifunction levers. 9. Install the upper and lower shrouds. 10. Install the SIR coil. 11. Install the steering wheel. 12. Enable the SIR system. 13. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Multifunction Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement > Page 16765 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Multifunction, Turn Signal Switch Replacement Multifunction, Turn Signal Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the steering column trim covers. 2. Disconnect the multifunction turn signal switch harness connectors. 3. Depress the lock tabs on the left and right multifunction levers. 4. Remove the multifunction levers. Installation Procedure 1. Install the multifunction turn signal switch to the steering column. 2. Important: Ensure both locking tabs are seated. Connect the multifunction turn signal switch harness connectors. 3. Install the steering column trim covers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Tail Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-08-42-001H Date: January 05, 2011 Subject: Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Guidelines Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-08-42-001G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The following information is being provided to better define the causes of condensation in exterior lamps and includes guidelines for determining the difference between a lamp with a normal atmospheric condition (condensation) and a lamp with a water leak. Some exterior lamps, such as cornering, turn signal, backup, headlamps or tail lamps may exhibit very small droplets of water, a fine mist or white fog (condensation) on the inside of the lamp lens. This may be more noticeable on lamps with "multi-lens" designs and may be normal during certain weather conditions. Condensation occurs when the air inside the lamp assembly, through atmospheric changes, reaches the "dew point". When this takes place, the moisture in the air within the lamp assembly condenses, creating a fine mist or white fog on the inside surface of the lamp lens. Most exterior lamps on General Motors vehicles use a vented design and feature a replaceable bulb assembly. They are designed to remove any accumulated moisture vapor by expelling it through a vent system. The vent system operates at all times, however, it is most effective when the lamps are ON or when the vehicle is in motion. Depending on the size, shape and location of the lamp on the vehicle, and the atmospheric conditions occurring, the amount of time required to clear the lamp may vary from 2 to 6 hours. Completely sealed headlamp assemblies (sealed beams) are still used on a limited number of models being manufactured today. These lamps require the replacement of the complete lamp assembly if a bulb filament burns out. Condensation 2006 TrailBlazer Shown A Fine Mist or White Fog on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens Occurring After a Period of High Humidity - May be located primarily in the lens corners (near the vents) and SHOULD NOT cover more than half the lens surface. - The condition should clear of moisture when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a SIMILAR performance. If the above conditions are noted, the customer should be advised that replacement of a lamp assembly may not correct this condition. Water Leak New Style Pickup Shown Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement > Page 16770 Numerous & Various Size Drops of Water Collecting on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens After the Vehicle Has Been Exposed to Rain or a Car Washing Environment - A condition that covers more than half the surface of the lamp lens. - An accumulation of water in the bottom of the lamp assembly. - A condition that WON'T clear when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a different performance. Any of the above conditions would indicate the need to service the lens or lamp assembly. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Tail Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16773 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16774 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16775 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16776 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16777 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16778 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16779 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16780 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16781 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16782 Tail Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16783 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16784 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16785 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16786 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16787 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16788 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16789 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16790 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16791 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16792 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16793 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16794 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16795 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16796 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16797 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16798 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16799 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16800 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16801 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16802 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16803 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16804 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16805 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16806 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16807 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16808 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16809 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16810 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16811 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16812 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16813 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16814 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16815 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16816 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16817 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16818 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16819 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16820 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16821 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16822 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16823 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16824 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16825 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16826 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16827 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16828 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16829 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16830 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16831 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16832 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16833 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16834 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16835 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16836 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16837 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16838 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16839 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16840 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16841 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16842 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16843 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16844 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16845 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16846 Tail Lamp: Description and Operation PARK, TAIL AND MARKER LAMPS The park lamps consist of the park, tail, marker and license lamps. These lamps are illuminated any time the headlamp switch is in the PARK, ON position, or anytime the body control module (BCM) illuminates the headlamps. The PARK fuse in the fuse block - instrument panel (I/P) supplies voltage to both the coil and switch input side of the park lamp relay. The BCM controls the park lamp relay by grounding the park lamp control circuit energizing the relay. For automatic lamp control (ALC) the BCM receives a signal from the ambient light sensor indicating a low or high ambient (outside) light level. Under low light conditions the BCM grounds the park lamp relay control circuit energizing the park lamp relay. The now closed relay supplies voltage on the park lamp supply voltage circuit directly to the lamps. The BCM always turns ON the park lamps and headlamps together when in the ALC mode. For manual operation, when the headlamp switch is in the PARK position, the headlamp switch supplies ground to the BCM on the park lamp switch signal circuit. In response, the BCM grounds only the park lamp relay control circuit, and the lamps illuminate as stated above. The conditions necessary for the BCM to activate the ACL mode are as follows: The ignition switch is in the RUN position. - The headlamps are in the OFF position. - The park brake is released. If the park brake is applied after the ignition key is placed in the RUN position the ALC is not effected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16847 Tail Lamp: Service and Repair TAIL LAMP ASSEMBLY AND /OR BACKUP, SIDEMARKER, STOP, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the tail lamp bolt covers. 2. Remove the tail lamp bolts (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16848 3. Pull outward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to disengage the retainers from the body side. 4. Remove the bulbs from the tail lamp assembly. 5. Remove the tail lamp assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 2. Install the bulbs into the tail lamp assembly. 3. Push inward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to engage the retainers into the body side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16849 4. Install the tail lamp bolts (3). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the tail lamp bolts to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the tail lamp bolt covers (4). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Flasher: Service and Repair HAZARD AND TURN SIGNAL FLASHER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) center trim bezel. 2. Remove the screws that retain the hazard and turn signal flasher switch to the I/P center stack. Remove the switch. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the hazard and turn signal flasher switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 16854 1. Align the switch with the trim bezel and fasten in place. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Connect the electrical connector to the hazard and turn signal flasher switch. 3. Install the I/P center trim bezel. 4. Test the flasher switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY OR HEADLAMP BULB AND/OR CORNERING, SIDEMARKER, PARK, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 3. Gently pull the top of the fascia assembly several inches away from the vehicle to release the radiator grille strap from the headlamp. 4. Place a piece of tape over the radiator grille strap to headlamp retaining clip to prevent scratching of the headlamp lens. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 16860 5. Remove the headlamp bolts (1, 2). 6. Pull gently on the bottom outboard corner of the headlamp to disengage the lower rear headlamp retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 16861 7. Remove the bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5) from the backside of the headlamp. 8. Remove the headlamp from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the headlamp into the headlamp opening. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 16862 2. Install the headlamp bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5). 3. Push the headlamp back into position until the lower rear retainer is fully engaged. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 16863 4. Install the headlamp bolts (1, 2) NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the headlamp bolts to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 5. Remove the tape from the radiator grille strap retainer. 6. Position the fascia assembly and engage the radiator grille strap retainer into the headlamp. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 16864 7. Install the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 8. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 16865 Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Tail Lamp Assembly and /or Backup, Sidemarker, Stop, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement TAIL LAMP ASSEMBLY AND /OR BACKUP, SIDEMARKER, STOP, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the tail lamp bolt covers. 2. Remove the tail lamp bolts (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 16866 3. Pull outward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to disengage the retainers from the body side. 4. Remove the bulbs from the tail lamp assembly. 5. Remove the tail lamp assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 2. Install the bulbs into the tail lamp assembly. 3. Push inward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to engage the retainers into the body side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 16867 4. Install the tail lamp bolts (3). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the tail lamp bolts to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the tail lamp bolt covers (4). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations Behind The Center Of The I/P - Turn Signal Relay Location Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16871 Turn Signal Relay Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Multifunction Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Multifunction Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement Multifunction Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disable the SIR system. 3. Remove the steering wheel. 4. Remove the SIR coil. 5. Remove the steering column trim covers. 6. Depress the lock tabs on the left and right multifunction levers. Remove the multifunction levers. 7. Disconnect the housing electrical connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Multifunction Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement > Page 16876 8. Remove the lock housing bolts. 9. Separate the ignition housing from the multifunction lever bracket. Slide the bracket from the column. Installation Procedure 1. Pre-assemble the lock housing and multifunction lever bracket. Hand-tighten the bolts, leaving approximately 3.2 mm (0.125 inch) gap at the bolt ends. 2. Important: Ensure that the lock tab fully engages into the column slot. Slide the bracket onto the column. 3. Hand-tighten the lower bolt until snug. 4. Hand-tighten the upper bolt until snug. 5. Notice: Tighten the lower bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.) 6. Tighten the upper bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Multifunction Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement > Page 16877 7. Connect the ignition housing electrical connectors. 8. Important: Ensure that both locking tabs are seated. Install the multifunction levers. 9. Install the upper and lower shrouds. 10. Install the SIR coil. 11. Install the steering wheel. 12. Enable the SIR system. 13. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Multifunction Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement > Page 16878 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Multifunction, Turn Signal Switch Replacement Multifunction, Turn Signal Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the steering column trim covers. 2. Disconnect the multifunction turn signal switch harness connectors. 3. Depress the lock tabs on the left and right multifunction levers. 4. Remove the multifunction levers. Installation Procedure 1. Install the multifunction turn signal switch to the steering column. 2. Important: Ensure both locking tabs are seated. Connect the multifunction turn signal switch harness connectors. 3. Install the steering column trim covers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Vanity Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16883 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16884 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16885 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16886 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16887 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16888 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16889 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16890 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16891 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16892 Vanity Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16893 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16894 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16895 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16896 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16897 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16898 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16899 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16900 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16901 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16902 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16903 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16904 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16905 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16906 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16907 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16908 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16909 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16910 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16911 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16912 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16913 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16914 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16915 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16916 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16917 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16918 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16919 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16920 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16921 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16922 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16923 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16924 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16925 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16926 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16927 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16928 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16929 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16930 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16931 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16932 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16933 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16934 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16935 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16936 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16937 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16938 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16939 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16940 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16941 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16942 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16943 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16944 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16945 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16946 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16947 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16948 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16949 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16950 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16951 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16952 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16953 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16954 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16955 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16961 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16962 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16963 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Broken Rear Window Defogger Grid Detection Rear Defogger: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Broken Rear Window Defogger Grid Detection Bulletin No.: 04-08-48-001B Date: June 28, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Rear Window Defogger - Broken Heating Grid Detection Method Models: 2006 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2006 model year and additional models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-48-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The addition of vertical grid lines to the heated back window defogger circuits has made it difficult to detect broken defogger grid lines. In the past, it was a simple matter to use a voltmeter to check the continuity of each grid line in order to locate a non-functional line. Some new design back windows have two vertical grid lines that connect all of the horizontal grid lines together, thereby providing alternate routes for the electrical current to follow. This makes the old test method ineffective. If the vehicle does not have the vertical lines, the old (line-by-line) test methods can be used. Materials Required ^ Permatex(R) Quick Grid, GM P/N 12346001, or equivalent ^ A small ball of fine steel wool Type 00, or ^ Optional - A strip of liquid crystal heat sensitive paper, 51 mm x 305 mm (2 in x 12 in) or similar size (Contact Edmund Scientific at 800-728-6999 for part number CR30723-70 or go to www.scientificsonline.com), or ^ Optional-A portable infrared thermometer, GE-46819, available from Kent-Moore (1-800-345-2233), or equivalent. Correction There are three distinct zones across the back window that must be checked. They are: ^ the driver's side outboard of the two vertical lines ^ the passenger side outboard of the two vertical lines ^ the central zone that falls between the two vertical lines To detect a broken grid line in any of the above three zones and to isolate the exact location of the break, perform the following steps: Caution: ^ Approved safety glasses and gloves should be worn when performing this procedure to reduce the chance of personal injury. ^ Cover the rear shelf area to prevent damage to the interior trim material. 1. Start the engine and turn on the back window defogger. 2. Take the ball of fine steel wool and twist one end to a point. Move the point slowly across each grid line. Be sure to start at the far side of the zone and move it to the opposite side of the zone. When you bridge the grid line break with the steel wool, you will see a small spark. Repeat the test over the same area to be sure you have accurately located the break. Mark the exact location of the grid line break. Repeat this portion of the test for each grid line. If you do not see a spark at any point, it is possible that there are two breaks in the same line and zone. Close visual inspection using a magnifying glass may be the only way to locate breaks in this case. 3. The following are provided as an alternative way to detect a non-functional grid line. If available, use in addition to the steel wool. 3.1. Method using liquid crystal heat sensitive paper: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Broken Rear Window Defogger Grid Detection > Page 16968 Important: The first part of the test must be completed quickly before the entire surface of the back window becomes warm. 3.1.1. From outside the vehicle, place the heat sensitive paper (dull surface in contact with the glass) against the top driver side grid line. Start the engine and turn on the back window defogger. A distinct color change will take place at each conductive grid line. Repeat for the bottom grid lines until they have all been checked in the driver side zone. 3.1.2. Repeat the process for the passenger side and center area zones. 3.1.3. If no color change is noted for a grid line, place a crayon or china marker check mark beside it. Mark each grid line in the zone where it is non-conductive and, therefore, not heating up. More than one broken grid line may be found. 3.2. Method using portable infrared thermometer: 3.2.1. Start the engine and turn on the rear back window defogger. 3.2.2. From inside the vehicle, start at the top driver side grid line and slowly run the portable infrared thermometer vertically down the rear window contacting each grid line. You should be able to see a district variation in temperature readings. 3.2.3. Mark each grid line in the zone where it is non-conductive and, therefore, not heating up. More than one broken grid line may be found. 3.2.4. Repeat the process for the passenger side and center area zones. 4. Use Permatex(R) Quick Grid, GM P/N 12346001, or equivalent, to repair each broken grid line. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. 5. Wait 24 hours before turning the defogger on, or the repair can be fast cured using a heat gun, 260°C - 371°C (500°F - 700°F). Hold the heat gun within 25 - 51 mm (1-2 in) from the repair point for 2 to 3 minutes. 6. Recheck the grid line with the heat sensitive paper or portable infrared thermometer to ensure that the line is now functional and that the repair was successful. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16973 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16974 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16975 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations Power Window Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16979 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16980 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16981 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Power Window Switch: Diagrams Power Window Switch - Main Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16986 Window Switch - LR Window Switch - RR Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Power Window Switch Replacement POWER WINDOW SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the console shift lever bezel. 2. Remove the screws from the power window switch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 16989 3. Remove the switch assembly from the bezel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the switch assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the screws to the switch assembly. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 16990 3. Install the console shift lever bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 16991 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Power Window Switch Replacement - Rear Door POWER WINDOW SWITCH REPLACEMENT - REAR DOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool to pry the switch from the door handle assembly. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the switch.. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 16992 2. Position the switch on the door handle assembly. Push in the switch to seat. 3. Install the door trim panel assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams Front Door Window Motor: Diagrams Window Motor - Driver Window Motor - Front Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16998 Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair Window Regulator Motor Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the water deflector. Refer to Water Deflector Replacement - Front Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the front door window regulator motor. 4. Remove the window from the regulator. 1. Raise the window. 2. Tape the window into position. 5. Remove the front door window regulator motor screws. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 16999 1. Align the front door window regulator motor assembly to the front door window regulator. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the front door window regulator motor to regulator screws. Tighten the front door window regulator motor to door screws to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the front door window regulator motor. 4. Install the water deflector. Refer to Water Deflector Replacement - Front Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 5. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams Rear Door Window Motor: Diagrams Window Motor - LR Window Motor - RR Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 17003 Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair Window Regulator Motor Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the water deflector. Refer to Water Deflector Replacement - Rear Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the rear door window regulator motor. 4. Remove the rear door window regulator motor to regulator screws. 5. Remove the rear door window regulator motor assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 17004 1. Align the rear door window regulator motor assembly to the rear door window regulator. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the rear door window regulator motor to regulator screws. Tighten the rear door window regulator motor to regulator screws to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the rear door window regulator motor. 4. Install the water deflector. Refer to Water Deflector Replacement - Rear Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 5. Install the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations Power Window Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 17008 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 17009 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 17010 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Power Window Switch: Diagrams Power Window Switch - Main Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 17014 Window Switch - LR Window Switch - RR Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Power Window Switch Replacement POWER WINDOW SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the console shift lever bezel. 2. Remove the screws from the power window switch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 17017 3. Remove the switch assembly from the bezel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the switch assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the screws to the switch assembly. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 17018 3. Install the console shift lever bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 17019 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Power Window Switch Replacement - Rear Door POWER WINDOW SWITCH REPLACEMENT - REAR DOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool to pry the switch from the door handle assembly. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the switch.. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 17020 2. Position the switch on the door handle assembly. Push in the switch to seat. 3. Install the door trim panel assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information Back Window Glass: Customer Interest A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H Date: April 11, 2011 Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab Models: 2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear Window Defroster - RPO C49 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Repair Suggestions Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass), always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector (P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab. In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the following before attempting the repair: - Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the solder. - If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass. Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair! - You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar, making a strong and lasting repair. - Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection. Soldering Procedure 1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a new connector to the feed wire. The proper connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5. - Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal. - Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab. Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with moveable glass. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly seated connector may cause excessive resistance and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical connector tab to the defroster tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 17030 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 17031 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 17032 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H Date: April 11, 2011 Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab Models: 2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear Window Defroster - RPO C49 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Repair Suggestions Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass), always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector (P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab. In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the following before attempting the repair: - Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the solder. - If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass. Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair! - You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar, making a strong and lasting repair. - Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection. Soldering Procedure 1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a new connector to the feed wire. The proper connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5. - Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal. - Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab. Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with moveable glass. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly seated connector may cause excessive resistance and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical connector tab to the defroster tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 17038 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 17039 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 17040 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 00-08-48-005D > Sep > 10 > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 00-08-48-005D > Sep > 10 > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Corner Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Front Corner Window Glass: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Window Run Channel Replacement Front Door Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Front Door (See: Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the front door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer to Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front ( See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front) . 3. Remove the outside rearview mirror. Refer to Mirror Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Doors) . 4. Remove the front door frame applique. Refer to Door Frame Applique Replacement - Front () . 5. Remove the window run channel bolts. 6. Remove the front door window run channel. Starting from the rear corner of the door, remove the seal from the door header flange. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 17059 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Install the window run channel seal to the door header flange, starting from the rear corner. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 2. Install the front door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer to Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front ( See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front) . 3. Install the front door frame applique. Refer to Door Frame Applique Replacement - Front () . 4. Install the outside rearview mirror. Refer to Mirror Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Doors) . 5. Install the front door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Front Door (See: Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 17060 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Lower the front door window. 2. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner (See: Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner) . 4. Starting at one end, carefully pull the window weatherstrip run channel assembly from the door frame. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 17061 1. Install the window weatherstrip run channel assembly. 1. Starting at the lower rear corner of the window opening, press the weatherstrip run channel onto the door flange. 2. Ensure the channel is fully secured into the upper corners of the door frame. 2. Install the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner (See: Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner) . 3. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 17062 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Outer Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Outer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the belt seal retaining screw at the rear edge of the door. 2. Remove the outside rearview mirror. Refer to Mirror Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Doors) . 3. Remove the outer belt seal by lifting up on the seal starting at the rear and working forward. Installation Procedure 1. Align the outer belt seal fastener location with the hole in the door structure and outer panel retaining tabs. 2. Starting at the rear of the belt seal, push the belt seal down onto the flange until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 17063 3. Install the outside rearview mirror. Refer to Mirror Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Doors) . Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 4. Install the outer belt seal retaining screw. Tighten the screw to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 17064 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the inner belt seal from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Install the inner belt seal. 2. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement Side Front Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door > Page 17065 Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair Window Replacement - Liftgate Tools Required * J 24402-A Glass Sealant (Cold Knife) Remover * J 39032 Stationary Glass Removal Tool * Urethane Adhesive Kit GM P/N 12346392 or Equivalent * Isopropyl Alcohol or equivalent * Cartridge-Type Caulking Gun * Commercial-Type Utility Knife * Razor Blade Scraper * Suction Cups * Plastic Paddle Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Cracked Window Caution in Cautions and Notices. Important: Before cutting out a stationary window, apply a double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the liftgate trim. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Trunk / Liftgate/Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) in Body Rear End. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the liftgate window defogger bus bar. Caution: Refer to Defroster Outlet Caution in Cautions and Notices. 4. Cover the following parts to protect from broken glass: * Upper dash pad * Defroster outlets and A/C outlets * Seats and carpeting Caution: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Caution in Cautions and Notices. Important: Keep the cutting edge of the tool against the window. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 17069 5. Remove the liftgate window from the urethane adhesive. * Leave a base of urethane approximately 2 mm (0.078 in) on the pinch-weld flange. * The only suitable lubrication is clear water. * Use J 24402-A , J 39032 or equivalent in order to remove the window. 6. With the aid of an assistant, remove the window from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the liftgate window into the opening. Refer to Urethane Adhesive Installation of Stationary Windows (Windshield) (See: Service and Repair/Urethane Adhesive Installation of Stationary Windows (Windshield))Urethane Adhesive Installation of Stationary Windows (Liftgate) ( See: Service and Repair/Urethane Adhesive Installation of Stationary Windows (Liftgate)) . 2. Connect the liftgate window defogger electrical connectors to the bus bar. 3. Install the liftgate trim. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Trunk / Liftgate/Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) in Body Rear End. 4. Remove the double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 5. Close the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Quarter Window Glass: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 17074 Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair Quarter Window Replacement Tools Required * J 24402-A Glass Sealant (Cold Knife) Remover * J 39032 Stationary Glass Removal Tool * Urethane Adhesive Kit GM P/N 12346392 or Equivalent * Isopropyl Alcohol or equivalent * Cartridge-type Caulking Gun * Commercial-type Utility Knife * Razor Blade Scraper * Suction Cups * Plastic Paddle Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Cracked Window Caution in Cautions and Notices. Important: Before cutting out a quarter window, apply a double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the inside garnish molding. Caution: Refer to Defroster Outlet Caution in Cautions and Notices. 3. Cover the following parts to protect from broken glass: * Upper dash pad * Defroster outlets and A/C outlets * Seats and carpeting Caution: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Caution in Cautions and Notices. Important: When cutting out the quarter window use care not to damage the encapsulation around the perimeter of the quarter window. If the encapsulation is damaged, the window must be replaced. Important: Keep the cutting edge of the tool against the quarter window. Do this from inside the vehicle to protect the outer painted surface. 4. Remove the window from the urethane adhesive. * Leave a base of urethane approximately 2 mm (0.078 in) on the pinch-weld flange. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 17075 * The only suitable lubrication is clear water. * Use the J 24402-A , J 39032 , or equivalent in order to remove the quarter window. 5. With the aid of an assistant, remove the window (1) from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Important: The molded encapsulation surrounding the quarter window is made using PVC plastic materials. Use a specific PVC primer application prior to applying the urethane adhesive bead to the window. 1. Install the quarter window into the opening. Refer to Urethane Adhesive Installation of Encapsulated Stationary Windows (See: Service and Repair/Urethane Adhesive Installation of Encapsulated Stationary Windows) . 2. Install the inside garnish molding. 3. Remove the double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 4. Close the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Lower the rear door window. 2. Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner (See: Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner) . 4. Starting at one end, carefully pull the window weatherstrip run channel assembly from the door frame. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 17081 1. Align the notch in the window weatherstrip seal to the fixed window post and press the weatherstrip onto the window flange. 1. Press the weatherstrip run channel onto the door flange. 2. Ensure the channel is fully secured into the upper corners of the door frame. 2. Install the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner (See: Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner) . 3. Install the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 17082 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Window Run Channel Replacement Rear Door Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Rear Door (See: Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the rear door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer toWindow Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear ( See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear) . 3. Remove the rear door window run channel and fixed window assembly. 1. Starting from the front corner of the door, remove the seal from the door header flange. 2. Remove the seal assembly from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 17083 1. Install the window run channel seal assembly. 1. Place the seal assembly into the door frame. 2. Place the seal assembly on the door header. 3. Install the seal to the door header flange, starting from the front corner. 2. Install the rear door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer to Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear (See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear) . 3. Install the rear door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Rear Door (See: Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 17084 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Outer Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Outer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the belt seal retaining screw at the front edge of the door. 2. Remove the outer belt seal by lifting up on the seal starting at the rear and working forward. Installation Procedure 1. Align the outer belt seal fastener location with the hole in the door structure and outer panel retaining tabs. 2. Starting at the rear of the belt seal, push the belt seal down onto the flange until fully seated. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 17085 3. Install the outer belt seal retaining screw. Tighten the screw to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 17086 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the inner belt seal from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Install the inner belt seal. 2. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement Side Rear Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear > Page 17087 Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair Window Handle: Service and Repair Window Regulator Handle Replacement - Door Removal Procedure 1. Using a standard handle tool, disengage the retention spring from the window regulator handle. 2. Remove the handle and the bearing plate. Installation Procedure 1. Install the retention spring on the window regulator handle. 2. Install the bearing plate on the regulator spindle. 3. Install the handle to the regulator spindle at a position 60 degrees forward of the up position. The illustration shows the proper angle for both the right and the left side doors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door outside handle. Refer to Door Handle Replacement - Front Outside (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the front door window run channel assembly. Refer to Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door (See: Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door) . 3. Remove the front door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Front Door in Entertainment. 4. Disconnect the mirror electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the 4 electrical connector rosebuds (2 at the mirror and 2 under the speaker). 6. Loosen the 2 rear module bolts. 7. Remove the 4 remaining module bolts. 8. Remove the 3 latch bolts from the door shut face. 9. Disconnect the door harness at the door jamb. 10. Remove the window regulator module from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 17095 1. Install the window regulator module into the door. 2. Connect the door harness at the door jamb. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the 3 latch bolts to the door shut face. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Install the 4 module bolts. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 5. Connect the 4 electrical connector rosebuds (2 at the mirror and 2 under the speaker). 6. Connect the mirror electrical connector. 7. Install the front door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Front Door in Entertainment. 8. Install the front door window run channel assembly. Refer to Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door (See: Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door) . 9. Install the front door outside handle. Refer to Door Handle Replacement - Front Outside (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door outside handle. Refer to Door Handle Replacement - Rear Outside (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Handle/Rear Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the rear door window run channel assembly. Refer to Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door (See: Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door) . 3. Remove the rear door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Rear Door in Entertainment. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector rosebuds. 5. Loosen the 2 rear module bolts. 6. Remove the 4 remaining module bolts. 7. Remove the 3 latch bolts from the door shut face. 8. Disconnect the door harness at the door jamb. 9. Remove the window regulator module from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 17099 1. Install the window regulator module into the door. 2. Connect the door harness at the door jamb. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the 3 latch bolts to the door shut face. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Install the 4 module bolts. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 5. Connect the electrical connector rosebuds. 6. Install the rear door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Rear Door in Entertainment. 7. Install the rear door window run channel assembly. Refer to Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door (See: Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door) . 8. Install the rear door outside handle. Refer to Door Handle Replacement - Rear Outside (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Handle/Rear Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Applique Replacement - Windshield Frame Removal Procedure 1. Remove the screws from the windshield pillar applique. 2. Remove applique from the vehicle by carefully pulling from the front of the molding rearward to disengage the retainers. Installation Procedure 1. Position the windshield pillar applique to the vehicle and push in to secure the retainers. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the screws that secure the applique to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 17104 Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wiper Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 17110 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 17111 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 17112 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper/Washer System Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 17117 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper/Washer System Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 17121 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose Replacement - Windshield Washer Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair Hose Replacement - Windshield Washer HOSE REPLACEMENT - WINDSHIELD WASHER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air inlet grille. 2. Separate the front washer nozzle hose from the front washer solvent container hose that runs along the upper motor compartment rail. 3. Remove the front washer nozzle hose. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the front nozzle hose to the front washer solvent container hose that runs along the upper motor compartment rail. 2. Position the washer hoses into the vehicle. 3. Install the air inlet grille. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose Replacement - Windshield Washer > Page 17126 Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair Washer Hose Replacement - Rear WASHER HOSE REPLACEMENT - REAR REAR WASHER HOSE ROUTING The rear washer hose is a component of the main body wire harness assembly. The rear washer hose is a hard plastic convoluted tube that is wrapped in the electrical tape along with the main body wiring harness. It starts underhood where it connects to the rear washer solvent container hose, this is rubber tubing. The rear washer hose routes into the main body wire harness underhood and passes through the front of the dash. The rear washer hose runs inside the vehicle interior along the left side rocker and over the right side at the 2nd bar beneath the front seats. It proceeds over the right side wheel housing and up the right side pillar where it connects to the washer nozzle hose, at the top of the lift gate opening. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the damaged section of the rear washer hose, this will be hard plastic convoluted tubing. 2. If the leak is located inside the main body wire harness, cut back the wire harness electrical tape to expose the damaged section. 3. Cut out the damaged section of the rear washer hose. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Replace the damaged section of the rear washer hose. - Use a 9.5 mm (3/8 in) vacuum hose to replace damaged section. - Overlap the rear washer hose, the plastic tubing, by 10 mm (0.39 in) on each end. - Retain each end of the vacuum hose with a 100 mm (4 in) cable tie. 2. Verify the repair by activating the washer system and checking for leaks. 3. If the leak was located inside the main body wire harness, use electrical tape to retain the repaired section to the wire harness. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose Replacement - Windshield Washer > Page 17127 4. If the leak requires the rear washer hose to be removed in the front of dash grommet do the following: - Cut out the auxiliary washer hose hole from the grommet. - Pass new section of the rear washer hose through the new grommet hose. - Repair the hose on either side of the grommet. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations Wiper/Washer System Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Diagrams Windshield Wiper Motor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Pump Filter Grommet Replacement Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump Filter Grommet Replacement WASHER PUMP FILTER GROMMET REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the washer solvent pump. 2. Remove the washer solvent filter grommet from the pump. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the washer solvent filter grommet to the pump. 2. Install the washer solvent pump. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Pump Filter Grommet Replacement > Page 17136 Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump/Reservoir Replacement WASHER PUMP/RESERVOIR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the coolant surge tank bolts. IMPORTANT: Allow the coolant surge tank sufficient cooling time before handling. 2. Disconnect the surge tank level sensor and set surge tank aside in engine compartment. IMPORTANT: Do not disconnect the coolant hoses from the coolant surge tank. 3. Remove the front washer solvent container bolts. 4. Disconnect the front washer solvent container hose from the front washer nozzle hose that runs along the upper motor compartment rail. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Pump Filter Grommet Replacement > Page 17137 5. Angle the washer solvent container to the rear of the vehicle and pull out of the mounting hole. 6. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector. 7. Pull the washer solvent pump from the solvent container. IMPORTANT: Contain any solvent the may spill while removing pump and hoses. 8. Disconnect the front and rear washer solvent hoses from the washer pump. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the front and rear washer solvent hoses to the washer pump. IMPORTANT: Do not reuse washer solvent as debris may clog the system. 2. Install the washer pump into the washer solvent container. Ensure the washer pump filter is installed, if removed. 3. Connect the washer pump electrical connector. 4. Insert the front and rear washer solvent container hoses into the grooves in the solvent container. 5. Install the washer solvent container into the motor compartment. Ensure that the washer solvent container's mounting peg, with grommet installed, is seated into the mounting hole in the body structure. A lubricant may be used to ease installation. IMPORTANT: Washer solvent container grommet must be installed between container and body structure to prevent squeaks and rattles. 6. Connect the front washer solvent container hose to front nozzle hose that runs along the upper motor compartment rail. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Pump Filter Grommet Replacement > Page 17138 7. Install the washer solvent container screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 8. Position coolant surge tank back into correct location. 9. Install the coolant surge tank bolts. Tighten the bolts to 6 N.m (53 lb in). 10. Fill the washer solvent container with washer solvent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair WASHER PUMP/RESERVOIR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the coolant surge tank bolts. IMPORTANT: Allow the coolant surge tank sufficient cooling time before handling. 2. Disconnect the surge tank level sensor and set surge tank aside in engine compartment. IMPORTANT: Do not disconnect the coolant hoses from the coolant surge tank. 3. Remove the front washer solvent container bolts. 4. Disconnect the front washer solvent container hose from the front washer nozzle hose that runs along the upper motor compartment rail. 5. Angle the washer solvent container to the rear of the vehicle and pull out of the mounting hole. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 17142 6. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector. 7. Pull the washer solvent pump from the solvent container. IMPORTANT: Contain any solvent the may spill while removing pump and hoses. 8. Disconnect the front and rear washer solvent hoses from the washer pump. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the front and rear washer solvent hoses to the washer pump. IMPORTANT: Do not reuse washer solvent as debris may clog the system. 2. Install the washer pump into the washer solvent container. Ensure the washer pump filter is installed, if removed. 3. Connect the washer pump electrical connector. 4. Insert the front and rear washer solvent container hoses into the grooves in the solvent container. 5. Install the washer solvent container into the motor compartment. Ensure that the washer solvent container's mounting peg, with grommet installed, is seated into the mounting hole in the body structure. A lubricant may be used to ease installation. IMPORTANT: Washer solvent container grommet must be installed between container and body structure to prevent squeaks and rattles. 6. Connect the front washer solvent container hose to front nozzle hose that runs along the upper motor compartment rail. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 17143 7. Install the washer solvent container screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 8. Position coolant surge tank back into correct location. 9. Install the coolant surge tank bolts. Tighten the bolts to 6 N.m (53 lb in). 10. Fill the washer solvent container with washer solvent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Nozzle Replacement - Front Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Washer Nozzle Replacement - Front WASHER NOZZLE REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air inlet grille panel. 2. Depress the washer nozzle tabs to disengage the nozzle from the air inlet grille. 3. Remove the nozzle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Push the washer nozzles into the air inlet grille panel until the tabs engage with the panel. 2. Install the air inlet grille panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Nozzle Replacement - Front > Page 17148 Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Washer Nozzle Replacement - Rear WASHER NOZZLE REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the center high mounted stop lamp (CHMSL). 2. Disconnect the rear washer nozzle hose from the rear washer nozzle. 3. Rotate the rear washer nozzle 45 degrees counterclockwise and remove the nozzle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Insert the rear washer nozzle into the CHMSL and rotate 45 degrees clockwise to lock the nozzle into position. 2. Connect the rear washer nozzle hose to the rear nozzle. Soapy water may be used as a lubricant to aid in assembly. 3. Install the CHMSL. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper/Washer System Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 17152 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Replacement Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Arm Replacement WIPER ARM REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open hood to access wiper arm nut. 2. Remove wiper arm nut. 3. Lift wiper arm assembly away from windshield and remove wiper arm from pivot shaft. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position wiper blade assembly at the dot in lower portion of windshield blackout strip on driver side of vehicle. 2. Position wiper blade assembly at the dot in windshield pillar portion of windshield blackout strip on passenger side of vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Replacement > Page 17157 3. Install the wiper arm nut. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the nut to 28 N.m (21 lb ft). 4. Operate the windshield wipers and inspect for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Replacement > Page 17158 Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Arm Replacement - Rear WIPER ARM REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear wiper arm finish cap to expose the wiper arm nut. 2. Remove the rear wiper arm nut. 3. Lift the rear wiper arm assembly away from the rear window and remove the wiper arm from the pivot shaft. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position wiper blade assembly on the blackout strip as shown in the illustration. 2. Install the rear wiper arm nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Replacement > Page 17159 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the nut to 21 N.m (16 lb ft). 3. Install the rear wiper arm finish cap. 4. Operate the windshield wipers and inspect for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance Wiper Blade: Technical Service Bulletins Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-43-003C Date: February 21, 2011 Subject: Windshield Wiper Performance, Cleaning Instructions and Maintenance Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2010 and Prior Isuzu Medium Duty Trucks 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 and 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-43-003B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Wiper Concerns Most concerns about windshield wiper performance are the result of dirty wiper blades, damaged wiper blades, or worn out blades that are continuing to be used beyond their useful life. Depending on environmental conditions, wiper blades can have dramatic differences in lifespan. Here are some tips and guidelines to maximize wiper performance to avoid damage to the blades, and to avoid unnecessary replacements. Many wiper blades are being replaced under warranty with reviews showing there is nothing wrong with the returned blades other than a build-up of dirt. Additionally, advise the customer to review the information in their Owner Manual. Inspection and Cleaning Scheduled Maintenance - Inspect your wipers rubber blades every 4-6 months or 12,000 km (7,500 mi) for wear, cracking or contamination. - Clean the windshield and the rubber wiper blades (using the procedure below) if the blades are not clearing the glass satisfactorily. If this does not correct the problem, then replace the rubber elements. Cleaning Procedure Important Avoid getting windshield washer fluid on your hands. Wear rubber gloves or avoid direct contact with washer fluid. Important Do not use gasoline, kerosene, or petroleum based products to clean wiper blades. - Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. You should see significant amounts of dirt being removed on the cloth. - Be sure to wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of car wash/wax treatments may additionally cause wiper streaking. Tip For a larger scale buildup on the windshield, use a non-abrasive cleaner such as Bon-Ami* (www.faultless.com) cleanser with a wet sponge, being sure to use plenty of water to avoid scratching the glass. Flush the surface and body panels completely. Tip For day-to-day exterior glass cleaning and to maintain a streak free appearance, suggest Vehicle Care Glass Cleaner, P/N 88862560 (in Canada, 992727). This product is an easy to use foaming cleaner that quickly removes dirt and grime from glass surfaces. Tip Interior glass should be cleaned with plain, clean water to eliminate any film or haze on the window and help prevent fogging, a major customer dissatisfier. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-00-89-006D for more information. The New Vehicle Pre-Delivery Inspection form also recommends using plain water to clean interior glass. *"We believe this material to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or equipment from these firms or any such items which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance > Page 17164 Avoiding Wiper Damage The following are major contributors to wiper damage. Some of these you can control and others are environmental concerns. - Extremely dusty areas (such as driving on dirt roads) may cause the wipers rubber edge to wear quickly and unevenly. - Sand and salt used on roads for increasing winter traction and ice control will cause the wiper blades to wear quicker. Areas with significant snowfall require more frequent blade replacements. - Heat and time may cause the rubber blades to take a "permanent set" resulting in the rubber not flexing and turning over uniformly. This condition may result in streaking and/or unwiped areas. - Rubber blades are easily cut or torn when using ice scrapers. Likewise pulling blades up off a frozen windshield can tear the rubber. Exercise caution when clearing ice and snow. - Using your wipers to "wear through" frost and ice, instead of allowing the defrosters to melt the ice, can dull, nick or tear the rubber blades. - Banging wipers on the glass to remove ice and snow may cause the blade to bend, dislodging the rubber and causing potential scratching of the windshield. - Ice can form in the pin joints of the wipers, which can cause streaking and unwiped areas. To remove ice from pin joints, compress the blade and rubber edge with your hand to loosen the frozen joints. Consider using Winter Blades that have a rubber cover to avoid this condition. Note GM does not recommend the use of any spray on/wipe on windshield treatments or washer fluid additives. The variation in friction that results on the glass from the use of these products causes wipers to chatter and have premature wear. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blade Element Cleaning Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Blade Element Cleaning BLADE ELEMENT CLEANING Lift each blade assembly off of the windshield and clean the element with a cloth saturated with full strength washer solvent. Hold the blade in one hand and wipe the element with the saturated cloth until the black residue disappears. Then rinse the blade assembly elements with clean drinkable water. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blade Element Cleaning > Page 17167 Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Blade Element Replacement - Rear BLADE ELEMENT REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Lift the wiper arm up to the service position. 2. Remove the wiper blade element by squeezing the metal tabs and pulling on the end of the insert at the heel claw. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Slide the wiper blade element into the wiper blade, starting with the heel claw, so that the claw engages in the groove of the wiper blade element. IMPORTANT: Do not remove the retainer clips from the new wiper blade element until installed. 2. Guide the wiper blade element through the wiper blade claw sets. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blade Element Cleaning > Page 17168 3. Push the wiper blade insert so that the metal tabs fully engage into the heel claw. NOTE: If the metal clip on the wiper blade insert is not completely engaged to the heel claw, the wiper blade insert will not be sufficiently retained and may result in windshield damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blade Element Cleaning > Page 17169 Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Wiper Arm Blade Replacement WIPER ARM BLADE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Move the wiper arm to the service up position 2. Depress the wiper blade attachment clip and slide blade out of wiper arm hook. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the hook of the wiper arm through the opening in the wiper blade. IMPORTANT: Passenger and driver side wiper blades are different lengths. Ensure that the longer blade is installed on the driver side. 2. Press the wiper blade pivot into the wiper arm hook until the pivot locks into the hook. 3. Operate the windshield wipers and inspect for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blade Element Cleaning > Page 17170 Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Wiper Arm Blade Replacement - Rear WIPER ARM BLADE REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Move the wiper arm to the service up position 2. Depress the wiper blade attachment clip and slide blade out of wiper arm hook. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the hook of the wiper arm through the opening in the wiper blade. 2. Press the wiper blade pivot into the wiper arm hook until the pivot locks into the hook. 3. Operate the windshield wipers and inspect for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blade Element Cleaning > Page 17171 Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Wiper Blade Element Replacement WIPER BLADE ELEMENT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Lift the wiper arm up to the service position. 2. Remove the wiper blade element by squeezing the metal tabs and pulling on the end of the insert at the heel claw. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Slide the wiper blade element into the wiper blade, starting with the heel claw, so that the claw engages in the groove of the wiper blade element. IMPORTANT: Passenger and driver side wiper blades are different lengths. Ensure that the longer blade is installed on the driver side. - Do not remove the retainer clips from the new wiper blade element until installed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blade Element Cleaning > Page 17172 2. Guide the wiper blade element through the wiper blade claw sets. 3. Push the wiper blade insert so that the metal tabs fully engage into the heel claw. NOTE: If the metal clip on the wiper blade insert is not completely engaged to the heel claw, the wiper blade insert will not be sufficiently retained and may result in windshield damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations Wiper/Washer System Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Wiper Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17178 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17179 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17180 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17181 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17182 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17183 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17184 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17185 Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17186 All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17187 Wiper Motor: Diagnostic Aids Abbreviations and Meanings Abbreviations and Meanings Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17188 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17189 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17190 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17191 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17192 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17193 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17194 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17195 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17196 Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17197 Conversion - English/Metric Conversion - English/Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17198 Decimal and Metric Equivalents Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17199 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17200 Equivalents - Decimal and Metric 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets Diagnostic Work Sheets The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Dealers may also access the DWD Store in Dealerworld and search for form DWS-01 or select Service Forms under Other Links and then select Diagnostic Worksheet (under Bulletin Information on use of Diagnostic Worksheet). Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Equivalents - Decimal and Metric Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17201 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17202 Fasteners Fasteners Metric Fasteners This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. Fastener Strength Identification 1 - English Bolt, Grade 2 (Strength Class) 2 - English Bolt, Grade 5 (Strength Class) 3 - English Bolt, Grade 7 (Strength Class) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17203 4 - English Bolt, Grade 8 (Strength Class) 5 - Metric Nut, Strength Class 9 6 - Metric Bolts, Strength Class Increases as Numbers Increase The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: ^ Lower strength ^ No numbered head marking system ^ Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: ^ M6.0 X 1 ^ M8 X 1.25 ^ M10 X 1.5 ^ M12 X 1.75 ^ M14 X 2.00 ^ M16 X 2.00 Prevailing Torque Fasteners Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. All Metal Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. Nylon Interface Prevailing Torque Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. 1 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Center Lock Type 2 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Top Lock Type 3 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Patch Type 4 - Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Washer Insert Type 5 Prevailing Torque Nut, Nylon Insert Type 6 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Dry Adhesive Coating Type 7 Prevailing Torque Bolt, Thread Profile Deformed Type 8 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Nylon Strip Type 9 - Prevailing Torque Bolt, Out-of-Round Thread Area Type A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: ^ The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged ^ There is no rust on the fastener ^ The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17204 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17205 Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17206 - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17207 - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE Note: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17208 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17209 Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17210 - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing for a Short to Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17211 With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector - Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17212 - Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J-38125 or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17213 - A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. - Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17214 The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit or the J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17215 J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17216 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17217 connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17218 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO .64) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17219 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 6. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17220 IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17221 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17222 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17223 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17224 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17225 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17226 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17227 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17228 Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17229 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17230 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17231 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17232 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAZAKI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17233 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17234 Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17235 must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: DuraSeal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) - J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17236 splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17237 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17238 if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17239 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17240 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17241 IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR REPAIR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J-38125. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17242 Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. - Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17243 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice, not sealed, from the J-38125 if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17244 IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17245 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17246 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17247 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. 4. Re-assemble the cable. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17248 Special Tools Ordering Information Special Tools Ordering Information The special service tools shown in this service information that have product numbers beginning with J or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-7:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7375 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A. 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m.-6:00 p.m. EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Thread Inserts Thread Inserts Repair Procedure ^ Tools Required General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17249 1. Important: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Important: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil (except when installing in aluminum) and install the insert. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training Training General Motors makes available automotive classroom training through the GM Training Centers and colleges. GMCL (General Motors of Canada Ltd) Dealers Course scheduling for GMCL Training Centres, remote and college locations is determined by Dealer Training Needs requested in TAMS (Technician Activity Monitoring System). Dealers register their Training Needs electronically via DCS. Training is then scheduled when sufficient Needs are received to support minimum classroom attendance. Dealers who have entered Needs will receive invitations via DCS (Dealer Communication System) to attend the requested training. Dealers having questions concerning the GMCL training process can directly contact GMCL Training Co-ordinators via toll free numbers 1-800-263-9555 (English) or 1-800-263-9770 (French). Fleets GMCL Fleet Training is accomplished through a separate training organization in Canada. Fleets can request training by faxing a document contained in a GMCL brochure (Fleet Training - Your Competitive Advantage) distributed to fleets (FAX # 905-831-1598). Further information concerning Fleet training can be obtained by calling toll free to 1-888-456-6660. United States Dealers All US Dealers enroll through the GM Enrollment Calling Center (EEC). Each GM Dealer has an assigned consultant that calls the Service Manager each month. During this consultation call, the EEC processes enrollments requested by the Dealer Service Manager. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of the training they need, course names, and course numbers for the classes the want to attend. Fleets Fleets are to call their GM Training Center. Non-GM Dealer Technician Technician training for non-GM dealers is available through AC Delco. This training is for AC Delco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. GM Training Center course availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886. Clinics are offered through AC Delco Warehouse Distributors. Contact yours directly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17250 Correspondence courses are available on batteries, spark plugs and filters. These courses can be obtained through any AC Delco Representative or AC Delco Warehouse Distributor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17251 Wiper Motor: Connector Views Windshield Wiper Motor Wiper Motor - Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Module Grommet Replacement Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor Module Grommet Replacement WIPER MOTOR MODULE GROMMET REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front wiper motor. 2. Remove the grommets and the bushings from the module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the grommets and the bushings to the module. IMPORTANT: The metal bushing inserts need to be installed with the flat side underneath the module bolts. 2. Install the front wiper motor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Module Grommet Replacement > Page 17254 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor Module Replacement (Old) WIPER MOTOR MODULE REPLACEMENT (OLD) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the wiper arms. 2. Remove the air inlet grille. 3. Remove the wiper module bolts. 4. Lift the wiper motor module away from the cowl. 5. Disconnect the wire harness rosebud clip from the wiper module frame. 6. Disconnect the wiper module electrical connector at the motor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the wiper module electrical connector to the motor. 2. Connect the wire harness rosebud clip to the wiper module frame. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Module Grommet Replacement > Page 17255 3. Install the wiper module assembly into the plenum. 4. Install the fasteners attaching the wiper module assembly to the plenum. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the fasteners to 12 N.m (9 lb ft). 5. Turn the key to RUN position and cycle wiper system to ensure motor is in the park position. 6. Install the air inlet screens. 7. Install the wiper arms. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Module Grommet Replacement > Page 17256 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor Replacement WIPER MOTOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the wiper motor module. 2. Remove the wiper motor to crank nut. 3. Remove the two wiper motor to wiper module frame bolts. 4. Remove the wiper motor from the wiper module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the wiper motor to the wiper module. 2. Install the two wiper motor to wiper module frame bolts. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Module Grommet Replacement > Page 17257 Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 3. Install the wiper motor crank arm and crank arm nut. Tighten the screws to 14 N.m (10 lb ft). 4. Install the wiper motor module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Module Grommet Replacement > Page 17258 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor Replacement - Liftgate WIPER MOTOR REPLACEMENT - LIFTGATE REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear wiper arm. 2. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 3. Remove the rear wiper motor bolts. 4. Remove the motor by sliding the pivot shaft out of the rear window grommet. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Module Grommet Replacement > Page 17259 2. Install the rear wiper motor through the rear window grommet. 3. Install the wiper motor bolts. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 4. Install the liftgate trim panel. 5. Install the wiper motor module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wiper Relay: Locations Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 17263 Application Table (Part 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 17264 Application Table (Part 2) Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 17265 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2006)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper/Washer System Components